XKWorkshopManual PDF

Workshop Manual
X150 - XK
5.0L - 5.0L S/C
VIN B32753 to VIN B44939

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1: General Information

100: Service Information

100‐00: General Information

Description and Operation
About This Manual
Application and Use of Specifications
General Service Information
Health and Safety Precautions
How To Use This Manual
Important Safety Instructions
Road/Roller Testing
Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
Standard Workshop Practices
Symbols Glossary
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Health and Safety Precautions
Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety Precautions
Body Repair Health and Safety and General Precautions
Brake System Health and Safety Precautions
Engine Cooling System Health and Safety Precautions
Petrol and Petrol‐Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions
Window Glass Health and Safety Precautions

100‐01: Identification Codes

Identification Codes

100‐02: Jacking and Lifting

Jacking
Lifting

100‐04: Noise, Vibration and Harshness

Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)

Diagnosis and Testing
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)

100‐11: Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage

New Vehicle Storage
New Vehicle Storage Form

2: Chassis

204: Suspension

204‐00: Suspension System ‐ General Information

Specification
Wheel Alignment Angles

Suspension System

General Procedures
Front Toe Adjustment (57.65.01)
Rear Toe Adjustment (57.65.08)
Four‐Wheel Alignment
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check ‐ Vehicles With: High
Performance Brakes
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check ‐ Vehicles With: High
Performance Brakes
Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes

204‐01: Front Suspension

Specification
Front Suspension

Front Suspension

Removal and Installation
Front Shock Absorber
Front Lower Arm (60.35.53)
Rear Lower Arm (60.35.54)
Rear Lower Arm Bushing (60.40.12)
Shock Absorber Bushing (60.30.16) (60.30.23)
Front Stabilizer Bar
Front Stabilizer Bar Link
Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing (60.10.03)
Upper Arm LH
Upper Arm RH
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Wheel Knuckle (60.25.23)

204‐02: Rear Suspension

Specification
Rear Suspension

Rear Suspension

Lower Arm
Rear Shock Absorber
Rear Stabilizer Bar (64.35.08) ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Rear Stabilizer Bar Link (64.35.24)
Rear Wheel Bearing
Tie Bar
Upper Arm (64.25.31)

204‐04: Wheels and Tires

Specification
Wheels and Tires

Wheels and Tires

Wheel and Tire (74.20.05)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module ‐ Convertible
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module ‐ 2‐Door
Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver

204‐05: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension

Adaptive Damping Module (86.56.35) ‐ Convertible
Adaptive Damping Module (86.56.35) ‐ 2‐Door

204‐06: Ride and Handling Optimization

Ride and Handling Optimization

205: Driveline

205‐00: Driveline System ‐ General Information

Driveline System

205‐01: Driveshaft

Specification
Driveshaft

Driveshaft

General Procedures
Driveshaft Runout and Balancing

Driveshaft

205‐02: Rear Drive Axle/Differential

Specification
Rear Drive Axle and Differential ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Rear Drive Axle and Differential

General Procedures
Differential Draining and Filling

Differential Case
Differential Front Bushing
Drive Pinion Seal
Rear Halfshaft Seal
Differential Locking Motor

205‐05: Rear Drive Halfshafts

Specification
Rear Drive Halfshafts

Rear Drive Halfshafts

Rear Halfshaft ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.33)
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.32)

206: Brake System

206‐00: Brake System ‐ General Information

Specification
Brake System

General Procedures
Brake Disc Runout Check
Brake System Bleeding (70.25.03)
Front Brake Disc Runout Check ‐ With Wheel On ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance
Brakes
Front Brake Disc Runout Check ‐ With Wheel On ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Rear Brake Disc Runout Check ‐ With Wheel On

206‐03: Front Disc Brake

Specification
Front Disc Brake

Brake Caliper ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Caliper ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Disc ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Disc ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Pads ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Pads ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes

206‐04: Rear Disc Brake

Specification
Rear Disc Brake

Brake Caliper ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Caliper ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Disc ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Disc ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Pads ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Pads ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes

206‐05: Parking Brake and Actuation

Specification
Parking Brake

Parking Brake

General Procedures
Parking Brake Cable Tension Release

Parking Brake Cable LH
Parking Brake Cable RH
Parking Brake Module (70.35.47) ‐ Convertible
Parking Brake Module (70.35.47) ‐ 2‐Door
Parking Brake Release Actuator
Parking Brake Switch

206‐06: Hydraulic Brake Actuation

Specification
Hydraulic Brake Actuation

Hydraulic Brake Actuation

Brake Master Cylinder (70.30.08) ‐ LHD RWD
Brake Master Cylinder (70.30.08) ‐ RHD RWD
Brake Fluid Reservoir (70.30.16)
Brake Pedal and Bracket (70.35.03)

206‐07: Power Brake Actuation

Specification
Brake Booster

Power Brake System

Brake Booster (70.50.17) ‐ LHD RWD
Brake Booster (70.50.17) ‐ RHD RWD
Brake Vacuum Pump

206‐09: Anti‐Lock Control ‐ Stability Assist

Specification
Anti‐Lock Control ‐ Stability Assist ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Anti‐Lock Control ‐ Stability Assist

Anti‐Lock Brake System (ABS) Module (70.60.02)
Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (70.60.18) (70.60.19)
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Yaw Rate Sensor and Accelerometer

211: Steering System

211‐00: Steering System ‐ General Information

Specification
Steering System

General Procedures
Power Steering System Bleeding (57.15.02 )
Power Steering System Filling
Power Steering System Flushing (57.15.08)

211‐02: Power Steering

Specification
Power Steering

Power Steering Fluid Cooler ‐ Vehicles Without: Supercharger
Power Steering Fluid Cooler ‐ Vehicles With: Supercharger
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Pump
Steering Gear
Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose

211‐03: Steering Linkage

Specification
Steering Linkage

Steering Gear Boot (57.10.29)
Tie Rod End

211‐04: Steering Column

Specification
Steering Column

Steering Column

Steering Column (57.40.01)
Steering Column Lower Shaft (57.40.05)
Steering Wheel (57.60.01)
Clockspring

211‐05: Steering Column Switches

Specification
Steering Column Switches

Steering Column Lock Actuator (57.40.41)
Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH (86.65.78)
Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH (86.65.41)

3: Powertrain

303: Engine

303‐00: Engine System ‐ General Information

Engine

General Procedures
Bearing Inspection
Camshaft Bearing Journal Clearance
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
Camshaft End Play
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Camshaft Surface Inspection
Connecting Rod Cleaning
Connecting Rod Large End Bore
Crankshaft End Play
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Clearance
Cylinder Bore Out‐of‐Round
Cylinder Head Distortion
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
Piston Inspection
Piston Pin Diameter
Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
Piston Ring End Gap
Piston Ring‐to‐Groove Clearance
Valve Spring Free Length
Valve Stem Diameter
Leakage Test Using Smoke Test Equipment

303‐01A: Engine ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Engine

General Procedures
Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
Engine Oil Draining and Filling
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment

Camshaft LH
Camshaft RH
Crankshaft Front Seal
Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft Rear Seal
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head RH
Engine Mount LH
Engine Mount RH
Exhaust Manifold
Exhaust Manifold RH
Flexplate
Oil Cooler
Oil Filter Element
Oil Pan
Oil Pan Extension
Oil Pump
Timing Cover
Timing Drive Components ‐ Assembly Part Number: INA Timing Drive
Timing Drive Components ‐ Assembly Part Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug
Fuel Pump Camshaft ‐ Assembly Part Number: INA Timing Drive
Fuel Pump Camshaft ‐ Assembly Part Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Lower Timing Cover

Removal
Engine

Installation
Engine

303‐01B: Engine ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Engine

General Procedures
Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
Engine Oil Draining and Filling
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment

Camshaft LH
Camshaft RH
Crankshaft Front Seal
Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft Rear Seal
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head RH
Engine Mount LH
Engine Mount RH
Exhaust Manifold
Exhaust Manifold RH
Flexplate
Intake Manifold
Oil Cooler
Oil Filter Element
Oil Pan
Oil Pan Extension
Oil Pump
Timing Cover
Timing Drive Components ‐ Assembly Part Number: INA Timing Drive
Timing Drive Components ‐ Assembly Part Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug
Fuel Pump Camshaft ‐ Assembly Part Number: INA Timing Drive
Fuel Pump Camshaft ‐ Assembly Part Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Lower Timing Cover

Removal
Engine

Installation
Engine

303‐03A: Engine Cooling ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Engine Cooling

Engine Cooling

General Procedures
Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling
Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol

Auxiliary Radiator
Coolant Expansion Tank
Coolant Pump ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Coolant Pump ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Cooling Module ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Cooling Module ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Radiator (26.40.01) ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Radiator (26.40.01) ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Thermostat Housing ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Thermostat Housing ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol

303‐03B: Supercharger Cooling ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Supercharger Cooling

Radiator

303‐04A: Fuel Charging and Controls ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Fuel Charging and Controls


General Procedures
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning Using Pressure Cleaner

Fuel Injectors
Fuel Rail LH
Fuel Rail RH
Left‐Hand Fuel Rail High‐Pressure Fuel Pump
Right‐Hand Fuel Rail High‐Pressure Fuel Pump
Throttle Body

303‐04B: Fuel Charging and Controls ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol

Specification


General Procedures
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning Using Pressure Cleaner

Fuel Injectors
Fuel Rail LH
Fuel Rail RH
Left‐Hand Fuel Rail High‐Pressure Fuel Pump
Right‐Hand Fuel Rail High‐Pressure Fuel Pump
Throttle Body

303‐05: Accessory Drive ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Accessory Drive

Accessory Drive

Accessory Drive Belt ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Accessory Drive Belt ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Supercharger Belt
Supercharger Belt Idler Pulley
Supercharger Belt Tensioner

303‐06: Starting System ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Starting System

Starting System
Starting System ‐ Vehicles With: Smart Key

Start Control Unit
Starter Motor

303‐07: Engine Ignition ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Engine Ignition

Engine Ignition

Ignition Coil‐On‐Plug ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Ignition Coil‐On‐Plug ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Spark Plugs ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Spark Plugs ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

303‐08A: Engine Emission Control ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Engine Emission Control


303‐08B: Engine Emission Control ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol



303‐12A: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering


Air Cleaner Element
Air Cleaner LH
Air Cleaner RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe LH
Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T‐Connector
Charge Air Cooler
Supercharger

303‐12B: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol

Specification


Air Cleaner Element
Air Cleaner LH
Air Cleaner RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe LH
Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T‐Connector

303‐13: Evaporative Emissions ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Evaporative Emissions


Evaporative Emission Canister
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

303‐14A: Electronic Engine Controls ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Electronic Engine Controls


General Procedures
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self‐Test
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self‐Test

Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor LH
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor RH
Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Front Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Front Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Engine Oil Level Sensor
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Rear Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Rear Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid LH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid RH

303‐14B: Electronic Engine Controls ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol

Specification


General Procedures
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self‐Test
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self‐Test

Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor LH
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor RH
Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Engine Oil Level Sensor
Front Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Front Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Rear Knock Sensor (KS) LH
Rear Knock Sensor (KS) RH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid LH
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid RH

307: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle

307‐01: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Transmission Description

Diagnostic Flow Chart

General Procedures
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill

Input Shaft Seal
Extension Housing Seal
Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve Body
Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Transmission Support Insulator
Transmission, Transmission Fluid Cooler and Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Transmission and Transmission Fluid Cooler

Removal
Transmission

Installation
Transmission

307‐02: Transmission/Transaxle Cooling ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Transmission Cooling


Transmission Fluid Cooler ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Transmission Fluid Cooler ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes

307‐05: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol

Specification
External Controls

External Controls

Downshift Paddle Switch
Emergency Park Position Release Lever
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Knob
Upshift Paddle Switch

309: Exhaust System

309‐00: Exhaust System ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Exhaust System

Exhaust System

Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter RH
Exhaust Sound Enhancement Vacuum Pump
Exhaust Sound Enhancement Valve
Exhaust System
Front Muffler
Rear Muffler

310: Fuel System

310‐00: Fuel System ‐ General Information

General Procedures
Fuel System Pressure Release ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Fuel Tank Draining
Quick Release Coupling
Quick Release Coupling ‐ Push Connect
Spring Lock Couplings

310‐01: Fuel Tank and Lines ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Fuel Tank and Lines

Fuel Tank and Lines

Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe

310‐02: Acceleration Control

Specification
Acceleration Control

Accelerator Pedal (19.20.01)

310‐03: Speed Control ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Speed Control

Speed Control

General Procedures
Speed Control Sensor Adjustment

Speed Control Deactivator Switch (19.75.20)
Speed Control Switch
Speed Control Sensor

4: Electrical

412: Climate Control System

412‐00: Climate Control System ‐ General Information

Specification
Climate Control System

General Procedures
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Flushing
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (82.30.30)
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
Electronic Leak Detection
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
Refrigerant Oil Adding
Refrigerant System Tests

412‐01: Air Distribution and Filtering

Air Distribution and Filtering

Air Distribution and Filtering

Center Registers (82.20.38)
Driver Side Register (82.20.39)
Passenger Side Register (82.20.40)
Pollen Filter (76.10.09)

412‐02: Heating and Ventilation

Specification
Heating and Ventilation

Heating and Ventilation

Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Blower Motor (82.25.66)
Heater Core (80.20.29)
Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing (82.25.21)

412‐03: Air Conditioning

Specification
Air Conditioning

Air Conditioning

Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Blower Motor Resistor
Condenser Core ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Condenser Core ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Evaporator Core (82.25.20)
Pressure Cutoff Switch (82.10.32)
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (82.25.01)
Receiver Drier

412‐04: Control Components

Specification
Control Components

Control Components

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator LH
Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator RH
Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator LH
Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator RH
In‐Vehicle Temperature Sensor (82.20.03)
Recirculation Blend Door Actuator (82.20.67)
Sunload Sensor (82.20.70)
Climate Control Module
Climate Control Assembly (82.20.07)

413: Instrumentation and Warning Systems

413‐00: Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination

Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination

Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination

413‐01: Instrument Cluster

Specification
Instrument Cluster

Instrument Cluster

Instrument Cluster (88.20.01)
Instrument Cluster Lens

413‐06: Horn

Specification
Horn

Horn

Horn ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol
Horn ‐ V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

413‐08: Information and Message Center

Information and Message Center

Information and Message Center

413‐09: Warning Devices

Warning Devices

Low Washer Fluid Warning Indicator Switch (84.10.17)

413‐13: Parking Aid

Specification
Parking Aid

Parking Aid

Parking Aid Module (86.80.39)
Rear Parking Aid Sensor (86.54.14) (86.62.01)
Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor (86.54.21)
Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor (86.54.22)

414: Battery and Charging System

414‐00: Battery and Charging System ‐ General Information

Battery Care Requirements
Quiescent Drain

Charging System

General Procedures
Battery Charging

414‐01: Battery, Mounting and Cables

Specification
Battery and Cables

Battery

General Procedures
Battery Disconnect and Connect

Battery

414‐02: Generator and Regulator ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Specification
Generator

Generator

415: Information and Entertainment Systems

415‐00: Information and Entertainment System ‐ General Information

Navigation System Map Updates

Audio System
Cellular Phone

415‐01A: Audio Unit

Specification
Audio System

Audio System

Amplifier (86.50.10)
Audio Unit (86.50.03)
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (86.50.42)
Satellite Radio Tuner
Digital Audio Module

415‐01B: Information and Entertainment System

Audio Input Control Module

415‐02: Antenna

Specification
Antenna

Antenna

Antenna (86.51.17.60)

415‐03: Speakers

Specification
Speakers

Speakers

Front Door Speaker (86.50.13)
Front Door Tweeter Speaker (86.50.63)
Subwoofer Speaker (86.51.05)
Quarter Panel Speaker (86.50.12) ‐ 2‐Door
Quarter Panel Speaker (86.50.12) ‐ Convertible

417: Lighting

417‐01: Exterior Lighting

Specification
Exterior Lighting

Headlamps

General Procedures
Front Fog Lamp Adjustment
Headlamp Adjustment (86.40.18)

Approach Lamp
Front Fog Lamp (86.40.96)
Headlamp Assembly (86.41.33)
Headlamp Bulb (86.42.14) ‐ Vehicles With: High Intensity Discharge Headlamps
Headlamp Leveling Module
Headlamp Leveling Front Sensor
Headlamp Leveling Rear Sensor
High Mounted Stoplamp (86.41.01) (86.41.32)
Rear Lamp Assembly ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Fog Lamp Bulb
Rear Fog and Reversing Lamp ‐ 2‐Door
Rear Fog and Reversing Lamp ‐ Convertible
Side Turn Signal Lamp

417‐02: Interior Lighting

Interior Lighting

Interior Lighting

417‐04: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

418: Electrical Distribution

418‐00: Module Communications Network

Specification
Communications Network

Communications Network

Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) (86.70.55)
Central Junction Box (CJB) (86.70.72)

418‐01: Module Configuration

Module Configuration

418‐02: Wiring Harnesses

Specification
Wiring Harness

General Procedures
Wiring Harness Repair
Fuel Tank Wiring Harness Modification

419: Electronic Feature Group

419‐01A: Anti‐Theft – Active

Specification
Anti‐Theft ‐ Active

Anti‐Theft ‐ Active

Antenna
Anti‐Theft Alarm Horn (86.52.03)
Rear Intrusion Sensor

419‐01B: Anti‐Theft – Passive

Anti‐Theft ‐ Passive

Anti‐Theft ‐ Passive

General Procedures
Anti‐Theft Security Access
Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment

419‐02: Remote Convenience

Universal Transmitter

General Procedures
Universal Transmitter Programming

419‐07: Navigation System

Specification
Navigation System

Navigation System

Navigation System Antenna (86.62.06)
Navigation System Display Module (86.62.07)
Navigation System Module (86.62.05)

419‐08: Cellular Phone

Specification
Cellular Phone

Cellular Phone Antenna (86.51.17)
Transceiver Module

419‐10: Multifunction Electronic Modules

Specification
Module Controlled Functions

Multifunction Electronic Module

Driver Door Module (DDM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM) (86.75.28)
Information and Entertainment Module (86.53.48)
Passenger Door Module (PDM)
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module

5: Body and Paint

501: Body and Paint

501‐02: Front End Body Panels

Air Deflector
Cowl Vent Screen (76.10.01)
Fender Splash Shield (76.10.90)
Radiator Splash Shield (76.22.90)

501‐03: Body Closures

Specification
General Procedures
Hood Alignment (76.16.02)
Luggage Compartment Lid Alignment (76.19.03)
Liftgate Alignment (76.19.54.60)

Hood (76.16.01)
Luggage Compartment Lid (76.19.01)
Door (76.28.04)
Door Check Arm
Liftgate

501‐05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation

Specification
A‐Pillar Trim Panel (76.13.31)
B‐Pillar Trim Panel (76.13.28)
Engine Cover ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Front Door Trim Panel (76.34.01)
Headliner (76.64.01)
Parcel Shelf (76.67.06)
Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel (76.13.81)
Scuff Plate Trim Panel (76.13.81)
Sun Visor (76.10.48)
Liftgate Upper Trim Panel (76.34.11)
Liftgate Lower Trim Panel
Rear Quarter Trim Panel (76.13.73) ‐ 2‐Door
Rear Quarter Trim Panel (76.13.73) ‐ Convertible
Rear Quarter Trim Sliding Panel
Loadspace Trim Panel (76.13.73.60) ‐ 2‐Door
Loadspace Trim Panel (76.13.73.60) ‐ Convertible
Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel (76.19.05)

501‐08: Exterior Trim and Ornamentation

Specification
Front Fender Moulding
Rear Spoiler (76.19.86.60)
Rocker Panel Moulding (76.11.36)

501‐09: Rear View Mirrors

Specification
Rear View Mirrors

Rear View Mirrors

Auto‐Dimming Interior Mirror
Exterior Mirror (76.10.52)
Exterior Mirror Cover
Exterior Mirror Glass
Exterior Mirror Motor

501‐10: Seating

Specification
Seats

Seats
Heater Mats

Front Seat (76.70.01)
Front Seat Backrest Cover (76.70.15)
Front Seat Backrest Cover
Front Seat Bolster
Front Seat Bolster Pump
Front Seat Control Switch (86.75.46)
Front Seat Cushion Cover (76.70.33)
Front Seat Lumbar Motor (86.75.44)
Front Seat Recliner Motor (86.75.04)
Rear Seat Armrest (76.70.39)
Rear Seat Backrest (76.70.38)
Rear Seat Cushion (76.70.37)
Front Seat Backrest Heater Mat (86.75.14)
Front Seat Cushion Heater Mat (86.75.13)
Seat Base
Front Seat Track Motor

Disassembly and Assembly
Rear Seat Backrest (76.70.48) ‐ Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat

501‐11: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms

Specification
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Fixed Window Glass

General Procedures
Door Window Motor Initialization
Door Window Glass Adjustment (76.31.03)

Front Door Window Glass (76.31.01)
Front Door Window Regulator Motor (76.31.45)
Front Door Window Regulator
Window Control Switch (86.25.08)
Rear Quarter Window Glass (76.31.31) ‐ Convertible
Windshield Glass (76.81.40)
Windshield Glass
Rear Quarter Window Glass (76.31.31) ‐ 2‐Door
Rear Quarter Window Regulator Motor (86.25.11)

501‐12: Instrument Panel and Console

Specification
Instrument Panel

Floor Console
Floor Console Finish Panel
Glove Compartment (76.52.03)
Instrument Panel (76.46.01)
Overhead Console (76.13.69)
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel (76.46.11)
Overhead Console Switch Moulding

501‐14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems

Specification
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems

DTC: With
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems

Door Lock Cylinder Cover
Exterior Door Handle (76.58.07)
Front Door Lock Actuator (76.37.74)
Front Door Lock Cylinder (76.37.71)
Luggage Compartment Lid Latch Actuator (76.19.25)
Luggage Compartment Lid Lock Cylinder (76.19.19)
Liftgate Lock Cylinder
Liftgate Latch Actuator (86.25.65.60)
Radio Frequency (RF) Receiver
Keyless Vehicle Front Antenna
Keyless Vehicle Center Antenna
Hood Latch

501‐16: Wipers and Washers

Specification
Wipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers

Headlamp Washer Jet (84.20.08)
Headlamp Washer Pump (84.20.21)
Rain Sensor
Windshield Washer Pump (84.10.21)
Windshield Washer Reservoir (84.10.01) (84.10.03)
Windshield Wiper Motor (84.15.13) ‐ LHD RWD
Windshield Wiper Motor (84.15.13) ‐ RHD RWD
Wiper Pivot Arm (84.15.03)

501‐18: Convertible Top

Specification
Convertible Top

Convertible Top

General Procedures
Convertible Top Compartment Lid Alignment
Convertible Top Alignment
Convertible Top Base Plate Adjustment

Convertible Top Assembly (76.86.15)
Convertible Top Headliner (76.86.16)
Convertible Top Latch (76.86.19)
Header Rail Upper Trim Panel (76.86.20)
Header Rail Weatherstrip
Convertible Top Compartment Lid
Convertible Top Compartment Lid Trim Panel
Convertible Top Compartment Lid Hinge
Convertible Top Compartment Lid Moulding
Convertible Top Compartment Lid Latch
Convertible Top Compartment Lid Release Cables
Convertible Top Compartment Lid Latch and Cable Assembly
Convertible Top Motor
Hydraulic System, Lift Cylinder and Motor
Convertible Top Module
Convertible Top Tension Cylinder
Convertible Top Compartment Lid Lift Cylinder
Convertible Top Material (76.86.12)
Convertible Top Striker
Convertible Top Rear Panel Lower Weatherstrip

501‐19: Bumpers

Specification
Front Bumper (76.22.08)
Front Bumper Cover
Rear Bumper (76.22.27) (76.22.52)
Rear Bumper Cover (76.22.74) (76.22.77)

501‐20A: Safety Belt System

Specification
Safety Belt System

Safety Belt System

Front Safety Belt Buckle (76.73.49)
Rear Safety Belt Buckle (76.73.50)
Rear Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.18) ‐ 2‐Door
Front Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.10)
Rear Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.18) ‐ Convertible

501‐20B: Supplemental Restraint System

Specification
Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

General Procedures
Air Bag Disposal


Front Impact Severity Sensor
Driver Air Bag Module (76.73.39)
Occupant Classification Sensor ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Restraints Control Module (RCM) (76.73.48)
Passenger Air Bag Module (76.73.37)
Side Air Bag Module (76.73.47)
Rollover Protection Unit
Side Impact Sensor (76.73.53) ‐ Convertible
Side Impact Sensor (76.73.53) ‐ 2‐Door

501‐20C: Pedestrian Protection System

Specification
Pedestrian Protection System

Pedestrian Protection System

Pedestrian Protection Module
Pedestrian Impact Sensor
Pedestrian Protection Latch Actuator
Pedestrian Protection Accelerometer
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator LH
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH

501‐25A: Body Repairs ‐ General Information

Body Repairs

501‐25B: Body Repairs ‐ Corrosion Protection

Corrosion Protection

501‐25C: Body Repairs ‐ Water Leaks

Water Leaks

501‐26: Body Repairs ‐ Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks

Body and Frame

501‐27: Front End Sheet Metal Repairs

Specification
Front End Sheet Metal

Front Fender
Front Crossmember
Fender Apron Panel
Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement
Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
Front Side Member
Side Member Deformation Element
Front Side Member Extension
Front Wheelhouse
Fender Apron Panel Front Extension
Front Side Member Side Extension
Auxiliary Front Crossmember
Front Side Member Side Extension Mounting
Front Side Member To Deformation Element Bracket
Suspension Top Mount
Front Side Member and Suspension Top Mount Assembly
Windshield Frame ‐ Convertible

501‐28: Roof Sheet Metal Repairs

Roof

Roof Panel

501‐29: Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs

Side Panel Sheet Metal

Rocker Panel
Bulkhead Lower Reinforcement
A‐Pillar Assembly
A‐Pillar Outer Panel

501‐30: Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs

Rear End Sheet Metal

Rear Wheelhouse Outer
Rear Inner Wheelhouse Half
Rear Outer Wheelhouse Half
Rear Lamp Mounting Panel
Spare Wheel Well
Rear Side Member Section
Quarter Panel Lower Extension
Quarter Panel Assembly ‐ 2‐Door
Quarter Panel Assembly ‐ Convertible
Back Panel Assembly
Rear Side Member Closing Panel
Rear Side Member Reinforcement Panel
Water Drain Panel ‐ Convertible
Water Drain Panel Reinforcement ‐ Convertible

502: Frame and Mounting

502‐00: Uni‐Body, Subframe and Mounting System

Specification
Front Subframe ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Rear Subframe ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Rear Subframe Front Bushing (64.25.34)
Rear Subframe Rear Bushing (64.25.36)

Published: 11-May-2011
General Information - About This Manual
Introduction
This manual covers diagnosis and testing and repair procedures.
It is structured into groups and sections, with specific system sections collected together under their relevant group.
A group covers a specific portion of the vehicle. The manual is divided into five groups, General Information, Chassis,
Powertrain, Electrical and Body and Paint. The number of the group is the first number of a section number.
Within Etis, the navigation tree will list the groups. After selecting a group the navigation tree will then list the sections
within that group. Each section has a contents list detailing Specifications, Description and Operation, Diagnosis and Testing,
General Procedures, Disassembly and Assembly, Removal and Installation.
References to LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)
All LH and RH references to the vehicle are taken from a position sitting in the driver seat looking forward.
Vehicle LH and RH definition
Item Part Number Description

1 - LH
2 - RH
All LH and RH references to the engine are taken from a position at the flywheel looking towards the crankshaft front pulley.
Powertrain LH and RH definition

1 - front
2 - right
3 - rear
4 - left
How to use Repair Procedures
This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of technicians worldwide. It provides general
descriptions for accomplishing repair work with tested and effective techniques.
Important Safety Instructions
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor vehicles
as well as the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.
Anyone who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that personal safety or vehicle
integrity is not compromised by the choice of method, tools or components.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual
WARNING: Warnings are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Cautions are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in damage to the vehicle
or equipment being used.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide additional essential information required to carry out a complete and satisfactory repair.
Generic warnings or cautions are in their relevant description and operation procedure within section 100-00. If the generic
warnings or cautions are required for a procedure, there will be a referral to the appropriate description and operation
procedure.
If a warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is placed at the beginning of the specific step.
Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Repair Procedures
NOTE: TAS style procedures can be identified by steps that have no accompanying step text and the magenta color of the
electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips.
A TAS removal and installation procedure uses a sequence of color illustrations to indicate the order to be followed when
removing/disassembling or installing/assembling a component.
Many of the TAS procedures will have the installation information within the removal steps. These procedures will have the
following note at the beginning of the procedure:
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets
The following list details the general policy for the reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets.
Types of self-locking nuts and bolts
NOTE: There are more types of self-locking fasteners available than shown in following illustration.

1 - Completely coated self-locking bolt
2 - Partially coated self-locking bolt
3 - Self-locking bolt with a locking washer
4 - Self-locking nut with a plastic locking insert
5 - Self-locking nut with thread deformation (3 dents)
6 - Self-locking nut with thread deformation (squeeze of thread to oval shape)
7 - Self-locking nut with integrated locking ring
 All types of seals and gaskets must be discarded and new seals and gaskets installed unless otherwise stated within
the procedure.
 Nuts and bolts with a chemical coating for locking and/or sealing and/or antiseize must be discarded unless the
procedure advises to reapply the coating with a specified material.
 Nuts and bolts with a mechanical locking such as thread inserts, thread deformation or locking washers must be
discarded and new nuts and bolts installed unless otherwise stated within the procedure.
 Torque to yield bolts must be discarded and new torque to yield bolts installed unless otherwise stated within the
procedure, recognizable by a tightening torque with more than one stage together with a torque angle.
Specification data
Specification procedures will only contain technical data that is not already part of a repair procedure.
Sequence of tasks
If components must be removed or installed in a specific sequence, the sequence will be identified numerically in a graphic
and the corresponding text will be numbered accordingly.
Special Tools, Equipment, Materials and Torque Figures
Special tools will be shown with the tool numbers in the illustration. The special tool numbers, general equipment, materials
and torque figures used for the procedure step will be shown in the text column.
TAS Graphics
Colors used in the graphic are as follows:
 Blue - Component to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled.

 Green and Brown - Additional components that need to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled prior to the
target component.
 Yellow - Component that is touched or affected in a way but remains in the vehicle. It may be detached, attached,
moved, modified, checked, adjusted etc.
 Magenta - Electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps and clips.
 Pale Blue - Special tool(s) and general equipment.
One illustration may have multiple steps assigned to it.
Numbered pointers are used to indicate the number of electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps and
clips.
Items in the illustration can be transparent or use cutouts to show hidden details.
TAS Symbols
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display. The following paragraphs
describe the various types and categories of symbols.
For additional information, refer to: Symbols Glossary (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
Prohibition symbols advise on prohibited actions to either avoid damage or health and safety related risks. These symbols
are
Health and Safety symbols recommend the use of particular protection equipment to avoid or at least reduce the risk or
severity of possible injuries.
Warning symbols are used to indicate potential risks resulting from a certain component or area.
Instruction symbols are used to apply sealer, lubricant, weight, tape or cleaning detergent to a component.
Location symbols are used to show the location of a component or system within the vehicle.
Gearshift lever or selector lever position symbols are used to show which gearshift lever or selector lever position is to be
set.
Pointer symbols are used to draw attention to components and give special instructions such as a required sequence or
number of components. The number of components is reflected by the value inside the luty arrow. A sequence number is
located inside the circle. Numbers inside circles are also used to allocate special information such as tightening torques or
chemicals to a particular component.
Movement arrows are used to show three dimensional or rotational movements. These movements can include specific
values inside the symbol if required.
Standard tool symbols recommend the use of certain standard tools. These tools can include dimension values if required.
The following graphic illustrates a set of symbols that are used to provide detailed information on where to apply a material.
Measurement symbols provide detailed information on where to carry out a specific measurement. These symbols can
include specific values if required.
How to use Diagnosis and Testing procedures
Inspection and Verification
Visual Inspection Charts, Symptom Charts and other information charts (such as diagnostic routines) or supplement test
procedures with technical specifications will navigate the user to a specific test procedure.
Symptom Chart
The symptom chart indicates symptoms, sources and actions to address a condition.
Pinpoint Tests
For electrical systems, pinpoint test steps are used to identify the source of a concern in a logical, step-by-step manner.
Pinpoint tests have two columns: CONDITIONS and DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS.
The CONDITIONS column is used exclusively for graphics and icons (with or without captions) and the
DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS column provides direction to another test step or specific corrective actions.
The boxed numbers indicate the order in which the described action is to be carried out.
Component Tests
A component test is used when a component is tested in multiple pinpoint tests, or if a procedure is too complicated to be
formatted within a single page of the pinpoint test.
Graphics
Test graphics show the measurement or test to be carried out in a test step.
A representative tester graphic is used for voltmeters and ohmmeters.
If multiple measurements are made in a single graphic, the test leads are drawn with a solid line until the test lead splits to
indicate the multiple measurements, at which point dashed lines are used.
Breakout box type testers are represented by a double circle test pin. Test pins are labeled with the pin number.
General Information - Application and Use of Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque specifications are shown in the torque specifications chart located at the front of the relevant section.
Published: 28-Dec-2012
General Information - General Service Information
Repairs and Replacements
When service parts are required, it is essential that only genuine Jaguar/Daimler replacements are used.
Attention is drawn to the following points concerning repairs and the installation of replacement parts and accessories:
 Safety features embodied in the vehicle may be impaired if other than genuine parts are installed. In certain
territories, legislation prohibits the installation of parts which are not produced to the vehicle manufacturer's
specification.
 Torque wrench setting figures given in this manual must be strictly adhered to. Locking devices, where specified,
must be installed. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be renewed.
 Owners purchasing accessories while travelling abroad should make sure that the accessory and its installed
location on the vehicle conform to mandatory requirements existing in their country of origin.
 The vehicle warranty may be invalidated by the installation of other than genuine Jaguar/Daimler parts. All
Jaguar/Daimler replacements have the full backing of the factory warranty.
 Jaguar/Daimler dealers are obliged to supply only genuine service parts.
Vehicle Specifications
Purchasers are advised that the specification details set out in this manual apply to a range of vehicles and not to any
specific one. For the specification of a particular vehicle, purchasers should consult their dealer.
The Manufacturer reserves the right to vary the specifications, with or without notice, and at such times and in such
manner as the Manufacturer thinks fit. Major as well as minor changes may be involved, in accordance with the
Manufacturer's policy of continuous improvement.
Whilst every effort is made to make sure the accuracy of the particulars contained in this manual, neither the
Manufacturer nor the Dealer, by whom the manual is supplied, shall in any circumstances be held liable for any
inaccuracy or the consequences thereof.
Service Repair Operation Numbering
A master index of numbered operations has been compiled for universal application to all vehicles manufactured by
Jaguar Land Rover Limited.
Each operation is allocated a number from the master index and cross-refers with an identical number in the Repair
Operation Times schedule. The number consists of six digits arranged in three pairs.
Each maintenance procedure in this manual is described in the sequence necessary to complete the operation in the
minimum time, as specified in the Repair Operation Times schedule.
References to Bank-1 and Bank-2
References to Bank-1 and Bank-2 are made with regard to the engine. When viewed from the flywheel the right-hand
bank will be Bank-1 and the left-hand bank will be Bank-2.
Special Tools
Any special tools and equipment required to perform a maintenance procedure, are shown at the beginning of each
procedure. When possible, illustrations are given to assist in identifying the tool needed.
Disconnecting/Connecting the Battery
Always stop the engine before disconnecting the battery negative lead and make sure the battery positive lead is
isolated i.e. wrapped in a suitable cloth.
WARNING: Radio code saving devices must not be used when conducting work on Air Bag or Fuel systems. It
must be noted that, when using these devices, the vehicle electrical system is still live albeit with a reduced current
flow.
NOTE: Before disconnecting the battery make sure that the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc player and compact
disc player keycodes are known and, that no data is required from the Engine Control Module (ECM) as battery
disconnection will erase any fault codes and idle/drive values held in the Keep Alive Memory (KAM).
Always disconnect the battery before commencing repair operations which require:
 The vehicle to be jacked up

 Work on the engine
 Work underneath the vehicle
 Arc welding
Alternatively a Radio Code Saver may be used, when not working on the Air Bag or Fuel systems. With the battery
disconnected, a Radio Code Saver will allow sufficient current to pass to maintain the radio receiver/cassette
player/mini disc player and compact disc player memory, operate the clock and supply the door operated interior lights
while isolating the battery in the event of a short circuit.
Reconnecting the Battery
WARNING: If the battery has been on bench charge the cells may be giving off explosive hydrogen gas. Avoid
creating sparks, and if in doubt cover the vent plugs or covers with a damp cloth.
Always make sure that all electrical systems are switched OFF before reconnecting the battery to avoid causing sparks
or damage to sensitive electrical equipment.
Always reconnect the battery positive lead first and the negative last, ensuring that there is a good electrical contact
and the battery terminals are secure.
Restart the clock (where installed) and set it to the correct time.
Enter the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc player and compact disc player keycodes and preset' frequencies, if
known.
Following reconnection of the battery, the engine should be allowed to idle until it has reached normal operating
temperature as the stored idle and drive values contained within the ECM have been lost. Allow the vehicle to idle for a
further three minutes. Drive the vehicle at constant speeds of approximately 48 km/h (30 mph), 64 km/h (40 mph), 80
km/h (50 mph), 96 km/h (60 mph) and 112 km/h (70 mph) for three minutes each. This will allow the ECM to relearn
idle and drive values, and may cause driveability concerns if the procedure is not carried out.
Connecting a Slave Battery Using Jump Leads
WARNING: If the slave battery has recently been charged and is gassing, cover the vent plugs or covers with a
damp cloth to reduce the risk of explosion should arcing occur when connecting the jump leads.
CAUTIONS:
A discharged battery condition may have been caused by an electrical short circuit. If this condition exists there
will be an apparently live circuit on the vehicle even when all circuits are switched off. This can cause arcing when the
jump leads are connected.
Whilst it is not recommended that the vehicle is jump started, it is recognized that this may occasionally be the
only practical way to mobilize a vehicle. In such an instance the discharged battery must be recharged immediately
after jump starting to avoid permanent damage.
 Always make sure that the jump leads are adequate for the task. Heavy duty cables must be used.
 Always make sure that the slave battery is of the same voltage as the vehicle battery. The batteries must be
connected in parallel.
 Always make sure that switchable electric circuits are switched off before connecting jump leads. This reduces
the risk of sparks occurring when the final connection is made.
WARNING: Make sure that the ends of the jump leads do not touch each other or ground against the vehicle body
at any time while the leads are attached to the battery. A fully charged battery, if shorted through jump leads, can
discharge at a rate well above 1000 amps causing violent arcing and very rapid heating of the jump leads and
terminals, and can even cause the battery to explode.
Always connect the jump leads in the following sequence.
 Slave battery positive first then vehicle battery positive.

 Slave battery negative next and then vehicle ground at least, 300 mm (12 in) from the battery terminal e.g.
engine lifting bracket.
Always reduce the engine speed to idle before disconnecting the jump leads.
Before removing the jump leads, switch on the heater blower (high) or the heated rear screen, to reduce the voltage
peak when the leads are removed.
Always disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to the connecting sequence and take great care not to short the
ends of the leads.
Do not rely on the generator to restore a discharged battery. For a generator to recharge a battery, it would take in
excess of 8 hours continuous driving with no additional loads placed on the battery.
Component Cleaning
To prevent ingress of dirt, accumulations of loose dirt and greasy deposits should be removed before disconnecting or
dismantling components or assemblies.
Components should be thoroughly cleaned before inspection prior to reassembly.
Cleaning Methods:
 Dry Cleaning
 Removal of loose dirt with soft or wire brushes
 Scraping dirt off with a piece of metal or wood
 Wiping off with a rag
CAUTION: Compressed air is sometimes wet so use with caution, especially on hydraulic systems.
 Blowing dirt off with compressed air (Eye protection should be worn when using this method)
 Removal of dry dust using vacuum equipment. This method should always be used to remove friction lining
material dust (asbestos particles)
 Steam Cleaning
Calibration of Essential Measuring Equipment
WARNING: Failure to comply may result in personal injury or damage to components.

It is of fundamental importance that certain essential equipment e.g. torque wrenches, multimeters, exhaust gas
analysers, rolling roads etc., are regularly calibrated in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Use of Control Modules
Control modules may only be used on the vehicle to which they were originally installed. Do not attempt to use or test a
control module on any other vehicle.
Functional Test
On completion of a maintenance procedure, a thorough test should be carried out, to ensure the relevant vehicle
systems are working correctly.
Preparation
Before disassembly, clean the surrounding area as thoroughly as possible. When components have been removed,
blank off any exposed openings using grease-proof paper and masking tape. Immediately seal fuel, oil and hydraulic
lines when separated, using plastic caps or plugs, to prevent loss of fluid and the entry of dirt. Close the open ends of
oil ways, exposed by component removal, with tapered hardwood plugs or readily visible plastic plugs. Immediately a
component is removed, place it in a suitable container; use a separate container for each component and its associated
parts. Before dismantling a component, clean it thoroughly with a recommended cleaning agent; check that the agent
will not damage any of the materials within the component. Clean the bench and obtain marking materials, labels,
containers and locking wire before dismantling a component.
Dismantling
Observe scrupulous cleanliness when dismantling components, particularly when parts of the brake, fuel or hydraulic
systems are being worked on. A particle of dirt or a fragment of cloth could cause a dangerous malfunction if trapped in
these systems. Clean all tapped holes, crevices, oil ways and fluid passages with compressed air.
WARNING: Do not permit compressed air to enter an open wound. Always use eye protection when using
compressed air.
Make sure that any O-rings used for sealing are correctly reinstalled or renewed if disturbed. Mark mating parts to make
sure that they are replaced as dismantled. Whenever possible use marking materials which avoid the possibilities of
causing distortion or the initiation of cracks, which could occur if a center punch or scriber were used. Wire together
mating parts where necessary to prevent accidental interchange (e.g roller bearing components). Tie labels on to all
parts to be renewed and to parts requiring further inspection before being passed for reassembly. Place labelled parts
and other parts for rebuild in separate containers. Do not discard a part which is due for renewal until it has been
compared with the new part, to make sure that the correct part has been obtained.
Inspection
Before inspecting a component for wear or performing a dimensional check, make sure that it is absolutely clean; a
slight smear of grease can conceal an incipient failure. When a component is to be checked dimensionally against
figures quoted for it, use the correct equipment (surface plates, micrometers, dial gauges etc.) in serviceable condition.
The use of makeshift equipment can be dangerous. Reject a component if its dimensions are outside the limits quoted,
or if damage is apparent. A component may be reinstalled if its critical dimension is exactly to the limit size and it is
otherwise satisfactory. Use Plastigauge 12 Type PG-1 for checking bearing surface clearance, e.g. big end bearing shell
to crank journal. Instructions for the use of Plastigauge and a scale giving bearing clearances in steps of 0,0025 mm
(0.0001 in) are supplied with the package.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)
This vehicle uses programmed electronic control systems to provide engine management and emission regulation,
automatic transmission operation and anti-lock braking control. These control systems are integral with the On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD) facility that is used in conjunction with either the Jaguar approved diagnostic system or the more
restricted scan tools.
The OBD information in this manual provides diagnostic and rectification procedures for emission related electrical and
mechanical systems. The information is intended to facilitate fault diagnosis and the subsequent rectification of the
vehicle without recourse to the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
The diagnosis and testing sections within the manual cover:

 System principles of operation with links to the relevant Description and Operation sections
 Self tests (where appropriate)
 Inspection and Verification - manual checks, symptom and Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) driven diagnostic
charts with actions required to rectify concerns
 Component tests (where appropriate)
Circuit Diagrams
To understand the relationship between the vehicle electrical system and the system circuit diagrams, Refer to the
Electrical Guide.
In the interest of clarity, single lines may represent multiple wires. Refer to the color code (1st alpha) followed by the
wire reference (numeric/alpha/numeric) to trace origin and destination.
e.g. BW 647B002. BW (black with white trace) 647 (wire reference) B002 (stage from origin).
Glossary of Terms
This glossary of terms is intended to cover mainly emissions-related (to SAE J 1930) terminology, and other
abbreviations that may be used in this manual.
The required term may be looked-up in the left-hand column, and subsequent columns give the standard acronym, unit
or abbreviation, and definition.
Term(s) Acronym/Unit/Abbreviation Definition

Air Conditioning A/C
Accelerator Pedal Position APP Is a multitrack sensor which inputs the drivers demand
into the engine control module (ECM)
After Bottom Dead Center ABDC Event occurring after bottom dead center
After Top Dead Center ATDC Event occurring after top dead center
Anti-lock Brake System ABS System which prevents wheel lock-up under braking by
sensing lack of rotation of a wheel(s) and diverting fluid
pressure away from it (them)
Alternating Current ac
Amplitude Modulation AM
Automatic Temperature ATC
Control
Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF
Ampere A SI unit of current
Ampere hour Ah
Barometric Pressure BARO Pressure of surrounding air at any given temperature
and altitude
Battery positive voltage B+ The positive voltage from a battery or any circuit
connected directly to it
Before Bottom Dead Center BBDC Event occurring before bottom dead center
Before Top Dead Center BTDC Event occurring before top dead center
Bottom Dead Center BDC Lowest point of piston travel in a reciprocating engine
Battery Junction Box BJB
Brake Pedal Position BPP
Brake Horsepower BHP Effective horsepower developed by an engine or motor,
as measured by a brake applied to its output shaft
British Standard BS Standard specification issued by the British Standards
Institution
Brake Traction Control BTCS
System
Bus Topology of a communication
network
Coast Clutch Solenoid CCS
Camshaft Position CMP Indicates camshaft position
Carbon dioxide CO² Colorless gas with a density of approximately 1.5 times
that of air
Carbon monoxide CO Poisonous gas produced as the result of incomplete
combustion
Chlorofluorocarbon CFC
Catalytic converter In-line exhaust system device used to reduce the level of
engine exhaust emissions
Celsius C SI term for the Centigrade scale, with freezing point at
zero and boiling point at 100 degrees
Compact Disc CD
Cylinder Head Temperature CHT Sensor A sensor for measuring the temperature of the cylinder
Sensor head
Central Junction Box CJB
Crankshaft Position CKP Indicates crankshaft position
Clutch Pedal Position CPP Indicates clutch pedal position
Controller Area Network CAN A communication system which allows control modules
to be linked together
Constant Velocity CV
Cubic centimeter cm³
Central Security Module CSM Electronic module to support security system
functionality
Data Link Connector DLC Connector providing access and/or control of the vehicle
information, operating conditions, and diagnostic
information
Driver Door Module DDM Electronic module to support driver door functionality
Driver Seat Module DSM Electronic module to support driver seat functionality
Daytime Running Lamps DRL
Deutsche Institut fur DIN German standards regulation body
Normung
Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC An alpha/numeric identifier for a fault condition identified
by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system
Direct current dc Current which flows in one direction only, though it may
have appreciable pulsations in its magnitude
Domestic Data Bus D2B
Digital Versatile Disc DVD
Electronic Automatic EATC
Temperature Control
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGRT Sensing EGR function based on temperature change
Temperature Sensor
Electronic Brake Force EBD
Distribution
Engine Control Module ECM Electronic module to support engine functionality
Electronic Crash Sensor ECS Sensor to measure severity of impact
Engine Coolant Temperature ECT
Engine Oil Pressure EOP
European On-Board EOBD
Diagnostic
Electronic Pressure Control EPC
Electrically Erasable EEPROM
Programmable Read-Only
Memory
Erasable Programmable EPROM
Read-Only Memory
Evaporative Emission EVAP System designed to prevent fuel vapor from escaping
into the atmosphere. Typically includes a charcoal filled
canister to absorb fuel vapor
Flash Electrically Erasable FEEPROM
Memory
Front Electronic Module FEM
Flash Erasable FEPROM
Memory
Frequency Modulation FM
Fuel Pump Driver Module FPDM
Fuel Rail Pressure FRP
Generic Electronic Module GEM
Ground GND Electrical conductor used as a common return for an
electrical circuit or circuits, and with a relative zero
potential
Global Positioning System GPS
Global System for Mobile GSM
Communication
Gross Vehicle Weight GVW
Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S Electrically heated oxygen sensor which induces fuelling
corrections
Hydrofluorocarbon HFC
High tension HT
Hydrocarbon HC
Idle Air Control IAC Stepper motor driven device which varies the volume of
air by-passing the throttle to maintain the programmed
idle speed
Intake Air Temperature IAT Temperature of intake air
Inertia Fuel Shut-off IFS An inertia system that shuts off the fuel supply when
activated by pre-determined force limits brought about
by (e.g.) collision
Input Shaft Speed ISS Indicates input shaft speed
Key On, Engine Off KOEO
Key On, Engine Running KOER
Kilogram (mass) kg
Kilogram (force) kgf
Kilogram force per square kgf/cm²
centimeter
Kilometer km
Kilometer per hour km/h
Kilopascal kPa
Kilovolt kV
Knock Sensor KS Sensor which detects the onset of detonation, and
signals the ECM to retard the ignition
Liquid Crystal Display LCD Optical digital display system, to which applied voltage
varies the way the crystals reflect light, thereby
modifying the display
Lighting Control Module LCM
Light Emitting Diode LED
Low Tension LT Primary circuit of the ignition system, linking the battery
to the primary winding in the ignition coil
Left-Hand LH
Left-Hand Drive LHD
Mass Air Flow MAF System which provides information on the mass flow
rate of the intake air to the engine
Manifold Absolute Pressure MAP Absolute pressure of the intake manifold air
Manifold Absolute Pressure MAPT
and Temperature
Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL A required on-board indicator to alert the driver of an
emission related malfunction
Meter (measurement) m
Metric (screw thread, e.g. M
M8)
Farad F Unit of electrical capacitance
Millimeter mm
Millimeter of mercury mmHg
Millisecond ms
Model year MY
Newton N SI unit of force. 1 N = 0.2248 pounds force
Newton Meter Nm SI unit of torque. Must not be confused with nm
(nanometer)
Negative Temperature NTC
Coefficient
Naturally aspirated N/A Fuelling system using intake air at atmospheric
pressure; not supercharged or turbocharged
Noise, Vibration and NVH
Harshness
North American Specification NAS Vehicles for sale in the USA and Canadian markets
On-Board Diagnostic OBD A system that monitors some or all computer input and
output control signals. Signal(s) outside the pre-
determined limits imply a fault in the system or a related
system
Oxides of Nitrogen Nox
Oxygen Sensor O2S A sensor which detects oxygen content in the exhaust
gases
On-board Refuelling Vapour ORVR
Recovery
Output State Control OSC
Output Shaft Speed OSS
Passenger Air Bag PAD
Deactivation
Pulsed Secondary Air PAIR
Injection
Passive Anti-Theft System PATS
Positive Crankcase PCV
Ventilation
Parameter Identification PID An index number referring to a parameter within a
module without knowledge of its storage location
Park/Neutral Position PNP
Pulse Width Modulation PWM
Programmable Electronic PECUS Process whereby a common ECM is programmed on the
Control Units System production line to suit the market requirements of a
particular vehicle
Programmable Read-only PROM ROM with some provision for setting the stored data
Memory after manufacture
Portable Support Electronics PSE
Power Steering Pressure PSP
Polytetrafluoroethylene PTFE
Random Access Memory RAM Fast access memory store which is accessible for entry
or extraction of data
Read Only Memory ROM Fast access memory in which data is fixed and may not
be changed
Restraints Control Module RCM Electronic module to support functionality of the
Supplemental Restraints System
Radio Data System RDS
Rear Electronic Module REM
Remote Keyless Entry RKE
Right-hand RH
Right-hand drive RHD
Research Octane Number RON
Rear Seat Module RSM Electronic module to support functionality of rear seats
Supercharger SC An intake system which utilizes a supercharger
(mechanically driven device that pressurizes intake air,
thereby increasing density of charge air and the
consequent power output from a given displacement)
Serial Communications Link SCL
Standard Corporate Protocol SCP A high-speed, serial communications system linking all
body system control modules. Control messages and
data are passed between modules at up to 786
messages per second
Supplemental Restraints SRS
System
Shift Solenoid SS Controls shifting in an automatic transmission
Seat Control Module SCM Module controlling the seat motor systems (not electric
raise/lower-only seats)
Secondary Air Injection AIR System used for a period of time each time the engine is
started, unless certain temperature criteria are met.
Pumps air directly into the exhaust system which
generates extra heat and reduces the time taken for the
catalytic converters to reach operating temperature
Service Repair Operation SRO Number generated by Jaguar Methods & Techniques
(number) system which relates to the time allowed to complete a
repair operation. Further information on the system can
be found in the separate Jaguar Publications (for each
model range) entitled 'Repair Operation Times'
Society of Automotive SAE
Engineers
Timing/Coast Clutch T/CCS
Solenoid
Torque Converter Clutch TCC
Transmission Control TCIL
Indicator Lamp
Throttle Position TP
Top Dead Center TDC
Transmission Control Module TCM Controls the shifting pattern of the (automatic)
transmission
Transmission Control Switch TCS Modifies the operation of electronically controlled
transmissions
Transmission Fluid TFT Indicates temperature of transmission fluid
Temperature
Transmission Range TR The range in which the transmission is operating
Turbine Shaft Speed TSS Indicates rotational speed of transmission output shaft
or turbine shaft
Variable Assist Power VAPS
Steering
Variable Camshaft Timing VCT A system by which the relationship of the crankshaft and
camshaft may be altered during engine running
Vehicle Identification VIN Number assigned to the vehicle by the manufacturer,
Number primarily for licensing and identification purposes
Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS Sensor which provides vehicle speed information
Worldwide Diagnostic WDS Jaguar approved diagnostic system
System
Wide Open Throttle WOT Full throttle position
General Information - Health and Safety Precautions
The Health and Safety Precautions subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards
associated with their use, and safety measures to be taken. Some of these chemicals may be included in the following
list either in their own right or as an ingredient in a sealer or adhesive.
Acids and Alkalis
See also Battery Acids.
e.g. caustic soda, sulphuric acid.
Used in batteries and cleaning materials.
Irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, nose and throat. Cause burns. Can destroy ordinary protective clothing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear suitable protective impervious apron, gloves and goggles. Do not
breath mists.
Ensure access to eye wash bottles, shower and soap are readily available for splashing accidents.
Display Eye Hazard sign.
Air Bags
See also Fire, Chemical Materials - General
Highly flammable, explosive – observe No Smoking policy.
Used as a part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), mounted in various positions around the vehicle.
The inflator contains a high-energetic propellant which, when ignited, produces a VERY HOT GAS (2500° C).
The gas generant used in air bags is Sodium Azide. This material is hermetically sealed in the module and is completely
consumed during deployment. No attempt should be made to open an air bag inflator as this will lead to the risk of
exposure to Sodium Azide. If a gas generator is ruptured, full protective clothing should be worn when dealing with the
spillage.
After normal deployment, gloves and safety goggles should be worn during the handling process.
Deployed air bags should be disposed of in a plastic bag in accordance with local regulations at an approved chemical
waste site.
Following any direct contact with gas generant.
 Wash affected areas thoroughly with water

 Seek medical assistance if necessary
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any SRS components. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the
battery negative cable and wait for one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTE: The storage, transportation, disposal and/or recycling of air bag modules must be carried out in accordance with
all applicable federal, state and local regulations including, but not limited to, those governing building and fire codes,
environmental protection, occupational health and safety and transportation.
Air Bags - Do's
 Do store in an air bag safe when not installed to the vehicle.

 Do store modules in an upright position
 Do keep modules dry
 Do carry modules with the cover side pointing away from the body
 Do place modules with their cover side upwards
 Do carefully inspect modules for damage
 Do stand to one side when connecting modules
 Do make sure all test equipment is properly calibrated and maintained
 Do wash you hands after handling deployed air bags
 Do wear safety glasses when carrying out repairs to the SRS or when handling an air bag module
 Only carry out a system test with the air bag modules fully installed
 Do inspect the condition of the impact sensor mounting bracket and sensor flylead if the vehicle has been
involved in an impact. Replace if damaged, even if there has been no deployment.
Air Bags - Do Nots
 Do not store highly flammable material together with modules or gas generators
 Do not store gas generators at temperatures exceeding 80° C
 Do not store modules upside down
 Do not attempt to open a gas generator housing
 Do not expose gas generators to open flame or sources of heat
 Do not place anything on top of a module cover
 Do not use damaged modules
 Do not handle a deployed device or gas generator for at least 20 minutes
 Do not probe air bag module electrical connectors or any other SRS component
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
See also Chlorofluorocarbon, Chemical Materials
Highly flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.
Skin contact may result in frostbite.
Instructions given by the manufacturer must be followed. Avoid naked lights, wear suitable protective gloves and
goggles.
If refrigerant comes into contact with the skin or eyes, rinse the affected areas with water immediately. Eyes should
also be rinsed with an appropriate irrigation solution and should not be rubbed. SEEK MEDICAL ASSISTANCE IF
NECESSARY.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant - Do Nots
 Do not expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat

 Do not expose refrigerant bottles to frost
 Do not drop refrigerant bottles
 Do not vent refrigerant to atmosphere under any circumstance
 Do not mix refrigerants i.e. R12 (Freon) and R134a
Antifreeze
See also Fire, Solvents.
e.g. isopropanol, ethylene glycol, methanol.
Highly flammable, flammable, combustible.
Used in vehicle coolant systems, brake air pressure systems, screenwash solutions.
Vapors may be given off from coolant antifreeze (glycol) when heated. Avoid breathing these vapors.
Antifreeze may be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities. Antifreeze, if swallowed can be fatal and
medical attention should be sought immediately.
These products must not be used in any cooling or industrial water system which is connected or linked to general, food
preparation or drinking water supplies.
Asbestos
Used in brake and clutch linings, transmission brake bands and gaskets. Jaguar original production and replacement
items are asbestos free.
See also Warning Symbols on Vehicles at the end of this subsection.
Breathing asbestos dust may cause lung damage or, in some cases, cancer.
The use of drum cleaning units, vacuum cleaning or damp wiping is preferred.
Asbestos dust waste should be dampened, placed in a sealed container and marked to make sure safe disposal. If any
cutting or drilling is attempted on materials containing asbestos the item should be dampened and only hand tools or
low speed power tools used.
Battery Acids
See also Acids and Alkalis.
Gases released during charging are explosive. Never use naked flames or allow sparks near charging or recently
charged batteries.
Ensure adequate ventilation.
Brake and Clutch Linings and Pads
See Asbestos.
Brake Fluids (Polyalkylene Glycols)
See also Fire.
Splashes to the skin and eyes may cause irritation. Avoid skin and eye contact as far as possible. Vapor inhalation
hazards do not arise at ambient temperatures because of the very low vapor pressure.
Brazing
See Welding.
Chemical Materials
See also Legal Aspects.
Chemical materials such as solvents, sealers, adhesives, paints, resin foams, battery acids, antifreeze, brake fluids,
fuels, oils and grease should always be used with caution and stored and handled with care. They may be toxic,
harmful, corrosive, irritant or highly flammable and give rise to hazardous fumes and dusts.
The effects of excessive exposure to chemicals may be immediate or delayed; briefly experienced or permanent;
cumulative; superficial; life threatening; or may reduce life-expectancy.
Chemical Materials - Do's
 Do carefully read and observe hazard and precaution warnings given on material containers (labels) and in any
accompanying leaflets, posters or other instructions. Material health and safety data sheets can be obtained
from manufacturers
 Do remove chemical materials from the skin and clothing as soon as practical after soiling. Change heavily soiled
clothing and have it cleaned
 Do organise work practices and protective clothing to avoid soiling of the skin and eyes, and the breathing in of
vapors, aerosols, dusts or fumes
 Do wash before breaks, before eating, smoking, drinking or using toilet facilities when handling chemical
materials
 Do keep work areas clean, uncluttered and free from spills
 Do store chemical materials according to national and local regulations
 Do keep chemical materials out of the reach of children
Chemical Materials - Do Nots
 Do not mix chemical materials except under the manufacturer's instructions; some chemicals can form other
toxic or harmful chemicals, give off toxic or harmful fumes or become explosive when mixed together
 Do not spray chemical materials, particularly those based on solvents, in confined spaces e.g. when people are
inside a vehicle
 Do not apply heat or flame to chemical materials except under the manufacturer's instructions. Some are highly
flammable and some may release toxic or harmful fumes
 Do not leave containers open. Fumes given off can build up to toxic, harmful or explosive concentrations. Some
fumes are heavier than air and will accumulate in confined areas, pits etc.
 Do not transfer chemical materials to unlabeled containers
 Do not clean hands or clothing with chemicals. Chemicals, particularly solvents and fuels, will dry skin and may
cause irritation leading to dermatitis or be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities
 Do not use emptied containers for other materials except when they have been cleaned under supervised
conditions
 Do not sniff or smell chemical materials. Brief exposure to high concentrations of fumes can be toxic or harmful
Chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)
There is concern in the scientific community that CFCs and Halons are depleting the upper ozone layer which filters out
harmful ultraviolet radiation. Decreased filtration of ultraviolet radiation may result in increases in skin cancer, cataracts
and immune system suppression in humans, as well as decreased productivity of crops and aquatic systems.
CFCs are used primarily as refrigerants in vehicle air conditioning systems and as aerosol propellants. Halons are used
as fire extinguishants.
Jaguar supports worldwide elimination of CFC usage and it is recommended that Company subsidiaries and affiliates
should phase out CFC usage as soon as acceptable substitutes are commercially available.
Clutch Fluids
See Brake fluids.
Clutch Linings and Pads
See Asbestos.
Corrosion Protection Materials
See also Solvents, Fire.
Highly flammable, flammable – observe No Smoking policy.
These materials are varied and the manufacturer's instructions should be followed. They may contain solvents, resins,
petroleum products etc. Skin and eye contact should be avoided. They should only be sprayed in conditions of adequate
ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Cutting
See Welding.
Dewaxing
See Solvents and Fuels (Kerosene).
Dusts
Powder, dusts or clouds may be irritant, harmful or toxic. Avoid breathing dusts from powdery chemical materials or
those arising from dry abrasion operations. Wear respiratory protection if ventilation is inadequate.
Fine dusts of combustible material can present an explosion hazard. Avoid explosive limits and/or sources of ignition.
Electric Shock
Electric shock can result from the use of faulty electrical equipment or from the misuse of equipment in good condition.
Ensure that electrical equipment is maintained in good condition and frequently tested. Faulty equipment should be
labelled and preferably removed from the work station.
Ensure that flexes, cables, plugs and sockets are not frayed, kinked, cut, cracked or otherwise damaged.
Ensure that electrical equipment and flexes do not come into contact with water.
Ensure that electrical equipment is protected by the correct rated fuse.
Never misuse electrical equipment and never use equipment which is in any way faulty. The results could be fatal.
Ensure that the cables of mobile electrical equipment cannot get trapped and damaged, such as in a vehicle hoist.
Ensure that the designated electrical workers are trained in basic First Aid.
In cases of electrocution:
 Switch off the power supply before approaching the victim

 If this is not possible push or drag the victim from the source of electricity using dry non-conductive material
 Commence resuscitation if trained to do so
 SUMMON MEDICAL ASSISTANCE
Engine Oils
See Lubricants and Grease.
Exhaust Fumes
These contain asphyxiating, harmful and toxic chemicals and particles such as carbon oxides, nitrogen oxides,
aldehydes, lead and aromatic hydrocarbons. Engines should be run only under conditions of adequate exhaust
extraction or general ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Gasolene (petrol) engine
There may not be adequate warning of odour or of irritation before toxic or harmful effects arise. These may be
immediate or delayed.
Fibre Insulation
See also Dusts.
Used in noise and sound insulation.
The fibrous nature of surfaces and cut edges can cause skin irritation. This is usually a physical and not a chemical
effect.
Precautions should be taken to avoid excessive skin contact through careful organization of work practices and the use
of gloves.
Fire
See also Welding, Foams, Legal Aspects.
Many of the materials found on or associated with the repair of vehicles are highly flammable. Some give off toxic or
harmful fumes if burnt.
Observe strict fire safety when storing and handling flammable materials or solvents, particularly near electrical
equipment or welding processes.
Ensure, before using electrical or welding equipment, that there is no fire hazard present.
Have a suitable fire extinguisher available when using welding or heating equipment.
www.JagDocs.com
First Aid
Apart from meeting any legal requirements it is desirable for someone in the workshop to be trained in First Aid
procedures.
Splashes in the eye should be flushed carefully with clean water for at least ten minutes.
Soiled skin should be washed with soap and water.
Individuals affected by inhalation of gases, fumes etc. should be removed to fresh air immediately. If effects persist,
consult a doctor.
If liquids are swallowed inadvertently, consult a doctor giving the information on the container or label. Do not induce
vomiting unless this action is indicated on the label.
Fluoroelastomer
See Viton.
Foams - Polyurethane
See also Fire.
Used in sound and noise insulation. Cured foams used in seat and trim cushioning.
Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Unreacted components are irritating and may be harmful to the skin and eyes. Wear gloves and goggles.
Individuals with chronic respiratory diseases, asthma, bronchial medical problems, or histories of allergic diseases
should not work in or near uncured materials.
The components, vapors or spray mists can cause direct irritation, sensitivity reactions and may be toxic or harmful.
Vapors and spray mists must not be inhaled. These materials must be applied with adequate ventilation and respiratory
protection. Do not remove the respirator immediately after spraying, wait until the vapor/mists have cleared.
Burning of the uncured components and the cured foams can generate toxic and harmful fumes. Smoking, naked
flames or the use of electrical equipment during foaming operations and until vapors/mists have cleared should not be
allowed. Any heat cutting of cured foams or partially cured foams should be conducted with extraction ventilation.
Freon
See Air Conditioning Refrigerant.
Fuels
See also, Fire, Legal Aspects, Chemicals and Solvents.
Avoid skin contact with fuel where possible. Should contact occur, wash the affected skin with soap and water.
Gasoline (Petrol)
Highly flammable - observe No Smoking policy.
Swallowing can result in mouth and throat irritation and absorption from the stomach can result in drowsiness and
unconsciousness. Small amounts can be fatal to children. Aspiration of liquid into the lungs e.g. through vomiting, is a
very serious hazard.
Gasoline dries the skin and can cause irritation and dermatitis on prolonged or repeated contact. Liquid in the eye
causes severe pain.
Motor gasoline may contain appreciable quantities of benzene, which is toxic upon inhalation, and the concentration of
gasoline vapors must be kept very low. High concentrations will cause eye, nose and throat irritation, nausea,
headache, depression and symptoms of drunkenness. Very high concentrations will result in rapid loss of consciousness.
Ensure there is adequate ventilation when handling and using gasoline. Great care must be taken to avoid the serious
consequences of inhalation in the event of vapor build up arising from spillages in confined spaces.
Special precautions apply to cleaning and maintenance operations on gasoline storage tanks.
Gasoline should not be used as a cleaning agent. It must not be siphoned by mouth. See First Aid.
Gas - oil (Diesel Fuel)
See warnings and cautions in relevant manual sections.
Combustible.
Gross or prolonged skin contact with high boiling point gas oils may also cause serious skin disorders including skin
cancer.
Kerosene (Paraffin)
Used also as heating fuel, solvent and cleaning agent.
Flammable - observe No Smoking policy.
Irritation of the mouth and throat may result from swallowing. The main hazard from swallowing arises if liquid
aspiration into the lungs occurs.
Liquid contact dries the skin and can cause irritation or dermatitis. Splashes in the eye may be slightly irritating.
In normal circumstances the low volatility does not give rise to harmful vapors. Exposure to mists and vapors from
kerosene at elevated temperature should be avoided (mists may arise in dewaxing). Avoid skin and eye contact and
make sure there is adequate ventilation.
Gas Cylinders
See also Fire.
Gases such as oxygen, acetylene, argon and propane are normally stored in cylinders at pressures of up to 13.790 kPa,
(2000 lb/in²) and great care should be taken in handling these cylinders to avoid mechanical damage to them or to the
valve gear attached. The contents of each cylinder should be clearly identified by appropriate markings.
Cylinders should be stored in well ventilated enclosures, and protected from ice and snow, or direct sunlight. Fuel gases
(e.g. acetylene and propane) should not be stored in close proximity to oxygen cylinders.
Care should be exercised to prevent leaks from gas cylinders and lines, and to avoid sources of ignition.
Only trained personnel should undertake work involving gas cylinders.
Gases
See Gas Cylinders.
Gaskets (Fluoroelastomer)
See Viton.
General Workshop Tools and Equipment
It is essential that all tools and equipment are maintained in good condition and the correct safety equipment is used
where required.
Never use tools or equipment for any purpose other than that for which they were designed. Never over – load
equipment such as hoists, jacks, axle and chassis stands or lifting slings. Damage caused by overloading is not always
immediately apparent and may result in a fatal failure the next time that the equipment is used.
Do not use damaged or defective tools or equipment, particularly high speed equipment such as grinding wheels. A
damaged grinding wheel can disintegrate without warning and cause serious injury.
Wear suitable eye protection when using grinding, chiselling or sand blasting equipment.
Wear a suitable breathing mask when using abrasive blasting equipment, working with asbestos-based materials or
using spraying equipment.
Ensure adequate ventilation to control dusts, mists and fumes.
High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment
See also Lubricants and Greases.
Always keep high pressure equipment in good condition, and regularly maintained, particularly at joints and unions.
Never direct a high pressure nozzle, e.g. diesel injector, at the skin as the fluid may penetrate to the under - lying
tissue etc., and cause serious injury.
Halon
See CFCs.
Legal Aspects
Many laws and regulations make requirements relating to health and safety in the use and disposal of materials and
equipment in workshops. Some of these laws which apply in the UK are listed. Similar laws exist for other territories:
 The Factories Act (1961)

 The Asbestos Regulations (1969)
 Highly Flammable Liquids and Liquified Petroleum Gases Regulations (1972)
 Control of Pollution Act (1974)
 Health and Safety at Work Act (1974)
 The Classification, Packaging and Labelling of Dangerous Substances Regulations (1978, 1981, 1983, 1984)
 Control of Lead at Work Regulations (1980)
 Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations (1989)
 Abrasive Wheels Regulations (1970)
 Reporting of injuries, diseases and dangerous occurrences regulations 1985 (RIDDOR)
Workshops should be familiar, in detail, with these and associated laws and regulations.
Consult the local factory inspectorate if in any doubt.
Lubricants and Greases
Avoid all prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oils. All lubricants and greases may be irritating to the eyes and
skin.
Used Engine Oil
Prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oil will result in the removal of natural oils from the skin, leading to
dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin cancer. Adequate means of skin protection and washing facilities must be provided.
Do not employ used engine oils as lubricants or for any application where appreciable skin contact is likely to occur.
There are publications describing the problems and advising on precautionary measures. For the UK a typical Health
and Safety Executive publication is: SHW 397: Cautionary Notice: Effects of mineral oil on the skin.
Health Protection Precautions
 Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils
 Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable
 Do not put oily rags into pockets
 Avoid contaminating clothing with oil
 Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly
 First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
 Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to enable easier removal of dirty oil and grease
from the skin
 Wash with soap and water to make sure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help).
Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed
 Do not use gasoline (petrol), kerosene (paraffin), diesel fuel (gas oil), thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
 If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay
 Where practical, degrease components prior to handling
 Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, goggles or face shields; in
addition an eye wash facility should be provided
Environmental Precautions
Burning used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers can be recommended only for units of approved design. In the
UK the heating system must meet the requirements of HM Inspectorate of Pollution for small burners of less than 0.4
MW. If in doubt check with the appropriate local authority and/or manufacturer of approved appliances.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors or licensed waste disposal sites, or
to the waste oil reclamation trade, batteries should also be disposed off under similar arrangements. If in doubt, contact
the relevant local authority for advice on disposal facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil, antifreeze and automatic transmission fluid on to the ground, down sewers, drains, or into
water courses.
Noise
Some operations may produce high noise levels which could, in time, damage hearing. In these cases, suitable ear
protection must be worn.
Noise Insulation Materials
See Foams, Fibre Insulation.
0-Rings (Fluoroelastomer)
See Viton.
Paints
See also body and paint manual.
See also Solvents, Chemical Materials.
Highly flammable, flammable - observe No Smoking policy
Pressurized Equipment
See High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment.
Solder
Solders are a mixture of metals such that the melting point of the mixture is below that of the constituent metals
(normally lead and tin). Solder application does not normally give rise to toxic lead fumes, provided a gas/air flame is
used. Oxy-acetylene flames should not be used, as they are much hotter and will cause lead fumes to be produced.
Some fumes may be produced by the application of any flame to surfaces coated with grease etc. and inhalation of
these should be avoided.
Removal of excess solder should be undertaken with care, to make sure that fine lead dust is not produced, which can
give toxic effects if inhaled. Respiratory protection may be necessary.
Solder spillage and filings should be collected and removed promptly to prevent general air contamination by lead.
High standards of personal hygiene are necessary in order to avoid ingestion of lead or inhalation of solder dust from
clothing.
Solvents
See also Chemical Materials, Fuels (Kerosene), Fire.
e.g. acetone, white spirit, toluene, xylene, trichloroethane.
Used in cleaning and de-waxing materials, paints, plastics, resins, thinners etc.
Some may be highly flammable or flammable.
Skin contact will degrease the skin and may result in irritation and dermatitis following repeated or prolonged contact.
Some can be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
Splashes in the eye may cause severe irritation and could lead to loss of vision.
Brief exposure to high concentrations of vapors or mists will cause eye and throat irritation, drowsiness, dizziness,
headaches and, in the worst circumstances, unconsciousness.
Repeated or prolonged exposure to excessive but lower concentrations of vapors or mists, for which there might not be
adequate warning indications, can cause more serious toxic or harmful effects.
Aspiration into the lungs (e.g. through vomiting) is the most serious consequence of swallowing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear protective gloves, goggles and clothing if necessary.
Ensure good ventilation when in use, avoid breathing fumes, vapors and spray mists and keep containers tightly sealed.
Do not use in confined spaces.
When spraying materials containing solvents, e.g. paints, adhesive, coatings, use extraction ventilation or personal
respiratory protection in the absence of adequate general ventilation.
Do not apply heat or flame except under specific and detailed manufacturer's instructions.
Sound Insulation
See Fibre Insulation, Foams.
Suspended Loads
CAUTION: Never improvise lifting tackle.
There is always a danger when loads are lifted or suspended. Never work under an unsupported, suspended or raised
load e.g. suspended engine, etc.
Always make sure that lifting equipment such as jacks, hoists, axle stands, slings, etc., are adequate and suitable for
the job, in good condition and regularly maintained.
Transmission Brake Bands
See Asbestos.
Underseal
See Corrosion Protection.

Viton
In common with many other manufacturers' vehicles, some components installed to the Jaguar range have 'O' rings,
seals or gaskets which contain a material known as 'Viton'.
Viton is a fluoroelastomer, that is a synthetic rubber type which contains Fluorine. It is commonly used for 'O' rings,
gaskets and seals of all types. Although Viton is the most well known fluoroelastomer, there are others, including
Fluorel and Tecmoflon.
When used under design conditions fluoroelastomers are perfectly safe. If, however, they are exposed to temperatures
in excess of 400º C, the material will not burn, but will decompose, and one of the products formed is hydrofluoric acid.
This acid is extremely corrosive and may be absorbed directly, through contact, into the body.
'O' rings, seals or gaskets which have been exposed to very high temperatures will appear charred or as a black sticky
substance.
DO NOT, under any circumstances touch them or the attached components.
Enquiries should be made to determine whether Viton or any other fluoroelastomer has been used in the affected 'O'
ring, seal or gasket. If they are of natural rubber or nitrile there is no hazard. If in doubt, be cautious and assume that
the material may be Viton or any fluoroelastomer.
If Viton or any other fluoroelastomers have been used, the affected area should be decontaminated before the
commencement of work.
Disposable heavy duty plastic gloves should be worn at all times, and the affected area washed down using wire wool
and a limewater (calcium hydroxide) solution to neutralize the acid before disposing of the decomposed Viton residue
and final cleaning of the area. After use, the plastic gloves should be discarded carefully and safely.
Welding
See also Fire, Electric Shock, Gas Cylinders.
Welding processes include Resistance Welding (Spot Welding), Arc Welding and Gas Welding (and cutting).
Resistance Welding (Spot Welding)
This process may cause particles of molten metal to be emitted at a high velocity, and the eyes and skin must be
protected.
Arc Welding
This process emits a high level of ultraviolet radiation which may cause arc-eye and skin burns to the operator and to
other persons nearby. Gas-shielded welding processes are particularly hazardous in this respect. Personal protection
must be worn, and screens used to shield other people.
CONTACT LENS WEARERS ARE ADVISED TO REVERT TO ORDINARY SPECTACLES WHEN ARC WELDING as the arc
spectrum is believed to emit microwaves which dry out the fluid between the lens and the eye. This may result in
blindness when the lens is removed from the eye.
Metal spatter will also occur, and appropriate eye and skin protection is necessary.
The heat of the welding arc will produce fumes and gases from the metals being welded, the rods and from any applied
coatings or contamination on the surfaces being worked on. These gases and fumes may be toxic and inhalation of
these should be avoided. The use of extraction ventilation to remove the fumes from the working area may be
necessary particularly in cases where the general ventilation is poor, or where considerable welding work is anticipated.
In extreme cases or confined spaces where adequate ventilation cannot be provided, air-fed respirators may be
necessary.
Gas Welding (and Cutting)
Oxy-acetylene torches may be used for welding and cutting, and special care must be taken to prevent leakage of these
gases, with consequent risk of fire and explosion.
The process will produce metal spatter and eye and skin protection is necessary.
The flame is bright, and eye protection should be used, but the ultraviolet emission is much less than that from arc
welding, and lighter filters may be used.
The process itself produces few toxic fumes, but such fumes and gases may be produced from coatings on the work,
particularly during cutting away of damaged body parts, and inhalation of the fumes should be avoided.
In brazing, toxic fumes may be produced from the metals in the brazing rod, and a severe hazard may arise if brazing
rods containing cadmium are used. In this event particular care must be taken to avoid inhalation of fumes and expert
advice may be required.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN BEFORE ANY WELDING OR CUTTING TAKES PLACE ON VESSELS WHICH HAVE
CONTAINED COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, E.G. BOILING OR STEAMING OUT OF FUEL TANKS.
Warning Symbols on Vehicles
Decals showing warning symbols will be found on various vehicle components.
These decals must not be removed. The warnings are for the attention of owners/operators and persons carrying out
service or repair operations on the vehicle.
The most commonly found decals are reproduced below together with an explanation of the warnings.
1. Components or assemblies displaying the warning triangle and open book symbol advise consultation of the
relevant section of the owners handbook before touching or attempting adjustments of any kind.
2. Components or assemblies displaying the warning triangle with the electrified arrow and open book symbol give
warning of inherent high voltages. Never touch these with the engine running or the ignition switched on. See
Electric Shock in this subsection.
3. Jaguar vehicles and replacement parts which contain asbestos are identified by this symbol. See Asbestos in this
subsection.
4. Components or assemblies displaying this symbol give warning that the component contains a corrosive
substance. See Acids and Alkalis in this subsection.
5. Vehicles displaying the caution circle with a deleted lighted match symbol, caution against the use of naked
lights or flames within the immediate vicinity due to the presence of highly flammable or explosive liquids or
vapors. See Fire in this subsection.
6. All vehicles with the passenger air bag installed from the factory have a warning sticker attached to the
instrument panel, prohibiting the use of rear facing child seats in the front seating position. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
White Spirit
See Solvents.
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Working on the fuel system results in fuel and fuel vapor being present in the atmosphere. Fuel vapor is extremely
flammable, hence great care must be taken whilst working on the fuel system. Adhere strictly to the following
precautions:
 Do not smoke in the work area

 Display 'no smoking' signs around the area
 Disconnect the battery before working on the fuel system
 Do not connect/disconnect electrical circuits, use electrical equipment or other tools or engage in working
practices which in any way may result in the production of sparks
 Ensure that a CO² fire extinguisher is close at hand
 Ensure that dry sand is available to soak up any fuel spillage
 Empty fuel using suitable fire proof equipment into an authorized explosion proof container
 Do not empty fuel while working in a workshop or a pit
 Ensure that working area is well ventilated
 Ensure that any work on the fuel system is only carried out by experienced and well qualified maintenance
personnel
 Ensure that fume extraction equipment is used where appropriate
Fume extraction equipment must be in operation when solvents are used e.g. Trichloroethane, white spirit, sbp3,
methylene chloride, perchlorethylene. Do not smoke in the vicinity of volatile degreasing agents.
Whenever possible, use a ramp or pit whilst working beneath a vehicle, in preference to jacking. Position chocks at the
wheels as well as applying the parking brake. Never rely on a jack alone to support a vehicle. Use axle stands, or blocks
carefully placed at the jacking points, to provide a rigid location. Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate
capacity and is fully serviceable. Ensure that a suitable form of fire extinguisher is conveniently located. When using
electrical tools and equipment, inspect the power lead for damage and check that it is properly earthed. Disconnect the
earth (grounded) terminal of the vehicle battery. Do not disconnect any pipes of the air conditioning refrigeration
system unless you are trained and instructed to do so. A refrigerant is used which can cause blindness if allowed to
come into contact with the eyes. Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided when volatile degreasing agents are being
used.
Adhere strictly to handling and safety instructions given on containers and labels. Keep oils and solvents away from
naked flames and other sources of ignition. Do not apply heat in an attempt to free seized nuts or fittings; as well as
causing damage to protective coatings, there is a risk of damage from stray heat to electronic equipment and brake
lines. Do not leave tools, equipment, spilt oil etc. around the work area. Wear protective overalls and use barrier cream
when necessary.
Environmental Protection
In some countries it is illegal to pour used oil onto the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water courses. The
burning of used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers is not recommended unless emission control equipment is
installed. Dispose of used oil through authorized waste disposal contractors, to licensed waste disposal sites or to the
waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the Local Authority for advice on disposal facilities.
General Information - How To Use This Manual
Workshop Manual Organization
This manual covers descriptive, diagnostic (including OBD), and repair aspects to service the vehicle effectively.
The manual is arranged in sections, each section dealing with a specific part of a vehicle system. For example, Section
412-03 [Air Conditioning] covers air conditioning, which is part of the climate control system.
The first digit of the section number indicates the group (in the above example this being Electrical). There are five
groups:
 General Information.
 Chassis.
 Powertrain.
 Electrical.
 Body and Paint.
The second and third digits of the section number indicate the vehicle system (12 in the above example being Climate
Control).
The last two digits of the section number indicate the part of the system covered by the section (03 in the example
denotes Air Conditioning).
General Information - Important Safety Instructions
Safety Notice
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor
vehicles, as well as the safety of the person doing the work. This manual provides general directions for accomplishing
service and repair work with tested effective techniques. Following them will help assure reliability.
There are numerous variations in procedures, techniques, tools, and parts for servicing vehicles, as well as in the skill of
the person doing the work. This manual cannot possibly anticipate all such variations and provide advice or cautions as
to each. Accordingly, anyone who departs from the instructions provided in the manual must first establish that neither
personal safety or vehicle integrity is compromised from choices of methods, tools or parts.
General Information - Road/Roller Testing
Road or roller testing may be carried out for various reasons and a procedure detailing pre-test checks, through engine
starting and stopping, pre-driving checks, on-test checks to final checks on completion of the test is given in this
section.
Unless complete vehicle performance is being checked, the full road test procedure need not be carried out. Instead,
those items particularly relevant to the system/s being checked can be extracted.
Pre - Test Checks
WARNING: If the brake system hydraulic fluid level is low, pedal travel is excessive or a hydraulic leak is found, do
not attempt to road test the vehicle until the reason for the low fluid level, excessive pedal travel or hydraulic leak is
found and rectified.
It is suggested that pre-test checks, and functional tests of those systems/circuits which affect the safe and legal
operations of the vehicle, such as brakes, lights and steering, should always be carried out before the road or roller
test.
 Engine oil level

 Engine coolant level
 Tires, for correct pressure, compatible types and tread patterns, and wear within limits
 There is sufficient fuel in the tank to complete the test
 All around the engine, transmission and under the vehicle for oil, coolant, hydraulic and fuel leaks. Make a note
of any apparent leaks and wipe off the surrounding areas to make it easier to identify the extent of the leak on
completion of the test
Starting the Engine
CAUTION: On initial drive away from cold and within the first 1.5 km (1 mile), do not depress accelerator pedal
beyond half travel until the vehicle has attained a minimum speed of 25 km/h (15 miles/h). Never operate at high
engine speed or with the accelerator pedal at full travel whilst the engine is cold.
With the ignition switched off, check:
 The parking brake is applied

 The transmission selector lever is in Park
 All instrument gauges (except fuel gauge) read zero
With the ignition switched on, check:
 Ignition controlled warning lamps come on

 Engine coolant temperature gauge registers a reading compatible with the engine coolant temperature
 Fuel gauge registers a reading appropriate to the fuel level in the tank
 The operation of the parking brake and brake fluid level warning lamps
On Road or Roller Test Check:
CAUTION: If road testing, check the brake operation while still travelling at low speed before continuing with the
test. If the brakes pull to one side, or appear to be otherwise faulty, do not continue with the road test until the fault
has been found and rectified.
 Initial gear engagement is smooth

 Parking brake control operates smoothly and the parking brake releases quickly and completely
 Transmission takes up the drive smoothly, without judder
 The engine power output is satisfactory, full power is achieved, acceleration is smooth and pedal operation not
stiff or heavy, and engine speed returns to idle correctly
 There is no excessive or abnormally colored smoke from the engine under normal driving, heavy load or overrun
conditions
 Steering operation, including power steering, is smooth, accurate, not excessively heavy or with excessive free
play or vibration. Does not pull to one side and self centres smoothly after cornering
 Speedometer, oil pressure warning lamp, coolant temperature gauge and tachometer register the correct
readings or operate correctly
 Switches and controls operate smoothly and positively, warning lamps operate correctly and the direction
indicator control self cancels when the steering is returned to the straight ahead position
 Heating and ventilation systems work correctly and effectively
 Brake operation and efficiency
Brake Testing
WARNING: When brake testing, avoid breathing the smoke or fumes from hot brakes, this may contain asbestos
dust which is hazardous to health, see Health and Safety Precautions.
Avoid brake testing on busy roads where it can cause inconvenience or danger to other road users.
CAUTION: Brake testing which includes heavy brake applications should not be carried out with new brake
pads/discs or linings/drums until the components have bedded-in. New brake friction components will not reach full
efficiency until the bedding-in process is complete.
Test the brakes at several speeds within the normal operating range using both light and heavy pedal pressure. Note
any tendency to snatch, pull or drag, and any undue delay in application or release.
Allow the vehicle to coast and note any tendency to pull to one side, or evidence that the brakes are binding.
After stopping the vehicle (not immediately after a period of heavy braking), carefully check the brake temperature. A
disc which feels hot, or appreciably hotter than the others, indicates that the brake is binding.
After completion of the test, check for:
 Oil, coolant, hydraulic, air and fuel leaks

 Abnormal temperature of any moving components or assemblies, e.g. wheel hubs, transmission, axle etc., which
might indicate over tightness or lack of lubrication
General Information - Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
WARNING: Always handle all solvents, sealers and adhesives with extreme care. Some contain chemicals or give
off fumes which can be dangerous to health. Always follow the manufacturers instructions. If in doubt about any
substance, particularly a solvent, DO NOT use it.
CAUTION: If in doubt about the suitability of any proprietary solvent or sealer for a particular application, contact
the manufacturer of the product for information regarding storage, handling and application.
The Solvents, Sealers and Adhesives subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards
associated with their use, and safety measures to be taken.
Adhesives and Sealers
Highly flammable, flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.
Generally should be stored in No Smoking' areas. Cleanliness and tidiness in use should be observed e.g. disposable
paper covering benches; should be dispensed from applicators where possible; containers, including secondary
containers, should be labelled appropriately.
Solvent - based Adhesives/Sealers - See Solvents
Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Water - based Adhesives/Sealers
Those based on polymer emulsions and rubber latexes may contain small amounts of volatile toxic and harmful
chemicals. Skin and eye contact should be avoided and adequate ventilation provided during use.
Hot Melt Adhesives
In the solid state, they are safe. In the molten state they may cause burns and health hazards may arise from the
inhalation of toxic fumes.
Use appropriate protective clothing and a thermostatically controlled heater with a thermal cut - out and adequate
extraction.
Resin - based Adhesives/Sealers e.g. Epoxide and Formaldehyde Resin - based
Mixing should be carried out in well ventilated areas, as harmful or toxic volatile chemicals may be released.
Skin contact with uncured resins and hardeners can result in irritation, dermatitis, and absorption of toxic or harmful
chemicals through the skin. Splashes can damage the eyes.
Provide adequate ventilation and avoid skin and eye contact.
Anaerobic, Cyanoacrylate (Super - glues) and other Acrylic Adhesives
Many are irritant, sensitizing or harmful to the skin and/or respiratory tract. Some are eye irritants.
Skin and eye contact should be avoided and the manufacturer's instructions followed.
Cyanoacrylate adhesives (super-glues) MUST NOT contact the skin or eyes. If skin or eye tissue is bonded, cover with a
clean moist pad and seek immediate medical attention. Do not attempt to pull tissue apart. Use in well ventilated areas
as vapors can cause irritation to the nose and eyes.
For two - pack systems see Resin - based and Isocyanate Adhesives/Sealers.
Isocyanate (Polyurethane) Adhesives/Sealers
See also Resin - based Adhesives
Individuals suffering from asthma or respiratory allergies should not work with or near these materials as sensitivity
reactions can occur.
Over exposure is irritating to the eyes and respiratory system. Excessive concentrations may produce effects on the
nervous system including drowsiness. In extreme cases, loss of consciousness may result. Long term exposure to vapor
concentrations may result in adverse health effects.
Prolonged contact with the skin may lead to skin irritation and, in some cases, dermatitis.
Splashes entering the eye will cause discomfort and possible damage.
Any spraying should preferably be carried out in exhaust ventilated booths removing vapors and spray droplets from
the breathing zone.
Wear appropriate gloves, eye and respiratory protection.

Published: 24-Jan-2012
General Information - Standard Workshop Practices
Protecting the Vehicle
Always install covers to protect the fenders before commencing work in the engine compartment. Always install the
interior protection kit, wear clean overalls and wash hands or wear gloves before working inside the vehicle. Avoid
spilling hydraulic fluid, antifreeze or battery acid on the paintwork. In the event of spillage, wash off with water
immediately. Use polythene sheets in the luggage compartment to protect carpets. Always use the recommended
service tool, or a satisfactory equivalent, where specified. Protect temporarily exposed screw threads by replacing nuts
or installing caps.
Vehicle in Workshop
When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:
 The parking brake is applied or the wheels are securely chocked to prevent the vehicle moving forwards or
backwards
 If the engine is to be run, there is adequate ventilation, or an extraction hose to remove exhaust fumes is
installed
 There is adequate room to jack up the vehicle and remove the wheels, if necessary
 Fender covers are always installed if any work is to be carried out in the engine compartment
 The battery is disconnected if working on the engine, underneath the vehicle, or if the vehicle is jacked up
CAUTION: When electric arc welding on a vehicle, always disconnect the generator wiring to prevent the
possibility of a surge of current causing damage to the internal components of the generator.
 If using welding equipment on the vehicle, ensure a suitable fire extinguisher is readily available.
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
WARNING: Do not install rear facing child seats in the front passenger seat.
The SRS contains components which are potentially hazardous to service personnel if not handled correctly. The
following guidelines and precautions are intended to alert personnel to potential sources of danger and emphasise the
importance of ensuring the integrity of the SRS components installed to the vehicle.
WARNING: The following precautions MUST be adhered to when working on the SRS system:
 The correct procedures must always be used when working on SRS components.
 Persons working on the SRS system must be fully trained and have been issued with the safety
guidelines.
 The airbag modules contain extremely flammable and hazardous compounds. Contact with water,
acids or heavy metals may produce harmful or explosive results. Do not dismantle, incinerate or
bring into contact with electricity before the unit has been deployed.
 Always replace a seat belt assembly that has withstood the strain of a severe vehicle impact or if the
webbing shows signs of fraying.
 Always disconnect the vehicle battery before carrying out any electric welding on a vehicle installed
with an SRS system.
CAUTION: Do not expose airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners to temperatures exceeding 85° C (185° F).
It should be noted that these precautions are not restricted to operations performed when servicing the SRS system.
The same care should be exercised when working on ancillary systems and components located in the vicinity of SRS
components; these include but are not limited to:
 Steering wheel airbag, rotary coupler.

 Passenger front airbag.
 Head airbag modules - front and rear.
 Seat belt pre-tensioners.
 SRS harnesses, link leads and connectors.
 Side (thorax) air bags.
Making the system safe
Before working on or in the vicinity of SRS components, make sure the system is rendered safe by performing the
following operations:
 Remove the ignition key.

 Disconnect battery, earth lead first.
 Wait 2 minutes for the SRS power circuit to discharge before commencing work.
NOTE: The SRS uses energy reserve capacitors to keep the system active in the event of electrical supply failure under
crash conditions. It is necessary to allow the capacitors sufficient time to discharge (2 minutes) in order to avoid the
risk of accidental deployment.
Installation
In order to make sure system integrity, it is essential that the SRS system is regularly checked and maintained so that
it is ready for effective operation in the event of a collision. Carefully inspect SRS components before installation. Do
not install a part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation.
WARNING: The integrity of the SRS systems is critical for safety reasons. Make sure the following precautions are
always adhered to:
 Do not install accessories or other objects to trim panels which cover ITS airbags.
 Never install used SRS components from another vehicle or attempt to repair an SRS component.
 When repairing an SRS system, only use genuine new parts.
 Never apply electrical power to an SRS component unless instructed to do so as part of an approved
test procedure.
 Special fixings are necessary for installing an airbag module – do not use other fixings and make
sure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.
 Always use new fixings when replacing an SRS component.
CAUTIONS:
Take care not to trap airbag modules when installing interior trim components.
Make sure SRS components are not contaminated by oil or grease.
NOTE: Following seat belt pre-tensioner deployment, the seat belts can still be used as conventional seat belts but will
need to be replaced as soon as possible to make sure full SRS protection.
NOTE: If the SRS components are to be replaced, the part number/bar code of the new unit must be recorded.
SRS component testing precautions
The SRS components are triggered using relatively low operating currents, always adhere to the following :
WARNING: Never use a multimeter or other general purpose equipment on SRS components. Use only T4 to
diagnose system faults.
WARNING: Do not use electrical test equipment on the SRS harness while it is connected to any of the SRS
components, it may cause accidental deployment and injury.
Handling and storage
Always observe the following precautions when handling SRS components:
 Never drop an SRS component. The airbag diagnostic control unit is a particularly shock sensitive device and
must be handled with extreme care. Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners could deploy if subjected to a
strong shock.
 Never wrap your arms around an airbag module. If a module has to be carried, hold it by the cover with the
cover uppermost and the base away from your body.
 Never transport airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in the passenger compartment of a vehicle. Always
use the luggage compartment of the vehicle for carrying airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioner units.
 Never attach anything to an airbag cover or any trim component covering an airbag module. Do not allow
anything to rest on top of an airbag module.
 Always keep components cool, dry and free from contamination.
 Never apply grease or cleaning solvents to seat belt pre-tensioner units, component failure could result.
 Always store an airbag module with the deployment side uppermost. If it is stored deployment side down,
accidental deployment will propel the airbag module with sufficient force to cause serious injury.
 Keep new airbag modules in their original packaging until just prior to installing. Place the old module in the
empty packaging for carriage.
WARNINGS:
When handling an inflatable tubular structure (ITS) airbag module, hold by the gas generator housing, DO NOT
hold by the airbag. Do not wrap the thumb around the gas generator while holding. Do not drape airbag over shoulder
or around neck. For seat buckle type pre-tensioners, hold by the piston tube, with the open end of the piston tube
pointing towards the ground and the buckle facing away from your body. Do not cover the end of the piston tube. DO
NOT hold buckle type pre-tensioners by the bracket assembly or cable. Never point the piston tube towards your body
or other people.
Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are classed as explosive devices. For overnight and longer term
storage, they must be stored in a secure steel cabinet which has been approved as suitable for the purpose and has
been registered with the local authority.
Store airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in a designated storage area. If there is no designated storage
area available, store in the locked luggage compartment of the vehicle and inform the workshop supervisor.
CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag module making it inoperative. If you
suspect the airbag module has been damaged, install a new module and refer to the deployment/disposal procedures
for disposal of the damaged module.
SRS harness and connectors
Always observe the following precautions with regards to SRS system electrical wiring:
 Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring.

 Never install electrical equipment such as a mobile telephone, two-way radio or in-car entertainment system in
such a way that it could generate electrical interference in the airbag harness. Seek specialist advice when
installing such equipment.
NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by a special yellow outer sleeve protecting the wires (black with yellow stripe
protective coverings are sometimes used).
WARNING: Always make sure SRS wiring is routed correctly. Be careful to avoid trapping or pinching the SRS
wiring.
WARNING: Do not leave the connectors hanging loose or allow SRS components to hang from their harnesses.
Look for possible chafing points.
Side impact crash sensor inspection
After any degree of side body damage, inspect the side impact crash sensors. Replace a crash sensor if there is any sign
of damage.
CAUTION: Take extra care when painting or carrying out bodywork repairs in the vicinity of the crash sensors.
Avoid direct exposure of the crash sensors or link harnesses to heat guns, welding or spraying equipment. Take care
not to damage sensor or harness when reinstalling components.
Rotary coupler
CAUTION: Always follow the procedure for installing and checking the rotary coupler as instructed in the SRS
repairs section. Comply with all safety and installation procedures to make sure the system functions correctly. Observe
the following precautions:
 Do not unlock and rotate the rotary coupler when it is removed from the vehicle.
 Do not turn the road wheels when the rotary coupler is removed from the vehicle.
 Always make sure the rotary coupler is removed and installed in its central position and with the front road
wheels in the straight ahead position - refer to SRS repair section for the correct removal and installation
procedure.
 If a new rotary coupler is being installed, make sure the locking tab holding the coupler's rotational position is
not broken; units with a broken locking tab must not be used.
Airbag location labels
WAITING AIRBAG LOCATION AND DESIGN LABELS - DUE MARCH - NEIL HARRISON 46404
Airbag and pre-tensioner deployment
WARNING: During deployment parts of the airbag module become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after
deployment before touching the airbag module.
Deployment procedures and precautions as detailed in this manual should be strictly adhered to. Only personnel who
have undergone the appropriate training should undertake deployment of airbag and pre-tensioner modules. The
following precautions must be complied with:
 Only use deployment equipment approved for the intended purpose.

 Deployment of airbag / pre-tensioner modules must be performed in a well ventilated area which has been
designated for the purpose.
 Make sure airbag / pre-tensioner modules are not damaged or ruptured before attempting to deploy.
 Where local legislation exists, notify the relevant authorities of intention to deploy airbag and pretensioner units.
 When deploying airbag pre-tensioner units, make sure that all personnel are at least 15 metres (45 feet) away
from the deployment zone.
 Make sure deployment tool is connected correctly, in compliance with the instructions detailed in the SRS section
of this manual. In particular, make sure deployment tool is NOT connected to battery supply before connecting
to airbag module connector.
 When deploying seat belt pre-tensioners, make sure pre-tensioner unit is secured correctly to the seat.
 When removing deployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units, wear protective clothing. Use gloves and seal
deployed units in a plastic bag.
 Following deployment of any component of the SRS system within the vehicle, all SRS components must be
replaced. DO NOT reuse or salvage any parts of the SRS system.
 Do not lean over an airbag module when connecting deployment equipment.
If a vehicle is to be scrapped, undeployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units must be manually deployed. In this
case airbags can be deployed in the vehicle. Before deployment, make sure the airbag module is secure within its
correct mounting position. Deployment of the driver's airbag in the vehicle may damage the steering wheel; if the
vehicle is not being scrapped, deploy the module outside of the vehicle.
SRS Component Replacement Policy
CAUTIONS:
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) will log a crash fault after every impact which is severe enough to cause
airbag deployment. It is possible to have three crashes/impacts logged after one event where, for example, a
front, side and rollover has occurred. After the third fault is logged, the SRS warning lamp will be
illuminated and the RCM must be installed. After any airbag deployment a new RCM must be installed.
The SRS side impact sensor must be replaced if there are any signs of physical damage or if the restraints control
module (RCM) is registering a fault.
The following information details the policy for replacement of SRS components as a result of a vehicle accident.
Impacts which do not deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
Check for structural damage in the area of the impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures, longitudinals
and bracketry.
Impacts which deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
The replacement and inspection policy is dependent on the type and severity of the crash condition. The following
guidelines are the minimum that should be exercised as a result of the deployment of specific SRS components.
Check for structural damage in the area of impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures,
longitudinals and bracketry.
Front Airbag Deployment - Driver and Passenger
CAUTION: If the front airbags are deployed, the following components must be replaced:
 Driver airbag module

 Passenger airbag module
 Fly leads (where applicable) connecting front airbag modules to SRS harness
 Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioner
 Rear seat belt pre-tensioners - if installed
 Driver's seat belt retractor - if installed
 Rotary coupler
 Any front impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
 Restraints control module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Additionally, the following items must be inspected for damage and replaced as necessary:
 Front passenger's seat belt retractor and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage point
 Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, body anchorage points and tongue latching function
 Fascia moulding adjacent to passenger airbag module
 Steering wheel
 Front seat frames and head restraints
 Steering column - if adjustment is lost or if there are signs of collapse
 Seat belt height adjusters
 Rear seat belts
Side Air Bags
CAUTION: If the side (thorax) air bags are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of
the vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
 Side (thorax) airbag

 Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
 Restraints Control Module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
 Front seat belts, retractors and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage points
 Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, tongue latching function, and body anchorage points
 Front seat frame and head restraints
 Door trim casing
 Rear seat belts
Head airbag modules
CAUTION: If the head airbag modules are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of the
vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
 Head airbag modules

 Link lead between airbag gas generator and restraints control module (RCM) harness
 Airbag retaining clips
 Internal trim finisher
 Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioners
 Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
 Headlining
 Component mounting brackets
 Adjacent trim components
Rear impacts
CAUTION: If the seat belt pre-tensioners are deployed during a rear impact, the following components must be
replaced:
 Seat belt pre-tensioners

 Front and rear seat belt retractors used during the impact

General Information - Symbols Glossary
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display.
Movement Symbols
Movement symbols provide detailed information to a required component movement. These component movements can be
rotational or 1-3 dimensional movements.

1 - Minor component movement clockwise/counterclockwise
2 - Major component movement clockwise/counterclockwise
3 - Component movement to the left/right/up/down
4 - Component movement towards/away
5 - 3 dimensional component movement
6 - 2 dimensional component movement
7 - 3 dimensional component rotation
- 3 dimensional component cycling
8
Turn Symbols
Turn symbols are used to provide further information on the direction or angle of component turns.

1 - Turn the component clockwise through 45°
2 - Turn the component counterclockwise through 45°
7 - Turn the component clockwise through 2 complete turns
8 - Turn the component counterclockwise through 2 complete turns
Steering Wheel Symbols
Steering wheel symbols are used to provide further information to a required steering wheel position or steering column lock
status.

1 - Steering wheel in straight ahead position
2 - Steering column lock locked
3 - Steering column lock unlocked
4 - Turn the steering wheel to the 90° left position
5 - Turn the steering wheel to the 90° right position
6 - Turn the steering wheel to the left-hand end position
7 - Turn the steering wheel to the right-hand end position
1 - 3, 4, 5-door body style
2 - Wagon body style
3 - Sports utility vehicle body style
4 - Coupe body style
5 - Convertible body style
6 - Van body style
7 - 3, 4, 5-door body style - Top View
8 - Wagon body style - Top View
9 - Underview
10 - Right-hand drive (RHD) vehicle
11 - Left-hand drive (LHD) vehicle
Gearshift lever and selector lever position symbols
Gearshift lever and selector lever position symbols are used to show the lever position that is required to be selected to carry
out a procedure step.

1 - Set the selector lever to the park (P) position
2 - Set the selector lever to the reverse ®) position
3 - Set the selector lever to the neutral (N) position
4 - Set the selector lever to the drive (D) position
5 - Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the park (D) position
6 - Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the manual (M) position
7 - Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the shift down (-) position
-
8 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the shift up (+) position
9 - Set the gearshift lever to the neutral (N) position
10 - Further gearshift lever positions that may appear in illustrations
Screwdriver symbols
The screwdriver symbols are used to show which screwdriver bit is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
1 - Screwdriver
-
2 Cross bladed screwdriver
3 - Flat bladed screwdriver
4 - Hexagonal screwdriver
5 - TORX screwdriver
Pliers symbols
The pliers symbols are used to show which pliers is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
-
1 Combination pliers
2 - Side cutter pliers
3 - Securing ring pliers - inner
4 - Securing ring pliers - outer
5 - Hose clamp pliers
6 - Locking pliers
7 - Long nose pliers
Drill symbols
The drill symbols are used to show which type and size of drill bit is recommended to carry out a procedure step.

1 - Drill bit with a specified diameter
2 - Hole saw with a specified diameter
3 - Stepped drill bit with a specified diameter
4 - Tap with a specified diameter
5 - Die with a specified diameter
6 - Scraper for circular holes
7 Scraper for straight edges
-
Cutting tool symbols
The cutting tool symbols are used to show which type of cutting tool is recommended to carry out a procedure step.

1 - Cutting knife
2 - Air body saw
3 - Scissors
4 - Grinder
5 - Jig saw
6 - Plasma cutter
7 - Sanding Paper
-
8 Drill through the shown number of body panel layers with a specified diameter
9 - Drill through the shown number of body panel layers with a suitable diameter
10 - Drill through 1 body panel layer with a specified diameter
11 - Drill through 1 body panel layer with a suitable diameter
12 - Wire brush
Apply Chemical or load symbols
The apply chemical or load symbols are used to show where to apply which type of chemical or load to carry out a procedure
step.
1 - Apply a bead from the specified tube
2 - Apply a bead from the specified cartridge
3 - Apply the specified chemical with a brush
4 - Apply the specified load to the specified component
5 - Apply a bead with a specific diameter from the specified tube
6 - Apply a bead with a specific diameter from the specified cartridge
7 - Apply the specified chemical with a roller
8 - Apply hot glue to the specified component
9 - Apply the specified amount of fluid from the fluid can
10 - Apply fluid from the fluid can
11 - Clean the specified component with the specified material
12 - Apply a broken bead from the specified tube
13 - Apply the specified chemical from a spray can
14 - Apply the specified lubricant to the specified component
15 - Apply spot welds to the specified component
16 - Apply a continuous weld to the specified component
17 - Handle the fluid using a syringe
18 - Extract the specified amount of fluid using a syringe
Measurement symbols
The measurement symbols are used to show where to measure which type of measurement to carry out a procedure step.

1 - Measure the current using a digital multimeter
2 - Measure the voltage using a digital multimeter
3 - Measure the resistance using a digital multimeter
4 - Measure the length/distance
5 - Check that the specified pressure is available using a suitable pressure gauge
6 - Measure the pressure at the specified port using a suitable pressure gauge
7 - Measure the time using a suitable stopwatch
-
8 Wait for the specified period of time
9 - The specified task requires the specified minimum temperature
10 - The specified task requires the specified maximum temperature not to be exceeded
11 - The specified task requires the specified temperature range
12 - The specified task requires the specified temperature
13 - Measure and check for the specified value using a dial indicator gauge
14 - Measure and check for the specified MAX value using a dial indicator gauge
15 - Measure and check for the specified MIN value using a dial indicator gauge
General equipment symbols
The general equipment symbols are used to show where to use which type of general equipment to carry out a procedure
step.

1 - Hot air gun
2 - Soldering iron
3 - Scraper
4 - Scriber
5 - Securing strap
6 - File with a specified size
7 - Center punch
-
8 Marker
9 - Metal inert gas (MIG) welding equipment
10 - Hose clamp
11 - Interior trim remover
12 - Vacuum cleaner
13 - Strap wrench
14 - Wedge
15 - Pin Punch
Material symbols
The material symbols are used to show where to use which type of material to carry out a procedure step.

1 - Remove/Install the specified blind rivet
2 - Apply tape to the specified component/area
3 - Remove/Install the specified cable tie
Miscellaneous symbols
These symbols provide further information that is required to carry out a procedure step.

1 - Set the ignition switch to the 0 position
2 - Set the ignition switch to the II position
3 - The procedure step requires the aid of the specified number of supporting technicians
4 - Self contained breathing apparatus
5 - General prohibition used in combination with another symbol
6 - Do not use power tools
7 - Visual check
-
8 Noise check
9 - Dispose the specified component
10 - Replaced by item 9 (Dispose the specified component)
11 - Set the engine speed to the specified value
12 - Fully apply the parking brake lever
13 - Fully release the parking brake lever
14 - Do not dispose of batteries into the waste bin
15 - Visual check using a mirror
16 - Area/component must be dry
Mandatory Protective equipment - Health and safety symbols
The protective equipment symbols advise to use a mandatory protective equipment to avoid or at least reduce possible
health and safety risks.

1 - Wear protective gloves
2 - Wear face guard
3 - Wear safety goggles
- Wear ear protectors
4
5 - Wear safety goggles and ear protectors
6 - Wear a respirator
Prohibition - Health and safety symbols and component damage
The prohibition symbols are used to prohibit the specified actions to avoid or at least reduce possible component damage and

1 - General prohibition symbol
2 - No naked flames
3 - No smoking
4 - No water
5 - Do not touch
6 - Do not switch
7 - No grinding
Warning symbols - Health and safety and component damage
The warning symbols are used to advise on hazardous conditions to avoid or at least reduce possible component damage and

1 - Hazardous voltage/Electrical shock/Electrocution
2 - Fire Hazard/Highly flammable
3 - Burn hazard/Hot surface
4 - Automatic start-up
5 - Toxic
6 - Explosive material
7 - Battery hazard
8 - Corrosive material
9 - Lifting hazard
10 - Hand crush/Force from above
11 - Cutting of fingers or hand
12 - Pressure hazard
Control Diagram symbols - Description and Operation procedures
These symbols provide further information on the type of connectivity, direction of flow or type of data bus of a system.

1 - Mid-speed Controller Area Network (CAN)
2 - High-speed Controller Area Network (CAN)
3 - Local Interconnect Network (LIN)
4 - Wires crossing not connected
General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C) System Health and Safety
Precautions
WARNINGS:
Only qualified technicians are allowed to work on air conditioning (A/C) systems.
Air conditioning (A/C) system components can become particularly hot or cold.
Make sure that the air conditioning (A/C) system is at ambient temperature before carrying out any repair.
When handling refrigerants, always wear protective goggles and gloves made of fluoroelastomer. Leather or fabric
gloves are not suitable.
SKIN CONTACT: If liquid refrigerant comes into contact with the skin, it produces severe frostbite. Immediately
flush affected areas with plenty of cold running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: If refrigerant comes into contact with the eyes, immediately flush the eyes with plenty of running
water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention.
INHALED: Toxic gases generated when refrigerant is heated are hazardous to health. The gases have an irritating
smell and can cause lung damage. The symptoms can continue for a long time after having been in contact with the
gases. The gases can cause lung damage even if the amount of gas in the air is too small to smell.
Refrigerant is flammable and explosive.
Make sure that refrigerant bottles are not exposed to temperatures greater than 45°C.
Make sure that the local regulations regarding work on air conditioning (A/C) systems are adhered to.
Make sure that refrigerant bottles are closed properly.
Gaseous refrigerant has a higher density than air. There is a danger of suffocation when working close to the
ground or in workshop pits.
Provide adequate ventilation when handling refrigerant.
Never release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
Only use special tools, equipment and lubricants that are approved for the type of refrigerant being used.
Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the correct servicing unit operating procedure.
CAUTIONS:
Do not mix refrigerant oils for different types of refrigerant.
Never mix different types of refrigerant or equipment intended for them.
Only use refrigerant in gas form when filling the system through the low-pressure connection.
Only use refrigerant in liquid form when filling the system through the high-pressure connection.
Refrigerant attacks certain plastics. Only use seals suitable for refrigerant.
If the air conditioning (A/C) compressor is damaged, the fixed orifice tube can become blocked with metal
particles.
Any sort of blockage in the refrigerant circuit will damage the air conditioning (A/C) compressor irreparably.
If the air conditioning (A/C) system has been opened for a period greater than 2 hours, a new receiver drier must
be installed and the evacuating time to be increased by a minimum of 2 hours.
NOTE: New air conditioning (A/C) compressors are delivered prefilled.
NOTE: Refrigerant oil in new air conditioning (A/C) compressors can contain Teflon, visible as white particles, which will
not harm the system.
General Information - Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety
Precautions
WARNINGS:
Batteries contain sulphuric acid, avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear safety goggles when working near
the battery to protect against possible splashing of the acid solution.
EYE CONTACT: If acid comes into contact with the eyes, flush immediately with plenty of running water for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: If acid comes into contact with the skin, flush immediately with plenty of running water for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: If acid is swallowed, rinse the mouth with plenty of water and then drink plenty of water or milk. Do
not induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases. Do not allow naked flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near
the battery.
When charging the battery shield your face and wear safety goggles. Provide adequate ventilation.
CAUTION: Boost charging with excessive current or voltage above 16 volts will damage the battery.
General Information - Body Repair Health and Safety and General
Precautions
General
Appropriate repair methods and carrying out repair and paint jobs correctly is particularly important to the operating
safety of vehicles and the safety of people.
WARNING: There is danger of injury through:
 High voltage when electrical welding.

 Do not perform welding work in a damp environment or on a wet substrate. Use suitable insulation underneath.
 Welding spatter and UV radiation.
 Wear protective clothing, gloves and welding mask or welding goggles.
 Fire, explosion and hot surfaces in the work area.
 Always have a suitable fire extinguisher available when using welding or heating equipment.
 Remove flammable substances from the danger area. Remove the fuel tank and fuel pipes and hoses.
 Welding and grinding near the battery presents the danger of explosion. Remove the battery before you start
working.
 During paint work there is an increased danger of fire or explosion. Prevent any sparks being created. Fire, open
light and smoking are forbidden.
 Always ventilate the workplace well and use an extraction system.
 Wear protective footwear made from anti-static material.
 Only use tools made of wood, brass or copper to clean stands and extraction ducts. Do not use tools made of
steel.
 Only fill or decant paint materials in a specially marked area.
 Inhalation and/or absorption through the skin of harmful substances.
 Welding fumes grinding dusts and solvent vapours can be extremely harmful to the health.
 Sealants, underbody protection and paint residues must not be burnt down with an unshielded flame, as this will
produce harmful substances.
 Always ventilate the workplace well and use an extraction system.
 Wear protective clothing.
 Pyrotechnic components.
 Disconnect the battery negative clamp and cover the battery terminal.
 Remove any airbag components.
 Noise
 Cutting, grinding and alignment work can cause a noise level over 85 dB (A).
 Always wear ear protection.
 High Forces.
 The various body areas are subject to very high forces during realignment work. Should any component
suddenly become detached during this process, there is a very great danger of injury.
 Pulling chains and pulling shackles must be secured with arrester cables.
As well as these general instructions on the dangers in body and paint shops, you must observe:
 All valid local national and international regulations governing Health and Safety at Work
 Safety instructions of material equipment and tool manufacturers
For additional information, refer to: (100-00 General Information)

Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives (Description and Operation),
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Health and Safety Precautions (Description and Operation),
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (Description and Operation).
Personal protection
Besides the body and limbs, several organs vital to life are in very particular danger. Because damage is mostly
irreparable, special attention and comprehensive protection is necessary.
Protective equipment
Always use the appropriate protective equipment:
 Protective helmet or welding mask

 Breathing protection
 Protective clothes gloves and safety boots
 Ear defenders
 Extraction systems
Always carry out an operational check on your protective equipment every time before you start working!
Breathing protection
WARNING: Vapor or spray mist containing isocyanates as a paint base or hardener can cause toxic respiratory
disease (conditions similar to asthma) leading to permanent damage, even when inhaled in the lowest concentrations
The instructions for use provided by the manufacturer must be observed when working with breathing protection
equipment.
During painting work and in the preparations for painting, gases, vapors, mists or dusts can appear in dangerous
concentrations.
Breathing protection devices which are independent of the local atmosphere are most suitable.
In these types of isolation systems, a compressed air hose carries natural air from the compressor line into the
protective mask. During supply, the air undergoes pressure reduction, water removal, fine filtration and usually
warming to natural breath temperature.

1 - Protective hood with fresh air supply
2 - Protective clothing
3 - Protective gloves
4 - Protective footwear
Only for short periods of work or minimal concentrations of hazardous substances breathing protection devices with a
combination filter is suitable as breathing protection equipment.

1 - Activated charcoal filter
2 - Coarse filter
Filter masks with wadding, sponge or colloid filters and also paper masks are all unsuitable for working with coating
materials because they do not stop solvent vapors.
Eye protection
Cutting grinding welding solvents and paint bear fundamental risks for your eyes.
Damage ranging from irritation of the cornea to incurable illnesses is possible.
Solvents and paint – even water based – could not only be absorbed via your skin but also via your eyes.
Therefore always wear the appropriate eye protection for your work.
Protective goggles must be inert toward splashes of solvent, and must have side protection. Best protection during
spray painting is offered by full mask respirators or helmet respirators with built-in visor.
Skin protection
Spray painters must wear suitable protective work clothing (flame-proof and anti-static). Also, when working with water
based materials, comprehensive skin protection must be worn, because these materials are very easily absorbed
through the skin.
Change your protective clothing at proper intervals. Clothes contaminated with coating materials can easily catch fire.
Do not choose clothes or underwear with a large content of easy melting synthetic fiber, because this material
considerably increases the danger and degree of injuries (melted plastic on the skin!).
For areas of the skin which are not covered by protective clothing suitable skin protection cleaning and care agents
must be used.
Ear protection
Cutting grinding compressors and extractor fans and ducts are the main sources of noise in body and paint shops.
Always wear suitable ear protection like ear plugs or ear defenders.
Protection of the vehicle
Protect affected areas from weld spatter and dust during all welding and grinding work on the vehicle. If metallic dust
stays on the vehicle for some time, there is the likelihood of film rust formation. Grinding produces tiny spots of
damage to the paint surface, which may cause corrosion. Also use suitable protective measures to protect the interior
when performing repair operations which relate to the inside of the vehicle.
For this reason, make sure to:
 Use carbon fiber blankets to protect the vehicle body and the interior.
 Use covering film to protect the vehicle body from grinding dust and metal dust.
 Use covering paper to protect the interior from grinding dust.
In addition, take into account:
 Remove fuel supply components as necessary.

 Protect working areas which are in danger of catching fire with a fireproof blanket.
 Keep heat away from all components of the air conditioning system.
 Remove all components in the space adjoining the repair area.
Electronic components
Increased use of comfort and safety electronics in modern vehicles requires additional attention to be paid during body
work.
Over voltages produced during welding can cause electronic systems to be damaged. In particular, the safety
instructions for performing welding work on vehicles with airbag systems must be adhered to.
WARNING: After disconnecting the power supply and before performing further work, a wait time of up to 15
minutes must be maintained, depending on the vehicle. Work on airbag systems may only be performed by persons
who have a relevant certificate of competence.
For additional information, refer to:

Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation),
Driver Lower Air Bag Module (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation),
Passenger Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation),
Side Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation),
Side Air Curtain Module (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation),
Restraints Control Module (RCM) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
Pay attention to the following points:
 Disconnect the battery negative clamp and cover the battery terminal.
 Disconnect the electrical connector at the airbag control module.
 If welding is to be performed directly near a control module, it must be disconnected or removed.
 Never connect the negative cable of the welder near an airbag or a control module.
 Connect the negative cable of the welder close to the location of the weld.
General Information - Brake System Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
EYE CONTACT: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes. Wash hands
thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid comes into contact with the eyes, flush the eyes with plenty of cold running
water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. If swallowed, drink plenty of water. Seek
immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
Only use new specified brake fluid from airtight containers.
CAUTION: If brake fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down with cold
water.
General Information - Engine Cooling System Health and Safety
Precautions
WARNINGS:
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas of
skin immediately.
Vapors may be given off from antifreeze when heated. Avoid breathing these vapors.
SKIN CONTACT: Antifreeze may be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
SWALLOWED: If antifreeze is swallowed, drink plenty of water, induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical
attention.
Antifreeze must not be used in any cooling or industrial water system that is connected or linked to general water
supplies.
General Information - Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health
and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Fuel may not give adequate warning before toxic or harmful effects arise.
Exposure to fuel can be harmful and can cause severe health damage or death.
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas of
skin immediately.
Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may ignite when working on fuel systems. Do not allow naked
flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near fuel related components.
Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.
Keep fuel containers tightly closed, out of direct sunlight and in a cool area. Keep away from heat sources, ignition
sources and oxidizing agents.
SKIN CONTACT: Excessive or prolonged skin contact with diesel fuel may cause serious skin disorders including
skin cancer.
SKIN CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the skin and may cause dermatitis due to defatting effect. Remove
contaminated clothing. Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention for any persistent skin
irritation or abnormality. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
EYE CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the eyes. Flush with plenty of running water, blinking as often as
possible. Do not force the eyelid open. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Fuel is moderately toxic and tends to foam on vomiting. If drawn into the lungs, inflammation may
develop. Do not induce vomiting. If spontaneous vomiting occurs place the victim in a forward position to reduce the
risk of fuel being drawn into the lungs. Give nothing by mouth. If breathing but unconscious, place in the recovery
position. If breathing has stopped, apply artificial respiration. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Fuel is toxic to the respiratory and other body systems. Exposure may result in various symptoms
including drowsiness, unconsciousness or severe health damage. Move a victim to fresh air. Keep a victim warm and at
rest. If unconscious, place in the recovery position. If not breathing, apply artificial respiration. Give cardiac massage if
necessary. Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that
absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
General Information - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Only qualified technicians are allowed to work on pyrotechnic components.
INHALED: Exposure to pyrotechnic residue may cause low blood pressure, severe headache, irritation of mucous
membranes, fainting, shortness of breath or rapid pulse. Move a victim to fresh air. Seek immediate medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: Exposure to unburned pyrotechnic residue may cause irritation, burning and etching of the eyes.
Flush immediately with plenty of cold running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: Exposure to burned pyrotechnic residue may cause irritation, burning and etching of the eyes.
Flush immediately with diluted boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Unburned pyrotechnic residue may be rapidly absorbed through the skin in toxic quantities. Wash
immediately with plenty of soap and water. Seek medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Burned pyrotechnic residue may be rapidly absorbed through the skin in toxic quantities. Wash
with plenty of water. Do not use soap. Seek medical attention.
SWALLOWED: Unburned pyrotechnic residue is extremely toxic. If conscious drink plenty of water then induce
vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention. If unconscious, or in convulsions do not attempt to induce vomiting or give
anything by mouth. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: Burned pyrotechnic residue is extremely toxic. Drink plenty of water and seek immediate medical
attention.
The deployment key must only be accessible to authorized personnel.
Make sure that the deployment key remains removed from the deployment equipment except during deployment.
If permenantly disabling or enabling the passenger air bag a new seat belt for vehicles without or with a
passenger air bag must be installed.
Undeployed pyrotechnic components must not be deployed in the vehicle.
Pyrotechnic components must be deployed following local regulations.
Check thoroughly that no loose objects can be spread during the deployment of pyrotechnic components.
Pyrotechnic components must be transported following local regulations.
Never carry out any electrical measurement on disconnected, undeployed pyrotechnic components.
Pyrotechnic components must not be disassembled.
Pyrotechnic components are not interchangeable between vehicles.
Always carry a live air bag module away from the body with the air bag or trim cover pointing upwards.
Live air bag modules must be placed in a suitable cage when removed from the vehicle. The air bag or trim cover
must be facing upwards.
Do not install a rearward facing child safety seat to the passenger seat with an activated passenger air bag.
CAUTIONS:
Pyrotechnic components must not be subjected to temperatures higher than 110°C.
Never install aftermarket accessories to the vehicle on or adjacent to the supplemental restraint system module.
General Information - Window Glass Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Cured polyurethane (PU) adhesive can degrade if subjected to high temperatures. Isocyanide compounds can be
released when grinding or welding in close proximity to cured PU adhesive.
SKIN CONTACT: Prolonged exposure to polyurethane (PU) adhesive may cause skin irritation. If PU adhesive
comes into contact with the skin, remove any contaminated clothing. Immediately wash the skin with soap and water.
Seek medical attention for any persistent skin irritation or abnormality.
EYE CONTACT: Polyurethane (PU) adhesive may cause severe irritation or damage. If PU adhesive comes into
contact with the eyes, immediately flush eyes with plenty of running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek immediate
medical attention.
SWALLOWED: If polyurethane (PU) adhesive is swallowed, flush the mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Provide rest, warmth and fresh air. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Persons having a respiratory allergy may have an allergic reaction when handling polyurethane (PU)
adhesive.
INHALED: Polyurethane (PU) adhesive can cause asthma like symptoms. Isocyanate vapor from primer or PU
adhesive can cause allergies in the respiratory tract.
INHALED: If polyurethane (PU) adhesive fumes are inhaled, move victim to fresh air. Provide oxygen if necessary.
If breathing stops, provide artificial respiration. Keep a victim warm and at rest. Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the direct glazing for bonded glass cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth changes to
avoid damage to the body and trim panels.
During the curing period of the PU adhesive, the door windows must be left open to avoid a build up of pressure
when the doors are opened and closed.
Identification Codes - Identification Codes
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The official vehicle identification number (VIN) for title and registration purposes is stamped on a metal plate and fastened to
the instrument panel. It is positioned close on the left-hand side of the vehicle and is visible from the outside.
The VIN is also located on the vehicle certification label.

1 — VIN plate
2 — Bar code label (USA)
3 — VIN label (Europe/Rest of World shown)
4 - VIN (Stamped)
www.JagDocs.com
Vehicle Identification Number (Typical)

1 — World manufacturer identifier
2 — Market, air bag specification
3 — Transmission and steering code
4 — Body code
5 — Emission control system
6 — Check digit
7 — Model year
8 — Assembly plant, model line
9 — Production sequence number
World Manufacturer Identifier
VIN Positions 1
Codes Manufacturer Make Type
SAJ Jaguar Land Rover Limited Jaguar Passenger car
Market, Air Bag Specification
VIN position 2
VIN code Description
A Rest of World with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
K Japan with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
W USA with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
X Canada with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Y Mexico with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Transmission, Steering Code
VIN Position 3
VIN Code Description
A Automatic LHS
C Automatic RHS
Body Code
VIN Position 4
43 Coupe (Rest of World)
44 Convertible (Rest of World)
45 Coupe Portfolio (Rest of World)
46 Convertible Portfolio (Rest of World)
47 XKRS Coupe (Rest of World)
48 XKRS Convertible (Rest of World)
4D Coupe (USA and Canada)
4E Convertible (USA and Canada)
4F Coupe Portfolio (USA and Canada)
4G Convertible Portfolio (USA and Canada)
4H XKRS Coupe (USA and Canada)
4J XKRS Convertible (USA and Canada)
Body Code - All except USA and Canada - XKRS 2012 model year
VIN Position 4
43 2 Door Coupe
44 2 Door Convertible
45 2 Door Coupe Portfolio / XKR Speed pack
46 2 Door Convertible Portfolio / XKR Speed pack
47 2 Door Coupe XKR 75 LE / XKRS
48 2 Door Convertible XKR 75 LE / XKRS
Body Code USA and Canada - XKRS 2012 model year
VIN Position 4
4D 2 Door Coupe
4E 2 Door Convertible
4F 2 Door Coupe Portfolio / XKR Speed pack
4G 2 Door Convertible Portfolio / XKR Speed pack
4H 2 Door Coupe XKR 75 LE / XKRS
4J 2 Door Convertible XKR 75 LE / XKRS
Engine Emission System - to the end of 11 model year
VIN Position 5
NOTE: *1 EU. Includes the following markets; Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Rep, Denmark, Eire, Estonia, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, Holland, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania,
Slovenia, Slovakia, Spain (incl. Canary Islands), Sweden and UK.
NOTE: *2 East Europe. Includes the following markets; Croatia and Serbia.
NOTE: *3 Russia. Includes the following markets; Belarus, Kazakhstan, Ukraine and Uzbekistan.
VIN
Code Engine Market
F 5.0L Algeria, Dominican Rep, Guatemala, Indonesia, Malaysia, *4 Middle East, Panama, Philippines,
G 5.0L Singapore, South Africa, Thailand and Tunisia
Supercharged
P 5.0L Argentina, Chile and China
R 5.0L
Supercharged
P 5.0L *2 East Europe, *1 EU, Israel, Morocco, Norway, *3 Russia, Switzerland and Turkey and Taiwan
R 5.0L
Supercharged
X 5.0L Brazil
Y 5.0L
Supercharged
F 5.0L Egypt and Syria
G 5.0L
Supercharged
P 5.0L Japan
R 5.0L
Supercharged
B 5.0L USA
C 5.0L
Supercharged
B 5.0L Canada
C 5.0L
Supercharged
B 5.0L Mexico
C 5.0L
Supercharged
P 5.0L Australia, Cyprus, Hong Kong, Malta, New Zealand and UK (and Eire)
R 5.0L
Supercharged
Engine Emission System - XKRS 2012 model year
VIN Position 5
NOTE: *1 EU. Includes the following markets; Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Chile(diesel only), Croatia, Cyprus, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, India (gasoline only), Ireland, Italy, Latvia,
Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Moldova, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, San
Marino, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, UK; (Canary Islands, Azores, Madeira, Martinique,
Guadeloupe, Reunion are included as remote parts of sovereign states).
NOTE: *2 With DPF, Australia, Belarus, Gibraltar, Hong Kong, Iceland, Israel, Korea (diesel only), Macau, Morocco, New
Zealand, Palestine, Singapore (diesel only), South Africa (Diesel), Taiwan, Tunisia
NOTE: *3 With-out DPF, Argentina, Bermuda, Chile (gasoline only), China, Guadeloupe, India (diesel only), Kazakhstan,
Mexico (diesel only), Morocco, Ukraine, Russia.
NOTE: *4 Rest Of World (ROW), includes the following markets; Barbados, Benin, Botswana, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Brunei,
Cameroon, Central African Republic, Chad, Congo, Costa Rica, Democratic Republic of Congo, Dominican Republic, Equatorial
Guinea, Ethiopia, Falklands, Fiji, Gabon, Gambia, Ghana, Guatemala, Guinea, Guinea Bissau, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Ivory
Coast, Lesotho, Liberia, Madagascar, Malawi, Mali, Mozambique, Mauritania, Namibia, New Caledonia, Niger, Panama, Papua
New Guinea, Rwanda, Sierra Leone, Singapore (gasoline only),Somalia, Swaziland, Tahiti, Tanzania, Togo, Trinidad &
Tobago, Uganda, Western Sahara, Zambia, Zimbabwe.
NOTE: *5 Emergent World, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Albania, Angola, Bolivia, Colombia, Ecuador,
Georgia, Indonesia, Jamaica, Kenya, Kyrgystan, Macedonia, Malaysia, Mauritius, Nigeria, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines, South
Africa (gasoline only), Sri Lanka, Turkmenistan, Uruguay, Uzbekhistan, Venezuela, Vietnam.
NOTE: *6 Hot Climate, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Algeria, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Bangladesh for gasoline,
Bhutan, Dubai, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon (gasoline only), Libya, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan,
Syria (gasoline only), Thailand, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Yemen.
A 5.0L Supercharged USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea

B 5.0L USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea
C 5.0L Supercharged USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea
D 5.0L Supercharged Brazil
E 5.0L Supercharged *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
F 5.0L *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
G 5.0L Supercharged *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
P 5.0L *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
R 5.0L Supercharged *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
S 5.0L Supercharged *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
X 5.0L Brazil
Y 5.0L Supercharged Brazil
Check Digit
VIN Position 6
0 - 9 or X Calculated in accordance with American standard CFR part 565
Model Year
VIN Position 7
A 2010 Model year
B 2011 Model year
C 2012 Model year
Assembly Plant and Model Line
VIN Position 8
L Castle Bromwich 5.0L Normally aspirated
M Castle Bromwich 5.0L Supercharged
Production Sequence Number
VIN Position 9
Sequence Number
B00001 - B99999
VIN Label
VIN Label (Europe and Rest of world)

1 — Whole vehicle type approval (WVTA)
2 — VIN
3 — Gross vehicle weight
4 — Gross train weight
5 — Maximum permitted front axle loading
6 — Maximum permitted rear axle loading
7 — Date of manufacture
8 — Interior trim code
9 — Paint code
VIN Label (North America)

5 — VIN
6 — Type
8 — Paint code
VIN Label (Saudi Arabia and Gulf States)

1 — Date of manufacturer
2 — VIN
4 — Paint code
VIN Label (Canada)
Part Number
Part Number
Item Description
5 — VIN
6 — Paint code
8 — Type
VIN Label (China)

1 — Trade mark
2 — Vehicle type
3 — Gross vehicle weight/Gross train weight
5 — Occupant number
6 — Engine specification
7 — VIN
VIN Label (Argentina)
1 — VIN
2 — Trade mark
4 — Gross train weight
9 — Paint code
Automatic Transmission Number
The serial number of the transmission unit is displayed on a metal label or bar code (if equipped) attached to the
transmission casing.
Engine Number - 5.0L and 5.0L Supercharged
The serial number is stamped on an engine web on the left-hand side of the cylinder block behind the engine mounting. The
emission code is also located here, on the transmission flange.
Jacking and Lifting - Jacking
Safety Precautions
WARNING: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to raise the vehicle for any other purpose. Refer to the Driver
Handbook when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
The following safety precautions must be observed when raising the vehicle to carry out service operations:
 Never rely on a jack alone to support a vehicle. Always use suitable vehicle stands to provide rigid support.
 When working beneath a vehicle, whenever possible use a vehicle hoist instead of a jack and vehicle stands.
 Make sure that the vehicle is standing on firm, level ground before using a jack.
 Do not rely on the parking brake alone; chock the wheels and put the automatic transmission into Park if
possible.
 Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate capacity for the load being lifted and is in correct working
order.
Jacking and Lifting - Lifting
Lifting Points—Two-Post Lift
CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the hoist adapters to contact the steering linkage, suspension arms, stabilizer bar, rear subframe stabilizer
brackets or to compress the lower suspension arm stabilizer bar insulator. Damage to the suspension, exhaust and steering
linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters of two-post lift prior to lifting the
vehicle.
Never use the rear axle as a lift point. Damage to the rear axle seals and bushes may occur.
When using a two-post lift, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid body damage.
Lifting Points—Floor Jack and Axle Stands
CAUTIONS:
When using a floor jack, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid body damage.
When using axle stands, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid damage to the body.
Item Description
A Jacking point
B Axle stand positioning point
Vehicle Recovery
NOTE: Prior to vehicle recovery, make sure the vehicle keys are available and the security system is disarmed.
Vehicle recovery methods are:
 By transporter or trailer
 Emergency towing
Transporter or Trailer Recovery
When the vehicle is being recovered by transporter or trailer:
 The parking brake must be applied and the wheels chocked

 The gear selector lever must be in Neutral. Do not select Park on automatic transmission vehicles, as the park lock
mechanism may be damaged by the forward and backward rocking motion of the vehicle
 The vehicle must be securely tied down to the transporter or trailer
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If the engine is not running, the steering will become heavy and the force necessary to effectively apply the
brakes will be greatly increased.
CAUTION: A vehicle with a defective transmission must be recovered by transporter or trailer.

When the vehicle is being towed on its own wheels:
 Local regulations for the towing of vehicles must be adhered to. In some countries the registration number of the
towing vehicle and an 'On Tow' sign or warning triangle must be displayed at the rear of the towed vehicle
 The gear selector lever must be in Neutral
 The ignition switch must be in position II to release the steering lock and to allow for the operation of the direction
indicators, horn and stop lamps
 A distance of 0,8 km (0.5 mile) must not be exceeded
 A speed of 48 km/h (30 mph) must not be exceeded
 The tow rope must be attached to the front towing eye
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Noise, Vibration and Harshness
(NVH)
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) is becoming more important as vehicles become more sophisticated and
passenger comfort levels increase. This section is designed to aid in the diagnosis, testing and repair of NVH concerns.
 Noise is defined as sounds not associated with the operation of passenger compartment equipment that
interface with customer satisfaction.
 Vibration is defined as impulses felt by the customer that are not caused by road surface changes.
 Harshness is a ride quality issue where the customer feels that the vehicle response to the road surface is
sharply transmitted to the customer.
Diagnostic Theory
Diagnosis is more than just following a series of interrelated steps in order to find the solution to the specific condition.
It is a way of looking at systems that are not functioning the way they should and finding out why. Also it is knowing
how the system should work and whether it is working correctly.
There are basic rules for diagnosis. If these rules are followed, the cause of the condition is usually found the first time
through the system.
Know the System
 Know how the parts go together.

 Know how the system operates as well as its limits and what happens when the system goes wrong.
 Sometimes this means checking the system against one that is known to be working correctly.
Know the History of the System
A clue in any one of these areas may save time:
 How old or new is the system?

 What kind of treatment has it had?
 Has it been repaired in the past in such a manner that might relate to the present condition?
 What is the repair history?
Know the History of the Condition
 Did it start suddenly or appear gradually?

 Was it related to some other occurrence such as a collision or previous part renewal?
 Know how the condition made itself known; it may be an important clue to the cause.
Know the Probability of Certain Conditions Developing
 Look for the simple rather than the complex.

 For example:
 Electrical conditions usually occur at connections rather than components.
 An engine no-start is more likely to be caused by a loose wire or small adjustment rather than a sheared-off
camshaft.
 Know the difference between impossible and improbable. Certain failures in a system can be improbable but still
happen.
 New parts are just that, new. It does not mean they are always good functioning parts.
Do Not Cure the Symptom and Leave the Cause
Lowering the pressure in a front tire may correct the condition of a vehicle leaning to one side, but it does not correct
the original condition.
Be Positive the Cause is Found
 Double check the findings.

 What caused a worn component?
 A loose transmission or engine mount could indicate that other mounts are also loose.
Diagnostic Charts
Charts are a simple way of expressing the relationship between basic logic and a physical system of components. They
help discover the cause of a condition in the least time. Diagnostic charts combine many areas of diagnosis into one
visual display:
 probability of certain things occurring in a system

 speed of checking certain components or functions before others
 simplicity of carrying out certain tests before others
 elimination of checking huge portions of a system by carrying out simple tests
 certainty of narrowing down the search to a small portion before carrying out in-depth testing
The fastest way to find a condition is to work with the tools that are available. This means working with proven
diagnostic charts and the correct special equipment for the system.
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Noise, Vibration and Harshness
(NVH)
Principle of Operation
For a detailed description of Noise, Vibration and Harshness issues, refer to the Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer's concerns by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition.
2. Visually inspect the vehicle to determine any obvious cause(s) of the concern(s).
3. If the inspection reveals obvious causes that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s) and refer to the Symptom Chart.
How To Use This Diagnostic Procedure Section
 Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) concerns have become more important as vehicles have become more
sensitive to these vibrations. This section is designed as an aid to identifying these situations
 The section provides diagnostic procedures based on symptoms. If the condition occurs at high speed, for
instance, the most likely place to start is under High Speed Shake
 The road test procedure will tell how to sort the conditions into categories and how to tell a vibration from a
shake
 A series of Road Test Quick Checks is provided to make sure that a cause is either pinpointed or eliminated
 Name the condition, proceed to the appropriate section and locate the correct diagnosis. When the condition is
identified, the job is partly done
 Follow the diagnostic procedure as outlined
 Quick Checks are described within the step, while more involved tests and adjustments are outlined in General
Procedures
 Always follow each step exactly and make notes to recall important findings later
Customer Interview
The road test and customer interview (if available) provide information that will help identify the concerns and will
provide direction to the correct starting point for diagnosis.
Identify the Condition
NVH problems usually occur in a number of areas:
 tires
 engine accessories
 suspension
 driveline
 air leakage (wind noise)
 squeaks and rattles
 heating ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC)
 electrical (e.g. motor noise)
 transmission
 engine
It is important, therefore, that an NVH concern be isolated into its specific area(s) as soon as possible. The easiest and
quickest way to do this is to carry out the Road Test as outlined.
Noise Diagnostic Procedure
Non-Axle Noise
The five most important sources of non-axle noise are exhaust, tires, roof racks, trim and mouldings, and transmission.
Therefore, make sure that none of the following conditions are the cause of the noise before proceeding with a driveline
tear down and diagnosis.
 Under certain conditions, the pitch of the exhaust may sound very much like gear noise. At other times, it can
be mistaken for a wheel bearing rumble
 Tires, especially snow tires, can have a high pitched tread whine or roar, similar to gear noise. Radial tires, to
some degree, have this characteristic. Also, any non-standard tire with an unusual tread construction may emit
a roar or whine type noise
 Trim and mouldings can also cause whistling or a whining noise
 Clunk may be a metallic noise heard when the automatic transmission is engaged in reverse or drive, or it may
occur when the throttle is applied or released. It is caused by backlash somewhere in the driveline
 Bearing rumble sounds like marbles being tumbled. This condition is usually caused by a damaged wheel bearing
Noise Conditions
 Gear noise is typically a howling or whining due to gear damage or incorrect bearing preload. It can occur at
various speeds and driving conditions, or it can be continuous
 Chuckle is a particular rattling noise that sounds like a stick against the spokes of a spinning bicycle wheel. It
occurs while decelerating from approximately 64 km/h (40 miles/h) and can usually be heard all the way to a
stop. The frequency varies with vehicle speed
 Knock is very similar to chuckle, though it may be louder and occurs on acceleration or deceleration. The tear
down will disclose what has to be corrected
Check and rule out tires, exhaust and trim items before disassembling the transmission to diagnose and correct gear
noise.
The noises described under Road Test usually have specific causes that can be diagnosed by observation as the unit is
disassembled. The initial clues are the type of noise heard on the road test and the driving conditions.
Vibration Conditions
NOTE: New Constant Velocity (CV) joints should not be installed unless disassembly and inspection revealed unusual
wear.
Clicking, popping or grinding noises may be caused by the following:
 Cut or damaged CV joint boots resulting in inadequate or contaminated lubricant in the outboard or inboard CV
joint bearing housings
 Loose CV joint boot clamps
 Another component contacting the rear drive half shaft
 Worn, damaged or incorrectly installed wheel bearing, suspension or brake component
Vibration at highway speeds may be caused by the following:
 Out-of-balance front or rear wheels

 Out-of-round tires
 Driveline imbalance
 Driveline run-out (alignment)
NOTE: Rear drive half shafts are not balanced and are not likely to contribute to rotational vibration disturbance.
Shudder or vibration during acceleration (including from rest) may be caused by the following:
 Driveline alignment
 Excessively worn or damaged outboard or inboard CV joint bearing housing
 Excessively high CV joint operating angles caused by incorrect ride height. Check ride height, verify correct
spring rate and check items under Inoperative Conditions
 Excessively worn driveshaft components
Leakage Conditions
1. Inspect the CV joint boots for evidence of cracks, tears or splits.
2. Inspect the underbody for any indication of grease splatter in the vicinity of the rear drive half shaft, outboard
and inboard CV joint boot locations, which is an indication of CV joint boot or CV joint boot clamp damage.
3. Inspect the inboard CV joint bearing housing seal for leakage.

Inoperative Conditions
If a CV joint or rear drive half shaft pull-out occurs, check the following:
 suspension components for correct location, damage or wear

 bushings for wear
 subframe for damage
 bent or worn components
 Stabilizer bar link
 Left-hand rear suspension lower arm and bushing
 Right-hand rear suspension lower arm and bushing
 Rear wheel hub and rear drive half shaft
Road Test
A gear-driven unit will produce a certain amount of noise. Some noise is acceptable and may be audible at certain
speeds or under various driving conditions as on a newly paved blacktop road. The slight noise is in no way detrimental
and must be considered normal.
The road test and customer interview (if available) provide information needed to identify the condition and give
direction to the correct starting point for diagnosis.
1. Make notes throughout the diagnosis routine. Make sure to write down even the smallest piece of information,
because it may turn out to be the most important.
2. Do not touch anything until a road test and a thorough visual inspection of the vehicle have been carried out.
Leave the tire pressures and vehicle load just where they were when the condition was first observed. Adjusting
tire pressures, vehicle load or making other adjustments may reduce the conditions intensity to a point where it
cannot be identified clearly. It may also inject something new into the system, preventing correct diagnosis.
3. Make a visual inspection as part of the preliminary diagnosis routine, writing down anything that does not look
right. Note tire pressures, but do not adjust them yet. Note leaking fluids, loose nuts and bolts, or bright spots
where components may be rubbing against each other. Check the luggage compartment for unusual loads.
4. Road test the vehicle and define the condition by reproducing it several times during the road test.
5. Carry out the Road Test Quick Checks as soon as the condition is reproduced. This will identify the correct
diagnostic procedure. Carry out the Road Test Quick Checks more than once to verify they are providing a valid
result. Remember, the Road Test Quick Checks may not tell where the concern is, but they will tell where it is
not.
Road Test Quick Checks
1. 24-80 km/h (15-50 miles/h): With light acceleration, a moaning noise is heard and possibly a vibration is felt in
the front floor pan. It is usually worse at a particular engine speed and at a particular throttle setting during
acceleration at that speed. It may also produce a moaning sound, depending on what component is causing it.
Refer to Tip-In Moan in the Symptom Chart.
2. Acceleration/deceleration: With slow acceleration and deceleration, a shake is sometimes noticed in the steering
wheel/column, seats, front floor pan, front door trim panel or front end sheet metal. It is a low frequency
vibration (around 9-15 cycles per second). It may or may not be increased by applying brakes lightly. Refer to
Idle Boom/Shake/Vibration in the Symptom Chart.
3. High speed: A vibration is felt in the front floor pan or seats with no visible shake, but with an accompanying
sound or rumble, buzz, hum, drone or booming noise. Coast with the clutch pedal depressed or shift control
selector lever in neutral and engine idling. If vibration is still evident, it may be related to wheels, tires, front
brake discs, wheel hubs or front wheel bearings. Refer to High Speed Shake in the Symptom Chart.
4. Engine rpm sensitive: A vibration is felt whenever the engine reaches a particular rpm. It will disappear in
neutral coasts. The vibration can be duplicated by operating the engine at the problem rpm while the vehicle is
stationary. It can be caused by any component, from the accessory drive belt to the torque converter which
turns at engine speed when the vehicle is stopped. Refer to High Speed Shake in the Symptom Chart.
5. Noise/vibration while turning: Clicking, popping, or grinding noises may be due to a worn, damaged, or
incorrectly installed front wheel bearing, rear drive half shaft or CV joint.
6. Noise/vibration that is road speed relative: This noise/vibration can be diagnosed independent of engine speed
or gear selected (engine speed varies but torque and road speed remain constant). The cause may be a rear
drive axle/differential whine.
Road Conditions
An experienced technician will always establish a route that will be used for all NVH diagnosis road tests. The road
selected should be reasonably smooth, level and free of undulations (unless a particular condition needs to be
identified). A smooth asphalt road that allows driving over a range of speeds is best. Gravel or bumpy roads are
unsuitable because of the additional road noise produced. Once the route is established and consistently used, the road
noise variable is eliminated from the test results.
NOTE: Some concerns may be apparent only on smooth asphalt roads.
If a customer complains of a noise or vibration on a particular road and only on a particular road, the source of the
concern may be the road surface. If possible, try to test the vehicle on the same type of road.
Vehicle Preparation
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the vehicle before carrying out the road test. Note anything which is unusual.
Do not repair or adjust any condition until the road test is carried out, unless the vehicle is inoperative or the condition
could pose a hazard to the technician.
After verifying the condition has been corrected, make sure all components removed have been installed.
Lift Test
After a road test, it is sometimes useful to do a similar test on a lift.
When carrying out the high-speed shake diagnosis or engine accessory vibration diagnosis on a lift, observe the
following precautions:
WARNING: If only one drive wheel is allowed to rotate, speed must be limited to 55 km/h (35 miles/h) indicated
on the speedometer since actual wheel speed will be twice that indicated on the speedometer. Speed exceeding 55
km/h (35 miles/h) or allowing the drive wheel to hang unsupported could result in tire disintegration, differential failure,
constant velocity joint and drive half shaft failure, which could cause serious personal injury and extensive vehicle
damage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The suspension should not be allowed to hang free. When the CV joint is run at a very high angle, extra
vibration as well as damage to the seals and joints can occur.
The rear suspension lower arm should be supported as far outboard as possible. To bring the vehicle to its correct ride
height, the full weight of the vehicle should be supported in the rear by floor jacks.
REFER to: Jacking (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation) /
Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
1. Raise and support the vehicle.

REFER to: Jacking (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation) /
Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
2. Explore the speed range of interest using the Road Test Quick Checks as previously described.
3. Carry out a coast down in neutral. If the vehicle is free of vibration when operating at a steady indicated speed
and behaves very differently in drive and coast, a transmission concern is likely.
Note, however, that a test on the lift may produce different vibrations and noises than a road test because of the effect
of the lift. It is not unusual to find vibrations on the lift that were not found in the road test. If the condition found on
the road can be duplicated on the lift, carrying out experiments on the lift may save a great deal of time.
Exhaust Neutralization Procedure
1. Raise vehicle on lift and slacken all exhaust fixings.

2. With all fixings loose, neutralize the exhaust system.
3. Tighten all fixings to correct torque, starting at the rear-most point working towards the front of the vehicle.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Sources Action

High-speed shake * Wheel end vibration * GO to Pinpoint Test A.
* Engine/transmission
* Driveline
Tip-in moan * Air cleaner * GO to Pinpoint Test B.
* Power steering
* Powertrain
* Engine mounts
* Exhaust system
Idle boom/shake/vibration, or shudder * Cable(s)/hoses(s) * GO to Pinpoint Test C.
* Intake air distribution and filtering system
* Engine mounts
* Exhaust system
* Belt/pulleys
Wheel end vibration analysis * Suspension/rear drive halfshaft and CV joints * GO to Pinpoint Test D.
* Tires/wheels
* Wheel bearings
* CV joint boots
Non-axle noise * Trim/mouldings * GO to Pinpoint Test E.
* A/C system
* Accessories
Pinpoint Tests
NOTE: These Pinpoint Tests are designed to take the technician through a step-by-step diagnosis procedure to
determine the cause of a condition. It may not always be necessary to follow the chart to its conclusion. Carry out only
the Pinpoint Test steps necessary to correct the condition. Then check operation of the system to make sure the
condition is corrected.
After verifying that the condition has been corrected, make sure all components removed have been installed.
PINPOINT TEST A : HIGH-SPEED SHAKE

TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
CONDITIONS
A1: NEUTRAL COAST
1 Carry out the neutral coast test.
Does the vibration disappear during the neutral coast test?
Yes
CHECK and INSTALL new engine/transmission mounts as necessary. REPEAT Road Test as
outlined.
No
GO to D1.
PINPOINT TEST B : TIP-IN MOAN

CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK THE AIR CLEANER
1 Check the air cleaner.
 Check the air cleaner, inlet tube, outlet tube, resonators and all other components associated
with the air induction system for correct installation and tightness of all connections.
Are the components OK?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
CORRECT the condition. REPEAT the Road Test as outlined.
B2: CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
1 Carry out the exhaust system neutralizing procedure in this section.
Is the exhaust system OK?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR as necessary. RESTORE vehicle. REPEAT the Road Test as outlined.
B3: CHECK THE POWER STEERING
1 Remove the auxiliary drive belt and test for tip-in moan.
Is the tip-in moan OK?
Yes
REPAIR the power steering as necessary. For additional information, refer to
REFER to: Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Diagnosis and Testing).
No
outlined.
PINPOINT TEST C : IDLE BOOM/SHAKE/VIBRATION/SHUDDER

CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK CABLE/HOSES
1 Check the engine compartment for any component that may be grounding between the engine
and body or chassis. Example: air conditioning (A/C) hoses.
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: CHECK INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION AND FILTERING SYSTEM
1 Check the intake air distribution and filtering system for loose/damaged components (primarily
upstream of the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor).
Yes
GO to C3.
No
CORRECT the condition. REPEAT the road test as outlined.
C3: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL DAMPER
1 Remove the driver air bag module and visually inspect the steering wheel damper for correct
installation or any touch condition.
Is the damper OK?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
C4: CHECK THE COOLING RADIATOR
1 Check the engine cooling radiator mountings and bushings for security and condition. Check the
radiator installation for any component that may have a touch condition.
Are the installation and bushings OK?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
C5: CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
1 Carry out the exhaust system neutralizing procedure in this section.
Is the exhaust system OK?
Yes
outlined.
No
REPAIR as necessary. REPEAT Road Test.
PINPOINT TEST D : WHEEL END VIBRATION ANALYSIS

CONDITIONS
D1: INSPECT THE TIRES
1 Inspect the tires.
 Raise and support the vehicle.

REFER to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
 Inspect the tires for:
 Correct tire pressures

 Correct tire size
 Tire/wheel compatibility
 Wear or damage
 Tire beads correctly seated

Are the tires OK?
Yes
GO to D2.
No
REPAIR as necessary. REPEAT the Road Test as outlined.
D2: INSPECT WHEEL BEARINGS
1 Inspect the wheel bearings.
Are the wheel bearings OK?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
D3: INSPECT THE CONSTANT VELOCITY (CV) JOINT BOOTS
1 Inspect the CV joint boots.
 Inspect for evidence of cracks, tears, splits or splattered grease

Are the CV joint boots OK?
Yes
GO to D4.
No
D4: INSPECT WHEEL AND TIRE RUNOUT
1 Inspect the wheel and tire runout.
Is the wheel and tire runout OK?
Yes
Balance the wheels and tires. Refer to the wheel balance equipment manufacturers
instructions.
No
REPAIR as necessary.
REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and Testing).
REPEAT the Road Test as outlined.
PINPOINT TEST E : NON-AXLE NOISE

CONDITIONS
E1: INSPECT VEHICLE TRIM
1 Check the grille and trim mouldings to see if they are the source of the noise.
Are the vehicle trim components causing the noise?
Yes
INSTALL new trim or REPAIR as necessary.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK THE A/C SYSTEM FOR NOISE
1 Check the A/C system components for noise by turning the A/C system on and off.
Is the A/C system causing the noise?
Yes
Diagnose the A/C system.
REFER to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
Diagnosis and Testing).
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK NON-FACTORY ACCESSORIES
1 Inspect any accessories for being the source of the noise. Example: grounding body-to-frame,
antennas, visors, bug deflectors and fog lights.
Are the accessories the cause of the noise?
Yes
ADJUST, REPAIR or INSTALL new accessories or fasteners as required.
No
Verify the customer concern
Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage - New Vehicle Storage
INTRODUCTION
Standards
Vehicles may require storage for varying periods of time before the customer takes delivery. It is essential that a new Jaguar
vehicle is stored correctly, in order to ensure total customer satisfaction after the car is removed from storage and prepared
for sale.
This document establishes the MINIMUM STANDARDS required of franchise holders and appointed vehicle storage companies
by Jaguar Land Rover Limited for the storage of new vehicles, and may only be deviated from with the Company’s
agreement. Any concerns should be discussed with your Franchise Regional Manager.
This information should be used in conjunction with the relevant Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) information.
AREAS OF RESPONSIBILITY
Preventative Measures
Adequate preventative measures must be taken to ensure that each vehicle in stock is maintained in peak condition.
ARRIVAL
It is your responsibility to notify delivery companies immediately of any losses and/or transit damage identified on receipt of
the vehicle.
Where applicable, Vehicle Condition Reports (VCR’s) must be endorsed accordingly, otherwise it is unlikely that the transit
insurance company will accept any claims for missing items or damage rectification.
STORAGE
Correct preparation of vehicles for storage is essential. The majority of new vehicles leaving Jaguar Land Rover Limited are
provided with the appropriate protection for transit. It is your responsibility to ensure that a vehicle storage department, or
specialist company, is sufficiently equipped to undertake the storage requirements endorsed in this publication. Whilst
vehicles are in storage, any deterioration or damage sustained is the sole responsibility of the storage operator
and must NOT be made the subject of a warranty claim.
DISPATCH
When removing vehicles from storage, you are responsible for procedures that ensure they are in a safe and roadworthy
condition.
VEHICLE STORAGE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION UPON ARRIVAL
 A New Vehicle Storage History Sheet must be raised for every new vehicle upon arrival and should remain inside the
vehicle until despatch. This must contain a record of the vehicle condition and any rectification work carried out
during the storage period (see Storage History Sheet).
 Vehicles must be checked for correct specification and/or shortages. Where this is incorrect the required parts should
be procured through normal channels and costs claimed back via the DDW system using the appropriate shortage or
misbuild program code.
 Claims for rectifying incorrect specification items and/or shortages must be made in accordance with the conditions
detailed in Section C of the Warranty Policy and Procedures Manual.
 NOTE: All missing items should be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage History Sheet and countersigned by an
authorized person.
 Vehicles must be inspected for transit damage.
 Delivery damage is not the responsibility of Jaguar Land Rover Limited and must not be made the subject of a
warranty claim. It is the responsibility of the Dealer/Retailer or vehicle storage company to identify any such damage
at the time of the new vehicle receipt and to ensure that the full details are recorded on the Delivery Receipt. Claims
for rectification of such damage must be directed to the Delivery Company.
 Failure to notify the Delivery Company of damage details at the time of vehicle delivery will result in claims for
subsequent rectification being rejected.
 Warranty claims for damage repairs may only be submitted where Jaguar Land Rover Limited responsibility is clearly
indicated. Examples falling into this category are paintwork damage during the fitment of trim or outward facing
dents on the door skin.
 Warranty claims will not be accepted for any transit damage repaired or identified after the vehicle has been placed
into service.
 A label should be suitably affixed to the inside of the windshield indicating the date of vehicle arrival. Labels must not
be stuck directly to the windshield but placed in a transparent licence holder, or alternatively stuck to a piece of cling
film and attached to the inside of the windshield. This will avoid damage to the windshield when removing labels.
 Ignition and door keys must be suitably labelled and when the vehicle is locked, they must be held in a suitably
identified and secure office. All key numbers must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage History Sheet. All keys,
including spares, must be removed from the vehicle during storage for security reasons.
VEHICLE INSPECTION
The entire vehicle exterior must be inspected and, if necessary, washed thoroughly, including the underside and wheel
arches, to remove all dirt and mud deposits.
Any defects found during inspection must be rectified before the vehicle is stored.
Ensure that bumper and body side protectors are correctly located.
There are two main methods of vehicle storage:
 Collective storage of several vehicles in an open compound.

 Collective storage of a small number of vehicles, normally at the dealership/retailer and possibly under cover.
IDEALLY ALL VEHICLES SHOULD BE STORED IN A WELL VENTILATED AND TEMPERATURE-CONTROLLED BUILDING.
However, it is recognised that the majority of all vehicle storage is done in an open compound. Therefore, the following site
requirements must be observed and should be authorised with your Regional Manager.
 The site should have a well-drained hard standing surface, preferably concrete or tarmac, which is free from
undergrowth.
 The site and driveways must be kept clean and clear of any obstruction at all times.
 The site must be enclosed by a secure intruder-proof perimeter fence and the gates securely locked. The site should
be under daily surveillance, with unauthorised access prevented at all times.
 The site should be located away from areas subject to industrial fallout, sea spray or wind-blown dust and sand.
Where fallout conditions are unavoidable it will be necessary to monitor the exterior condition of all cars and wash as
necessary. Heavy contamination may require vehicles to have the transit protection coating removed and problems
arising from the contamination rectified. Once the transit coating has been removed, the vehicle must not be
returned to outdoor storage unless it is fully covered to provide the necessary protection against deterioration.
 Mains water, tyre inflation and battery charging facilities must be available on site.
 Hedges, shrubs and trees adjacent to the site should be kept trimmed and clear of parked vehicles.
 Vehicles must not be parked under trees, overhead cables or other overhanging structures as bird droppings or other
types of contamination could occur.
VEHICLE PARKING
Vehicles must be parked tidily with a minimum of 600 mm (2 feet) between bumpers, front and rear.
There must be a full doors width clearance between the driver’s door and any adjacent vehicle or obstruction.
Vehicles must be parked at least 1.2 metres (4 feet) away from any interior wall or, for outside storage, at least 2 metres (6
feet) away from any perimeter fence.
Vehicles must be moved on a first-in-first-out basis, subject to specification.

A - Storage Outside
B - Storage Inside
FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
Car wash facilities.
KATS’ (Special Tool) Decoater Gun.
‘KATS 8077 Remover Fluid’.
Tyre inflation equipment with calibrated gauge 0 - 4.05 bar (0 - 60lbf/in²).
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements. Please refer to the approved
equipment document.
Jacking equipment.
Wheel brace.
The following materials must be available and must meet Jaguar specifications:
 Engine oil.
 Transmission fluid.
 Brake fluid.
 Distilled water.
 Windscreen washer fluid.
 Anti-freeze.
Access to trailer/recovery vehicle (Vehicles should not be towed).
Comprehensive filing system for vehicle records.
NOTE: Tools supplied with the vehicle must not be used for any rectification work prior to the prospective purchaser.
OPERATIONS REQUIRED DURING STORAGE PERIOD
REFERENCE CHART
The following chart gives a quick reference to the requirements necessary during the time a vehicle is in storage. A detailed
explanation of each operation is provided on subsequent pages.
If a vehicle remains in storage after 6 months recommence operations as from month 1.
UPON 30 days from 60 days from 90 days from 120 days 150 days
OPERATION RECEIPT receipt receipt receipt from receipt from receipt
1. IDENTIFICATION X . . . . .
2. INSPECTION X X X X X X
3. BATTERIES X X X X X X
4. COOLING SYSTEM X X X X X X
5. ENGINE X X X X X X
6. TIRES X X X X X X
7. PARKING BRAKE X X X X X X
8. DOORS, WINDOWS AND X . . X . .
VEHICLE INTERIOR
9. WINDSHIELD WIPER X . . X . .
BLADES
10. PAINTWORK .
Markets with high ultraviolet REMOVE TRANSIT COATING AFTER 270 DAYS
light
All other markets REMOVE TRANSIT COATING AFTER 180 DAYS
STORAGE OPERATIONS
BATTERIES
To make sure the correct standard of battery care, please see the ‘Battery Care Requirements for New Vehicles (Dealer and
Retailer).
For requirements for receipt of a new vehicle, new vehicle storage and replacement batteries please see the battery care
requirements for new vehicles (dealer and service)
Place a label on the vehicle (or on New Vehicle Storage History Sheet) to indicate when a recharge will be required.
For additional information, refer to: New Vehicle Storage Form (100-11 Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage,
Description and Operation).
The battery condition should be checked prior to starting and/or moving the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to: Battery Care Requirements (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information,
The storage, handling and charging of batteries is not dangerous provided that the relevant battery manufacturers’
recommendations are followed. However, a suitable storage and charging facility must be available and should be in
accordance with local legal requirements.
COOLING SYSTEM
It is ESSENTIAL to maintain the concentration of anti-freeze at the factory-fill condition. Failure to do so may cause
oxidisation of the cooling system leading to corrosion of the engine and heater core.
The coolant mixture specification is 50% plain water and 50% Jaguar anti-freeze, Coolant and Corrosion Inhibitor for frost
protection down to -36°C (-33°F).
Coolant specific gravity must be checked monthly using a high quality hydrometer with an appropriate range. At a coolant
temperature of 15°C (60°F), the correct specific gravity reading is 1.074. If the coolant is above or below this temperature,
the following corrections will enable accurate specific gravity readings to be taken:
 For higher temperatures: add 0.004 to the specific gravity for each 5°C (10°F).
 For lower temperatures: deduct 0.004 from the specific gravity for each 5°C (10°F).
If the specific gravity is correct but the cooling system requires topping up, mix anti-freeze and water to the correct
proportions and to the correct volume, then top up the system. Examine for leaks from the radiator and hoses and rectify as
necessary.
If the check shows that the coolant contains less than the required anti-freeze content, proceed as follows:
 Carefully examine the radiator and all hoses for leaks and security of hose clamps.
 Remove the header tank pressure cap and drain the cooling system as instructed in the relevant service manual.
 Mix anti-freeze and water in the correct proportions and to the correct volume.
 Close the drain plug and add the coolant until the level in the header tank is steady at ‘MAX’.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE HEADER TANK PRESSURE CAP WHILE THE ENGINE IS HOT.
CAUTION: DO NOT use radiator anti-freeze solution in the windshield washer equipment or paint work will be damaged.
ENGINE
If the vehicle is stored for 30 days, the engine should be started, run at 1000 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) for one minute
from cold and then 2000 RPM per minute until the coolant temperature gauge shows normal.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Where fitted, remove the dipstick and check the engine oil level. If necessary, top up with the approved grade of engine oil.
On vehicles with an electronic oil level and temperature sensor, check the engine oil level using the procedures described in
the applicable Workshop Manual.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
If the system is not to be run for more than one month, it is recommended that the air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes (engine running at idle speed). This is to circulate refrigerant and oil to ensure the O-
rings and seals (especially the compressor) are kept lubricated and do not harden.
TIRES
For storage purposes, tires on fitted wheels must be inflated to and maintained at a maximum pressure of 3.60 bar (52
lbf/in2).
NOTE: Wheels must be rotated through 90 degrees in the forward direction monthly, to ensure that the tread is rotated
evenly during the storage period.
The spare wheel tire pressure must be maintained at the appropriate pressure specified in the Owners Handbook.
Tire condition should be inspected and defective tires replaced prior to removal from storage.
Guidance for Rotation of Tires
To ensure tires are rotated through a minimum of 90 degrees, apply a chalk mark on a front wheel tire wall at the current
centre contact point with the road surface. Move the car forwards until the chalk mark is at the horizontal position. This
process can be applied to a single car or to a row of vehicles and should ensure that all four wheels on each vehicle is
rotated by 90 degrees.
PARKING BRAKE
Vehicles with Manual Park Brake

The parking brake must NOT remain ‘on’ during storage.
After parking:
 Manual transmission vehicles: select first or reverse gear and release the parking brake
 Automatic transmission vehicles: select ‘P’ and release the parking brake.
Vehicles with Electric Park Brake (EPB)
For vehicles with EPB, the park brake will remain locked onto the brake disc during storage. Refer to the Workshop Manual,
General Procedures, Parking Brake and Actuation for EPB release procedure.
NOTE: For all vehicles with an Electronic Parking Brake (EPB), on manual transmission vehicles, first or reverse gear must be
selected before releasing the EPB. On automatic transmission vehicles 'Park' (P) must be selected before releasing the EPB.
Where possible the EPB must not remain on during storage. If, for any reason, it is not possible to perform the release
procedure, the operation of the EPB must be checked/monitored monthly during the road wheel rotation procedure.
AIR SUSPENSION - JAGUAR XJ AND XF SPORTBRAKE
During storage the air suspension system should be left in the transit mode. No other checks are necessary during storage
for this system.
DOORS, WINDOWS AND VEHICLE INTERIOR
Doors, windows, bonnet, boot lid and fuel filler flap must be closed and locked to prevent water and moisture ingress. A
check should be done each month for any signs of water ingress into the cars interior and luggage compartment. Any water
ingress points should be rectified immediately.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Depending on the model, where possible move the wiper arms and blades away from the windshield and leave in the
extended position.
PAINTWORK
Paintwork can be damaged if the protective coating remains on the vehicle for an extended period of time. In markets with
high levels of ultraviolet light (tropical or semi-tropical conditions), the protective coating MUST be removed after six
months. For all other markets the protective coating MUST be removed after nine months.
If storage is subsequently continued, the vehicle must be kept under cover and should be washed regularly (at least every
month).
REMOVAL FROM STORAGE
PROCEDURES
Before removal from storage area, all fluid levels including coolant, hydraulic fluids and lubricating oils must be checked and
replenished where necessary. Where a substantial loss has occurred the cause must be traced prior to moving the vehicle.
The New Vehicle Storage History Sheet must be checked and safety related faults rectified before the vehicle is moved from
the storage site. These checks are essential to ensure that the vehicle is safe to drive.
Tires must be adjusted to the pressures recommended in the relevant service manual or owners handbook.
Refit the vehicle battery if removed.
Check the operation of the lighting and signalling equipment.
TRANSIT PROTECTION COATING (WHERE FITTED)
REMOVAL OF TRANSIT PROTECTION COATING
During storage, the protective coating will collect airborne dirt and grit. Great care must be taken when removing the transit
coating so that damage to the paint film and exterior trim is avoided.
Removal of the transit protection coating should be carried out in accordance with the procedure detailed in the Pre-Delivery
Inspection (PDI) information.
When the vehicle is dispatched from the storage area, remove the New Vehicle Storage History Sheet and file in the vehicle
records.
STORAGE HISTORY SHEET
www.JagDocs.com
STORAGE HISTORY SHEET (Continued)
Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage - New Vehicle Storage
Form
Before carrying out any battery assessments. refer to the battery care requirements.
For additional information, refer to: Battery Care Requirements (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General
Information, Description and Operation).
NOTE: If the vehicle has been started within the previous 24 hours the surface charge must be removed prior to any
battery assessment
This form is to be used to record the battery condition for vehicles and parts by the dealer / retailer prior to handover to
the customer. If the vehicle is kept in storage longer than 150 days, a new form must be started.
For AGM batteries Midtronics EXP 1080 / GR1 tester must be used.
Follow the instructions on the Midtronics EXP 1080 / GR1 tester to assess battery condition.
TESTER RESULTS ACTION

GOOD BATTERY Return to service.
GOOD RE-CHARGE Fully charge battery and return to service.
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Fully charge battery. Remove surface charge. Re-test battery. If same result replace
battery.
REPLACE BATTERY OR BAD Verify surface charge removed. Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test. If result
CELL BATTERY repeats after surface charge removal, replace battery. DO NOT RECHARGE.
UNABLE TO DO TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test.
Voltage Date Signature
Vehicle Arrival
Initial battery voltage and date of reading Midtronics Code
taken
Battery Voltage
Recharge Details (if any)
Post Charge Voltage
30 days from initial battery reading Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Pre Delivery Inspection (PDI) Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Customer Handover The battery voltage MUST be 12.55 volts or
above
Please make sure that any transit relays are refitted and / or the vehicle is put into transportation mode if the vehicle is
stored
Transit relay removal / vehicle placed in normal mode should only be completed a maximum of 72 hours prior to
handover to customer
MODEL: COLOR: ARRIVAL DATE:

KEY NUMBER:
VIN:
DOORS,
PARKING WINDOWS
BRAKE - AND VEHICLE
OPERATIONS IDENTIFICATION INSPECTION COOLING SYSTEM ENGINE TIRES OFF INTERIOR
UPON . . . . . . .
RECEIPT
30 DAYS . . . . . . .
60 DAYS . . . . . . .
90 DAYS . . . . . . .
120 DAYS . . . . . . .
150 DAYS . . . . . . .
OPERATIONS WINDSHIELD PAINTWORK COMMENTS ON INSPECTORS
WIPER BLADES VEHICLE SIGNATURE
CONDITION AND DATE
UPON . . NOTE: RECORD ANY .
RECEIPT VEHICLE BODY
DAMAGE ON
SILHOUETTES THAT
FOLLOW
30 DAYS . . . .
60 DAYS . . . .
90 DAYS . . . .
120 DAYS . . . .
150 DAYS . . . .
Published: 17-Apr-2012
Suspension System - General Information -
Wheel Alignment Specification - Front
All Right-Hand Drive and Japan vehicles without dynamics pack
Item LH RH Split LH-RH
Castor Decimal degrees 7.05° ± 0.75° 6.51° ± 0.75° 0.55° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 7° 03' ± 45' 6° 31' ± 45' 0° 33' ± 45'
Camber Decimal degrees -0.70° ± 0.75° -0.30° ± 0.75° -0.40° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -0° 42' ± 45' -0° 18' ± 45' -0° 24' ± 45'
Total toe Decimal degrees 0.17° ± 0.20°
Degrees/minutes 0° 10' ± 12'
All Right-Hand Drive and Japan vehicles with dynamics pack
Castor Decimal degrees 7.20° ± 0.75° 6.65° ± 0.75° 0.55° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 7° 12' ± 45' 6° 39' ± 45' 0° 33' ± 45'
Camber Decimal degrees -1.0° ± 0.75° -0.60° ± 0.75° -0.40° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -1° 00' ± 45' -0° 36' ± 45' -0° 24' ± 45'
USA, Canada, Mexico and Dominican Republic vehicles without dynamics pack - Vehicles built up to VIN
B44679
Castor Decimal degrees 6.78° ± 0.75° 6.78° ± 0.75° 0° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes 6° 47' ± 45' 6° 47' ± 45' 0° 0' ± 45'
Camber Decimal degrees -0.25° ± 0.75° -0.75° ± 0.75° 0.50° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -0° 15' ± 45' -0° 45' ± 45' 0° 30' ± 45'
USA, Canada, Mexico and Dominican Republic vehicles with dynamics pack - Vehicles built up to VIN
B44679
Degrees/minutes 6° 56' ± 45' 6° 56' ± 45' 0° 0' ± 45'
Degrees/minutes -0° 33' ± 45' -1° 03' ± 45' 0° 30' ± 45'
Degrees/minutes 0° 15' ± 0° 12'
Rest Of the World vehicles without dynamics pack - Vehicles built up to VIN B44679
Degrees/minutes 6° 47' ± 45' 6° 47' ± 45' 0° 0' ± 45'
Degrees/minutes -0° 24' ± 45' -0° 36' ± 45' 0° 12' ± 45'
Rest Of the World vehicles with dynamics pack - Vehicles built up to VIN B44679
Degrees/minutes 6° 56' ± 45' 6° 56' ± 45' 0° 0' ± 45'
Degrees/minutes -0° 42' ± 45' -0° 54' ± 45' 0° 12' ± 45'
Left hand drive vehicles without dynamics pack - Vehicles built VIN B44680 onwards
Degrees/minutes 6° 47' ± 45' 6° 47' ± 45' 0° 0' ± 45'
Degrees/minutes -0° 15' ± 45' -0° 45' ± 45' 0° 30' ± 45'
Left hand drive vehicles with dynamics pack - Vehicles built VIN B44680 onwards
Degrees/minutes 6° 56' ± 45' 6° 56' ± 45' 0° 0' ± 45'
Degrees/minutes -0° 33' ± 45' -1° 03' ± 45' 0° 30' ± 45'
Wheel Alignment Specification - Rear

Naturally Aspirated (NA)
Item LH RH
Camber Decimal degrees -0.60° ± 0.75° -0.60° ± 0.75°
Degrees/minutes -0° 36' ± 45' -0° 36' ± 45'
Toe Decimal degrees 0.12° ± 0.14° 0.12° ± 0.14°
Degrees/minutes 0° 07' ± 0° 08' 0° 07' ± 0° 08'
Rear thrust angle Decimal degrees 0° ± 0.14°
Supercharged (SC) without dynamics pack
Item LH RH
Degrees/minutes -0° 43' ± 45' -0° 43' ± 45'
Degrees/minutes 0° 07' ± 0° 08' 0° 07' ± 0° 08'
Vehicles with dynamics pack
Item LH RH
Degrees/minutes -1° ± 45' -1° ± 45'
Degrees/minutes 0° 07' ± 0° 08' 0° 07' ± 0° 08'
Vehicle ride height
Front Rear
Naturally aspirated (NA) 394 mm (15.51 inch) 394 mm (15.51 inch)
Supercharged (SC) without dynamics pack 392 mm (15.43 inch) 389 mm (15.31 inch)
Supercharged (SC) with dynamics pack 381 mm (15.00 inch) 379 mm (14.92 inch)
 All the above figures are measured at "kerb" height -all fluids at full and a full fuel tank.
 Tires must be inflated to normal pressure For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Specifications).
 Rear thrust angle = (LH toe - RH toe) ÷ 2
 Ride height is measured from the centre of the wheel to the apex of the wheel arch, through the wheel centre
line.
Suspension System - General Information - Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber, caster and toe are adjustable on the front suspension system. Only the toe is adjustable on the rear
suspension system. Camber and caster are adjusted by means of eccentric cams on the lower arm mounting bolts. The
front toe is adjusted by use of the front tie-rod. The rear toe is adjusted by the use of toe link assemblies connecting
the knuckles to the rear sub-frame.
Camber
Negative Camber
Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct
effect on tire wear.
Caster
Item Description
1 Positive caster
2 True vertical
3 Steering axis
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the ball joints when viewed from the side. The
caster specifications in this section will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and
driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear.
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe-In)
Negative Toe (Toe-Out)
The vehicle toe setting:
 affects tire wear and directional stability.

Ride Height
NOTE: All ride height measurements are carried out with vehicle empty and 9 liters of fuel in the tank (showroom
condition). The vehicle must be driven above 40 km/h (25 miles/hour) for a minimum of five minutes to make sure that
the reservoir is full.
Front Ride Height Measurement
Item Description
1 Ride height
Rear Ride Height Measurement
Item Description
1 Ride height
Wheel Track
Item Description
1 Front track
2 Rear track
Crabbing
Item Description
1 Front track
2 Rear track
3 Crabbing angle
Crabbing is the condition in which the independent rear suspension (IRS) system is not square to the chassis. Heavily
crowned roads can give the illusion of crabbing.
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to maintain
a straight path down a level road.
Shimmy
Shimmy, as observed by the driver, is rotational oscillations of the steering wheel which may come and go over time,
generally resulting from wheel and tire imbalances.
Shimmy can be experienced at any speed but generally between 80 to 145 km/h (50 to 90 miles/hour) and is most
often experienced on smooth roads at steady speeds.
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road surfaces or
brake disc irregularity and observed by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel.
Poor Returnability of the Steering
Poor returnability of the steering is used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or the
steering correction is completed.
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation, felt by the hands on the steering wheel, that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going
straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with hands off the steering wheel.
 A vehicle-related drift/pull, on a flat road, will cause a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and
require constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
 Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (i.e., wind, road crown).
Vague On-Center Feel
Vague on-center feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel is
rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel
turn). Efforts may be said to be "flat on center".
 In the diagnosis of a roadability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and
vague on-center feel.
Suspension System - General Information - Suspension System
For a detailed description of the suspension system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to:
Wheel Alignment Angles (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, Description and Operation),
Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension, Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer's concern by carrying out a road test on a smooth road. If any vibrations are apparent, refer
to
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis and
Testing).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity.
Visual Inspection Chart

Mechanical
 Damaged tires
 Wheel bearing(s)
 Loose or damaged front or rear suspension components
 Loose, damaged or missing suspension fastener(s)
 Incorrect spring usage
 Damaged or sagging spring(s)
 Damaged or leaking shock absorber(s)
 Damaged or leaking strut(s)
 Worn or damaged suspension bushing(s)
 Loose, worn or damaged steering system components
 Damaged axle components
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported condition is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart

Crabbing * Incorrect rear thrust angle. * CHECK the rear toe adjustment.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System -
General Information, Specifications) /
Rear Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System -
General Information, General Procedures).
* Front or rear suspension * INSPECT the front and rear suspension systems.
components. REPAIR or INSTALL new suspension components as
necessary.
REFER to: Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension,
Diagnosis and Testing) /
Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Diagnosis
and Testing).
* Drive axle damaged. * INSTALL a new rear drive axle/differential.
REFER to: Axle Assembly (205-02 Rear Drive
Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).
Drift/Pull * Unequal tire pressure. * CHECK and ADJUST the tire pressures. INSPECT the tire
for excessive wear.
REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
* Incorrect wheel alignment. * CHECK and ADJUST the wheel alignment.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System -
General Information, Specifications).
* Tires. * CHECK and ADJUST the tire pressures. INSPECT the tire
for excessive wear.
Specifications).
* Unevenly loaded or overloaded * NOTIFY the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
vehicle.
* Damaged steering components. * CHECK the steering system.
REFER to: Steering System (211-00 Steering System -
General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
* Brake drag. * CHECK the brakes.
REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System -
Front Bottoming or * Coil springs. * CHECK the ride height. INSTALL new springs as
Riding Low necessary.
REFER to: Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension,
Removal and Installation).
Incorrect Tire Wear * Incorrect tire pressure (rapid * CHECK and ADJUST the tire pressure. INSPECT the tire
center rib or inner and outer for excessive wear.
edge wear). REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
* Excessive front or rear toe * CHECK and ADJUST the wheel alignment.
(rapid inner or outer edge wear). REFER to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, General Procedures).
* Excessive negative or positive * CHECK and ADJUST the wheel alignment.
camber (rapid inner or outer REFER to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension
edge wear). System - General Information, General Procedures).
* Tires out of balance (tires * BALANCE the tires.
cupped or dished).
Rough ride * Spring(s) * Check and install new spring(s) as necessary.
Removal and Installation) /
Shock Absorber (204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
Shimmy or Wheel * Loose wheel nut(s). * CHECK and TIGHTEN the wheel nuts to specification.
Tramp REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
* Loose front suspension * CHECK and TIGHTEN the suspension fasteners to
fasteners. specification.
REFER to: Specifications (204-01 Front Suspension,
Specifications).
* Front wheel bearing(s). * CHECK the wheel bearings.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension,
* Worn or damaged suspension * CHECK and INSTALL new components as necessary.
component bushing. REFER to: Rear Lower Arm Bushing (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Shock Absorber Bushing (204-01 Front Suspension,
Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing (204-01 Front Suspension,
* Wheel/tires. * CHECK the wheels/tires. BALANCE or INSTALL new
wheel/tires as necessary.
REFER to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
* Loose, worn or damaged ball * CHECK the Ball Joint(s).
joint(s). REFER to: Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension,
* Loose, worn or damaged * CHECK and INSTALL new components as necessary.
steering components.
* Front wheel alignment. * CHECK and ADJUST the wheel alignment.
REFER to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension
* Shock absorber(s). * CHECK and INSTALL new shock absorber(s) as
necessary.
Installation).
* Spring(s). * CHECK and INSTALL new springs as necessary.
Installation).
Poor self center action * Ball joints. * CHECK the Ball Joints.
of the steering REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
* Steering components. * CHECK and INSTALL new components as necessary.
Steering wheel off- * Unequal front or rear toe * CHECK and ADJUST the wheel alignment.
center settings. REFER to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, General Procedures) /
Rear Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System -
* Steering components. * CHECK and INSTALL new components as necessary.
Sway or roll * Overloaded, unevenly or * NOTIFY the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
incorrectly loaded vehicle.
* Loose wheel nut(s). *
CHECK and TIGHTEN the wheel nut(s) to specification.
Specifications).
* Coil spring(s). * CHECK and INSTALL new coil springs as necessary.
* Loose front stabilizer bar or rear * CHECK and TIGHTEN the stabilizer bar to specification.
stabilizer bar. REFER to: Specifications (204-01 Front Suspension,
Specifications) /
Specifications (204-02 Rear Suspension, Specifications).
* Worn lower suspension arm * INSTALL new lower suspension arm stabilizer bar as
stabilizer bar insulators. necessary.
REFER to: Stabilizer Bar Link (204-01 Front Suspension,
Rear Stabilizer Bar Link (204-02 Rear Suspension,
necessary.
Installation).
Vehicle Leans to One * Unevenly loaded or overloaded * NOTIFY the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
Side vehicle.
* Front or rear suspension * INSPECT the front and rear suspension systems.
components. REPAIR or INSTALL new suspension components as
necessary.
necessary.
Installation).
* Coil spring(s). * CHECK and INSTALL new spring(s) as necessary.
Installation).
* Incorrect ride height. Lateral tilt * CHECK the ride height. INSTALL new spring(s) as
out of specification. necessary.
Installation).
Vibration/Noise * Tires/wheels. * CHECK and INSTALL new components as necessary.
* Wheel bearings. REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-
* Wheel hubs. 04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis and
* Brake components. Testing).
* Suspension components.
* Steering components.
Wander * Unevenly loaded or overloaded * NOTIFY the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
vehicle.
* Ball joint(s). * CHECK the Ball Joint(s).
REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
* Front wheel bearing(s). * CHECK the wheel bearings.
* Loose, worn or damaged * CHECK and INSTALL new suspension components as
suspension components. necessary.
* Loose suspension fasteners. * CHECK and TIGHTEN the suspension fasteners to
specification.
REFER to: Specifications (204-01 Front Suspension,
Specifications) /
Specifications (204-02 Rear Suspension, Specifications).
* Steering components. * CHECK and INSTALL new steering components.
* Wheel alignment (excessive total * CHECK and ADJUST the wheel alignment.
front toe-out). REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System -
General Information, Specifications) /
Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System -
Component Tests
Ball Joint Inspection
NOTE: The front suspension is shown in the following procedures. The inspection of the rear suspension upper ball joint
is similar.

REFER to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
2. Prior to carrying out any inspection of the ball joints, inspect the front wheel bearings.
3. CAUTION: The safety stand beneath the suspension lower arm must only support the weight of the
suspension and not the full weight of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
components.
Position a safety stand beneath the front suspension lower arm or rear suspension lower arm to be tested.
4. While an assistant pulls and pushes the top and bottom of the tire, observe the relative movement between the
ball joint and the front suspension lower arm. Any movement at or exceeding the specification indicates a worn
or damaged ball joint. Install a new wheel knuckle as necessary.
REFER to: Wheel Knuckle (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
5. While an assistant pulls and pushes the top and bottom of the tire, observe the relative movement between the
ball joint and the front suspension upper arm or rear suspension upper arm. Any movement at or exceeding the
specification indicates a worn or damaged ball joint. Install a new upper arm as necessary.
REFER to: Upper Arm LH (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Upper Arm RH (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Upper Arm (204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the safety stand.
7. Lower the vehicle.

Suspension System - General Information - Front Toe Adjustment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the vehicle is on a flat level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are within specification.
Make sure that only the manufacturers' recommended four wheel alignment equipment is used.
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.
1. For wheel alignment information, refer to the suspension

specification section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-00,
Specifications).
2. Check the tie rod ends, suspension joints, wheel bearings and
wheels and tires for damage, wear and free play.
 Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly adjusted
components.
3. Check and adjust tire pressures.
4. Position the vehicle on a calibrated, level, vehicle lift.
5. Release the vehicle parking brake.
6. Using only four-wheel alignment equipment approved by Jaguar,
check the wheel alignment.
7. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
To adjust, loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.
8. CAUTION: Do not allow the gaiter to twist.
NOTE: Both tie rods must be rotated by an equal

amount.
NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
Adjust the front toe.
9. Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).

Suspension System - General Information - Rear Toe Adjustment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:

Specifications).
 Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly adjusted
components.
To adjust, loosen the toe link locknuts.

amount.
Adjust the rear toe.
9. Tighten the toe link locknuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).

Suspension System - General Information - Four-Wheel Alignment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:

Specifications).
 Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly
adjusted components.
To adjust, loosen the toe link locknuts.

amount.
Adjust the rear toe.
9. Tighten the toe link locknuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).

To adjust the caster, loosen the front lower arm lock

nuts.
Rotate the caster adjustment cam bolt.
12. CAUTION: Make sure the caster adjustment bolt does not
rotate while the lock nut is being tightened.
Tighten the caster adjustment cam bolt nut.

 Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
13. CAUTION: Adjustments made to the camber

setting will affect the front toe setting. Therefore , the
camber and toe may need to be adjusted at the same
time.
To adjust the camber, loosen the rear lower arm lock

nuts.
Rotate the camber adjustment cam bolt.
15. CAUTION: Make sure the camber adjustment bolt does not
rotate while the lock nut is being tightened.
Tighten the camber adjustment cam bolt nut.

 Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
To adjust, loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.

amount.
Adjust the front toe.
18. Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).
Published: 14-Feb-2012
Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout
Check Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH similar.
1. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
Raise the front of the vehicle.

2. Remove the front wheel.
For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper support bolts.
 Push the brake caliper pistons back to release the pads from the disc.
 Detach the brake caliper and position to one side with suitable tie strap.
4. Remove the disc.

 Remove the 2 clips.
5. Mount special 6. Position

tool 100-053 the Dial
on the lower Test
caliper support Indicator
bracket as (DTI)
shown. gauge
 A probe on
spacer the hub
washer flange as
may be shown.
required
under
the tool.
 Use the
brake
caliper
support
bolt and
suitable
nut.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub runout. hub runout must not exceed
0.015 mm.
8. If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and bearing.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension,
9. If the hub runout is within the limit install the removed components.
10. tighten the brake caliper bolts to 115 Nm.
Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout
Check Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
RH illustration shown, LH similar.

2. Remove the front wheel.
For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
 Push the brake caliper pistons back to release the pads from the disc.
 Detach the brake caliper and position to one side with suitable tie strap.
4. Remove the disc.

5. Mount special 6. Position

tool 100-053 the Dial
on the lower Test
caliper support Indicator
bracket as (DTI)
shown. gauge
 A probe on
spacer the hub
washer flange as
may be shown.
required
under
the tool.
 Use the
brake
caliper
support
bolt and
suitable
nut.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub runout. hub runout must not exceed
0.015 mm.
8. If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and bearing.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension,
9. If the hub runout is within the limit install the removed components.
10. Tighten brake caliper bolts to 115 Nm.
This section contains no data
Suspension System - General Information - Rear Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub Runout Check Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
NOTE: It is recommended that the DTI is capable of measurements of 0.005 mm.
1. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle

stands.
Raise the rear of the vehicle.

2. Remove the rear wheel.
For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04
Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
 Push the brake pads back to release the
brake caliper from the disc.
 Detach the brake caliper and position to
one side with suitable tie strap.
4. Remove the disc.

5. Mount special tool 100-053 on the lower caliper

support bracket as shown.
 A spacer washer may be required under the
tool.
 Use the brake caliper support bolt and
suitable nut.
6. CAUTION: Take care not to contact the studs.
Position the Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge probe

on the hub flange as shown.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to

measure hub runout. Hub runout must not exceed 0.025 mm.
8. If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and
bearing.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing (204-02
Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
9. If the hub runout is within the limit install the removed
components.
10. Tighten the brake support caliper bolts to 103 Nm.
Front Suspension -
CAUTION: Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.
Description Nm lb-ft
Front lower arm to rear lower arm - nut *:
Stage 1 60 44
Stage 2 135 degrees in clockwise 135 degrees - clockwise
direction direction
Front lower arm to subframe - nut * 175 129
Rear lower arm to subframe - nut * 175 129
Rear lower arm to wheel knuckle ball joint - nut * 92 68
Shock absorber to spring - nut:
Active shock absorber 50 37
Passive shock absorber 27 20
Shock absorber and spring assembly to lower arm - 175 129
bolt
Shock absorber and spring assembly to top mount - 27 20
nuts
Stabilizer bar clamp to subframe - bolt 55 40
Stabilizer bar link to lower arm - nut * 70 52
Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar - nut * 43 32
Upper arm ball-joint - nut * 90 66
Upper arm to subframe brackets - nut * 60 44
Wheel bearing and hub assembly to wheel knuckle - 90 66
bolts *
* New nut/bolt must be installed.
Front Suspension - Front Suspension
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Right Hand (RH) wheel hub and bearing assembly
2 - RH wheel knuckle
3 - Upper control arm bush (2 off)
4 - RH upper control arm
5 - RH top mount plate
6 - RH spring and damper assembly
7 - Stabilizer link
8 - RH lower lateral control arm
9 - Front subframe
10 - Left Hand (LH) lower lateral control arm
-
11 LH spring and damper assembly
12 - Upper control arm bush (2 off)
13 - LH top mount plate
14 - LH upper control arm
15 - LH wheel knuckle
16 - LH wheel hub and bearing assembly
17 - LH lower control arm
18 - Mounting bracket (2 off)
19 - Stabilizer bar
20 - Stabilizer bar bush (2 off)
21 - RH lower control arm
INTRODUCTION
The front suspension is of a fully independent design. The front suspension components are attached to the front subframe
and the vehicle body. The subframe is attached to the vehicle body with four long bolts which pass through bushes located in
the subframe.
The front suspension on each side comprises:
 Upper control arm

 Lower lateral control arm
 Lower control arm
 Wheel knuckle and hub assembly
 Stabilizer bar
 Spring and damper assembly.
UPPER CONTROL ARM

1 - Bush (2 off)
2 - Ball joint and locknut
3 - Upper control arm
The forged aluminum upper control arm is a wishbone design with three mounting points. The two inner mounting points are
fitted with bushes. The outer mounting is fitted with a ball joint which locates in a hole in the wheel knuckle and is secured
with a locknut.
The inclination of the upper control arm axis provides an anti-dive and anti-squat action during vehicle braking and
acceleration and also improves castor trail which in turn improves steering 'feel'.
LOWER LATERAL CONTROL ARM

1 - Bush - subframe attachment
2 - Lower lateral control arm
3 - Spring and damper assembly attachment
4 - Insert - stabilizer link attachment
5 - Lower control arm attachment
6 - Wheel knuckle attachment
The forged aluminum lower lateral control arm is fitted with a bush in its inner end which locates between brackets on the
subframe. The arm is secured with an eccentric bolt, an eccentric washer and a locknut which allow for the adjustment of the
suspension camber geometry.
The outer end of the control arm has a tapered hole which locates on a ball joint fitted to the wheel knuckle. Two cast
brackets on the forward face of the control arm allow for the attachment of the lower control arm. A threaded insert is fitted
behind the two cast brackets and provides for the attachment of the stabilizer link with a bolt. A bush is fitted to a cross-hole
in the control arm which provides the location for the forked attachment of the spring and damper assembly.
LOWER CONTROL ARM

1 - Hydrabush
2 - Lower control arm
3 - Spherical bearing
The cast lower control arm is fitted with a hydrabush in its inner end which locates between brackets on the subframe. The
arm is secured with an eccentric bolt, an eccentric washer and a locknut which allow for adjustment of the castor and
camber geometry.
The outer end of the control arm is fitted with a spherical bearing and locates between the cast brackets on the lower lateral
control arm. The lower lateral control arm and lower control arm together form a wishbone design.
WHEEL KNUCKLE

1 - Upper control arm attachment
2 - Ball joint locknut
3 - Ball joint locknut
4 - Bolt - hub attachment (2 off)
5 - Torx bolt - hub attachment (2 off)
6 - Steering tie rod ball joint attachment
7 - Dust shield attachment
8 - Ball joint - lower lateral arm attachment
9 - Wheel hub and bearing assembly
10 - Wheel knuckle
The cast aluminum wheel knuckle is a swan neck design which provides the attachment for the upper control arm and lower
lateral control arm. The lower lateral control arm locates on a non serviceable ball joint integral with the wheel knuckle. The
lower boss on the knuckle provides for the attachment of the steering gear tie-rod ball joint.
The wheel knuckle also provides the mounting locations for the wheel hub and bearing assembly, the wheel speed sensor,
the brake caliper and the brake dust shield, which is retained with 3 rivets.
The wheel hub and bearing assembly is a non-serviceable component that requires replacement as a complete assembly. A
magnetic encoder ring for the wheel speed sensor is incorporated into the wheel bearing. The assembly is secured to the
knuckle with 2 bolts and 2 Torx bolts.
www.JagDocs.com
STABILIZER BAR

1 - Stabilizer bar
2 - Bolt (4 off)
3 - Bracket (2 off)
4 - Locknut (2 off)
5 - Ball joint (2 off)
6 - Stabilizer link (2 off)
7 - Locknut (2 off)
8 - Bolt (2 off)
9 - Bush (2 off)
The stabilizer bar is attached to the front of the subframe with bushes and mounting brackets. The pressed steel brackets
locate over the bushes and are attached to the cross member with bolts screwed into threaded locations in the subframe.
The stabilizer bar has crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed in position on the inside edges of the bushes. The collars prevent
sideways movement of the stabilizer bar.
The stabilizer bar is manufactured from 32 mm diameter, manganese steel bar. Each end of the stabilizer bar curves
rearwards to attach to a ball joint on a stabilizer link. Each stabilizer link is secured to a bush in the lower lateral arm with a
bolt and locknut. The links allow the stabilizer bar to move with the wheel travel providing maximum effectiveness.
SPRING AND DAMPER ASSEMBLY

1 - Damper self locking nut
2 - Top mount self locking nut (4 off)
3 - Spring packer
4 - Gaiter
5 - Spring aid
6 - Damper
7 - Bolt
8 - Spring
9 - Upper spring seat
10 - Top mount
The spring and damper assemblies are located between the lower lateral arm and the front suspension housing in the inner
wing. There are two damper variants:
 A conventional oil damped damper.

 On vehicles with the adaptive dynamics system, a continuously variable adaptive damper.
For additional information, refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Description
and Operation).
Different combinations of springs and dampers are available depending on the vehicle model. The conventional and adaptive
damper assemblies are of a similar construction.
The dampers are a monotube design with a spring seat welded onto the damper tube. The lower end of the damper has a
forked mounting with a cross hole and captive nut. The fork locates over the lower lateral control arm and is secured with a
bolt.
The damper functions by restricting the flow of oil through internal galleries in the damper piston, providing damping of
undulations in the road surface.
The damper piston is connected to a damper rod which is sealed at its exit point from the damper body. The threaded outer
end of the damper rod locates through a hole in the top mount. A self locking nut secures the top mount to the damper rod.
On adaptive dampers an electrical connector is incorporated into the outer end of the damper rod.
The damper rod is fitted with a spring aid which prevents the top mount making contact with the top of the damper body
during full suspension compression and also assists with the suspension tune.
The spring rate of the coil springs can differ between models and are color coded for identification. The coil spring locates on
a spring packer and a lower spring seat which is integral with the damper body. The spring locates in an upper spring seat
which is located on the underside of the top mount.
The top mount has four studs which locate through mating holes in the vehicle inner wing and are secured with self locking
nuts.
Front Suspension - Front Suspension
workshop manual.REFER to: (204-01)
Front Suspension (Description and Operation),
Front Suspension (Description and Operation),
Front Suspension (Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer concern
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
 Damaged suspension dampers
proceeding to the next step
4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Cause Action
Evidence of fluid on suspension  Fluid on damper from an external  Damper not faulty, do not
damper source renew
 Fluid leaking from damper  GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST A : DAMPER FLUID LEAK DIAGNOSIS

TEST CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
A1: ASSESS LEAK
NOTE: Residual oil left over from the damper assembly process may create oil staining on the damper tube. This will
not affect the function of the damper.
NOTE: Slight seepage is considered normal.
1 Assess the extent of the oil leakage
Is the leakage serious enough to indicate that the damper seal has failed?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Damper not faulty, do not renew.
PINPOINT TEST B : CONFIRM LEAK

B1: ROAD TEST
1 Clean all traces of oil from the damper
2 Drive the vehicle over a speed bump or similar ten times
Is any fluid visible on the outside of the damper?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test C.
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DAMPER STICKOUT TEST

C1: DAMPER STICKOUT TEST
NOTE: If a significant quantity of fluid has leaked out of the damper, the dividing piston will be displaced upwards in
the tube by the pressure of the gas below it. This will limit the downward travel of the piston.
1 Remove the suspension strut assembly
REFER to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01, Removal
and Installation).
2 Remove the spring
3 Remove the bump stop
4 Push the damper piston fully into the damper tube
5 Measure and record the stickout dimension (the
distance between the damper tube cap and the
piston rod shoulder)
Is the stickout dimension greater than 12.0mm?

Yes
Damper unserviceable. Install a new suspension
damper. Enclose a record of the stickout dimension
with the returned part.
No
Damper serviceable. Re-assemble and re-install the
suspension strut
REFER to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01, Removal
and Installation).
Front Suspension - Front Shock Absorber
Removal
1. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported

only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal
and Installation).
3. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball
joint rotating.
4.
5. CAUTION: Discard the nut.
6. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.
Discard the nut.

7.
8.
9.
10.
11. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the
component prior to removal.
 Make sure that the shock absorber and

spring assembly is installed to the special
tool with the lower mount retaining nut
facing upwards.
12.
13. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care when handling the

component.
Note the fitted position of the component

prior to removal.
 Make sure that the top mount assembly

and isolator remain in position while
removing shock absorber.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that these components

are installed to the noted removal position.
Torque: 27 Nm
2.
3.
4.
5. Torque: 27 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 175 Nm
8. Torque:
Stage 1: 60 Nm
Stage 2: 135°
9. Torque: 90 Nm
10.

joint rotating.
 1
Torque: 43 Nm
 2
Torque: 70 Nm
and Installation).
Front Suspension - Front Lower Arm
Removal


2. Remove the LH front wheel and tire.
3. NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Release the forward lower control arm.

 Remove the 2 bolts and discard the nuts.
Installation
1. Install the forward lower control arm.
 Install the bolt and tighten the new nut to 60 Nm (44
lb.ft) + 135 degrees.
 Tighten the 14mm bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
2. Install the wheel and tire.

check the wheel alignment, and adjust if required.
Front Suspension - Rear Lower Arm
Removal


joint rotating.
Disconnect the LH stabilizer bar link.

 Remove and discard the 2 nuts.
4. Disconnect the height sensor link.
5. Release the forward lower control arm.

 Remove the bolt and discard the nut.
6. Release the shock absorber from the lower arm.

 Remove the Torx bolt.
Remove the lower arm nut and bolt; discard the

nut.
8. CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the premature
failure of the joint.
Remove the LH lower arm.

 Remove and discard the nut.
 Using the special tool, release the ball joint from
the lower suspension arm.
Installation
1. NOTE: Align to the position noted on removal.
Install the lower suspension arm.

 Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm.
2. Install the forward lower control arm.

 Install the bolt and tighten the new nut to 60 Nm + 135
degrees.
3. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball joint
rotating.
Install the lower arm ball joint

 Clean the component mating faces.
 Tighten the nut to 92 Nm.
4. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the component from

rotating.
Install the stabilizer bar link.

 Tighten the nuts to 43 Nm.
5. Connect the height sensor link.

check the wheel alignment, and adjust if required.
Front Suspension - Rear Lower Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Rear lower arm bushing remover and installer
204-464
Rear lower arm bushing remover
204-333
Rear lower arm bushing installer
204-332
204-465
204-334
Removal


2. Remove the LH lower arm.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Lower Arm (204-01
Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
Using the special tools, remove and discard the lower

arm rear bushings.
Installation
1. Install the special tools to the rear lower arm.
 Tighten the bolts.
Position the bushing in the special tool.
3. Using the special tools, partially install the lower arm

bushing.
4. Change the special tools, then complete installation of

the bushing.
5. Install the lower suspension arm.
Front Suspension - Shock Absorber Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Replacer support-bush
204-337
Replacer-bush
204-338
Remover-bush
204-336
Remover support-bush
204-335
Removal


2. Remove the front lower suspension arm.
3. NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush.
Using the special tools, remove the shock absorber

bushing.
Installation
1. Install the bushing into the special tool.
Using the special tools, install the shock absorber

bushing.

Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar
Removal

stands.

and Installation).
3. CAUTION: Discard the nuts.
 On both sides.
 1
Torque: 43 Nm
 2
Torque: 70 Nm
4. Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
5.
6.
7. Torque: 55 Nm
8.
9.
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal


and Installation).
3. CAUTION: Discard the nuts.
 1
Torque: 43 Nm
 2
Torque: 70 Nm
Installation

Front Suspension - Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Bush installer
204-340
Bush remove
204-342
Support
204-341
Support
204-339
Removal


2. Remove the LH lower arm.
3. Using the special tools, remove and discard the
stabilizer bar link bushing.
Installation
1. Using the special tools, install the stabilizer bar link
bushing.

Front Suspension - Upper Arm LH
Removal

2. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery,
Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
3. Refer to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal
and Installation).
4. Refer to: Engine Control Module (ECM) (303-14B Electronic Engine
Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5. Torque: 70 Nm
6. Torque: 70 Nm
7.
Installation

Front Suspension - Upper Arm RH
Removal

3. Refer to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal
and Installation).
4. Refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5. Torque: 70 Nm
6. Torque: 70 Nm
7.
Installation

Front Suspension - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

stands.

2. Torque: 112 Nm
3. Torque: 10 Nm

5. CAUTION: Discard the bolts.
NOTE: Secure with cable ties.
Torque: 115 Nm
7. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolts.
Make sure that the area around the

component is clean and free of foreign material.
Do not attempt to release the wheel hub by

hitting it with a hammer directly, loosen the wheel
hub retaining bolts partially before applying an
even amount of force to the head of each bolts to
release the wheel hub from the wheel knuckle.
Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage
to the component.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may

occur, but the essential information is always
correct.
NOTE: Install the components to their original

fitted positions.
Torque: 90 Nm
Installation

Front Suspension - Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint splitter
204-327
Removal


2. Remove the hub assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the brake disc shield.
 Remove the 3 rivets.
4. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the

component from rotating.
Disconnect the steering gear tie rod end ball joint.

 Remove and discard the tie rod end
retaining nut.

joint rotating.
Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.

6. CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not
damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the
premature failure of the joint.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball

joint rotating.
Remove the wheel knuckle.

 Using the special tool, release the ball joint
from the lower suspension arm.
Installation
rotating.
Install the wheel knuckle.

2. Install the brake disc shield.
 Install the rivets.
 Repeat the above procedure for the other side.

rotating.
Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.

4. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the component from

rotating.
Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.

5. Install the hub assembly.

Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
Rear Suspension -
Halfshaft/hub - nut * 300 221
Lower arm to subframe - nut * 164 121
Lower arm to wheel knuckle - nut * 150 110
Shock absorber to spring - nut:
Active shock absorber 50 37
Passive shock absorber 27 20
Shock absorber and spring assembly to top mount - nuts 27 20
Shock absorber and spring assembly to lower arm - bolt 133 98
Stabilizer bar clamp to subframe - nut * 55 40
Stabilizer bar link to lower arm - nut * 48 35
Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar - nut * 48 35
Toe link to subframe - ball joint nut * 90 66
Toe link to wheel knuckle - nut * 55 40
Upper arm to subframe - nut * 97 71
Upper arm to wheel knuckle - ball-joint nut * 90 66
Wheel bearing to wheel knuckle - bolts 70 52
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Right Hand (RH) wheel hub and bearing assembly
2 - RH upper control arm
3 - RH spring and damper assembly
4 - RH top plate
5 - Bush - upper control arm
-
6 Left Hand (LH) top plate
7 - LH spring and damper assembly
8 - Stabilizer link
9 - Toe-link (2 off)
10 - Ball joint
11 - LH wheel knuckle
12 - LH wheel hub and bearing assembly
13 - LH upper control arm
14 - LH lower control arm
15 - Bush - lower control arm
16 - Bush - upper control arm
17 - Mounting bracket (2 off)
18 - Bush (2 off)
19 - Stabilizer bar
20 - Rear crossbeam
INTRODUCTION
The rear suspension is a double wishbone design which is attached to a rear crossbeam. The crossbeam is attached to the
vehicle body with 4 long bolts which pass through bushes located in the crossbeam.
The rear suspension on each side comprises:
 Upper control arm

 Lower control arm
 Toe-link
 Wheel knuckle and hub assembly
 Stabilizer bar
 Spring and damper assembly.
UPPER CONTROL ARM

- Bolt
1
2 - Bush
3 - Locknut
4 - Bolt
5 - Bush
6 - Locknut
7 - Upper control arm
8 - Ball joint
9 - Washer
10 - Locknut
The cast aluminum upper control arm is a wishbone design with 3 mounting points. Two bushed mountings locate in brackets
on the crossbeam. The outer end has a ball joint which mates with the wheel knuckle.
LOWER CONTROL ARM

1 - Bolt
2 - Bush
3 - Locknut
4 - Bolt
5 - Bush
6 - Caged nut
7 - Lower control arm
8 - Spring and damper assembly attachment
9 - Stabilizer link attachment
10 - Locknut
11 - Bolt
The cast aluminum lower control arm is a wishbone design with 3 bushed mounting points. Two bushes locate between
brackets on the crossbeam and the outer bush locates in the wheel knuckle.
The rear of the control arm has mounting points for the spring and damper assembly and the stabilizer link.
TOE-LINK

1 - Locknut
2 - Washer
3 - Inner rod and ball joint
4 - Locknut
5 - Outer rod
6 - Bolt
7 - Outer ball joint
8 - Locknut
The toe-link is located between the wheel knuckle and brackets on the rear crossbeam.
The toe-link comprises an inner rod with integral ball joint. The inner ball joint has a threaded spigot which locates in a
bracket on the crossbeam and is secured with a washer and locknut. The rod has an internal thread which accepts the outer
rod.
The outer rod has a ball joint at its outer end which is located between 2 brackets on the wheel knuckle, and is secured with
a bolt and locknut.
The length of the toe-link can be adjusted by rotating the inner and outer rods. This allows for adjustment of the toe angle
for the rear wheel. Once set the inner and outer rods can be locked in position by tightening a locknut against the inner rod.
WHEEL KNUCKLE

1 - Hub attachment bolt (4 off)
2 - Upper control arm attachment
3 - Wheel knuckle
4 - Toe-link attachment
5 - Wheel hub and bearing assembly
6 - Half shaft nut
7 - Brake dust shield attachment
8 - Lower control arm attachment
9 - Brake caliper attachment
The wheel knuckle is an aluminum casting which provides for the attachment of the upper and lower control arms and the
toe-link. The wheel knuckle also provides the mounting locations for the wheel hub and bearing assembly, the wheel speed
sensor, the brake caliper and the brake dust shield, which is secured with 3 rivets.
The wheel hub and bearing assembly is a non-serviceable component that requires replacement as a complete assembly. It
is secured to the wheel knuckle with 4 bolts. A magnetic encoder ring for the wheel speed sensor is incorporated into the
wheel bearing.
STABILIZER BAR

1 - Stabilizer bar
2 - Bracket (2 off)
3 - Bush (2 off)
4 - Locknut (2 off)
5 - Stabilizer link (2 off)
6 - Locknut (2 off)
7 - Caged nut (2 off)
8 - Bolt (2 off)
The stabilizer bar is attached to the top of the crossbeam with 2 bushes and mounting brackets. The brackets are secured to
the crossbeam with bolts and caged nuts. The stabilizer bar has crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed in position on the
inside edges of the bushes. The collars prevent sideways movement of the stabilizer bar.
The stabilizer bar is manufactured from manganese steel and has a diameter of 17 mm (0.669 in.). The torsional rate of the
stabilizer bar differs between models, and is color coded for identification.
Each end of the stabilizer bar curves rearward to attach to a ball joint on each stabilizer link. Each link is attached via a
second ball joint to a cast bracket on the lower control arm which is secured with a locknut. The links allow the stabilizer bar
to move with the wheel travel providing maximum effectiveness.
The stabilizer bar is attached to the forward face of the chassis front subframe. The stabilizer bar is attached to the subframe
with 2 rubber bushes. Pressed steel brackets locate over the bushes and are attached to the cross member with bolts
screwed into threaded locations in the subframe.
SPRING AND DAMPER ASSEMBLY

1 - Damper rod self locking nut
2 - Top mount self locking nut
3 - Spring
4 - Spring packer
5 - Spring aid
6 - Damper
7 - Bolt
8 - Gaiter
9 - Upper spring seat
10 - Top mount
The spring and damper assemblies are attached to cast brackets on the lower control arms and to the rear floor side
member assemblies via the 4 studs in the top plate. As on the front suspension, there are three variants of spring and
damper assembly:
 A conventional oil damped damper.

 On vehicles with the adaptive dynamics system, a continuously variable adaptive damper.
and Operation).
Different combinations of springs and dampers are available depending on the vehicle model. The conventional and adaptive
dampers are of a similar construction.
The dampers are a monotube design with a spring seat welded onto the damper tube. The lower end of the damper has a
bushed mounting which locates in the lower control arm and is secured with a bolt.
The damper functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through internal galleries in a piston, providing damping of
undulations in the road surface.
The damper piston is connected to a damper rod which is sealed at its exit point from the damper body. The threaded outer
end of the damper rod locates through a hole in the top mount. A self locking nut secures the top mount to the damper rod.
On adaptive dampers an electrical connector is incorporated into the outer end of the damper rod.
The damper rod is fitted with a spring aid which prevents the top mount making contact with the top of the damper body
during full suspension compression and also assists with the suspension tune.
The spring rate of the coil springs can differ between models and are color coded for identification. The coil spring locates on
a spring packer and a lower spring seat which is integral with the damper body. The spring locates in an upper spring seat
which is located on the underside of the top mount.
The top mount has 4 studs which locate through mating holes in the vehicle rear floor side member and are secured with self
locking nuts.
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension
workshop manual.REFER to: (204-02)
Rear Suspension (Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
 Damaged suspension dampers
4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Evidence of fluid on suspension  Fluid on damper from an external  Damper not faulty, do not
damper source renew
 Fluid leaking from damper  GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST A : DAMPER FLUID LEAK DIAGNOSIS

A1: ASSESS LEAK
NOTE: Residual oil left over from the damper assembly process may create oil staining on the damper tube. This will
not affect the function of the damper.
NOTE: Slight seepage is considered normal.
1 Assess the extent of the oil leakage
Is the leakage serious enough to indicate that the damper seal has failed?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : CONFIRM LEAK

B1: ROAD TEST
1 Clean all traces of oil from the damper
2 Drive the vehicle over a speed bump or similar ten times
Is any fluid visible on the outside of the damper?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DAMPER STICKOUT TEST

C1: DAMPER STICKOUT TEST
NOTE: If a significant quantity of fluid has leaked out of the damper, the dividing piston will be displaced upwards in
the tube by the pressure of the gas below it. This will limit the downward travel of the piston.
1 Remove the suspension strut assembly
REFER to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
(204-02, Removal and Installation).
2 Remove the spring
3 Remove the bump stop
4 Push the damper piston fully into the damper tube
5 Measure and record the stickout dimension (the
distance between the damper tube cap and the
piston rod shoulder)
Is the stickout dimension greater than 12.0mm?

Yes
Damper unserviceable. Install a new suspension
damper. Enclose a record of the stickout dimension
with the returned part.
No
Damper serviceable. Re-assemble and re-install the
suspension strut
REFER to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Rear Suspension - Lower Arm
Removal


and Installation).
3. Torque: 103 Nm
4.
5. WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is

installed.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the

Torque: 48 Nm
6. Torque: 133 Nm
7. CAUTION: Make sure the wheel knuckle is

supported. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in damage to the vehicle.
Torque: 150 Nm
8. Torque: 192 Nm
9. CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is
installed.
Torque: 192 Nm
Installation

2. Carry out the final suspension tightening with the vehicle on its
wheels.
Rear Suspension - Rear Shock Absorber
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).
Vehicles with convertible top

3. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - Convertible (501-05 Interior
Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Vehicles without convertible top

4. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - 2-Door (501-05 Interior Trim
and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
All vehicles
5. Torque: 27 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:

prior to removal.
Make sure the alignment mark points

towards the front of the vehicle.
Torque: 133 Nm
7.
 Make sure that the spring and shock
absorber assembly is installed to the spring
compressor with the alignment mark facing
upwards.
8.
9. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care when handling the

component.

prior to removal.
Torque: 27 Nm
Installation

Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal


2. Remove the rear subframe assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and
Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
Disconnect the LH rear ABS sensor.

 Disconnect the electrical connector.
 Release the 2 clips.
 Carefully tie the harness aside.
 Repeat the above procedure for the other
side.
4. Disconnect the electronic parking brake actuator

electrical connector.
 Release the electrical connector.
5. Remove the headlamp leveling sensor link.


Release both stabilizer bar links.
 Remove the bump stops.
7. Remove the stabilizer bar bushings.

 Release the bushings.
8. With assistance, remove the rear stabilizer bar.

 Raise the suspension arms, to release the
bar.
Installation
1. With assistance, install the rear stabilizer bar.
2. Install the stabilizer bar bushings.

 Tighten to 55 Nm.
Install the stabilizer bar links.

 Install the bump stops.
4. Connect the electronic parking brake actuator

 Secure the electrical connector.
5. Install the height sensor link.
6. Connect the LH rear ABS sensor.

 Connect the electrical connector.
 Carefully secure the clips.
 Repeat the above procedure for the other
side.
7. Install the rear subframe.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and
Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal


2. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.
joint rotating.
Remove the LH stabilizer bar link.

Installation
rotating.
Install the stabilizer bar link.

 Tighten the nuts to 48 Nm (35 lb.ft).

Rear Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing
Special Tool(s)
204-250
Wheel bearing install and removal tool
204-269
Flange remover forcing screw
204-305
Remover, Wheel Bearing
204-726
Remover/Installer, Wheel Bearing
204-727A
Installer, Wheel Bearing
204-791
Installer, Wheel Bearing
205-491
Hub puller
205-491-1
Adapter nuts
205-725
Remover/Installer, Wheel Hub
Removal

stands

and Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach
the halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the
halfshaft.
Special Tool(s): 205-491, 205-491-1, 204-269

11. Special Tool(s): 204-726, 205-725
12. Special Tool(s): 204-305, 204-726, 205-725

13.
14. Special Tool(s): 204-726
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure correct alignment of the bearing

is maintained when installing into the hub carrier.
Special Tool(s): 204-727A, 204-791

2.
3. NOTE: Make sure the correct alignment of the

drive flange is maintained when installing into the
hub carrier and bearing assembly.
Special Tool(s): 204-726, 204-250
4. CAUTION: The final tightening of the

suspension components must be carried out with
the vehicle on its wheels.
Torque: 96 Nm
5. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger

tight.
NOTE: The wheel hub nut is not tightened at this

stage.
Torque: 190 Nm

Torque: 63 Nm
8. Torque: 6 Nm
9.
10. Torque: 103 Nm
11. CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the

nut. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the component.
Torque: 300 Nm
and Installation).
Rear Suspension - Tie Bar
Removal


joint rotating.
Remove the tie rod.

 Remove and discard the 2 tie-rod end
retaining nuts.
Installation
rotating.
Install the tie rod.

 Tigten the new inner nut to 90 Nm (59 lb.ft).
 Tighten the new outer nut to 55 Nm (41 lb.ft).

check and adjust the wheel alignment.
Rear Suspension - Upper Arm
Special Tool(s)
Brake pedal hold down tool JDS 9013
Removal


3. CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint

finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove
the fluid and clean the area with water.
NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this

operation.
NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Disconnect the brake hose from the brake caliper.

 Using the special tool, press and hold the
brake pedal.
 Remove and discard the two sealing
washers.
4. Release the rear wheel speed sensor lead.
5. Remove the LH upper arm.
 LH rear: Remove the upper arm 2 nuts and
bolts.
Installation
1. CAUTION: The final tightening of the upper arm must be

carried out with the vehicle on it's wheels.
Install the upper arm.

 Tighten the nuts and bolts to 97 Nm (72 lb.ft).
 Tighten the nut to 90 Nm (66 lb.ft).
Connect the brake hose to the brake caliper.

 Install 2 new sealing washers.
 Tighten the union to 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
3. Install the rear wheel speed sensor lead.

5. Bleed the brake system.
For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding
(206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Wheels and Tires -
Wheel and Tire Specification
NOTE: Spare wheel assembly not fitted with runflat tires.
NOTE: As tire fitment can vary in individual markets, consult the vehicle handbook or tire label for further information.
Wheel Size Tire Type Tire Size

8.5" x 18" Continental Sport Contact 2 245/45R 18 96Y
9.5"v x 18" Continental Sport Contact 2 275/40R 18 99Y
8.5" x 19" Dunlop Sport 01 245/40R 19 94Y
8.5" x 19" (runflat) Dunlop Sport 01 DSST 245/40R 19 94Y
9.5" x 19" Dunlop Sport 01 275/35R 19 96Y
9.5" x 19" (runflat) Dunlop Sport 01 DSST 275/35R 19 96Y
8.5" x 20" Dunlop Sport Maxx Directional 255/35R 20 97Y
9.5" x 20" Dunlop Sport Maxx Directional 285/30R 20 99Y
4" x 18" Pirelli (spare) T135/80R 18 104M
Tire Pressures
Tire Pressure
Description Front Rear Space Saver Spare
All Derivatives 2.1 bar (30 lb/in²) 2.3 bar (33 lb/in²) 4.2 bar (60 lb/in²)
Wheel nuts 125 92
Tire low pressure sensor 6.5 5
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
INTRODUCTION
A number of alloy wheels are available ranging from 18 in. to 20 in. diameter. The rim widths are 8.5 or 9.0 in. for front
wheels and 9.5 or 10.5 in. for rear wheels. An alloy space saver wheel is a standard fitment, except for vehicles fitted with
run-flat tires.
A Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is also available as a standard or optional fitment dependant on market. The
TPMS is a driver warning system if a tire pressure is outside predetermined thresholds.
A 'run-flat' tire option is available with the 19 in. wheel option. Vehicles fitted with these tires have the TPMS fitted as
standard and are not supplied with a spare wheel, vehicle jack or wheel brace.
WHEELS

A - Venus (8.5J X 18 Front/9.5J X 18 Rear)
B - Carelia (8.5J X 19 Front/9.5J X 19 Rear)
C - Sabre - Run-flat tires (8.5J X 19 Front/9.5J X 19 Rear)
D - Jupiter (8.5J X 19 Front/9.5J X 19 Rear)
E - Senta (8.5J X 20 Front/9.5J X 20 Rear)
F - Cremona (8.5J X 20 Front/9.5J X 20 Rear)
G - Vortex (9.0J X 20 Front/10.5J X 20 Rear)
H - Space saver wheel (4J X 18)
TIRES
Tires are available in a number of sizes and tread patterns dependent on vehicle specification. Tire sizes are as follows:
 T135/80R18 (space saver wheel)

 245/45ZR18 Front / 275/40ZR18 Rear
 245/40ZR19 Front / 275/35ZR19 Rear
 255/35ZR20 Front / 285/30ZR20 Rear
 255/35ZR20 Front / 295/30ZR20 Rear.
WARNING: Tires should be inflated to the recommended pressures (shown on a label on the 'B' pillar) only when the
tires are cold (ambient temperature). If the tires have been subjected to use or exposed to direct sunlight, move the vehicle
into a shaded position and allow the tires to cool before checking/adjusting the pressures.
Tire Changing
NOTE: The TPMS valve should be serviced using the suitable service kit, each time the tyre is dismounted, to ensure an air
tight seal. Attention should be made to the detail of fitting this kit.
On vehicles fitted the TPMS, care must be taken when removing and refitting tires to ensure that the tire pressure sensor is
not damaged.
Vehicles fitted with TPMS can be visually identified by an external metal locknut and valve of the tire pressure sensor on the
road wheels. Vehicles without TPMS will have rubber tire valve.

1 - Tire valve and pressure sensor
2 - Tire fitting/removal tool initial start position
3 - High tire and bead tension area
4 - Low tire and bead tension area
When removing the tire, the bead breaker must not be used within 90 degrees of the tire valve in each direction on each
side of the tire.
When using the tire removal machine, the fitting arm start position must be positioned as shown in the tire changing
illustration for each side of the tire. The wheel can then be rotated through 180 degrees in a counter-clockwise direction.
This will relieve tension from the tire bead allowing the remaining 180 degrees of the tire to be manually pulled from the rim.
When refitting the tire, position the fitting arm as shown. Rotate the tire and take care that the bead on the low tension side
of the tire does not damage the sensor.
Run-Flat Tires
Run-flat tires can be handled, fitted and removed using the same principles as used for normal low profile and high-
performance tires, with two exceptions:
 They are always fitted with tire pressure sensors

 They have thicker bead cores and more rigid sidewalls which require special care when being mounted on the rims.
It is recommended that the tire fitting machine is fitted with plastic rollers for the upper and lower bead. This will ensure that
the bead is removed gently, protecting the rims and the tire pressure sensors.
Adequate amounts of special fitting lubricant must be used to ensure that the sidewalls move with the minimum exertion and
locate on the rim flange correctly.
Run-flat tires can be identified by the marking 'RSC' on the tire sidewall.
NOTE: Vehicles fitted with run-flat tires are not supplied with a spare wheel, vehicle jack or wheel brace.
TREAD Act - NAS Only
Vehicles supplied to the North American markets must comply with the legislation of the Transport Recall Enhancement,
Accountability and Documentation (TREAD) act. Part of the requirement of the TREAD act is for the vehicle to display a label
which defines the recommended tire inflation pressure, load limits and maximum load of passengers and luggage weight the
vehicle can safely carry. This label will be specific to each individual vehicle and will be installed on the production line. The
label is positioned on the driver's side 'B' pillar on NAS vehicles and the inside rear face of the LH door on Canadian
specification vehicles.
This label must not be removed from the vehicle. The label information will only define the specification of the vehicle as it
came off the production line. It will not include dealer or owner fitted accessory wheels and tires of differing size from the
original fitment.
If the label is damaged or removed for body repair, it must be replaced with a new label specific to that vehicle. A new label
is requested from Jaguar parts and will be printed specifically for the supplied VIN of the vehicle.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Tire pressure sensor (4 off)
2 - Initiator (4 off)
3 - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) receiver
4 - TPMS module
OVERVIEW
The TPMS is a driver assistance system which assists the driver to maintain the tire pressures at the optimum level. The
TPMS is a standard fitment on North American Specification (NAS) vehicles and an optional fitment in other markets. The
TPMS system has the following benefits:
 Improve fuel consumption

 Maintain ride and handling characteristics
 Reduce the risk of rapid tire deflation - which may be caused by under inflated tires
 Comply with legislation requirements in relevant markets.
CAUTION: The TPMS is not intended as a replacement for regular tire pressure and tire condition checks and should be
considered as additional to good tire maintenance practices.
The TPMS measures the pressure in each of the tires on the vehicle (the space saver spare wheel is not monitored) and
issues warnings to the driver if any of the pressures deviate from defined tolerances.
NOTE: During a 'blow-out' a very rapid reduction in pressure is experienced. The system is not intended to warn the driver of
a 'blow-out', since it is not possible to give the driver sufficient warning that such an event is occurring, due to its short
duration. The design of the TPMS is to assist the driver in keeping the tires at the correct pressure, which will assist to
reduce the likelihood of a tire 'blow-out' occurring.
The controlling software for the TPMS is located within a TPMS module. The software detects the following:
 the tire pressure is below the recommended low pressure value - under inflated tire
 the position of the tire on the vehicle.
The system comprises a TPMS module, a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver, 4 initiators and 4 tire pressure sensors (the space
saver spare wheel is not fitted with a sensor).
The TPMS module is located behind the Left Hand (LH) rear passenger seat, behind the Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) and the
TPMS RF receiver is located on the AJB mounting bracket. The front initiators are positioned at the front of the wheel arches,
behind the fender splash shields. The rear initiators are positioned at the rear of the rear wheel arches, behind the fender
splash shields.
The 4 initiators are hard wired to the TPMS module. The initiators transmit 125 KHz Low Frequency (LF) signals to the tire
pressure sensors which respond by modifying the mode status within the RF transmission. The 315 or 433 MHz RF signals
are detected by the RF receiver which is connected directly to the TPMS module. The received RF signals from the tire
pressure sensors are passed to the TPMS module and contain identification, pressure, temperature and acceleration
information for each wheel and tire.
The TPMS module communicates with the instrument cluster via the medium speed CAN bus to provide the driver with
appropriate warnings. The TPMS module also indicates status or failure of the TPMS or components.
Tire Location and Identification
The TPMS can identify the position of the wheels on the vehicle and assign a received tire pressure sensor identification to a
specific position on the vehicle, for example FL (front left), FR (front right), RL (rear left) and RR (rear right). This feature is
required because of the different pressure targets and threshold between the front and rear tires.
The wheel location is performed automatically by the TPMS module using an 'auto-location' function. This function is fully
automatic and requires no input from the driver. The TPMS module automatically re-learns the position of the wheels on the
vehicle if the tire pressure sensors are replaced or the wheel positions on the vehicle are changed.
The TPMS software can automatically detect, under all operating conditions, the following:
 one or more new tire pressure sensors have been fitted

 one or more tire pressure sensors have stopped transmitting
 TPMS module can reject identifications from tire pressure sensors which do not belong to the vehicle
 two 'running' wheels on the vehicle have changed positions.
If a new tire pressure sensor is fitted on any 'running' wheel, the module can learn the new sensor identification
automatically when the vehicle is driven for more than 15 minutes at a speed of more than 20 km/h (12.5 mph).
The tire learn and location process is ready to commence when the vehicle has been stationary or travelling at less than 12
mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. This is known as 'parking mode'. The learn/locate process requires the vehicle to be driven
at speeds of more than 12 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If the vehicle speed reduces to below 12 mph (20 km/h), the
learn process timer is suspended until the vehicle speed increases to more than 12 mph (20 km/h), after which time the
timer is resumed. If the vehicle speed remains below 12 mph (20 km/h) for more than 15 minutes, the timer is set to zero
and process starts again.
If the tire pressure sensors fitted to the running wheels vehicle are changed, the module can learn the new sensor
identifications automatically. The learn function requires no manual intervention by the driver.
Spare Tire Identification
Tire pressure sensors are not fitted to the space saver spare wheel and therefore the spare wheel is not monitored.
Initiators
Four initiators are fitted to the vehicle. The front initiators are located near the front of the front wheel arches, behind the
fender splash shields. The rear initiators are located at the rear of the rear wheel arches, behind the fender splash shields.
Each initiator has a connector which connects to the vehicle body harness.
The initiator is a passive, LF transmitter. The initiators transmit their signals which are received by the tire pressure sensors,
prompting them to modify their mode status.
The TPMS module energises each initiator in turn using LF drivers. The corresponding tire pressure sensor detects the LF
signal and responds by modifying the mode status within the RF transmission.
Tire Pressure Sensor
The TPMS uses active tire pressure sensors which are located on each wheel, inside the tire cavity. The sensor incorporates
the tire valve and is secured in the wheel by a nut on the outside of the wheel. The sensor contains a Printed Circuit Board
(PCB) which houses a Positive Temperature Co-efficient (PTC) sensor, a Piezo pressure sensor. a radio receiver and
transmitter and a lithium battery.
The tire pressure sensors use the PTC sensor and the Piezo sensor to periodically measure the pressure and temperature of
the air inside the tire. The data is transmitted by RF data signals at either 315 MHz or 433 MHz dependant on market
requirements.
The RF transmission from the sensor contains a unique identification code in its transmission data. This allows the TPMS to
identify the wheel on the vehicle. If the sensor is replaced on a 'running' wheel, the new sensor identification will be learnt
when the vehicle is driven at speed of more than 20 km/h (12.5 mph) for 15 minutes.
The tire pressure sensor can also detect when the wheel is rotating. In order to preserve battery power, the sensor uses
different transmission rates when the wheel is stationary or moving.
The care points detailed in 'Tire Changing' earlier in this section must be followed to avoid damage to the sensor. If a new
sensor is fitted, a new nut, seal and washer must also be fitted and the sensor nut tightened to the correct torque as given in
the Service Repair Manual.
Instrument Cluster Indications

1 - Low tire pressure warning indicator
2 - Message centre
The warning indications to the driver are common on all vehicles fitted with TPMS. The driver is alerted to system warnings
by a low tire pressure warning indicator in the instrument cluster and an applicable text message in the message centre.
The TPMS module passes system status information to the instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. The
instrument cluster then converts this data into illumination of the warning indicator and display of an appropriate message.
When the ignition is switched on, the warning indicator is illuminated for 3 seconds for a bulb check.
NOTE: If the vehicle is not fitted with the TPMS, the warning indicator will not illuminate.
The instrument cluster checks, within the 3 second bulb check period, for a CAN bus message from the TPMS. During this
time the TPMS performs internal tests and CAN bus initialisation. The warning indicator will be extinguished if the TPMS
module does not issue a fault message or tire pressure warning message.
If a TPMS fault warning message is detected by the instrument cluster at ignition on, the warning indicator will illuminate on
vehicles up to 2007.25MY and will flash on vehicles from 2007.25MY for 72 seconds after the 3 second bulb check period and
then remain permanently illuminated.
If a tire pressure warning message is detected by the instrument cluster at ignition on, the warning indicator will extinguish
briefly after the 3 second bulb check period, before re-illuminating to indicate a tire pressure warning.
The following table shows the warning indicator functionality for given events:
Event Instrument Cluster Indications

Low pressure warning limit reached in one Warning indicator illuminated. 'CHECK TYRE PRESSURE' message displayed and
wheel applicable tire highlighted on display.
Low pressure warning limit reached in one Warning indicator illuminated. 'CHECK ALL TYRE PRESSURES' message displayed.
or more wheels in low speed mode (only if
programmed or learning)
TPMS fault On vehicles up to 2007.25MY - Warning indicator permanently illuminated. On
vehicles from 2007.25MY - Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then
permanently illuminated. 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
No transmission from a specific tire Warning indicator illuminated. 'TYRE NOT MONITORED' message displayed and
pressure sensor or Specific tyre pressure Amber LED flashes for 72 seconds. Amber LED illuminated at next and
sensor fault subsequent ignition on cycle.
No transmission from more than one tyre Warning indicator illuminated. 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message
pressure sensor or More than one tyre displayed and Amber LED flashes for 72 seconds. Amber LED illuminated at next
pressure sensor fault and subsequent ignition on cycle.
CAN signals missing On vehicles up to 2007.25MY - Warning indicator permanently illuminated. On
vehicles from 2007.25MY - Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then
permanently illuminated. 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; F = RF Transmission; N = Medium speed CAN bus; W = LF Transmission

1 - Battery
2 - Megafuse (175A)
3 - Megafuse (175A)
4 - Central Junction Box (CJB)
5 - Auxiliary junction box
6 - TPMS module
-
7 TPMS receiver
8 - Initiators
9 - Tire pressure sensors
10 - Instrument cluster
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Each time the vehicle is driven the TPMS module activates each initiator in turn to transmit a LF 125 KHz signal to each tire
pressure sensor. The LF signal is received by the tire pressure sensor which responds by transmitting a 315 or 433 MHz
(depending on market) signal which is received by the RF receiver. The signal contains coded data which corresponds to
sensor identification, air pressure, air temperature and acceleration data and is passed to the TPMS module.
When the vehicle has been parked for more than 15 minutes and then driven at a speed of more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h),
the initiators fire in turn for 6 seconds on all 433 MHz vehicles or for 18 seconds on 315 MHz vehicles in the following order:
 Front left
 6 second pause (for the TPMS module to detect a response from the tire pressure sensor)
 Front right
 6 second pause
 Rear right
 6 second pause
 Rear left
 6 second pause.
Each tire pressure sensor responds in turn which allows the TPMS module to establish the sensor positions at the start of the
drive cycle. This process is repeated up to three times but less if the sensor positions are already known. The process is
known as 'Auto Location' and takes 2 to 4 minutes to complete.
During this period the tire pressure sensors transmit at regular intervals, once every 5 seconds (once every 15 seconds on
315 MHz vehicles). For the remainder of the drive cycle the tire pressure sensors transmit once every 60 seconds or more
often if a change of tire pressure is sensed until the vehicle stops and the TPMS returns to the parking mode.
Once the wheel positions have been established, the initiators stop transmitting the LF signal and do not transmit again until
the vehicle has been parked for more than 15 minutes.
The warning appears in the instrument cluster message centre when the inflation pressure has fallen to 25% of the nominal
pressure. The displayed message will also include the position(s) of the affected wheel(s) displayed on a vehicle graphic.
The TPMS enters 'Parking Mode' after the vehicle speed has been less than 20 km/h (12.5 mph) for 15 minutes. In parking
mode the tire pressure sensors transmit a coded RF signal once every 13 hours. If the tire pressure decreases by more than
0.06 bar (1 lbf/in2), the sensor will transmit more often if pressure in the tire is being lost.
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
For a detailed description of the wheels and tires, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation).
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does
not guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor
vehicle.
1. Verify the customer complaint. As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in
diagnosing the cause(s). Confirm which of the following two warning types (A or B) exist for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System when the ignition status is switched from 'OFF' to 'ON'
 (A) Check Tire Pressure Warnings. A low tire pressure warning will continuously illuminate the low
tire pressure warning lamp. This warning may be accompanied by a text message such as CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE (refer to owner literature). The manufacturer approved diagnostic system does NOT need to
be used. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are not generated with this type of warning. To extinguish this
warning it is essential that, with the ignition 'ON', all vehicle tires (including the spare) are to be set to
the correct pressure as stated in the vehicle handbook or as indicated on the placard label in the
passenger/driver door aperture. It is not necessary to drive the vehicle to clear 'check tire
pressure' warnings - just changing the tire pressure causes the tire low pressure sensor to
transmit new data.
NOTE: The tire pressures should be set by:
 Using a calibrated tire pressure gauge

 With 'cold' tires (vehicle parked in the ambient temperature for at least one hour, not in a garage
with an artificial ambient temperature)
NOTE: If the tire pressure warning does not clear within two minutes, it is likely that the gauge is not
correctly calibrated or the tires are 'warm'. Carry out the following steps until the warning has cleared:
 Increase the tire pressures by 3psi

 Wait a further two minutes
 When the tires are at ambient temperature and a calibrated gauge is available, reset the tire
pressures to the correct pressure.
NOTE: Tire pressure adjustments are part of routine owner maintenance. Tire pressure adjustments that
are required due to a lack of owner maintenance are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.
 (B) System Fault Warnings. When a system fault is detected, the low tire pressure warning lamp will
flash for approximately 75 seconds prior to being continuously illuminated. Visually inspect for obvious
signs of damage and system integrity. Check for the presence of tire low pressure sensors on all four
wheels (note: a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one).
2. Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
NOTE: If the tester fails to communicate with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module, the following actions are
recommended:
 Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse, inspect and re-install (if intact). Test to see if
communications have been re-established.
 Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ignition fuse (if applicable), inspect and re-install (if intact). Test to
see if communications have been re-established.
 With ignition status set to 'ON', refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Tire Pressure Monitoring
System module for power, ignition and ground supplies .
 Carry out CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
DTC Index
CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit,
part number 3548-1358-00
NOTE: If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to
the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component.
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. If this is the case, match the
five digits from the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits
give extra information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
NOTE: When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM
leads into account.
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
NOTE: If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may
be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
DTC Description Possible Cause Action

C1A56- Left Front Tire Pressure  Missing, incompatible or GO to Pinpoint Test F.
31 Sensor and Transmitter defective tire low pressure
Assembly-no signal sensor or radio frequency
receiver
C1A56- Left Front Tire Pressure  Information only - vehicle No action required.
68 Sensor and Transmitter exposed to extreme
Assembly-event temperature environment
information and/or tire low pressure
sensor low battery voltage
event
C1A56- Left Front Tire Pressure  Tire low pressure sensor Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. Refer
91 Sensor and Transmitter has reported out of range to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Assembly-parametric information for pressure,
temperature or
acceleration
C1A56- Left Front Tire Pressure  No tire low pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.
93 Sensor and Transmitter sensor can be localized at
Assembly-no operation this position due to an
initiator or tire low
pressure sensor
malfunction
C1A57- Left Front Initiator-circuit  Left front initiator circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B. Refer to Pinpoint test B1
11 short to ground is short to ground
C1A57- Left Front Initiator-circuit  Left front initiator circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B. Go to Pinpoint test B2
12 short to battery is short to power
C1A57- Left Front Initiator-circuit  Left front initiator circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B. Go to Pinpoint test B9
13 open open
C1A58- Right Front Tire Pressure  Missing, incompatible or GO to Pinpoint Test F.
receiver
C1A58- Right Front Tire Pressure  Information only - vehicle No action required.
event
C1A58- Right Front Tire Pressure  Tire low pressure sensor Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. refer
temperature or
acceleration
C1A58- Right Front Tire Pressure  No tire low pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.
pressure sensor
malfunction
C1A59- Right Front Initiator-  Right front initiator circuit GO to Pinpoint Test C. Go to Pinpoint test C1
11 circuit short to ground is short to ground
12 circuit short to battery is short to power
13 circuit open open
C1A60- Left Rear Tire Pressure  Missing, incompatible or GO to Pinpoint Test F.
receiver
C1A60- Left Rear Tire Pressure  Information only - vehicle No action required.
event
C1A60- Left Rear Tire Pressure  Tire low pressure sensor Replace defective tire low pressure sensor, refer
temperature or
acceleration
C1A60- Left Rear Tire Pressure  No tire low pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.
pressure sensor
malfunction
C1A61- Left Rear Initiator-circuit  Left rear initiator circuit GO to Pinpoint Test D. Go to Pinpoint test D1
11 short to ground short to ground
12 short to battery short to power
13 open open
C1A62- Right Rear Tire Pressure  Missing, incompatible or GO to Pinpoint Test F.
receiver
C1A62- Right Rear Tire Pressure  Information only - vehicle No action required.
event
C1A62- Right Rear Tire Pressure  Tire low pressure sensor Replace defective tire low pressure sensor, refer
temperature or
acceleration
C1A62- Right Rear Tire Pressure  No tire low pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.
pressure sensor
malfunction
C1A63- Right Rear Initiator-  Right rear initiator circuit GO to Pinpoint Test E. Go to Pinpoint test E1
11 circuit short to ground short to ground
12 circuit short to battery short to power
13 circuit open open
C1A64- Spare Wheel Tire  Information only - vehicle No action required.
68 Pressure Sensor and exposed to extreme
Transmitter Assembly- temperature environment
event information and/or tire low pressure
event
C1A64- Spare Wheel Tire  Tire low pressure sensor Replace defective tire low pressure sensor, refer
91 Pressure Sensor and has reported out of range to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Transmitter Assembly- information for pressure,
parametric temperature or
acceleration
C1A64- Spare Wheel Tire  Missing, incompatible or GO to Pinpoint Test H.
93 Pressure Sensor and defective tire low pressure
Transmitter Assembly-no sensor or radio frequency
operation receiver
C1D19- External Receiver Data  Tire pressure monitoring GO to Pinpoint Test A.
11 Line-circuit short to system radio frequency
ground receiver or data line
circuit is short to ground
C1D19- External Receiver Data  Tire pressure monitoring GO to Pinpoint Test I.
12 Line-circuit short to system radio frequency
battery receiver or data line
circuit is short to power
C1D19- External Receiver Data  Radio Frequency reception GO to Pinpoint Test J.
87 Line-missing message blocked
 Tire pressure monitoring
system radio frequency
receiver faulty
 Tire pressure monitoring
system radio frequency
receiver or data line
circuits open circuit
 Missing, incompatible or
defective tire low pressure
sensors
U0010- Medium Speed CAN  CAN bus fault Carry out CAN network integrity tests. Refer to the
88 Communication Bus-bus electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN network
off for short, open circuit.
U0140- Lost communication with  CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
00 body control module-no  Central Junction Box fault Central Junction Box power and ground supplies
sub type information for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests.
U0142- Lost Communication With  CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
00 Body Control Module "B"  Auxiliary Junction Box Auxiliary Junction Box power and ground supplies
-no sub type information fault for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests.
U0155- Lost Communications  CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
00 With Instrument Panel  Instrument cluster fault instrument cluster power and ground supplies for
Cluster (IPC) Control short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
Module-no sub type integrity tests.
information
U0164- Lost Communication With  CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
00 HVAC Control Module-no  Climate control module climate control module power and ground supplies
sub type information fault for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests.
U0300- Internal Control Module  Incompatible tire pressure Check correct tire pressure monitoring system
00 Software Incompatibility- monitoring system module is installed to vehicle specification,
no sub type information module for vehicle CAN otherwise suspect the Auxiliary Junction Box.
network
U0415- Invalid Data Received  Invalid data received from Check Anti-Lock Braking System control module
00 From Anti-Lock Brake the Anti-Lock Braking and Instrument Cluster for related DTCs and refer
System (ABS) Control System Control Module to the relevant DTC Index. Carry out CAN network
Module-no subtype  CAN bus fault integrity tests.
information  Anti-Lock Braking System
fault
U0424- Invalid Data Received  HVAC control module fault Check climate control module for related DTCs and
00 From HVAC Control refer to relevant DTC Index.
Module-no sub type
information
U1A14- CAN Initialisation Failure-  Tire pressure monitoring Install a new tire pressure monitoring module.
49 internal electronic failure system module fault Refer to the new module/component installation
note at the top of the DTC Index.
U3000- Control Module-not  Tire pressure monitoring Check and amend the car configuration file.
55 configured system configuration data
is invalid
U3000- Control Module-missing  Tire pressure monitoring Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for related DTCs
87 message system configuration data and refer to the relevant DTC Index. Carry out
not received CAN network integrity test.
U3002- Vehicle Identification  Tire pressure monitoring NOTE: This DTC indicates that the tire pressure
81 Number - invalid serial system module and monitoring system module is not the original part
data received vehicle VIN mis-match installed to the vehicle at the factory/dealer and
could have been substituted. Refer to the note
above the DTC index about replacing components
which may remain under manufacturer warranty.
Re-install the original or a new tire pressure

monitoring system control module.
Component Tests
Wheels and Tires
For wheel and tire specification information (pressures, torques, etc).
When replacing wheels or tires, local legislation regarding health and safety must be complied with.
If the vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System installed, only Jaguar approved wheels and tires should be used. If
the wheel and tire size is changed (for example from R18 to R20) the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module should
be updated with the correct pressure information appropriate to the new wheel and tire set. Update the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System module using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
As a general guideline, only replace tires in pairs or as a set, and only with tires of equivalent size and specification.
Confirm the symptoms of the customer complaint.
As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in diagnosing the cause(s).
1. Before a road test, carry out a basic inspection to make sure the vehicle is safe and legal to drive.
Basic inspection
 Correct tire inflation

 Legal tire tread depth
 Cuts/Bulges in tire sidewall(s)
 Tire ply separation
 Embedded objects
 Wheel rim damage
 Correct tire installation (specification, direction of rotation, etc)
 Any obvious distortion of the tire (flat/high spots)
 Worn/Damaged steering or suspension components
Road test
If the results of the basic inspection are acceptable, carry out a road test to confirm the symptoms.
To reproduce the symptoms, test the vehicle on similar roads to those on which the fault occurs and at similar speeds
(provided it is legal to do so).
If the vibration or noise can be reproduced, note the speed at which it occurs and see if it is possible to drive through
the symptom, meaning, is it possible to alter the fault by driving faster or slower than the speed at which it occurs?
If it is possible, it is likely that the fault is caused by an imbalance in the wheel or tire.
If the vibration or noise gets worse as the vehicle speed increases, it is likely that the fault is caused by distortion in the
wheel or tire, or worn or damaged components.
Distortion checks
Check for distortion by raising the vehicle so that the wheels are free and placing an axle stand or similar fixed object
next to each wheel in turn.
If the stand is placed at the tread of the tire, the tire can be checked for ovality by turning the wheel by hand and
checking for high or low spots where the gap between the tread and the stand increases or reduces.
If the stand is placed next to the wheel rim or tire sidewall, the wheel and tire can be checked for run-out in a similar
way.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : C1D1911 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER

DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
A1: C1D1911 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, CA131.
3 Measure the resistance between
CA131, harness side Battery
Pin 1 Negative terminal
Is the resistance less than 5 Ohms?
Yes
GO to A2.GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.GO to A3.
A2: C1D1911 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector,
CA109.
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to A4.GO to A4.
A3: C1D1911 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
TO GROUND
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, CA131.
2 Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system run On Demand Self Test (0x0202).
Is the DTC C1D1911 set?
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
Investigate possible cause of intermittent failure.
A4: C1D1911 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
TO GROUND
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector,
CA109.
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module.
No
PINPOINT TEST B : LEFT FRONT LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

B1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the left hand front low-frequency initiator
electrical connector, FB013.
3 Measure the resistance between:

FB013, harness side Battery
Is the resistance less than 10,000 ohms?

Yes
GO to B5.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Pin 2 Positive terminal
Yes
GO to B6.
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Yes
GO to B7.
No
GO to B4.
B4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to B8.
No
GO to B9.
B5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
1 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module
connector, CA072.

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. This circuit contains
intermediate connectors, FB001 and FL070. For additional
information, refer to the wiring diagram. Clear the DTC
and run an On Demand Self Test (ODST) using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new Tire Pressure Monitoring System module.
REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module -
Convertible (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module - 2-
Door (Removal and Installation).
connector, CA072.
Yes
rectification.
No
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
connector, CA072.
Yes
rectification.
No
B9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
CA072, harness side FB013, harness side
Pin 14 Pin 2
Is the resistance greater than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the high resistance circuit. This circuit contains
rectification.
No
GO to B10.
B10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 13 Pin 1
Yes
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new left hand front low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front
Antenna (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
PINPOINT TEST C : RIGHT FRONT LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

C1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the right hand front low-frequency initiator
www.JagDocs.com
electrical connector, FB012.

Yes
GO to C5.
No
GO to C2.
C2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to C6.
No
GO to C3.
C3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Yes
GO to C7.
No
GO to C4.
C4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to C8.
No
GO to C9.
C5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
connector, FB072.

Yes
rectification.
No
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
C9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 16 Pin 2
Yes
rectification.
No
GO to C10.
C10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 15 Pin 1
Yes
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new right hand front low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front
Installation).
PINPOINT TEST D : LEFT REAR LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

D1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the left hand rear low-frequency initiator
electrical connector, RB010.
RB010, harness side Battery

Yes
GO to D5.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to D6.
No
GO to D3.
D3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Yes
GO to D7.
No
GO to D4.
D4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to D8.
No
GO to D9.
D5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
connector, CA072.

Yes
intermediate connector, RB001. For additional
rectification.
No
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
D9: CHECK THE INITIATOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
CA072, harness side RB010, harness side
Pin 6 Pin 2
Yes
rectification.
No
GO to E1.
D10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 5 Pin 1
Yes
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new rear left hand low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear
Installation).
PINPOINT TEST E : RIGHT REAR LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

E1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the right hand rear low-frequency initiator
electrical connector, RB009.

Yes
GO to E5.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to E6.
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Yes
GO to E7.
No
GO to E4.
E4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
GO to E8.
No
GO to E9.
E5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
connector, CA072.

Yes
rectification.
No
E9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 8 Pin 2
Yes
rectification.
No
GO to E10.
E10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Pin 7 Pin 1
Yes
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new rear right hand low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear
Installation).
PINPOINT TEST F : MISSING, INCOMPATIBLE OR DEFECTIVE RUNNING TIRE LOW PRESSURE
SENSOR OR RECEIVER
CONDITIONS
F1: CHECK FOR CORRECT WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY AND TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Establish that a full size running wheel and tire assembly has a tire low pressure sensor installed.
As a visual confirmation, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber
one and cannot be installed to a mini/space saver spare wheel.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
Install the correct wheel and tire assembly or tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in
accordance with that defined in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low
pressure sensor application.
F2: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse and re-install it. Clear DTCs and
leave the vehicle stationary for 15 minutes, then drive it at a speed greater than 15.5 mph (25
kph) continuously for at least 10 minutes.
(Note: If the vehicle speed drops below this value, the drive time to complete the test will need to be increased.)
The use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure
monitor system status – learn mode status’ will verify the completion of the test when the value
returns to ‘Inactive’.
2 Check for additional DTCs C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031, C1A6231, with identical time stamps.
Have all four DTCs logged with identical time stamps in the tire pressure monitoring system module?
Yes
Replace the tire pressure monitoring system radio frequency receiver.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal
and Installation).
No
GO to F3.
F3: VERIFY THE POSITION OF THE DEFECTIVE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Check tire pressure monitoring system DTCs.
Are any C1AXX31 DTCs logged?
Yes
Install the correct tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance with that defined
in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the
position identified by the logged DTC.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
No
No further action is required.
(Note: The use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure monitor system status –
learn completed successfully’ will verify the successful completion of the test.)
PINPOINT TEST G : LOCALIZATION FAILURE

CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Check for additional DTCs: C1A5711, C1A5712, C1A5713. C1A5911, C1A5912, C1A5913,
C1A6111, C1A6112, C1A6113, C1A6311, C1A6312, C1A6313.
Are any of the DTCs listed above also logged?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index and remedial actions.
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Check for additional DTCs: C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031 or C1A6231
Is a C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031 or C1A6231 DTC also logged?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index and remedial actions.
No
GO to G3.
G3: CHECK INITIATOR INSTALLATION
1 Check for correct installation of Initiator. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
Is the Initiator correctly installed?
Yes
GO to G4.
No
Rectify as required. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
G4: CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN INITIATOR HARNESS
1 Locate and remove module blue connector L.
2 Measure the resistance across the relevant initiator circuits within the blue connector.
Is the resistance less than 1 Ohm?
Yes
A value of less than 1 Ohm indicates a short circuit, rectify the short circuit as required.
No
position identified by the logged DTC.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST H : SPARE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR NO OPERATION

CONDITIONS
H1: ESTABLISH THE TYPE OF SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY INSTALLED
1 Establish the type of spare wheel and tire assembly Installed.
Is the spare wheel a mini/space saver type?
Yes
Tire low pressure sensors are not installed to mini/space-saver spare wheels. Tire low pressure
sensors are installed to full size spare wheels only. The DTC is to be ignored and no repair action
is required.
No
GO to H2.
H2: ESTABLISH THAT THE SPARE WHEEL HAS A TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR INSTALLED
1 Establish that the spare wheel has a tire low pressure sensor installed, considering the following
additional information:
 a) As a visual confirmation, the tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a
rubber one.
Is a tire low pressure sensor installed?
Yes
GO to H3.
No
A new spare tire low pressure sensor should be installed. Note: Refer to the note above the DTC
index about replacing components which may remain under manufacturer warranty. Refer to the
relevant section of the workshop manual.
H3: CONFIRM OPERATION OF THE SPARE WHEEL PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Deflate the spare tire, in close proximity to the vehicle, until it is completely deflated.
Complete an ignition cycle to ignition on and verify that the instrument cluster reports a spare
2
tire pressure warning for approximately 20 seconds.
3 Re-inflate the spare tire, in close proximity to the vehicle, to the recommended spare tire
pressure.
4 Complete an ignition cycle to ignition on and verify that the instrument cluster no longer reports
a spare tire pressure warning.
Does the instrument cluster continue to report a spare tire pressure warning?
Yes
GO to H4.
No
No repair action is required. It is possible that the customer may have placed items in the
vehicle's luggage compartment that prevented correct RF reception.
H4: VERIFY THAT THE SPARE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR ID HAS BEEN CORRECTLY PROGRAMMED TO
THE MODULE
1 Remove tire low pressure sensor. Record the 8 character hexadecimal ID written on the casing.
2 Use the approved diagnostic system to read the spare tire sensor ID from the module. Refer to
the relevant procedure in the workshop manual.
3 Compare the IDs from steps 1 & 2.
Do the IDs match?

Yes
Replace the spare tire low pressure sensor. Refer to the relevant installation section in the
workshop manual.
The identification for the sensor must be programmed into the tire pressure monitoring system
module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. The identification code is provided
on a label with the complete assembly and is also printed on the casing of each sensor.
No
Program the spare tire sensor ID, recorded in step 1, to the module using the approved
diagnostic system. The identification code is provided on a label with the complete assembly and
is also printed on the casing of each sensor.
Repeat test to ensure correct operation.GO to H3.
PINPOINT TEST I : C1D1912 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA
LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
I1: C1D1912 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
1 Ignition off.
Yes
GO to I2.
No
GO to I3.
I2: C1D1912 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
1 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector,
CA109.
Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to I4.
I3: C1D1912 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
TO POWER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
I4: C1D1912 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
TO POWER
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector,
CA109.
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST J : C1D1987 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA
LINE MISSING MESSAGE
CONDITIONS
J1: C1D1987 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE MISSING MESSAGE
Yes
GO to J2.
No
GO to J5.
J2: C1D1987 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT
1 Ignition off.
3 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector, CA109
CA131, harness side CA109, harness side
Pin 1 Pin4
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
REPAIR the high resistance/open circuit in wiring harness.
J3: C1D1987 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector, CA109
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.GO to J4.
No
J4: C1D1987 CHECK TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE
Yes
No
Test is complete. No further action is required.
J5: C1D1987 CHECK WHEELS HAVE TIRE SENSORS INSTALLED
NOTE: As a visual check, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one
and cannot be installed to a mini/space saver spare wheel.
1 Check that all full size running wheel and tire assemblies have tire low pressure sensors
installed.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed to all running wheel
positions?
Yes
GO to J6.
No
If agreed with the customer install correct tire low pressure sensors in accordance with that
defined in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application,
as required.
(Note: Confirm why the vehicle has non-Tire Pressure Monitoring System wheel & tire assemblies installed before installing tire
low pressure sensors, which are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.)
J6: C1D1987 CHECK TIRE SENSOR COMPATIBILITY TO TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM RECEIVER
1 Remove tire low pressure sensor from 1 wheel.
2 Verify the tire low pressure sensor part number from the information on the casing.
Is the tire low pressure sensor the correct part for the vehicle?
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.Carry out the following to verify repair.
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse and re-install it. Clear DTCs and
leave the vehicle stationary for 15 minutes, then drive it at a speed greater than 15.5 mph (25
kph) continuously for at least 10 minutes.
(Note: If the vehicle speed drops below this value, the drive time to complete the test will need to be increased. The use of the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure monitor system status – learn mode status’
will verify the completion of the test when the value returns to ‘Inactive’.)
No
position(s) identified.
(Note: Confirm why the vehicle has incorrect Tire Pressure Monitoring System wheel & tire assemblies installed before installing
tire low pressure sensors, which are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.)
Wheels and Tires - Wheel and Tire
Removal

stands.

2. TORQUE: 125 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Apply a small amount of grease to the bore and

spigot areas of the wheel before installation. Make sure the
grease does not come into contact with the vehicles braking
components and the wheel stud threads. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front
Antenna
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
For additional information, refer to: Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Front Antenna (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
2. Turn the steering on to full lock for access.
3. Release the front of the fender splash shield.
 Remove the 5 Torx bolts.
 Tie the splash shield aside.
4. Remove the tire pressure antenna.

Installation
1. Install the tire pressure antenna.

 Install the clips.
2. Install the fender splash shield.

 Tighten the Torx bolts.
3. Connect the battery ground cable.
For additional information, refer to: Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Front Antenna (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear
Antenna
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and
Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General
Procedures).


4. Release the rear lower edge of the rear fender
splash shield.
5. Remove the tire pressure antenna.

Installation
1. Install the tire pressure antenna.

3. Install the wheel and tire assembly.

Procedures).
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Module Convertible
Removal
1. Remove the cover and disconnect the battery ground cable.
Specifications).
2. Make the SRS system safe.
3. Remove the LH roll over protection unit.
4. Remove the rear seat RH backrest retaining
bracket.
 Remove the 2 nuts and 2 bolts.
5. Remove the RH roll over protection unit.

6. Release the auxiliary junction box mounting

bracket.
 Remove the 3 nuts.
7. Remove the tire pressure monitoring module.
 Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors.
Installation
1. Install the tire pressure monitoring module.
 Connect the electrical connectors.
2. Secure the auxiliary junction box mounting bracket.

3. Install the rear seat RH backrest retaining bracket.

4. Install the RH roll over protection unit.

 Tighten the Torx bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
5. Install the LH roll over protection unit.

6. Connect the battery ground cable and install the cover.
Specifications).
7. Using WDS, configure a new module.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module 2-
Door
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the rear seat backrest.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat Backrest (501-10
Seating, Removal and Installation).
bracket.
4. Remove the tire pressure monitoring module.

Installation
1. Install the tire pressure monitoring module.

3. Install the rear seat backrest.

Specifications).
5. Using WDS, configure a new module.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Removal
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that the valve seal and steel washer is replaced each time a tire is changed to avoid
a seal failure. The seal and washer must be replaced if the sensor is removed. Removal of the sensor retaining nut must
be regarded as sensor removal. The valve cap must always be in place except when inflating, releasing pressure or
checking pressure.


2. Remove the wheel and tire.
3. Remove the wheel trim.
4. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the tire low pressure

sensor, release the tire bead from the rim, 180 degrees from
the valve.
Remove the tire from the wheel.
5. CAUTIONS:
Do not push on the valve.
If the tire low pressure sensor is to be re-

installed, a new washer, seal and nut must be
installed.
Remove the tire low pressure sensor.

 Remove the nut.
 Release and withdraw the sensor along the
valve axis.
6. If necessary, install a new seal and washer.

 Remove and discard the seal and washer.
 Install a new washer and seal, making sure
the valve remains pressed fully onto its
seat.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use compressed air to clean the sensor.

Do not clean the sensor with solvents or cleaning agents of any
type, use a clean dry cloth.
Clean the component mating faces.
2. CAUTION: Do not apply any lubricant to the

new valve.
NOTE: If the sensor is replaced on a 'running'

wheel, the new sensor identification will be learnt
in the first 15 minutes of the vehicle is being
driven. If a new sensor is fitted to the spare wheel
the identification for that sensor must be
programmed into the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) module using WDS. The
identifcation code is provided on a label with the
complete assembly and is also printed on the
sensor assembly.
Install the tire low pressure sensor.

 Install and hand tighten the nut whilst
keeping the sensor in place.
 Tighten the nut to 6.5 Nm (4.8 lb.ft).
3. Install the tire and balance the wheel.

5. Install the wheel trim.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver
Removal

2.
3.
Installation

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - RH (right hand) front spring and damper assembly
2 - RH front accelerometer
3 - RH rear suspension height sensor
4 - RH rear spring and damper assembly
5 - ADCM (adaptive damping control module)
6 - Rear accelerometer
7 - LH (left hand) rear spring and damper assembly
8 - LH rear suspension height sensor
9 - LH front spring and damper assembly
10 - LH front accelerometer
11 - LH front suspension height sensor
12 - RH front suspension height sensor
INTRODUCTION
A continuously variable damping system, known as adaptive dynamics, is available on certain models. Adaptive dynamics is
an electronically controlled suspension system which continuously adjusts the damping characteristics of the suspension
dampers in reaction to the current driving conditions.
The system is controlled by an ADCM (adaptive damping control module). The ADCM receives signals from three
accelerometers, four suspension height sensors and from other vehicle systems to determine vehicle state, body and wheel
motions, and driver inputs. These signals are used by the ADCM to continuously control the damping characteristics of each
damper to the appropriate level, to give the optimum body control and vehicle ride.
The ADCM also contains the controller for the electronic differential, if fitted.
DAMPERS

A - Front spring and damper assembly
B - Rear spring and damper assembly
CAUTION: The dampers look identical to those on the CATS (computer active technology suspension) system of 4.2L
vehicles, but have a different part number. Resistance across the solenoid pins of an adaptive dynamics damper should be 2
to 3.5 ohms; if more than 5 ohms, you should suspect that the damper is from a CATS system.
The adaptive dynamics dampers are monotube, nitrogen gas and oil filled units. The dampers are continuously variable,
which allows the damping force to be electrically adjusted when the vehicle is being driven. The dampers provide the
optimum compromise between vehicle control and ride comfort.
The dampers have an electrical connector on the end of the piston rod, in the center of the top mount.
In each damper, the damping adjustment is achieved by a solenoid operated variable orifice, which opens up an alternative
path for oil flow within the damper. When de-energized the bypass is closed and all the oil flows through the main (firm)
piston. When energized the solenoid moves an armature and control blade, which work against a spring. The control blade
incorporates an orifice which slides inside a sintered housing to open up the bypass as required. In compression, oil flows
from the lower portion of the damper through a hollow piston rod, a separate soft (comfort) valve, the slider housing and
orifice and into the upper portion of the damper, thereby bypassing the main (firm) valve. In rebound the oil flows in the
opposite direction.
In the firm setting oil flows through the main (firm) valve only, but when the bypass is opened by any amount the oil flows
through both valves in a pressure balance. When fully energized the solenoid moves the armature and therefore the slider to
the maximum extension and opens the orifice completely. The damper operates continuously between these two boundary
conditions.
The solenoid in each damper is operated by a 526 Hz PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ADCM. The ADCM
controls the PWM duty ratio to provide 1.5 A to operate the damper in the soft setting. When de-energized (0.0 A) the
damper is in the firm setting. The current varies continuously as required to increase and decrease the damping individually
in each of the dampers.
Sectioned Views of Damper Operating States

A - Firm setting
B - Soft setting
C - Main oil flow
D - Bypass oil flow
-
1 - Bypass valve (open)
2 - Main valve
3 - Tube
4 - Bypass valve (closed)
5 - Piston and rod assembly
ACCELEROMETERS
Three accelerometers are used in the adaptive dynamics system. The accelerometers are located as follows:
 One each on the front edge of the LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand) A pillars.
 One in the luggage compartment, in the rear LH corner adjacent to the rear lamp assembly.
The accelerometers measure acceleration in the vertical plane and output a corresponding analogue signal to the ADCM. The
algorithms in the ADCM calculate the heave, pitch and roll motions of the vehicle, which are used by the controller to control
road induced body motion.
Each accelerometer is connected to the ADCM via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply and signal return.
The sensing element comprises a single parallel plate capacitor, one plate of which moves relative to the other dependant on
the force (acceleration) applied. This causes the capacitance to change as a function of applied acceleration. This capacitance
is compared with a fixed reference capacitor in a bridge circuit and the signal is processed by means of a dedicated
integrated circuit to generate an output voltage that varies as a function of applied acceleration. The sensors output a signal
voltage of approximately 1 V/g ± 0.05 V/g. When the vehicle is stationary, each accelerometer outputs approximately 2
volts.
SUSPENSION HEIGHT SENSORS
Four suspension height sensors are used in the adaptive dynamics system, two for the front suspension and two for the rear
suspension. A front suspension height sensor is attached to each side of the front subframes and connected by a sensor arm
and sensor link to the related lower lateral arm of the front suspension. A rear suspension height sensor is attached to each
side of the rear subframe and connected by a sensor arm and sensor link to the related upper control arm of the rear
suspension.
The RH suspension height sensors are dual output, with separate outputs for the adaptive damping system and for the AFS
(adaptive front lighting system). The LH suspension height sensors are single output, for the adaptive damping system only.
www.JagDocs.com
On each suspension height sensor, the sensor arm and sensor link convert linear movement of the suspension into rotary
movement of the sensor shaft. The suspension height sensors measure suspension displacement at each corner of the
vehicle and output a corresponding analogue signal to the ADCM. The algorithms in the ADCM calculate the position, velocity
and frequency content of the signals and use the results for wheel control.
Each suspension height sensor is connected to the ADCM via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply and signal return.
The sensing element consists of an array of Hall effect devices arranged to measure the direction of the magnetic field of a
small magnet attached to the end of the sensor shaft. As the sensor shaft rotates, so do the lines of magnetic flux from the
magnet. The signals from the Hall effect elements are processed by means of a dedicated integrated circuit to generate an
output voltage that varies as the sensor shaft is rotated. The sensor has a measurement range of ± 40° around its nominal
position and the nominal sensitivity is 57 mV/° of shaft rotation.
ADAPTIVE DAMPING CONTROL MODULE (ADCM)
The ADCM is installed on the right side of the passenger compartment rear bulkhead, behind the RH rear seat back (and
behind the RH roll over protection hoop on convertible models).
System Fault Message
If a fault is detected by the ADCM, a message is sent via the high speed CAN (controller area network) to the instrument
cluster and the message ADAPTIVE DYNAMICS FAULT is displayed. The ADCM also logs an appropriate DTC (diagnostic
trouble code). The ADCM can be interrogated using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
When a fault is detected, the ADCM implements a strategy based on the type of fault. If there is an electrical power fault, or
the ADCM cannot control the dampers, they default to the firm condition. If a sensor fails that only affects one or more
control modes then an intermediate damper setting is used as the lower threshold and the remaining working modes can
demand higher damping as required. In the event of a high speed CAN bus fault, the dampers are fixed at an intermediate
setting (no control) or default to the firm condition, depending on the severity of the fault.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus

1 - Battery
2 - BJB (battery junction box) (175 A megafuse)
3 - AJB (auxiliary junction box)
4 - CJB (central junction box)
5 - ATC (automatic temperature control) module
6 - Fuse 14 (15 A) - from delayed power-off relay
7 - Rear accelerometer
9 - JaguarDrive selector module
10 - ABS (anti-lock brake system) module
11 - TCM (transmission control module)
12 - ECM (engine control module)
13 - RH rear damper
14 - RH front damper
15 - LH front damper
16 - LH rear damper
- LH rear suspension height sensor
17
18 - RH rear suspension height sensor
19 - LH front suspension height sensor
20 - RH front accelerometer
21 - RH front suspension height sensor
22 - ADCM
23 - LH front accelerometer
The ADCM uses a combination of information from other system modules and data from the accelerometers and suspension
height sensors to measure the vehicle and suspension states and driver inputs. Using this information, the ADCM applies
algorithms to control the dampers for the current driving conditions.
The ADCM receives the following signals on the high speed CAN bus from the stated system components:
 Brake Pressure - ABS (anti-lock brake system) module.

 Brake Pressure Quality Factor - ABS module.
 Car Configuration Parameters - AJB (auxiliary junction box).
 Center Differential Range Actual - ECM (engine control module).
 Engine Speed - ECM.
 Engine Speed Quality Factor - ECM.
 Engine Torque Flywheel Actual - ECM.
 Engine Torque Flywheel Actual Quality Factor - ECM.
 Gear Position Target - TCM (transmission control module).
 Lateral Acceleration - ABS module.
 Power Mode (Ignition Signal) - CJB (central junction box).
 Power Mode Quality Factor - CJB.
 Roll Stability Control Mode - ABS module.
 Steering Wheel Angle - ABS module.
 Steering Wheel Angle Speed - ABS module.
 Steering Wheel Angle Status - ABS module.
 Terrain Mode Requested - JaguarDrive selector.
 Torque Converter Slip - TCM.
 Vehicle Information Parameters HS - AJB
 Vehicle Speed - ABS module.
 Vehicle Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
 Front Left Wheel Speed - ABS module.
 Front Left Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
 Front Right Wheel Speed - ABS module.
 Front Right Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
 Rear Left Wheel Speed - ABS module.
 Rear Left Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
 Rear Right Wheel Speed - ABS module.
 Rear Right Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
The ADCM also outputs information on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems as follows:
 Fault Message - instrument cluster.

 Terrain Mode Change Status - JaguarDrive selector.
 Terrain Mode - JaguarDrive selector.
The ADCM monitors the input signals and operates the damper solenoids. The input signals are used in control functions and
a force required for each damper, for each function, is calculated. An arbitrator monitors the force requirements from each
function and apportions a force to a damper. The force is converted to the appropriate current and sent to the damper.
The control functions are as follows:
 Body Control – Uses CAN and accelerometer inputs. Calculates road induced body motions 100 times a second and
sets each damper to the appropriate level to maintain a flat and level body.
 Roll Rate Control – Uses CAN inputs. Predicts vehicle roll rate due to driver steering inputs 100 times a second and
increases damping to reduce roll rate.
 Pitch Rate Control – Uses CAN inputs. Predicts vehicle pitch rate due to driver throttle and braking inputs 100 times a
second and increases damping to reduce pitch rate.
 Bump Rebound Control – Uses suspension height sensor inputs. Monitors the position of the wheel 500 times a
second and increases the damping rate as the damper approaches the end of its travel.
 Wheel Hop Control – Uses suspension height sensor and CAN inputs. Monitors the position of the wheel 500 times a
second and detects when the wheel begins to vibrate at its natural frequency and increases the damping to reduce
vertical wheel motion.
Under normal road conditions when the vehicle is stationary with the engine running, the dampers are set to the firm
condition to reduce power consumption.
The ADCM receives its power supply via a relay and fuse in the CJB. The relay remains energized for a period of time after
the ignition is off. This allows the ADCM to record and store any DTC relating to adaptive dynamics system faults.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
For a detailed description of the adaptive damping system operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension,
vehicle.
1. Verify the customer concern.
Mechanical Electrical
 Coil spring(s)  Fuse(s)
 Shock absorber(s)  Wiring harness/electrical connectors
 Accelerometer(s) installation  Accelerometer(s)
 Height sensor(s) installation  Adaptive Damping Control Module
 Height sensor(s)
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer
to the DTC index.
DTC Index
part number 3548-1358-00.
NOTE: If a control module fault is suspected and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a new module.
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five-digit codes. Match the five-digits from
the scan tool to the first five-digits of the seven-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give additional
information read by the manufacturer approved diagnostic system).
NOTE: When performing electrical voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three
decimal places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the
DMM leads into account.
NOTE: Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.
NOTE: If DTCs are logged and, after carrying out the pinpoint tests, a fault is not identified, an intermittent concern
may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.

C101D- Left Front  Left Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
12 vertical acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to power or
acceleration circuit short to power another circuit. Repair circuit, clear the DTC and retest the
sensor - short to system
power
C101D- Left Front  Left Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front vertical
14 vertical acceleration sensor acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open circuit. If
acceleration circuit short to ground, no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace sensor, clear
sensor - short to open circuit DTC and retest the system
ground, open  Vertical acceleration
circuit sensor fault
C101D- Left Front  Left front vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Left Front Vertical
22 vertical acceleration sensor Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to 2.1
acceleration insecurely mounted volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts, loose
sensor - signal  Left front vertical connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then suspect
amplitude > acceleration sensor faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the sensor is
maximum signal circuit short to correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as required. Refer
another circuit to the new module/component installation note at the top of
 Left front vertical the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C101D- Left Front  Left front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Left Front
26 vertical acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer signal circuit for faults, if circuit is
acceleration signal circuit short to correct suspect faulty sensor, refer to the new
sensor - signal another circuit module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
rate of change  Left front vertical Index. Replace the sensor, clear the DTC and retest the system
below threshold acceleration sensor
internal fault
C101D- Left Front  Left front vertical Check Left Front Vertical Accelerometer for location and
78 vertical acceleration sensor security, if correct suspect faulty Accelerometer, refer to the
acceleration bracket bent new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
sensor -  Left front vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
alignment or acceleration sensor retest the system
adjustment damaged
incorrect
C101E- Right Front  Right Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
12 vertical acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to power or
acceleration circuit short to power another circuit. Repair circuit, clear the DTC and retest the
sensor - short to system
power
C101E- Right Front  Right Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
14 vertical acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open
acceleration circuit short to ground, circuit. If no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace
sensor - short to open circuit sensor, clear DTC and retest the system
ground, open  Vertical acceleration
circuit sensor fault
C101E- Right Front  Right front vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Right Front
22 vertical acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to
acceleration insecurely mounted 2.1 volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts,
sensor - signal  Right front vertical loose connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then
amplitude > acceleration sensor suspect faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the
maximum signal circuit short to sensor is correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as
another circuit required. Refer to the new module/component installation note
 Right front vertical at the top of the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C101E- Right Front  Right front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Front
26 vertical acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer signal circuit for faults, if circuit is
acceleration signal circuit short to correct suspect faulty sensor, refer to the new
sensor - signal another circuit module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
rate of change  Right front vertical Index. Replace the sensor, clear the DTC and retest the system
below threshold acceleration sensor
internal fault
C101E- Right Front  Right front vertical Check Right Front Vertical Accelerometer for location and
78 vertical acceleration sensor security, if correct suspect faulty Accelerometer, refer to the
acceleration bracket bent new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
sensor -  Right front vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
alignment or acceleration sensor retest the system
adjustment damaged
incorrect
C1024- System  Loss of power to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
00 Temporarily control module whilst ground circuits to Adaptive Damping Control Module for
Disabled Due To driving intermittent or poor connection. Repair wiring circuits as
Power required, clear DTC and retest the system
Interruption
During Driving -
no sub type
information
C1030- Left Rear vertical  Left Rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear
12 acceleration acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to power or
sensor - short to circuit short to power another circuit. Repair circuit, clear the DTC and retest the
power system
C1030- Left Rear vertical  Left rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear
14 acceleration acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open
sensor - short to circuit short to ground, circuit. If no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace
ground, open open circuit sensor, clear DTC and retest the system
circuit  Vertical acceleration
sensor fault
C1030- Left Rear vertical  Left Rear vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Left Rear Vertical
22 acceleration acceleration sensor Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to 2.1
sensor - signal insecurely mounted volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts, loose
amplitude >  Left Rear vertical connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then suspect
maximum acceleration sensor faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the sensor is
signal circuit short to correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as required. Refer
another circuit to the new module/component installation note at the top of
 Left Rear vertical the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C1030- Left Rear vertical  Left Rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Left Rear
26 acceleration acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer signal circuit for faults, if circuit is
sensor - signal signal circuit short to correct suspect faulty sensor, refer to the new
rate of change another circuit module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
below threshold  Left Rear vertical Index. Replace the sensor, clear the DTC and retest the system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C1030- Left Rear vertical  Left Rear vertical Check Left Rear Vertical Accelerometer for location and
78 acceleration acceleration sensor security, if correct suspect faulty Accelerometer, refer to the
sensor - bracket bent new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
alignment or  Left Rear vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
adjustment acceleration sensor retest the system
incorrect damaged
C1A03- Left Front Height  Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
12 Sensor - circuit shorted to another Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
short to power cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
 height sensor internal
fault
C1A03- Left Front Height  Wiring to sensor Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
14 Sensor - circuit (signal) open circuit connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
short to ground  Wiring to height ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control
or open sensor partial short to Module. A: Check for short circuits between any of the 3
ground terminals and vehicle ground. B: Check for electrical continuity
 Wiring to height between the two connectors for each of the 3 terminals.
sensor short to other Reconnect electrical connector at Control Module only. C:
cable Check voltages at terminals within height sensor connector
 Height sensor internal (sensor not connected), with respect to vehicle body. • Voltage
electrical fault to sensor ground connection should be ~0v • Voltage to sensor
signal connection should be ~0v • Voltage to sensor supply
connection should be ~5v All voltages should be within ±
0.15v
C1A03- Left Front Height  Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height sensor
21 Sensor - signal not connected fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a height
amplitude <  Height sensor or sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be re-
minimum bracket loose calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part number
 Height sensor bracket is fitted, as specified in the service parts database. To check
bent height sensor: Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor
 Incorrect height and inspect connecter pins & terminals for evidence of
calibration corrosion or water ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect
 Height sensor linkage harness at Control Module. A: Check for short circuits between
toggled any of the 3 terminals and vehicle ground. B: Check for
 Height sensor water electrical continuity between the two connectors for each of the
ingress 3 terminals. Reconnect electrical connector at Control Module
 Wiring to height only. C: Check voltages at terminals within height sensor
sensor partial short to connector (sensor not connected), with respect to vehicle
ground body. • Voltage to sensor ground connection should be ~0v •
 Wiring to height Voltage to sensor signal connection should be ~0v • Voltage to
sensor short to other sensor supply connection should be ~5v All voltages should be
cable within ± 0.15v. To check sensor operation on the vehicle:
 Height sensor Check for water ingress around the height sensors, electrical
electrical fault connectors or shaft end. Check for excessive movement in the
 Height sensor linkage shaft in all directions. Raise vehicle (ideally on wheels-free
bent ramp) until suspension on corner under investigation is at
 Incorrect height rebound to gain access to height sensor. Access may be
sensor fitted improved by removing road wheel. Carefully disconnect the
height sensor link from the upper suspension arm. Monitor the
height sensor signal voltage output for the height sensor under
investigation. Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid
position and confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move
the sensor arm over the range ±40° around the mid position
and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly between
around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or do
not change smoothly then replace sensor. NOTE: For angles of
movement beyond ±40°, the sensor signal will clamp to a
voltage of ~0.15v or ~4.85v, depending on position of sensor
lever. This is normal. When investigation is complete, refit
height sensor link to upper arm. If any fixings to the height
sensor body or mounting bracket were slackened or found to
be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride
height MUST be re-calibrated. Refer to the relevant section of
the workshop manual for the calibration procedure
C1A03- Left Front Height  Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height sensor
amplitude >  Height sensor or sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be re-
maximum bracket loose calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part number
C1A03- Left Front Height  Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
76 Sensor - wrong calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
mounting
position
C1A03- Left Front Height  Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
78 Sensor - calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C1A04- Right Front  Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right
12 Height Sensor - shorted to another Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
circuit short to cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
power  height sensor internal
fault
C1A04- Right Front  Wiring to sensor Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
14 Height Sensor - (signal) open circuit connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
circuit short to  Wiring to height ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control
ground or open sensor partial short to Module. A: Check for short circuits between any of the 3
0.15v
C1A04- Right Front  Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height sensor
21 Height Sensor - not connected fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a height
signal amplitude  Height sensor or sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be re-
< minimum bracket loose calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part number
C1A04- Right Front  Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height sensor
> maximum bracket loose calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part number
C1A04- Right Front  Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
76 Height Sensor - calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
wrong mounting
position
C1A04- Right Front  Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C1A05- Left Rear Height  Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
12 Sensor - circuit shorted to another Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
short to power cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
 height sensor internal
fault
C1A05- Left Rear Height  Wiring to sensor Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
14 Sensor - circuit (signal) open circuit connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
short to ground  Wiring to height ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control
or open sensor partial short to Module. A: Check for short circuits between any of the 3
0.15v
C1A05- Left Rear Height  Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height sensor
amplitude <  Height sensor or sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be re-
minimum bracket loose calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part number
C1A05- Left Rear Height  Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height sensor
amplitude >  Height sensor or sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be re-
maximum bracket loose calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part number
C1A05- Left Rear Height  Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
76 Sensor - wrong calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
mounting
position
C1A05- Left Rear Height  Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
78 Sensor - calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C1A06- Right Rear  Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
12 Height Sensor - shorted to another Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
circuit short to cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
power  height sensor internal
fault
C1A06- Right Rear  Wiring to sensor Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
14 Height Sensor - (signal) open circuit connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
circuit short to  Wiring to height ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control
ground or open sensor partial short to Module. A: Check for short circuits between any of the 3
0.15v
C1A06- Right Rear  Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height sensor
< minimum bracket loose calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part number
C1A06- Right Rear  Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height sensor
> maximum bracket loose calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part number
C1A06- Right Rear  Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
wrong mounting
position
C1A06- Right Rear  Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C110C- Left Front  Left front damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
01 Damper solenoid circuit fault damper solenoid circuit for faults, If no faults are evident
Solenoid - suspect a faulty control module, refer to the new module
General installation note at the top of the DTC Index
electrical failure
C110C- Left Front  Front Left Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
18 Damper Actuator open circuit Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
Solenoid - circuit at startup should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
current below
threshold
19 Damper Solenoid circuit Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
Solenoid - circuit current above should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
current above threshold
threshold
C110C- Left front  Left front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
14 damper solenoid solenoid circuit - short manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
- short to to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check left front damper solenoid
ground, open  Left front damper circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a
circuit failure new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110C- Left front  Left front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
1D damper solenoid solenoid circuit - short manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check left front damper solenoid
circuit circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check and
 Left front damper install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
failure and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
64 Damper Solenoid Measured Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
Solenoid - signal Current control loop should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
plausibility failed
failure  Front Left Damper
Solenoid open circuit
C110D- Right Front  Right front damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right
electrical failure
C110D- Right Front  Front Right Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right
current below
threshold
threshold
C110D- Right front  Right front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
- short to to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check Right front damper
ground, open  Right front damper solenoid circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and
circuit failure install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110D- Right front  Right front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check Right front damper
circuit solenoid circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
 Right front damper and install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
plausibility failed
failure  Front Right Damper
C110E- Left Rear  Left Rear damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
electrical failure
C110E- Left Rear  Rear Left Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
current below
threshold
threshold
C110E- Left Rear  Left Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
- short to to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear damper solenoid
ground, open  Left Rear damper circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a
circuit failure new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110E- Left Rear  Left Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear damper solenoid
circuit circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check and
 Left Rear damper install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
failure and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
plausibility failed
failure  Rear Left Damper
C110F- Right Rear  Rear Right Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
current below
threshold
threshold
C110F- Right Rear  Right Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
- short to to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Rear damper
ground, open  Right Rear damper solenoid circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and
circuit failure install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110F- Right Rear  Right Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Rear damper
circuit solenoid circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
 Right Rear damper and install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
plausibility failed
failure  Rear Right Damper
C1B14- Sensor Supply  Left Front Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor supply
1C Voltage A - out Sensor or Right Front for circuit fault. Check all height sensors. Check module sensor
of range Height Sensor or Left supply output voltage measured voltage should be between
Rear Height Sensor or 4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
Right Rear Height
Sensor supply partial
short to other circuit
or ground
 Left Front Height
Sensor or Right Front
Height Sensor or Left
Rear Height Sensor or
Right Rear Height
Sensor internal failure
 Internal control
module failure
C1B15- Sensor Supply  Left Front Vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor supply
1C Voltage B - out Acceleration Sensor or for circuit fault. Check all Vertical Acceleration Sensors. Check
of range Right Front Vertical control module sensor supply output voltage Measured voltage
Acceleration Sensor or should be between 4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
Left Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor or
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
supply partial short to
other circuit or
ground. Left Front
Vertical Acceleration
Sensor or Right Front
Sensor or Left Rear
Sensor or Right Rear
Sensor supply partial
short to other circuit
or ground
 Left Front Vertical
Right Front Vertical
Left Rear Vertical
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
internal failure
 Internal control
module failure
U0001- High speed CAN  Lost Communication Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
88 communication With Engine Control electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit for faults,
bus - bus off Module (ECM) (CAN check CAN circuits for open circuits or shorts to power, ground
Bus circuit fault) or other circuits
U0100- Lost  Missing message from Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
00 Communication ECM electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus for circuit fault
With ECM/PCM A
- no sub type
information
U0101- Lost  Lost Communication Check Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
00 Communication with Transmission the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus for circuit
with TCM - no control module (TCM) fault
sub type (CAN Bus circuit fault)
information
U0103- Lost  Lost Communication Check Gear Shift Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
00 Communication With Gear Shift electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus for circuit faults
With Gear Shift Module (GSM) (CAN
Control Module Bus circuit fault)
A - no sub type
information
U0121- Lost  Lost Communication Check Anti lock Brake System Control Module for stored DTCs.
00 Communication With Anti-Lock Brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus
With Anti-Lock System (ABS) Control circuit to Anti lock Brake System Control Module for circuit
Brake System Module (CAN Bus faults
(ABS) Control circuit fault)
Module - no sub
type information
U0132- Lost  Lost Communication Check Air Suspension Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
00 Communication With Air Suspension the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to Air
With Suspension Control Module (CAN Suspension Control Module for circuit faults
Control Module Bus circuit fault
A - no sub type
information
U0136- Lost  Lost Communication Check Rear Differential Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer
00 Communication With Rear Differential to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to
With Differential Control Module (CAN Rear Differential Control Module for circuit faults
Control Module - Bus circuit fault)
Rear - no sub
type information
U0140- Lost  Lost Communication Check Body Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
00 Communication With Body Control electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to Body
With Body Module (Front Smart Control Module for faults
Control Module - Junction Box) (CAN
no sub type Bus circuit fault)
information
U0142- Lost  Lost Communication Check Rear Smart Junction Box for stored DTCs. Refer to the
00 Communication rear smart junction electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to Rear
With Body box (CAN Bus circuit Smart Junction Box for faults
Control Module fault)
B - no sub type
information
U0155- Lost  Lost Communication Check Instrument Panel Cluster for stored DTCs. Refer to the
00 Communication With Instrument Panel electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus to Instrument
With Instrument Cluster (IPC) Control Panel Cluster for circuit fault
Panel Cluster Module (CAN bus
(IPC) Control circuit fault)
Module - no sub
type information
U0300- Internal control  CAN master Check Front Smart Junction Box vehicle configuration file,
00 module software configuration ID check part number of adaptive damping control module
incompatibility incorrect
U0401- Invalid Data  Invalid Data Received Check Engine Control Module for DTCs. Refer to the relevant
68 Received from from Engine Control DTC index
ECM/PCM A - Module
event
information
U0402- Invalid Data  Invalid Data Received Check for Transmission Control Module DTCs. Refer to relevant
68 Received from from Transmission DTC index
TCM - event control module
information
U0404- Invalid Data  Invalid data received Check Gear Shift Control Module for DTCs. Refer to the
68 Received from from gear shift control relevant DTC index
Gear Shift module
Control Module
A
U0415- Invalid Data  * Invalid Data Check for Anti lock Brake System DTCs. Refer to the relevant
68 Received From Received From Anti- DTC index
Anti-Lock Brake Lock Brake System
System (ABS) (ABS) Control Module
Control Module -
event
information
U0421- Invalid Data  Invalid Data Received Check Air Suspension Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
68 Received from From Air Suspension the relevant DTC index
Suspension Control Module
Control Module
A event
information
U0422- Invalid Data  Invalid Data Received Check Body Control Module (Front Smart Junction Box) for
68 Received From From Body Control stored DTCs. Refer to the relevant DTC index
Body Control Module (Front Smart
Module - event Junction Box)
information
U0437- Invalid Data  Invalid Data Received Check Rear Differential Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer
68 Received From From Rear Differential to the relevant DTC index
Differential Control Module
Control Module -
Rear - event
information
U0443- Invalid Data  Invalid Data Received Check rear smart junction box for DTCs and refer to relevant
68 Received From From body control DTC index
Body Control module B (Rear Smart
Module B - event Junction Box)
information
U1A14- CAN initialization  CAN network harness Refer to circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit for fault
00 failure - no sub short, disconnected (short to power, ground or open circuit)
type information
U2100- Initial  Car Configuration Data Install car config to Front Smart Junction Box. Clear DTC and
00 Configuration not loaded (New Body retest systems
Not Complete - Control Module (Front
no sub type Smart Junction Box)
information fitted to vehicle and
not initialized)
 Internal Body Control
Module (Front Smart
Junction Box) failure
U2101- Control Module  Car Configuration Data Carry out the new module software installation procedure
00 Configuration transmitted over CAN
Incompatible - does not match
no sub type adaptive damping
information control module
internal config
U3000- Control module -  General electrical Check integrity of electrical connectors and pins to module.
01 General failure Check damper negative circuits for short to Ground. Refer to
Electrical Failure the new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Install a new Adaptive Damping Control Module.
U3000- Control Module -  Module Internal failure Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check all damper
04 System Internal solenoid circuits for short to power. If no harness faults are
Failure found suspect adaptive damping control module. Install a new
module, refer to new module installation note at top of DTC
Index
U3000- Control Module -  Module Internal failure Suspect Adaptive Damping Control Module internal failure.
43 special memory Install a new module, refer to the new module/component
failure installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U3000- Control Module -  Module Internal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
45 program ground circuit for fault. Clear DTC turn off ignition, wait 1
memory failure minute. Turn on ignition, check for DTCs. If DTC returns
suspect Adaptive Damping Control Module internal failure.
Install a new module, refer to the new module/component
installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U3000- Control Module -  Module Internal If this DTC is logged contact your local in-market support
47 watchdog / Failure
safety Micro
controller failure
U3000- Control Module -  Adaptive Damping Install the latest software / Carry out the new-module
52 not activated Control Module has (software) install procedure
been replaced and not
programmed
U3000- Control Module -  Adaptive damping Refer to the workshop manual. Install the latest software /
54 missing control module has Carry out the new-module (software) install procedure
calibration been replaced and no
software is installed
U3003- Battery voltage -  Circuit voltage out of Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged, refer
1C circuit voltage range (Supply Voltage to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and charging
out of range at adaptive damping section of the workshop manual and check the performance of
control module < the charging system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
10.5v or Supply and check power and ground circuit to adaptive damping
Voltage at adaptive control module for faults, including intermittent high resistance
damping control
module > 18v for 30s)
U3003- Battery Voltage  High Resistance Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged, refer
62 - signal compare Connections to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and charging
failure  Adaptive Damping section of the workshop manual and check the performance of
Control module the charging system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Internal Failure and check power and ground circuit to adaptive damping
control module for faults, including intermittent high resistance
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Adaptive Damping Module Convertible
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the restraints control module backup power supply must be depleted. Wait at
least one minute after disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) before commencing any repair or adjustment to the
supplemental restraint system (SRS), or any component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to follow these
Always wear safety glasses when working on an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling an air bag module.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, do not use radio key code savers when working on the
supplemental restraint system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of injury in the event of premature deployment, always carry a live air bag module with
the bag and trim cover pointed away from the body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, live air bag modules must only be placed on work benches
which have been ground bonded and with the trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Never probe the electrical connectors of air bag modules or any other supplemental restraint system component.
Painting over the driver air bag module trim cover or instrument panel could lead to deterioration of the trim cover
and air bags. Do not for any reason attempt to paint discolored or damaged air bag module trim covers or instrument
panel. Install a new component. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-01
Battery, Mounting and Cables, Specifications).
2. WARNING: Make sure that sufficient time has elapsed after

disconnecting the battery ground cable(s), before commencing
work on the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Make the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) safe.

For additional information, refer to: Rollover Protection Unit
(501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and
Installation).
4. Remove the active damping module.
Installation
1. Install the active damping module.
 Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm.

Installation).
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Adaptive Damping Module 2-Door
Removal
2. Remove the active damping module.
Installation
1. Install the active damping module.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization
COMPONENT LOCATION

4 - DLM (differential locking module)
INTRODUCTION
JaguarDrive control is a selectable vehicle optimization system designed to fine-tune the driving characteristics of the vehicle
by accommodating different driving conditions or driving styles. The system allows the performance envelope of the vehicle
to be stretched and prevents the necessity for a single, compromised configuration for all conditions. JaguarDrive control
increases the vehicle's abilities by changing the characteristics of engine mapping, transmission shifts, stability and traction
interventions, suspension settings and, on SC (supercharger) vehicles, the electronic differential settings.
JAGUARDRIVE CONTROLS

1 - Winter mode button
2 - DSC/TracDSC mode button
3 - Dynamic mode button
The system is controlled by buttons adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector on the floor console. The buttons allow the selection
of one of the following three modes:
 Special modes off.

 Winter mode.
 Dynamic mode.
The instrument cluster will display the selected JaguarDrive control mode in the message center.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
The JaguarDrive control system uses a combination of a number of vehicle sub-systems to achieve the required vehicle
characteristics for the mode selected. The following sub-systems make up the JaguarDrive control system:
 EMS (engine management system). For additional information, refer to:

Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and
Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
 Automatic transmission.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Description (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
 Brake system.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (206-09
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
 Adaptive dynamics.
and Operation).
 Electronic differential control (SC vehicles only).
For additional information, refer to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-02 Rear
Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation).
The JaguarDrive control software is stored in the JaguarDrive selector module located below the JaguarDrive selector. The
module detects the selection made using the buttons and transmits a signal on the high speed CAN (controller area network)
bus, which is received by each of the sub-system control modules.
Each of the affected sub-system control modules contain software, which applies the correct operating parameters to their
controlled system for the JaguarDrive control mode selection made.
Each sub-system control module also provides feedback for the selected mode so that the JaguarDrive control software can
check that all systems have changed to the correct operating parameters.
NOTE: The JaguarDrive control system is a co-ordinating system only. It CANNOT generate a fault in one of the participating
sub-systems. All participating sub-systems should be FULLY diagnosed before assuming a fault with JaguarDrive control. The
JaguarDrive selector module should not be replaced until all other options have been exhausted.
Winter Mode
To activate winter mode, press the winter mode button briefly (not less than 500 ms) to activate or de-activate the mode.
NOTE: Winter mode cannot be active at the same time as dynamic mode.
When active the winter mode icon and message appear in the instrument cluster message center to confirm the activation.
Dynamic Stability Control
Press the DSC (dynamic stability control) mode button briefly (not less than 300 ms) to switch between DSC and TracDSC.
The instrument cluster message center will display either DSC ON or TRAC DSC depending on which selection is made. When
TracDSC is selected, the DSC warning lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated and the DSC button is illuminated.
TracDSC is intended only for use on dry tarmac by suitably experienced drivers.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (206-09 Anti-Lock
Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
DSC can be manually switched off by pressing the DSC mode button for more than 10 seconds. Confirmation is given by a
chime from the instrument cluster, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the DSC warning
lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated.
NOTE: DSC is operational at all times when the engine is running unless manually switched off.
Dynamic Mode
To activate dynamic mode, press the button briefly. The dynamic mode button is illuminated. Dynamic mode confirmed
message is displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
NOTE: Dynamic mode cannot be active at the same time as winter mode.
In transmission sport mode and manual mode, the driver has full control over the transmission shift points and the TCM
(transmission control module) will not intervene to prevent engine overspeed (i.e. automatic upshifts are inhibited). In this
setting, the gear indicator in the instrument cluster will turn amber at high engine speeds to indicate an appropriate manual
upshift point.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus

1 - Battery
2 - 175 A megafuse
3 - CJB (central junction box) fuse 17
4 - Diagnostic socket
5 - High speed CAN connection to other systems
6 - ECM
7 - TCM
-
8 ABS module
9 - DLM
10 - ADCM
Engine Management System
The EMS varies the accelerator pedal maps to change the amount of torque per percentage of pedal travel. The EMS can also
change the accelerator pedal response to control the allowed torque change relative to the speed of pedal travel.
Each driving mode uses a combination of operating parameters for each sub-system. Changing between driving modes
initiates a different set of operating characteristics, which will be noticeable to the driver. The driver will notice differences in
engine response when, for example, the accelerator pedal is held in a constant position and the driving mode is changed
from winter to dynamic, the driver will notice the torque and engine speed increase. Similarly, if the mode is changed from
normal or dynamic to winter, the driver will notice a reduction in torque and engine speed.
NOTE: The change in torque and engine speed can take approximately 30 seconds and care must be taken not to confuse the
JaguarDrive control system operation with an EMS fault.
Transmission Control
The TCM changes the shift maps for the JaguarDrive control mode selected. This changes the shift points providing early or
late upshifts and downshifts. For example, on slippery surfaces in winter mode the transmission will select 2nd gear for
starting from a standstill on a flat surface to minimize wheel slip.
Anti-Lock Braking System Control
The ABS (anti-lock brake system) module controls several vehicle functions and adjusts the operating parameters of these
functions to optimize the selected JaguarDrive control mode. Traction control uses different slip/acceleration thresholds to
improve traction and vehicle composure. For example, the system sensitivity is increased on slippery surfaces to reduce
wheel spin.
If TracDSC is selected or DSC is switched off, then subsequently the JaguarDrive control mode is changed, DSC is
automatically switched back on.
The stability control uses different threshold values for the selected mode, reducing the requirement for the driver to change
the DSC system mode for optimum performance in various driving scenarios.
Incorrect Mode Usage
Selection of an inappropriate mode is discouraged in the following ways:
 The active mode icon is continually displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
 In dynamic mode, when the ignition has been in the off position continuously for more than 6 hours, the JaguarDrive
control system defaults to the special modes off (DSC on).
Selection of an inappropriate mode for the conditions will not endanger the driver or immediately cause damage to the
vehicle. Continued use of an inappropriate mode may reduce the life of some components. The driver may notice a different
vehicle response, with the engine and transmission responses being different than in the special modes off.
Driver Information
The message center contains the JaguarDrive control mode icons, which display the currently selected mode. If no symbol is
displayed, no special mode is selected and the system is in special modes off.
In dynamic mode when the transmission is in sport and manual mode, the gear information is displayed in amber when the
appropriate engine speed is reached for the optimum sporty change point.
Diagnostics
The JaguarDrive control system relies on the correct functionality of the sub-systems. If one of the sub-systems develops a
fault, the JaguarDrive control system will not function, even though the fault is not in the JaguarDrive control system.
The JaguarDrive selector module and the mode buttons should only be investigated if there are no apparent faults in any of
the sub-systems. If a fault in a sub-system is subsequently corrected, the JaguarDrive control system will function normally
after an engine on and off cycle.
JaguarDrive Control Sub-System Faults
If a fault occurs in a sub-system, the driver is alerted by the illumination of a warning indicator and/or an appropriate
message for that sub-system in the instrument cluster message center. No JaguarDrive control message will be shown when
a failed sub-system displays its own message.
When a sub-system fault is present and the driver attempts to select a different JaguarDrive control mode or at the next
ignition on cycle, a message WINTER MODE FAULT or DYNAMIC MODE FAULT will appear in the message center. This
generally implies that the JaguarDrive control system has a fault, but only because a sub-system fault is preventing its
operation. This message will be displayed once per ignition cycle, but is repeated if a further selection is made by the driver
using the JaguarDrive control buttons or at the next ignition on cycle.
NOTE: The message WINTER MODE FAULT or DYNAMIC MODE FAULT can also in very rare circumstances be generated by a
fault in the JaguarDrive selector module.
NOTE: It is not possible for the JaguarDrive selector module to cause any fault behavior (warning indicator illumination or
message generation) in any of the sub-systems. Illumination of a sub-system warning indicator and/or a sub-system related
message will never be associated with a JaguarDrive selector module or JaguarDrive control system fault.
The sub-system control modules can detect a fault with the CAN bus signal from the JaguarDrive selector module. If a fault
in the JaguarDrive control system is detected, the sub-system control modules will operate in the special modes off setting.
The sub-system control modules will record a fault code for a failure of the JaguarDrive control CAN signal. These faults can
be retrieved using the Jaguar approved diagnostic tool and will provide useful information to indicate investigation of the
JaguarDrive selector module or the CAN bus network.
JaguarDrive Control System or Selector Module Fault
If a fault occurs in the JaguarDrive control system, all button icon LED (light emitting diode) will be turned off (if applicable,
background illumination will remain on) and pressing of the JaguarDrive control buttons is ignored. The instrument cluster
message center will display a message WINTER MODE FAULT or DYNAMIC MODE FAULT when the fault occurs, if the fault is
present and the driver attempts to select a special mode (if the control module is able to do this) or at the next ignition on
cycle.
The JaguarDrive control buttons and selector module are an integrated unit. If a fault occurs in either component, the whole
unit will require replacement, however, this is extremely unlikely.
CAN Bus Faults
If a CAN bus fault exists and prevents JaguarDrive control system operation, all of the JaguarDrive control button icon LED
will be illuminated and pressing of the JaguarDrive control buttons is ignored.
If the instrument cluster does not receive a JaguarDrive control system CAN bus message from the JaguarDrive selector
module, the message SPECIAL MODE UNAVAILABLE will be displayed when the fault occurs and will be repeated at every
ignition on cycle.
User Error
A special mode change will not occur while DSC or ABS is active (including ABS cycling). This may be misinterpreted as a
system fault.
Driveline System - General Information - Driveline System
For a detailed description of driveline operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to:
Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation).
CAUTION: Only serviceable items can be renewed or adjusted. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
warranty of the component being rejected.
Certain driveline trouble symptoms are also common to the engine, transmission, wheel bearings, tires, and other parts
of the vehicle. For this reason, make sure that the cause of the trouble is in the driveline before adjusting, repairing, or
installing any new components. For additional information,
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis and Testing).
1. Verify the customer concern by carrying out a road test of the vehicle.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage and system integrity.
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Identify the Condition
Gear Howl and Whine
Howling or whining of the ring gear and pinion is due to an incorrect gear pattern, gear damage or incorrect bearing
preload.
Bearing Whine
Bearing whine is a high-pitched sound similar to a whistle. It is usually caused by worn/damaged pinion bearings, which
are operating at driveshaft speed. Bearing noise occurs at all driving speeds. This distinguishes it from gear whine
which is speed dependent.
As noted, pinion bearings make a high-pitched, whistling noise, usually at all speeds. If however there is only one
pinion bearing that is worn/damaged, the noise may vary in different driving phases.
A wheel bearing noise can be mistaken for a pinion bearing noise.
www.JagDocs.com
Chuckle
Chuckle that occurs on the coast driving phase is usually caused by excessive clearance between the differential gear
hub and the differential case bore.
Damage to a gear tooth on the coast side can cause a noise identical to a chuckle. A very small tooth nick or ridge on
the edge of a tooth can cause the noise.
Knock
Knock, which can occur on all driving phases, has several causes including damaged teeth or gearset.
A gear tooth damaged on the drive side is a common cause of the knock.
Clunk
Clunk is a metallic noise heard when the automatic transmission is engaged in REVERSE or DRIVE. The noise may also
occur when the throttle is applied or released. Clunk is caused by transmission calibration, backlash in the driveline or
loose suspension components and is felt or heard in the vicinity of the rear drive axle.
Bearing Rumble
Bearing rumble sounds like marbles being tumbled. This condition is usually caused by a worn/damaged wheel bearing.
The lower pitch is because the wheel bearing turns at only about one-third of the driveshaft speed. Wheel bearing noise
also may be high-pitched, similar to gear noise, but will be evident in all four driving modes.
Symptom Chart

Noise is at constant tone over a * Rear drive axle. * For additional information,GO to Pinpoint
narrow vehicle speed range. Test B. .
Usually heard on light drive and
coast conditions.
Noise is the same on drive or * Road. * Normal conditions.
coast * Worn or damaged driveshaft joint. * INSTALL new components as necessary.
* Driveshaft center bearing. * INSTALL new components as necessary.
* Wheel bearing. * CHECK and INSTALL a new wheel bearing as
necessary.
REFER to: Wheel Bearing (204-02 Rear
Noise is produced with the * Engine. * For additional information,
vehicle standing and driving REFER to: Engine (303-00 Engine System -
* Transmission. * For additional information,
REFER to: Diagnostic Strategy (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Diagnosis
and Testing).
Loud clunk in the driveline * Transmission calibration. * Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic
when shifting from reverse to system, re-configure the Transmission
forward Control Module (TCM) with the latest
available calibration.
* Transmission Mount. * INSPECT and INSTALL new transmission
mounts as necessary.
* Transmission. * For additional information,
REFER to: Diagnostic Strategy (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Diagnosis
and Testing).
* Suspension components. * INSPECT and INSTALL new suspension
components as necessary.
* Backlash in the driveline. * INSPECT and INSTALL new driveline
components as necessary.
* Engine idle speed set too high. * Check and adjust the idle speed as
necessary.
* Engine mount. * INSPECT and INSTALL new engine mounts
as necessary.
Clicking, popping, or grinding * Inadequate or contaminated * INSPECT, CLEAN and LUBRICATE with new
noises lubrication in the rear drive grease as necessary.
halfshaft constant velocity (CV)
joint.
* Another component contacting the * INSPECT and REPAIR as necessary.
rear drive halfshaft.
* Wheel bearings, brakes or * INSPECT and INSTALL new components as
suspension components. necessary.
Vibration at highway speeds * Out-of-balance wheel(s) or tire(s). * BALANCE and INSTALL new wheel(s) and
tire(s) as necessary.
REFER to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels
and Tires, Removal and Installation).
* Driveline out of * For additional information, refer to the
balance/misalignment. Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
* Driveshaft center bearing touching * Check for correct spacer washer thickness.
body mounting point. INSPECT and INSTALL new washers as
necessary.
Shudder, Vibration During * Powertrain/driveline misalignment. * CHECK for misalignment. INSTALL new
Acceleration components as necessary. For driveshaft
alignment, GO to Pinpoint Test B.
* High constant velocity (CV) joint * CHECK the ride height and VERIFY the
operating angles caused by correct spring rate. INSTALL new
incorrect ride height. components as necessary.
Lubricant Leak * Rear drive axle breather. * Check oil level and correct as necessary.
* Damaged seal. * INSTALL new components as necessary.
* Rear drive axle filler plug. * INSTALL new components as necessary.
* Rear drive axle rear cover joint. * INSTALL new components as necessary.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : EXCESSIVE DRIVELINE NOISE

CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK NOISE FROM VEHICLE ON ROAD TEST
1 Road test vehicle to determine load and speed conditions when noise occurs.
2 Assess the noise with different gears selected.
Does the noise occur in different gears at the same vehicle speed?
Yes
INSTALL a new rear drive axle/differential assembly.
REFER to: Axle Assembly (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).
RE-TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REFER to: Engine (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing) /
Diagnostic Strategy (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Diagnosis and Testing).
PINPOINT TEST B : DRIVESHAFT ALIGNMENT

B1: CHECK DRIVESHAFT COMPOUND ANGLE
1 Remove exhaust system and center heat shield.
REFER to: Exhaust System (309-00 Exhaust System,
2 Place inclinometer (special tool number 501-F007) on
flat surface and calibrate.
3 Using the inclinometer check the angle of the

driveshaft rearwards of the center bearing and note
the reading (reading one)
4 Check the angle of the driveshaft forward of the
center bearing and note the reading (reading two).
Subtract reading two from reading one to obtain the
compound angle of the driveshaft. The correct
specification for the driveshaft compound angle is 1.1°
± 0.3°
Is driveshaft compound angle correct?

Yes
GO to B2.
No
Adjust driveshaft center bearing height by adding or
removing shims (refer to parts catalogue for selection
of shims available) and re-check compound angle. GO
to B2.
B2: CHECK CENTER BEARING ALIGNMENT
1 Check the center bearing is aligned at 90° to front
section of driveshaft.
Is the center bearing aligned correctly?

Yes
Driveshaft alignment is correct. Install center heat
shield and exhaust system.
No
Undo but do not remove center bearing bolts, align
center bearing to front section of driveshaft, tighten
bolts to correct torque.
REFER to: Specifications (205-01 Driveshaft,
Specifications).
Install center heat shield and exhaust system.
Driveshaft -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Center bearing - bolt* 40 29 -
Driveshaft balance - nut* 12 9 -
Driveshaft flange to differential flange - nut/bolt* 88 65 -
Driveshaft flange to transmission flange - nut/bolt* 127 94 -
Driveshaft - Driveshaft
COMPONENT LOCATION
INTRODUCTION
The driveshaft consists of the following components:
 A two-piece welded steel tube with a splined center slip joint.

 One universal joint.
 A center bearing.
 A flexible joint and a plunging joint.
The two-piece driveshaft is manufactured from lightweight steel and is used to transmit drive from the engine, via the
transmission, to the differential. The driveshaft aligns with the centerline of the vehicle’s body and is supported by a center
bearing.
The driveshafts front tube is of a swaged construction, designed to collapse in a controlled manner in the event of the vehicle
being involved in a front-end collision. Low friction splines at the center of the driveshaft provide the driveshaft's plunge
capability.
A flexible coupling is used to connect the driveshaft assembly to the transmission, allowing for angular movement of the
drive shafts due to acceleration and braking. The center universal joint is lubricated during manufacture and sealed for life.
This joint is positioned to a specified angle using shims between the center bearing and the body.
Driveshaft

1 - Rear driveshaft tube
2 - Differential
3 - Differential plunging joint
4 - Universal joint
5 - Center bearing
6 - Transmission
7 - Collapsible front driveshaft tube
8 - Transmission flexible joint
For additional information,

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Driveshaft - Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
General Procedures
1. For additional information, refer to the Jaguar Approved

Diagnostic System.
Special Tool(s)
205-932
Remover, Driveshaft
Removal
NOTE: Select NEUTRAL before disconnecting the battery, to allow the driveshaft to be turned.



3. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00 Exhaust System - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7. CAUTION: Under no circumstances must the

flexible coupling (or it's fixings) be loosened or
removed from the driveshaft.
8. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the joint or

gaiter, do not allow the driveshaft to hang.
NOTE: Make sure that the special tool is correctly

installed to the recess on the driveshaft.
Special Tool(s): 205-932

NOTE: Using a suitable hammer and drift, make

sure that you only hit the corner edges of the
special tool to remove the driveshaft.
10.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger-tight
at this stage.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark on the

driveshaft is correctly aligned to the alignment
mark on the differential case.
Torque: 75 Nm
3. NOTE: This step only applies if a new driveshaft is

being installed.
NOTE: Using the 3mm hole on the differential case

flange and paint alignment mark on the driveshaft
(as indicated). Make sure that the alignment marks
are correctly aligned.
Torque: 75 Nm
flexible coupling (or it's fixings) be loosened or
Torque: 127 Nm
5. Torque: 40 Nm
6. Torque: 5 Nm
7. Torque: 7 Nm
8. Torque: 10 Nm


Lower the vehicle.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential -
General Specifications
Item Specification
Differential Ratio 3.31 : 1
Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Specifications
Differential fluid type 5.0L NA Castrol SAF–XO 75W–90
Differential fluid type 5.0L SC Castrol BOT 720 75W–90
Capacities
Liters
Differential fluid capacity 5.0L NA 0.9 liters
Differential fluid capacity 5.0L SC 1.3 liters
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Differential flange to driveshaft flange - nuts/bolts* 73 54 -
Differential flange to pinion shaft - nut* A - -
Differential front mounting - bolt* 90 66 -
Differential rear mounting - bolt* 163 120 -
NOTE: A = refer to the procedure for correct torque sequence.

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential V8 5.0L
COMPONENT LOCATION
Open Differential
Electronic Differential

2 - Electronic differential
INTRODUCTION
The differential converts the 'angle of drive' through 90° and distributes drive, via the rear drive halfshafts, to the rear
wheels.
Two types of differential are installed on 5.0L vehicles. An open differential on naturally aspirated vehicles and an electronic
differential on SC (supercharger) vehicles. Both types of differential are attached to the rear subframe at four mounting
points. Each mounting point incorporates an insulator to reduce NVH (noise, vibration and harshness). The insulators in the
forward mounting points are installed in the differential. The insulators in the rear mounting points are installed in the rear
subframe.
OPEN DIFFERENTIAL

1 - Cover
2 - LH (left hand) rear drive halfshaft oil seal
3 - Filler/Level plug
4 - Input flange
5 - Front mounting points with insulators
6 - Carrier
7 - Rear mounting points
8 - Breather
9 - RH (right hand) rear drive halfshaft oil seal
10 - Magnetic drain plug
The open differential is a conventional design using a hypoid gear layout. The final drive ratio is 3.31:1.
The outer casing comprises two parts; a cover and a carrier. The carrier provides locations for all the internal components.
Nine bolts attach the cover to the carrier. The cover and carrier have cast fins, which assist rigidity and cooling. A breather is
fitted to the top of the carrier.
Exploded View of Open Differential

1 - Bolt (9 off)
2 - Oil seal
3 - Cover
4 - Shim
5 - Bearing assembly
6 - Bolt (10 off)
7 - Differential case
9 - Oil seal
10 - Oil slinger inner
11 - Oil slinger outer
12 - Input flange
13 - Pinion nut
14 - Collapsible spacer
15 - Shim
- Pinion shaft
17
18 - LH mounting insulator inner
19 - LH mounting insulator rubber
20 - LH mounting insulator outer
21 - Carrier
22 - RH mounting insulator inner
23 - RH mounting insulator rubber
24 - RH mounting insulator outer
25 - Oil seal
26 - Drain plug
27 - Breather tube
28 - Breather cap
29 - Shim
31 - Drive gear
32 - Shaft
33 - Planet gear (2 off)
34 - Thrust washer (2 off)
35 - Sun gear (2 off)
36 - Spacer (2 off)
37 - Roll pin
38 - Fill/Level plug
The open differential comprises a pinion shaft with a hypoid gear, and a crown wheel drive gear attached to a differential
case. The differential case houses two planet gears and two sun gears.
An input flange is installed on the externally splined outer end of the pinion shaft and retained by a pinion nut. The input
flange has six threaded holes for the driveshaft attachment bolts. An oil slinger and oil seal are installed in the carrier to seal
the input flange. The hypoid gear of the pinion shaft mates with the drive gear.
Ten bolts attach the drive gear to the differential case. The differential case is mounted on taper roller bearings located in
machined bores in the carrier and the cover. Shims are installed behind the bearing cups to apply the correct bearing preload
and hypoid backlash.
The differential case has a through hole, which provides location for a shaft. Two planet gears are installed on the shaft, with
thrust washers between the planet gears and the differential case. A roll pin locks the shaft to the differential case.
Two sun gears are located in pockets in the differential case and mesh with the planet gears. Spacers are fitted between the
sun gears and the differential case to give the correct mesh contact between the planet gears and the sun gears. Each sun
gear has a machined bore with internal splines and a machined groove. The splines transfer drive to the rear drive halfshafts.
The groove provides positive location for the snap ring fitted to the inboard end of the rear drive halfshafts.
Oil seals are installed in the carrier and the cover to seal the rear drive halfshafts.
The open differential contains a quantity of oil for splash lubrication of the internal components. A magnetic drain plug is
installed in the bottom of the carrier and a filler/level plug is installed in the cover.
ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL

1 - Cover
2 - LH rear drive halfshaft oil seal
4 - Temperature sensor
5 - Motor
6 - Input flange
7 - Front mounting points with insulator assemblies
8 - Carrier
9 - Rear mounting points
10 - Breather
11 - RH rear drive halfshaft oil seal
12 - Magnetic drain plug
The electronic differential has the same functionality as the open differential, but it also incorporates a locking and torque
biasing function to give improved traction performance and vehicle dynamic stability.
The basic construction of the electronic differential is similar to the open differential. However, the electronic differential also
has the following:
 Two additional planet gears in the differential case, to cater for the higher torque of the SC engine.
 A multi-plate clutch and actuator assembly installed on the LH (left-hand) sun gear.
 A motor and reduction gearbox, attached to the cover.
 A temperature sensor installed in the cover.
The DLM (differential locking module) operates the motor of the electronic differential under the control of the ADCM
(adaptive damping control module).
Exploded View of Electronic Differential

1 - Circlip
3 - Input actuator
4 - Actuator balls
5 - Output actuator
6 - Thrust race
7 - Shim
8 - Thrust plate
-
9 Dished washer
10 - Bolt (10 off)
11 - Clutch basket
12 - Multi-plate clutch and pressure disc
13 - Differential case
14 - Screw (2 off)
16 - Oil seal
17 - Oil slinger inner
18 - Oil slinger outer
19 - Input flange
20 - Pinion nut
21 - Collapsible spacer
22 - Shim
24 - Pinion shaft
25 - Mounting insulator inner (2 off)
26 - Mounting insulator rubber (2 off)
27 - Mounting insulator outer (2 off)
28 - Carrier
29 - Oil seal
30 - Drain plug
31 - Breather tube
32 - Breather cap
33 - Shim
35 - Drive gear
36 - Shim
37 - RH sun gear
38 - Circlip
39 - Thrust washer (4 off)
40 - Planet gear (4 off)
41 - Pin (2 off)
42 - Shaft
43 - LH sun gear
44 - Shim
46 - Shim
47 - Dowel (2 off)
48 - Bolt (4 off)
49 - Reduction gear casing
50 - Reduction gear
51 - Shaft
53 - O-ring seal
54 - Motor
55 - Screw (4 off)
56 - Cover
57 - Output actuator locking pin
58 - Bolt (9 off)
60 - Oil seal
The multi-plate clutch is contained in a clutch basket attached to the differential case with the drive gear securing bolts.
Alternate plates of the clutch pack are keyed to the clutch basket and the LH sun gear. A pressure disc is installed on the
outer end of the clutch pack and keyed to the clutch basket. A thrust plate on the end of the clutch basket incorporates lugs
which extend through the clutch basket onto the pressure disc.
The actuator assembly is mounted on bearings on the outboard end of the clutch basket, against the thrust race. The
actuator assembly consists of input and output actuators separated by five ball bearings. A locking pin in the cover engages
with a slot in the output actuator to prevent it turning, but allow it to move axially. The input actuator engages with the
reduction gearbox and is free to rotate relative to the cover. Ball bearings locate in curved grooves in the mating faces of the
input and output actuators. The bottom surface of each groove incorporates a ramp. Rotation of the input actuator forces the
ball bearings up the ramps in the grooves and induces an axial movement in the output actuator. The thrust race and
pressure disc transfer the axial movement from the output actuator to the clutch pack.
Section Through Multi-plate Clutch

1 - Actuator
2 - Multi-plate clutch
3 - Differential
The motor is a 12 Vdc motor that adjusts the frictional loading of the multi-plate clutch, via the reduction gearbox and the
actuator assembly, under the control of the DLM. Adjusting the frictional loading of the multi-plate clutch adjusts the locking
torque between the crown wheel drive gear and the sun gear.
Four bolts attach the motor to the reduction gearbox, which is located in position on the cover with two dowels, and secured
with four bolts. An O-ring seals the joint between the motor and the reduction gearbox.
The motor is driven by a 12 V PWM (pulse width modulated) feed from the DLM. The motor also incorporates the following
connections with the DLM:
 A motor temperature sensor, to prevent excessive use from damaging the motor.
 Two Hall effect motor position sensors, to enable closed loop control of the motor.
The temperature sensor provides a differential oil temperature signal to the DLM, to prevent excessive use from damaging
the multi-plate clutch.
Differential Locking Module
The DLM controls the operation of the motor on the electronic differential. The DLM is attached to a bracket located on the
LH side of the luggage compartment, immediately forward of the tail lamp, behind the trim.
The DLM receives three battery feeds from the AJB (auxiliary junction box) and an ignition feed from the CJB (central
junction box). A connection with the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus allows the DLM to communicate with the
ADCM.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL

1 - Battery
2 - BJB (battery junction box) (2 x 175 A megafuses)
4 - Motor
5 - DLM
6 - Oil temperature sensor
7 - ADCM
Open Differential
Rotational input from the drive shaft is passed via the input flange to the pinion shaft and pinion gear. The angles of the
pinion gear to the drive gear moves the rotational direction through 90°.
The transferred rotational motion is now passed to the drive gear, which in turn rotates the differential case. The planet
gears rotate with the differential case and transfer rotational motion to the LH and RH (right-hand) sun gears, which rotate
the rear drive halfshafts.
When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, the torque applied through the differential to each sun gear is equal. In
this condition both rear drive halfshafts rotate at the same speed. The planet gears do not rotate and effectively lock the sun
gears to the differential case.
If the vehicle is turning, the outer wheel will be forced to rotate faster than the inner wheel by having a greater distance to
travel. The differential senses the torque difference between the sun gears. The planet gears rotate on their shaft to allow
the outer wheel to rotate faster than the inner one.
Electronic Differential
The multi-plate clutch prevents excessive differential slip and therefore maximizes the traction performance of the vehicle.
This is fundamentally different from 'braked' traction control systems, which can only counteract differential slip when it
occurs.
A certain amount of differential slip is required to allow the vehicle to turn corners and to remain stable under control of the
ABS (anti-lock brake system). The ADCM monitors the driver's demands through primary vehicle controls and automatically
sets the slip torque in the differential. The system is completely automatic and does not require any special driver input.
The multi-plate clutch actively controls the torque flow through the differential and optimizes the torque distribution in the
driveline. The clutch biases the torque from the differential to the wheel with the higher grip and prevents the wheel with the
lower grip from spinning.
The differential strategy in the ADCM includes:
 A pre-loading function, increasing locking torque with increased driving torque.

 A slip controller to decrease locking torque for optimum comfort, e.g. parking.
The ADCM memorizes the position of the motor when the ignition is switched off.
CAN bus messages used by the ADCM include wheel speed, steering angle, automatic transmission speed, temperature
information, car configuration, axle ratios and mode inputs.
The ADCM also sends messages via the CAN bus to tell other control modules on the network the status of the electronic
differential. The clutch torque and default mode status are some of the main signals sent out by the ADCM.
If the DLM or ADCM are replaced, a Jaguar approved diagnostic system must be connected to the vehicle and the differential
self-calibration procedure must be performed. This procedure must also be performed if the motor or electronic differential is
replaced.
If a fault occurs with the electronic differential, the ADCM, the DLM, or one of the required input signals, the ADCM records
an error code and displays a warning in the message center.
The following messages can be displayed:
Message Description Chime

EDIFF NOT Differential temperature has reached the overheat threshold. System deactivated until Single
AVAILABLE temperature returns within limits.
EDIFF SYSTEM Fault has occurred with electronic differential. System deactivated until fault rectified. Single
FAULT
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential
For a detailed description of the Rear Drive Axle and Differential, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
in the workshop manual. REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-02 Rear
Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
 Fixings that secure Rear Differential Control Module (Heat  Fuses/Relays
path for Module Heatsink)  Damaged, Loose or Corroded Connector(s)
 Damage to Wiring Loom/Incorrect Location,
Stretched or Taught
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer
to the DTC index.
DTC Index
NOTE: If the control module is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module.
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the five digits from
the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give extra
information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
places and with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads
into account.
NOTE: If the Rear Differential Control Module, Rear Differential Actuator or the Rear Differential are replaced the on
demand self test (ODST) must be carried out to calibrate the components.

P0562- System Voltage Low - no  System voltage low at ECU Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 sub type information (supply voltage less than 9 check, power and ground circuit for fault
volts)
P0563- System Voltage High - no  System voltage high Check Engine control module for stored DTCs ,
00 sub type information (supply voltage supply Suspect charging system fault. Refer to the
greater than 16 volts) electrical circuit diagrams and check, power
and ground circuit for fault
P0604- Internal Control Module  Module internal fault Suspect Rear Differential Control Module, refer
00 Random Access Memory to the new module installation note at the top
(RAM) Error - no sub type of the DTC Index
information
P0605- Internal Control Module  Module internal fault Suspect Rear Differential Control Module, refer
00 Read Only Memory (ROM) to the new module installation note at the top
Error - no sub type of the DTC Index
information
P0606- Control Module Processor -  Module internal fault Suspect Rear Differential Control Module, refer
00 no sub type information to the new module installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
P0607- Control Module  Module internal fault Clear DTCs, cycle ignition if DTC returns
00 Performance - no sub type suspect Rear Differential Control Module, refer
information to the new module installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
P0652- Sensor Reference Voltage B  Motor position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Circuit Low - no sub type supply below 5.7 V check, Rear Differential Actuator - Motor
information Position Sensor Circuit for fault. If circuit is
correct suspect Rear Differential Control
Module, refer to the new module installation
note at the top of the DTC Index
P0653- Sensor Reference Voltage B  Motor position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Circuit High - no sub type supply above 8.3 V - check, Rear Differential Actuator - Motor
information Internal control module Position Sensor circuit for fault. If wiring
failure integrity is correct suspect the Rear Differential
Control Module, refer to the new module
P0666- PCM / ECM / TCM Internal  Internal ECU temperature Investigate security of Rear Differential Control
00 Temperature Sensor A sensor value above 105 Module fixings. The units heatsink is through
Circuit - no sub type Degrees C its mounting, if fixings secure, suspect Rear
information Differential Control Module, refer to the new
module installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
P0712- Transmission Fluid  Rear Differential Actuator - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Temperature Sensor A Motor Temperature Sensor check, Rear Differential Actuator - Motor
Circuit Low - no sub type open circuit or short circuit Temperature Sensor circuit for open circuit or
information to ground short to ground
P0713- Transmission Fluid  Rear Differential Actuator - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Temperature Sensor A Motor Temperature Sensor check, Rear Differential Actuator - Motor
Circuit High - no sub type short circuit to power Temperature Sensor circuit for short circuit to
information power or motor circuit. Repair short circuit.
Clear DTCs, cycle ignition. If DTC returns
suspect the Rear Differential Actuator, refer to
the new module / component installation note
at the top of the DTC Index
P0806- Clutch Position Sensor  Mismatch of actual and Clear DTCs. Cycle ignition, Carry out on
00 Circuit Range/Performance expected/calculated demand self test (ODST), record DTCs. Clear
- no sub type information actuator position DTCs. Cycle ignition. Road test. If DTC reoccurs
suspect mechanical fault with Rear Differential,
refer to the new component installation note at
the top of the DTC Index
P0807- Clutch Position Sensor  Open circuit or short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Circuit Low - no sub type ground of DC Motor check, Rear Differential Actuator - Motor
information Position Sensor signal A or Position Hall Sensor signal circuit (A or B) open
B circuit or short to ground
P0808- Clutch Position Sensor  Short circuit to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Circuit High - no sub type supply of DC Motor Position check, Rear Differential Actuator - Motor
information Sensor signal A or B Position Hall Sensor signal circuit (A or B) short
to power or motor circuit
P080A- Clutch Position Not Learned  On demand self test Clear DTCs. Cycle ignition, Carry out on
00 - no sub type information (ODST) Re-calibration demand self test (ODST), record DTCs. Clear
failed. RDCM runs with DTCs. Cycle ignition. Road test. If DTC reoccurs
default values suspect mechanical fault with Rear Differential,
refer to the new component installation note at
P0894- Transmission Component  Internal Magnetic Brake of Suspect Rear Differential Actuator, refer to the
00 Slipping - no sub type Actuator is slipping new component installation note at the top of
information the DTC Index. Replace Rear Differential
Actuator, Clear DTCs. Cycle ignition, Carry out
on demand self test (ODST), record DTCs.
Clear DTCs. Cycle ignition. Road test.
P0900- Clutch Actuator Circuit /  Open circuit of DC Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Open - no sub type power supply circuit check, Rear Differential Actuator - Clutch
information Actuation Motor circuit for open circuit
P0901- Clutch Actuator Circuit  Both DC Motor supply leads Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Range/Performance - no are short circuited against check, Rear Differential Actuator - Clutch
sub type information each other or H-bridge Actuation Motor circuit for circuit fault
overload detected
P0902- Clutch Actuator Circuit Low  Short circuit to ground of Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 - no sub type information Motor supply cable check, Rear Differential Actuator - Clutch
Actuation Motor circuit for circuit short to
ground
P0903- Clutch Actuator Circuit High  Short circuit to power of Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 - no sub type information Motor supply cable check, Rear Differential Actuator - Clutch
Actuation Motor circuit for circuit short to
power
P1603- EEPROM Malfunction - no  Module internal fault - Suspect Rear Differential Control Module, refer
00 sub type information EEPROM failure detected to the new module installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
P1783- Transmission  Rear Differential Oil Clear DTCs . Allow vehicle to cool , read DTCs if
00 Overtemperature Condition Temperature Sensor value DTC reoccurs suspect Rear Differential Actuator
- no sub type information above 160 Degrees C - Motor Temperature Sensor fault
P186A- Differential Lock-up  Open circuit of DC Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Actuator Brake Control Brake supply circuit check, Rear Differential Actuator - Brake
Circuit / Open - no sub Solenoid Circuit for open circuit
type information
P186B- Differential Lock-up  Short circuit to ground of Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Actuator Brake Control DC Motor Brake supply check, Rear Differential Actuator - Brake
Circuit Low - no sub type circuit Solenoid circuit for short to ground
information
P186C- Differential Lock-up  Short circuit to power of DCRefer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Actuator Brake Control Motor Brake supply circuit check, Rear Differential Actuator - Brake
Circuit High - no sub type Solenoid circuit for short to power or motor
information circuit
P186D- Clutch Actuator Stuck - no  Clutch Actuation Motor Clear DTCs. Cycle ignition, Carry out on
00 sub type information fault demand self test (ODST), record DTCs. Clear
DTCs. Cycle ignition. If DTC reoccurs suspect
Rear Differential Actuator, refer to the new
Index
P2742- Transmission Fluid  Rear Differential Oil Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Temperature Sensor B Temperature Sensor short check, Rear Differential Actuator - Oil
Circuit Low - no sub type circuit to ground Temperature sensor for short circuit to ground
information
P2743- Transmission Fluid  Rear Differential Oil Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Temperature Sensor B Temperature Sensor short check, Rear Differential Actuator - Oil
Circuit High - no sub type circuit to power Temperature sensor for short circuit to power
information or motor circuit
P2785- Clutch Actuator  Clutch Actuator Suspect Rear Differential Actuator, refer to the
00 Temperature Too High - no Temperature Sensor value new component installation note at the top of
sub type information above 150 Degrees C the DTC Index
P2787- Clutch Temperature Too  Rear Differential Clutch Suspect mechanical fault with Rear Differential,
00 High - no sub type Pack temperature value refer to the new component installation note at
information above 200 Degrees C the top of the DTC Index
U0001- High Speed CAN  High speed CAN bus off Carry out the CAN network integrity tests using
88 Communication - Bus off detected the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U0100- Lost Communication With  Lost Communication With Check ECM for stored DTCs. Refer to the
00 ECM/PCM "A" - no sub type engine control module electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus
information (ECM) (CAN Bus circuit circuit to ECM for circuit fault
fault)
U0121- Lost Communication With  Lost Communication With Check ABS Control Module for stored DTCs.
00 Anti-Lock Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
(ABS) Control Module - no (ABS) Control Module (CAN check Can Bus circuit to ABS Control Module
sub type information Bus circuit fault) for circuit fault
U0139- Lost Communication With  Lost Communication With Check Suspension Control Module "B" for
00 Suspension Control Module Suspension Control Module stored DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit
"B" - no sub type "B" (CAN Bus circuit fault) diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to
information Suspension Control Module "B" for circuit fault
U0155- Lost Communication With  Lost Communication With Check Instrument Panel Cluster for stored
00 Instrument Panel Cluster Instrument Panel Cluster DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
(IPC) Control Module - no (IPC) Control Module (CAN and check Can Bus circuit to Instrument Panel
sub type information Bus circuit fault) Cluster for circuit fault
U0300- Internal Control Module  Wrong Master Config ID Incorrect software installed Check/confirm the
00 Software Incompatibility - received or Signal missing part number of installed Rear Differential
no sub type information Control Module is correct
U0415- Invalid Data Received From  Invalid data receive Check Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Control
68 Anti-Lock Brake System Module for stored DTCs
(ABS) Control Module -
event information
U0422- Invalid Data Received From  Invalid data receive Check Body Control Module for stored DTCs
68 Body Control Module -
event information
U043A- Invalid Data Received From  Invalid data receive Check Suspension Control Module "B" for
68 Suspension Control Module stored DTCs
"B" - event information
U0443- Invalid Data Received From  Invalid data receive Check Suspension Control Module "B" for
68 Body Control Module "B" - stored DTCs for stored DTCs
event information
U1A14- CAN Initialization Failure -  Module internal fault Suspect Rear Differential Control Module, refer
49 internal electronic failure to the new module installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
P0702- Transmission Control  Implausibility of Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
64 System Electrical - signal Temperature Sensor and check, Motor Temperature Sensor and Oil
plausibility failure Oil Sump Temperature Sump Temperature Sensors and circuit for fault
Sensor readout detected.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Check
1. Refer to: Specifications (205-02, Specifications).

stands.

3.
 Clean the area around the lubricant filler
plug.
 Position container to collect fluid loss.
4.
 Clean the area around the drain plug.
 Remove the fluid drain plug.
 Drain the differential lubricant.
Adjustment
1.
 Clean the drain plug.
 Torque: 27 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to

the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the
differential with lubricant, and not to act as a level
indicator.
Make sure the correct specification and

quanity of oil is used.
 Fill the differential with the correct amount

of lubricant.
3.
 Clean the filler plug.
 Torque: 27 Nm
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Case
Special Tool(s)
205-932
Remover, Driveshaft
Removal
All vehicles


2. Refer to: Rear Halfshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
4. Torque: 7 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. WARNING: Make sure the axle assembly is

supported.
 K-Frame bolts
Torque:
M10 40 Nm
M12 133 Nm
 Subframe bolts
Torque:
Stage 1: 60 Nm
Stage 2: 240°
7.
NOTE: Make sure that the special tool is correctly

installed to the recess on the driveshaft.
Torque: 75 Nm

NOTE: Using a suitable hammer and drift, make

sure that you only hit the corner edges of the
special tool to remove the driveshaft.

Vehicles with supercharger
10.
All vehicles
11. Support the rear differential casing.
12. Torque:
M14 190 Nm
M12 90 Nm
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark on the driveshaft is
correctly aligned to the alignment mark on the differential case.

2. NOTE: This step only applies if a new driveshaft is
being installed.
NOTE: Using the 3mm hole on the differential case

flange and paint alignment mark on the driveshaft
(as indicated). Make sure that the alignment marks
are correctly aligned.
Torque: 75 Nm
3. Check and top-up the differential case.
Torque: 34 Nm

4.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Front Bushing
Special Tool(s)
204-274
Bush install and removal tool
204-275
204-335
204-601
Bush install tool
303-1121
Installer, Crankshaft Seal
Removal


2. Refer to: Differential Case (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential,
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the new bushes are installed in the correct
orientation.
Special Tool(s): 204-275, 204-601, 303-1121, 204-274

Published: 19-Aug-2011
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal
Special Tool(s)
204-264
Pinion Seal Replacer
204-265
Remover/Installer, Drive Pinion Seal
204-266
Adapter for 204-265
204-267
Adapter for 204-265
204-269
205-053
Retainer, Drive Flange
205-053-03
Adapter, Drive Pinion Flange
Removal


2. Refer to: Driveshaft - TD4 2.2L Diesel (205-01, Removal and
Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-01 Driveshaft,
Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01
Driveshaft, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft,
3. NOTE: Measure for installation.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion

shaft.
4. NOTE: Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive
pinion shaft to the drive pinion nut and pinion
flange.
5. Special Tool(s): 205-053, 205-053-03
6. Special Tool(s): 204-266, 204-265, 204-269
7. NOTE: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
Installation
2.
3. Special Tool(s): 204-267, 204-266, 204-265
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the drive pinion flange has no end

float and is free to rotate.
Make sure that the drive pinion flange scribed

mark is aligned and is never tightend short of the
scribed mark on the drive pinion shaft and is no
more than a maximum of 5 degrees past the
scribed mark on the drive pinion shaft.
NOTE: Using the special tool, counter hold the

drive pinion flange.
NOTE: Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the

pinion shaft to previous noted depth.
Special Tool(s): 205-053, 205-053-03

Torque: 34 Nm
6. Refer to: Driveshaft - TD4 2.2L Diesel (205-01, Removal and

Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-01 Driveshaft,
Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01
Driveshaft, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft,
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Halfshaft Seal
Removal
1. Refer to: Rear Halfshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Installation
Refer to: Rear Halfshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Locking Motor
Removal
1. Refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive

Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
2.
3.
4. CAUTION: Take extra care when handling the

component.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the exhaust
system is supported with a suitable transmission
stand.

correct.
6.
7.
8.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces

are clean and free of foreign material.
 Torque: 11 Nm
 Apply a suitable amount of approved
sealant to one of the mating faces.
2.
3. Torque: 7 Nm
4. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may
correct.

component.
6.
 Torque: 25 Nm
7. Torque: 25 Nm
8. Refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive

Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
Rear Drive Halfshafts -
Specifications
Constant velocity (CV) grease Optimal LN 584 LO
Driveshaft locking compound Loctite WSK-M2G349-A4
Capacities
Liters
Grease for inner CV joint/boot 140g
Grease for outer CV joint/boot 120g
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Halfshaft/hub - nut * 300 222 -
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts
COMPONENT LOCATION
INTRODUCTION
The rear drive halfshafts are of unequal length and both inner and outer joints are of the CV (constant velocity) type, with
plunging inboard and fixed outboard capability allowing for suspension movement.
Dust shields are installed on the inner CV joints to protect the connections with the differential.
The inner and outer CV joints are linked by a solid bar halfshaft. The outer CV joint is a spline interferance-fit into the wheel
hub. The inner CV joint is of a spline slide-fit arrangement and is retained in the differential with the aid of a spring clip.
1 - Outer CV joint
2 - Outer CV joint gaiter
3 - Rear drive halfshaft
4 - Inner CV joint gaiter
5 - Inner CV joint
6 - Dust shield
7 - Spring clip
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts
For additional information,

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Halfshaft V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
204-269
205-491
Hub puller
205-491-1
Adapter nuts
308-005
Remover, Axle oil seal
308-621-1
Installer, Halfshaft Oil Seal
308-621-2
Installer/Guide, Halfshaft Oil Seal
www.JagDocs.com
Materials
Name Specification
Thread Locking HS WSK-M2G349-A4 / 6U7J-M2G349-AA
Removal


and Installation).
3. NOTE: With assistance, remove the halfshaft
retaining nut, and retain it for the install
procedure.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach
the halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to
halfshaft.
Special Tool(s): 205-491-1, 205-491, 204-269

11.
12. NOTE: Component illustrated, removed for clarity.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 308-005

13.
Installation
1. Clean the components mating faces.

2. NOTE: Component illustrated, removed for clarity.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 308-621-1, 308-621-2
3. CAUTION: Install a new circlip.
Apply a 3 mm (0.125) diameter bead of sealant to

the halfshaft splines.
Material: Thread Locking HS (WSK-M2G349-A4 /

6U7J-M2G349-AA)
4. Install the halfshaft oil seal plutector.
5. CAUTIONS:
Do not install the rear halfshaft fully at this

stage.
Only install the rear halfshaft until the

halfshaft splines have past the halfshaft oil seal.
6. Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal plutector.

7. CAUTION: Make sure that the rear halfshaft
circlip is installed correctly by pulling the halfshaft
gently to make sure it is engaged.

Torque: 90 Nm
9. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger

tight.
NOTE: The wheel hub nut is not tightened at this

stage.

Torque: 150 Nm
Torque: 55 Nm
12. Torque: 6 Nm
13.
14. Torque: 103 Nm

15. CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the
nut. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Torque: 300 Nm
Torque: 34 Nm
and Installation).
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal
CAUTION: The inboard joint has angularly adjusted roller (AAR) joints. AAR joints have no internal retaining
mechanism and can separate.


2. Remove the halfshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts,
3. NOTE: Position and secure component in a bench vice
fitted with soft jaws.
Remove and discard the CV joint boot outer retaining

clamp.
4. Remove the outer CV joint.

 Carefully release the clip.
Remove the outer CV joint boot.

 Remove and discard the CV joint boot inner
retaining clamp.
Installation
1. Clean and inspect the components for deterioration.
Install the CV joint boot.

 Secure the clip.
3. NOTE: Check that the circlip is fully engaged.
Install the outer CV joint.
4. CAUTION: Only use lubricants meeting the Jaguar

specification.
Pack the CV joint with the grease supplied.
5. CAUTION: Ensure enough air is present in the CV boot

before the retaining clip is secured.
Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.

6. Install the halfshaft.

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal
CAUTION: The inboard joint has angularly adjusted roller (AAR) joints. AAR joints have no internal retaining
mechanism and can separate.


2. Remove the halfshaft.
3. NOTE: Position and secure component in a bench vice
fitted with soft jaws.
Remove and discard the CV joint boot outer retaining

clamp.
4. CAUTION: Use a soft face hammer or soft drift to

release the C V joint from the retaining circlip.
Remove the outer CV joint.
5. Remove and discard the circlip.

Remove the outer CV joint boot.

 Remove and discard the CV joint boot inner
retaining clamp.
Installation
1. Clean and inspect the components for deterioration.
Install the CV joint boot.

3. Install the circlip.

4. NOTE: Check that the circlip is fully engaged.
Install the outer CV joint.
5. CAUTION: Only use lubricants meeting the Jaguar

specification.
Pack the CV joint with the grease supplied.
6. CAUTION: Ensure enough air is present in the CV boot

before the retaining clip is secured.
Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.

7. Install the halfshaft.

Brake System - General Information -
CAUTION: Do not use brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 on 2006my vehicles onwards. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Super Dot 4 which is the Jaguar
recommended brake fluid. Shell ESL Super Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item Specification
Brake fluid Shell ESL Dot 4
Brake Lining and Disc Specifications

Item Specification
Front brake pad material nominal thickness 13 mm (0.51 in)
Front brake pad material minimum thickness 2 mm (0.08 in)
Rear brake pad material nominal thickness 10.8 mm (0.43 in)
Rear brake pad material minimum thickness 2 mm (0.08 in)
Front brake disc diameter - Vehicles with standard brakes 355 mm (14.0 in)
Front brake disc diameter - Vehicles with high performance brakes 380 mm (15.0 in)
New front brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes 32 mm (1.26 in)
New front brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes 36 mm (1.42 in)
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes 30 mm (1.18 in)
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes 34 mm (1.34 in)
Rear brake disc diameter - Vehicles with standard brakes 326 mm (12.8 in)
Rear brake disc diameter - Vehicles with high performance brakes 376 mm (14.8 in)
New rear brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes 20 mm (0.79 in)
New rear brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes 26 mm (1.02 in)
Worn rear brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes 18 mm (0.72 in)
Worn rear brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes 24 mm (0.94 in)
Maximum front brake disc runout (installed) 0.075 mm ( 0.003 in)
Maximum rear brake disc runout (installed) 0.09 mm ( 0.004 in)
Maximum front hub face runout (installed) 0.015 mm ( 0.0006 in)
Maximum rear hub face runout (installed) 0.025 mm ( 0.0009 in)
Front brake sliding caliper single piston diameter - Vehicles with standard brakes 60 mm (2.36 in)
Front brake sliding caliper double piston diameter - Vehicles with high performance brakes 42 mm (1.66 in)
Rear brake sliding caliper single piston diameter 45 mm (1.77 in)
Front brake caliper bleed screw 14 Nm (10 lb-ft)
Rear brake caliper bleed screw 14 Nm (10 lb-ft)
Brake System - General Information - Brake System
For a detailed description of the brake system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to:
Front Disc Brake (206-03, Description and Operation),
Rear Disc Brake (206-04, Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation),
Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation),
Brake Booster (206-07, Description and Operation),
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (206-09, Description and Operation).
NOTE: Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, make sure that the brake system warning indicator is functional.
Visually examine the front and rear wheel and tire assemblies for damage such as uneven wear patterns, tread worn
out or sidewall damage. Verify the tires are the same size, type and, where possible, same manufacturer. Replace the
damaged wheel or excessively worn tire.
REFER to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
Wheels and tires must be cleared of any foreign matter and tire pressures adjusted to the correct specification.
If the tires exhibit uneven wear or feathering, the cause must be corrected. Check the steering and suspension
components for damage or wear and, if necessary, check and adjust front wheel alignment.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, Specifications) /
Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).

 Brake master cylinder  Parking brake actuator
 Brake caliper piston(s)  Parking brake module
 Brake discs  Parking brake switch
 Wheel bearings  Damaged or corroded wiring harness
 Brake pads  Brake master cylinder fluid level switch
 Power brake booster
 Brake pedal linkage
 Brake booster vacuum hose
 Tires
 Debris
Road Test
Carry out a road test to compare actual vehicle braking performance with the performance standards expected by the
driver. The ability of the test driver to make valid comparisons and detect performance deficiencies will depend on
experience.
The driver should have a thorough knowledge of brake system operation and accepted general performance guidelines
to make good comparisons and detect performance concerns.
An experienced brake technician will always establish a route that will be used for all brake diagnosis road tests. The
roads selected will be reasonably smooth and level. Gravel or bumpy roads are not suitable because the surface does
not allow the tires to grip the road equally. Crowned roads should be avoided because of the large amount of weight
shifted to the low set of wheels on this type of road. Once the route is established and consistently used, the road
surface variable can be eliminated from the test results.
Before a road test, obtain a complete description of the customer concerns or suspected condition. From the
description, the technician's experience will allow the technician to match possible causes with symptoms. Certain
components will be tagged as possible suspects while others will be eliminated by the evidence. More importantly, the
customer description can reveal unsafe conditions which should be checked or corrected before the road test. The
description will also help form the basic approach to the road test by narrowing the concern to specific components,
vehicle speed or conditions.
Begin the road test with a general brake performance check. Keeping the description of the concern in mind, test the
brakes at different vehicle speeds using both light and heavy pedal pressure. To determine if the concern is in the front
or rear braking system, use the brake pedal and then use the parking brake control. If the condition (pull, vibration,
pulsation) occurs only with the parking brake, the concern is in the rear brake system.
If the concern becomes evident during this check, verify it fits the description given before the road test. If the concern
is not evident, attempt to duplicate the condition using the information from the description.
If a concern exists, use the Symptom Chart in order to isolate it to a specific sub-system and condition description.
From this description, a list of possible sources can be used to further narrow the cause to a specific component or
condition.
Symptom Chart

Brakes noisy * Brake pads. * GO to Pinpoint Test A.
* Brake discs.
Vibration when brakes are * Wheels require balancing. * Go to Pinpoint Test B.
applied * Wheel hub nuts.
* Brake caliper mounting bolts.
* Brake pads.
* Foreign material/scratches/corrosion on
brake disc contact surfaces.
* Excessive brake disc thickness variation.
* Excessive brake disc runout.
* Wheel bearing wear or failure.
* Suspension bushing wear or failure.
* Steering bushing wear or failure.
The brakes pull or drift * Tire pressures/wear. * GO to Pinpoint Test C.
* Brake calipers.
* Brake pads.
* Brake discs.
* Wheel alignment adjustment.
* Wheel bearing.
* Suspension bushings and ball joints.
The pedal feels spongy * Air in brake system. * GO to Pinpoint Test D.
* Leak in hydraulic system.
* Brake booster/master cylinder.
* Brake pads.
The pedal goes down fast * Air in brake system. * GO to Pinpoint Test E.
* Leak in hydraulic system.
* Brake booster/master cylinder.
* Brake pads.
The pedal goes down * Air in brake system. * Go to Pinpoint Test F.
slowly * Brake booster/master cylinder.
Excessive brake pedal * Brake pads. * GO to Pinpoint Test G.
effort * Brake booster.
Brake lockup during light * Brake pads. * GO to Pinpoint Test H.
brake pedal force * Brake calipers.
Brakes drag * Parking brake control * GO to Pinpoint Test I.
applied/malfunction.
* Seized parking brake cables.
* Seized caliper slide pins.
* Seized brake caliper.
* Brake booster.
* Pedal gear.
Excessive/Erratic brake * Hydraulic system. * GO to Pinpoint Test J.
pedal travel * Brake pads.
* Brake discs.
* Hub and bearing assembly.
The red brake warning * Fluid level. * FILL the system to specification. CHECK
indicator is always on for leaks.
* Brake fluid level sensor. * INSTALL a new brake master cylinder fluid
reservoir.
REFER to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06
Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
* Parking brake control. * For additional information,
REFER to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking
Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and
Testing).
* Electrical circuit. * For additional information,
REFER to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking
Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Slow or incomplete brake * Brake pedal binding. * GO to Pinpoint Test K.
pedal return * Brake booster/master cylinder.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : BRAKES NOISY

CONDITIONS
A1: INSPECT BRAKE PADS
1 Inspect the condition of the front and rear brake pads. Check for damage to any anti-squeal
shims.
Are the brake pads OK?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
CLEAN the front brake pads or INSTALL new front brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03, Removal and Installation).
CLEAN the rear brake pads or INSTALL new rear brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
Test vehicle for presence of brake squeal.
A2: INSPECT BRAKE DISCS
1 Inspect the brake discs for excessive corrosion, wear or disc thickness variation.
Does excessive corrosion, wear or disc thickness variation exist?
Yes
INSTALL new front brake discs and brake pads.
REFER to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation) /
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
. INSTALL new rear brake discs and brake pads.
REFER to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation) /
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Vehicle is OK.
PINPOINT TEST B : VIBRATION WHEN BRAKES ARE APPLIED

CONDITIONS
B1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) without applying brakes.
Is the vibration present?
Yes
TEST for noise vibration and harshness.
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness,
REPEAT road test if necessary.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK FOR BRAKE VIBRATION
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) with light and medium application on the
brake pedal.
Is a vibration present?
Yes
CHECK the brake caliper mounting bolts and wheel hub nuts and TIGHTEN as necessary. CHECK
the balance of all road wheels and tyres and REPAIR as necessary. CHECK the brake discs for
excessive wear, runout, thickness variation or cracks. INSTALL new brake discs and brake pads as
necessary. GO to B3.
No
Vehicle is OK.
B3: IS VIBRATION STILL PRESENT UNDER BRAKE APPLICATION?
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) with light and medium application on the
brake pedal.
Is a vibration present?
Yes
CHECK for wear or failure of steering gear bushings. CHECK for wear or failure of steering gear
ball joints. CHECK for wear or failure of front wheel bearings, suspension bushings and ball joints.
CHECK for wear or failure of rear wheel bearings, suspension bushings and ball joints. REFER to
relevant section in workshop manual and INSTALL new parts as necessary.
No
Vehicle is OK.
PINPOINT TEST C : THE BRAKES PULL OR DRIFT

CONDITIONS
C1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal.
Does the vehicle pull or drift?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Vehicle is OK.
C2: INSPECT TIRE CONDITION/PRESSURE
1 Check for excessive tire wear or incorrect pressures.
Are the tires at the correct pressure and in good condition?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
ADJUST the tire pressures or INSTALL new tires if excessively worn. TEST the system for normal
operation.
C3: CHECK CALIPERS
1 Check the disc brake caliper pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
Do the disc brake caliper pistons and pins bind, leak or stick?
Yes
RECTIFY sticking pins and INSTALL new brake calipers as necessary.
REFER to: Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation) /
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
No
GO to C4.
C4: INSPECT BRAKE DISCS
1 Check the brake discs for excessive damage, thickness variation or runout.
REFER to: Brake Disc Runout Check (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Does excessive damage or runout exist?
Yes
INSTALL new brake discs and brake pads as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
C5: INSPECT THE FRONT HUB AND WHEEL BEARING ASSEMBLY
1 Check the front hub and wheel bearing assembly.
Are the wheel bearings OK?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
INSTALL new wheel bearings.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
C6: CHECK SUSPENSION BUSHINGS AND BALL JOINTS.
1 Check all suspension bushings and ball joints.
Are the suspension bushings and ball joints OK?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
INSTALL new front suspension bushings and ball joints as necessary. INSTALL new rear
suspension bushings and ball joints as necessary. REFER to the relevant section in the workshop
manual.
C7: CHECK VEHICLE ALIGNMENT
1 Check the vehicle alignment.
REFER to: Front Subframe (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and
Installation).
Is the alignment within specification?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
Adjust the alignment as necessary.
REFER to: Front Subframe (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and
Installation).
PINPOINT TEST D : THE PEDAL FEELS SPONGY

CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK FOR SPONGY PEDAL (ENGINE OFF)
1 Check for a firm brake pedal.
Is the brake pedal effort and brake pedal travel normal?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE (ENGINE OFF)
1 Pump the brake pedal 10 times and hold on the final application.
Does the brake pedal feel firm on final application?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
BLEED the brake system.
REFER to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).
D3: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE (ENGINE ON)
1 Engine is idle.
2 Apply the brake pedal lightly three or four times.
3 Wait 15 seconds for the vacuum to recover.
4 Push down on the brake pedal until it stops moving downward or an increased resistance to
the brake pedal travel occurs.
5 Hold the brake pedal in the applied position while increasing the engine speed to 2000
revs/min.
6 Release the accelerator pedal.
Does the brake pedal move downward as the engine speed returns to idle?
Yes
GO to D4.
No
CHECK the vacuum to brake booster.
D4: CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
1 Check the brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level.
Is the fluid level OK?
Yes
Procedures).
No
CHECK for leaking brake system and RECTIFY as necessary. ADD fluid and BLEED the brake
system.
Procedures).
TEST the system for normal operation. REPEAT road test if necessary.
PINPOINT TEST E : THE PEDAL GOES DOWN FAST

CONDITIONS
E1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal.
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL-PRESSURIZE SYSTEM
1 Pump the brake pedal rapidly (five times).
Does the brake pedal travel build up and then hold?

Yes
Procedures).
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK FOR BRAKE SYSTEM LEAKS
1 Check for external brake system leaks. For additional information, refer to brake master
cylinder component test in this section.
Are leaks found?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary, ADD fluid and BLEED brake system.
Procedures).
No
System is OK.
PINPOINT TEST F : THE PEDAL GOES DOWN SLOWLY

CONDITIONS
F1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE - CHECK BRAKE PEDAL OPERATION
1 Check if the condition occurs during actual stopping application by applying the brake pedal
while the vehicle is moving.
Does the condition occur when the vehicle is moving?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
GO to F3.
F2: CHECK FOR BRAKE SYSTEM LEAKS
1 Check for external brake system leaks. For additional information, refer to brake master
cylinder component test in this section.
Are there any external brake system leaks?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. ADD fluid and BLEED the brake system.
Procedures).
No
GO to F3.
F3: CARRY OUT A BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER BYPASS TEST
1 Test for brake master cylinder bypass condition. Refer to Brake master cylinder component
test in this section.
Are any concerns found?
Yes
INSTALL a new brake master cylinder, ADD fluid and BLEED the brake system.
Procedures).
No
System is OK.
PINPOINT TEST G : EXCESSIVE BRAKE PEDAL EFFORT

CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK BRAKE PADS
1 Check the brake pads for wear, contamination, correct installation, damage and type.
Yes
INSTALL the front brake pads correctly or INSTALL new front brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
INSTALL the rear brake pads correctly or INSTALL new rear brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. REPEAT road test.
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK VACUUM
1 Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake booster.
2 Connect a vacuum/pressure tester to the vacuum hose.
3 Run the engine at normal operating temperature.
4 Record the vacuum reading.
Is the reading 40.5 kPa (12 in-Hg) or greater?
Yes
GO to G3.
No
LOCATE and REPAIR the source of low vacuum. TEST the system for normal operation.
G3: INSPECT SYSTEM
1 Switch the engine off.
2 Reconnect the vacuum hose.
3 Inspect the brake booster, rubber grommet, and all vacuum plumbing for cracks, holes,
damaged connections, or missing clamps.
4 Pump the brake pedal several times to exhaust the vacuum. Push down on the brake pedal and
hold.
Does the brake pedal move down when the engine is started?
Yes
Vacuum system is OK.
No
GO to G4.
G4: CHECK POWER BRAKE BOOSTER VALVE
1 Check the brake booster valve. For additional information, refer to Brake Booster component
test in this section.
Is the power brake booster valve OK?
Yes
CHECK the brake booster. For additional information, refer to Brake Booster component test in
this section. INSTALL a new brake booster if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Booster - RHD RWD (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation) /
Brake Booster - LHD RWD (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
No
INSTALL a new brake booster valve. TEST the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST H : BRAKE LOCKUP DURING LIGHT BRAKE PEDAL FORCE

CONDITIONS
H1: TEST BRAKE LOCKUP
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal lightly.
Do the brakes lockup?
Yes
GO to H2.
No
Vehicle is OK.
H2: INSPECT BRAKE PADS
1 Inspect brake pads for contamination, correct installation, damage and type.
Yes
INSTALL the front brake pads correctly or INSTALL new front brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
INSTALL the rear brake pads correctly or INSTALL new rear brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
TEST the system for correct operation.
No
GO to H3.
H3: INSPECT BRAKE CALIPERS
1 Inspect brake calipers for binding, leaking or sticking.
Yes
INSTALL the brake calipers correctly or INSTALL new brake calipers as necessary.
and Installation) /
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
No
Vehicle is OK.
PINPOINT TEST I : BRAKES DRAG
CONDITIONS
I1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brakes.
Are the brakes functioning correctly?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
GO to I2.
I2: CHECK BRAKE CALIPERS
1 Check the front caliper pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
and Installation).
Check the rear caliper pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
REFER to: Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
Do the disc brake caliper pistons and pins bind, leak or stick?
Yes
INSPECT the brake calipers and parking brake cables. INSTALL new components as necessary.
Test the system for normal operation. Road test vehicle if necessary.
No
GO to I3.
I3: CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER
1 Check the brake booster connecting rod alignment and travel.
Is the connecting rod OK?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
INSTALL a new brake booster.
Installation) /
PINPOINT TEST J : EXCESSIVE/ERRATIC BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL

CONDITIONS
J1: TEST ON ROUGH ROAD
1 Road test the vehicle on rough road conditions.
2 Apply the brakes slowly.
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
GO to J2.
J2: CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
1 Check the brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level.
Is the fluid level OK?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
CHECK brake master cylinder reservoir sealing points. For additional information, refer to Brake
master cylinder component test in this section. ADD brake fluid and BLEED the brake system.
Procedures).
TEST the system for normal operation. REPEAT road test if necessary.
J3: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE
1 Run engine at idle speed.
2 Apply the brake pedal lightly three or four times.
3 Wait 15 seconds for the vacuum to replenish.
4 Push down on the brake pedal until it stops moving downward or an increased resistance to the
brake pedal travel occurs.
5 Hold the brake pedal in the applied position while increasing the engine speed to 2000 revs/min.
6 Release the accelerator pedal.
Does the brake pedal move downward as the engine speed returns to idle?
Yes
GO to J4.
No
CHECK the vacuum to the brake booster.
J4: CHECK THE FRONT WHEEL BEARING ASSEMBLY
1 Check the front wheel bearing assembly.
Are the front wheel bearings loose?
Yes
INSTALL a new front wheel bearing if damaged.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
No
CHECK the front brake discs for thickness variances.
PINPOINT TEST K : SLOW OR INCOMPLETE BRAKE PEDAL RETURN

CONDITIONS
K1: CHECK FOR BRAKE PEDAL RETURN
1 Run the engine at idle while making several brake applications.
2 Pull the brake pedal rearward with approximately 44.5 N (10lb) force.
3 Release the brake pedal and measure the distance to the toe board.
4 Make a hard brake application.
5 Release the brake pedal and measure the brake pedal to toe board distance. The brake pedal
should return to its original position.
Does the brake pedal return to its original position?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
GO to K2.
K2: CHECK FOR BRAKE PEDAL BINDING
1 Disconnect the brake booster from the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal to ensure free
operation.
Is the brake pedal operating freely?
Yes
INSTALL a new brake booster.
Installation) /
No
REPAIR or INSTALL new brake pedal. TEST the system for normal operation.
Component Tests
Brake Booster
1. Check all hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connectors should be capped. Hoses and their connections
should be correctly secured and in good condition with no holes and no collapsed areas. Inspect the valve on the
brake booster for damage.
2. Check the hydraulic brake system for leaks or low fluid.
3. With the automatic transmission in PARK, stop the engine and apply the parking brake. Pump the brake pedal
several times to exhaust all vacuum in the system. With the engine switched off and all vacuum in the system
exhausted, apply the brake pedal and hold it down. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the
brake pedal will tend to move downward under constant foot pressure. If no motion is felt, the vacuum booster
system is not functioning.
4. Remove the vacuum hose from the brake booster. Manifold vacuum should be available at the brake booster end
of the hose with the engine at idle speed and the automatic transmission in PARK. Make sure that all unused
vacuum outlets are correctly capped, hose connectors are correctly secured and vacuum hoses are in good
condition. When it is established that manifold vacuum is available to the brake booster, connect the vacuum
hose to the brake booster and repeat Step 3. If no downward movement of the brake pedal is felt, install a new
brake booster.
5. Operate the engine for a minimum of 10 seconds at a fast idle. Stop the engine and allow the vehicle to stand
for 10 minutes. Then, apply the brake pedal with approximately 89 N (20lb) of force. The pedal feel (brake
application) should be the same as that noted with the engine running. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power
assist), install a new valve and then repeat the test. If the brake pedal still feels hard, install a new brake
booster. If the brake pedal movement feels spongy, bleed the brake system.
REFER to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
Brake Master Cylinder
Usually, the first and strongest indicator of anything wrong in the brake system is a feeling through the brake pedal. In
diagnosing the condition of the brake master cylinder, check pedal feel as evidence of a brake concern. Check for brake
warning lamp illumination and the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Normal Conditions
The following conditions are considered normal and are not indications that the brake master cylinder is in need of
repair.
 Modern brake systems are designed to produce a pedal effort that is not as hard as in the past. Complaints of
light pedal efforts should be compared to the pedal efforts of another vehicle of the same model and year.
 The fluid level will fall with brake pad wear.
Abnormal Conditions
Changes in the brake pedal feel or brake pedal travel are indicators that something could be wrong in the brake system.
The diagnostic procedure and techniques use brake pedal feel, warning indicator illumination and low brake fluid level
as indicators to diagnosing brake system concerns. The following conditions are considered abnormal and indicate that
the brake master cylinder is in need of repair:
NOTE: Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, make sure the brake system warning indicator is functional.
 Brake pedal goes down fast. This could be caused by an external or internal leak.
 Brake pedal goes down slowly. This could be caused by an internal or external leak.
 Brake pedal is low or feels spongy. This condition may be caused by no fluid in the brake master cylinder,
reservoir cap vent holes clogged or air in the hydraulic system.
 Brake pedal effort is excessive. This may be caused by a bind or obstruction in the pedal/linkage, a faulty non-
return valve, booster or insufficient booster vacuum.
 Rear brakes lock up during light pedal force. This may be caused by damaged brake pads, a partially applied
parking brake, a damaged ABS sensor or bearing failure.
 Brake pedal effort erratic. This condition could be caused by the brake booster or incorrectly installed brake
pads.
 Brake warning indicator is on. This may be caused by low fluid level or float assembly damaged.
Non Pressure Leaks
Any reduced fluid volume in the brake master cylinder reservoir may be caused by two types of none pressure external
leaks.
Type 1: An external leak may occur at the brake master cylinder reservoir cap because of incorrect positioning of the
gasket and cap. Reposition cap and gasket.
Type 2: An external leak may occur at the brake master cylinder reservoir mounting seals. Repair such a leak by
installing new seals and make sure that the brake master cylinder reservoir retaining bolt is correctly installed.
Brake System - General Information - Brake Disc Runout Check
General Procedures
Check
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Install all wheel nuts and tighten equally to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).
 Make sure that the brake disc is fully seated against the
hub face.
3. Install a dial test indicator gauge and holding fixture to a
suitable mounting point.
4. NOTE: If the runout is outside specification, check the hub face
runout.
Using the dial test indicator, measure the inner and outer faces
of the brake disc.
Specifications) /
Specifications (206-04, Specifications).
1. Position the gauge so that it contacts the disc 10 mm
(0.4 in) from the outer edge.
2. Slowly rotate the hub/disc assembly. Note the reading.
5. If a front hub runout check is required, remove the front brake
disc.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With:
Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
6. If a rear hub runout check is required, remove the rear brake
disc.
Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
7. NOTE: The hub surface should be free from dirt and corrosion.
Do not use abrasive cloths to clean hub faces.
Using the dial test indicator, measure the hub face runout.
1. Position the gauge so that it contacts the mounting tube
between the stud and the chamfer.
2. Slowly rotate the hub and note the runout. For additional
information, refer to the specification chart.
 If the front hub runout exceeds the specifications, install
a new hub, brake disc and recheck.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing
and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-
01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
If the rear hub runout exceeds the specifications, install
a new hub, brake disc and recheck.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing
(204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
8. If the front hub face is within specification, install a new brake
disc.
Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
If the rear hub face is within specification, install a new disc.
Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
Brake System - General Information - Brake System Bleeding
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with new, clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with
water.
NOTE:


2. Check that the brake fluid lines are secure and that there are no
signs of a brake fluid leak. If a brake fluid leak is detected,
investigate and rectify the cause of the leak before bleeding the
brakes.
3. Remove the brake master cylinder cover.
4. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids

to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of
the correct specification from airtight containers.
Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not
be compatible.
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint

finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove
the fluid and clean the area with water.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.
5. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.

6. Install the bleed tube to the right hand rear brake caliper bleed
screw and immerse the free end of the bleed tube in a bleed jar,
containing a small quantity of approved brake fluid.
 Remove the bleed screw covers.
7. Loosen the bleed screw by one-half to three-

quarters of a turn.
8. CAUTION: The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with
new, clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
NOTE: If the bleed tube used, does not have a one way valve
the bleed screw will need to be closed before the brake pedal is
returned to the rest position. Then opened again and the
procedure repeated for each pedal application.
With assistance, depress the brake pedal steadily through its full
stroke and allow it to return to the rest position. Repeat the
procedure until brake fluid, clean and air-free flows into the
bleed jar.
9. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is installed after

bleeding. This will prevent corrosion to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten the bleed screw.
 Vehicles with standard brakes: Tighten the front caliper
bleed screw to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
 Vehicles with high performance brakes: Tighten the front
caliper bleed screw to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
 Tighten the rear bleed screw to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
11. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be

seriously impaired if an incorrect bleed sequence is
used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each

brake caliper, following the above sequence.

13. Apply the brakes and check for leaks.
14. Install the brake fluid reservoir cap.
15. Install the brake master cylinder cover.
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check -
With Wheel On Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
1. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the

essential information is always correct.
NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH similar
NOTE: All measurements must taken with the wheel installed.

stands.

3. Mount the DTI Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge to the bolt as
shown with tool 100-053.
4. Make sure the DTI is securely mounted.
5. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the outer edge

of the disc.
 Zero DTI and rotate road wheel one
complete revolution to measure disc
runout.
6. Position the DTI probe in the centre of the disc.

runout.
7. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the inner edge
of the disc.
runout.
8. NOTE: The disc runout limit is 0.075 mm.
If the disc runout exceeds the limit check the hub drive flange
and bearing runout.
Wheel Hub Runout Check - Vehicles With: High Performance
Brakes (204-00 Suspension System - General Information,
General Procedures).
9. If hub runout is within the limit replace the brake disc.
10. Install the wheel.
 Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence as
shown above to the following:
 Stage 1: 4 Nm.
 Stage 2: 60 Nm.
 Stage 3: 125 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
11. Re-check the disc runout as detailed above.
12. Remove DTI and install the bolt. 90 Nm.
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check -
With Wheel On Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures

NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH similar
NOTE: All measurements must taken with the wheel installed.

stands.

3. Mount the Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge to the bolt as shown
with tool 100-053.
4. Make sure the DTI is securely mounted.

of the disc.
runout.
runout.

of the disc.
runout.
and bearing runout.
Wheel Hub Runout Check - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
(204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General
Procedures).
shown above to the following:
 Stage 1: 4 Nm.
 Stage 2: 60 Nm.
 Stage 3: 125 Nm.
11. Re-check the disc runout as detailed above.
12. Remove DTI and install the bolt. 90 Nm.
Brake System - General Information - Rear Brake Disc Runout Check -
With Wheel On
General Procedures

NOTE: All measurements must be taken with the wheel

installed.

stands.
Raise the rear of the vehicle.

3. Modify tool 100-053 with an M8 bolt and nut as
shown.
4. Mount the DTI Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge on

the tool as shown.
5. Securely mount the DTI on the bottom calliper
mounting bolt, a spacer washer maybe required
under the tool.

of the disc.
runout.

runout.
of the disc.
runout.
and bearing runout.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub Runout Check - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
(204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General
Procedures).
shown to the following:
 Stage 1: 4 Nm.
 Stage 2: 60 Nm.
 Stage 3: 125 Nm.
Published: 18-Sep-2012
Front Disc Brake -
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Dot 4 which is the Jaguar recommended
brake fluid. Shell ESL Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item Specification
Brake Fluid Shell ESL Dot 4
Description Nm lb-ft lb-in
Brake caliper anchor plate retaining bolts 115 85 -
Brake caliper retaining bolts 58 43 -
Brake hose retaining bolt 42 31 -
Front Disc Brake - Front Disc Brake
COMPONENT LOCATION - NATURALLY ASPIRATED VEHICLES
NOTE: LH (left-hand) installation shown, RH (right-hand) installation similar.

1 - Brake pad wear sensor
2 - Caliper body
3 - Anti-rattle spring
4 - Piston
5 - Piston seal
6 - Piston dust cover
7 - Inboard brake pad
8 - Outboard brake pad
9 - Retaining washer (2 off)
-
10 Brake disc
11 - Rivet (2 off)
12 - Heat shield
13 - Front wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
14 - Caliper bolt (2 off)
15 - Caliper carrier
16 - Guide pin dust cover (2 off)
17 - Guide pin bush (2 off)
18 - Guide pin (2 off)
19 - Bleed screw
20 - Bleed screw dust cap
COMPONENT LOCATION - SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES
NOTE: LH installation shown, RH installation similar.

-
2 Caliper body
4 - Piston (2 off)
5 - Piston seal (2 off)
6 - Piston dust cover (2 off)
10 - Brake disc
11 - Rivet (2 off)
12 - Heat shield
13 - Front wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
18 - Guide pin (2 off)
19 - Bleed screw
INTRODUCTION
The front braking system features ventilated brake discs with single (naturally aspirated vehicles) or dual (SC (supercharger)
vehicles) piston sliding calipers. On naturally aspirated vehicles the discs are 355 mm (13.98 in.) diameter x 32 mm (1.26
in.) thick. On SC vehicles the discs are 380 mm (14.96 in.) diameter x 36 mm (1.42 in.) thick.
The brake disc is manufactured from cast iron. The disc is retained on the wheel hub by two retaining washers and the wheel
nuts.
Each caliper is mounted within a fixed carrier that is secured to the front wheel knuckle with two bolts. On SC vehicles the
calipers are painted. Each outboard brake pad is installed with a pressed steel anti-rattle spring. On SC vehicles a badge is
formed on the anti-rattle spring. The inboard brake pad of the LH brake incorporates a wear sensor.
NOTE: New pad wear sensor leads need to be fitted whenever the brake pads are changed irrespective of the brake pad
warning sensor being triggered.
The brake pad wear sensor is wired in series with a wear sensor on the RH rear brake and the instrument cluster. If the
thickness of one of the brake pads connected to a wear sensor decreases to a predetermined limit, the instrument cluster
illuminates the brake warning indicator.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired

1 - Battery
3 - Front brake pad wear sensor
5 - Rear brake pad wear sensor
6 - Power distribution box
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the piston(s) extends to force the inner pad against the brake disc. The
caliper reacts and slides along two guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the brake disc.
When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the brake pad wear sensor goes open
circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it illuminates the amber LED (light emitting diode) in the brake
warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the message center and sounds a warning chime.
Published: 02-Oct-2012
Front Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: High Performance
Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the
area with water.


2. Remove the left-hand front wheel and tire.
Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal
and Installation).
3.
4. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections

to prevent contamination.
NOTE: To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the

special tool apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm
( 1.6 in ) below the rest position.
NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.

5. NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
6.
7. CAUTION: Removal of the clips is a delicate

procedure, damage will occur if any force is used.
 Lever the anti-rattle spring in the center of

the spring until either side is released.
8. WARNING: If the brake caliper piston seal is
damaged a new brake caliper must be installed.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to

hang on the brake hose.
 Release the clip.
Installation
1. WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean brake

components. Dust from friction materials can be harmful if
inhaled.
CAUTION: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper

housing, the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do not
allow the reservoir to overflow.
Press the piston into the caliper housing.

2.
 Apply grease C2C-39930 to the areas
indicated.

 Torque: 58 Nm
 Secure the bottom arm of the anti-rattle

spring under the bottom anchor bracket of
the caliper.
 Compress the upper spring arm into the
correct position, under the upper anchor
bracket, whilst retaining the logo plate.
 Using the screw-driver, tap the central
locating tag into the locked position.


Torque: 42 Nm
8.
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the road wheels are in the

straight ahead position.
Make sure that excessive force is not used.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the brake hose is not twisted

and is correctly located.
 Pull downwards at the position shown.
10. Refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System -

and Installation).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
area with water.


and Installation).
3.


 Remove and discard the two sealing

washers.



7.
8.
Installation

inhaled.


2.
indicated.
3.
4.
5.
 Torque: 58 Nm
6.
the caliper.
7.
 Torque: 42 Nm
8.
9. CAUTIONS:




and Installation).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs.


2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
(206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
3. Torque: 115 Nm
4.
 Clean the components mating faces.
5. Repeat the above procedure on the opposite side.
Installation

Front Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal


2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03
Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
3. Torque: 115 Nm
4.
Installation

Front Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
area with water.


and Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
5.





10.
Installation

inhaled.


2.
3.
indicated.

 Torque: 58 Nm

the caliper.
8.
9. CAUTIONS:




and Installation).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
area with water.


and Installation).
3.




8.
Installation

inhaled.


2.
3.
indicated.

 Torque: 58 Nm

the caliper.
8.
9. CAUTIONS:




and Installation).
Rear Disc Brake -
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Dot 4 which is the Jaguar recommended
brake fluid. Shell ESL Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item Specification
Brake fluid Shell ESL Dot 4
Brake hose to brake caliper 42 31 -
Brake caliper anchor plate 103 76 -
Brake caliper retaining bolts 28 21 -
Brake caliper logo badge retaining bolts - Vehicles with high performance brakes 10 7 -
Rear Disc Brake - Rear Disc Brake
COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: RH (right-hand)SC (supercharger) vehicle installation shown, other installations similar.

2 - Brake disc
3 - Rivet (3 off)
4 - Dust shield
5 - Rear wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
-
10 Guide pin (2 off)
11 - Caliper body
12 - Piston
13 - Piston dust cover and seal
18 - Bleed screw
20 - Knurled pin
21 - Handbrake actuation lever
22 - Tension spring
INTRODUCTION
The rear braking system on both the naturally aspirated and SC vehicles features ventilated brake discs with single piston
sliding calipers. On naturally aspirated vehicles the discs are 326 mm (12.83 in.) diameter x 20 mm (0.79 in.) thick. On SC
vehicles the discs are 376 mm (14.80 in.) diameter x 26 mm (1.02 in.) thick.
The brake disc is manufactured from cast iron. The disc is retained on the wheel hub by two retaining washers and the wheel
nuts.
Each caliper is mounted within a fixed carrier that is secured to the rear wheel knuckle with two bolts. The brake calipers on
SC vehicle are painted and also include a badge. The badge must be removed in order to renew the brake pads. Each inboard
brake pad is installed with a wire anti-rattle spring. The inboard brake pad of the RH brake incorporates a wear sensor.
NOTE: New pad wear sensor leads need to be fitted whenever the brake pads are changed irrespective of the brake pad
warning sensor being triggered.
The brake pad wear sensor is wired in series with a wear sensor on the LH (left-hand) front brake and the instrument cluster.
If the thickness of one of the brake pads connected to a wear sensor decreases to a predetermined limit, the instrument
cluster illuminates the brake warning indicator.
Also incorporated into each rear brake caliper carrier is the parking brake mechanism.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05, Description and Operation).
Repairs
CAUTION: Do not use the 'Emergency Release' tool to allow work to be carried out on the rear brakes. Work can only
be carried out on the rear brakes after the 'parking brake unjam' routine is run.
Before carrying out any work on the rear brakes, the Jaguar approved diagnostic system must be connected and the 'parking
brake unjam' routine run.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General
Procedures).
When all work is carried out on the rear brakes, the parking brake system will require resetting.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05, Diagnosis and Testing).
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired

1 - Battery
2 - 175 A megafuse
3 - Front brake pad wear sensor
5 - Rear brake pad wear sensor
7 - Central junction box
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the piston extends to force the inner pad against the brake disc. The
caliper reacts and slides along two guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the brake disc.
When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the brake pad wear sensor goes open
circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it illuminates the amber LED (light emitting diode) in the brake
warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the message center and sounds a warning chime.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01, Description and Operation).
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: High Performance
Brakes
Removal
WARNING: Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related
service procedures, could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
area with water.


and Installation).
3. Refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking
Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:
Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the

affected area must be immediately washed down
with cold water.

Torque: 42 Nm



Torque: 28 Nm
Installation
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
area with water.


and Installation).
4.
5. CAUTIONS:
Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the

affected area must be immediately washed down
with cold water.


Torque: 42 Nm


Torque: 28 Nm
Installation

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal


2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
(206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
3.
 Torque: 103 Nm
4.
Installation

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal


2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04
Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
3.
 Torque: 103 Nm
4.
Installation

Rear Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Special Tool(s)
206-080
Brake caliper piston retractor tool
206-081
303-588
Remover, Crankshaft Pulley/Damper
Removal
WARNINGS:
Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service
procedures, could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
area with water.
NOTE: Only extraction bolt from special tool 303-588 is used.


and Installation).
4.
Torque: 10 Nm



Torque: 28 Nm

 Special Tool(s): 303-588

 Using the special tools, fully retract the
brake caliper piston.
11.
Installation
1. NOTE: The brake pad wear sensor retaining tang

must be installed to the sensor prior to installation
to the brake pad.

www.JagDocs.com
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Special Tool(s)
206-080
206-081
303-588
Remover, Crankshaft Pulley/Damper
Removal
WARNINGS:
Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service
procedures, could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
area with water.
NOTE: Only extraction bolt from special tool 303-588 is used.


and Installation).

4.


Torque: 28 Nm

 Using the special tools, fully retract the
brake caliper piston.
10.
Installation
1. NOTE: The brake pad wear sensor retaining tang

must be installed to the sensor prior to installation
to the brake pad.

Parking Brake and Actuation -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Parking brake actuator - bolts 20 15 -
Parking brake module - nuts 4 3 35
Parking brake switch- bolts 6 4 53
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Stoplamp switch
2 - Parking brake switch
3 - Parking brake control module
4 - Parking brake actuator
5 - Caliper and disc assemblies
6 - Brake warning indicator - All except NAS (North American specification) vehicles
7 - Brake warning indicator - NAS vehicles
INTRODUCTION
The parking brake is an electrically actuated system that operates on the rear brake calipers. Two cables are connected to
the rear brake calipers, and act directly on the same pistons used for normal, hydraulic rear brake actuation.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Disc Brake (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Description and Operation).
The parking brake is controlled by the parking brake control module. In response to commands from the driver through the
parking brake switch, the module controls operation of the parking brake actuator. The actuator adjusts the tension of the
brake cables to apply and release the rear brake calipers.
Features of the parking brake include:
 Manual apply
 Manual release
 Automatic apply
 Automatic release.
For more information on parking brake operation, refer to the Owner's Handbook.
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
The parking brake switch is mounted in the floor console, rearward of the gear selector. The switch has three states:
 Apply: When the switch is pulled up to apply the parking brake

 Release: When the switch is pushed down to release the parking brake
 Neutral: The central default position. The switch returns to this position regardless of parking brake status.
The parking brake switch contains a pair of microswitches for both the apply and release actions. The parking brake control
module provides an individual hardwired electrical feed to each of the 4 mircoswitches plus a single ground connection,
allowing it to constantly monitor switch status.
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL MODULE
The parking brake control module is mounted behind the auxiliary junction box and is connected to the vehicles electrical
wiring by two mulitplugs. The control module is also connected to the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus, allowing
it to communicate with other vehicle systems.
The control module monitors the condition of the parking brake switch through a series of hardwired electrical connections
and controls operation of the parking brake actuator accordingly.
PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR
The parking brake actuator is mounted on the rear cross beam, underneath the vehicle. Operation of the actuator is
controlled by the control module in response to parking brake switch requests from the driver.
A hall sensor is located within the actuator and provides positional information back to the control module. The principle
function of the hall sensor is to ensure the actuator fully releases the parking brake when a static release request is made.
The signal provided by the hall sensor is compared to configuration information contained within the control module software
to determine when a full release has been carried out.
Further information on the hall sensor can be found in the 'Principles of Operation' section below.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
The stoplamp switch is mounted on the brake pedal bracket. One of the prerequisites for releasing the parking brake is that
the foot brake is applied. The parking brake control module is able to determine the position of the footbrake by monitoring
the status of the stoplamp switch via a hardwired electrical connection.
The stoplamp switch also forms part of the ABS (anti-lock brake system) and the speed control system.
For additional information, refer to: Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description
and Operation).
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Depending on market specification, the instrument cluster may contain a red and an amber brake warning indicator, or only
a red brake warning indicator. The functionality of the warning indicators is shown in the table below.
Indicator Status Details

Red Illuminated Parking brake applied
Red Flashing Parking brake electrical failure
Amber Illuminated Parking brake electrical failure
If a parking brake failure warning indicator is active, the message 'CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE' or 'PARK BRAKE FAULT' will
also appear in the instrument cluster message center. If the vehicle is moving with the parking brake applied, the message
'PARK BRAKE ON' will appear in the message center accompanied by a chime from the instrument cluster.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center, Description
and Operation).
NOTE: NAS vehicles utilize different instrument cluster symbols and brake warning indicators.
CONTROL DIAGRAM

1 - Battery
2 - BJB (battery junction box)
3 - CJB (central junction box) (175 A megafuse)
5 - Parking brake control module
6 - Stoplamp switch
-
7 Instrument cluster
8 - Adaptive speed control module
9 - Parking brake switch
10 - Parking brake actuator
Static Apply
The parking brake control module receives a vehicle speed signal from the ABS module on the high speed CAN bus. If the
parking brake switch is pulled to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h), the control module will
instigate its 'Static Apply' mode and drive the actuator to apply full parking brake force to the rear wheels.
The parking brake control module monitors the current drawn by the actuator and compares this to information held within
its configuration software to determine when full braking force has been applied.
Dynamic Apply
There are two 'Dynamic Apply' modes; low speed dynamic and high speed dynamic. The low speed dynamic mode operates
at speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). The high speed dynamic mode operates at speeds above 20 mph
(32 km/h)
If the parking brake switch is pulled up to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is within the low speed dynamic range, the
control module drives the actuator to apply full parking brake force to the rear wheels.
If the parking brake switch is pulled up to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is within the high speed dynamic range, the
control module will apply braking force to the rear wheels at a slower rate until full braking load is reached or the switch is
released. The rate with which braking force is applied is controlled by the control module, which monitors both current drawn
by the actuator and positional information from the actuator hall sensor and compares this to information held within its
configuration software.
Drive Away Release
The parking brake control module will initiate its 'Drive Away Release' function and automatically release the parking brake if
the following conditions are detected:
 The engine is running

 D (drive), or R (reverse) is selected
 Positive throttle movement is detected
The control module receives messages of gear selector lever position and throttle angle over the high speed CAN bus from
the gear selector module and the ECM (engine control module) respectively.
Release from Park
The parking brake control module will initiate its 'Release from Park' function and automatically release the parking brake if
the gear selector is moved from P (park) to any position except N (neutral).
NOTE: A 'between gears' positioning of the gear selector level will not initiate 'Release from Park'.
Repairs
Before carrying out any work on the parking brake system, the Jaguar approved diagnostic tester must be connected and the
'parking brake unjam' routine run. The routine can be found in the 'Vehicle Configuration' area, under the 'Set-up and
Configuration' menu. After any work has been carried out on the parking brake, the system will require resetting.
CAUTION: Do not use the 'Emergency Release' tool to allow work to be carried out on the parking brake. Work can only
be carried out on the parking brake system after the 'parking brake unjam' routine has been run.
Resetting
If the electrical supply is disconnected from the parking brake control module, the actuator will loose its position memory. On
battery re-connection and ignition on, 'APPLY FOOT AND PARK BRAKE' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message
center indicating the parking brake requires resetting. To reset the parking brake, press and hold the foot brake. While
holding the foot brake in position, move the parking brake switch to the 'Apply' position.
Operating Voltages
The control module will only operate the actuator if the power supply from the battery is between 9 V and 16 V. At any
voltage within this range, the actuator is able to fully tighten and release the brake cables. If the power supply falls outside
of the range, a fault code is stored in the parking brake control module and can be retrieved using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic tester.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake
For a detailed description of the Parking Brake operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation)
Parking Brake (Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (Description and Operation).
Parking Brake Calibration
The parking brake system must be calibrated whenever the battery has been disconnected or has been in a state of
discharge, or repairs have been carried out to the rear service or parking brake system.
NOTE: If new rear brake pads have been installed, pressure must be applied to the brake pedal a minimum of five times
prior to calibration of the parking brake system.
To calibrate the parking brake system:
1. Place gear selector lever in 'P' Park position.
2. Release parking brake cable tension to service position.

REFER to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).
3. Set the ignition status to 'ON'.
4. Apply and hold the footbrake then pull up the parking brake switch.
5. To release the parking brake, apply and hold the footbrake then release and press down the parking brake
switch.
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Parking brake cable  Fuse(s)
 Parking brake actuator  Wiring harness/electrical connectors
 Brake caliper  Check for bent/corroded pins
 Brake pads  Parking brake switch
 Stabilizer bar drop link caps  Parking brake module
4. If the cause is not visually evident check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
proceed to the DTC Index , alternatively, verify the customer concern and refer to the Symptom Chart.
DTC Index
the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give additional
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the DMM
leads into account.

B1142- Ignition status 1-  The hard wired ignition status Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
64 signal plausibility signal does not agree with parking brake module ignition power supply for
failure CAN messages. Ignition power short to ground, open circuit
supply is detected open circuit
when ignition status is set to
'ON'
C1127- Position Sensor - No  Parking brake motor hall effect Inspect mechanical linkages for faults/damage.
31 Signal position sensor power circuit Repair as required. Refer to the electrical circuit
fault diagrams and check parking brake motor hall
 Parking brake motor hall effect effect position sensor circuits for short, open
position sensor ground circuit circuit. Check and install a new sensor actuator as
fault required
 Parking brake motor hall effect
position sensor signal circuit
fault
 Mechanical fault with
sensor/actuator
C1129- Actuator engage -  Motor engage current reached Carry out parking brake calibration procedure.
39 incorrect has too few before full apply travel check for mechanical failure of parking brake
pulses distance system
 Service brake adjustment
incorrect after brake lining
replacement
 Brake cables broken, seized,
trapped.
 Caliper malfunction
C1129- Actuator engage -  Motor engage current not Carry out parking brake calibration procedure.
3A incorrect has too reached or travelled too far check for mechanical failure of parking brake
many pulses upon apply system
 Service brake adjustment
incorrect after brake lining
replacement
 Brake cables broken, seized,
trapped.
 Caliper malfunction
C112A- Actuator disengage -  intermittent motor or circuit - Check for additional motor or circuit DTCs and
39 incorrect has too few open circuit refer to DTC index. check for mechanical failure of
pulses  Actuator malfunction parking brake
C1D00- Park brake apply  Connector fault - bent, loose Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
11 switch - circuit short or corroded pin(s) switch primary and secondary apply circuits for
to ground  Harness fault - short to ground short to ground. Repair circuit faults or install a
 Switch fault new switch as required
C1D00- Park brake apply  Connector fault - bent, loose Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
15 switch circuit - circuit or corroded pin(s) switch primary and secondary apply circuits for
short to battery or  Harness fault - short to power short to power or open circuit. Repair circuit faults
open or open circuit or install a new switch as required
 Switch fault
C1D00- Park brake apply  Connector fault - bent, loose Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
1C switch - voltage out or corroded pin(s) primary parking brake apply switch circuits for
of range  Harness fault - low resistance short to ground. Check and install a new switch as
to ground required
 Switch fault
C1D00- Park brake apply  Connector fault - bent, loose Apply switch active then release switch active,
62 switch - signal or corroded pin(s) refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
compare failure  Harness fault apply/release switch circuits. Check and install a
 Switch fault new switch as required
C1D00- Park brake apply  Connector fault - bent, loose Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
64 switch - signal or corroded pin(s) parking brake primary and secondary apply
plausibility failure  Harness fault - primary or circuits. Check and install a new switch as
secondary apply circuit required
 Switch fault
C1D01- Park brake release  Connector fault - bent, loose Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 switch - circuit short or corroded pin(s) park brake primary and secondary circuit for short
to ground  Harness fault - short to ground to ground. Check and install a new switch as
 Switch fault required
C1D01- Park brake release  Connector fault - bent, loose Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
15 switch - circuit short or corroded pin(s) parking brake primary and secondary release
to battery or open  Harness fault - open circuit circuits for open circuits or short to battery. Check
 Harness fault - short to battery and install a new switch as required
 Switch fault
C1D01- Park brake release  Connector fault - bent, loose Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test park
1C switch - voltage out or corroded pin(s) brake switch primary and secondary switch
of range  Harness fault - low resistance circuits for low resistance to ground. Check and
to ground install a new switch as required
 Switch fault
C1D01- Park brake release  Connector fault - bent, loose Release switch active then apply switch active.
62 switch - signal or corroded pin(s) Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
compare failure  Harness fault switch circuits for open circuits or shorts. Repair
 Switch fault circuit or replace switch as required
C1D01- Park brake release  Connector fault - bent, loose Primary and secondary release switch inputs
64 switch - signal or corroded pin(s) signals do not match. Check connectors for
plausibility failure  Harness fault damaged pins, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
 Switch fault and check switch circuits for open circuits or
shorts. Repair circuit or replace switch as required
P1536- Parking Brake Switch  Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
62 Circuit - signal  Switch internal fault all the switch apply, release and return circuits for
compare failure short circuit or open circuit. If no fault with wiring
harness suspect switch has an internal fault. Refer
to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
module/component is suspect
P1536- Parking Brake Switch  System abuse NOTE: The Electric Parking Brake system will be
66 Circuit - signal has  Wiring harness fault locked out if the module receives more then 30
too many  Switch internal fault apply/release requests within 1 minute
transitions / events
Cycle the ignition to clear the fault mode. Clear
the DTC and test the system. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check all the switch
apply, release and return circuits for short circuit
or open circuit. If no fault with wiring harness
suspect switch has an internal fault. Refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
P1571- Brake Switch - signal  Wiring harness fault The signal from the hardwired brake pedal switch
64 plausibility failure  Brake pedal switch fault does not agree with the brake status message
broadcast on CAN. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the brake pedal switch
circuits for short circuit or open circuit. If there
are no wiring harness faults suspect switch. Refer
to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
U0001- High speed CAN  All CAN messages are detected Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
87 communication bus - missing at Ignition ON DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
missing message system
U0001- High speed CAN  CAN Bus circuit fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
88 communication Bus - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
bus off system
U0100- Lost communication  ECM off Bus Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
00 with ECM DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U0103- Lost communication  Transmission shift module off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
00 with gear shift Bus DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module A system. Check the transmission shift module for
related DTCs and refer to the DTC index
U0104- Lost communication  Speed control module off bus Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
00 with speed control DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
front distance range system. Check the speed control module for
sensor related DTCs and refer to the DTC index
U0121- Lost communication  ABS module off Bus Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
00 with anti-lock brake DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system system. Check the anti-lock brake system module
for related DTCs and refer to the DTC index
U0155- Lost communication  Instrument cluster off Bus Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
00 with instrument DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
cluster system. Check the instrument cluster control
module for related DTCs and refer to the DTC
index
U0300- Internal control  Invalid configuration message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
00 module software is received approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and
incompatibility retest. If the DTC is still logged suspect the
Parking Brake module, refer to the new module
U0401- Invalid data received  Invalid message from the ECM No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
00 from ECM logged. Check ECM for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index
U0404- Invalid data received  Invalid message from the No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
00 from gear shift transmission shift module logged. Check transmission shift module for DTCs
control module A and refer to the DTC Index
U0415- Invalid data received  Invalid message from the anti- No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
00 from anti-lock brake lock brake system module logged. Check anti-lock control - stability assist
system (ABS) control module for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index
module
U0422- Invalid data received  Invalid message from the CJB No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
00 from Central Junction logged. Check CJB for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Box (CJB) Index.
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).
U0423- Invalid data received  Invalid message from the No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
00 from instrument instrument cluster logged. Check the instrument cluster for DTCs and
cluster refer to DTC Index.
REFER to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument
Cluster, Diagnosis and Testing).
U0433- Invalid data received  Incorrect apply request from No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
64 from speed control the speed control when the logged. Check the speed control module for DTCs
front distance range conditions were not correct and refer to DTC Index
sensor
U2001- Reduced system  Invalid or missing message No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
68 function - event from ABS with ignition OFF logged. Check the anti-lock control - stability
information and vehicle speed > 3Kph assist module for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index.
REFER to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
(206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist,
U2005- Vehicle speed -  Implausible speed message No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
64 signal implausibility from the anti-lock brake logged. Check anti-lock control - stability assist
failure system module module for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index
U200D- Control module  Actuator FET circuit over Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
4B output power A - current / over temperature actuator circuit for low resistance. Repair circuit
over temperature faults or install a new actuator as required
U2011- Motor - circuit short  Electric park brake motor Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
11 to ground output short to ground actuator circuit for short to ground. Repair circuit
faults or install a new actuator as required
U2011- Motor - circuit short  Electric park brake motor Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
12 to battery output short to power actuator circuit for short to power. Repair circuit
U2011- Motor - circuit open  Electric park brake motor Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
13 output open circuit actuator circuit for open circuit. Repair circuit
U3000- Control module -  Defective ECU Lost communication with secondary micro
47 watchdog/safety processor, check power and ground connections to
micro controller ECU. Clear DTC, perform battery reset and retest
failure system. If DTC reoccurs suspect the Parking
Brake control module, refer to the new module
U3002- Vehicle Identification  Vehicle/component VIN mis- Install original module, check for parking brake
81 Number (VIN) match between RJB and related DTCs and refer to DTC Index. If DTC
parking brake module, module remains suspect parking brake module, refer to
installed from donor vehicle new module installation note at top of DTC Index
U3003- Battery voltage  Mis-match of battery voltage, Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
62 of 2 volts or lower, between DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
parking brake module and RJB system
U3006- Control module input  ECU logic voltage is high (over Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power
16 power A - circuit 18 volts for 40mS) supplies and ground connections to the park brake
voltage below  Wiring harness fault control module. Check battery voltage and
threshold  Charging system fault charging system. Repair wiring harness or
charging system as required, clear DTC, perform
battery reset. Retest system
U3006- Control module input  ECU logic voltage is low (below Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power
17 power A - circuit 8 volts for 2000mS) supplies and ground connections to the park brake
voltage above  Wiring harness fault control module. Check battery voltage and
threshold  Charging system fault charging system. Repair wiring harness or
charging system as required, clear DTC, perform
battery reset. Retest system
U3007- Control module input  Connector fault - bent, loose Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check ECU
14 power B - circuit or corroded pin(s) high power feed circuit for open circuits or short
short to ground or  Harness fault to ground. Repair wiring harness as required,
open clear DTC
Symptom Chart

The parking brake will not  Cables fouled, trapped or damaged  Check the rear and primary
engage or release (with no  Cables incorrectly routed or installed cables for correct installation
parking brake warning  Rear lining wear and damage
message)  Service brake incorrectly adjusted following  Inspect the rear brake linings
lining change for wear
 Caliper malfunction  Re-calibrate the parking brake,
refer to the calibration
procedure
 Check the rear service brake
for correct installation and
operation
The parking brake will not  Cables fouled, trapped or damaged  Check the rear and primary
engage or release (with  Cables incorrectly routed or installed cables for correct installation
parking brake warning  Rear lining wear and damage
message)  Actuator malfunction  Inspect the rear brake linings
 Caliper malfunction for wear
 Re-calibrate the parking brake,
refer to the calibration
procedure
 Check the rear service brake
for correct installation and
operation
No communication with the  Fuse  Check fuses
parking brake module  Module off Bus  Ensure battery is fully charged
 CAN network error and in serviceable condition.
 Parking brake module fault Check battery voltage at
parking brake module
 Check CAN network using
manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
'Park brake Fault' displayed  Parking brake system fault  Check the parking brake
on message center with module for DTCs and refer to
associated warning lamps DTC Index
Brakes drag  Parking brake not re-calibrated after battery  Re-calibrate parking brake,
has been disconnected or has been in a refer to the calibration
state of discharge, or repairs have been procedure
carried out to the rear service or parking  Check the service brake for
brake system correct operation
 Service brake system fault
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Electric parking brake release tool 206-082. Only to be used for EMERGENCY brake
release
Electric parking brake release tool link lead 206-082-01. Only to be used for EMERGENCY brake
release
CAUTIONS:
Ensure the vehicle transmission is in park position before the cable tension is released.
The warranty of the electric parking brake release tool will be invalidated if the casing has been removed.
NOTE: The tools shown must only be used in the event of an emergency.
1. WARNING: Always use Jaguar approved diagnostic

equipment to release the cable tension, when carrying out
repair operations on the electric park brake which require cable
tension release.
Connect the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to release

the electric parking brake cable tension.
 Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. WARNING: The procedure below should only

be used in emergency situations, to release the
electric park brake. All calibration of the parking
brake system will be lost, and the parking brake
will need to be re-calibrated to function correctly.
Release the auxiliary junction box access cover.

 Release from the clip.
3. Disconnect the parking brake module.

 Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors in the
sequence illustrated.
4. Connect the special tool.
5. Release the parking brake cable tension.

 An audible 'click', signals complete parking
brake cable tension release.
6. Remove the special tool.

 Reverse the removal sequence, connect and
secure the electrical connectors.
7. Secure the auxiliary junction box access cover.

 Align the pegs and secure the clip.
8. WARNING: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar

approved diagnostic equipment. If Jaguar approved diagnostic
equipment is not available disconnect the battery for
approximatly 30 seconds , the vehicle will then prompt the
driver to carry out the calibration procedure as per the vehicle
hand book on re-connection.
Re-calibrate the electric park brake.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable LH
Removal



3. Refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal
and Installation).
4.
6. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable RH
Removal



and Installation).
4.

6. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Module Convertible
Removal
Specifications).
For additional information, refer to: Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering (501-20B
Supplemental Restraint System, General Procedures).
3. Remove the LH roll over protection unit.
Installation).
4. Remove the rear seat RH backrest retaining
bracket.
 Remove the 2 nuts and 2 bolts.


bracket.
7. Remove the parking brake module.
Installation
1. Install the parking brake module.

3. Install the rear seat RH backrest retaining bracket.


5. Install the LH roll over protection unit.

Installation).
Specifications).
7. Connect WDS to the vehicle and configure a new module.
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Module 2-Door
Removal
Specifications).
bracket.
4. Remove the parking brake module.

Installation
1. Install the parking brake module.


Specifications).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Release Actuator
Removal



and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
2. CAUTION: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar

approved diagnostic system. If the Jaguar approved diagnostic
system is not available disconnect the battery for approximately
30 seconds, the vehicle will then prompt the driver to carry out
the calibration procedure as per the vehicle hand book on re-
connection.
Calibrate the electric parking brake (EPB) using the diagnostic

tool.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Switch
Removal

2. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding trim to

avoid damage.
3. CAUTION: It is imperative that no damage is

caused to the electrical connector or the module.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes

(DTCs) have been removed after the road test.

Hydraulic Brake Actuation -
General
Item Specification
Brake master cylinder diameter 26.9 mm
Specifications
Brake fluid Shell ESL (Dot 4)
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Bleed nipple - front brake caliper 8 6 70
Bleed nipple - front brake caliper (Supercharged models) 14 10 -
Bleed nipple - rear brake caliper 14 10 -
Brake master cylinder to brake booster - nuts 25 18 -
Brake tube to components - union nut 17 13 -
Master cylinder reservoir to master cylinder 6 4 53
Master cylinder reservoir to master cylinder (Supercharged models) 4 3 35
Pedal bracket 25 18 -
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Brake master cylinder and fluid reservoir
2 - Brake pedal
3 - Stoplamp switch
4 - Brake pipes
6 - Brake booster
INTRODUCTION
The hydraulic brake system is a diagonally split dual line system, and consists of the brake pedal, brake master cylinder and
hydraulic pipes and hoses.
The brake pipes distribute pressure from the master cylinder to the four corners of the vehicle via the ABS (anti-lock brake
system) module. Braided steel hoses are used to connect the brake pipes to the front and rear calipers.
BRAKE PEDAL
The brake pedal is mounted in a bracket attached to the rear side of the engine bulkhead. The bracket also contains the
accelerator pedal. A clevis pin connects the brake pedal to the push rod of the brake booster.
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and operated by the brake pedal. There are two switches in the
stoplamp switch, which close when the brake pedal is pressed to output 'brake applied' signals. When closed, one switch
connects a ground to the ECM (engine control module). The second switch connects battery power from the CJB (central
junction box) to the:
 AJB (auxiliary junction box)

 CJB
 ECM
 EPB (electronic parking brake) module.
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER AND FLUID RESERVOIR
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) version shown, RHD (right-hand drive) version similar.

1 - Brake fluid level switch electrical connector
2 - Brake fluid reservoir cap
3 - Brake fluid reservoir
4 - Primary circuit inlet port
5 - Brake master cylinder
6 - Secondary circuit outlet port
7 - Primary circuit outlet port
8 - Torx bolt
9 - Secondary circuit inlet port
10 - Reservoir to master cylinder seal (2 off)
The brake master cylinder is attached to the front of the brake booster, on the drivers side of the engine compartment. The
brake master cylinder consists of a cylinder housing containing two pistons in tandem. The rear piston produces pressure for
the primary braking circuit and the front piston produces pressure for the secondary circuit.
The fluid reservoir is mounted on top of the master cylinder to provide a supply of brake fluid for the primary and secondary
circuits.
Brake Fluid Level Switch
The brake fluid level switch is located in the fluid reservoir and is hardwired to the instrument cluster. When the level of fluid
in the reservoir reaches a predetermined low level, the switch contacts close and provide a return signal to the instrument
cluster, which illuminates the red brake warning indicator, and displays the red warning triangle and BRAKE FLUID LOW in
the instrument cluster message center.
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

1 - LH (left hand) front brake
2 - RH (right hand) rear brake
3 - LH rear brake
4 - RH front brake
5 - Primary circuit inlet port
6 - Secondary circuit inlet port
The HCU (hydraulic control unit) is attached to the ABS module in the LH (left-hand) front wheel arch. The HCU is a four
channel unit that modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under control of the ABS module.
CAUTION: The ABS module and the HCU are a single unit and must not be separated. There are no serviceable parts
within the brakes modulator.
The primary and secondary outlets of the master cylinder are connected to the primary and secondary circuits within the
HCU. The primary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet ports to the RH (right-hand) front and LH rear brakes. The
secondary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet ports to the LH front and RH rear brakes.
Each of the HCU circuits contains the following components to control the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes:
 A normally open, solenoid-operated pilot valve, to enable active braking.

 A normally closed, solenoid-operated priming valve, to connect the brake fluid reservoir to the dual circuit return
pump during active braking.
 A dual circuit return pump, driven by an electric motor, to generate hydraulic pressure for active braking and return
brake fluid to the reservoir.
 Normally open, solenoid-operated inlet valves and normally closed, solenoid-operated outlet valves, to modulate the
hydraulic pressure in the individual brakes.
 An accumulator and a relief valve, to allow the fast release of pressure from the brakes.
 Filters, to protect the internal components from contamination.
Hydraulic Control Unit Schematic

1 - Secondary circuit
2 - Master cylinder
3 - Fluid reservoir
4 - Primary circuit
5 - HCU
6 - Pressure sensor
7 - Priming valve
8 - Pilot valve
9 - Pilot valve
10 - Priming valve
11 - Return pump
12 - Motor
13 - Return pump
14 - Inlet valve
15 - Relief valve
16 - Accumulator
17 - Inlet valve
18 - Inlet valve
19 - Accumulator
20 - Relief valve
21 - Inlet valve
22 - Outlet valve
23 - Outlet valve
24 - Outlet valve
25 - Outlet valve
26 - Right front brake
-
27 Left rear brake
28 - Right rear brake
29 - Left front brake
Brake Master Cylinder
When the brake pedal is pressed, the front push rod in the brake booster pushes the master cylinder primary piston along
the bore of the housing. This produces pressure in the primary pressure chamber which, in conjunction with the primary
spring, overcomes the secondary spring and simultaneously moves the secondary piston along the bore. The initial
movement of the pistons away from the piston stops closes the primary and secondary center valves in the master cylinder.
Further movement of the pistons then pressurizes the fluid in the primary and secondary chambers and thus the brake
circuits. The fluid in the chambers behind the pistons is unaffected by the movement of the pistons and can flow unrestricted
through the inlet ports between the chambers and the reservoir.
Hydraulic Control Unit
The HCU has three operating modes:
 Normal braking/EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

 ABS braking
 Active braking.
Normal Braking/EBD
Initially, all of the solenoid-operated valves are de-energized. Operating the brake pedal produces a corresponding increase
or decrease of pressure in the brakes, through the open pilot valves and inlet valves. If the ABS module determines that EBD
is necessary, it energizes the inlet valves for both rear brakes, to isolate the brakes from any further increase in hydraulic
pressure.
ABS Braking
If the ABS module determines that ABS braking is necessary, it energizes the inlet and outlet valves of the related brake and
starts the return pump. The inlet valve closes to isolate the brake from pressurized fluid; the outlet valve opens to release
pressure from the brake into the accumulator, and the inlet side of the return pump. The reduced hydraulic pressure allows
the wheel to accelerate. The ABS module then operates the inlet and outlet valves to modulate the pressure in the brake to
apply the maximum braking effort without locking the wheel. Control of the valves for each wheel takes place individually.
Active Braking Mode
The active braking mode is used to generate and control hydraulic pressure to the brakes for functions other than normal
braking/EBD and ABS braking, i.e. DSC (dynamic stability control), CBC (corner brake control), ETC (electronic traction
control), EBA (emergency brake assist), understeer control and electronic brake prefill (on vehicles with ASC (adaptive speed
control)).
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (206-09 Anti-Lock
Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
For active braking, the ABS module energizes the pilot valves and priming valves, starts the return pump and energizes the
inlet valves and outlet valves when required. Brake fluid, drawn from the reservoir through the master cylinder and priming
valve, is pressurized by the return pump and supplied to the inlet valves. The ABS module then operates the inlet valves and
outlet valves, as required, to modulate the pressure in the individual brakes. Some noise may be generated during active
braking.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation
For additional information, refer to

REFER to: Brake System (206-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Master Cylinder LHD RWD
Removal
area with water.
1. Remove the brake fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-
06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
2. Release and disconnect the electrical connector.
 Fully loosen the bolt.
3. NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this operation.
Disconnect the brake master cylinder lines.
4. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing

the components, ensure the area around the joint
faces and connections are clean. Plug open
connections to prevent contamination.
Remove the brake master cylinder.

5. Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. Install a new O-ring seal.
2. Install the brake master cylinder.
3. Connect the brake master cylinder lines.
 Tighten the brake line unions to 17 Nm (13 lb.ft).
4. Connect and secure the electrical connector.

 Tighten the bolt.
5. Install the brake fluid reservoir.

Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Master Cylinder RHD RWD
Removal
area with water.
1. Remove the coolant expansion tank.

For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank
3. Release the plenum box sidewall.
 Remove the 4 bolts.
4. Remove the coolant expansion tank mounting

bracket.
5. NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this operation.
Disconnect the brake master cylinder lines.

Remove the brake master cylinder.

7. Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. Install a new O-ring seal.
3. Connect the brake master cylinder lines.

4. Install the plenum chamber panel.

 Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5. Install the coolant expansion tank mounting bracket.


7. Install the coolant expansion tank.
For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal
area with water.
Remove the air intake cover.

2. Siphon the fluid from the brake master cylinder.

 Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
3. Disconnect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch electrical
connector.


operation.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir.

 Remove and discard 2 brake fluid reservoir
seals.
Installation
1. Clean the components.
2. Install the brake fluid reservoir.
 Install new brake fluid reservoir seals.
 Tighten the Torx bolt to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
3. Connect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch electrical
connector.
Procedures).
5. Install the air intake cover.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the instrument panel.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel (501-12
Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the windshield wiper arms.
For additional information, refer to: Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16
Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the throttle pedal assembly.
 Remove the 3 Torx screws.
5. Release the brake switch.

 Rotate clockwise approximately 30 degrees.
6. Release the brake booster.

 Remove the brake pedal clevis pin.
7. Remove the nuts from the brake pedal bracket.
8. NOTE: Working from the engine bay.
Remove the air intake cover.


10. Remove the plenum chamber panel.

 Release the retaining clip.
 Disconnect the washer jet hose.
11. Remove the brake pedal bracket.
 Remove sealant for access to the bulkhead
screw heads.
 Remove the 4 screws.
 Release the electrical harness clip.
Installation
1. Install the brake pedal bracket.
 Align to the studs and lightly tighten the nuts.
 Install and tighten the bulkhead screws.
 Apply sealant to the bulkhead screw heads.
 Secure the electrical harness with the clip.
2. Tighten the brake pedal bracket nuts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).

 Connect the washer jet hose.


6. Secure the brake booster.
 Install the brake pedal clevis pin.
7. Install the brake switch.

8. Install the throttle pedal assembly.
 Install the Torx screws.
9. Install the windshield wiper arms.

For additional information, refer to: Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16
Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
10. Install the instrument panel.
Specifications).
Power Brake Actuation -
General
Item Specification
Brake booster - boost ratio 5.8:1
Brake booster - boost ratio (Supercharged models) 6.2:1
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Brake booster to bulk head/pedal bracket - nuts 25 18 -
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) installation shown, LHD (left-hand drive) installation similar.

1 - Brake booster
2 - Vacuum pipes
3 - Vacuum pump
NOTE: LHD installation shown, RHD installation similar.

1 - Vacuum pipes
2 - Brake booster
3 - Vacuum pump
INTRODUCTION
Power assistance for the braking system is provided by a vacuum operated non-active brake booster. The vacuum is provided
by a vacuum pump and the intake manifold, which are connected to the brake booster by plastic pipes.
BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster gives a boost ratio of 6.2 : 1 to the effort applied to the brake pedal. The brake booster is attached to the
driver side of the engine compartment bulkhead with a gasket, and four studs and nuts.
The input push rod within the brake booster is connected to the brake pedal. The output rod locates in the primary piston of
the brake master cylinder.
For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation).
VACUUM PIPES
NOTE: RHD naturally aspirated installation shown, other installations similar.

1 - Brake booster connector/check valve
2 - Brake booster
3 - Intake manifold rear cover
4 - In-line check valve
5 - Vacuum pump
Plastic pipes connect the brake booster to the intake manifold and the vacuum pump to provide the vacuum for the brake
booster. The connection with the brake booster contains a check valve to maintain the vacuum in the brake booster. An in-line
check valve near the connection with the intake manifold prevents air being drawn from the intake manifold and fuel vapor
from entering the pipes.
VACUUM PUMP

1 - Vacuum pipe connection
2 - Cover
3 - Vane
4 - Oil tube
5 - Drive gear
6 - Seal
7 - Rotor
The vacuum pump is a mechanically driven vane pump installed on the front of the engine sump body and driven by the
auxiliary camshaft. Two bolts attach the vacuum pump to the sump body. A seal is installed in a groove on the mating face of
the vacuum pump.
The vacuum pump drive gear locates on the end of the rotor and engages with slots in the front of the auxiliary camshaft. An
oil tube in the center of the rotor supplies engine oil from the auxiliary camshaft to lubricate the vacuum pump. Exhaust air
from the vacuum pump is expelled into the engine sump through the sump body.
Power Brake Actuation - Power Brake System

REFER to: Brake System (206-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster LHD RWD
Removal
1. Remove the brake master cylinder.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder - LHD
RWD (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).

Remove the driver's side footwell trim panel.

 Carefully release the 3 clips.

4. Release the vacuum pipe.
5. Remove the brake booster.

6. Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Install new gaskets.
2. Install the brake booster.
3. Connect the vacuum hose.

5. Install the driver's side footwell trim panel.
 Carefully align and secure the clips.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder - LHD
RWD (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster RHD RWD
Removal
1. Remove the brake master cylinder.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Master
Cylinder - RHD RWD (206-06 Hydraulic Brake
Actuation, Removal and Installation).
2. CAUTION: Removal of the clips is a delicate procedure,

damage will occur if any force is used.

4. Release the vacuum pipe.
5. Remove the brake booster.

6. Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Install new gaskets.
2. Install the brake booster.
3. Connect the vacuum hose.


For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder -
RHD RWD (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum Pump
Removal


2. Drain the engine oil.
3.
4. Torque: 12 Nm
Installation

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Brake tubes to hydraulic control unit - union nut 17 13 -
Hydraulic control unit bracket to vehicle - bolt 9 7 79
Hydraulic control unit to bracket - bolt 9 7 79
Rear wheel speed sensor - bolt 9 7 79
Steering angle sensor - screw 4 3 35
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer - nut 9 7 -
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - RH (right hand) front wheel speed sensor
2 - Steering angle sensor
4 - RH rear wheel speed sensor
5 - LH (left hand) rear wheel speed sensor
6 - Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
8 - LH front wheel speed sensor
INTRODUCTION
The ABS (anti-lock brake system) and DSC (dynamic stability control) system features a Bosch modulator, which is an
integrated four-channel HCU (hydraulic control unit) and ABS module. The unit is installed in the brake hydraulic circuit
between the brake master cylinder and the four brake calipers.
The ABS module is connected to the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus, and actively interacts with other vehicle
system control modules and associated sensors to receive and transmit current vehicle operating information.
When required, the ABS module will actively intervene and operate the HCU during braking or vehicle maneuvers to correct
the vehicle attitude, stability, traction or speed. During incidents of vehicle correction, the ABS module may also request the
ECM (engine control module) to control engine power in order to further stabilize and correct the vehicle.
To provide full system functionality, the ABS and DSC system comprise the following components:
 DSC switch.
 Four wheel speed sensors.
 Steering angle sensor.
 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor.
 Stoplamp switch.
 Instrument cluster indicator lamps.
 Integrated ABS module and HCU.
Two variants of ABS module are available, Bosch ESP®8.1 and Bosch ESP®plus8.1. The Bosch ESP®plus8.1 system is fitted
to vehicles with ASC (adaptive speed control) and incorporates a feature known as 'electronic brake prefill'.
The ABS provides the following brake functions that are designed to assist the vehicle or aid the driver:
 ABS.
 DSC, including TracDSC.
 CBC (corner brake control).
 EBD (electronic brake force distribution).
 ETC (electronic traction control).
 EBA (emergency brake assist).
 EDC (engine drag-torque control).
 Understeer control.
 Electronic brake prefill (vehicles with ASC only).
All the brake functions listed are automatically active when the ignition is in power mode and the engine is running. The DSC
system can be selected to off using the DSC switch.
WARNING: Although the vehicle is fitted with DSC, it remains the drivers responsibility to drive safely according to the
prevailing conditions.
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL SWITCH
The DSC switch is mounted in the floor console adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector.
DSC becomes active whenever the engine is running. A momentary press of the switch allows the driver to toggle between
the standard DSC settings and the optimized TracDSC settings. The message TRAC DSC or DSC ON will temporarily be
displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The amber DSC warning indicator in the instrument cluster remains
illuminated while TracDSC is selected.
The DSC can be switched off by pressing and holding the switch for more than 10 seconds.
In each case the message DSC OFF will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center to confirm DSC has been
switched off. The amber DSC warning indicator in the instrument cluster will remain illuminated. The system can be switched
back on again by simply pressing and releasing the switch. The message DSC ON will then temporarily appear in the
instrument cluster message center to confirm the system is on.
NOTE: Switch requests may be delayed if the switch is pressed while a DSC operation is taking place. The switch request will
be displayed in the instrument cluster but the ABS module will not initiate any stability changes until it is safe to do so.
DSC returns to ON at the beginning of each ignition cycle, regardless of the previous setting. The exception to this is when
the ignition is switched off only briefly and the ABS module remains powered, as indicated by the continued illumination of
the P indicator on the JaguarDrive selector.
If a fault is detected with the DSC switch, the ABS module defaults to the DSC on setting and any switch requests are
ignored.
WARNING: It is recommended that when using show chains, DSC is switched on and JaguarDrive control winter mode
is selected.
WHEEL SPEED SENSORS

1 - Front wheel speed sensor
2 - Rear wheel speed sensor
An active wheel speed sensor is installed in each wheel hub to provide the ABS module with a rotational speed signal from
each road wheel. The head of each front wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a magnetic encoder ring incorporated into
the inboard seal of the wheel bearing. The head of each rear wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a magnetic encoder
ring incorporated into the rear wheel bearing assembly. Each encoder ring contains 46 north and south poles. A fly lead
connects each sensor to the vehicle harness.
The wheel speed sensors each have a signal and a return connection with the ABS module. When the ignition is ON the ABS
module supplies a signal feed to the wheel speed sensors and monitors the return signals. Any rotation of the road wheels
induces current fluctuations in the return signals, which are converted into individual wheel speeds and overall vehicle speed
by the ABS module.
The ABS module broadcasts the individual wheel speeds and the vehicle speed on the high speed CAN bus for use by other
systems.
If a wheel speed sensor fault is detected by the ABS module, 'ABS FAULT' will be displayed in the instrument cluster
message center and an amber warning indicator will illuminate.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
The steering angle sensor measures the steering wheel angle and the rate of change of the steering wheel angle. These
measurements are received by the ABS module and broadcast on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
The steering angle sensor is mounted on the steering column upper shroud mounting bracket, immediately behind the
multifunction switches, and is secured by two screws. A fly lead connects the sensor to the passenger compartment wiring
harness via a four pin multiplug.
The sensor is housed in a 'U' shaped plastic casing and contains two offset LED (light emitting diode) facing two detectors.
An encoder ring is mounted on the inner steering column shaft and intersects the LED's and detectors. The encoder ring
contains 60 slots which break and restore the light beams between the LED's and the detectors as the steering wheel is
rotated. The ABS module is able to determine the direction of rotation of the steering wheel by monitoring when the light
beams change state. The LED's and detectors are mounted in such a way that only one beam will change state, either to
broken or restored, at any one time.
The center (straight ahead) position of the steering wheel has to be learned by the ABS module every time the ignition is
switched ON. The steering angle sensor is unable to determine the center position so inputs from the yaw rate and lateral
acceleration sensor and wheel speed signals are also used by the ABS module to help it perform this process. If extreme
weather conditions are present, for example ice causing extreme wheel spin or understeer/oversteer, the ABS module may
not be able to determine the center position of the steering wheel. In this situation 'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed in
the instrument cluster message center and the amber warning indicator will illuminate.
'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will also be displayed if the ABS module detects a steering angle sensor fault. The amber warning
indicator will illuminate until the fault is rectified.
YAW RATE AND LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR
The yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor is mounted on the transmission tunnel, forward of the gear selector module.
The sensor is secured by 2 screws and connects to the vehicle wiring via a 4 pin multiplug.
When the ignition is ON, the sensor receives a power feed from the CJB (central junction box). The ground path for the
sensor is located on the instrument panel cross-car beam. The sensor measures the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the
vehicle, providing values to the ABS module via a dedicated, private high speed CAN bus connection. The ABS module
broadcasts these values on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
If a sensor fault is detected by the ABS module, 'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message
center and the amber warning indicator will illuminate.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
The stoplamp switch is mounted on the brake pedal box and is connected to the vehicle harness via a four pin multiplug.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the switch contacts close. This allows a hard wired signal feed to be sent to the ECM. A
stoplamp switch status message is then sent from the ECM to the ABS module on the high speed CAN bus. The ABS module
is then able to control braking force accordingly in conjunction with the HCU.
NOTE: The stoplamp switch also forms part of the speed control system.
BRAKE WARNING INDICATORS

1 - ABS warning indicator (all except USA, Canada and Mexico) - also shared with EPB (electronic
parking brake) warning
2 - ABS warning indicator (Canada and Mexico only) - not shared with EPB warning
3 - ABS warning indicator (USA only) - not shared with EPB warning
4 - DSC warning indicator
5 - Brake warning indicator (all except USA)
6 - Brake warning indicator (USA only)
The instrument cluster and message center contains warning indicators and warning messages to display the operating
status of the anti-lock control - stability assist functions. The warning indicators and messages provide a visual notification of
either a system warning or information indication to the driver. There are three warning indicators on the instrument cluster,
which vary dependant on market, and several types of message relating to the anti-lock control - stability assist functions.
The DSC OFF message is accompanied by an audible warning.
The following anti-lock control - stability assist warning indicators are installed in the instrument cluster:
 An amber ABS warning indicator.

 A red brake warning indicator.
 An amber DSC warning indicator.
ABS MODULE
The ABS module is secured to a mounting bracket located in the LH (left-hand) front wheel arch. The module is mounted on
the rear face of the HCU, which it uses to control all braking and stability functions by modulating hydraulic pressure to the
individual wheel brakes.
Two types of ABS modules are available; one for vehicles with standard speed control, one for vehicles fitted with adaptive
speed control.
If an ABS modulator fault is detected, 'ABS FAULT' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the amber
warning indicator will illuminate.
CAUTION: The ABS module and the HCU comprise a single unit and must not be separated.
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT
The HCU is a four channel unit, secured to a mounting bracket located in the LH front wheel arch. The HCU modulates the
supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under the control of the ABS module.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; V = Private CAN bus.

1 - Battery
2 - BJB (battery junction box) (175A megafuse)
3 - CJB (central junction box
5 - LH front wheel speed sensor
6 - LH rear wheel speed sensor
7 - RH rear wheel speed sensor
8 - RH front wheel speed sensor
9 - Stoplamp switch
12 - ECM
13 - DSC switch
14 - Other systems
15 - Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
16 - ABS module
- Steering angle sensor
17
Anti-Lock Brake System
ABS controls the speed of all road wheels to ensure optimum wheel slip when braking at the adhesion limit. The wheels are
prevented from locking to retain effective steering control of the vehicle.
The brake pressures are modulated separately for each wheel. Rear brake pressures are controlled to maintain rear stability
on split friction surfaces.
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC uses brakes and powertrain torque control to assist in maintaining the yaw stability of the vehicle. While the ignition is
energized the DSC function is permanently enabled, unless selected off using the DSC switch.
DSC enhances driving safety in abrupt maneuvers and in under-steer or over-steer situations that may occur in a bend. The
ABS module monitors the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, steering input and individual wheel speeds, then
selectively applies individual brakes and signals for powertrain torque adjustments to reduce under-steer or over-steer
conditions.
In general:
 In an under-steer situation the inner wheels are braked to counteract the yaw movement towards the outer edge of
the bend.
 In an over-steer situation the outer wheels are braked to prevent the rear end of the vehicle from pushing towards
the outer edge of the bend.
The ABS module monitors the tracking stability of the vehicle using inputs from the wheel speed sensors, the steering angle
sensor, and the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor. The tracking stability is compared with stored target data.
Whenever the tracking stability deviates from the target data, the ABS module intervenes by applying the appropriate control
strategy.
The following interactions occur in an intervention situation:
 High speed CAN signal to the ECM, to reduce engine torque.

 Application of braking to the appropriate corner of the vehicle.
TracDSC
TracDSC is an alternative setting of DSC with reduced system interventions. With TracDSC engaged, traction may be
somewhat increased, although stability may be reduced compared to normal DSC. TracDSC is intended for use only on dry
tarmac by suitably experienced drivers and should not be selected for other surfaces or by drivers with insufficient skill and
training to operate the vehicle safely with the TracDSC function engaged. The less restrictive TracDSC setting may be
preferred, for example, by expert drivers engaged in high performance driving on dry tarmac surfaces such as tracks and
circuits.
WARNING: Vehicle safety may be reduced by inappropriate use of TracDSC. TracDSC should only be used in suitable
conditions.
Briefly pressing and releasing the DSC switch will switch the vehicle between normal DSC settings and TracDSC settings. To
confirm which setting has been selected, either DSC ON or TracDSC will be temporarily displayed in the instrument cluster
message center.
When TracDSC is selected, the amber DSC warning indicator located in the instrument cluster will illuminate. The warning
indicator will remain illuminated unless TracDSC becomes active. At this point the warning indicator will flash.
NOTE: If speed control is engaged it will automatically disengage if DSC or TracDSC becomes active.
Corner Brake Control
CBC (corner brake control) influences the brake pressures, below and within DSC and ABS thresholds, to counteract the
yawing moment produced when braking in a corner. CBC produces a correction torque by limiting the brake pressure on one
side of the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
EBD limits the brake pressure applied to the rear wheels. When the brakes are applied, the weight of the vehicle transfers
forwards, reducing the ability of the rear wheels to transfer braking effort to the road surface. This may cause the rear
wheels to slip and make the vehicle unstable.
EBD uses the ABS braking hardware to automatically optimize the pressure to the rear brakes, below the point where ABS is
normally invoked.
NOTE: Only the rear brakes are controlled by the EBD function.
Electronic Traction Control
ETC (electronic traction control) attempts to optimize forward traction by reducing engine torque, or by applying the brake of
a spinning wheel until traction is regained.
ETC is activated if an individual wheel speed is above that of the vehicle reference speed (positive slip) and the brake pedal
is not pressed. The brake is applied to the spinning wheel, allowing the excess torque to be transmitted to the non-spinning
wheel through the drive line. If necessary, the ABS module also sends a high speed CAN bus message to the ECM to request
a reduction in engine torque.
When the DSC function is selected off using the DSC switch, the braking and engine torque reduction features are both
disabled.
Emergency Brake Assist
EBA assists the driver in emergency braking situations by automatically increasing the applied braking effort. The ABS
module invokes EBA when:
 The brake pedal is rapidly pressed.

 The brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation.
When the brake pedal is rapidly pressed, the ABS module increases the hydraulic pressure to all of the brakes until the
threshold for ABS operation is reached. This action applies the maximum braking effort for the available traction. The ABS
module monitors for the sudden application of the brakes, using inputs from the brake pedal switch and from the pressure
sensor within the HCU. With the brake pedal pressed, if the rate of increase of hydraulic pressure exceeds the predetermined
limit, the ABS module invokes emergency braking.
When the brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation, the ABS module increases the
hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes up to the ABS threshold.
EBA operation continues until the driver releases the brake pedal, sufficiently for the hydraulic pressure in the HCU to drop
below a threshold value stored in the ABS module.
Engine Drag-Torque Control
EDC (engine drag-torque control) prevents wheel slip caused by any of the following:
 A sudden decrease in engine torque when the accelerator is suddenly released.

 A downshift using the Jaguar sequential shift function.
When the ABS module detects the onset of wheel slip without the brakes being applied, the ABS module signals the ECM via
the high speed CAN bus to request a momentary increase in engine torque.
Understeer Control
Understeer Logic Control is a proactive system which monitors the vehicle for understeer by comparing signals from the yaw
rate and lateral acceleration sensor with signals from the steering angle sensor and wheel speed sensors.
When the ABS module detects the onset of understeer, the ABS module signals the ECM via the high speed CAN bus to
request a decrease in engine torque. At the same time the ABS module will control the HCU to apply brake pressure to the
relevant wheels to correct the understeer.
Electronic Brake Prefill (Vehicles With ASC Only)
Electronic brake prefill (Bosch ESP®plus8.1) senses any rapid throttle lift off, activating a small brake hydraulic pressure
build-up of approximately 3 to 5 bar (43.5 to 72.5 lbf/in²) in anticipation of the brakes being applied.
This application produces a quicker brake pedal response and consequently slightly shorter stopping distances. The system
supports vehicles with ASC.
When the ABS module detects rapid throttle lift off (from the signals received from the ECM over the high speed CAN bus), it
controls the HCU to apply a low brake pressure to assist in a quicker brake application.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
For a detailed description of the Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist system, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
2. Confirm if the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning light was illuminated, or still is.
NOTE: An intermittent fault may allow the warning light to go off. This does not necessarily mean the fault is not
present. Some warnings will appear to clear when the ignition is cycled. This is often because the warning has flagged
as a result of one of the vehicle's on-board diagnostic routines having run to detect the fault. If the same routine is not
run when the ignition status is set to ON, the warning will not re-flag until the routine does run.
Visual Inspection
 Brake fluid level  Warning light operation
 Vacuum system  Fuses
 Wheel speed sensor installation  Wheel speed sensors
 Wheel speed sensor air gap  Connectors/Pins
 Magnetic pulse wheel(s) (damaged/contaminated)  Harnesses
 Steering angle sensor  Steering wheel rotation sensor
 Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer cluster installation  Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer cluster
 Incorrect wheel or tire size  Booster pressure sensor
 Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
5. If the cause is not visually evident check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTE: If the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
prior to the installation of a new HCU.
into account.

C0021- Brake Booster  No vacuum available from  Check integrity of brake booster vacuum hose.
09 Performance engine due to split/leaking Check and install a new brake booster as
hose etc required
 Brake booster servo has
failed due to lack of vacuum
C0030- Left Front Tone  Left front magnetic pulse  Check the left front magnetic pulse ring for
38 Wheel - signal ring damaged/contaminated damage or contamination. Clean or replace as
frequency incorrect  Incorrect component required. If no damage/contamination found,
installed suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the
 * Sensor internal fault Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
module/component is suspect. To validate the
repair and extinguish the lamps, the vehicle
needs to be driven above 9mph/15kph for
more than 10 seconds
C0031- Left Front Wheel  Electrical wiring harness  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 Speed Sensor - fault check the wheel speed sensor circuit for short
short to battery  Sensor internal fault to power. Repair harness as required. If no
harness fault found, suspect wheel speed
sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
circuit short to  Sensor internal fault to ground or open circuit. Repair harness as
ground or open required. If no harness fault found, suspect
wheel speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual if a
25 Speed Sensor - fault check the wheel speed sensor circuit for partial
signal  Sensor internal fault or intermittently grounded signal circuit. Repair
shape/waveform harness as required. If no harness fault found,
failure suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the
needs to be driven above 9mph/15kph
2F Speed Sensor - fault check the wheel speed sensor circuit for
signal erratic  Sensor internal fault intermittent short to power, ground or open
circuit. Repair harness as required. If no
suspect. To validate the repair and extinguish
the lamps, the vehicle needs to be driven
above 9mph/15kph
31 Speed Sensor - no fault check the wheel speed sensor circuit for open
signal  Magnetic pulse ring de- circuit or high resistance. Check connectors for
magnetised or damaged damage or corrosion. Check the wheel speed
 Sensor internal fault sensor for correct location and contamination.
Check the magnetic pulse wheel for
contamination, damage or de-magnetisation.
Clean or replace the sensor or wheel bearing as
required. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
above 9mph/15kph
62 Speed Sensor - fault check the wheel speed sensor circuit for
signal compare  Sensor internal fault intermittent short to power, ground or open
failure circuit. Repair harness as required. If no
above 9mph/15kph
C0031- Left Front Wheel  Incorrect wheels/tyres  Check the correct wheels and tyres are
64 Speed Sensor - installed installed. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
signal plausibility  Electrical wiring harness and check the wheel speed sensor circuit for
failure fault intermittent short to power, or ground. Check
 EMC influences on left front for EMC influences on the speed sensor and
wheel speed sensor and circuits. Check magnetic pulse wheel for
supply line damage/contamination and de-magnetisation.
 Magnetic pulse wheel Repair Wiring harness, install a new sensor or
damaged/contaminated, de- wheel bearing as required. Refer to the
magnetised Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
 Sensor internal fault module/component is suspect
C0032- Left Front wheel  Electrical wiring harness  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Speed Sensor fault check the wheel speed sensor circuit for short
Supply - circuit  Sensor internal fault to ground. Repair harness as required. If no
short to ground harness fault found, suspect wheel speed
suspect
C0033- Right Front Tone  Right front magnetic pulse  Check the right front magnetic pulse ring for
C0034- Right Front Wheel  Electrical wiring harness  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
suspect
above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
C0034- Right Front Wheel  Incorrect wheels/tyres  Check the correct wheels and tyres are
 EMC influences on right for EMC influences on the speed sensor and
front wheel speed sensor circuits. Check magnetic pulse wheel for
and supply line damage/contamination and de-magnetisation.
 Magnetic pulse wheel Repair wiring harness, install a new sensor or
suspect
C0036- Left Rear Tone  Left rear magnetic pulse  Check the left rear magnetic pulse ring for
C0037- Left Rear Wheel  Electrical wiring harness  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
suspect
above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
C0037- Left Rear Wheel  Incorrect wheels/tyres  Check the correct wheels and tyres are
 EMC influences on left rear for EMC influences on the speed sensor and
suspect
C0039- Right Rear Tone  Right rear magnetic pulse  Check the right rear magnetic pulse ring for
frequency incorrect  Incorrect component required. . If no damage/contamination found,
 Sensor internal fault Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
C003A- Right Rear Wheel  Electrical wiring harness  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
suspect
above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
C003A- Right Rear Wheel  Incorrect wheels/tyres  Check the correct wheels and tyres are
 EMC influences on left rear for EMC influences on the speed sensor and
C003B- Right Rear Wheel  Electrical wiring harness  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
suspect
C0047- Brake Booster  Brake booster pressure  Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this
16 Pressure Sensor - sensor supply circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved
circuit voltage voltage below threshold diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit
below threshold  HCU failure diagrams and check brake booster pressure
sensor power supply for short to ground. Check
and install a new HCU as required, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the
top of the DTC Index
1C Pressure Sensor - sensor supply circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved
circuit voltage out voltage out of range 4.5v- diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit
of range 5.3v diagrams and check brake booster pressure
 Brake booster pressure sensor power supply for short, high resistance.
sensor failure Establish if sensor or HCU is at fault. Check and
 HCU failure install a new brake booster pressure sensor or
HCU as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
29 Pressure Sensor - sensor signal 1 circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved
signal invalid short to ground, power, diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit diagrams and check brake booster signal 1 and
 Brake booster pressure 2 circuits for short to ground, power, open
sensor signal 2 circuit - circuit. Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains,
short to ground, power, suspect the brake booster pressure sensor,
open circuit check and install a new sensor as required,
 Brake booster pressure refer to the new module/component installation
sensor failure note at the top of the DTC Index. To validate
the repair and extinguish the lamps, start the
engine and apply the foot brake
C0047- Brake Booster NOTE: Fault detected during  Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this
62 Pressure Sensor - braking event DTC using the manufacturer approved
signal compare diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check brake booster pressure
 Brake booster pressure
sensor signal circuits 1 and 2 for shorting
sensor signal circuits 1 and
together. Repair any harness faults found and
2 - shorted together
retest. To validate the repair and extinguish
the lamps, start the engine and apply the foot
brake
C0047- Brake Booster NOTE: Fault detected during non-  Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this
64 Pressure Sensor - braking event DTC using the manufacturer approved
signal plausibility diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check brake booster signal 1 and
 Signal plausibility failure
2 circuits for short to ground, power, open
 Electrical wiring harness
circuit or high resistance. Check connectors for
fault
damage or corrosion. Repair any harness faults
 Brake booster pressure
found and retest. If DTC remains, suspect the
sensor failure
brake booster pressure sensor, check and
install a new sensor as required, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the
top of the DTC Index. To validate the repair
and extinguish the lamps, start the engine and
apply and release the foot brake
C0062- Longitudinal  Yaw sensor insecurely  Check the yaw sensor is securely mounted. If
28 Acceleration Sensor mounted the mounting is secure suspect the yaw sensor,
- signal bias level  Yaw sensor fault Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
out of range/zero manual if a module/component is suspect
adjustment failure
C0062- Longitudinal  The longitudinal  Check the longitudinal acceleration sensor has
54 Acceleration Sensor acceleration sensor has not been calibrated
- missing been calibrated  If it has been calibrated check that the sensor
calibration  Mounting bracket is aligned correctly, check for bent mounting
bent/misaligned bracket
 To validate the calibration/repair, ignition on
and wait 10 seconds. Check lamps remain
extinguished
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor -  Wiring harness fault  Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and
08 bus  Yaw sensor fault check the integrity of the power and ground
signal /message supplies to the yaw sensor. Check the integrity
failures of the bus connections. Repair any harness
faults found and retest. If no harness faults are
found suspect the yaw sensor, Refer to the
repair, ignition on and wait 10 seconds. Check
lamps remain extinguished.
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor -  Wiring harness fault  Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and
14 circuit short to  Sensor fault check the high speed CAN circuit between the
ground or open yaw sensor and the Anti-Lock Braking System
Hydraulic Control Unit for short to ground or
open circuit. Repair any harness faults found
and retest. If no harness faults are found
suspect the yaw sensor, Refer to the Warranty
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor -  Yaw rate sensor power  Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and
1C circuit voltage out distribution fault check the power and ground supplies to the
of range  Wiring harness fault yaw sensor. Check power circuit for short to
 Yaw sensor internal fault ground or open circuit. Check ground circuit for
short to power or open circuit. Repair any
harness faults found and retest. If no harness
faults are found suspect the yaw sensor, Refer
to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual
if a module/component is suspect
 To confirm the repair and extinguish the
warning lamps, clear the DTC, cycle the
ignition state to off, then return the ignition
state to on and wait up to 10 seconds
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor -  Yaw sensor insecurely  Check the yaw sensor is securely mounted.
27 signal rate of mounted Check the yaw sensor harness connector is
change  Yaw sensor connector securely located. Refer to the electrical wiring
insecure diagrams and check the power and ground
 Wiring harness fault supplies to the yaw sensor. Check circuits for
 Yaw sensor fault intermittent open circuit or high resistance.
 Anti-Lock Braking System Repair any harness faults found and retest. If
Hydraulic Control Unit fault no harness faults are found suspect the yaw
sensor or Anti-Lock Braking System Hydraulic
Control Unit, Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor -  Yaw sensor insecurely  Check the yaw sensor is securely mounted. If
28 signal bias level out mounted the mounting is secure suspect the yaw sensor,
of range/zero  Yaw sensor fault Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
adjustment failure manual if a module/component is suspect
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor -  Yaw sensor fault  Replace the yaw sensor, clear the DTC and
41 checksum error  Anti-Lock Braking System retest the system. If the DTC remains install a
Hydraulic Control Unit fault new Anti-Lock Braking System Hydraulic
Control Unit. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor -  Yaw rate sensor internal  Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and
49 internal electronic electronic failure check the power and ground supplies to the
failure  Wiring harness fault yaw sensor. Repair any harness faults found
and retest. If no harness faults are found
suspect the yaw sensor, Refer to the Warranty
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor -  The vehicle has been NOTE: This DTC can be set if the vehicle is operated
64 signal plausibility operated on a on a dynamometer/rolling road, if this is the case the
failure dynamometer/rolling road DTC should be stored as a historic DTC
 Yaw rate sensor incorrectly
installed
 This DTC is set if the information coming from
 Yaw rate sensor fault
the yaw sensor is deemed to be implausible
when compared with other sensor information
such as steering angle sensor. Check that the
yaw sensor is correctly installed on the vehicle.
If the sensor is installed correctly suspect the
sensor has an internal fault. Refer to the
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor -  Incorrect yaw sensor  Check the part number of the yaw sensor and
95 incorrect assembly installed fit the correct sensor as required
C101F- Generic Valve  Anti-Lock Braking System  Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
49 Failure - internal Hydraulic Control Unit fault manual if a module/component is suspect.
electronic failure Check and install a new Anti-Lock Braking
System Hydraulic Control Unit
C1A77- Valve Relay Supply  Valve relay supply circuit  Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and
16 Circuit - voltage fault check the valve relay supply circuit for open
below threshold  Valve relay ground circuit circuit or short to ground. Check the valve
fault relay ground circuit for open circuit
state to on and wait up to 10 seconds. If
required road test the vehicle at a speed above
20 KPH
C1A90- Wheel Speed  Wiring harness fault  This DTC is set if at least one wheel speed
12 Sensor Supply - sensor supply circuit is short to power. Refer to
circuit short to the electrical wiring diagrams and check the
battery wheel speed sensor circuits for short to power.
Repair wiring harness as required. Clear the
DTC and retest the system
C1A95- Wheel speed  Incorrect wheel speed  Check and install the correct wheel speed
4A Sensor - incorrect sensor installed sensor
component  To confirm the repair and extinguish the
installed warning lamps, clear the DTC, cycle the
C1A95- Wheel Speed  Incorrect wheels/tyres NOTE: This DTC could be set by a flat tyre which
64 Sensor - signal installed would give a continuous different rate of speed when
plausibility failure  Electrical wiring harness compared to other 3 wheels, if this is the case the DTC
fault should be stored as a historic DTC
 Magnetic pulse wheel
damaged/contaminated or
 Check that approved wheels and tyres are
de-magnetised
installed. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
 EMC influences on wheel
and check the wheel speed sensor circuits for
speed sensors and supply
intermittent short to power, or ground. Check
circuits
the wheel speed sensors and pulse wheels for
 Wheel speed sensor internal
contamination/damage or de-magnetisation.
fault
Clear the DTC and retest the vehicle. If the
fault remains check the wheel speed sensor
circuits for possible EMC interference. Examine
the output from the sensors using an
oscilloscope to identify inconsistent patterns or
spikes. Repair wiring harness or replace wheel
speed sensors or wheel bearings as required.
Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
manual if a module/component is suspect
C1A96- Brake Light Switch  Brake pedal switch out of  This DTC is set when the signal from the brake
64 - signal plausibility adjustment pedal position switch is contradicted by the
failure  Brake pedal switch circuit signal from the master cylinder pressure
faults sensor. Check the adjustment of the brake
 Brake pedal switch fault pedal position switch. Check the Engine Control
Module for brake pedal switch related DTCs.
Check brake pedal switch circuits for open
circuit. Repair wiring as required or install a
replacement switch as required. Switch the
ignition state to on, press and release brake
pedal at least once
C1A97- Lateral  Sensor Internal Fault  This DTC is set when the lateral accelerometer
24 Accelerometer - produces an erroneous signal with the vehicle
signal stuck high stationary. Suspect sensor, refer to the
C1A98- Yaw Rate Sensor  Internal electronic failure  Check and install a new sensor as required,
49 refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
C1A98- Yaw Rate Sensor NOTE: This DTC may set due to a  Check the Yaw rate sensor is correctly installed
64 sustained period of steep uphill to the vehicle. Check and install a new sensor
driving (>35% for four seconds) as required, refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
 Yaw rate sensor incorrectly
mounted to the vehicle
 Yaw rate sensor failure
C1A98- Yaw Rate Sensor -  Yaw rate sensor incorrectly  Check the mounting of the yaw rate sensor and
92 performance or mounted to the vehicle. correct or replace sensor as required. Refer to
incorrect operation the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
C1A98- Yaw Rate Sensor -  Yaw rate sensor incorrectly  Clear the DTC and retest the system. If the
96 component internal installed fault remains check for additional DTCs and
failure  Yaw rate sensor wiring fault refer to the DTC index. Check the Yaw sensor
 EMC influences on yaw rate is mounted correctly on the vehicle. Check the
sensor and circuits wiring connections to the sensor are correct
 Yaw rate sensor internal and secure. Check for any sources of EMC
fault interference with the sensor or circuits. If no
external causes are evident suspect the sensor.
C1A98- Yaw Rate Sensor -  The signal from the yaw NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault
2F signal erratic rate sensor has been condition is present and should be ignored. Clear the
suspicious for > 2 minutes DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
www.JagDocs.com
but has not yet moved fully diagnosis
to fault condition
 Information only, regard as normal operation.
Clear the DTC and retest the system
C1A99- Pressure Sensor -  Pedal box adjustment  Check the pedal box is adjusted/operating
28 signal bias level out incorrect correctly, perform any necessary adjustments,
of range / zero  Pedal box fault clear DTC and retest system. If DTC resets
adjustment failure  Anti-Lock Braking System suspect Anti-Lock Braking System Control
Control Module fault Module. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
C1B00- Steering Angle  Steering angle sensor not  The sensor is calibrated at every new ignition
16 Sensor - circuit initialised and calibrated cycle, every time the vehicle is driven away
voltage below  Wiring harness fault from standstill. The DTC indicates that the
threshold  Sensor internal fault steering offset exceeded allowed values and
that the calibration process was restarted.
Check for a disturbance of the ignition supply
to the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the steering angle sensor
wiring harness and circuits for open circuits,
short to ground. Refer to the Warranty Policy
and Procedures manual if a module/component
is suspect
C1B00- Steering Angle  Wiring harness fault  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
1C Sensor - circuit  Sensor internal fault check the steering angle sensor wiring harness
voltage out of and sensor signal circuits for open circuits,
range short to power or ground. Refer to the
C1B00- Steering Angle  Harness fault  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, check
27 Sensor - signal rate  Sensor internal fault the wiring harness connection at the steering
of change above angle sensor for security and check circuits for
threshold intermittent faults. Clear DTC and retest
system. The sensor is calibrated at every new
ignition cycle, every time the vehicle is driven
away from standstill. If fault returns suspect
suspect
C1B00- Steering Angle  Steering angle sensor not  Check the installed position of the steering
49 Sensor - internal installed in the correct angle sensor. Remove and reinstall if required.
electronic failure position Clear DTC. The sensor is calibrated at every
 Steering angle sensor new ignition cycle, every time the vehicle is
internal fault driven away from standstill. Retest system. If
fault returns suspect sensor. Refer to the
C1B00- Steering Angle  Steering angle sensor not  This DTC is set when there is conflicting
64 Sensor - signal installed in the correct information coming from the Steering Angle
plausibility failure position Sensor and the Yaw Rate Sensor. Check both
 Yaw rate sensor not of these sensors to ensure they are correctly
installed in the correct installed on the vehicle. Check for other related
position DTCs. Clear the DTC. The sensor is calibrated
 Steering angle sensor at every new ignition cycle, every time the
internal fault vehicle is driven away from standstill. If the
DTC returns suspect the Steering Angle Sensor.
C1B00- Steering Angle  Wiring harness fault  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
66 Sensor - signal has  Steering angle sensor check the steering angle circuits for short
too many internal fault circuit to each other. If no harness faults are
transitions/events found suspect the steering angle sensor, refer
to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual
if a module/component is suspect
C1B00- Steering Angle  Conditions not met under  Information only, regard as normal operation.
68 Sensor - event which the sensor can learn Clear the DTC and retest the system. Switch
information the centre position the ignition state to on, engine running,
accelerate > 5.4 kph with steering input
C1B02- Return Pump -  Wiring harness fault  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
16 circuit voltage check the return pump supply and ground
below threshold circuits for short to ground or open circuit
state to on and drive the vehicle above
9mph/15kph
C1B02- Return Pump -  Internal fault within the  Install a new hydraulic control unit. Refer to
49 internal electronic Anti-Lock Braking System the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
failure Hydraulic Control Unit module/component is suspect
state to on and drive the vehicle above
9mph/15kph
C2009- Front Axle Wheel  Vehicle unevenly loaded  Check the vehicle is not unevenly loaded
95 Speed Sensors  Incorrect tyres installed (heavy on one side). Check that approved
Swapped -  Wiring harness fault wheels and tyres are installed. Refer to
incorrect assembly electrical circuit diagrams and check if the front
wheel speed sensor connectors are transposed
or incorrectly attached at the wiring harness
connector
C200A- Rear Axle Wheel  Vehicle unevenly loaded  Check the vehicle is not unevenly loaded
95 Speed Sensors  Incorrect tyres installed (heavy on one side). Check that approved
Swapped -  Wiring harness fault wheels and tyres are installed. Refer to
incorrect assembly electrical circuit diagrams and check if the rear
wheel speed sensor connectors are transposed
or incorrectly attached at the wiring harness
connector
U0001- High Speed CAN  Wiring harness fault  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Communication bus check the power and ground connections to the
- bus off module. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the CAN network
U0074- Control Module  Wiring harness fault  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
13 Communication Bus check the power and ground connections to the
B off - circuit open module. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the private CAN bus circuits between
the Yaw Rate Sensor and the Anti-Lock Braking
System control module for open circuit
U0074- Control Module  Wiring harness fault  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Communication Bus check the power and ground connections to the
B off - bus off module. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the private CAN bus circuits between
the Yaw Rate Sensor and the Anti-Lock Braking
System control module for short to ground,
short to power open circuit. check for insecure
connectors
U0100- Lost  Power distribution fault  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Communication  Wiring harness fault check the power and ground connections to the
With ECM/PCM A - module. Using the manufacturer approved
no sub type diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
information integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the CAN network between
the Engine Control Module and the Anti-Lock
Braking System Control Module
With ECM/PCM "A" module. Using the manufacturer approved
- Missing message diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
the Engine Control Module and the Anti-Lock
With TCM - no sub module. Using the manufacturer approved
type information diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
the Transmission Control Module and the Anti-
Lock Braking System Control Module
with TCM - missing module. Using the manufacturer approved
message diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
the Transmission Control Module and the Anti-
With Gear Shift module. Using the manufacturer approved
Control Module A - diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
no sub type integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
information diagrams and check the CAN network between
the Transmission Shift Control Module and the
Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module
With Gear Shift module. Using the manufacturer approved
Module - Missing diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
message integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
the Transmission Shift Control Module and the
With Cruise Control module. Using the manufacturer approved
Module - no sub diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
type information integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
the Adaptive Speed Control Module and the
U0104- Lost  Invalid brake demand NOTE: This DTC can be set by either lost
87 Communication pressure received from the communication over CAN or by the ABS receiving an
With Cruise Control Adaptive Speed Control invalid brake demand pressure from the Adaptive
Module - missing Module Speed Control Module
message  Power distribution fault
 Wiring harness fault
 Check for Adaptive Speed Control Module
related DTCs
 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the power and ground connections to the
module. Using the manufacturer approved
the Adaptive Speed Control Module and the
With Yaw Rate  Sensor failure Yaw Rate Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
Sensor Module - no diagrams and check the CAN network between
sub type the Yaw Rate Sensor Module and the Anti-Lock
information Braking System Control Module
 If no harness faults are found, suspect the yaw
rate sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
U0123- Lost  Yaw rate sensor HS CAN  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
87 Communication circuit - open circuit check the power and ground connections to the
With Yaw Rate  Yaw rate sensor ignition Yaw Rate Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
Sensor Module - supply circuit - short to diagrams and check the CAN network between
missing message ground, open circuit the Yaw Rate Sensor Module and the Anti-Lock
 Sensor failure Braking System Control Module
 If no harness faults are found, suspect the yaw
rate sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
With Park Brake module. Using the manufacturer approved
Control Module - no diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
sub type integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
the Park Brake Control Module and the Anti-
With Park Brake module. Using the manufacturer approved
Control Module - diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
Missing message integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
the Park Brake Control Module and the Anti-
With Suspension module. Using the manufacturer approved
Control Module B - diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
no sub type integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
the Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module
and the Adaptive Damping Control Module
With Central module. Using the manufacturer approved
Junction Box - no diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
sub type integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
the Central Junction Box and the Anti-Lock
With Instrument module. Using the manufacturer approved
Panel Cluster (IPC) diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
Control Module - no integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
sub type diagrams and check the CAN network between
information the Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module
and the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Control
Module
U0300- Internal Control  The Anti-Lock Braking  Check the Anti-Lock Braking System control
00 Module Software System Control Module is module part number, install the correct part as
Incompatibility - no not compatible with the required. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
sub type vehicle Procedures manual if a module/component is
information suspect
U0401- Invalid Data  Event information - engine  Check the Engine Control Module for related
68 Received From control module related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
ECM/PCM - event concern  To confirm the repair and extinguish the
information warning lamps, clear the DTC, cycle the
U0402- Invalid Data  Event information -  Check the Transmission Control Module for
68 Received From Transmission Control related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Transmission Module related concern index
Control Module -
event information
U0404- Invalid Data  Event information -  Check the Transmission Shift Module for
68 Received From transmission shift module Dynamic Stability Control switch related DTCs
Gear Shift Module A related concern and refer to the relevant DTC index
- event information
U0405- Invalid Data  Event information - speed  Check the Speed Control Module for related
68 Received From control module related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Cruise Control concern
Module - event
information
U0417- Invalid Data  Event information - electric  Check the Electric Park Brake Control Module
68 Received From Park park brake control module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Brake Control related concern index
Module - event
information
U0443- Invalid Data  Event information  Check the RJB for related DTCs and refer to the
68 Received From relevant DTC Index
Body Control
Module "B"
U1A14- CAN Initialisation  Power distribution fault  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Failure - no sub  Wiring harness fault check the power and ground connections to the
type information module. Using the manufacturer approved
diagrams and check the CAN network
U2001- Reduced System  Event information - The  Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
68 Function - event pump motor wear estimator manual if a module/component is suspect.
information has reached a preset limit Check and install a new Anti-Lock Braking
which mean that the Anti- System Hydraulic Control Unit as required
Lock Braking System
control module will no
longer support adaptive
speed control
U200D- Control Module  Wiring harness fault NOTE: This monitoring is based on detecting that the
14 Output Power A -  Vacuum boost pressure supply voltage from the ABS modulator is out of range
circuit short to sensor failure (V6 petrol (4.5V – 5.3 V)
ground or open variants only)
 Steering angle sensor fault
 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
 HCU failure
check the power and ground connections to the
Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module.
Check the circuits between the steering angle
sensor and the Anti-Lock Braking System
Control Module, in particular check the steering
angle sensor ground at the Anti-Lock Braking
System Control Module connector pin. On V6
Petrol variants check the circuits between the
vacuum boost pressure sensor and the Anti-
Lock Braking System Control Module, in
particular check the vacuum boost pressure
sensor power supply at the Anti-Lock Braking
System Control Module connector pin. If no
wiring harness faults are found and the power
and ground supplies to the vacuum boost
pressure sensor, steering angle sensor and
Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module are
ok then suspect (1) the vacuum boost pressure
sensor, (2) the steering angle sensor, (3) the
Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module.
U2101- Control Module  Anti-Lock Braking System  Check/amend the car configuration file in the
00 configuration Control Module variant code Central Junction Box using the manufacturer
Incompatible - no value not supported on this approved diagnostic system
sub type vehicle
information
U2101- Control Module  Anti-Lock Braking System NOTE: The DTC is only for information and the system
68 configuration Control Module has been will have full functionality
Incompatible - substituted from another
event information vehicle
 Check if the Anti-Lock Braking System Control
 A new Anti-Lock Braking
Module has been previously installed to another
System Control Module has
vehicle, if so: Install the correct Anti-Lock
been installed
Braking System Control Module for this vehicle.
If the Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module
is new, cycle the ignition ON/OFF and clear the
DTC. Retest the system
U2300- Central  Configuration missing  Check/amend the car configuration file using
54 Configuration - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
missing calibration
U3000- Control Module -  Anti-Lock Braking System  Check Anti-Lock Braking System Control
45 program memory Control Module memory Module, clear DTC and retest system. If the
failure failure fault returns install a new Anti-Lock Braking
System Hydraulic control Unit. Refer to the
U3000- Control Module -  Anti-Lock Braking System  Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
49 internal electronic Control Module internal manual if a module/component is suspect.
failure electronic failure Install a new Anti-Lock Braking System
Hydraulic Control Unit
U3000- Control Module -  Anti-Lock Braking System NOTE: This DTC may be set if the manufacturer
4B over temperature valve overheat protection approved diagnostic system has been operating the
has been activated valves for a prolonged period
 Allow the Anti-Lock Braking System Hydraulic

Control Unit to cool, Clear the DTC and retest
the system
U3000- Control Module -  Event information - Anti-  Check for other DTCs relating to wheel speed,
68 event information Lock Braking System yaw rate, steering angle and component
intervention in progress for failures. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
an unfeasible length of time Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
U3000- Control Module -  Error/mismatch in Car  Download the Car Configuration File from the
87 missing message Configuration file RJB using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, check and amend to suit
vehicle specification
U3002- Vehicle  The Anti-Lock Braking NOTE: The module will continue to work normally even
81 Identification System Hydraulic Control with the stored DTC
Number - invalid Unit has previously been
serial data received installed to another vehicle
 Check and install the original, or a new Anti-
Lock Braking System Hydraulic Control Unit.
U3003- Battery Voltage -  There is a difference of  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
62 signal compare more than 2 volts between check the power and ground supply circuits to
failure the power supply to the the Central Junction Box and the Anti-Lock
Anti-Lock Braking System Braking System Hydraulic Control Unit. Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit and wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest the
the Central Junction Box system
U3006- Control Module  Power supply voltage low at  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
16 Input Power A - Anti-Lock Braking System check the power and ground supply circuits to
circuit voltage Hydraulic Control Unit the Anti-Lock Braking System Hydraulic Control
below threshold Unit for open circuit, short to ground. Repair
wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest the
system
U3006- Control Module  Power supply voltage high  Suspect overcharging. Check the Engine
17 Input Power A - at Anti-Lock Braking Control Module for charging related DTCs and
circuit voltage System Hydraulic Control refer to the relevant DTC index. Refer to the
above threshold Unit workshop manual and battery care manual and
check the vehicle charging circuit performance.
Rectify any charging circuit concerns and clear
the DTC. Retest the system
U3006- Control Module  Power supply voltage  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
1C Input Power A - momentarily low at the check the power and ground supply circuits to
circuit voltage out Anti-Lock Braking System the Anti-Lock Braking System Hydraulic Control
of range Hydraulic Control Unit Unit for intermittent open circuit, short to
ground, or high resistance. Check the Engine
Control Module for charging related DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index. Refer to the
workshop manual and battery care manual and
check the vehicle battery condition and
charging circuit performance. Rectify any
battery or charging circuit concerns and clear
the DTC. Retest the system
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Module
Removal
NOTE: The ABS Module is part of the hydraulic control unit (HCU) and cannot be serviced separately.
1. Remove the HCU.

For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Control Unit
(HCU) (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Removal and
Installation).
Installation
1. Install the HCU.
For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Control Unit
(HCU) (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Removal and
Installation).
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal

and Installation).
Torque: 6 Nm

 Disconnect the wheel speed sensor
Installation

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Special Tool(s)
Brake pedal hold down tool
JDS9013
Removal
area with water.


Procedures).
3. Remove the front LH fender splash shield.
For additional information, refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-
02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
4. NOTE: To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the special tool
apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm ( 1.6 in ) below the rest
position.
Using the special tool, press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Disconnect the hydraulic control unit (HCU)


operation.
Disconnect the 6 brake pipe unions.

7. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the locating pegs.
Remove the HCU and pipe assembley.


Remove the HCU.

 Disconnect the 6 brake pipe unions.
9. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the

component is removed for access only.
Remove the HCU bracket.

Installation
1. Install the HCU bracket.
2. Connect the brake pipe unions.

3. NOTE: When installing the HCU , make sure the locating peg fits
securely into the grommet.
Install the HCU and pipe assembley.

 Position the locating peg.
4. Connect and secure the electrical connector.

Procedures).
Procedures).
9. Using WDS, configure a new HCU.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal
1. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only

by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.

2. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the harness retaining

bracket is not removed. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the harness.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.

Torque: 6 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to the position

noted on removal.

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Yaw Rate Sensor and
Accelerometer
Removal

2. Refer to: Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,
3. CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic

trouble codes (DTCs) have been removed after the
road test.
NOTE: Make sure that this component is installed

to the noted removal position.
Torque: 6 Nm
Installation

Steering System - General Information -
Specifications
Power steering fluid Dextron 3
Steering System - General Information - Steering System
For a detailed description of the steering system operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of
the workshop manual.
REFER to: Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Description and Operation) /
Steering Linkage (211-03 Steering Linkage, Description and Operation) /
Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation) /
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
 Tire condition/pressure  Fuses
 Fluid level  Harnesses for
 Leaks damage/corrosion
 Security, condition and correct installation of suspension components  Electrical connector(s)
 Security, condition and correct installation of steering system  Damaged/corroded pins
components
CAUTION: If a steering gear assembly is returned under warranty with leaking output shaft seals, but there is also
damage to the steering gear boot/boots the steering gear warranty will be invalid. This is due to the steering gear
output shaft seals being damaged due to foreign materials entering the steering gear boot and damaging the steering
gear output shaft seals thereafter.
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the symptom chart.
Symptom Charts
WARNING: It is not possible to CHECK the torque of a patchlock bolt, if the torque is suspected to be low, the bolt
must be REMOVED/DISCARDED and a new bolt MUST be INSTALLED and torqued to the correct value.
Fluid Leakage
NOTE: Confirm the position of the fluid leak. CLEAN the area of the leak, inspect the area and confirm the exact
position. Ensure the fluid is not from another system on the vehicle.
Symptom Possible Causes Action

 Overfilled system  CORRECT the fluid level as necessary
 Install new steering gear.
 Steering gear REFER to: Steering Gear (211-02 Power Steering,
 INSTALL a new fluid cap/reservoir.
 Damaged fluid REFER to: Power Steering Fluid Reservoir - Vehicles
cap/reservoir Without: Supercharger (211-02 Power Steering, Removal
 Power steering and Installation).
fluid leakage  TIGHTEN the hose connection or latch plate fixing to the
recommended torque.
 Loose or damaged
REFER to: Specifications (211-02 Power Steering,
hoses and fittings
Specifications).
 O-ring or Dowty seals
INSTALL new components as necessary
 INSTALL new O-ring or Dowty seals as necessary
 Fluid cooler  INSTALL new fluid cooler.

REFER to: Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Vehicles Without:
Supercharger (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and
Installation).
 INSTALL a new power steering pump.
REFER to: Power Steering Pump - Vehicles Without:
 Power steering pump
Supercharger (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and
Installation).
Functional

 CHECK the steering
alignment.
 Steering wheel REFER to: Specifications
 Steering not correctly centred
misalignment (204-00 Suspension System -
General Information,
Specifications).
 CHECK and TIGHTEN the
steering wheel retaining bolt
as necessary.
 Steering wheel loose
REFER to: Steering Wheel
(211-04 Steering Column,
 INSTALL new components as
 Excess play in the steering linkage
necessary
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to

adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure
to follow this instruction will
invalidate the steering gear warranty
 Steering gear not correctly adjusted
(causing excessive backlash)
 INSTALL a new steering gear
as necessary.
REFER to: Steering Gear
(211-02 Power Steering,
 CHECK and TIGHTEN the
lower steering column pinch
 Lower steering column universal joint bolts as necessary.
pinch bolts loose REFER to: Specifications
Specifications).
 Excessive free play at  INSTALL a new steering
steering wheel (refer to column or steering column
the Steering Linkage lower shaft as necessary.
Inspection and Backlash REFER to: Steering Column
 Excessive wear in steering column
(Free play) Check in this (211-04 Steering Column,
universal joints
section) Removal and Installation) /
Steering Column Lower Shaft
 CHECK/TIGHTEN and INSTALL
new steering gear mounting
 Steering gear mounting bolts loose or bolts as necessary.
damaged REFER to: Specifications
Specifications).
 INSTALL new tie-rod ends as
necessary.
 Wear in steering gear tie-rod end ball
REFER to: Tie Rod End (211-
joints
03 Steering Linkage, Removal
and Installation).
NOTE: Inner ball joint wear is rare. The
steering gear installed to all Jaguar vehicles has
a spring loaded pinion to ensure the correct
level of engagement between the rack and  INSTALL new steering gear as
pinion. This play is optimized with the steering necessary.
gear in the central position and should not be REFER to: Steering Gear
confused with inner ball joint wear. Check for (211-02 Power Steering,
vertical motion in the inner ball joint with the Removal and Installation).
steering gear in the central position.
 Wear in steering gear inner ball joints

 Wear in suspension ball joints/bushings
necessary

 Steering gear not correctly adjusted
as necessary.
 RECTIFY the source of the
contamination and INSTALL
new brake pads and discs as
necessary.
REFER to: Brake Disc -
Vehicles With: Standard
Brakes (206-03 Front Disc
Brake, Removal and
Installation) /
Brake Disc - Vehicles With:
 Contamination of brake pads and discs High Performance Brakes
(206-03 Front Disc Brake,
Brake Pads - Vehicles With:
Standard Brakes (206-03
Front Disc Brake, Removal
 Veer under braking and Installation) /
Brake Pads - Vehicles With:
High Performance Brakes
 RECTIFY sticking slide pins
and INSTALL new calipers as
necessary.
REFER to: Brake Caliper -
Brake, Removal and
Installation) /
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With:
 Seized front brake caliper slide pins or (206-03 Front Disc Brake,
piston Removal and Installation).
 Damaged brake discs  INSTALL new brake discs as
necessary.
REFER to: Brake Disc -
Brake, Removal and
Installation) /
Brake Disc - Vehicles With:
 For further information on
diagnosis of uneven tire wear.
REFER to: Suspension System

(204-00 Suspension System -
 Uneven tire wear
 Incorrect tire pressure
 ADJUST tire pressures.
REFER to: Specifications
(204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
NOTE: Dealerships must keep a copy

 Incorrect geometry adjustment
of the BEFORE and AFTER geometry
figures with job card for future
reference
 ADJUST as necessary.
Specifications).
 Vehicle is unevenly loaded or  Notify the customer of
overloaded incorrect vehicle loading

 Steering gear is not correctly adjusted
as necessary.
 TIGHTEN and INSTALL new
front suspension components
 Loose, damaged or worn front as necessary.
suspension components REFER to: Specifications
(204-01 Front Suspension,
 Vehicle pulls to one side Specifications).
when driving on a level
surface
rear suspension components
 Loose, damaged or worn rear as necessary.
(204-02 Rear Suspension,
Specifications).
 For further information on
diagnosis of the brake
system.
 Incorrect brake operation REFER to: Brake System
(206-00 Brake System -
 SET underbody alignment
referring to the Removal and
Installation procedures for
instruction.
REFER to: Front Subframe
(502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe
 Incorrect underbody alignment
and Mounting System,
Rear Subframe (502-00 Uni-
Body, Subframe and Mounting
System, Removal and
Installation).
 CHECK and ADJUST the tire
pressure.
Specifications).
 Incorrect tire pressure or tire size
 INSTALL a new tire as
necessary.
REFER to: Wheel and Tire
 Vehicle is unevenly or excessively  Notify the customer of
loaded incorrect vehicle loading
 Incorrect toe adjustment Specifications) /
Front Toe Adjustment (204-
00 Suspension System -
General Information, General
Procedures).
 TIGHTEN and INSTALL a new
tie-rod end as necessary.
 Vehicle wanders from REFER to: Specifications
side to side when driven (211-03 Steering Linkage,
straight ahead and the Specifications) /
 Loose or worn steering gear tie-rod end
steering wheel is held in Tie Rod End (211-03 Steering
(s)
a firm position Linkage, Removal and
Installation).
 TIGHTEN and INSTALL a new
suspension ball joint assembly
as necessary.
 Loose or worn suspension ball joint(s) (204-01 Front Suspension,
Specifications) /
Wheel Knuckle (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
 TIGHTEN the steering column
universal joint pinch bolt to
 Steering column universal joint pinch the correct torque.
bolt loose REFER to: Specifications
Specifications).
rear suspension components
 Loose or worn rear suspension as necessary.
components REFER to: Specifications
(204-02 Rear Suspension,
Specifications).
 CHECK/ADJUST the tire
pressure and INSTALL correct
tire as necessary.
 Incorrect tire pressure, size or type (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Specifications) /
Wheel and Tire (204-04
Wheels and Tires, Removal
and Installation).
reference
 Incorrect geometry adjustment

Specifications).
 CHECK the steering column
and steering column lower
 Steering column/steering column lower shaft are free from
shaft interference interference from the engine
 Poor self center action of
harness, sound proofing and
the steering
floor covering
 Steering column shroud fouling on the  Correctly INSTALL/ALIGN as
steering wheel necessary
 INSTALL a new upper or lower
steering column as necessary.
REFER to: Steering Column

 Steering column universal joints binding
or stiff
 Correctly INSTALL and
INSTALL new lower shaft as
 Steering column lower shaft floor seal necessary.
incorrectly installed, binding or REFER to: Steering Column
damaged Lower Shaft (211-04 Steering
Column, Removal and
Installation).
 INSTALL a new tie-rod end as
 Binding or damaged steering gear tie- necessary.
rod(s) REFER to: Tie Rod End (211-
03 Steering Linkage, Removal
and Installation).
 Loose, damaged or worn front as necessary.
Specifications).
 CHECK and RECTIFY any fluid
leakage.
REFER to: Steering System
 Low power steering fluid (211-00 Steering System -
Fill to correct level
 INSTALL a new FEAD belt
tensioner.
REFER to: Accessory Drive
 Damaged Front End Accessory Drive
Belt Tensioner - Vehicles
(FEAD) belt tensioner
Without: Supercharger (303-
05 Accessory Drive, Removal
and Installation).
 CHECK hoses and cooler for
restriction/damage and
INSTALL new components as
necessary.
 Power steering hose or fluid cooler
REFER to: Power Steering
restriction
 Excessive steering efforts Fluid Cooler - Vehicles
required during low Without: Supercharger (211-
speed/rapid manoeuvring 02 Power Steering, Removal
and/or during parking and Installation).
manoeuvres  BLEED the system.
System Bleeding (211-00
 Fluid aeration
Steering System - General
Information, General
Procedures).
 Refer to the electrical circuit
 Steering transducer not closed - no feed
diagrams and test steering
voltage or cable fault
transducer circuit
 INSTALL a new power
steering pump or steering
NOTE: REFER to the power steering pressure gear as necessary.
check in this section. REFER to: Power Steering
Pump - Vehicles Without:
Supercharger (211-02 Power
 Power steering fluid delivery pressure or Steering, Removal and
flow too low Installation) /
 Internal steering gear leakage Steering Gear (211-02 Power
Steering, Removal and
Installation).
 Steering operation is very  Refer to the electrical circuit
heavy when VEHICLE IS  Steering transducer open early diagrams and test steering
IN MOTION AT LOW transducer circuit
SPEED, but when  Check for vehicle speed
stationary manoeuvring  Speedometer signal error related DTCs and refer to the
is NORMAL relevant DTC Index
 Steering transducer not open, (no
diagrams and test steering
power steering fluid flow)
transducer circuit
 Check for vehicle speed
 Speedometer signal error related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index
 Steering operation is very
 CHECK for kinking or
light when VEHICLE IN
blockage of pipe/hose
MOTION AT HIGHER
 Ensure CORRECT
SPEED, but when  Power steering fluid low pressure
INSTALLATION and INSTALL a
stationary manoeuvring pipe/hose restricted flow
new power steering fluid low
is NORMAL
pressure pipe/hose as
necessary
 INSTALL a new reservoir,
refill with fluid and bleed the
system.
Fluid Reservoir - Vehicles
Without: Supercharger (211-
02 Power Steering, Removal
and Installation) /
 Fluid reservoir filter blocked Power Steering System
Bleeding (211-00 Steering
System - General
Information, General
Procedures).
 CHECK the steering column is
free from interference from
 Lower steering column interference
the engine harness, sound
proofing or the floor covering
reference.
 Incorrect steering geometry  CHECK the front wheel

alignment.
Specifications).
NOTE: Refer to the power steering
pressure check in this section
 Steering operation is
heavy in one direction  If the power steering system
pressure is low but the power
 Faulty rotary valve/seal steering pump maximum
output pressure is correct
INSTALL a new steering gear.

 CHECK for correct installation
or damage to wheel arch liner
and suspension components.
 Tire fouling on the wheel arch liner or Correctly INSTALL and
suspension components INSTALL new components as
necessary
 CHECK tire for correct size,
type and pressure
 Damaged steering gear cylinder feed  INSTALL new components as
pipe necessary
 CHECK and RECTIFY any fluid
leaks. Refer to the fluid
leakage symptom charts in
 Low power steering fluid
this section
 Fill power steering system to
correct level
NOTE: Refer to the power steering
pressure check in this section
 If the power steering system

pressure is low but the power
 Faulty rotary valve/seal steering pump maximum
output pressure is correct,
INSTALL a new steering gear.


steering pump or steering
gear as necessary.
NOTE: Refer to the power steering pressure
check in this section
 Power steering fluid delivery pressure or Steering, Removal and
flow too low Installation) /
 Internal steering gear leakage Steering Gear (211-02 Power
Installation).
steering pump as necessary.
 Fluid loss at the power steering pump
shaft seal
Installation).
 INSTALL a new upper or lower

 Steering column universal joints binding
or stiff
 Steering operation is
heavy in both directions
necessary.
REFER to: Wheel Knuckle
 Seized front ball joints REFER to: (204-01 Front
Suspension)
Upper Arm LH (Removal
and Installation),
Upper Arm RH (Removal
and Installation).
 INSTALL new steering gear as
necessary.
 Seized or worn steering gear REFER to: Steering Gear
 CHECK the steering column is
free from interference from
 Lower steering column interference
the engine harness, sound
proofing and floor covering
 Check for vehicle speed
 Incorrect speedometer signal related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index
 Steering operation varies  Steering transducer circuit fault diagrams and test steering
from heavy to light when transducer circuit
driving at constant speed  INSTALL a new upper or lower

 Steering column universal joint binding
or stiff
 Uncharacteristic
 Steering transducer circuit fault diagrams and test steering
effort/speed relationship
transducer circuit
 CHECK/ADJUST the tire
pressure and INSTALL correct
tire as necessary.
 Incorrect tire pressure, size or type (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Specifications) /
Wheel and Tire (204-04
 Excessive kick-back Wheels and Tires, Removal
through steering wheel and Installation).
NOTE: Inner ball joint wear is rare. The

steering gear installed to all Jaguar vehicles  INSTALL new steering gear
have a spring loaded pinion to ensure the and tie-rod ends as
correct level of engagement between the rack necessary.
and pinion. This play is optimized with the REFER to: Steering Gear
steering gear in the central position and should (211-02 Power Steering,
not be confused with inner ball joint wear. Removal and Installation) /
Check for vertical motion in the inner ball joint Tie Rod End (211-03 Steering
with the steering gear in the central position. Linkage, Removal and
Installation).
 Badly worn steering gear/linkage
as necessary.
 Loose or worn front suspension
components/bushings
Specifications).
 Column will not adjust  Electrical/electronic failure  CHECK column adjust switch
 Column will not move to datalogger signal using the
memory position manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
 CHECK fuses/relays
 Check instrument cluster for
column movement/memory
related DTCs and refer to DTC
Index.
REFER to: Instrument Cluster
(413-01 Instrument Cluster,
 If DTCs B1C3314, B1C3514
are stored, and the column
inches when the switch is
activated and there is no
memory recall function, there
will be an existing fault with
the circuit, if the column
function is OK the fault is
intermittent
 If DTCs B1C3277, B1C3477
are stored, these should be
ignored in this case
 CHECK condition of wiring and
connectors
 CHECK column calibration.
The BAR code information is
located in the right hand
luggage compartment floor
area below the carpet
 CHECK seat control memory
module
 Motor locked/jammed  CHECK to see if mechanism
has reached hard end stops
 Free mechanism
 Replace motor with
appropriate service kit
 Column easy entry/exit  Electrical/electronic failure  Turn column adjust switch to
does not function AUTO position, check that
'Column Adjust AUTO' text is
displayed in the instrument
cluster message center
 CHECK column adjust switch
datalogger signal using the
diagnostic system
 CHECK fuses/relays
 Check instrument cluster for
column movement/memory
related DTCs and refer to DTC
Index.
REFER to: Instrument Cluster
(413-01 Instrument Cluster,
 If DTCs B1C3314, B1C3514
are stored, and the column
inches when the switch is
activated and there is no
memory recall function, there
will be an existing fault with
the circuit, if the column
function is OK the fault is
intermittent
 If DTCs B1C3277, B1C3477
are stored, these should be
ignored in this case
 CHECK condition of wiring and
connectors
 CHECK column calibration.
The BAR code information is
located in the right hand
luggage compartment floor
area below the carpet
 CHECK seat control memory
module for DTCs and refer to
DTC Index
 When driver memory  Driver seat has passenger seat module  Install the correct module to
recall requested from installed the driver seat
driver switch pack -
Column and exterior
mirrors DO NOT move to
memory position - Driver
seat DOES move to
memory position
 When passenger memory  Passenger seat has driver seat module  Install the correct module to
recall requested from installed the passenger seat
passenger switch pack -
Column, exterior mirrors
and passenger seat ALL
move to memory position
 Internal lock failure  Refer to the electrical circuit
 Electromechanical diagrams and test steering
Steering column lock will column lock circuit
not operate  Install a new steering column
lock as necessary
Noise

 CHECK for leaks and RECTIFY as necessary.
 Low power steering fluid For further information refer to the symptom
level charts for leakage in this section. FILL power
steering fluid reservoir to correct level
NOTE: Look for small air bubbles
visible in the fluid, air may also get  BLEED the power steering system.
trapped in the hydraulic system REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding
(211-00 Steering System - General
Information, General Procedures).
 Air in hydraulic system
 Continuous noise  Power steering pipe/hose in

 CHECK and REPOSITION, or INSTALL new IF
contact with the vehicle
damaged/deformed, power steering pipe/hose
body
 CHECK and CLEAR restriction to pipe/hose
 Power steering pipe/hose  REPOSITION power steering pipe/hose.
restricted or twisted INSTALL new pipe/hose IF permanently
damaged/deformed
 TIGHTEN the power steering pump mounting
 Power steering pump bolts to the correct torque.
mounting bolts loose REFER to: Specifications (211-02 Power
Steering, Specifications).
 CHECK and FILL power steering fluid reservoir
to correct level
NOTE: Refer to the power steering  Bleed the power steering system.
pressure check in this section REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding
(211-00 Steering System - General
 Noise gets worse
 Low power steering fluid Information, General Procedures).
when system is
level  CHECK power steering pump pressure. If the
loaded
 Aerated fluid pump pressure is low, INSTALL a new power
 Low power steering pump steering pump.
pressure REFER to: Power Steering Pump - Vehicles
Without: Supercharger (211-02 Power
Steering, Removal and Installation).
 CHECK FEAD belt tension
 FEAD belt incorrectly  CHECK FEAD belt condition and INSTALL a
 Front End Accessory tensioned or glazed new belt as necessary.
Drive (FEAD) belt REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt - Vehicles
squeal Without: Supercharger (303-05 Accessory
Drive, Removal and Installation).
 CHECK FEAD belt tension
 CHECK FEAD belt condition and INSTALL a
 Chirp noise from the
new belt as necessary.
steering pump when  Loose or worn FEAD belt
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt - Vehicles
a load is applied
Without: Supercharger (303-05 Accessory
 Scrape/grind noise  Steering column shroud foul  Correctly INSTALL the steering column shroud
from behind steering condition or clockspring to eliminate the foul condition
wheel while steering  INSTALL a new clockspring as necessary.
REFER to: Clockspring (211-04 Steering
Column, Removal and Installation).
 Foreign objects  REMOVE foreign objects from between
steering column shroud and steering
wheel/steering column rotating components
 Click  Clockspring or steering  Correctly INSTALL and INSTALL new
column multifunction switch components as necessary.
LH REFER to: Clockspring (211-04 Steering
Column, Removal and Installation) /
Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
(211-05 Steering Column Switches, Removal
and Installation).
 Loose universal joint pinch  INSTALL a new universal joint pinch bolt and
bolt TIGHTEN to correct specification.
REFER to: Specifications (211-04 Steering
Column, Specifications).
 Squeak  Steering column shroud  APPLY Krytox spray to steering column shroud
joints joints
 Clockspring  INSTALL new clockspring as necessary.
REFER to: Clockspring (211-04 Steering
Column, Removal and Installation).
 Loose fixings (universal  TIGHTEN fixings to correct specification.
 Knock joint pinch bolt and steering REFER to: Specifications (211-04 Steering
column fixings) Column, Specifications).
 Foreign objects  REMOVE foreign objects from between
steering column shroud and steering
wheel/steering column rotating components
 Rattle  Loose fixings  TIGHTEN steering column fixings to correct
specification.
REFER to: Specifications (211-04 Steering
Column, Specifications).
 Electric motor/solenoid NOTE: Before carrying out repairs/replacement,
assess column adjustment noise levels against other
 Noise while adjusting vehicles of the same model
column
 Install new components as necessary
 Motor spindle/lead screw  Lubricate lead screw
Vibration
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust

the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this
 Wheel Fight (Kick Back) -  Loose or worn steering instruction will invalidate the steering gear
condition where roughness is components/bushings warranty.
felt in the steering wheel by the
driver when the vehicle is driven  TIGHTEN and INSTALL new steering
over rough surfaces components/bushings as necessary
 Loose or worn suspension
suspension components/bushings as
components/bushings
necessary
 CHECK for wheel and tire damage.
INSTALL new components as
 Nibble (Shimmy) - condition necessary.
where oscillation of the steering  Road wheel and tire REFER to: Wheel and Tire (204-04
wheel occurs (not vertical which condition Wheels and Tires, Removal and
is Shake). This is driven by road Installation).
wheel imbalance  CHECK for tire uniformity. INSTALL
new tire(s) as necessary
 CHECK and ADJUST road wheel
 Road wheel imbalance
balance as necessary
NOTE: Vibration smooths out  ENSURE tires installed are to Jaguar
 Shake - condition where vertical after several miles of driving specification. INSTALL new tires as
vibration of the steering
necessary
wheel/column occurs (not
 Road wheel imbalance  CHECK and ADJUST tire pressures to
oscillation which is Nibble)
due to tire flat-spotting correct specification
Component Tests
Steering Linkage Inspection and Backlash (Free play) Check
CAUTION: Steering gear boots must be handled carefully to avoid damage. Use new clamps when installing
steering gear boots.
Inspect the boots for cuts, deterioration, twisting or distortion. Check the steering gear boots to make sure they are
tight. Install new boots or clamps as necessary.
NOTE: The following steps must be carried out with assistance.
1. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, gently turn the steering wheel to the left and the right to check
for free play.
2. Free play should be between 0 and 6 mm (0 and 0.24 in) at the steering wheel rim. If the free play exceeds this
limit, either the ball joints are worn, the lower steering column joints are worn or the backlash of the steering
gear is excessive.
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this instruction will invalidate the
steering gear warranty.
3. The backlash of the steering gear cannot be adjusted, install a new steering gear if excessive backlash is
diagnosed.
4. Grasp the steering wheel firmly and move it up and down and to the left and right without turning the wheel to
check for column bearing wear, steering wheel or steering column.
Power Steering Fluid Condition Check
1. Run the engine for 2 minutes.
2. Check the power steering fluid system level.
3. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be dark reddish, not brown or
black.
4. Using a suitable clean syringe extract a suitable amount of fluid from the reservoir.
5. Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain.
6. If evidence of solid material is found, the power steering fluid system should be drained for further inspection.
7. If fluid contamination or steering component failure is confirmed by the sediment in the power steering fluid
system, REFER to Steering Fault Diagnosis by Symptom Charts in this section.
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering Pressure Test
Test Equipment

1 211-011 Pressure Gauge Hose
2 211-011-08 Pump Return Hose
3 211-011-07 Pump Return Hose Connector
4 211-011-03/2 Test Equipment to High Pressure Hose Adaptor
5 211-011-03/1 Pump High Pressure Outlet to Hose Adaptor
6 211-011-02 Pump Adaptor to Control Valve Hose
7 211-011-01 Control Valve
8 211-011 Pressure Gauge
9 - 'O' Ring Seal
The measurement of the maximum system pressure, (which is governed by the pressure relief valve) is achieved by
inserting the Service Tool (pressure gauge and adaptors) into the fluid circuit of the power steering system. Run the
engine at idle speed, turn the steering from lock to lock and read the maximum pressure recorded on the gauge.
Installing Test Equipment
To install the pressure test equipment:
 Place a suitable drain tray below the power steering pump.

 Install a hose clamp on the reservoir to pump hose prior to disconnecting any hoses, to avoid unnecessary loss
of fluid.
 Disconnect the hose from the power steering pump high pressure outlet.
 Install the pump outlet to hose adaptor (5). Do not omit the 'O' ring seal (9).
 Connect the power steering pump adaptor to control valve hose (6) of the test equipment.
 Install the adaptor (4) in the high pressure hose previously removed from the power steering pump outlet.
 Connect the connector (3) of the test equipment hose (2) to the adaptor (4).
 Remove the hose clamp from the reservoir hose.
 Start the engine to check the system pressure.
With the control valve (7) OPEN and the engine idling, the following system pressures may be checked:
 During turning when static (dry parking pressure).

 When the steering is held on full lock (maximum system pressure or pressure relief).
 With the steering at rest (idle pressure or back pressure).
CAUTIONS:
To avoid excessive heating of the power steering pump when CHECKING the pressure, do not close the valve for
more than 5 seconds maximum.
When CHECKING the pump pressure DO NOT drive the vehicle with the test equipment installed.
With the control valve (7) CLOSED the power steering pump maximum output pressure can be checked.
Removing Test Equipment
To remove the test equipment:
 Install a hose clamp on the reservoir to power steering pump hose.

 Removing the test equipment is a reversal of the installation instructions.
 Install a new 'O' ring seal (9) to the power steering pump high pressure outlet to hose connection.
 Install the original hose to the power steering pump.
 Remove the clamp from the reservoir to the power steering pump hose.
 Top-up the reservoir fluid.
 Bleed the power steering system.
REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding (211-00 Steering System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Description of Terms
General Steering System Noises
Boom
Rhythmic sound like a drum roll or distant thunder. May cause pressure on the ear drum.
Buzz
Low-pitched sound, like a bee. Usually associated with vibrations.
Chatter
Rapidly repeating metallic sound.
Chuckle
Rapid noise that sounds like a stick against the spokes of a spinning bicycle wheel.
Chirp
High pitched rapidly repeating sound, like chirping birds.
Click
Light sound, like a ball point pen being clicked.
Click/Thump
Heavy metal-to-metal sound, like a hammer striking steel.
Grind
Abrasive sound, like a grinding wheel or sandpaper rubbing against wood.
Groan/Moan
Continuous, low-pitched humming sound.
Groan/Howl
Low, guttural sound, like an angry dog.
Hiss
Continuous sound like air escaping from a tire valve.
Hum
Continuous sound of varying frequencies, like a wire humming in the wind.

Knock
Heavy, loud repeating sound like a knock on a door.
Ping
Similar to knock, except at higher frequency.
Rattle
A sound suggesting looseness, such as marbles rolling around in a can.
Roar
Deep, long, prolonged sound like an animal, or winds and ocean waves.
Rumble
Low, heavy continuous sound like that made by wagons or thunder.
Scrape
Grating noise like one hard plastic part rubbing against another.
Squeak
High-pitched sound like rubbing a clean window.
Squeal
Continuous, high-pitched sound like running finger nails across a chalkboard.
Tap
Light, hammering sound like tapping pencil on edge of table. May be rhythmic or intermittent.
Whirr/Whine
High-pitched buzzing sound, like an electric motor or drill.
Whistle
Sharp, shrill sound, like wind passing a small opening.
Specific Steering System Noise Types
Belt Squeal
Belt squeal is a high frequency air-borne noise generated by slippage of the ribbed Vee belt on the power steering pump
pulley. Squeal increases with system loading and at full lock.
Clonk
Clonk is a structure-borne noise heard as a loose-sounding rattle or vibration coming from the steering column. Clonk
can be identified by driving and turning over cobblestones, rough roads, or high frequency bumps such as 25-50 mm
tall tar strips. Clonk requires a tie-rod load impact.
Column Knock
Column knock is a loose-sounding rattle or vibration generated by the steering column shaft contacting other portions
of the column assembly. The noise is both audible and tactile. Column knock is generated by driving over cobblestones
or rough pavement. It is not necessary to turn the steering wheel to create this noise.
Column Rattle
Column rattle is a metallic sounding noise created when applying a highly impulsive force to the steering wheel. Column
rattle is often used to combine the more general group of column noises including clonk and column knock. Column
rattle noises can be caused by clonk, knock, loose column components, bonus parts etc. A series of parked, straight-line
driving, and cornering tests should be carried out to isolate the source/sources.
Grinding/Scrape
Grinding is a low frequency noise in the column when the steering wheel is turned. It is generally caused by
interference between moving components such as the steering wheel to steering column shroud.
Grunt (Squawk/Whoop)
Grunt is a 'honking' sound elicited when coming off one of the steering stops. Grunt is generally excited during parking
manoeuvres with a low to medium speed steering input.
Hiss (Swish)
Hiss or Valve Hiss is a high-frequency sound coming from the steering gear when the system is loaded. It is a rushing
or 'swish' noise that doesn't change frequency with RPM. Hiss is the general noise generated by the flow of hydraulic
fluid through restrictions in the steering system. Restrictions include the rotary steering valve, power steering tubes,
connectors, tuning orifices, etc. Hiss can be air-borne and structure-borne, but the structure-borne path through the
steering intermediate shaft is usually dominant.
Moan (Groan)
Moan is the general structure-borne noise of the steering system. Moan is primarily transmitted to the driver via the
body structure through the pump mount, engine mounts, power steering lines and power steering brackets. On some
vehicles, moan is a loud humming noise, often present when the wheel is turned and the system is loaded. It may
change frequency with engine RPM and if the system is loaded or unloaded.
Steering Gear Knock (Steering Gear Slap)
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this instruction will invalidate the
steering gear warranty.
Steering gear knock is a rattle sound and steering wheel vibration caused by separation of the steering gear and pinion
while driving over bumps. It is a structure-borne noise transmitted through the intermediate shaft and column. Steering
gear knock can also be heard as a 'thump' or impact noise that occurs with the vehicle stationary when the steering
wheel is released from a loaded position and allowed to return to rest. Noise occurs with the engine on or off.
Rattles
Rattles are noises caused by knocking or hitting of components in the steering system. Steering rattles can occur in the
engine compartment, the suspension, or the passenger compartment. Rattles can be caused by loose components,
movable and flexible components, and improper clearances.
Squeaks/Scrapes
Squeaks/Scrapes are noises due to friction or component rubbing anywhere in the steering system. Squeaks/Scrapes
have appeared in steering linkages and joints, in column components and in column and steering wheel trim.
Weep
Weep is an air-borne noise, occasionally generated when turning the steering across lock at a constant rate. When
present on a vehicle the noise, once initiated can often be maintained across a large proportion of the available steering
movement.
Whistle
Whistle is similar to hiss but is louder and of a higher frequency. It is also more of a pure tone noise than hiss. Whistle
is air-borne and is generated by a high flow rate of hydraulic fluid through a small restriction.
Zip
Zip noise is the air-borne noise generated by power steering pump cavitation when power steering fluid does not flow
freely through the suction hose from the reservoir to the pump. Zip primarily occurs during cold weather at start-up.
Steering System Vibrations and Harshness
Buzz
Buzz is a tactile rotary vibration felt in the steering wheel when steering inputs are slow. Buzz can also be called a
grinding feel and it is closely related to grunt and is caused by high system gain with low damping. Buzz is generally
excited during parking manoeuvres with low to medium speed steering input.
Buzz (Electrical)
A different steering buzz can be caused by pulse width modulated (PWM) electric actuators used in variable assist
steering systems. This buzz is felt by turning the ignition key to run without starting the engine and holding onto the
steering wheel. In extreme cases, the buzz can be felt with the engine running also.
Column/Steering Wheel Shake
Column shake is a low frequency vertical vibration excited by primary engine vibrations.
Nibble (Shimmy)
Steering nibble is a rotary oscillation or vibration of the steering wheel, which can be excited at a specific vehicle speed.
Nibble is driven by wheel and tire imbalance exciting a suspension recession mode, which then translates into steering
gear travel and finally steering wheel nibble.
Shudder (Judder)
Shudder is a low frequency oscillation of the entire steering system (tire, wheels, steering gear and linkage, etc.) when
the vehicle is steered during static-park or at low speeds. Shudder is very dependent on road surface.
Torque/Velocity Variation (Phasing/Effort Cycling)
Steering wheel torque variation occurring twice in one revolution is normally as a result of problems with the lower
steering column (intermediate shaft), but foul conditions generally result in either constant stiffness or single point
stiffness. Depending upon the orientation of the joints, the steering can feel asymmetric (torque falling off in one
direction and rising in the other) or else it can simply have pronounced peaks and troughs as the steering moves from
lock to lock.
Wheel Fight (Kick Back)
Wheel fight is excess feedback of sudden road forces through the steering system and back to the driver. It is evaluated
at all vehicle speeds over cobblestones, rough roads, and potholes. The tires, wheels, and suspension generate forces
into the steering systems. Steering friction, hydraulic damping, hydraulic compliance, mechanical compliance, steering
ratio, and assist gain all affect how much is transmitted to the driver.
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System
Bleeding
General Procedures
1. Clean power steering fluid reservoir around the filler cap and
fluid indicator.
 Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid
is free from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level
mark with recommended fluid.
2. CAUTION: Fluid must always be present in

the reservoir during bleeding.
Remove the filler cap and fill to the MAX level

mark.
 Install the reservoir filler cap.
3. Start the engine and allow to run for 10 seconds, stop the
engine.
 Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid
is free from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level
mark with recommended fluid.
4. CAUTION: Do not hold steering on full lock for longer than

10 seconds.
Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock, stop the
engine.
 Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
5. Start and run the engine for 2 minutes, turn the steering fully
lock to lock.
 Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
Filling
General Procedures
Draining
1.

stands.

and Installation).
4.
 Using a syringe, remove the PAS fluid from the reservoir.
5. CAUTIONS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
Filling
1. NOTE: Make sure that the component is clean, free
of foreign material and lubricant.
Torque: 20 Nm

 Fill the power steering reservoir.
3. Install the vacuum hand pump to the power steering fluid

reservoir.
4. NOTE: Apply the maximum vacuum possible on the reservoir for
1 minute.
Apply a vacuum to the power steering fluid reservoir.

5. Remove the vacuum hand pump from the power steering fluid
reservoir.

7.
 Run the engine for 30 seconds.
 Turn the steering fully lock-to-lock, stop the engine.

reservoir.
1 minute.

reservoir.

12.
reservoir.
1 minute.

reservoir.

17.
18.
 Install the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
and Installation).
Flushing
General Procedures
NOTE: If heavy steering or contamination within the power steering system is found, it is necessary to carry out the
system flush procedure as detailed below. If any components have been replaced in the power steering system the
procedure below must be carried out in full.
1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir cap.

2. Using a suitable syringe, remove the power steering fluid from
the power steering fluid reservoir.
3. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping

fluids.
Detach the power steering fluid reservoir.

 Detach but do not remove the power
steering fluid reservoir.
 Release the power steering fluid return
hose from the power steering fluid
reservoir.
 If a quick release coupling is fitted to the
power steering return hose, release the
power steering fluid return hose from the
coupling by removing the clip.

fluids.
NOTE: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
Using a suitable blanking cap, cap the power

steering reservoir return pipe.

fluids.
NOTE: Make sure the extended pipe is not kinked

or twisted and is correctly secured with hose clips.
Attach a suitable pipe to the power steering return

hose to allow the fluid to drain.
6. NOTE: The suitable funnel should have the a
capacity of 4 litres and O-ring seal
NOTE: The suitable funnel must be tightly sealed

to the power steering fluid reservoir to avoid fluid
leakage.
Install a suitable funnel onto the power steering

fluid reservoir.

Raise and support the vehicle with the wheels just clear of the
ground.
8. CAUTIONS:
Steps 8 and 9 must be carried out within 2 - 3 seconds of

each other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the power steering system.
Using the suitable funnel, top up the power steering system with
the specified fluid. Make sure the fluid level is maintained at two
thirds full in the funnel.
9. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the power steering fluid level in

the power steering fluid reservoir to fall below the
minimum power steering fluid level. Failure to
power steering system.
Make sure the engine is switched off as soon

as the full 4 litres of power steering fluid has
entered the power steering fluid reservoir.
Flush the power steering system.

 Start the engine
 With assistance turn the steering slowly
lock to lock 3 times at approximately 1
revolution every 5 seconds.
 Continue to flush the power steering
system until 4 litres of power steering fluid
has been added to the power steering
reservoir. This should take approximately
30 seconds.

fluids.
Remove the suitable funnel.

fluids.
Remove the suitable pipe to the power steering

return hose.
12. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power steering return

hose, connect the power steering fluid return hose to the
coupling by installing the clip.
13. Install a new power steering fluid reservoir. For additional
information, refer to: (211-02)
Power Steering -
Power steering fluid cooler retaining bolts 10 7 -
Power steering fluid reservoir retaining bolts 10 7 -
Power steering pipe connection to steering gear retaining bolt 15 11
Steering gear retaining bolts 100 74 -
Steering column lower joint retaining bolt 35 26 -
Power steering pump pulley retaining bolts 25 18 -
air intake pipe retaining bolts 10 7 -
Power steering pump oil supply line bolt 25 18 -
Power steering pump retaining bolts 25 18 -
Thermostat housing retaining bolt 25 18 -
Power Steering - Power Steering
COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) installation shown, LHD (left-hand drive) installation similar.

1 - Tie-rod
2 - Servotronic valve
3 - Power steering pump
4 - Power steering fluid reservoir
5 - Steering gear
6 - Power steering fluid cooler and hoses
INTRODUCTION
The power steering system comprises a ZF manufactured rack and pinion Servotronic 2 steering gear, a power steering
pump, a fluid reservoir, a fluid cooler and fluid hoses. The steering gear is an end take-off rack and pinion power assisted
unit with the addition of road speed proportional ZF Servotronic 2 assistance.
The steering rack is connected to the front wheel knuckles by adjustable tie-rods. The tie-rods allow for adjustment to
centralize the steering wheel and also adjust the toe setting of the front wheel geometry.
The steering gear has a variable ratio rack. This provides conventional response when the steering is in the center, straight
ahead position, but provides more direct and faster steering as the turning angle increases. The variable ratio provides
precise and rapid steering response at high speeds and provides optimized steering of the vehicle when maneuvering into
parking spaces, turning in tight areas and when cornering in extreme conditions.
Fluid is supplied to the steering gear by a fixed displacement vane pump, belt driven from the crankshaft pulley. The pump is
mounted on the LH (left-hand) side of the engine, above the A/C (air conditioning)compressor.
A fluid reservoir is positioned at the front LH side of the engine compartment, forward of the front suspension housing. A
fluid cooler is located in front of the engine cooling radiator.
Servotronic 2 adds electronic control and speed sensitive steering to the steering gear. The Servotronic 2 feature provides
easy and comfortable steering operation when parking, improved 'road feel' at increased road speeds and adds an
integrated, positive center feel feature which optimizes steering wheel torque during high speed driving.
The Servotronic 2 system is controlled by software which is incorporated into the instrument cluster. The software responds
to road speed signals and controls the power assistance via a transducer valve located on the steering gear valve housing.
STEERING GEAR

1 - Input shaft
2 - Valve unit
3 - Servotronic valve
4 - Pressure/Return pipes
5 - Tie-rod
6 - Locknut
7 - Tie-rod end
8 - Locknut
9 - Steering gear boots
10 - Mounting bolts and washers
11 - Pinion housing
12 - Pressure/Return connection from/to pump
The steering gear is located at the rear of the engine and attached to the front sub-frame. The gear is secured to the sub-
frame with three bolts and washers which screw into threaded tubes which are integral with the sub-frame.
The steering gear comprises an aluminum, cast, valve housing which contains the hydraulic valve unit and Servotronic valve.
The mechanical steering rack and the hydraulic actuator are located in a steel cylinder which is attached to the cast valve
housing.
The steering gear uses a rack with an integrated piston which is guided on plain bearings within the cylinder and the valve
housing. The pinion, which is attached to the valve unit, runs in bearings and meshes with the rack teeth. The rack is
pressed against the pinion by a spring loaded yoke which ensures that the teeth mesh with the minimum of play. The pinion
is connected to the valve unit via a torsion bar. The rotary motion of the steering wheel is converted into linear movement of
the rack by the rack and pinion mechanism and is initiated by the valve unit. This movement is transferred into movement of
the road wheels by adjustable tie-rods.
The teeth angles at the center of the rack vary from those at the end sections. It is this variation in teeth angles which
provides the variable ratio.
The piston of the hydraulic actuator is located on the rack bar. Each side of the piston is connected to fluid pressure or fluid
return via external metal pipes which are connected to the valve unit.
Each end of the rack bar has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie-rod. The external ends of the gear are
sealed with boots which prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The tie-rod has a long threaded area which allows for the
fitment of the tie-rod end. The thread allows for the adjustment of the steering toe. When the correct toe setting is achieved,
a locknut is tightened against the tie-rod end preventing inadvertent movement.
The gear has a central hole machined along most of its length. The hole allows the air in the boots to be balanced when the
steering is turned. The boots are serviceable items and are retained on the gear housing and the tie-rod with clips.
Valve Unit

1 - Pressure/return to/from steering gear
2 - Return fluid chamber
3 - Cut-off valve
4 - Radial groove
5 - Servotronic transducer valve
6 - Fluid feed radial groove
7 - Radial groove
8 - Orifice
9 - Balls
10 - Compression spring
11 - Torsion bar
12 - Valve rotor
13 - Reaction piston
14 - Reaction chamber
15 - Centering piece
16 - Return to reservoir
17 - Pressure supply from pump
18 - Pinion
19 - Steering gear rack bar
20 - Valve sleeve
The valve unit is an integral part of the steering gear. The principle function of the valve unit is to provide power assistance
(i.e. when parking) to optimize the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
The pinion housing of the valve is an integral part of the main steering gear casting. The pinion housing has four machined
ports which provide connections for pressure feed from the power steering pump, return fluid to the reservoir and pressure
feeds to each side of the cylinder piston.
The valve unit comprises an outer sleeve, an input shaft, a torsion bar and a pinion shaft. The valve unit is co-axial with the
pinion shaft which is connected to the steering column via the input shaft. The valve unit components are located in the
steering gear pinion housing which is sealed with a cap.
The outer sleeve is located in the main bore of the pinion housing. Three annular grooves are machined on its outer
diameter. PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) rings are located between the grooves and seal against the bore of the pinion
housing. Holes are drilled radially in each annular groove through the wall of the sleeve. The bore of the outer sleeve is
machined to accept the input shaft. Six equally spaced slots are machined in the bore of the sleeve. The ends of the slots are
closed and do not continue to the end of the outer sleeve. The radial holes in the outer sleeve are drilled into each slot.
The input shaft has two machined flats at its outer end which allow for the attachment of the steering column intermediate
shaft yoke. The flats ensure that the intermediate shaft is fitted in the correct position. The inner end of the input shaft
forms a dog-tooth which mates with a slot in the pinion shaft. The fit of the dog-tooth in the slot allows a small amount of
relative rotation between the input shaft and the pinion shaft before the dog-tooth contacts the wall of the slot. This ensures
that, if the power assistance fails, the steering can be operated manually without over stressing the torsion bar. The central
portion of the input shaft has equally spaced longitudinal slots machined in its circumference. The slots are arranged
alternately around the input shaft.
The torsion bar is fitted inside the input shaft and is an interference fit in the pinion shaft. The torsion bar is connected to the
input shaft by a drive pin. The torsion bar is machined to a smaller diameter in its central section. The smaller diameter
allows the torsion bar to twist in response to torque applied from the steering wheel in relation to the grip of the tires on the
road surface.
The pinion shaft has machined teeth on its central diameter which mate with teeth on the steering gear rack. A slot,
machined in the upper end of the pinion shaft mates with the dog-tooth on the input shaft. The pinion shaft locates in the
pinion housing and rotates on ball and roller bearings.
Servotronic Valve
The Servotronic transducer valve is located in a port in the side of the steering gear valve housing. The valve is sealed in the
housing with an O-ring seal and is secured with two long screws into threaded holes in the housing. The Servotronic valve is
a transducer controlled valve which responds to control signals supplied from Servotronic software in the instrument cluster.
The Servotronic valve determines the hydraulic reaction at the steering gear rotary valve and controls the input torque
required to turn the steering wheel. The Servotronic system allows the steering to be turned with the optimum effort when
the vehicle is stationary or manoeuvered at slow speed. The hydraulic reaction changes proportional to the vehicle speed,
with the required steering effort increasing as the vehicle moves faster. At high speeds, the Servotronic system provides the
driver with a good feedback through the steering providing precise steering and improved stability.
The instrument cluster receives road speed signals from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module and calculates the correct
controlling signal for the Servotronic valve. The Servotronic software within the instrument cluster has a diagnostic capability
which allows a Jaguar approved diagnostic system to check the tune of the steering and retrieve fault codes relating to the
Servotronic valve. Two fault codes are stored relating to the valve for positive connection short to ground or battery and
negative connection short to ground or battery.
The Servotronic software within the instrument cluster also contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the
car configuration file depending on the vehicle model and tire fitment.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only a default
level of assistance will be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored in the instrument cluster. No warning lamps
are illuminated and the driver may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
POWER STEERING PUMP

1 - Pulley
2 - Pump body
3 - High pressure outlet port (to steering gear)
4 - Low pressure suction port (from reservoir)
The power steering pump is a positive displacement, vane type pump which supplies a constant fluid flow to the steering
gear valve unit. The power steering pump is driven by a Poly Vee belt from the crankshaft pulley.
The pump has an internal pressure relief valve and a flow control valve. The pressure relief valve limits the maximum
pressure supplied to the steering gear to 115 bar (1668 lbf/in2) ± 4 bar (58 lbf/in2). The flow control valve limits the
maximum flow to 8.5 l/min (2.25 US galls/min) ± 0.50 l/min (0.13 US galls/min) regardless of engine speed. The pump has
a displacement of 11 cm3/rev (0.67 in3/rev).
A shaft runs longitudinally through the pump. One end of the shaft is fitted with a drive pulley, which is secured by three
bolts. The opposite end of the shaft is closed by a cover. The shaft runs in bearings located in the body and oil seals at each
end of the shaft prevent leakage of hydraulic fluid. The pump contains ten vanes which rotate within a cam ring and are
driven by the shaft. As the vanes rotate, the cam ring causes the space between the vanes to increase. This causes a
depression between the vanes and fluid is drawn from the reservoir via the suction hose into the space between the vanes.
As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid, trapping the fluid between the vanes.
The cam ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially compresses and pressurizes the hydraulic
fluid trapped between them.
Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurized fluid passes
from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to the steering gear.
The pressurized fluid is subject to control by the flow control and pressure relief valve. The flow control valve maintains a
constant flow of fluid supplied to the steering gear irrespective of engine speed variations. The pressure relief valve limits the
maximum pressure on the output side of the pump. A metering orifice is included in the discharge port of the pump. If the
pressure in the orifice reaches a predetermined level, a spring loaded ball in the center of the flow control valve is lifted from
its seat and allows pressurized fluid to recirculate within the pump.
The pressure relief valve will operate if the discharge from the pump is restricted, i.e. steering held on full lock. If the output
from the pump is blocked, all output is recirculated through the pump. In this condition, as no fresh fluid is drawn into the
pump from the reservoir, the fluid temperature inside the pump will increase rapidly. Consequentially, periods of operation of
the steering gear on full lock should be kept to a minimum to prevent overheating of the pump and the fluid within it.
RESERVOIR

1 - Mounting bolt (2 off)
2 - Cap
3 - Maximum oil level
4 - Minimum oil level
5 - Bracket
6 - Feed to pump
7 - Return from cooler
The reservoir is located in the engine compartment, forward of the LH suspension turret. A bracket attached to the reservoir
is bolted via two rubber mounts, to two brackets on the front body crossmember.
The reservoir is a plastic molding with an integral 100 micron, non-serviceable filter. Two molded ports at the base of the
reservoir provide for attachment of the fluid supply hose to the power steering pump and fluid return hose from the fluid
cooler.
The reservoir is fitted with a removable cap which is screwed into the reservoir body. The cap has a dip stick with different
diameters which denote the minimum and maximum fluid levels.
The reservoir has a fluid capacity to the maximum level of 400 cm3 (0.85 US pints).
HOSES AND FLUID COOLER
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) installation shown, RHD installation similar.

1 - Cooling module (reference)
2 - Clip
3 - Power steering fluid cooler
4 - Restrictor
5 - Reservoir suction pipe
6 - Reservoir return pipe
7 - Steering gear pressure and return pipes
8 - Power steering pump pressure pipe
Hoses
A mixture of metal pipes and rubber hoses are used in the power steering system. The high pressure pipe from the pump
and the return pipe to the cooler from the steering gear are attached to one mounting plate. The pipe connections are sealed
with O-ring seals and the plate is secured with a bolt screwed into the steering gear.
The pump high pressure pipe is attached to the pump with a special elbow, banjo bolt and washers.
A restrictor is installed in the return line from the fluid cooler to the reservoir. The restrictor optimizes power steering system
performance in terms of hydraulic NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) (water-hammer, grunt, shudder etc.) and vehicle
dynamics (steering feel/damping).
Fluid Cooler
The fluid cooler is located in the return circuit from the steering gear to the reservoir. The cooler is an aluminum fin and tube
design. Cool air entering the front of the vehicle passes over the cooler and flows through the fins. The fins act as heat
exchangers, conducting heat from the fluid as it passes through the tube.
The cooler is located near the top of the cooling pack.
The following hydraulic circuits show power steering operation and fluid flow for the steering in a straight ahead, neutral
position and when turning right. The circuit diagram for turning left is similar to that shown for turning right.
Power Steering in Neutral Position
NOTE: Circuit shows steering rotary valve in neutral position with the vehicle not moving.

1 - Return fluid control groove
2 - Radial groove
3 - Feed fluid control groove
4 - Radial groove
5 - Axial groove
6 - Feed fluid control edge
7 - Feed fluid radial groove
8 - Return fluid control edge
10 - Cut-off valve
11 - Radial groove
-
13 Feed fluid radial groove
14 - Radial groove
15 - Orifice
16 - Balls
19 - Torsion bar
20 - Valve rotor
24 - Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 - Inner track rod
27 - Pinion
28 - Valve sleeve
29 - Steering gear
30 - Steering gear housing
31 - Power assist cylinder - right
32 - Piston
33 - Power assist cylinder - left
When the engine is started, the power steering pump draws fluid from the reservoir down the low pressure suction line. The
fluid passes through the pump and is delivered at pressure, via a hose, to the steering rack valve unit.
The pressurized fluid flows through a connecting bore in the valve and, via the feed fluid radial groove and the transverse
bores in the valve sleeve, passes to the feed fluid control groove of the valve rotor.
In the neutral (straight ahead) position, the fluid passes over the open feed fluid control edges to all valve sleeve axial
grooves. The fluid then passes through return fluid control edges and the return fluid grooves of the valve rotor, back to the
reservoir passes via the fluid cooler.
Simultaneously, the radial grooves of the valve and their associated pipes provide a connection the left and right power assist
cylinders.
Power Steering in Right Turn Position
NOTE: Circuit shows steering rotary valve in right turn position, at high vehicle speed and with rapid steering corrections. The
Servotronic transducer valve is fully open and the maximum hydraulic reaction is limited by the cut-off valve.
1 - Return fluid control groove
2 - Radial groove
3 - Feed fluid control groove
4 - Radial groove
5 - Axial groove
6 - Feed fluid control edge
8 - Return fluid control edge
10 - Cut-off valve
11 - Radial groove
14 - Radial groove
15 - Orifice
16 - Balls
19 - Torsion bar
20 - Valve rotor
24 - Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 - Inner track rod
27 - Pinion
28 - Valve sleeve
-
29 Steering gear
30 - Steering gear housing
31 - Power assist cylinder - right
32 - Piston
33 - Power assist cylinder - left
When the steering wheel is turned to the right, the steering rack and piston moves to the left in the piston bore. The valve
rotor is rotated to the right (clockwise) and pressurized fluid is directed over the further opened feed fluid control edges and
to the associated axial grooves, the radial groove and via an external pipe to the left power assist cylinder chamber. The
pressure applied to the piston from the left power assist cylinder chamber provides the hydraulic assistance.
An adaptable pressure build-up is achieved by the partially or fully closed feed fluid control edges restricting or preventing a
connection between the fluid pressure inlet and the other axial grooves connected to the radial groove.
Simultaneously, the fluid pressure outlet to the pressurized axial grooves are restricted or partially restricted by the closing
return fluid control edges. The fluid displaced by the piston from the right power assist cylinder chamber, flows through an
external pipe to the radial grooves. From there the fluid passes to the associated axial grooves and on to the return fluid
control grooves, via the further opened return fluid control edges.
The return flow of fluid to the reservoir passes via interconnecting bores which lead to the return fluid chamber. When the
steering wheel is turned to the left the operating sequence is as above but the pressure is applied to the opposite side of the
piston.
Servotronic Operation
The Servotronic software contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the car configuration file depending on
the vehicle mode and tire fitment.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only normal
power steering wheel be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored, but no warning lamps are illuminated and the
driver may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
When the vehicle is manoeuver into and out of a parking space (or other similar manoeuver), the Servotronic software uses
road speed data from the ABS module to determine the vehicle speed, which in this case will be slow or stationary. The
Servotronic software analyses the signals and outputs an appropriate control current to the Servotronic transducer valve. The
Servotronic valve closes and prevents fluid flowing from the feed fluid radial groove to the reaction chamber. An orifice also
ensures that there is return pressure in the reaction chamber. This condition eliminates any 'reaction' ensuring that the
steering is very light to operate, reducing the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
As the vehicle is driven and the road speed increases, the Servotronic software analyses the road speed signals from the ABS
module and reduces the amount of control current supplied to the Servotronic valve which increases the reaction pressure.
This modifies the input torque applied through the steering wheel and provides the driver with an improved 'road feel'
allowing precise steering and directional stability.
Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Cooler Vehicles Without:
Supercharger
Removal

3. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling (211-00 Steering
4.
5.
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7.
8.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Cooler Vehicles With:
Supercharger
Removal

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Installation

Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Removal


3. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling (211-00 Steering System -
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
Installation

Power Steering - Power Steering Pump
Removal

4. Torque: 25 Nm
5. NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2 turns.
Torque: 25 Nm
6.
7.
8.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10. Torque: 25 Nm
11. Torque: 25 Nm
12. Torque: 25 Nm
13. Torque: 10 Nm
14.
16.
Installation

Power Steering - Steering Gear
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the clockspring
and steering wheel switches may occur.
NOTE: Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.


stands.

and Installation).
4. NOTE: RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
5.
6.
7. CAUTION: Discard the bolt.
Torque: 35 Nm
8.
9. CAUTIONS:

Torque: 15 Nm
10. Torque: 100 Nm
Installation

2. Refer to: Power Steering System Bleeding (211-00 Steering
3. Refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System -
Power Steering - Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Removal
All vehicles

stands.

4. Torque: 11 Nm
5. NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2 turns.
Torque: 25 Nm
6.
7.

9. Torque: 10 Nm
10.
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. Torque: 25 Nm
13. WARNING: Fluid loss is unavoidable, use

absorbent cloth or a container to collect the fluid.
CAUTION: Always plug any open connections

NOTE: Discard the sealing washers.
Torque: 28 Nm
14. Raise the vehicle.
Left-hand drive vehicles

15.
Torque: 35 Nm
17. Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
18. Torque: 63 Nm
19. CAUTION: Support the engine on a jack. The angle may

need to be adjusted during this procedure.
Support the engine with the lifting equipment.

20. Torque: 48 Nm

correct.
 Using a suitable wooden block, support the

engine on the subframe.
 Lower the transmission jack.
22. Torque: 25 Nm
23. Torque: 25 Nm
NOTE: RHD shown, LHD is similar.
Installation

Published: 03-Jun-2011
Power Steering - Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Removal
All vehicles

stands.

3.

4.
Right-hand drive vehicles
5.
Installation

Steering Linkage -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Tie rod end ball-joint to wheel knuckle - nut* 75 55 -
Tie rod end - locking nut* 55 40 -
* New nuts/bolts must be installed.
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage

REFER to: Steering System (211-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Steering Linkage - Steering Gear Boot
Removal


2. Remove the tie-rod end. For additional information, refer to:
(211-03 Steering Linkage)
Tie Rod End (Removal and Installation),
Tie Rod End (Removal and Installation).
Remove the locknut.

4. NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to
dismantling.
Remove the steering gear boot.

Installation
1. Install the steering gear boot.
Install the locknut.

3. Install the tie-rod end. For additional information, refer to:
(211-03 Steering Linkage)
Tie Rod End (Removal and Installation),
Tie Rod End (Removal and Installation).
check and adjust the wheel alignment.
For additional information, refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-
00 Suspension System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Steering Linkage - Tie Rod End
Removal


2. NOTE: RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
Torque: 55 Nm
3. CAUTION: This step is to allow correct tool alignment to

the tie rod end.
Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03

Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
(206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the ball joint ball

does not rotate.
NOTE: RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
Torque: 133 Nm

NOTE: RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.

Installation

2. Refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension System -
Steering Column -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Clock spring to steering column - bolt 7 5 62
Lower steering column, bearing-carrier to body - bolt 9 7 80
Lower steering column, bearing to bearing carrier - bolt 9 7 80
Lower steering column to steering gear - universal-joint pinch bolt* 30 22 -
Steering column to vehicle body - nuts 24 18 -
Steering column to lower steering column - universal-joint pinch bolt* 30 22 -
Steering wheel to steering column - bolt 62 46 -
* New nuts/bolts must be installed.
Steering Column - Steering Column
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Steering wheel
2 - Gear change paddle switch (if fitted)
3 - Column adjust switch
4 - Lower shroud
5 - Rake adjustment housing
6 - Reach adjustment housing
7 - Column adjustment motor
8 - Lower column - upper collapse shaft
9 - Bulkhead bearing assembly
10 - Lower column - lower collapse shaft
11 - Electric steering column lock (all except NAS (North American specification)
12 - Column mounting plate
13 - Upper shroud
INTRODUCTION
The steering column comprises the upper column assembly, the lower column assembly and the steering wheel. The three
components are positively connected together to pass driver rotary input from the steering wheel to a linear output of the
steering gear.
The upper column assembly contains electrical adjustment for steering wheel reach and rake and also provides the location
for the ignition switch, the electric steering column lock mechanism and the steering angle sensor.
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam. Crash load absorption is provided by a 'peeling tube'
mechanism.
Column adjustment is provided by a single motor for both reach and rake adjustment. Operation of the column adjustment is
controlled by a four way joystick type switch located in the column lower shroud. Column adjustment is an integral part of
the driver position memory system and also incorporates an entry/exit mode to allow the driver additional room to enter and
exit the vehicle.
On all except NAS vehicles, an electric steering column lock is positioned on the column assembly. Where fitted, the electric
steering column lock is an integral function of the active anti-theft system.
Two plastic shrouds are fitted to the upper column assembly. The lower shroud is fitted with an energy absorbing foam pad
to minimize leg injury in the event of an accident.
The lower column assembly comprises two splined shafts connected by a universal joint in the center. The splines of the
upper shaft locate in a flexible coupling which in turn is located in the yoke on the lower shaft of the upper column assembly.
The splines allow the shaft to collapse in the event of an accident. The flexible coupling controls axial and torsional
movements and also assists with noise and vibration damping.
A bulkhead mounted bearing is located on the upper shaft and supports the lower column as it passes from the passenger
compartment to the engine compartment.
The splines on the lower shaft locate in a universal joint which in turn is connected to the steering gear input shaft. The
lower column assembly incorporates a crash collapse mechanism in the form of a 'tube-in-tube' design.
The steering wheel locates on a splined shaft in the upper column assembly and is secured with a bolt. The steering wheel
houses the driver's airbag and switches for the audio system, gear change (if fitted) and speed control. A clockspring is used
to connect to the vehicle harness.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus.

1 - Battery
2 - BJB (battery junction box) (175 A megafuse x 2)
5 - Electric steering column lock (all except NAS vehicles)
6 - High speed CAN connection to other systems
7 - Rake adjustment solenoid and potentiometer
8 - Reach adjustment solenoid and potentiometer
9 - Steering column adjustment motor
11 - Steering column adjustment switch

REFER to: Steering System (211-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Special Tool(s)
Clockspring locking tool
211-326
Driver air bag module remover
501-106
Removal
3. Remove the instrument panel lower trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Lower
Trim Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and
Installation).
4. Remove the steering column lower cowl.
 If installed, disconnect the steering column
and foot pedal control switch electrical
connector.
5. CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel

with the steering column lower shaft disconnected
as damage to the clockspring and steering wheel
switches may occur.
Check the road wheels are in the straight ahead

position, then remove the steering column
universal joint upper clamp bolt.
6. Release the steering column.
 Loosen but do not remove the 4 nuts.
7. Remove the steering column upper cowl.

8. Disconnect the upper steering column wiring
harness connections.
 Release the 3 wiring harness clips.
9. Disconnect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.

10. Remove the steering column.

Using the special tool, remove the driver air bag

module.
 Rotate the steering wheel for access to
slots.
Remove the steering wheel.

 Loosen, but do not fully remove the bolt.
 Release the steering wheel from the spline.
 Remove the bolt.
 Release the electrical harness.
13. CAUTIONS:
Failing to install the clockspring special tool, may

result in damage to vehicle.
Do not dismantle the clockspring, it has no

serviceable parts and must be replaced as a complete
assembly.
Install the special tool to the clockspring.

14. Remove the clockspring.
Remove the steering angle sensor.

 Remove the reluctor ring.
Installation
1. Install the steering angle sensor.
 Install the reluctor ring.
 Install the bolts and tighten to 3 Nm (2.2 lb.ft).
2. Install the clockspring.

 Install the Torx bolts and tighten to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).

Install the steering wheel.

 Check the clockspring is aligned.
 Position the electrical harness.
 Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).
5. Install the driver air bag module.

6. Install the steering column.

 Install the 4 nuts, do not tighten at this time.
7. Connect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.

 Secure the 3 clips.
8. Connect the steering harness electrical connectors

9. Install the steering column upper cowl.

 Install the screws.
10. Secure the steering column.

11. Connect the steering column lower shaft to the steering column.
 Align the shafts.
12. Install the steering column lower cowl.
 If installed, connect the steering column and foot pedal
switch electrical connector.
 Secure in the clips.
13. Install the instrument panel lower trim panel.

Installation).


16. Loosen the upper bolt from the steering column lower universal
joint.
 Allow the steering column lower universal joint to settle.
17. Connect WDS and configure the steering angle sensor.

Steering Column - Steering Column Lower Shaft
Removal
1. Turn the steering wheel to the straight ahead position.


3. Remove the steering column lower universal joint
assembly for access.
 Remove and discard the 2 bolts.
4. Remove the instrument panel lower trim panel.

Installation).
5. Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the steering
column.
6. Remove the steering column lower shaft.

 Release the bearing carrier.
 Discard the gasket.

Remove the bearing carrier.

Installation
1. Install the bearing carrier.

 Install a new gasket.
2. Install the steering column lower shaft.

 Install a new gasket.
3. Connect the steering column lower shaft to the steering column.
4. Raise the vehicle.

5. Install the steering column lower universal joint assembly.
 Tighten the new bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
6. Install the instrument panel lower trim panel.

Installation).
Steering Column - Steering Wheel
Special Tool(s)
211-326
Removal
3. Remove the driver air bag module.
For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-
20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).

5. CAUTIONS:
Failing to install the clockspring special tool, may

result in damage to vehicle.
Do not dismantle the clockspring, it has no

serviceable parts and must be replaced as a complete
assembly.
Do not allow the clockspring to unwind.
Install the special tool to the clockspring.

Remove the upshift and downshift paddle switches.

 Release the assembly.
 Repeat the procedure and remove the
opposite hand.
7. Remove the steering wheel switch assembly.
 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
 Repeat the procedure and remove the
opposite hand.
8. Remove the air bag housing.

9. Remove the air bag ground cable.

 Remove the Torx screw.
Installation
1. Install the air bag ground cable.
 Install the Torx screw.
2. Install the air bag housing.

 Secure the electrical harness.
 Install the Torx bolts and tighten to 6 Nm
(4 lb.ft).
3. Install the steering wheel switch assembly.

 Connect and secure the electrical
connectors.
 Repeat the above procedure on the
opposite hand.
4. Install the upshift and downshift paddle switches.

 Connect and secure the electrical
connector.
 Repeat the above procedure on the
opposite hand.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the arrow on the

cassette is centered and pointing vertically prior to
the steering wheel installation. On removal of the
special tool keep the clockspring cables taught to
prevent the cassette moving from the set position.
Do not allow the clockspring to unwind. Failure to
component.
Remove the special tool.
6. CAUTION: Check the alignment arrow is still

in the vertical position with the wheels straight
ahead to make sure that the directional indicator
cancellation is central.
Install the steering wheel.

7. Install the driver air bag module.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-
Steering Column - Clockspring
Special Tool(s)
211-326
Removal
WARNINGS:
Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when
handling an air bag module.
Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk
of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant
combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this
Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment, which may result
in personal injury. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers must be replaced, not repainted.
Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for
deformation. If damaged, replace the sensor whether or not the air bag is deployed.
To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before
repairing or replacing any air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components. To deplete the backup power
supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Make sure the wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in

Procedures).
System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General
3. For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that special tool 211-326 is

installed to the clockspring.

straight ahead position, failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.

5. CAUTION: Failing to install the special tool to

the clockspring may result in damage to the
vehicle.
6.
7.
TORQUE: 6 Nm
9. CAUTION: Make sure no damage is occured

to the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this


12.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that special tool 211-326 is

installed to the clockspring.
Make sure that the arrow on the cassette is

centered and pointing vertically (make sure that
the steering wheel has remained in the 12
o'clock position and that it has not been
turned by +/- 360 degrees) prior to the
steering wheel installation. On removal of the
special tool, keep the clockspring cables taught to
prevent the cassette moving from the set position.
NOTE: Make sure that the road wheels are in the

straight ahead position, failure to follow this

Steering Column Switches -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Gearshift paddle switch 2.5 - 22
Speed and audio control switch 3.5 - 31
Steering column lock actuator 9 7 80
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches
For a detailed description of the steering column switches, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
 Switches  Fuse(s)
 Steering column lock  Electrical connector(s)
 Wiring Harness
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
into account.

B100D51 Column lock  Not programmed Check ignition, power and ground supplies to
authorisation steering column lock and instrument cluster. Re-
synchronise ID by re-configuring the steering
column lock as a new module
B100D62 Column lock  CAN fault Check CAN network between steering column lock
authorisation -  Steering column lock fault and instrument cluster. Check power and ground
signal compare  Instrument cluster fault supplies to steering column lock and instrument
failure  Incorrect module installed cluster. Confirm the correct modules are installed.
(Steering column Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring the steering
lock/Instrument cluster) column lock as new. Check CAN network for
 Target ID synchronisation interference/EMC related issues
error following re-
programming
 Noise/EMC related error
B100D64 Column lock  CAN fault Check CAN network to steering column lock. Check
authorisation -  Steering column lock fault power and ground supplies to steering column lock
signal plausibility  Instrument cluster fault and instrument cluster
failure
B100D87 Column lock  CAN fault Check CAN network between steering column lock
authorisation -  Steering column lock fault and instrument cluster. Check power and ground
missing message  Instrument cluster fault supplies to steering column lock and instrument
 Low voltage at steering cluster
column lock < 8V
U000188 High speed CAN  Vehicle CAN bus off condition Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
communication bus DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U030000 Internal control  Invalid configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
module software message is received approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and
incompatibility retest. If the DTC is still logged suspect the steering
column lock, refer to the new module installation
U300049 Control Module  Internal electronic failure Install a new steering column lock, refer to the new
module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U300087 Control Module  Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check steering column
lock for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Check
CAN network integrity using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system
U300281 Vehicle  Vehicle/component mis- Install original module, check for DTCs and refer to
Identification match. Corrupt VIN data relevant DTC Index
Number (VIN) being transmitted, module
previously installed to other
vehicle
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Lock Actuator
Special Tool(s)
5 point security torx bit
418-535
Removal
1. Remove the steering column.
For additional information, refer to Section 211-04 Steering
Column.
2. Remove the steering column lock actuator.
 Using the special tool, remove the steering
column lock actuator retaining bolts.
Installation
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Removal
connector.

3. Remove the steering column multifunction switch.

 Depress the 2 clips.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the electrical harness is not trapped

during the installation.

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Removal
For additional information, refer to: General Service Information
(100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
3. Remove the instrument panel, lower trim panel.
Installation).
connector.

6. Remove the steering column multifunction switch.
Installation
1. Install the multifunction switch.
 Align the lugs and secure the clips.
2. Install the steering column upper cowl.

3. Install the steering column lower cowl.

 If installed, connect the steering column and foot pedal
switch electrical connector.
4. Install the instrument panel, lower trim panel.

Installation).
Engine System - General Information - Engine
Special Tool(s)
Oil pressure testing adaptor, 303-1451
Oil pressure testing gauge, 303-871
For a detailed description of the 5.0L engine, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual.
REFER to: Engine (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system.

Visual Inspection
 Coolant leaks  Fuses
 Oil leaks  Loose or corroded electrical connectors
 Leaks in the fuel system  Harnesses
 Visibly damaged or worn parts  Sensors
 Loose or missing fixings
Symptom Chart
NOTE: If an engine is suspect, when the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty refer to the Warranty Policy
and Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new engine.
NOTE: Due to the possibility of loose carbon, that has become trapped between the valve face and seat, effecting the
pressure readings, when carrying out a compression test and some cylinders are found to have low pressures, install
the spark plugs, road test the vehicle and re-test the suspect cylinders. If the correct pressures are restored, no further
action is required.
Symptom Action
All engine related issues  Check ECM for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to DTC Index.
Difficult to start hot and  Carry out general engine checks:
cold  Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
 Valve clearances
 Spark plug condition and color
Poor idle  Ensure the air intake system is free from leaks
 Carry out general engine checks:
 Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
 Check for collapsed catalytic converter/blocked exhaust system
 Check long and short term fuel trim datalogger signals
 Readings up to 10%: may be considered as acceptable if the readings are equal
bank to bank
 Positive readings of between 10-20%: check for air leaks in air intake system
 Negative readings of between 10-20%: check for over fuelling e.g. leaking injectors,
high fuel pressure
 Readings above 20%: check for DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
 Carry out a vacuum gauge check. Refer to component tests in this section
Insufficient  Ensure the air intake system is free from leaks
power/Insufficient  Carry out general engine checks:
compression  Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
 Check for collapsed catalytic converter/blocked exhaust system
 Check long and short term fuel trim datalogger signals
 Readings up to 10%: may be considered as acceptable if the readings are equal
bank to bank
 Positive readings of between 10-20%: check for air leaks in air intake system
 Negative readings of between 10-20%: check for over fuelling e.g. leaking injectors,
high fuel pressure
 Readings above 20%: check for DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
 Carry out a vacuum gauge check. Refer to component tests in this section
Oil consumption  Carry out oil leak check followed by an oil consumption test. Refer to the component
tests in this section
 If oil consumption is excessive:
 Check the integrity of the engine breather system
 Carry out general engine checks:
 Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
Noise  Refer to the Special Service Messages on the Electronic Product Quality Report
(EPQR) system for sound files. If the symptom does NOT compare to any of the
sound files, contact Dealer Technical Support (DTS)
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section
303-14. REFER to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).
Component Tests
Engine Oil Leaks
NOTE: Before installing new gaskets or oil seals, make sure that the fault is clearly established.
If the oil leak cannot be identified clearly by a visual inspection, carry out an Ultraviolet test:
Fluorescent Oil Additive Method
1. Clean the engine with a suitable cleaning fluid (brake cleaner).
2. Drain the engine oil and refill with recommended oil, premixed with Diesel Engine Oil Dye or equivalent. Use a
minimum 14.8 ml (0.5 ounce) to a maximum 29.6 ml (1 ounce) of fluorescent additive to all engines. If oil is not
premixed, fluorescent additive must first be added to the crankcase.
3. Run engine for 15 minutes. Stop the engine and inspect all seal and gasket areas for leaks using a 12 Volt
Master UV Diagnostic Inspection Kit or equivalent. A clear bright yellow or orange area will identify leak. For
extremely small leaks, several hours may be required for the leak to appear.
4. As necessary, pressurize the main oil gallery system to locate leaks due to incorrectly sealed, loose or cocked
plugs. If the flywheel bolts leak oil, look for sealer on the threads.
5. Repair all leaks as necessary.
Compression Test
General Remarks
NOTE: Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components may cause the Engine Control Module (ECM) to log
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). After the measurements have been carried out, DTCs should be cleared from memory
by connecting to the Manufacturer Approved Diagnostic System.
NOTE: Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this can be adjusted).
The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at operating temperature.
Check the Compression Pressure
WARNING: Move gear selector lever to 'P' position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the fuel pump relay.
2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds then stall.
3. Remove the spark plugs.
4. Install the compression tester.
5. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter
switch, crank the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes.
7. Install the removed components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening torques.
8. Clear all DTCs from the ECM.
Interpretation of the Results
NOTE: Due to the possibility of loose carbon that has become trapped between the valve face and seat effecting the
pressure readings, when carrying out a compression test and cylinders are found to have low pressures, install the
spark plugs, road test the vehicle and re-test the suspect cylinders. If the correct pressures are restored, no further
action is required.
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of
the highest reading.
If the cylinder pressures are found to be low, carry out a leakdown test to determine the location of the fault (if any
leakback can be heard through the engine breather system suspect the piston rings, if any leakback can be heard
through the inlet system suspect the inlet valve or seat, if any leakback can be heard through the exhaust manifold
suspect the exhaust valve or seat. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other are both too low then it is
very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through. This can also be recognized by traces of
engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil).
Oil Consumption Test
The amount of oil an engine uses will vary with the way the vehicle is driven in addition to normal engine-to-engine
variation. This is especially true during the first 16,100 km (10,000 miles) when a new engine is being broken in or until
certain internal components become conditioned. Vehicles used in heavy-duty operation may use more oil. The
following are examples of heavy-duty operation:
 Trailer towing applications

 Severe loading applications
 Sustained high speed operation
www.JagDocs.com
Engines need oil to lubricate the following internal components:
 Cylinder block cylinder walls

 Pistons and piston rings
 Intake and exhaust valve stems
 Intake and exhaust valve guides
 All internal engine components
When the pistons move downward, a thin film of oil is left on the cylinder walls. As the vehicle is operated, some oil is
also drawn into the combustion chambers past the intake and exhaust valve stem seals and burned.
The following are examples of conditions that can affect oil consumption rates:
 Engine size
 Operator driving habits
 Ambient temperatures
 Quality and viscosity of oil
 Engine is being run in an overfilled condition (check the oil level at least five minutes after a hot shutdown with
the vehicle parked on a level surface. The oil level should not be above the top of the cross-hatched area and
the letter "F" in FULL).
Operation under varying conditions can frequently be misleading. A vehicle that has been run for several thousand
miles on short trips or in below-freezing ambient temperatures may have consumed a "normal" amount of oil. However,
when checking the engine oil level, it may measure up to the full mark on the oil level indicator due to dilution
(condensation and fuel) in the engine crankcase. The vehicle then might be driven at high speeds on the highway where
the condensation and fuel boil off. The next time the engine oil is checked it may appear that a liter of oil was used in
about 160 km (100 miles). Oil consumption rate is about one liter per 2,400 km (1,500 miles).
Make sure the selected engine oil meets Jaguar specification and the recommended API performance category "SG" and
SAE viscosity grade as shown in the vehicle Owner's Guide. It is also important that the engine oil is changed at the
intervals specified for the typical operating conditions.
The following diagnostic procedure is used to determine the source of excessive oil consumption.
NOTE: Oil use is normally greater during the first 16,100 km (10,000 miles) of service. As mileage increases, oil use
decreases. High speed driving, towing, high ambient temperature and other factors may result in greater oil use.
1. Define excessive consumption, such as the number of miles driven per liter of oil used. Also determine
customers driving habits, such as sustained high speed operation, towing, extended idle and other
considerations.
2. Verify that the engine has no external oil leaks as described under Engine Oil Leaks in this section.
3. Carry out an oil consumption test:

 Run the engine to normal operating temperature. Switch engine OFF and allow oil to drain back for at
least five minutes .
 With vehicle parked on level surface, check the engine oil level.
 If required, add engine oil to set level exactly to the FULL mark.
 Record the vehicle mileage.
 Instruct the customer to return for a level check after driving the vehicle as usual for 1,610 km (1000
miles).
 Check the oil level under the same conditions and at the same location as the initial check.
NOTE: If the oil consumption rate is unacceptable go to Step 4.
4. Check the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) system. Make sure the system is not plugged.
5. Check for plugged oil drain-back holes in the cylinder head and cylinder block.
6. If the condition still exists after carrying out the above tests go to step 9.
7. Carry out a cylinder compression test. Refer to the Compression Test procedure in this section. This can help
determine the source of oil consumption such as valves, piston rings or other areas.
8. Check valve guides for excessive guide clearance. Install new valve stem seals after verifying valve guide
clearance.
9. Worn or damaged internal engine components can cause excessive oil consumption. Small deposits of oil on the
tips of the spark plugs can be a clue to internal oil consumption.
Intake Manifold Vacuum Test
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature. Connect a vacuum gauge or equivalent to the intake manifold. Run
the engine at the specified idle speed.
The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) depending upon the engine condition and the altitude
at which the test is performed. Subtract 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8 m (1,000 feet)
of elevation above sea level.
The reading should be steady. As necessary, adjust the gauge damper control (where used) if the needle is fluttering
rapidly. Adjust damper until needle moves easily without excessive flutter.
Interpreting Vacuum Gauge Readings
A careful study of the vacuum gauge reading while the engine is idling will help pinpoint trouble areas. Always conduct
other appropriate tests before arriving at a final diagnostic decision. Vacuum gauge readings, although helpful, must be
interpreted carefully.
Most vacuum gauges have a normal band indicated on the gauge face.
The following are potential gauge readings. Some are normal; others should be investigated further.
1. NORMAL READING: Needle between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) and holding steady.
2. NORMAL READING DURING RAPID ACCELERATION: When the engine is rapidly accelerated, the needle will drop
to a low (not to zero) reading. When the throttle is suddenly released, the needle will snap back up to a higher
than normal figure.
3. NORMAL FOR HIGH-LIFT CAMSHAFT WITH LARGE OVERLAP: The needle will register as low as 51 kPa (15 in-Hg)
but will be relatively steady. Some oscillation is normal.
4. WORN RINGS OR DILUTED OIL: When the engine is accelerated, the needle drops to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg). Upon
deceleration, the needle runs slightly above 74 kPa (22 in-Hg).
5. STICKING VALVES: When the needle remains steady at a normal vacuum but occasionally flicks (sharp, fast
movement) down and back about 13 kPa (4 in-Hg), one or more valves may be sticking.
6. BURNED OR BENT VALVES: A regular, evenly-spaced, downscale flicking of the needle indicates one or more
burned or damaged valves. Insufficient hydraulic valve tappet or hydraulic lash adjuster clearance will also
cause this reaction.
7. POOR VALVE SEATING: A small but regular downscale flicking can mean one or more valves are not seating
correctly.
8. WORN VALVE GUIDES: When the needle oscillates over about a 13 kPa (4 in-Hg) range at idle speed, the valve
guides could be worn. As engine speed increases, the needle will become steady if guides are responsible.
9. WEAK VALVE SPRINGS: When the needle oscillation becomes more violent as engine RPM is increased, weak
valve springs are indicated. The reading at idle could be relatively steady.
10. LATE VALVE TIMING: A steady but low reading could be caused by late valve timing.
11. IGNITION TIMING RETARDED: Retarded ignition timing will produce a steady but somewhat low reading.
12. INSUFFICIENT SPARK PLUG GAP: When spark plugs are gapped too close, a regular, small pulsation of the
needle can occur.
13. INTAKE LEAK: A low, steady reading can be caused by an intake manifold or throttle body gasket leak.
14. BLOWN HEAD GASKET: A regular drop of fair magnitude can be caused by a blown head gasket or warped
cylinder head to cylinder block surface.
15. RESTRICTED EXHAUST SYSTEM: When the engine is first started and is idled, the reading may be normal, but as
the engine RPM is increased, the back pressure caused by a clogged muffler, kinked tail pipe or other concerns
will cause the needle to slowly drop to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg). The needle then may slowly rise. Excessive exhaust
clogging will cause the needle to drop to a low point even if the engine is only idling.
When vacuum leaks are indicated, search out and correct the cause. Excess air leaking into the system will upset the
fuel mixture and cause concerns such as rough idle, missing on acceleration or burned valves. If the leak exists in an
accessory such as the power brake booster, the unit will not function correctly. Always repair vacuum leaks.
Engine Oil Pressure Check
NOTE: Prior to checking the engine oil pressure, a road test of 6 miles (10 kilometres), must be carried out. Do not
attempt to attain engine normal operating temperature by allowing the engine to idle.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. Refer to section 414-00 - Charging System - General Information of the
workshop manual
2. WARNINGS:
The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
Wear protective gloves.
Remove the engine oil filter element

REFER to: Oil Filter Element (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
NOTE: Ensure the oil filter element is not contaminated during this procedure
3. Install the oil filter element into special tool (Oil filter adapter number 303-1451)
4. Install the special tool (Oil filter adapter number 303-1451) to the engine. Torque: 25 Nm
5. Install the special tool (Oil pressure testing gauge, 303-871) and tighten the union
6. Connect the battery ground cable
7. Refer to owner hand book, check and top-up the engine oil if required
8. Start and run the engine
9. Note the oil pressure readings with the engine running at idle and 3500 RPM
10. Turn off the engine
11. Disconnect the battery ground cable
12. Remove the special tools

1. Clean the components
13. Install the engine oil filter element

REFER to: Oil Filter Element (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
NOTE: Ensure the oil filter element is not contaminated during this procedure
14. Connect the battery ground cable
15. Refer to owner hand book, check and top-up the engine oil if required
Engine System - General Information - Bearing Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect bearings for the following defects.

1. Cratering - fatigue failure
2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating.
3. Imbedded dirt engine oil.
4. Scratching - dirty engine oil.
5. Base exposed - poor lubrication.
6. Both edges worn - journal damaged.
7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not
seated.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Bearing Journal
Clearance
General Procedures
1. NOTE: Make sure that the following stages are followed

exactly. The tappets or followers must be removed to
carry out this measurement.
NOTE: Make sure that the camshaft is to specification.
NOTE: The bearing caps and journals should be free

from engine oil and dirt.
Position on a length of plastigage on the bearing cap.

 Insert the camshaft, without lubrication, into
the cylinder head.
 Position a plastigage strip, which should be
equal to the width of the bearing cap, on the
bearing journal.
2. Install the camshaft bearing caps.
 Follow the relevant tightening sequence.
3. NOTE: Do not strike the bearing caps.
Remove the camshaft bearing caps.

 Follow the relevant loosening sequence.
4. Using the special tool, read off the measurement.

 Compare the width of plastigage with the plastigage
scale.
 The value that is read off is the bearing clearance.
 If the values are not to specification install a new
camshaft.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Bearing Journal
Diameter
General Procedures
1. Determine the diameter of the camshaft journals.

 Using a micrometer measure the diameter at
90 degrees intervals to determine if the
journals are out-of-round.
 Measure at two different points on the journal
to determine if there is any tapering.
 If the measurements are out of the specified
range, install a new camshaft.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. NOTE: Make sure that the camshaft is to specification.
Using the special tool, measure the end play.

 Slide the camshaft in both directions. Read
and note the maximum and minimum values
on the dial indicator gauge.
1. End play = maximum value minus
minimum value.
 If the measurement is out of specification,

install new components.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Lobe Lift
General Procedures
1. Measure the diameter (1) and diameter (2) with a vernier

caliper. The difference in measurements is the lobe lift.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Surface Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the active

area. Minor pitting is acceptable outside the active area.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Cleaning
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or

damage to connecting rods may occur.
Mark and separate the parts and clean with solvent. Clean the
oil passages.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Large End Bore
General Procedures
1. Measure the bearing bore in two directions. The difference is the

connecting rod bore out-of-round. Verify the out-of-round is
within specification.
2. Measure the bearing bore diameter in two directions. Verify

the bearing bore is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Crankshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Brackets,

measure the end play.
 Measure the end play by lifting the crankshaft
using a lever.
 If the value is out of the specification, install
new thrust half rings to take up the end float
and repeat the measurement.
Engine System - General Information - Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal
Clearance
General Procedures
CAUTION: THESES PROCEDURES SHOULD NOT BE CARRIED OUT DURING THE MANUFACTURERS
WARRANTY PERIOD.
1. NOTE: Example - *PJEAL* - Crankshaft Main Journal

Diameter.
Read the grade letters from LEFT to RIGHT = FRONT to REAR of

engine eg. for this example engine, the crank journal at the front
of the engine is grade P, and at the rear is grade L.
 The selection of main bearing shells is described in the
following chart.
2. NOTE: Example - *ABAA* - Crankshaft (Big End Bearing)

Crankpin Diameter
NOTE: For vehicles built up to 2002 MY.
NOTE: If the crankshaft main bearing carrier retaining bolts

have been marked with a center punch dot, they must be
discarded and new bolts installed.

engine eg. for this example engine, the crankpin at the front of the
engine is grade A and at the rear is also grade A.
 Grade A = 56,000 to 55,994 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Blue).
 Grade B = 55,994 to 55,988 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Green).
 Grade C = 55,988 to 55,982 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Yellow).
3. NOTE: Example - *ABAA* - Crankshaft (Big End Bearing)
Crankpin Diameter
NOTE: For vehicles built from 2002 MY.
NOTE: If the crankshaft main bearing carrier retaining bolts

have been marked with a center punch dot, they must be
discarded and new bolts installed.

engine eg. for this example engine, the crankpin at the front of the
engine is grade A and at the rear is also grade A.
 Grade A = 53,000 to 52,994 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Blue).
 Grade B = 52,994 to 52,988 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Green).
 Grade C = 52,988 to 52,982 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Yellow).
4. NOTE: Example - *21222122* - Cylinder Bore and Piston
The cylinder bore grades read from LEFT to RIGHT as follows:

 Bank 2 - Cylinder 1, Bank 2 - Cylinder 2, Bank 2 - Cylinder
3, Bank 2 - Cylinder 4, Bank 1 - Cylinder 4,
 Bank 1 - Cylinder 3, Bank 1 - Cylinder 2, Bank 1 - Cylinder
1.
 (Note, in earlier publications Bank 1 was described
as A-Bank and Bank 2 as B-Bank)
 Grade 1 Bore = 85,990 to 86,000 mm.
 Grade 2 Bore = 86,000 to 86,010 mm.
 Grade 3 Bore = 86,010 to 86,020 mm.
5. NOTE: Example - *WPPNN* - Crankshaft Main Bearing Bore

in Cylinder Block

engine eg. for this example engine, the crank journal bore at the
front of the engine is grade W, and at the rear is grade N.
 The selection of main bearing shells is described in the
following JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING
BORE CHART.
6. JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING BORE CHART
7. NOTE: THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE CARRIED OUT
WHEN REPLACIING MAIN BEARING SHELLS.
NOTE: Refer to the JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING

BORE CHART in step 6 for tolerance and bearing information.
The number in each diagonal band represents a PAIR of color

coded main bearing shells which must be used with a specific
journal, depending on the combination of journal diameter and
crankshaft bore diameter. The color codes for each band are as
follows:
1. Blue / Green and Blue / Green
2. Blue / Green and Blue
3. Blue and Blue
4. Blue and Green
5. Green and Green
6. Green and Yellow
7. Yellow and Yellow
 Consider crankshaft journal 5 (from the example grade
markings on the cylinder block) - the cylinder block bore is
Grade N and the crankshaft journal diameter is Grade L.
From the chart, it will be seen that the point of intersection
is in Band 4 which equates to one Blue shell and one Green
shell.
 When the appropriate pair of color codes have been
selected for a journal, either color may be installed to the
cylinder block or to the bedplate, but, the shell which is to
be installed to the cylinder block must have an oil groove
and the shell which is to be installed to the bedplate must
be plain.
8. NOTE: THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE CARRIED OUT
WHEN A REPLACMENT CRANKSHAFT OR CYLINDER BLOCK
HAS BEEN FITTED.
NOTE: Refer to the JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING

BORE CHART in step 6 for tolerance and bearing information.
The thickness grade of all main bearing shells are to be selected to

give a total running clearance of not less than 0.022 mm or
greater than 0.040 mm.
 Each bearing bore in the block/bedplate assembly should
be measured at two mutually perpendicular diameters 45°
to the vertical in the middle of the bearing.
 The minimum diameter of the two is to be used.
 Each crankshaft main bearing journal should be measured
dynamically at a point in line with the middle of each
bearing.
 When the appropriate pair of color codes have been
selected for a journal, either color may be installed to the
cylinder block or to the bedplate, but, the shell which is to
be installed to the cylinder block must have an oil groove
and the shell which is to be installed to the bedplate must
be plain.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The main bearing caps or lower crankcase must be

in place and tightened to the specified torque; however,
the bearing shells should not be installed.
Measure the cylinder bore with an internal micrometer.

 Carry out the measurements in different directions
and at different heights to determine if there is any
out-of-roundness or tapering.
 If the measurement is out of the specified range,
hone out the cylinder block or install a new block.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Head Distortion
General Procedures
1. Measure the cylinder block/cylinder head distortion.

 Using the special tool, measure the mating
face distortion.
 If the value is not to specification rework the
mating face.
Engine System - General Information - Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and
Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect the cylinder head joining flanges of the exhaust

manifold for evidence of exhaust gas leaks.
2. Inspect the exhaust manifold for cracks, damaged gasket
surfaces, or other damage that would make it unfit for further
use.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Inspection
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use any aggressive cleaning fluid

or a wire brush to clean the piston.
Carry out a visual inspection.

 Clean the piston skirt, pin bush, ring grooves and
crown and check for wear or cracks.
 If there are signs of wear on the piston skirt,
check whether the connecting rod is twisted or
bent.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin are a matched pair.

Do not mix up the components.
Measure the piston pin diameter.

 Measure the diameter in two directions.
 If the values are not to specification, install a
new piston and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin form a matched pair. Do not
mix up the components.
Measure the diameter of the piston pin bore.

 Measure the diameter in two directions.
 If the values are not to specification, install both a new
piston and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring End Gap
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not mix up the piston rings. Install

the piston rings in the same position and location.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring gap.

 The values given in the specification refer to a
gauge ring used during production.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring-to-Groove
Clearance
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston ring must protrude from the piston

groove. To determine the piston ring clearance, insert
the Feeler Gauge right to the back of the groove,
behind the wear ridge.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring

clearance.
Engine System - General Information - Valve Spring Free Length
General Procedures
1. Using a vernier gauge, measure the free length of each

valve spring. Verify the length is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Valve Stem Diameter
General Procedures
1. Using a micrometer measure the diameter of the valve

stems.
 If the measurements are not to specification,
install a new valve.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Leakage Test Using Smoke Test
Equipment
General Procedures
CAUTION: The compressed air line supply pressure must be between 3.5 and 12 bar (50 and 175 psi) for the
smoke test equipment to function correctly. Do not exceed this pressure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the smoke test equipment.
NOTE: The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
NOTE: On vehicles with 3.0L TDV6, it will be necessary to insert smoke at both air cleaner outlet pipes independently if
the right hand turbocharger and associated hoses are to be tested.
NOTE: In some cases it may be necessary to remove undertrays, trim or engine covers to obtain access to all potential
leak locations.
NOTE: For further information regarding operation of the test equipment refer to the manufacturers operators manual
supplied with the kit.
1. WARNING: Use an additional support to

prevent the hood from falling if the smoke test
equipment is secured to the hood. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in personal injury.
Install the smoke test equipment to a suitable

location under the hood.
2. Connect a suitable compressed air line to the smoke test

equipment.
3. Connect the smoke test equipment positive power cable to the
battery positive terminal.
4. WARNING: Do not connect the smoke test equipment

negative cable to the battery negative terminal.
Connect the smoke test equipment negative cable to a suitable

body ground point.
5. NOTE: A flashing green light indicates low battery
voltage. In this case, place the battery on charge
and make sure that the battery is fully charged
before using the smoke test equipment.
Observe the power indicator lamp on the smoke

test equipment. Make sure that a continuous green
light is displayed.
6. NOTE: In some cases it may be necessary to

remove the air cleaner(s) to allow access to the air
cleaner outlet pipes.
NOTE: In some cases it will be necessary to cap

one of the air cleaner outlet pipes. Use the
blanking caps supplied in the kit to cap the open
orifice.
Disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe(s).
7. NOTE: Make sure the smoke test equipment

adapter is a good fit to the air cleaner outlet pipe.
This must be an air tight seal.
Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to

the air cleaner outlet pipe.
1. Install the appropriate adapter to the air
cleaner outlet pipe.
2. Connect the smoke test equipment supply
hose to the adapter link hose.
8. NOTE: The flow control valve must be in the fully
open position.
NOTE: Smoke is produced for 5 minutes. The

smoke test equipment will automatically switch off
after this period of time.
Switch the smoke test equipment on.
9. Remove the oil filler cap, and observe until a constant flow of
smoke is visible leaving the oil filler orifice. Install the oil filler
cap.
10. NOTE: The longer smoke is allowed to exit from a leak, the
more fluorescent dye will be deposited at a leak location.
Using the torch supplied in the kit set to white light, look for
escaping smoke. Alternatively, use the ultraviolet light to look
for fluorescent dye deposits at the source of a leak.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Engine Data
Engine Maximum Engine Maximum Engine Compression
Engine Description Capacity Torque (EEC) (SAE) Power (EEC) (SAE) Ratio Bore Stroke
• 90° "Vee" • 8 4.999 ccm 625 Nm at 2.500 - 375 kW at 6.000 - 9.5 ± 0.50 92.509 ± 93 ± 0.1
Cylinder • 32 Valves 5.500 RPM 6.500 RPM 0.009 mm mm
Engine Firing Order

Firing Order
1:2:7:3:4:5:6:8
Engine Valve Clearance (cold)

Intake Valve Exhaust Valve
0.20 ±0.02 0.25 ±0.02
Spark Plugs
Specification Spark Plug Gap
ILKR6C-10 1 mm
Lubricants,Fluids,Sealers and Adhesives

Description Specification
Engine Oil WSS-M2C925-A
Sealant WSE-M4G323-A6
Core plug and stub pipe retainer WSK-M2G349-A7
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Fluid WSS-M97B44-D
Capacities
Description Liters
Engine oil, initial fill 8.90
Engine oil, service fill with oil filter change 7.25
Cylinder Head and Valve Train
Item Specification
Cylinder head maximum permitted warp (mm) (flatnes specfication)
overall 0.08
over 150x150 mm area 0.05
Valve guide inner diameter (mm) 5.51 ± 0.01
Intake valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 117.21 ± 0.1
Exhaust valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.39 ± 0.1
Valve stem to guide clearance intake diametrical (mm) 0.022 - 0.057
Valve stem to guide clearance exhaust diametrical (mm) 0.03 - 0.065
Valve head diameter intake (mm) 36 ± 0.1
Valve head diameter exhaust (mm) 30 ± 0.1
Intake valve face angle (degrees) 44.875 ± 0.125
Exhaust valve face angle (degrees) 44.875 ± 0.125
Valve stem diameter intake (mm) 5.4705 ± 0.0075
Valve stem diameter exhaust (mm) 5.4625 ± 0.0075
Valve spring free length (mm) - inlet 46.1
Valve spring free length (mm) - exhaust 46.1
Valve spring installed height (mm) - inlet 35.74
Valve spring installed height (mm) - exhaust 35.1
Camshaft lobe lift intake (mm) 10
Camshaft lobe lift exhaust (mm) 9.36
Camshaft journal to cylinder head bearing surface clearance diametrical (mm) 0.025 - 0.065
Camshaft journal diameter - all positions 26.965 ± 0.01
Bearing diameter - all positions 27.01 ± 0.01
Camshaft journal maximum run out limit (mm)
Camshaft journals to end journals 0.03
Camshaft journals to adjacent journals 0.015
Camshaft journal maximum out of round (mm) - all journals 0.005
Torque Specification
NOTE: A = Refer to procedure for correct torque sequence.
Engine cover mounting bolts 10 7 -
Accessory drive belt tensioner retaining bolt 40 30 -

Supercharger belt idler/tensioner bracket retaining bolts 25 18 -
Secondary drive belt idler retaining bolts 40 30 -
Power steering pump bracket to engine retaining bolts 25 18 -
Generator retaining bolts 48 35 -
Starter motor retaining bolts 48 35 -
Air conditioning compressor retaining bolts 25 18 -
Engine mounting to engine mounting bracket retaining nuts 48 35 -
Engine mounting to subframe retaining nuts 63 46 -
Engine mounting bracket to engine retaining bolts 48 35 -
Crankshaft damper pulley retaining LH threaded bolt 200 + 270° 148 + 180° -
Flexplate retaining bolts 45 + 90° 33 + 90° -
Exhaust manifold heat shield retaining bolts A - -
Exhaust manifold retaining bolts A - -
Engine wiring harness bracket retaining bolts 10 7 -
Intercooler retaining bolts 25 18 -
Intake manifold retaining bolts 25 18 -
Oil Cooler retaining bolts 13 10 -
Knock sensor (KS) retaining bolt 20 14 -
Ignition coil retaining bolts 8 - 71
Spark plugs 20 15 -
Fuel rail retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel pipe retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil filter housing assembly retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil filter cap 28 21 -
Lifting eye bolts 25 + 90° 18 + 90° -
Manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT) sensor sensor retaining bolts 5 - 44
Coolant pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Variable valve timing (VVT) oil control solenoid retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft cover retaining bolts 13 10 -
Front upper timing cover retaining bolts 12 9 -
Front lower timing cover retaining bolts A - -
Engine rear cover retaining bolts A - -
VVT to camshaft retaining bolts 32 24 -
Camshaft bearing caps retaining bolts 11 8 -
Primary timing chain fixed guide retaining bolts 12 9 -
Primary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts 12 9 -
Primary timing chain tensioner guide blade retaining bolts 25 18 -
Auxiliary chain tensioner guide retaining bolts 21 15 -
Auxiliary chain fixed guide retaining bolt 12 9 -
Oil pump sprocket retaining bolt 21 15 -
Cylinder head retaining bolts A - -
Engine oil level (EOL) sensor retaining bolt 12 9 -
Oil pan to oil sump body retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil sump body to engine retaining bolts 25 18 -
Oil pan drain plug 23 17 -
Oil transfer tube to Oil pan body retaining bolts 11 8 -
Oil pump to engine block retaining bolts 25 18 -
Pick-up pipe to oil pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Windage tray retaining bolts 25 18 -
Piston cooling jet retaining bolts 12 9 -
Engine block coolant draining plug 50 37 -
Connecting Rod bolts
Stage 1 10 7 -
Stage 2 50 37 -
Main bearing cap
M10 bolt Stage 1 25 18 -
M10 bolt Stage 2 57 + 70° 42 + 70° -
M8 bolt Stage 2 33 + 75° 24 + 75° -
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine
EXTERNAL VIEW
INTRODUCTION
The 5.0L SC (supercharger) gasoline engine is a liquid cooled V8 unit featuring direct fuel injection, four overhead camshafts
and four valves per cylinder. All four camshafts incorporate VCT (variable camshaft timing).
The main structural components of the engine are all manufactured from aluminum alloy. The engine is built around a very
stiff, lightweight, enclosed V, deep skirt cylinder block. A structural windage tray is bolted to the bottom of the cylinder block
to further improve the block stiffness, minimize NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and help reduce oil foaming. To further
enhance the stiffness of the lower engine structure, a heavily ribbed sump body is installed. The sump body also helps to
reduce engine noise.
Engine Structure

1 - LH (left hand) cylinder head (bank B)
2 - Cylinder block
3 - Windage tray
4 - Sump body
5 - Sump pan
6 - RH (right hand) cylinder head (bank A)
CYLINDER BLOCK
The cylinder block is a 90 degree configuration with cast-in iron cylinder liners and an open deck die-cast coolant jacket. The
low volume coolant jacket gives good warm-up times and low piston noise levels. The longitudinal flow design of the coolant
jacket, with a single cylinder head coolant transfer port in each bank, provides good rigidity and head gasket sealing.
The cylinders in each bank are numbered from 1 to 4, with number 1 at the front.
Engine Data Location

1 - Engine data location
Engine data is marked on the cylinder block at the rear of the RH cylinder bank.
CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft is made from spheroidal graphite cast iron, which, compared with grey cast iron, has higher mechanical
strength, ductility and increased shock resistance. The undercut and rolled fillets also improve strength. Eight counter-
balance weights ensure low vibration levels and the large, cross-drilled main bearing journals are designed to contribute to
stiffness.
An oil groove in the upper half of each main bearing transfers the oil into the crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod
bearings. A thrust washer is installed each side of the top half of the center main bearing.
Crankshaft Data Location

1 - Pin journal classification and plant identification
2 - Main journal classification
3 - Date and time codes
The main bearings are numbered 1 to 5 starting from the front of the engine. There are five grades of main bearing
available, each being color coded. Journal sizes are marked on the rear of the crankshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Clearance (303-00 Engine System - General
Crankshaft Installation

1 - Coolant drain plug
2 - Torque converter access plug
3 - Drive plate
4 - Rear cover
5 - Main bearing cap
6 - Identification mark
7 - Front cover
8 - Front pulley
The main bearing caps are made from cast iron and are cross bolted to increase rigidity. An identification mark on the
bearing cap faces the front of the engine.
At the front of the crankshaft, a tuned torsional vibration damper is incorporated into the crankshaft front pulley. At the rear
of the crankshaft a pressed steel drive plate, with a steel starter ring gear, is installed to transfer drive from the engine to
the transmission. The reluctor ring for the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor is integrated into the perimeter of the drive
plate.
The crankshaft seals are located in the front and rear covers.
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS
The diameter of each piston is graded and precisely matched to each cylinder bore to help reduce noise. In the vertical
plane, the pistons have a slight barrel form, which helps to ensure a reliable oil film is maintained between the piston and
the cylinder bore. A solid film lubricant coating is applied to both reaction faces of the piston to reduce wear and improve
fuel economy.
A three-ring piston-sealing system is used. The steel top ring is treated with a PVD (physical vapor deposition) peripheral
coating. PVD is a coating technique where material can be deposited with improved properties to ensure good cylinder bore
compatibility and wear resistance. A Napier center ring helps cylinder pressure and oil management, while the three-piece oil
control lower ring is produced from nitrided steel.
The pistons are cooled with engine oil from four piston cooling jets installed under the valley of the cylinder block. Each
piston cooling jet sprays oil onto the underside of the two adjacent pistons, one from each cylinder bank.
The connecting rods are forged from high strength steel. The cap is fracture-split from the rod to ensure precision re-
assembly for bearing shell alignment. There are three grades of large end bearing available, each being color coded.
Cap Alignment with Connecting Rod

1 - Alignment marks
2 - Connecting rod
3 - Cap
4 - Bearings
The correct alignment of the cap with the connecting rod is indicated by marks on adjacent faces of the two components.
Connecting Rod and Piston Orientation

A - Front of engine
1 - Alignment mark
2 - LH side (bank B)
3 - Alignment mark
4 - RH side (bank A)
5 - Piston orientation arrow
The orientation of the connecting rods and pistons on the crankshaft are given below:
 Bank A - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod alignment
marks must face the rear of the engine.
 Bank B - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod alignment
marks must face the front of the engine.
CYLINDER HEADS
NOTE: RH (right-hand) (A bank) cylinder head shown, LH (left-hand) (B bank) cylinder head similar.
The cylinder heads are manufactured in gravity die cast aluminum alloy and are unique for each cylinder bank. Deep-seated
bolts reduce distortion and secure the cylinder heads to the cylinder block.
Each cylinder is served by four valves. To help achieve the required gas-flow characteristics, these are arranged
asymmetrically around the cylinder bore. Each cylinder has a centrally mounted fuel injector and spark plug.
The cylinder head gasket is of a multi-layer steel construction.

EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOTE: LH (B bank) installation shown, RH (A bank) installation similar.

1 - Cylinder head
2 - Gasket
3 - Heat shield
4 - Gasket
5 - Exhaust manifold
6 - Bolt (8 off)
7 - Heat shield
8 - Bolt (4 off)
9 - Spacer (8 off)
The high SiMo (silicon molybdenum) cast iron exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder bank. Each exhaust manifold
installation includes two metal gaskets and two heat shields. Spacers on the securing bolts allow the manifolds to expand
and contract with changes of temperature while maintaining the clamping loads.
VALVE TRAIN

1 - Inlet camshafts
2 - Exhaust camshaft
3 - Inverted tooth timing chain
4 - Nylon chain guide
5 - Auxiliary chain tensioner
6 - Auxiliary drive chain
7 - Oil pump drive
8 - Auxiliary drive camshaft
9 - Timing chain tensioner
10 - Tensioner lever
11 - VCT unit
12 - VCT solenoids
The lightweight valve train provides good economy and noise levels and is chain driven from the crankshaft.
Double overhead camshafts on each cylinder head operate the valves. For each cylinder head, an inverted tooth timing chain
transfers drive from the crankshaft to the VCT unit on the front of each camshaft. Graded tappets enable setting of inlet and
exhaust valve clearances.
Each timing chain has a hydraulic tensioner operated by engine oil pressure. The chain tensioners incorporate a ratchet
mechanism, which maintains tension while the engine is stopped to eliminate start-up noise. The chains are lubricated with
engine oil from jets located at the front of the engine block. Nylon chain guides control chain motion on the drive side.
Variable Camshaft Timing

1 - VCT units
2 - Intake camshaft VCT solenoid
3 - Camshaft position sensors
4 - Exhaust camshaft VCT solenoid
The VCT system varies the timing of the intake and exhaust camshafts to deliver optimum engine power, efficiency and
emissions. The timing of the intake camshafts has a range of 62 degrees of crankshaft angle. The timing of the exhaust
camshafts has a range of 50 degrees of crankshaft angle.
In the base timing position:
 The intake camshafts are fully retarded.

 The exhaust camshafts are fully advanced.
VCT Operating Ranges

Camshaft Valve Opens Valve Closes
Intake 29 degrees BTDC (before top dead center) to 33 degrees ATDC (after top dead center) 207 to 269 degrees ATDC
Exhaust 244 to 194 degrees BTDC 6 to 56 degrees ATDC
The system consists of a VCT unit and a VCT solenoid for each camshaft. The ECM (engine control module) controls the
system using PWM (pulse width modulation) signals to the VCT solenoids.
The torsional energy generated by the valve springs and the inertia of the valve train components are used to operate the
system.
Variable Camshaft Timing Units
The VCT units change the position of the camshafts in relation to the timing chains.
1 - Bolt (3 off)
2 - VCT unit
3 - Filter
4 - Camshaft
5 - Inner plate
6 - Housing and sprocket
7 - Rotor assembly
8 - Reed plate
9 - Spring and lock pin
10 - Spring (3 off)
11 - Tip seal (3 off)
12 - Spring (2 off)
14 - Spring
15 - Dowel pin
16 - Bias spring
- Snap ring
17
18 - Reluctor ring
19 - Center plate
20 - Snap ring
21 - Screw (6 off)
22 - Spool valve
23 - Outer plate
Each VCT unit is attached to the camshaft by three bolts. A rotor assembly and a reed plate are installed inside a sprocket
housing, which consists of a sprocket, an outer plate and an inner plate held together by six screws.
A reluctor ring, for the CMP (camshaft position) sensor, a center plate and a bias spring are installed at the front of the VCT
unit. The ends of the bias spring locate on the center plate assembly and the sprocket housing, to give a turning moment to
the camshaft in the advance direction. A snap ring locates the reluctor ring on to a sleeve installed in the center of the rotor
assembly. The opposite end of the sleeve locates in a bore in the front face of the camshaft, which contains a filter.
A spring and spool valve are installed in the rotor assembly sleeve and retained by a snap ring. The spring keeps the spool
valve in contact with the armature of the related VCT solenoid.
Each VCT unit is supplied with engine oil from an oil gallery in the cylinder head, through the camshaft front bearing cap and
a bore in the center of the camshaft.
Variable Camshaft Timing Solenoids
The VCT solenoids control the position of the spool valves in the VCT units.
The VCT solenoids are installed in the front upper timing covers, immediately in front of their related VCT units. Each VCT
solenoid is secured with two screws and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface with the
engine harness.
Each VCT solenoid incorporates a spindle that acts on the spool valve in the related VCT unit to advance and retard the
camshaft timing. The VCT solenoids operate independently and are controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM.
Variable Camshaft Timing Operation
When the engine is running, the compression and expansion of the valve springs causes momentary increases and decreases
in the torque acting on the camshafts. These momentary changes of torque are sensed in the VCT units and used to change
the camshaft timing.
Camshaft Torsional Energy (For a Single Valve Event)

A - Camshaft torque
B - Camshaft rotation (degrees)
C - Valve opening
D - Peak lift
E - Valve closing
1 - 1000 rev/min
2 - 4000 rev/min
3 - 7000 rev/min
4 - Inertia effects from valve train rotating components
5 - Force caused by valve spring
6 - Bias torque from friction
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Base Timing
NOTE: Intake camshaft VCT unit shown. For exhaust camshaft VCT unit, read advance for retard and retard for advance.

1 - Advance chamber
2 - Retard chamber
3 - Sprocket housing
4 - Rotor assembly
5 - Lock pin
6 - Sleeve
7 - Engine oil supply from camshaft
8 - Inlet check valve
9 - Lock pin drain
10 - Spool valve
11 - Advance check valve
12 - Retard check valve
NOTE: The following description is for intake camshaft VCT units. For exhaust camshaft VCT units, read advance for retard,
and retard for advance.
At engine start-up, once the engine oil pressure in the camshaft is sufficient to open the inlet check valve, engine oil flows
across the spool valve, through the advance and retard check valves and into the advance and retard chambers. During the
start cycle, the ECM signals the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve into the sleeve and connect the lock pin to inlet oil
pressure. The inlet oil pressure causes the lock pin to retract from the inner plate and unlock the rotor assembly and
camshaft from the sprocket housing.
There is a constant supply of oil to the VCT to ensure the unit remains filled during operation.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Advance
To advance the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve so that the advance
chamber oil passage is closed and the retard chamber oil passage is connected to inlet oil.
Each momentary increase of the torque acting on the camshaft generates a pressure pulse in the retard chamber. Oil moves
from the retard chamber, through the spool valve and the advance check valve to the advance chamber, to equalize the
pressures in the two chambers. The displacement of oil from the retard chamber causes the rotor assembly to advance in
relation to the sprocket housing. Each momentary decrease of torque acting on the camshaft also generates a pressure pulse
in the advance chamber, but, with the advance chamber oil passage closed, no movement of oil between the advance and
retard chambers occurs and the rotor assembly cannot move in the retard direction.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Null
Once the camshaft has reached the required timing position the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to set the spool
valve in the null position. In the null position, the advance and retard chamber oil passages are both closed by the spool
valve and the rotor assembly is hydraulically locked to the sprocket housing.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Retard
To retard the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve to close the retard
chamber oil passage and connect the advance chamber oil passage to the inlet oil.
Each momentary decrease of the torque acting on the camshaft causes oil to transfer from the advance chamber, through
the spool valve and the retard check valve to the retard chamber, and so retard the camshaft timing.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM

1 - Oil pump outlet tube
2 - Anti-drain valve
3 - Oil cooler
4 - Oil filter
5 - Piston cooling jets
6 - Timing chain lubrication jets
7 - Oil evacuation tube
8 - Oil pump
9 - Oil temperature and level sensor
10 - Oil pick-up
The oil pump is attached to the underside of the windage tray. The input shaft of the oil pump is driven from the front of the
crankshaft, by the auxiliary chain, at 0.87 engine speed.
The oil pump draws oil from the sump pan through a centrally mounted pick-up pipe. The oil is pressurized and pumped
through an output tube to the cylinder block. After passing through an anti-drain valve and a plate type oil cooler, the oil is
filtered by a replaceable cartridge installed on the front of the RH cylinder head.
The output from the oil filter is distributed through oil galleries in the cylinder heads and cylinder block. All moving parts are
lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for the VCT system, the timing chain tensioners, the
piston cooling jets and the timing chain lubrication jets.
The oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the rapid
return of the oil to the sump pan. System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the LH cylinder head cover.
An oil evacuation tube is installed to allow oil to be drawn from the sump pan. The upper end of the oil evacuation tube is
located under the oil filler cap.
An oil drain plug is installed in the RH side of the sump pan.
Oil Pump Nominal Operating Pressures

Engine Speed, rev/min Temperature, °C (°F) Pressure, bar (lbf/in2)
Idle 20 (68) 2.0 (29.0)
1500 20 (68) 6.0 (87.0)
3000 40 (104) 6.2 (90.0)
3000 110 (230) 5.0 (72.5)
3000 130 (266) 4.0 (58.0)
Oil Level Monitoring
Oil level monitoring is provided by an oil level and temperature sensor that measures the oil level in the sump pan. The oil
level can be displayed in the message center of the instrument cluster.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor
The oil level and temperature sensor supplies the ECM with a signal containing the level and temperature of the oil in the
sump pan. The oil level and temperature sensor is secured to the bottom of the sump pan with three screws and sealed with
a gasket.
The oil level and temperature sensor sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically upward and measures the time taken for the pulse
to be reflected back from the top surface of the oil. This time is compared with the time taken for an ultrasonic pulse to
travel a reference distance within the oil level and temperature sensor to determine the oil level. The oil level reading is
combined with the oil temperature reading and transmitted in a PWM signal to the ECM.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor Specifications
Feature Details
Power source Battery Voltage
Level Accuracy ±2 mm (±0.08 in.) at temperatures of -30 °C (-22 °F)) and above; (±4 mm (±0.16 in.) at
temperatures below -30 °C (-22 °F))
Temperature Accuracy ±2 °C (±3.6 °F)
Operating Level Range 116 to 147 mm (4.57 to 5.79 in.)
Operating Temperature -40 to 160 °C (-40 to 320 °F)
Range
Oil Level Check
For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
For accuracy, oil level checks should be performed with the vehicle on level ground when the oil is hot. The vehicle needs to
stand for approximately 10 minutes, after the engine is switched off, to allow the oil to drain back into the sump pan and the
oil level to stabilize. The oil level system will not give a reading until the oil level has stabilized.
With the ignition on, the engine stopped and the transmission in P (park), repeatedly press the trip button on the end of the
LH multifunction switch until the oil level icon and applicable message are displayed in the fuel gage/trip computer area of
the message center, as shown below:

A - Oil level is between 50% and 100% of recommended level. No top-up required.
B - Oil level is between 12.5% and 50% percent of recommended level. Add 0.5 liter (0.53 US
quart) of oil.
C - Oil level is between 0% and 12.5% of recommended level. Add 1 liter (1.06 US quarts) of oil.
D - Oil level is above maximum for safe operation. Reduce oil level to recommended level.
E - Oil level is below minimum for safe operation. Add 1.5 liters (1.59 US quarts) of oil, then
recheck level.
F - Oil level is stabilizing. Wait 10 minutes and then recheck level. If this display is accompanied
by the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT, a fault with the oil level
monitoring system is indicated.
System Fault Warning
If there is a fault with the system, in addition to being displayed during an oil level check, the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT will be temporarily displayed when the ignition is first switched on.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1484
Vacuum Pump, Oil Drain
303-1484-01
Adapter for 303-1484
Draining
WARNING: The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent
scalding.
CAUTION: Correct installation of the oil filler cap can be obtained by tightening the cap until hard stop.
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is parked on level ground.
NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
1.
 Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop
the engine.
2. CAUTION: Allow 10 minutes from turning the

engine off before starting oil extraction.
3. Refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-
05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
4.
 Loosen the element cover 4 complete turns
to allow engine oil to drain from the filter
cover.
5.
 Using the oil vacuum pump drain the oil out
through the oil extraction tube.
Special Tool(s): 303-1484, 303-1484-01
6.
 Remove the oil vacuum pump.
7.
8. NOTE: Discard the O-ring seals.

Filling
1. NOTE: Install new O-ring seals.
Lubricate the oil filter element O-ring seal with

clean engine oil.
2. CAUTION: Tighten the component finger tight

first.
 Torque: 25 Nm
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes

from filling with oil and that the engine oil level is reading at
least minimum (by following Steps 7-11), before starting the
engine.
 Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles

without supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L

Petrol, Specifications).
 Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles with
supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

 Clean any residual engine oil from the oil filler cap area.
4.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle has been left for 5
minutes from filling with oil.
Follow the Steps 7-11 before starting the engine.

6.
the engine.
 Check for leaks.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift

mechanism are in the park (P) position.
Make sure that the hood is open.
 Turn the ignition on.
8.
 Scroll through the trip menu to access the
engine oil level display.
9.
 Press the cruise control cancel button twice
within 2 seconds.
10.
 The message center display will revert to
the normal display in the trip computer.
 Check that the oil level display shows an oil
level reading.
 Only after having started and run the
engine for 10 minutes (as indicated in Step
6), switch off the engine, then stabilizing
for 10 minutes, take a reading from the oil
level display and, if necessary top up with
engine oil.
11. NOTE: If instructed to follow Steps 7-11 in a previous step,

return to Step 6 and continue the procedure.
Turn the ignition off.

12. Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize if there has
been additional oil top up.
13. NOTE: The following steps are to update the
average oil level value.

 Press and hold the cruise control cancel
button for more than 2 seconds.
14.
 The message center display will revert to the normal
display in the trip computer.
15. Turn the ignition off.
16. Turn the ignition on.
17.
 Make sure that the average oil level value
has now been updated.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Draining
scalding.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the
engine.
2.
4.
cover.
 Make sure that the O-ring seal is exposed.
5. NOTE: Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain from the oil
filter housing.
6. NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
7. Remove and discard the oil filter element.


and Installation).
10. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
Allow at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to

drain.
NOTE: Discard the sealing washer.

Filling
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the area around

the component is clean and free of foreign
material.
NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Torque: 24 Nm
and Installation).

clean engine oil.

first.
 Torque: 25 Nm

engine.


supercharger:

6.

8.
the engine.
9. CAUTIONS:


10.
11.
within 2 seconds.
12.
level reading.
engine oil.



16.
19.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Alignment Tool, Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing
Check


and Installation).
4. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
NOTE: Collect the engine oil in a clean container.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
Make sure that the crankshaft is fully locked.
Install the Special Tool(s): 303-1447
7. Using a suitable marker, mark the position of the

crankshaft pulley as illustrated.
8.
9. NOTE: Discard the seal.

10. Remove the Special Tool(s): 303-1447
11. If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft position

to allow correct installation of the special tool.
Install the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613
12. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when

adjusting the crankshaft position.
NOTE: If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be

installed, adjustment of the fuel pump camshaft
timing will be required.
 If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft

position to allow correct installation of the
special tool.

 If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be
installed, adjustment of the fuel pump
camshaft timing will be required.
Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing

Adjustment (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L
Petrol, General Procedures).
13. Remove the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613
14. NOTE: Install a new seal.
Torque: 12 Nm
15.

17. Torque: 10 Nm
18. NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Torque: 24 Nm

engine.


supercharger:


22.
the engine.
23. CAUTIONS:


24.
25.
within 2 seconds.
26.
level reading.
engine oil.



30.
33.
and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Adjustment


3. Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check (303-01B Engine -
V8 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
4. Refer to: Lower Timing Cover (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
5. CAUTIONS:

Inspect the 3 timing chain oil nozzles for

signs of damage, install as necessary.
6. NOTE: Using a suitable tie strap, position the
tensioner to one side.
Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613

Torque: 12 Nm

9. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm

engine.


supercharger:


14.
the engine.
15. CAUTIONS:


16.
17.
within 2 seconds.
18.
level reading.
engine oil.



22.
25.

and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft LH
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that the orientation and code on the top of the camshaft bearing caps is noted (along with
the bank - A or B), so that on installation the components are installed to their original position. Failure to follow this
instruction may cause damage to the vehicle.


stands.

3. Refer to: Timing Drive Components (303-01, Removal and
Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:
Rotate the camshafts until all the valves are

at their minimum open point.
Evenly and progressively, release the

camshaft bearing caps.
NOTE: Remove the camshaft bearing caps. Note:

their position, orientation and markings. Each is
marked with its position (number) and an
orientation (arrow).
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Prior to installing the camshafts, position the

crankshaft 45 degrees ATDC cylinder 1A to prevent
valve/piston collision.
Make sure that the camshafts and camshaft

bearing caps are installed in their original
locations.
Evenly and progressively install and tighten

the camshaft bearing caps.
NOTE: Lubricate the camshafts and the camshaft

bearing caps with EP90 oil (or 75/90 viscosity oil
www.JagDocs.com
will suffice) prior to installation.
Torque: 3 Nm
2. NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. CAUTION: Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
Rotate the crankshaft untill the camshaft lobe on the valve

being checked is 180 degrees from the maximum opening
position.
4. NOTE: If the valve clearance is incorrect, continue to the next
step. If the valve clearance is correct, continue to step 8.
Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and the
camshaft lobe and check against specifications table.
5. CAUTIONS:
Do not use a magnet to remove the tappet.
Use the following formula to calculate the required bucket

thickness. Original thickness + measured clearance - desired
clearance = required bucket thickness.
Remove the tappet and measure the thickness.

6. NOTE: If a new tappet is installed then go back to step 1 of the
install procedure.
Install a new tappet if required.

7. Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and the
Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft RH
Removal


stands.

Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:



Installation
1. CAUTIONS:



locations.

Torque: 3 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm

position.
5. CAUTIONS:


install procedure.

Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Front Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1434
Remover/Installer, Front Crankshaft Seal
Removal
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
Cables, General Procedures).
2. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
3. CAUTION: Do not over tighten the crankshaft front seal.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Do not over tighten the crankshaft front seal. Failure to follow this
Take extra care not to damage the seal.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
303-1437
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer
303-1438
Crankshaft Damper Bolt Remover/Installer
303-1439
Crankshaft Damper Removal Plate
303-1440
Crankshaft Damper Removal/Installation Stud
303-1441
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer Body
303-1448
Locking Tool
Removal



stands.

3. Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
4. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06 Starting System - V8 5.0L
5.
6.
7. Install the special tool.

8. CAUTION: Before removing the crankshaft
pulley bolt, note the numbers on the bolt head. If
the bolt head shows 10.9, the bolt must be
removed counter clockwise. If the bolt head shows
12.9, the bolt must be removed clockwise. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the crankshaft.
Note the markings on the crankshaft pulley bolt.
9.
Special Tool(s): 303-1438, 303-1437

11. Torque: 65 Nm
12. NOTE: The graphic shows the tool position for LH

thread only, RH thread will be the opposite.
Using a suitable stand, support the special tool.
NOTE: The thread is left handed.
NOTE: The crankshaft pulley bolt will be very tight.
14.
15. NOTE: If the crankshaft damper is fitted with an
early RH thread crankshaft bolt then the pulley can
be removed with a standard puller.
16.

20.
21. CAUTION: Discard the friction washer after

removing the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE: Make sure to clean the threads in the end of

the crankshaft and that the crank nose is free of
any foreign materials.
22.
23.
Installation
1.
 Apply RTV sealant to the crankshaft pulley
keyway.
 Make sure that the RTV sealant is applied in
a 2mm diameter bead.
 Make sure that when the RTV sealant is
applied that the RTV sealant is level with
the top of the keyway.
2. CAUTION: Install a new friction washer

before installing the crankshaft pulley.

NOTE: Skip to step 11 for engines fitted with early

RH thread crankshaft bolt.
Torque: 15 Nm
6. CAUTION: Rotate the crankshaft pulley

installation tool anti-clockwise until the pulley is
fully located, do not over tighten. Failure to do this
may result in damge to the components.
10. WARNING: Make sure that a new bolt is

installed.
 Apply loctite 270 to the thread of the bolts.

 Torque: 65 Nm

installed.
14. Torque: 65 Nm
16. Torque: 200 Nm
17. NOTE: The use of a torque multiplyer capable of

600Nm will be required.
 Torque: 270°
 Make sure that the socket is turned through
270 degrees not the torque wrench.
18.
20. Apply loctite 270 to the thread of the bolts.
Torque: 65 Nm
21.
22.

24. Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Rear Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1442
Rear Crankshaft Seal Installer
303-1443
Rear Crankshaft Cover Alignment Tool
Removal
1. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

2.
Installation
Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443
Torque: 11 Nm
3. Torque: 11 Nm
4. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
4. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol, Removal and Installation).
correct.
6. CAUTION: Discard the seals.

8. NOTE: Discard the gasket.

Installation
1. CAUTION: An acceptable flatness of the

cylinder head is 0.1mm.
NOTE: For cylinder head with distortion above the

maximum allowance, the cylinder head material
must be measured.
Check cylinder head face for distortion, across the

center and from corner to corner.
2. WARNING: Make sure care is taken when

handling the cylinder head gasket.
CAUTION: The head gasket must be installed

over the cylinder block dowels.
NOTE: Install a new cylinder head gasket.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that new cylinder head

bolts are installed.
NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
Torque: 90°
Torque: 120°
7. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
9. CAUTION: Install the new seals.
Torque: 10 Nm
10.

12. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head RH
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Discard the seal.
LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.

7.
8.
9. NOTE: Clamp the hose to minimize coolant loss.

11.
13.

16.
17. CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head has been installed

then new tappets must be installed.
If the cylinder head is being removed without

a new component being installed, the tappets must
be installed in their original positions.

Installation


must be measured.


CAUTION: The head gasket must be installed

over the cylinder block dowels.
NOTE: Install a new gasket.


Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
Torque: 90°
Torque: 120°
7. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:


Lubricate the valve tappets with clean engine oil.

10. NOTE: Install a new gasket.
11. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be

installed.
NOTE: Install a new engine oil filter.

12. Torque: 12 Nm
13. Torque: 20 Nm
14. Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
16. CAUTION: Install a new seal.
Torque: 12 Nm
17. Torque: 25 Nm
18. Torque: 25 Nm

20. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount LH
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).
All vehicles


5.
Torque: 35 Nm
7. Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
8. Torque: 63 Nm
9. Torque: 48 Nm

Torque: 48 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount RH
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).
All vehicles


5.
Torque: 35 Nm
7. Torque: 100 Nm
Installation
All vehicles
8. Torque: 10 Nm
9. Torque: 63 Nm
10. Torque: 48 Nm
Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold
Special Tool(s)
303-1444-01
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
303-1444-02
E115262
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
All vehicles


3. Refer to: Power Steering Pump (211-02 Power Steering,
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

correct.
12.
All vehicles
13.
14. Refer to: Catalytic Converter (309-00 Exhaust System - V8 5.0L

15.
NOTE: Discard the gasket.
NOTE: Make sure that the position of the spacers is

noted before removal of the manifold.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Torque: 45 Nm
Install the special tool.
Special Tool(s): 303-1444-01, 303-1444-02
3. NOTE: If a new cylinder head is installed use the

special tools in the illustration.
Special Tool(s): 303-1444-02

4. CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are
installed.
NOTE: Install the spacers in the noted position.
Torque: 10 Nm

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 18 Nm
8.

10.

11. Torque: 100 Nm
installed.

correct.
Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
13. Torque: 25 Nm
14. Torque: 25 Nm
15. Torque: 10 Nm
16. Torque: 10 Nm
17. Torque: 25 Nm
18. Torque: 3 Nm
19. Torque: 3 Nm

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold RH
Removal

3. Refer to: Catalytic Converter RH (309-00 Exhaust System - V8
4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Torque: 48 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
7. Torque: 100 Nm
8.
9.


Installation
1. Torque: 45 Nm
www.JagDocs.com


installed.
Torque: 10 Nm

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 18 Nm
8.
9. Torque: 12 Nm
10. Torque: 48 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
12. Torque: 100 Nm
13.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Flexplate
Removal

3. Refer to: Transmission (307-01 Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:
Install all the bolts finger tight before final

tightening.
The bolts can only be used 3 times, mark the

bolts with a center punch. If 2 punch marks are
visible, discard the bolts.
Make sure that no components fall off during

removal.
Install the bolts in the noted position.
NOTE: Make sure the crankshaft and flexplate

mating faces are clean before installation.
NOTE: Make sure that the crankshaft is not

rotated.
NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts working

diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1: 45 Nm
Stage 2: 90°
Installation

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Cooler
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Supercharger (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling (303-03A
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
5.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.
Torque: 13 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that these components are

installed to the noted removal position.
Install new o-ring seals

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

tightening.

Install the new seals.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Filter Element
Removal
2.
 Allow the engine oil to drain from the oil
filter element housing for two minutes.
3.
4.
1.
Installation
2. Torque: 25 Nm
3.
4. Start and run the engine.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan
Removal

stands.

2. Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14B Electronic Engine
3.
Installation
1. Apply a continuous bead of RTV sealant (Loctite

5901) 3 mm diameter, around the flange as
indicated.
2. Torque: 12 Nm
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14B Electronic Engine

Published: 21-Nov-2011
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan Extension
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Lower Timing Cover Alignment tool
303-1442
303-1443
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L
4. Refer to: Engine (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Removal).
5. CAUTIONS:


removal.

rotated.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15. NOTE: The high-pressure fuel pumps are removed

from the illustration for clarity.
16. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
17.
18. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
19.
20.
21.
22. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
Discard the fuel pipes.
23. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
24.
fluids.

fluids.
27.

fluids.
fluids.

fluids.
31.
32.

dismantling.
34. NOTE: Discard the component.

35.
36. NOTE: Make sure to use the aluminium lug

provided on the oil pan extension to lever against.

Installation
1. Torque: 8 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean

and free of foreign material.
Use only a plastic scraper when removing the

sealing material.
 Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite

5901G) to the areas shown, and tighten the
bolts within 7 minutes.
Torque: 25 Nm
4. CAUTIONS:


sealing material.
 Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6

(Loctite 5901G) to the areas shown, and
tighten the bolts within 7 minutes.
Torque: 12 Nm

Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite

5901G) to the areas shown, and tighten the bolts
within 7 minutes.
NOTE: Install new lower timing cover.
Install the bolts, but do not tighten fully at this

stage.
Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
9. Torque: 12 Nm
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11. Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443
12. Remove the special tools.

Torque: 11 Nm
14. Torque: 11 Nm
15.
 Torque: 11 Nm
16. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure fuel

pump bucket with clean engine oil.
17. CAUTION: Tighten the Torx screws a turn at

a time until the correct torque is achieved.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure fuel

pump O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
 Torque: 11 Nm
18. Loosen the Torx screws half a turn each.
19.



 Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
23.
24. CAUTIONS:
Install new high-pressure fuel supply lines.
Lubricate only the union threads with clean

engine oil.
NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.
NOTE: Install the bolt and unions fully finger tight

before final tightening.
25. CAUTION: Care must be taken when

positioning the fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump
cover to one side.
NOTE: Fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump cover

shown removed for clarity.
 Torque: 11 Nm
cover to one side.

 Torque: 11 Nm
27. NOTE: Do not tighten at this stage.
28.
 Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
29.
 Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
30. NOTE: Install the bolt and unions finger tight

 Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
31.
 Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
32. Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
33.
34. Torque: 25 Nm
35. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
36.
37. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm

39.
40. Torque: 40 Nm
41. Torque: 25 Nm
42. Torque: 25 Nm
43. Torque: 55 Nm
44. Torque: 12 Nm
45. CAUTION: Install all the bolts finger tight
Torque: 25 Nm
46.

Torque: 48 Nm
48. CAUTIONS:

tightening.


rotated.


diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1: 45 Nm
Stage 2: 90°
49. Refer to: Engine (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Removal).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pump
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L
4. NOTE: Tsubaki timing drive only.
5. NOTE: INA timing drive only.

6.
7. CAUTION: Remove and discard the O-ring

seal.

seals.
seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate and install the new O-ring seals.
Torque:
M8 25 Nm
M6 12 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Torque: 21 Nm
Install the lower timing chain making sure the

coloured chain links align correctly with the fuel
rail high-pressure fuel pumps camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket markings.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the tensioner

spring is correctly located.
NOTE: Tsubaki timing drive only.
Torque: 21 Nm

coloured chain links align correctly with the fuel rail
high-pressure fuel pumps camshaft and crankshaft
sprocket markings.

NOTE: INA timing drive only.
Torque: 21 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Cover
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-05
Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
4. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(303-05 Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
5. Refer to: Thermostat Housing - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03A
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
6. Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
7. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
9.
10.
11.
Installation
1.
2.
Torque: 12 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
5. Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite
within 7 minutes.


stage.
Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
9. Torque: 12 Nm
10. Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 12 Nm

13. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
14. Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
and Installation).
16. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(303-05 Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
17. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-05
and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part
Number: INA Timing Drive
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
Timing Tool – Camshaft Alignment
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
Camshaft Rotating Tool
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal
CAUTION: Check all timing components for wear and install new components if required.
Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting

and Cables, General Procedures).

3. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
4.
6. CAUTION: If the noted postion of the woodruff key

is at the 9 o'clock position, then a new flexplate must be
installed. If the woodruff key is in the 6 o'clock position
then proceed with the next step.
Note the position of the crankshaft woodruff key.

7.
8.
9.
10. CAUTION: If the variable valve timing (VVT) units

are knocked or dropped then the VVT must be replaced.
Remove the timing chain with the VVT units.

11.
12.
13.
14. CAUTION: If the VVT is knocked or dropped then

the VVT must be replaced.

15.
16. CAUTION: Discard the friction washer.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Install a new friction washer.
www.JagDocs.com
2. Torque: 12 Nm
3.
 Install the special tool to each Camshaft.
 Torque: 10 Nm
4.
 Carefully rotate the camshafts if the position is
not as shown.
5.
 Install the special tool 303-1445 to the rear of the
camshafts making sure the key way's are
correctly located into each slot on each of the
camshafts.
6. CAUTIONS:
Do not overturn the camshafts.
Tighten the wing nuts finger tight. Failure to follow

this instruction may result in damage to the components.
 Using a suitable tool, carefully rock the camshaft

clockwise then anti-clockwise. Turn the special
tool locking nuts until there is no movement left
in camshafts.
 Repeat steps 3- 6 for the camshafts on the other
cylinder head.
7. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the camshaft to rotate.
If the VVT is knocked or dropped then the VVT

must be replaced.
NOTE: Do not tighten at this stage.
 Install the timing chain with the variable valve

timing (VVT) units.
8.
 Make sure that all the timing chain alignment marks are in the
positions shown.
9. Torque: 25 Nm
10. Make sure the tensioner piston is fully extended. Then
fully depress and lock the tensioner piston with the
grenade pin before installation, failure to do this may
result in damage to the engine.
11. CAUTION: Do not release the timing chain tensioner

locking pin at this stage.
Torque: 10 Nm
12. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the camshafts to rotate.

must be replaced.
 Install the timing chain with the VVT units.
13.
positions shown.
14. Torque: 25 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
17.
18. CAUTION: Do not use mechanical force.
Make sure that the tensioners are fully deployed.

19.
 Release and reposition the oil suction tube to one
side.
20.
 Install the special tool.
21. CAUTIONS:
Apply the torque to the end of the special tool.
Make sure that the torque wrench is aligned with

the special tool as illustrated in the graphic.
 Install the torque wrench to the special tool.

 Torque: 35 Nm
22. CAUTION: Make sure that the torque wrench does

not move whilst tightening the VVT bolts.
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the exhaust VVT unit bolts

first.
 Torque: 32 Nm
23.
 Install the oil suction tube.
 Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25. CAUTIONS:


 Torque: 35 Nm
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the inlet VVT unit bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
27.
 Remove the special tool.
28.
29.
30.
31. CAUTION: Install the crankshaft pulley bolt with an

M16 washer to prevent damage to the crankshaft on
installation.
Torque: 50 Nm
32.
33. Rotate the engine two complete turns clockwise.

35.
36.
37.
38. CAUTIONS:
If the special tool cannot be installed, return to step

22 of the installation until the special tool 303-1445 is
installed correctly.
If directed to step 22, make sure that the VVT unit

retaining bolts are loosened prior to installing the special
tool(s).
39. CAUTION: If the special tool cannot be installed,

the timing chain installation steps must be repeated.
40.
41.
42.
43. Torque: 10 Nm
and Installation).

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part
Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal


3.

and Installation).
7.
8.
9.
11.
12.
13.
15.
16. CAUTION: Discard the friction washers.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Install new friction washers.
2. Torque: 12 Nm
3.
 Install the special tool to the LH bank Camshafts.
 Torque: 10 Nm
4.
not as shown.
5.
camshafts.
6. CAUTIONS:


in camshafts.
cylinder head.
7. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.

timing (VVT) units.
8.
positions shown.
9. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.

12.
positions shown.
13. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
15.

17.
www.JagDocs.com

19.
side.
20.
21. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the torque wench is aligned with the

special tool as illustrated in the graphic.

 Torque: 35 Nm

first.
 Torque: 32 Nm
23.
 Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25. CAUTIONS:


 Torque: 35 Nm

Torque: 32 Nm
27.
28.
29.
30.

installation.
Torque: 50 Nm
32.

34.
35.
36.
38. CAUTIONS:


tool(s).


40.
41.
42.
43. Torque: 10 Nm
and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover LH
Removal

4. Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
correct.
Torque: 10 Nm

correct.

correct.
Installation
Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover RH
Removal

2. Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4.

correct.

correct.
Installation
Torque: 13 Nm
Published: 23-Jul-2011
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L
4. Torque: 48 Nm
5.
6.
7. Torque:
Stage 1: 40 Nm
Stage 2: 180°
Installation

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part
Number: INA Timing Drive
Removal
NOTE: Some illustrations may show the engine removed for clarity.
Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

stands.

4.
5.
6.
7. CAUTION: Take extra care when removing

the component, prevent damage to the mating
faces.
Installation

2. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 21 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Install the lower timing chain making sure the
sprocket markings.

Torque: 21 Nm


Specifications).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part
Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Removal

Specifications).

stands.

4.
5.
6.

faces.
Installation

mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 21 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm

Torque: 21 Nm


Specifications).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Lower Timing Cover
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal


stands.

4.
5.
6. Refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump (206-07 Power Brake Actuation,

7.
Installation

within 7 minutes.

stage.
Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm

6. Torque: 25 Nm
7. NOTE: Install the bolt finger tight before final

tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm
8. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

engine.


supercharger:


12.
the engine.
13. CAUTIONS:

14.
15.
within 2 seconds.
16.
level reading.
engine oil.



20.
23.
and Installation).
Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1435
Engine Lifting Brackets Rear
303-1436
Engine Lifting Bracket Front


stands.

3. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12A Intake
Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Installation).
Procedures).
7. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A, General
Procedures).
8. Evacuate the air conditioning (A/C) system.
Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation

and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System - General
9.
10.
11. Refer to: Hood (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and

Installation).
12.
13.
14.
15.
16. Special Tool(s): 303-1435, 303-1436
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37. CAUTION: Take extra care when handling the component.
NOTE: This step requires the aid of another technician.
Remove the special tool supporting the engine.

38. NOTE: This step requires the aid of another
technician.
Using a suitable tool, remove the engine.

Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1435
303-1436

technician.
Using a suitable tool, install the engine.

3. Torque: 45 Nm
4. Torque: 25 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Torque: 25 Nm
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13. Torque: 6 Nm
14. Torque: 3 Nm
15. Torque: 4 Nm
16.
17.
18. Torque: 10 Nm
19. Torque: 12 Nm
20. Torque: 12 Nm
21.
22. Torque: 25 Nm
23. Special Tool(s): 303-1435, 303-1436

24. Torque: 25 Nm
25.
26.
27.

Installation).
29. Torque: 45 Nm
30. Torque: 45 Nm
31. Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation

32. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01, General
Procedures).
Procedures).
Installation).
Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol -
Engine Data
Engine Maximum Engine Maximum Engine Compression
Engine Description Capacity Torque (EEC) (SAE) Power (EEC) (SAE) Ratio Bore Stroke
• 90° "Vee" • 8 4.999 ccm 515 Nm at 3.500 RPM 283 kW at 6.500 RPM 11.5 ± 0.5 92.509 ± 93 ± 0.1
Cylinder • 32 Valves 0.009 mm mm
Engine Firing Order

Firing Order
1:2:7:3:4:5:6:8
Engine Valve Clearance (cold)

Intake Valve Exhaust Valve
N/A 0.25 mm ± 0.02
Spark Plugs
Specification Spark Plug Gap
ILKR6C-10 1 mm
Lubricants,Fluids,Sealers and Adhesives

Engine Oil WSS-M2C925-A
Sealant WSE-M4G323-A6
Core plug and stub pipe retainer WSK-M2G349-A7
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Fluid WSS-M97B44-D
Capacities
Description Liters
Engine oil, initial fill 8.75
Engine oil, service fill with oil filter change 7.25
Cylinder Head and Valve Train
Item Specification
Cylinder head maximum permitted warp (mm) (flatnes specfication)
overall 0.08
Valve guide inner diameter (mm) 5.51 ± 0.01
Intake valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 97.63 ± 0.1
Exhaust valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.39 ± 0.1
Valve stem to guide clearance intake diametrical (mm) 0.022 - 0.057
Valve stem to guide clearance exhaust diametrical (mm) 0.03 - 0.065
Valve head diameter intake (mm) 36 ± 0.1
Valve head diameter exhaust (mm) 30 ± 0.1
Intake valve face angle (degrees) 44.875 ± 0.125
Exhaust valve face angle (degrees) 44.875 ± 0.125
Valve stem diameter intake (mm) 5.4705 ± 0.0075
Valve stem diameter exhaust (mm) 5.4625 ± 0.0075
Valve spring free length (mm) - inlet 43.43
Valve spring free length (mm) - exhaust 46.1
Valve spring installed height (mm) - inlet 34.49
Valve spring installed height (mm) - exhaust 35.1
Camshaft lobe lift intake (mm) 5.5 (low) 10.53 (high)
Camshaft lobe lift exhaust (mm) 9.36
Camshaft journal to cylinder head bearing surface clearance diametrical (mm) 0.025 - 0.065
Camshaft journal diameter - all positions 26.965 ± 0.01
Bearing diameter - all positions 27.01 ± 0.01
Camshaft journal maximum run out limit (mm)
Camshaft journals to end journals 0.03
Camshaft journals to adjacent journals 0.015
Camshaft journal maximum out of round (mm) - all journals 0.005
Torque Specification
NOTE: A = Refer to procedure for correct torque sequence.
Engine cover mounting bolts 10 7 -

Accessory drive belt idler retaining bolt 25 18 -
Power steering pump bracket to engine retaining bolts 25 18 -
Air conditioning compressor retaining bolts 25 18 -
Engine mounting to engine mounting bracket retaining nuts 48 35 -
Engine mounting to subframe retaining nuts 63 46 -
Engine mounting bracket to engine retaining bolts 48 35 -
Crankshaft damper pulley retaining LH threaded bolt 200 + 270° 148 + 270° -
Flexplate retaining bolts 45 + 90° 33 + 90° -
Exhaust manifold heat shield retaining bolts A - -
Exhaust manifold retaining bolts A - -
Engine wiring harness bracket retaining bolts 10 7 -
Knock sensor (KS) retaining bolt 20 14 -
Ignition coil retaining bolts 8 - 71
Spark plugs 20 15 -
Fuel rail retaining bolts A - -
High Pressure fuel pipe retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil filter housing assembly retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil filter cap 28 21 -
Lifting eye bolts 25 + 90° 18 + 90° -
CPS solenoid retaining bolts 12 9 -
Variable valve timing (VVT) oil control solenoid retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor retaining bolts 10 7 -
Camshaft cover retaining bolts 13 10 -
Front upper timing cover retaining bolts 12 9 -
Front lower timing cover retaining bolts A - -
Engine rear cover retaining bolts A - -
VVT to camshaft retaining bolts 32 24 -
Camshaft bearing caps retaining bolts 11 8 -
Primary timing chain fixed guide retaining bolts 12 9 -
Primary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts 12 9 -
Primary timing chain tensioner guide blade retaining bolts 25 18 -
Auxiliary chain tensioner guide retaining bolts 21 15 -
Auxiliary chain fixed guide retaining bolt 12 9 -
Oil pump sprocket retaining bolt 21 15 -
Cylinder head retaining bolts A - -
Engine oil level (EOL) sensor retaining bolt 12 9 -
Oil pan to oil sump body retaining bolts 12 9 -
Oil sump body to engine retaining bolts 25 18 -
Oil pan drain plug 23 17 -
Oil transfer tube to Oil pan body retaining bolts 11 8 -
Oil pump to engine block retaining bolts 25 18 -
Pick-up pipe to oil pump retaining bolts 12 9 -
Windage tray retaining bolts 25 18 -
Engine block coolant draining plug 50 37 -
Connecting Rod bolts
Stage 1 10 7 -
Stage 2 50 37 -
Main bearing cap
M10 bolt Stage 2 57 + 70° 42 + 70° -
M8 bolt Stage 2 33 + 75° 24 + 75° -
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine
EXTERNAL VIEW
INTRODUCTION
The 5.0L NA (naturally aspirated) gasoline engine is a liquid cooled V8 unit featuring direct fuel injection, four overhead
camshafts and four valves per cylinder. All four camshafts incorporate VCT (variable camshaft timing). The intake camshafts
and valves also incorporate CPS (camshaft profile switching).
The main structural components of the engine are all manufactured from aluminum alloy. The engine is built around a very
stiff, lightweight, enclosed V, deep skirt cylinder block. A structural windage tray is bolted to the bottom of the cylinder block
to further improve the block stiffness, minimize NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and help reduce oil foaming. To further
enhance the stiffness of the lower engine structure, a heavily ribbed sump body is installed. The sump body also helps to
reduce engine noise.
Engine Structure

1 - LH (left hand) cylinder head (bank B)
2 - Cylinder block
3 - Windage tray
4 - Sump body
5 - Sump pan
6 - RH (right hand) cylinder head (bank A)
CYLINDER BLOCK
The cylinder block is a 90 degree configuration with cast-in iron cylinder liners and an open deck die-cast coolant jacket. The
low volume coolant jacket gives good warm-up times and low piston noise levels. The longitudinal flow design of the coolant
jacket, with a single cylinder head coolant transfer port in each bank, provides good rigidity and head gasket sealing.
The cylinders in each bank are numbered from 1 to 4, with number 1 at the front.
Engine Data Location

1 - Engine data location
Engine data is marked on the cylinder block at the rear of the RH cylinder bank.
CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft is made from spheroidal graphite cast iron, which, compared with grey cast iron, has higher mechanical
strength, ductility and increased shock resistance. The undercut and rolled fillets also improve strength. Eight counter-
balance weights ensure low vibration levels and the large, cross-drilled main bearing journals are designed to contribute to
stiffness.
An oil groove in the upper half of each main bearing transfers the oil into the crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod
bearings. A thrust washer is installed each side of the top half of the center main bearing.
Crankshaft Data Location

1 - Pin journal classification and plant identification
2 - Main journal classification
3 - Date and time codes
The main bearings are numbered 1 to 5 starting from the front of the engine. There are five grades of main bearing
available, each being color coded. Journal sizes are marked on the rear of the crankshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Clearance (303-00 Engine System - General
Crankshaft Installation

1 - Coolant drain plug
2 - Torque converter access plug
3 - Drive plate
4 - Rear cover
5 - Main bearing cap
6 - Identification mark
7 - Front cover
8 - Front pulley
The main bearing caps are made from cast iron and are cross bolted to increase rigidity. An identification mark on the
bearing cap faces the front of the engine.
At the front of the crankshaft, a tuned torsional vibration damper is incorporated into the crankshaft front pulley. At the rear
of the crankshaft a pressed steel drive plate, with a steel starter ring gear, is installed to transfer drive from the engine to
the transmission. The reluctor ring for the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor is integrated into the perimeter of the drive
plate.
The crankshaft seals are located in the front and rear covers.
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS
The diameter of each piston is graded and precisely matched to each cylinder bore to help reduce noise. In the vertical
plane, the pistons have a slight barrel form, which helps to ensure a reliable oil film is maintained between the piston and
the cylinder bore. A solid film lubricant coating is applied to both reaction faces of the piston to reduce wear and improve
fuel economy.
A three-ring piston-sealing system is used. The steel top ring is treated with a PVD (physical vapor deposition) peripheral
coating. PVD is a coating technique where material can be deposited with improved properties to ensure good cylinder bore
compatibility and wear resistance. A Napier center ring helps cylinder pressure and oil management, while the three-piece oil
control lower ring is produced from nitrided steel.
The connecting rods are forged from high strength steel. The cap is fracture-split from the rod to ensure precision re-
assembly for bearing shell alignment. There are three grades of large end bearing available, each being color coded.
Cap Alignment with Connecting Rod

1 - Alignment marks
2 - Connecting rod
3 - Cap
4 - Bearings
The correct alignment of the cap with the connecting rod is indicated by marks on adjacent faces of the two components.
Connecting Rod and Piston Orientation

A - Front of engine
1 - Alignment mark
2 - LH side (bank B)
3 - Alignment mark
4 - RH side (bank A)
5 - Piston orientation arrow
The orientation of the connecting rods and pistons on the crankshaft are given below:
 Bank A - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod alignment
marks must face the rear of the engine.
 Bank B - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod alignment
marks must face the front of the engine.
CYLINDER HEADS
NOTE: RH (right-hand) (A bank) cylinder head shown, LH (left-hand) (B bank) cylinder head similar.
The cylinder heads are manufactured in gravity die cast aluminum alloy and are unique for each cylinder bank. Deep-seated
bolts reduce distortion and secure the cylinder heads to the cylinder block.
Each cylinder is served by four valves. To help achieve the required gas-flow characteristics, these are arranged
asymmetrically around the cylinder bore. Each cylinder has a centrally mounted fuel injector and spark plug.
The cylinder head gasket is of a multi-layer steel construction.

EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOTE: LH (B bank) installation shown, RH (A bank) installation similar.

1 - Cylinder head
2 - Gasket
3 - Heat shield
4 - Gasket
5 - Exhaust manifold
6 - Bolt (8 off)
7 - Heat shield
8 - Bolt (4 off)
9 - Spacer (8 off)
The high SiMo (silicon molybdenum) cast iron exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder bank. Each exhaust manifold
installation includes two metal gaskets and two heat shields. Spacers on the securing bolts allow the manifolds to expand
and contract with changes of temperature while maintaining the clamping loads.
www.JagDocs.com
VALVE TRAIN

1 - VCT solenoids
2 - CPS solenoids
3 - Inverted tooth timing chain
4 - Nylon chain guide
5 - Auxiliary chain tensioner
7 - Oil pump drive
8 - Auxiliary drive camshaft
9 - Timing chain tensioner
10 - Tensioner lever
11 - VCT unit
Camshafts

1 - Intake camshaft
2 - Exhaust camshaft
The lightweight valve train provides good economy and noise levels and is chain driven from the crankshaft.
Double overhead camshafts on each cylinder head operate the valves. For each cylinder head, an inverted tooth timing chain
transfers drive from the crankshaft to the VCT unit on the front of each camshaft. Graded tappets enable setting of exhaust
valve clearances. Switchable tappets with hydraulic lash adjusters are installed on the intake valves.
Each timing chain has a hydraulic tensioner operated by engine oil pressure. The chain tensioners incorporate a ratchet
mechanism, which maintains tension while the engine is stopped to eliminate start-up noise. The chains are lubricated with
engine oil from jets located at the front of the engine block. Nylon chain guides control chain motion on the drive side.
Variable Camshaft Timing

1 - VCT units
2 - Intake camshaft VCT solenoid
3 - Camshaft position sensors
4 - Exhaust camshaft VCT solenoid
The VCT system varies the timing of the intake and exhaust camshafts to deliver optimum engine power, efficiency and
emissions. The timing of the intake camshafts has a range of 62 degrees of crankshaft angle. The timing of the exhaust
camshafts has a range of 50 degrees of crankshaft angle.
In the base timing position:
 The intake camshafts are fully retarded.

 The exhaust camshafts are fully advanced.
VCT Operating Ranges

Camshaft Valve Opens Valve Closes
Intake - Low Lift 27 degrees BTDC (before top dead center) to 35 degrees ATDC (after top dead 187 to 249 degrees
center) ATDC
Intake - High 37 degrees BTDC to 25 degrees ATDC 213 to 275 degrees
Lift ATDC
Exhaust 244 to 194 degrees BTDC 6 to 56 degrees ATDC
The system consists of a VCT unit and a VCT solenoid for each camshaft. The ECM (engine control module) controls the
system using PWM (pulse width modulation) signals to the VCT solenoids.
The torsional energy generated by the valve springs and the inertia of the valve train components are used to operate the
system.
Variable Camshaft Timing Units
The VCT units change the position of the camshafts in relation to the timing chains.

1 - Bolt (3 off)
2 - VCT unit
3 - Filter
4 - Camshaft
5 - Inner plate
6 - Housing and sprocket
7 - Rotor assembly
8 - Reed plate
9 - Spring and lock pin
10 - Spring (3 off)
12 - Spring (2 off)
14 - Spring
15 - Dowel pin
16 - Bias spring
- Snap ring
17
18 - Reluctor ring
19 - Center plate
20 - Snap ring
21 - Screw (6 off)
22 - Spool valve
23 - Outer plate
Each VCT unit is attached to the camshaft by three bolts. A rotor assembly and a reed plate are installed inside a sprocket
housing, which consists of a sprocket, an outer plate and an inner plate held together by six screws.
A reluctor ring, for the CMP (camshaft position) sensor, a center plate and a bias spring are installed at the front of the VCT
unit. The ends of the bias spring locate on the center plate assembly and the sprocket housing, to give a turning moment to
the camshaft in the advance direction. A snap ring locates the reluctor ring on to a sleeve installed in the center of the rotor
assembly. The opposite end of the sleeve locates in a bore in the front face of the camshaft, which contains a filter.
A spring and spool valve are installed in the rotor assembly sleeve and retained by a snap ring. The spring keeps the spool
valve in contact with the armature of the related VCT solenoid.
Each VCT unit is supplied with engine oil from an oil gallery in the cylinder head, through the camshaft front bearing cap and
a bore in the center of the camshaft.
Variable Camshaft Timing Solenoids
The VCT solenoids control the position of the spool valves in the VCT units.
The VCT solenoids are installed in the front upper timing covers, immediately in front of their related VCT units. Each VCT
solenoid is secured with two screws and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface with the
engine harness.
Each VCT solenoid incorporates a spindle that acts on the spool valve in the related VCT unit to advance and retard the
camshaft timing. The VCT solenoids operate independently and are controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM.
Variable Camshaft Timing Operation
When the engine is running, the compression and expansion of the valve springs causes momentary increases and decreases
in the torque acting on the camshafts. These momentary changes of torque are sensed in the VCT units and used to change
the camshaft timing.
Camshaft Torsional Energy (For a Single Valve Event)

A - Camshaft torque
B - Camshaft rotation (degrees)
C - Valve opening
D - Peak lift
E - Valve closing
1 - 1000 rev/min
2 - 4000 rev/min
3 - 7000 rev/min
4 - Inertia effects from valve train rotating components
5 - Force caused by valve spring
6 - Bias torque from friction
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Base Timing
NOTE: Intake camshaft VCT unit shown. For exhaust camshaft VCT unit, read advance for retard and retard for advance.

1 - Advance chamber
2 - Retard chamber
3 - Sprocket housing
4 - Rotor assembly
5 - Lock pin
6 - Sleeve
7 - Engine oil supply from camshaft
8 - Inlet check valve
9 - Lock pin drain
10 - Spool valve
11 - Advance check valve
12 - Retard check valve
NOTE: The following description is for intake camshaft VCT units. For exhaust camshaft VCT units, read advance for retard,
and retard for advance.
At engine start-up, once the engine oil pressure in the camshaft is sufficient to open the inlet check valve, engine oil flows
across the spool valve, through the advance and retard check valves and into the advance and retard chambers. During the
start cycle, the ECM signals the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve into the sleeve and connect the lock pin to inlet oil
pressure. The inlet oil pressure causes the lock pin to retract from the inner plate and unlock the rotor assembly and
camshaft from the sprocket housing.
There is a constant supply of oil to the VCT to ensure the unit remains filled during operation.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Advance
To advance the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve so that the advance
chamber oil passage is closed and the retard chamber oil passage is connected to inlet oil.
Each momentary increase of the torque acting on the camshaft generates a pressure pulse in the retard chamber. Oil moves
from the retard chamber, through the spool valve and the advance check valve to the advance chamber, to equalize the
pressures in the two chambers. The displacement of oil from the retard chamber causes the rotor assembly to advance in
relation to the sprocket housing. Each momentary decrease of torque acting on the camshaft also generates a pressure pulse
in the advance chamber, but, with the advance chamber oil passage closed, no movement of oil between the advance and
retard chambers occurs and the rotor assembly cannot move in the retard direction.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Null
Once the camshaft has reached the required timing position the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to set the spool
valve in the null position. In the null position, the advance and retard chamber oil passages are both closed by the spool
valve and the rotor assembly is hydraulically locked to the sprocket housing.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Retard
To retard the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve to close the retard
chamber oil passage and connect the advance chamber oil passage to the inlet oil.
Each momentary decrease of the torque acting on the camshaft causes oil to transfer from the advance chamber, through
the spool valve and the retard check valve to the retard chamber, and so retard the camshaft timing.
Camshaft Profile Switching
The CPS (camshaft profile switching) system switches the intake valves between two cam profiles which have different lift
and period. The low lift profile improves driveability and emissions at lower engine speeds. The high lift profile improves
power and torque output at higher engine speeds.
The intake camshafts have three lobes for each valve. The two outer lobes have identical profiles that produce the high lift of
10.53 mm (0.415 in.). The central lobe produces the low lift of 5.50 mm (0.217 in.). Switching between cam profiles is
performed by a switchable tappet on each intake valve. The switchable tappets are operated by engine oil controlled by a
CPS solenoid on each cylinder head. Operation of the CPS solenoids is controlled by the ECM.
Camshaft Profile Switching Solenoids
The CPS solenoids control the supply of engine oil pressure to the locking pins in the switchable tappets, to switch the
tappets between the two cam profiles.
A CPS solenoid is installed on the rear of each cylinder block. Each CPS solenoid has a pintle installed in a sleeve, which
incorporates oil inlet and outlet holes. The sleeve is installed at the junction of oil galleries in the cylinder head, with the oil
inlet and outlet holes aligned with the galleries. Movement of the pintle in the sleeve controls a connection between the oil
galleries. When the CPS solenoid is energized, the pintle connects an oil supply gallery to the gallery along the outboard side
of the switchable tappets. When the CPS solenoid is de-energized, the oil gallery along the outboard side of the switchable
tappets is connected to drain.
The CPS solenoids receive a fused battery supply from the main relay. The ECM switches a ground connection to operate the
solenoids.
Switchable Tappets

1 - Outer tappet
2 - Outer locking pin
3 - Inner locking pin
4 - Return spring
5 - Lash adjuster oil inlet
6 - Lash adjuster
7 - Lost motion spring
8 - CPS oil inlet
9 - Anti-rotation lug
The switchable tappets are installed on the intake valves, in bores in the cylinder heads. The cylinder heads incorporate
engine oil galleries along the inboard and outboard sides of the bores. The inboard oil galleries (between the tappets and the
spark plug/fuel injector bores) supply an oil feed to the locking pins in the switchable tappets. The outboard oil galleries
(over the inlet ports) supply an oil feed to the hydraulic lash adjusters in the switchable tappets.
Each switchable tappet consists of inner and outer tappets, which can operate independently or be locked together by locking
pins. A hydraulic lash adjuster on the bottom of the inner tappet locates on the intake valve stem.
In low lift, the intake valve lift is controlled by the inner tappets, which run on the center lobes of the intake camshafts. The
outer tappets run on the outer lobes of the intake camshafts, and move up and down the inner tappets without affecting the
valve lift. The lost motion springs keep the outer tappets in contact with the outer lobes. Movement of the inner tappets is
transferred to the intake valves through the hydraulic lash adjusters.
In high lift, engine oil is supplied to the locking pins, which lock the outer tappets to the inner tappets. Intake valve lift is
controlled by the outer tappets, which run on the outer lobes of the intake camshafts. Movement of the outer tappets is
transferred to the intake valves through the locking pins, the inner tappets and the hydraulic lash adjusters.
1 - Intake camshaft
2 - Inner tappet
3 - Outer tappet
4 - Outer cam profile (high lift)
5 - Inner cam profile (low lift)
6 - Locking pin oil pressure inlet
7 - Outer locking pin
8 - Inner locking pin
9 - Outer tappet lost motion spring
10 - Valve spring
Camshaft Profile Switching Operation
The switching point is speed and load dependent. This strategy ensures that switching occurs at air flow neutral points in the
engine's operation and is imperceptible to the driver.
At engine speeds from idle up to the range of 2825 - 4250 rev/min (depending on engine load), the CPS solenoids are de-
energized and the switchable tappets are set to low lift. At engine speeds above the 2825 - 4250 rev/min range, the CPS
solenoids are energized by the ECM and the switchable tappets are set to high lift. There is a 200 rev/min hysteresis when
switching from high lift to low lift with decreasing engine speed. Switching between lift settings occurs within one revolution
of the camshaft.
Switching is only enabled at engine oil temperatures of 20 ºC (68 ºF) and above. At oil temperatures below 20 °C (68 ºF),
CPS operation is disabled and the switchable tappets remain in the low lift setting. CPS operation is also disabled if a CPS
solenoid fails. When CPS operation is disabled, engine speed is limited to 5000 rev/min.
The ECM can diagnose the operation of the CPS solenoids and store fault related DTC (diagnostic trouble code) if it detects a
failure.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM

1 - Oil pump outlet tube
2 - Anti-drain valve
3 - Oil cooler
4 - Oil filter
5 - Timing chain lubrication jets
6 - Oil evacuation tube
7 - Oil pump
8 - Oil temperature and level sensor
9 - Oil pick-up
The oil pump is attached to the underside of the windage tray. The input shaft of the oil pump is driven from the front of the
crankshaft, by the auxiliary chain, at 0.87 engine speed.
The oil pump draws oil from the sump pan through a centrally mounted pick-up pipe. The oil is pressurized and pumped
through an output tube to the cylinder block. After passing through an anti-drain valve and a plate type oil cooler, the oil is
filtered by a replaceable cartridge installed on the front of the RH cylinder head.
The output from the oil filter is distributed through oil galleries in the cylinder heads and cylinder block. All moving parts are
lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for the VCT system, the CPS system, the timing chain
tensioners and the timing chain lubrication jets.
The oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the rapid
return of the oil to the sump pan. System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the LH cylinder head cover.
An oil evacuation tube is installed to allow oil to be drawn from the sump pan. The upper end of the oil evacuation tube is
located under the oil filler cap.
An oil drain plug is installed in the RH side of the sump pan.
Oil Pump Nominal Operating Pressures

Engine Speed, rev/min Temperature, °C (°F) Pressure, bar (lbf/in2)
Idle 20 (68) 2.0 (29.0)
1500 20 (68) 6.0 (87.0)
3000 40 (104) 6.2 (90.0)
3000 110 (230) 5.0 (72.5)
3000 130 (266) 4.0 (58.0)
Oil Level Monitoring
Oil level monitoring is provided by an oil level and temperature sensor that measures the oil level in the sump pan. The oil
level can be displayed in the message center of the instrument cluster.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor
The oil level and temperature sensor supplies the ECM with a signal containing the level and temperature of the oil in the
sump pan. The oil level and temperature sensor is secured to the bottom of the sump pan with three screws and sealed with
a gasket.
The oil level and temperature sensor sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically upward and measures the time taken for the pulse
to be reflected back from the top surface of the oil. This time is compared with the time taken for an ultrasonic pulse to
travel a reference distance within the oil level and temperature sensor to determine the oil level. The oil level reading is
combined with the oil temperature reading and transmitted in a PWM signal to the ECM.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor Specifications
Feature Details
Power source Battery Voltage
Level Accuracy ±2 mm (±0.08 in.) at temperatures of -30 °C (-22 °F)) and above; (±4 mm (±0.16 in.) at
temperatures below -30 °C (-22 °F))

Temperature Accuracy ±2 °C (±3.6 °F)
Operating Level Range 116 to 147 mm (4.57 to 5.79 in.)
Operating Temperature -40 to 160 °C (-40 to 320 °F)
Range
Oil Level Check
For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
For accuracy, oil level checks should be performed with the vehicle on level ground when the oil is hot. The vehicle needs to
stand for approximately 10 minutes, after the engine is switched off, to allow the oil to drain back into the sump pan and the
oil level to stabilize. The oil level system will not give a reading until the oil level has stabilized.
With the ignition on, the engine stopped and the transmission in P (park), repeatedly press the trip button on the end of the
LH multifunction switch until the oil level icon and applicable message are displayed in the fuel gage/trip computer area of
the message center, as shown below:

A - Oil level is between 50% and 100% of recommended level. No top-up required.
B - Oil level is between 12.5% and 50% percent of recommended level. Add 0.5 liter (0.53 US
quart) of oil.
C - Oil level is between 0% and 12.5% of recommended level. Add 1 liter (1.06 US quarts) of oil.
D - Oil level is above maximum for safe operation. Reduce oil level to recommended level.
E - Oil level is below minimum for safe operation. Add 1.5 liters (1.59 US quarts) of oil, then
recheck level.
F - Oil level is stabilizing. Wait 10 minutes and then recheck level. If this display is accompanied
by the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT, a fault with the oil level
monitoring system is indicated.
System Fault Warning
If there is a fault with the system, in addition to being displayed during an oil level check, the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT will be temporarily displayed when the ignition is first switched on.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1484
Vacuum Pump, Oil Drain
303-1484-01
Adapter for 303-1484
Draining
scalding.
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is parked on level ground.
1.
the engine.
2. CAUTION: Allow 10 minutes from turning the

engine off before starting oil extraction.
4.
cover.
5.
 Using the oil vacuum pump drain the oil out
through the oil extraction tube.
Special Tool(s): 303-1484, 303-1484-01
6.
 Remove the oil vacuum pump.
7.
8. NOTE: Discard the O-ring seals.

Filling

clean engine oil.

first.
 Torque: 25 Nm

engine.


supercharger:

4.

6.

the engine.
7. CAUTIONS:

8.
9.
within 2 seconds.
10.
level reading.
engine oil.



14.
17.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Draining
scalding.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the
engine.
2.
4.
cover.
 Make sure that the O-ring seal is exposed.
5. NOTE: Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain from the oil
filter housing.
7. Remove and discard the oil filter element.


and Installation).
10. CAUTIONS:
Allow at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to

drain.

Filling

material.
NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Torque: 24 Nm
and Installation).

clean engine oil.

first.
 Torque: 25 Nm

engine.


supercharger:

6.

8.
the engine.
9. CAUTIONS:


10.
www.JagDocs.com
11.

within 2 seconds.
12.
level reading.
engine oil.



16.
19.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Check


and Installation).
4. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
NOTE: Collect the engine oil in a clean container.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
Make sure that the crankshaft is fully locked.
7. Using a suitable marker, mark the position of the

crankshaft pulley as illustrated.
8.
9. NOTE: Discard the seal.

11. If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft position

to allow correct installation of the special tool.
Install the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613
12. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when

adjusting the crankshaft position.
NOTE: If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be

installed, adjustment of the fuel pump camshaft
timing will be required.
 If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft

position to allow correct installation of the
special tool.

 If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be
installed, adjustment of the fuel pump
camshaft timing will be required.
Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing

Adjustment (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L
13. Remove the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613
14. NOTE: Install a new seal.
Torque: 12 Nm
15.

17. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm

engine.


supercharger:


22.
the engine.
23. CAUTIONS:


24.
25.
within 2 seconds.
26.
level reading.
engine oil.



30.
33.

and Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Adjustment


3. Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check (303-01B Engine -
V8 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
5. CAUTIONS:

Inspect the 3 timing chain oil nozzles for

signs of damage, install as necessary.
6. NOTE: Using a suitable tie strap, position the
tensioner to one side.
Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613

Torque: 12 Nm

9. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm

engine.


supercharger:


14.
the engine.
15. CAUTIONS:


16.
17.
within 2 seconds.
18.
level reading.
engine oil.



22.
25.
and Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft LH
Removal


stands.

Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:



Installation
1. CAUTIONS:


locations.


Torque: 3 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm

position.
NOTE: On vehicles without supercharger the inlet camshaft

valve clearances cannot be checked.
5. CAUTIONS:


install procedure.

Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft RH
Removal


stands.

Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:



Installation
1. CAUTIONS:


locations.


Torque: 3 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm

position.
NOTE: On vehicles without supercharger the inlet camshaft

valve clearances cannot be checked.
5. CAUTIONS:


install procedure.

Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Front Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1434
Remover/Installer, Front Crankshaft Seal
Removal
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
Cables, General Procedures).
2. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Do not over tighten the crankshaft front seal. Failure to follow this
Take extra care not to damage the seal.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
303-1437
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer
303-1438
Crankshaft Damper Bolt Remover/Installer
303-1439
Crankshaft Damper Removal Plate
303-1440
Crankshaft Damper Removal/Installation Stud
303-1441
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer Body
303-1448
Locking Tool
Removal

stands.

3. Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-
03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
5.
6. CAUTION: Before removing the crankshaft

pulley bolt, note the numbers on the bolt head. If
the bolt head shows 10.9, the bolt must be
removed counter clockwise. If the bolt head shows
12.9, the bolt must be removed clockwise. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the crankshaft.
Note the markings on the crankshaft pulley bolt.

7.
Special Tool(s): 303-1437, 303-1438
9. Torque: 65 Nm


NOTE: The crankshaft pulley bolt will be very tight.
NOTE: The thread is left handed.
12.
13. NOTE: If the crankshaft damper is fitted with an

early RH thread crankshaft bolt then the pulley can
be removed with a standard puller.

15.
www.JagDocs.com
19.
20. CAUTION: Discard the friction washer after

removing the crankshaft pulley.

21.
22.
Installation
1. Apply RTV sealant to the crankshaft pulley keyway.
2. CAUTION: Install a new friction washer

before installing the crankshaft pulley.


6.

10. Apply loctite 270 to the thread of the bolts.

installed.
14. Torque: 65 Nm


16. Torque: 200 Nm
17. NOTE: The use of a torque multiplyer capable of

600Nm will be required.
 Torque: 270°
 Make sure that the socket is turned through
270 degrees not the torque wrench.
18.
20. Torque: 65 Nm
21.

23. Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-
03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Rear Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1442
303-1443
Removal
1. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal

and Installation).
2.
Installation
Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443
Torque: 11 Nm
3. Torque: 11 Nm
4. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal

and Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
5. Refer to: Intake Manifold (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
6.
7.
8. CAUTION: Discard the seal.
9.
10.

13.
14.
15.
17.
18.
19. CAUTIONS:



Installation



CAUTIONS:
The head gasket must be installed over the

cylinder block dowels.


Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 90 degrees.
Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 120 degrees.

7. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:


10. Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 12 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
13.
14.
15.
16. NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 12 Nm
17.
18. CAUTION: Install new o-ring seals
Torque: 12 Nm
19.
20. Torque: 20 Nm
21. Torque: 20 Nm
22. Torque: 12 Nm

24. Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head RH
Removal

4. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
6.
7.
8. CAUTIONS:
Discard the seal.
LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
9.
10.

13.

15.

18.
19. CAUTIONS:



Installation


must be measured.

2. CAUTIONS:
Use care when installing the cylinder head.

Damage to the cylinder block, cylinder head or
cylinder head gasket may result.
The head gasket must be installed over the

cylinder block dowels.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 20 Nm
4. Torque: 35 Nm
5. Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 90 degrees.
6. Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 120 degrees.

7. Torque: 25 Nm
8. Torque: 12 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:



Torque: 12 Nm
11. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be

installed.
NOTE: Install a new engine oil filter.

12. Torque: 12 Nm
13. Torque: 20 Nm
14. Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
17. Torque: 25 Nm
18. Torque: 25 Nm

20. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount LH
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).
All vehicles


5.
Torque: 35 Nm
7. Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
8. Torque: 63 Nm
9. Torque: 48 Nm

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount RH
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).
All vehicles


5.
Torque: 35 Nm
7. Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
8. Torque: 10 Nm
9. Torque: 63 Nm
10. Torque: 48 Nm
Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold
Special Tool(s)
303-1444-01
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
303-1444-02
E115262
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
All vehicles


4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

correct.
12.
All vehicles
13.

15.

Installation
All vehicles
1. Torque: 45 Nm
Special Tool(s): 303-1444-01, 303-1444-02

Special Tool(s): 303-1444-02

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 18 Nm
8.

10.

11. Torque: 100 Nm
installed.

correct.
Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
13. Torque: 25 Nm
14. Torque: 25 Nm
15. Torque: 10 Nm
16. Torque: 10 Nm
17. Torque: 25 Nm
18. Torque: 3 Nm
19. Torque: 3 Nm

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold RH
Removal

4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Torque: 48 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
7. Torque: 100 Nm
8.
9.


Installation
1. Torque: 45 Nm


installed.
Torque: 10 Nm

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 18 Nm
8.
9. Torque: 12 Nm
10. Torque: 48 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
12. Torque: 100 Nm
13.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Flexplate
Removal

Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:

tightening.


removal.

rotated.


diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1: 45 Nm
Stage 2: 90°
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Intake Manifold
Removal

4. Refer to: Throttle Body (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls -
V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.
6.
7. Torque: 8 Nm
8.
9. Torque: 8 Nm

Torque: 25 Nm
11.
12. Torque: 10 Nm
13. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

2. Torque: 25 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Cooler
Removal


stands.

Procedures).
5.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.
Torque: 13 Nm
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that these components are

installed to the noted removal position.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

tightening.


Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Filter Element
Removal
2.
 Allow the engine oil to drain from the oil
filter element housing for two minutes.
3.
4.
Installation
1.
2. Torque: 25 Nm
3. Check and top up the engine oil.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan
Removal

stands.

2. Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine
Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
3.
Installation


Torque: 12 Nm
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine

Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan Extension
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
303-1442
303-1443
Removal


stands.

4. Refer to: Engine (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Installation).
5. CAUTIONS:


removal.

rotated.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

14. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
15.
16. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
17.
18.
19.
20. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
Discard the fuel pipes.
21. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
22.

fluids.

fluids.
25.
fluids.

fluids.

fluids.
29.
30.

dismantling.
32. NOTE: Discard the component.

33.
34. NOTE: Make sure to use the aluminium lug

provided on the oil pan extension to lever against.

Installation
1. Torque: 8 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:


sealing material.
 Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite

5901G) to the areas shown, and tighten the
bolts within 7 minutes.
Torque: 25 Nm
4. CAUTIONS:


sealing material.

Torque: 12 Nm

within 7 minutes.
NOTE: Install new lower timing cover.

stage.
 Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm

10. Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443
13. Remove the special tools.

Torque: 11 Nm
15. Torque: 11 Nm
16.
 Torque: 11 Nm



 Torque: 11 Nm
20.



 Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
24.
25. CAUTIONS:

engine oil.


cover to one side.

 Torque: 11 Nm
cover to one side.

 Torque: 11 Nm
29.
 Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
30.
 Torque:
Unions 21 Nm

 Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
32.
 Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
33. Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
34.
35. Torque: 25 Nm
36. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 8 Nm
37.
38. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm

40.
41. Torque: 40 Nm
42. Torque: 25 Nm
43. Torque: 12 Nm

Torque: 25 Nm
45.
Torque: 48 Nm
47. CAUTIONS:

tightening.


rotated.


diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1: 45 Nm
Stage 2: 90°
48. Refer to: Engine (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pump
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

6.

seals.
Installation
1. Lubricate and install the new O-ring seals.
2. Torque:
M8 25 Nm
M6 12 Nm
3. Lubricate and install a new O-ring seal.
4. Torque: 12 Nm
5. Torque: 21 Nm


NOTE: Tsubaki timing drive only.
Torque: 21 Nm

sprocket markings.

NOTE: INA timing drive only.
Torque: 21 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Timing Cover
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-05
and Installation).
4. Refer to: Thermostat Housing - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03A Engine
Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
5. Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
6. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Installation




Torque: 12 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm

within 7 minutes.

stage.
Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
8. Torque: 12 Nm
9. Torque: 12 Nm
10. Torque: 12 Nm
11. Torque: 40 Nm

tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm

14. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
15. Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
Installation).
17. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-05
and Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part Number:
INA Timing Drive
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal

and Installation).
4.


7.
8.
9.


11.
12.
13.

www.JagDocs.com
15.
16. CAUTION: Discard the friction washer.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Install a new friction washer.

2. Torque: 12 Nm
3.
 Install the special tool to each Camshaft.
 Torque: 10 Nm
4.
not as shown.
5.
camshafts.
6. CAUTIONS:


in camshafts.
cylinder head.
7. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.

timing (VVT) units.
8.
positions shown.
9. Torque: 25 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
12. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.
13.
positions shown.
14. Torque: 25 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
17.

19.
side.
20.

21. CAUTIONS:


 Torque: 35 Nm


first.
 Torque: 32 Nm
23.
 Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25. CAUTIONS:


 Torque: 35 Nm
Torque: 32 Nm
27.
28.
29.
30.

installation.
Torque: 50 Nm
32.


35.
36.
37.
38. CAUTIONS:


tool(s).

40.
41.
42.
43. Torque: 10 Nm
and Installation).

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part Number:
Tsubaki Timing Drive
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal


3.

and Installation).
7.
8.
9.
11.
12.
13.
15.
16. CAUTION: Discard the friction washers.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Install new friction washers.
2. Torque: 12 Nm
3.
 Install the special tool to the LH bank Camshafts.
 Torque: 10 Nm
4.
not as shown.
5.
camshafts.
6. CAUTIONS:


in camshafts.
cylinder head.
7. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.

timing (VVT) units.
8.
positions shown.
9. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.

12.
positions shown.
13. Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
15.

17.

19.
side.
20.
21. CAUTIONS:


 Torque: 35 Nm

first.
 Torque: 32 Nm
23.
 Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25. CAUTIONS:


 Torque: 35 Nm

Torque: 32 Nm
27.
28.
29.
30.

installation.
Torque: 50 Nm
32.

34.
35.
36.

38. CAUTIONS:


tool(s).


40.
41.
42.
43. Torque: 10 Nm
and Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover LH
Removal

2. Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4.
5.
6.
Installation
Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover RH
Removal

2. Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
3.
4.
5.
Installation
Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L
4. Torque: 48 Nm
5.
6.
7. Torque:
Stage 1: 40 Nm
Stage 2: 180°
Installation

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part Number:
INA Timing Drive
Removal
1. Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

stands.

4.
5.
6.

faces.
Installation

mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 21 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm
sprocket markings.

Torque: 21 Nm

Specifications).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part Number:
Tsubaki Timing Drive
Removal

Specifications).

stands.

4.
5.
6.

faces.
Installation

mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3. Torque: 21 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm

Torque: 21 Nm

Specifications).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Lower Timing Cover
Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal


stands.

4.
5.

7.
Installation

within 7 minutes.

stage.
Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
4. Torque: 12 Nm

6. Torque: 40 Nm

tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm

engine.


supercharger:


12.
the engine.
13. CAUTIONS:


14.
15.
within 2 seconds.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
level reading.
engine oil.



20.
23.

and Installation).
Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1435
303-1436


stands.

4. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12B Intake
Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Installation).
Procedures).
Procedures).

9.
10.
11.
12.

Installation).
14.
15.
16. Special Tool(s): 303-1435, 303-1436
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
Remove the engine support.

technician.
Using a suitable tool, remove the engine.

Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1435
303-1436

technician.
Using a suitable tool, install the engine.
Using the special tool, support the engine.

3. Torque: 45 Nm
4. Torque: 25 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Torque: 25 Nm
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13. Torque: 6 Nm
14. Torque: 3 Nm
15. Torque: 4 Nm
16.
17.
18. Torque: 10 Nm
19. Torque: 12 Nm
20. Torque: 12 Nm
21.
22.
23.
24. Special Tool(s): 303-1436, 303-1435
25. Torque: 25 Nm
26.

Installation).
28. Torque: 45 Nm
29. Torque: 45 Nm

Procedures).
Procedures).
Installation).
Installation).
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Capacities
Liters
Vehicles without supercharger 9.5
Vehicles with supercharger 13.8
Specifications
Coolant fluid WSS M97B44-D
Coolant concentration - will provide frost protection to -40°C (-40°F) 50%
Specific gravity of coolant at 20°C (68°F), to protect against frost down to -40°C (-40°F) 1.068
NOTE: The coolant is of the Organic Acid Technology (OAT) type and must not be mixed with other types of coolant.
Item Specifications
Cooling system type Pressurised, thermostatically controlled with remote header
tank
Radiator Cross flow with separate sub cooled section at top to feed
trans oil cooler
Expansion tank Remote - fitted with a bleed screw and low coolant level
sensor
Pressure cap rating 1.4 bar (140 kPa) (20 lbf/in²)
Thermostat:
Starts to open 88° C (190° F)
Fully open 96° C (205° F)
Cooling fan Electronically controlled
Coolant pump Centrifugal flow impellor, belt driven from crankshaft
Low temperature radiator (Intercooler circuit) - vehicles Cross flow, twin pass in front of condenser
with supercharger
Auxiliary Coolant pump (Intercooler circuit) - vehicles with Centrifugal type, 35w 12V DC electric motor
supercharger
Engine oil cooler Oil to coolant located in V of engine
Transmission oil cooler Oil to coolant plate type cooler located on LH chassis
longitudinal
Auxiliary radiator SC only Cross flow single pass located in front of and below low
temperature radiator
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Coolant outlet pipe bolts 11 8 -
Upper water outlet pipe bolts 11 8 -
Coolant expansion tank retaining bolt 7 - 62
Coolant fan motor and shroud retaining nuts 7 - 62
Thermostat Housing retaining bolt 10 7 -
Radiator upper mounting bracket retaining bolts 25 18 -
Radiator drain plug 2 - 18
Coolant bleed screw(s) 3 2 -
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Cooling

1 - Engine vent hose
2 - Coolant expansion tank
3 - Coolant supply/expansion hose
4 - Engine oil cooler
5 - Engine block heater (110 V version shown) or drain plug
6 - Radiator upper hose
7 - Transmission fluid cooler
8 - Transmission fluid cooler supply and return hoses
9 - Throttle body heater hose
10 - Heater manifold
-
11 Heater core supply and return hoses
12 - Cooling fan
13 - Radiator lower hose
14 - Thermostat
15 - Coolant pump
16 - Radiator
17 - Throttle
18 - Outlet tube

1 - Engine vent hose
2 - Coolant expansion tank
3 - Coolant supply/expansion hose
5 - Engine block heater (110 V version shown) or drain plug
-
6 Radiator upper hose
7 - Supercharger cooling system connecting hose
8 - Auxiliary radiator supply hose
9 - Auxiliary radiator
11 - Transmission fluid cooler supply and return hoses
12 - Throttle body heater hose
13 - Heater manifold
14 - Heater core supply and return hoses
15 - Auxiliary radiator return hose
16 - Cooling fan
17 - Radiator lower hose
18 - Thermostat
19 - Coolant pump
20 - Radiator
21 - Throttle
22 - Outlet tube
INTRODUCTION
The engine cooling system maintains the engine within an optimum temperature range under changing ambient and engine
operating conditions. The system is a pressurized expansion tank system with continuous bleeds to separate air from the
coolant and prevent the formation of air locks. The engine cooling system also provides:
 Heating for:
 The passenger compartment. For additional information, refer to 412-02 Heating and Ventilation.
 The throttle body.
 Cooling for:
 The engine oil cooler. For additional information, refer to 303-01A Engine - 5.0L, Vehicles With: Supercharger or 303-
01B Engine - 5.0L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger.
 The transmission fluid cooler. For additional information, refer to 307-02 Transmission Cooling.
The primary components of the engine cooling system are the:
 Coolant pump.
 Thermostat.
 Radiator.
 Auxiliary radiator (SC (supercharger) vehicles only).
 Cooling fan.
 Expansion tank.
 Engine oil cooler.
 Outlet tube and heater manifold.
 Connecting hoses and pipes.
COOLANT PUMP

1 - Inlet connection
2 - Pump body
3 - Outlet flange to RH cylinder head
4 - Outlet to engine oil cooler
5 - Outlet flange to LH cylinder head
6 - Pulley
7 - Bleed pipe connection (containing check valve)
The body of the coolant pump contains an impeller attached to a shaft supported in a bearing assembly. The impeller is
driven by a pulley, pressed on to the front of the shaft, which is driven by the accessory drive belt. For additional
information, refer to 303-05 Accessory Drive.
Two coolant outlet flanges attach the coolant pump to the front of the cylinder heads. A pipe connects a further coolant
outlet to a pipe from the engine oil cooler. A bleed connector is installed in the front of the coolant pump, adjacent to the
coolant inlet connection from the thermostat. A check valve is incorporated into the bleed connection.
THERMOSTAT

1 - Screw (3 off)
2 - Lower body
3 - Upper body
4 - Thermostat
5 - Seal
The thermostat is a multi-stage device located in the coolant pump inlet to provide fast response and control of the engine
outlet temperature.
The thermostat allows rapid engine warm-up by preventing coolant flow through the radiator and by limiting coolant flow
through the cylinder block when the engine is cold. During warm-up and at engines speeds above approximately 1800
rev/min, a by-pass valve opens to control the coolant flow and pressure, to protect the engine components. When the
thermostat opening reaches 6 mm (0.24 in.), the by-pass flow is shut-off. When the thermostat opening exceeds 6 mm
(0.24 in.), the radiator coolant flow is further controlled up to the point where the thermostat is fully open. At this point
maximum radiator coolant flow is achieved to provide maximum cooling.
On both naturally aspirated and supercharger vehicles, the thermostat begins to open at 88 - 90 °C (190 - 194 °F) and is
fully open at 102 °C (216 °F).
RADIATOR
Radiator (Naturally Aspirated Vehicles)

1 - Locating spigot (2 off)
2 - Upper hose connection
3 - Support (2 off)
4 - Drain plug
5 - Lower hose connection
6 - Transmission fluid cooler inlet hose connection
www.JagDocs.com
Radiator (Supercharger Vehicles)

1 - Locating spigot (2 off)
2 - Upper hose connection
3 - Supercharger cooling system connection
4 - Auxiliary radiator inlet hose connection
5 - Support (2 off)
6 - Drain plug
7 - Lower hose connection
8 - Auxiliary radiator outlet hose connection
9 - Transmission fluid cooler inlet hose connection
The radiator is a cross flow type with an aluminum core and plastic end tanks. The radiator is part of the cooling module and
is attached to the vehicle by locating spigots and supports integrated into the end tanks. The supports are installed in rubber
bushes located in mounting brackets on the front subframe. The locating spigots are installed in rubber bushes located in
mounting brackets on the front crossmember.
The two end tanks incorporate connections for the upper and lower hoses, the coolant supply hose of the transmission fluid
cooler and, on SC vehicles, the supply and return hoses of the auxiliary radiator. A drain plug is installed in the bottom of the
LH (left-hand) end tank.
AUXILIARY RADIATOR (SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES ONLY)

1 - Outlet hose connection
2 - Inlet hose connection
The auxiliary radiator is connected in parallel with the (main) radiator to increase the engine cooling capacity on SC vehicles.
The auxiliary radiator is mounted horizontally in an air deflector attached to the front of the charge air radiator. The two end
tanks of the auxiliary radiator incorporate connections for the supply and return hoses that connect it to the main radiator.
COOLING FAN
Cooling Fan (Naturally Aspirated Vehicles)

1 - Shroud
2 - Motor and fan control module
3 - Harness
4 - Fan
Cooling Fan (Supercharger Vehicles)

1 - Shroud
2 - Motor and fan control module
3 - Harness
4 - Fan
An electric, variable speed cooling fan is installed in a shroud attached to the rear of the radiator. The cooling fan is operated
by a fan control module, integrated into the electric motor, under the control of the ECM (engine control module). An
electrical connector at the RH (right-hand) side of the shroud provides the interface between the cooling fan harness and the
vehicle wiring.
EXPANSION TANK

1 - Filler cap
2 - Bleed screw
3 - Vent hose connection
4 - Level markings
5 - Expansion hose connection
6 - Level sensor
The expansion tank is installed on the RH side of the engine compartment, immediately behind the suspension turret. A filler
cap, bleed screw and level sensor are incorporated into the expansion tank. MAX and MIN level markings are molded onto
the exterior of the tank.
The expansion tank provides the following functions:
 Service fill.
 Coolant expansion during warm-up.
 Air separation during operation.
 System pressurization by the filler cap.
The expansion tank has an air space of approximately 0.5 liter (1.06 US pints), above the MAX level, to allow for coolant
expansion.
OUTLET TUBE AND HEATER MANIFOLD
Outlet Tube

A - Outlet tube on naturally aspirated vehicles
B - Outlet tube on supercharger vehicles
1 - Bleed hose connection
2 - Radiator upper hose connection
3 - Cylinder block connections
4 - Thermostat hose connection
Heater Manifold

1 - Throttle body heater hose connection
2 - Heater core supply hose connection
-
3 - RH cylinder head connection
4 - Engine coolant temperature sensor
5 - LH cylinder head connection
ENGINE COOLANT
The engine coolant is formulated to last for ten years or 240,000 km (150,000 miles). The coolant is silicate free and must
not be mixed with conventional engine coolant.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired

1 - Battery
-
5 Cooling fan
Engine Cooling Flow Diagram - Naturally Aspirated Vehicles

1 - Expansion tank
2 - Heater core
3 - RH cylinder head
4 - Cylinder block
5 - Throttle
7 - Heater manifold
8 - LH cylinder head
10 - Check valve
-
11 Thermostat
12 - Radiator
13 - Coolant pump
14 - Bleed screw
Engine Cooling Flow Diagram - Supercharger Vehicles

1 - Expansion tank
2 - Heater core
3 - RH cylinder head
4 - Cylinder block
5 - Throttle
7 - Heater manifold
8 - LH cylinder head
10 - Check valve
-
11 Thermostat
12 - Radiator
13 - Coolant pump
14 - Auxiliary radiator
15 - Connection with SC cooling system
16 - Bleed screw
When the engine is running, the coolant is circulated around the engine cooling system by the coolant pump. From the
coolant pump, coolant flows through the cylinder heads and the engine oil cooler into the cylinder block and the heater
manifold.
In the cylinder block, the coolant flows forwards to the outlet tube. When the coolant is cold, the thermostat is closed and the
coolant flows direct from the outlet tube back to the coolant pump. Once the coolant reaches operating temperature the
thermostat begins to open, to control system temperature, and coolant flows from the outlet tube to the coolant pump via
the radiator and, on SC vehicles, the auxiliary radiator. When the thermostat is open, the coolant flow through the radiator(s)
also generates a coolant flow through the transmission fluid cooler.
From the heater manifold the coolant flows through the electronic throttle and the heater core, in parallel circuits that are
unaffected by the position of the thermostat. From the electronic throttle, the coolant merges with bleed coolant from the
coolant pump and the outlet tube and flows to the expansion tank. From the heater core, the coolant flows back to the inlet
of the coolant pump.
Expansion and contraction of the coolant is accommodated by an air space in the expansion tank and the compliance of the
flexible hoses.
If the coolant level in the expansion tank decreases below a predetermined value, the level sensor connects a ground to the
instrument cluster, which activates the appropriate warning. For additional information, refer to 413-01 Instrument Cluster.
The cooling fan is operated by a fan control module integrated into the cooling fan motor. The fan control module regulates
the voltage, and thus speed, of the cooling fan motor in response to a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ECM.
The ECM calculates the required fan speed from the engine temperature, A/C (air conditioning) system pressure and
transmission fluid temperature. Under hot operating conditions, the fan may continue to operate for 4 minutes after the
engine has been switched off.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Cooling
For a detailed description of the engine cooling system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of
the workshop manual. REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and
Operation).
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
 Coolant leaks  Fuses
 Coolant Hoses  Harnesses
 Coolant expansion tank  Loose or corroded connector(s)
 Radiator  Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
 Heater core
 Accessory drive belt
 Viscous fan
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the
next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Coolant loss  Hoses Carry out a visual inspection. If there are no obvious leaks, carry out a cooling
 Hose connections system pressure test. Rectify any leaks as necessary.
 Radiator
 Water pump
 Heater core
 Gaskets
 Engine casting cracks
 Engine block core
plugs
Overheating  Low/Contaminated Check the coolant level and condition. Carry out a cooling system pressure test.
coolant Rectify any leaks as necessary. Check the thermostat and rectify as necessary.
 Thermostat Check the viscous fan operation, make sure the viscous fan rotates freely.
 Viscous fan Check for obstructions to the air flow over the radiator. Rectify as necessary.
 ECT sensor
 Restricted air flow
over the radiator
Engine not  Thermostat Check the thermostat operation. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure
reaching normal  Viscous fan the viscous fan is not seized. Rectify as necessary.
temperature  Thermostat
 Electric fan
 Fan speed module
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module (ECM) , please refer to Section
303-14. REFER to:
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling System
Draining and Vacuum Filling
General Procedures
Draining
1. WARNINGS:
Release the cooling system pressure by

slowly turning the coolant expansion tank cap a
quarter of a turn. Cover the expansion tank cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in personal injury.
Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
CAUTION: Since injury such as scalding could

be caused by escaping steam or coolant, make
sure the vehicle cooling system is cool prior to
carrying out this procedure


fluids.
Filling
1. Torque: 2 Nm
3. CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained

at 50%.
 Refill the cooling system.

 Install the cooling system vacuum refill adaptor to the
expansion tank.
 Fill the cooling system to the upper level mark of the
coolant expansion tank.
4.
5. Set the heater controls to maximum.

6. Start the engine and idle until hot air is emited at the face
registers.
7. Switch the heater off.
8. Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM for eight minutes.
9. CAUTION: Switch off the engine and allow the coolant

temperature to go cold.
Switch the engine off.

10. Visually check the engine and cooling system for signs of
coolant leakage.
11. WARNING: When releasing the cooling system pressure,
cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.
CAUTIONS:
Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping

steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling system is cool
prior to carrying out this procedure
Make sure the coolant level remains above the "COLD FILL
RANGE" lower level mark.
NOTE: When the cooling system is warm, the coolant will be

approximately 10mm above the upper level mark on the
expansion tank with the cap removed.
Check and top-up the coolant if required.

Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1. WARNINGS:


carrying out this procedure.

stands.

fluids.
Filling
1. Torque: 2 Nm

4.
5.
6.
 Raise the coolant expansion tank 50mm
from its original position.
7.
8. CAUTION: Make sure that the clip from the
connector remains with the connector.
Fill the coolant expansion tank to the rim and continue until
coolant is visable from the outlet.
10. Once coolant is visable from the outlet, connect
the pipe.
11. NOTE: This step may take approximatley 10 minutes as the

coolant level will drop slowly.
Continue to fill the coolant expansion tank to the rim until the
coolant level stops dropping.
12.
13.

15. Torque: 23 Nm
17.
18. WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.

20. Start the engine.
21. Continue to top-up with coolant with the engine at idle.
22. Increase the engine speed to 1500rpm for 2 minutes.
23.
 Continue to top-up with coolant with engine idling until
hot air is emitted from face vents.
 When hot air is emitted from the vents, switch the
heater off.
24. Install the coolant expansion tank cap while the
engine is at idle.

coolant leakage.
CAUTIONS:

prior to carrying out this procedure.


Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1. WARNINGS:



stands.

and Installation).

fluids.
fluids.
6. Carry out the procedure up to step 1 in the filling section three

times, filling the cooling system with clean water at the first two
drains. At the third refill, use a suitable measuring tool to make
sure that the cooling system maintains a 50% mix.
Filling
1. Torque: 2 Nm
2. Torque: 50 Nm
and Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9.

the pipe.

14.
15.

17. Torque: 23 Nm
19.

www.JagDocs.com
25.
heater off.
engine is at idle.

coolant leakage.

CAUTIONS:



Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1. WARNINGS:



stands.

fluids.
Filling
1. Torque: 2 Nm

4.
5.
6.
7.

the pipe.

12.
13.

15. Torque: 23 Nm
17.

23.
heater off.
engine is at idle.

coolant leakage.

CAUTIONS:



Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1. WARNINGS:



stands.

and Installation).

fluids.
fluids.
7. Carry out the procedure up to step 1 in the filling section three

times, filling the cooling system with clean water at the first two
drains. At the third refill, use a suitable measuring tool to make
sure that the cooling system maintains a 50% mix.
Filling
1. Torque: 2 Nm
2. Torque: 50 Nm

4.
5.
6.
7.

the pipe.

12.
13.

15.

21.
heater off.
engine is at idle.

24. Torque: 23 Nm
coolant leakage.

CAUTIONS:



and Installation).
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Auxiliary Radiator
Removal

Procedures).
2. Refer to: Radiator Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
3. Torque: 7 Nm
4.
5. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Expansion
Tank
Removal
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not remove the filler
cap from the coolant expansion tank while the system is hot.
CAUTIONS:
Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.
Correct installation of the Coolant expansion tank cap can be obtained by tightening the cap until an audible click
is heard.
2. Torque: 23 Nm
3. WARNING: Release the cooling system

pressure by slowly turning the coolant expansion
tank cap a quarter of a turn. Cover the expansion
tank cap with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding. Failure to follow this
4. Torque: 9 Nm

fluids.
6.
7.
Installation

2. Check and top-up the coolant.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Pump V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal



4. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding -
V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
5. Refer to: Supercharger Belt (303-05 Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the accessory drive belt is

correctly located on each pulley.
Clean and inspect the accessory drive belt

pulleys for damage.
8. Torque: 40 Nm
9.

CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the

paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately
remove the coolant and clean the area with water.
Torque: 12 Nm

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the gaskets are correctly located.
Install all the bolts finger tight before final tightening.
NOTE: Install new gaskets.

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Pump V8
5.0L Petrol
Removal



3. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding -
V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
Installation).
5. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe LH (303-12A
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
6. CAUTIONS:


pulleys for damage.
7.
8. Torque: 40 Nm
9.

CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the

paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately
remove the coolant and clean the area with water.
Torque: 12 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:

prior to removal.
Discard the seals.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Install all the bolts finger tight before final tightening.
Make sure that the gaskets are correctly located.
NOTE: Install new gaskets.

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Fan Motor
and Shroud V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

Installation).


5. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH (303-12A
7. Torque: 9 Nm
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
10.
11. Torque: 25 Nm
12. Torque: 30 Nm
13. CAUTION: Make sure to protect the

paintwork.
Torque: 23 Nm
14.
15. Torque: 7 Nm
16.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Fan Motor
and Shroud V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal

Installation).


7. Torque: 7 Nm
8.
9.
10.
11. Torque: 25 Nm
12. Torque: 30 Nm

paintwork.
Torque: 23 Nm
14.
15. Torque: 7 Nm
16.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Module V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal




Procedures).
Installation).
6. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12A Intake Air
Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
7. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12A Intake Air
Installation).
9. Refer to: Auxiliary Radiator (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L
10.
11. Torque: 25 Nm
12. Torque: 23 Nm

paintwork.
Torque: 30 Nm
14. Torque: 30 Nm
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are
sealed. Use new blanking caps.
Torque: 8 Nm
24.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Module V8
5.0L Petrol
Removal




Procedures).
Installation).
6. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12A Intake Air
Installation).
7. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12A Intake Air
Installation).
9.
10. Torque: 25 Nm
11. Torque: 23 Nm

paintwork.
Torque: 30 Nm
13.
14. Torque: 5 Nm
15.
16.
17. Torque: 9 Nm
18.


correct.
Torque: 8 Nm
20.
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol
Removal



Installation).
7.
8.
9. Torque: 7 Nm
10. Torque: 25 Nm

paintwork.
Torque: 23 Nm
12. Torque: 30 Nm
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20. Torque: 7 Nm
21.
22. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator V8 5.0L
Petrol
Removal



Procedures).
7. Torque: 7 Nm
8.
9.
10. Torque: 25 Nm
11. Torque: 23 Nm
paintwork.
Torque: 30 Nm
13.
14.
15. Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
16.
17. Torque: 7 Nm
18.
19.
20.

Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Thermostat
Housing V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

stands.

2. Refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Procedures).
4.
5.
6.
7. NOTE: The retaining clips cannot be removed from

the pipe.
8. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Thermostat
Housing V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal

stands.

2. Refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Procedures).
4.
5. NOTE: The retaining clips cannot be removed from

the pipe.
6. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Cooling
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Intake manifold assemblies
2 - Supply hoses to charge air coolers
3 - Charge air radiator
4 - Charge air coolant pump
5 - Engine cooling system connecting hose
6 - Return hoses from charge air coolers
INTRODUCTION
The supercharger cooling system cools the pressurized charge air from the supercharger. The supercharger cooling system
consists of:
 A charge air coolant pump.
 A charge air radiator.
 Two charge air coolers.
 Connecting hoses and pipes.
The supercharger cooling system is operationally independent of the engine cooling system, but connected to it by a hose
installed between the charge air radiator and the radiator of the engine cooling system. The connection with the engine
cooling system accommodates thermal expansion and retraction of the coolant in the supercharger cooling system, and
enables filling and draining of the supercharger cooling system.
CHARGE AIR COOLANT PUMP

1 - Coolant outlet connection
2 - Coolant inlet connection
3 - Electrical connector
The charge air coolant pump is an electric pump attached to the RH (right-hand) side of the charge air radiator. Hoses
connect the inlet of the charge air coolant pump to the charge air radiator, and the outlet to the charge air coolers. An
electrical connector provides the interface between the motor of the charge air coolant pump and the vehicle wiring.
CHARGE AIR RADIATOR

1 - Pipe clip bracket (2 off)
2 - Coolant outlet connection
3 - Lower attachment bracket (2 off)
4 - Coolant inlet connection
5 - Upper attachment bracket (2 off)
6 - Expansion hose connection (with engine cooling system)
The charge air radiator is a cross flow type with an aluminum core and plastic end tanks. The charge air radiator is installed
in the cooling module, in front of the A/C (air conditioning) condenser. Brackets on the end tanks attach the charge air
radiator to the front of the engine cooling system radiator.
The RH end tank incorporates the coolant inlet and outlet connections, and a connection for the hose to the engine cooling
system. Hoses connect the inlet of the charge air radiator to the charge air coolers, and the outlet to the charge air coolant
pump.
CHARGE AIR COOLERS
A charge air cooler is installed in each intake manifold.

For additional information, refer to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired

1 - Battery
4 - Power distribution box (intercooler water pump relay and fuse 24)
Supercharger Cooling Flow Diagram

1 - RH charge air cooler
2 - Engine
3 - LH (left hand) charge air cooler
4 - Expansion hose connection (with engine cooling system)
5 - Charge air radiator
Electrical power for the charge air coolant pump is supplied from the intercooler water pump relay in the power distribution
box. When the intercooler water pump relay is energized, it connects power from the battery, via the BJB (battery junction
box) and CJB (central junction box), to the charge air coolant pump. Operation of the intercooler water pump relay is
controlled by the ECM (engine control module). The intercooler water pump relay is energized continuously while the ignition
is in power mode 6.
When the charge air coolant pump is running, coolant flows from the pump outlet through the charge air coolers, the charge
air radiator and back to the pump inlet.
Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator
Removal

stands.

3.
4.
5. Torque: 7 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
WARNINGS:
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related
components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection
until the work is complete.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
NOTE: Tighten the fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions and fuel rail crossover pipe unions as it is instructed
in service manual.

Ignition coil-on-plugs retaining bolts 7 - 62
Spark plugs 20 15 -
Fuel rail retaining bolt Stage 1 - 20 Stage 2 - 30 Stage 1 - 15 Stage 2 - 22 -
Fuel rail crossover pipe unions 21 15 -
Fuel rail crossover pipe retaining bolts 12 9 -
Fuel pressure regulator 33 24 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions 21 15 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M8 bolt 25 18 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M5 nut 6 - 53
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line shield M10 bolt 29 21 -
Fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump fuel line shield M6 bolt 11 8 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump torx bolts 12 9 -
Throttle body retaining bolts 10 7 -
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolts 25 18 -
Steering column lower universal joint assembly bolts 35 26 -
Coolant expansion tank retaining bolt 10 7 -
Engine compartment brace retaining bolts 45 33 -
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Charging and
Controls
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Crossover tube
2 - LH (left hand) fuel rail
3 - Fuel injector
4 - HP (high pressure) fuel lines
5 - HP fuel pumps and covers
6 - RH (right hand) fuel rail
7 - FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor
8 - LP (low pressure) fuel lines
INTRODUCTION
The fuel charging and controls system is a gasoline DI (direct injection) system controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
The fuel charging and controls system consists of:
 LP and HP fuel lines.

 Two HP fuel pumps.
 Two fuel rails and a crossover tube.
 A FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor.
 Eight fuel injectors.
LP fuel from the pump in the fuel tank is pressurized by the HP fuel pumps and supplied to the fuel injectors via the fuel rails and
crossover tube. The ECM controls the fuel injectors and HP fuel pumps to inject the required volume of fuel into the combustion
chambers.
LOW AND HIGH PRESSURE FUEL LINES

A - LP fuel lines
B - HP fuel lines
1 - Acoustic cover
2 - Heat reflective and insulation sleeves
The LP fuel line connects the HP fuel pumps to the fuel delivery line from the fuel tank and lines system. A quick release
connector at the start of the LP fuel line is held in a clip integrated into the LH (left-hand) ignition coils cover. P-clips secure the
LP fuel line to the rear of each cylinder head and to the RH (right-hand) side of the cylinder block. A heat reflective and
insulation sleeves are installed on the LP fuel line where it runs behind the RH exhaust manifold.
The HP fuel lines connect the HP fuel pumps to the RH fuel rail and the crossover tube. Two P-clips and a pipe clamp attach the
HP fuel lines to the cylinder block and the RH cylinder head respectively. An integral bracket on the front HP fuel line is attached
to a stud on the front-upper RH timing cover. An acoustic cover is installed on the bottom of the front HP fuel line.
HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMPS

1 - Crankshaft
3 - Auxiliary camshaft
4 - Tappet
5 - HP fuel pump
6 - Acoustic cover
The two HP fuel pumps are identical mechanically-driven pumps installed on the RH side of the sump body, behind the
generator. An O-ring seals each of the HP fuel pumps in the sump body. The front HP fuel pump is identified as No. 1 pump; the
rear HP fuel pump is identified as No. 2 pump. An acoustic cover is installed on each of the HP fuel pumps.
The HP fuel pumps are single-plunger pumps. The plunger of each pump extends through the sump body and the carrier of the
auxiliary camshaft. A tappet on the end each plunger is operated by a two-lobe cam on the auxiliary camshaft. A spring installed
on the outside of the plunger ensures the plunger and tappet remain in contact with the cam.
The auxiliary camshaft is driven by the crankshaft, via the auxiliary drive chain, at engine speed. The auxiliary camshaft is timed
to match the pump delivery strokes with crankshaft position.
HP Fuel Pump Schematic

1 - PRV (pressure relief valve)
2 - To HP fuel lines
3 - Check valve
4 - Plunger
5 - From LP fuel lines
6 - Damper chamber
7 - Fuel metering valve
In addition to the plunger, each HP fuel pump contains:
 A damper chamber.
 A fuel metering valve.
 A check valve.
 A PRV.
The damper absorbs pressure pulses from the plunger when the fuel metering valve is open at the start of the delivery stroke.
The fuel metering valve regulates the output pressure from the HP fuel pump. The fuel metering valve is a normally open
solenoid valve controlled by the ECM. During the inlet stroke of the plunger the fuel metering valve is de-energized, which allows
LP fuel into the pumping chamber. The ECM energizes the fuel metering valve closed during the delivery stroke of the plunger,
which forces the fuel in the pumping chamber through the check valve into the HP lines. By changing the closing point of the fuel
metering valve, the ECM can determine the volume of fuel output during the delivery stroke, and thus the pressure in the HP
side of the system.
The check valve prevents the return of HP fuel to the pumping chamber during the inlet stroke of the plunger.
The PRV protects the HP side of the system from excessive pressure if there is a failure of the fuel metering valve. If the pump
delivery pressure increases to 195 - 204 bar (2828 - 2959 lbf/in2), the PRV opens and returns fuel to the inlet side of the
plunger.
FUEL RAILS AND CROSSOVER TUBE

1 - LH fuel rail
2 - Crossover tube
3 - RH fuel rail
4 - FRP sensor
5 - Fuel injector
The fuel rails and crossover tube are made from stainless steel. Bolts attach each fuel rail to the related cylinder head. The
crossover tube connects the front high pressure line to the LH fuel rail, which ensures there is equal pressure in the two fuel
rails. Four P-clips attach the crossover tube to the intercooler-tank top.
The rear of the RH fuel rail incorporates a threaded boss for installation of the FRP sensor.
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
The FRP sensor provides the ECM with a continuous signal of fuel rail pressure. The FRP sensor is installed in the rear of the RH
fuel rail. The FRP sensor is screwed into a threaded boss in the fuel rail. A flying lead and three pin connector provides the
interface with the engine harness.
The FRP sensor contains a steel diaphragm fitted with strain gages, which are incorporated into a Wheatstone bridge. The output
from the Wheatstone bridge is processed by the ECM to derive a pressure value.
FUEL INJECTORS
The fuel injectors spray fuel from the fuel rail directly into the combustion chambers. The fuel injectors are installed close to the
center of the combustion chambers, between the inlet and exhaust valves and next to the spark plug.
The fuel injectors are a push fit in the fuel rails and the cylinder heads. On each fuel injector, a rubber O-ring seals the head of
the fuel injector in the fuel rail. A teflon ring seals the nozzle of the fuel injector in the cylinder head. A clamp locks each fuel
injector to the fuel rail.
Each fuel injector contains a solenoid-operated needle valve, which opens when the solenoid winding is energized. While the
needle valve is open, fuel is sprayed into the combustion chamber. The solenoid winding is connected to a power feed and a
ground from the ECM, which operates the fuel injectors with a two stage power supply. Initially the ECM supplies the fuel
injectors with 65 V, then once the boost current reaches 11 A the power supply is switched to battery voltage. The ECM meters
the amount of fuel injected into the combustion chambers by adjusting the time that the solenoid winding is energized.
There are six holes around the tip of the nozzle through which the fuel is sprayed. Two of the holes direct fuel below the spark
plug. The other four holes direct fuel evenly around the remainder of the combustion chamber.
If a fuel injector fails, the engine will suffer from unstable idle speed, poor NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and poor
emissions performance.
CONTROL DIAGRAM

1 - Battery
4 - No. 1 HP fuel pump
6 - Fuel injectors
7 - ECM
8 - FRP sensor
The ECM controls the output from the HP fuel pumps to deliver the required volume of fuel at pressures up to 150 bar (2175
lbf/in2).
The ECM uses the signal from the FRP sensor to calculate the time the fuel injectors need to be energized to deliver the correct
mass of fuel to the combustion chambers.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Charging and
Controls
Principles of Operation
For a detailed description of the fuel charging and controls system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls
- V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
not guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Fuel level  Fuses
 Fuel leaks  Loose or corroded electrical connectors
 Damaged fuel lines  Harnesses
 Damaged push connect fittings  Sensor(s)
 Fuel contamination/grade/quality  Engine Control Module (ECM)
 Throttle body
 Damaged fuel tank filler pipe cap
 Damaged fuel tank filler pipe
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, but does not  Engine breather system Ensure the engine breather system is free from
fire disconnected/restricted restriction and is correctly installed. Check for ignition
 Ignition system system, fuel system and electronic engine control
 Fuel system DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
 Electronic engine control
Engine cranks and fires, but  Evaporative emissions purge Check for evaporative emissions, fuel system and
will not start valve ignition system related DTCs and refer to the relevant
 Fuel pump DTC Index
 Spark plugs
 HT short to ground
(tracking) check rubber
boots for cracks/damage
 Ignition system
Difficult cold start  Engine coolant level/anti- Check the engine coolant level and condition. Ensure
freeze content the battery is in a fully charged and serviceable
 Battery condition. Check for electronic engine controls, engine
 Electronic engine controls emissions, fuel system and evaporative emissions
 Exhaust Gas Recirculation system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
(EGR) valve stuck open Index
 Fuel pump
 Purge valve
Difficult hot start  Injector leak Check for injector leak, install new injector as
 Electronic engine control required. Check for electronic engine controls,
 Purge valve evaporative emissions, fuel system, ignition system
 Fuel pump and engine emission system related DTCs and refer
 Ignition system to the relevant DTC Index
 EGR valve stuck open
Difficult to start after hot  Injector leak Check for injector leak, install new injector as
soak (vehicle standing,  Electronic engine control required. Check for electronic engine controls,
engine off, after engine has  Purge valve evaporative emissions, fuel system, ignition system
reached operating  Fuel pump and engine emission system related DTCs and refer
temperature)  Ignition system to the relevant DTC Index
Engine stalls soon after start  Breather system Ensure the engine breather system is free from
disconnected/restricted restriction and is correctly installed. Check for
 ECM relay electronic engine control, ignition system and fuel
 Electronic engine control system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
 Ignition system Index. Check for blockage in air filter element and air
 Air intake system restricted intake system. Check for air leakage in air intake
 Air leakage system
 Fuel lines
Engine hesitates/poor  Fuel pressure, fuel pump, Check for fuel system related DTCs and refer to the
acceleration fuel lines relevant DTC Index. Check for injector leak, install
 Injector leak new injector as required. Check for air leakage in air
 Air leakage intake system. Ensure accelerator pedal is free from
 Electronic engine control restriction. Check for electronic engine controls,
 Throttle motor ignition, engine emission system and transmission
 Restricted accelerator pedal related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
travel (carpet, etc)
 Ignition system
 Transmission malfunction
Engine backfires  Fuel pump/lines Check for fuel system failures. Check for air leakage
 Air leakage in intake air system. Check for electronic engine
 Electronic engine controls controls, ignition system and VCT system related
 Ignition system DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
 Sticking variable camshaft
timing (VCT) hub
Engine surges  Fuel pump/lines Check for fuel system failures. Check for electronic
 Electronic engine controls engine controls, throttle system and ignition system
 Throttle motor related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
 Ignition system
Engine detonates/knocks  Fuel pump/lines Check for fuel system failures. Check for air leakage
 Electronic engine controls controls and VCT system related DTCs and refer to
 Sticking VCT hub the relevant DTC Index
No throttle response  Electronic engine controls Check for electronic engine controls and throttle
 Throttle motor system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Index
Poor throttle response  Breather system Ensure the engine breather system is free from
 Electronic engine control electronic engine controls, transmission and traction
 Transmission malfunction control related DTCs and refer to the related DTC
 Traction control event Index. Check for air leakage in intake air system
 Air leakage
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module (ECM), please refer to
Section 303-14. REFER to:
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injection Component
Cleaning
General Procedures
General Equipment
Pneumatic vacuum gun
Cleaning
WARNINGS:
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel system with the engine running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical attention.
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that clean non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, prior to starting
work on the vehicle.
Use a steel topped workbench and cover it with clean, lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible. Foreign matter
from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system and may result in later
malfunction.
1. Using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, brush the components
being removed and the surrounding area.
2. Using a pneumatic vacuum gun, remove all traces of foreign material.
General Equipment: Pneumatic vacuum gun

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injection
Component Cleaning Using Pressure Cleaner
General Procedures
Cleaning
WARNINGS:
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical
attention.
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the
vehicle.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop,
seek medical attention.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable
vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
Foreign matter from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system
and may result in later malfunction.
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking
material.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the correct additive is used in this

step. Failure to carry out this instruction may cause damage to
the vehicle.
 Open the fuel filler door and remove the cap.

 Empty the fuel additive into the fuel filler pipe.
 Install the fuel filler cap and close the fuel filler door.
3. Release the breather from the air intake elbow.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the correct additive is

used in this step. Failure to carry out this
Install the cleaning equipment to a suitable

5.
 Remove the cleaning equipment filler cap.
 Empty the induction system cleaning fluid
into the cleaning equipment.
 Install the filler cap.
6. Position the intake system cleaning tool into intake

elbow and secure with the clamp.
7.
 Connect a suitable compressed air line to
the cleaning equipment.
 Set the pressure to 4 bar.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
 Open the ball valve on the cleaning

equipment and allow the cleaning fluid to
spray into the intake elbow.
 Raise the engine speed to 1200 rpm and
hold until the cleaning fluid spray has
stopped.
10.
 Close the ball valve.
 Release the air pressure in the cleaning equipment.
 Disconnect the air line.
11. Connect the breather to the air intake elbow.
13.
 Start the engine.
 Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
 Raise the engine speed to 1500 rpm and hold for 3
minutes until a temperature of 70ºC is achieved.
 Switch off the engine.
14. Connect the approved diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.

15. Follow on screen prompts and check for DTC's (Diagnostic
Trouble Codes).
16. Clear the DTC's following the on screen procedure.
17. Disconnect the approved diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injectors
Removal
1. Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8

Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
Installation
Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8

Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1450
Spark Plug Remover/Installer
310-197
Remover, Fuel Injector
310-198
Installer, Teflon Seal
310-199
Re-shape Tool, Teflon Seal
310-200-01
Fuel Rail Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
310-200-02
Fuel Rail Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that tools and equipment are clean, free of foreign material and lubricant.
1. Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and

Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
2. Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol (310-00 Fuel System - General Information, General
Procedures).
4. Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04A Fuel
Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
6. Torque: 45 Nm
7.

fluids.
9.

fluids.

fluids.

13. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
14.
15. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.



19. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.

21.
22.
23. NOTE: RH shown LH similar.
24. CAUTION: Make a note of the fuel injector

clamp alignment to the fuel rail prior to removal.
25. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the special tool is located

correctly to the fuel injector prior to removing the
fuel injector.
Make sure that the special tool is held square

to the fuel injector during removal.
Make sure that all open ports are covered to

prevent any foreign material ingress.

26. CAUTION: If the fuel injector is being
removed without a new component being installed,
the fuel injector clamp must remain with the fuel
injector it is removed with.
27. CAUTIONS:
Do not use a knife to remove the Teflon seal

as damage could occur to the fuel injector.
Do not cut the Teflon seal to deep as damage

could occur to the fuel injector.
Pinch the Teflon seal to allow the tool to cut

the Teflon seal without damaging the fuel injector.
28. CAUTION: Do not use any sharp tools to

remove the O-ring seal as damage could occur to
the fuel injector.
Installation
1. Install new O-ring seals.
2. Install new Teflon seals.

4. CAUTION: If the original fuel injector is being
installed, the original fuel injector clamp must
installed with the fuel injector it was removed with.
5. CAUTION: If a new cylinder head has been

installed then the special tool 310-200-02 without
the thread must be used to install the fuel rail.
Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the open fuel

injector ports are clean and free of foreign material
and lubricant prior to installing the fuel injector.
When Installing the fuel injector(s), make

sure that the Teflon seal is clean and free of
foreign material and lubricant.
7. CAUTIONS:
If new fuel injectors are installed, a new

injector clamp must be installed
Make sure that the fuel injector is aligned

and installed into the fuel rail correctly, as noted in
the removal step.
Tighten the fuel rail retaining bolts a turn at a

time until the correct torque is achieved.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel injector O-ring seals with
clean engine oil.
Torque: 20 Nm
8. Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
9. Torque: 20 Nm
10. NOTE: Tighten in the sequence indicated.
Torque:
Bolt 2 30 Nm
Bolt 3 30 Nm
Bolt 1 30 Nm
Bolt 4 30 Nm

Torque: 20 Nm
12. Torque: 7 Nm
13.
14. CAUTION: Lubricate only the union threads
with clean engine oil.
NOTE: Install the bolt and unions finger tight




Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm

23.
24. NOTE: Lubricate the union threads with clean

engine oil.
25. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
26. Torque: 21 Nm

28.
29.
30.
31.
32. Torque: 45 Nm
33. Torque: 45 Nm
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1450
310-197
310-198
310-199
310-200-01
310-200-02
Removal

and Operation).
Procedures).
Procedures).
6. Torque: 45 Nm
7.

fluids.
9.
fluids.

12. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
13.
14. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.

18. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.

20.
21. NOTE: LH shown RH similar.

alignment to the fuel rail prior to removal.
NOTE: LH shown RH similar.
25. CAUTIONS:

fuel injector.



27. CAUTIONS:



the fuel injector.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com


Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
6. CAUTIONS:


7. CAUTIONS:


the removal step.

clean engine oil.
Torque: 20 Nm
Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
Torque: 20 Nm
NOTE: Tighten in the sequence indicated.
Torque:
Bolt 2 30 Nm
Bolt 3 30 Nm
Bolt 1 30 Nm
Bolt 4 30 Nm
11.

Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 7 Nm





Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm

24.

engine oil.
26. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
27. Torque: 21 Nm

29.
30.
31.
32. Torque: 10 Nm
33. Torque: 45 Nm
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Left-Hand Fuel Rail
High-Pressure Fuel Pump
Removal

and Operation).
Procedures).
5. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01 Engine - 5.0L,
Vehicles Without: Supercharger, General Procedures).
Procedures).

fluids.
8.
fluids.
10. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH (303-12B

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
11. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
12.
13. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.

15. Refer to: Engine Mount RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,
16. Refer to: Generator (414-02 Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L
17.

20. CAUTIONS:
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel

supply lines.

new blanking caps.
21. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
22.

fluids.
Loosen the Torx screws a turn each at a time.

fluids.
Installation



Torque: 12 Nm

4.
5. CAUTIONS:

engine oil.


cover to one side.

Torque: 12 Nm



Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
13. Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm

16. Torque: 25 Nm

20.

engine oil.

22. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
23. Torque: 21 Nm

and Installation).
25.
26.
27.

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Right-Hand Fuel Rail
High-Pressure Fuel Pump
Removal
All vehicles
and Operation).
Procedures).
Vehicles With: Supercharger, General Procedures).
Procedures).

fluids.
8.
fluids.

11. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
12.
13. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
15. Refer to: Engine Mount RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

17.
18.
All vehicles
19.
22. CAUTIONS:

supply lines.

new blanking caps.
23. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
24.

fluids.

fluids.
Installation
All vehicles
2. CAUTION: Tighten on both sides
simultaneously.
Torque: 12 Nm
4.
5. CAUTIONS:

engine oil.

cover to one side.

Torque: 12 Nm



Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm

Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
13. Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
16. Torque: 25 Nm

17. Torque: 100 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
18. Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
20. Refer to: Engine Mount RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L
22.

engine oil.
24. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
25. Torque: 21 Nm

27.
28.
29.

Vehicles With: Supercharger, General Procedures).
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Throttle Body
Removal


Procedures).
Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10.
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care when removing the throttle

body, failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the manifold absolute pressure and
temperature (MAPT) sensor.
Do not attempt to clean the throttle body

bore, build up of deposits reduces air leakage past
the throttle plate at the fully closed position.
 Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol -
WARNINGS:
in personal injury.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
NOTE: Tighten the fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions and fuel rail crossover pipe unions as it is instructed
in service manual.

Ignition coil-on-plugs retaining bolts 7 - 62
Spark plugs 20 15 -
Fuel rail retaining bolt Stage 1 - 20 Stage 2 - 30 Stage 1 - 15 Stage 2 - 22 -
Fuel rail crossover pipe unions 21 15 -
Fuel rail crossover pipe retaining bolts 8 - 71
Fuel pressure regulator 33 24 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions 21 15 -
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M5 nut 6 - 53
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump torx bolts 12 9 -
Throttle body retaining bolts 10 7 -
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolts 25 18 -
Steering column lower universal joint assembly bolts 35 26 -
Coolant expansion tank retaining bolt 10 7 -
Engine compartment brace retaining bolts 45 33 -
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Charging and Controls
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Crossover tube
2 - LH (left hand) fuel rail
3 - Fuel injector
4 - HP (high pressure) fuel lines
5 - HP fuel pumps and covers
6 - RH (right hand) fuel rail
7 - FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor
8 - LP (low pressure) fuel lines
INTRODUCTION
The fuel charging and controls system is a gasoline DI (direct injection) system controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
The fuel charging and controls system consists of:
 LP and HP fuel lines.

 Two HP fuel pumps.
 Two fuel rails and a crossover tube.
 A FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor.
 Eight fuel injectors.
LP fuel from the pump in the fuel tank is pressurized by the HP fuel pumps and supplied to the fuel injectors via the fuel rails and
crossover tube. The ECM controls the fuel injectors and HP fuel pumps to inject the required volume of fuel into the combustion
chambers.
LOW AND HIGH PRESSURE FUEL LINES

A - LP fuel lines
B - HP fuel lines
1 - Acoustic cover
2 - Heat reflective and insulation sleeves
The LP fuel line connects the HP fuel pumps to the fuel delivery line from the fuel tank and lines system. A quick release
connector at the start of the LP fuel line is held in a clip integrated into the LH (left-hand) ignition coils cover. P-clips secure the
LP fuel line to the rear of each cylinder head and to the RH (right-hand) side of the cylinder block. A heat reflective and
insulation sleeves are installed on the LP fuel line where it runs behind the RH exhaust manifold.
The HP fuel lines connect the HP fuel pumps to the RH fuel rail and the crossover tube. Two P-clips and a pipe clamp attach the
HP fuel lines to the cylinder block and the RH cylinder head respectively. An integral bracket on the front HP fuel line is attached
to a stud on the front-upper RH timing cover. An acoustic cover is installed on the bottom of the front HP fuel line.
HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMPS

1 - Crankshaft
3 - Auxiliary camshaft
4 - Tappet
5 - HP fuel pump
6 - Acoustic cover
The two HP fuel pumps are identical mechanically-driven pumps installed on the RH side of the sump body, behind the
generator. An O-ring seals each of the HP fuel pumps in the sump body. The front HP fuel pump is identified as No. 1 pump; the
rear HP fuel pump is identified as No. 2 pump. An acoustic cover is installed on each of the HP fuel pumps.
The HP fuel pumps are single-plunger pumps. The plunger of each pump extends through the sump body and the carrier of the
auxiliary camshaft. A tappet on the end each plunger is operated by a two-lobe cam on the auxiliary camshaft. A spring installed
on the outside of the plunger ensures the plunger and tappet remain in contact with the cam.
The auxiliary camshaft is driven by the crankshaft, via the auxiliary drive chain, at engine speed. The auxiliary camshaft is timed
to match the pump delivery strokes with crankshaft position.
HP Fuel Pump Schematic

1 - POV (pressure relief valve)
2 - To HP fuel lines
3 - Check valve
4 - Plunger
5 - From LP fuel lines
6 - Damper chamber
7 - Fuel metering valve
In addition to the plunger, each HP fuel pump contains:
 A damper chamber
 A fuel metering valve
 A check valve
 A PRV (pressure relief valve)
The damper absorbs pressure pulses from the plunger when the fuel metering valve is open at the start of the delivery stroke.
The fuel metering valve regulates the output pressure from the HP fuel pump. The fuel metering valve is a normally open
solenoid valve controlled by the ECM. During the inlet stroke of the plunger the fuel metering valve is de-energized, which allows
LP fuel into the pumping chamber. The ECM energizes the fuel metering valve closed during the delivery stroke of the plunger,
which forces the fuel in the pumping chamber through the check valve into the HP lines. By changing the closing point of the fuel
metering valve, the ECM can determine the volume of fuel output during the delivery stroke, and thus the pressure in the HP
side of the system.
The check valve prevents the return of HP fuel to the pumping chamber during the inlet stroke of the plunger.
The PRV protects the HP side of the system from excessive pressure if there is a failure of the fuel metering valve. If the pump
delivery pressure increases to 195 - 204 bar (2828 - 2959 lbf/in2), the PRV opens and returns fuel to the inlet side of the
plunger.
FUEL RAILS AND CROSSOVER TUBE

1 - LH fuel rail
2 - Crossover tube
3 - Fuel injector
4 - RH fuel rail
5 - FRP sensor
The fuel rails and crossover tube are made from stainless steel. Bolts attach each fuel rail to the related cylinder head. The
crossover tube connects the front high pressure line to the LH fuel rail, which ensures there is equal pressure in the two fuel
rails. Two P-clips attach the crossover tube to the intake manifold.
The rear of the RH fuel rail incorporates a threaded boss for installation of the FRP sensor.
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
The FRP sensor provides the ECM with a continuous signal of fuel rail pressure. The FRP sensor is installed in the rear of the RH
fuel rail. The FRP sensor is screwed into a threaded boss in the fuel rail. A flying lead and three pin connector provides the
interface with the engine harness.
The FRP sensor contains a steel diaphragm fitted with strain gages, which are incorporated into a Wheatstone bridge. The output
from the Wheatstone bridge is processed by the ECM to derive a pressure value.
FUEL INJECTORS
The fuel injectors spray fuel from the fuel rail directly into the combustion chambers. The fuel injectors are installed close to the
center of the combustion chambers, between the inlet and exhaust valves and next to the spark plug.
The fuel injectors are a push fit in the fuel rails and the cylinder heads. On each fuel injector, a rubber O-ring seals the head of
the fuel injector in the fuel rail. A teflon ring seals the nozzle of the fuel injector in the cylinder head. A clamp locks each fuel
injector to the fuel rail.
Each fuel injector contains a solenoid-operated needle valve, which opens when the solenoid winding is energized. While the
needle valve is open, fuel is sprayed into the combustion chamber. The solenoid winding is connected to a power feed and a
ground from the ECM, which operates the fuel injectors with a two stage power supply. Initially the ECM supplies the fuel
injectors with 65 V, then once the boost current reaches 11 A the power supply is switched to battery voltage. The ECM meters
the amount of fuel injected into the combustion chambers by adjusting the time that the solenoid winding is energized.
There are six holes around the tip of the nozzle through which the fuel is sprayed. Two of the holes direct fuel below the spark
plug. The other four holes direct fuel evenly around the remainder of the combustion chamber.
If a fuel injector fails, the engine will suffer from unstable idle speed, poor NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and poor
emissions performance.
CONTROL DIAGRAM

1 - Battery
6 - Fuel injectors
7 - ECM
8 - FRP sensor
The ECM controls the output from the HP fuel pumps to deliver the required volume of fuel at pressures up to 150 bar (2175
lbf/in2).
The ECM also uses the signal from the FRP sensor to calculate the time the fuel injectors need to be energized to deliver the
correct mass of fuel to the combustion chambers.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Charging and
Controls
For a detailed description of the fuel charging and controls system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls
- V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Throttle body
Symptom Chart

 Spark plugs
 Ignition system
 Fuel pump
 Purge valve
 Fuel lines
 Ignition system
timing (VCT) hub
 Ignition system
Index
 Air leakage
DTC Index
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injection Component
Cleaning
General Procedures
General Equipment
Pneumatic vacuum gun
Cleaning
WARNINGS:
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel system with the engine running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical attention.
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that clean non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, prior to starting
work on the vehicle.
Use a steel topped workbench and cover it with clean, lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible. Foreign matter
from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system and may result in later
malfunction.
1. Using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, brush the components
being removed and the surrounding area.
2. Using a pneumatic vacuum gun, remove all traces of foreign material.
General Equipment: Pneumatic vacuum gun

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injection Component
Cleaning Using Pressure Cleaner
General Procedures
Cleaning
WARNINGS:
attention.
vehicle.
in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
Foreign matter from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system
and may result in later malfunction.
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking
material.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the correct additive is used in this

step. Failure to carry out this instruction may cause damage to
the vehicle.
 Open the fuel filler door and remove the cap.

 Empty the fuel additive into the fuel filler pipe.
 Install the fuel filler cap and close the fuel filler door.
3. Release the breather from the air intake elbow.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the correct additive is

used in this step. Failure to carry out this
Install the cleaning equipment to a suitable

5.
 Remove the cleaning equipment filler cap.
 Empty the induction system cleaning fluid
into the cleaning equipment.
 Install the filler cap.
6. Position the intake system cleaning tool into intake

elbow and secure with the clamp.
7.
 Connect a suitable compressed air line to
the cleaning equipment.
 Set the pressure to 4 bar.

9.
 Open the ball valve on the cleaning

equipment and allow the cleaning fluid to
spray into the intake elbow.
 Raise the engine speed to 1200 rpm and
hold until the cleaning fluid spray has
stopped.
10.
 Close the ball valve.
 Release the air pressure in the cleaning equipment.
 Disconnect the air line.
11. Connect the breather to the air intake elbow.
13.
 Start the engine.
minutes until a temperature of 70ºC is achieved.
14. Connect the approved diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.
15. Follow on screen prompts and check for DTC's (Diagnostic

Trouble Codes).
16. Clear the DTC's following the on screen procedure.
17. Disconnect the approved diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injectors
Removal
1. Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8

Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
Installation
Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8

Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1450
310-197
310-198
310-199
310-200-01
310-200-02
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that tools and equipment are clean, free of foreign material and lubricant.

and Operation).
Procedures).
Procedures).
6. Torque: 45 Nm
7.
8.
fluids.
10.

and Installation).
12. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
13.
14. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.



18. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.

20.
21.
www.JagDocs.com

clamp alignment to the fuel rail prior to removal.
24. CAUTIONS:

fuel injector.



26. CAUTIONS:




the fuel injector.
Installation


Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
6. CAUTIONS:


7. CAUTIONS:


the removal step.

clean engine oil.
Torque: 20 Nm
8. Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
9. Torque: 20 Nm
10. NOTE: Tighten in the sequence indicated.
Torque:
Bolt 2 30 Nm
Bolt 3 30 Nm
Bolt 1 30 Nm
Bolt 4 30 Nm

Torque: 20 Nm
12. Torque: 7 Nm
13.




Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm

23.

engine oil.
25. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
26. Torque: 21 Nm

and Installation).
28.
29.
30.
31. Torque: 45 Nm
32. Torque: 45 Nm
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1450
310-197
310-198
310-199
310-200-01
310-200-02
Removal

and Operation).
Procedures).
Procedures).
6.
7.
8.
9.

and Installation).
11. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
12.
13. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.



17. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.

19.


alignment to the fuel rail prior to removal.
NOTE: LH shown RH similar.

24. CAUTIONS:

fuel injector.



26. CAUTIONS:



the fuel injector.
Installation


Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
6. CAUTIONS:


7. CAUTIONS:


the removal step.


clean engine oil.
Torque: 20 Nm
Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02

Torque: 20 Nm
NOTE: Tighten in the sequence indicated.
Torque:
Bolt 2 30 Nm
Bolt 3 30 Nm
Bolt 1 30 Nm
Bolt 4 30 Nm
11.

Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 7 Nm





Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm

24.

engine oil.

26. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
27. Torque: 21 Nm

and Installation).
29.
30.
31. Torque: 10 Nm
32. Torque: 45 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Left-Hand Fuel Rail High-
Pressure Fuel Pump
Removal

and Operation).
Procedures).
Procedures).
7.
8.

and Installation).
10. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
11.
12. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.


16.

19. CAUTIONS:

supply lines.

new blanking caps.
20. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
21.

fluids.

fluids.
Installation



Torque: 12 Nm

4.
5. CAUTIONS:

engine oil.


cover to one side.

Torque: 12 Nm



Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
13. Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm

16. Torque: 25 Nm

20.

engine oil.

22. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
23. Torque: 21 Nm

and Installation).
25.
26.

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Right-Hand Fuel Rail High-
Pressure Fuel Pump
Removal
All vehicles
and Operation).
Procedures).
Procedures).
7.
8.

and Installation).
10. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
11.
12. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.


16.
17.
All vehicles
18.
21. CAUTIONS:

supply lines.

new blanking caps.
22. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
23.

fluids.

fluids.
Installation
All vehicles
Torque: 12 Nm
4.
5. CAUTIONS:

engine oil.

cover to one side.

Torque: 12 Nm



Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm

Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
13. Torque: 21 Nm
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
16. Torque: 25 Nm

17. Torque: 100 Nm
18. Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
22.

engine oil.
24. Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
25. Torque: 21 Nm

and Installation).
27.
28.

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Throttle Body
Removal

3.
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 18 Nm
8. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean the

throttle body bore, build up of deposits reduces air
leakage past the throttle plate at the fully closed
position.
NOTE: Clamp the hose to minimize coolant loss.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and
free of foreign material.

Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -

Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolt - all vehicles 40 30 -
Accessory drive belt center idler pulley retaining bolt - vehicles without supercharger 25 19 -
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolt to tensioner bracket - vehicles with supercharger 40 30 -
Supercharger belt tensioner bracket retaining bolt 25 19 -
Supercharger belt tensioner retaining bolt 40 30 -
Supercharger belt 76mm idler pulley retaining bolt 40 30 -
Supercharger belt 90mm idler pulley retaining bolt 56 41 -
Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Accessory Drive

1 - Coolant pump
3 - Belt tensioner
4 - A/C (air conditioning) compressor
5 - Primary drive belt
6 - Crankshaft pulley/torsional vibration damper
7 - Idler pulley
8 - Generator
9 - Idler pulley
COMPONENT LOCATION - SUPERCHARGED VEHICLES

A - Primary accessory drive
B - Secondary accessory drive
1 - Coolant pump
3 - Primary drive belt
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Belt tensioner
6 - Crankshaft pulley/torsional vibration damper
7 - Idler pulley
8 - Generator
9 - Idler pulley
10 - Supercharger
11 - Idler pulley
12 - Belt tensioner
13 - Secondary drive belt
14 - Idler pulley
www.JagDocs.com
INTRODUCTION
The accessory drive is a belt sysem powered by a pulley attached to the front of the crankshaft. The crankshaft pulley, which
incorporates a torsional vibration damper, drives a single (primary) drive belt on NA (naturally aspirated) vehicles and two
(primary and secondary) drive belts on SC (supercharger) vehicles. An automatic belt tensioner in each belt run maintains
the drive belt at the correct tension. Together with idler pulleys, the belt tensioner also guides the drive belt clear of
obstructions and sets the correct 'wrap-around' of the accessory component drive pulleys to ensure a slip-free drive.
Primary Drive Belt
On both NA and SC vehicles the primary drive belt is a six-ribbed poly-V belt that drives the:
 Coolant pump
 A/C (air conditioning) compressor
 Generator.
Secondary Drive Belt
On SC vehicles the secondary drive belt is an eight-ribbed poly-V belt that drives the SC.
Belt Tensioners
Each belt tensioner consists of an idler pulley on the end of a spring loaded pivot arm. The pivot arm can be turned clockwise
(viewed from the front of the engine) for removal and installation of the belt.
The belt tensioner is calibrated to automatically maintain the correct tension in the related drive belt.
For a detailed description of the accessory drive system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Accessory Drive (303-05 Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor
vehicle.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
 Belt drive belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
 Belt tension
 Pulley alignment
 Coolant pump
 Belt tensioner assembly
 Air conditioning compressor
 Crankshaft pulley
 Generator
 Deflection pulley
 Cooling fan pulley
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding
to the next step.
CAUTION: If the engine is run without the accessory drive belts connected to eliminate driven components, diagnostic
trouble codes, (DTCs) may be set which must be cleared before the vehicle is returned to the owner. The engine should not
be run for more than 2-3 minutes with the belts disconnected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Symptom Chart

Noise  Belt condition Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner
 Belt tension function. Check the pulley alignment. Check the driven components for
 Pulleys misaligned excessive resistance to rotation. Rectify as necessary.
 Driven components
(including tensioners)
Drive belt does  Belt condition Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner
not hold tension  Tensioner fault function. Rectify as necessary.
DTC Index
Belt V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal


stands.

and Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:


pulleys for damage.
Installation

Belt V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal


stands.

and Installation).
5. Torque: 55 Nm
6. Torque: 25 Nm
7. CAUTIONS:

correctly aligned to the pulleys. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.

pulleys for damage.

correct.
Installation

Belt Idler Pulley V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal

Installation).
5. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the accessory belt is correctly aligned to the

pulleys. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage
to the vehicle.
Clean and inspect the accessory drive belt pulleys for

damage.

Belt Idler Pulley V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

5. Torque: 25 Nm
6. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

to the vehicle.

damage.

Belt Tensioner V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal

Installation).
4.
 Note the fitted position.
5. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

to the vehicle.

damage.

Belt Tensioner V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

Installation).
5. Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

to the vehicle.

damage.

Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger
Belt
Removal

Installation).
4.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the supercharger belt is correctly

aligned to the pulleys. Failure to follow this instruction may

Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Belt
Idler Pulley
Removal

2. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH (303-12A Intake
Installation).
3. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12A Intake Air
Installation).
5. Torque: 55 Nm
Installation

aligned to the pulleys. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the vehicle.

Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Belt
Tensioner
Removal

2. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12A Intake Air
Installation).
3. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH (303-12A Intake
Installation).
5. Torque: 55 Nm
Installation

aligned to the pulleys. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the vehicle.

Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -

Battery positive terminal connector retaining nut 10 7 -
Solenoid terminal connector retaining nut 7 - 62
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starting System
COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: Installation on supercharged engine shown, installation on naturally aspirated engine similar.
INTRODUCTION
The starter motor is manufactured by Denso and is rated at 1.8 kW. The motor is geared directly to the pinion. The motor is
a series wound motor with an overrunning clutch. The interior of the motor is ventilated through a breather tube attached to
the underside of the motor housing.
The starter motor is located on the rear right side of the engine sump body. The motor is installed in an aperture in the
sump body and the pinion is engaged with the ring gear of the flexplate assembly. A ground cable for the starter motor is
connected to one of the starter motor securing points.
A heat shield is attached to the starter motor, at the point closest to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter.
A heavy duty cable, which supplies the electrical power to turn the starter motor, is connected to the battery positive
terminal via the positive remote charge terminal and a 400 A megafuse.
At the starter motor, the cable is connected to a copper terminal plate. The terminal plate and a heavy duty cable from the
generator are connected to a terminal stud on the solenoid. The power feed from the starter relay, to energize the solenoid,
is connected to a second terminal stud on the solenoid.
Starer Motor Assembly

1 - Terminal cover
2 - Terminal bolt
3 - Terminal plate
4 - Eyelet terminal (power lead from generator)
5 - Spring washer
6 - Nut
7 - Breather tube
8 - Bolt (2 off)
9 - Heat shield
-
10 Nut
11 - Spring washer
12 - Eyelet terminal (power lead from battery)
13 - Starter solenoid
14 - Pinion gear
15 - Electric motor
16 - Eyelet terminal (power feed from starter solenoid)
17 - Anti-rotation washer
18 - Nut
CONTROL DIAGRAM

1 - Battery
2 - Positive remote charge terminal
3 - Starter motor
4 - Power distribution box (starter relay)
-
5 ECM
6 - CJB
8 - BJB (400 A megafuse)
Engine crank requests are monitored by the passive anti-theft system and, if valid, passed on to the ECM (engine control
module). For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).
When the ECM receives a crank request, it energizes the starter relay in the power distribution box. The energized starter
relay supplies power from the CJB (central junction box) to energize the starter solenoid. The energized solenoid then
connects the power feed from the battery to the starter motor via the positive remote charge terminal.
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starting System
For a detailed description of the starting system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
of the workshop manual. REFER to: Starting System (303-06 Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
vehicle.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
 Starter motor  Battery
 Engine (turns freely)  Fuses
 Starter relay
 Wiring harness(es)
 Damaged, loose or corroded connectors
 Ignition switch
 Generator
 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
 Engine Control Module (ECM)
Symptom Chart

The engine does  Gear selector not in P or N Make sure the gear selector is in the P or N position. Check the
not crank (starter position (vehicles with battery condition and state of charge. Check for DTCs indicating
motor does not automatic transmission) an immobilizer fault. Check the starter motor relay, ignition
turn)  Battery switch and generator circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
 Starter relay Check for TCM and ECM DTCs. Check that the engine turns
 Invalid key code received by freely.
Central Junction Box (CJB)
 Harness/Connectors
 Starter motor
 Ignition switch
 Generator
 Transmission Control Module
(TCM)
 Engine Control Module
(ECM)
 Engine seized
The engine does  Starter motor installation Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, starter
not crank (starter  Starter motor motor square to engine, etc). Check the flywheel/drive plate
motor does turn)  Flywheel/Drive plate ring ring gear teeth for damage, foreign objects, etc.
gear
Engine cranks too  Battery Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the
slowly  Harness/Connectors starter motor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the
 Starter motor engine oil grade and condition.
 Oil grade
Engine cranks too  Low engine compression Check the engine compressions.
fast
Excessive starter  Starter motor Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, motor
motor noise  Flywheel/Drive plate ring square to engine, etc). Check the starter motor casing
gear condition. Check the flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth for
 Starter motor damage, foreign objects, etc.
installation/casing
DTC Index
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starting
System Vehicles With: Smart Key
For a detailed description of the starting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
Visual Inspection
 Steering column  Fuses
 Brake pedal  Harnesses and connectors
 Smart key  Warning lamp operation
 Steering Wheel  Smart key operation
 Engine start operation
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) and refer to the DTC Index.
CAUTIONS:
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor
vehicle
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part
number 3548-1358-00
the warranty policy and procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the
scan tool to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read
by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
NOTE: When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places
and with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital multimeter
leads into account
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
NOTE: Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion
NOTE: If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an
intermittent concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
Symptom Chart
Symptom - Message Displayed Symptom - Possible Cause Action
Smart key not found - Refer to handbook Ignition mode fails to switch on GO to Pinpoint Test A.
NOTE: Back up start - 10MY onwards Ignition mode fails to switch on GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Smart key not found - Refer to handbook
Press start and brake Engine fails to crank GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Steering column locked Ignition switches off after 3 seconds GO to Pinpoint Test D.
NOTE: For diesel engines Ambient temperatures below zero GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Engine still not cranking
Pin Point Test
PINPOINT TEST A : SMART KEY NOT FOUND - REFER TO HANDBOOK

CONDITIONS
A1: IGNITION MODE FAILS TO SWITCH ON
NOTE: In normal operation, pressing the start button for one second will cause the vehicle to enter the ignition mode.
If the procedures below are followed the engine should crank
NOTE: For automatic transmission vehicles, ensure the brake pedal is depressed and the park or neutral selected
1 Ensure the smart Key is within the cabin area. Check the smart key is not close to any electrical
devices e.g. Smart phones, laptops, laptop cases, games consoles and game console bags,
briefcases, metal objects etc. All can affect the system performance and may block its
communication with the vehicle. If the smart key battery low warning message has been displayed
it is likely that the smart key battery has insufficient charge. Refer to section 'Back Up Start' for
10MY onwards
Has the vehicle started?
Yes
No further action required
No
Check and install a new battery as required. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
contact dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST B : BACK UP START - 10MY ONWARDS - SMART KEY NOT FOUND - REFER TO
HANDBOOK
CONDITIONS
B1: IGNITION MODE FAILS TO SWITCH ON
NOTE: In normal operation, pressing the start button for one second will cause the vehicle to enter the ignition mode.
If the procedures below are followed the engine should crank
1 On pressing the start button, smart key not found. When this warning is displayed the smart
key should be brought into close proximity with the immobilize antenna unit. Hold the key in the
location and press the start button again. If this process fails the first time, try repositioning the
key around the immobilize antenna unit location, repeat the sequence again
Yes
No
Contact dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST C : PRESS START AND BRAKE - (MESSAGE DISPLAYED)

CONDITIONS
C1: ENGINE FAILS TO CRANK
NOTE: Conditions for starting in addition to pressing the start button are
NOTE: If the engine can be heard to crank there is no fault with the smart key
NOTE: If the locking pin is still engaged, turn the steering wheel to overcome the side load
NOTE: Start authorisation defined as Ignition functions, Steering column lock engagement, Engine immobilize and
smart key authorisation
1 Check that there is sufficient brake pressure, (Automatic transmission only). Attempt another
start making sure that the brake pedal is pressed firmly so the message is no longer displayed.
In certain conditions this may require a more effort than usual
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST D : STEERING COLUMN LOCKED - (MESSAGE DISPLAYED)
CONDITIONS
D1: IGNITION SWITCHES OFF AFTER 3 SECONDS
NOTE: Conditions for starting in addition to pressing the start button are
NOTE: If the engine can be heard to crank there is no fault with the smart key
NOTE: If the locking pin is still engaged, turn the steering wheel to overcome the side load
NOTE: Start authorisation defined as Ignition functions, Steering column lock engagement, Engine immobilize and
smart key authorisation
1 Unlock the vehicle using the key fob, within 3 minutes of unlocking ensure the steering wheel can
rotate freely. Perform a further lock and unlock check and attempt to start vehicle. If the steering
'column locked' message is still displayed, Lock the vehicle with the key fob and ensure the
column is locked (If installed) by turning the steering wheel. Then unlock the vehicle ensuring
the column Steering wheel can turn freely. Now perform another start attempt
Did the engine start?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST E : ENGINE STILL NOT CRANKING

CONDITIONS
E1: AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW ZERO
1 Hold the start button down for at least 4 seconds while starting the vehicle
2 Switch the ignition on, the passive anti theft system (PATS) LED should now be illuminated.
Start the engine, the PATS LED should switch off after 3 seconds
Did the engine start?
Yes
No
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Start Control
Unit
Removal

2. Refer to: Floor Console Finish Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel
and Console, Removal and Installation).
3.
4.
5. Torque: 6 Nm
6. Torque: 2 Nm
7. Torque: 2 Nm
Installation

Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starter Motor
Removal


stands.

and Installation).
4. Torque: 6 Nm
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the protective

cover is correctly installed over the electrical
connector.
Torque: 12 Nm
6. CAUTION: Make sure that the protective

cover is correctly installed over the electrical
connector.
Torque: 12 Nm
7. NOTE: The upper bolt will remain captive.
Torque: 48 Nm
8.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Item Specification
Firing order 1:2:7:3:4:5:6:8
Spark plug type - Vehicles with supercharger ILKAR6C-10
Spark plug type - Vehicles without supercharger ILKAR6C-10
Spark plugs 20 15 -
Ignition coil-on-plug retaining bolts 7 5 -
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Ignition
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - RFI (radio frequency interference) suppressor
3 - Spark plug (8 off)
4 - Ignition coil (8 off)
INTRODUCTION
The engine ignition system is a coil-on-plug, single spark system controlled by the ECM (engine control module). An iridium
tipped spark plug is installed in each combustion chamber, between the inlet and exhaust valves, and an ignition coil is
installed on each spark plug. A RFI (radio frequency interference) suppressor is connected to the power feed to the ignition
coils.
IGNITION COILS
The ignition coils are installed in the cylinder head covers, under the NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) covers. Each
ignition coil locates on a spark plug and is secured to the related cylinder head cover with a single screw. Each ignition coil
incorporates a three pin electrical connector for connection to the engine harness.
Each ignition coil contains a primary and a secondary winding. The primary winding receives electrical power from the
ignition relay in the power distribution box. A power stage in the primary winding allows the ECM to interrupt the power
supply, to induce a voltage in the secondary winding and thus the spark plug. A diode in the ground side of the secondary
winding reduces any undesirable switch-on voltage, to prevent misfiring into the intake manifold. The power stage limits the
maximum voltage and current in the primary winding, to protect the power stage and limit the voltage in the secondary
winding.
RFI SUPPRESSOR
The RFI (radio frequency interference) suppressor is installed on the engine harness carrier at the rear of the engine.
CONTROL DIAGRAM

1 - Battery
4 - Power distribution box (ignition relay)
5 - RFI suppressor
6 - LH (left hand) cylinder bank ignition coil (4 off)
7 - RH (right hand) cylinder bank ignition coil (4 off)
8 - ECM
The ignition coils are supplied with electrical power from the battery via a 175 A megafuse in the BJB (battery junction box),
the CJB (central junction box) and the ignition relay in the power distribution box. The control signal for the ignition relay is
supplied by the CJB.
The ECM sends a separate signal to each ignition coil to trigger the power stage switching. The ECM calculates the dwell time
from the battery voltage and engine speed, to ensure a constant energy level is produced in the secondary coil each time the
power stage is switched. This ensures sufficient spark energy is available without excessive primary current flow, which
avoids overheating and damage to the ignition coils.
The ECM calculates the ignition timing for individual cylinders from:
 Engine speed
 Camshaft position
 Engine load
 Engine temperature
 The knock control function
 The shift control function
 The idle speed control function.
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Ignition
For a detailed description of the engine ignition system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Engine Ignition (303-07 Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
vehicle.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
 Engine oil level  Fuses
 Cooling system coolant level  Wiring harness
 Fuel level  Loose or corroded electrical connectors
 Fuel contamination/grade/quality  Ignition coils
 Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valves  Sensor(s)
Symptom Chart

 Spark plugs
 Ignition system
 Fuel pump
 Purge valve
 Fuel lines
 Ignition system
timing (VCT) hub
 Ignition system
Index
 Air leakage
DTC Index
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Ignition Coil-On-
Plug V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal

3.
4. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Ignition Coil-On-
Plug V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal


coolant.
4.
5. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Spark Plugs V8
5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
303-1450
Removal

3.
4.
Torque: 7 Nm

material.

Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Spark Plugs V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
303-1450
Removal


coolant.
4.
5. NOTE: Naturally aspirated graphic shown,
supercharged is similar.
Torque: 7 Nm

material.

Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Engine Emission Control - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Emission Control
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Part load breather
2 - Full load breather
INTRODUCTION
The engine emission control system reduces the level of hydrocarbon emissions released to atmosphere from the engine. The
engine emission control system consists of a PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) system with part and full load breathers.
Piston blow-by gases are drawn through the breathers into the engine air intake and added to the air charge. The resultant
depression in the engine sump, front covers and cylinder head covers reduces the load on the joint seals in those areas.
PART LOAD BREATHER

1 - Flexible hose
2 - Baffle plate
3 - Oil drain
4 - PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) valves
5 - Oil separator
The part load breather consists of an oil separator, two PCV valves and a flexible hose. The oil separator and the PCV valves are
installed in the top of the RH (right-hand) cylinder head cover. The flexible hose connects the RH cylinder head cover to the
inlet of the SC (supercharger).
The oil separator is installed in a channel in the top of the cylinder head cover. A baffle plate, which incorporates a gas inlet and
an oil drain, is installed over the channel. The two PCV valves are installed on the outside of the cylinder head cover and
connected in parallel in the gas outlet from the channel to the flexible hose. The PCV valves prevent reverse flow into the
cylinder head cover when there is minimal depression in the inlet of the SC.
FULL LOAD BREATHER

1 - Flexible hose
2 - Two-way valve
3 - Oil drain
4 - Baffle plate
5 - Oil separator
The full load breather consists of an oil separator, a two-way valve and a flexible hose. The oil separator and the two-way valve
are installed in the top of the LH (left-hand) cylinder head cover. The flexible hose connects the LH cylinder head cover to the
LH air duct of the intake air distribution and filtering system.
an oil drain, is installed over the channel. The two-way valve is installed in the gas outlet from the channel. The two-way valve
prevents reverse flow into the cylinder head cover when there is minimal depression in the air duct.
Engine Emission Control - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Emission
Control
For a detailed description of the engine emission control system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08A Engine Emission Control - V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Exhaust gas recirculation system  Fuses
 Breather hoses  Loose or corroded electrical connectors
 Positive crankcase ventilation valve  Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve
 Fuel level  Engine Control Module (ECM)
 Fuel contamination/grade/quality
 Throttle body
Symptom Chart

Difficult to  Battery For battery information, CKP sensor, fuel system and purge valve
start cold  Crankshaft Position (CKP) tests, refer to relevant workshop manual section. Check the EGR
sensor valve.
 Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) valve stuck open
 Fuel system
 Evaporative emissions purge
valve
Engine stalls  Breather system Check the engine breather hoses, PCV, etc. Check the Engine
soon after disconnected/restricted Control Module (ECM) relay operation. For MAF sensor, ignition
start  Engine Control Module (ECM) system tests, air intake and fuel line information, refer to
relay relevant workshop manual section.
 MAF sensor
 Ignition system
 Air filter restricted
 Air leakage
 Fuel lines
Poor throttle  APP sensor malfunction For APP, TP, ECT, MAF sensor tests, intake system checks and
response  TP sensors transmission information, refer to relevant workshop manual
 ECT sensor section. Check the breather system hoses, PCV, etc.
 MAF sensor
 Traction control event
 Air leakage
 Breather system
disconnected/restricted
DTC Index
Engine Emission Control - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Emission Control
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Part load breather
2 - Full load breather
INTRODUCTION
The engine emission control system reduces the level of hydrocarbon emissions released to atmosphere from the engine. The
engine emission control system consists of a PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) system with part and full load breathers.
Piston blow-by gases are drawn through the breathers into the engine air intake and added to the air charge. The resultant
depression in the engine sump, front covers and cylinder head covers reduces the load on the joint seals in those areas.
PART LOAD BREATHER

1 - Flexible hose
2 - Baffle plate
3 - Oil drain
4 - PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) valve
5 - Oil separator
The part load breather consists of an oil separator, two PCV valves and a flexible hose. The oil separator and the PCV valves are
installed in the top of the RH (right-hand) cylinder head cover. The flexible hose connects the RH cylinder head cover to the
inlet of the intake manifold.
an oil drain, is installed over the channel. The two PCV valves are installed on the outside of the cylinder head cover and
connected in parallel in the gas outlet from the channel to the flexible hose. The PCV valves prevent reverse flow into the
cylinder head cover when there is minimal depression in the intake manifold.
FULL LOAD BREATHER

1 - Flexible hose
2 - Two-way valve
3 - Oil drain
4 - Baffle plate
5 - Oil separator
The full load breather consists of an oil separator, a two-way valve and a flexible hose. The oil separator and the two-way valve
are installed in the top of the LH (left-hand) cylinder head cover. The flexible hose connects the LH cylinder head cover to the
LH air duct of the intake air distribution and filtering system.
an oil drain, is installed over the channel. The two-way valve is installed in the gas outlet from the channel. The two-way valve
prevents reverse flow into the cylinder head cover when there is minimal depression in the air duct.
Engine Emission Control - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Emission Control
For a detailed description of the engine emission control system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08B Engine Emission Control - V8
5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Exhaust gas recirculation system  Fuses
 Breather hoses  Loose or corroded electrical connectors
 Positive crankcase ventilation valve  Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve
 Fuel level  Engine Control Module (ECM)
 Fuel contamination/grade/quality
 Throttle body
Symptom Chart

Difficult to  Battery For battery information, CKP sensor, fuel system and purge valve
start cold  Crankshaft Position (CKP) tests, refer to relevant workshop manual section. Check the EGR
sensor valve.
 Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) valve stuck open
 Fuel system
 Evaporative emissions purge
valve
Engine stalls  Breather system Check the engine breather hoses, PCV, etc. Check the Engine
soon after disconnected/restricted Control Module (ECM) relay operation. For MAF sensor, ignition
start  Engine Control Module (ECM) system tests, air intake and fuel line information, refer to
relay relevant workshop manual section.
 MAF sensor
 Ignition system
 Air filter restricted
 Air leakage
 Fuel lines
Poor throttle  APP sensor malfunction For APP, TP, ECT, MAF sensor tests, intake system checks and
response  TP sensors transmission information, refer to relevant workshop manual
 ECT sensor section. Check the breather system hoses, PCV, etc.
 MAF sensor
 Traction control event
 Air leakage
 Breather system
disconnected/restricted
DTC Index
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -

Air cleaner retaining bolts 8 - 71
Supercharger retaining bolts 25 18 -
Charge air cooler lower assembly retaining bolts 20 15 -
Throttle body retaining studs 10 7 -
Charge air cooler top assembly retaining bolts 25 18 -
Manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT) sensor 5 - 44
Coolant outlet pipe 11 8 -
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Intake Air
Distribution and Filtering
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Supercharger and intake manifolds
2 - Noise feedback system
3 - Air intakes, air cleaners and air ducts
INTRODUCTION
The intake air distribution and filtering system comprises:
 Dual air intakes, air cleaners and air ducts.

 A supercharger and intake manifolds.
 A noise feedback system.
AIR INTAKES, AIR CLEANERS AND AIR DUCTS

1 - Hose clamp
2 - Mounting grommet and bracket
3 - Throttle to T piece duct
4 - Hose clamp
5 - Hose clamp
6 - Full load breather connector stub
7 - LH engine intake duct
9 - Hose clamp
10 - Upper quarter wave resonator
11 - Lower quarter wave resonator
12 - Hose clamp
13 - LH air cleaner
14 - LH air intake
15 - Quarter wave resonator
18 - LH outlet duct
20 - Throttle T-piece duct
22 - RH outlet duct
25 - Pollution sensor bracket
- RH air intake
27
28 - RH air cleaner
29 - Hose clamp
30 - Lower quarter wave resonator
31 - Upper quarter wave resonator
32 - Hose clamp
34 - RH engine intake duct
The air intakes supply air from behind the front bumper to the air cleaners. A grommet and bracket attaches each air intake
to the related side air deflector of the radiator. Quarter wave tubes are installed on the air intakes to reduce air induction
noise. The RH (right-hand) air intake incorporates a bracket for the pollution sensor.
The air cleaners are located forward of the front wheels, behind the fender splash shields. Two mounting points, both
consisting of a grommet installed on a bracket, attach each of the air cleaners to the fender extension of the related front
side member and to a bracket on the front bumper beam. Each air cleaner consists of a casing with inlet and outlet
connections. A removable cassette drawer holds a tray and a replaceable air cleaner element. Two screws secure the cassette
drawer in the closed position in the casing. The underside of the casing incorporates a drain valve to prevent the
accumulation of water in the air cleaner. The outlet connection of each air cleaner incorporates a MAFT (mass air flow and
temperature) sensor.
Air Cleaner

4 - MAFT sensor
5 - Outlet connection
6 - Air cleaner element
7 - Screws
8 - Cassette
9 - Casing
The air ducts direct the air from the air cleaners to the electric throttle. The air ducts consist of LH (left-hand) and RH outlet
ducts, LH and RH engine intake ducts and a throttle T-piece duct. Hose clamps connect the ducts together and to the air
cleaners and the electric throttle.
The air ducts incorporate the following mounting points, which all consist of a grommet installed on a bracket:
 One on each outlet duct, attached to the related front side member.
 One on each engine intake duct, attached to brackets on the front cross member.
 One on the throttle T-piece duct, attached to a bracket on the RH cylinder head.
The air ducts also incorporate the following:
 On the outlet ducts, quarter wave tubes to reduce air induction noise.
 On the LH engine intake duct, a resonator, to reduce air induction noise, and a connector stub for the engine full load
breather pipe.
 On the throttle T-piece, a resonator, to reduce air induction noise, and a connector stub for the vacuum tube of the
bypass valve actuator on the supercharger.
SUPERCHARGER AND INTAKE MANIFOLDS
The SC (supercharger) increases the pressure, and thus mass, of the air supplied to the engine, to increase the engine's
power output. Two separate intake manifolds direct air from the SC to the cylinder inlet ports.
The intake manifolds are attached to their related cylinder heads and the sides of the SC. Two dowels locate the SC in
position on the cylinder block. A charge air cooler tank top is installed on top of the SC and intake manifolds to form the air
duct from the SC outlet to the intake manifolds. A charge air cooler is installed in each intake manifold.
The charge air cooler tank top incorporates four studs for the attachment of the engine cover. A NVH (noise, vibration and
harshness) pad is attached to the side of each intake manifold.
www.JagDocs.com
Supercharger and Intake Manifolds - Assembled

1 - Engine cover rear attachment points
2 - Vacuum connector stub
3 - MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor
4 - SC filler/level plug
5 - Symposer inlet pipe connection
6 - Dowels
7 - Engine cover front attachment points
8 - EVAP (evaporative emissions) connector stub
9 - Part load breather connector stub
10 - MAP (manifold absolute pressure ) sensor
11 - Bypass valve pneumatic actuator
12 - Outlet ports
13 - Inlet port
14 - Pulley
15 - Coolant inlet and outlet connections
Supercharger and Intake Manifolds - Exploded

1 - M08 x 35 mm screw (19 off)
3 - Charge air cooler tank top
4 - Gasket
5 - LH charge air cooler
8 - M08 x 30 mm crew (3 off)
9 - LH intake manifold
10 - Gasket
11 - NVH pad
12 - M08 x 50 mm screw
13 - Bypass valve
14 - SC
15 - Gasket
16 - RH intake manifold
- M08 x 30 mm crew (3 off)
17
18 - M08 x 50 mm screw
19 - NVH pad
22 - RH charge air cooler
23 - M08 x 150 mm screw
Supercharger
The SC is a Roots blower with high angle helix rotors driven at 2.1 x engine speed by the secondary belt of the accessory
drive.
The two rotors of the SC are contained in a housing. The ends of the rotors are supported in bearings in the front cover and
the bearing plate. A rear cover seals the bearing plate and incorporates a filler/level plug for lubricant. A pulley transfers
power from the accessory drive to the shaft of one of the rotors.
A pneumatic actuator on the front cover is attached to a by-pass valve in the housing. The bypass valve regulates a flow of
air from the outlet of the SC back to the inlet side of the rotors, to control the outlet pressure of the SC. Hoses connect the
pneumatic actuator to the throttle T-piece of the air ducts, upstream of the electric throttle, and to the front cover,
downstream of the electric throttle. A lever connects the actuating rod of the pneumatic actuator to the shaft of the bypass
valve. A screw in the front cover limits movement of the lever in the closed direction to allow calibration of the SC output.
The front cover also incorporates:
 The SC air inlet and mounting face for the electric throttle.
 A connector stub for the part load breather.
 A MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor.
 A connector stub for a hose from the EVAP (evaporative emission) canister purge valve.
Intake Manifolds
Each intake manifold is attached to the SC with three screws and a bolt. Two dowels ensure correct alignment of each intake
manifold. The RHD (right-hand drive) intake manifold incorporates a connection port for the noise feedback system. The LH
intake manifold incorporates:
 A connector stub for the brake vacuum system.

 A MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor.
NOISE FEEDBACK SYSTEM

1 - Outlet adapter
2 - Clip
3 - Feedback tube
4 - Clip
5 - Resonator
6 - Vacuum hose - tuning valve to pneumatic actuator
7 - Tuning valve
8 - Vacuum hose - tuning valve to brake vacuum system
9 - Pneumatic valve
10 - Symposer
11 - Inlet pipe
12 - Outlet pipe
The noise feedback system generates a sporty, powerful engine sound in the passenger compartment, at high engine load
and speed settings, to enhance the driving experience. The noise feedback system consists of a symposer system, a
feedback tube and a resonator. Activation of the noise feedback system is controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
Symposer System
The symposer system modifies induction sound waves of a specific frequency range, at given engine settings, to produce the
required engine sound. The symposer system consists of:
 An inlet pipe and flange.

 A symposer and pneumatic valve assembly.
 A tuning valve and associated vacuum tubes.
 An outlet pipe.
 An outlet adapter.
The inlet pipe and flange transfer induction noise from the RH intake manifold to the symposer. The pipe is a push fit on the
symposer and the flange, which is attached to the rear face of the RH intake manifold.
The symposer contains two pairs of chambers, one pair on the inlet side and one pair on the outlet side. The inlet pipe
connects to one of the chambers on the inlet side of the symposer, and the pneumatic valve connects to one of the
chambers on the outlet side of the symposer. A calibrated orifice in the inlet pipe connection on the symposer limits the
range of sound waves that pass through it. A 'paddle' installed in a diaphragm forms the separating wall in each pair of
chambers. The paddle is able to pivot about its lateral axis where it passes through the wall that separates the two pairs of
chambers.
Symposer

1 - Diaphragm
2 - Paddle
3 - Isolator
4 - Inlet chamber (sealed)
5 - Outlet chamber (open to pneumatic valve)
6 - Screw (8 off)
7 - Pneumatic valve
8 - Outlet chamber
9 - Inlet chamber (open to inlet pipe)
10 - Inlet pipe connection
The pneumatic valve controls the flow of sound from the symposer outlet. It is a normally-closed valve connected directly to
the outlet of the symposer and operated by vacuum pressure. Two isolators, one on the pneumatic valve and one on the
symposer, locate the assembly on a bracket attached to the SC rear cover.
The tuning valve controls the application of vacuum pressure to the pneumatic valve. Two screws attach the tuning valve to
the same bracket as the symposer and pneumatic valve. The tuning valve is a normally-closed solenoid-operated valve
installed in the vacuum line between a T-connection in the brake vacuum system and the pneumatic valve. A vent cap on the
tuning valve allows atmospheric pressure into the vacuum line to the pneumatic valve when the tuning valve is closed.
The outlet pipe carries sound from the pneumatic valve to the feedback tube via the outlet adapter. The outlet pipe is a push
fit on the pneumatic valve and in the outlet adapter. A screw attaches the outlet adapter to an engine harness bracket
installed between the two intake manifolds.
Feedback Tube
The feedback tube transfers the sound from the symposer system to the resonator. Clips secure the feedback tube to the
outlet adapter of the symposer system and to the resonator.
Resonator
The resonator directs the sound from the feedback tube into the passenger compartment. The resonator is installed in the
passenger compartment side of the engine bulkhead, on two mounting grommets each consisting of an isolator and a
compression limiter.
CONTROL DIAGRAM (NOISE FEEDBACK SYSTEM)
NOTE: A = Hardwired

1 - Battery
3 - Power distribution box (EMS secondary relay)
4 - Tuning valve
5 - ECM
Supercharger
At closed or partially open throttle positions, the bypass valve is fully open, allowing a flow of air from the SC outlet back to
the inlet side. This results in little or no pressure increase across the SC. Progressive opening of the throttle reduces the
depression downstream of the electric throttle. This is sensed by the pneumatic actuator, which moves to close the bypass
valve. As the bypass valve closes there is a corresponding increase in the outlet pressure from the SC, which increases
engine power output.
Noise Feedback System
Sound waves from the RH intake manifold are filtered by the calibrated orifice in the inlet pipe connection on the symposer.
The sound waves make the paddle oscillate and generate pulsations in the outlet chambers. When the pneumatic valve is
open, the pulsations are transmitted through the outlet pipe and feedback tube to the resonator in the passenger
compartment.
The tuning valve of the noise feedback system receives a power feed from the power distribution box and is connected to
ground through the ECM. At lower engine loads and speeds the ECM keeps the ground open circuit and the tuning valve is
de-energized closed. Atmospheric pressure is sensed at the pneumatic valve through the vent cap on the tuning valve, which
keeps the pneumatic valve closed and prevents sound from the symposer entering the feedback system.
At higher engine loads and speeds the ECM connects the tuning valve to ground. The tuning valve energizes, blanks off the
atmospheric vent and opens the vacuum line between the brake vacuum system and the pneumatic valve. The depression in
the brake vacuum system is sensed at the pneumatic valve, which opens and allows sound from the symposer into the
feedback system.
The status of the pneumatic valve at various engine loads and speeds is given below:
Pneumatic Valve Status

NOTE: Values are for valve opening with increasing engine load and speed. Deduct 0.05 g/rev and 50 rev/min for valve
closing with decreasing engine load and speed.
Engine Speed: rev/min

Engine Load: g/rev 0 500 1000 2500 3000 4000 5800 6500
1.30 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed
1.35 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed
1.40 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Open
2.50 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Open Open Open
3.00 Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Open Open Open
3.50 Closed Closed Closed Open Open Open Open Open
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Intake Air
For a detailed description of the intake air distribution and filtering system and operation, refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12A
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Hoses and ducts (damage/connections)  Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor
 Air cleaner element (contaminated/blocked)  Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
 Restricted air intake  Manifold Absolute Pressure/Temperature (MAPT) sensor
 Supercharger  Throttle body
 Supercharger (cooling fan) drive belt  Harness (security/damage)
 Supercharger seals and gaskets  Connections (security/damage)
 Charge air coolers (damage/connection)
Symptom Chart

Vehicle does not  Restricted/Blocked air Clear the restriction. Replace the air cleaner element as
start/hard intake necessary. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
starting/poor  Restricted/Blocked air
performance cleaner element
Excessive intake  Intake pipe Check the intake system and hoses for correct
noise disconnected/damaged installation/damage. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
after the air cleaner section.
 Air cleaner assembly
incorrectly
assembled/damaged
Lack of boost  Supercharger drive belt Check the supercharger and drive belt. Check the charge air
broken/slipping coolers. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
 Supercharger fault
 Supercharger air intake
fault
 Major air leakage (after the
supercharger)
Noise  Supercharger drive belt Check the supercharger and drive belt. Remove the
slipping supercharger drive belt and recheck for noise. Turn the
 Supercharger fault supercharger by hand and check for excessive resistance.
 Major air leakage (after the Check for excessive play at the supercharger pulley. Check the
supercharger) charge air coolers. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
section.
DTC Index
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner
Element
Removal
NOTE: LH air cleaner element procedure shown, RH is similar.
and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
Installation

LH
Removal


2. remove the left-hand wheel and tire.
and Installation).
3.
5.
Installation

RH
Removal


2. Remove the right-hand front wheel and tire.
and Installation).
5.
6.
Installation

Outlet Intermediate Pipe LH
Removal
2. Torque: 10 Nm
3.
Installation

Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH
Removal
2.
Installation

Outlet Pipe LH
Removal
1. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe LH (303-12B

and Installation).


and Installation).
4.
5.
Installation

Outlet Pipe RH
Removal

and Installation).


and Installation).
5.
Installation

Outlet Pipe T-Connector
Removal
1. Refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Charge Air
Cooler
Removal

2. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting
4. Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04A Fuel Charging
and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
Procedures).
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14. WARNINGS:
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open

flame of any type when working on or near any fuel
related components. Highly flammable vapors are always
present and may ignite. Failure to follow these

CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the fuel line union does not rotate.
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new

blanking caps.
15. Torque: 10 Nm
16.
17. Torque: 10 Nm
18. Torque: 10 Nm
19.
20. NOTE: Install and lightly tighten bolts in sequence illustrated.
NOTE: Complete the tightening sequence.
NOTE: Remove and discard the gasket.
Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
2. WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco

or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these
NOTE: Lubricate the union threads with clean engine oil.
3. WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco

or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these
Torque:
Union 21 Nm
M6 12 Nm
4. WARNINGS:

After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be

checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow these
Torque: 21 Nm
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Supercharger
Special Tool(s)
303-1449-01
Supercharger Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
303-1449-02
Supercharger Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
CAUTION: If a new cylinder head has been installed, then new taptite bolts must be used to install the
supercharger.
NOTE: New taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the first application.



3. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
4. Refer to: Throttle Body (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls -
V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
6. Refer to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT)
Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L
7.
8.
9.
10. Discard the gaskets.

12.
13.
14.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new cylinder head has been installed, then

new taptite bolts must be used to install the supercharger.
NOTE: New taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the
first application.

2. Torque: 25 Nm
3. Torque: 25 Nm
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
 CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head has been

installed then the special tool 303-1449-02
without the thread must be used to install
the supercharger.
If a new cylinder head has been
installed, then new taptite bolts must be
used to install the supercharger.
NOTE: New taptite bolts when used cut

their own threads on the first application.
Special Tool(s): 303-1449-01, 303-1449-

02

 Install new gaskets.

Special Tool(s): 303-1449-01, 303-1449-02

Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 25 Nm
11.
12.
13. Refer to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT)

Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L
15. Refer to: Throttle Body (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls -
V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
16. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol -

Air cleaner retaining bolts 8 - 71
Throttle body retaining studs 17 13 -
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 5 - 44
Intake hose to throttle body 4 - 35
Intake hose support bracket 8 - 71
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Intake Air
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Intake manifold
2 - Noise feedback system
3 - Air intakes, air cleaners and air ducts
INTRODUCTION
The intake air distribution and cleaning system comprises:
 Dual air intakes, air cleaners and air ducts.

 An intake manifold.
 A noise feedback system.
AIR INTAKES, AIR CLEANERS AND AIR DUCTS

1 - Hose clamp
2 - Noise feedback tube connector stub
4 - Hose clamp
5 - Hose clamp
6 - Full load breather connector stub
7 - LH (left hand) engine intake duct
9 - Hose clamp
10 - Helmholtz resonator
12 - Hose clamp
13 - LH air cleaner
14 - LH air intake
16 - LH outlet duct
17 - Throttle T-piece duct
18 - Hose clamp
19 - RH outlet duct
22 - Pollution sensor bracket
23 - RH (right hand) air intake
24 - RH air cleaner
25 - Hose clamp
27 - Helmholtz resonator
29 - RH engine intake duct
The air intakes supply air from behind the front bumper to the air cleaners. A grommet and bracket attaches each air intake
to the related side air deflector of the radiator. The RH (right-hand) air intake incorporates a bracket for the pollution sensor.
The air cleaners are located forward of the front wheels, behind the fender splash shields. Two mounting points, both
consisting of a grommet installed on a bracket, attach each of the air cleaners to the fender extension of the related front
side member and to a bracket on the front bumper beam. Each air cleaner consists of a casing with inlet and outlet
connections. A removable cassette drawer holds a tray and a replaceable air cleaner element in the casing. Two screws
secure the cassette drawer in the closed position in the casing. The underside of the casing incorporates a drain valve to
prevent the accumulation of water in the air cleaner. The outlet connection of each air cleaner incorporates a MAFT (mass air
flow and temperature) sensor.
Air Cleaner

4 - MAFT sensor
5 - Outlet connection
6 - Air cleaner element
7 - Screws
8 - Cassette
9 - Casing
The air ducts direct the air from the air cleaners to the electric throttle. The air ducts consist of LH (left-hand) and RH outlet
ducts, LH and RH engine intake ducts and a throttle T-piece duct. Hose clamps connect the ducts together and to the air
cleaners and the electric throttle.
The air ducts incorporate the following mounting points, which all consist of a grommet installed on a bracket:
 One on each outlet duct, attached to the related front side member.
 One on each engine intake duct, attached to brackets on the front cross member.
 One on the throttle T-piece duct, attached to a bracket on the RH cylinder head.
The air ducts also incorporate the following:
 On the outlet ducts, quarter wave tubes and Helmholtz resonators to reduce air induction noise.
 On the LH engine intake duct, a connector stub for the engine full load breather pipe.
 On the throttle T-piece, a connector stub for the noise feedback tube.
INTAKE MANIFOLD

1 - Engine cover rear attachment points
2 - Engine harness shield attachment points
3 - Cover plate
4 - Brake booster vacuum connection
5 - Outlet ports
6 - Evaporative emissions connection
7 - Inlet port
8 - MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor
9 - Part load breather connection
10 - Fuel crossover tube attachment points
11 - Engine cover front attachment points
The intake manifold is installed between the cylinder heads and directs air from the electric throttle to the individual
cylinders. The inlet port connects to a central chamber in the intake manifold. Eight separate tracts connect the central
chamber to the outlet ports. A cover plate seals the rear of the intake manifold.
The intake manifold incorporates:
 A stub pipe for connection of the part load breather.

 A stub pipe for connection of the evaporative emissions system.
 A MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor.
 A vacuum connection for the brake booster.
 Threaded inserts to provide attachment points for the electric throttle, fuel crossover tube, engine cover and an
engine harness shield.
 Compression limiters in the cylinder head attachment points.
 Seals in the inlet and outlet ports.
 A VIS (variable intake system).
Variable Intake System

1 - Cassette
2 - Cover plate
3 - RH pneumatic actuator
4 - Vent cap
6 - Tuning valve
7 - Vacuum connector
8 - LH pneumatic actuator
9 - Vacuum hoses
10 - Drive shaft
11 - Flap valve
The VIS changes the length of the tracts in the intake manifold to improve the air flow to the cylinders, which improves the
engine power and torque.
A cassette in the intake manifold contains eight flap valves, each located in an opening part-way along one of the tracts. Two
drive shafts connect the flap valves together in two groups of four. Each drive shaft is connected to a pneumatic actuator
installed on the cover plate of the intake manifold.
A tuning valve, also installed on the cover plate, controls the application of vacuum pressure to the pneumatic actuators. The
tuning valve is a normally-closed solenoid-operated valve installed in the vacuum line between the cover plate and the
pneumatic actuators. A vent cap on the tuning valve allows atmospheric pressure into the vacuum line to the pneumatic
actuators when the tuning valve is closed.
The ECM (engine control module) controls the operation of the tuning valve.
NOISE FEEDBACK SYSTEM

1 - Clip
2 - Feedback tube
3 - Clip
4 - Resonator
5 - Grommet assembly
The noise feedback system generates a sporty, powerful engine sound in the passenger compartment to enhance the driving
experience. The noise feedback system consists of a feedback tube and a resonator.
The feedback tube transfers induction sound waves into the resonator. Clips secure the feedback tube to the resonator and
to the throttle T-piece air duct.
The resonator modifies sound waves of a specific frequency range to produce the required engine tone and sound volume.
The resonator is installed in the passenger compartment side of the engine bulkhead, mounted on two grommet assemblies
consisting of an isolator and a compression limiter.
CONTROL DIAGRAM (VARIABLE INTAKE SYSTEM)
NOTE: A = Hardwired

1 - Battery
3 - Power distribution box (EMS secondary relay)
4 - Tuning valve
5 - ECM
Variable Intake System
The flap valves can be set to one of two positions, to produce short or long intake tracts in the intake manifold. Short intake
tracts are produced with the flap valves closed. Long intake tracts are produced with the flap valves open. The flap valves
are closed at engine speeds up to 4700 rev/min and open at engine speeds of 4700 rev/min and above, with a hysteresis of
50 rev/min.
The intake manifold tuning valve receives a power feed from the power distribution box and is connected to ground through
the ECM. To close the flap valves, the ECM connects the intake manifold tuning valve to ground. The energized intake
manifold tuning valve blanks off the atmospheric vent and opens the vacuum line between the cover plate and the
pneumatic actuators. The depression in the intake manifold is sensed at the pneumatic actuators, which turn the drive shafts
and move the flap valves to the closed position.
To open the flap valves, the ECM disconnects the ground connection and the intake manifold tuning valve is de-energized
closed. Atmospheric pressure is sensed at the pneumatic actuators through the vent cap on the intake manifold tuning valve
and the flap valves move to the open position.
Flap Valves Closed

Flap Valves Open
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Intake Air
For additional information.

REFER to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner
Element
Removal
NOTE: LH air cleaner element procedure shown, RH is similar.
and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner LH
Removal


2. remove the left-hand wheel and tire.
and Installation).
3.
5.
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner RH
Removal


and Installation).
5.
6.
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner Outlet
Intermediate Pipe LH
Removal
2. Torque: 10 Nm
3.
Installation

Intermediate Pipe RH
Removal
2.
Installation

Pipe LH
Removal
1. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe LH (303-12B

and Installation).


and Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
Installation

Pipe RH
Removal

and Installation).


and Installation).
5.
Installation

Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Evaporative emission canister retaining nuts 7 - 62
Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Evaporative
Emissions
COMPONENT LOCATION (ALL EXCEPT NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATION)
NOTE: System on supercharger vehicle shown, system on naturally aspirated vehicle similar.

1 - EVAP (evaporative emissions) canister
2 - Vapor pipe (filler head communication) - fuel tank to filler pipe
3 - Vapor pipe - EVAP canister to EVAP canister purge valve
4 - Vapor pipe - fuel tank to EVAP canister
5 - EVAP canister purge valve
COMPONENT LOCATION (NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATION)
NOTE: System on naturally aspirated vehicle shown, system on supercharger vehicle similar.

1 - EVAP canister
2 - DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage) filter
3 - Vapor pipe (filler head communication) - fuel tank to filler pipe
4 - Atmospheric vent pipe - DMTL pump to filter
5 - DMTL pump
6 - Vapor pipe - EVAP canister to EVAP canister purge valve
7 - Vapor pipe - fuel tank to EVAP canister
8 - EVAP canister purge valve
INTRODUCTION
The EVAP (evaporative emission) system reduces the level of hydrocarbons released into the atmosphere by fuel vapor venting
from the fuel tank. The system comprises of an EVAP canister, an EVAP purge valve and interconnecting vapor pipes. The vapor
pipes are connected to the system components using quick release connectors.
Fuel vapor is generated by the fuel in the tank and the amount of vapor produced increases as the fuel heats up. Fuel vapor can
flow freely to the EVAP canister via the tank venting system.
On NAS vehicles the vapor generated in the fuel tank during refueling flows without restriction to the EVAP canister.
On all vehicles except NAS, the vapor is restricted in its path to the EVAP canister, but can flow freely during the refueling operation
to atmosphere via the fuel filler pipe opening.
The vapor passes into the EVAP canister where it is absorbed and stored by the charcoal. Because there is a limit to the amount of
vapor the canister can contain, the fuel vapor is purged from the canister when the engine is running and burned in the engine.
DIAGNOSTIC MODULE - TANK LEAKAGE PUMP (NAS ONLY)
The DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage) pump periodically checks the EVAP system and the fuel tank for leaks when the
ignition is switched off. The DMTL system comprises the previously described components of the EVAP system with the following
additional components; a DMTL pump and a DMTL filter.
The DMTL pump is connected to the atmospheric vent of the EVAP canister and incorporates an electric air pump, a PTC (positive
temperature coefficient) heating element, a normally open change-over valve and a reference orifice. The DMTL pump is only
operated when the ignition is switched off and is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). The ECM also monitors the electric
air pump operation and the change-over valve for faults.
The DMTL filter protects the pump from dust being drawn into the system when the pump is being operated. The filter is located on
the fuel filler head and is connected to the DMTL pump by a vapor pipe.
The DMTL test is performed after the engine has stopped following a run of 10 minutes or more, providing that the vehicle fuel tank
is between 15 and 85% full, the ambient temperature is above 0 °C (32 °F) and less than 40 °C (104 °F) and the vehicle was not
started for at least 180 minutes prior to this run.
The DMTL pump is driven to pressurize the fuel tank and the current is measured with the change-over valve in different states.
A comparison of the current draw in each state indicates the degree of any leak, and the ECM then sets the appropriate DTC
(diagnostic trouble code).
DMTL Pump Operation
To check the fuel tank and the EVAP system for leaks, the ECM operates the DMTL pump and monitors the current draw. Initially,
the ECM establishes a reference current by pumping air through the reference orifice and back to atmosphere. Once the reference
current is determined, the ECM closes the change-over valve, which seals the EVAP system. The EVAP canister purge valve remains
de-energized and is therefore closed. The output from the air pump is diverted from the reference orifice and into the EVAP system.
When the change-over valve is closed, the load on the air pump falls to zero. Providing there are no leaks, the air pump will begin
to pressurize the EVAP system and the load and current draw in the pump increases. By monitoring the rate and level of the current
increase, the ECM can determine if there is a leak in the EVAP system.
During normal vehicle operation, 15 seconds after the engine has started, the ECM energizes the heating element in the pump to
prevent condensation formation and possible incorrect readings. The heater remains energized until either the engine and ignition
are off (if no DMTL test is running) or until after the DMTL test is completed."
Leaks are classified as:
 Minor - equivalent to a hole diameter of 0.5 to 1.0 mm (0.02 to 0.04 in.).

 Major - equivalent to a hole diameter of 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) or greater.
The ECM performs a check for major leaks each time the ignition is switched off, providing the following conditions are met:
 The vehicle speed is zero.

 The engine speed is zero.
 The atmospheric pressure is above 70 kPa (10.15 lbf/in2), i.e. the altitude is less than approximately 3047 m (10000 feet).
 The ambient temperature is between 0 and 40 °C (32 and 104 °F).
 The EVAP canister vapor concentration factor is 5 or less (where 0 is no fuel vapor, 1 is stoichiometric fuel vapor and greater
than 1 is rich fuel vapor).
 The fuel tank level is valid and between 15 and 85% of nominal capacity.
 The engine running time during the previous cycle was more than 10 minutes.
 The battery voltage is between 10 and 15 volts.
 The last engine off time was more than 180 minutes.
 No errors are detected with the EVAP components, the ambient air temperature and the fuel level.
NOTE: A leak test can be performed using a Jaguar recognized diagnostic tool. This overrides the above conditions and is useful for
checking correct system and component operation.
The ECM performs a check for minor leaks after every 2nd major leak check.
When the leak check is complete, the ECM stops the DMTL pump and opens (de-energizes) the change-over valve.
If the fuel filler cap is opened or refueling is detected during the leak check, by a sudden drop in the current draw or a rise in the
fuel level, the ECM aborts the leak check.
If a leak is detected during the check, the ECM stores an appropriate fault code in its memory. If a leak is detected on two
consecutive checks, the ECM illuminates the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) in the instrument cluster on the next drive cycle.
The duration of a leak check can be between 60 and 900 seconds depending on the results and fuel tank level.
EVAP CANNISTER
EVAP Canister (All Except NAS)

1 - FPDM (fuel pump driver module) mounting bracket
2 - Atmospheric vent
3 - Connector for vapor pipe to EVAP canister purge valve
4 - Connector for vapor pipe from fuel tank
EVAP Canister (NAS)

1 - FPDM mounting bracket
2 - Connector for DMTL pump
3 - DMTL pump bracket
4 - Connector for vapor pipe to EVAP canister purge valve
5 - Connector for vapor pipe from fuel tank
The EVAP canister is located immediately behind the fuel tank. Two bolts attach the EVAP canister to the underside of the center
floor section.
The EVAP canister contains a bed of activated charcoal or carbon. The charcoal is produced using special manufacturing techniques
to treat the charcoal with oxygen. The oxygen treatment opens up millions of pores between the carbon atoms resulting in a highly
porous charcoal with a very large effective surface area which is capable of absorbing large quantities of fuel vapor. Once treated
the charcoal is known as 'activated' carbon or charcoal. The EVAP canister on NAS vehicles uses a higher grade of charcoal to meet
the stricter emissions' regulations.
A mounting bracket on the RH (right-hand) end of the EVAP canister contains the FPDM (fuel pump driver module). For additional
information, refer to 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines.
On all except NAS vehicles, the EVAP canister has a capacity of 1400 cc (85.4 in.3). Two connectors on the EVAP canister allow for
the attachment of the vapor pipe from the fuel tank and the vapor pipe to the EVAP canister purge valve. An atmospheric vent is
located on the underside of the EVAP.
On NAS vehicles, the EVAP canister has a capacity of 3000 cc (183 in.3). Three connectors on the EVAP canister allow for the
attachment of the vapor pipe from the fuel tank, the vapor pipe to the EVAP canister purge valve and the DMTL pump.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
The EVAP canister purge valve is located on the LH (left-hand) side of the engine, below the ignition coils cover. A vapor pipe is
routed from the EVAP canister purge valve to the inlet of the intake manifold (naturally aspirated vehicles) or the supercharger
(supercharged vehicles). The EVAP canister purge valve is controlled by the ECM and is operated when engine operating conditions
are correct to allow purging of the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge valve is a solenoid operated valve which is closed when
de-energized.
A vapor pipe, which runs parallel with the fuel delivery line under the LH side of the vehicle, connects the EVAP canister purge valve
to the EVAP canister.
The EVAP canister purge valve is operated at 10 Hz by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ECM. At this high frequency,
the pulses of fuel vapor flow into the intake manifold/supercharger in an almost continuous flow. The valve operates between 7%
and 100% duty or mark space ratio (percentage open time).
Atmospheric pressure is higher than the pressure at the inlet of the intake manifold/supercharger under all throttle settings and
engine running conditions. It is this pressure differential that causes air to flow through the EVAP system to the engine.
The ECM waits until the engine is running above 55 °C (131 °F) coolant temperature with closed loop fuel operational before the
purging process is activated. Under these conditions the engine should be running smoothly with no warm up enrichment. The EVAP
canister purge valve duty (and flow) is initially ramped slowly because the vapor concentration is unknown (a sudden increase in
purge could cause unstable engine running or cause it to stall due to an extremely "rich" air/fuel mixture). The concentration is
then determined from the amount of adjustment that the closed loop fueling is required to make to achieve the target Air Fuel Ratio
(AIR). Once the concentration has been determined, the purge flow can be increased rapidly and the injected fuel can be pro-
actively adjusted to compensate for the known purge vapor and the target AIR control is maintained.
When the purging process is active, fresh air is drawn into the EVAP canister via the DMTL filter and pump on NAS vehicles, or via
the vent port on the EVAP canister of non NAS vehicles.
For a detailed description of the evaporative emission system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to:
Evaporative Emissions (303-13 Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and
Operation),
Evaporative Emissions (303-13A, Description and Operation),
Evaporative Emissions (303-13A, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Fuel filler cap and seal  Fuses
 Fuel filler neck  Connectors
 DMTL fresh air filter (restriction, etc)  Harness
 Fuel tank (leaks, damage, etc)  Purge valve
 Fuel lines and joints, etc  Diagnostic module fuel tank leak (DMTL) pump
 Carbon canister
 Purge valve
 Diagnostic module fuel tank leak (DMTL) pump module
5. Where K-Line, Vacutec or other proprietary smoke test equipment is available, it should be utilized to assist with
Evaporative Emissions System leak diagnosis.
Symptom Chart

Difficulty in filling fuel  Restriction in the vapour line between the fuelCheck for restrictions/damage, etc
tank tank and the carbon canister outlet/atmospheric (see visual inspection)
port
Fuel smell  System leak Check for leaks, check the purge
 Purge valve inoperative valve operation
'Check Fuel Filler Cap'  Fuel filler cap missing/not tightened after Check the fuel filler cap and seal
displayed on Message refuelling
Center
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Evaporative Leak OBD Fault Rectification Guide
Determine Which DTC Has Been Stored
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, choose diagnostic session, then choose the following symptom
paths : Powertrain/engine system/fuel vapour and odor, Powertrain/engine system/fuel tank,
Electrical/instruments/warning lamps/engine malfunction lamp/lamp illuminated, Powertrain/engine
system/engine performance/fuel consumption high
NOTE: This guide covers DTCs that relate to evaporative leak monitoring, as listed in the table below
DTC Description
P0442-00 DMTL small leak
P0447-00 DMTL COV electrical low (open)
P0448-00 DMTL COV electrical high
P0455-00 DMTL rough leak
P2401-00 DMTL pump electrical low (open)
P2402-00 DMTL pump electrical high
P2404-2F DMTL noise fault
P2404-29 DMTL reference leak
P2405-00 DMTL reference current low
P2406-00 DMTL reference current high
P2450-00 DMTL COV stuck open
P2451-00 DMTL COV stuck closed
P240B-00 DMTL heater electrical low (open)
P240C-00 DMTL heater electrical high
Attempt To Replicate The Fault Using The "Fuel Leak Check" Forced Test
1. Record any DTCs that has been logged
2. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, in the Recommendations tab run the Fuel Leak Check
forced test
3. For the test to run the fuel level must be between 15% and 85%
4. During this procedure the engine must be off
5. The possible responses from the test and the associated DTCs are listed below
6. If again no fault is found it could suggest that the failure mode is a borderline condition (refer to section 3) or
that it was caused by incorrect fitment of the fuel cap or the fuel filler neck is at fault therefore it is important
not disturb the fuel cap
7. Disconnect purge pipe from the purge valve, observe the condition of connection (the seating and condition of
the "O" ring) and then reconnect. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run Purge Valve Self
Test (to clean the purge valve) then run the Fuel Leak Check
8. If the test failed, a smoke test is required to determine the cause of the leak
NOTE: P240B & P240C are not included in the Fuel Leak Check forced test (these monitors run at every ignition on
and complete within 30 seconds)
Response Description ID Equivalent DTC

Function running: Reference leak measurement 1
Function running: Rough leak measurement 2
Function running: Small leak measurement 3
Function running: 2nd ref leak measurement 4
Function running: COV Cleaning 5
Function aborted due to conditions: Vbatt conditions not correct 11
(too high/ low)
Function aborted due to conditions: Variation Ref. I (reference 12 P2404-29
current) too high
Function aborted due to conditions: DMTL electrical fault 13 P0447, P0448
Function aborted due to conditions: Maximum diagnostic time 14
exceeded
Function aborted due to conditions: Crash detected 15
Function aborted due to conditions: Refuel detected 20
Function aborted due to conditions: Filler cap opened 21
Function aborted due to conditions: Engine start 23
Function aborted due to conditions: Noisy current measurement 24 P2404-2F
Function aborted due to conditions: Ambient temp outside range26
Function aborted due to conditions: Ambient pressure outside range
27
Function aborted due to conditions: Other conditions 29
Function complete - Tight system, fault free 30
Function complete - Fine leak detected 31 P0442
Function complete - Rough leak detected 32 P0455
Function complete - Module error 33 P2401, P2402, P2450, P2451, P2405, P2406,
P2404-29
Function complete - Medium leak detected 34 P0442, P0455
Read The "Ranking values" To Determine How Far Away The Result Is From The Failure Threshold
9. When the Fuel Leak Check forced test has completed the test results (known as ranking values) will be
displayed
10. These should be compared against the limits shown in the table below
11. If the test result is borderline then there is a risk that a failure will occur at a later date (during customer usage
of the vehicle)
12. To avoid this the vehicle should be carefully checked for any small leaks
Ranking Value Normal Result For Tight System Leak Failure Condition
Rough Leak (40 thou+) 0 > = 50 >= 128
Small Leak (20 thou+) 0 > = 60 >= 128
TRACE THE ROOT CAUSE OF THE FAULT
The list below provides some suggested actions to help trace the root cause of the fault
Each action should be followed up with a Fuel Leak Check forced test (and ranking value check) in order to determine
if any improvement has been made
DTC Fault Description Fault Rectification Actions after smoke test

P0442- DMTL small leak  1. Inspect / refit filler cap after smoke test (inspect filler neck for correct fitment to
00 pocket so that filer neck protrudes)
 2. Run engine at idle; Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run
Purge Valve Self Test (to clean the purge valve)
 3. Check that the DMTL module wiring connector has been installed correctly and
that the seals around the connector body and individual wires are in good condition
 4. Check all fuel system connections are correctly installed and secure
 5. Visually inspect purge canister, purge pipes, fuel tank and filler neck for any
obvious damage
 6. Try isolating the purge valve by fitting a blanking plug to the purge pipe
 7. Carry out a smoke test
 8. Replace the DMTL module
P0447- DMTL COV  1. Check fuse
00 electrical low  2. Check that fuse fits tightly into the fuse holder
(open)  3. Check that the DMTL module wiring connector has been fitted correctly
 4. Check wiring harness continuity between DMTL module and ECU connectors
 5. Replace DMTL module
P0448- DMTL COV  1. Check wiring
00 electrical high  2. Replace DMTL module
P0455- DMTL rough leak  1. Inspect / refit filler cap after smoke test (inspect filler neck for correct fitment to
00 pocket so that filer neck protrudes)
 2. Run engine at idle; Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run
"Purge Valve Self Test" (to help clean the purge valve)
 3. Check that the DMTL module wiring connector has been installed correctly and
that the seals around the connector body and individual wires are in good condition
(surprisingly, this is a potential leakage path!)
 4. Check all fuel system connections are correctly installed and secure
 5. Visually inspect purge canister, purge pipes, fuel tank and filler neck for any
obvious damage
 6. Try isolating the purge valve by fitting a blanking plug to the purge pipe
 7. Carry out a smoke test
P2401- DMTL pump  1. Check fuse
00 electrical low  2. Check that fuse fits correctly into the fuse holder
P2402- DMTL pump  1. Check wiring
P2404- DMTL noise fault  Replace DMTL module
2F
P2404- DMTL reference  Replace DMTL module
29 leak
P2405- DMTL reference  Replace DMTL module
00 current low
P2406- DMTL reference  1. Check for any blockages in the DMTL ventilation pipe & filter
00 current high  2. Replace DMTL module
P2450- DMTL COV stuck  Replace DMTL module
00 open
P2451- DMTL COV stuck  Replace DMTL module
00 close
P240B- DMTL heater  1. Check fuse
00 electrical low  2. Check that fuse fits tightly into the fuse holder
P240C- DMTL heater  1. Check wiring
Pre and 10MY Denso/Bosch PCM Systems
CAUTION: The Maximum pressure of the EVAP system is 0.07 bar do not exceed
NOTE: Apart from the purge valve connection, it is recommended to smoke test the EVAP system without disturbing
any joints associated with the system, this will determine the leak more accurately and quickly
 1. Remove rear wheel arch liner to access fuel filler neck

 2. On the fuel filler neck the DMTL filter will be visible as shown in picture. Unclip filter housing from fuel filler
neck to gain better access to DMTL filter
 3. Remove carefully the top of filter to expose filter and remove
 4. Attach rubber adapter to tip of smoke machine nozzle to ensure tight seal to filter housing. Disconnect the
purge pipe from purge valve; this will be an escape point for the smoke to exit
 5. Allow tester to complete self-test and green READY light to turn ON 2. For best Tester performance;
completely unwind Tester’s supply hose
 6. Press Smoke on control panel to fill EVAP system with smoke vapour. The control panel Smoke light will light
indicating smoke production. The smoke setting is on a 15 minute timer. Pressing the Smoke button again turns
Tester off. It is normal for the flow meter ball, while in the smoke mode, not to be as steady as when it is in the
Test mode. Note: The pressure gauge is active only after smoke cycle is complete
 7. Continue introducing smoke into the EVAP System until the flow meter’s ball stops descending and this
assures the system test pressure is met and smoke will appear from the purge pipe, then close off purge pipe
with special tool (Test Adapter Hose/EVAP Port 310-142)
NOTE: Special tool (Test Adapter Hose/EVAP Port 310-142)

CAUTION: On some vehicles, the DMTL filter can not be removed, in these instances fill the system through the
purge valve and smoke will appear from the filter
Pre 10MY Vehicles
On pre 10MY DMTL systems, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, select Measurement application
session then select the Recommendations tab which will give you access to Datalogger. Then select Engine
systems then select the Output state control data-logger signal Engine output 1 – diagnostic module – tank
leakage -change over valve active which will close the system. Then select Engine output 1 – diagnostic module
– tank leakage – pump active this will pressurize the EVAP system
10MY vehicles
On 10MY vehicles a smoke test application is available so therefore only smoke fill the system and then run the
application
 8. Follow the EVAP system path with the halogen light provided and looks for the smoke exiting the leak(s) or
use the UV light provided and look for the dye deposited at the exact location of the leak(s)
 9. Repair the leak(s) and perform the Fuel Leak Check application again or smoke test to verify repair, as well
as to make sure there are no additional leaks in the EVAP system
The UltraTraceUV® smoke solution’s dye feature is especially helpful when the leak is in an area that is not readily
visible, as on the top of the fuel tank or behind a panel. Once you gain access to the area of the leak, wear the yellow
UV glasses and shine the UV light provided to identify the exact location of the leak(s). Smoke exiting a very small leak
is even easier to see with lower pressure. If you encounter smoke leaking out of an area but find it difficult to pinpoint
exactly where the source of the leak is; try reducing the pressure in the system being tested by turning the Tester OFF
and allow the pressure to dissipate. The longer a particular leak is allowed to leak, the more fluorescent dye material
will be deposited at that leak. With some vapour system leaks, the leak may only present itself under vacuum and not
under pressure. If equipment permits, test the system in both states. Purge valve faults [P0441, P0444, P0458 and
P0459] should all inhibit DMTL leak test and therefore need to be resolved prior to any DMTL issues. For this reason,
when smoke testing the vapour system, it should be sufficient to enter the system at the connection up stream of the
purge valve. If no leak is found then testing the remainder of the system up to the purge valve is recommended
NOTE: It may be possible to search for small leaks using a gas analyzer and looking for HC (hydro carbon) spikes. This
should enable leaks to be detected in areas of the vapor system that our out of sight of the technician. The solenoid
should be deactivated after five minutes to prevent potential damage. Check that connector and individual terminals are
sealed correctly
Phase-One – (quantifying the leak)
 1. Connect the tester supply hose to vehicle EVAP system. > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
 2. Determine if the vehicle’s EVAP system you are testing is governed by a .020” (0.5 mm) or .040” (1 mm)
acceptable leak standard. Press the appropriate calibration standard on the tester’s control panel and observe
the position of the flow meter ball. > This function automatically turns off in 10 seconds
 3. Position the flow meter's pointer flag so that it aligns with the measurement observed in step 2 above. > This
sets PASS / FAIL mark
 4. Close vehicle’s EVAP Vent Solenoid. > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
 5. Press TEST on control panel and fill EVAP system. > This introduces 5-minutes of nitrogen gas
 6. Look for flow meter ball to stop descending indicating that the vehicle system is full. > Fill time 1-4 minutes
depending on system volume
 7. Compare flow meter ball reading to pointer flag. > ABOVE flag = FAIL (go to Phase-Two). > BELOW flag =
PASS (test complete)
Testing With Pressure and Vacuum Decay
In addition to quantifying the leak with the Phase-One flow test, the Tester allows you the flexibility of testing the
vehicle’s EVAP system by using either Pressure Decay or Vacuum Decay methods. Below are instructions for
performing both decay tests
Pressure-Decay Test
NOTE: The Pressure Decay test is best performed immediately after the Phase-one flow test, since the system has
already built up pressure
At the completion of the Phase-one flow test, the EVAP system is fully pressurized, since the Phase-one test uses
pressure to perform its flow test. Testing pressure decay with the Vacutec® 522B-J/LR is very simple. All you need to
do is the following:
 1. Allow tester to complete self-test and green READY light to turn ON

 2. Connect Tester supply hose to vehicle EVAP system
 3. Close vehicle’s EVAP Vent solenoid > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
 4. Press VACUUM switch on the tester control panel
 NOTE: The vacuum switch is on a 30-second timer, which should be sufficient time to draw the appropriate
vacuum from the EVAP system. Press VACUUM switch again if additional time is required
 5. After vacuum timer turns off, observe the vacuum gauge for any decay (loss of vacuum) indicating a leak in
the EVAP system
NOTE: Disconnect the Tester from the vehicle after the Vacuum Decay Test. The fuel pressure in the vehicle’s fuel tank
is constantly changing due to the vehicle’s fuel volatility and that could cause the Tester’s pressure gauge to exceed its
maximum reading limits
Removal
WARNING: Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General


3.
4. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Removal


3.
4.
5. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
2.

fluids.
Installation

Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Evaporative
Emission Canister Purge Valve V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

coolant.
3.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor(s) retaining bolt 10 7 -
Heated oxygen sensor (H02S) 48 35 -
Catalyst monitor sensor 48 35
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor retaining bolt 10 7 -
Knock sensor(s) (KS) retaining bolt 20 15 -
Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor 32 24 -
Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor 5 - 44
Engine Oil Level Sensor retaining bolts 11 8 -
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid(s) retaining bolts 10 7 -
Engine Control Module (ECM) retaining bolts 7 - 62
Fuse box retaining screws 4 - 35
Engine wiring harness connector bolt 3 - 27
Engine wiring harness retaining bracket bolts 6 - 53
ECM retaining bracket bolts 7 - 62
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Electronic Engine
Controls
COMPONENT LOCATION - SHEET 1 OF 3

1 - MAFT (mass air flow and temperature) sensor
2 - CMP (camshaft position) sensors
4 - Knock sensors
5 - CKP (crankshaft position) sensor
6 - CMP sensors
7 - MAFT sensor
8 - ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor (ECT 2)
9 - Electronic throttle

1 - ECT sensor (ECT 1)
2 - MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor
3 - Upstream HO2S (heated oxygen sensor)
4 - Downstream HO2S
5 - Downstream HO2S
6 - Upstream HO2S

1 - AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor
2 - APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor
INTRODUCTION
The EEC (electronic engine control) system operates the engine to generate the output demanded by the accelerator pedal
and loads imposed by other systems. The EEC system has an ECM (engine control module) that uses a torque-based
strategy to evaluate inputs from sensors and other systems, then produces outputs to engine actuators to produce the
required torque.
The EEC system controls the following:
 Charge air
 Fueling
 Ignition timing
 Valve timing
 Cylinder knock
 Noise feedback system
 Idle speed
 Engine cooling fan
 Evaporative emissions
 On-board diagnostics
 Immobilization system interface
 Speed control.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
The ECM is installed behind the suspension turret on the LH (left-hand) side of the engine compartment, on a bracket
attached to the longitudinal and the wheel arch apron panel.
The ECM has the capability of adapting its fuel and ignition control outputs in response to several sensor inputs.
The ECM receives inputs from the following:
 CKP (crankshaft position) sensor.

 CMP (camshaft position) sensors (4 off).
 ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor.
 Knock sensors (4 off).
 MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor.
 MAFT (mass air flow and temperature) sensors (2 off).
 MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor.
 Throttle position sensor.
 Heated oxygen sensors (4 off).
 APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor.
 Ambient air temperature sensor.
 FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor. For additional information, refer to 303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls.
 Engine cooling fan. For additional information, refer to 303-03A Engine Cooling.
 Stoplamp switch. For additional information, refer to 206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist.
 Speed control cancel/suspend switch. For additional information, refer to 310-03 Speed Control.
 Oil level and temperature sensor. For additional information, refer to 303-01A Engine.
 Fuel LP (low pressure) sensor. For additional information, refer to 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines.
 Fuel pump driver module. For additional information, refer to 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines.
The ECM provides outputs to the following:
 Electronic throttle.
 Main relay.
 Heaters elements of the heated oxygen sensors (4 off).
 Fuel injectors (8 off). For additional information, refer to 303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls.
 Ignition coils (8 off). For additional information, refer to 303-07 Engine Ignition.
 VCT (variable camshaft timing) solenoids (4 off). For additional information, refer to 303-01A Engine.
 Noise feedback system tuning valve. For additional information, refer to 303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering.
 EVAP (evaporative emission) canister purge valve. For additional information, refer to 303-13 Evaporative Emissions.
 Engine starter relay. For additional information, refer to 303-06 Starting System.
 Intercooler water pump relay. For additional information, refer to 303-03B Supercharger Cooling.
 Generator. For additional information, refer to 414-02 Generator and Regulator.
 HP fuel pumps. For additional information, refer to 303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls.
 DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage). For additional information, refer to 303-13 Evaporative Emissions.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The CKP sensor is an inductive sensor that allows the ECM to determine the angular position of the crankshaft and the
engine speed.
The CKP sensor is installed in the rear left side of the sump body, in line with the engine drive plate. The sensor is secured
with a single screw and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The head of the CKP sensor faces a reluctor ring pressed into the outer circumference of the engine drive plate. The reluctor
ring has a 60 minus 2 tooth pattern. There are 58 teeth at 6° intervals, with two teeth removed to provide a reference point
with a centerline that is 21° BTDC (before top dead center) on cylinder 1 of bank A.
If the CKP sensor fails, the ECM:
 Uses signals from the CMP sensors to determine the angular position of the crankshaft and the engine speed
 Adopts a limp home mode where engine speed is limited to a maximum of 3000 rev/min.
With a failed CKP sensor, engine starts will require a long crank time while the ECM determines the angular position of the
crankshaft.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSORS
The CMP sensors are MRE (magneto resistive element) sensors that allow the ECM to determine the angular position of the
camshafts. MRE sensors produce a digital output which allows the ECM to detect speeds down to zero.
The four CMP sensors are installed in the front upper timing covers, one for each camshaft.
Each CMP sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with an O-ring. On each CMP sensor, a three pin electrical
connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The head of each CMP sensor faces a sensor wheel attached to the front of the related VCT unit.
If a CMP sensor fails, the ECM:
 Defaults to base mapping for the ignition timing, with no cylinder correction
 Disables the VCT system.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The ECT sensors are NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistors that allow the ECM to monitor the engine coolant
temperature.
There are two identical ECT sensors installed, which are identified as ECT 1 and ECT 2. Each sensor is secured with a twist-
lock and latch mechanism, and is sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface between the
sensor and the engine harness.
ECT 1
ECT 1 is installed in the heater manifold, at the rear of the RH (right-hand) cylinder head. The input from this sensor is used
in calibration tables and by other systems.
ECT 2
ECT 2 is installed in the lower hose connector which attaches to the bottom of the thermostat. The input from this sensor is
used for OBD (on-board diagnostic) 2 diagnostics and, in conjunction with the input from ECT 1, to confirm that the
thermostat is functional.
KNOCK SENSORS
The knock sensors are piezo-ceramic sensors that allow the ECM to employ active knock control and prevent engine damage
from pre-ignition or detonation.
Two knock sensors are installed on the inboard side of each cylinder head, one mid-way between cylinders 1 and 2, and one
mid-way between cylinders 3 and 4. Each knock sensor is secured with a single screw. On each knock sensor, a two pin
electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The ECM compares the signals from the knock sensors with mapped values stored in memory to determine when detonation
occurs on individual cylinders. When detonation is detected, the ECM retards the ignition timing on that cylinder for a
number of engine cycles, then gradually returns it to the original setting.
The ECM cancels closed loop control of the ignition system if the signal received from a knock sensor becomes implausible.
In these circumstances the ECM defaults to base mapping for the ignition timing. This ensures the engine will not become
damaged if low quality fuel is used. The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) will not illuminate, although the driver may notice
that the engine 'pinks' in some driving conditions and displays a drop in performance and smoothness.
The ECM calculates the default value if one sensor fails on each bank of cylinders
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
The MAP sensor allows the ECM to calculate the load on the engine, which is used in the calculation of fuel injection time.
The MAP sensor is installed in the air inlet of the SC (supercharger). The sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed
with an O-ring. A three pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
If the MAP sensor fails, the ECM adopts a default value of 1 bar (14.5 lbf/in.2).
With a failed MAP sensor, the engine will suffer from poor starting, rough running and poor driveability.
MASS AIR FLOW AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The MAFT sensors allow the ECM to measure the mass and the temperature of the air flow into the engine. The mass air flow
is measured with a hot film element in the sensor. The temperature of the air flow is measured with a NTC thermistor in the
sensor. The mass air flow is used to determine the fuel quantity to be injected in order to maintain the stoichiometric air/fuel
mixture required for correct operation of the engine and the catalytic converters.
There are two MAFT sensors installed, one in each air cleaner outlet duct. Each MAFT sensor is secured with two screws and
sealed with an O-ring. On each MAFT sensor, a five pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
If the hot film element signal fails the ECM invokes a software backup strategy to calculate the mass air flow from other
inputs. Closed loop fuel control, closed loop idle speed control and evaporative emissions control are discontinued. The
engine will suffer from poor starting, poor throttle response and, if the failure occurs while driving, the engine speed may dip
before recovering.
If the NTC thermistor signal fails the ECM adopts a default value of 25 °C (77 °F) for the intake air temperature.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The MAPT sensor allows the ECM to calculate the air charge density immediately before it enters the cylinders. This is used
to adjust the ignition timing relative to the boost pressure, and to monitor the performance of the charge air coolers.
The MAPT sensor is installed in the rear of the LH intake manifold. The sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with
an O-ring. A four pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
THROTTLE POSITION SENSORS
The TP (throttle position) sensors allow the ECM to determine the position and angular rate of change of the throttle blade.
There are two TP sensors located in the electronic throttle. See below for details of the electronic throttle.
If aTP sensor fails, the ECM:
 Adopts a limp home mode where engine speed is limited to a maximum of approximately 2000 rev/min
 Discontinues evaporative emissions control
 Discontinues closed loop control of engine idle speed.
With a failed TP sensor, the engine will suffer from poor running and throttle response.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSORS

A - Upstream heated oxygen sensor
B - Downstream heated oxygen sensor
The heated oxygen sensors allow the ECM to measure the oxygen content of the exhaust gases, for closed loop control of the
fuel:air mixture and for catalytic converter monitoring.
An upstream heated oxygen sensor is installed in the outlet of each exhaust manifold, which enables independent control of
the fuel:air mixture for each cylinder bank. A downstream heated oxygen sensor is installed in each catalytic converter,
which enables the performance of the catalytic converters to be monitored.
Oxygen sensors need to operate at high temperatures in order to function correctly. To achieve the high temperatures
required, the sensors are fitted with heater elements that are controlled by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the
ECM. The heater elements are operated immediately after each engine start and during low load conditions when the
temperature of the exhaust gases is insufficient to maintain the required sensor temperature. The PWM duty cycle is
carefully controlled to prevent thermal shock to cold sensors. A non-functioning heater delays the sensor’s readiness for
closed loop control and increases emissions.
The upstream heated oxygen sensors produce a constant voltage, with a variable current that is proportional to the lambda
ratio. The downstream heated oxygen sensors produce an output voltage dependant on the ratio of the exhaust gas oxygen
to the ambient oxygen.
The heated oxygen sensors age with mileage, increasing their response time to switch from rich to lean and lean to rich. This
increase in response time influences the ECM closed loop control and leads to progressively increased emissions. Measuring
the period of rich to lean and lean to rich switching monitors the response rate of the upstream sensors.
Diagnosis of electrical faults is continually monitored in both the upstream and downstream sensors. This is achieved by
checking the signal against maximum and minimum threshold, for open and short circuit conditions.
If a heated oxygen sensor fails:
 The ECM defaults to open loop fueling for the related cylinder bank
 The CO (carbon monoxide) and emissions content of the exhaust gases increases
 The exhaust smells of rotten eggs (hydrogen sulphide).
With a failed heated oxygen sensor, the engine will suffer from unstable operation and reduced performance.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
The APP sensor allows the ECM to determine the driver requests for vehicle speed, acceleration and deceleration. The ECM
uses this information to determine the setting of the electronic throttle.
The APP sensor is installed on the pedal box and secured with three screws. A six pin electrical connector provides the
interface with the vehicle harness. The accelerator pedal is connected to a spindle on the RH side of the APP sensor.
The APP sensor is a twin track potentiometer. Each track receives an independent power supply from the ECM and returns an
independent analog signal to the ECM. Both signals contain the same positional information, but the signal from track 2 is
half the voltage of the signal from track1 at all positions.
If both signals have a fault, the ECM adopts a limp home mode, which limits the engine speed to 2000 rev/min maximum.
The ECM constantly checks the range and plausibility of the two signals and stores a fault code if it detects a fault.
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor is a NTC thermistor that allows the ECM to monitor the temperature of the air
around the vehicle. The ECM uses the AAT input for a number of functions, including engine cooling fan control. The ECM
also transmits the ambient temperature on the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus for use by other control
modules.
The AAT sensor is installed in the LH exterior mirror, with the bulb of the sensor positioned over a hole in the bottom of the
mirror casing.
The ECM supplies the sensor with a 5 V reference voltage and a ground, and translates the return signal voltage into a
temperature.
If there is a fault with the AAT sensor, the ECM calculates the AAT from the temperature inputs of the MAFT sensors. If the
AAT sensor and the temperature inputs of the MAFT sensors are all faulty, the ECM adopts a default ambient temperature of
20 °C (68 °F).
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
The ECM uses the electronic throttle to regulate engine torque.
The electronic throttle is installed between the T piece duct, of the intake air distribution and filtering system, and the inlet of
the SC. For additional information, refer to 303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering.
The throttle plate is operated by an electric DC (direct current) motor integrated into the throttle body. The ECM uses a PWM
signal to control the DC motor. The ECM compares the APP sensor inputs against an electronic map to determine the
required position of the throttle plate. The ECM and electronic throttle are also required to:
 Monitor requests for cruise control operation
 Automatically operate the electronic throttle for accurate cruise control
 Perform all dynamic stability control engine interventions
 Monitor and carry out maximum engine speed and road speed cut outs
 Provide different engine maps for the ride and handling optimization system.
A software strategy within the ECM calibrates the position of the throttle plate at the beginning of each ignition cycle. When
the ignition is turned on, the ECM performs a self test and calibration routine by fully closing the throttle plate and then
opening it again. This tests the default position springs and allows the ECM to learn the position of the closed hard stop.
Subsequently the ECM keeps the throttle plate a minimum of 0.5 degree from the closed hard stop.
MAIN RELAY
The main relay is used to initiate the power up and power down routines within the ECM. The main relay is installed in the
PDB (power distribution box).
When the ignition is turned on, battery voltage is applied to the ignition sense input. The ECM then starts its power up
routines and energizes the main relay.
When the ignition is turned off, the ECM maintains its powered up state while it conducts the power down routines (up to 20
minutes in extreme cases, when cooling fans are required) and on completion will turn off the main relay.
ECM Adaptions
The ECM has the ability to adapt the input values it uses to control certain outputs. This capability maintains engine
refinement and ensures the engine emissions remain within the legislated limits. The components which have adaptions
associated with them are:
 The APP sensor

 The heated oxygen sensors
 The MAFT sensors
 The CKP sensor
Oxygen and MAFT Sensors
There are several adaptive maps associated with the fueling strategy. Within the fueling strategy the ECM calculates short-
term adaptions and long term adaptions. The ECM will monitor the deterioration of the heated oxygen sensors over a period
of time. It will also monitor the current correction associated with the sensors.
The ECM will store a fault code in circumstances where an adaption is forced to exceed its operating parameters. At the
same time, the ECM will record the engine speed, engine load and intake air temperature.
Crankshaft Position Sensor
The characteristics of the signal supplied by the CKP sensor are learned by the ECM. This enables the ECM to set an adaption
and support the engine misfire detection function. Due to the small variation between different drive plates and different CKP
sensors, the adaption must be reset if either component is renewed, or removed and refitted. It is also necessary to reset
the drive plate adaption if the ECM is renewed or replaced. The ECM supports four drive plate adaptions for the CKP sensor.
Each adaption relates to a specific engine speed range. The engine speed ranges are detailed in the table below:
Adaption Engine Speed, rev/min

1 1800 - 3000
2 3001 - 3800
3 3801 - 4600
4 4601 - 5400
Misfire Detection
Legislation requires that the ECM must be able to detect the presence of an engine misfire. It must be able to detect misfires
at two separate levels. The first level is a misfire that could lead to the legislated emissions limit being exceeded by a given
amount. The second level is a misfire that may cause catalytic converter damage.
The ECM monitors the number of misfire occurrences within two engine speed ranges. If the ECM detects more than a
predetermined number of misfire occurrences within either of these two ranges, over two consecutive journeys, it will record
a fault code and details of the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant temperature. In addition, the ECM monitors the
number of misfire occurrences that happen in a 'window' of 200 engine revolutions. The misfire occurrences are assigned a
weighting according to their likely impact on the catalytic converters. If the number of misfires exceeds a given value, the
ECM stores catalytic converter damage fault codes, along with the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant
temperature.
The signal from the CKP sensor indicates how fast the poles on the drive plate are passing the sensor tip. A sine wave is
generated each time a pole passes the sensor tip. The ECM can detect variations in drive plate speed by monitoring the sine
wave signal supplied by the crankshaft position sensor. By assessing this signal, the ECM can detect the presence of an
engine misfire. At this time, the ECM will assess the amount of variation in the signal received from the CKP sensor and
assign a roughness value to it. This roughness value can be viewed within the real time monitoring feature using Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment. TheECM will evaluate the signal against a number of factors and will decide whether to
record the occurrence or ignore it. The ECM can assign a roughness and misfire signal for each cylinder.
Diagnostics
The ECM stores each fault as a DTC (diagnostic trouble code). The DTC and associated environmental and freeze frame data
can be read using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, which can also read real time data from each sensor, the adaption
values currently being employed and the current fueling, ignition and idle speed settings.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Electronic Engine
Controls
For a detailed description of electronic engine controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Visual Inspection
 Engine oil level and condition  Fuses
 Fuel level  Electrical connector(s)
 Fuel contamination/grade/quality  Sensor(s)
 Throttle body  Engine Control Module
 Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) belt  Transmission Control Module
 Air cleaner condition
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the customer concern and refer to the Symptom Chart below,
alternatively, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Engine non-start
Engine does not crank  Security  Check that the security system is
system /Immobilizer disarmed
engaged  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Engine in shut-down mode this section for ECM relay tests
 ECM relay  Ensure the battery is in fully charged
 Battery and serviceable condition
 Starting system  For starting system tests refer to the
 Engine seized relevant section of the workshop manual
 For engine system tests refer to the
relevant section of the workshop manual
Engine cranks, but does not fire  Engine breather system  Ensure the engine breather system is
disconnected/restricted free from restriction and is correctly
 Ignition system installed
 Fuel system  For ignition system tests refer to the
 Electronic engine controls relevant section of the workshop manual
 For fuel system tests refer to the
 Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
this section for electronic engine control
tests
Engine cranks and fires, but will  Evaporative emissions  For purge valve tests refer to the
not start purge valve relevant section of the workshop manual
 Fuel pump  For fuel system tests refer to the
 Spark plugs relevant section of the workshop manual
 Ignition coil failure(s)  For ignition system tests refer to the
Difficult to start
Difficult cold start  Check engine coolant  Check the engine coolant level and
level/anti-freeze content condition. Refer to the relevant sections
 Battery of the workshop manual
 Electronic engine controls  Ensure the battery is in a fully charged
 Exhaust gas recirculation and serviceable condition. Refer to the
(EGR) valve stuck open battery care manual and the relevant
 Fuel pump sections of the workshop manual.
 Evaporative emissions  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
purge valve this section for electronic engine control
tests
 Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual and check the
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve
and associated hoses and connections.
workshop manual and check the purge
valve and associated hoses and
connections.
Difficult hot start  Injector leak  Refer to the relevant section of the
 Electronic engine controls workshop manual, carry out injector
 Evaporative emissions leak tests, install new injectors as
purge valve necessary.
 Fuel pump  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Ignition system this section for electronic engine control
 EGR valve stuck open tests
connections.
 For ignition system tests refer to the
Difficult to start after hot soak  Injector leak  Refer to the relevant section of the
(vehicle standing, engine off, after  Electronic engine controls workshop manual, carry out injector
engine has reached operating  Evaporative emissions leak tests, install new injectors as
temperature) purge valve necessary.
 EGR valve stuck open tests
connections.
Engine cranks too fast/slow  Compressions high/low  Refer to the relevant section of the
 Battery workshop manual, carry out
 Starting system compression tests.
 Ensure the battery is in a fully charged
and serviceable condition. Refer to the
battery care manual and the relevant
sections of the workshop manual.
 For starting system tests refer to the
Engine stalls
Engine stalls soon after start  Breather system  Ensure the engine breather system is
 ECM relay installed
 Electronic engine controls  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Ignition system this section for ECM relay tests
 Air intake system restricted  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Air leakage this section for electronic engine control
 Fuel lines tests
 Check for blockage in air cleaner
element and air intake system
 Check for leakage in air intake system
Engine stalls on overrun  ECM relay  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Throttle position (TP) this section for ECM relay and TP sensor
sensors tests
Engine stalls at steady speed  ECM relay  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 crankshaft position sensor this section for ECM relay, crankshaft
 TP sensors position sensor, and TP sensor tests
Engine stalls with speed control  ECM relay  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
enabled this section for ECM relay tests
Engine stalls when manoeuvring  ECM relay  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 TP sensors this section for ECM relay, and TP sensor
 Additional engine loads tests
(PAS, air conditioning, etc)  Check for excessive loads being placed
 Transmission malfunction on the engine from PAS, air conditioning
 CAN malfunction systems etc.
 Refer to the workshop manual or
transmission troubleshooting guide for
transmission system tests.
workshop manual and the electrical
wiring diagrams to perform CAN
network tests.
Poor driveability
Engine hesitates/poor acceleration  Fuel pressure, fuel pump,  For fuel system tests refer to the
fuel lines relevant section of the workshop manual
 Injector leak  Carry out fuel injector leak tests, install
 Air leakage new injectors as necessary.
 Electronic engine controls  Check for leakage from air intake
 Ignition system system
 EGR valve stuck  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Transmission malfunction this section for electronic engine control
 Restricted pedal travel tests
(carpet, etc)  For ignition system tests refer to the
 Ensure accelerator pedal is free from
restriction
Engine backfires  Fuel pump, fuel lines  For fuel system tests refer to the
 Air leakage relevant section of the workshop manual
 Sticking variable camshaft  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
timing (VCT) hub this section for electronic engine control
tests
this section for VCT system tests
Engine surges  Fuel pump, fuel lines  For fuel system tests refer to the
 Ignition system  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
tests
Engine detonates/knocks  Electronic engine controls  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Fuel pump, fuel lines, fuel this section for electronic engine control
quality tests
 Air leakage  For fuel system tests refer to the
 Sticking VCT hub relevant section of the workshop manual
 Check for leakage from air intake
system
No throttle response  Electronic engine controls  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
tests
Speed control inhibited or disabled  Default mode enabled  Check message center for default
 Speed control, brake switch message, read DTCs and refer to DTC
 Electronic engine controls Index
 CAN fault  Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual for speed control, and
brake switch tests.
tests
network tests.
Poor throttle response  Breather system  Ensure engine breather system is free
disconnected/restricted from restriction and is correctly installed
 Traction control event tests
 Air leakage  Refer to the workshop manual or
Engine defaults, warning light and  Electronic engine controls  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
messages. Refer to the owner this section for electronic engine control
handbook tests
DTC Index
WARNING: Fuel injector voltage will reach 65Volts during operation and have a high current requirement.
NOTE: If the module/component is suspect and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a new module/component.
DTC Description Possible Causes Action

B10A2- Crash Input - No signal NOTE: - Circuit SRS_SIGNAL -  Refer to the electrical circuit
31 diagrams and check restraints
control module pulse width
 Loss of communication between
modulated SRS signal line
restraints control module and
circuit, hard wired connection
engine control module
between engine control module
and restraints control module
for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open
circuit. Repair circuit as
required, clear the DTC and
retest
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch -  The engine control module has  Clear the DTC and press all the
81 Invalid serial data received received an invalid command from steering wheel switches, re-
the steering wheel switch pack check for DTCs. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and
check the speed control switch
circuit for open circuit, short
circuit to power, short circuit to
ground, disconnected
 Check and install a new
steering wheel module as
required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual,
or determine if any prior
approval programme is in
operation, prior to the
installation of a new
module/component
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch -  Cruise buttons alive counter is not  Refer to the electrical circuit
82 Alive / sequence counter incrementing. Which suggests diagrams and check the speed
incorrect / not updated that the LIN bus is faulty control switch circuit for open
 Steering wheel module is not circuit, short circuit to power,
connected short circuit to ground,
 Steering wheel module failure disconnected
diagrams and check the LIN
bus between steering wheel
module and the CAN gateway
module/component
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch - Value  Cruise buttons checksum  Check and install new cruise
83 of signal protection incorrect, incorrect cruise switches switches as required. Refer to
calculation incorrect fitted to vehicle the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a
new module/component
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch -  Speed control switch circuit, open  Check for related DTCs in other
96 Component internal failure circuit, short circuit to power, central junction boxes
short circuit to ground,  Refer to the electrical circuit
disconnected diagrams and check the speed
 Speed control switch failure control switch circuit for open
 Steering wheel module failure circuit, short circuit to power,
short circuit to ground,
disconnected
 Check and install a new speed
control switch as required.
Check and install a new
module/component
B10FF- Ignition Control - Event  Spark plug(s) fault  Refer to repair manual and
68 information  Wiring harness fault check spark plug(s) for
 Ignition coil(s) fault condition and security. Replace
any defective components as
required
 Refer to electrical wiring
diagrams and check ignition
coil circuit for intermittent open
circuit, short circuit to power,
short circuit to ground
 Check and install a new coil(s)
as required. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in
module/component
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Module - NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY -  Refer to electrical wiring
01 General electrical failure diagrams and check charging
system for faults. Perform any
 Charging system fault
repairs required
 Battery monitoring signal line
 Refer to the electrical wiring
circuit fault
diagrams and check the battery
 Vehicle battery fault
monitoring system module
circuit to ground, short circuit
to power
 Refer to the workshop manual
and the battery care manual,
inspect the vehicle battery and
ensure it is fully charged and
serviceable before performing
further tests
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Module - NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY -  Refer to the electrical wiring
87 Missing message diagrams and check the battery
 Battery signal line circuit fault
monitoring system module
to power
diagrams and check the LIN
circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit
B1206- Crash Occurred - Event NOTE: - Circuit SRS_SIGNAL -  Refer to the electrical circuit
68 information diagrams and check the engine
control module to restraints
 Engine control module has
control module circuit for short
detected the vehicle has crashed -
event information DTC only
to power, open circuit. Repair
circuit as required, clear the
DTC and retest
C0031- Left Front Wheel Speed  Invalid data received from anti-  Check anti-lock braking system
00 Sensor - No sub type lock braking system module - left module for related DTCs and
information front wheel speed signal fault refer to relevant DTC index
C0034- Right Front Wheel Speed  Invalid data received from anti-  Check anti-lock braking system
00 Sensor - No sub type lock braking system module - module for related DTCs and
information right front wheel speed signal refer to relevant DTC index
fault
C0037- Left Rear Wheel Speed  Invalid data received from anti-  Check anti-lock braking system
00 Sensor - No sub type lock braking system module - left module for related DTCs and
information rear wheel speed signal fault refer to relevant DTC index
C003A- Right Rear Wheel Speed  Invalid data received from anti-  Check anti-lock braking system
00 Sensor - No sub type lock braking system module - module for related DTCs and
information right rear wheel speed signal fault refer to relevant DTC index
P0010- Intake (A) Camshaft Position NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Actuator (Bank 1) - Circuit diagrams and check intake (A)
open camshaft position actuator
 Intake (A) camshaft position
(Bank 1) circuit for open circuit
actuator (Bank 1) open circuit
 Engine control module interface
diagrams and check engine
harness open circuit
control module interface
harness for open circuit
P0011- Intake (A) Camshaft Position NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Timing - Over-Advanced diagrams and check intake (A)
(Bank 1) - No sub type camshaft position actuator
 Intake (A) camshaft position
information (Bank 1) circuit for open circuit
actuator (Bank 1) open circuit
 Engine control module interface
harness open circuit
P0013- Exhaust (B) Camshaft NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Position Actuator (Bank 1) - diagrams and check exhaust
Circuit open  Exhaust (B) camshaft position (B) camshaft position actuator
actuator (Bank 1) open circuit (Bank 1) circuit for open circuit
 Engine control module interface  Refer to the electrical circuit
harness open circuit diagrams and check engine
P0015- Exhaust (B) Camshaft NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A -  Check for related DTC P0365-
00 Position Timing - Over- 00. Refer to the electrical
Retarded (Bank 1) - No sub circuit diagrams and check
 Exhaust (B) camshaft position
type information exhaust (B) camshaft position
actuator (Bank 1) open circuit,
actuator (Bank 1) for open
short circuit to ground, short
circuit, short circuit to ground,
circuit to power
short circuit to power
P0016- Crankshaft Position - NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A -  Check engine timing. Check
00 Camshaft Position camshaft sensor timing plate is
Correlation - Bank 1 Sensor installed correctly. Check
 The relative positions of the
A - No sub type information timing chain is installed
crankshaft position sensor and
correctly
cam timing plate teeth are not
correct
 Engine timing incorrect
 Timing chain installed incorrectly
 Variable valve timing forced fully
advanced
P0017- Crankshaft Position - NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A -  Check for related DTC P0365-
00 Camshaft Position 00. Check engine timing. Check
Correlation - Bank 1 Sensor camshaft sensor timing plate is
B - No sub type information installed correctly. Check
timing chain is installed
camshaft timing plate teeth are
correctly
not correct
diagrams and check exhaust
(B) camshaft position actuator
(Bank 1) for open circuit, short
advanced
to power
P0018- Crankshaft Position - NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B -  Check engine timing. Check
A - No sub type information timing chain is installed
correctly
not correct
advanced
P0019- Crankshaft Position - NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B -  Check engine timing. Check
B - No sub type information timing chain is installed
correctly
not correct
advanced
P0020- Intake (A) Camshaft Position NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Actuator (Bank 2) - Circuit diagrams and check intake
open  Intake valve solenoid 2 open
valve solenoid 2 for open circuit
circuit
P0023- Exhaust (B) Camshaft NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Position Actuator (Bank 2) - diagrams and check exhaust
Circuit open (B) camshaft position actuator
 Exhaust (B) Camshaft Position
(Bank 2) circuit for open circuit
actuator (Bank 2) circuit, open
circuit
P0026- Intake Valve Control NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A -  Check operation of intake valve
72 Solenoid Circuit solenoid 1. Check and install a
Range/Performance (Bank 1)  Intake valve solenoid 1 angle less
new intake valve solenoid 1 as
- Actuator stuck open than target required. Refer to the warranty
 Intake valve solenoid 1 slow or
not operating
module/component
P0026- Intake Valve Control NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A -  Check operation of intake valve
Range/Performance (Bank 1)  Intake valve solenoid 1 angle
new intake valve solenoid 1 as
- Commanded position not required. Refer to the warranty
greater than target
reachable policy and procedures manual,
 Intake valve solenoid 1 not
returning to target in time
 Intake valve solenoid 1 stuck
advanced
module/component
P0027- Exhaust Valve Control NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A -  Check operation of exhaust
72 Solenoid Circuit valve solenoid 1. Check and
Range/Performance (Bank 1) install a new exhaust valve
 Exhaust valve solenoid 1 angle
- Actuator stuck open solenoid 1 as required. Refer to
less than target
the warranty policy and
 Exhaust valve solenoid 1 slow or
not operating
P0027- Exhaust Valve Control NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A -  Check operation of exhaust
Range/Performance (Bank 1)  Exhaust valve solenoid 1 angle
install a new exhaust valve
- Commanded position not greater than target solenoid 1 as required. Refer to
reachable  Exhaust valve solenoid 1 not
returning to target in time procedures manual, or
 Exhaust valve solenoid 1 stuck
advanced programme is in operation,
P0028- Intake Valve Control NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B -  Check operation of intake valve
Range/Performance (Bank 2) new intake valve solenoid 2 as
 Intake valve solenoid 2 angle less
- Actuator stuck open required. Refer to the warranty
than target
 Intake valve solenoid 2 slow or
not operating
module/component
P0028- Intake Valve Control NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B -  Check operation of intake valve
Range/Performance (Bank 2) new intake valve solenoid 2 as
 Intake valve solenoid 2 angle
- Commanded position not required. Refer to the warranty
greater than target
reachable policy and procedures manual,
 Intake valve solenoid 2 not
 Intake valve solenoid 2 stuck
advanced operation, prior to the
module/component
P0029- Exhaust Valve Control NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B -  Check operation of exhaust
Range/Performance (Bank 2)  Exhaust valve solenoid 2 angle
install a new exhaust valve
- Actuator stuck open solenoid 2 as required. Refer to
less than target
 Exhaust valve solenoid 2 slow or
not operating
P0029- Exhaust Valve Control NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B -  Check operation of exhaust
Range/Performance (Bank 2) install a new exhaust valve
 Exhaust valve solenoid 2 angle
- Commanded position not solenoid 2 as required. Refer to
greater than target
reachable the warranty policy and
 Exhaust valve solenoid 2 not
 Exhaust valve solenoid 2 stuck
advanced
P0031- HO2S Heater Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit HTR_CTRL_A_UPSTREAM  Using the manufacturer
11 Low (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - - approved diagnostic system
Circuit short to ground check datalogger signal,
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER A - Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1
(0x03A1)
 Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd  Refer to the electrical circuit
heater control circuit (Bank 1, diagrams and check pre
Sensor 1) circuit short circuit to catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
ground heater control circuit (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) circuit for short
circuit to ground
Circuit open check datalogger signal,
Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER A -
(0x03A1)
Sensor 1) circuit, open circuit catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
heater control circuit (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) circuit for open
circuit
12 High (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - - approved diagnostic system
Circuit short to battery check datalogger signal,
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER A - Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
(0x03A1)
Sensor 1) circuit short circuit to catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
power heater control circuit (Bank 1,
circuit to power
P0036- HO2S Heater Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_A -  Using the manufacturer
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 2) - No sub approved diagnostic system
type information check datalogger signal,
 Catalyst oxygen sensor heater
circuit control fuse failure
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
(0x03A2)
heater control circuit short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power,
diagrams and check post
open circuit
catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
sensor fuse for open circuit
circuit control relay circuit short
circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit
circuit control relay failure sensor circuit for short circuit to
failure open circuit
diagrams and check catalyst
oxygen sensor heater circuit
control relay circuit for short
to power, open circuit
catalyst oxygen sensor heater
control relay, as required.
Check and install a new post
catalyst oxygen sensor-odd as
module/component
P0051- HO2S Heater Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit HTR_CTRL_B_UPSTREAM  Using the manufacturer
Circuit short to ground check datalogger signal,
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER B -
 Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even Duty Cycle Bank 2 Sensor 1
heater control circuit (Bank 2, (0x03A4)
Sensor 1) circuit short circuit to  Refer to the electrical circuit
ground diagrams and check pre
catalyst oxygen sensor-even
circuit to ground
Circuit open check datalogger signal,
(0x03A4)
 Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even  Refer to the electrical circuit
Sensor 1) circuit, open circuit catalyst oxygen sensor-even
Sensor 1) circuit for open
circuit
12 High (Bank 2, Sensor 1) - - approved diagnostic system
Circuit short to battery check datalogger signal,
(0x03A4)
 Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even  Refer to the electrical circuit
Sensor 1) circuit short circuit to catalyst oxygen sensor-even
power heater control circuit (Bank 2,
circuit to power
P0054- HO2S Heater Resistance NOTE: - Circuit HTR_CTRL_A_UPSTREAM  Using the manufacturer
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 2) - No sub - approved diagnostic system
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER A -
(0x03A1)
 Catalyst oxygen sensor heater  Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit control fuse failure diagrams and check post
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
heater control circuit short circuit sensor fuse for open circuit
to ground, short circuit to power,  Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit, high resistance diagrams and check post
 Catalyst oxygen sensor heater catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
circuit control relay circuit short sensor circuit for short circuit to
circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
power, open circuit open circuit, high resistance
circuit control relay failure diagrams and check catalyst
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd oxygen sensor heater circuit
failure control relay circuit for short
module/component
P0056- HO2S Heater Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_B -  Using the manufacturer
00 (Bank 2, Sensor 2) - No sub approved diagnostic system
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even
heater control circuit short circuit
(0x03A5)
open circuit
circuit control relay circuit short
circuit to ground, short circuit to catalyst oxygen sensor-even
power, open circuit sensor circuit for short circuit to
 Catalyst oxygen sensor heater ground, short circuit to power,
circuit control relay failure open circuit
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even  Refer to the electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check catalyst
catalyst oxygen sensor-even,
module/component
P0060- HO2S Heater Resistance NOTE: - Circuit HTR_CTRL_B_UPSTREAM  Using the manufacturer
00 (Bank 2, Sensor 2) - No sub - approved diagnostic system
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER B - Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
(0x03A5)
circuit control fuse failure diagrams and check post
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even catalyst oxygen sensor-even
heater control circuit short circuit sensor fuse for open circuit
to ground, short circuit to power,  Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit, high resistance diagrams and check post
 Catalyst oxygen sensor heater catalyst oxygen sensor-even
circuit control relay circuit short sensor circuit for short circuit to
circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
power, open circuit open circuit, high resistance
circuit control relay failure diagrams and check catalyst
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even oxygen sensor heater circuit
failure control relay circuit for short
catalyst oxygen sensor-even as
module/component
P0069- MAP - Barometric Pressure  Manifold absolute pressure sensor  Using the manufacturer
29 Correlation - Signal invalid failure approved diagnostic system
 Engine control module failure check datalogger signal,
Barometric Pressure Sensor
Voltage (0x035A). Check for
related manifold absolute
pressure sensor DTCs
diagrams and check manifold
absolute pressure sensor circuit
circuit
 Check and install new manifold
absolute pressure sensor as
required. Check and install a
new engine control module as
module/component
P0071- Ambient Air Temperature NOTE: Jaguar - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
21 Sensor Range/Performance - AMBIENT_TEMP_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
Signal amplitude < minimum check datalogger signal,
Ambient Air Temperature
NOTE: LR - Circuit TAMB TEMP -
Sensor Voltage (0x03BA)
 Ambient air temperature sensor diagrams and check ambient
circuit short circuit to ground, air temperature sensor circuit
short circuit to power, open circuit for short circuit to ground,
 Temperature and manifold short circuit to power, open
absolute pressure sensor circuit circuit
short circuit to ground, short  Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power, open circuit diagrams and check
 Ambient air temperature sensor temperature and manifold
failure absolute pressure sensor circuit
 Temperature and manifold for short circuit to ground,
absolute pressure sensor failure short circuit to power, open
circuit
ambient air temperature sensor
as required. Check and install a
new temperature and manifold
module/component
P0071- Ambient Air Temperature NOTE: - Circuit AMBIENT_TEMP_SENSOR  Using the manufacturer
22 Sensor Range/Performance - - approved diagnostic system
Signal amplitude > check datalogger signal,
maximum Ambient Air Temperature
short circuit to power, open circuit for short circuit to ground,
 Temperature and manifold short circuit to power, open
absolute pressure sensor circuit circuit
short circuit to ground, short  Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power, open circuit diagrams and check
 Ambient air temperature sensor temperature and manifold
failure absolute pressure sensor circuit
 Temperature and manifold for short circuit to ground,
absolute pressure sensor failure short circuit to power, open
circuit
as required. Check and install a
new temperature and manifold
module/component
00 Sensor Circuit Low - No sub - approved diagnostic system
open circuit, high resistance for short circuit to ground,
 Ambient air temperature sensor open circuit, high resistance
failure  Check and install a new
module/component
00 Sensor Circuit High - No sub - approved diagnostic system
type information check datalogger signals
ground circuit high resistance, air temperature sensor circuit
open circuit for short circuit to ground, high
 Ambient air temperature sensor resistance, short circuit to
signal circuit short circuit to power power. Check connector
 Ambient air temperature sensor terminals for corrosion or
failure damage
module/component
P007B- Charge Air Cooler NOTE: - Circuit TMAP_TEMP_SENSOR -  Using the manufacturer
23 Temperature Sensor Circuit approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance (Bank 1) check datalogger signal,
 Charge air cooler temperature
- Signal stuck low Charge Air Temperature
sensor circuit poor / intermittent
Voltage (0x03EE)
connection
diagrams and check charge air
sensor failure
cooler temperature sensor
circuit for poor, intermittent
connection
 Check and install a new charge
air cooler temperature sensor
module/component
Range/Performance (Bank 1)  Charge air cooler temperature
check datalogger signal,
- Signal stuck high sensor circuit short circuit to Charge Air Temperature
ground, open circuit Voltage (0x03EE)
diagrams and check charge air
sensor failure
cooler temperature sensor
ground, open circuit
module/component
Range/Performance (Bank 1) check datalogger signal,
- Signal invalid sensor circuit short circuit to Charge Air Temperature
ground, open circuit, short circuit Voltage (0x03EE)
to power  Refer to the electrical circuit
 Charge air cooler temperature diagrams and check charge air
sensor failure cooler temperature sensor
ground, open circuit, short
circuit to power
module/component
P007C- Charge Air Cooler NOTE: - Circuit TMAP_TEMP_SENSOR -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Temperature Sensor Circuit diagrams and check charge air
Low (Bank 1) - No sub type cooler temperature sensor
information (Bank 1) circuit for short circuit
sensor (Bank 1) circuit short
to ground, open circuit, high
circuit to ground, open circuit,
resistance
high resistance
sensor (Bank 1) failure air cooler temperature sensor
(Bank 1) as required. Refer to
P007D- Charge Air Cooler NOTE: - Circuit TMAP_TEMP_SENSOR -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Temperature Sensor Circuit diagrams and check charge air
High (Bank 1) - No sub type cooler temperature sensor
information (Bank 1) circuit for short circuit
sensor (Bank 1) circuit short
to power, open circuit, high
circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
resistance
sensor (Bank 1) failure
(Bank 1) as required. Refer to
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure - NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
00 Too Low - No sub type FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
information check datalogger signal, Fuel
 Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit
Rail Pressure Sensor - High
short circuit to ground, open Range Sensor Voltage
circuit, high resistance (0x0377)
 Fuel rail pressure sensor failure
 Fuel lines leaking or restricted
diagrams and check fuel rail
 Fuel pump failure
pressure sensor circuit for short
circuit to ground, open circuit,
high resistance
 Check for fuel pump related
DTCs. Check fuel lines for
leakage or restriction
 Check and install new fuel rail
pressure sensor as required.
Check and install a new fuel
pump as required. Refer to the
module/component
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure - NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
00 Too High - No sub type FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
 Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit Rail Pressure Sensor - High
short to each other, high Range Sensor Voltage
resistance, short circuit to power (0x0377)
 Fuel rail pressure sensor failure  Refer to the electrical circuit
to each other, high resistance,
 Check and install new fuel rail
pressure sensor as required.
Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual, or
P008A- Low Pressure Fuel System NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
00 Pressure - Too Low - No sub LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
type information check datalogger signal, Fuel
Rail Pressure - Low Range
 Low pressure fuel sensor circuit
Sensor Voltage (0x0376)
failure, short circuit to ground,
 Check fuel system for leakage
short circuit to power, open circuit
 Fuel pump driver module circuit
diagrams and check low
circuit to power, open circuit pressure fuel sensor circuit for
 Low pressure fuel
 Fuel pump driver module failure
circuit to power, open circuit
diagrams and check fuel pump
driver module circuit short
 Check and install a new low
pressure fuel sensor as
new fuel pump driver module
module/component
P008B- Low Pressure Fuel System NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
00 Pressure - Too High - No sub LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
type information check datalogger signal, Fuel
 Low pressure fuel sensor circuit
 Fuel pump driver module circuit
diagrams and check low
short circuit to ground, short pressure fuel sensor circuit for
circuit to power, open circuit short circuit to ground, short
 Blockage or restriction in low
circuit to power, open circuit.
pressure fuel line Check for blockage or
 Low pressure fuel sensor failure
restriction in low pressure fuel
line
driver module circuit short
 Check and install a new low
pressure fuel sensor as
new fuel pump driver module
module/component
P00AB- Intake Air Temperature NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
23 Sensor 1 Circuit INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_B - approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance (Bank 2)  Intake air temperature sensor check datalogger signal, Intake
- Signal stuck low bank 2 circuit short circuit to Air Temperature Sensor Bank 2
ground, open circuit (0x0312)
 Intake air temperature sensor  Refer to the electrical circuit
bank 2 failure diagrams and check intake air
temperature sensor bank 2
 Check and install a new intake
air temperature sensor bank 2
module/component
Range/Performance (Bank 2) check datalogger signal, Intake
- Signal stuck high Air Temperature Sensor Bank 2
 Intake air temperature sensor
(0x0312)
bank 2 circuit short circuit to
power
diagrams and check intake air
bank 2 failure temperature sensor bank 2
circuit for short circuit to power
module/component
Range/Performance (Bank 2) check datalogger signal, Intake
- Signal invalid Air Temperature Sensor Bank 2
(0x0312)
bank 2 circuit short circuit to
ground, open circuit, short circuit
to power
bank 2 failure
to power
module/component
P00AC- Intake Air Temperature NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
00 Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_B - approved diagnostic system
2) - No sub type information check datalogger signal, Intake
Air Temperature Sensor Bank 2
(0x0312)
bank 2 sensing circuit short circuit
to ground, high resistance,
disconnected
bank 2 failure
ground, open circuit, high
resistance, disconnected
connector
module/component
P00AD- Intake Air Temperature NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
00 Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_B - approved diagnostic system
2) - No sub type information check datalogger signal, Intake
Air Temperature Sensor Bank 2
(0x0312)
bank 2 sensing circuit short
open circuit, high resistance
circuit for short ground, short
bank 2 failure
circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance. Check for
backed out or damaged
connector pins
module/component
P00C6- Fuel Rail Pressure Too Low -  No fuel at pump  Check fuel supply to both
00 Engine Cranking - No sub  Injector stuck open pumps (if engine runs then
type information  Fuel pressure sensor signal stuck supply is not suspect). If
 Fuel pump failure engine does not run perform
fuel prime routine. Use fuel
pump diagnostic routine to
determine if one pump has
failed, if so replace pump. If a
fuel injector is stuck open the
exhaust will smell of fuel and
fuelling adaptions may indicate
rich shift. Perform checks for as
DTC P0191-00
 Check and install a new fuel
pump as required. Refer to the
module/component
P0101- Mass or Volume Air Flow A  Intake air distribution and filtering  Using the manufacturer
00 Circuit Range/Performance - components incorrectly installed approved smoke tester check
No sub type information  Leakage from intake air system intake air distribution and
 Blocked air cleaner element(s) filtering components for
 Blocked engine breather leakage and correct installation
 Blockage in intake air system  Check air cleaner element is
 Mass air flow sensor seal failure free from restriction and in
 Connector is disconnected, serviceable condition
connector terminal is backed out,  Ensure the engine breather
connector terminal corrosion system is correctly installed
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, short and in serviceable condition
circuit to ground, short circuit to  Check for mass air flow sensor
power, open circuit, high seal integrity and correct
resistance installation
 Carbon build-up on throttle blade  Inspect connectors for signs of
 Blocked injectors water ingress, and pins for
 Blocked catalysts damage and/or corrosion
 Mass air flow sensor failure  Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check mass air
flow sensor circuit for short
resistance
 Make sure throttle blade is
clean of carbon
 Check for blocked injectors
 Check for blocked catalysts
 Clear the DTC and retest
 Refer to the relevant section of
workshop manual. Reset
fuelling adaptions and carry out
Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-
Test
 Check and install new mass air
flow sensor as required
P0102- Mass or Volume Air Flow A  Fuse failure  Check for fuse failure
00 Circuit Low - No sub type  Connector is disconnected,  Inspect connectors for signs of
information connector terminal is backed out, water ingress, and pins for
connector terminal corrosion damage and/or corrosion
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, short  Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground, short circuit to diagrams and check mass air
power, open circuit, high flow sensor circuit for short
resistance circuit to ground, short circuit
 Mass air flow sensor failure to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Test
P0103- Mass or Volume Air Flow A  Connector is disconnected,  Using the manufacturer
00 Circuit High - No sub type connector terminal is backed out, approved diagnostic system
information connector terminal corrosion check datalogger signal, Mass
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, short Air Flow Sensor, Bank 1
circuit to ground, short circuit to (0x0314)
power, open circuit, high  Inspect connectors for signs of
resistance water ingress, and pins for
 Blocked air cleaner element(s) damage and/or corrosion
 Blockage in air intake system  Refer to the electrical circuit
 Mass air flow sensor failure diagrams and check mass air
resistance
 Check air cleaner element is
free from restriction and in
serviceable condition
 Check air intake system for
blockage
Test
P0106- Manifold Absolute NOTE: - Circuit MAP_SENSOR -  Check air cleaner element is
00 Pressure/BARO Sensor free from restriction
Range/Performance - No sub  Blocked air cleaner element(s)
 Check for leak from air intake
type information system, rectify as required
 Intake manifold air leak
 Manifold absolute pressure sensor
diagrams and check manifold
circuit short circuit to ground,
absolute pressure sensor circuit
circuit, high resistance
 Engine breather leak
 Carbon build up on throttle plate
 Ensure the engine breather
 Exhaust system blocked
system is correctly installed
and in serviceable condition
failure
 BARO sensor failure
clean of carbon
 Check for blocked exhaust
manifold absolute pressure
sensor as required. Check for
related BARO sensor DTC
P0069-29. Refer to the
module/component
P0107- Manifold Absolute NOTE: - Circuit MAP_SENSOR -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Pressure/BARO Sensor Low - diagrams and check manifold
No sub type information absolute pressure sensor circuit
failure
sensor as required. Refer to the
module/component
P0108- Manifold Absolute NOTE: - Circuit MAP_SENSOR -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Pressure/BARO Sensor High - diagrams and check manifold
No sub type information absolute pressure sensor circuit
circuit short circuit to power, open for short circuit to power, open
circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
failure manifold absolute pressure
sensor as required. Refer to the
module/component
P010B- Mass or Volume Air Flow B  Intake air distribution and filtering  Using the manufacturer
00 Circuit Range/Performance - components incorrectly installed approved smoke tester check
No sub type information  Leakage from intake air system intake air distribution and
resistance
clean of carbon
Test
P010C- Mass or Volume Air Flow B  Fuse failure  Check for fuse failure
00 Circuit Low - No sub type  Connector is disconnected,  Inspect connectors for signs of
information connector terminal is backed out, water ingress, and pins for
connector terminal corrosion damage and/or corrosion
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, short  Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to ground, short circuit to diagrams and check mass air
power, open circuit, high flow sensor circuit for short
resistance circuit to ground, short circuit
 Mass air flow sensor failure to power, open circuit, high
resistance
Test
P010D- Mass or Volume Air Flow B  Connector is disconnected,  Using the manufacturer
00 Circuit High - No sub type connector terminal is backed out, approved diagnostic system
information connector terminal corrosion check datalogger signal, Mass
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, short Air Flow Sensor 2 Voltage
circuit to ground, short circuit to (0x0503)
power, open circuit, high  Inspect connectors for signs of
resistance water ingress, and pins for
 Blocked air cleaner element(s) damage and/or corrosion
 Blockage in air intake system  Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance
free from restriction and in
serviceable condition
blockage
Test
P010F- Mass or Volume Air Flow  Intake air distribution and filtering  Using the manufacturer
00 Sensor A/B Correlation - No components incorrectly installed approved smoke tester check
sub type information  Leakage from intake air system intake air distribution and
resistance
clean of carbon
Test
P0111- Intake Air Temperature NOTE: - Circuit  Refer to the electrical circuit
23 Sensor 1 Circuit INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_A - diagrams and check intake air
Range/Performance - Signal temperature sensor circuit for
stuck low short circuit to ground, open
short circuit to ground, open
air temperature sensor as
failure
module/component
stuck high short circuit to power, open
circuit short circuit to power, open circuit
circuit
failure required. Refer to the warranty
module/component
invalid short circuit to ground, short
failure
module/component
00 Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_A - diagrams and check intake air
1) - No sub type information temperature sensor circuit for
circuit short circuit to ground, circuit to power, open circuit,
short circuit to power, open high resistance
failure
module/component
00 Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_A - diagrams and check intake air
1) - No sub type information temperature sensor circuit for
circuit short circuit to power, open
failure
module/component
P0116- Engine Coolant Temperature NOTE: - Circuit COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR  Using the manufacturer
23 Sensor 1 Circuit - approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance - Signal check datalogger signal, Engine
stuck low Coolant Temperature Sensor
 Battery reset carried out when the
Voltage (0x0357)
engine was warm/hot
 Check for related DTC P2610-
 Engine coolant temperature
87. Start the engine and switch
sensor 1 sensing circuit
off. Clear DTC and re-test
intermittent high resistance
sensor 1 failure
coolant temperature sensor 1
circuit for intermittent high
resistance
 Check and install a new engine
module/component
24 Sensor 1 Circuit - approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance - Signal check datalogger signal, Engine
stuck high  Engine coolant temperature
Coolant Temperature Sensor
sensor 1 sensing circuit Voltage (0x0357)
 Check for related DTC P2610-
intermittent high resistance
87. Start the engine and switch
off. Clear DTC and re-test
sensor 1 failure
 Battery reset carried out when the
engine was warm/hot
resistance
module/component
P0116- Engine Coolant Temperature NOTE: - Circuit COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR  Fill cooling system to correct
29 Sensor 1 Circuit - level and specification
Range/Performance - Signal  Using the manufacturer
invalid  Low coolant level
check datalogger signal, Engine
sensor 1 sensing circuit - Coolant Temperature Sensor
intermittent high resistance Voltage (0x0357)
sensor 1 failure diagrams and check engine
 Possible airlock in cooling system
resistance
 Check and install new engine
module/component
 Bleed cooling system
16 Sensor 1 Circuit Low - Circuit - approved diagnostic system
voltage below threshold check datalogger signal, Engine
Coolant Temperature Sensor
Voltage (0x0357)
sensor 1 circuit short circuit to
ground  Refer to the electrical circuit
 Engine coolant temperature diagrams and check engine
sensor 1 failure coolant temperature sensor 1
ground
 Check and install a new Engine
module/component
17 Sensor 1 Circuit High - - approved diagnostic system
Circuit voltage above check datalogger signal, Engine
threshold Coolant Temperature Sensor
Voltage (0x0357)
power, open circuit, sensor
disconnected
sensor 1 failure
power, open circuit, sensor
disconnected
 Check and install new engine
module/component
P0121- Throttle/Pedal Position  Corrupt engine control module  Using the manufacturer
00 Sensor A Circuit software flash approved diagnostic system
Range/Performance - No sub  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
type information supply circuit open circuit, high level of software to the engine
resistance control module
 Engine control module damage  Refer to the electrical circuit
through water ingress, internal diagrams and check engine
fault control module power supply
circuit for open circuit, high
resistance
control module as required.
P0122- Throttle/Pedal Position NOTE: - Circuit  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Sensor A Circuit Low - No THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 - diagrams and check throttle
sub type information position sensor 1 circuit for
 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit
short circuit to ground, open circuit
 Clear DTC and repeat
circuit
automated diagnostic
 Throttle position sensor 1 failure
procedure using the
diagnostic system. If DTC
remains suspect the electronic
throttle unit
electronic throttle unit as
module/component
00 Sensor A Circuit High - No THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 - diagrams and check throttle
sub type information position sensor 1 circuit for
 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit
 Throttle position sensor 1 failure
procedure using the
remains suspect the electronic
throttle unit
module/component
P0125- Insufficient Coolant Temp For  Coolant temperature sensor 1  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Closed Loop Fuel Control - circuit, open circuit, high diagrams and check engine
No sub type information resistance coolant temperature sensor 1
 Engine coolant temperature circuit for open circuit, high
sensor 1 failure resistance
coolant temperature sensor 1.
P0126- Insufficient Coolant Temp For  Thermostat stuck open  Refer to the electrical circuit
26 Stable Operation - Signal  Coolant temperature coolant diagrams and check engine
rate of change below sensor circuit, short circuit to coolant temperature sensor 1
threshold ground, short circuit to power, circuit for short circuit to
open circuit ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit
 Check for related coolant
temperature coolant sensor
faults. Check and install a new
thermostat as required. Refer
to the warranty policy and
P0128- Coolant Thermostat (Coolant  Thermostat stuck open  Check for related coolant
00 Temp Below Thermostat  Cooling fans running continuously temperature coolant sensor
Regulating Temperature) - or at a high duty faults
No sub type information  Check cooling fans for correct
operation. Repair as required
thermostat as required. Refer
P0131- O2 Circuit Low Voltage (Bank  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd  Check pre-catalyst oxygen
00 1, Sensor 1) - No sub type disconnected sensor odd connector is
information  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd connected
variable circuit, short circuit to  Refer to the electrical circuit
ground diagrams and check pre-
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd catalyst oxygen sensor odd
variable circuit, open circuit variable circuit for short circuit
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd to ground, open circuit
heater fault  Check pre-catalyst oxygen
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd sensor odd heater circuit
failure  Check and install a new pre-
catalyst oxygen sensor odd as
module/component
P0131- O2 Sensor Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_A_VARIABLE -  Check pre-catalyst oxygen
1A Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) - sensor odd connector is
Circuit resistance below connected
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd
threshold  Refer to the electrical circuit
disconnected
diagrams and check pre-
catalyst oxygen sensor odd
variable circuit, short circuit to
variable circuit for short circuit
ground
to ground, open circuit
 Check pre-catalyst oxygen
variable circuit, open circuit
sensor odd heater circuit
 Check and install a new pre-
heater fault
failure
module/component
P0132- O2 Sensor Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_A_VARIABLE -  Check pre-catalyst oxygen
1B Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) - sensor odd connector is
Circuit resistance above  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd
connected
threshold disconnected  Refer to the electrical circuit
variable circuit, short circuit to
variable circuit for short circuit
power
 Check pre-catalyst oxygen
variable circuit, open circuit
sensor odd heater circuit
heater fault
failure
module/component
P0132- O2 Circuit High Voltage  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd  Check pre-catalyst oxygen
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - No sub disconnected sensor odd connector is
type information  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd connected
variable circuit, short circuit to  Refer to the electrical circuit
power diagrams and check pre-
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd catalyst oxygen sensor odd
variable circuit, open circuit variable circuit for short circuit
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd to power, open circuit
heater fault  Check pre-catalyst oxygen
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd sensor odd heater circuit
failure  Check and install a new pre-
module/component
P0133- O2 Circuit Slow Response NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_A_VARIABLE -  Check pre-catalyst oxygen
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - No sub sensor odd is correctly installed
type information in exhaust manifold
 Exhaust leak
 Check for and rectify any
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd to
exhaust leak between cylinder
engine control module wiring
head and catalytic converter
shield high resistance
 Fuel control system fault
catalyst oxygen sensor odd to
failure
shield for high resistance
 Check fuel control system for
failure
module/component
P0134- O2 Circuit No Activity NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_A_VARIABLE -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Detected (Bank 1, Sensor 1) diagrams and check pre-
- No sub type information catalyst oxygen sensor odd
open circuit
failure
module/component
P0137- O2 Circuit Low Voltage (Bank NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 1, Sensor 2) - No sub type diagrams and check post
information  Post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
sensing circuit short circuit to sensing circuit for short circuit
ground, high resistance, open
open circuit
circuit
 Check for damaged or blocked
 Damaged or blocked catalyst
catalyst
 Air leak between catalyst and
 Check for air leak between
exhaust manifold
catalyst and exhaust manifold
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
 Check and install new post
failure
module/component
P0138- O2 Circuit High Voltage NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 2) - No sub diagrams and check post
type information catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
sensing circuit short circuit to sensing circuit for short circuit
power to power
 Check post catalyst oxygen
tip damaged, blocked, poisoned sensor - odd, tip for damage,
 Catalyst blocked
blockage, poisoned, install a
new sensor as required
 Check for blocked catalyst
failure
 Check and install new catalyst
as required. Check and install
new post catalyst oxygen
sensor - odd, as required. Refer
P0139- O2 Circuit Slow Response NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_A -  Check for excessive oil
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 2) - No sub consumption. Repair as
type information required
 Excessive oil consumption
 Check for related DTCs. Check
post catalyst oxygen sensor -
tip damaged, blocked, poisoned
odd, tip for damage, blockage,
poisoned, install a new sensor
module/component
P0140- O2 Circuit No Activity NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Detected (Bank 1, Sensor 2) diagrams and check post
- No sub type information catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
sensing circuit for short circuit
sensing circuit short circuit to
to ground, short circuit to
power, high resistance, open
high resistance, open circuit
circuit
exhaust manifold
tip damaged, blocked, poisoned
sensor - odd, tip for damage,
blockage, poisoned, install a
failure
new sensor as required
 Check for excessive oil
consumption. Repair as
required
module/component
P0141- O2 Heater Circuit (Bank 1, NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_A -  Using the manufacturer
00 Sensor 2) - No sub type approved diagnostic system
information check datalogger signal,
(0x03A2)
exhaust manifold
circuit control relay failure
failure
circuit
Check and install new post
module/component
P0148- Fuel Delivery Error - Signal  Injector(s) circuit, short circuit to  Check for related injector DTCs
65 has too few transitions / ground, short circuit to power,  Refer to the electrical circuit
events high resistance diagrams and check injector(s)
 Injector(s) failure circuit for, short circuit to
 Engine control module internal ground, short circuit to power,
failure high resistance
 Check and install a new injector
(s) as required. Check and
install a new engine control
module as required. Refer to
P0148- Fuel Delivery Error - Signal  Injector(s) circuit, short circuit to  Check for related injector DTCs
66 has too many transitions / ground, short circuit to power,  Refer to the electrical circuit
events high resistance diagrams and check injector(s)
P0149- Fuel Timing Error - Signal  Injector(s) circuit, short circuit to  Check for related injector DTCs
32 low time < minimum ground, short circuit to power,  Refer to the electrical circuit
high resistance diagrams and check injector(s)
P0149- Fuel Timing Error - Signal  Injector(s) circuit, short circuit to  Check for related injector DTCs
35 high time > maximum ground, short circuit to power,  Refer to the electrical circuit
high resistance diagrams and check injector(s)
P0151- O2 Sensor Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_B_VARIABLE -  Refer to the electrical circuit
1A Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 1) - diagrams and check pre-
Circuit resistance below catalyst oxygen sensor - even
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - even
threshold circuit for short circuit to
circuit short circuit to ground
ground
 Check and install new pre
failure
catalyst oxygen sensor - even.
P0152- O2 Sensor Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_B_VARIABLE -  Refer to the electrical circuit
1B Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 1) - diagrams and check pre-
Circuit resistance above catalyst oxygen sensor - even
threshold circuit for short circuit to
circuit short circuit to power,
power, disconnected
disconnected
 Check and install new pre
catalyst oxygen sensor - even.
failure Refer to the warranty policy
P0153- O2 Circuit Slow Response NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_B_VARIABLE -  Check pre-catalyst oxygen
00 (Bank 2, Sensor 1) - No sub sensor even is correctly
type information installed in exhaust manifold
 Exhaust leak
 Check for and rectify any
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even
exhaust leak between cylinder
to engine control module wiring
head and catalytic converter
to engine control module signal
catalyst oxygen sensor even to
 Fuel control system fault
failure
diagrams and check Pre-
engine control module signal
ground
 Check fuel control system for
failure
catalyst oxygen sensor even as
module/component
P0154- O2 Circuit No Activity NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_B_VARIABLE -  Check pre-catalyst oxygen
00 Detected (Bank 2, Sensor 1) sensor even is correctly
- No sub type information installed in exhaust manifold
to engine control module wiring
to engine control module signal
failure
engine control module signal
circuit
catalyst oxygen sensor even as
module/component
P0157- O2 Circuit Low Voltage (Bank NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 2, Sensor 2) - No sub type diagrams and check post
information catalyst oxygen sensor - even,
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor -
even, sensing circuit short circuit
to ground, high resistance, open
open circuit
circuit
exhaust manifold
sensor - even, tip for damage,
even, tip damaged, blocked,
blockage, poisoned
poisoned

catalyst oxygen sensor - even,
even, failure
module/component
P0158- O2 Circuit High Voltage NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 (Bank 2, Sensor 2) - No sub diagrams and check post
type information catalyst oxygen sensor - even,
to power
to power
blockage, poisoned
poisoned
even, failure
module/component
P0159- O2 Circuit Slow Response NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_B -  Check for excessive oil
00 (Bank 2, Sensor 2) - No sub consumption, repair as required
type information  Check post catalyst oxygen
 Excessive oil consumption
even, tip damaged, blocked, blockage, poisoned, install a
poisoned new sensor as required. Refer
even, failure procedures manual, or
P0160- O2 Circuit No Activity NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Detected (Bank 2, Sensor 2) diagrams and check post
- No sub type information catalyst oxygen sensor - even,
circuit
exhaust manifold
poisoned
blockage, poisoned
even, failure
module/component
P0161- O2 Heater Circuit (Bank 2, NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Sensor 2) - No sub type diagrams and check post
information catalyst oxygen sensor - even,
circuit
even, sensing circuit fuse failure
diagrams and check Post
circuit control relay failure
sensing circuit fuse, replace as
required
even, failure
Check and install new post
module/component
P0171- System Too Lean (Bank 1) -  Air leak upstream of MAF/IAT  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 No sub type information sensor bank 1 diagrams and check MAF/IAT
 MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 circuit sensor circuit, for short circuit
failure to ground, short circuit power,
 MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 failure high resistance, open circuit
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd  Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit failure diagrams and check post
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd catalyst oxygen sensor - even,
failure sensing circuit for short circuit
 Post-catalyst oxygen sensor odd to ground, short circuit power,
circuit failure high resistance, open circuit
 Post-catalyst oxygen sensor odd  Check for leak from air intake
failure system
 Check for additional MAF/IAT
sensor bank 1 related DTCs and
refer to relevant DTC index
 Check for additional pre-
related DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC index
 Check for additional post-
relevant DTC index
P0172- System Too Rich (Bank 1) -  Restricted air cleaner  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 No sub type information  Leaking fuel injector(s) diagrams and check MAF/IAT
 MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 failure sensor circuit, for short circuit
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd to ground, short circuit power,
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd  Refer to the electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check post
 Post-catalyst oxygen sensor odd catalyst oxygen sensor - even,
circuit failure sensing circuit for short circuit
 Post-catalyst oxygen sensor odd to ground, short circuit power,
failure high resistance, open circuit
free from restriction
 Check for leaking injectors,
install new injector(s) as
module/component
relevant DTC index
relevant DTC index
P0174- System Too Lean (Bank 2) -  Air leak upstream of MAF/IAT  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 No sub type information sensor bank 2 diagrams and check MAF/IAT
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even  Refer to the electrical circuit
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even catalyst oxygen sensor - even,
 Post-catalyst oxygen sensor even to ground, short circuit power,
 Post-catalyst oxygen sensor even  Check for leak from air intake
failure system
catalyst oxygen sensor even
relevant DTC index
relevant DTC index
P0175- System Too Rich (Bank 2) -  Restricted air cleaner  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 No sub type information  Leaking fuel injector(s) diagrams and check MAF/IAT
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even  Refer to the electrical circuit
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even catalyst oxygen sensor - even,
 Post-catalyst oxygen sensor even to ground, short circuit power,
 Post-catalyst oxygen sensor even  Check for leak from air intake
failure system
relevant DTC index
relevant DTC index
P018B- Fuel Pressure Sensor B NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
29 Circuit Range/Performance - LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
Signal invalid check datalogger signal, Fuel
 Fuel Filter or fuel system
restriction
 Check for related fuel pump
 Fuel system leak
DTCs
 Fuel pump pressure sensor circuit
 Check the fuel system for
circuit to power, open circuit, high restrictions or blockages
resistance
 Fuel pump pressure sensor failure
high resistance
pump pressure sensor as
module/component
P018C- Fuel Pressure Sensor B NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
00 Circuit Low - No sub type LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
resistance

resistance
module/component
P018D- Fuel Pressure Sensor B NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
00 Circuit High - No sub type LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
resistance

resistance
module/component
P0191- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A NOTE: - Circuit  Using the manufacturer
00 Circuit Range/Performance - FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
No sub type information check datalogger signal, Fuel
 Fuel rail pressure sensor short
Range Sensor Voltage
(0x0377)
power, open circuit, high
resistance
 Fuel rail pressure sensor A failure
pressure sensor A circuit for
short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground, high
resistance, open circuit,
terminal damage or corrosion
 Check and install a new fuel rail
pressure sensor A as required.
00 Circuit Low - No sub type FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
 Fuel rail pressure sensor short
circuit to ground, short circuit to Range Sensor Voltage
power, open circuit, high (0x0377)
resistance
 Fuel rail pressure sensor A failure
00 Circuit High - No sub type FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR - approved diagnostic system
information  Fuel rail pressure sensor short check datalogger signal, Fuel
circuit to ground, short circuit to Rail Pressure Sensor - High
power, open circuit, high Range Sensor Voltage
resistance (0x0377)
 Fuel rail pressure sensor A failure  Refer to the electrical circuit
P0196- Engine Oil Temperature NOTE: - Circuit OIL_QUALITY_SENSOR -  Using the manufacturer
23 Sensor Range/Performance - approved diagnostic system
Signal stuck low check datalogger signal, Sump
 Oil temperature - level sensor
Oil Temperature - Measured
(0x03F3)
high resistance
failure diagrams and check oil
temperature - level sensor
ground, intermittent high
resistance
 Check and install new oil
temperature - level sensor as
module/component
P0196- Engine Oil Temperature NOTE: - Circuit OIL_QUALITY_SENSOR -  Using the manufacturer
24 Sensor Range/Performance - approved diagnostic system
Signal stuck high check datalogger signal, Sump
circuit short circuit to power
(0x03F3)
failure
diagrams and check oil
temperature - level sensor
circuit for intermittent short
circuit to power
 Check and install new oil
temperature - level sensor as
module/component
P0200- Injector Circuit - System  Engine control module injector  Refer to the electrical circuit
04 internal failures circuit power failure diagrams and check engine
 Engine control module power control module injector power
supply open circuit circuit for open circuit
 Engine control module ground  Refer to the electrical circuit
supply open circuit diagrams and check the power
and ground connections to the
module
 Check for misfire DTCs, if
present suspect the engine
control module
P0200- Injector Circuit - Internal  Engine control module failure  Check for misfire DTCs, if
49 electronic failure present suspect the engine
control module
P0200- Injector Circuit - Over  Engine control module failure  If combined with misfire codes
4B temperature for one or both injector sets,
then no service rectification is
proposed
P0201- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Open - Circuit open INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - diagrams and check fuel
injector no.1 circuit for open
circuit, disconnected injector,
 Fuel injector no.1 circuit open
high resistance
circuit
 Injector disconnected
 Injector high resistance
P0202- Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Open - Circuit open INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - diagrams and check fuel
high resistance
circuit
circuit high resistance
high resistance
circuit
high resistance
circuit
high resistance
circuit
 Fuel injector no.8 circuit open circuit, disconnected injector,
00 Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_2 - diagrams and check
- No sub type information throttle/pedal position
sensor/switch B circuit for open
 Throttle/pedal position
circuit, short circuit to ground
sensor/switch B circuit open
throttle/pedal position
sensor/switch B as required.
sensor/switch B failure
00 Sensor/Switch B Circuit High THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_2 - diagrams and check
- No sub type information throttle/pedal position
sensor/switch B circuit for open
circuit, short circuit to power
sensor/switch B circuit open
throttle/pedal position
sensor/switch B failure sensor/switch B as required.
P0231- Fuel Pump Secondary Circuit NOTE: - Circuit  Check for related DTCs P0232-
23 Low - Signal stuck low HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG - 24
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2POS -  Refer to the electrical circuit
driver module signal circuit for
 Fuel pump driver module signal
circuit
open circuit
 Fuel pump driver module is not
energized with the ignition on
driver module is energized with
the ignition on. Repair as
required
pump driver module as
module/component
P0232- Fuel Pump Secondary Circuit NOTE: - Circuit  Check for related DTCs P0231-
24 Low - Signal stuck high HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG - 23
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2POS -  Refer to the electrical circuit
driver module signal circuit for
 Fuel pump driver module signal
circuit
open circuit
 Fuel pump driver module is not
energized with the ignition on
driver module is energized with
the ignition on. Repair as
required
pump driver module as
module/component
P0236- Turbocharger/Supercharger NOTE: - Circuit TMAP_PRESS_SENSOR -  Check air cleaner element is
00 Boost Sensor A Circuit free from restriction
Range/Performance - No sub  Blocked air cleaner element(s)
 Check for leak from air intake
type information  Intake manifold air leak
system, rectify as required
2 circuit short circuit to ground, diagrams and check manifold
absolute pressure sensor 2
 Engine breather leak
 Carbon build up on throttle plate
 Ensure the engine breather
 Exhaust system blocked
system is correctly installed
and in serviceable condition
2 failure
 BARO sensor failure
clean of carbon
 Check for blocked exhaust
 Check for related BARO sensor
DTC P0069-29
sensor 2 as required. Refer to
P0237- Turbocharger/Supercharger NOTE: - Circuit TMAP_PRESS_SENSOR -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Boost Sensor A Circuit Low - diagrams and check manifold
No sub type information  Manifold absolute pressure sensor
absolute pressure sensor 2
2 circuit short circuit to ground, circuit for short circuit to
resistance
2 failure
P0238- Turbocharger/Supercharger NOTE: - Circuit TMAP_PRESS_SENSOR -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Boost Sensor A Circuit High - diagrams and check manifold
No sub type information absolute pressure sensor 2
circuit 2 short circuit to power,
resistance
2 failure
P0251- Injection Pump Fuel Metering NOTE: - Circuit  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Control A - Circuit open HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG - diagrams and check fuel rail
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG - pressure sensor circuit for open
circuit
 Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit,
open circuit
11 Control A Low - Circuit short HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG - diagrams and check fuel rail
to ground HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG - pressure sensor circuit for short
circuit to ground
12 Control A High - Circuit short HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG - diagrams and check fuel rail
to battery HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG - pressure sensor circuit for short
circuit to power
13 Control B - Circuit open HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG - diagrams and check fuel rail
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG - pressure sensor circuit for open
circuit
open circuit
11 Control B Low - Circuit short HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG - diagrams and check fuel rail
to ground HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG - pressure sensor circuit for short
circuit to ground
12 Control B High - Circuit short HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG - diagrams and check fuel rail
to battery HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG - pressure sensor circuit for short
circuit to power
P025C- Fuel Pump Module Control NOTE: - Circuit FPDM control -  Refer to the electrical circuit
14 Circuit Low - Circuit short to diagrams and check fuel pump
ground or open driver module circuit short
 Fuel pump driver module control
circuit to ground, open circuit
open circuit
P025D- Fuel Pump Module Control NOTE: - Circuit FPDM control -  Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Circuit High - Circuit short to diagrams and check fuel pump
battery driver module circuit short
 Fuel pump driver module control
circuit to power
P0261- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
11 Low - Circuit short to ground INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - diagrams and check fuel
injector no.1 circuit for short
circuit to ground
 Fuel injector no.1 circuit short
circuit to ground
12 Low - Circuit short to battery INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - diagrams and check fuel
circuit to power
circuit to power
01 High - General electrical INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - diagrams and check fuel
failure injector no.1 circuit for short
to power
power
12 High - Circuit short to INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - diagrams and check fuel
battery injector no.1 circuit for short
circuit to power
circuit to power
P0264- Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
11 Low - Circuit short to ground INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - diagrams and check fuel
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
12 Low - Circuit short to battery INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - diagrams and check fuel
circuit to power
circuit to power
01 High - General electrical INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - diagrams and check fuel
to power
power
12 High - Circuit short to INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - diagrams and check fuel
circuit to power
circuit to power
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
circuit to power
circuit to power
to power
power
circuit to power
circuit to power
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
circuit to power
circuit to power
to power
power
circuit to power
circuit to power
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
circuit to power
circuit to power
to power
power
circuit to power
circuit to power
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
circuit to power
circuit to power
circuit to ground, short circuit to to power
power
circuit to power
circuit to power
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
circuit to power
circuit to power
circuit to ground, short circuit to to power
power
circuit to power
circuit to power
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
circuit to power
circuit to power
to power
power
circuit to power
circuit to power
P02EE- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
01 Range/Performance - INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - diagrams and check cylinder 1
General electrical failure injector circuit for short circuit
to power, short circuit together
 Cylinder 1 injector low circuit
short circuit to power cylinder 1 injector as required.
 Cylinder 1 injector low circuit Refer to the warranty policy
shorted to high circuit and procedures manual, or
 Cylinder 1 injector failure determine if any prior approval
P02EE- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A -  Using the manufacturer
1C Range/Performance - Circuit INJECTOR_1A_COMMON - approved diagnostic system,
voltage out of range check engine control module,
for related DTCs and refer to
 Engine control module failure
the relevant DTC index
P02EF- Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
01 Range/Performance - INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - diagrams and check cylinder 2
cylinder 2 injector as required.
shorted to high circuit
 Cylinder 2 injector failure
P02EF- Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B -  Using the manufacturer
1C Range/Performance - Circuit INJECTOR_1B_COMMON - approved diagnostic system,
P02F0- Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_2A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
P02F0- Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_2A -  Using the manufacturer
P02F1- Cylinder 4 Injector Circuit NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_2B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
shorted to high circuit Refer to the warranty policy
P02F1- Cylinder 4 Injector Circuit NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_2B -  Using the manufacturer
shorted to high circuit Refer to the warranty policy
P0300- Random Misfire Detected -  Poor fuel quality  Using the manufacturer
00 No sub type information  Catalyst/exhaust system blockage approved diagnostic system,
 Spark plug(s) fouled or failed check engine control module,
 Coil(s) failure for related DTCs and refer to
 Injector(s) circuit short circuit to the relevant DTC index
ground, short circuit to power,  Check the fuel system for
open circuit blockages, repair as required
 Injector(s) failure  Check the catalyst/exhaust
 Fuel system excessively too lean system for blockage, repair as
or too rich required
 Camshaft position sensor failure  Check and install a new spark
plug(s) as required
as required
diagrams and check injector(s)
open circuit
(s) as required
 Check for air leaks within the
intake system
camshaft position sensor as
required
 Refer to the warranty policy
P0301- Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected -  Poor fuel quality  Using the manufacturer
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
P0313- Misfire Detected With Low  Poor fuel quality  Using the manufacturer
00 Fuel - No sub type  Catalyst/exhaust system blockage approved diagnostic system,
information  Spark plug(s) fouled or failed check engine control module,
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
P0316- Misfire Detected On Startup  Poor fuel quality  Using the manufacturer
00 (First 1000 Revolutions) - No  Catalyst/exhaust system blockage approved diagnostic system,
sub type information  Spark plug(s) fouled or failed check engine control module,
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
P0327- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_1A_POS  Ensure a good electrical contact
00 (Bank1) - No sub type - with the cylinder block
information  Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check knock
 Poor sensor contact with the
sensor bank 1 front circuit for
cylinder block
 Knock sensor bank 1 front circuit
circuit
 Check and install a new knock
circuit
 Knock sensor bank 1 front failure
sensor bank 1 front as
module/component
P0328- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_1A_POS  Ensure a good electrical contact
00 (Bank 1) - No sub type - with the cylinder block
cylinder block
short circuit to power, high
resistance
high resistance, short circuit to
power
module/component
P032C- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_2A_POS  Ensure a good electrical contact
www.JagDocs.com
cylinder block sensor bank 2 front circuit for
module/component
P032D- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_2A_POS  Ensure a good electrical contact
cylinder block
resistance
high resistance, short circuit to
power
module/component
P0332- Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_1B_POS  Ensure a good electrical contact
sensor bank 1 rear circuit for
cylinder block
 Knock sensor bank 1 rear circuit
circuit
circuit
sensor bank 1 rear as required.
 Knock sensor bank 1 rear failure
P0333- Knock Sensor 2 Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_1B_POS  Ensure a good electrical contact
cylinder block sensor bank 1 rear circuit for
P0335- Crankshaft Position Sensor A NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_SENSOR -  Refer to the electrical circuit
02 Circuit - General signal diagrams and check crankshaft
failure position sensor circuit for short
 Crankshaft position sensor circuit
to power, high resistance,
circuit to power, high resistance,
disconnected
disconnected
 Check and install new
 Crankshaft position sensor failure
crankshaft position as required.
31 Circuit - No signal  Crankshaft position sensor circuit diagrams and check crankshaft
- short circuit to ground, short position sensor circuit for short
circuit to power, high resistance, circuit to ground, short circuit
disconnected to power, high resistance,
 Crankshaft position sensor failure disconnected
00 Circuit Range/Performance - diagrams and check crankshaft
No sub type information position sensor circuit for short
 Crankshaft position sensor circuit
to power, high resistance,
circuit to power, high resistance,
disconnected
disconnected
 Check crankshaft position
 Crankshaft position sensor gap
sensor for damage and check
incorrect, foreign matter on
air gap (check at 90° intervals,
sensor face, damaged teeth on
should be no greater than
rotor
4.5mm)
 Crankshaft position sensor failure
P033C- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_2B_POS  Ensure a good electrical contact
sensor bank 2 rear circuit for
cylinder block
P033D- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_2B_POS  Ensure a good electrical contact
cylinder block sensor bank 2 rear circuit for
high resistance, short circuit to resistance
power
P0340- Camshaft Position Sensor A NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
02 Circuit (Bank 1 or single diagrams and check camshaft
sensor) - General signal position sensor bank 1 inlet
 Camshaft position sensor bank 1
failure sensor circuit for short circuit to
inlet sensor circuit short circuit to
high resistance, disconnected
 Check camshaft position sensor
bank 1 inlet sensor for correct
inlet sensor gap incorrect, foreign
installation and damage
matter on sensor face, damaged
rotor
camshaft position sensor bank
1 inlet as required. Refer to the
inlet sensor failure
module/component
31 Circuit (Bank 1 or single diagrams and check camshaft
sensor) - No signal position sensor bank 1 inlet
sensor circuit for short circuit to
rotor
module/component
00 Circuit Range/Performance diagrams and check camshaft
(Bank 1 or single sensor) -  Camshaft position sensor bank 1
position sensor bank 1 inlet
No sub type information inlet sensor circuit short circuit to sensor circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, ground, short circuit to power,
high resistance, disconnected high resistance, disconnected
inlet sensor gap incorrect, foreign bank 1 inlet sensor for correct
rotor
module/component
P0345- Camshaft Position Sensor A NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
02 Circuit (Bank 2) - General diagrams and check camshaft
signal failure position sensor bank 2 inlet
matter on sensor face, damaged installation and damage
rotor
inlet sensor failure 2 inlet as required. Refer to the
module/component
31 Circuit (Bank 2) - No signal diagrams and check camshaft
inlet sensor circuit - short circuit
rotor
module/component
(Bank 2) - No sub type  Camshaft position sensor bank 2
information sensor circuit for short circuit to
inlet sensor circuit - short circuit
matter on sensor face, target
 Check target rotor for run out,
rotor run-out
repair as required
module/component
P0351- Ignition Coil A NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Primary/Secondary Circuit - diagrams and check ignition
Circuit open  Ignition coil 1 open circuit
coil 1 circuit for open circuit,
 Ignition coil 1 disconnected
disconnected ignition coil, high
 Ignition coil high resistance
resistance
P0352- Ignition Coil B NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
Circuit open coil 2 circuit for open circuit,
 Ignition coil 2 open circuit
resistance
P0353- Ignition Coil C NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_2A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance
P0354- Ignition Coil D NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_2B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance
P0355- Ignition Coil E NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_3A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance
P0356- Ignition Coil F NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_3B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance
P0357- Ignition Coil G NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_4A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance
P0358- Ignition Coil H NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_4B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance
P0365- Camshaft Position Sensor B NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
signal failure  Camshaft position sensor bank 1
position sensor bank 1 outlet
outlet sensor circuit short circuit sensor circuit for short circuit to
to ground, short circuit to power, ground, short circuit to power,
 Camshaft position sensor bank 1 bank 1 outlet sensor for correct
outlet sensor gap incorrect, installation and damage
foreign matter on sensor face,  Check and install a new
damaged rotor camshaft position sensor bank
 Camshaft position sensor bank 1 1 outlet as required. Refer to
outlet sensor failure the warranty policy and
P0366- Camshaft Position Sensor B NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
(Bank 1) - No sub type position sensor bank 1 outlet
information sensor circuit for short circuit to
outlet sensor circuit short circuit
bank 1 outlet sensor for correct
outlet sensor gap incorrect,
foreign matter on sensor face,
 Check target run-out, repair as
target rotor run-out
required
outlet sensor failure
1 outlet as required. Refer to
P0390- Camshaft Position Sensor B NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
signal failure position sensor bank 2 outlet
outlet sensor circuit short circuit
bank 2 outlet sensor for correct
outlet sensor gap incorrect,
damaged rotor
P0391- Camshaft Position Sensor B NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
(Bank 2) - No sub type  Camshaft position sensor bank 2
position sensor bank 2 outlet
information outlet sensor circuit short circuit sensor circuit for short circuit to
to ground, short circuit to power, ground, short circuit to power,
outlet sensor gap incorrect, bank 2 outlet sensor for correct
 Check target rotor, repair as
damaged rotor, rotor run-out
required
P0420- Catalyst System Efficiency  Catalytic converter failure due to  Using the manufacturer
00 Below Threshold (Bank 1) - overheating damage caused by approved diagnostic system,
No sub type information misfire and/or lean combustion check for misfire/lean
 Catalytic converter failure due to combustion related DTCs and
poisoning caused by excessive oil refer to the relevant DTC index
consumption and/or contaminated  Check the oil and fuel
fuel condition/level
 Check the catalytic converter
for damage
catalytic converter bank 1 as
module/component
P0430- Catalyst System Efficiency  Catalytic converter failure due to  Using the manufacturer
00 Below Threshold (Bank 2) - overheating damage caused by approved diagnostic system,
No sub type information misfire and/or lean combustion check for misfire/lean
 Catalytic converter failure due to combustion related DTCs and
poisoning caused by excessive oil refer to the relevant DTC index
consumption and/or contaminated  Check the oil and fuel
fuel condition/level
 Check the catalytic converter
for damage
catalytic converter bank 2 as
module/component
P0441- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit PURGE_VALVE -  Check all evaporative emission
00 Incorrect Purge Flow - No system hoses, pipes and
sub type information connection are serviceable,
 Evaporative emission system
repair/replace as required
hoses, pipes or connection failure
 Purge control valve circuit short
diagrams and check purge
control valve circuit for short
resistance
 Purge control valve failure
 Check and install a new purge
control valve as required. Refer
P0442- Evaporative Emission System  Fuel filler cap not sealing/missing  Check fuel tank filler cap for
00 Leak Detected (small leak)-  Diagnostic module tank leakage sealing/missing. Check and
No sub type information connector not sealed install a new fuel tank filler cap
 Purge valve dirty as required
 Evaporative emission system leak  Check evaporative emission
 Fuel tank, filler neck leak system for leak using
 Diagnostic module tank leakage appropriate smoke/leak tester
module failure  Carry out a purge valve self
test to clean the purge valve
 Check fuel tank and filler neck
for leakage, replace as required
diagnostic module tank leakage
P0444- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit PURGE_VALVE -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Purge Control Valve Circuit diagrams and check purge
Open - Circuit open control valve circuit for open
 Purge control valve open circuit,
circuit, disconnected purge
valve, high resistance
P0447- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit COV -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Vent Control Circuit Open - NOTE: LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER VALVE diagrams and check diagnostic
No sub type information - module tank leakage module
circuit for open circuit
 Check diagnostic module tank
 Diagnostic module tank leakage
module circuit open circuit leakage module fuse and
replace as required
module circuit fuse blown / not
secure in holder
module failure
P0448- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit COV -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Vent Control Circuit Shorted diagrams and check diagnostic
- No sub type information module tank leakage module
NOTE: LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER VALVE
-
open circuit
 Diagnostic module tank leakage  Check and install a new
module circuit, short circuit to diagnostic module tank leakage
ground, short circuit to power, module as required. Refer to
open circuit the warranty policy and
 Diagnostic module tank leakage procedures manual, or
module failure determine if any prior approval
P0456- Evaporative Emission System  Fuel filler cap not sealing/missing  Check fuel tank filler cap for
00 Leak Detected (very small  Diagnostic module tank leakage sealing/missing. Check and
leak) - No sub type connector not sealed install a new fuel tank filler cap
information  Purge valve dirty as required
 Evaporative emission system leak  Check evaporative emission
 Fuel tank, filler neck leak system for leak using
 Diagnostic module tank leakage appropriate smoke/leak tester
module failure  Carry out a purge valve self
test to clean the purge valve
 Check fuel tank and filler neck
for leakage, replace as required
11 Purge Control Valve Circuit diagrams and check
High - Circuit short to ground  Evaporative emission system
evaporative emission system
purge control valve circuit short purge control valve circuit for
circuit to ground short circuit to ground
12 Purge Control Valve Circuit diagrams and check
High - Circuit short to evaporative emission system
 Evaporative emission system
battery purge control valve circuit for
purge control valve circuit short
circuit to power
P0461- Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit  Fuel level sensor circuit open  Refer to the electrical circuit
29 Range/Performance - Signal circuit, short circuit to ground, diagrams and check fuel level
invalid short circuit to power sensor circuit for short circuit to
 Fuel level sensor stuck ground, short circuit to power,
 Fuel level sensor failure open circuit
 Check for stuck level sensor
level sensor as required. Refer
P0461- Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit  Fuel level sensor circuit short  Refer to the electrical circuit
2F Range/Performance - Signal circuit to ground, short circuit to diagrams and check fuel level
erratic power, open circuit sensor circuit for short circuit to
 Fuel level sensor track damaged ground, short circuit to power,
 Fuel level sensor failure open circuit
 Check level sensor track for
damage
level sensor as required. Refer
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit RAD_FAN_PWM -  Using the manufacturer
04 System internal failures approved diagnostic system
 Damaged cooling fan control unit
Electric Fan PWM Control -
 Cooling fan control unit failure
Commanded Duty Cycle
(0x03F9)
 Check and install a new cooling
fan control unit as required.
09 Component failures approved diagnostic system
(0x03F9)
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit RAD_FAN_PWM -  Using the manufacturer
11 short to ground approved diagnostic system
 Cooling fan control unit circuit
(0x03F9)
diagrams and check cooling fan
control unit circuit for short
circuit to ground
12 short to battery approved diagnostic system
(0x03F9)
control unit circuit for short
circuit to power
13 open approved diagnostic system
open circuit
(0x03F9)
control unit circuit for open
circuit
16 voltage below threshold approved diagnostic system
 Discharged battery
(0x03F9)
diagrams and check charging
circuit to ground
generator as required
 Check and install a new battery
as required
17 voltage above threshold approved diagnostic system
 Discharged battery
(0x03F9)
circuit to ground
generator as required
 Check and install a new battery
as required
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit - Signal NOTE: - Circuit RAD_FAN_PWM -  Using the manufacturer
38 frequency incorrect approved diagnostic system
(0x03F9)
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit - Over NOTE: - Circuit RAD_FAN_PWM -  Using the manufacturer
4B temperature approved diagnostic system
(0x03F9)
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit - No NOTE: - Circuit RAD_FAN_PWM -  Using the manufacturer
93 operation approved diagnostic system
 Blocked cooling fan control unit
(0x03F9)
 Check for blocked or
obstruction to fan rotor
96 Component internal failure approved diagnostic system
(0x03F9)
97 Component or system approved diagnostic system
operation obstructed or  Damaged cooling fan control unit
blocked  Blocked cooling fan control unit
(0x03F9)
 Check for blocked or
obstruction to fan rotor
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A -  Wheel speed sensor fault  Check anti-lock braking system
81 Invalid serial data received module for related DTCs and
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A -  Anti-lock braking system module  Check anti-lock braking system
82 Alive / sequence counter not on bus module and engine control
incorrect / not updated module for related DTCs and
diagrams and check anti-lock
braking system module circuit
circuit
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A -  Incorrect level of anti-lock braking  Clear DTC and re-test
83 Value of signal protection system module software  Using the manufacturer
calculation incorrect  Incorrect level of engine control approved diagnostic system
module software check and install latest relevant
level of software to the anti-
lock braking system module
 Using the manufacturer
check and install latest relevant
level of software to the engine
control module
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A -  Anti-lock braking system module  Check anti-lock braking system
85 Signal above allowable range has reported a speed above 300 module for related DTCs and
km/h refer to relevant DTC index
P0501- Vehicle Speed Sensor A  Vehicle speed from the anti-lock  Check engine control module
62 Range/Performance - Signal braking system module does not for related vehicle speed DTCs
compare failure match the calculated vehicle and refer to relevant DTC index
speed from the engine control  Check anti-lock braking system
module module and transmission
control module for related DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC index
 Check the vehicle tire sizes are
correct
P0504- Brake Switch A / B  No brake pressure signal available  Check Anti-Lock braking
00 Correlation - No sub type from anti-lock braking module module for related DTCs and
information  Brake switch 1 and Brake switch 2 refer to relevant DTC index
sense circuit short circuit to  Check for brake fluid leaks
ground, short circuit to power,  Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit diagrams and check anti-lock
 Brake switch 1 failure braking system module circuit
circuit
diagrams and check brake
switch circuit for short circuit to
open circuit
 Check and install a new brake
switch 1 as required. Refer to
P0504- Brake Switch A / B NOTE: - Circuit BRAKE_SW -  Check for brake fluid leaks
64 Correlation - Signal BRAKE_SW_2 -  Refer to the electrical circuit
plausibility failure diagrams and check brake
 Brake fluid leak
switch 1 circuit for short circuit
 Brake switch incorrectly
to brake switch 2
 Check brake switch is correctly
installed/adjusted
installed and adjusted
 Brake switch 1 sense circuit short
circuit to Brake switch 2 sense
switch as required. Refer to the
 Brake switch failure
module/component
P0506- Idle Air Control System RPM  Air intake restriction  Ensure the air intake system is
00 Lower Than Expected - No  Front end accessory drive free from restriction
sub type information overload (defective/seized  Check the front end accessory
component) drive belt and components for
failure, repair as required
24 Lower Than Expected -  Air intake system air leak between free from restriction
Signal stuck high MAF/IAT sensor and throttle  Check for air leak between
 Intake air leak between throttle MAF/IAT sensor and throttle
and manifold  Check for air leak between
 Engine crankcase breather leak throttle and inlet manifold
 Front end accessory drive  Check for engine breather
overload (defective/seized system leak
component)  Check the front end accessory
drive belt and components for
failure
P0507- Idle Air Control System RPM  Air intake system air leak between  Check for air leak between
00 Higher Than Expected - No MAF/IAT sensor and throttle MAF/IAT sensor and throttle
sub type information  Intake air leak between throttle  Check for air leak between
and manifold throttle and inlet manifold
 Engine crankcase breather leak  Check for engine breather
system leak
23 Higher Than Expected -  Air intake system air leak between free from restriction
Signal stuck low MAF/IAT sensor and throttle  Check for air leak between
 Intake air leak between throttle MAF/IAT sensor and throttle
and manifold  Check for air leak between
 Engine crankcase breather leak throttle and inlet manifold
 Check for engine breather
system leak
P050B- Cold Start Ignition Timing  Ignition coil(s)faulty  Refer to the electrical circuit
23 Performance - Signal stuck  Ignition coils circuit noise diagrams and check ignition
low  Engine control module failure coil circuit for short circuit to
open circuit
control module to ignition coil
as required
coils circuit for corrosion, high
resistance
P050B- Cold Start Ignition Timing  Ignition coil(s)faulty  Refer to the electrical circuit
24 Performance - Signal stuck  Ignition coils circuit noise diagrams and check ignition
high  Engine control module failure coil circuit for short circuit to
open circuit
control module to ignition coil
as required
coils circuit for corrosion, high
resistance
P050E- Cold Start Engine Exhaust  Incorrect coolant temperature  Check the correct coolant
00 Temperature Too Low - No sensor installed temperature sensor is installed
sub type information  Coolant temperature sensor circuit  Refer to the electrical circuit
short circuit to ground, open diagrams and check coolant
circuit temperature sensor circuit for
 Coolant temperature sensor short circuit to ground, open
failure circuit
 Check and install a new coolant
temperature sensor as
module/component
P0512- Starter Request Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_REQUEST -  Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Circuit short to battery diagrams and check crank
request circuit between engine
 Crank request circuit between
control module and central
engine control module and central
junction box for short circuit to
junction box short circuit to power
power
P0512- Starter Request Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_REQUEST -  Refer to the electrical circuit
14 Circuit short to ground or diagrams and check crank
open request circuit between engine
 Crank request circuit between
control module and central
engine control module and central
junction box for short circuit to
junction box short circuit to
P0513- Incorrect Immobilizer Key -  Security key invalid  Check for CAN network
00 No sub type information  Controller area network data interference/engine control
corruption module related error
 Low battery voltage  Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network
integrity test
 Check the vehicle charging
system for faults, repair as
required
P052A- Cold Start Intake (A) NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_A -  Check engine oil level and top
00 Camshaft Position Timing up as required
Over-Advanced (Bank 1) -  Refer to the electrical circuit
 Engine oil pressure too low
No sub type information diagrams and check intake
 Intake valve solenoid 1 circuit
valve solenoid 1 sensor circuit
 Intake valve solenoid 1 failure
 Timing chains stretched beyond
valve solenoid 1 sensor as
allowable limits
required
 Check service history /mileage
 Check and install new timing
chains as required
P052B- Cold Start Intake (A) NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_A -  Check engine oil level and top
Over-Retarded (Bank 1) - No  Engine oil pressure too low
sub type information  Intake valve solenoid 1 circuit
diagrams and check intake
short circuit to ground, open valve solenoid 1 sensor circuit
allowable limits
required
chains as required
P052C- Cold Start Intake (A) NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_B -  Check engine oil level and top
No sub type information diagrams and check intake
circuit, high resistance for short circuit to ground,
allowable limits valve solenoid 2 sensor as
required
chains as required
P052D- Cold Start Intake (A) NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_B -  Check engine oil level and top
Over-Retarded (Bank 2) - No  Refer to the electrical circuit
sub type information diagrams and check intake
allowable limits
required
chains as required
P054A- Cold Start Exhaust (B) NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_A -  Check engine oil level and top
No sub type information diagrams and check exhaust
 Exhaust valve solenoid 1 circuit
 Exhaust valve solenoid 1 failure
exhaust valve solenoid 1 sensor
allowable limits
as required
chains as required
P054B- Cold Start Exhaust (B) NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_A -  Check engine oil level and top
Over-Retarded (Bank 1) - No  Engine oil pressure too low
sub type information diagrams and check exhaust
exhaust valve solenoid 1 sensor
allowable limits
as required
chains as required
P054C- Cold Start Exhaust (B) NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_B -  Check engine oil level and top
Over-Advanced (Bank 2) -  Engine oil pressure too low
No sub type information  Exhaust valve solenoid 2 circuit
diagrams and check exhaust
circuit, high resistance for short circuit to ground,
allowable limits exhaust valve solenoid 2 sensor
as required
chains as required
P054D- Cold Start Exhaust (B) NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_B -  Check engine oil level and top
Over-Retarded (Bank 2) - No  Refer to the electrical circuit
sub type information diagrams and check exhaust
allowable limits exhaust valve solenoid 2 sensor
as required
chains as required
P0560- System Voltage - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 open diagrams and check engine
control module power supply
 Engine control module power
supply circuit, open circuit
 Engine control module battery
monitor disconnected
control module battery monitor
P0562- System Voltage Low - No sub NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 type information diagrams and check battery
circuit for high resistance
 Battery circuit high resistance
 Generator circuit open circuit,
diagrams and check generator
high resistance
 Generator failure
circuit for open circuit, high
resistance
generator as required. Refer to
P0563- System Voltage High - No NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 sub type information diagrams and check battery
circuit for high resistance
 Battery circuit high resistance
 Generator over charging
generator as required. Refer to
P0572- Brake Switch A Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit BRAKE_SW -  Refer to the electrical circuit
17 Circuit voltage above diagrams and check brake
threshold switch 2 circuit for short circuit
to ground
circuit to ground
installed/adjusted installed and adjusted
 Ensure customer is not driving
 Customer is driving with foot
resting on brake pedal with foot resting on brake pedal
 Brake switch 2 failure
module/component
P0573- Brake Switch A Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit BRAKE_SW -  Refer to the electrical circuit
16 Circuit voltage below diagrams and check brake
threshold switch 1 circuit for open circuit
circuit to ground
diagrams and check brake
 Brake switch 2 sense circuit open
switch 2 circuit for open circuit
circuit
installed and adjusted
installed/adjusted
with foot resting on brake pedal
resting on brake pedal
module/component
P0578- Cruise Control Multi-Function  Speed control circuit, output  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Input A Circuit Stuck - No signal stuck diagrams and check speed
sub type information  Speed control switch stuck control switch circuit for short
circuit to ground
 Check for stuck speed control
switch, install a new switch
pack as required. Refer to the
module/component
P057B- Brake Pedal Position Sensor  Brake pressure signal missing  Check the anti-lock braking
87 Circuit Range/Performance - from anti-lock braking system system control module for
Missing message control module related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
P0590- Cruise Control Multi-Function  Active speed limiter switch stuck  Check for active speed limiter
00 Input B Circuit Stuck - No DTCs within gear shift module
sub type information  Check and install a new gear
shift module as required. Refer
P0600- Serial Communication Link -  Corrupt engine control module  Using the manufacturer
49 Internal electronic failure software approved diagnostic system
 Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
supply fault level of software to the engine
 Engine control module damage control module
through water ingress  Check engine control module
power supply circuit for open
circuit
 Check engine control module
for signs of water ingress
P0601- Internal Control Module  Corrupt engine control module  Using the manufacturer
43 Memory Check Sum Error - software flash approved diagnostic system
Special memory failure  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
45 Memory Check Sum Error - software flash approved diagnostic system
Program memory failure  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
42 Random Access Memory software flash approved diagnostic system
(RAM) Error - General  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
memory failure supply fault level of software to the engine
circuit
(RAM) Error - Special  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
(RAM) Error - Data memory  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
failure supply fault level of software to the engine
circuit
P0605- Internal Control Module Read  Corrupt engine control module  Using the manufacturer
00 Only Memory (ROM) Error - software flash approved diagnostic system
No sub type information  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
Signal invalid  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
General memory failure  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
Data memory failure  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
Calibration / parameter  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
Supervision software failure  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
Signal plausibility failure  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
P0606- Control Module Processor -  Corrupt engine control module  Using the manufacturer
01 General electrical failure software flash approved diagnostic system
circuit
04 System internal failures software flash approved diagnostic system
circuit
05 System programming software flash approved diagnostic system
failures  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
41 General checksum failure software flash approved diagnostic system
circuit
42 General memory failure software flash approved diagnostic system
circuit
43 Special memory failure software flash approved diagnostic system
circuit
44 Data memory failure software flash approved diagnostic system
circuit
47 Watchdog / safety micro software flash approved diagnostic system
controller failure  Engine control module power check and install latest relevant
circuit
48 Supervision software failure software flash approved diagnostic system
circuit
49 Internal electronic failure software flash approved diagnostic system
circuit
P0607- Control Module Performance  Corrupt engine control module  Using the manufacturer
00 - No sub type information software flash approved diagnostic system
circuit
P0610- Control Module Vehicle  Corrupt engine control module  Clear the DTC and re-test
43 Options Error - Special software flash  Using the manufacturer
memory failure  Corrupt rear junction box software approved diagnostic system
flash check and install latest relevant
 Corrupt central junction box level of software to the engine
software flash control module
 Re-configure the rear junction
box using the manufacturer
 Re-configure the central
junction box using the
diagnostic system
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit STARTER_RELAY_NEG -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 open diagrams and check starter
relay control circuit for open
 Starter relay control circuit open
circuit
circuit
 Check and install a new starter
 Starter relay failure
relay as required. Refer to the
module/component
P0616- Starter Relay Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit STARTER_RELAY_NEG -  Refer to the electrical circuit
11 Circuit short to ground diagrams and check starter
relay control circuit for short
 Starter relay control circuit short
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
module/component
P0617- Starter Relay Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit STARTER_RELAY_NEG -  Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Circuit short to battery diagrams and check starter
relay control circuit for short
 Starter relay control circuit short
circuit to power
circuit to power
module/component
P061A- Internal Control Module  Manifold air flow sensor(s) failure  Check for related DTCs
00 Torque Performance - No sub  Electronic throttle unit failure  Check manifold air flow sensors
type information are reading correctly
manifold air flow sensor(s) as
required
 Check throttle position sensors
are reading the same position
 Check throttle body is clear of
any deposits
module/component
P061A- Internal Control Module  Manifold air flow sensor(s) failure  Check for related DTCs
04 Torque Performance -  Electronic throttle unit failure  Check manifold air flow sensors
System internal failures are reading correctly
required
any deposits
module/component
P061A- Internal Control Module  Intake system air leak  Check for related DTCs
29 Torque Performance - Signal  Manifold air flow sensor(s) failure  Check intake air system for
invalid  Throttle position sensors are leaks
reading incorrectly  Check manifold air flow sensors
 Electronic throttle unit failure are reading correctly
 Atmospheric pressure sensor  Check and install a new air flow
failure sensor(s) as required
any deposits
required
P061A- Internal Control Module  Intake system air leak  Check for related DTCs
64 Torque Performance - Signal  Manifold air flow sensor(s) failure  Check intake air system for
plausibility failure leaks and is correctly installed
 Check manifold air flow sensors
are reading correctly
module/component
P061B- Internal Control Module  Intake system air leak  Check intake air system for
62 Torque Calculation  Engine breather system leak leaks
Performance - Signal  Manifold air flow sensor failure  Check engine breather system
compare failure  Electronic throttle unit failure for leaks
 Throttle position sensors are  Check throttle position sensors
reading incorrectly are reading the same position
 Atmospheric pressure sensor  Check and install a new
failure manifold air flow sensor as
required
required
P0620- Generator Control Circuit - NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A -  Check for good/clean contact at
01 General electrical failure generator B+ and battery
terminal connectors
 Generator B+ or battery terminal
disconnected/poor connection
 Charging circuit short, open circuit
circuit for short circuit, open
circuit
procedure using the
diagnostic system
 If DTC remains, check and
install a new generator as
module/component
P0627- Fuel Pump A Control Circuit / NOTE: - Circuit  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Open - No sub type HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG diagrams and check high
information pressure fuel pump 1 circuit for
 High pressure fuel pump 1 circuit
to fuel pump driver module short
high resistance
resistance
P062A- Fuel Pump A Control Circuit  Invalid fuel pump duty requested  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Range/Performance - No sub by the engine control module diagrams and check the fuel
type information pump driver module circuit for
high resistance
P0630- VIN Not Programmed or  Car configuration file to CAN VIN  Using the manufacturer
00 Incompatible - ECM/PCM - mismatch approved diagnostic system
No sub type information  New engine control module fitted check and install latest relevant
and incorrectly configured level of software to the engine
 New central junction box fitted control module, clear DTC and
and incorrectly configured re-test
 Re-configure the central
junction box using the
diagnostic system, clear DTC
and re-test
P0634- PCM / ECM/ TCM Internal  Engine control module internal  Clear the DTC. With the ignition
22 Temperature Too High - temperature too high off, wait 10 minutes and re-
Signal amplitude > check DTC
maximum  Check the engine control
module does not have
additional external covering or
obstructions which may cause
overheating
P0634- PCM / ECM / TCM Internal  Engine control module internal  Clear the DTC. With the ignition
4B Temperature A Too High - temperature too high off, wait 10 minutes and re-
Over temperature check DTC
 Check the engine control
module does not have
additional external covering or
obstructions which may cause
overheating
P0642- Sensor Reference Voltage A NOTE: - Circuit SENSOR_5V_SUPPLY -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Circuit Low - No sub type diagrams and check 5V supply
information circuit for short circuit to
 Short circuit to power of a 5V
ground open circuit, high
output pin, either in the harness,
resistance, terminal damage or
or a connector
corrosion
 Internal short circuit in a faulty
component
for sensor related DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index
P0643- Sensor Reference Voltage A NOTE: - Circuit SENSOR_5V_SUPPLY -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Circuit High - No sub type diagrams and check 5V supply
information  Short circuit to ground of a 5V
output pin, either in the harness, open circuit, high resistance,
or a connector terminal damage or corrosion
 Internal short circuit in a faulty
for sensor related DTCs and
component
refer to the relevant DTC index
P0657- Actuator Supply Voltage A NOTE: Jaguar - Circuit IMTV -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Circuit / Open - Circuit open diagrams and check intake
manifold tuning solenoid circuit
NOTE: LR - Circuit MANIFOLD TUNING
for open circuit
VALVE -
 Intake manifold tuning solenoid

circuit, open circuit
11 Circuit Low - Circuit short to diagrams and check intake
ground manifold tuning solenoid circuit
NOTE: LR - Circuit MANIFOLD TUNING
for short circuit to ground
VALVE -

12 Circuit High - Circuit short to diagrams and check intake
battery NOTE: LR - Circuit MANIFOLD TUNING manifold tuning solenoid circuit
VALVE - for short circuit to power

P065B- Generator Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A -  Check for good/clean contact at
16 Range/Performance - Circuit generator B+ and battery
voltage below threshold  Generator B+ or battery terminal
terminal connectors
disconnected/poor connection
 Charging circuit short, open circuit
 Battery failure
circuit
 Ensure the battery is in a fully
charged and serviceable
condition. Refer to the battery
care manual and the relevant
sections of the workshop
manual
procedure using the
remains, check and install a
new generator as required.
P065B- Generator Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A -  Check for good/clean contact at
17 Range/Performance - Circuit generator B+ and battery
voltage above threshold terminal connectors
 Charging circuit short circuit to
power
 Battery failure
circuit
manual
procedure using the
remains, check and install a
new generator as required.
P065C- Generator Mechanical NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A -  Check front end accessory belt
00 Performance - No sub type for condition/contamination and
information correct tension
 Poor front end accessory belt
 Check generator pulley for
tension
failure
 Generator pulley loose/failure
procedure using manufacturer
 If DTC remains check and
install a new generator as
module/component
P0668- PCM / ECM / TCM Internal  Engine control module internal  Check and install a new engine
00 Temperature Sensor A Circuit temperature sensor failure control module as required.
Low - No sub type Refer to the warranty policy
information and procedures manual, or
P0669- PCM / ECM / TCM Internal  Engine control module internal  Check and install a new engine
00 Temperature Sensor A Circuit temperature sensor failure control module as required.
High - No sub type Refer to the warranty policy
information and procedures manual, or
P0687- ECM/PCM Power Relay NOTE: - Circuit EMS_MAIN_RLY -  Refer to the electrical circuit
73 Control Circuit High - diagrams and check engine
Actuator stuck closed control module relay circuit for
 Engine control module relay
 Engine control module relay control module relay as
module/component
P0695- Fan 3 Control Circuit Low - NOTE: - Circuit E_BOX_FAN -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 No sub type information diagrams and check E-Box
cooling fan circuit for short
 E-Box cooling fan circuit short
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
 Check and install a new E-Box
 E-Box cooling fan failure
cooling fan as required. Refer
P0696- Fan 3 Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit E_BOX_FAN -  Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Circuit short to battery diagrams and check E-Box
cooling fan circuit for short
 E-Box cooling fan circuit short
circuit to power
circuit to power
P0696- Fan 3 Control Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit E_BOX_FAN -  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Circuit open diagrams and check E-Box
cooling fan circuit for open
 E-Box cooling fan circuit open
circuit
circuit
P0721- Output Shaft Speed Sensor  Transmission control module has  Check transmission control
85 Circuit Range/Performance - reported a fault in the shaft speed module for related DTCs and
Signal above allowable range signal refer to relevant DTC index
P0721- Output Shaft Speed Sensor  Transmission control module has  Check transmission control
86 Circuit Range/Performance - taken to 8 seconds or longer to module for related DTCs and
Signal invalid change range refer to relevant DTC index
P0724- Brake Switch B Circuit High - NOTE: - Circuit BRAKE_SW -  Refer to the electrical circuit
17 Circuit voltage above diagrams and check brake
threshold  Brake switch 1 sense circuit short
switch 1 circuit for short circuit
circuit to power to power
installed/adjusted installed and adjusted
with foot resting on brake pedal
resting on brake pedal
module/component
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW -  Check gear shift module for
86 Circuit - Signal invalid related DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC index
 Intermittent fault on Park/Neutral
signal from gear shift module
diagrams and check
 CAN network failure between gear
Park/Neutral switch input
shift module and engine control
module
open circuit
integrity test
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW -  Check gear shift module for
8F Circuit - Erratic related DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC index
 Intermittent fault on Park/Neutral
signal from gear shift module
diagrams and check
 CAN network failure between gear
Park/Neutral switch input
shift module and engine control
module
open circuit
integrity test
P0851- Park / Neutral Switch Input NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW -  Refer to the electrical circuit
14 Circuit Low - Circuit short to diagrams and check
ground or open park/neutral switch input circuit
 Park/Neutral switch input circuit
open circuit
circuit
P0852- Park / Neutral Switch Input NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW -  Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Circuit Low - Circuit short to diagrams and check
battery park/neutral switch input circuit
 Park/Neutral switch input circuit
for short circuit to power
P0A1A- Generator Control Module - NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A -  Check for good/clean contact at
87 Missing message generator and engine control
module LIN circuit
 Generator to engine control
connectors/pins
module LIN circuit open circuit
 Check for engine control
module hardware DTCs and
 Clear DTCs and repeat
procedure using the
diagnostic system
P0A1A- Generator Control Module - NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A -  Check for good/clean contact at
88 Bus off generator and engine control
module LIN circuit
 Generator to engine control
connectors/pins
module LIN circuit open circuit
 Check for engine control
module hardware DTCs and
 Clear DTCs and repeat
procedure using the
diagnostic system
P0A3B- Generator Over Temperature  Cooling fan not operating  Check for correct cooling fan
00 - No sub type information  Coolant level low operation
 Check coolant level. Clear DTC
and re-test
P0A3B- Generator Over Temperature  Cooling fan not operating  Check for correct cooling fan
68 - Event information  Coolant level low operation
 Check coolant level. Clear DTC
and re-test
P115D- Mass Air Flow Circuit Offset - NOTE: - Circuit MAF_SENSOR_A -  Using the manufacturer
00 No sub type information MAF_SENSOR_B - approved diagnostic system
check datalogger signal, Mass
Air Flow Sensor 2 Voltage
 NOTE: Customer likely to report
(0x0503)
hesitation.
 Check air cleaner for blockage
Air cleaner blocked leaks
 Air intake leak  Check engine breather system
 Engine breather blocked for blockages
 Air intake blockage  Check for carbon build up on
 Carbon build up on throttle blade throttle blade
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, high  Check for related mass air flow
resistance DTCs P0102 or P0103
 Blocked catalyst(s)  Refer to the electrical circuit
flow sensor circuit for high
resistance
 Check and install a new mass
air flow sensor as required.
P1315- Persistent Misfire - No sub  Engine control module to ignition  Check for cylinder mis-fire,
00 type information coil primary circuit fault (cylinder ignition and injector DTCs and
misfire detected DTC also flagged) refer to the DTC index
 Fuel injector circuit fault(s)  Refer to the electrical circuit
(injector DTCs also flagged) diagrams and check ignition
 Fuel delivery pressure low coil circuit for short circuit to
 Spark plug failure/fouled/incorrect ground, short circuit to power,
gap open circuit
 Ignition coil failure  Check for fuel system failure
 Cylinder compression low  Check and install a new spark
 Exhaust system blockage plug(s) as required
 Check and install a new ignition
coil as required
 Carry out cylinder compression
tests
 Check exhaust system for
blockage
P1316- Injector Driver Module Codes  Engine control module to ignition  Check for cylinder mis-fire,
00 Detected - No sub type coil primary circuit fault (cylinder ignition and injector DTCs and
information misfire detected DTC also flagged) refer to the DTC index
 Fuel injector circuit fault(s)  Refer to the electrical circuit
(injector DTCs also flagged) diagrams and check ignition
 Fuel delivery pressure low coil circuit for short circuit to
 Spark plug failure/fouled/incorrect ground, short circuit to power,
gap open circuit
 Ignition coil failure  Check for fuel system failure
 Cylinder compression low  Check and install a new spark
 Exhaust system blockage plug(s) as required
 Check and install a new ignition
coil as required
tests
 Check exhaust system for
blockage
P1593- Cruise Control Monitor Fault -  Speed control monitor fault. The  Using the manufacturer
64 Signal plausibility failure engine control module performs a approved diagnostic system
independent check of the cruise check and up-date the car
status configuration file as required.
Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, contact
dealer technical support
P1603- EEPROM Malfunction - No  Corrupt engine control module  Using the manufacturer
00 sub type information software flash approved diagnostic system
through water ingress  Refer to the electrical circuit
control module power supply
P2088- A Camshaft Position Actuator NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
11 Control Circuit Low Bank 1 - diagrams and check intake
Circuit short to ground valve solenoid 1 for short
 Intake valve solenoid 1 short
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
P2089- A Camshaft Position Actuator NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Control Circuit High Bank 1 - diagrams and check intake
Circuit short to battery  Intake valve solenoid 1 short
valve solenoid 1 for short
circuit to power circuit to power
P2090- B Camshaft Position Actuator NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
11 Control Circuit Low Bank 1 - diagrams and check exhaust
 Exhaust valve solenoid 1 short
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
P2091- B Camshaft Position Actuator NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Control Circuit High Bank 1 - diagrams and check exhaust
Circuit short to battery  Exhaust valve solenoid 1 short
P2092- A Camshaft Position Actuator NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
11 Control Circuit Low Bank 2 - diagrams and check intake
 Intake valve solenoid 2 short
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
P2093- A Camshaft Position Actuator NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Control Circuit High Bank 2 - diagrams and check intake
Circuit short to battery  Intake valve solenoid 2 short
P2094- B Camshaft Position Actuator NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
11 Control Circuit Low Bank 2 - diagrams and check exhaust
 Exhaust valve solenoid 2 short
circuit to ground
circuit to ground
P2095- B Camshaft Position Actuator NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Control Circuit High Bank 2 - diagrams and check exhaust
Circuit short to battery  Exhaust valve solenoid 2 short
P2096- Post Catalyst Fuel Trim NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 System Too Lean Bank 1 - diagrams and check post
No sub type information catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor odd,
open circuit
circuit
exhaust manifold
 Check for air leak between the
 Air leak between the two oxygen
two oxygen sensors
sensors
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor odd,
catalyst oxygen sensor odd, as
failure
module/component
P2097- Post Catalyst Fuel Trim NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 System Too Rich Bank 1 - No diagrams and check post
sub type information catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor odd, sensing circuit for short circuit
sensing circuit short circuit to to ground, high resistance,
ground, high resistance, open open circuit
circuit  Check for air leak between
 Air leak between catalyst and catalyst and exhaust manifold
exhaust manifold  Check for air leak between the
 Air leak between the two oxygen two oxygen sensors
sensors  Check and install new post
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor odd, catalyst oxygen sensor odd, as
module/component
P2098- Post Catalyst Fuel Trim NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 System Too Lean Bank 2 - diagrams and check post
No sub type information catalyst oxygen sensor even,
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor even,
open circuit
circuit
exhaust manifold
sensors two oxygen sensors
failure catalyst oxygen sensor even,
module/component
P2099- Post Catalyst Fuel Trim NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 System Too Rich Bank 2 - No diagrams and check post
sub type information catalyst oxygen sensor even,
open circuit
circuit
exhaust manifold
two oxygen sensors
sensors
catalyst oxygen sensor even,
failure
module/component
P2105- Throttle Actuator Control NOTE: - Circuit THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG -  Check for any DTCs relating to
00 System - Forced Engine THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS - engine control module, throttle
Shutdown - No sub type pedal position sensor, or torque
information faults and refer to the DTC
 Engine speed or torque limitation
index
has been activated as a result of
engine control module, throttle
pedal position sensor, or torque
faults
P2118- Throttle Actuator Control NOTE: - Circuit THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG -  Refer to the electrical circuit
19 Motor Current THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS - diagrams and check electronic
Range/Performance - Circuit throttle unit circuit for short
current above threshold circuit to ground, short circuit
 Throttle motor control circuit short
to power, high resistance
power, high resistance
 Engine control module ground
circuit fault control module ground circuit
 Carbon build-up on throttle blade
for faults
 Electronic throttle unit failure
clean of carbon
 Check the system is operating
correctly and the DTC does not
return
module/component
P2119- Throttle Actuator Control NOTE: - Circuit THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG -  Make sure throttle blade is
00 Throttle Body THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS - clean of carbon
Range/Performance - No sub  Refer to the electrical circuit
type information diagrams and check engine
 Carbon build-up on throttle blade
control module ground circuit
 Engine control module ground
for faults
circuit fault
 Check the system is operating
 Electronic throttle unit return
spring faulty
return
 Electronic throttle unit limp home
spring faulty
module/component
P2119- Throttle Actuator Control NOTE: - Circuit THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG -  Ensure throttle blade is free of
29 Throttle Body THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS - any carbon build-up / other
Range/Performance - Signal obstructions
invalid  Check the system is operating
 Stuck / sticking throttle blade
return
module/component
P2119- Throttle Actuator Control NOTE: - Circuit THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG -  Ensure throttle blade is free of
64 Throttle Body THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS - any carbon build-up / other
Range/Performance - Signal obstructions
plausibility failure  Check the system is operating
 Stuck / sticking throttle blade
return
module/component
00 Sensor/Switch D Circuit Low THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 - diagrams and check accelerator
- No sub type information pedal unit, accelerator pedal
position sensor 1 circuit for
 Accelerator pedal position sensor
1 circuit short circuit to ground,
circuit
open circuit
 Check accelerator pedal unit,
VREF circuit for open circuit
1, VREF circuit open circuit
1 failure
procedure using the
diagnostic system
install a new accelerator pedal
unit as required. Refer to the
module/component
00 Sensor/Switch D Circuit High THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 - diagrams and check accelerator
1 circuit short circuit to power
1 failure
procedure using the
diagnostic system
module/component
00 Sensor/Switch E Circuit Low THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_2 - diagrams and check accelerator
2 circuit short circuit to ground,
circuit
open circuit
2 failure
procedure using the
diagnostic system
module/component
00 Sensor/Switch E Circuit High THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_2 - diagrams and check accelerator
2 circuit short circuit to power short circuit to power
2, VREF circuit open circuit VREF circuit for open circuit
2 failure
procedure using the
diagnostic system
module/component
P2135- Throttle/Pedal Position  Throttle pedal position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
00 Sensor/Switch A / B Voltage circuit 1 and 2 short circuit to and check throttle pedal position
Correlation - No sub type ground, short circuit to power, sensor circuit 1 and 2 for short circuit
information open circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit
P2135- Throttle/Pedal Position  Throttle pedal position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
09 Sensor/Switch A / B Voltage circuit 1 and 2 short circuit to and check throttle pedal position
Correlation - Component ground, short circuit to power, sensor circuit 1 and 2 for short circuit
Failures open circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit
P2138- Throttle/Pedal Position  Accelerator pedal position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
64 Sensor/Switch D / E Voltage circuit 1 and 2 short circuit to and check accelerator pedal position
Correlation - No sub type ground, short circuit to power, sensor circuit 1 and 2 for short circuit
information open circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit
P2169- Exhaust Pressure Regulator NOTE: Jaguar - Circuit  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Vent Solenoid Control ACTIVE_EXT_VALVE - diagrams and check active
Circuit / Open - Circuit open exhaust solenoid valve circuit
for open circuit
 Active exhaust solenoid valve
circuit open circuit
11 Vent Solenoid Control Circuit ACTIVE_EXT_VALVE - diagrams and check active
Low - Circuit short to ground exhaust solenoid valve circuit
12 Vent Solenoid Control Circuit ACTIVE_EXT_VALVE - diagrams and check active
high - Circuit short to battery exhaust solenoid valve circuit
P2183- Engine Coolant Temperature NOTE: - Circuit  Refer to the electrical circuit
23 Sensor 2 Circuit COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR_2 - diagrams and check engine
Range/Performance - Signal coolant temperature sensor 2
stuck low  Engine coolant temperature
circuit for high resistance, open
sensor 2 circuit high resistance, circuit
open circuit
sensor 2 failure
module/component
stuck high circuit for short circuit to power
power
sensor 2 failure
module/component
invalid  Engine coolant temperature
circuit for high resistance, open
sensor 2 circuit high resistance,
open circuit, short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power
sensor 2 failure
module/component
16 Sensor 2 Circuit Low - Circuit COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR_2 - diagrams and check engine
voltage below threshold coolant temperature sensor 2
 Engine coolant temperature circuit for high resistance, open
sensor 2 circuit high resistance, circuit, short circuit to ground
open circuit, short circuit to  Check and install a new engine
ground coolant temperature sensor 2
 Engine coolant temperature as required. Refer to the
sensor 2 failure warranty policy and procedures
module/component
P2185- Engine Coolant Temperature NOTE: - Circuit  Clear the DTC and re-test
17 Sensor 2 Circuit High - COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR_2 -  Refer to the electrical circuit
Circuit voltage above diagrams and check engine
threshold coolant temperature sensor 2
 Ignition turned on with an
ambient temperature of below -
40c
power
sensor 2 failure
module/component
P219A- Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio NOTE: Post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd &  Using the manufacturer
00 Imbalance - No sub type Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd approved diagnostic system
information check the engine control
 Other oxygen sensor related DTCs
module for oxygen sensor
 Air leak in the exhaust system
related DTCs and refer to the
between post catalyst oxygen relevant DTC index. Record any
available freeze frame data
sensor-odd and catalyst
 Check for air leaks in the
exhaust system between post
between catalyst and exhaust
catalyst oxygen sensor-odd and
manifold flange
catalyst
between pre catalyst oxygen
exhaust system between
sensor-odd and post catalyst
oxygen sensor-odd
flange
 Air leak around pre catalyst
oxygen sensor-odd
exhaust system between pre
 Air leaks within the intake system
catalyst oxygen sensor-odd and
 Air leak around fuel injector(s)
post catalyst oxygen sensor-
bank 1
odd
 Air leak around spark plug(s)
 Check for air leaks around pre
bank 1
 Low fuel pressure, fuel injector(s)
leak, fuel system leak bank 1
intake system
 camshaft position actuator
 Check for air leak around fuel
sticking
 Airpath blockage between throttle
injector(s) bank 1
 Check for air leak around spark
butterfly and inlet poppet valve
plug(s) bank 1
 Check for low fuel pressure,
failure
 Cylinder head gasket failure
fuel injector(s) leak, fuel
system leak bank 1
 Check for camshaft position
actuator sticking
 Check for airpath blockage
between throttle butterfly and
inlet poppet valve
check. Record the results
 Check and install a post
module/component
clear DTC and retest
P219B- Bank 2 Air-Fuel Ratio NOTE: Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even  Using the manufacturer
00 Imbalance - No sub type & Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even approved diagnostic system
information check the engine control
 Other oxygen sensor related DTCs
module for oxygen sensor
related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index. Record any
between post catalyst oxygen
available freeze frame data
sensor-even and catalyst
exhaust system between post
between catalyst and exhaust
manifold flange
and catalyst
between pre catalyst oxygen
exhaust system between
sensor-even and post catalyst
oxygen sensor-even
flange
 Air leak around pre catalyst
oxygen sensor-even
exhaust system between pre
 Air leaks within the intake system
 Air leak around fuel injector(s)
and post catalyst oxygen
bank 2
sensor-even
 Air leak around spark plug(s)
 Check for air leaks around pre
bank 2
 Low fuel pressure, fuel injector(s)
leak, fuel system leak bank 2
 camshaft position actuator
intake system
 Check for air leak around fuel
sticking
 Airpath blockage between throttle
injector(s) bank 2
 Check for air leak around spark
butterfly and inlet poppet valve
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even
plug(s) bank 2
 Check for low fuel pressure,
failure
 Cylinder head gasket failure
fuel injector(s) leak, fuel
system leak bank 2
 Check for camshaft position
actuator sticking
 Check for airpath blockage
between throttle butterfly and
inlet poppet valve
check. Record the results
 Check and install a post
catalyst oxygen sensor-even as
module/component
clear DTC and retest
P2228- Barometric Pressure Circuit  Barometric pressure sensor failure  Using the manufacturer
00 Low - No sub type (internal engine control module approved diagnostic system
information failure) check datalogger signal,
Voltage (0x035A)
P2229- Barometric Pressure Circuit  Barometric pressure sensor failure  Using the manufacturer
00 Low - No sub type (internal engine control module approved diagnostic system
information failure) check datalogger signal,
Voltage (0x035A)
P2279- Intake Air System Leak - No  Part load breather pipe  Check for related DTCs
00 sub type information disconnected  Check part load breather pipe
 Brake vacuum pipe disconnected for leaks or disconnected
 Excessive intake air leak  Check brake vacuum pipe for
leaks or disconnected
 Check intake air system for
leaks
P2300- Ignition Coil A Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
11 Control Circuit Low - Circuit diagrams and check ignition
short to ground coil 1 circuit for short circuit to
 Ignition coil 1 circuit short circuit
ground
to ground
P2301- Ignition Coil A Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
12 Control Circuit High - Circuit diagrams and check ignition
short to battery  Ignition coil 1 circuit short circuit
coil 1 circuit for short circuit to
to power power
P2303- Ignition Coil B Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
ground
to ground
P2304- Ignition Coil B Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
short to battery coil 2 circuit for short circuit to
power
to power
P2306- Ignition Coil C Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_2A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
ground
to ground
P2307- Ignition Coil C Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_2A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
power
to power
P2309- Ignition Coil D Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_2B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
ground
to ground
P2310- Ignition Coil D Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_2B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
power
to power
P2312- Ignition Coil E Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_3A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
short to ground  Ignition coil 5 circuit short circuit
ground
to ground
P2313- Ignition Coil E Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_3A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
power
to power
P2315- Ignition Coil F Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_3B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
to ground ground
P2316- Ignition Coil F Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_3B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
power
to power
P2318- Ignition Coil G Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_4A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
to ground ground
P2319- Ignition Coil G Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_4A -  Refer to the electrical circuit
power
to power
P2321- Ignition Coil H Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_4B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
to ground ground
P2322- Ignition Coil H Primary NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_4B -  Refer to the electrical circuit
power
to power
P2401- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP -  Check diagnostic module tank
00 Leak Detection Pump Control leakage fuse for failure and
Circuit Low - No sub type  Diagnostic module tank leakage
security in holder
information fuse failure  Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check diagnostic
circuit short circuit to ground, module tank leakage circuit for
open circuit short circuit to ground, open
circuit
failure
module/component
P2402- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Leak Detection Pump Control diagrams and check diagnostic
Circuit High - No sub type module tank leakage circuit for
information short circuit to power
failure
module/component
P2404- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP -  Check and install a new
29 Leak Detection Pump Sense diagnostic module tank leakage
Circuit Range/Performance -  Diagnostic module tank leakage
Signal invalid warranty policy and procedures
failure
module/component
P2404- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP -  Check and install a new
2F Leak Detection Pump Sense diagnostic module tank leakage
Circuit Range/Performance - as required. Refer to the
Signal erratic warranty policy and procedures
failure
module/component
P2405- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP -  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Leak Detection Pump Sense diagrams and check diagnostic
Circuit Low - No sub type module tank leakage circuit for
information circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, high
high resistance, open circuit resistance, open circuit
failure diagnostic module tank leakage
module/component
P2406- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP -  Check for blockage in the
00 Leak Detection Pump Sense Blockage in diagnostic module
Circuit High - No sub type tank leakage ventilation pipe
information  Blockage in diagnostic module  Check and install a new
tank leakage ventilation pipe diagnostic module tank leakage
 Diagnostic module tank leakage as required. Refer to the
circuit, open circuit warranty policy and procedures
module/component
P240A- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit PUMP_HEATER_CONTROL  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Leak Detection Pump Heater - diagrams and check diagnostic
Circuit / Open - No sub type module tank leakage heater
information circuit for open circuit
circuit, open circuit
P240B- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit PUMP_HEATER_CONTROL  Refer to the electrical circuit
Circuit Low - No sub type module tank leakage heater
information  Diagnostic module tank leakage
heater circuit short circuit to ground, high resistance
ground, high resistance
P240C- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit PUMP_HEATER_CONTROL  Refer to the electrical circuit
Circuit High - No sub type module tank leakage heater
information circuit for short circuit to power
heater circuit short circuit to
power
P2450- Evaporative Emission Control NOTE: - Circuit COV -  Check and install a new
00 System Switching Valve diagnostic module tank leakage
Performance/Stuck Open - NOTE: LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER VALVE as required. Refer to the
No sub type information - warranty policy and procedures
 Diagnostic module tank leakage operation, prior to the
failure installation of a new
module/component
P2451- Evaporative Emission Control NOTE: - Circuit COV -  Check and install a new
00 System Switching Valve diagnostic module tank leakage
Performance/Stuck Closed - as required. Refer to the
NOTE: LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER VALVE
No sub type information warranty policy and procedures
-
 Diagnostic module tank leakage operation, prior to the
failure installation of a new
module/component
P250C- Engine Oil Level Sensor NOTE: - Circuit OIL_QUALITY_SENSOR -  Using the manufacturer
23 Circuit Low - Signal stuck low approved diagnostic system
check datalogger signal, Sump
 Oil temperature level sensor
(0x03F3)
failure
temperature level sensor circuit
 Check and install a new oil
temperature level sensor as
module/component
P250D- Engine Oil Level Sensor NOTE: - Circuit OIL_QUALITY_SENSOR -  Using the manufacturer
24 Circuit High - Signal stuck approved diagnostic system
high check datalogger signal, Sump
(0x03F3)
failure
temperature level sensor circuit
 Check and install a new oil
temperature level sensor as
module/component
P2544- Torque Management Request  Inappropriate request from anti-  Check for related DTCs within
64 Input Signal A - Signal lock braking system anti-lock braking system
plausibility failure module and refer to the
relevant DTC index
integrity test
P2544- Torque Management Request  Inappropriate request from anti-  Check for related DTCs within
92 Input Signal A - Performance lock braking system anti-lock braking system
or incorrect operation module and refer to the
relevant DTC index
integrity test
P2600- Coolant Pump A Control NOTE: XF - Circuit  Refer to the electrical circuit
13 Circuit / Open - Circuit open IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL - XK - Circuit diagrams and check coolant
INT_WATERPUMP_RLY - pump A control circuit for open
circuit
 Coolant pump A control circuit
open circuit
P2601- Coolant Pump Control Circuit NOTE: XF - Circuit  Check coolant level and top up
00 Range/Performance - No sub IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL - XK - Circuit as required
type information INT_WATERPUMP_RLY -  Check the cooling system for
blockages or trapped hoses
 Coolant level low
diagrams and check coolant
 Blocked cooling system
pump A control circuit for open
circuit
open circuit
 Check and install a new coolant
 Coolant pump A failure
pump A as required. Refer to
11 Circuit Low - Circuit short to IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL - XK - Circuit diagrams and check coolant
ground INT_WATERPUMP_RLY - pump A control circuit for short
circuit to ground
12 Circuit High - Circuit short to IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL - XK - Circuit diagrams and check coolant
battery INT_WATERPUMP_RLY - pump A control circuit for short
circuit to power
P2610- ECM/PCM Internal Engine Off  Instrument cluster fault  Check for DTCs related to any
00 Timer Performance - No sub  Central junction box fault of the components listed and
type information  CAN network error refer to relevant DTC index
integrity test
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off Timer  Instrument cluster fault  Check for DTCs related to any
84 Performance - Signal below  Central junction box fault of the components listed and
allowable range  Engine coolant temperature refer to relevant DTC index
sensor fault  Refer to the electrical circuit
 Ambient temperature sensor fault diagrams and check engine
 Low battery voltage coolant temperature sensor
 CAN network error circuit for short circuit to
open circuit
diagrams and check ambient
air temperature sensor circuit
circuit
 Check the battery voltage,
repair as required
integrity test
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off Timer  Instrument cluster fault  Check for DTCs related to any
85 Performance - Signal above  Central junction box fault of the components listed and
allowable range  Engine coolant temperature refer to relevant DTC index
 Low battery voltage coolant temperature sensor
 CAN network error circuit for short circuit to
open circuit
circuit
 Check the battery voltage,
repair as required
integrity test
P2610- ECM/PCM Internal Engine Off  Instrument cluster fault  Check for DTCs related to any
87 Timer Performance - Missing  Central junction box fault of the components listed, and
message  Engine coolant temperature refer to relevant DTC index
 CAN network error coolant temperature sensor
open circuit
circuit
integrity test
U0001- High Speed CAN NOTE: - Circuit HS_CAN_NEG -  Refer to the electrical circuit
88 Communication Bus - Bus off HS_CAN_POS - diagrams and check CAN
network for short circuit to
 High speed CAN bus circuit, short
open circuit
circuit to ground
 High speed CAN bus circuit, short
circuit to power
carry out network integrity test
 High speed CAN bus, open circuit
U0101- Lost Communication with  CAN link engine control  Using the manufacturer
00 TCM - No sub type module/transmission control approved diagnostic system,
information module network malfunction check transmission control
 Transmission control module module for DTCs and refer to
failure the relevant DTC index
integrity test
diagrams and check
transmission control module
power and ground circuit for
open circuit
 Check CAN harness to
transmission control module,
repair as necessary
U0103- Lost Communication with  CAN link engine control  Refer to the electrical wiring
00 Gear Shift Control Module A - module/gear shift module network diagrams and check power and
No sub type information malfunction ground connections to the gear
shift module
integrity test
U0104- Lost Communication With  Vehicle configured for speed  Check vehicle has correct
00 Cruise Control Module - No control, but speed control module speed control module installed
sub type information is not installed  Using the manufacturer
 CAN Link engine control approved diagnostic system,
module/speed control module check speed control module,
network malfunction anti-lock braking system
 Speed control module power or module for DTCs and refer to
ground circuit, open circuit the relevant DTC index
integrity test
diagrams and check speed
control module power and
ground circuit for open circuit
 Check CAN harness to speed
control module, repair as
necessary
U0121- Lost Communication With  CAN Link engine control  Using the manufacturer
00 Anti-lock Braking System module/anti-lock braking system approved diagnostic system,
(ABS) Control Module - No module network malfunction check anti-lock braking system
sub type information  Anti-lock braking system module module for DTCs and refer to
power or ground circuit, open the relevant DTC index
circuit  Using the manufacturer
integrity test
diagrams and check anti-lock
braking system module power
and ground circuit for open
circuit
 Check CAN harness to anti-lock
braking system module, repair
as necessary
U0128- Lost Communication With  CAN Link engine control  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Park Brake Control Module - module/electronic parking brake diagrams and check power and
No sub type information signal missing network ground supplies to electronic
malfunction parking brake
integrity test
U0132- Lost Communication with  CAN link/suspension control  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Suspension Control Module A module network malfunction diagrams and check power and
- No sub type information ground supplies to suspension
control module
integrity test
U0151- Lost Communication with  Lost communication with  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Restraints Control Module - restraints control module over diagrams and check power and
No sub type information CAN or hardwired link ground supplies to restraints
control module
integrity test
U0151- Lost Communication with  Lost communication due to  Check restraints control module
87 Restraints Control Module - restraints control module fault for associated DTCs and refer
Missing message to relevant DTC index
diagrams and check power and
ground supplies to restraints
control module
integrity test
U0155- Lost Communication with  CAN link between engine control  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Instrument Panel Cluster module and instrument cluster diagrams and check power and
(IPC) - No sub type fault ground supplies to instrument
information cluster
integrity test
U0167- Lost Communication with  Security challenge response  Refer to the electrical circuit
00 Vehicle Immobilizer Control timeout diagrams and check power and
Module - No sub type  Battery fault ground supplies to the electric
information steering column lock
 Check for related CAN DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC
index
manual
integrity test
U0300- Internal Control Module  Engine control module has  Check and install the correct
00 Software Incompatibility - No incorrect software installed engine control module software
sub type information  The engine control module is in  Check and install the correct
expulsion mode. An incorrect engine control module as
specification engine control required. Refer to the warranty
module has been installed to the policy and procedures manual,
vehicle or determine if any prior
module/component
U0402- Invalid Data Received From  Transmission engine control  Using the manufacturer
00 Transmission Control Module module request corruption approved diagnostic system,
- No sub type information check transmission control
module, for DTCs and refer to
integrity test
diagrams and check high speed
CAN bus circuit for short circuit,
open circuit
U0402- Invalid Data Received from  Transmission engine control  Using the manufacturer
08 TCM - Bus signal / message module request corruption approved diagnostic system,
failures  High speed CAN bus circuit failure, check transmission control
short, open circuit module, for DTCs and refer to
integrity test
open circuit
U0402- Invalid Data Received from  Transmission to engine control  Using the manufacturer
64 TCM - Signal plausibility module request corruption approved diagnostic system,
failure  High speed CAN bus signal check transmission control
corruption module, for DTCs and refer to
integrity test
open circuit
U0402- Invalid Data Received from  Transmission control module  Using the manufacturer
82 TCM - Alive / sequence shaft-speed faults approved diagnostic system,
counter incorrect / not check transmission control
updated module, for DTCs and refer to
U0402- Invalid Data Received from  Transmission control module  Using the manufacturer
83 TCM - Value of signal shaft-speed faults approved diagnostic system,
protection calculation check transmission control
incorrect module, for DTCs and refer to
U0415- Invalid Data Received From  Electronic throttle unit, throttle  Using the manufacturer
00 Anti-lock Braking System position sensor 1 failure approved diagnostic system,
(ABS) Control Module - No  Electronic throttle unit, throttle check for electronic throttle
sub type information position sensor 2 failure unit DTCs repair as necessary
 Electronic throttle unit harness  Refer to the electrical circuit
short, open circuit diagrams and check electronic
unit harness for short circuit,
open circuit
U0415- Invalid Data Received From  Invalid request from anti-lock  Using the manufacturer
64 Anti-lock Braking System braking system approved diagnostic system,
(ABS) Control Module -  Torque up request higher than check anti-lock braking system,
Signal plausibility failure expected from anti-lock braking for DTCs and refer to the
system relevant DTC index
open circuit
U0415- Invalid Data Received From  Torque up request higher than  Using the manufacturer
67 Anti-lock Braking System expected from anti-lock braking approved diagnostic system,
(ABS) Control Module - system check anti-lock braking system,
Signal incorrect after event for DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
open circuit
U0426- Invalid Data Received From  Security code mis-match  Check CAN network between
00 Vehicle Immobilizer Control  This DTC will be logged if the engine control module,
Module - No sub type encrypted data exchange does not instrument cluster and central
information match between engine control junction box
module and the instrument cluster  Refer to the electrical circuit
or central junction box diagrams and check power and
ground circuit to engine control
module and instrument cluster
 Check correct engine control
installed
 Re-synchronise ID by re-
configuring the engine control
as new modules
U0447- Invalid Data Received From  The LIN to high speed CAN  This DTC has been inhibited in
81 Gateway "A" - Invalid serial gateway has informed the engine the engine control module, as
data received control module of a failure the LIN bus flag is set during
normal operation
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
WARNING: Where possible, all road tests should be on well surfaced and dry roads. Always comply with speed
limits and local traffic regulations.
NOTE: This procedure is an overcheck only. If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant system must be
carried out and claimed against.
NOTE: The vehicle must exceed 50mph (80 km/h) during the road test.
1. Connect the diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.

2. Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management
fault codes.
3. Clear the fault codes following the on screen procedure.
4. Disconnect the diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
5. NOTE: Make sure cruise control is not engaged.
Make sure the engine temperature is above 60 ºC (140 ºF).
Carry out a road test and perform the following operations.

1. Accelerate to 55 mph (88 km/h) in 5th gear and cruise
for 2 minutes with the engine speed at or above
1800rpm.
2. Lift off the throttle and allow the vehicle to decelerate
until the engine speed is less than 1000 rpm.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Release brake, allow the vehicle to move with no throttle
for 1 minute.
5. Road test is now complete.
7. NOTE: If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant
system must be carried out and claimed against.
Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management

fault codes.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures

fault codes.
minutes until a temperature of 70ºC (158 ºF) is
achieved.


fault codes.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft Position
(CMP) Sensor LH
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).
Vehicles without supercharger

Installation).
All vehicles
4.
 Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of
foreign material.
Make sure that the sensor tip is clean and free of foreign
material.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft Position
(CMP) Sensor RH
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).

Installation).
All vehicles
4.
 Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
material.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor
Sensor LH
Removal



and Installation).

5.
6.

 Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
If accidentally dropped or knocked install a new sensor.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring harness is

not twisted more than 180 degrees and is not in contact with
either the exhaust or driveshaft.
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the

catalyst monitor sensor tip.
NOTE: If the original sensor is to be installed, apply lubricant

meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A to the thread of the sensor.

2. NOTE: For NAS vehicles only.
If required, carry out a long drive cycle.
Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle

Self-Test (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol,
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor
Sensor RH
Removal



and Installation).
4.
5.
 Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:





Self-Test (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Position
(CKP) Sensor
Removal


and Installation).
dismantling.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Make sure that the component is clean, free of foreign

material and lubricant.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Control Module
(ECM)
Removal

2.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5. Torque: 6 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 7 Nm
8. Torque: 9 Nm
Installation

2. Configure the engine control module (ECM) using the diagnostic
tool.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Removal


Procedures).
4.
 Lift the tang and rotate the engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor counter-
clockwise.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Front Knock Sensor
(KS) LH
Removal



4. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Front Knock Sensor
(KS) RH
Removal



4. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail Pressure
(FRP) Sensor
Removal

Procedures).
3. WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping

fluids.

fluids.
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are

Torque: 32 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Level
Sensor
Removal


and Installation).
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01D, General
Procedures).

fluids.
Torque: 11 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be installed.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor
(HO2S) LH
Special Tool(s)
310-121
Wrench, H02S
Removal



and Installation).
5.
6.
7.


Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

HO2S tip.
Make sure the HO2S wiring harness is not twisted more

than 180 degrees and is not in contact with either the exhaust
or driveshaft.



Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor
(HO2S) RH
Special Tool(s)
310-121
Wrench, H02S
Removal



and Installation).
5.
6.


Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

HO2S tip.

or driveshaft.



Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Manifold Absolute
Pressure and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor
Removal
2. Torque: 10 Nm
3.
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6. Torque: 5 Nm
Installation

If required, carry out a short drive cycle.
Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Mass Air Flow (MAF)
Sensor
Removal


2. Refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
3.
Installation


Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear Knock Sensor
(KS) LH
Removal



4. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear Knock Sensor
(KS) RH
Removal



4. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Variable Valve Timing
(VVT) Oil Control Solenoid LH
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).

Installation).
All vehicles
5.
6. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation


Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Variable Valve Timing
(VVT) Oil Control Solenoid RH
Removal
All vehicles


Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).

Installation).
All vehicles
5. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-
Test (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor(s) retaining bolt 10 7 -
Heated oxygen sensor (H02S) 48 35 -
Catalyst monitor sensor 48 35
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor retaining bolt 10 7 -
Knock sensor(s) (KS) retaining bolt 20 15 -
Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor 32 24 -
Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor 5 - 44
Engine Oil Level Sensor retaining bolts 11 8 -
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid(s) retaining bolts 10 7 -
Engine Control Module (ECM) retaining bolts 7 - 62
Fuse box retaining screws 4 - 35
Engine wiring harness connector bolt 3 - 27
Engine wiring harness retaining bracket bolts 6 - 53
ECM retaining bracket bolts 7 - 62
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Electronic Engine Controls

1 - MAFT (mass air flow and temperature) sensor
2 - CMP (camshaft position) sensors
4 - Knock sensors
5 - CKP (crankshaft position) sensor
6 - CMP sensors
7 - MAFT sensor
8 - ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor (ECT 2)
9 - Electronic throttle

1 - ECT sensor (ECT 1)
2 - Upstream HO2S (heated oxygen sensor)
3 - Downstream HO2S
4 - Downstream HO2S
5 - Upstream HO2S

1 - AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor
INTRODUCTION
The EEC (electronic engine control) system operates the engine to generate the output demanded by the accelerator pedal
and loads imposed by other systems. The EEC system has an ECM (engine control module) that uses a torque-based
strategy to evaluate inputs from sensors and other systems, then produces outputs to engine actuators to produce the
required torque.
The EEC system controls the following:
 Charge air
 Fueling
 Ignition timing
 Valve timing
 Cylinder knock
 Idle speed
 Engine cooling fan
 Evaporative emissions
 On-board diagnostics
 Immobilization system interface
 Speed control.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
The ECM is installed behind the suspension turret on the LH (left-hand) side of the engine compartment, on a bracket
attached to the longitudinal and the wheel arch apron panel.
The ECM has the capability of adapting its fuel and ignition control outputs in response to several sensor inputs.
The ECM receives inputs from the following:
 CKP (crankshaft position) sensor.

 CMP (camshaft position) sensors (4 off).
 ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensors (2 off).
 Knock sensors (4 off).
 MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor.
 MAFT (mass air flow and temperature) sensors (2 off).
 Throttle position sensor.
 Heated oxygen sensors (4 off).
 APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor.
 Ambient air temperature sensor.
 FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor. For additional information, refer to 303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls.
 Stoplamp switch. For additional information, refer to 206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist.
 Speed control cancel/suspend switch. For additional information, refer to 310-03 Speed Control.
 Oil level and temperature sensor. For additional information, refer to 303-01B Engine.
 Fuel LP (low pressure) sensor. For additional information, refer to 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines.
The ECM provides outputs to the following:
 Main relay.
 Heaters elements of the heated oxygen sensors (4 off).
 Fuel injectors (8 off). For additional information, refer to 303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls.
 Ignition coils (8 off). For additional information, refer to 303-07 Engine Ignition.
 VCT (variable camshaft timing) solenoids (4 off). For additional information, refer to 303-01B Engine.
 Camshaft profile switching solenoids (2 off). For additional information, refer to 303-01B Engine.
 Variable intake system tuning valve. For additional information, refer to 303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering.
 EVAP (evaporative emission) canister purge valve. For additional information, refer to 303-13 Evaporative Emissions.
 Engine starter relay. For additional information, refer to 303-06 Starting System.
 Generator. For additional information, refer to 414-02 Generator and Regulator.
 HP fuel pumps. For additional information, refer to 303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls.
 DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage). For additional information, refer to 303-13 Evaporative Emissions.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The CKP sensor is an inductive sensor that allows the ECM to determine the angular position of the crankshaft and the
engine speed.
The CKP sensor is installed in the rear left side of the sump body, in line with the engine drive plate. The sensor is secured
with a single screw and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The head of the CKP sensor faces a reluctor ring pressed into the outer circumference of the engine drive plate. The reluctor
ring has a 60 minus 2 tooth pattern. There are 58 teeth at 6° intervals, with two teeth removed to provide a reference point
with a centerline that is 21° BTDC (before top dead center) on cylinder 1 of bank A.
If the CKP sensor fails, the ECM:
 Uses signals from the CMP sensors to determine the angular position of the crankshaft and the engine speed
 Adopts a limp home mode where engine speed is limited to a maximum of 3000 rev/min.
With a failed CKP sensor, engine starts will require a long crank time while the ECM determines the angular position of the
crankshaft.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSORS
The CMP sensors are MRE (magneto resistive element) sensors that allow the ECM to determine the angular position of the
camshafts. MRE sensors produce a digital output which allows the ECM to detect speeds down to zero.
The four CMP sensors are installed in the front upper timing covers, one for each camshaft.
Each CMP sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with an O-ring. On each CMP sensor, a three pin electrical
connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The head of each CMP sensor faces a sensor wheel attached to the front of the related VCT unit.
If a CMP sensor fails, the ECM:

 Defaults to base mapping for the ignition timing, with no cylinder correction
 Disables the VCT system.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The ECT sensors are NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistors that allow the ECM to monitor the engine coolant
temperature.
There are two identical ECT sensors installed, which are identified as ECT 1 and ECT 2. Each sensor is secured with a twist-
lock and latch mechanism, and is sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface between the
sensor and the engine harness.
ECT 1
ECT 1 is installed in the heater manifold, at the rear of the RH (right-hand) cylinder head. The input from this sensor is used
in calibration tables and by other systems.
ECT 2
ECT 2 is installed in the lower hose connector which attaches to the bottom of the thermostat. The input from this sensor is
used for OBD (on-board diagnostic) 2 diagnostics and, in conjunction with the input from ECT 1, to confirm that the
thermostat is functional.
KNOCK SENSORS
The knock sensors are piezo-ceramic sensors that allow the ECM to employ active knock control and prevent engine damage
from pre-ignition or detonation.
Two knock sensors are installed on the inboard side of each cylinder head, one mid-way between cylinders 1 and 2, and one
mid-way between cylinders 3 and 4. Each knock sensor is secured with a single screw. On each knock sensor, a two pin
electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The ECM compares the signals from the knock sensors with mapped values stored in memory to determine when detonation
occurs on individual cylinders. When detonation is detected, the ECM retards the ignition timing on that cylinder for a
number of engine cycles, then gradually returns it to the original setting.
The ECM cancels closed loop control of the ignition system if the signal received from a knock sensor becomes implausible.
In these circumstances the ECM defaults to base mapping for the ignition timing. This ensures the engine will not become
damaged if low quality fuel is used. The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) will not illuminate, although the driver may notice
that the engine 'pinks' in some driving conditions and displays a drop in performance and smoothness.
The ECM calculates the default value if one sensor fails on each bank of cylinders
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
The MAP sensor allows the ECM to calculate the load on the engine, which is used in the calculation of fuel injection time.
The MAP sensor is installed in the air inlet of the intake manifold. The sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with
an O-ring. A three pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
If the MAP sensor fails, the ECM adopts a default value of 1 bar (14.5 lbf/in.2).
With a failed MAP sensor, the engine will suffer from poor starting, rough running and poor driveability.
MASS AIR FLOW AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The MAFT sensors allow the ECM to measure the mass and the temperature of the air flow into the engine. The mass air flow
is measured with a hot film element in the sensor. The temperature of the air flow is measured with a NTC thermistor in the
sensor. The mass air flow is used to determine the fuel quantity to be injected in order to maintain the stoichiometric air/fuel
mixture required for correct operation of the engine and the catalytic converters.
There are two MAFT sensors installed, one in each air cleaner outlet duct. Each MAFT sensor is secured with two screws and
sealed with an O-ring. On each MAFT sensor, a five pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
If the hot film element signal fails the ECM invokes a software backup strategy to calculate the mass air flow from other
inputs. Closed loop fuel control, closed loop idle speed control and evaporative emissions control are discontinued. The
engine will suffer from poor starting, poor throttle response and, if the failure occurs while driving, the engine speed may dip
before recovering.
If the NTC thermistor signal fails the ECM adopts a default value of 25 °C (77 °F) for the intake air temperature.
www.JagDocs.com
THROTTLE POSITION SENSORS
The TP (throttle position) sensors allow the ECM to determine the position and angular rate of change of the throttle blade.
There are two TP sensors located in the electronic throttle. See below for details of the electronic throttle.
If aTP sensor fails, the ECM:
 Adopts a limp home mode where engine speed is limited to a maximum of approximately 2000 rev/min
 Discontinues evaporative emissions control
 Discontinues closed loop control of engine idle speed.
With a failed TP sensor, the engine will suffer from poor running and throttle response.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSORS

A - Upstream heated oxygen sensor
B - Downstream heated oxygen sensor
The heated oxygen sensors allow the ECM to measure the oxygen content of the exhaust gases, for closed loop control of the
fuel:air mixture and for catalytic converter monitoring.
An upstream heated oxygen sensor is installed in the outlet of each exhaust manifold, which enables independent control of
the fuel:air mixture for each cylinder bank. A downstream heated oxygen sensor is installed in each catalytic converter,
which enables the performance of the catalytic converters to be monitored.
Oxygen sensors need to operate at high temperatures in order to function correctly. To achieve the high temperatures
required, the sensors are fitted with heater elements that are controlled by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the
ECM. The heater elements are operated immediately after each engine start and during low load conditions when the
temperature of the exhaust gases is insufficient to maintain the required sensor temperature. The PWM duty cycle is
carefully controlled to prevent thermal shock to cold sensors. A non-functioning heater delays the sensor’s readiness for
closed loop control and increases emissions.
The upstream heated oxygen sensors produce a constant voltage, with a variable current that is proportional to the lambda
ratio. The downstream heated oxygen sensors produce an output voltage dependant on the ratio of the exhaust gas oxygen
to the ambient oxygen.
The heated oxygen sensors age with mileage, increasing their response time to switch from rich to lean and lean to rich. This
increase in response time influences the ECM closed loop control and leads to progressively increased emissions. Measuring
the period of rich to lean and lean to rich switching monitors the response rate of the upstream sensors.
Diagnosis of electrical faults is continually monitored in both the upstream and downstream sensors. This is achieved by
checking the signal against maximum and minimum threshold, for open and short circuit conditions.
If a heated oxygen sensor fails:
 The ECM defaults to open loop fueling for the related cylinder bank
 The CO (carbon monoxide) and emissions content of the exhaust gases increases
 The exhaust smells of rotten eggs (hydrogen sulphide).
With a failed heated oxygen sensor, the engine will suffer from unstable operation and reduced performance.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
The APP sensor allows the ECM to determine the driver requests for vehicle speed, acceleration and deceleration. The ECM
uses this information to determine the setting of the electronic throttle.
The APP sensor is installed on the pedal box and secured with three screws. A six pin electrical connector provides the
interface with the vehicle harness. The accelerator pedal is connected to a spindle on the RH side of the APP sensor.
The APP sensor is a twin track potentiometer. Each track receives an independent power supply from the ECM and returns an
independent analog signal to the ECM. Both signals contain the same positional information, but the signal from track 2 is
half the voltage of the signal from track 1 at all positions.
If both signals have a fault, the ECM adopts a limp home mode, which limits the engine speed to 2000 rev/min maximum.
The ECM constantly checks the range and plausibility of the two signals and stores a fault code if it detects a fault.
The AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor is a NTC thermistor that allows the ECM to monitor the temperature of the air
around the vehicle. The ECM uses the AAT input for a number of functions, including engine cooling fan control. The ECM
also transmits the ambient temperature on the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus for use by other control
modules.
The AAT sensor is installed in the LH exterior mirror, with the bulb of the sensor positioned over a hole in the bottom of the
mirror casing.
The ECM supplies the sensor with a 5 V reference voltage and a ground, and translates the return signal voltage into a
temperature.
If there is a fault with the AAT sensor, the ECM calculates the AAT from the temperature inputs of the MAFT sensors. If the
AAT sensor and the temperature inputs of the MAFT sensors are all faulty, the ECM adopts a default ambient temperature of
20 °C (68 °F).
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
The ECM uses the electronic throttle to regulate engine torque.
The electronic throttle is installed between the T piece duct, of the intake air distribution and filtering system, and the inlet of
the SC (supercharger). For additional information, refer to 303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering.
The throttle plate is operated by an electric DC (direct current) motor integrated into the throttle body. The ECM uses a PWM
signal to control the DC motor. The ECM compares the APP sensor inputs against an electronic map to determine the
required position of the throttle plate. The ECM and electronic throttle are also required to:
 Monitor requests for cruise control operation

 Automatically operate the electronic throttle for accurate cruise control
 Perform all dynamic stability control engine interventions
 Monitor and carry out maximum engine speed and road speed cut outs
 Provide different engine maps for the ride and handling optimization system.
A software strategy within the ECM calibrates the position of the throttle plate at the beginning of each ignition cycle. When
the ignition is turned on, the ECM performs a self test and calibration routine by fully closing the throttle plate and then
opening it again. This tests the default position springs and allows the ECM to learn the position of the closed hard stop.
Subsequently the ECM keeps the throttle plate a minimum of 0.5 degree from the closed hard stop.
MAIN RELAY
The main relay is used to initiate the power up and power down routines within the ECM. The main relay is installed in the
PDB (power distribution box).
When the ignition is turned on, battery voltage is applied to the ignition sense input. The ECM then starts its power up
routines and energizes the main relay.
When the ignition is turned off, the ECM maintains its powered up state while it conducts the power down routines (up to 20
minutes in extreme cases, when cooling fans are required) and on completion will turn off the main relay.
ECM Adaptions
The ECM has the ability to adapt the input values it uses to control certain outputs. This capability maintains engine
refinement and ensures the engine emissions remain within the legislated limits. The components which have adaptions
associated with them are:
 The APP sensor

 The heated oxygen sensors
 The MAFT sensors
 The CKP sensor
Oxygen and MAFT Sensors
There are several adaptive maps associated with the fueling strategy. Within the fueling strategy the ECM calculates short-
term adaptions and long term adaptions. The ECM will monitor the deterioration of the heated oxygen sensors over a period
of time. It will also monitor the current correction associated with the sensors.
The ECM will store a fault code in circumstances where an adaption is forced to exceed its operating parameters. At the
same time, the ECM will record the engine speed, engine load and intake air temperature.
Crankshaft Position Sensor
The characteristics of the signal supplied by the CKP sensor are learned by the ECM. This enables the ECM to set an adaption
and support the engine misfire detection function. Due to the small variation between different drive plates and different CKP
sensors, the adaption must be reset if either component is renewed, or removed and refitted. It is also necessary to reset
the drive plate adaption if the ECM is renewed or replaced. The ECM supports four drive plate adaptions for the CKP sensor.
Each adaption relates to a specific engine speed range. The engine speed ranges are detailed in the table below:
Adaption Engine Speed, rev/min

1 1800 - 3000
2 3001 - 3800
3 3801 - 4600
4 4601 - 5400
Misfire Detection
Legislation requires that the ECM must be able to detect the presence of an engine misfire. It must be able to detect misfires
at two separate levels. The first level is a misfire that could lead to the legislated emissions limit being exceeded by a given
amount. The second level is a misfire that may cause catalytic converter damage.
The ECM monitors the number of misfire occurrences within two engine speed ranges. If the ECM detects more than a
predetermined number of misfire occurrences within either of these two ranges, over two consecutive journeys, it will record
a fault code and details of the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant temperature. In addition, the ECM monitors the
number of misfire occurrences that happen in a 'window' of 200 engine revolutions. The misfire occurrences are assigned a
weighting according to their likely impact on the catalytic converters. If the number of misfires exceeds a given value, the
ECM stores catalytic converter damage fault codes, along with the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant
temperature.
The signal from the CKP sensor indicates how fast the poles on the drive plate are passing the sensor tip. A sine wave is
generated each time a pole passes the sensor tip. The ECM can detect variations in drive plate speed by monitoring the sine
wave signal supplied by the crankshaft position sensor. By assessing this signal, the ECM can detect the presence of an
engine misfire. At this time, the ECM will assess the amount of variation in the signal received from the CKP sensor and
assign a roughness value to it. This roughness value can be viewed within the real time monitoring feature using Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment. TheECM will evaluate the signal against a number of factors and will decide whether to
record the occurrence or ignore it. The ECM can assign a roughness and misfire signal for each cylinder.
Diagnostics
The ECM stores each fault as a DTC (diagnostic trouble code). The DTC and associated environmental and freeze frame data
can be read using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, which can also read real time data from each sensor, the adaption
values currently being employed and the current fueling, ignition and idle speed settings.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Electronic Engine Controls
For a detailed description of electronic engine controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol,
Visual Inspection
 Engine oil level and condition  Fuses
 Fuel level  Electrical connector(s)
 Fuel contamination/grade/quality  Sensor(s)
 Throttle body  Actuators
 Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) belt  Engine Control Module (ECM)
 Air cleaner condition  Gear Shift Module (GSM)
 Air intake ducting  Transmission Control Module (TCM)
 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) control module
 Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL)
 Controller Area Network (CAN) circuit
 Local Interconnect Network (LIN) circuit(s)
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the customer concern and refer to the Symptom Chart below,
alternatively, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Engine non-start
Engine does not crank  Security  Check that the security system is
system /Immobilizer disarmed
engaged  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Engine in shut-down mode this section for ECM relay tests
 ECM relay  Ensure the battery is in fully charged
 Battery and serviceable condition
 Starting system  For starting system tests refer to the
 Engine seized relevant section of the workshop manual
 For engine system tests refer to the
Engine cranks, but does not fire  Engine breather system  Ensure the engine breather system is
 Ignition system installed
 Fuel system  For ignition system tests refer to the
tests
Engine cranks and fires, but will  Evaporative emissions  For purge valve tests refer to the
not start purge valve relevant section of the workshop manual
 Fuel pump  For fuel system tests refer to the
 Spark plugs relevant section of the workshop manual
 Ignition coil failure(s)  For ignition system tests refer to the
Difficult to start
Difficult cold start  Check engine coolant  Check the engine coolant level and
level/anti-freeze content condition. Refer to the relevant sections
 Battery of the workshop manual
 Electronic engine controls  Ensure the battery is in a fully charged
 Exhaust Gas Recirculation and serviceable condition. Refer to the
(EGR) valve stuck open battery care manual and the relevant
 Fuel pump sections of the workshop manual
 Evaporative emissions  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
purge valve this section for electronic engine control
tests
and associated hoses and connections
connections
Difficult hot start  Injector leak  Refer to the relevant section of the
 Electronic engine controls workshop manual, carry out injector
 Evaporative emissions leak tests, install new injectors as
purge valve necessary
 Exhaust Gas Recirculation tests
(EGR) valve stuck open  Refer to the relevant section of the
connections
Difficult to start after hot soak  Injector leak  Refer to the relevant section of the
(vehicle standing, engine off, after  Electronic engine controls workshop manual, carry out injector
engine has reached operating  Evaporative emissions leak tests, install new injectors as
temperature) purge valve necessary
 Exhaust Gas Recirculation tests
(EGR) valve stuck open  Refer to the relevant section of the
connections.
Engine cranks too fast/slow  Compressions high/low  Refer to the relevant section of the
 Battery workshop manual, carry out
 Starting system compression tests.
 Ensure the battery is in a fully charged
and serviceable condition. Refer to the
battery care manual and the relevant
sections of the workshop manual.
 For starting system tests refer to the
Engine stalls
Engine stalls soon after start  Breather system  Ensure the engine breather system is
 ECM relay installed
 Ignition system this section for ECM relay tests
 Air intake system restricted  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Air leakage this section for electronic engine control
 Fuel lines tests
 Check for blockage in air cleaner
element and air intake system
Engine stalls on overrun  ECM relay  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Throttle Position (TP) this section for ECM relay and Throttle
sensors Position (TP) sensor tests
Engine stalls at steady speed  ECM relay  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 crankshaft position sensor this section for ECM relay, crankshaft
 TP sensors position sensor, and TP sensor tests
Engine stalls with speed control  ECM relay  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
enabled this section for ECM relay tests
Engine stalls when manoeuvring  ECM relay  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 TP sensors this section for ECM relay, and TP sensor
 Additional engine loads tests
(PAS, air conditioning, etc)  Check for excessive loads being placed
 Transmission malfunction on the engine from PAS, air conditioning
 CAN malfunction systems etc.
transmission system tests
network tests
Poor driveability
Engine hesitates/poor acceleration  Fuel pressure, fuel pump,  For fuel system tests refer to the
fuel lines relevant section of the workshop manual
 Injector leak  Carry out fuel injector leak tests, install
 Air leakage new injectors as necessary
 Exhaust Gas Recirculation  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
(EGR) valve stuck this section for electronic engine control
 Transmission malfunction tests
 Restricted pedal travel  For ignition system tests refer to the
(carpet, etc) relevant section of the workshop manual
 Ensure accelerator pedal is free from
restriction
Engine backfires  Fuel pump, fuel lines  For fuel system tests refer to the
 Air leakage relevant section of the workshop manual
 Sticking Variable Camshaft  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
Timing (VCT) actuators this section for electronic engine control
tests
this section for Variable Camshaft
Timing (VCT) system tests
Engine surges  Fuel pump, fuel lines  For fuel system tests refer to the
 Ignition system  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
tests
Engine detonates/knocks  Electronic engine controls  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
 Fuel pump, fuel lines, fuel this section for electronic engine control
quality tests
 Air leakage  For fuel system tests refer to the
 Sticking VCT hub relevant section of the workshop manual
 Check for leakage from air intake
system
No throttle response  Electronic engine controls  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
tests
Speed control inhibited or disabled  Default mode enabled  Check message center for default
 Speed control, brake switch message, read DTCs and refer to DTC
 Electronic engine controls Index
 CAN fault  Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual for speed control, and
brake switch tests
tests
network tests
Poor throttle response  Breather system  Ensure engine breather system is free
disconnected/restricted from restriction and is correctly installed
 Traction control event tests
 Air leakage  Refer to the workshop manual or
Engine defaults, warning light and  Electronic engine controls  Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
messages. Refer to the owner this section for electronic engine control
handbook tests
DTC Index
WARNING: Fuel injector voltage will reach 65Volts during operation and have a high current requirement.
NOTE: If the module/component is suspect and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the

B10A2- Crash Input - No  Loss of communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
31 signal between Restraints Control Restraints Control Module (RCM) Pulse Width
Module (RCM) and Engine Modulated (PWM) SRS signal line circuit, hard
Control Module (ECM) wired connection between Engine Control Module
(ECM) and Restraints Control Module (RCM) for
short to ground, short to power, open circuit.
Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
system to confirm repair.
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch -  The Engine Control Module Clear the DTC and press all the steering wheel
81 invalid serial data (ECM) has received an switches, re-check for DTCs. Refer to the electrical
received invalid command from the circuit diagrams and check the Cruise control
steering wheel switch pack switch circuit for open circuit, short to power,
short to ground, disconnected. Check and install a
new Steering Wheel Module (SWM) as required.
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch -  Cruise Buttons alive counter Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
82 alive / sequence is not incrementing. Which the Cruise control switch circuit for open circuit,
counter incorrect / not suggests that the LIN bus is short to power, short to ground, disconnected.
updated faulty Check and install a new Steering Wheel Module
 Steering Wheel Module (SWM) as required.
(SWM) is not connected
 Steering Wheel Module
(SWM) failure
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch -  Cruise buttons checksum Check and install new cruise switches as required.
83 value of signal incorrect, incorrect cruise
protection calculation switches fitted to vehicle
incorrect
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch -  Cruise control switch circuit, Check for related DTCs in other Central Junction
96 component internal open circuit, short to power, Box (CJB)s. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
failure short to ground, and check the Cruise control switch circuit for open
disconnected circuit, short to power, short to ground,
 Cruise Control Switch failure disconnected. Check and install a new cruise
 Steering Wheel Module control switch as required. Check and install a new
(SWM) failure Steering Wheel Module (SWM) as required.
B10FF- Ignition Control -  Spark plug(s) fault Refer to repair manual and check spark plug(s) for
68 Event information  Wiring harness fault condition and security. Replace any defective
 Ignition coil(s) fault components as required. Refer to electrical wiring
diagrams and check ignition coil circuit for
intermittent open circuit, short to power, short to
ground. Check and install a new coil(s) as
required.
B11DB- Battery Monitoring  Charging system fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check
01 Module - General  Battery monitoring signal charging system for faults. Perform any repairs
Electrical Failure line circuit fault required. Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams
 Vehicle battery fault and check the Battery Monitoring System (BMS)
module circuit for open circuit, short to ground,
short to power. Refer to the battery care manual
and check and install a new battery.
B11DB- Battery Monitoring  Battery signal line circuit Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
87 Module - missing fault the Battery Monitoring System (BMS) module
message circuit for open circuit, short to ground, short to
power.
B1206- Crash Occurred -  Engine control Module (ECM) Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
68 event information has detected the vehicle has the Engine Control Module (ECM) to Restraints
crashed - event information Control Module (RCM) circuit for short to ground,
DTC only short to power, open circuit. Repair circuit as
required, clear DTC and retest system to confirm
repair.
C0031- Left Front Wheel  Invalid data received from Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for
00 Speed Sensor - No sub Anti-lock Braking System related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
type information (ABS) module - left front
wheel speed signal fault
C0034- Right Front Wheel  Invalid data received from Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for
type information (ABS) module - right front
C0037- Left Rear Wheel Speed  Invalid data received from Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for
00 Sensor - No sub type Anti-lock Braking System related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
information (ABS) module - left rear
C003A- Right Rear Wheel  Invalid data received from Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for
type information (ABS) module - right rear
P0010- Intake (A) Camshaft  Intake (A) camshaft position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Position Actuator actuator (Bank 1) open Intake (A) camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
(Bank 1) - circuit open circuit open circuit for open circuit. Refer to the electrical
 Engine Control Module circuit diagrams and check Engine Control Module
(ECM) interface harness (ECM) interface harness for open circuit.
open circuit
P0013- Exhaust (B) Camshaft  Exhaust (B) camshaft Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Position Actuator position actuator (Bank 1) Exhaust (B) camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
(Bank 1) - circuit open open circuit open circuit for open circuit. Refer to the electrical
 Engine Control Module circuit diagrams and check Engine Control Module
(ECM) interface harness (ECM) interface harness for open circuit.
open circuit
P0015- Exhaust (B) Camshaft  Exhaust (B) camshaft Check for related DTC code P0365-00. Refer to the
00 Position Timing - Over- position actuator (Bank 1) electrical circuit diagrams and check Exhaust (B)
Retarded (Bank 1) - open circuit, short to camshaft position actuator (Bank 1) for open
No sub type ground, short to power circuit, short to ground, short to power.
information
P0016- Crankshaft Position -  The relative positions of the Check engine timing. Check camshaft sensor
00 Camshaft Position crankshaft position sensor timing plate is installed correctly. Check timing
Correlation - Bank 1 and cam timing plate teeth chain is installed correctly.
Sensor A - No sub type are not correct
information  Engine timing incorrect
 Timing chain installed
incorrectly
P0017- Crankshaft Position -  The relative positions of the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Camshaft Position crankshaft position sensor exhaust (B) camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
Correlation - Bank 1 and camshaft timing plate for open circuit for open circuit, short to ground,
Sensor B - No sub type teeth are not correct short to power. Check for related DTC code P0365-
information  Engine timing incorrect 00. Check engine timing. Check camshaft sensor
 Timing chain installed timing plate is installed correctly. Check timing
incorrectly chain is installed correctly.
Correlation - Bank 2 and camshaft timing plate chain is installed correctly.
Sensor A - No sub type teeth are not correct
incorrectly
Correlation - Bank 2 and camshaft timing plate chain is installed correctly.
Sensor B - No sub type teeth are not correct
incorrectly
P001A- Intake (A) Cam Profile  Camshaft profile switching Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Control Circuit (Bank solenoid bank 1 open circuit camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 1 for
1) - circuit open open circuit.
P001B- Intake (A) Cam Profile  Camshaft profile switching Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Control Circuit Low solenoid bank 1 circuit short camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 1 circuit
(Bank 1) - circuit short to ground for short to ground
to ground
P001C- Intake (A) Cam Profile  Camshaft profile switching Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 Control Circuit High solenoid bank 1 circuit short camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 1 circuit
(Bank 1) - circuit short to power for short to power.
to battery
P001D- Intake (A) Cam Profile  Camshaft profile switching Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Control Circuit (Bank solenoid bank 2 open circuit camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 2 for
2) - circuit open open circuit.
P001E- Intake (A) Cam Profile  Camshaft profile switching Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Control Circuit Low solenoid bank 2 circuit short camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 2 circuit
(Bank 2) - circuit short to ground for short to ground
to ground
P001F- Intake (A) Cam Profile  Camshaft profile switching Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 Control Circuit High solenoid bank 2 circuit short camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 2 circuit
(Bank 2) - circuit short to power for short to power.
to battery
P0020- Intake (A) Camshaft  Intake valve solenoid 2 open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Position Actuator circuit intake valve solenoid 2 for open circuit.
(Bank 2) - circuit open
P0023- Exhaust (B) Camshaft  Exhaust (B) Camshaft Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Position Actuator Position actuator (Bank 2) exhaust (B) camshaft position actuator (Bank 2)
(Bank 2) - circuit open circuit, open circuit circuit for open circuit
P0026- Intake Valve Control  Intake valve solenoid 1 Check operation of intake valve solenoid 1. Check
72 Solenoid Circuit angle less than target and install a new intake valve solenoid 1 as
Range/Performance  Intake valve solenoid 1 slow required.
(Bank 1) - actuator or not operating
stuck open
77 Solenoid Circuit angle greater than target and install a new intake valve solenoid 1 as
Range/Performance  Intake valve solenoid 1 not required.
(Bank 1) - returning to target in time
commanded position  Intake valve solenoid 1
not reachable stuck advanced
P0027- Exhaust Valve Control  Exhaust valve solenoid 1 Check operation of exhaust valve solenoid 1.
72 Solenoid Circuit angle less than target Check and install a new exhaust valve solenoid 1
Range/Performance  Exhaust valve solenoid 1 as required.
(Bank 1) - actuator slow or not operating
stuck open
77 Solenoid Circuit angle greater than target Check and install a new exhaust valve solenoid 1
Range/Performance  Exhaust valve solenoid 1 not as required.
commanded position  Exhaust valve solenoid 1
72 Solenoid Circuit angle less than target and install a new intake valve solenoid 2 as
Range/Performance  Intake valve solenoid 2 slow required.
(Bank 2) - actuator or not operating
stuck open
77 Solenoid Circuit angle greater than target and install a new intake valve solenoid 2 as
Range/Performance  Intake valve solenoid 2 not required.
commanded position  Intake valve solenoid 2
72 Solenoid Circuit angle less than target Check and install a new exhaust valve solenoid 2
Range/Performance  Exhaust valve solenoid 2 as required.
(Bank 2) - actuator slow or not operating
stuck open
77 Solenoid Circuit angle greater than target Check and install a new exhaust valve solenoid 2
Range/Performance  Exhaust valve solenoid 2 not as required.
commanded position  Exhaust valve solenoid 2
P0031- HO2S Heater Control  Pre catalyst oxygen sensor- Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
11 Circuit Low (Bank 1, odd heater control circuit system check datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
Sensor 1) - circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) circuit (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1
short to ground short to ground (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd heater
control circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) circuit for short
to ground.
Sensor 1) - circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) circuit, (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1
open open circuit (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
control circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) circuit for open
circuit.
12 Circuit High (Bank 1, odd heater control circuit system check datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
short to battery short to power (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
to power.
P0036- HO2S Heater Control  Catalyst oxygen sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor heater circuit control fuse system check datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
2) - no sub type failure (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 2
information  Post catalyst oxygen sensor- (0x03A2). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
odd heater control circuit and check post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd sensor
short to ground, power, fuse for open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit diagrams and check post catalyst oxygen sensor-
 Catalyst oxygen sensor odd sensor circuit for short to ground, power, open
heater circuit control relay circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short to ground, check catalyst oxygen sensor heater circuit control
power, open circuit relay circuit for short to ground, power, open
 Catalyst oxygen sensor circuit. Check and install a new catalyst oxygen
heater circuit control relay sensor heater control relay, as required. Check
failure and install a new post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor- as required.
odd failure
P003C- A Camshaft Profile  Oil supply blockage to Check for the presence of oil at the camshaft
00 Control camshaft profile switching profile switching solenoid. Check for catalyst
Performance /Stuck solenoid oxygen sensor related DTCs. Refer to the electrical
Off (Bank 1) - no sub  Catalyst oxygen sensor circuit diagrams and check camshaft profile
type information failure, giving false flag switching solenoid bank 1 circuit for short to
 Camshaft profile switching power, short to ground, open circuit. Check and
solenoid bank 1 circuit fault install a new operation camshaft profile switching
 Camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 1 as required. Clear DTC and road
solenoid bank 1 fault test the vehicle. If fault remains contact Dealer
Technical Support before carrying out any further
work.
P003E- A Camshaft Profile  Oil supply blockage to Check for the presence of oil at the camshaft
00 Control Performance/ camshaft profile switching profile switching solenoid. Check for catalyst
Stuck Off (Bank 2) - solenoid oxygen sensor related DTCs. Refer to the electrical
no sub type  Catalyst oxygen sensor circuit diagrams and check camshaft profile
information failure, giving false flag switching solenoid bank 2 circuit for short to
 Camshaft profile switching power, short to ground, open circuit. Check and
solenoid bank 2 circuit fault install a new operation camshaft profile switching
 Camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 2 as required. Clear DTC and road
solenoid bank 2fault test the vehicle. If fault remains contact Dealer
Technical Support before carrying out any further
work.
short to ground short to ground (0x03A4). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
to ground.
Sensor 1) - circuit (Bank 2, Sensor 1) circuit, (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 2 Sensor 1
open open circuit (0x03A4). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
control circuit (Bank 2, Sensor 1) circuit for open
circuit.
12 Circuit High (Bank 2, odd heater control circuit system check datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
short to battery short to power (0x03A4). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
to power.
P0054- HO2S Heater  Catalyst oxygen sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Resistance (Bank 1, heater circuit control fuse system check datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
Sensor 2) - no sub failure (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1
type information  Post catalyst oxygen sensor- (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
open circuit, high resistance diagrams and check post catalyst oxygen sensor-
heater circuit control relay circuit, high resistance. Refer to the electrical
circuit short to ground, circuit diagrams and check catalyst oxygen sensor
power, open circuit heater circuit control relay circuit for short to
 Catalyst oxygen sensor ground, power, open circuit. Check and install a
heater circuit control relay new catalyst oxygen sensor heater control relay,
failure as required. Check and install a new post catalyst
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor- oxygen sensor-odd as required.
odd failure
P0056- HO2S Heater Control  Post catalyst oxygen sensor- Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Circuit (Bank 2, Sensor even heater control circuit system check datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
2) - no sub type short to ground, power, (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 2 Sensor 2
information open circuit (0x03A5). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
 Catalyst oxygen sensor and check post catalyst oxygen sensor-even
heater circuit control relay sensor circuit for short to ground, power, open
circuit short to ground, circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
power, open circuit check catalyst oxygen sensor heater circuit control
 Catalyst oxygen sensor relay circuit for short to ground, power, open
heater circuit control relay circuit. Check and install a new catalyst oxygen
failure sensor heater control relay, as required. Check
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor- and install a new post catalyst oxygen sensor-
even failure even, as required.
P0060- HO2S Heater  Catalyst oxygen sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Resistance (Bank 2, heater circuit control fuse system check datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
Sensor 2) - no sub failure (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 2 Sensor 2
type information  Post catalyst oxygen sensor- (0x03A5). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
open circuit, high resistance diagrams and check post catalyst oxygen sensor-
heater circuit control relay circuit, high resistance. Refer to the electrical
circuit short to ground, circuit diagrams and check catalyst oxygen sensor
power, open circuit heater circuit control relay circuit for short to
 Catalyst oxygen sensor ground, power, open circuit. Check and install a
heater circuit control relay new catalyst oxygen sensor heater control relay,
failure as required. Check and install a new post catalyst
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor- oxygen sensor-odd as required.
odd failure
P0069- MAP - Barometric  Manifold Absolute Pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
29 Pressure Correlation - (MAP) sensor failure system check datalogger signal, Barometric
signal invalid  Engine Control Module Pressure Sensor Voltage (0x035A). Check for
(ECM) internal fault related Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for
short to ground, short to power, open circuit.
Check and install new manifold absolute pressure
sensor as required. Check and install a new Engine
Control Module (ECM) as required. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
P0071- Ambient Air  Ambient air temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
21 Temperature Sensor sensor circuit short to system check datalogger signal, Ambient Air
Range/Performance - ground, power, open circuit Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x03BA). Refer to
signal amplitude <  Temperature and manifold the electrical circuit diagrams and check ambient
minimum absolute pressure sensor air temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
circuit short to ground, power, open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
power, open circuit diagrams and check temperature and manifold
 Ambient air temperature absolute pressure sensor circuit for short to
sensor failure ground, power, open circuit. Check and install a
 Temperature and manifold new ambient air temperature sensor as required.
absolute pressure sensor Check and install a new temperature and manifold
failure absolute pressure sensor as required.
Range/Performance - ground, power, open circuit Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x03BA). Refer to
Signal amplitude >  Temperature and manifold the electrical circuit diagrams and check ambient
maximum absolute pressure sensor air temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
circuit short to ground, power, open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
power, open circuit diagrams and check temperature and manifold
 Ambient air temperature absolute pressure sensor circuit for short to
sensor failure ground, power, open circuit. Check and install a
 Temperature and manifold new ambient air temperature sensor as required.
absolute pressure sensor Check and install a new temperature and manifold
failure absolute pressure sensor as required.
Circuit Low - no sub ground, open circuit, high Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x03BA). Refer to
type information resistance the electrical circuit diagrams and check ambient
 Ambient air temperature air temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
sensor failure open circuit, high resistance. Check and install a
new ambient air temperature sensor as required.
00 Temperature Sensor sensor ground circuit high system check datalogger signals Ambient Air
Circuit High - no sub resistance, open circuit Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x03BA). Refer to
type information  Ambient air temperature the electrical circuit diagrams and check ambient
sensor signal circuit short to air temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
power high resistance, short to power. Check connector
 Ambient air temperature terminals for corrosion or damage. Check and
sensor failure install a new ambient air temperature sensor as
required.
P007B- Charge Air Cooler  Charge air cooler Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
23 Temperature Sensor temperature sensor circuit system check datalogger signal, Charge Air
Circuit poor / intermittent Temperature Voltage (0x03EE). Refer to the
Range/Performance connection electrical circuit diagrams and check charge air
(Bank 1) - signal stuck  Charge air cooler cooler temperature sensor circuit for poor,
low temperature sensor failure intermittent connection, check and install a new
charge air cooler temperature sensor as required.
Circuit short to ground, open circuit Temperature Voltage (0x03EE). Refer to the
Range/Performance  Charge air cooler electrical circuit diagrams and check charge air
(Bank 1) - signal stuck temperature sensor failure cooler temperature sensor circuit for short to
high ground, open circuit. Check and install a new
charge air cooler temperature sensor as required.
Circuit short to ground, open Temperature Voltage (0x03EE). Refer to the
Range/Performance circuit, short to power electrical circuit diagrams and check charge air
(Bank 1) - signal  Charge air cooler cooler temperature sensor circuit for short to
invalid temperature sensor failure ground, open circuit, short to power. Check and
install a new charge air cooler temperature sensor
as required.
P0087- Fuel Rail/System  Fuel rail pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Pressure - Too Low - circuit short to ground, open system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
no sub type circuit, high resistance Sensor - High Range Sensor Voltage (0x0377).
information  Fuel rail pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to ground,
 Fuel lines leaking or open circuit, high resistance. Check for fuel pump
restricted related DTCs. Check fuel lines for leakage or
 Fuel pump failure restriction. Check and install new fuel rail pressure
sensor as required. Check and install a new fuel
pump as required.
P0088- Fuel Rail/System  Fuel rail pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Pressure - Too High - circuit short to each other, system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
no sub type high resistance, short to Sensor - High Range Sensor Voltage (0x0377).
information power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
 Fuel rail pressure sensor fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to each
failure other, high resistance, short to power. Check and
install new fuel rail pressure sensor as required.
P008A- Low Pressure Fuel  Low pressure fuel sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 System Pressure - Too circuit failure, short to system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
Low - no sub type ground, power, open circuit - Low Range Sensor Voltage (0x0376). Refer to
information  Fuel Pump Driver Module the electrical circuit diagrams and check low
(FPDM) circuit short to pressure fuel sensor circuit for short to ground,
ground, power, open circuit power, open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
 Low pressure fuel diagrams and check Fuel Pump Driver Module
 Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) circuit short to ground, power, open
(FPDM) failure circuit. Check and install a new low pressure fuel
sensor as required. Check and install a new Fuel
Pump Driver Module (FPDM) as required.
P008B- Low Pressure Fuel  Low pressure fuel sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 System Pressure - Too circuit short to ground, system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
High - No sub type power, open circuit - Low Range Sensor Voltage (0x0376). Refer to
information  Fuel Pump Driver Module the electrical circuit diagrams and check low
(FPDM) circuit short to pressure fuel sensor circuit for short to ground,
ground, power, open circuit power, open circuit. Check for blockage or
 Blockage or restriction in low restriction in low pressure fuel line. Refer to the
pressure fuel line electrical circuit diagrams and check Fuel Pump
 Low pressure fuel sensor Driver Module (FPDM) circuit short to ground,
failure power, open circuit. Check and install a new low
 Fuel Pump Driver Module pressure fuel sensor as required. Check and install
(FPDM) failure a new Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) as
required.
P00AB- Intake Air  Intake air temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
23 Temperature Sensor 1 sensor bank 2 circuit short system check datalogger signal, Intake Air
Circuit to ground, open circuit Temperature Sensor Bank 2 (0x0312). Refer to
Range/Performance  Intake air temperature the electrical circuit diagrams and check intake air
(Bank 2) - signal stuck sensor bank 2 failure temperature sensor bank 2 circuit for short to
low ground, open circuit. Check and install a new
intake air temperature sensor bank 2 as required.
Circuit to power Temperature Sensor Bank 2 (0x0312). Refer to
Range/Performance  Intake air temperature the electrical circuit diagrams and check intake air
(Bank 2) - signal stuck sensor bank 2 failure temperature sensor bank 2 circuit for short to
high power. Check and install a new intake air
temperature sensor bank 2 as required.
Circuit to ground, open circuit, Temperature Sensor Bank 2 (0x0312). Refer to
Range/Performance short to power the electrical circuit diagrams and check intake air
(Bank 2) - signal  Intake air temperature temperature sensor bank 2 circuit for open circuit,
invalid sensor bank 2 failure short to ground, short to power. Check and install
a new intake air temperature sensor bank 2 as
required.
P00AC- Intake Air  Intake air temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Temperature Sensor 1 sensor bank 2 sensing circuit system check datalogger signal, Intake Air
Circuit Low (Bank 2) - short to ground, high Temperature Sensor Bank 2 (0x0312). Refer to
no sub type resistance, disconnected the electrical circuit diagrams and check intake air
information  Intake air temperature temperature sensor bank 2 circuit for short to
sensor bank 2 failure ground, open circuit, high resistance, disconnected
connector. Check and install a new intake air
P00AD- Intake Air  Intake air temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Temperature Sensor 1 sensor bank 2 sensing circuit system check datalogger signal, Intake Air
Circuit High (Bank 2) - short ground, short to Temperature Sensor Bank 2 (0x0312). Refer to
No sub type power, open circuit, high the electrical circuit diagrams and check intake air
information resistance temperature sensor bank 2 circuit for short
 Intake air temperature ground, short to power, open circuit, high
sensor bank 2 failure resistance. Check for backed out or damaged
connector pins. Check and install a new intake air
P00C6- Fuel Rail Pressure Too  No fuel at pump Check fuel supply to both pumps (if engine runs
00 Low - Engine Cranking  Injector stuck open then supply is not suspect). If engine does not run
- no sub type  Fuel pressure sensor signal perform fuel prime routine. Use fuel pump
information stuck diagnostic routine to determine if one pump has
 Fuel pump failure failed, if so replace pump. If a fuel injector is stuck
open the exhaust will smell of fuel and fuelling
adaptions may indicate rich shift. perform checks
for as DTC P0191-00. Check and install a new fuel
pump as required.
P0101- Mass or Volume Air  Intake air distribution and  Using the manufacturer approved smoke
00 Flow A Circuit filtering components tester check intake air distribution and
Range/Performance - incorrectly installed filtering components for leakage and
No sub type  Leakage from intake air correct installation
information system  Check air cleaner element is free from
 Blocked air cleaner element restriction and in serviceable condition
(s)  Ensure the engine breather system is
 Blocked engine breather correctly installed and in serviceable
 Blockage in intake air condition
system  Check for mass air flow sensor seal
 Mass air flow sensor seal integrity and correct installation
failure  Inspect connectors for signs of water
 Connector is disconnected, ingress, and pins for damage and/or
connector terminal is backed corrosion
out, connector terminal  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
corrosion check mass air flow sensor circuit for short
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
short circuit to ground, short open circuit, high resistance
circuit to power, open  Make sure throttle blade is clean of carbon
circuit, high resistance  Check for blocked injectors
 Carbon build-up on throttle  Check for blocked catalysts
blade  Clear the DTC and retest
 Blocked injectors  Refer to the relevant section of workshop
 Blocked catalysts manual. Reset fuelling adaptions and carry
 Mass air flow sensor failure out Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long
Drive Cycle Self-Test
 Check and install new mass air flow sensor
as required
P0102- Mass or Volume Air  Fuse failure  Check for fuse failure
00 Flow A Circuit Low -  Connector is disconnected,  Inspect connectors for signs of water
No sub type connector terminal is backed ingress, and pins for damage and/or
information out, connector terminal corrosion
corrosion  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, check mass air flow sensor circuit for short
short circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit to power, open open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high resistance  Clear the DTC and retest
 Mass air flow sensor failure  Refer to the relevant section of workshop
manual. Reset fuelling adaptions and carry
out Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long
as required
P0103- Mass or Volume Air  Connector is disconnected,  Using the manufacturer approved
00 Flow A Circuit High - connector terminal is backed diagnostic system check datalogger signal,
No sub type out, connector terminal Mass Air Flow Sensor, Bank 1 (0x0314)
information corrosion  Inspect connectors for signs of water
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, ingress, and pins for damage and/or
short circuit to ground, short corrosion
circuit to power, open  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit, high resistance check mass air flow sensor circuit for short
 Blocked air cleaner element circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
(s) open circuit, high resistance
 Blockage in air intake  Check air cleaner element is free from
system restriction and in serviceable condition
 Mass air flow sensor failure  Check air intake system for blockage
 Refer to the relevant section of workshop
as required
P010B- Mass or Volume Air  Intake air distribution and  Using the manufacturer approved smoke
00 Flow B Circuit filtering components tester check intake air distribution and
Range/Performance - incorrectly installed filtering components for leakage and
No sub type  Leakage from intake air correct installation
information system  Check air cleaner element is free from
as required
P010C- Mass or Volume Air  Fuse failure  Check for fuse failure
00 Flow B Circuit Low -  Connector is disconnected,  Inspect connectors for signs of water
No sub type connector terminal is backed ingress, and pins for damage and/or
information out, connector terminal corrosion
corrosion  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, check mass air flow sensor circuit for short
short circuit to ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit to power, open open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high resistance  Clear the DTC and retest
 Mass air flow sensor failure  Refer to the relevant section of workshop
as required
P010D- Mass or Volume Air  Connector is disconnected,  Using the manufacturer approved
00 Flow B Circuit High - connector terminal is backed diagnostic system check datalogger signal,
No sub type out, connector terminal Mass Air Flow Sensor 2 Voltage (0x0503)
information corrosion  Inspect connectors for signs of water
 Mass air flow sensor circuit, ingress, and pins for damage and/or
short circuit to ground, short corrosion
circuit to power, open  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit, high resistance check mass air flow sensor circuit for short
 Blocked air cleaner element circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
(s) open circuit, high resistance
 Blockage in air intake  Check air cleaner element is free from
system restriction and in serviceable condition
 Mass air flow sensor failure  Check air intake system for blockage
 Refer to the relevant section of workshop
as required
P010F- Mass or Volume Air  Intake air distribution and  Using the manufacturer approved smoke
00 Flow Sensor A/B filtering components tester check intake air distribution and
Correlation - No sub incorrectly installed filtering components for leakage and
type information  Leakage from intake air correct installation
system  Check air cleaner element is free from
as required
P0111- Intake Air  Intake air temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
23 Temperature Sensor 1 sensor short to ground, open intake air temperature sensor circuit for short to
Circuit circuit, high resistance ground, open circuit, high resistance. Check and
Range/Performance -  Intake air temperature install a new intake air temperature sensor as
signal stuck low sensor failure required.
24 Temperature Sensor 1 sensor circuit short to intake air temperature sensor circuit for short to
Circuit power, open circuit power, open circuit. Check and install a new intake
Range/Performance -  Intake air temperature air temperature sensor as required.
signal stuck high sensor failure
Circuit ground, power, open circuit ground, power, open circuit. Check and install a
Range/Performance -  Intake air temperature new intake air temperature sensor as required.
signal invalid sensor failure
Circuit Low (Bank 1) - ground, short to power, ground, short to power, open circuit, high
no sub type open circuit, high resistance resistance. Check and install a new intake air
information  Intake air temperature temperature sensor bank 1 as required.
sensor failure
Circuit High (Bank 1) - power, open circuit, high power, open circuit, high resistance. Check and
no sub type resistance install a new intake air temperature sensor bank 1
information  Intake air temperature as required.
sensor failure
P0116- Engine Coolant  Engine coolant temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
23 Temperature Sensor 1 sensor 1 sensing circuit system check datalogger signal, Engine Coolant
Circuit intermittent high resistance Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x0357). Refer to
Range/Performance -  Engine coolant temperature the electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
signal stuck low sensor 1 failure coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for
 Battery reset carried out intermittent high resistance. Check and install a
when the engine was new engine coolant temperature sensor 1 as
warm/hot required. Check for related DTC P2610- 87. Start
the engine and switch off. Clear DTC and re-test.
24 Temperature Sensor 1 sensor 1 sensing circuit system check datalogger signal, Engine Coolant
Circuit intermittent high resistance Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x0357). Refer to
Range/Performance -  Engine coolant temperature the electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
signal stuck high sensor 1 failure coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for
 Battery reset carried out intermittent high resistance. Check and install a
when the engine was new engine coolant temperature sensor 1 as
warm/hot required. Check for related DTC P2610- 87. Start
the engine and switch off. Clear DTC and re-test.
P0116- Engine Coolant  Low coolant level Fill cooling system to correct level and
29 Temperature Sensor 1  Engine coolant temperature specification. Using the manufacturer approved
Circuit sensor 1 sensing circuit - diagnostic system check datalogger signal, Engine
Range/Performance - intermittent high resistance Coolant Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x0357).
Signal invalid  Engine coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
sensor 1 failure engine coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for
 Possible airlock in cooling intermittent high resistance. Check and install new
system engine coolant temperature sensor 1 as required,
Bleed cooling system.
16 Temperature Sensor 1 sensor 1 circuit short to system check datalogger signal, Engine Coolant
Circuit Low - circuit ground Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x0357). Refer to
voltage below  Engine coolant temperature the electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
threshold sensor 1 failure coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for short to
ground. Check and install a new Engine coolant
temperature sensor 1 as required.
17 Temperature Sensor 1 sensor 1 circuit short to system check datalogger signal, Engine Coolant
Circuit High - Circuit power, open circuit, sensor Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x0357). Refer to
voltage above disconnected the electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
threshold  Engine coolant temperature coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for short to
sensor 1 failure power, open circuit, sensor disconnected. Check
and install new engine coolant temperature sensor
1 as required.
P0121- Throttle/Pedal Position  Corrupt Engine Control Re-configure the Engine Control Module (ECM)
00 Sensor A Circuit Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Range/Performance -  Engine Control Module system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
no sub type (ECM) power supply circuit check Engine Control Module (ECM) power supply
information open circuit, high resistance circuit for open circuit, high resistance. Check and
 Engine Control Module install a new Engine Control Module (ECM)as
(ECM) damage through required. Refer to the warranty policy and
water ingress, internal fault procedures manual if a module is suspect.
P0122- Throttle/Pedal Position  Throttle position sensor 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Sensor A Circuit Low - circuit short to ground, open throttle position sensor 1 circuit for short to
no sub type circuit ground, open circuit. Clear DTC and repeat
information  Throttle position sensor 1 automated diagnostic procedure using the
failure manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If DTC
remains suspect the electronic throttle unit, check
and install a new electronic throttle unit as
required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module is suspect.
P0123- Throttle/Pedal Position  Throttle position sensor 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Sensor A Circuit High - circuit short to ground, short throttle position sensor 1 circuit for short to
no sub type to power, open circuit ground, short to power, open circuit. Clear DTC
information  Throttle position sensor 1 and repeat automated diagnostic procedure using
failure the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If
DTC remains suspect the electronic throttle unit,
check and install a new electronic throttle unit as
P0125- Insufficient Coolant  Coolant temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Temp For Closed Loop 1 circuit, open circuit, high engine coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for
Fuel Control - no sub resistance open circuit, high resistance. Check and install a
type information  Engine coolant temperature new engine coolant temperature sensor 1.
sensor 1 failure
P0126- Insufficient Coolant  Thermostat stuck open Check for related coolant temperature coolant
26 Temp For Stable  Cooling fans running sensor faults. Check and install a new thermostat
Operation - signal rate continuously or at a high as required. Check cooling fans for correct
of change below duty operation. Repair as required.
threshold
P0128- Coolant Thermostat  Thermostat stuck open Check for related coolant temperature coolant
00 (Coolant Temp Below  Coolant temperature coolant sensor faults. Check and install a new thermostat
Thermostat Regulating sensor circuit, short to as required. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Temperature) - no sub ground, short to power, and check engine coolant temperature sensor 1
type information open circuit circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
circuit.
P0131- O2 Circuit Low Voltage  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd connector is
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 1) - odd disconnected connected. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
no sub type  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor and check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd variable
information odd variable circuit, short to circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check pre-
ground catalyst oxygen sensor odd heater circuit. Check
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor and install a new pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd
odd variable circuit, open as required.
circuit
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
odd heater fault
odd failure
P0132- O2 Circuit High  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd connector is
00 Voltage (Bank 1, odd disconnected connected. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Sensor 1) - no sub  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor and check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd variable
type information odd variable circuit, short to circuit for short to power, open circuit. Check pre-
power catalyst oxygen sensor odd heater circuit. Check
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor and install a new pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd
odd variable circuit, open as required.
circuit
odd heater fault
odd failure
P0133- O2 Circuit Slow  Exhaust leak Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd is correctly
00 Response (Bank 1,  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor installed in exhaust manifold. Check for and rectify
Sensor 1) - no sub odd to Engine Control any exhaust leak between cylinder head and
type information Module (ECM) wiring shield catalytic converter. Refer to the electrical circuit
high resistance diagrams and check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
 Fuel control system fault odd to Engine Control Module (ECM) wiring shield
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor for high resistance. Check fuel control system for
odd failure failure. Check and install a new pre-catalyst
oxygen sensor odd as required.
P0134- O2 Circuit No Activity  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Detected (Bank 1, odd circuit short to ground, pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd circuit for short to
Sensor 1) - no sub short to power, open circuit ground, short to power, open circuit. Check and
type information  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor install a new pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd as
odd failure required.
P0137- O2 Circuit Low Voltage  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 2) - - odd, sensing circuit short post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, sensing circuit
no sub type to ground, high resistance, for short to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
information open circuit Check for damaged or blocked catalyst. Check for
 Damaged or blocked catalyst air leak between catalyst and exhaust manifold.
 Air leak between catalyst Check and install new post catalyst oxygen sensor
and exhaust manifold - odd, as required.
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor
- odd, failure
P0138- O2 Circuit High  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Voltage (Bank 1, - odd, sensing circuit short post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, sensing circuit
Sensor 2) - no sub to power for short to power. Check post catalyst oxygen
type information  Post catalyst oxygen sensor sensor - odd, tip for damage, blockage, poisoned,
- odd, tip damaged, blocked, install a new sensor as required. Check for blocked
poisoned catalyst. Check and install new catalyst as
 Catalyst blocked required. Check and install new post catalyst
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor oxygen sensor - odd, as required.
- odd, failure
P0139- O2 Circuit Slow  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Check for related DTCs. Check post catalyst
00 Response (Bank 1, - odd, tip damaged, blocked, oxygen sensor - odd, tip for damage, blockage,
Sensor 2) - no sub poisoned poisoned, install a new sensor as required. Check
type information  Excessive oil consumption for excessive oil consumption. Repair as required.
P0140- O2 Circuit No Activity  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Detected (Bank 1, - odd, sensing circuit short post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, sensing circuit
Sensor 2) - no sub to ground, power, high for short to ground, power, high resistance, open
type information resistance, open circuit circuit. Check for air leak between catalyst and
 Air leak between catalyst exhaust manifold. Check post catalyst oxygen
and exhaust manifold sensor - odd, tip for damage, blockage, poisoned,
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor install a new sensor as required. Check for
- odd, tip damaged, blocked, excessive oil consumption. Check and install new
poisoned post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, as required.
- odd, failure
P0141- O2 Heater Circuit  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 (Bank 1, Sensor 2) - - odd, sensing circuit short system check datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
no sub type to ground, power, high (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 2
information resistance, open circuit (0x03A2). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
 Air leak between catalyst and check post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
and exhaust manifold sensing circuit for short to ground, power, high
 Catalyst oxygen sensor resistance, open circuit. Check for air leak between
heater circuit control relay catalyst and exhaust manifold. Refer to the
failure electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor oxygen sensor heater circuit control relay circuit
- odd, failure for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
and install a new catalyst oxygen sensor heater
control relay, as required. Check and install new
post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, as required.
P0148- Fuel Delivery Error -  Injector(s) circuit, short to Check for related injector DTCs. Refer to the
65 signal has too few ground, short to power, high electrical circuit diagrams and check Injector(s)
transitions / events resistance circuit for, short to ground, short to power, high
 Injector(s) failure resistance. Check and install a new injector(s) as
 Engine Control Module required. Check and install a new Engine Control
(ECM) internal failure Module (ECM) as required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect.
P0148- Fuel Delivery Error -  Injector(s) circuit, short to Check for related injector DTCs. Refer to the
66 signal has too many ground, short to power, high electrical circuit diagrams and check Injector(s)
transitions / events resistance circuit for, short to ground, short to power, high
suspect.
P0149- Fuel Timing Error -  Injector(s) circuit, short to Check for related injector DTCs. Refer to the
32 signal low time < ground, short to power, high electrical circuit diagrams and check Injector(s)
minimum resistance circuit for, short to ground, short to power, high
suspect.
P0149- Fuel Timing Error -  Injector(s) circuit, short to Check for related injector DTCs. Refer to the
35 signal high time > ground, short to power, high electrical circuit diagrams and check Injector(s)
maximum resistance circuit for, short to ground, short to power, high
suspect.
P0151- O2 Sensor Circuit Low  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
1A Voltage (Bank 2 even circuit short to ground pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - even circuit for short
Sensor 1) - circuit  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - to ground. Check and install new pre catalyst
resistance below even failure oxygen sensor - even.
threshold
P0152- O2 Sensor Circuit Low  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
1B Voltage (Bank 2 even circuit short to power, pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - even circuit for short
Sensor 1) - circuit disconnected to power, disconnected. Check and install new pre
resistance above  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - catalyst oxygen sensor - even.
threshold even failure
P0153- O2 Circuit Slow  Exhaust leak Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even is correctly
00 Response (Bank 2,  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor installed in exhaust manifold. Check for and rectify
Sensor 1) - no sub even to Engine Control any exhaust leak between cylinder head and
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even to Engine Control Module (ECM) wiring shield
even to Engine Control for high resistance. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module (ECM) signal circuit diagrams and check Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
short to ground even to Engine Control Module (ECM) signal circuit
 Fuel control system fault for short to ground. Check fuel control system for
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor failure. Check and install a new pre-catalyst
even failure oxygen sensor even as required.
P0154- O2 Circuit No Activity  Exhaust leak Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even is correctly
00 Detected (Bank 2,  Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor installed in exhaust manifold. Check for and rectify
Sensor 1) - no sub even to Engine Control any exhaust leak between cylinder head and
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even to Engine Control Module (ECM) wiring shield
even to Engine Control for high resistance. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module (ECM) signal circuit diagrams and check Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
short to ground, high even to Engine Control Module (ECM) signal circuit
resistance, open circuit for short to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
 Fuel control system fault Check fuel control system for failure. Check and
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor install a new pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even as
even failure required.
P0157- O2 Circuit Low Voltage  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 (Bank 2, Sensor 2) - - even, sensing circuit short post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, sensing circuit
no sub type to ground, high resistance, for short to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
information open circuit Check for air leak between catalyst and exhaust
 Air leak between catalyst manifold. Check post catalyst oxygen sensor -
and exhaust manifold even, tip for damage, blockage, poisoned, install a
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor new sensor as required. Check and install new
- even, tip damaged, post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, as required.
blocked, poisoned

- even, failure
P0158- O2 Circuit High  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Voltage (Bank 2, - even, sensing circuit short post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, sensing circuit
Sensor 2) - no sub to power for short to power. Check for air leak between
type information  Air leak between catalyst catalyst and exhaust manifold. Check post catalyst
and exhaust manifold oxygen sensor - even, tip for damage, blockage,
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor poisoned, install a new sensor as required. Check
- even, tip damaged, and install new post catalyst oxygen sensor -
blocked, poisoned even, as required.

- even, failure
P0159- O2 Circuit Slow  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Check post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, tip for
00 Response (Bank 2, - even, tip damaged, damage, blockage, poisoned, install a new sensor
Sensor 2) - no sub blocked, poisoned as required. Check for excessive oil consumption,
type information  Excessive oil consumption repair as required.
P0160- O2 Circuit No Activity  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Detected (Bank 2, - even, sensing circuit short post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, sensing circuit
Sensor 2) - no sub to ground, power, high for short to ground, power, high resistance, open
type information resistance, open circuit circuit. Check for air leak between catalyst and
 Air leak between catalyst exhaust manifold. Check post catalyst oxygen
and exhaust manifold sensor - even, tip for damage, blockage, poisoned,
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor install a new sensor as required. Check and install
- even, tip damaged, new post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, as
blocked, poisoned required.
- even, failure
P0161- O2 Heater Circuit  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 (Bank 2, Sensor 2) - - even, sensing circuit short post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, sensing circuit
no sub type to ground, power, high for short to ground, power, high resistance, open
information resistance, open circuit circuit. Check for air leak between catalyst and
 Air leak between catalyst exhaust manifold. Refer to the electrical circuit
and exhaust manifold diagrams and check catalyst oxygen sensor heater
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor circuit control relay circuit for short to ground,
- even, sensing circuit fuse power, open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check Post catalyst oxygen sensor -
 Catalyst oxygen sensor even, sensing circuit fuse, replace as required.
heater circuit control relay Check and install a new catalyst oxygen sensor
failure heater control relay, as required. Check and install
 Post catalyst oxygen sensor new post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, as
- even, failure required.
P0171- System Too Lean  Air leak upstream of Check for leak from air intake system. Check for
00 (Bank 1) - no sub type MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 additional MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 related DTCs
information  MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check for
circuit failure additional Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd related
 MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check for
failure additional Post-catalyst oxygen sensor odd related
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
odd circuit failure
odd failure
 Post-catalyst oxygen sensor
odd circuit failure
odd failure
P0172- System Too Rich  Restricted air cleaner Check air cleaner element is free from restriction.
00 (Bank 1) - no sub type  Leaking fuel injector(s) Check for leaking injectors, install new injector(s)
information  MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 as required. Check for additional MAF/IAT sensor
failure bank 1 related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor Index. Check for additional Pre-catalyst oxygen
odd circuit failure sensor odd related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor Index. Check for additional Post-catalyst oxygen
odd failure sensor odd related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
 Post-catalyst oxygen sensor Index.
odd circuit failure
odd failure
P0174- System Too Lean  Air leak upstream of Check for leak from air intake system. Check for
00 (Bank 2) - no sub type MAF/IAT sensor bank 2 additional MAF/IAT sensor bank 2 related DTCs
information  MAF/IAT sensor bank 2 and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check for
circuit failure additional Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even related
 MAF/IAT sensor bank 2 DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check for
failure additional Post-catalyst oxygen sensor even
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
even circuit failure
even failure
even failure
P0175- System Too Rich  Restricted air cleaner Check air cleaner element is free from restriction.
00 (Bank 2) - no sub type  Leaking fuel injector(s) Check for leaking injectors, install new injector(s)
information  MAF/IAT sensor bank 2 as required. Check for additional MAF/IAT sensor
circuit failure bank 2 related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
 MAF/IAT sensor bank 2 Index. Check for additional Pre-catalyst oxygen
failure sensor even related DTCs and refer to relevant
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor DTC Index. Check for additional Post-catalyst
even circuit failure oxygen sensor even related DTCs and refer to
 Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor relevant DTC Index.
even failure
even failure
P018B- Fuel Pressure Sensor B  Fuel Filter or fuel system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
29 Circuit restriction system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
Range/Performance -  Fuel system leak - Low Range Sensor Voltage (0x0376). Check for
signal invalid  Fuel pump pressure sensor related fuel pump DTCs. Check the fuel system for
circuit short to ground, short restrictions or blockages. Refer to the electrical
to power, open circuit, high circuit diagrams and check fuel pump pressure
resistance sensor circuit for short to power, open circuit, high
 Fuel pump pressure sensor resistance. Check and install a new fuel pump
failure pressure sensor as required.
P018C- Fuel Pressure Sensor B  Fuel pump pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Circuit Low - no sub circuit short to ground, short system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
type information to power, open circuit, high - Low Range Sensor Voltage (0x0376). Refer to
resistance the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel pump
 pressure sensor circuit for short to power, open
 Fuel pump pressure sensor circuit, high resistance. Check and install a new
failure fuel pump pressure sensor as required.
P018D- Fuel Pressure Sensor B  Fuel pump pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Circuit High - no sub circuit short to ground, short system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
type information to power, open circuit, high - Low Range Sensor Voltage (0x0376). Refer to
resistance the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel pump
 pressure sensor circuit for short to power, open
 Fuel pump pressure sensor circuit, high resistance. Check and install a new
failure fuel pump pressure sensor as required.
P0191- Fuel Rail Pressure  Fuel rail pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Sensor A Circuit short to ground, short to system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
Range/Performance - power, open circuit, high Sensor - High Range Sensor Voltage (0x0377).
no sub type resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
information  Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A fuel rail pressure sensor A circuit for short to
failure power, short to ground, high resistance, open
circuit, terminal damage or corrosion. Check and
install a new Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A as
required.
00 Sensor A Circuit Low - short to ground, short to system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
no sub type power, open circuit, high Sensor - High Range Sensor Voltage (0x0377).
information resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A fuel rail pressure sensor A circuit for short to
required.
00 Sensor A Circuit High - short to ground, short to system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
no sub type power, open circuit, high Sensor - High Range Sensor Voltage (0x0377).
information resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A fuel rail pressure sensor A circuit for short to
required.
P0196- Engine Oil  Oil temperature - level Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
23 Temperature Sensor sensor circuit short to system check datalogger signal, Sump Oil
Range/Performance - ground, high resistance Temperature - Measured (0x03F3). Refer to the
signal stuck low  Oil temperature - level electrical circuit diagrams and check oil
sensor failure temperature - level sensor circuit for short to
ground, intermittent high resistance. Check and
install new oil temperature - level sensor as
required.
P0196- Engine Oil  Oil temperature - level Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
24 Temperature Sensor sensor circuit short to power system check datalogger signal, Sump Oil
Range/Performance -  Oil temperature - level Temperature - Measured (0x03F3). Refer to the
signal stuck high sensor failure electrical circuit diagrams and check oil
temperature - level sensor circuit for intermittent
short to power. Check and install new oil
temperature - level sensor as required.
P0200- Injector Circuit -  Engine Control Module Check Engine Control Module (ECM) injector power
04 System Internal (ECM) injector circuit power circuit for open circuit. Check for misfire DTCs, if
Failures failure present suspect the Engine Control Module (ECM).
 Engine Control Module Check and install a new Engine Control Module
(ECM) fault (ECM) as required. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
P0200- Injector Circuit -  Engine Control Module Check for misfire DTCs, if present suspect the
49 internal electronic (ECM) fault Engine Control Module (ECM). Check and install a
failure new Engine Control Module (ECM) as required.
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if a module is suspect.
P0200- Injector Circuit - over  Engine Control Module If combined with misfire codes for one or both
4B temperature (ECM) fault injector sets, then no service rectification is
proposed.
P0201- Cylinder 1 Injector  Fuel injector no.1 circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Circuit / Open - circuit open circuit fuel injector no.1 circuit for open circuit,
open  Injector disconnected disconnected injector, high resistance.
P0222- Throttle/Pedal Position  Throttle/pedal position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Sensor/Switch B sensor/switch B circuit open throttle/pedal position sensor/switch B circuit for
Circuit High - no sub circuit, short to ground open circuit, short to ground. Check and install a
type information  Throttle/pedal position new throttle/pedal position sensor/switch B as
sensor/switch B failure required.
P0223- Throttle/Pedal Position  Throttle/pedal position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Sensor/Switch B sensor/switch B circuit open throttle/pedal position sensor/switch B circuit for
Circuit High - no sub circuit, short to power open circuit, short to power. Check and install a
type information  Throttle/pedal position new throttle/pedal position sensor/switch B as
sensor/switch B failure required.
P0231- Fuel Pump Secondary  Fuel Pump Driver Module Check for related DTCs P0232-24. Refer to the
23 Circuit Low - signal (FPDM) signal circuit short to electrical circuit diagrams and check Fuel Pump
stuck low ground, open circuit Driver Module (FPDM) signal circuit for short to
 Fuel Pump Driver Module ground, open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
(FPDM) is not energized with diagrams and check Fuel Pump Driver Module
the ignition on (FPDM) is energized with the ignition on. Repair as
 Fuel Pump Driver Module required. Check and install a new Fuel Pump
(FPDM) failure Driver Module (FPDM) as required. Refer to the
module is suspect.
P0232- Fuel Pump Secondary  Fuel Pump Driver Module Check for related DTCs P0231-23. Refer to the
24 Circuit Low - Signal (FPDM) signal circuit short to electrical circuit diagrams and check Fuel Pump
stuck high ground, open circuit Driver Module (FPDM) signal circuit for short to
 Fuel Pump Driver Module ground, open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
(FPDM) is not energized with diagrams and check Fuel Pump Driver Module
the ignition on (FPDM) is energized with the ignition on. Repair as
 Fuel Pump Driver Module required. Check and install a new Fuel Pump
(FPDM) failure Driver Module (FPDM) as required. Refer to the
module is suspect.
P0251- Injection Pump Fuel  Fuel rail pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Metering Control A - circuit, open circuit fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for open circuit.
circuit open
11 Metering Control A circuit, short to ground fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to ground.
Low - circuit short to
ground
12 Metering Control A circuit, short to power fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to power.
High - circuit short to
battery
13 Metering Control B - circuit, open circuit fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for open circuit.
circuit open
11 Metering Control B circuit, short to ground fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to ground.
Low - circuit short to
ground
12 Metering Control B circuit, short to power fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to power.
High - circuit short to
battery
P025C- Fuel Pump Module  Fuel Pump Driver Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
14 Control Circuit Low - (FPDM) control circuit, short Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) circuit short to
circuit short to ground to ground, open circuit ground, open circuit.
or open
P025D- Fuel Pump Module  Fuel Pump Driver Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 Control Circuit High - (FPDM) control circuit, short Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) circuit short to
circuit short to battery to power power.
11 Circuit Low - circuit short to ground fuel injector no.1 circuit for short to ground.
short to ground
12 Circuit Low - circuit short to power fuel injector no.1 circuit for short to power.
short to battery
01 Circuit High - General short to ground, short to fuel injector no.1 circuit for short to ground, short
Electrical Failure power to power.
12 Circuit High - circuit short to power fuel injector no.1 circuit for short to power.
short to battery
short to ground
short to battery
short to battery
short to ground
short to battery
short to battery
short to ground
short to battery
short to battery
short to ground
short to battery
short to battery
short to ground
short to battery
short to battery
short to ground
short to battery
short to battery
short to ground
short to battery
short to battery
P02EE- Cylinder 1 Injector  Cylinder 1 injector low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
01 Circuit circuit short to power cylinder 1 injector circuit for short to power,
Range/Performance -  Cylinder 1 injector low shorted together. Check and install a new cylinder
General Electrical circuit shorted to high circuit 1 injector as required.
Failure  Cylinder 1 injector failure
P02EE- Cylinder 1 Injector  Engine Control Module Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
1C Circuit (ECM) internal fault misfire DTCs and refer to this DTC Index.
Range/Performance -
circuit voltage out of
range
P02EF- Cylinder 2 Injector  Cylinder 2 injector low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P02EF- Cylinder 2 Injector  Engine Control Module Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
Range/Performance -
range
P02F0- Cylinder 3 Injector  Cylinder 3 injector low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P02F0- Cylinder 3 Injector  Engine Control Module Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
Range/Performance -
range
Range/Performance -
range
Range/Performance -
range
Range/Performance -
range
Range/Performance -
range
Range/Performance -
range
P0300- Random Misfire  Poor fuel quality Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
00 Detected - no sub type  Catalyst/exhaust system misfire DTCs and refer to this DTC Index. Check
information blockage the fuel system for blockages, repair as required.
 Spark plug(s) fouled or Check the catalyst/exhaust system for blockage,
failed repair as required. Check and install a new spark
 Injector(s) circuit short to plug(s) as required. Refer to the electrical circuit
ground, short to power, diagrams and check injector(s) circuit for short to
open circuit ground, power, open circuit. Check and install a
 Injector(s) failure new injector(s) as required. Check for air leaks
 Fuel system excessively too within the intake system. Check and install a new
lean or too rich camshaft position sensor as required.
 Camshaft position sensor
failure
P0301- Cylinder 1 Misfire  Poor fuel quality Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
failure
failure
failure
failure
failure
failure
failure
failure
P0313- Misfire Detected With  Poor fuel quality Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
00 Low Fuel - no sub type  Catalyst/exhaust system misfire DTCs and refer to this DTC Index. Check
failure
P0316- Misfire Detected On  Poor fuel quality Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
00 Startup (First 1000  Catalyst/exhaust system misfire DTCs and refer to this DTC Index. Check
Revolutions) - no sub blockage the fuel system for blockages, repair as required.
type information  Spark plug(s) fouled or Check the catalyst/exhaust system for blockage,
failure
P0327- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit  Poor sensor contact with the Ensure a good electrical contact with the cylinder
00 Low (Bank1) - no sub cylinder block block. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
type information  Knock sensor bank 1 front check knock sensor bank 1 front circuit for short to
circuit short to ground, open ground, open circuit. Check and install a new
circuit knock sensor bank 1 front as required.
 Knock sensor bank 1 front
failure
00 High (Bank 1) - no sub cylinder block block. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit high resistance, short power, high resistance. Check and install a new
to power knock sensor bank 1 front as required.
failure
P032C- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit  Poor sensor contact with the Ensure a good electrical contact with the cylinder
circuit short to ground ground. Check and install a new knock sensor
 Knock sensor bank 2 front bank 2 front as required.
failure
P032D- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit  Poor sensor contact with the Ensure a good electrical contact with the cylinder
00 High (Bank1) - no sub cylinder block block. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
to power knock sensor bank 2 front as required.
failure
type information  Knock sensor bank 1 rear check knock sensor bank 1 rear circuit for short to
circuit short to ground, open ground, open circuit. Check and install a new
circuit knock sensor bank 1 rear as required.
 Knock sensor bank 1 rear
failure
circuit short to power power. Check and install a new knock sensor bank
 Knock sensor bank 1 rear 1 rear as required.
failure
P0335- Crankshaft Position  Crankshaft position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
02 Sensor A Circuit - circuit short to ground, short crankshaft position sensor circuit for short to
General signal failure to power, high resistance, ground, short to power, high resistance,
disconnected disconnected. Check and install new crankshaft
 Crankshaft position sensor position as required.
failure
31 Sensor A Circuit - no circuit - short to ground, crankshaft position sensor circuit for short to
signal short to power, high ground, short to power, high resistance,
resistance, disconnected disconnected. Check and install new crankshaft
 Crankshaft position sensor position as required.
failure
00 Sensor A Circuit circuit short to ground, short crankshaft position sensor circuit for short to
Range/Performance - to power, high resistance, ground, short to power, high resistance,
no sub type disconnected disconnected. Check crankshaft position sensor for
information  Crankshaft position sensor damage and check air gap (check at 90° intervals,
gap incorrect, foreign matter should be no greater than 4.5mm). Check and
on sensor face, damaged install new crankshaft position as required.
teeth on rotor
 Crankshaft position sensor
failure
P033C- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit  Poor sensor contact with the Ensure a good electrical contact with the cylinder
00 Low (Bank 2) - no sub cylinder block block. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short to ground ground. Check and install a new knock sensor
 Knock sensor bank 2 rear bank 2 rear as required.
failure
P033D- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit  Poor sensor contact with the Ensure a good electrical contact with the cylinder
to power knock sensor bank 2 rear as required.
 Knock sensor bank 2 rear
failure
P0340- Camshaft Position  Camshaft position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
02 Sensor A Circuit (Bank bank 1 inlet sensor circuit camshaft position sensor bank 1 inlet sensor
1 or single sensor) - short to ground, short to circuit for short to ground, short to power, high
General signal failure power, high resistance, resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
disconnected sensor bank 1 inlet sensor for correct installation
 Camshaft position sensor and damage. Check and install a new camshaft
bank 1 inlet sensor gap position sensor bank 1 inlet as required.
sensor face, damaged rotor
bank 1 inlet sensor failure
1 or single sensor) - short to ground, short to circuit for short to ground, short to power, high
no signal power, high resistance, resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
00 Sensor A Circuit bank 1 inlet sensor circuit camshaft position sensor bank 1 inlet sensor
Range/Performance short to ground, short to circuit for short to ground, short to power, high
(Bank 1 or single power, high resistance, resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
sensor) - no sub type disconnected sensor bank 1 inlet sensor for correct installation
information  Camshaft position sensor and damage. Check and install a new camshaft
2) - General signal short to ground, short to circuit for short to ground, short to power, high
failure power, high resistance, resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
31 Sensor A Circuit (Bank bank 2 inlet sensor circuit - camshaft position sensor bank 2 inlet sensor
2) - no signal short to ground, short to circuit for short to ground, short to power, high
power, high resistance, resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
00 Sensor A Circuit bank 2 inlet sensor circuit - camshaft position sensor bank 2 inlet sensor
(Bank 2) - no sub type power, high resistance, resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
information disconnected sensor bank 2 inlet sensor for correct installation
 Camshaft position sensor and damage. Check target rotor for run out, repair
bank 2 inlet sensor gap as required. Check and install a new camshaft
incorrect, foreign matter on position sensor bank 2 inlet as required.
sensor face, target rotor
run-out
P0351- Ignition Coil A  Ignition coil 1 open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Primary/Secondary  Ignition coil 1 disconnected ignition coil 1 circuit for open circuit, disconnected
Circuit - circuit open  Ignition coil high resistance ignition coil, high resistance.
P0352- Ignition Coil B  Ignition coil 2 open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P0353- Ignition Coil C  Ignition coil 3 open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P0354- Ignition Coil D  Ignition coil 4 open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P0355- Ignition Coil E  Ignition coil 5 open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P0356- Ignition Coil F  Ignition coil 6 open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit - Circuit Open  Ignition coil high resistance ignition coil, high resistance.
P0357- Ignition Coil G  Ignition coil 7 open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P0358- Ignition Coil H  Ignition coil 8 open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
02 Sensor B Circuit (Bank bank 1 outlet sensor circuit camshaft position sensor bank 1 outlet sensor
1) - General signal short to ground, short to circuit for short to ground, short to power, high
failure power, high resistance, resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
disconnected sensor bank 1 outlet sensor for correct installation
bank 1 outlet sensor gap position sensor bank 1 outlet as required.
bank 1 outlet sensor failure
00 Sensor B Circuit bank 1 outlet sensor circuit camshaft position sensor bank 1 outlet sensor
(Bank 1) - No sub type power, high resistance, resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
information disconnected sensor bank 1 outlet sensor for correct installation
 Camshaft position sensor and damage. Check target run-out, repair as
bank 1 outlet sensor gap required. Check and install a new camshaft
incorrect, foreign matter on position sensor bank 1 outlet as required.
sensor face, target rotor
run-out
02 Sensor B Circuit (Bank bank 2 outlet sensor circuit camshaft position sensor bank 2 outlet sensor
2) - performance or short to ground, short to circuit for short to ground, short to power, high
incorrect operation power, high resistance, resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
disconnected sensor bank 2 outlet sensor for correct installation
bank 2 outlet sensor gap position sensor bank 2 outlet as required.
00 Sensor B Circuit bank 2 outlet sensor circuit camshaft position sensor bank 2 outlet sensor
(Bank 2) - no sub type power, high resistance, resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
information disconnected sensor bank 2 outlet sensor for correct installation
 Camshaft position sensor and damage. Check target rotor, repair as
bank 2 outlet sensor gap required. Check and install a new camshaft
incorrect, foreign matter on position sensor bank 2 outlet as required.
sensor face, damaged rotor,
rotor run-out
P0420- Catalyst System  Catalytic converter failure Check for misfire/lean combustion DTCs and refer
00 Efficiency Below due to overheating damage to DTC Index in this section. Check the oil and fuel
Threshold (Bank 1) - caused by misfire and/or condition/level. Check the catalytic converter for
no sub type lean combustion damage. Check and install a new catalytic
information  Catalytic converter failure converter bank 1 as required. Refer to the
due to poisoning caused by warranty policy and procedures manual if a
excessive oil consumption component is suspect.
and/or contaminated fuel
P0430- Catalyst System  Catalytic converter failure Check for misfire/lean combustion DTCs and refer
00 Efficiency Below due to overheating damage to DTC Index in this section. Check the oil and fuel
Threshold (Bank 2) - caused by misfire and/or condition/level. Check the catalytic converter for
no sub type lean combustion damage. Check and install a new catalytic
information  Catalytic converter failure converter bank 2 as required. Refer to the
due to poisoning caused by warranty policy and procedures manual if a
excessive oil consumption component is suspect.
and/or contaminated fuel
P0441- Evaporative Emission  Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Check all Evaporative Emission (EVAP) system
00 System Incorrect system hoses, pipes or hoses, pipes and connection are serviceable,
Purge Flow - no sub connection failure repair/replace as required. Refer to the electrical
type information  Purge control valve circuit circuit diagrams and check purge control valve
short to ground, short to circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit.
power, open circuit, high Check and install a new purge control valve as
resistance required. Refer to the warranty policy and
 Purge control valve failure procedures manual if a component is suspect.
P0442- Evaporative Emission  Fuel filler cap not Check fuel tank filler cap for sealing/missing.
00 System Leak Detected sealing/missing Check and install a new fuel tank filler cap as
(small leak)- no sub  Diagnostic Module Tank required. Check EVAP system for leak using
type information Leakage (DMTL) connector appropriate smoke/leak tester. Carry out a purge
not sealed valve self test to clean the purge valve. Check fuel
 Purge valve dirty tank and filler neck for leakage, replace as
 Evaporative emission system required. Check and install a new Diagnostic
leak Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) module as required.
 Fuel tank, filler neck leak Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
 Diagnostic Module Tank manual if a module is suspect.
Leakage (DMTL) module
failure
P0444- Evaporative Emission  Purge control valve open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 System Purge Control circuit, high resistance, purge control valve circuit for open circuit,
Valve Circuit Open - disconnected disconnected purge valve, high resistance.
circuit open
P0447- Evaporative Emission  Diagnostic Module Tank Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 System Vent Control Leakage (DMTL) module Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) module
Circuit Open - no sub circuit open circuit circuit for open circuit. Check Diagnostic Module
type information  Diagnostic Module Tank Tank Leakage (DMTL) module fuse and replace as
Leakage (DMTL) module required. Check and install a new Diagnostic
circuit fuse blown / not Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) module as required.
secure in holder Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
failure
00 System Vent Control Leakage (DMTL) module Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) module
Circuit Shorted - no circuit, short to ground, circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
sub type information short to power, open circuit circuit. Check and install a new Diagnostic Module
 Diagnostic Module Tank Tank Leakage (DMTL) module as required. Refer to
Leakage (DMTL) module the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
failure module is suspect.
P0456- Evaporative Emission  Fuel filler cap not Check fuel tank filler cap for sealing/missing.
00 System Leak Detected sealing/missing Check and install a new fuel tank filler cap as
(very small leak) - no  Diagnostic Module Tank required. Check EVAP system for leak using
sub type information Leakage (DMTL) connector appropriate smoke/leak tester. Carry out a purge
not sealed valve self test to clean the purge valve. Check fuel
 Purge valve dirty tank and filler neck for leakage, replace as
 Evaporative emission system required. Check and install a new Diagnostic
leak Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) module as required.
 Fuel tank, filler neck leak Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
failure
P0458- Evaporative Emission  Evaporative emission system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 System Purge Control purge control valve circuit evaporative emission system purge control valve
Valve Circuit High - short to ground circuit for short to ground.
circuit short to ground
P0459- Evaporative Emission  Evaporative emission system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 System Purge Control purge control valve circuit evaporative emission system purge control valve
Valve Circuit High - short to power circuit for short to power.
circuit short to battery
P0461- Fuel Level Sensor A  Fuel level sensor circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
29 Circuit circuit, short to ground, fuel level sensor circuit for short to ground, short
Range/Performance - short to power to power, open circuit. Check for stuck level
signal invalid  Fuel level sensor stuck sensor. Check and install a new fuel level sensor
 Fuel level sensor failure as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a component is suspect.
P0461- Fuel Level Sensor A  Fuel level sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
2F Circuit short to ground, short to fuel level sensor circuit for short to ground, short
Range/Performance - power, open circuit to power, open circuit. Check level sensor track for
signal erratic  Fuel level sensor track damage. Check and install a new fuel level sensor
damaged as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
 Fuel level sensor failure procedures manual if a component is suspect.
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit -  Damaged cooling fan control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
04 system internal unit system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
failures  Cooling fan control unit Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Check
failure and install a new cooling fan control unit as
09 component failures unit system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
 Cooling fan control unit Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Check
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit -  Cooling fan control unit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
11 short to ground circuit short to ground system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check cooling
fan control unit circuit for short to ground.
12 short to battery circuit short to power system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
fan control unit circuit for short to power.
13 circuit open circuit open circuit system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
fan control unit circuit for open circuit.
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit -  Charging system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 circuit voltage below  Discharged battery system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
threshold Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
charging circuit for open circuit, short to ground.
Check and install a new alternator as required.
Check and install a new battery as required. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit -  Charging system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
17 circuit voltage above  Discharged battery system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
threshold Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
charging circuit for open circuit, short to ground.
Check and install a new alternator as required.
Check and install a new battery as required. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
38 signal frequency unit system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
incorrect  Cooling fan control unit Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Check
4B Over temperature unit system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
 Cooling fan control unit Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Check
93 no operation unit system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
 Blocked cooling fan control Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Check
unit for block or obstruction to fan rotor. Check and
 Cooling fan control unit install a new cooling fan control unit as required.
failure Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
96 component internal unit system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
failure  Cooling fan control unit Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Check
97 component or system unit system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
operation obstructed  Blocked cooling fan control Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Check
or blocked unit for block or obstruction to fan rotor. Check and
 Cooling fan control unit install a new cooling fan control unit as required.
failure Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor  Wheel speed sensor fault Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for
81 A - invalid serial data related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
received
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor  Anti-lock Braking System Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module and
82 A - alive / sequence (ABS) module not on bus Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs and
counter incorrect / not refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the electrical
updated circuit diagrams and check Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) module circuit for short to ground,
power, open circuit.
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor  Incorrect level of Anti-lock Clear DTC and re-test. Re-configure the Anti-lock
83 A - value of signal Braking System (ABS) Braking System (ABS) module using the
protection calculation module software manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Re-
incorrect  Incorrect level of Engine configure the Engine Control Module (ECM) using
Control Module (ECM) the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
software
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor  Anti-lock Braking System Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for
85 A - signal above (ABS) module has reported related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
allowable range a speed above 300 km/h
P0501- Vehicle Speed Sensor  Vehicle speed from the Anti- Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
62 A Range/Performance lock Braking System (ABS) vehicle speed DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
- signal compare module does not match the Index. Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
failure calculated vehicle speed module and Transmission Control Module (TCM)
from the Engine Control for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
Module (ECM) Check the vehicle tire sizes are correct.
P0504- Brake Switch A / B  No brake pressure signal Check Anti-Lock braking module for related DTCs
00 Correlation - no sub available from Anti-Lock and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check for brake
type information (ABS) braking module fluid leaks. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
 Brake switch 1 and Brake and check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module
switch 2 sense circuit short circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit.
to ground, short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit brake switch circuit for short to ground, power,
 Brake switch 1 failure open circuit. Check and install a new brake switch
1 as required.
P0504- Brake Switch A / B  Brake fluid leak Check for brake fluid leaks. Refer to the electrical
64 Correlation - signal  Brake switch 1 sense circuit circuit diagrams and check brake switch 1 circuit
plausibility failure short to power for short to power. Check and install a new brake
 Brake switch 1 failure switch 1 as required.
P0506- Idle Air Control  Air intake restriction Ensure the air intake system is free from
00 System RPM Lower  Front end accessory drive restriction. Check the FEAD belt and components
Than Expected - no (FEAD) overload for failure, repair as required.
sub type information (defective/seized
component)
24 System RPM Lower  Air intake system air leak restriction. Check for air leak between MAF/IAT
Than Expected - signal between MAF/IAT sensor sensor and throttle. Check for air leak between
stuck high and throttle throttle and inlet manifold. Check for engine
 Intake air leak between breather system leak. Check the FEAD belt and
throttle and manifold components for failure.
 Engine crankcase breather
leak
 Front end accessory drive
(FEAD) overload
(defective/seized
component)
P0507- Idle Air Control  Air intake system air leak Check for air leak between MAF/IAT sensor and
00 System RPM Higher between MAF/IAT sensor throttle. Check for air leak between throttle and
Than Expected - no and throttle inlet manifold. Check for engine breather system
sub type information  Intake air leak between leak.
throttle and manifold
leak
23 System RPM Higher  Air intake system air leak restriction. Check for air leak between MAF/IAT
Than Expected - signal between MAF/IAT sensor sensor and throttle. Check for air leak between
stuck low and throttle throttle and inlet manifold. Check for engine
 Intake air leak between breather system leak.
throttle and manifold
leak
P050B- Cold Start Ignition  Ignition coil(s)faulty Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
23 Timing Performance -  Ignition coils circuit noise ignition coil circuit for short to ground, power,
signal stuck low  Engine Control Module open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
(ECM) faulty and check Engine Control Module (ECM) to ignition
coil circuit for short to power. Check and install a
new coil(s) as required. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check ignition coils circuit for
corrosion, high resistance. Check and install a new
Engine Control Module (ECM) as required. Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
P050B- Cold Start Ignition  Ignition coil(s)faulty Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
24 Timing Performance -  Ignition coils circuit noise ignition coil circuit for short to ground, power,
signal stuck high  Engine Control Module open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
(ECM) faulty and check Engine Control Module (ECM) to ignition
coil circuit for short to power. Check and install a
new coil(s) as required. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check ignition coils circuit for
corrosion, high resistance. Check and install a new
Engine Control Module (ECM) as required. Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
P050E- Cold Start Engine  Incorrect coolant Check the correct coolant temperature sensor is
00 Exhaust Temperature temperature sensor installed installed. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Too Low - no sub type  Coolant temperature sensor and check coolant temperature sensor circuit for
information circuit short to ground, open short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a
circuit new coolant temperature sensor as required.
 Coolant temperature sensor
failure
P0512- Starter Request Circuit  Crank request circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 - circuit short to between Engine Control crank request circuit between Engine Control
battery Module (ECM) and Central Module (ECM) and Central Junction Box (CJB) for
Junction Box (CJB) short to short to power.
power
P0512- Starter Request Circuit  Crank request circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
14 - circuit short to between Engine Control crank request circuit between Engine Control
ground or open Module (ECM) and Central Module (ECM) and Central Junction Box (CJB) for
Junction Box (CJB) short to short to ground, open circuit.
P0513- Incorrect Immobilizer  Security key invalid Check for CAN network interference/Engine
00 Key - no sub type  Controller Area Network Control Module (ECM) related error. Carry out the
information (CAN) data corruption CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer
 Low battery voltage approved diagnostic system. Check the vehicle
charging system for faults, repair as required.
P052A- Cold Start Intake (A)  Engine oil pressure too low Check engine oil level and top up as required.
00 Camshaft Position  Intake valve solenoid 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Timing Over-Advanced circuit short to ground, open intake valve solenoid 1 sensor circuit for short to
(Bank 1) - no sub type circuit, high resistance ground, open circuit, high resistance. Check and
information  Intake valve solenoid 1 install a new intake valve solenoid 1 sensor as
failure required. Check service history /mileage. Check
 Timing chains stretched and install new timing chains as required. Refer to
beyond allowable limits the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
component is suspect.
P052B- Cold Start Intake (A)  Engine oil pressure too low Check engine oil level and top up as required.
Timing Over-Retarded circuit short to ground, open intake valve solenoid 1 sensor circuit for short to
P052C- Cold Start Intake (A)  Engine oil pressure too low Check engine oil level and top up as required.
Timing Over-Advanced circuit short to ground, open intake valve solenoid 2 sensor circuit for short to
P052D- Cold Start Intake (A)  Engine oil pressure too low Check engine oil level and top up as required.
Timing Over-Retarded circuit short to ground, open intake valve solenoid 2 sensor circuit for short to
P054A- Cold Start Exhaust (B)  Engine oil pressure too low Check engine oil level and top up as required.
00 Camshaft Position  Exhaust valve solenoid 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Timing Over-Advanced circuit short to ground, open exhaust valve solenoid 1 sensor circuit for short to
information  Exhaust valve solenoid 1 install a new exhaust valve solenoid 1 sensor as
P054B- Cold Start Exhaust (B)  Engine oil pressure too low Check engine oil level and top up as required.
Timing Over-Retarded circuit short to ground, open exhaust valve solenoid 1 sensor circuit for short to
P054C- Cold Start Exhaust (B)  Engine oil pressure too low Check engine oil level and top up as required.
Timing Over-Advanced circuit short to ground, open exhaust valve solenoid 2 sensor circuit for short to
P054D- Cold Start Exhaust (B)  Engine oil pressure too low Check engine oil level and top up as required.
Timing Over-Retarded circuit short to ground, open exhaust valve solenoid 2 sensor circuit for short to
P0560- System Voltage-  Engine Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 circuit open (ECM) power supply circuit, Engine Control Module (ECM) power supply circuit
open circuit for open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
 Engine Control Module diagrams and check Engine Control Module (ECM)
(ECM) battery monitor battery monitor circuit for open circuit.
disconnected
P0562- System Voltage Low -  Battery circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 no sub type resistance battery circuit for high resistance. Refer to the
information  Alternator circuit open electrical circuit diagrams and check alternator
circuit, high resistance circuit for open circuit, high resistance. Check and
 Alternator failure install a new alternator as required. Refer to the
P0563- System Voltage High -  Battery circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 no sub type resistance battery circuit for high resistance. Check and
information  Alternator over charging install a new alternator as required. Refer to the
P0572- Brake Switch A Circuit  Brake switch 2 sense circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
17 Low - circuit voltage short circuit to ground brake switch 2 circuit for short to ground. Check
above threshold  Brake switch 2 failure and install a new brake switch 2 as required.
P0573- Brake Switch A Circuit  Brake switch 1 sense circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
16 High - circuit voltage short circuit to ground brake switch 1 circuit for open circuit. Refer to the
below threshold  Brake switch 2 sense circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check brake switch
open circuit 2 circuit for open circuit. Check and install a new
 Brake switch 2 failure brake switch 2 as required.
P0578- Cruise Control Multi-  Cruise control circuit, output Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Function Input A signal stuck cruise control switch circuit for short to ground.
Circuit Stuck - no sub  Cruise control switch stuck Check for stuck speed control switch, install a new
type information switch pack as required.
P057B- Brake Pedal Position  Brake pressure signal Check the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) control
87 Sensor Circuit missing from Anti-lock module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Range/Performance - Braking System (ABS) DTC index.
missing message control module
P0590- Cruise Control Multi-  Active Speed Limiter (ASL) Check for Active Speed Limiter (ASL) DTCs within
00 Function Input B switch stuck Gear Shift Module (GSM). Check and install a new
Circuit Stuck - no sub Gear Shift Module (GSM) as required. Refer to the
type information warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
P0600- Serial Communication  Corrupt Engine Control Re-configure the Engine Control Module (ECM)
49 Link - internal Module (ECM) software using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
electronic failure  Engine Control Module system. Check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
(ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
 Engine Control Module Control Module (ECM) for signs of water ingress.
(ECM) damage through Check and install a new Engine Control Module
water ingress (ECM) as required. Refer to the warranty policy
P0601- Internal Control  Corrupt Engine Control Re-configure the Engine Control Module (ECM)
43 Module Memory Check Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Sum Error - special  Engine Control Module system. Check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
memory failure (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
45 Module Memory Check Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Sum Error - program  Engine Control Module system. Check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
memory failure (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
42 Module Random Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Access Memory (RAM)  Engine Control Module system. Check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
Error - general (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
memory failure  Engine Control Module Control Module (ECM) for signs of water ingress.
Access Memory (RAM)  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
Error - Special (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
Access Memory (RAM)  Engine Control Module system. Check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
Error - Data memory (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
failure  Engine Control Module Control Module (ECM) for signs of water ingress.
00 Module Read Only Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Memory (ROM) Error -  Engine Control Module system. Check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
no sub type (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
information  Engine Control Module Control Module (ECM) for signs of water ingress.
Memory (ROM) Error -  Engine Control Module system. Check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
signal invalid (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
Memory (ROM) Error -  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
general memory (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
data memory failure (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
calibration / parameter (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
supervision software (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
signal plausibility (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
P0606- Control Module  Corrupt Engine Control Re-configure the Engine Control Module (ECM)
01 Processor - general Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Electrical Failure  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
04 Processor - system Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
internal failures  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
05 Processor - system Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
programming failures  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
checksum failure  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
memory failure  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
43 Processor - special Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
44 Processor - data Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
47 Processor - watchdog / Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
safety micro controller  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
failure (ECM) power supply fault supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
48 Processor - supervision Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
software failure  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
49 Processor - internal Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
electronic failure  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
00 Performance - no sub Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information  Engine Control Module system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
P0610- Control Module Vehicle  Corrupt Engine Control Clear the DTC and re-test. Re-configure the Engine
43 Options Error - special Module (ECM) software flash Control Module (ECM) using the manufacturer
memory failure  Corrupt Rear Junction (RJB ) approved diagnostic system. Re-configure the Rear
Box software flash Junction Box (RJB) using the manufacturer
 Corrupt Central Junction Box approved diagnostic system. Re-configure the
(CJB) software flash Central Junction Box (CJB) using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system.
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit -  Starter relay control circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 circuit open open circuit starter relay control circuit for open circuit. Check
 Starter relay failure and install a new starter relay as required.
P0616- Starter Relay Circuit  Starter relay control circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Low - circuit short to short to ground starter relay control circuit for short to ground.
ground  Starter relay failure Check and install a new starter relay as required.
P0617- Starter Relay Circuit  Starter relay control circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 High - circuit short to short to power starter relay control circuit for short to power.
battery  Starter relay failure Check and install a new starter relay as required.
P061A- Internal Control  Manifold air flow sensor(s) Check for related DTCs. Check manifold air flow
00 Module Torque failure sensors are reading correctly. Check and install a
Performance - no sub  Electric throttle unit failure new manifold air flow sensor(s) as required. Check
type information throttle position sensors are reading the same
position. Check throttle body is clear of any
deposits. Check and install a new electric throttle
unit as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
P061A- Internal Control  Manifold air flow sensor(s) Check for related DTCs. Check manifold air flow
04 Module Torque failure sensors are reading correctly. Check and install a
Performance - System  Electric throttle unit failure new manifold air flow sensor(s) as required. Check
Internal Failures throttle position sensors are reading the same
position. Check throttle body is clear of any
deposits. Check and install a new electric throttle
unit as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a component is suspect
P061A- Internal Control  Intake system air leak Check for related DTCs. Check intake air system
29 Module Torque  Manifold air flow sensor(s) for leaks. Check manifold air flow sensors are
Performance - signal failure reading correctly. Check and install a new air flow
invalid  Electric throttle unit failure sensor(s) as required. Check throttle position
 Accelerator pedal position sensors are reading the same position. Check
sensor failure throttle body is clear of any deposits. Check and
 Atmospheric pressure sensor install a new electric throttle unit as required.
failure Check and install a new accelerator pedal position
sensor as required. Check and install a new Engine
Control Module (ECM) as required. Refer to the
module is suspect.
P061A- Internal Control  Intake system air leak Check for related DTCs. Check intake air system
64 Module Torque  Manifold air flow sensor(s) for leaks and is correctly installed. Check manifold
Performance - signal failure air flow sensors are reading correctly. Check and
plausibility failure install a new manifold air flow sensor(s) as
required.
P061B- Internal Control  Intake system air leak Check intake air system for leaks. Check engine
62 Module Torque  Engine breather system leak breather system for leaks. Check and install a new
Calculation  Manifold air flow sensor manifold air flow sensor as required. Check and
Performance - signal failure install a new electric throttle unit as required.
compare failure  Electric throttle unit failure Check and install a new accelerator pedal position
 Accelerator pedal position sensor as required. Check and install a new Engine
sensor failure Control Module (ECM) as required. Refer to the
 Atmospheric pressure sensor warranty policy and procedures manual if a
failure module is suspect.
P0620- Generator Control  Generator B+ or battery Check for good/clean contact at generator B+ and
01 Circuit - General terminal disconnected/poor battery terminal connectors. Refer to the electrical
Electrical Failure connection circuit diagrams and check charging circuit for
 Charging circuit short, open short, open circuit. Clear DTC and repeat
circuit automated diagnostic procedure using the
 Generator failure manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If DTC
remains suspect the generator, check and install a
new generator as required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a component is
suspect.
P0627- Fuel Pump A Control  High pressure fuel pump 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Circuit / Open - no sub circuit to Fuel Pump Driver high pressure fuel pump 1 circuit for short to
type information Module (FPDM) short to ground, power, open circuit, high resistance.
ground, power, open circuit,
high resistance
P062A- Fuel Pump A Control  Invalid fuel pump duty Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Circuit requested by the Engine the Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) circuit for
Range/Performance - Control Module (ECM) short to ground, power, open circuit, high
no sub type resistance.
information
P0630- VIN Not Programmed  Car Configuration File (CCF) Re-configure the Engine Control Module (ECM)
00 or Incompatible - to CAN VIN mismatch using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ECM/PCM - no sub  New Engine Control Module system, clear DTC and re-test. Re-configure the
type information (ECM) fitted and incorrectly Central Junction Box (CJB) using the manufacturer
configured approved diagnostic system. Check and install a
 New Central Junction Box new Engine Control Module (ECM) as required.
(CJB) fitted and incorrectly Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
configured manual if a module is suspect.
P0634- PCM / ECM/ TCM  Engine Control Module Clear the DTC. With the ignition off, wait 10
22 Internal Temperature (ECM) internal temperature minutes and re-check DTC. Check and install a
Too High - signal too high new Engine Control Module (ECM) as required.
amplitude > maximum Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
P0634- PCM / ECM / TCM  Engine Control Module Clear the DTC. With the ignition off, wait 10
4B Internal Temperature (ECM) internal temperature minutes and re-check DTC. Check and install a
A Too High - over too high new Engine Control Module (ECM) as required.
temperature Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
P0642- Sensor Reference  Short circuit to power of a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Voltage A Circuit Low - 5V output pin, either in the 5V supply circuit for short to ground open circuit,
no sub type harness, or a connector high resistance, terminal damage or corrosion.
information  Internal short circuit in a Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for sensor
faulty component related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
P0643- Sensor Reference  Short circuit to ground of a Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Voltage A Circuit High 5V output pin, either in the 5V supply circuit for short to power open circuit,
- no sub type harness, or a connector high resistance, terminal damage or corrosion.
information  Internal short circuit in a Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for sensor
faulty component related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
P065B- Generator Control  Generator B+ or battery Check for good/clean contact at generator B+ and
16 Circuit terminal disconnected/poor battery terminal connectors. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance - connection circuit diagrams and check charging circuit for
circuit voltage below  Charging circuit short, open short, open circuit. Clear DTC and repeat
threshold circuit automated diagnostic procedure using the
 Battery failure remains suspect the generator, check and install a
new generator as required. Ensure the battery is in
a fully charged and serviceable condition. Refer to
the battery care manual and the relevant sections
of the workshop manual. Refer to the warranty
suspect.
P065B- Generator Control  Charging circuit short to Check for good/clean contact at generator B+ and
17 Circuit power battery terminal connectors. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance -  Generator failure circuit diagrams and check charging circuit for
circuit voltage above  Battery failure short, open circuit. Clear DTC and repeat
threshold automated diagnostic procedure using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If DTC
remains suspect the generator, check and install a
new generator as required. Ensure the battery is in
a fully charged and serviceable condition. Refer to
the battery care manual and the relevant sections
of the workshop manual. Refer to the warranty
suspect.
P065C- Generator Mechanical  Poor front end accessory Check front end accessory belt for
00 Performance - no sub belt tension condition/contamination and correct tension.
type information  Generator pulley Check generator pulley for failure. Clear DTC and
loose/failure repeat automated diagnostic procedure using
remains check and install a new generator as
P0660- Intake Manifold Tuning  Intake manifold tuning valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 Valve Control Circuit circuit open circuit intake manifold tuning valve circuit for open
Low - Bank 1 - circuit circuit.
open
11 Valve Control Circuit circuit short to ground intake manifold tuning valve circuit for short to
Low - Bank 1 - circuit ground.
short to ground
12 Valve Control Circuit circuit short to power manifold tuning valve circuit for short to power.
Low - Bank 1 - circuit
short to battery
P0668- PCM / ECM / TCM  Engine Control Module Check and install a new Engine Control Module
00 Internal Temperature (ECM) internal temperature (ECM) as required. Refer to the warranty policy
Sensor A Circuit Low - sensor failure and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
no sub type
information
P0669- PCM / ECM / TCM  Engine Control Module Check and install a new Engine Control Module
00 Internal Temperature (ECM) internal temperature (ECM) as required. Refer to the warranty policy
Sensor A Circuit High - sensor failure and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
no sub type
information
P0687- ECM/PCM Power Relay  Engine Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
73 Control Circuit High - (ECM) relay circuit short to Engine Control Module (ECM) relay circuit for short
actuator stuck closed power to power. Check and install a new Engine Control
 Engine Control Module Module (ECM) relay as required.
(ECM) relay failure
P0695- Fan 3 Control Circuit  E-Box fan circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Low - no sub type ground E-Box fan circuit for short to ground. Check and
information  E-Box fan failure install a new E-Box fan as required.
P0696- Fan 3 Control Circuit  E-Box fan circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 High - circuit short to power E-Box fan circuit for short to power. Check and
battery  E-Box fan failure install a new E-Box fan as required.
P0696- Fan 3 Control Circuit  E-Box fan circuit open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
13 High - circuit open  E-Box fan failure E-Box fan circuit for open circuit. Check and install
a new E-Box fan as required.
P0721- Output Shaft Speed  Transmission Control Module Check Transmission Control Module (TCM) for
85 Sensor Circuit (TCM) has reported a fault in related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
Range/Performance - the shaft speed signal
signal above allowable
range
P0721- Output Shaft Speed  Transmission Control Module Check Transmission Control Module (TCM) for
86 Sensor Circuit (TCM) has taken to 8 related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
Range/Performance - seconds or longer to change
signal invalid range
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch  Intermittent fault on Check Gear Shift Module (GSM) for related DTCs
86 Input Circuit - signal Park/Neutral signal from and refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the
invalid Gear Shift Module (GSM) electrical circuit diagrams and check Park/Neutral
 CAN network failure between switch input circuit for short to ground, power,
Gear Shift Module (GSM) open circuit. Carry out the CAN network integrity
and Engine Control Module test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
(ECM) system.
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch  Intermittent fault on Check Gear Shift Module (GSM) for related DTCs
8F Input Circuit - erratic Park/Neutral signal from and refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the
GSM electrical circuit diagrams and check Park/Neutral
 CAN network failure between switch input circuit for short to ground, power,
Gear Shift Module (GSM) open circuit. Carry out the CAN network integrity
and Engine Control Module test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
(ECM) system.
P0851- Park / Neutral Switch  Park/Neutral switch input Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
14 Input Circuit Low - circuit short to ground, open park/neutral switch input circuit for short to
circuit short to ground circuit ground, open circuit.
or open
P0852- Park / Neutral Switch  Park/Neutral switch input Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 Input Circuit Low - circuit short to power park/neutral switch input circuit for short to
circuit short to battery power.
P0A1A- Generator Control  Generator to Engine Control Check for good/clean contact at generator and
87 Module - missing Module (ECM) Engine Engine Control Module (ECM) LIN circuit
message Control Module (ECM) LIN connectors/pins. Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit open circuit diagrams and check generator circuit for open
 Generator/Engine Control circuit. Check for Engine Control Module (ECM)
Module (ECM) failure hardware DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
Clear DTCs and repeat automated diagnostic
procedure using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. If DTC remains check and
install a new generator/Engine Control Module
(ECM) as required. Refer to the warranty policy
P0A1A- Generator Control  Generator to Engine Control Check for good/clean contact at generator and
88 Module - bus off Module (ECM) Engine Engine Control Module (ECM) LIN circuit
Control Module (ECM) LIN connectors/pins. Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit open circuit diagrams and check generator circuit for open
 Generator/Engine Control circuit. Check for Engine Control Module (ECM)
Module (ECM) failure hardware DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
Clear DTCs and repeat automated diagnostic
procedure using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. If DTC remains check and
install a new generator/Engine Control Module
(ECM) as required. Refer to the warranty policy
P0A3B- Generator Over  Cooling fan not operating Check for correct cooling fan operation. Check
68 Temperature - event  Coolant level low coolant level. Clear DTC and re-test.
information
P115D- Mass Air Flow Circuit  NOTE: Customer likely to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Offset - no sub type report hesitation. system check datalogger signal, Mass Air Flow
information Sensor 2 Voltage (0x0503). Check air cleaner for
Air cleaner blocked blockage. Check air intake system for leaks. Check
 Air intake leak
engine breather system for blockages. Check for
 Engine breather blocked
carbon build up on throttle blade. Check for
related mass air flow DTCs P0102 or P0103. Refer
 Air intake blockage
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check mass
 Carbon build up on throttle
air flow sensor circuit for high resistance. Check
blade
and install a new mass air flow sensor as
 Mass air flow sensor circuit,
required .
high resistance
 Blocked catalyst(s)
 Mass air flow sensor failure
P1315- Persistent Misfire - No  Engine Control Module Check for cylinder mis-fire, ignition and injector
00 sub type information (ECM) to ignition coil DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Refer to the
primary circuit fault (cylinder electrical circuit diagrams and check ignition coil
misfire detected DTC also circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit.
flagged) Check for fuel system failure. Check and install a
 Fuel injector circuit fault(s) new spark plug(s) as required. Carry out cylinder
(injector DTCs also flagged) compression tests. Check exhaust system for
 Fuel delivery pressure low blockage.
 Spark plug
failure/fouled/incorrect gap
 Cylinder compression low
 Exhaust system blockage
P1316- Injector Driver Module  Engine Control Module Check for cylinder mis-fire, ignition and injector
00 Codes Detected - no (ECM) to ignition coil DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Refer to the
sub type information primary circuit fault (cylinder electrical circuit diagrams and check ignition coil
misfire detected DTC also circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit.
flagged) Check for fuel system failure. Check and install a
 Fuel injector circuit fault(s) new spark plug(s) as required. Carry out cylinder
(injector DTCs also flagged) compression tests. Check exhaust system for
 Fuel delivery pressure low blockage.
 Spark plug
failure/fouled/incorrect gap
 Cylinder compression low
 Exhaust system blockage
P1593- Cruise Control Monitor  Cruise control monitor fault. Check the car configuration and contact the Jaguar
64 Fault - signal The Engine Control Module Landrover helpdesk.
plausibility failure (ECM) performs a
independent check of the
cruise status
P1603- EEPROM Malfunction -  Corrupt Engine Control Re-configure the Engine Control Module (ECM)
00 no sub type Module (ECM) software flash using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information  Engine Control Module system. Check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
P2088- A Camshaft Position  Intake valve solenoid 1 short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Actuator Control to ground intake valve solenoid 1 for short to ground.
Circuit Low Bank 1 -
12 Actuator Control to power intake valve solenoid 1 for short to power.
Circuit High Bank 1 -
P2090- B Camshaft Position  Exhaust valve solenoid 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Actuator Control short to ground exhaust valve solenoid 1 for short to ground.
12 Actuator Control short to power exhaust valve solenoid 1 for short to power.
11 Actuator Control to ground intake valve solenoid 2 for short to ground.
12 Actuator Control to power intake valve solenoid 2 for short to power.
11 Actuator Control short to ground exhaust valve solenoid 2 for short to ground.
12 Actuator Control short to power exhaust valve solenoid 2 for short to power.
P2096- Post Catalyst Fuel Trim  Post catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 System Too Lean Bank odd, sensing circuit short to post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, sensing circuit
1 - no sub type ground, high resistance, for short to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
 Air leak between catalyst manifold. Check for air leak between the two
and exhaust manifold oxygen sensors. Check and install new post
 Air leak between the two catalyst oxygen sensor odd, as required.
oxygen sensors
odd, failure
00 System Too Rich Bank odd, sensing circuit short to post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, sensing circuit
 Air leak between the two catalyst oxygen sensor odd, as required.
oxygen sensors
odd, failure
00 System Too Lean Bank even, sensing circuit short to post catalyst oxygen sensor even, sensing circuit
 Air leak between the two catalyst oxygen sensor even, as required.
oxygen sensors
even, failure
00 System Too Rich Bank even, sensing circuit short to post catalyst oxygen sensor even, sensing circuit
 Air leak between the two catalyst oxygen sensor even, as required.
oxygen sensors
even, failure
P2105- Throttle Actuator  Engine speed or torque Check for any DTCs referring to Engine Control
00 Control System - limitation has been activated Module (ECM), throttle pedal position sensor, or
Forced Engine as a result of Engine Control torque faults.
Shutdown - no sub Module (ECM), throttle pedal
type information position sensor, or torque
faults
P2118- Throttle Actuator  Throttle motor control circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
19 Control Motor Current short to ground, power, high electric throttle unit circuit for short to ground,
Range/Performance - resistance power, high resistance. Refer to the electrical
circuit current above  Engine Control Module circuit diagrams and check Engine Control Module
threshold (ECM) ground circuit fault (ECM) ground circuit for faults. Make sure throttle
 Carbon build-up on throttle blade is clean of carbon. Check the system is
blade operating correctly and the DTC does not return.
 Electronic throttle unit Check and install a new electronic throttle unit as
failure required. Refer to the warranty policy and
P2119- Throttle Actuator  Carbon build-up on throttle Make sure throttle blade is clean of carbon. Refer
00 Control Throttle Body blade to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Engine
Range/Performance -  Engine Control Module Control Module (ECM) ground circuit for faults.
no sub type (ECM) ground circuit fault Check the system is operating correctly and the
information  Electronic throttle unit DTC does not return. Suspect electronic throttle
return spring faulty unit faulty. Check and install a new electronic
 Electronic throttle unit limp throttle unit as required. Refer to the warranty
home spring faulty policy and procedures manual if a component is
suspect.
P2119- Throttle Actuator  Stuck / sticking throttle Ensure throttle blade is free of build-up / other
29 Control Throttle Body blade obstructions. Suspect electric throttle unit faulty.
Range/Performance -  Electric throttle unit failure Check and install a new electric throttle unit as
signal invalid required. Refer to the warranty policy and
P2119- Throttle Actuator  Stuck / sticking throttle Ensure throttle blade is free of build-up / other
64 Control Throttle Body blade obstructions. Suspect electric throttle unit faulty.
Range/Performance -  Electric throttle unit failure Check and install a new electric throttle unit as
signal plausibility required. Refer to the warranty policy and
failure procedures manual if a component is suspect.
P2122- Throttle/Pedal Position  Electronic throttle unit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Sensor/Switch D throttle position sensor 1 electronic throttle unit, throttle position sensor 1
Circuit Low - no sub circuit short to ground, open circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check
type information circuit electronic throttle unit, VREF circuit for open
 Electronic throttle unit, VREF circuit. Clear DTC and repeat automated diagnostic
circuit open circuit procedure using the manufacturer approved
 Electronic throttle unit, diagnostic system. If DTC remains suspect the
throttle position sensor 1 electronic throttle unit, check and install a new
failure electronic throttle unit as required. Refer to the
00 Sensor/Switch D throttle position sensor 1 electronic throttle unit, throttle position sensor 1
Circuit High - no sub circuit short to power circuit for short to power. Check electronic throttle
type information  Electronic throttle unit, GREF unit, GREF circuit for open circuit. Clear DTC and
circuit open circuit repeat automated diagnostic procedure using the
 Electronic throttle unit, manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If DTC
throttle position sensor 1 remains suspect the electronic throttle unit, check
failure and install a new electronic throttle unit as
00 Sensor/Switch E throttle position sensor 2 electronic throttle unit, throttle position sensor 2
Circuit Low - no sub circuit short to ground, open circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check
type information circuit electronic throttle unit, VREF circuit for open
 Electronic throttle unit, VREF circuit. Clear DTC and repeat automated diagnostic
circuit open circuit procedure using the manufacturer approved
 Electronic throttle unit, diagnostic system. If DTC remains suspect the
throttle position sensor 2 electronic throttle unit, check and install a new
failure electronic throttle unit as required. Refer to the
00 Sensor/Switch E throttle position sensor 2 electronic throttle unit, throttle position sensor 2
Circuit High - no sub circuit short to power circuit for short to power. Check electronic throttle
type information  Electronic throttle unit, GREF unit, GREF circuit for open circuit. Clear DTC and
circuit open circuit repeat automated diagnostic procedure using the
 Electronic throttle unit, manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If DTC
throttle position sensor 2 remains suspect the electronic throttle unit, check
failure and install a new electronic throttle unit as
P2135- Throttle/Pedal Position  Throttle pedal position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Sensor/Switch A / B sensor circuit 1 and 2 short throttle pedal position sensor circuit 1 and 2 for
Voltage Correlation - to ground, short to power, short to ground, short to power, open circuit.
no sub type open circuit
information
P2135- Throttle/Pedal Position  Throttle pedal position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
09 Sensor/Switch A / B sensor circuit 1 and 2 short throttle pedal position sensor circuit 1 and 2 for
Voltage Correlation - to ground, short to power, short to ground, short to power, open circuit.
Component Failures open circuit
P2138- Throttle/Pedal Position  Analogue Pedal Position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
64 Sensor/Switch D / E (APP) sensor circuit 1 and 2 Analogue Pedal Position (APP) sensor circuit 1 and
Voltage Correlation - short to ground, short to 2 for short to ground, short to power, open circuit.
No sub type power, open circuit
information
P2183- Engine Coolant  Engine coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
23 Temperature Sensor 2 sensor 2 circuit high engine coolant temperature sensor 2 circuit for
Circuit resistance, open circuit high resistance, open circuit. Check and install a
Range/Performance -  Engine coolant temperature new engine coolant temperature sensor 2 as
signal stuck low sensor 2 failure required.
24 Temperature Sensor 2 sensor 2 circuit short to engine coolant temperature sensor 2 circuit for
Circuit power short to power. Check and install a new engine
Range/Performance -  Engine coolant temperature coolant temperature sensor 2 as required.
signal stuck high sensor 2 failure
Circuit resistance, open circuit, high resistance, open circuit, short to ground,
Range/Performance - short to ground, short to short to power. Check and install a new engine
signal invalid power coolant temperature sensor 2 as required.
sensor 2 failure
Circuit Low - circuit resistance, open circuit high resistance, open circuit. Check and install a
voltage below  Engine coolant temperature new engine coolant temperature sensor 2 as
threshold sensor 2 failure required.
P2185- Engine Coolant  Ignition turned on with an Clear the DTC and re-test. Refer to the electrical
17 Temperature Sensor 2 ambient temperature of circuit diagrams and check engine coolant
Circuit High - circuit below -40c temperature sensor 2 circuit for short to power.
voltage above  Engine coolant temperature Check and install a new engine coolant
threshold sensor 2 circuit short to temperature sensor 2 as required.
power
sensor 2 failure
P2228- Barometric Pressure  Barometric pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Circuit Low - no sub failure (internal Engine system check datalogger signal, Barometric
type information Control Module (ECM) fault) Pressure Sensor Voltage (0x035A). Suspect the
Engine Control Module (ECM). Check and install a
new Engine Control Module (ECM) as required.
P2229- Barometric Pressure  Barometric pressure sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Circuit Low - no sub failure (internal Engine system check datalogger signal, Barometric
type information Control Module (ECM) fault) Pressure Sensor Voltage (0x035A). Suspect the
Engine Control Module (ECM). Check and install a
new Engine Control Module (ECM) as required.
P2279- Intake Air System  Part load breather pipe Check for related DTCs. Check part load breather
00 Leak - no sub type disconnected pipe for leaks or disconnected. Check brake
information  Brake vacuum pipe vacuum pipe for leaks or disconnected. Check
disconnected intake air system for leaks.
 Excessive intake air leak
P2300- Ignition Coil A Primary  Ignition coil 1 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 Control Circuit Low - ground ignition coil 1 circuit for short to ground.
P2301- Ignition Coil A Primary  Ignition coil 1 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
12 Control Circuit Low - power ignition coil 1 circuit for short to power.
P2303- Ignition Coil B Primary  Ignition coil 2 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2304- Ignition Coil B Primary  Ignition coil 2 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2306- Ignition Coil C Primary  Ignition coil 3 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2307- Ignition Coil C Primary  Ignition coil 3 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2309- Ignition Coil D Primary  Ignition coil 4 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2310- Ignition Coil D Primary  Ignition coil 4 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2312- Ignition Coil E Primary  Ignition coil 5 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2313- Ignition Coil E Primary  Ignition coil 5 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2315- Ignition Coil F Primary  Ignition coil 6 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2316- Ignition Coil F Primary  Ignition coil 6 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2318- Ignition Coil G Primary  Ignition coil 7 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2319- Ignition Coil G Primary  Ignition coil 7 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2321- Ignition Coil H Primary  Ignition coil 8 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2322- Ignition Coil H Primary  Ignition coil 8 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
P2401- Evaporative Emission  Diagnostic Module Tank Check Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL)
00 System Leak Detection Leakage (DMTL) fuse failure fuse for failure and security in holder. Refer to the
Pump Control Circuit  Diagnostic Module Tank electrical circuit diagrams and check Diagnostic
Low - no sub type Leakage (DMTL) circuit short Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) circuit for short to
information to ground, open circuit ground, open circuit. Check and install a new
 Diagnostic Module Tank Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) as
Leakage (DMTL) failure required. Refer to the warranty policy and
00 System Leak Detection Leakage (DMTL) circuit short Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) circuit for
Pump Control Circuit to power short to power. Check and install a new Diagnostic
High - no sub type  Diagnostic Module Tank Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) as required. Refer to
information Leakage (DMTL) failure the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
P2404- Evaporative Emission  Diagnostic Module Tank Check and install a new Diagnostic Module Tank
29 System Leak Detection Leakage (DMTL) failure Leakage (DMTL) as required. Refer to the warranty
Pump Sense Circuit policy and procedures manual if a module is
Range/Performance - suspect.
Signal invalid
2F System Leak Detection Leakage (DMTL) failure Leakage (DMTL) as required. Refer to the warranty
Pump Sense Circuit policy and procedures manual if a module is
Range/Performance - suspect.
signal erratic
00 System Leak Detection Leakage (DMTL) circuit short Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) circuit for
Pump Sense Circuit to ground, high resistance, short to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
Low - no sub type open circuit Check and install a new Diagnostic Module Tank
information  Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) as required. Refer to the warranty
Leakage (DMTL) failure policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect.
P2406- Evaporative Emission  Blockage in Diagnostic Check for blockage in the Blockage in Diagnostic
00 System Leak Detection Module Tank Leakage Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) ventilation pipe.
Pump Sense Circuit (DMTL) ventilation pipe Check and install a new Diagnostic Module Tank
High - no sub type  Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) as required. Refer to the warranty
information Leakage (DMTL) circuit, policy and procedures manual if a module is
open circuit suspect.
P240A- Evaporative Emission  Diagnostic Module Tank Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 System Leak Detection Leakage (DMTL) circuit, Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) heater
Pump Heater Circuit / open circuit circuit for open circuit. Check and install a new
Open - no sub type  Diagnostic Module Tank Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) as
information Leakage (DMTL) failure required. Refer to the warranty policy and
P240B- Evaporative Emission  Diagnostic Module Tank Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 System Leak Detection Leakage (DMTL) heater Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) heater
Pump Heater Circuit circuit short to ground, high circuit for short to ground, high resistance.
Low - no sub type resistance
information
P240C- Evaporative Emission  Diagnostic Module Tank Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 System Leak Detection Leakage (DMTL) heater Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) heater
Pump Heater Circuit circuit short to power circuit for short to power.
High - no sub type
information
00 Control System Leakage (DMTL) failure Leakage (DMTL) as required. Refer to the warranty
Switching Valve policy and procedures manual if a module is
Performance/Stuck suspect.
Open - no sub type
information
00 Control System Leakage (DMTL) failure Leakage (DMTL) as required. Refer to the warranty
Switching Valve policy and procedures manual if a module is
Performance/Stuck suspect.
Closed - no sub type
information
P250C- Engine Oil Level  Oil temperature level sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
23 Sensor Circuit Low - circuit short to ground system check datalogger signal, Sump Oil
signal stuck low  Oil temperature level sensor Temperature - Measured (0x03F3). Refer to the
failure electrical circuit diagrams and check oil
temperature level sensor circuit for short to
ground. Check and install a new oil temperature
level sensor as required. Refer to the warranty
suspect.
P250D- Engine Oil Level  Oil temperature level sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
24 Sensor Circuit High - circuit short to power system check datalogger signal, Sump Oil
signal stuck high  Oil temperature level sensor Temperature - Measured (0x03F3). Refer to the
failure electrical circuit diagrams and check oil
temperature level sensor circuit for short to power.
Check and install a new oil temperature level
sensor as required. Refer to the warranty policy
P2544- Torque Management  Inappropriate request from Check for related DTCs within Anti-lock Braking
64 Request Input Signal A Anti-lock Braking System System (ABS) module and refer to the relevant
- signal plausibility (ABS) DTC index. Carry out the CAN network integrity
failure test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
P2544- Torque Management  Inappropriate request from Check for related DTCs within Anti-lock Braking
92 Request Input Signal A Anti-lock Braking System System (ABS) module and refer to the relevant
- performance or (ABS) DTC index. Carry out the CAN network integrity
incorrect operation test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
P2610- ECM/PCM Internal  Instrument Panel Cluster Check for DTCs related to any of the components
00 Engine Off Timer (IPC) fault listed and refer to relevant DTC Index. Carry out
Performance - no sub  Central Junction Box (CJB) the CAN network integrity test using the
type information fault manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
 CAN network error
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off  Instrument Panel Cluster Check for DTCs related to any of the components
84 Timer Performance - (IPC) fault listed and refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the
signal below allowable  Central Junction Box (CJB) electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
range fault coolant temperature sensor circuit for short to
 Engine coolant temperature ground, power, open circuit. Refer to the electrical
sensor fault circuit diagrams and check ambient air
 Ambient temperature sensor temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
fault power, open circuit. Check the battery voltage,
 Low battery voltage repair as required. Carry out the CAN network
 CAN network error integrity test using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system.
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off  Instrument Panel Cluster Check for DTCs related to any of the components
85 Timer Performance - (IPC) fault listed and refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the
signal above allowable  Central Junction Box (CJB) electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
range fault coolant temperature sensor circuit for short to
 Engine coolant temperature ground, power, open circuit. Refer to the electrical
fault power, open circuit. Check the battery voltage,
 Low battery voltage repair as required. Carry out the CAN network
diagnostic system.
P2610- ECM/PCM Internal  Instrument Panel Cluster Check for DTCs related to any of the components
87 Engine Off Timer (IPC) fault listed, and refer to relevant DTC Index, refer to
Performance - missing  Central Junction Box (CJB) the electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
message fault coolant temperature sensor circuit for short to
 Engine coolant temperature ground, power, open circuit, refer to the electrical
fault power, open circuit, carry out the CAN network
diagnostic system.
U0001- High Speed CAN  High speed CAN bus circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
88 Communication Bus - short to ground CAN network for short to ground, power, open
bus off  High speed CAN bus circuit, circuit. Using the manufacturer approved
short to power diagnostic system, carry out network integrity
 High speed CAN bus, open test.
circuit
U0101- Lost Communication  CAN link Engine Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 with TCM - no sub Module (ECM)/Transmission system, check Transmission Control Module (TCM)
type information Control Module (TCM) for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
network malfunction Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
 Transmission Control Module system, carry out network integrity test. Refer to
(TCM) fault the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Transmission Control Module (TCM) power and
ground circuit for open circuit. Check CAN harness
to Transmission Control Module (TCM), repair as
necessary.
U0103- Lost Communication  CAN link Engine Control Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
00 with Gear Shift Control Module (ECM)/Gear Shift power and ground connections to the Gear Shift
Module A - no sub type Module (GSM) network Module (GSM). Carry out the CAN integrity tests
information malfunction using the manufacturer approved diagnostic tool.
U0104- Lost Communication  Vehicle configured for speed Check vehicle has correct speed control module
00 With Cruise Control control, but speed control installed. Using the manufacturer approved
Module - no sub type module is not installed diagnostic system, check speed control module,
information  CAN Link Engine Control Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for DTCs
Module (ECM)/speed control and refer to the relevant DTC Index. Using the
module network malfunction manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry
 Speed control module power out network integrity test. Refer to the electrical
or ground circuit, open circuit diagrams and check speed control module
circuit power and ground circuit for open circuit. Check
CAN harness to speed control module, repair as
necessary.
U0121- Lost Communication  CAN Link Engine Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 With Anti-lock Braking Module (ECM)/Anti-lock system, check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
System (ABS) Control Braking System (ABS) module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Module - no sub type module network malfunction Index. Using the manufacturer approved
information  Anti-lock Braking System diagnostic system, carry out network integrity
(ABS) module power or test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground circuit, open circuit check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module
power and ground circuit for open circuit. Check
CAN harness to Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
module, repair as necessary.
U0128- Lost Communication  CAN Link Engine Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Park Brake Module (ECM)/Electronic power and ground supplies to Electronic Parking
Control Module - no Parking Brake (EPB) signal Brake (EPB). Carry out the CAN network integrity
sub type information missing network malfunction test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
U0132- Lost Communication  CAN link/suspension control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 with Suspension module network malfunction power and ground supplies to suspension control
Control Module A - no module. Carry out the CAN network integrity test
sub type information using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
U0151- Lost Communication  Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 with Restraints Control Restraints Control Module power and ground supplies to restraints control
Module - no sub type (RCM) over CAN or module. Carry out the CAN network integrity test
information hardwired link using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
U0151- Lost Communication  Lost communication due to Check Restraints Control Module for associated
87 with Restraints Control Restraints Control Module DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the
Module - missing (RCM) fault electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
message ground supplies to restraints control module. Carry
out the CAN network integrity test using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
U0155- Lost Communication  CAN link between Engine Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 with Instrument Panel Control Module (ECM) and power and ground supplies to Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC) - no sub Instrument Panel Cluster Cluster. Carry out the CAN network integrity test
type information (IPC) fault using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
U0167- Lost Communication  Security challenge response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 with Vehicle timeout power and ground supplies to the Electric Steering
Immobilizer Control  Battery fault Column Lock (ESCL). Check for related CAN DTCs
Module - no sub type and refer to the relevant DTC index. Ensure the
information battery is in a fully charged and serviceable
condition. Refer to the battery care manual and
the relevant sections of the workshop manual.
Carry out the CAN network integrity test using the
U0300- Internal Control  Engine Control Module Check and install the correct Engine Control
00 Module Software (ECM) has incorrect software Module (ECM) software. Check and install the
Incompatibility - no installed correct Engine Control Module (ECM) as required.
sub type information  The Engine Control Module Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
(ECM) is in expulsion mode. manual if a module is suspect.
An incorrect specification
Engine Control Module
(ECM) has been installed to
the vehicle
U0402- Invalid Data Received  Transmission Engine Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 From Transmission Module (ECM) request system, check Transmission Control Module (TCM),
Control Module - no corruption for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
sub type information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, carry out network integrity test. Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check high
speed CAN bus circuit for short, open circuit.
U0402- Invalid Data Received  Transmission Engine Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
08 from TCM - bus Module (ECM) request system, check Transmission Control Module (TCM),
signal / message corruption for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
failures  High speed CAN bus circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure, short, open circuit system, carry out network integrity test. Refer to
U0402- Invalid Data Received  Transmission to Engine Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 from TCM - Signal Control Module (ECM) system, check Transmission Control Module (TCM),
plausibility failure request corruption for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
 High speed CAN bus signal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
corruption system, carry out network integrity test. Refer to
U0402- Invalid Data Received  Transmission Control Module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
82 from TCM - alive / (TCM) shaft-speed faults system, check Transmission Control Module (TCM),
sequence counter for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
incorrect / not updated
U0402- Invalid Data Received  Transmission Control Module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
83 from TCM - Value of (TCM) shaft-speed faults system, check Transmission Control Module (TCM),
signal protection for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
calculation incorrect
U0415- Invalid Data Received  Electronic throttle unit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 From Anti-lock Braking throttle position sensor 1 system, check for electronic throttle unit DTCs
System (ABS) Control failure repair as necessary. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module - no sub type  Electronic throttle unit, diagrams and check electronic unit harness for
information throttle position sensor 2 short circuit, open circuit. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual if a module is
 Electronic throttle unit suspect, if the electronic throttle unit is suspect.
harness short, open circuit
U0415- Invalid Data Received  Invalid request from Anti- Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
64 From Anti-lock Braking lock Braking System (ABS) system, check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), for
System (ABS) Control  Torque up request higher DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index. Refer to
Module - signal than expected from Anti-lock the electrical circuit diagrams and check high
plausibility failure Braking System (ABS) speed CAN bus circuit for short, open circuit.
U0415- Invalid Data Received  Torque up request higher Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
67 From Anti-lock Braking than expected from Anti-lock system, check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), for
System (ABS) Control Braking System (ABS) DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index. Refer to
Module - signal the electrical circuit diagrams and check high
incorrect after event speed CAN bus circuit for short, open circuit.
U0426- Invalid Data Received  Security code mis-match Check CAN network between Engine Control
00 From Vehicle  This DTC will be logged if Module (ECM), Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) and
Immobilizer Control the encrypted data Central Junction Box (CJB). Refer to the electrical
Module - no sub type exchange does not match circuit diagrams and check power and ground
information between Engine Control circuit to Engine Control Module (ECM) and
Module (ECM) and the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC). Check correct
Instrument Panel Cluster Engine Control Module (ECM) and Instrument
(IPC) or Central Junction Panel Cluster (IPC) installed. Re-synchronise ID by
Box (CJB) re-configuring the Engine Control Module (ECM)
and Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) as new
modules.
U0447- Invalid Data Received  The LIN to high speed CAN This DTC has been inhibited in the Engine Control
81 From Gateway "A" - gateway has informed the Module (ECM), as the LIN bus flag is set during
invalid serial data Engine Control Module normal operation.
received (ECM) of a failure
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
WARNING: Where possible, all road tests should be on well surfaced and dry roads. Always comply with speed
limits and local traffic regulations.
NOTE: The vehicle must exceed 50mph (80 km/h) during the road test.

fault codes.
5. NOTE: Make sure cruise control is not engaged.
Make sure the engine temperature is above 60 ºC (140 ºF).
Carry out a road test and perform the following operations.

1. Accelerate to 55 mph (88 km/h) in 5th gear and cruise
for 2 minutes with the engine speed at or above
1800rpm.
2. Lift off the throttle and allow the vehicle to decelerate
until the engine speed is less than 1000 rpm.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Release brake, allow the vehicle to move with no throttle
for 1 minute.
5. Road test is now complete.

fault codes.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures

fault codes.
minutes until a temperature of 70ºC (158 ºF) is
achieved.


fault codes.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft Position (CMP)
Sensor LH
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).

Installation).
All vehicles
4.
 Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
material.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft Position (CMP)
Sensor RH
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).

Installation).
All vehicles
4.
 Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
material.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor Sensor
LH
Removal



and Installation).

5.
6.

 Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:





Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor Sensor
RH
Removal



and Installation).
4.
5.
 Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:





Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Position (CKP)
Sensor
Removal


and Installation).
dismantling.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Make sure that the component is clean, free of foreign

material and lubricant.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Control Module
(ECM)
Removal

2.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5. Torque: 6 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 7 Nm
8. Torque: 9 Nm
Installation

2. Configure the engine control module (ECM) using the diagnostic
tool.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Removal


Procedures).
4.
 Lift the tang and rotate the engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor counter-
clockwise.
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Level Sensor
Removal


and Installation).
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01D, General
Procedures).

fluids.
Torque: 11 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be installed.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Front Knock Sensor (KS)
LH
Removal

3. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Front Knock Sensor (KS)
RH
Removal

3. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP)
Sensor
Removal

Procedures).
3.

fluids.
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are

Torque: 32 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor
(HO2S) LH
Special Tool(s)
310-121
Wrench, H02S
Removal



and Installation).
5.
6.
7.


Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

HO2S tip.

or driveshaft.



Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor
(HO2S) RH
Special Tool(s)
310-121
Wrench, H02S
Removal



and Installation).
5.
6.


Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

HO2S tip.

or driveshaft.



Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Manifold Absolute Pressure
and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor
Removal
2. Torque: 5 Nm
Installation


Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Mass Air Flow (MAF)
Sensor
Removal


2. Refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
3.
Installation


Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Rear Knock Sensor (KS)
LH
Removal

3. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Rear Knock Sensor (KS)
RH
Removal

3. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Variable Valve Timing
(VVT) Oil Control Solenoid LH
Removal
All vehicles


and Installation).

Installation).
All vehicles
5.
6. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation


Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Variable Valve Timing (VVT)
Oil Control Solenoid RH
Removal
All vehicles


Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).

Installation).
All vehicles
5. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-
Test (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
-

Specifications
high temperature grease Molecote FB180 / Jaguar 8309
transmission fluid Shell M1375.4
Capacities
Liters
Transmission fluid vehicles without supercharger 10.0
Transmission fluid vehicles with supercharger 10.0
Service fill 6.0
NOTE: * New nut/bolt must be installed
NOTE: A = refer to the procedure for correct torque sequence
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Crossmember to vehicle body retaining bolts 48 35 -
Fluid pan, gasket and filter retaining bolts 8 - 71
Mass damper to crossmember retaining bolts 10 7 -
Output shaft flange retaining nut* 60 44 -
Selector lever to transmission retaining nut 12 9 -
Support insulator to crossmember retaining bolts 70 52 -
Support insulator to transmission retaining bolts 48 35 -
Flexplate to torque converter retaining bolts 62 46 -
Torque converter housing to engine 48 35 -
Transmission control module and Main control valve body retaining bolts 8 - 71
Transmission fluid - drain plug 8 - 71
Transmission fluid - fill plug A - -
Transmission heat shield 9 7 -
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Transmission Description
COMPONENT LOCATION
INTRODUCTION
The ZF 6HP28 transmission is an electronically controlled, hydraulically operated, six speed automatic unit. The hydraulic and
electronic control elements of the transmission, including the TCM (transmission control module), are incorporated in a single
unit located inside the transmission and is known as 'Mechatronic'.
On SC (supercharger) models, the transmission used is an uprated derivative of the ZF 6HP28 transmission used in the 5.0L
naturally aspirated models.
The ZF 6HP28 transmission has the following features:
 Designed to be maintenance free

 Transmission fluid is 'fill for life'
 The torque converter features a controlled slip feature with electronically regulated control of lock-up, creating a
www.JagDocs.com
smooth transition to the fully locked condition
 Shift programs controlled by the TCM
 Electronic park lock, controlled by the TCM, with a mechanical emergency release
 ASIS (adaptive shift strategy), to provide continuous adaptation of shift changes to suit the driving style of the
driver, which can vary from sporting to economical.
 Connected to the ECM (engine control module) via the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus for
communications
 Default mode if major faults occur
 Diagnostics available from the TCM via the high speed CAN bus.
The transmission selections are made using the rotary JaguarDrive selector in the floor console and two paddle switches on
the steering wheel.
For additional information, refer to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 5.0L
TRANSMISSION
The transmission comprises the main casing which houses all of the transmission components. The main casing also
incorporates an integral bell housing.
A fluid pan is attached to the lower face of the main casing and is secured with bolts. The fluid pan is sealed to the main
casing with a gasket. Removal of the fluid pan allows access to the Mechatronic valve block. The fluid pan has a magnet
located around the drain plug which collects any metallic particles present in the transmission fluid.
A fluid filter is located inside the fluid pan. If the transmission fluid becomes contaminated or after any service work, the
fluid pan with integral filter must be replaced.
The integral bell housing provides protection for the torque converter assembly and also provides the attachment for the
gearbox to the engine cylinder block. The torque converter is a non-serviceable assembly which also contains the lock-up
clutch mechanism. The torque converter drives a crescent type pump via drive tangs. The fluid pump is located in the main
casing, behind the torque converter.
The main casing contains the following major components:
 Input shaft
 Output shaft
 Mechatronic valve block which contains the solenoids, speed sensors and the TCM
 Three rotating multiplate drive clutches
 Two fixed multiplate brake clutches
 A single planetary gear train and a double planetary gear train.
1 - Torque converter lock-up clutch
2 - Torque converter
3 - Fluid pump
4 - Single planetary gearset
5 - Clutch A
6 - Clutch B
-
7 Clutch E
8 - Brake C
9 - Brake D
10 - Double planetary gearset
11 - Park lock gear
12 - Output shaft
13 - Park lock pawl
14 - Drain plug
15 - Magnet
16 - Pressure regulator
17 - Mechatronic valve block
18 - Fluid filter
19 - Fluid pan
20 - Input shaft
21 - Bell housing
TORQUE CONVERTER

1 - Impeller
2 - Turbine
3 - Stator
4 - Freewheel clutch
5 - Torque converter hub
6 - Stator shaft
7 - Turbine shaft
8 - Drive plate
9 - Journal - Drive plate/crankshaft location
10 - Torque converter cover
11 - Lock-up clutch piston
- Lock-up clutch plate
12
The torque converter is the coupling element between the engine and the transmission and is located in the bell
housing, on the engine side of the transmission. The driven power from the engine crankshaft is transmitted hydraulically
and mechanically through the torque converter to the transmission. The torque converter is connected to the engine by a
drive plate attached to the rear of the crankshaft.
The torque converter comprises an impeller, a stator and a turbine. The torque converter is a sealed unit with all components
located between the converter housing cover and the impeller. The two components are welded together to form a sealed,
fluid filled housing. With the impeller welded to the converter housing cover, the impeller is therefore driven at engine
crankshaft speed.
The converter housing cover has four threaded bosses, which provide for attachment of the engine drive plate. The threaded
bosses also provide for location of special tools which are required to remove the torque converter from the bell housing.
Impeller
Fluid Flow

1 - Turbine
2 - Stator
3 - Impeller
When the engine is running the rotating impeller acts as a centrifugal pump, picking up fluid at its center and discharging it
at high velocity through the blades on its outer rim. The design and shape of the blades and the curve of the impeller body
cause the fluid to rotate in a clockwise direction as it leaves the impeller. This rotation improves the efficiency of the fluid as
it contacts the outer row of blades on the turbine.
The centrifugal force of the fluid leaving the blades of the impeller is passed to the curved inner surface of the turbine via the
tip of the blades. The velocity and clockwise rotation of the fluid causes the turbine to rotate.
Turbine
The turbine is similar in design to the impeller with a continuous row of blades. Fluid from the impeller enters the turbine
through the tip of the blades and is directed around the curved body of the turbine to the root of the blades. The curved
surface redirects the fluid back in the opposite direction to which it entered the turbine, effectively increasing the turning
force applied to the turbine from the impeller. This principle is known as torque multiplication.
When engine speed increases, turbine speed also increases. The fluid leaving the inner row of the turbine blades is rotated in
a counter-clockwise direction due to the curve of the turbine and the shape of the blades. The fluid is now flowing in the
opposite direction to the engine rotation and therefore the impeller. If the fluid was allowed to hit the impeller in this
condition, it would have the effect of applying a brake to the impeller, eliminating the torque multiplication effect. To prevent
this, the stator is located between the impeller and the turbine.
Stator
The stator is located on the splined transmission input shaft via a freewheel clutch. The stator comprises a number of blades
which are aligned in an opposite direction to those of the impeller and turbine. The main function of the stator is to redirect
the returning fluid from the turbine, changing its direction to that of the impeller.
The redirected fluid from the stator is directed at the inner row of blades of the impeller, assisting the engine in turning the
impeller. This sequence increases the force of the fluid emitted from the impeller and thereby increases the torque
multiplication effect of the torque converter.
Stator Functions
NOTE: The following illustration shows a typical stator

1 - Blades
2 - Stator held – fluid flow redirected
3 - Stator rotates freely
4 - Roller
5 - Converter at coupling speed
6 - Fluid flow from turbine
7 - Converter multiplying
8 - Fluid flow from impeller
9 - Drive from engine
10 - Impeller
11 - Stator
12 - Turbine
13 - Output to transmission
Fluid emitted from the impeller acts on the turbine. If the turbine is rotating at a slower speed than the fluid from the
impeller, the fluid will be deflected by the turbine blades in the path 'A'. The fluid is directed at and deflected by the stator
blades from path 'B' to path 'C'. This ensures that the fluid is directed back to the pump in the optimum direction. In this
condition the sprag clutch is engaged and the force of the fluid on the stator blades assists the engine in rotating the
impeller.
As the rotational speed of the engine and therefore the turbine increases, the direction of the fluid leaving the turbine
changes to path 'D'. The fluid is now directed from the turbine to the opposite side of the stator blades, rotating the stator in
the opposite direction. To prevent the stator from resisting the smooth flow of the fluid from the turbine, the sprag clutch
releases, allowing the stator to rotate freely on its shaft.
When the stator becomes inactive, the torque converter no longer multiplies the engine torque. When the torque converter
reaches this operational condition it ceases to multiply the engine torque and acts solely as a fluid coupling, with the impeller
and the turbine rotating at approximately the same speed.
The stator uses a sprag type, one way, freewheel clutch. When the stator is rotated in a clockwise direction the sprags twist
and are wedged between the inner and outer races. In this condition the sprags transfer the rotation of the outer race to the
inner race which rotates at the same speed.
One Way Free Wheel Clutch – Typical

1 - Sprags
2 - Inner race
3 - Outer race
4 - Sprag and cage assembly
5 - Sprag outer race
6 - Sprag inner race
7 - Retaining ring
The free wheel clutch can perform three functions; hold the stator stationary, drive the stator and free wheel allowing the
stator to rotate without a drive output. The free wheel clutch used in the ZF 6HP28 transmission is of the sprag type and
comprises an inner and outer race and a sprag and cage assembly. The inner and outer races are pressed into their related
components with which they rotate. The sprag and cage assembly is located between the inner and outer races.
The sprags are located in a cage which is a spring which holds the sprags in the 'wedge' direction and maintains them in
contact with the inner and outer races.
Referring to the illustration, the sprags are designed so that the dimension 'B' is larger than the distance between the inner
and outer race bearing surfaces. When the outer race rotates in a clockwise direction, the sprags twist and the edges across
the dimension 'B' wedge between the races, providing a positive drive through each sprag to the inner race. The dimension
'A' is smaller than the distance between the inner and outer race bearing surfaces. When the outer race rotates in an anti-
clockwise direction, the dimension 'A' is too small to allow the sprags to wedge between the races, allowing the outer race to
rotate freely.
On the illustration shown, when the outer race is rotated in a clockwise direction, the sprags twist and are 'wedged' between
the inner and outer races. The sprags then transfer the rotation of the outer race to the inner race, which rotates at the
same speed.
Lock-Up Clutch Mechanism
The TCC (torque converter clutch) is hydraulically controlled by an EPRS (electronic pressure regulating solenoid), which is
controlled by the TCM. This allows the torque converter to have three states of operation as follows:
 • Fully engaged
 • Controlled slip variable engagement
 • Fully disengaged.
The TCC is controlled by two hydraulic spool valves located in the valve block. These valves are actuated by pilot pressure
supplied via a solenoid valve which is also located in the valve block. The solenoid valve is operated by PWM (pulse width
modulation) signals from the TCM to give full, partial or no lock-up of the torque converter.

A - Unlocked condition
B - Locked condition
1 - Clutch plate
2 - Clutch piston
3 - Torque converter body
4 - Turbine
5 - Impeller
6 - Stator
7 - Piston chamber
8 - Turbine chamber
The lock-up clutch is a hydro-mechanical device which eliminates torque converter slip, improving fuel consumption. The
engagement and disengagement is controlled by the TCM to allow a certain amount of controlled 'slip'. This allows a small
difference in the rotational speeds of the impeller and the turbine which results in improved shift quality. The lock-up clutch
comprises a piston and a clutch friction plate.
In the unlocked condition, the oil pressure supplied to the piston chamber and the turbine chamber is equal. Pressurized fluid
flows through a drilling in the turbine shaft and through the piston chamber to the turbine chamber. In this condition the
clutch plate is held away from the torque converter body and torque converter slip is permitted.
In the locked condition, the TCC spool valves are actuated by the EPRS. The fluid flow in the unlocked condition is reversed
and the piston chamber is vented. Pressurized fluid is directed into the turbine chamber and is applied to the clutch piston.
The piston moves with the pressure and pushes the clutch plate against the torque converter body. As the pressure
increases, the friction between the clutch plate and the body increases, finally resulting in full lock-up of the clutch plate with
the body. In this condition there is direct mechanical drive from the engine crankshaft to the transmission planetary gear
train.
FLUID PUMP
The fluid pump is an integral part of the transmission. The fluid pump is used to supply hydraulic pressure for the operation
of the control valves and clutches, to pass the fluid through the transmission cooler and to lubricate the gears and shafts.
The ZF 6HP28 fluid pump is a crescent type pump and is located between the intermediate plate and the torque converter.
The pump has a delivery rate of 16 cm3 per revolution.
1 - Securing ring
2 - Shaft oil seal
3 - O-ring seal
4 - Pump housing
5 - Ring gear
6 - Crescent spacer
7 - Roller bearing
8 - Impeller
9 - Centering pin
10 - Spring washer
11 - Outlet port (high pressure)
12 - Inlet port (low pressure)
The pump comprises a housing, a crescent spacer, an impeller and a ring gear. The housing has inlet and outlet ports to
direct flow and is located in the intermediate plate by a centering pin. The pump action is achieved by the impeller, ring gear
and crescent spacer.
The crescent spacer is fixed in its position by a pin and is located between the ring gear and the impeller. The impeller is
driven by drive from the torque converter hub which is located on a needle roller bearing in the pump housing. The impeller
teeth mesh with those of the ring gear. When the impeller is rotated, the motion is transferred to the ring gear which rotates
in the same direction.
The rotational motion of the ring gear and the impeller collects fluid from the intake port in the spaces between the teeth.
When the teeth reach the crescent spacer, the oil is trapped in the spaces between the teeth and is carried with the rotation
of the gears. The spacer tapers near the outlet port. This reduces the space between the gear teeth causing a build up of
fluid pressure as the oil reaches the outlet port. When the teeth pass the end of the spacer the pressurized fluid is released
into the outlet port.
The fluid emerging from the outlet port is passed through the fluid pressure control valve. At high operating speeds the
pressure control valve maintains the output pressure to the gearbox at a predetermined maximum level. Excess fluid is
relieved from the pressure control valve and is directed, via the main pressure valve in the valve block, back to the pump
inlet port. This provides a pressurized feed to the pump inlet which prevents cavitation and reduces pump noise.
MECHATRONIC VALVE BLOCK
The Mechatronic valve block is located in the bottom of the transmission and is covered by the fluid pan. The valve block
houses the TCM, electrical actuators, speed sensors and control valves which provide all electro-hydraulic control for all
transmission functions. The Mechatronic valve block comprises the following components:
 TCM
 Pressure regulator solenoids
 Shift control solenoid
 Damper
 Hydraulic spool valves
 Selector valve
 Temperature sensor
 Turbine speed sensor
 Output shaft speed sensor.
Sensors
Speed Sensors
The turbine speed sensor and the output shaft speed sensor are Hall effect type sensors located in the Mechatronic valve
block and are not serviceable items. The TCM monitors the signals from each sensor to determine the input (turbine) speed
and the output shaft speed.
The turbine speed is monitored by the TCM to calculate the slip of the torque converter clutch and internal clutch slip. This
signal allows the TCM to accurately control the slip timing during shifts and adjust clutch application or release pressure for
overlap shift control.
The output shaft speed is monitored by the TCM and compared to engine speed signals received on the CAN bus from the
ECM. Using a comparison of the two signals the TCM calculates the transmission slip ratio for plausibility and maintains
adaptive pressure control.
Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor is also located in the Mechatronic valve block. The TCM uses the temperature sensor signals to
determine the temperature of the transmission fluid. These signals are used by the TCM to control the transmission
operation to promote faster warm-up in cold conditions or to assist with fluid cooling by controlling the transmission
operation when high fluid temperatures are experienced. If the sensor fails, the TCM will use a default value and a fault code
will be stored in the TCM.
Damper
There is one damper located in the valve housing. The damper is used to regulate and dampen the regulated pressure
supplied via EPRS. The damper is load dependent through modulation of the damper against return spring pressure.
The damper comprises a piston, a housing bore and a spring. The piston is subject to the pressure applied by the spring. The
bore has a connecting port to the function to which it applies. Fluid pressure applied to the applicable component (i.e. a
clutch) is also subjected to the full area of the piston, which moves against the opposing force applied by the spring. The
movement of the piston creates an action similar to a shock absorber, momentarily delaying the build up of pressure in the
circuit. This results in a more gradual application of clutches improving shift quality.
Spool Valves
The valve block spool valves control various functions of the transmission. The spool valves are of conventional design and
are operated by fluid pressure.
Each spool valve is located in its spool bore and held in a default (unpressurized) position by a spring. The spool bore has a
number of ports which allow fluid to flow to other valves and clutches to enable transmission operation. Each spool has a
piston which is waisted to allow fluid to be diverted into the applicable ports when the valve is operated.
When fluid pressure moves a spool, one or more ports in the spool bore are covered or uncovered. Fluid is prevented from
flowing or is allowed to flow around the applicable waisted area of the spool and into another uncovered port. The fluid is
either passed through galleries to actuate another spool, operate a clutch or is returned to the fluid pan.
DRIVE CLUTCHES
Multiplate Drive or Brake Clutch – Typical

1 - Input shaft
2 - Main pressure supply port
3 - Piston
4 - Cylinder – external plate carrier
5 - Clutch plate assembly
6 - Baffle plate
7 - Diaphragm spring
8 - Output shaft
9 - Bearing
10 - Dynamic pressure equalization chamber
11 - Piston chamber
12 - Lubrication channel
There are three drive clutches and two brake clutches used in the ZF 6HP28 transmission. Each clutch comprises one or
more friction plates dependent on the output controlled. A typical clutch consists of a number of steel outer plates and inner
plates with friction material bonded to each face.
On SC models, the uprated transmission includes additional clutch plates to enable the transmission to manage the
additional power output of the SC engine.
The clutch plates are held apart mechanically by a diaphragm spring and hydraulically by dynamic pressure. The pressure is
derived from a lubrication channel which supplies fluid to the bearings etc. The fluid is passed via a drilling in the output
shaft into the chamber between the baffle plate and the piston. To prevent inadvertent clutch application due to pressure
build up produced by centrifugal force, the fluid in the dynamic pressure equalization chamber overcomes any pressure in
the piston chamber and holds the piston off the clutch plate assembly.
When clutch application is required, main pressure from the fluid pump is applied to the piston chamber from the supply
port. This main pressure overcomes the low pressure fluid present in the dynamic pressure equalization chamber. The piston
moves, against the pressure applied by the diaphragm spring, and compresses the clutch plate assembly. When the main
pressure falls, the diaphragm spring pushes the piston away from the clutch plate assembly, disengaging the clutch.
PLANETARY GEAR TRAINS
The planetary gear trains used on the ZF 6HP28 transmission comprise a single web planetary gear train and a double web
planetary gear train. These gear trains are known as Lepelletier type gear trains and together produce the six forward gears
and the one reverse gear.
Single Web Planetary Gear Train
The single web planetary gear train comprises:
 Sunwheel
 Three (naturally aspirated versions) or four (SC versions) planetary gears
 Planetary gear carrier (spider)
 Ring gear or annulus.

1 - Cylinder
2 - Baffle plate
3 - Ring gear
4 - Sun gear
5 - Planetary gear spider
6 - Torque converter input shaft
Torque Converter Input Shaft

1 - Planetary gear spider
2 - Planetary gears (short)
3 - Ring gear
4 - Output shaft
5 - Planetary gear carrier
6 - Sunwheel
7 - Double planetary gears (long)
-
8 Sunwheel
The double planetary gear train comprises:
 Two sunwheels
 Three short planetary gears
 Three long planetary gears
 Planetary gear carrier
 Ring gear or annulus
ELECTRONIC PARK LOCK
The park lock is electronically actuated by solenoid valve located in the valve block. The park lock is engaged by a
mechanical spring system comprising a parking disc and a lock cylinder controlled by a solenoid valve.
The park lock is engaged when the TCM receives a park request from the JaguarDrive selector. When the park lock is
released, a solenoid valve in the valve housing directs hydraulic pressure to the lock cylinder, which moves the piston within
the cylinder and releases the park lock pawl at the rear of the transmission by means of a connecting rod. The solenoid on
the lock cylinder is energized and locks the cylinder piston in the unlocked position. Additional locking of the piston is
achieved with ball catches within the lock cylinder.
When park is selected, the solenoid on the lock cylinder is de-energized, the ball catches are released and the piston is free
to move in the lock cylinder. The solenoid in the valve housing is also de-energized. The spring loaded parking disc pulls the
cylinder piston in the park direction which allows the park disc to move on its mounting. This movement is transferred via the
connecting rod to parking pawl, which is engaged in the park lock gear.
If an electrical failure occurs, the park lock can be manually released by means of an emergency park release lever located in
the floor console. The lever is connected to the parking disc by a cable and allows the park lock to be released manually. For
additional information, refer to 307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
The TCM is an integral part of the Mechatronic valve block which is located at the bottom of the transmission, within the fluid
pan. The TCM is the main controlling component of the transmission.
The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, ECM and other vehicle systems. From the
received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the module calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting and
optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; B = K bus; D = High speed CAN bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus

1 - Battery
4 - TCM
5 - JaguarDrive selector
8 - ECM
9 - Clockspring
10 - Steering wheel audio switches
11 - Downshift paddle switch
12 - Upshift paddle switch
Power Flows
Operation of the transmission is controlled by the TCM, which electrically activates various solenoids to control the
transmission gear selection. The sequence of solenoid activation is based on programmed information in the TCM memory
and physical transmission operating conditions such as vehicle speed, throttle position, engine load and JaguarDrive selector
position.

1 - Torque input from engine
2 - Torque converter lock-up clutch
3 - Single web planetary gear carrier
4 - Single web planetary gears
5 - Single web sunwheel 1
6 - Double web sunwheel 2
7 - Double web planetary gears - long
8 - Double web planetary gear carrier
9 - Double web planetary gears - short
10 - Double web sunwheel 3
11 - Torque output from transmission
A - Multiplate clutch
B - Multiplate clutch
C - Multiplate brake
D - Multiplate brake
E - Multiplate clutch
Engine torque is transferred, via operation of single or combinations of clutches to the 2 planetary gear trains. Both gear
trains are controlled by reactionary inputs from brake clutches to produce the 6 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. The ratios
are as follows:
Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th Reverse

Ration 4.171 2.340 1.521 1.143 0.867 0.691 3.403
Shift Elements

1 - Turbine shaft
2 - Stator shaft
3 - Single web planetary gear train
4 - Ring gear 1
5 - Clutch A
6 - Clutch B
7 - Clutch E
8 - Brake clutch C
9 - Fixed connection to transmission housing
10 - Shaft key
11 - Brake clutch D
12 - Double web planetary gear train
13 - Planetary gears - long
14 - Ring gear 2
15 - Sunwheel 2
16 - Sunwheel 3
17 - Double web planetary gear carrier
18 - Planetary gears - short
19 - Single web planetary gear carrier
20 - Sunwheel 1
The shift elements are three rotating multiplate clutches (A, B and E) and two fixed multiplate brakes © and D). All shifts
from 1st to 6th gears are power-on overlapping shifts. Overlapping shifts can be described as one of the clutches continuing
to transmit drive at a lower main pressure until the next required clutch is able to accept the input torque.
The shift elements, clutches and brakes are actuated hydraulically. Fluid pressure is applied to the required clutch and/or
brake, pressing the plates together and allowing drive to be transmitted through the plates. The purpose of the shift
elements is to perform power-on shifts with no interruption to traction and smooth transition between gear ratios.
Power Flow 1st Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector valve spool are in the 'D' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
converter turbine shaft to the ring gear 1 of the single web planetary gear train and the outer plate carrier of clutch 'E'.
Ring gear 1 drives the planetary gears which rotate around sunwheel 1. This drives the planetary gear carrier 1 and also the
outer plate carrier of clutch 'A' and the inner plate carrier of clutch 'B'.
When clutch 'A' is engaged, sunwheel 3 in the double web planetary gear train is driven and meshes with the short planetary
gears.
The double web planetary gear train is locked against the transmission housing by brake 'D'. This allows ring gear 2 (output
shaft) to be driven in the same direction as the engine via the long planetary gears.
NOTE: Refer to 'Shift Elements' illustration for key

Power Flow 2nd Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector spool valve are in the 'D' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
gears.
Sunwheel 2 is locked to the transmission housing by brake clutch 'C'. The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with
the short planetary gears, roll around the fixed sunwheel 2 and transmit drive to the double web planetary gear train carrier
and ring gear 2 in the direction of engine rotation.

Power Flow 3rd Gear
gears.
Sunwheel 2 is driven via clutch 'B' which is engaged. The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the short
planetary gears, cannot roll around the fixed sunwheel 2 and therefore transmit drive to the locked double web planetary
gear train carrier in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow 4th Gear
converter turbine shaft to ring gear 1 of the single web planetary gear train and the outer plate carrier of clutch 'E'.
gears.
The double web planetary gear carrier is driven via clutch 'E' which is engaged. The long planetary gears, which are also
meshed with the short planetary gears and the double web planetary gear carrier, drive ring gear 2 in the direction of engine
rotation.
Power Flow 5th Gear
gears.
The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the short planetary gears and the double web planetary gear carrier,
drive ring gear 2 in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow 6th Gear
Clutches 'A' and 'B' are released, removing the effect of the single web planetary gear train.
Clutch brake 'C' is applied which locks sunwheel 2 to the transmission housing.
Clutch 'E' is engaged and drives the double web planetary gear carrier. This causes the long planetary gears to rotate around
the fixed sunwheel 2 and transmit drive to ring gear 2 which is driven in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow Reverse Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector spool valve are in the 'R' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
Ring gear 1 drives the planetary gears of the single web planetary gear train which rotate around the fixed sunwheel 1. This
transmits the drive to the single web planetary gear carrier, the outer plate carrier of clutch 'A' and the inner plate carrier of
clutch 'B'.
With clutch 'B' applied, sunwheel 2 in the double web planetary gear train is driven and meshes with the long planetary
gears.
The double web planetary gear carrier is locked to the transmission housing by brake clutch 'D'. This allows ring gear 2 to be
driven in the opposite direction to engine rotation by the long planetary gears.
Instrument Cluster

1 - Transmission selected gear status
2 - MIL (malfunction indicator lamp)
3 - Message center
The instrument cluster is connected to the TCM via the high speed CAN bus. Transmission status is transmitted by the TCM
and displayed to the driver in one of two displays in the instrument cluster. For additional information, refer to 413-01
Instrument Cluster.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) is located in the tachometer in the instrument cluster. Transmission related faults
which may affect the vehicle emissions output will illuminate the MIL.
The MIL is illuminated by the ECM on receipt of a relevant fault message from the TCM on the high speed CAN. The nature of
the fault can be diagnosed using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system which reads the fault codes stored in the TCM
memory.
Transmission Status Display
The transmission status display is located in a LCD (liquid crystal display) at the top of the instrument cluster, between the
speedometer and the tachometer. The LCD shows the JaguarDrive selector position or the selected gear when in manual
'Jaguar Sequential Shift' mode.
The following table shows the displays and their descriptions.
Symbol Description
P Park selected
R Reverse selected
N Neutral selected
D Drive selected
S Sport mode selected
1 1st gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
2 2nd gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
3 3rd gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
4 4th gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
The message center is located in the lower center of the instrument cluster. The message center is a LCD to relay vehicle
status and operating information to the driver and can display messages relating to a number of the vehicle systems. If a
transmission fault occurs, the message center will display the message 'GEARBOX FAULT'.
Transmission Control Module
The TCM outputs signals to control the shift control solenoid valve and the EPRS to control the hydraulic operation of the
transmission.
The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, the ECM and other vehicle systems. From
the received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the module calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting
and optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.
The ECM supplies the engine management data over the high speed CAN bus. The TCM requires engine data to efficiently
control the transmission operation, for example; flywheel torque, engine speed, accelerator pedal angle, engine
temperature. The steering angle sensor and the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module also supply data to the TCM on the
high speed CAN bus. The TCM uses data from these systems to suspend gear changes when the vehicle is cornering and/or
the ABS module is controlling braking or traction control.
Using the signal inputs and the memorized data, the TCM control program computes the correct gear and torque converter
lock-up clutch setting and the optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control. Special output-side
modules (power output stages, current regulator circuits), allow the TCM to control the solenoid valves and pressure
regulators and consequently precisely control the hydraulics of the automatic transmission. In addition, the amount and
duration of engine interventions are supplied to the engine management by way of the CAN bus.
The transmission has a fully electronic JaguarDrive selector with no Bowden cable connection to the transmission. The
transmission selections are made using a rotary JaguarDrive selector which rises from the floor console once the engine is
running. Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM via the high speed CAN bus.
The TCM then reacts according to the selected position. The 'S' (sport) position selection allows the TCM to operate the
transmission using the semi-automatic 'Jaguar Sequential Shift'.
Gear selections are sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the JaguarDrive
selector position is confirmed, the TCM outputs appropriate information on the high speed CAN bus.
If the JaguarDrive selector is in 'D', 'Jaguar Sequential Shift' is temporary and will cancel after a time period or can be
cancelled by pressing and holding the + paddle for approximately 2 seconds.
If the JaguarDrive selector is in 'S', 'Jaguar Sequential Shift' is permanent and can only be cancelled by pressing and holding
the + paddle for approximately 2 seconds or by moving the JaguarDrive selector to the 'D' position.
The TCM can be reprogrammed using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system using a flash code. The TCM processor has a
440 kb internal flash memory. Of this capacity, approximately 370 kb are used by the basic transmission program. The
remainder, approximately 70 kb is used to store vehicle-specific application data.
Engine Stall
If the vehicle stalls it will coast down in gear, with the transmission providing drive to the engine. A restart can be attempted
at this point and the engine may start and the driver can continue.
If the coast down speed reduces such that the speed of the engine is less than 600 rev/min, the transmission will go to
neutral, D illumination will flash in the instrument cluster. The driver needs to select neutral or park and then press the
brake pedal to restart the engine.
If the start/stop button is pressed when driving, the message ENGINE STOP BUTTON PRESSED is displayed in the message
center but there will be no change to the ignition state. If the driver requires to switch off the engine, the start/stop button
must be pressed for a second time. The engine will be stopped and will be back driven by the transmission as the vehicle
coasts down. When the engine speed is less than 600 rev/min the transmission engages neutral (flashing D illumination in
the instrument cluster). When vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h (1.2 mph) Park is engaged. The JaguarDrive selector
automatically rotates back to its lowered P position and the vehicle ignition is switched off.
The park engagement is prevented in a stall case as the ignition power is on and D was the last selected gear. The park
engagement speed at ignition off is from the least value of the wheel speeds (CAN signal) and transmission output speed
(internal signal).
- Diagnostic Flow Chart
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission/transaxle, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section n the workshop manual. REFER to: Transmission Description (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Fluid Level and Condition Check
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is low as internal failure can result.
NOTE: The transmission fluid temperature must not be allowed to exceed 50°C (122°F) whilst checking level. Should
the temperature rise above this figure, abort the check and allow the transmission fluid to cool to below 30°C (86°F).
This vehicle is not equipped with a fluid level indicator. An incorrect level may affect the transmission operation and
could result in transmission damage. To correctly check and add fluid to the transmission.
REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
High Fluid Level
A fluid level that is too high may cause the fluid to become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal
parts. This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of fluid from the vent tube and possible transmission
damage. If an overfill condition is identified, with the engine at idle ensure the fluid temperature is within the specified
range and allow the excess fluid to drain until a small thread of fluid runs from the filler/level plug hole.
Low Fluid Level
A low fluid level could result in poor transmission engagement, slipping, or damage. This could also indicate a leak in
one of the transmission seals or gaskets.
REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: The use of any other type of transmission fluid other than that specified can result in transmission
damage.
If fluid needs to be added, add fluid in 0.50 liter increments through the fill hole Opening. Do not overfill the fluid. For
fluid type, refer to the General Specification chart in this section.
REFER to: Specifications (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Specifications).
Fluid Condition Check
1. Check the fluid level.

REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
2. Observe the color and the odor of the fluid. The color under normal circumstances should be Honey.
3. Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain.
4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection.
NOTE: In the event of a transmission unit replacement for internal failure, the oil cooler and pipes must also be
replaced.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical Hydraulic
 Damaged/stuck shift mechanism  Blown fuse(s)  Fluid level too
 Damaged automatic transmission  Damaged, loose or corroded high/low
casing connectors  Poor condition of fluid
 Wiring harness  Fluid leak
4. If the cause is not visually evident check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTE: If the control module/transmission is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
prior to the installation of a new module/transmission.

P0121- Throttle/Pedal Position  Throttle/Pedal Position Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
86 Sensor A Circuit Sensor Fault (Data
Range/Performance - signal received over CAN Bus)
invalid
P0219- Engine Overspeed Condition  Engine speed too low or Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
86 - signal invalid too high (Data received
over CAN Bus)
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A -  Vehicle Speed Sensor Check DSC module for stored DTCs
81 invalid serial data received fault (Data received
over CAN Bus)
P0501- Vehicle Speed Sensor A  Vehicle Speed receive Check Anti-lock braking system module for stored
81 Range/Performance invalid over CAN Bus does not DTCs. Check correct Differential is installed to the
serial data received match Transmission vehicle
Output-Shaft speed
P0561- System Voltage Unstable -  Power supply voltage Check Engine control module for stored DTCs.
1C Circuit voltage out of range out of range when Check Charging System and Battery condition
engine running
P0562- System Voltage Low -  Circuit low voltage. Refer to Circuit diagrams and check Power and
21 signal amplitude < Battery supply voltage Ground Circuit for fault. Check Engine control
minimum to Transmission Control module for stored DTCs. Check Charging System
Module (Transmission and Battery condition
control module)
P0563- System Voltage High -  High Battery charge, Check Engine control module for stored DTCs.
22 signal amplitude > alternator fault Check Charging System and Battery condition
maximum
P0601- Internal Control Module  Software error Re-configure the Transmission control module
41 Memory Check Sum Error -  Transmission control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
general checksum failure module failure system, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains,
Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
new Transmission control module as required,
refer to the new module/component installation
P0604- Internal Control Module  Shift-by-Wire fault Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
00 Random Access Memory new Transmission control module as required,
(RAM) Error - no sub type refer to the new module/component installation
information note at the top of the DTC Index
P0605- Internal Control Module  General checksum Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
41 Read Only Memory (ROM) failure new Transmission control module as required,
Error - general checksum refer to the new module/component installation
failure note at the top of the DTC Index
P0606- Transmission control  Micro controller Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
04 module Processor - System component faults new Transmission control module as required,
Internal Failures refer to the new module/component installation
26 module Processor - signal component faults new Transmission control module as required,
rate of change below refer to the new module/component installation
threshold note at the top of the DTC Index
49 module Processor-internal component faults new Transmission control module as required,
electronic failure refer to the new module/component installation
04 module Processor - System component faults new Transmission control module as required,
06 module Processor - component faults new Transmission control module as required,
Algorithm Based Failures refer to the new module/component installation
P0613- Transmission control  Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
11 module Processor - Circuit new Transmission control module as required,
Short to Ground refer to the new module/component installation
Short to Battery refer to the new module/component installation
Open refer to the new module/component installation
Short to Ground or Open refer to the new module/component installation
21 module Processor - signal new Transmission control module as required,
amplitude < minimum refer to the new module/component installation
22 module Processor - signal new Transmission control module as required,
amplitude > maximum refer to the new module/component installation
47 module Processor - new Transmission control module as required,
watchdog / safety Micro refer to the new module/component installation
controller failure note at the top of the DTC Index
49 module Processor - internal component faults new Transmission control module as required,
electronic failure refer to the new module/component installation
68 module Processor-Event new Transmission control module as required,
Information refer to the new module/component installation
P061B- Internal Control Module  Transmission control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
02 Torque Calculation module - positive torque new Transmission control module as required,
Performance - general signal not valid refer to the new module/component installation
signal failure note at the top of the DTC Index
P061B- Internal Control Module  Transmission control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
26 Torque Calculation module positive torque new Transmission control module as required,
Performance - signal rate of signal not valid refer to the new module/component installation
change below threshold note at the top of the DTC Index
P062F- Internal Control Module  EEPROM communication Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
04 EEPROM Error - System error new Transmission control module as required,
P0642- Sensor Reference Voltage A  Sensor supply voltage Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
21 Circuit Low - signal fault low new Transmission control module as required,
amplitude < minimum refer to the new module/component installation
P0643- Sensor Reference Voltage A  Sensor supply voltage Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
22 Circuit High - signal fault high new Transmission control module as required,
amplitude > maximum refer to the new module/component installation
P0657- Actuator Supply Voltage A  Actuator supply Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
13 Circuit / Open - Circuit (pressure control valves new Transmission control module as required,
Open etc) Open Circuit refer to the new module/component installation
P0657- Actuator Supply Voltage A  Actuator supply Refer to electrical Circuit diagrams and check
1C Circuit / Open - Circuit (pressure control valves Transmission control module connector for signs
voltage out of range etc) voltage plausibility of water ingress or damage, check pin 7 for Short
fault to Power or Ground (should NOT be connected
and harness terminal should have a bung fitted).
If no fault identified, suspect the Transmission
control module. Check and install a new
Transmission control module as required, refer to
the new module/component installation note at
11 Circuit Low - Circuit Short (pressure control valves new Transmission control module as required,
to Ground etc) voltage Short to refer to the new module/component installation
Ground note at the top of the DTC Index
12 Circuit High - Circuit Short (pressure control valves new Transmission control module as required,
to Battery etc) voltage Short to refer to the new module/component installation
Power note at the top of the DTC Index
P0667- PCM / Engine control  General electrical failure Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
01 module / Transmission new Transmission control module as required,
control module Internal refer to the new module/component installation
Temperature Sensor A note at the top of the DTC Index
Range/Performance -
General Electrical Failure
P0667- PCM / Engine control  Internal Electronic Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
04 module / Transmission Failure new Transmission control module as required,
Range/Performance -
System Internal Failures
P0667- PCM / Engine control  Internal electronic Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
49 module / Transmission failure new Transmission control module as required,
Range/Performance -
internal electronic failure
P0700- Transmission Control  General Signal failure Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
02 System (MIL Request) - Investigate as required
General signal failure
P0700- Transmission Control  Double fault from If any of the following DTCs are also present;
22 System (MIL Request) - monitoring of internal
P074013, P096712, P273912, P273012, P272112,
signal amplitude > power supply and P096312, P276312, P097112, suspect the
maximum pressure Transmission control module, check and install a
regulator/solenoid new Transmission control module as required,
control software refer to the new module/component installation
P0700- Transmission Control  Emergency Position Not Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
75 System (MIL Request) - Reachable investigate as required
Emergency Position Not
Reachable
P0710- Transmission Fluid  Transmission fluid Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
13 Temperature Sensor A temperature sensor Transmission control module. Install a new
Circuit - Circuit Open Circuit Open Circuit Transmission control module as required, refer to
P0711- Transmission Fluid  General electrical failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
01 Temperature Sensor A Transmission control module. Install a new
Circuit Range/Performance Transmission control module as required, refer to
- General Electrical Failure the new module/component installation note at
P0711- Transmission Fluid  Signal amplitude > Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
22 Temperature Sensor A maximum. Excessive driving vehicle until normal operating temperature
Circuit Range/Performance jump in temperature is achieved. Reads DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect
- signal amplitude > the Transmission control module. Install a new
maximum Transmission control module as required, refer to
Circuit Low - Circuit Short Circuit Short to Ground Transmission control module as required, refer to
to Ground the new module/component installation note at
P0713- Transmission Fluid  General electrical failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
01 Temperature Sensor A Transmission control module. Install a new
Circuit High-General Transmission control module as required, refer to
Electrical Failure the new module/component installation note at
Circuit High - Circuit Short Circuit Short to Power Transmission control module as required, refer to
to Battery the new module/component installation note at
P0716- Turbine/Input Shaft Speed  Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
14 Sensor A Circuit Speed Sensor Circuit Transmission control module. Install a new
Range/Performance - Short to Ground or Transmission control module as required, refer to
Circuit Short to Ground or Open Circuit the new module/component installation note at
Open the top of the DTC Index
P0716- Turbine/Input Shaft Speed  Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
21 Sensor A Circuit Speed Sensor signal too the Transmission control module. Install a new
Range/Performance - signal small Transmission control module as required, refer to
amplitude < minimum the new module/component installation note at
P0716- Turbine/Input Shaft Speed  Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
22 Sensor A Circuit Speed Sensor signal the Transmission control module. Install a new
Range/Performance - signal above maximum Transmission control module as required, refer to
amplitude > maximum the new module/component installation note at
P0717- Turbine/Input Shaft Speed  Turbine/input shaft Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
12 Sensor A Circuit No Signal - speed sensor A Circuit Transmission control module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Battery Short to Power Transmission control module as required, refer to
P0720- Output Shaft Speed Sensor  Transmission output Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
12 Circuit - Circuit Short to shaft speed sensor Transmission control module. Install a new
Battery Circuit Short to Power Transmission control module as required, refer to
P0720- Output Shaft Speed Sensor  Transmission output Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
14 Circuit - Circuit Short to shaft speed sensor Transmission control module. Install a new
Ground or Open Circuit Short to Ground Transmission control module as required, refer to
or Open Circuit the new module/component installation note at
P0721- Output Shaft Speed Sensor  Transmission output Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
22 Circuit Range/Performance shaft speed sensor the Transmission control module. Install a new
- signal amplitude > signal above maximum Transmission control module as required, refer to
maximum the new module/component installation note at
P0721- Output Shaft Speed Sensor  Output shaft speed Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
27 Circuit Range/Performance negative gradient too the Transmission control module. Install a new
- signal rate of change high Transmission control module as required, refer to
above threshold the new module/component installation note at
P0721- Output Shaft Speed Sensor  Signal plausibility failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
64 Circuit Range/Performance Transmission control module. Install a new
- signal plausibility failure Transmission control module as required, refer to
P0731- Incorrect Gear Ratio-  Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code re-
07 Mechanical Failures Mechanical Failures detects suspect Transmission (gearbox) internal
fault. Install a new Transmission as required, refer
to the new module/component installation note at
P0740- Torque Converter Clutch  Pressure control Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
13 Solenoid Circuit / Open - solenoid 2 Circuit Open Transmission control module. Install a new
Circuit Open Circuit Transmission control module as required, refer to
P0741- Torque Converter Clutch  Too high slip at torque Suspect torque converter lockup clutch. Install a
07 Solenoid Circuit converter clutch. new torque converter, refer to the new
Performance/Stuck Off - Mechanical Failures module/component installation note at the top of
Mechanical Failures the DTC Index. If transmission fluid is in very
poor condition and dirty, install a new
transmission, refer to the new module/component
P0745- Pressure Control Solenoid A  System Internal Failures Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
04 - System Internal Failures new Transmission control module as required,
P0745- Pressure Control Solenoid A  Supervision Software Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
48 - Supervision Software Failure new Transmission control module as required,
Failure refer to the new module/component installation
P0758- Shift Solenoid B Electrical -  Circuit Short to Power Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
12 Circuit Short to Battery new Transmission control module as required,
P0758- Shift Solenoid B Electrical -  Solenoid valve 1 or Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
13 Circuit Open Pressure control new Transmission control module as required,
Solenoid G Circuit Open refer to the new module/component installation
Circuit note at the top of the DTC Index
P0771- Shift Solenoid E  Actuator stuck Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
71 Performance/Stuck Off - new Transmission control module as required,
actuator stuck refer to the new module/component installation
P0775- Pressure Control Solenoid B  System Internal Failures Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
P0775- Pressure Control Solenoid B  Supervision Software Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
48 - Supervision Software Failure new Transmission control module as required,
P0781- 1-2 Shift - Mechanical  Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code re-
07 Failures Mechanical Failures detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
P0781- 2-1 Shift - commanded  Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code re-
77 position not reachable Mechanical Failures detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
P0798- Pressure Control Solenoid C  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
1A Electrical - Circuit solenoid C Circuit new Transmission control module as required,
Resistance Below Threshold resistance below refer to the new module/component installation
1E Electrical - Circuit Short to solenoid C electrical new Transmission control module as required,
Ground circuit short to ground refer to the new module/component installation
P0798- Pressure Control Solenoid C  Pressure Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
21 Electrical - signal amplitude Solenoid C Electrical new Transmission control module as required,
< minimum signal amplitude < refer to the new module/component installation
minimum note at the top of the DTC Index
P0814- Transmission Range Display  Transmission Range Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
62 Circuit - signal compare Display Circuit signal new Transmission control module as required,
failure compare failure refer to the new module/component installation
P0826- Up and Down Switch circuit  Invalid CAN signal from Check Central junction box and Instrument cluster
08 - Bus Signal Message BCM/Instrument cluster for stored DTCs. Check gear change switches for
Failures  Stuck switch correct operation. Refer to circuit diagrams and
 CAN bus circuit fault check CAN bus for a circuit fault
P0826- Up and Down Switch Circuit  Invalid Can signal from Check Central junction box and Instrument cluster
81 - invalid serial data received BCM / Instrument for stored DTCs. Check Gear Change Switches for
cluster correct operation. Refer to Circuit diagrams and
 Stuck switch check CAN Bus for Circuit fault
 CAN Bus Circuit fault
P0826- Up and Down Switch Circuit  SWM to BCM / Check Central junction box and Steering Wheel
88 - Bus off Instrument cluster LIN Ice Switches for stored DTCs. Refer to Circuit
Bus failure diagrams and check LIN Bus for Circuit fault
07 Failures Mechanical Failures detects suspect Transmission internal fault. Install
a new Transmission as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0829- 6-5 Shift - Commanded  Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code re-
77 Position Not Reachable Mechanical Failures detects suspect Transmission internal fault. Install
a new Transmission as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index
P084F- Park / Neutral Switch Input  Wrong voltage level Check for correct output at Transmission control
01 Circuit - General Electrical detected on Park/No module park signal pin (check in all positions) 12
Failure Park signal volts in Park, 0 volts in all other positions. If fault
identified, suspect the Transmission control
module. Install a new Transmission control
module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index. If no fault identified, check Park
signal circuit to Transmission Shift Module for
short, open circuit.
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input  General electrical failure Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
01 Circuit - General Electrical new Transmission control module as required,
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input  General signal failure Check park lock mechanism. If park lock
02 Circuit - General signal operation is correct, suspect the transmission
failure control module. Check and install a new
transmission control module as required. Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input  Signal invalid Check park lock mechanism. If park lock
29 Circuit - signal invalid operation is correct, suspect the transmission
control module. Check and install a new
transmission control module as required. Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
P850- Park / Neutral Switch Input  Circuit voltage out of Check park lock mechanism, if park lock operation
1C Circuit - circuit voltage out range correct suspect the Transmission control module.
of range Install a new Transmission control module as
required, refer to the new module/component
P0919- Gear Shift Position Control  No shifting despite Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
93 Error - no operation driver request new Transmission control module as required,
P0919- Gear Shift Position Control  Shifting without driver Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
94 Error - unexpected request new Transmission control module as required,
operation refer to the new module/component installation
P0938- Hydraulic Oil Temperature  Transmission fluid Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
29 Sensor Range/Performance temperature compared driving vehicle until normal operating temperature
- signal invalid with module is achieved. Read DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect
temperature fault the Transmission control module. Install a new
P0963- Pressure Control Solenoid A  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
12 Control Circuit High - Circuit solenoid 1 Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
Short to Battery to Power refer to the new module/component installation
P0964- Pressure Control Solenoid B  Pressure Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
13 Control Circuit / Open - Solenoid B Control new Transmission control module as required,
Circuit Open Circuit Open refer to the new module/component installation
P0964- Pressure Control Solenoid B  Pressure Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
14 Control Circuit / Open - Solenoid B Control new Transmission control module as required,
Circuit Short to Ground or Circuit Short to Ground refer to the new module/component installation
Open or Open note at the top of the DTC Index
P0966- Pressure Control Solenoid B  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
11 Control Circuit Low - Circuit solenoid 2 Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
Short to Ground to Ground refer to the new module/component installation
P0967- Pressure Control Solenoid B  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
14 Control Circuit / Open - solenoid 3 Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
Circuit Short to Ground or to Ground or Open refer to the new module/component installation
Open Circuit note at the top of the DTC Index
11 Control Circuit Low - Circuit solenoid 3 Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
P0972- Shift Solenoid A Control  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
22 Circuit Range/Performance solenoid 1 current too new Transmission control module as required,
- signal amplitude > large refer to the new module/component installation
maximum note at the top of the DTC Index
P0973- Shift Solenoid A Control  Shift solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
11 Circuit Low - Circuit Short Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission control module as required,
to Ground refer to the new module/component installation
P0973- Shift Solenoid A Control  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
14 Circuit Low - Circuit Short solenoid 1 Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
to Ground or Open to Ground or Open refer to the new module/component installation
Circuit note at the top of the DTC Index
P0973- Shift Solenoid A Control  Shift Solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
1A Circuit Low - Circuit circuit resistance below new Transmission control module as required,
Resistance Below Threshold threshold refer to the new module/component installation
P0973- Shift Solenoid A Control  Shift Solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
1E Circuit Low - Circuit circuit resistance out of new Transmission control module as required,
Resistance Out Of Range range refer to the new module/component installation
P0976- Shift Solenoid B Control  Solenoid valve 2 Circuit Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
11 Circuit Low - Circuit Short Short to Ground new Transmission control module as required,
to Ground refer to the new module/component installation
P0976- Shift Solenoid B Control  Solenoid valve 2 Circuit Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
14 Circuit Low - Circuit Short Short to Ground or new Transmission control module as required,
to Ground or Open Open Circuit refer to the new module/component installation
P1674- Control Module Software  System internal failures Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
04 Corrupted - System Internal new Transmission control module as required,
Failures refer to the new module/component installation
P1674- Control Module Software  Supervision software Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
48 Corrupted - Supervision failure new Transmission control module as required,
Software Failure refer to the new module/component installation
P1707- Transfer Case Neutral or  Transfer case neutral or Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
07 Park/Neutral Indication park/neutral indication and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
Circuit - commanded circuit - mechanical the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
position not reachable failures and replace as required. If no faulty park lock
component is found Clear DTC and the DTC
returns suspect the Transmission control module.
Install a new Transmission control module as
P1707- Transfer Case Neutral or  Transfer case neutral or Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
72 Park/Neutral Indication park/neutral indication and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
Circuit - Actuator Stuck circuit - Actuator stuck the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
Open open and replace as required. If no faulty park lock
P1707- Transfer Case Neutral or  Commanded position Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
77 Park/Neutral Indication not reachable and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
Circuit - commanded the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
position not reachable and replace as required. If no faulty park lock
P2700- Transmission Friction  Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code re-
07 Element A Apply Time Mechanical Failures detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
Range/Performance - fault. Install a new Transmission as required, refer
Mechanical Failures to the new module/component installation note at
07 Element B Apply Time Mechanical Failures detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
07 Element C Apply Time Mechanical Failures detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
07 Element D Apply Time Mechanical Failures detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
07 Element E Apply Time Mechanical Failures detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
P2713- Pressure Control Solenoid D  System internal failures Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
P2713- Pressure Control Solenoid D  Supervision software Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
48 - Supervision Software failure new Transmission control module as required,
P2716- Pressure Control Solenoid D  Pressure Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
22 Electrical - signal amplitude Solenoid D Electrical new Transmission control module as required,
> maximum signal amplitude > refer to the new module/component installation
P2716- Pressure Control Solenoid D  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
1A Electrical - Circuit solenoid D circuit new Transmission control module as required,
1E Electrical - Circuit solenoid D circuit new Transmission control module as required,
Resistance Out Of Range resistance out of range refer to the new module/component installation
14 Control Circuit / Open - solenoid D Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
Circuit Short to Ground or to Ground or Open refer to the new module/component installation
Open Circuit note at the top of the DTC Index
11 Control Circuit Low - Circuit solenoid D Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
12 Control Circuit High - Circuit solenoid D Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
P2722- Pressure Control Solenoid E  Pressure Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
04 - System Internal Failures Solenoid E system new Transmission control module as required,
internal failures refer to the new module/component installation
48 - Supervision Software Solenoid E supervision new Transmission control module as required,
Failure control software failure refer to the new module/component installation
22 Electrical - signal amplitude Solenoid E Electrical new Transmission control module as required,
P2725- Pressure Control Solenoid E  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
1A Electrical - Circuit solenoid E electrical new Transmission control module as required,
1E Electrical - Circuit solenoid E circuit new Transmission control module as required,
Resistance Out Of Range resistance out of range refer to the new module/component installation
14 Control Circuit / Open - Solenoid E Control new Transmission control module as required,
Open or Open Circuit note at the top of the DTC Index
11 Control Circuit Low - Circuit solenoid E Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
12 Control Circuit High-Circuit solenoid E Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
P2731- Pressure Control Solenoid  Pressure Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
04 F-System Internal Failures Solenoid F no sub type new Transmission control module as required,
information refer to the new module/component installation
P2731- Pressure Control Solenoid F  Pressure Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
48 - Supervision Software Solenoid F supervision new Transmission control module as required,
Failure software failure refer to the new module/component installation
22 Electrical-signal amplitude Solenoid F Electrical new Transmission control module as required,
P2734- Pressure Control Solenoid F  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
1A Electrical-Circuit Resistance solenoid F electrical new Transmission control module as required,
Below Threshold circuit resistance below refer to the new module/component installation
P2734- Pressure Control Solenoid F  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
1E Electrical-Circuit Resistance solenoid F electrical new Transmission control module as required,
Out Of Range circuit resistance out of refer to the new module/component installation
range note at the top of the DTC Index
14 Control Circuit / Open - Solenoid F Control new Transmission control module as required,
Open or Open note at the top of the DTC Index
11 Control Circuit Low - Circuit Solenoid F Control new Transmission control module as required,
Short to Ground Circuit Short to Ground refer to the new module/component installation
12 Control Circuit High - Circuit Solenoid F Control new Transmission control module as required,
Short to Battery Circuit Short to Power refer to the new module/component installation
P2763- Torque Converter Clutch  Pressure control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
12 Pressure Control Solenoid solenoid F Circuit Short new Transmission control module as required,
Control Circuit High - Circuit to Power refer to the new module/component installation
Short to Battery note at the top of the DTC Index
P2764- Torque Converter Clutch  Torque converter clutch Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
11 Pressure Control Solenoid pressure control new Transmission control module as required,
Control Circuit Low - Circuit solenoid control Circuit refer to the new module/component installation
Short to Ground Short to Ground note at the top of the DTC Index
1A Pressure Control Solenoid pressure control new Transmission control module as required,
Control Circuit Low-Circuit solenoid control circuit refer to the new module/component installation
Resistance Below Threshold resistance below note at the top of the DTC Index
threshold
1E Pressure Control Solenoid pressure control new Transmission control module as required,
Control Circuit Low-Circuit solenoid control circuit refer to the new module/component installation
Resistance Out Of Range resistance out of range note at the top of the DTC Index
P2807- Pressure Control Solenoid G  Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
11 - Circuit Short to Ground Short to Ground new Transmission control module as required,
12 - Circuit Short to Battery Short to Power new Transmission control module as required,
13 - Circuit Open Open Circuit new Transmission control module as required,
P2807- Pressure Control Solenoid G  Park solenoid Circuit Carry out any diagnostic pinpoint tests associated
14 - Circuit Short to Ground or Short to Ground or with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
Open Open Circuit diagnostic system. Suspect the Transmission
control module. Install a new Transmission control
the DTC Index
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - alive /  Alive counter fault Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
82 sequence counter Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
incorrect / not updated Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN
Bus)
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - value of  Checksum error Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs
83 signal protection calculation Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
incorrect Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN
Bus)
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - missing  GSM is NOT visible to Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs
87 message the Transmission control Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
module on the LIN Bus Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Bus off  LIN Bus Circuit fault. Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
88 Check hardware of LIN Transmission control module to Transmission shift
connection between module for Short, Open Circuit (LIN Bus). Check
transmission and GSM Transmission Shift Module for related DTCs
U0001- High Speed CAN  CAN Bus off Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
88 Communication Bus - Bus CAN Bus for Circuit fault
off
U0100- Lost Communication With  Alive counter fault Check Engine control module for stored DTCs
82 Engine control module/PCM
"A" - alive / sequence
counter incorrect / not
updated
U0100- Lost Communication With  Checksum fault Check Engine control module for stored DTCs
83 Engine control module/PCM
"A" - value of signal
protection calculation
incorrect
U0100- Lost Communication With  CAN Timeout NOTE: Do NOT install a new Engine control
87 Engine control module/PCM module if an Engine control module Timeout DTC
"A" - missing message is only logged in the Transmission control module,
the failure is NOT with the Engine control module
Check Engine control module for stored DTCs.

Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
U0103- Lost Communication With  Alive counter fault Check Transmission shift module for stored DTCs.
82 Gear Shift Control Module Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
A-alive / sequence counter
U0103- Lost Communication With  Checksum fault Check Transmission shift module for stored DTCs.
83 Gear Shift Control Module A Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
- value of signal protection
U0103- Lost Communication With  CAN Timeout Check Transmission shift module for stored DTCs.
87 Gear Shift Control Module A Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
- missing message
U0122- Lost Communication With  Alive counter fault Check Anti-lock braking system for stored DTCs.
82 Vehicle Dynamics Control Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - alive / sequence
counter incorrect / not
updated
U0122- Lost Communication With  Checksum fault Check Anti-lock braking system for stored DTCs.
Module - value of signal
incorrect
U0122- Lost Communication With  CAN Timeout Check Anti-lock braking system for stored DTCs.
Module - missing message
U0126- Lost Communication With  Lost Communication Check Steering angle sensor for stored DTCs.
00 Steering Angle Sensor With Steering Angle Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - no sub type Sensor Module
information
U0128- Lost Communication With  CAN timeout electronic Check Electronic Parking Brake Module for stored
87 Park Brake Control Module - parking brake module DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
missing message
U0140- Lost Communication With  Alive counter fault Check Central junction box for stored DTCs. Check
82 Body Control Module - CAN Bus Circuit for fault
alive / sequence counter
U0140- Lost Communication With  Checksum fault Check Central junction box for stored DTCs. Check
83 Body Control Module - value CAN Bus Circuit for fault
of signal protection
U0140- Lost Communication With  CAN Timeout Check Central junction box for stored DTCs. Check
87 Body Control Module - CAN Bus Circuit for fault
missing message
U0155- Lost Communication With  CAN timeout instrument Check Instrument cluster for stored DTCs. Check
87 Instrument Panel Cluster cluster CAN Bus Circuit for fault
(Instrument cluster) Control
Module - missing message
U0300- Control Module - event  Transmission software Check Central junction box software level, Check
68 information does not match vehicle Transmission control module Software level,
network Update software as required using the
manufacturer approved process
U0401- Invalid Data Received From  Inaccurate engine Check Engine control module for stored DTCs,
08 Engine control module/PCM speed, torque Check CAN Bus circuit for faults
A - Bus Signal Message information
Failures
U0401- Invalid Data Received from  Inaccurate engine Check Engine control module for stored DTCs.
68 Engine control module/PCM speed, torque Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
A - event information information
U0401- Invalid Data Received from  Inaccurate engine Check Engine control module for stored DTCs.
86 Engine control module/PCM speed, torque Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
A - Signal Invalid information
U0404- Invalid Data Received from  Incorrect CAN data Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
68 Gear Shift Control Module A received from Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
- event information Transmission shift Bus for Circuit fault
module
U0404- Invalid Data Received from  Incorrect LIN data Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
81 Gear Shift Control Module A received from Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
- Invalid Serial Data Transmission shift Bus for Circuit fault
Received module
U0416- Invalid Data Received From  Event information brake Check Engine control module for stored DTCs.
68 Vehicle Dynamics Control information Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - event information
U0422- Invalid Data Received From  Event information Check Central junction box for stored DTCs. Check
68 Body Control Module - invalid Power mode CAN Bus Circuit for fault
event information information
U101B- Lost Communication With  Missing message lost Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
87 GSM - Multiple Bus-missing communication with Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
message Transmission Shift Bus for Circuit fault
Module (multiple Bus)
U3000- Control Module - internal  Internal electronic Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
49 electronic failure failure new Transmission control module as required,
U3000- Control Module - Circuit  Internal electronic Check and correct oil level. Check hydraulic flow
4B resistance above threshold failure through oil cooler and pipe circuit for restriction or
blockage. If no restrictions found, suspect the
Transmission control module. Install a new
U3000- Control Module - invalid  Vehicle or Engine type Reflash the Transmission control module using the
81 serial data received signal incorrect from manufacturer approved process
BCM or incorrect
Transmission control
module software
installed
U3001- Control Module Improper  Control Module Check Engine control module For Power
94 Shutdown - unexpected Improper Shutdown (generator) faults. Check Power and Ground
operation (voltage related) Circuit and Battery for fault. Clear DTCs. Road
Test. If DTC reoccurs suspect the Transmission
control module. Install a new Transmission control
the DTC Index
- Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
307-452
Wrench, Transmission Filler Plug
Activation
WARNINGS:
Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.
Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.
1.
 The following steps must be observed before starting the
transmission fluid level check.
 The vehicle must be on a horizontal ramp.
 The parking brake must be applied.
 The engine must be running for 2 minutes with the
transmission control switch (TCS) in the "P" position.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the transmission fluid

temperature is below 30 degrees before starting the fluid level
check.
Connect Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.

3.
 Apply, and hold, the footbrake.
 Move the selector lever from 'P' through all the gear
positions, pausing in each gear position for 2-3 seconds
and return to the 'P' position.

stands.

5. Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02, Removal and Installation).
6. Place a suitable container under the transmission fluid fill plug.
7. CAUTIONS:
The transmission fluid level must only be

checked when the temperature of the fluid is
between 30 degrees and 50 degrees. The fluid
level obtained will be incorrect if the reading is
outside this temperature range.
Discard the seal.
8. NOTE: Use transmission fluid meeting Jaguar

specification.
If the transmission fluid does not come out of the

transmission fluid fill plug hole the transmission
fluid level is insufficient. If this is the case add the
transmission fluid in 0.5 liter units into the
transmission fluid fill plug hole until fluid comes
out.
9. NOTE: Make sure the transmission fluid

temperature does not exceed 50 °C (122 °F). If
the transmission fluid temperature does exceed 50
°C (122 °F) stop the transmission fluid level check
and allow the transmission fluid to cool until the
temperature is below 30 °C (86 °F).
Allow the transmission fluid to drain from the

transmission fluid filler plug hole until the flow
almost stops.
Using the special tool, install the new transmission

fluid fill plug.
11. CAUTION: Make sure the transmission fluid fill

plug is tightened to the correct specification. Failure to
vehicle.
 To make sure the transmission fill plug is

torqued to the correct specification. Using the
special tool and torque wrench the following
calculation steps must be followed.
 Step 1. Multiply 35 Nm by the effective length
of the torque wrench (1).
 Step 2. Add the effective length of the special
tool (2) to the effective length of the torque
wrench (1).
 Step 3. Divide the total of step 1 by the total
of step 2.
 Step 4. Set the torque wrench to the figure
arrived at in step 3.
 Tighten the transmission fluid fill plug to the
torque given by the calculation.
13. Remove the container.
16. Disconnect the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment from the
vehicle.
- Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
307-452
Wrench, Transmission Filler Plug
WARNINGS:
Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.
Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.

stands.

3. Place a container under the transmission.

5. CAUTION: Discard the component.
 Allow the fluid to drain.
6. CAUTION: Make sure that a new component

is installed.
Torque: 8 Nm
7. NOTE: Use transmission fluid meeting Jaguar

specification.
Refill the transmission with fluid.

8. Allow the transmission fluid to drain from the
transmission fluid filler plug hole until the flow
almost stops.
 Loosely install the transmission fluid fill

plug.
10. CAUTION: Make sure the transmission fluid fill

plug is tightened to the correct specification. Failure to
vehicle.
 To make sure the transmission fill plug is

torqued to the correct specification. Using the
special tool and torque wrench the following
calculation steps must be followed.
 Step 1. Multiply 35 Nm by the effective length
of the torque wrench (1).
 Step 2. Add the effective length of the special
tool (2) to the effective length of the torque
wrench (1).
 Step 3. Divide the total of step 1 by the total
of step 2.
 Step 4. Set the torque wrench to the figure
arrived at in step 3.
 Tighten the transmission fluid fill plug to the
torque given by the calculation.
11. Carry out a transmission fluid level check.
Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

- Input Shaft Seal
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter
307-613
Holding Pins, Torque Converter
308-246
Installer, Front Seal
308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal
Removal
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01, General

Procedures).


3. Refer to: Transmission - 3.0L Diesel (307-01, Removal).
5. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the edges of

the component.
Discard the seal.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 100-012-01, 308-375
Installation

2. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark is
visable through the inspection hole as illustrated.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the torque converter is

fully located into the oil pump drive.
4. Refer to: Transmission - 3.0L Diesel (307-01B, Installation).

Procedures).
- Extension Housing Seal
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter
204-264
Pinion Seal Replacer
205-053
Retainer, Drive Flange
303-D121
Puller, General Purpose
308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator (307-01 Automatic
5. CAUTION: Discard the nut.
6. Special Tool(s): 303-D121
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 100-012-01, 308-375

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:

Install a new seal.
2. WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is

installed.
Torque: 60 Nm
3. Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator (307-01 Automatic

4. Refer to: Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
- Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve Body
Removal
NOTE: The transmission control module (TCM) is part of the main control valve body and cannot be serviced separately.

Procedures).

stands.

3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
4.
5.
6. CAUTION: Discard the component.

fluids.
NOTE: Note the position of the manual park brake

release.
8.
9.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that when fully fitted, all seals

protrude by the same amount.
 Install a new seal block.
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that when fully fitted, all seals

protrude by the same amount.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the manual park

release is correctly engaged.
Torque: 8 Nm
4. CAUTION: Make sure that a new component

is installed.
5.
6.
7. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Procedures).
9. If a new component has been installed, configure using Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment.
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Removal

Procedures).
4. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
5.
6. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

but the essential information is always correct.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the component is

clean and free of foreign material.
Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

- Transmission Support Insulator
Removal



4. Torque: 10 Nm
5. WARNING: Secure the component to the

transmission jack.
Torque: 48 Nm
6. Torque: 48 Nm
7. Torque: 70 Nm
Installation

- Transmission, Transmission Fluid Cooler and Transmission Fluid
Cooler Tubes
Special Tool(s)
303-021
Engine support bracket
303-1435
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.


stands.

3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes (307-02
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
5.
7. Using the special tool, support the engine.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
 Make sure that the alignment mark is
visible through the inspection hole on
removal of the last torque converter bolt.
flexible coupling (or its fixings) be loosened or
21. WARNING: Make sure that the transmission is secured

with suitable retaining straps.
Using a suitable stand, support the transmission.

22.
23.
24. CAUTION: Make sure that the torque

converter remains in the transmission.
NOTE: This step requires the aid of another

technician.
 Install the torque converter retainer.

coolant.
NOTE: Clamp the hoses to minimize coolant loss.

coolant.
27.
Installation
1. Torque: 5 Nm
2.
3.


technician.
 Remove the torque converter retainer.
5. Torque: 45 Nm
6. Torque: 45 Nm
7. Remove the support.

8. Torque: 127 Nm
Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through the

inspection hole on installation of the first torque converter bolt.
10. Torque: 45 Nm
11.
12.
13.
14.
15. Torque: 10 Nm
16.
17.
18. Torque: 48 Nm
19. Torque: 6 Nm
20. Torque: 40 Nm
21.

24.

28. Check and top up the cooling system as required.
29. Set the heater controls to HOT.
30. CAUTION: Observe the engine temperature warning light.

If the warning light is displayed, switch off immediately and
allow to cool. Failure to follow this instruction may cause
Start the engine and allow to idle until hot air is emited at the
face registers.

Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM and maintain at 2000 RPM
until the engine cooling fan operates.
Switch the engine off and allow to cool.

coolant leakage.
34. WARNINGS:
When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the

coolant expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.

CAUTIONS:


35. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic
- Transmission and Transmission Fluid Cooler
Special Tool(s)
303-021
Engine support bracket
303-1435
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.


stands.

5.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
visible through the inspection hole on
flexible coupling (or its fixings) be loosened or


22.
23.


technician.

coolant.

coolant.
27.
Installation
1. Torque: 5 Nm
2.
3.


technician.
5. Torque: 45 Nm
6. Torque: 45 Nm

8. Torque: 127 Nm
Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through the

10. Torque: 45 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
11.
12.
13.
14.
15. Torque: 10 Nm
16.
17.
18. Torque: 48 Nm
19. Torque: 6 Nm
20. Torque: 40 Nm
21.

24.

28. Check and top up the cooling system as required.
29. Set the heater controls to HOT.

Start the engine and allow to idle until hot air is emited at the
face registers.

Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM and maintain at 2000 RPM
until the engine cooling fan operates.
Switch the engine off and allow to cool.

coolant leakage.
34. WARNINGS:
When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the

coolant expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.

CAUTIONS:


35. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic
- Transmission
Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1436


stands.

5.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
visable through the inspection hole on
20.


22.
23.


technician.

- Transmission
Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1436


technician.
2. Torque: 45 Nm
3. Torque: 45 Nm

5. Torque: 127 Nm
Make sure that the alignment mark is visable through the

7. Torque: 45 Nm
8.
9.
10.
11.
12. Torque: 10 Nm
13.
14.
15. Torque: 48 Nm
16. Torque: 6 Nm
17. Torque: 40 Nm
18.
19. Remove the special tool supporting the engine.

21.

Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Fluid cooler tubes to transmission retaining bolts 22 16 -
Fluid cooler tubes support bracket retaining nut 10 7 -
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Latch-plate
2 - Feed hose and pipe (from transmission)
4 - Engine coolant hose connections
5 - Return hose and pipe (to transmission)
INTRODUCTION
Transmission cooling is provided by a transmission fluid cooler, which transfers heat from the transmission to the engine
cooling system. The transmission fluid cooler is attached to a mounting bracket on the front subframe, in the front left corner
of the engine compartment.
Two hose and pipe assemblies connect the transmission fluid cooler to the automatic transmission. Two engine coolant hose
connections are incorporated into the top of the transmission fluid cooler for the supply and return of coolant from the
engine cooling system.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description
and Operation).
Fluid from the pump in the automatic transmission flows through the feed hose and pipe to the transmission fluid cooler. The
fluid then flows through the transmission fluid cooler, and the return hose and pipe, to the sump of the automatic
transmission.
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission cooling system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: Transmission Cooling (307-02 Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
 Feed and return tubes
 Connections to the automatic transmission and the automatic transmission fluid cooler
 Automatic transmission fluid level
Symptom Chart
Condition Possible Causes Action

Over heating of the Obstruction in the automatic Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler with new
automatic transmission fluid cooler automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is unsuccessful,
transmission install a new transmission fluid cooler.
Over heating of the Obstruction in the automatic Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler tubes with
automatic transmission fluid tubes new automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is
transmission unsuccessful install new automatic transmission fluid cooler
tubes.
Loss of automatic Connections to the automatic Check the integrity of the tubes, connections and seals. Check
transmission fluid transmission and the automatic the torque of the tube fixings.
transmission fluid cooler
Loss of automatic Leak at oil cooler Check the integrity of tubes, connections and seals. Check the
transmission fluid torque of the tube fixings.
Transmission Fluid Cooler V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal

stands.

3. Refer to: Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling (303-03,
4. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
5.
6.
7. Torque: 5 Nm
Installation

Transmission Fluid Cooler V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

stands.

3. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03,
4. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12, Removal and Installation).
5. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
6.
7.
8. Torque: 5 Nm
Installation

Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Removal

stands.

2. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01, General
Procedures).
3. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
4. Torque: 11 Nm
5. Torque: 23 Nm
correct.
Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Upshift paddle switch to steering wheel retaining bolt 3 - 27
Downshift paddle switch to steering wheel retaining bolt 3 - 27
Transmission control switch (TCS) to floor console bracket retaining bolts 3 - 27
Emergency park position release lever cable bracket to transmission housing retaining bolts 11 8 -
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Upshift (+) paddle switch
2 - Downshift (-) paddle switch
4 - Emergency park release
INTRODUCTION
The external controls for the transmission consist of a JaguarDrive selector, two paddle switches and an emergency park
release.
The JaguarDrive selector transmits driver transmission selections to the TCM (transmission control module). The paddle
switches allow the driver to initiate gear shifts when the transmission is in the sequential shift manual mode. The emergency
park release ensures the transmission is kept in neutral during vehicle recovery operations.
JAGUARDRIVE SELECTOR
The Jaguardrive selector is a rotary selector installed in the top of the JaguarDrive selector module. The JaguarDrive selector
module is located in the floor console and controls the vehicle optimization functions on the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and
Operation).
The TCM allows the transmission to be operated as a conventional automatic unit by selecting P, R, N, D on the JaguarDrive
selector.
Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector allows the selection of P (park), R (reverse), N (neutral) and D (drive). By depressing
the JaguarDrive selector and rotating clockwise from the D position, S (sport) mode can be selected. The JaguarDrive
selector is fully electronic rotary transmission selector with no mechanical connection to the transmission.
The JaguarDrive selector rises from the JaguarDrive selector module once the engine is running. When the engine is stopped
with the JaguarDrive selector in any position other than N, it retracts into the JaguarDrive selector module again. If the
selector is in position N when the engine is stopped, it remains in the raised position for up to 10 minutes, for use in a drive
through car wash for example. After 10 minutes the selector automatically retracts into the JaguarDrive selector module. The
selector also retracts if P is selected within the 10 minute period.
If the JaguarDrive selector does not rise from the console when the engine is started, but electrical power is supplied to the
selector, the retracted selector can still be rotated to make selections. If electrical power to the JaguarDrive selector is lost,
the selector will not rise from the console when the engine is started and the retracted selector will not rotate.
The JaguarDrive selector contains an internal interlock solenoid to prevent the selector from being rotated when the engine
is not running.
The engine can be stopped with the JaguarDrive selector in any position. Once the engine is stopped the selector will
automatically reset to the P position and the transmission park lock will be engaged, except if the selector is moved to the N
position when the engine is stopped.
PADDLE SWITCHES
Two gear change 'paddle' switches are fitted at the rear of the steering wheel and allow the driver to operate the
transmission as a semi-automatic manual gearbox using the Jaguar sequential shift feature.
Each paddle switch has 3 connections; ground, illumination PWM (pulse width modulation) supply and ground switch signal.
The paddle switches are hardwired to the steering wheel audio switches. Operation of the paddle switch completes a ground
path to the audio switch assembly. The audio switch assembly converts the completed ground signal into a LIN (local
interconnect network) bus signal which is passed via the clockspring to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster
converts the signal into a high speed CAN (controller area network) bus signal to the TCM.
Pulling the LH (left-hand) downshift - paddle provides down changes and pulling the RH (right-hand) upshift (+) paddle
provides up changes. The first operation of either paddle, after sport mode is selected, puts the transmission into permanent
manual Jaguar sequential shift mode. Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector back to the D position, returns the transmission to
conventional automatic operation.
Temporary operation of manual Jaguar sequential shift mode can also be operated with the JaguarDrive selector in the D
position. Operation of either the upshift or downshift paddles activates the manual mode operation. If the JaguarDrive
selector is in D, Jaguar sequential shift will cancel after a time period or can be cancelled by pressing and holding the +
paddle for approximately 2 seconds.
EMERGENCY PARK RELEASE

1 - Strap
2 - Locking cylinder
3 - Operating lever
4 - Cable guide bracket
5 - Upper cable
6 - Cable joint
7 - Lower cable
8 - Cable bracket
9 - Park interlock lever
10 - Operating lever base
11 - Latch
The emergency park release consists of an operating lever that is connected to a park interlock lever on the transmission by
an upper and lower cable assembly.
One end of the operating lever is attached to a base by a hinge pin. A locking cylinder is installed in the other end of the
operating lever, to secure the operating lever to the base. A strap is attached to the operating lever, next to the locking
cylinder, to pull on when raising the operating lever. The base is installed on top of the transmission tunnel, under the cubby
box of the floor console. An access panel for the operating lever is located under the twin cup holder in the cubby box.
The park interlock lever is attached to the transmission selector shaft.
When operated, the emergency park release turns the transmission selector shaft and locks the transmission in neutral.
In the event of the vehicle requiring recovery, the park lock can be released manually with the use of the emergency park
release mechanism. To release the park lock:
 Remove the trim cover from the rear of the floor console and locate the emergency park release lever.
 Rotate the locking mechanism of the lever 90 degrees counterclockwise.
 Apply the footbrake, pull the lever upwards and ensure it is locked in the vertical position.
Raising the emergency park release lever causes the emergency park release cable to rotate the park interlock lever on the
transmission, which disengages the parking pawl and engages neutral. This allows the vehicle to freewheel.
To re-engage the park lock:
 Hold the strap on the emergency park release lever, release the latch and lower the lever to the horizontal position.
 Lock the lever by turning the locking mechanism 90 degrees clockwise.
 Install the trim cover.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus

1 - Battery
4 - TCM
8 - ECM
9 - Steering wheel audio switch
10 - Clockspring
Four additional switches are located adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector and control the JaguarDrive control functions.
For additional information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and
Operation).
JaguarDrive Selector
Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM via the high speed CAN bus. A LIN bus
connection is also provided but is only used in the event of a CAN bus failure as a back-up. The TCM then reacts according to
the selected position. The JaguarDrive selector is a magnetic system using Hall effect sensors to determine the position of the
selector.
The S position selection allows the TCM to operate the transmission using the semi-automatic Jaguar sequential shift. Gear
selections are sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the JaguarDrive
selector position is confirmed, the TCM outputs appropriate information on the high speed CAN bus which is received by the
instrument cluster to display the gear selection information in the message center.
and Operation).
The paddles can also be used on a temporary basis when the JaguarDrive selector is in the D position to override the
automatic gear selection if required.
PARK INTERLOCK AND NEUTRAL LOCK
Neutral lock is a new feature introduced as a requirement for the JaguarDrive selector. The selector is always locked at
ignition on when the engine is not running, except after an engine stall when the selector is not in P or N.
If, when driving with the JaguarDrive selector in S, D or R at a speed of more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the driver selects P or N:
 Without the brake pedal pressed, the JaguarDrive selector will be immediately locked once the vehicle speed falls to
below 5 km/h (3 mph).
 With the brake pedal pressed, the JaguarDrive selector will remain locked for as long as the brake pedal remains
pressed, regardless of vehicle speed.
The transmission will only engage park once the vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h (1 mph).
If the driver selects N and releases the brake pedal with a vehicle speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the JaguarDrive
selector will be locked 2 seconds after N is selected. The selector will remain locked until the driver presses the brake pedal
again.
To ensure that a driver request to change from a non-driving range (N for example) to a driving range (D for example), the
park interlock and neutral lock features are used in conjunction with the intermediate position.
If the transmission receives a range change request without the brake pedal pressed, the TCM initiates a soft lock function.
The transmission will remain in park or neutral, depending on the starting position.
If a transmission position letter is flashing in the message center and the vehicle has no drive, the driver must:
 Press the brake pedal.

 Reselect N or P on the JaguarDrive selector.
 Select the required driving range, ensuring that the brake pedal is pressed.
Rocking Function
The rocking function is a new feature introduced to compliment the neutral lock function. For all changes from a non-driving
range to a driving range, it is necessary to press the brake pedal (to release either the park interlock or neutral lock).
In situations where the driver will require to change the gear selection from R to D, or from D to R, without brake pedal input
(car park maneuvering, 3 point turns or 'rocking' the vehicle from a slippery surface for example), the rocking function gives
a 2 second lock delay when N is selected on the JaguarDrive selector and the brake pedal is not pressed.
Intermediate Position
If the JaguarDrive selector is rotated slowly from P to S and back to position P with the brake pedal pressed, the R or D
position display letter in the message center will flash and the transmission will remain in park or neutral depending on the
previous starting position of the selector.
If the brake pedal is released when R or D is flashing in the message center and the JaguarDrive selector is rotated to the R
or D position, the required range will not be selected and the transmission will remain in park or neutral, depending on the
previous starting position. This feature is known as soft lock.
If the driving range letter in the message center is flashing and the vehicle has no drive, the driver should depress the brake
pedal to reselect N or P, and then select the required driving range while the brake pedal remains pressed.
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
in the workshop manual. REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Check for stuck/jammed switches and  Fuses/Relays
buttons  Damaged, Loose or Corroded Connector(s)
 Visibly damaged or worn components  Damage to Wiring Loom/Incorrect Location, Stretched or
 Loose or missing fasteners Taught
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTE: If the control module/transmission is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
prior to the installation of a new module/transmission.

B1087- LIN Bus "A" - Bus  LIN Bus "A" Error Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
08 Signal / Message check LIN input signal circuit for short,
Failures open circuit
B1087- LIN Bus "A" -  Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
81 invalid serial data message error: complement fault check LIN input signal circuit for short,
received open circuit faults. Check Transmission
control module for related DTCs and refer
to relevant DTC Index
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - alive /  Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
82 sequence counter message error: Alive counter fault check LIN input signal circuit for short,
incorrect / not open circuit faults. Check Transmission
updated control module for related DTCs and refer
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - value  Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
83 of signal protection message error: checksum fault check LIN input signal circuit for short,
calculation incorrect open circuit faults. Check Transmission
B1087- LIN Bus "A" -  Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
87 missing message message error: missing message check LIN input signal circuit for short,
open circuit faults. Check Transmission
B1142- Ignition Status 1 -  Hardwired Ignition and CAN powermode Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
62 signal compare signals differ check ignition supply circuit for short,
failure open circuit
B123C- Dynamic Stability  Dynamic stability control LED failure Suspect transmission shift module, check
01 Control Status operation of the Dynamic stability control
Indicator - General button status illumination, check and
Electrical Failure install new transmission shift module as
required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the
B123D- Dynamic Stability  Dynamic stability control button may be Check for normal Dynamic stability control
64 Control Button - stuck, May be due to a faulty button or button functionality. If it operates
signal plausibility to the user holding the button for a normally then no further action required.
failure prolonged period. (Dynamic stability If the Dynamic stability control button fails
control button detected as pressed for to operate normally then may be due to
30 seconds) (S1) an internal fault, check and install new
transmission shift module as required,
refer to the new module/component
installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
B123F- Adaptive Speed  Adaptive Speed Limiter LED failure Suspect transmission shift module, check
01 Limiter Mode operation of the active speed limiter
Indicator - General button status illumination, check and
Electrical Failure install new transmission shift module as
B1241- Adaptive Speed  May be due to a faulty button or to the Check for normal adaptive speed limiter
64 Limiter Button - user holding the button for a prolonged button functionality. If it operates
signal plausibility period (Adaptive Speed Limiter button normally then no further action required.
failure detected as pressed for 30 seconds) If the adaptive speed limiter button fails
to operate normally then may be due to
an internal fault, check and install new
Index
B1242- Winter Button -  May be due to a faulty button or to the Check for normal winter button
64 signal plausibility user holding the button for a prolonged functionality. If it operates normally then
failure period. (Winter button detected as no further action required. If the winter
pressed for 30 seconds) button fails to operate normally then may
be due to an internal fault, check and
install new transmission shift module as
B1243- Winter Button Mode  Winter LED failure Suspect transmission shift module, check
01 Indicator - General operation of the winter button status
Electrical Failure illumination, check and install new
Index
B1244- Dynamic / Sport  May be due to a faulty button or to the Check for normal dynamic mode button
64 Button - signal user holding the button for a prolonged functionality. If it operates normally then
plausibility failure period. (Dynamic/Performance button no further action required. If the dynamic
detected as pressed for 30 seconds) mode button fails to operate normally
then may be due to an internal fault,
check and install new transmission shift
B1245- Dynamic / Sport  Dynamic / Sport LED Failure Suspect transmission shift module, check
01 Button Mode operation of the dynamic mode button
Indicator - General status illumination, check and install new
Electrical Failure transmission shift module as required,
Index
C113A- Wake up Control -  Hardwired delayed power and CAN Bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
62 signal compare Engine Running status differ. check hardwired wake up (start stop
failure illumination) input circuit for short, open
circuit
P0603- Internal Control  Transmission shift module Internal Suspect transmission shift module, check
44 Module Keep Alive failure and install new transmission shift module
Memory (KAM) as required, refer to the new
Error - data module/component installation note at the
memory failure top of the DTC Index
44 Module Random failure and install new transmission shift module
Access Memory as required, refer to the new
(RAM) Error - data module/component installation note at the
45 Module Read Only failure and install new transmission shift module
Memory (ROM) as required, refer to the new
Error - program module/component installation note at the
P0606- Control Module  Transmission shift module Internal Suspect transmission shift module, check
2F Processor - signal failure and install new transmission shift module
erratic as required, refer to the new
P0606- Control Module  Transmission shift module Internal Suspect transmission shift module, check
47 Processor - failure and install new transmission shift module
watchdog / safety as required, refer to the new
Micro controller module/component installation note at the
failure top of the DTC Index
P0705- Transmission Range  PRNDS sensor fault Suspect transmission shift module, check
09 Sensor A Circuit and install new transmission shift module
(PRNDL Input) - as required, refer to the new
Component Failures module/component installation note at the
P0705- Transmission Range  PRNDS calibration missing/invalid Suspect transmission shift module, check
calibration / module/component installation note at the
parameter memory top of the DTC Index
failure
P0705- Transmission Range  Received signal incorrect Suspect transmission shift module, check
signal invalid module/component installation note at the
P0814- Transmission Range  PRNDS LED failure Suspect transmission shift module, check
01 Display Circuit - operation of PRNDS display, check and
General Electrical install new transmission shift module as
Failure required, refer to the new
P081C- Park Input Circuit -  Hardwired Park and Transmission Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
64 signal plausibility control module Position Display signals check Park input signal circuit for short,
failure are not consistent open circuit. Check Transmission control
module for Park signal failure DTCs. Check
operation of signal - should be set (equal
to vehicle supply voltage) when
transmission in P and un-set (equal to
vehicle ground) when transmission in
R,N,D,S
P084F- Park/Neutral Switch  Park/neutral signal circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Output Circuit - ground check the park/neutral signal circuit for
circuit short to short to ground
ground
P084F- Park / Neutral  Park/neutral signal circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Switch Output power or open circuit check the park/neutral signal circuit for
Circuit - circuit short to power or open circuit
short to battery or
open
P176A- Transmission Range  Raise/Lower mechanism up / down Cycle ignition, clear DTC and retest. If
01 Selector Up and sensor fault fault persists, check and install new
Down Position transmission shift module as required.
Circuit - General Refer to the warranty policy and
Electrical Failure procedures manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a new
module/component
P176A- Transmission Range  Raise/Lower mechanism current sense Cycle ignition, clear DTC and retest. If
13 Selector Up and fault fault persists, check and install new
Circuit - circuit open Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any
module/component
P176A- Transmission Range  Raise/Lower mechanism motor over Cycle ignition, clear DTC and retest. If
19 Selector Up and current fault persists, check and install new
Circuit - circuit Refer to the warranty policy and
current above procedures manual, or determine if any
threshold prior approval programme is in operation,
module/component
P176A- Transmission Range  Motor current detected while gear Cycle ignition, clear DTC and retest. If
94 Selector Up and selector knob not moving up or down fault persists, check and install new
Down Position for 100ms transmission shift module as required.
Circuit - unexpected Refer to the warranty policy and
operation procedures manual, or determine if any
module/component
P176B- Transmission Range  Raise Lower failure. Note: Can be due Check that no visible obstructions are
71 Selector Up and to driver abuse! If DTC is detected then present and test for normal raise/lower
Down Position test raise/lower functionality to confirm operation. If transmission shift module
Control Error - OK with no abuse forces or obstructions raises and lowers normally then no further
actuator stuck present. Only replace Transmission shift action is required. If the transmission shift
module if raise/lower issues are present module fails to raise and lower normally
with no abuse forces or obstructions even though no obstructions or abuse
present. forces are present then may be due to an
internal fault, check and install new
Index
P176C- Transmission Range  Gear selector movement detected while Check for normal shift interlock
07 Selector Lock locked. DTC set after 100ms. Park lock lock/unlock operation, and check for short
Control Error - failure Transmission shift module has circuit DTCs. If the transmission shift
Mechanical Failures detected that the selector has been module locks and unlocks normally then
turned while a lock request has been no further action is required. If the
received from the Transmission control transmission shift module fails to lock
module This is usually due to the driver normally when fully in the P position then
releasing the brake pedal with the may be due to an internal fault, check and
selector in between positions and does install new transmission shift module as
not represent a fault. required, refer to the new
P176C- Transmission Range  Short to ground detected while solenoid Suspect transmission shift module, check
11 Selector Lock active for 100ms. operation of the shift interlock, check and
Control Error - install new transmission shift module as
circuit short to required, refer to the new
ground module/component installation note at the
P176C- Transmission Range  Short to power detected for 100ms. Suspect transmission shift module, check
12 Selector Lock operation of the shift interlock, check and
Control Error - install new transmission shift module as
circuit short to required, refer to the new
power module/component installation note at the
P176C- Transmission Range  Solenoid Unlock Failure. This may be Check for normal shift interlock
73 Selector Lock due either to the user applying a lock/unlock operation. If the transmission
Control Error - prolonged rotational force against the shift module locks and unlocks normally
actuator stuck selector lock mechanism while it is then no further action is required. If the
closed attempting to unlock or due to an transmission shift module fails to lock and
internal failure unlock normally then may be due to an
internal fault, check and install new
Index
U0001- High Speed CAN  HS CAN Failure (Bus Off) Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Communication Bus check CAN bus for short, open circuit
- bus off
U0100- Lost Communication  Lost communication with the engine Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With ECM/PCM "A" - control module check the CAN Bus connection to the
missing message  Engine speed signal not received for engine control module for short, open
450mS (S3) circuit. Check the engine control module
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
U0101- Lost Communication  Lost communication with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 with TCM - missing transmission control module check the CAN Bus connection to the
message  TCM_PosDisp signal not received for transmission control module for short,
75mS. (S3) open circuit. Check the transmission
to the relevant DTC Index
U0121- Lost Communication  Lost communication with the anti-lock Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Anti-Lock brake system (ABS) control module check the CAN Bus connection to the anti-
Brake System  Message containing TCSSwitchSports is lock brake system (ABS) control module
(ABS) Control not received for 450mS. (S3) for short, open circuit. Check the anti-lock
Module - missing brake system (ABS) control module for
message related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
U0139- Lost Communication  Lost communication with the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Suspension suspension control module "B" check the CAN Bus connection to the
Control Module "B"  Message containing SUMB signals is not suspension control module "B for short,
- missing message received for 750mS. (S3) open circuit. Check the suspension control
module "B" for related DTCs and refer to
the relevant DTC Index
U0155- Lost Communication  Lost communication with instrument Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 With Instrument panel cluster check the CAN Bus connection to the
Panel Cluster (IPC)  Message containing Powermode is not instrument panel cluster for short, open
Control Module - received for 350mS. (S3) circuit. Check the instrument panel cluster
missing message for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
U0300- Internal Control  Invalid master configuration ID received Re-configure the RJB using the
00 Module Software manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Incompatibility - no Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains
sub type suspect the transmission shift module.
information Check and install a new module as
U0401- Invalid Data  Jaguar Drive Optimisation Winter/ Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to
92 Received From Performance modes not available. Fault the relevant DTC Index
ECM/PCM - message if a Jaguar Drive Optimization
performance or mode button is pressed
incorrect operation  Message received from Engine Control
Module indicates it is unable to support
Jaguar Drive Optimisation modes.
U0402- Invalid Data  Implausible lock request received Unexpected lock data received from
64 Received from Transmission control module. Check for
Transmission additional communication DTCs and follow
control module - relevant service actions. If no other
signal plausibility communication DTCs present, check
failure Transmission control module for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
U0402- Invalid Data  Transmission control module CAN Check Transmission control module for
81 Received from message error: complement fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Transmission If no fault found then refer to the
control module - electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
invalid serial data bus for short, open circuit
received
U0402- Invalid Data  Alive Counter fault detected (Stuck, Check Transmission control module for
82 Received from jumps or Fault Flag). More than 1 fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Transmission in 200ms. If no fault found then refer to the
control module - electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
alive / sequence bus for short, open circuit
counter incorrect /
not updated
U0402- Invalid Data  Calculated checksum for Transmission Check Transmission control module for
83 Received from control module message data does not DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Transmission match received checksum. More than 1 If no fault found then refer to the
control module - fault in 200ms. electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
value of signal bus for short, open circuit
protection
U0402- Invalid Data  Message received from Transmission Check Transmission control module for
92 Received from Control Module indicates it is unable to DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Transmission support Jaguar Drive Optimisation
control module - modes.
performance or
incorrect operation
U0415- Invalid Data  Information only. Message received Check ABS module for DTCs and refer to
92 Received From Anti- from Anti-Lock Brake System module the relevant DTC Index
Lock Brake System indicates it is unable to support Jaguar
(ABS) Control Drive Optimisation modes.
Module -
performance or
incorrect operation
U0422- Invalid Data  Update bit for powermode signal not Check central junction box for DTCs and
08 Received From received from central junction box. refer to the relevant DTC Index
Body Control Possible CAN fault
Module - Bus
Signal / Message
Failures
U0422- Invalid Data  Invalid powermode complement data Check central junction box for DTCs and
81 Received From received from central junction box refer to the relevant DTC Index
central junction box
- invalid serial data
received
U0422- Invalid Data  Message received from power assisted Check instrument cluster and central
92 Received From steering module indicates that it is junction box for DTCs and refer to the
central junction box unable to support Jaguar Drive relevant DTC Index. If no fault found then
- performance or Optimisation modes refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
incorrect operation check CAN bus for short, open circuit
U043A- Invalid Data  Information only, Suspension Module Check Suspension Control Module "B" for
92 Received From unable to support Jaguar Drive related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Suspension Control Optimisation modes (Invalid data is DTC Index
Module "B" - received from the SUMB)
performance or
incorrect operation
U101A- Lost Communication  CAN and LIN bus failed. FOR Check for Transmission control module
86 With Transmission INFORMATION ONLY - No action CAN and/or LIN DTCs present in
control module necessary if no additional CAN or LIN transmission shift module then refer to
(Multiple Bus) - DTCs present actions for these specific DTCs. If no
signal invalid additional Transmission control module
CAN and/or LIN DTCs present in
transmission shift module then no further
action required
U1A14- CAN Initialization  Signal configuration not present / Suspect transmission shift module, check
04 Failure - System incorrect. and install new transmission shift module
Internal Failures as required, refer to the new
U2012- Car Configuration  Mismatch detected between vehicle Check correct transmission shift hardware
4A Parameter(s) - configuration and installed gear selector variant is installed for the vehicle
incorrect variant. Check correct part fitted, and if configuration - i.e. for supercharged
component installed fault still present, check vehicle variants, transmission shift modules with
configuration dynamic mode button should be installed
only. All other vehicles should contain
hardware without the dynamic mode
button. If correct hardware installed then
check/amend car configuration
parameters using the manufacturer
U2100- Initial Configuration  Transmission shift module not fully Suspect transmission shift module, check
00 Not Complete - no configured. and install new transmission shift module
sub type as required, refer to the new
information module/component installation note at the
U3003- Battery Voltage -  Low voltage detected at Transmission Ensure battery is in a fully charged and
16 circuit voltage shift module (Battery voltage < 8.5V for serviceable condition, refer to the battery
below threshold 660mS) care manual. Check ECM for alternator
related DTCs, Check battery power feed
circuit to Transmission shift module, Clear
DTCs, Cycle ignition
U3003- Battery Voltage -  High voltage detected at Transmission Check ECM for alternator/over charging
17 circuit voltage shift module (Battery voltage > 16.5V related DTCs, Clear DTCs, Cycle ignition
above threshold for 660mS)
U3003- Battery Voltage -  Measured voltage different to CAN Compare vehicle voltage to voltage
62 signal compare received voltage (Voltage difference > present at the Transmission shift module,
failure 2V for > 10s) Repair fault, Clear DTCs, Cycle ignition
S/C 5.0L Petrol - Downshift Paddle Switch
Removal
1. Torque: 3 Nm
2.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed correctly.

Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Emergency Park Position Release Lever
Removal


stands.

3. Refer to: Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,
4. Torque: 11 Nm
5. Torque: 25 Nm
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the cable is

correctly routed.
NOTE: Note the routing of the emergency park

brake release cable.
8.
correct.
10. Torque: 6 Nm
Installation

Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Removal


avoid damage.
3. CAUTION: It is imperative that no damage is

caused to the electrical connector or the module.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes


Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Knob
Removal
1.
2. WARNING: The brake pedal must not be

depressed whilst tightening the retaining screw.
CAUTION: Make sure the Torx screw is not

over tightened. Failure to follow this instruction will
Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation

S/C 5.0L Petrol - Upshift Paddle Switch
Removal
1. Torque: 3 Nm
2.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed correctly.

Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Catalytic converter retaining bolts 40 30 -
Rear muffler support retaining bolts 25 18 -
Exhaust securing strap nuts 55 40 -
Exhaust support retaining bolts 25 18 -
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust System

1 - Rear section
2 - Center section
3 - LH (left hand) front section
4 - RH (right hand) front section

1 - Rear section
2 - Active exhaust system
3 - LH front section
4 - RH front section
5 - Center section
INTRODUCTION
The exhaust systems on both NA (naturally aspirated) and SC (supercharger) vehicles are manufactured from stainless
steels and have four separate sections:
 LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand) front sections

 A center section
 A rear section.
The sections of the exhaust system are connected together with slip joints and clamps.
FRONT SECTIONS
NOTE: LH front section shown, RH front section is mirror image.

1 - Flange
2 - Inlet pipe
3 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) boss
4 - Outlet pipe
5 - Catalytic converter
Each of the front sections consists of an inlet pipe, a catalytic converter and an outlet pipe welded together. A flange on the
inlet pipe connects the front section to the related exhaust manifold on the engine. The flange has two holes which locate on
studs in the exhaust manifold and is secured with flanged nuts.
In the catalytic converters, the exhaust gases are passed through honeycombed ceramic elements coated with a special
surface treatment called 'washcoat'. The washcoat increases the surface area of the ceramic elements by a factor of
approximately 7000. On top of the washcoat is a coating containing palladium and rhodium, which are the active
constituents for converting harmful emissions into inert by-products. The palladium and rhodium take oxygen from nitrogen
oxides, to leave nitrogen, and combine the oxygen with carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons to leave carbon dioxide and
water.
CENTER SECTION
Naturally Aspirated Vehicles

1 - Inlet pipe
2 - Mounting rubbers
3 - Outlet pipe
4 - Front muffler
5 - Front to center section joint clamps
The center section has two inlet and outlet pipes and a muffler all welded together. A plate is welded between the inlet pipes
at the front of the center section. Two suspension rubbers connect hangers on the outlet pipes to hangers on the underside
of the body.
The muffler consists of an outer case and two end plates, which contain two perforated tubes and a baffle plate.
Supercharger Vehicles

1 - Intermediate pipe
2 - Outlet pipe
3 - Mounting rubbers
4 - Air deflector shield
5 - Center muffler
6 - Front muffler
7 - Front to center section joint clamps
8 - Inlet pipe
The center section has two inlet, intermediate and outlet pipes, and two mufflers all welded together. Two plates are welded
between the inlet pipes at the front of the center section. Two suspension rubbers connect hangers on the outlet pipes to
hangers on the underside of the body.
An air deflector shield is attached to four brackets on the outlet pipes. The air deflector shield directs cooling air on to the
electronic differential at high vehicle speeds.
The front muffler consists of an outer case and two end plates, which contain two perforated tubes and a baffle plate. The
center muffler consists of upper and lower shells, which contain perforated pipes, installed inside over-pipes, and three baffle
plates.
REAR SECTION
Naturally Aspirated Vehicles

1 - Mounting rubber
2 - Rear muffler
3 - Outlet pipe
4 - Finisher
5 - Mounting rubber
6 - Semi-active muffler valve
7 - Inlet pipe
8 - Center to rear section joint clamps
9 - Mounting rubber
The rear section has two inlet and outlet pipes welded to a muffler. A polished stainless steel finisher is installed on each of
the outlet pipes. Three suspension rubbers connect hangers on the muffler to hangers and a bracket on the underside of the
body.
The muffler consists of upper and lower shells, which contain inlet pipes connected to SAM (semi active muffler) valves, and
perforated inner pipes supported in five baffle plates. The inner pipes connect to the outlet pipes.
The SAM valves vary the tone of the exhaust to give a more sporty sound at higher engine speeds. The SAM valves are
normally closed, spring loaded check valves.
The SAM valves are non serviceable and the muffler is replaced as a complete assembly.
Supercharger Vehicles

1 - Rear muffler
2 - Mounting rubber
3 - Exhaust valve
4 - Outlet pipes
5 - Finishers
6 - Exhaust valve
7 - Mounting rubber
8 - Inlet pipe
9 - Center to rear section joint clamps
10 - Mounting rubber
The rear section has two inlet pipes and four outlet pipes welded to a muffler. A stiffener plate is welded between each pair
of outlet pipes. A polished stainless steel finisher is installed on each of the outlet pipes. Three suspension rubbers connect
hangers on the muffler to hangers and a bracket on the underside of the body.
The muffler consists of upper and lower shells, which contain perforated inlet and inner pipes supported in five baffle plates.
An exhaust valve is installed in the outboard outlet pipe on each side of the muffler. The exhaust valves are part of the
active exhaust system.
Active Exhaust System

1 - Bracket and isolator mounts
2 - Vacuum pump
3 - Solenoid valve
4 - LH exhaust valve
5 - Pipe
6 - Pipe carrier
7 - RH exhaust valve
8 - Reservoir
9 - Restrictor
10 - Check valve
The active exhaust system allows exhaust gases to bypass the muffler to produce a more sporty exhaust sound. In addition
to the exhaust valves, the active exhaust system has:
 A vacuum pump
 A solenoid valve
 A reservoir
 Related pipes, which incorporate a restrictor and a check valve.
Each exhaust valve consists of a normally open plate valve and pneumatic actuator.
The vacuum pump, solenoid valve and reservoir are attached to a bracket installed in the left rear wheel housing, behind the
wheel arch liner. Plastic pipes are connected between the vacuum pump, reservoir and solenoid valve, and between the
solenoid valve and the two exhaust valves. The pipes to the RH exhaust valve are located in pipe carriers attached to the
rear floor brace.
In the pipes between the solenoid valve and the exhaust valves, a restrictor is installed in parallel with a check valve. The
restrictor slows the flow of air through the pipes, to damp the opening of the exhaust valves. The check valve ensures air
flows only through the restrictor when the exhaust valves are opened, but allows the restrictor to be by-passed when the
exhaust valves are closed, to give an undamped closing movement.
The solenoid valve controls the operation of the exhaust valves by connecting them to the reservoir and vacuum pump or to
atmosphere. Atmospheric pressure enters the solenoid valve through a filter attached to a vent.
Operation of the active exhaust system is controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
CONTROL DIAGRAM (SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES ONLY)
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Part Number
Part Number
Item Description
1 - Battery
4 - Vacuum pump
5 - Solenoid valve
6 - ECM
Semi Active Muffler Valves (Naturally Aspirated Vehicles Only)
At low engine speeds the SAM valves are closed and restrict the flow through the muffler, which produces a more refined
exhaust sound. At higher engine speeds the increased pressure in the exhaust system opens the SAM valves and the
increased flow through the muffler produces a sportier exhaust sound.
Active Exhaust System (Supercharger Vehicles Only)
The position of the exhaust valves set by the ECM depends on engine speed, throttle angle and operating mode of the
transmission. At startup the exhaust valves are always open, to enhance the exhaust sound.
When the transmission is in the manual (sequential shift) mode, the exhaust valves are permanently open. When the
transmission is in the normal or sport mode, the position of the exhaust valves depends on engine speed and load, as
detailed in the following table:
Exhaust Valve Opening Strategy (Normal and Sport Transmission Modes)

Engine Speed: rev/min
Throttle Angle: % 700 1000 1100 2000 2500 3000 3750 4000>
0 Open Open Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Open
80> Open Open Closed Closed Closed Closed Open Open
The ECM energizes the active exhaust relay in the AJB (auxiliary junction box) 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on.
When the relay is energized, it supplies power to the vacuum pump and the solenoid valve. The vacuum pump is connected
to ground and runs continuously while the relay is energized, maintaining a depression in the reservoir and pipes to the
solenoid valve.
The solenoid valve is connected to ground through the ECM. When the ECM determines the exhaust valves require closing, it
connects the solenoid valve to ground. When the solenoid valve energizes, it opens the pipe connection from the reservoir
and vacuum pump to the exhaust valves, and closes the atmospheric vent. The depression at the reservoir and vacuum
pump is then sensed at the exhaust valves, via the check valve, and the exhaust valves close. When the ECM determines the
exhaust valves require opening, it disconnects the solenoid valve from ground. The solenoid valve de-energizes and closes
the pipe connection to the exhaust valves, and opens the atmospheric vent. Atmospheric pressure is then sensed at the
exhaust valves, via the restrictor, and the exhaust valves open.
Active Exhaust System Schematic

1 - Vacuum pump
2 - Reservoir
3 - Solenoid valve
4 - Filter
5 - Valve
6 - Check valve
7 - Restrictor
8 - RH exhaust valve
9 - LH exhaust valve
For a detailed description of the exhaust system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Exhaust System (309-00 Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description
and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
 Leaks
 Metal fatigue
 Pipes, mufflers and catalytic converters
 Joints
 Mountings
 Clearance around components
Symptom Chart

Excessively  Exhaust system/components  Inspect exhaust system, refer to Visual Inspection
noisy/leaking exhaust above
 Rectify leaks or Install new components as
necessary. Refer to Removal and Installation
instructions in this section
Exhaust excessively  Exhaust sound enhancement  Install new muffler and tailpipe assembly.
noisy at low speed valve stuck open REFER to: Rear Muffler (309-00 Exhaust System -
V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Loss of power  Restricted exhaust system  Install new exhaust components as necessary.
 Exhaust sound enhancement Refer to relevant Removal and Installation
valve stuck closed instructions in workshop manual
 Fuel system  Check for fuel system, ignition system, and
 Ignition system electronic engine controls DTCs and refer to the
 Electronic engine control relevant DTC Index
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalytic
Converter
Removal

stands.

and Installation).
4.

Torque: 40 Nm
6.
Installation


Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalytic
Converter RH
Removal


and Installation).
4.
5.
6. NOTE: Tighten the top nut first.
Torque:
Top nut 40 Nm
Bottom nut 40 Nm
7. NOTE: If the original sensor is to be installed,

apply lubricant meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A
to the thread of the sensor.
Torque: 48 Nm
Installation


Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Sound
Enhancement Vacuum Pump
Removal


and Installation).
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Sound
Enhancement Valve
Removal
WARNING: Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.


Installation

Removal
All vehicles

component.
All vehicles
3. Torque: 25 Nm
4. Torque: 25 Nm
5.
6. Torque: 50 Nm

technician.
technician.

Installation

Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Front Muffler
Removal

stands.

2. Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00 Exhaust System - V8 5.0L
3. Torque: 25 Nm
4.
5. Torque: 50 Nm
technician.
Installation

Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear Muffler
Removal
All vehicles

component.
All vehicles
3. Torque: 25 Nm
4. Torque: 50 Nm
technician.

technician.

Installation

Fuel System - General Information - Fuel System Pressure Release V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1. Remove the fuel pump fuse.
2. Remove the fuel filler cap.
3. CAUTION: When depressurising the fuel system, make

sure that there is no throttle input. Failure to follow this
Start the engine and allow it to idle until the engine stalls.
4. Crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure
that the fuel rail pressure is released.
Filling
1. NOTE: Make sure all repairs have been carried out before
proceeding to the following steps.
Install the fuel pump fuse.

2. Install the fuel filler cap.
3. Read and clear stored DTC fault codes.
Fuel System - General Information - Fuel Tank Draining
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Fuel drain adaptor
310-154
WARNINGS:
vehicle.
in personal injury.
The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent
fire and explosion.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, ensure the area around the joint faces and connections
are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.

Specifications).
2. Remove the rear RH seat cushion cover.
3. Position the underseat sound deadner, to gain

access to the fuel tank grommet.
4. Remove the rubber grommet.
5. Cut the sealing plug from the top of the 2 drain

ports.
6. Connect the fuel tank drain equipment ground cable to the

vehicle.
7. Remove the fuel from the tank, via the 2 drain ports, to drain
the left and right sides of the fuel tank.
8. Remove the fuel drain equipment.
9. WARNING: After the fuel tank drain is

complete always fit the sealing covers over the
drain ports. Failure to do so will mean that fuel
vapour can escape.
Install the drain port sealing covers.
10. Install the grommet.

 Connect and secure the electrical connector.
11. Position the sound deadner.

12. Install the RH rear seat cushion.
13. Refill the fuel tank.

Specifications).
Fuel System - General Information - Quick Release Coupling
General Procedures
Disconnect
1. WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a quarantined area and arrange "No

Smoking/Petrol Fumes" signs about the vehicle.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground

the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until
the work is complete.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of

any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on

or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors
are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these
The fuel system remains pressurized for a long time after

the ignition is switched off. The fuel pressure must be relieved
before attempting any repairs. Failure to follow these

checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel

spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
If taken internally do not induce vomiting, seek immediate

medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or
eyewash solution and seek medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged

contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
Relieve the fuel system pressure.

For additional information, refer to Pressure Relief in this
section.
2. Disconnect the quick release fitting.
1. Release the retaining clip.
2. Disconnect the quick release fitting.
Connect
1. To connect, reverse the disconnect procedure.
Fuel System - General Information - Quick Release Coupling - Push
Connect
General Procedures
Disconnect
1. WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a quarantined area and arrange "No

Smoking/Petrol Fumes" signs about the vehicle.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground

the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until
the work is complete.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of

any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on

or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors
are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these
The fuel system remains pressurized for a long time after

the ignition is switched off. The fuel pressure must be relieved
before attempting any repairs. Failure to follow these

checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow these instructions
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel

spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
If taken internally do not induce vomiting, seek immediate

medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or
eyewash solution and seek medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged

contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
Relieve the fuel system pressure.

For additional information, refer to Pressure Relief in this
section.
2. Disconnect the push connect fitting.
 Press the collar.
 Disconnect the push connect fitting.
Connect
1. To connect.
 Support the male stub.
 Push the connector fitting onto the stub until an
audible click can be heard.
 Check the connection by a gentle tug test.
Fuel System - General Information - Spring Lock Couplings
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Fuel spring lock decoupling tool 310-D005
WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a quarantined area and arrange "No Smoking/Petrol Fumes" signs about the vehicle.
in personal injury.
The fuel system remains pressurized for a long time after the ignition is switched off. The fuel pressure must be
relieved before attempting any repairs. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow this instruction may
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
If taken internally, do not induce vomiting, seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions
attention.
Make sure the garter spring snaps over the male end of the spring lock coupling.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, ensure the area around the joint faces and connections
are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
www.JagDocs.com
1. Release the fuel line safety clip.
3. Close the special tool and push it into the female end of
the spring lock coupling.
4. Disconnect the spring lock coupling.

 Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid
spillage.
6. Connect the spring lock coupling.

 Clean the components.
 Install new O-ring seals.
 Install a new garter spring.
7. Check the spring lock coupling, to make sure it is

correctly connected.
8. Attach the fuel line safety clip.

Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Item
Fuel system type Electronic - returnless
Fuel tank construction Stainless steel pressings
Fuel filter Mounted internally to the fuel tank
Fuel tank sender unit Mounted on the body of the fuel pump
Fuel Pump:
Type/location Electric - submersible - located in the fuel tank
Operating pressure 4.5 bar - 65lbf/in²
Maximum output press at key on key off 6.3 bar - 91lbf/in²
Capacities
Liters
Fuel tank capacity 71.1 (total) / 70.6 (useable)
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Fuel tank filler pipe bracket to vehicle 7 5 62
Fuel tank strap to vehicle - bolt 35 26 -
Fuel/vapor tube bracket to vehicle - bolt 7 5 62
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank and
Lines
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Fuel tank
2 - FPDM (fuel pump driver module)
3 - Fuel filler pipe
4 - Vent pipe
5 - Fuel LP (low pressure) sensor
6 - Fuel delivery line
INTRODUCTION
The fuel tank and lines is an electronically controlled returnless system that delivers a continuous supply of LP fuel to the fuel
charging and control system on the engine. For additional information, refer to:
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
The fuel tank and lines has:
 A fuel tank.
 A FPDM (fuel pump driver module).
 A fuel filler pipe.
 A vent pipe.
 A fuel delivery line.
 A fuel LP sensor.
FUEL TANK

1 - Internal vent pipes
2 - Vent connector - to EVAP (evaporative emissions) canister
3 - Baffle plate (2 off)
4 - Remote pump housing
5 - Fuel level sensor
- Fuel level sensor
6
7 - Pump module
8 - Lower pressing
9 - Upper pressing
10 - Mounting flange
11 - PVV (pressure ventilation valve)
12 - Fuel filler check valve
13 - Vent connector - to fuel filler pipe
14 - LVS (liquid vapor separator)
The fuel tank is a saddle type tank made of upper and lower pressings of stainless steel. Two baffle plates are installed in the
fuel tank to reduce fuel surge.
Two metal straps attach the fuel tank to the underside of the vehicle, just forward of the rear suspension. A heat shield is
attached to the metal straps and to two brackets on the underside of the fuel tank. Isolator pads are bonded to the top of the
fuel tank at the contact points between the fuel tank and the vehicle.
Incorporated into the fuel tank are:
 A pump module.
 A mounting flange.
 A PVV.
 A LVS and related vent pipes.
 A remote pump housing and related fuel pipes.
 Two fuel level sensors.
 A fuel filler check valve.
Pump Module

1 - Electrical connector (connects to vehicle wiring at mounting flange)
2 - Electrical connector (connects to mounting flange ground)
3 - Fuel connector (supply to mounting flange)
4 - PVV
-
5 Housing
6 - Filter
7 - Fuel pump
8 - RH (right hand) fuel level sensor
9 - Jet pump
10 - Electrical connector (connects to LH fuel level sensor)
The pump module takes fuel from both sides of the fuel tank and supplies it to the fuel delivery line via the PVV and the
mounting flange. The pump module is mounted in the RH (right-hand) side of the fuel tank, on a bayonet fitting welded to
the bottom of the fuel tank.
A swirl pot is integrated into the base of the pump module housing. A 60 micron filter is attached to the swirl pot inlet at the
base of the housing.
The fuel pump is an electric, variable speed, vane pump installed in the top of the housing. The pump has a maximum rated
flow of 234 liters/hour (61.82 US gallons/hour) at 12.2 V and 4.5 bar (65.3 lbf/in.2).
The inlet of the fuel pump is located in the center of the swirl pot. Pipes connect the two outlet ports of the fuel pump to the
PVV and to a jet pump on top of the housing. The jet pump draws fuel from the LH (left-hand) side of the fuel tank through a
suction pipe connected to the remote pump housing. A 'spider trap' in the remote pump housing prevents the ingress of
larger pieces of debris.
Operation of the fuel pump is controlled by the FPDM. The fuel pump is connected to the FPDM via an electrical connector on
the underside of the mounting flange.
Mounting Flange

1 - RH drain connector
2 - Fuel delivery line connector (with transportation blank installed)
3 - Filter bowl
4 - Electrical connector (from ground point)
5 - Inlet connector (from PVV)
6 - Ground point
-
7 Mounting flange
8 - LH drain connector
6 - Electrical connector (connects to vehicle wiring)
The mounting flange filters the fuel before it enters the fuel delivery line and provides the fuel and electrical interfaces
between the interior and exterior of the fuel tank. The mounting flange is installed in the top of the fuel tank on the RH side.
A gasket, retainer ring, clamp ring and six nuts secure the mounting flange to the top of the fuel tank. The mounting flange
aperture provides access to the fuel tank interior.
A connector for the fuel delivery line is located in the top of the mounting flange. Two drain connectors, one for each side of
the fuel tank, are located in the mounting flange. Under the RH drain connector is a pipe that extends to the bottom of the
tank. Under the LH drain connector is a stub pipe, which connects to a pipe attached to the remote pump housing on the LH
side of the fuel tank.
The bowl on the underside of the mounting flange contains a fuel filter element and incorporates the fuel inlet connector. The
fuel filter element is non-serviceable and can only be replaced by replacing the mounting flange. Two cables connect an
electrical connector to a ground point on the base of the filter bowl.
A six pin electrical connector, located between the drain connectors, provides the electrical connection between the vehicle
wiring and the mounting flange ground point, the fuel pump and the fuel level sensors.
Pressure Ventilation Valve
The PVV is installed in the pipe between the pump module and the mounting flange to protect the system from excess
pressure. The PVV releases fuel back into the tank if pressure in the pipe increases to 7.3 to 8.3 bar (105.9 to 120.4 lbf/in.2).
Liquid Vapor Separator

1 - ROV (roll over valve)
-
2 Vent pipes
3 - FLVV (fuel level vent valve)
4 - OPRV (over pressure relief valve)
The LVS prevents the escape of liquid fuel through to the fuel tank vent pipes. The LVS is installed in a bracket in the top
center of the fuel tank. Vent pipes connect the LVS to two connectors in the upper rear corners of the fuel tank. The RH
connector is for a vent pipe connected to the top of the fuel filler pipe. The LH connector is for a vent pipe connected to the
EVAP (evaporative emission) canister.
For additional information, refer to: Evaporative Emissions (303-13 Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol, Description and Operation).
Three valves are incorporated into the LVS:
 An OPRV, to relieve any excess pressure in the fuel tank into the LVS
 A FLVV, to limit the maximum fuel level when filling the fuel tank
 A ROV, to prevent the escape of fuel through the vent pipes if the vehicle overturns, and allow the fuel tank to vent
when the FLVV is closed (i.e. when the fuel tank is full).
Vapor leaving the fuel tank passes through either the FLVV or the ROV during normal vehicle use. During filling, if the fuel
reaches the full level the FLVV closes and prevents fuel vapor passing through to the LVS. This causes the pressure in the
fuel tank to rise, which in turn causes the pump filling nozzle to cut off at approximately 17 mbar (0.25 lbf/in2).
The ROV contains a valve that closes if the vehicle overturns, and prevents liquid fuel escaping from the fuel tank through
the vent pipes.
The ball in the top of the ROV provides a pressure hold function, which is set at 45 mbar (0.65 lbf/in2). This prevents trickle
filling or over filling of the fuel tank.
Remote Pump Housing

1 - LH fuel level sensor
2 - Remote pump housing
3 - Pipe (from LH drain connector on mounting flange)
4 - Pipe (to jet pump on pump module)
The remote pump housing is where fuel from the LH side of the fuel tank is drawn from to fill the swirl pot in the pump
module. The remote pump housing is installed on the front face of the LH rear baffle. Clips integrated into the remote pump
housing hold the LH fuel level sensor and the pipe from the LH drain connector on the mounting flange.
Fuel Level Sensors
Two identical fuel level sensors are installed in the fuel tank. One is mounted on the pump module and one is mounted on
the remote pump housing. The fuel level sensors are connected to the BJB (battery junction box) via the connector on the
mounting flange.
The fuel level sensors are magnetic passive position sensors. Each sensor consists of a sealed housing that contains 51 film
resistors mounted in an arc on a ceramic surface. The film resistors range in value from 51.2 to 992.11 Ohms and are wired
in series with individual contacts. A soft magnetic foil with 51 flexible contacts is mounted a small distance above the film
resistors. A magnet, located below the ceramic surface, is attached to a lever and float arm.
The magnet pulls the flexible contacts onto the opposing film resistor contacts, forming an electrical circuit. As the float arm
moves, the magnet follows the arc of film resistors and changes the point at which the flexible contacts are pulled onto the
opposing film resistor contacts, which changes the resistance in the circuit.
Sensor Operating Principle

1 - Magnetic foil
2 - Spacer
3 - Ceramic surface
4 - Magnet
5 - Resistance film
Fuel Filler Check Valve
The fuel filler check valve prevents the escape of fuel through the fuel filler pipe if the vehicle overturns. The fuel filler check
valve is installed in a stub pipe in the rear right corner of the fuel tank and sealed with an O-ring seal.
A door on the fuel filler check valve is normally held closed by a spring. During filling, the weight of fuel in the fuel filler pipe
is sufficient to open the door and allow fuel into the fuel tank.
FUEL PUMP DRIVER MODULE
The FPDM controls the speed of the fuel pump to match the fuel demand of the engine. The FPDM is installed in the RH end
of the evaporative emission canister.
The pump speed required is calculated by the ECM (engine control module) and transmitted to the FPDM in a PWM (pulse
width modulation) signal.
FUEL FILLER PIPE

1 - Baffle
2 - Flapper
3 - Hose
4 - Pipe
5 - Vent pipe connector
6 - Filler cap
7 - Tether
The top of the fuel filler pipe is located above the right rear wheel. The filler cap is a conventional screw in type which is
secured to the vehicle with a tether. The filler cap is covered by a plastic door, which has a locking motor controlled by the
active anti-theft system.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
The fuel filler pipe is a stainless steel fabrication which is secured to the vehicle body by two brackets and a flange. A stub
pipe is incorporated into the top of the fuel filler pipe for connection of a vent pipe from the fuel tank. A baffle and flapper
are installed in the top of the fuel filler pipe. The baffle restricts the diameter of the fuel nozzle that can be used to fill the
fuel tank.
The bottom of the fuel filler pipe locates in a flexible hose attached to the fuel filler stub pipe in the rear right corner of the
fuel tank. Both ends of the hose are secured with worm drive clamps.
VENT PIPE
The vent pipe connects the vent connector at the right rear corner of the fuel tank to the stub pipe in the head of the fuel
filler pipe. Quick release connectors attach the vent pipe to the vent connection and the stub pipe. Cable ties secure the vent
pipe to the fuel filler pipe.
FUEL DELIVERY LINE
The fuel delivery line delivers fuel from the mounting flange to the engine compartment. The fuel delivery line is routed
along the front of the fuel tank and under the floor of the vehicle on the LH side. Clips secure the fuel delivery line in place
on the fuel tank and under the floor. At the front LH corner of the fuel tank a manifold is installed in the fuel delivery line to
allow installation of the fuel LP sensor.
FUEL LP SENSOR
The fuel LP sensor supplies a pressure signal to the ECM to enable closed loop control of the fuel pump. The fuel LP sensor is
installed in a manifold in the fuel delivery line, at the front left corner of the fuel tank.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Part Number Description
Item
1 - Battery
4 - RH fuel level sensor
5 - LH fuel level sensor
6 - Fuel pump
7 - FPDM
8 - ECM
10 - Fuel LP sensor
Fuel Level Sensors
The AJB (auxiliary junction box) sends a separate signal to each of the fuel level sensors. As the float arms of the fuel level
sensors move, the resistance across the fuel level sensors changes. Thus the level in the fuel tank determines the value of
the signals from the AJB.
From the two signal values the AJB derives a fuel quantity, which it incorporates into a medium speed CAN (controller area
network) message for the instrument cluster.
In addition to using the fuel quantity signal itself, the instrument cluster also transmits it on the high speed CAN for the
electronic engine controls system. For additional information, refer to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Fuel Pump
The FPDM is powered by a supply from the fuel pump relay in the AJB. The fuel pump relay is energized on opening the
driver's door, pressing the start button only or pressing the start button and the footbrake (which initiates engine cranking).
The FPDM supplies power to the fuel pump, and adjusts the power to control the speed of the fuel pump and thus the
pressure and flow in the fuel delivery line.
A PWM signal from the ECM tells the FPDM the required speed for the fuel pump. The on time of the PWM signal represents
half the fuel pump speed, e.g. if the PWM signal has an on time of 50%, the FPDM drives the pump at 100%.
The FPDM will only energize the fuel pump if it receives a valid PWM signal, with an on time of between 4% and 50%. To
switch the fuel pump off, the ECM transmits a PWM signal with an on time of 75%.
The output pressure from the fuel pump will change with changes of engine demand and fuel temperature. The ECM monitors
the input from the fuel LP sensor and adjusts the speed of the fuel pump as necessary to maintain a nominal output pressure
of 450 kPa (4.5 bar; 65.3 lbf/in.2), except during engine start-up. At engine start-up the target pressure for the fuel delivery
line is 630 kPa (6.3 bar; 91.4 lbf/in.2).
If the SRS (supplemental restraint system) outputs a crash signal on the high speed CAN, the ECM de-energizes the fuel
pump relay to prevent any further fuel being pumped to the engine.
If the ECM does not detect pressure in the fuel delivery line, it stops, or refuses to start, the engine and stores the
appropriate DTC (diagnostic trouble code).
The ECM receives a monitoring signal from the FPDM. Any FPDMDTC are stored by the ECM.
DTC can be retrieved from the ECM using the IDS (Integrated Diagnostic System). The FPDM itself cannot be interrogated by
the IDS.
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank and
Lines
For a detailed description of the fuel tank and lines system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Throttle body
Symptom Chart

 Spark plugs
 Ignition system
 Fuel pump
 Purge valve
 Fuel lines
 Ignition system
timing (VCT) hub
 Ignition system
Index
 Electronic engine controls electronic engine controls, transmission and traction
 Air leakage
DTC Index
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Level
Sender
Removal

2. Refer to: Fuel Pump and Sender Unit (310-01 Fuel Tank and
Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
3.
Installation

Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump
and Sender Unit
Removal

and Operation).


3. Refer to: Fuel Tank (310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
7.

fuel tank level sensor float and arm.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the fuel tank

level sensor float and arm.

Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank
Removal

and Operation).


3. Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel System - General
and Installation).

fluid.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank
Filler Pipe
Removal
1. Open the fuel filler door and remove the cap.

2. Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel System - General
3. Remove the right-hand wheel and tire.
and Installation).
4. Remove the right-hand wheel arch liner.
5. Remove the right-hand halfshaft.
Refer to: Rear Halfshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

6. NOTE: Non federal market vehicles only.
Torque: 7 Nm
7. NOTE: Federal market vehicles only.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Acceleration Control -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Accelerator pedal to bracket - screw 10 7 -
Acceleration Control - Acceleration Control
For a detailed description of the acceleration control systems, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in
REFER to: Acceleration Control (310-02 Acceleration Control, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
 Accelerator pedal  Fuses
 Throttle body  Wiring harness
 Electrical connector(s)
 Sensor(s)
4. If the concern is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTE: If a module or component is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the

P012100 Throttle Position (TP)  TP sensor sensing  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
sensor circuits TP 1 and TP circuits TP 1 and TP this DTC using the manufacturer approved
2 - range/performance 2 - short to power, diagnostic system
high resistance  Install a new throttle body as necessary.
 TP sensor failure REFER to: Throttle Body (303-04 Fuel
Charging and Controls - Vehicles Without:
Supercharger, Removal and Installation).
sensor circuit TP 1 - low circuit TP 1 - short to this DTC using the manufacturer approved
input ground, high diagnostic system
resistance  Install a new throttle body as necessary.
sensor circuit TP 1 - high circuit TP1 - short to this DTC using the manufacturer approved
input power diagnostic system
 TP sensor failure  Install a new throttle body as necessary.
REFER to: Throttle Body (303-04 Fuel
sensor circuit TP 2 - low circuit TP 2 - short to this DTC using the manufacturer approved
input ground, high diagnostic system
resistance  Install a new throttle body as necessary.
sensor circuit TP 2 - low circuit TP 2- short to this DTC using the manufacturer approved
input power diagnostic system
 TP sensor failure  Install a new throttle body as necessary.
P022700 Accelerator Pedal Position  APP sensor circuit  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
(APP) sensor circuit APP 1 - APP 1 - short to this DTC using the manufacturer approved
low input ground, high diagnostic system
resistance
P022800 Accelerator pedal position  APP sensor circuit  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
(APP) sensor circuit APP 1 APP 1 - short to this DTC using the manufacturer approved
high input power diagnostic system
P210129 Throttle actuator control  Jammed throttle  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
motor circuit blade, gearing or this DTC using the manufacturer approved
range/performance motor diagnostic system
 Install a new throttle body. Refer to the new
P210162 Throttle actuator control  Jammed throttle  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
motor circuit blade, gearing or test throttle actuator control motor circuit for
range/performance motor short to ground, power, high resistance.
Compare throttle position sensor 1 and 2
datalogger signals, if signals are comparable
install a new throttle body.
P210164 Throttle actuator control  Jammed throttle  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
motor circuit blade, gearing or this DTC using the manufacturer approved
range/performance motor diagnostic system
 Install a new throttle body. Refer to the new
P210177 Throttle actuator motor  Throttle blade stuck  Check for throttle related DTCs and refer to
control circuit open DTC Index in this section
range/performance  Intake air system  Check intake air system for leaks
(commanded position not leak
reachable)
P210329 Throttle actuator motor  Throttle motor  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
control circuit high control circuit - short this DTC using the manufacturer approved
to power diagnostic system
 ECM fault  Refer to new module installation Note at top
of DTC Index
control circuit high - signal control circuit - short this DTC using the manufacturer approved
plausibility failure to power diagnostic system
 ECM fault  Refer to new module installation Note at top
of DTC Index
P210500 Throttle actuator control  Throttle MIL request  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
system - forced engine due to fuel cut this DTC using the manufacturer approved
shutdown diagnostic system
P210629 Throttle actuator control  Signal invalid  Install a new throttle body.
system - forced limited REFER to: Throttle Body (303-04 Fuel
power Charging and Controls - Vehicles Without:
Refer to the new module/component
P210664 Throttle actuator control  Signal plausibility  Install a new throttle body.
system - forced limited failure REFER to: Throttle Body (303-04 Fuel
power Charging and Controls - Vehicles Without:
control current control circuit - short this DTC using the manufacturer approved
range/performance to ground, power, diagnostic system
high resistance
P211900 Throttle actuator control  Throttle spring faulty  Install a new throttle body.
throttle body REFER to: Throttle Body (303-04 Fuel
range/performance - spring Charging and Controls - Vehicles Without:
P212200 Accelerator pedal position  APP sensor circuit 2 -  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
(APP) sensor D circuit low low input this DTC using the manufacturer approved
input diagnostic system
P212300 Accelerator pedal position  APP sensor circuit 2 -  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
(APP) sensor D circuit high high input this DTC using the manufacturer approved
input diagnostic system
P213528 Accelerator pedal position  APP sensor circuit 1  Check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short
(APP) sensor 1 and 2 and 2 range to ground, power and high resistance. Clear
voltage correlation performance - sub- the DTCs and retest. If the code remains,
processor replace the APP sensor
P213529 Accelerator pedal position  APP sensor -  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
(APP) sensor 1 and 2 excessive difference this DTC using the manufacturer approved
voltage correlation between raw values diagnostic system
of circuit 1 and 2 -
sub-processor
P213562 Accelerator pedal position  APP sensor circuit 1  Check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short
(APP) sensor 1 and 2 and 2 range to ground, power and high resistance. Clear
voltage correlation performance - sub- the DTCs and retest. If the code remains,
processor replace the APP sensor
P213564 Accelerator pedal position  APP sensor circuit 1  Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
(APP) sensor 1 and 2 and 2 range this DTC using the manufacturer approved
voltage correlation performance diagnostic system
Acceleration Control - Accelerator Pedal
Removal


2. Remove the throttle pedal assembly.

Installation
1. Install the throttle pedal assembly.

Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Speed control sensor - vertical alignment 90° ± 0.75
Item Nm lb-ft lg-in
Speed control module retaining nut 5 - 44
Speed control sensor retaining bolts 5 - 44
Speed control sensor, adjusment - lock nut 5 - 44
Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Adaptive speed control sensor (adaptive speed control system only)
2 - Stoplamp switch
4 - Instrument cluster warning lamps and icons
5 - Adaptive speed control module (adaptive speed control system only)
6 - Forward alert switch (adaptive speed control system only)
7 - Steering wheel mounted speed control switches (standard speed control system)
8 - Steering wheel mounted speed control switches (adaptive speed control system)
INTRODUCTION
There are two variants of speed control available, a standard system and an adaptive system. The standard system
maintains a set speed selected by the driver until operation is suspended or cancelled by a further input from the driver and
is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). The adaptive system includes the same functionality as the standard
system, but also has the ability to:
 Reduce vehicle speed, to less than the set speed, in order to maintain a selected distance behind a slower moving
vehicle
 Accelerate the vehicle back to the set speed, once the way ahead is clear, after reducing the set speed because of a
slower moving vehicle
 Alert the driver when the vehicle comes within a given distance of a slower moving vehicle.
The standard system and the adaptive system both have the following components:
 A set +/- switch

 A RESUME switch
 A CANCEL switch.
Both systems also use:
 The ECM
 The stoplamp switch
 The APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor.
The adaptive system incorporates the following additional components:
 An adaptive speed control module

 An adaptive speed control sensor
 A forward alert switch
 A time gap switch.
STANDARD SPEED CONTROL
The standard speed control system is integrated with the EEC (electronic engine control) system and uses fueling
intervention to automatically maintain a set vehicle speed. Once engaged, the system can also be used to accelerate the
vehicle without using the accelerator pedal.
The standard speed control system also uses inputs from the stoplamp switch, the APP sensor, the ECM and the ABS (anti-
lock brake system) module.
The standard speed control is operated by the driver using only the steering wheel switches. When standard speed control is
active, the ECM controls the electronic throttle to adjust the fuel supply as required to maintain the set speed.
The minimum set speed for standard speed control is 18 mph (30 (km/h). Speed control is automatically suspended if the
following conditions apply:
 Vehicle speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h)

 The brake pedal is pressed
 The cancel button is pressed
 Neutral, park or reverse gear is selected
 The difference between actual speed and the set speed is too great
 When the vehicle speed reaches a maximum speed of 120 mph (192 km/h)
 If the accelerator pedal is used to accelerate beyond the set speed for too long.
Speed Control Switches

1 - Set speed adjustment switch
2 - CANCEL switch
3 - RESUME switch
There are three standard speed control switches:
 Set speed adjustment switch

 Cancel
 Resume.
The standard speed control switches are located on the RH (right-hand) side of the steering wheel. The switches are
connected via fly leads to the audio control switches. The standard speed control switches are resistive ladder type switches
which vary the resistance of a 5 volt signal sent to them. The signal is returned along a LIN (local interconnect network) bus
from the audio control switches to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster routes the control signals to the ECM on the
medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Speed control is engaged by rotating the speed adjustment switch to the + or - positions. Once engaged the speed can be
varied by the speed adjustment switch. Each press of the speed adjustment switch will increase or decrease the set speed in
steps of 1 mph (2 km/h).
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL
The adaptive speed control system uses a forward looking radar sensor to scan the road ahead, looking for objects that are
moving at a different rate to itself. When a target is identified the adaptive speed control system will monitor the time gap
between it and the target vehicle. When that gap falls below a set driver selected level the adaptive speed control system
will intervene slowing the vehicle by backing off the throttle and/or applying the brakes, until the correct gap is attained. The
driver can chose between four gap settings, 1, 1.4, 1.8 and 2.2 seconds.
The system will detect but not react to the following:
 Vehicles in the oncoming lane

 Stationary vehicles
 Pedestrians
 Vehicles not in the same lane.
Adaptive speed control is active when the vehicle is moving. Adaptive speed control only functions when a set speed is
entered in normal speed control mode. The adaptive speed control system only intervenes with the set speed when it detects
a target vehicle, and then only if the minimum time gap is breached.
It is important to note that the system is intended for use in limited driving situations, does not remove control and
responsibility from the driver, and at all times can be quickly overridden. The adaptive speed control system is not a collision
warning system and will not react to stationary objects. The system does not operate below a minimum speed of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h) since it is unsuitable for use in cities or congested traffic. The system is best suited to main
roads/ highways with gradual bends.
The ECM, throttle body and throttle control are unchanged from those used for the standard speed control variants.
Radar Sensing
The adaptive speed control system is based on the use of a front mounted radar sensor. The sensor transmits a 1.5° wide
beam forward of the vehicle and detects the returning signals reflected off other vehicles and objects ahead.
The 1.5° wide radar beam is mechanically scanned at a rate of 10 sweeps/second across a total arc of 15° centered on the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle. The radar operates at millimetric wavelengths (76 - 77 GHz) and transmits a frequency
modulated continuous wave signal at a relatively low power level (no high power pulses).
With the ignition switched ON, the adaptive speed control module is powered up but no radar transmissions are emitted until
the vehicle is in motion.
The radar sensor detects three primary parameters of objects within the scanned arc. These are:
 Range
 Relative velocity
 Angle.
Range
The radar sensor detects the presence and ranges of different vehicles and objects within the scanned arc up to a distance of
approximately 130 meters (426.5 feet). The transmitted signal frequency changes continuously in a cyclic pattern
(modulation). This means that, in the time taken for the signal wave front, to travel to and from a target vehicle (or other
object), the transmission frequency will have changed. The difference between the received signal frequency and the new
transmission frequency is proportional to the distance between the transmitting vehicle and the target vehicle.
Relative Velocity
When the signal is reflected off a vehicle moving at a different speed (opening or closing gap) an effect known as the
Doppler shift causes an extra frequency modulation to be imposed on the signal. This Doppler frequency varies with the
relative speed of the vehicle being followed, enabling the system to differentiate between vehicles traveling at different
speeds and also between moving vehicles and stationary objects.
Angle
Using a narrow angle beam to scan horizontally enables the system to distinguish between vehicles in different lanes and
between vehicles and roadside objects.
Follow Mode
A set speed is selected in the normal speed control manner and this speed is maintained until a slower vehicle is
encountered in the lane ahead. When the vehicle ahead comes within the effective range of the radar sensor, the system
identifies it as a target vehicle and an icon is illuminated on the instrument cluster to indicate that the system is in "follow
mode". When the distance between the two vehicles closes to a set time gap, the adaptive speed control system closes the
throttle and if necessary applies the brakes to maintain the set time gap. Follow mode is effectively a closed loop system. If
several vehicles are ahead, the closest vehicle is chosen as the target to follow. If the target vehicle moves out of radar
range, or if either vehicle changes lane or drops below the minimum operating speed, the system exits follow mode and the
follow mode icon is extinguished. The adaptive speed control system will only raise its speed to the originally set speed, it
will not accelerate past this speed to maintain a time gap.
Driver operation of the foot brake or control switches will immediately cancel adaptive speed control.
When the vehicle is in follow mode the follow mode warning indicator is illuminated in the instrument cluster and the current
gap setting will be displayed in the message center.
1 - Follow mode warning indicator
2 - Forward alert warning indicator
System Restrictions
The adaptive speed control system is only intended to provide enhanced speed control as described above in certain
restricted conditions.
The following points should be noted:
 Automatic braking is limited to approximately 30% of full pressure (0.3 G deceleration) and is intended to provide a
smooth, gradual deceleration in follow mode conditions. Harsh braking by the target vehicle or following the target
vehicle down to very low speeds or to a halt will require driver override of the brakes
 While the radar sensor detects moving and stationary targets for assessment of the environment ahead, the system
does not react to or provide any control in situations other than follow mode conditions. Stationary or slow moving
vehicles (below 6 mph (10 km/h)), pedestrians, objects on the road and oncoming vehicles in the same lane are not
recognized.
WARNING: It must be emphasized that the adaptive speed control system is not a collision warning or avoidance
system and that, other than the limited conditions of follow mode, driver intervention will be necessary to control the vehicle
speed.
In follow mode, some situations may cause target ambiguities for the detection system. These situations include:
 The nearby presence of a third vehicle when driving on a line slightly offset to the target vehicle
 Vehicles edging into the lane ahead which are not detected by the system until they have moved into the radar
beam.
On the approach to, or exit from a bend, a target vehicle may be lost or a new target acquired as vehicles ahead change
their angular position with respect to the radar sensor. On a straight road, if the sensing vehicle is in follow mode below its
selected set speed, losing the target vehicle will cause the sensing vehicle to accelerate to this set speed. This acceleration is
undesirable either on, or entering a bend when the target is suddenly lost, and in this situation the system inhibits the
resumption of the set speed.
The speed control system compares vehicle speed data from the ABS system with the relative speed of an external object as
detected by the radar sensor to ascertain whether the object is stationary or not.
NOTE: If tires are fitted which are different in diameter from those specified for the vehicle, the vehicle speed calculated by
the ABS will not be the true road speed. This situation may cause stationary objects to be falsely identified as moving
vehicles and result in automatic deceleration on a clear road.
Adaptive Speed Control Switches

1 - Set speed adjustment switch
2 - Time gap switch
3 - Cancel switch
4 - Resume switch
The adaptive speed control system is controlled from the steering wheel switches. The switches are the same as used for
normal speed control with the addition of an extra time gap setting switch. The time gap setting switch allows the driver to
adjust the time gap to one of four pre-set time gaps. The selected time gap is displayed in the vehicle message center.
The time gap will return to the default gap (the third setting) each time the ignition is cycled.
Adaptive Speed Control Module
The adaptive speed control module is located on the bottom of the RH A pillar. The control module is connected to the other
vehicle systems via the high speed CAN bus. Signals from the adaptive speed control forward looking radar sensor are
received on a dedicated CAN bus between the two modules.
Adaptive Speed Control Radar Sensor
The adaptive speed control radar sensor is located centrally behind the front bumper cover. The sensor is connected to the
adaptive speed control module via a private CAN bus. If the unit is replaced in service the unit must be re-aligned vertically.
Horizontal alignment is achieved by putting the sensor in service mode with a Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The
vehicle is then driven for a short period while the sensor calibrates itself. Calibration is complete when the 'follow' icon in the
instrument cluster stops flashing.
Forward Alert
The forward alert system utilizes the adaptive speed control system components. Forward alert is turned on and off
independently of adaptive speed control, via a switch mounted in the lower outboard knee bolster switchpack. Forward alert
will notify the driver by means of a chime, and warning indicator in the instrument cluster and indication in the message
center, when a target vehicle comes into range. The system will NOT use throttle or brake intervention to slow the vehicle.
Forward Alert Switch
The forward alert switch is connected to the instrument cluster in a resistive ladder with the luggage compartment opening
switch and the fuel filler flap switch. The instrument cluster sends the forward alert information to the adaptive speed control
module on the CAN bus.
WARNING: This system is intended as a driver aid and should be used as such. The system is NOT a collision warning
or avoidance device.
The system sensitivity can be adjusted in the same manner as the adaptive speed control, via the steering wheel mounted
switches. Each adjustment is accompanied by a message in the message center.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired connection; D = High speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus; U = Private CAN

1 - APP sensor
2 - Stoplamp switch
3 - Electric throttle
4 - ECM
7 - Clockspring
9 - Steering wheel speed control switches (adaptive speed control version shown)
13 - Adaptive speed control sensor (adaptive speed control system only)
14 - Forward alert switch (adaptive speed control system only)
15 - Adaptive speed control module (adaptive speed control system only)
There are two options of speed control available, adaptive speed control and non-adaptive speed control. For a detailed
description of the speed control systems, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to: Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and
Operation).
Visual Inspection
 Speed control sensor  Fuses
 Ensure the speed control sensor is free from obstructions  Wiring harness
 Speed control module  Electrical connector(s)
 Steering wheel switches
 Brake switch
 Speed control sensor
 Speed control module
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (vehicles with adaptive system installed)
An incorrectly aligned speed control sensor can cause incorrect system operation. Before starting any repair work on
the speed control system, on vehicles with the adaptive system installed, check the adjustment of the speed control
sensor.
REFER to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (310-03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
Symptom Chart

Speed control inhibited or  Default mode enabled  Check for Network related DTCs that could be
disabled  Supply voltage to caused by power failure to the module or sensor
speed control module and refer to DTC Index.
 Supply voltage to  For steering wheel speed control switch and circuit
speed control sensor tests. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
 Steering wheel speed  Check for engine throttle position sensor DTCs and
control switch(s) refer to the relevant DTC Index.
 Steering wheel speed  For brake switch tests. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
control switch circuit
 Throttle sensors
 Brake switch
Unable to regulate/adjust  Steering wheel switch  For speed control switch circuit tests. GO to
vehicle speed malfunction Pinpoint Test A.
Unable to cancel speed  Steering wheel switch  For speed control switch circuit tests. GO to
control from steering wheel malfunction Pinpoint Test A.
Unable to cancel speed  Brake switch  For brake switch tests. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
control from brake pedal malfunction
DTC Index
NOTE: If a module or component is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the
into account.

B1A84- Car configuration data  RJB reporting invalid car Re-configure RJB using manufacturer approved
81 configuration parameters diagnostic system and re-test
C1A67- Speed control sensor  Speed control sensor out Carry out speed control sensor adjustment
54 alignment angle - out of of alignment procedure.
range REFER to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment
(310-03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
C1A67- Speed control sensor - Yaw  Yaw rate voltage - out of Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
81 rate sensor range DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
C1A67- Speed control sensor - Incorrect or missing data from Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
87 Missing data speed control sensor DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
C1A67- Speed control sensor -  Internal hardware failure Install a new speed control sensor.
96 Internal sensor failure REFER to: Speed Control Sensor (310-03 Speed
Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
C1A67- Speed control sensor -  Sensor reduced visibility This DTC will be cleared automatically when
97 reduced visibility environmental conditions allow
C1A67- Speed control sensor -  Speed control sensor This DTC will be cleared automatically when
98 temperature high internal temperature environmental conditions allow
exceeded threshold
P174E- ABS wheel speed correlation  Follow speed is mis- Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
81 - active speed output error calculated to too high a system, clear the DTC and re-test. If the DTC is
value logged contact Dealer Technical Support
U0001- High speed CAN  Vehicle CAN Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
88 communication Bus condition DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U0100- Lost communications with  ECM missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
00 ECM DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U0101- Lost communications with  TCM missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
00 TCM DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U0121- Lost communication with  ABS missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
00 ABS DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U0128- Lost communications with  Parking brake missing Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
00 parking brake module message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U0155- Lost communications with  Instrument cluster Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
00 instrument cluster missing message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U0300- Internal control module  Invalid configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
00 software incompatibility message is received approved diagnostic system. Clear DTCs and re-
test. If DTC still logged, suspect speed control
module. Refer to new module installation note at
top of DTC Index
U0300- Control module software  RJB - at least one of the Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
55 incompatibility - module car configuration approved diagnostic system. Clear DTCs and re-
configuration failure parameters is not test
configured
U0401- Invalid data received from  ECM did not respond Check ECM for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
00 ECM - ECM cancel fault properly to speed control
cancel or auto brake
cancel request
U0401- Invalid data received from  ECM did not respond Check ECM for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
67 ECM - ECM resume fault properly to speed control
resume request
U0401- Invalid data received from  Speed control inhibited Check ECM for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
81 ECM - speed control by ECM
inhibited by ECM
U0415- Invalid data received from  Stability assist fault Check ABS module for DTCs and refer to DTC
81 ABS Index
U0417- Invalid data received from  Parking brake module did Check parking brake module for DTCs and refer
67 parking brake module - not respond properly to to DTC Index
parking brake apply apply request
acknowledge
U0417- Invalid data received from  Speed control inhibited Check parking brake module for DTCs and refer
81 parking brake module by parking brake module to DTC Index
U0422- Invalid data received from  CJB message not up- Check CJB for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
00 CJB dated
U0423- Invalid data received from  Instrument cluster not Check instrument cluster for DTCs and refer to
81 instrument cluster enabled for adaptive DTC Index
speed control
U0443- Invalid data received from  RJB message not up- Check RJB for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
00 RJB dated
U1A00- Private CAN Bus circuit  Private CAN Bus off Refer to wiring diagrams and test Private CAN
88 condition Bus circuit between speed control module and
speed control sensor for circuit faults
U1A14- CAN initialisation failure  Internal electronic failure Install a new speed control module, refer to the
49 new module installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
U2101- Control module  Data sent from RJB is Re-configure RJB using manufacturer approved
00 configuration incompatible invalid diagnostic tool, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC
remains check RJB for DTCs and refer to DTC
Index
U3000- Control module  Internal micro controller Install a new speed control module, refer to new
41 error module installation note at top of DTC Index
 Checksum fault
U3000- Control module  Internal RAM test fault Install a new speed control module, refer to new
42 module installation note at top of DTC Index
U3000- Control module  Internal control module Install a new speed control module, refer to the
49 failure new module installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : SPEED CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT TESTS
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the back-up power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any supplemental restraint system (SRS) components. To deplete the back-up
power supply energy, disconnect the battery GROUND cable and wait two minutes. Failure to follow this instruction
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL SWITCH FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1 Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2 Wait two minutes for the system to become safe.
3 Disconnect the speed control switch connector SW009.
 speed control switch connector SW009, pin 02, component side
Is the resistance 4310 ohms?

Yes
GO to A2.
No
INSTALL a new speed control switch assembly.
REFER to: Speed Control Switch (310-03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
A2: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL RESUME SWITCH CIRCUIT

2 Operate the RESUME switch.
Does the resistance switch between 4310 ohms and 2110 ohms when the switch is operated?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
A3: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL SET+ SWITCH CIRCUIT

2 Operate the SET+ switch.
Yes
GO to A4.
No
A4: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL HEADWAY REDUCTION SWITCH CIRCUIT

2 Operate the HEADWAY REDUCTION switch.
Yes
GO to A5.
No
A5: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL HEADWAY INCREASE SWITCH CIRCUIT

2 Operate the HEADWAY INCREASE switch.
Yes
GO to A6.
No
A6: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL SET- SWITCH CIRCUIT
2 Operate the SET- switch.

Yes
GO to A7.
No
A7: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL CANCEL SWITCH CIRCUIT

2 Operate the CANCEL switch.
Does the resistance switch between 4310 ohms and zero ohms when the switch is operated?
Yes
GO to A8.
No
A8: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
 speed control switch connector SW009, pin 02, harness side
 steering wheel audio control switch connector SW004, pin 02, harness side
Yes
REPAIR the circuit speed control switch connector SW009, pin 02 to clockspring connector
SW004, pin 02. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the system for
normal operation.
No
GO to A9.
A9: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL SWITCH FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
 speed control switch connector SW009, pin 03, harness side
 steering wheel audio control switch connector SW004, pin 03, harness side
Yes
REPAIR the circuit speed control switch connector SW009, pin 02 to clockspring connector
normal operation.
No
No fault has been identified with the speed control switch or circuit, check integrity of
connections. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN circuit between the steering
wheel audio switch and the instrument cluster. Test the steering wheel audio switch.
PINPOINT TEST B : BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT TEST

CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK THE BRAKE SWITCH FUNCTION, WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL RELEASED
1 Set ignition status to OFF.
2 Disconnect the brake switch connector CA142.
 Brake switch connector CA142, pin 02 component side

Yes
INSTALL a new brake switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK THE BRAKE SWITCH FUNCTION, WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED

Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
INSTALL a new brake switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
B3: CHECK THE BRAKE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
 Brake switch connector CA142, pin 03
 GROUND
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the brake switch connector CA142, pin 03 and GROUND. For
additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B4.
B4: CHECK THE ECM TO BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1 Disconnect the ECM connector, FL072.
 ECM connector FL072, pin 40

Yes
GO to B5.
No
No fault is indicated with the brake switch or circuit. Check the integrity of all connections and
1 Disconnect intermediate electrical connector FL002.
 ECM connector FL072, pin 40
 Intermediate electrical connector FL002, pin 13

Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the ECM connector FL072, pin 40 and intermediate electrical
connector FL002, pin 13. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the
system for normal operation.
No
GO to B6.
 Intermediate electrical connector FL002, pin 13

Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the brake switch connector CA142, pin 02 and intermediate electrical
connector FL002, pin 13. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the
No
No fault is indicated with the brake switch or circuit. Check the integrity of all connections and
Sensor Adjustment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
501-F007
Inclinometer
Adjustment

stands.
 Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).
3. NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a
level surface.
4. NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a

level surface.
 Using the special tool, check the adaptive

cruise control (ACC) radar is level, (+/- 0.5
degrees).
Special Tool(s): 501-F007

5. NOTE: Do not release the lock nut.
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a

level surface.
 Adjust using an internal Torx Bit.

 If the vertical alignment has to be adjusted
by more than 2 degrees, then carry out the
service alignment procedure.

stands.

Installation).
8.
 Configure the ACC module using the diagnostic tool.
 This procedure is required if:
 A new ACC radar and, or ACC module are installed.
 The ACC radar needed to be removed or is misaligned in
its position due to another repair operation.
9.
 From the diagnostic tool menu, select: Service Alignment
Mode.
 The follow indicator will now be flashing, this indicates
that the vehicle is in "service alignment" and now
requires driving.
 The vehicle speed must be above 30 mph (48 kph).
 Choose a road with plenty of stationary objects, like
street lights, road signs, or barriers. Use an inside or
outside lane.
 Following vehicles too closely will obscure the stationary
targets from the radar, a time gap of 2 seconds is
recommended.
 A straight road will produce a quicker and better result,
although the process will still operate on a curved road.
 The time that the ACC module takes to align will vary,
depending on the route, speed, number of targets, and
individual module.
 When the flashing follow indicator light extinguishes, the
ACC system is now functional, and a required vehicle
speed can now be set by the driver and the ACC system
will operate as normal.
Deactivator Switch
Removal
NOTE: This component also functions as the brake pedal switch.



Installation
CAUTION: During installation of the brake switch, make sure the brake pedal is not depressed at any time.
Depressing the pedal may cause: poor operation of the brake light switch and brake lights, diagnostic trouble codes to
be logged and/or failure of the vehicle to start.


Switch
Removal
Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00, Description and

Operation).
2. Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental
Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Upshift Paddle Switch (307-05 Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
4. Refer to: Downshift Paddle Switch (307-05 Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
5. Torque: 3 Nm
6. Torque: 3 Nm
7. Torque: 6 Nm
8.
Installation

Sensor
Removal


stands.

Installation).
4. Refer to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (310-03 Speed
Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes

Do not remove the speed control sensor

adjustment stud lock nut.
NOTE: Make sure that the sensor is aligned after

installation as described in the speed control
sensor adjustment procedure.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation

Climate Control System - General Information -
Air conditoning (A/C) refrigerant HFC 134a
A/C compressor oil ND-OIL8
Capacities
Description Grammes
A/C refigerant 750
Refrigerant Oil Adding Capacities

NOTE: Rotate the A/C compressor shaft at least 6 to 8 turns when draining the refrigerant oil.
Item Mililiters
Condenser core Add 33
and desiccant bag
Evaporator Add 46
A/C compressor 1. Drain old A/C compressor. With drain plug removed and ports uncapped, rotate shaft to remove
oil and measure the amount of oil captured. 2. Drain new A/C compressor into a clean vessel. With
drain plug removed and ports uncapped, rotate shaft to remove oil. Then add back a quantity of
the new oil that is identical to the quantity of oil removed from the old A/C compressor. However,
if this quantity is less than 30ml, then make it up to 30ml.
A/C lines - If air Add 10 per line
conditioning has
been operational.
Climate Control System - General Information - Climate Control
System
NOTE: All Air Conditioning (A/C) related tests should be run in an ambient temperature of at least 10°C (50°F).
Visual Inspection
 Coolant level  Fuse(s)
 Refrigerant leaks (UV lamp)  Circuit
 Drive belt  Blower motor
 Compressor  Electrical connector(s)
 Cooling fan  Compressor
 Control flap(s)  Cooling fan
 Duct(s)  Actuators
 Register(s)  Climate control assembly
 Cabin air filter
 Hose(s)
 Coolant pump
3. Listen for any unusual noises during climate control system operation.
4. Inspect the refrigerant system with an ultraviolet (UV) lamp for traces of UV sensitive leak trace dye.
6. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Flushing
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
Use extreme care and observe all safety precautions related to the
use of refrigerants. Due to refrigerant hazards, always wear safety
goggles and non-penetrable gloves when working on or flushing air
conditioning (A/C) systems. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
When flushing the A/C system, refer to the manufacturers

equipment instructions for additional information. Failure to do so may
result in system damage or personal injury.
The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of

any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts shop bulk refrigerant
at risk of contamination. If the vehicle A/C refrigerant is contaminated,
refer the customer to return to the repair facility that performed the last
A/C repair. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C
recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C
refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as
hazardous waste. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers
equipment instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Prior to using the A/C flushing equipment for the first time, follow
the operating instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Prior to flushing, remove and discard the desiccant sack.

Depending on the equipment used, other A/C components may have to
be removed prior to flushing. For additional information, refer to the
manufacturers equipment instructions before flushing the A/C system.
Recover the refrigerant.

For additional information, refer to Air conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging in this section.
2. Remove the desiccant sack.
For additional information, refer to Section 412-03 Air Conditioning.
3. Flush the system. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers
equipment instructions.
4. Install new refrigerant lines if blocked with debris.
5. Install a new desiccant sack.
For additional information, refer to Section 412-03 Air Conditioning.
6. Add the required amount of oil to the A/C system depending on the
repair procedure.
For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding in this section.
7. Evacuate and charge the A/C system.
For additional information, refer to Air conditioning (A/C) System
8. Carry out fluorescent dye leak detection test.
For additional information, refer to Flourescent Dye Leak Detection in this
section.
9. Check the A/C system for correct operation.
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel

familliar with both vehicle system and the charging and testing
equipment. All operations must be carried out in a well
ventilated area away from open flame and heat sources.
NOTE: The receiver drier need only be changed under the

following circumstances: There is dirt in the refrigerant circuit
( eg. compressor seizure ), the system is leaking and refrigerant
has been lost to atmosphere, or the refrigerant circuit has been
open more than 24 hours, due to repair.
Refrigerant recovery.
2. Remove the dust covers from the high and low
pressure connections.
3. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate

connections.
4. Open the valves on the connections.
5. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
6. Turn the process switch to the correct position.
7. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.
8. WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before re-

use to ensure that the purity of the refrigerantis high enough for
safe use in the air conditioning system. Recycling should always
be carried out with equipment which is design certified by
Underwriter Laboratory Inc. for compliance with SEA J1991.
Other equipment may not recycle refrigerant to the required
level of purity. R143a Refrigerant Recover Recycling Recharging
station must not be used with any other type of
refrigerant.Refrigerant R134a from domestic and comercial
sources must not be used in motor vehicles air conditioning
systems.
Allow the system to recover the refrigerant from the system.

9. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.
10. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
11. Close the valves on the connections.
12. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.
13. Install the dust covers to the connectors.
14. Open the tap at the rear of the station to drain the refrigerant
oil.
15. Measure and record the quantity of refrigerant oil recovered
from the system.
16. Close the tap at the rear of the station.
17. Evacuation.
18. Remove the dust covers from the high and low pressure
connections.
19. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate
connections.
20. Open the valves on the connections.
21. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
22. Turn the process switch to the correct position.
23. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.
24. Allow the station to evacuate the A/C system.
25. CAUTION: The system must be evacuated immediatley

before recharging commences. Delay between evacuation and
recharging is not permitted
Recharging
26. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.
27. Close the valve on the oil charger.
28. Disconnect the yellow line from the refrigerant station.
29. Remove the cover from the oil charger.
30. Pour the correct quantity of refrigerant oil into the oil charger.
31. Install the cover to the oil charger.
32. Connect the yellow line to the refrigerant station.
33. Open the valve on the oil charger.
34. Move the pointer on the refrigerant gauge to mark the position
of the refrigerant drop.
35. Slowly open the correct valve on the refrigerant to allow the
vacuum to pull the refrigerant into the system.
36. Close the valve on the refrigerant station when the correct
amount of refrigerant has been drawn into the air conditioning
system.
37. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
38. Close the valves on the connections.
39. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.
Climate Control System - General Information - Contaminated
Refrigerant Handling
General Procedures
1. If contaminated refrigerant is detected DO NOT recover the

refrigerant into your R-134a OR R-12 recovery/recycling
equipment. Take the follow actions:
1. Repeat the test to verify contaminated refrigerant is
present.
2. Advise the customer of the contaminated A/C system
and any additional cost to repair the system. The
customer may wish to return to the repair facility
performing the last A/C repair.
3. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable
recovery only equipment designed for capturing and
storing contaminated refrigerant. This equipment must
only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to
prevent the spread to other vehicles. As an alternative,
contact an A/C repair facility in your area with the proper
equipment to perform the repair.
4. On completion of the recovery of the contaminated
refrigerant, it will be necessary to carry out the A/C
system flushing procedure.
For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (AC)
System Flushing in this section.
Climate Control System - General Information - Electronic Leak
Detection
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where

A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is
contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate
this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as
antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other cleaning
solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well
ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of
contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector.
Attach an R-134a manifold gauge set or use a UL-approved

recovery/recycling device such as an R-134a A/C refrigerant
center (which meets SAE Standard J 1991). For additional
information, refer to the manufacturers equipment instructions.
 Both gauges should indicate 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at
24°C (75°F) with the engine off.
 If little or no pressure is indicated, carry out the air
conditioning (A/C) system recovery, evacuation and
charging procedure.
For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (AC)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging in this
section.
2. Use an R134-a Automatic calibration halogen leak detector to
leak test the refrigerant system. For additional information,
refer to the manufacturers equipment instructions.
3. If a leak is found, carry out the air conditioning (A/C) system
recovery procedure.
For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (AC) System
Climate Control System - General Information - Fluorescent Dye Leak
Detection
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Eye protection glasses supplied with the

ultraviolet (UV) lamp should be used to protect eyesight from
harm.
NOTE: The air conditioning (A/C) system has an R-134a leak

trace dye wafer incorporated into the desiccant bag. The exact
location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow/green
glow of the tracer dye. Since more than one leak may exist,
always inspect each component. If it is necessary to add dye
(due to a severe leakage for example) use proprietary tracer
dye injection equipment.
Check for leaks using ultraviolet (UV) lamp.

2. Check all components, fittings and lines of the A/C system.
3. Carry out the repair. For additional information, refer to Section
412-03 Air Conditioning.
4. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak trace dye
with a general purpose oil solvent.
5. Check the A/C system for correct operation.
6. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and
inspecting with the (UV) lamp.
Climate Control System - General Information - Refrigerant Oil Adding
General Procedures
Activation
CAUTIONS:
Collect the refrigerant oil in a clean measuring cylinder.
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
1. NOTE: This step only needs to be carried out when

removing the air conditioning (A/C) compressor.
Torque: 15 Nm
2. NOTE: This step only needs to be carried out when

removing the air conditioning (A/C) compressor.
Rotate the A/C compressor shaft at least 6 to 8

turns when draining the refrigerant oil.
3. CAUTIONS:
The refrigerant oil top-up quantity must not exceed the

refrigerant oil fill quantity.
If other A/C components are being renewed in addition to

the A/C compressor, there is no need to top up with additional
refrigerant oil, apart from filling the A/C compressor.
Top up with the calculated quantity of new refrigerant oil.

Climate Control System - General Information - Refrigerant System
Tests
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
Use extreme care and observe all safety precautions

related to the use of refrigerants. Failure to follow this
The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the

recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts
shop bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle A/C
refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to return to the
repair facility that carried out the last A/C repair. If the
customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C
recovery equipment that is designated for recovering
contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant
must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment,
follow the equipment manufacturers procedures and
instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
NOTE: Jaguar Land Rover Limited supports the efficient usage,

recovery and recycling of the refrigerant used in passenger car
air conditioners. Jaguar Land Rover Limited recommends the
use of UL-approved recovery/recycling device such as R-134a
A/C refrigerant center (which meets SAE Standard J 1991)
during any A/C system repair and recharge procedure which
requires that the system be evacuated.
Use R-134a A/C Refrigerant Centre to evacuate and recover the

A/C system.
 Follow the equipment manufactures procedures and
instructions for use of equipment.
Air Distribution and Filtering - Air Distribution and Filtering
COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: right-hand drive (RHD) shown, left-hand drive (LHD) similar

1 - Windshield vents
2 - Windshield and side window air duct
3 - Driver side window vent
4 - Driver instrument panel register
5 - Driver instrument panel duct
6 - Driver footwell duct
7 - Center instrument panel register
8 - Air deflector nozzle
9 - Passenger footwell duct
-
10 Passenger instrument panel duct
11 - Passenger instrument panel register
12 - Passenger side window vent
13 - Air intake
14 - Water shield
15 - Cabin air filter
INTRODUCTION
The air distribution and filtering system controls the distribution and quality of air supplied to the vehicle interior. The system
consists of:
 Air ducts
 Air registers and vents
 A cabin air filter
Air Distribution and Filtering - Air Distribution and Filtering
For additional information, refer to Section 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information
Air Distribution and Filtering - Center Registers
Removal
1. Remove the information and entertainment module.
For additional information, refer to: Information and
Entertainment Module (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules,
2. NOTE: The Torx screws may not be fitted.
Remove the center register.

 Carefully release the component.
Installation
1. NOTE: The Torx screws may not be fitted.
Carefully install the center register.

2. Install the information and entertainment module.

For additional information, refer to: Information and
Entertainment Module (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules,
Air Distribution and Filtering - Driver Side Register
Removal
1. Remove the instument panel driver's side
reinforcement trim panel.
2. CAUTION: Care must be taken to avoid

damage to the mating surfaces.
Remove the driver side register trim panel.

Installation
1. Install the driver side register trim panel.
2. Install the instument panel driver's side reinforcement trim

panel.
 Align the pegs and secure with the clips.
Air Distribution and Filtering - Passenger Side Register
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel passenger side
2. Remove the passenger side register.

 Carefully release the component.
Installation
1. Install the passenger side register.
2. Install the instrument panel passenger side reinforcement trim

panel.
Air Distribution and Filtering - Pollen Filter
Removal
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the air intake cover.
3. Release the pollen filter housing cover.

 Release from the 2 clips.
4. CAUTION: Remove any debris from the filter

aperture.
Remove the pollen filter.
Installation
1. Install the pollen filter.
2. Secure the pollen filter housing cover.
4. Close the hood.

Heating and Ventilation -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Auxiliary coolant flow pump retaining bolt 7 - 62
Air conditioning (A/C) lines retaining bolt 6 - 53
Heating and Ventilation - Heating and Ventilation
COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) shown, LHD (left-hand drive) similar

1 - Blower relay
2 - Ventilation outlets (2 off)
3 - Heater assembly
4 - Blower motor control module
5 - Blower
6 - Air inlet
7 - Heater coolant pump
INTRODUCTION
The heating and ventilation system controls the temperature and flow of air supplied to the vehicle interior. The system is
dual zone, and can provide different temperature settings for the Left Hand (LH) and Right Hand (RH) side of the cabin. The
system can be operated in 'Automatic' or 'Manual' mode, with temperature settings being selected using the control switches
located below the TSD.
For information on how to operate the heating and ventilation system, refer to the Owner's Handbook.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE
Many of the features and operations of the heating and ventilation system are controlled by the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) module, which is located on the end of the air inlet duct casing.
For additional information, refer to: Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Description and Operation).
AIR INLET DUCT

1 - ATC module
2 - Fresh/recirculated air door
3 - Fresh/recirculated air door motor
- Blower motor and fan assembly
5
The air inlet duct is installed behind the instrument panel on the passenger side. Inlet air passes through the cabin
filter and into the air inlet duct where it enters the blower. A servo motor mounted on the air inlet duct allows fresh or
recirculated air to be selected. Operation of the fresh/recirculated door is controlled by the ATC module.
BLOWER
The blower is contained within the air inlet duct assembly and consists of an open hub, centrifugal fan powered by an electric
motor. Operation of the blower is controlled by the ATC module using a relay located in the auxiliary junction box and the
blower motor control module. The blower motor control module is installed in the air inlet duct downstream of the blower,
where any heat generated during operation is dissipated by the air flow.
HEATER ASSEMBLY

1 - A/C evaporator
2 - Heater coolant pipes
3 - Windshield distribution door motor
4 - RH temperature blend motor
5 - Heater core
6 - LH temperature blend motor
7 - Face and feet distribution door motor
The heater assembly controls the temperature of the air supplied to the air distribution ducts, as directed by the ATC module.
The heater assembly is installed on the vehicle center line, between the instrument panel and the engine bulkhead.
The heater assembly consists of a casing which contains the Air Conditioning (A/C) evaporator, the heater core, 2 air
distribution control doors, and 2 temperature blend control doors.
The A/C evaporator is controlled as part of the A/C system.

For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (412-03 Air Conditioning, Description and Operation).
The heater core provides the heat source to warm the air being supplied to the cabin. The heater core is an aluminium 2
pass, fin and tube heat exchanger, and is installed across the width of the heater housing. Two aluminium tubes attached to
the heater core extend through the engine bulkhead and connect to the engine cooling system. When the engine is running,
coolant is constantly circulated through the heater core by the coolant pump.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cooling (303-03, Description and Operation).
HEATER COOLANT PUMP
A heater coolant pump is mounted on the RH rear face of the radiator housing. The pump is electrically driven and provides
the necessary flow rate of engine coolant to the heater core. Operation of the pump is controlled by the Central Junction Box
(CJB) on receipt of medium speed Controller Area Network (CAN) bus signals from the ATC module.
The pump will run when the engine is running and operates at a single speed. The CJB broadcasts pump status over the
medium speed CAN bus for use by other vehicle systems.
NOTE: The pump can be forced to run when the engine is not running if required.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cooling (303-03, Description and Operation).
VENTILATION OUTLETS
The ventilation outlets allow the free flow of air through the passenger compartment. The outlets are installed in the LH and
RH rear quarter panels, below the tail lamps.
Each ventilation outlet consists of a grille covered by a soft rubber flap, and is effectively a non-return valve. The flaps open
and close automatically depending on the differential between cabin and outside air pressures.
Operation of the heating and ventilation system is controlled by the ATC module.
Heating and Ventilation - Heating and Ventilation
REFER to:
Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Diagnosis and Testing).
Heating and Ventilation - Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump V8 5.0L
Removal


2. Refer to: Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling (303-03
Engine Cooling 5.0L, General Procedures).
5.
6.
7. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation


Heating and Ventilation - Blower Motor
Removal

Remove the passenger side footwell trim panel.

2. Remove the blower motor.

Installation
1. Install the blower motor.
2. Install the passenger side footwell trim panel.
Heating and Ventilation - Heater Core
Removal


Specifications).
3. Remove the heater and evaporator core housing.
For additional information, refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator
Core Housing (412-02 Heating and Ventilation, Removal and
Installation).
4. Remove the RH side footwell heater duct.
5. Remove the heater core.

 Remove the coolant pipe clamp.
 Remove the screw.
 Remove the heater core retaining bracket.
 Position the RH footwell duct mounting
bracket aside for access.
 Loosen the screw.
Remove the heater core, inlet and outlet pipes.

 Release the 2 clamps.
 Remove and discard both O-ring seals.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the seals with coolant.
Install the heater core, inlet and outlet pipes.

 Install the clamps and tighten the screws.
2. Install the heater core.

 Secure the heater core retaining bracket.
 Install the screw.
 Install the coolant pipe clamp.
 Align the footwell duct mounting bracket and tighten the
screw.
3. Install the RH side footwell heater duct.
4. Install the heater and evaporator core housing.

For additional information, refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator
Core Housing (412-02 Heating and Ventilation, Removal and
Installation).
Specifications).
Heating and Ventilation - Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing
Removal
All vehicles


4. Recover the A/C refrigerant.

5. Drain the coolant.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining
and Vacuum Filling (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

6. Drain the coolant.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding - Vehicles With: Supercharger (303-03A,
All vehicles

Disconnect the heater supply and return hoses.

 Position a container to collect the fluid.
 Carefully release the clips.

faces and connections are clean and dry. Plug open
Disconnect the A/C lines.

 Remove and discard both O-ring seals.
 Position the carpet aside for access.
 Release both footwell lamp holders.
Installation
All vehicles
2. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil.
Connect the A/C lines.

3. Connect the heater supply and return hoses.

 Secure the clips.


6. Refill and bleed the cooling system.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding - Vehicles With: Supercharger (303-03A,

7. Refill and bleed the cooling system.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining
and Vacuum Filling (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
All vehicles
8. Fill the A/C system.
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Evaporator
2 - Thermostatic expansion valve
3 - High pressure line
4 - Low pressure line
5 - Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor
6 - Receiver/Drier
7 - Condenser
8 - Refrigerant pressure sensor
9 - High pressure servicing connection
10 - Low pressure servicing connection
INTRODUCTION
The A/C system transfers heat from the vehicle interior to the outside atmosphere to provide the heater assembly with
dehumidified cool air. The A/C system is a sealed, closed loop system, filled with a charge weight of R134a refrigerant as the
heat transfer medium. Oil is added to the refrigerant to lubricate the internal components of the A/C compressor.
Operation of the A/C system is controlled by the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module.
A/C COMPRESSOR

1 - Pressure relief valve
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
4 - Solenoid valve
6 - Pulley
The A/C compressor circulates refrigerant around the system by compressing low pressure, low temperature vapour from the
evaporator and discharging the resultant high pressure, high temperature vapour to the condenser.
The A/C compressor is a permanently engaged variable displacement unit which is driven by the engine accessory drive belt.
To protect the system from excessive pressure, a pressure relief valve is installed in the outlet side of the A/C compressor.
The pressure relief valve vents excess pressure into the engine compartment.
CONDENSER

1 - Right Hand (RH) end tank
2 - Condenser core
3 - Left Hand (LH) end tank
4 - Mounting brackets (4 off)
5 - Low pressure line connector block
6 - High pressure line connector block
7 - Receiver drier outlet pipe
8 - Receiver drier inlet pipe
9 - Receiver drier
The condenser transfers heat from the refrigerant to the surrounding air to convert the high pressure vapour from the
compressor into a liquid. The condenser is installed immediately in front of the radiator. Two brackets on each end tank
attach the condenser to the end tanks of the radiator.
The condenser is classified as a sub-cooling condenser and consists of a fin and tube heat exchanger core installed between
2 end tanks. Divisions in the end tanks separate the heat exchanger into a 4 pass upper (condenser) section and a 2 pass
lower (sub-cooler) section.
The LH end tank provides the connections to the high pressure line from the A/C compressor and the low pressure line to the
evaporator.
The RH end tank provides the connections to the receiver drier.
RECEIVER DRIER
The receiver drier is mounted on the condenser RH end tank and removes solid impurities and moisture from the refrigerant.
It also provides a reservoir for liquid refrigerant to accommodate changes of heat load at the evaporator.
NOTE: The receiver drier is part of the condenser assembly and is not serviceable separately.
Refrigerant entering the receiver drier passes through a filter and a desiccant pack, then collects in the base of the unit
before flowing through the outlet pipe back to the condenser.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the high pressure/temperature refrigerant line between the condenser and the
thermostatic expansion valve.
THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE

1 - Metering valve
2 - Housing
3 - Diaphragm
5 - Outlet passage from evaporator
6 - Inlet passage to evaporator
The thermostatic expansion valve meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator, to match the refrigerant flow with the
heat load of the air passing through the evaporator.
The thermostatic expansion valve is a block type valve located behind the heater assembly, and attached to the inlet and
outlet ports of the evaporator. The thermostatic expansion valve consists of an aluminium housing containing inlet and outlet
passages. A ball and spring metering valve is installed in the inlet passage and a temperature sensor is installed in the outlet
passage. The temperature sensor consists of a temperature sensitive tube connected to a diaphragm. The bottom end of the
temperature sensitive tube acts on the ball of the metering valve. Pressure on top of the diaphragm is controlled by the
evaporator outlet temperature conducted through the temperature sensitive tube. The bottom of the diaphragm senses
evaporator outlet pressure.
Liquid refrigerant flows through the metering valve into the evaporator. The restriction across the metering valve reduces
the pressure and temperature of the refrigerant. The restriction also changes the liquid stream of refrigerant into a fine
spray, to improve the evaporation process. As the refrigerant passes through the evaporator, it absorbs heat from the air
flowing through the evaporator. The increase in temperature causes the refrigerant to vaporise and increase in pressure.
The temperature and pressure of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator acts on the diaphragm and temperature sensitive
tube, which regulate the metering valve opening and so control the volume of refrigerant flowing through the evaporator.
The warmer the air flowing through the evaporator, the more heat available to evaporate refrigerant and thus the greater
volume of refrigerant allowed through the metering valve.
EVAPORATOR
The evaporator is installed in the heater assembly, between the blower and the heater matrix, to absorb heat from the
exterior or recirculated air. Low pressure, low temperature refrigerant changes from liquid to vapour in the evaporator,
absorbing large quantities of heat as it changes state.
Most of the moisture in the air passing through the evaporator condenses into water, which drains out of the vehicle by
passing through a drain tube to the underside of the vehicle.
REFRIGERANT LINES
To maintain similar flow velocities around the A/C system, the diameter of the refrigerant lines varies to suit the 2
pressure/temperature regimes. Larger diameter pipes are installed in the low pressure/temperature regime and smaller
diameter pipes are installed in the high pressure/temperature regime.
Low and high pressure charging connections are incorporated into the refrigerant lines for system servicing.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Refrigerant liquid; B = Refrigerant vapour; C = Air flow
www.JagDocs.com
1 - Evaporator
2 - Thermostatic expansion valve
3 - High pressure servicing connection
5 - Engine cooling fan
6 - Condenser
7 - Receiver/Drier
8 - Variable displacement A/C compressor
9 - Low pressure servicing connection
10 - Blower
To accomplish the transfer of heat, the refrigerant is circulated around the system, where it passes through 2
pressure/temperature regimes. In each of the regimes the refrigerant changes state, during which process maximum heat
absorption or dissipation occurs.
The low pressure/temperature regime is from the thermostatic expansion valve, through the evaporator to the compressor.
The refrigerant decreases in pressure and temperature at the thermostatic expansion valve then changes state from a liquid
to a vapour in the evaporator to absorb heat.
The high pressure/temperature regime is from the compressor, through the condenser and receiver drier assembly to the
thermostatic expansion valve. The refrigerant increases in pressure and temperature as it passes through the compressor,
then releases heat and changes state from a vapour to a liquid in the condenser.
Operation of the A/C system is controlled by the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module.
The A/C system works in conjunction with the heating and ventilation system, and the air distribution and filtering system.
For additional information, refer to:
Heating and Ventilation (412-02 Heating and Ventilation, Description and Operation),
Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01, Description and Operation).
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning
REFER to:
Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Diagnosis and Testing).
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal



4.
5. Torque: 8 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:
Immediately cap all refrigerant lines to

prevent ingress of dirt and moisture.

new blanking caps.
Torque: 9 Nm
7.
8. CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
Take care not to damage the O-ring seals

during installation.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Air Conditioning - Blower Motor Resistor
Removal


2. Remove the blower motor resistor.

Installation
1. Install the blower motor resistor.

Air Conditioning - Condenser Core V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal



5. Torque: 5 Nm
6.
Torque: 8 Nm
8. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil.

Air Conditioning - Condenser Core V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal



5. Refer to: Radiator (303-03B Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L

Torque: 8 Nm
7. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil.

Air Conditioning - Evaporator Core
Removal
Specifications).


3. Remove the TXV assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Thermostatic Expansion
Valve (412-03 Air Conditioning, Removal and Installation).

Remove the A/C pipes.

 Release the clamp.
 Release the foam pad and the upper
section of the clamp.
5. Remove the coolant pipe clamp.

6. Carefully separate the evaporator housing.
 Release the blower motor harness clip.
 Release the 2 evaporator housing clips.
7. Remove the evaporator core.

 Carefully remove the evaporator core
temperature sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure all components are clean.
Install the evaporator core.

 Carefully install the evaporator core temperature sensor.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the evaporator temperature sensor

harness does not become trapped.
Install the evaporator housing cover.

3. Install the coolant pipe clamp.
4. Install the A/C pipes.

 Install the foam pad.
 Install the clamp.
5. Install the TXV assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Thermostatic Expansion
Valve (412-03 Air Conditioning, Removal and Installation).
Specifications).
Air Conditioning - Pressure Cutoff Switch
Removal
Specifications).
2. Recover the A/C refrigerant.
3. Remove the engine cover.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover (501-05,
4. Remove the air intake duct.

components, ensure the area around the joint
Remove the pressure cutoff switch.

 Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil.
Install the pressure cutoff switch.

 Clean the components.
 Install a new O-ring seal.
 Tighten the cutoff switch to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2. Install the air intake duct.

 Tighten the clips.
3. Recharge the A/C system.

4. Install the engine cover.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover (501-05,
Specifications).
Air Conditioning - Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00, Specifications).
2. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a

jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator Core
Housing (412-02 Heating and Ventilation, Removal and Installation).
4. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
Remove the TXV assembly.

 Carefully cut and release the insulation for access.
 Remove the 2 Allen bolts.
 Remove and discard the 4 O-ring seals.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Lubricate the new seals with clean refrigerant oil.
NOTE: Make sure all component mating faces are clean.
Install the TXV assembly.

 Install the new O-ring seals.
 Install and tighten the Allen bolts to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
 Replace the TXV insulation.

For additional information, refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator Core
Housing (412-02 Heating and Ventilation, Removal and Installation).
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00, Specifications).
Air Conditioning - Receiver Drier
Removal

stands.

4.

correct.
Torque: 12 Nm
correct.
Installation

Control Components -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Climate control module and audio/cd module assembly to instrument panel - bolt 3 - 27
Climate control and audio/cd modules to assembly bracket - bolt 3 - 27
Climate control and audio/cd modules to assembly bracket - screw 2.5 - 22
Control Components - Control Components
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 - Pollution sensor (if fitted)
- Refrigerant pressure sensor
2
3 - Sunload/Light sensor
4 - Windshield distribution (defrost) stepper motor
5 - Right-Hand (RH) temperature blend stepper motor
6 - Cabin humidity and temperature sensor
7 - Evaporator temperature sensor
8 - Control switches
9 - Left-Hand (LH) temperature blend stepper motor
10 - Face/feet distribution stepper motor
12 - Blower motor
13 - Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module
14 - Ambient air temperature sensor
15 - Air intake servo motor
16 - Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor solenoid valve
INTRODUCTION
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module controls the A/C (air conditioning) system and the heating and ventilation
system to regulate the temperature, volume, and distribution of air into the cabin.
The system is a fully automatic dual zone system capable of maintaining individual temperature levels selected for the LH
(left-hand) and RH (right-hand) sides of the cabin. Manual overrides for the system include intake air source, blower speed
and air distribution. These selections can be made using either the Touch Screen Display (TSD) or the control switches
located below the TSD.
For information on how to operate the A/C system and the heating and ventilation system, refer to the Owner's Handbook.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE
The ATC module is mounted on the end of the blower motor casing, behind the instrument panel. The ATC module processes
inputs from the TSD, the control switches located below the TSD, and the system sensors. In response to these inputs, the
ATC module outputs control signals to the A/C system and the heating and ventilation system.
In addition to controlling the A/C system and the heating and ventilation system, the ATC module also controls the following:
 The seat heaters.

For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
 The rear window heater.
For additional information, refer to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
 The windshield heater.
For additional information, refer to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
 The exterior mirror heaters.
For additional information, refer to: Rear View Mirrors (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Description and Operation).
 The steering wheel heater (if fitted).
For additional information, refer to: Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and
Operation).
Two electrical connectors provide the interface between the ATC module, and the vehicle wiring. The ATC module uses
hardwired inputs from the system sensors, the LIN (local interconnect network) bus to communicate with the stepper motors
and the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus to communicate with other control modules on the vehicle.
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR SOLENOID VALVE
The A/C compressor solenoid valve is integral with the A/C compressor. Operation of the solenoid valve is controlled by the
ATC module using a hardwired drive current of differing values. By controlling the flow of refrigerant through the
compressor, the solenoid valve can control the A/C system pressure and the evaporator operating temperature.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor provides the ATC module with a pressure input from the high pressure side of the refrigerant
system. The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the refrigerant line between the condenser and the thermostatic
expansion valve.
The ATC module supplies a 5 V reference voltage to the refrigerant pressure sensor and receives a return signal voltage,
between 0 V and 5 V, related to system pressure.
The ATC module uses the signal from the pressure sensor to protect the refrigerant system from extremes of pressure. The
ATC module transmits the A/C pressure, along with the compressor drive current value, to the instrument cluster on the
medium speed CAN bus. These signals are broadcast to the ECM (engine control module) on the high speed CAN bus to allow
it to calculate the torque being applied to the engine by the compressor.
To protect the system from extremes of pressure, the ATC module sets the A/C compressor to the minimum flow position if
the pressure:
 Decreases to 2.1 ± 0.2 bar (31.5 ± 3 lbf/in²); the ATC module loads the A/C compressor again when the pressure
increases to 2.3 ± 0.2 bar (33.4 ± 3 lbf/in²)
 Increases to 31 ± 1 bar (450 ± 14.5 lbf/in²); the ATC module loads the A/C compressor again when the pressure
decreases to 26 ± 1 bar (377 ± 14.5 lbf/in²)
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The evaporator temperature sensor is a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistor that provides the ATC module
with a temperature signal from the downstream side of the evaporator. The evaporator temperature sensor is mounted
directly onto the evaporator matrix fins.
The ATC module uses the input from the evaporator temperature sensor to control the load of the A/C compressor and thus
the operating temperature of the evaporator.
CABIN HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The cabin humidity and temperature sensor is installed behind a grill on the drivers side of the instrument panel. The
temperature inside the cabin is measured by a NTC thermistor. A motor within the sensor assembly draws cabin air in
through the grill and over the thermistor. The motor is provided a battery voltage feed by a relay located within the CJB
(central junction box).
Humidity inside the cabin is measured by a sensor element made up of film capacitors on different substrates. The dielectric
is a polymer which absorbs or releases water proportional to the relative humidity of the air being drawn through the sensor
and thus changes the capacitance of the capacitor. For protection, the sensor element is contained in a nylon mesh cover.
Humidity within the cabin is controlled by raising and lowering the evaporator temperature. An increase in evaporator
temperature increases the moisture content in the air entering the cabin. Lowering the evaporator temperature reduces the
moisture content in the air entering the cabin.
The ambient air temperature sensor is a NTC thermistor that provides the ATC module with an input of external air
temperature. The sensor is hard wired to the ECM and its signal is transmitted to the instrument cluster on the high speed
CAN bus. The instrument cluster acts as a gateway and transmits the ambient air temperature signal to the ATC module on
the medium speed CAN bus. The sensor is mounted on the vehicle center line behind the lower front grill, and can be
accessed from underneath the vehicle.
SUNLOAD/LIGHT SENSOR
The sunload/light sensor consists of 2 photoelectric cells that provide the ATC module with inputs of light intensity; one as
sensed coming from the left of the vehicle and one as sensed coming from the right. The inputs are a measure of the solar
heating effect on vehicle occupants, and are used by the ATC module to adjust blower speed, temperature and distribution to
improve comfort.
NOTE: The solar sensor is also used as part of the Autolamp feature and also contains the active anti-theft alarm indicator
LED (light emitting diode).
For additional information, refer to: Exterior Lighting (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Description and Operation) /
Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
The sensor is installed in the center of the instrument panel upper surface and is powered by a 5 V feed from the instrument
cluster.
POLLUTION SENSOR
Up to 2009 MY, a pollution sensor was installed only on Japanese specification vehicles. From 2009 MY, the pollution sensor
is a standard fit in all markets.
The pollution sensor allows the ATC module to monitor the ambient air for the level of hydrocarbons and oxidised gases such
as nitrous oxides, sulphur oxides and carbon monoxide. The sensor is mounted in the RH front corner of the engine
compartment.
The pollution sensor is powered by an ignition controlled voltage feed from the CJB and provides the ATC module with
separate signals of hydrocarbon and oxidised gases. With a pollution sensor fitted, the ATC module can control the air intake
source to reduce the amount of contaminants entering the cabin. This function is fully automatic, but can be overridden by
manual selection of the air source using the recirculation control switch below the TSD.
If there is a fault with the sensor, the ATC module disables automatic operation of the recirculation door.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus

1 - Battery
2 - Control switches
4 - Ambient air temperature sensor
5 - Pollution sensor
6 - Engine Control Module (ECM)
-
8 - Cabin humidity and temperature sensor
9 - A/C compressor solenoid
10 - RH temperature blend stepper motor
12 - Face/feet distribution stepper motor
13 - LH temperature blend stepper motor
14 - Air intake servo motor
15 - Blower motor
17 - Evaporator temperature sensor
18 - ATC module
19 - CJB
20 - Sunload/Light sensor
21 - Megafuse (175A)
Air Intake Control
The source of intake air is automatically controlled unless overridden by pressing the air recirculation switch located below
the TSD. Under automatic control, the ATC module determines the required position of the recirculation door from its
'comfort' algorithm and, if fitted, the pollution sensor.
The recirculation door is operated by an electric motor. The ATC module provides analogue signals to the motor along a
hardwired connection. A potentiometer in the motor supplies the ATC module with a position feedback signal for closed loop
control.
Air Temperature Control
Cooled air from the evaporator enters the heater assembly, where temperature blend doors direct a proportion of the air
through the heater core to produce the required output air temperature.
The 2 temperature blend doors operate independently to enable individual temperature settings for the left and right sides of
the cabin. The temperature blend doors are operated by stepper motors, which are controlled by the ATC module using LIN
bus messages.
The ATC module calculates the temperature blend stepper motor positions required to achieve the selected temperature and
compares it against the current position. If there is any difference, the ATC module signals the stepper motors to adopt the
new position.
Air temperature is controlled automatically unless maximum heating (HI) or maximum cooling (LO) is selected. When
maximum heating or cooling is selected, a 'comfort' algorithm in the ATC module adopts an appropriate strategy for air
distribution, blower speed, and air source.
Temperature control of one side of the cabin can be compromised by the other side of the cabin being set to a high level of
heating or cooling. True maximum heating or cooling (displayed as 'HI' or 'LO' on the TSD) can only be selected from the
driver's side temperature control button. If 'HI' or 'LO' is selected from the driver's side, the passenger side temperature will
be automatically set to match the driver's side.
When economy mode is selected by pressing the 'Econ' TSD soft button, no cooling of the intake air will take place. The
minimum output air temperature from the system will be ambient air temperature plus any heat pick up in the air intake
path.
Blower Motor Control
Operation of the blower motor is controlled by the ATC module. The ATC module monitors a feedback voltage from the
blower motor control module. In response to the feedback voltage, the ATC module provides a drive signal back to the
blower motor control module which is used to regulate the voltage flow across the blower motor and hence regulate blower
speed. The blower motor is provided with a battery voltage feed from the blower motor relay, which is located within the
auxiliary junction box.
When the A/C system is in automatic mode, the ATC module determines the blower speed required from its 'comfort'
algorithm. When the A/C system is in manual mode, the ATC module operates the blower at the speed selected using either
the rotary control switch or the '+/-' soft buttons on the TSD.
The ATC module also controls blower motor speed to compensate for the ram effect on intake air produced by forward
movement of the vehicle. As vehicle speed, and consequently the ram effect increases, blower motor speed is reduced.
Air Distribution Control
Two air distribution doors are used to direct air into the cabin. The doors are operated by stepper motors, which are
controlled by the ATC module using LIN bus messages.
When the A/C system is in automatic mode, the ATC module automatically controls air distribution into the cabin in line with
its 'comfort' algorithm. Automatic control is overridden if any of the TSD air distribution soft buttons are selected. Air
distribution in the cabin will remain as selected until the 'Auto' switch is pressed or a different manual selection is made.
Programmed Defrost
When the 'DEF' button is pressed, the ATC module instigates the programmed defrost function. When selected, the ATC
module configures the system as follows:
 Automatic mode off

 Selected temperature unchanged
 Air inlet set to fresh air
 Air distribution set to windshield
 Blower speed set to level 6
 Windshield and rear screen heaters on.
The programmed defrost function can be cancelled by one of the following:
 Selecting any air distribution switch on the TSD

 Pressing the 'AUTO' switch below the TSD
 A second press of the 'DEF' button
 Switching the ignition OFF
NOTE: The blower speed can be adjusted without terminating the programmed defrost function.
A/C Compressor Control
When A/C is selected ('Econ' off) the ATC module maintains the evaporator at an operating temperature that varies with the
cabin cooling requirements. If the requirement for cooled air decreases, the ATC module raises the evaporator operating
temperature by reducing the flow of refrigerant provided by the A/C compressor.
NOTE: The ATC module closely controls the rate of temperature increase to avoid introducing moisture into the cabin.
If the requirement for cooled air increases, the ATC module lowers the evaporator operating temperature by increasing the
flow of refrigerant provided by the A/C compressor.
When economy mode is selected by pressing the 'Econ' TSD soft button, the compressor current signal supplied by the ATC
module holds the A/C compressor solenoid valve in the minimum flow position, effectively switching off the A/C function.
The ATC module incorporates limits for the operating pressure of the refrigerant system. When the system approaches the
high pressure limit the compressor current signal is progressively reduced until the system pressure decreases. When the
system pressure falls below the low pressure limit the compressor current signal is held at its lowest setting so that the A/C
compressor is maintained at its minimum stroke. This avoids depletion of the lubricant from the A/C compressor.
A/C Compressor Torque
The ATC module transmits refrigerant pressure and A/C compressor current values to the ECM over the medium speed then
high speed CAN bus, using the instrument cluster as a gateway. The ECM uses these values to calculate the torque being
used to drive the A/C compressor. The ECM compares the calculated value with its allowable value and if necessary forces
the ATC module to inhibit the A/C compressor by transmitting the 'ACClutchInhibit' CAN message. This forces the ATC
module to reduce the drive current to the A/C compressor solenoid valve, which reduces refrigerant flow. This in turn
reduces the torque required to drive the A/C compressor.
By reducing the maximum A/C compressor torque, the ECM is able to reduce the load on the engine when it needs to
maintain vehicle performance or cooling system integrity.
Cooling Fan Control
The ATC module determines the amount of condenser cooling required from the refrigerant pressure sensor, since there is a
direct relationship between the temperature and pressure of the refrigerant. The cooling requirement is broadcast to the ECM
on the medium speed CAN bus. The ECM then controls the temperature of the condenser using the cooling fan.
www.JagDocs.com
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - Vehicles Without:
Supercharger, Description and Operation).
Windshield Heater
The ATC module controls operation of the windshield heater using 2 relays in the power distribution box. When a request is
made for windshield heater operation, the ATC module broadcasts a message to the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus. On
receipt of this message, the CJB energises the relays by providing a ground path for both relay coils. This allows a battery
feed to flow across the relays to power the left and right heater elements.
NOTE: Windshield heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running.
There are 2 modes of windshield heater operation; manual and automatic.
Manual operation is activated by pressing the windshield heater control switch. When the switch is pressed, the ATC module
illuminates a LED in the switch and powers the heater elements for 6.5 minutes.
The switch LED remains illuminated until the windshield heater switch is pressed a second time (to switch the system off),
the heating phase is completed, or the engine stops. If the engine is re-started within 30 seconds the windshield heater
resumes the previous heating phase.
There are 2 variants of automatic operation; automatic operation at the start of a journey and automatic operation during a
journey.
Automatic operation at the start of a journey is initiated if the ambient air temperature is below 5 °C (41 °F) at the start of a
journey. In this instance, the ATC module will automatically power the windshield heater elements and illuminate the switch
LED for 6.5 minutes. The windshield heater can be switched off during this period by pressing the control switch or stopping
the engine.
Automatic operation during a journey is initiated when low ambient air temperatures are experienced and the vehicle has
been travelling for a set period of time above a threshold speed. In this instance, no feedback is given to the driver to inform
him the windshield heater is operational (the switch LED is not illuminated) and the duration of operation is variable
depending upon the ambient air temperature, vehicle speed and the amount of time the vehicle has been travelling.
Rear Window Heater
The ATC module controls operation of the rear window heater using a relay in the auxiliary junction box. When a request is
made for rear window heater operation, the ATC module broadcasts a message to the auxiliary junction box on the medium
speed CAN bus. On receipt of this message, the auxiliary junction box energises the relay by providing a ground path for the
relay coil. This allows a battery feed to flow across the relay to power the rear window heater element.
NOTE: Rear window heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running.
There are 2 modes of rear window heater operation; manual and automatic.
Manual operation is activated by pressing the rear window heater control switch. When the switch is pressed, the ATC
module illuminates a LED in the switch and powers the heater element for 21 minutes.
The switch LED remains illuminated until the rear window heater switch is pressed a second time (to switch the system off),
the heating phase is completed, or the engine stops. If the engine is re-started within 30 seconds the rear window heater
resumes the previous heating phase.
There are 2 variants of automatic operation; automatic operation at the start of a journey and automatic operation during a
journey.
Automatic operation at the start of a journey is initiated if the ambient air temperature is below 5 °C (41 °F) at the start of a
journey. In this instance, the ATC module will automatically power the rear window heater element and illuminate the switch
LED for 21 minutes. The rear window heater can be switched off during this period by pressing the control switch or stopping
the engine.
Automatic operation during a journey is initiated when low ambient air temperatures are experienced and the vehicle has
been travelling for a set period of time above a threshold speed. In this instance, no feedback is given to the driver to inform
him the rear window heater is operational (the switch LED is not illuminated) and the duration of operation is variable
depending upon the ambient air temperature, vehicle speed and the amount of time the vehicle has been travelling.
Exterior Mirror Heaters
Exterior mirror heater operation is determined by ambient air temperature and windshield wiper status. When ambient air
temperature reaches a pre-determined level, the ATC module broadcasts an exterior mirror heating request to the door
modules over the medium speed CAN bus. On receipt of this message, the door modules provide feed and ground
connections to both exterior mirror heater elements.
NOTE: Operation of the exterior mirror heaters is fully automatic and not controllable by the driver.
The amount of time the exterior mirror heaters are operational increases if the windshield wipers are switched on. This
ensures the mirrors remain mist free in damp and wet conditions, where there is an increased risk of misting.
Seat Heaters
There are 4 seat heater settings available; Off, 1, 2 or 3, which can be set through the TSD. The heat setting is relayed to
the vehicle occupants through a graduated display on the TSD.
Operation of the heated seats is controlled by the ATC module. When the ATC module receives a heating request from the
TSD, it broadcasts a message to the CJB over the medium speed CAN bus. The CJB then provides a hardwired 12 V supply to
the 3 heater elements contained within each seat. The 3 heater elements, 2 in the seat cushion and 1 in the seat squab, are
wired in series.
The ATC module monitors seat temperature using a temperature sensor located in each seat cushion. The CJB provides the
temperature sensors with a 5 V supply. The level of the returned voltage back to the CJB is proportional to the seat
temperature. The value of the return signal is broadcast to the ATC module over the medium speed CAN bus which it then
converts into a temperature value to allow it to control seat temperature to the required level.
The ATC module will suspend or disable operation of the seat heaters if any of the following occur:
 Battery voltage exceeds 16.5 ± 0.3 V for more than 5 seconds. Seat heating is re-enabled when battery voltage
decreases to 16.2 ± 0.3 V
 If a short or open circuit is detected
 If the seat heat temperature rises significantly above the target temperature setting.
The graduated display on the TSD remains illuminated until the seat heaters are turned off or the engine stops. If the engine
is restarted within 30 seconds the seat heater resumes the previous heating level.
Steering Wheel Heater
The steering wheel heater has 1 heat setting and can be turned on and off by pressing the soft button located on the seat
heater TSD screen. The on/off status of the steering wheel heater is relayed to the vehicle occupants through the TSD. When
the ignition is switched off, the heater will reset to off.
Power for the heater element is supplied by the CJB on receipt of a request from the ATC module over the medium speed
CAN bus. Temperature control for the heater element is provided by the steering wheel heater control module which receives
a temperature feedback signal from a NTC thermistor located within the steering wheel.
Control Components - Control Components
For a detailed description of the climate control system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
 Refrigerant  Fuse(s)
 Heater control flaps  Harness
 Ducting  Electrical connectors
 Switch(s)
DTC Index
into account.

B105A01 Aspirator fan fault  Aspirator fan circuit - short toCarry out any pinpoint tests associated with
ground, open circuit this DTC using the manufacturer approved
 Aspirator fan component fault diagnostic system
B1A5911 Recirculation servo  Sensor 5 volt supply - short to Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
motor actuator - ground this DTC using the manufacturer approved
sensor 5 volt supply diagnostic system
B1A5913 Air conditioning  Air conditioning pressure sensor Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
pressure sensor - 5 volt supply - open circuit air conditioning pressure sensor circuit for
sensor 5 volt supply open circuit
B1A6111 In car temperature  In car temperature sensor circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
sensor circuit - short - short to ground this DTC using the manufacturer approved
to ground diagnostic system
B1A6115 In car temperature  In car temperature sensor circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
sensor circuit - short - short to power, open circuit this DTC using the manufacturer approved
to power, open circuit diagnostic system
B1A6211 Air conditioning  Air conditioning pressure sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
pressure sensor - circuit - short to ground this DTC using the manufacturer approved
short to ground diagnostic system
B1A6215 Air conditioning  Air conditioning pressure sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
pressure sensor - circuit - short to power, open this DTC using the manufacturer approved
short to power, open circuit diagnostic system
circuit
B1A6311 Right hand sun load  Right hand sun load sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
sensor - short to circuit - short to ground this DTC using the manufacturer approved
ground diagnostic system
B1A6411 Left hand sun load  Left hand sun load sensor circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
sensor - short to - short to ground this DTC using the manufacturer approved
ground diagnostic system
B1A6713 Vehicle sensor ground  Vehicle sensor ground - open Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
- open circuit circuit vehicle sensor ground circuit for open circuit
B1A6901 Humidity sensor fault  Humidity sensor circuit - short Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
to power, ground, open circuit this DTC using the manufacturer approved
 Sensor component fault diagnostic system
B1A7001 Compressor fault  Over current detection Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B1A9815 Stepper motor  No response from ALL steppers Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
actuator LIN Bus fault, for 20 seconds - LIN network stepper motor actuator LIN Bus for open
or power supply - fault circuit
open circuit
B1B6013 Recirculation servo  Sensor 5 volt supply - open Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
motor actuator - circuit sensor 5 volt supply for open circuit
sensor 5 volt supply
B1B6111 Pollution sensor HC  Pollution sensor HC input - short Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
input - short to ground to ground this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B1B6211 Pollution sensor Nox  Pollution sensor Nox input - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
input - short to ground short to ground this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B1B6313 Recirculation servo  Recirculation servo motor Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
motor actuator - actuator ground - open circuit recirculation servo motor actuator ground for
ground circuit open circuit
B1B6711 Recirculation servo  Recirculation servo Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
potentiometer - short potentiometer circuit - short to this DTC using the manufacturer approved
to ground ground diagnostic system
potentiometer - short potentiometer circuit - short to this DTC using the manufacturer approved
to power, open circuit power, open circuit diagnostic system
motor fault potentiometer circuit - short to this DTC using the manufacturer approved
power, ground, open circuit diagnostic system
 Recirculation door/linkage
broken
B1B7111 Evaporator  Evaporator temperature sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
temperature sensor - circuit - short to ground this DTC using the manufacturer approved
short to ground diagnostic system
B1B7115 Evaporator  Evaporator temperature sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
temperature sensor - circuit - short to power, open this DTC using the manufacturer approved
short to power, open circuit diagnostic system
circuit
B1B7211 Stepper motor  Stepper motor actuator LIN Bus Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
actuator LIN Bus power supply - short to ground stepper motor actuator LIN Bus power supply
power supply - short for short to ground
to ground
B1B7400 Defrost stepper motor  Internal or external fault - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
actuator fault under/over voltage this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B1B7449 Defrost stepper motor  Internal electronic fault - motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
actuator fault over temperature this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B1B7500 Panel/foot stepper  Internal or external fault - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
motor actuator fault under/over voltage this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B1B7549 Panel/foot stepper  Internal electronic fault - motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
motor actuator fault over temperature this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B1B7600 Front left air blend  Internal or external fault - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
stepper motor actuator under/over voltage this DTC using the manufacturer approved
fault diagnostic system
B1B7649 Front left air blend  Internal electronic fault - motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
stepper motor actuator over temperature this DTC using the manufacturer approved
B1B7700 Front right air blend  Internal or external fault - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
stepper motor actuator under/over voltage this DTC using the manufacturer approved
B1B7749 Front right air blend  Internal electronic fault - motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
stepper motor actuator over temperature this DTC using the manufacturer approved
B1B7884 Air conditioning  Signal below allowable range Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
system under pressure  System leak this DTC using the manufacturer approved
 Incorrect refrigerant charge diagnostic system. Check system for leaks.
weight Charge system with correct weight of
refrigerant
B1B7885 Air conditioning  Signal above allowable range Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
system over pressure this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U001088 Medium speed CAN  Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
communication this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U030000 Internal control  Invalid configuration message is Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
module software received approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC
incompatibility and retest. If the DTC is still logged suspect
the climate control module, refer to the new
Index
U1A1449 Failed to initialise CAN  Internal electronic failure Install a new climate control module, refer to
the new module installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
U300055 Stored vehicle  Incorrect car configuration data Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
configuration data received approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and
does not match re-test. If the DTC remains suspect the
climate control module, refer to the new
Index
U300087 Control Module  Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check climate
control module for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U300281 Vehicle Identification  Vehicle/component mis-match. Install original module, check for DTCs and
Number (VIN) Corrupt VIN data being refer to relevant DTC Index
transmitted, module previously
installed to other vehicle
Control Components - Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2.
3.
4.
5.
Installation

Control Components - Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator LH
Removal
Specifications).
3. NOTE: Note the relationship between the servo
motor drive and the vent flap.
Remove the servo motor assembly.

Installation
1. Install the servo motor assembly.
 Align the servo motor drive.

Specifications).
Control Components - Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator RH
Removal
Specifications).

Installation

Specifications).
Control Components - Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator LH
Removal
Specifications).
3. Remove the LH side footwell heater duct.
 Release the lampholder.
4. Remove the support bracket.



Installation
2. Install the support bracket.

3. Install the LH side footwell heater duct.
Specifications).
Control Components - Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator RH
Removal
Specifications).
3. Remove the LH side footwell heater duct.


Installation
2. Install the LH side footwell heater duct.


Specifications).
Control Components - In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel, lower trim panel.
Trim Panel (501-12, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
Installation
1. Install the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
 Install the Torx screw.
2. Install the instrument panel, lower trim panel.

Control Components - Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
Removal
Specifications).

Installation

Specifications).
Control Components - Sunload Sensor
Removal
1. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding trim from

damage when changing the component.
Remove the center speaker grille.

2. Remove the sunload sensor.

Installation
1. Install the sunload sensor.
2. Install the center speaker grille.

Control Components - Climate Control Module
Removal
Specifications).
3. Remove the A/C control module.
Installation
1. Install the A/C control module.

Specifications).
Control Components - Climate Control Assembly
Removal
NOTE: Removal of this component is part of the audio removal procedure.

2. Remove the audio unit.
For additional information, refer to: Audio Unit (415-01A Audio
Unit, Removal and Installation).
Installation
1. Install the audio unit.
For additional information, refer to: Audio Unit (415-01A Audio
Unit, Removal and Installation).
Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination - Instrument Cluster and Panel
Illumination
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Accessory power socket/cigar lighter
2 - Overhead console
4 - Dimmer switch
5 - Driver door switch pack
7 - Steering wheel speed control switches
-
10 JaguarDrive selector module
11 - Integrated control panel
12 - Passenger door switch pack
INTRODUCTION
Instrument cluster and panel illumination is provided by light emitting diodes which are activated in conjunction with the
exterior lights. The illumination intensity can be adjusted using a dimmer switch located in the auxiliary switch pack.
DIMMER SWITCH
The dimmer switch is a variable resistor installed in a circuit with the instrument cluster, which is used as a potential divider
to provide a high or low voltage according to its set position.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus.
- Battery
1
5 - Passenger door module
7 - Driver door module
10 - Dimmer switch
11 - Accessory power socket/cigar lighter
12 - Clockspring
14 - Steering wheel speed control switches
18 - Overhead console
When the exterior lights are on, the instrument cluster converts the voltage from the dimmer switch into an illumination level
value, which it uses to set the illumination level of the instruments. The instrument cluster also transmits the illumination
level value on the medium speed CAN bus to:
 The integrated control panel

 The CJB (central junction box)
 The driver and passenger door modules.
The integrated control panel sets the illumination level of its switches and the TSD (touch screen display) to the value
contained in the CAN message.
The CJB transmits the illumination level value in a high speed CAN message to the JaguarDrive selector module, which sets
the illumination level of its switches and controls accordingly. The CJB also controls power outputs to set the required
illumination levels in:
 The overhead console

 The steering wheel audio, cruise control and paddle switches
 The accessory power socket/cigar lighter
 The auxiliary switch pack.
The driver and passenger door modules control power outputs to set the required illumination levels in their respective door
switch packs.
Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination - Instrument Cluster and
Panel Illumination
For a detailed description of the Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination (413-00 Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination, Description
and Operation).
Visual Inspection
 Fluid level(s)  Bulbs(s)
 Accessory installations  Fuse(s)
 Wiring harness
 Engine compartment components
 Underbody components
 Instrument cluster
 Dimmer switch
 Headlamp switch
 Autolamp sensor
system.
Instrument Cluster -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Instrument cluster surround - screw 1 - 9
Instrument cluster - screw 1.5 - 13
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Speedometer
2 - Message center
3 - Tachometer
INTRODUCTION
The instrument cluster is located in the instrument panel, above the steering column. The instrument cluster comprises
analogue gages, a LCD (liquid crystal display) message center to provide vehicle operation details to the driver and a
number of indicator lamps to display system status.
The message center is a LCD located in a central position in the instrument cluster.
and Operation).
The instrument cluster also functions as an intelligent controller for a number of other vehicle systems, for example column
adjust positions, steering column multifunction switch inputs, steering Servotronic control.
The instrument cluster is the gateway for the high speed and medium speed CAN (controller area network) buses, and is also
connected to the LIN (local interconnect network) bus to the start control unit and the steering wheel audio module.
ANALOGUE GAGES
Speedometer
The speedometer is located on the LH (left-hand) side of the cluster and is available in three market variants:
 Major scale mph, minor scale km/h

 Major scale km/h, minor scale mph
 Major scale only in km/h.
The speedometer is driven by high speed CAN signals transmitted by the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module. The wheel
speeds are measured by sensors reading the rotational speed of the rear wheels from toothed targets on the hubs. An
average of the two wheel speeds are passed from the sensors to the ABS module in the form of pulsed signals. The ABS
module converts these signals into a speed output on the high speed CAN to the instrument cluster.
The same speed outputs from the wheel speed sensors are also used to calculate the distance the vehicle has traveled.
Tachometer
The tachometer is located on the RH (right-hand) side of the instrument cluster and displays engine speeds up to 8000
rev/min.
The tachometer is driven by an engine speed signal transmitted on the high speed CAN from the ECM (engine control
module). The signal is derived from the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor. The signal is received by the instrument cluster
microprocessor and the output from the microprocessor drives the tachometer.
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
In the area above and below the message center is a LCD. The area below the message center displays a linear fuel gage,
odometer, trip distance and trip computer readouts. The area above the message center displays the transmission gear
position information and speed control related information.
NOTE: There is no engine coolant temperature gage displayed. If the engine coolant temperature increases to above a
predetermined threshold, a warning message is displayed in the message center. The message is sent from the ECM in a
high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster.
A warning message is also displayed in the message center if the coolant in the expansion tank falls below a given level. The
instrument cluster is hardwired to a level switch in the expansion tank with feed and return connections. If the switch opens
the instrument cluster detects the low coolant level and displays the applicable message.
Fuel Gage
The linear fuel gage has a colored bar which moves left or right depending on the tank contents. As the bar moves to the left
the fuel tank contents displayed is decreasing. A warning message is displayed in the message center when the fuel tank
contents fall to below the reserve level.
The fuel gage is controlled by CAN messages from the AJB (auxiliary junction box). The AJB reads the values output by the
fuel level sensors every 131 ms and transmits a fuel tank contents value, corrected for battery voltage, in a CAN message to
the instrument cluster.
A fuel pump symbol is displayed to the left of the linear gage. An arrow above the symbol shows the driver on which side of
the vehicle the fuel filler cap is located.
Above the linear fuel gage, is a LCD area which displays odometer and trip readouts. When a trip computer function is
selected, these are replaced by a trip computer display for the trip function selected.
Transmission Gear Position Display
The transmission gear position display shows the JaguarDrive selector position or, when operating the transmission in the
sequential shift mode, the selected gear.
The JaguarDrive selector module transmits a CAN message to the instrument cluster for JaguarDrive selector position. The
module also outputs a 'not in park' signal to the instrument cluster.
The TCM (transmission control module) transmits a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster with data containing
the selected gear when in sequential shift mode.
WARNING INDICATORS

1 - ABS (anti-lock braking system) (USA only)
2 - ABS - (Canada and Mexico)
3 - ABS - (all except Canada, Mexico and USA)
4 - Adaptive speed control
5 - AFS (adaptive front lighting system)
6 - MIL (malfunction indicator lamp)
7 - TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system)
8 - Airbag
9 - RH (right hand) turn signal
10 - Rear fog lamps
11 - DSC (dynamic stability control)
12 - High beam
13 - Side lamp
14 - Safety belt
15 - ASL (automatic speed limiter)
16 - Forward alert
17 - Brake (USA only)
18 - Brake (all except USA)
19 - LH (left hand) turn signal
The warning indicators are located in various positions in the instrument cluster. The indicators can be split into two groups;
instrument cluster controlled and externally controlled.
Instrument cluster controlled warning indicators are dependant on software logic within the instrument cluster for activation.
The cluster software controls the indicator illumination check at ignition on.
Externally controlled indicators are supplied with current from another vehicle system control module or illuminated by the
instrument cluster software on receipt of a bus message from another vehicle system. The indicator illumination check at
ignition on is also controlled by the other system module on these indicators.
CONTROL DIAGRAM

1 - Battery
4 - Power distribution box (ignition relay)
5 - High speed CAN (controller area network) bus to other vehicle systems
6 - Medium speed CAN bus to other vehicle systems
7 - LIN (local interconnect network) bus from steering wheel audio switch module (via clockspring)
and start control module
9 - Steering column adjustment switch
10 - Steering column reach and rake adjustment motors
11 - Steering column position potentiometer
12 - Coolant level switch
13 - Power steering Servotronic valve
-
14 Brake fluid level switch
15 - Steering column RH multifunction switch
16 - Steering column LH multifunction switch
18 - Auxiliary switch panel
19 - Sunload sensor (with alarm LED (light emitting diode))
Warning Indicator Functionality

1 - LH turn signal
2 - RH turn signal
3 - Brake
4 - Forward alert
5 - ASL
6 - Adaptive speed control
7 - ABS
8 - AFS
9 - MIL
10 - TPMS
11 - Airbag
12 - DSC
13 - Safety belt
14 - Side lamp
15 - High beam
16 - Rear fog lamps
The functionality for each of the above warning indicators is described in the following section.
1. and 2. Turn Signal Warning Indicators
The turn signal indicators are controlled by the AJB on receipt of medium speed CAN signals from the instrument cluster.
The instrument cluster outputs a voltage to the turn signal indicator switch. The switch contains resistors of different values.
When the switch is operated in either the LH or RH direction, the voltage is passed to a ground connection in the instrument
cluster which detects the reduced voltage supplied via the resistors. When the turn signal indicator switch is operated in the
LH or RH direction, the instrument cluster detects the ground voltage and determines whether a LH or RH selection is made.
The instrument cluster transmits a medium speed CAN message to the AJB for operation of the applicable turn signal
indicators. The message can contain a number of states for each possible switch position and also an out of range low and
high state for circuit faults and an initial value for the switch neutral position. The turn signal indicators are not subject to
the 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The AJB software controls the flash rate of the turn signal warning indicators by sending on and off signals to the instrument
cluster, which flashes the applicable indicator in a green color. During normal operation, the warning indicator flashes slowly,
accompanied simultaneously by a sound from the instrument cluster sounder. If a fault exists, the AJB transmits a message
to the instrument cluster which responds by flashing the warning indicator and operating the sounder at double speed to
indicate a bulb failure and also displays an appropriate message and vehicle graphic in the message center.
The hazard warning indicators are controlled by the AJB on receipt of a completed ground path from the hazard warning
indicator switch. The AJB outputs a medium speed CAN message to the instrument cluster which operates both the LH and
RH turn signal indicators simultaneously. The hazard warning indicators can operate with the ignition switched off, therefore
the CAN message from the AJB will also carry a 'wake-up' message for the instrument cluster.
3. Brake Warning Indicator
This warning indicator is displayed in a red or amber color (depending on market) as a brake symbol in all markets except
USA, which has the word BRAKE in addition to the symbol. The indicator is controlled either by a hardwired input from the
brake fluid level switch or by high speed CAN messages from the ABS module and the EPB (electronic parking brake)
module. The indicator is illuminated in a red color for a 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The instrument cluster is hardwired to the level switch in the brake fluid reservoir with feed and return connections. If the
brake fluid level falls below a given level, the switch opens and the instrument cluster detects the low fluid level condition.
The instrument cluster then illuminates the warning indicator and displays the message BRAKE FLUID LOW in the message
center. The warning indicator can also be illuminated by the ABS module if an EBD (electronic brake force distribution) fault
is detected.
NOTE: If both the brake warning indicator and the ABS warning indicator illuminate simultaneously, a major fault in the
brake system has occurred.
The warning indicator also displays parking brake status. When the parking brake is applied, the warning indicator will be
illuminated by the instrument cluster and, if the vehicle is moving, the message PARK BRAKE APPLIED will be also displayed
in the message center in response to a CAN message from the EPB module.
If a condition exists where the parking brake cannot be applied, the EPB module issues a CAN message to the instrument
cluster which illuminates or flashes (depending on market) the warning lamp and is accompanied with the message CANNOT
APPLY PARK BRAKE. If a fault occurs in the parking brake system, the EPB module issues a CAN message to the instrument
cluster which illuminates the warning indicator and displays the message PARK BRAKE FAULT in the message center.
4. Forward Alert Warning Indicator
The forward alert system uses the components of the adaptive speed control system to alert the driver of the presence of a
vehicle ahead. The system can be turned on and off using a switch located in the auxiliary switch panel when the adaptive
speed control system is off. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is
switched on.
The forward alert system is controlled by the adaptive speed control module. When the switch is pressed, the forward alert
system is activated and the adaptive speed control module issues a forward alert active message on the high speed CAN bus
to the instrument cluster. The forward alert icon in the instrument cluster will illuminate in an amber color and a 'FORWARD
ALERT' message will be displayed in the message center. When the button is pressed a second time, the module issues a
forward alert off CAN message. The forward alert system will be deactivated, the forward alert icon will go off and a message
'FORWARD ALERT OFF' will be displayed in the message center.
5. Automatic Speed Limiter Warning Indicator
The ASL is controlled by the ECM. An ASL switch is located in the floor console, adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector. When
the ASL switch is pressed, this is sensed by the ECM, which issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster. The
instrument cluster illuminates the ASL warning indicator in an amber color to show the driver that ASL is active. The driver
sets the required speed using the speed control SET +/- switches on the steering wheel. The selected speed is shown by the
message ' LIMITER SET XXX MPH / K/MH' in the message center. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3
seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
ASL can be deselected by pressing the ASL switch, by depressing the throttle pedal initiating kick-down or by pressing the
'cancel' switch on the steering wheel. The ASL indicator will go off and the message center will display the message 'limiter
cancelled' for 4 seconds.
If a fault occurs in the ASL system, the ECM will send a message to the instrument cluster to illuminate the ASL indicator and
display the message 'LIMITER NOT AVAILABLE'.
6. Adaptive Speed Control Warning Indicator
www.JagDocs.com
The adaptive speed control system is controlled by the adaptive speed control module. Operation of the SET +/- switches on
the steering wheel will activate the system. Operation of the switches is detected by the adaptive speed control module. The
module issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster which illuminates the adaptive speed control indicator,
when the system is in 'follow mode', in an amber color and displays a 'SETSPEED XXX MPH / KM/H' message in the message
center. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
7. Anti-lock Braking System Warning Indicator
The ABS warning indicator is controlled by the ABS module. If a fault in the ABS system is detected by the ABS module, the
module issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster to illuminate the ABS warning indicator in an amber color
and display the message 'ABS FAULT' in the instrument cluster. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds
indicator check when the ignition is switched on. If a fault is present when the ignition is on the indicator will remain
illuminated after the 3 seconds check period.
NOTE: The 'ABS FAULT' message is not displayed in NAS markets.
NOTE: If both the ABS warning indicator and the brake warning indicator illuminate simultaneously, a major fault in the
brake system will have occurred.
On all vehicles except NAS, the ABS warning indicator is also used for parking brake faults. The indicator in these markets
illuminates in an amber color and displays a brake symbol without the text 'ABS' in the icon.
On NAS vehicles, the ABS warning indicator is only used for ABS. The warning indicator has 'ABS' on the icon and will
illuminate amber for ABS faults only.
8. Adaptive Front Light System Warning Indicator
The AFS warning indicator is controlled by the AFS control module. The AFS warning indicator illuminates in an amber color if
a fault in the AFS system is detected by the control module. If a fault in another system occurs which prevents AFS
operation, the warning indicator will flash. The indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a high speed
CAN message from the AFS control module. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds indicator check
when the ignition is switched on.
9. Malfunction Indicator Lamp Warning Indicator
The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) is controlled by the ECM and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a
message on the high speed CAN bus from the ECM. The MIL is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds indicator check
when the ignition is switched on.
If the MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started or illuminates when driving, a fault is present and must be
investigated at the earliest opportunity. Illumination of the MIL alerts the driver to an OBD (on-board diagnostic) fault which
will cause excessive emissions output. This may relate to either an engine management system fault or a transmission fault.
10. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Indicator
The TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) warning indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a
medium speed CAN message from the TPMS module. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds indicator
check when the ignition is switched on.
If the indicator illuminates and is accompanied by the message 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' in the message center,
then a TPMS fault has occurred. If the indicator illuminates and accompanied by a different message, then a low tire
pressure has been detected, a spare wheel has been fitted or a TPMS sensor has failed.
11. Airbag Warning Indicator
The airbag warning indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for the 3
seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on. The indicator remains illuminated after the 3 seconds period has
expired until the instrument cluster receives a turn off message on the high speed CAN bus from the RCM (restraints control
module).
12. Dynamic Stability Control Warning Indicator
The DSC indicator is controlled by the ABS module and illuminated by the instrument cluster in response to messages
received on the high speed CAN bus. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for the 3 seconds indicator check when
the ignition is switched on.
The DSC indicator is permanently illuminated in an amber color if the instrument cluster receives a high speed CAN message
from the ABS module relating to one of the following faults:
 Traction control fault
 Yaw control fault
 Engine drag torque control fault
 EBA (emergency brake assist) fault
 Signal missing relating to either traction control active, yaw control active or DSC switch input.
The above faults will also generate an applicable DSC and ABS warning message in the message center.
The DSC warning indicator will flash at 2 Hz if traction control or yaw control is active when the DSC system is enabled.
If the DSC system is switched off, the warning indicator will be permanently illuminated until the DSC system is
subsequently re-activated.
13. Safety Belt Warning Indicator
The safety belt warning indicator operates for both the driver and passenger safety belts. The warning indicator is controlled
by the RCM and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of high speed CAN bus messages. The safety belt warning
indicator is not subject to the 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The operation of the passenger safety belt buckle switch is as described below with the exception that the instrument cluster
must receive a hardwired signal from the belt minder control module to indicate that a passenger is occupying the seat.
The safety belt warning indicator is subject to a timer. The warning indicator is activated when the following conditions exist:
 Ignition is switched on
 One of the front safety belts is unbuckled
 USA market only - 75 seconds has elapsed after ignition on mode is selected
 Vehicle is not in reverse gear
 Vehicle speed is more than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Once the above parameters are met, the instrument cluster flashes the warning indicator at 2 Hz for 10 seconds
accompanied by a simultaneous chime. After 10 seconds the chime ceases and the warning indicator is permanently
illuminated for 20 seconds. This sequence is repeated every 30 seconds until one of the following events occurs:
 300 seconds has elapsed

 The safety belt of the occupied front seats is fastened
 The ignition is switched to off mode
 The vehicle speed decreases to less 5 km/h (3 mph).
NOTE: On USA market vehicles, the warning indicator is not permanently illuminated.
In certain markets the belt minder function can be enabled and disabled using the driver safety belt switch. For additional
information, refer to 501-20A Safety Belt System.
14. Side Lamp Warning Indicator
The instrument cluster controls the green colored side lamp indicator on receipt of a side lamp status message on the
medium speed CAN bus from the CJB (central junction box) and the AJB. The lighting switch on theLH steering column
multifunction switch is connected to the instrument cluster. Selections using this switch are detected by the cluster which
requests the side or headlamp operation via a CAN message to the CJB and the AJB. The CJB and the AJB responds with a
side lamp active message and the cluster illuminates the side lamp indicator. The side lamp indicator is not subject to the 3
seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
15. High Beam Warning Indicator
The instrument cluster controls the blue colored high beam indicator on receipt of a high beam status message on the
medium speed CAN bus from the CJB. The lighting switch on the LH steering column multifunction switch is connected to the
instrument cluster. High beam or flash selections using this switch are detected by the cluster which requests the light
operation via a CAN message to the CJB. The CJB responds with a high beam active message and the cluster illuminates the
high beam indicator. The high beam indicator is not subject to the 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched
on.
16. Rear Fog Lamp Warning Indicator
The amber colored rear fog lamp indicator is controlled by the AJB and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a
rear fog lamp on message on the medium speed CAN bus from the AJB. The indicator is illuminated for as long as the rear
fog lamps are active. The rear fog lamp indicator is not subject to the 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched
on.
For a detailed description of the instrument cluster, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
 Fluid level(s)  Fuse(s)
 Accessory installations  Wiring harness
 Central Junction Box (CJB)
 Engine Junction Box (EJB)
 Auxiliary Junction Box
 Driver Door Module (DDM)
 Passenger Door Module (PDM)
DTC Index
into account.

B100811 Wiper mode switch -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit short to ground  Switch fault wiper switch circuits for short to ground. Repair
wiring harness or replace switch as required. Clear
DTC and retest system
B100815 Wiper mode switch -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit short to power or  Switch fault wiper switch circuits for short to power or open
open circuits. Repair wiring harness or replace switch as
required. Clear DTC and retest system
B100951 Ignition authorisation -  Faulty instrument cluster Check ignition, power and ground supplies to
not programmed  Re-synchronisation error Central Junction Box and instrument cluster. Re-
following programming synchronise ID by re-configuring the instrument
 CAN fault cluster as a new module. Check CAN
communications between instrument cluster and
tester
B100962 Ignition authorisation -  Low speed CAN fault Check CAN communications between Central
signal compare failure  Central Junction Box Junction Box and instrument cluster. Check
fault ignition, power and ground supplies to Central
 Instrument cluster fault Junction Box and instrument cluster. Confirm
 Incorrect module correct module is installed. Re-synchronise ID by
installed (Central re-configuring the instrument cluster as a new
Junction Box/Instrument module. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
cluster) related issues
 Re-synchronisation error
following re-
programming
B100987 Ignition authorisation -  Central Junction Box Check power and ground supplies to Central
missing message fault Junction Box and instrument cluster. Refer to
 Low speed CAN fault electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN network
 Instrument cluster fault between Central Junction Box and instrument
 Low battery voltage <9V cluster. Check battery is fully charged and in
serviceable condition, refer to the battery care
manual
B102487 Start Control Unit -  Loss of LIN Check power and ground supplied to the start
Missing message communication with control unit. Refer to circuit diagrams and check
Start Control Unit LIN bus circuits. If no circuit faults are present
 Start Control Unit failure suspect start control unit. Refer to the new module
B104611 Front fog lamp control  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
switch - Circuit short to  Switch fault switch circuits for short to ground. Repair wiring
ground harness or replace switch as required. Clear DTC
and retest system
B104615 Front fog lamp control  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
switch - Circuit short to  Switch fault switch circuits for short to power or open circuit.
battery or open Repair wiring harness or replace switch as
B100A62 Fuel pump authorisation  Low speed CAN fault Check CAN communications between Auxiliary
- signal compare failure  Auxiliary Junction Box Junction Box and instrument cluster. Check power
fault and ground supplies to Auxiliary Junction Box and
 Instrument cluster fault instrument cluster. Confirm correct module
 Incorrect module installed. Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the
installed (Auxiliary Auxiliary Junction Box as a new module. Check
Junction Box/Instrument CAN network for interference/EMC related issues
cluster)
 Write target SID
synchronisation error
following re-
programming
B100A64 Fuel Pump authorisation -  Write target SID Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the Auxiliary
signal plausibility failure synchronisation error Junction Box as a new module. Check ignition,
following re- power and ground supplies to Auxiliary Junction
programming Box and instrument cluster. Check CAN network
 Auxiliary Junction Box between Auxiliary Junction Box and instrument
fault cluster
 Low speed CAN fault
B100A87 Fuel pump authorisation  Auxiliary Junction Box Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check
- missing message fault power and ground supplies to Auxiliary Junction
 Low speed CAN fault Box and instrument cluster. Check CAN network
 Instrument cluster fault between Auxiliary Junction Box and instrument
 Low battery voltage < 9 cluster. Check battery is fully charged and in
volts serviceable condition, refer to the battery care
manual
B100B67 Column lock ground  Instrument cluster fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check
authorisation - signal  Low speed CAN fault power and ground supplies to Auxiliary Junction
incorrect after event  Auxiliary Junction Box Box and instrument cluster. Check CAN network
fault between Auxiliary Junction Box and instrument
 Vehicle speed present cluster. Check Anti-lock Braking System, Engine
when attempting to Control Module and Central Junction Box for DTCs
power steering column and refer to the relevant DTC Index
lock
 Engine speed present
when attempting to
power steering column
lock
 Power mode status >
four when attempting to
perform lock action
B100B87 Column lock ground  Instrument cluster fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check
authorisation - missing  Low speed CAN fault power and ground supplies to Auxiliary Junction
message  Auxiliary Junction Box Box and instrument cluster. Check CAN network
fault between Auxiliary Junction Box and instrument
cluster
B100C67 Column lock supply  Instrument cluster fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check
authorisation - signal  Low speed CAN fault power and ground supplies to Central Junction Box
incorrect after event  Central Junction Box and instrument cluster. Check CAN network
fault between Central Junction Box and instrument
 Vehicle speed present cluster. Check Anti-lock Braking System, Engine
when attempting to Control Module and Central Junction Box for DTCs
power steering column and refer to the relevant DTC Index
lock
 Engine speed present
when attempting to
power steering column
lock
 Power mode status >
four when attempting to
perform lock action
B100C87 Column lock supply  Instrument cluster fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check
authorisation - missing  Low speed CAN fault power and ground supplies to Central Junction Box
message  Central Junction Box and instrument cluster. Check CAN network
fault between Central Junction Box and instrument
cluster
B100D62 Column lock  CAN fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN
authorisation - signal  Steering column lock network between steering column lock and
compare failure fault instrument cluster. Check power and ground
 Instrument cluster fault supplies to steering column lock and instrument
 Incorrect module cluster. Confirm the correct modules are installed.
installed (Steering Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring the steering
column lock/Instrument column lock as new. Check CAN network for
cluster) interference/EMC related issues
 Target ID
following re-
programming
authorisation - signal  Steering column lock network to steering column lock. Check power and
plausibility failure fault ground supplies to steering column lock and
 Instrument cluster fault instrument cluster
authorisation - missing  Steering column lock network between steering column lock and
message fault instrument cluster. Check power and ground
 Instrument cluster fault supplies to steering column lock and instrument
 Low voltage at steering cluster
column lock < 8V
authorisation -  Steering column lock network between steering column lock and
component internal fault instrument cluster. Check power and ground
failure  Instrument cluster fault supplies to steering column lock and instrument
 Low temperature < -30 cluster. Check there is no torque applied to the
° steering column/wheel when the unlock process is
 Low voltage at steering attempted
column lock < 8 volts
 Restricted bolt
movement
B112B87 Steering Wheel Module -  Loss of LIN Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check LIN
Missing message communication with network connections to Steering wheel module.
Steering wheel module Check power and ground connections. Check
 Wiring harness fault switch signal circuits. Repair wiring harness faults,
 Switch fault clear DTC and test. If DTC recurs suspect steering
 internal module fault wheel module. Refer to the new module
B10A011 Wiper/washer switch -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit short to ground  Switch fault switch circuits for short to ground. Repair wiring
harness or replace switch as required. Clear DTC
and retest system
B10A015 Wiper/washer switch -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit short to battery or  Switch fault switch circuits for short to power or open circuit.
open Repair wiring harness or replace switch as
B10A611 Main light switch - Circuit  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
short to ground  Switch fault switch circuits for short to ground. Repair wiring
harness or replace switch as required. Clear DTC
and retest system
B10A615 Main light switch - Circuit  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
short to battery or open  Switch fault switch circuits for short to power or open circuit.
Repair wiring harness or replace switch as
B115C7A Transfer fuel pump  Fluid leak or seal failure Check transfer fuel pump for leak/seal failure
B1A8511 Ambient light sensor -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit short to ground  Sensor fault ambient light sensor circuit for short to ground.
Repair wiring harness or replace sensor as
B1A8515 Ambient light sensor -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit short to battery or  Sensor fault ambient light sensor circuit for short to power or
open open circuit. Repair wiring harness or replace
sensor as required. Clear DTC and retest system
B1B0100 Key transponder -  Operator only cycles one Ensure all keys to be programmed are available.
number of keys stored key during programming Check power and ground supplies to all relevant
below minimum number  Instrument cluster, start modules. Replace faulty key. Check CAN network
required control unit or key loses for noise/EMC related issues
power or circuit failure
during programming
 Faulty key
 Unable to programme
key due to noise/EMC
related issues
B1B0105 Key transponder -  Error following start Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring the start
system programming control unit replacement control unit as a new module. Refer to electrical
failures  Start Control Unit fault wiring diagrams and check power and ground
 LIN fault supplies to start control unit and instrument
 Instrument cluster fault cluster. Check LIN circuit between start control
unit and instrument cluster
B1B0151 Key transponder - not  LIN fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check LIN
programmed  Instrument cluster fault circuit between start control unit and instrument
 Faulty key cluster. Check power and ground supplies to start
 Start control unit fault control unit and instrument cluster. Ensure new
 Attempted to keys are from a known good source
programme a non-
default key
B1B0155 Key transponder - not  Un-programmed key Confirm correct keys are being used
configured inserted in Start Control
Unit
 Non-default key inserted
during key programming
B1B0162 Key transponder - signal  Instrument cluster fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check
compare failure  Start Control Unit fault power and ground supplies to start control unit
 Incorrect module and instrument cluster. Check correct modules are
installed (instrument installed. Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring the
cluster/start control start control unit as a new module. Check CAN
unit) network for interference/EMC related issues
 Error during or following
the write target SID
routine
 Noise/EMC related issues
B1B0164 Key transponder - signal  LIN fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check LIN
plausibility failure  Instrument cluster fault circuit between start control unit and instrument
 Key fault cluster. Check power and ground supplies to start
 Start control unit fault control unit and instrument cluster. Confirm
 Error occurred during correct key operation. Re-run key programming
key programming
B1B0167 Key transponder - signal  LIN fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check LIN
incorrect after event  Instrument cluster fault circuit between start control unit and instrument
 Key fault cluster. Check ignition, power and ground supplies
 Start control unit fault to start control unit and instrument cluster.
 Another key in close Confirm correct key operation. Confirm single key
proximity operation. Ensure new keys are from a known
 Attempted to good source. Check for intermittent power and
programme a non ground at instrument cluster. Design condition -
default key advise customer of correct starting sequence.
 IPK Cold initialisation Design condition - determine customer
whilst in Ignition On transponder key usage
state, without key being
present in the Start
Control Unit
 Race condition caused
by closing driver door
and pressing start
button within a small
time window
 Passive Key search
function from last door
closed and key inserted
in the Start Control Unit
B1B0187 Key transponder -  LIN fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
missing message  Instrument cluster fault LIN circuit between start control unit and
 Start control unit fault instrument cluster. Check power and ground
supplies to start control unit and instrument
cluster
B1B3305 Target I.D. transfer -  CAN fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN
system programming  Engine Control Module network between Engine Control Module and
failures fault instrument cluster. Check ignition, power and
 Instrument cluster fault grounds to Engine Control Module and instrument
 Engine Control Module cluster. Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the
or instrument cluster instrument cluster as a new module
incorrectly configured
B1B3362 Target I.D. transfer -  CAN fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams check CAN
signal compare failure  Engine Control Module network between Engine Control Module and
fault instrument cluster. Check ignition, power and
 Incorrect module cluster. Check correct Engine Control Module and
installed (Engine Control instrument cluster installed. Re-synchronise ID by
Module/instrument re-configuring the instrument cluster as a new
cluster) module. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
 Synchronisation error related issues
following re-
programming
signal plausibility failure  Engine Control Module network between Engine Control Module and
 Steering column lock cluster. Check steering column lock operation.
status incomplete Design condition - advise customer of correct start
 Race condition caused sequence
by closing driver door
and pressing start
button within a small
time window
missing message  Engine Control Module network between Engine Control Module and
 Low battery voltage cluster. Check battery is in fully charged and
serviceable condition, refer to the battery care
manual
B1C2597 Pedal Motor Relay -  Pedal motion fault Check mechanical pedal mechanisms are not
Component or system obstructed or blocked. Unblock or remove
operation obstructed or obstruction. Clear DTC and retest system
blocked
B1C2612 Pedal Motor Feedback  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check motor
Circuit - circuit short to  Motor fault feedback circuit for short to power. Repair wiring
battery harness or connectors as required. Clear DTC and
retest system
B1C2614 Pedal Motor Feedback  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check motor
Circuit - circuit open or  Motor fault feedback circuit for short to ground or open.
short to ground Repair wiring harness or connectors as required.
Clear DTC and retest system
B1C3277 Steering column tilt  Tilt motion mechanical Check mechanical functions of column and
solenoid - Commanded fault solenoid pin. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
position not reachable  Wiring harness fault and check tilt solenoid and switch circuits for open
 Switch fault circuit, short to power or ground. Repair harness
or replace switch as required. Clear DTC and retest
system
B1C3294 Steering column tilt  Tilt motion mechanical Check mechanical functions of column and
solenoid - Unexpected fault solenoid pin. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
operation  Wiring harness fault and check tilt solenoid and switch circuits for open
 Switch fault circuit, short to power or ground. Repair harness
or replace switch as required. Clear DTC and retest
system
B1C3312 Steering column tilt  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check tilt
feedback signal - Circuit feedback circuits for short to power. Repair
shorted to battery harness as required. Clear DTC and retest system
B1C3314 Steering column tilt  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check tilt
feedback signal - Circuit feedback circuits for short to ground or open
short to ground or open circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
retest system
B1C3477 Steering column  Telescope motion Check mechanical functions of column and
telescope solenoid - mechanical fault solenoid pin. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
Commanded position not  Wiring harness fault and check telescope solenoid and switch circuits
reachable  Solenoid fault for open circuit, short to power or ground. Repair
 Switch fault harness or replace switch or solenoid as required.
B1C3494 Steering column  Telescope motion Check mechanical functions of column and
telescope solenoid - mechanical fault solenoid pin. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
Unexpected operation  Wiring harness fault and check telescope solenoid and switch circuits
 Solenoid fault for open circuit, short to power or ground. Repair
 Switch fault harness or replace switch or solenoid as required.
B1C3512 Steering column  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
telescope feedback signal telescope feedback circuits for short to power.
- Circuit shorted to Repair harness as required, clear DTC and retest
battery system
telescope feedback signal telescope feedback circuits for short to ground or
- Circuit short to ground open circuit. Repair harness as required, clear DTC
or open and retest system
tilt/telescope switch -  Switch fault switch circuit for short to ground. Repair the
Circuit short to ground harness or replace the switch as required. Clear
the DTC and retest the system
B1C4811 Flash to pass switch -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit short to ground  Switch fault switch circuit for short to ground. Repair the
harness or replace the switch as required. Clear
B1C4815 Flash to pass switch -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit short to battery or  Switch fault switch circuit for short to power or open circuit.
open Repair the harness or replace the switch as
required. Clear the DTC and retest the system
B1C5311 Front wiper intermittent  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
data - Circuit short to  Switch fault switch intermittent data circuit for short to ground.
ground Repair the harness or replace the switch as
B1C5315 Front wiper intermittent  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
data - Circuit short to  Switch fault switch intermittent data circuit for short to power
battery or open or open circuit. Repair the harness or replace the
switch as required. Clear the DTC and retest the
system
B1D3611 Turn indicator switch -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit short to ground  Switch fault turn switch circuits for short to ground. Repair the
harness or replace the switch as required. Clear
B1D3615 Turn indicator switch -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Circuit short to battery or  Switch fault turn switch circuits for short to power or open
open circuit. Repair the harness or replace the switch as
B1D3711 Wiper switch connection  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
circuit - Circuit short to  Switch fault wiper switch connection circuits for short to
ground ground. Repair the harness or replace the switch
as required. Clear the DTC and retest the system
B1D3715 Wiper switch connection  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
circuit - Circuit short to  Switch fault wiper switch connection circuits for short to power
battery or open or open circuit. Repair the harness or replace the
switch as required. Clear the DTC and retest the
system
C004A11 Brake Lining Wear Sensor  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams. Check brake
- Circuit Short to ground  Brake linings sensor linings and wear sensing circuit for short to
fault ground. Rectify any wiring harness faults and clear
the DTC. retest the system to confirm repair
C004A15 Brake Lining Wear Sensor  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams. Check brake
- Circuit Short to battery  Brake linings sensor linings and wear sensing circuit for short to power
or open fault or open circuit. Rectify any wiring harness faults
and clear the DTC. retest the system to confirm
repair
C111064 Power steering  Invalid Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
calibration data - Signal Assistance Power system, re-configure the instrument cluster as
plausibility failure Steering calibration new, reload Variable Assistance Power Steering
loaded calibration data.
P063511 Power steering control  Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
circuit - Circuit short to  Variable Assistance the power steering control circuits for short to
ground Power Steering actuator ground. Repair the harness or replace the actuator
fault as required. Clear the DTC and retest the system
to confirm correct operation
circuit - Circuit short to  Variable Assistance the power steering control circuits for short to
battery Power Steering actuator power. Repair the harness or replace the actuator
fault as required. Clear the DTC and retest the system
to confirm correct operation
circuit - Circuit open  Variable Assistance the power steering control circuits for open circuit.
Power Steering actuator Repair the harness or replace the actuator as
fault required. Clear the DTC and retest the system to
confirm correct operation
circuit - Signal amplitude  Internal fault within the power steering actuator control circuits for
> maximum instrument cluster short to power, short to ground, open circuit.
Check for power and ground supply faults to
instrument cluster. Check CAN network integrity.
Repair any faults found, clear DTC and retest
system. If fault resets suspect instrument cluster,
refer to note above DTC table regarding replacing
a module/components which may be covered by
manufacturers warranty
P063544 Power steering control  Internal Fault within Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check for
circuit - data memory instrument cluster intermittent faults on power and ground supplies.
failure module If no faults found suspect instrument cluster, refer
to note above DTC table regarding replacing a
module/components which may be covered by
manufacturers warranty
U000188 High speed CAN  Break in connection to Check network integrity. Refer to the electrical
communication Bus - bus HS CAN bus circuit diagrams and check HS CAN circuits
off
U001088 Medium speed CAN  Break in connection to Check network integrity. Refer to the electrical
communication Bus - bus MS CAN bus circuit diagrams and check MS CAN circuits
off
U010000 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check Engine Control Module for related DTCs.
ECM/PCM A - Missing communication with Check network integrity. Refer to electrical wiring
message Engine Control Module diagrams and check the CAN circuits
U010100 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check Transmission Control Module for related
TCM - Missing message communication with DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Check network
Transmission Control integrity. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and
Module check the CAN circuits, check power and ground
supplies to transmission control module
U010300 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check Transmission Shift Module for related DTCs
Gear Shift Module - communication with and refer to DTC Index. Check network integrity.
Missing message Transmission Shift Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Module CAN circuits, check power and ground supplies to
the transmission shift module
U010400 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check speed control module for related DTCs and
cruise control module - communication with refer to the DTC index. Check network integrity.
missing message speed control module Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
CAN circuits, check power and ground supplies to
the speed control module
U012100 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check Anti-lock Braking System module for related
Anti-lock Brake System communication with DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Check network
(ABS) control module Anti-lock Braking integrity. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and
System control module check the CAN circuits, check power and ground
supplies to the anti-lock braking system control
module
U012600 Lost communication with  Loss of communication Check Passenger Seat Module for DTCs and refer
Passenger Seat Module with Passenger Seat to DTC Index. Check network integrity. Refer to
(PSM) - missing message Module electrical wiring diagrams and check the CAN
circuits, check power and ground supplies to the
passenger seat module
U012700 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check tire pressure monitor module for related
Tire Pressure Monitor communication with tire DTCs and refer to the DTC index. Check network
Module - missing pressure monitor integrity. Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
message module with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U012800 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check park brake control module for related DTCs
Park Brake control communication with the and refer to the DTC index. Check network
module - missing park brake control integrity. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and
message module check the CAN circuits, check power and ground
supplies to the park brake control module
U013900 Lost communication with  Loss of communication Check adaptive damping control module for DTCs
suspension control with adaptive damping and refer to DTC Index. Refer to electrical wiring
module B - missing control module. diagrams and check the CAN circuits, check power
message and ground supplies to the adaptive damping
control module
U014000 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check Central Junction Box for DTCs and refer to
Body Control Module - communication with DTC Index
Missing message Central Junction Box
U014200 Lost communication with  loss of CAN Check Auxiliary junction box for DTCs and refer to
Body Control Module B - communication with the DTC index. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
missing message Auxiliary Junction Box and check the CAN circuits, check power and
ground supplies to the Auxiliary junction box
U015100 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check Restraints Control Module for related DTCs
Restraints Control Module communication with and refer to the DTC index. Check network
- missing message Restraints Control integrity. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and
Module check the CAN circuits, check power and ground
supplies to the restraints control module
U015600 Lost communication with  Loss of communication Check information and entertainment module for
Information Centre A - with infotainment control DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Check network
Missing message module integrity. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and
check the CAN circuits, check power and ground
supplies to the communication and infotainment
control module
U016400 Lost communication with  loss of CAN Check Climate Control Module for DTCs and refer
HVAC control module - communication with to DTC Index. Check network integrity. Refer to
missing message Climate Control Module electrical wiring diagrams and check the CAN
circuits, check power and ground supplies to the
climate control module
U019900 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check Drivers Door Module for DTCs and refer to
Door Control Module A - communications with DTC Index. Check network integrity. Refer to
Missing message Driver's door control electrical wiring diagrams and check the CAN
module circuits, check power and ground supplies to the
drivers door control module
U020000 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check Passenger Door Module for DTCs and refer
Door Control Module B - communications with to DTC Index. Check network integrity. Refer to
Missing message passenger door control electrical wiring diagrams and check the CAN
passenger door control module
U020600 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check convertible roof control module for related
folding Top control communication with DTCs and refer to the DTC index. Check network
module - Missing convertible roof control integrity. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and
message module check the CAN circuits, check power and ground
supplies to the convertible roof control module
U020800 Lost communication With  Loss of CAN Check Drivers Seat Module for DTCs and refer to
Seat Control Module A - communication with DTC Index. Check network integrity. Refer to
Missing message driver's seat control electrical wiring diagrams and check the CAN
drivers seat control module
U021400 Lost communication with  Lost CAN communication Check Remote Keyless Entry module for DTCs and
Remote Function with keyless vehicle refer to DTC Index. Check network integrity. Refer
Actuation - Missing module to electrical wiring diagrams and check the CAN
message circuits, check power and ground supplies to the
keyless vehicle module
U024100 Lost communication with  Lost CAN communication Check lighting control module for DTCs and refer
headlamp Control Module with Active Front to DTC Index. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
A - Missing message Lighting system control and check the CAN circuits, check power and
module ground supplies to the adaptive front lighting
control module
U025000 Lost communication with  loss of CAN Check Pedestrian Protection system module for
Impact Classification communication with DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Refer to electrical
System Module - Missing Pedestrian Protection wiring diagrams and check the CAN circuits, check
message System module power and ground supplies to the pedestrian
protection system module
U025600 Lost communication with  Loss of CAN Check Integrated Control Panel for DTCs and refer
Front Controls Interface communication with to DTC Index. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
Module A - Missing integrated control panel and check the CAN circuits, check power and
message ground supplies to the integrated control panel
U030000 Internal control module  Auxiliary Junction Box Re-configure the Auxiliary Junction Box using the
software incompatibility car configuration data is manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear
not compatible with the DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged, suspect the
instrument cluster instrument cluster. Refer to the new module
U200411 Auxiliary switch pack -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check for
Circuit short to ground  Switch pack fault Auxiliary switch signal circuit short to ground.
Repair wiring harness or replace switch pack as
U200415 Auxiliary switch pack -  Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check for
Circuit short to power or  Switch pack fault Auxiliary switch signal circuit short to ground.
open Repair wiring harness or replace switch pack as
U300046 Control module -  Internal instrument Install a new instrument cluster. Refer to the new
Calibration/parameter cluster fault - corrupt module installation note at the top of the DTC
memory failure non-volatile memory Index
U300049 Control module - Internal  Internal instrument Install a new instrument cluster, refer to the new
electronic failure cluster fault - module installation note at the top of the DTC
ROM/EEPROM checksum Index
failure
U300055 Control module - not  Incorrect car Re-configure the Auxiliary Junction Box using the
configured configuration data manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear
received DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains suspect the
instrument cluster, refer to the new module
U300087 Control module - Missing  Car configuration Re-configure the Auxiliary Junction Box using the
message parameter not received manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
within 25s time period instrument cluster for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
U300281 Vehicle Identification  Vehicle/component mis- Install original module, check for DTCs and refer to
Number - invalid serial match. Corrupt VIN data relevant DTC Index
data received being transmitted,
module previously
U300316 Battery voltage - circuit  Circuit voltage below 9 Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
voltage below threshold volts threshold for 1 battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
second and starting/charging system performance
U300317 Battery voltage - Circuit  Circuit voltage above 16 Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
voltage above threshold volts threshold for 1 battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
second and starting/charging system performance
U300362 Battery voltage - Signal  Signal compare failure Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
Compare Failure battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
and starting/charging system performance. Check
logic power supply circuit from Central Junction
Box to Instrument Cluster
Removal
1. NOTE: Make sure all smart keys are available before a new
instrument cluster is installed.
If a new instrument cluster is being installed, all smart keys

must be cleared from the passive anti-theft system (PATS),
using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment prior to the
instrument cluster removal.
2. Remove the instrument panel driver's side

Remove the instrument cluster surround.

4. Remove the instrument cluster.

 Raise the steering column finisher for
access to the lower screws.
Installation
1. Install the instrument cluster.
 Connect and secure the electrical connectors.
2. Install the instrument cluster surround.

3. Install the instrument panel driver's side reinforcement trim

panel.
4. NOTE: Make sure all smart keys are available before the new
instrument cluster is installed.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, programme

the new instrument cluster and reprogram all of the smart keys
to the vehicle.
Horn -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Horn - stud 25 18 -
Horn - Horn
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Horns
2 - Horn switch
3 - Horn relay and fuse (15A)
INTRODUCTION
The vehicle horns are operated by pressing the center of the steering wheel. Two horns are fitted to the vehicle; a high tone
horn and a low tone horn. Voltage supply to the horns is controlled by the horn relay, which is energized when the horn
switch is pressed.
The horn relay is located in the power distribution box and when energized provides a supply to both horns simultaneously.
Circuit protection is provided by fuse 10 (15A), which is also located in the power distribution box.
The horns are mounted on a bracket, which is secured to the center of the front bumper beam, and are also used by the
active anti-theft system.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired

1 - Battery
2 - 175 A megafuse
4 - Horn relay
5 - Horns
6 - Horn switch
7 - Clockspring
Horn - Horn
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.

Electrical
 Fuse(s)
 Wiring Harness
 Horn(s)
 Relay
 Horn switch
 Clockspring
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Jaguar Approved Diagnostic System.
Horn - Horn V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.
2.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4.
5.
6. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Horn - Horn V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal


3. Refer to: Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Vehicles With: Supercharger
(211-02 Power Steering, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center
COMPONENT LOCATION
INTRODUCTION
The message center is a LCD (liquid crystal display) located in a central position in the instrument cluster.
The message center displays system information, vehicle status and trip computer information to the driver. The message
center is controlled by the instrument cluster and displays system information using CAN (controller area network) and hard
wired signals received from other vehicle system control modules and sensors.
MESSAGE CENTER
The message center LCD display has a viewable area of 240 pixels horizontal and 315 pixels vertical. It is divided into five
information display zones as follows, starting from the top:
 Transmission position
 Set speed
 Warning/Message display
 Odometer/Trip computer information/engine oil level
 Fuel level.
The message center is active at all times when the ignition is on and can also be active when the ignition is off, dependant
on the information to be displayed.
The message center LCD is displayed at its full brightness when the ignition is on and the exterior lights are off. If the
exterior lights have been activated by the AUTO windshield wipers feature, the illumination will remain at full brightness. If
the exterior lights are on in any position other than AUTO, then the LCD will be illuminated at a brightness controlled by the
illumination dimmer which is located in the auxiliary lighting switch.
If more than one message is active, each message is displayed in turn in the order of priority. Once all messages have been
displayed, they are again displayed in turn for 2 seconds each. Warning messages can be displayed when the ignition is in
convenience mode which is the initial ignition state when a door is opened.
Message Priority
Messages are assigned priorities which are defined by the effect on driving safety and functional ability of the vehicle. When
new messages are displayed they may be accompanied by a chime from the instrument cluster sounder.
A new message will be displayed immediately, providing the currently displayed message (if there is one) has been displayed
for at least 4 seconds. A warning indicator will be activated simultaneously with the message being displayed. If more than
one fault warning message is being displayed, the messages will cycle, in priority order, with each message being displayed
for 2 seconds.
INFORMATION DISPLAY
Transmission Display
The transmission display is located in the upper section of the LCD. The transmission position information is sent from the
TCM (transmission control module) and the JaguarDrive selector module in high speed CAN messages to the instrument
cluster.
The transmission has three modes of operation:
 Conventional automatic operation (JaguarDrive selector in D (drive) position)

 Sport automatic operation (S (sport) selected with JaguarDrive selector)
 Manual gear operation (Jaguar sequential shift).
The following table shows the JaguarDrive selector position and the highlighted indication displayed in the transmission
display.
Selector Position Transmission Display

P (park) P
R (reverse) R
N (neutral) N
D (drive) D
S (sport) DS
The following table shows the Jaguar sequential shift display. Selections are made using the steering wheel mounted paddle
switches.
Jaguar Sequential Shift Gear Selection Transmission Display

First 1
Second 2
Third 3
Fourth 4
Fifth 5
Sixth 6
The TCM may inhibit a requested up or down shift if the requested gear is outside the normal engine speed operating range.
If this occurs, the transmission display will briefly display the gear requested by the driver, but will then change to display
the actual gear selection.
Speed Control and Set Speed Displays
The following table shows the possible messages which can be displayed, other visual or audible warnings and a description
of the message.
Message Other Warnings Reason Action
OVERLIMIT  Amber ASL warning Displayed when vehicle speed exceeds Reduce vehicle speed to ASL set
XXX MPH indicator illuminated at +4.8 the ASL set speed. limit.
(km/h) km/h (+3 mph) above limit.
 Amber ASL warning
indicator flashing at +24
km/h (+15 mph) above
limit.
 Amber ASL warning
indicator flashing and chime
emitted at +24 km/h (+15
mph) for a certain time
period.
LIMITER None. Displayed for 4 seconds when driver None.
CANCELLED deselects ASL.
LIMITER SET None. Displays new speed setting for the None.
XXX MPH ASL.
(km/h)
LIMITER None. Displayed when ASL is activated and None.
STANDBY speed control is selected.
LIMITER NOT None. Displayed when ECM (engine control Use a Jaguar approved diagnostic
AVAILABLE module) has detected a fault. system to diagnose fault.
TOO FAST TO None. Displayed when 'Resume' switch is Reduce vehicle speed to set
RESUME pressed but vehicle speed is 30 km/h speed then press 'Resume'
(18 mph) above the set speed. switch.
CRUISE None. Driver has cancelled speed control or Re-activate the speed control
CANCELLED the brake pedal has been pressed. system or press the 'Resume'
switch on the steering wheel.
CRUISE None. Driver has pressed the accelerator WARNING: Adaptive cruise
OVERRIDE pedal, overriding the speed control braking will be disabled when
system. Message will go off when this message is displayed.
accelerator pedal is released and
speed control is active.
GAP 1 / 2 / 3 / None. Displays the current set or default If required, adjust distance using
4 adaptive speed control distance. the steering wheel switches.
Displayed along with a vehicle graphic
in the LCD. Chevrons (>) denote gap
figure selected
SETSPEED XXX None. Displays the new speed input for the None.
MPH (km/h) speed control.
DRIVER None. Immediate action required by the  Apply brakes if required.
INTERVENE driver to apply the brakes if required.  May also be displayed if
speed control system
loses CAN messages when
active.
CRUISE NOT None. Speed control cannot be engaged. A fault has occurred in the speed
AVAILABLE control system. Diagnose fault
using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic system.
RADAR None. The adaptive speed control radar Remove obstruction or clean the
SENSOR sensor has become dirty or radar sensor.
BLOCKED obstructed.
FORWARD None. Forward alert has been switched off. None.
ALERT OFF No warning will be given for objects in
the vehicle's forward direction.
FORWARD None. Forward alert has been switched on or None.
ALERT the gap settings have changed.
Warning/Message Display
Warning and information messages are displayed in the central area of the LCD. When no messages are required, an
analogue clock is present on the display.
The message display language can be changed by the driver using a selection menu on the TSD (touch screen display).
The following table shows the possible messages which can be displayed, other visual or audible warnings and a description
of the message.
Message Other Warnings Reason Action

DSC ON DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time when the None.
flashes for a short time. DSC switch is operated to activate the
DSC system.
DSC OFF DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time when the None.
illuminated. DSC switch is operated to de-activate
the DSC system.
TRAC DSC DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time when the None.
illuminated. DSC switch is operated to activate the
TRAC DSC system.
DSC NOT DSC warning indicator A fault is present in the DSC system. A fault has occurred in the DSC
AVAILABLE illuminated. system. Interrogate ABS (anti-lock
brake system) module for faults and
diagnose fault using a Jaguar
BRAKE FLUID  Brake warning Brake fluid level has become low and Investigate fluid loss and check brake
LOW indicator activated low level switch. system for leaks. Repair system as
illuminated. required and replenish brake fluid
 Red warning reservoir.
triangle illuminated
in LCD.
ABS FAULT  ABS warning A fault is present in the ABS system. A fault has occurred in the ABS
indicator Braking system will operate but ABS system. Interrogate ABS module for
illuminated. will not be available. faults and diagnose fault using a
 Amber warning Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
in LCD.
BRAKE ASSIST Amber warning triangle A fault is present in the braking system A fault has occurred in the brake
FAULT illuminated in LCD. preventing brake assist operation. assist system. Interrogate ABS
Braking system will operate but brake module for faults and diagnose fault
assist will not be available and using a Jaguar approved diagnostic
increased effort on the brake pedal may system.
be required.
EBD FAULT Red warning triangle A fault is present in the braking system A fault has occurred in the EBD
illuminated in LCD. preventing EBD (electronic brake force system. Interrogate ABS module for
distribution) operation. Braking system faults and diagnose fault using a
will operate but EBD will not be Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
available.
PARK BRAKE None Parking brake has been applied when None.
APPLIED the vehicle moving at a speed 5 km/h
(3 mph) or above.
PARK BRAKE  Brake warning A fault is present in the parking brake A fault has occurred in the parking
FAULT indicator system. brake system. Interrogate the parking
illuminated. brake module for faults and diagnose
 Red warning using a Jaguar approved diagnostic
triangle illuminated system.
in LCD.
APPLY FOOT AND Amber warning triangle The battery has been disconnected or Apply foot brake and parking brake to
PARK BRAKE illuminated in LCD. power supply interrupted to the parking reset the parking brake module.
brake module.
CANNOT APPLY  Brake warning A fault is present in the parking brake A fault has occurred in the parking
PARK BRAKE indicator flashing. system and the parking brake cannot brake system. Interrogate the parking
 Red warning be applied. brake module for faults and diagnose
triangle illuminated using a Jaguar approved diagnostic
in LCD. system.
 NOTE: In certain
markets the
brake warning
indicator does
not flash.
CHECK TYRE  TPMS (tire A tire pressure has decreased to below Check tires for punctures and re-
PRESSURE pressure the warning threshold. inflate to correct pressures.
monitoring system)
warning indicator
illuminated.
 Vehicle graphic
displaying tire
location.
TYRE NOT  TPMS warning  One or more tire pressure  Check for local RF
MONITORED indicator sensors have developed a fault. interference.
illuminated.  A temporary spare wheel or a  A wheel has been fitted
 Vehicle graphic wheel without a sensor has without a TPMS sensor fitted
displaying tire been fitted at the displayed (space saver spare wheel).
location. position.  TPMS sensor has developed a
 An unapproved accessory may fault or the battery voltage is
be interfering with the TPMS. low.
 A fault has occurred in the
TPMS. Interrogate the TPMS
module for faults and diagnose
using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic system.
CHECK ALL TYRE  TPMS warning One or more tire pressures have  Check tires for punctures and
PRESSURES indicator decreased to below the warning re-inflate to correct pressures.
illuminated. threshold.  Message may be displayed
 Amber warning when TPMS is learning position
triangle illuminated of a new sensor.
in LCD.
 Vehicle graphic
displaying tire
location.
TYRE PRESSURE  TPMS warning  Wheels and tires without A fault has occurred in the TPMS.
SYSTEM FAULT indicator sensors have been fitted to the Interrogate the TPMS module for
illuminated. vehicle. faults and diagnose using a Jaguar
 Amber warning  TPMS sensors have become approved diagnostic system.
triangle illuminated defective.
in LCD.  An unapproved accessory may
be interfering with the TPMS.
 A fault is present in the TPMS
system and the tire pressures
cannot be monitored.
TYRE PRESSURE  TPMS warning TPMS has detected current tire Check tire pressures and inflate to the
LOW FOR SPEED indicator pressures are too low for sustained high correct pressures if necessary.
illuminated. speed driving
 Amber warning
in LCD.
TYRE PRESSURE  TPMS warning  Wheels and tires without A fault has occurred in the TPMS.
SYSTEM FAULT indicator sensors have been fitted to the Interrogate the TPMS module for
illuminated. vehicle. faults and diagnose using a Jaguar
 Amber warning  TPMS sensors have become approved diagnostic system.
triangle illuminated defective.
in LCD.  An unapproved accessory may
be interfering with the TPMS.
 A fault is present in the TPMS
system and the tire pressures
cannot be monitored.
ENGINE Red warning triangle Engine coolant temperature has  Stop vehicle and allow engine
OVERHEATING illuminated in LCD at exceeded threshold for normal engine to idle for 5 minutes. Switch
temperatures of 119.4°C operation. off engine and allow to stand
(247°F) or above. for not less than 10 minutes.
Check coolant level.
 If message re-appears,
investigate coolant system for
leakage.
RESTRICTED Red or amber warning A fault has occurred which has reduced Investigate cause of engine power
PERFORMANCE triangle illuminated in LCD engine power output. loss. Interrogate control modules for
depending on nature of faults and diagnose using a Jaguar
power loss. approved diagnostic system.
ENGINE SYSTEMS  MIL (malfunction  A fault has occurred in the  Investigate cause of fault.
FAULT indicator lamp) engine management system or, Interrogate ECM and TCM for
illuminated for if the MIL is illuminated, an faults and diagnose using a
certain faults. emissions related fault is Jaguar approved diagnostic
 Red or amber present which has been system.
warning triangle detected by the On-Board  Check start/stop switch for
illuminated in LCD. Diagnostic systems in the ECM correct operation or short
and TCM. circuits.
 A fault has occurred with the
start/stop switch.
CHECK FUEL  (NAS only) Tank Leakage Detection system has Check fuel filler cap to ensure is it
FILLER CAP  Red warning detected fuel filler cap has not been correctly installed and secure or check
triangle illuminated correctly installed or the system has a the fuel system for leakage.
in LCD. leak.
ENGINE Red warning triangle A fault has occurred in the engine Investigate cause of engine
TEMPERATURE illuminated LCD. management system and the engine temperature failure. Interrogate ECM
INDICATION temperature signal is no longer being for faults and diagnose using a Jaguar
FAULT received. approved diagnostic system.
GEARBOX FAULT Battery symbol and amber TCM has detected a fault in the Investigate transmission fault.
warning triangle transmission. Transmission may default Interrogate TCM and diagnose fault
illuminated in LCD. to 'limp home' mode and only allow using a Jaguar approved diagnostic
limited operation of forward gears and system.
reverse.
BATTERY NOT Red warning triangle Charge output from generator not Investigate cause of generator failure.
CHARGING illuminated in LCD. detected by ECM.
OVER 120 km/h  (Gulf States only) Vehicle has exceeded the preset 120 Reduce vehicle speed.
 Red text km/h speed value.
illuminated in LCD.
COOLANT LEVEL Red warning triangle Coolant level in expansion tank has  Stop vehicle and allow engine
LOW illuminated in LCD. fallen below minimum level. to idle for 5 minutes. Switch
off engine and allow to stand
for not less than 10 minutes.
Check coolant level and
replenish expansion tank to
maximum level.
 If message re-appears,
investigate coolant system for
leakage.
BRAKE PADS Amber warning triangle Brake pads have reached the service Replace brake pads.
LOW illuminated LCD. limit.
SERVICE Amber warning triangle If the vehicle is within 3,200 kilometers None.
REQUIRED IN illuminated LCD. (1,988 miles) of a service, the message
XXXX MILES/km center will display this message. The
displayed distance will decrease in
increments of 50 km (31 miles).
SERVICE Amber warning triangle This is displayed if the distance to next Vehicle requires service.
REQUIRED illuminated LCD. service drops below 1 km (0.6 miles).
RESETTING Amber warning triangle Displayed during the service reset None.
SERVICE MODE illuminated LCD. procedure.
SERVICE MODE Amber warning triangle Displayed when the service rest None.
RESET illuminated LCD. procedure has been successful.
WINTER MODE Snow mode symbol Displayed when snow mode has been None.
CONFIRMED illuminated LCD. selected.
DYNAMIC MODE Dynamic mode symbol Displayed when dynamic mode has None.
CONFIRMED illuminated LCD. been selected.
MODE CHANGE None or snow mode Displayed when the driver has selected None.
IN PROGRESS symbol illuminated or an alternative JaguarDrive mode.
dynamic mode symbol
illuminated LCDLCD
RECOMMEND None or dynamic mode Displayed when the JaguarDrive senses Select winter mode.
WINTER MODE symbol illuminated LCD excessive wheel slip.
FOR CONDITIONS
WINTER MODE None. Confirmation that winter mode has None.
OFF been deselected.
DYNAMIC MODE None. Confirmation that dynamic mode has None.
OFF been deselected.
WINTER MODE Amber warning triangle A sub-system fault is present and the Investigate cause of message.
FAULT illuminated LCD. driver attempts to select a different Interrogate sub-system control
JaguarDrive control mode. The modules for faults and diagnose using
message 'WINTER MODE FAULT' can a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
also in very rare circumstances be If no sub-system fault is found,
generated by a fault in the JaguarDrive investigate JaguarDrive control
control module. module.
DYNAMIC MODE Amber warning triangle A sub-system fault is present and the Investigate cause of message.
FAULT illuminated LCD. driver attempts to select a different Interrogate sub-system control
message 'DYNAMIC MODE FAULT' can a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
also, in very rare circumstances, be If no sub-system fault is found,
generated by a fault in the JaguarDrive investigate JaguarDrive control
control module. module.
SPECIAL MODES Amber warning triangle A sub-system fault is present and the Investigate cause of message.
NOT AVAILABLE illuminated LCD. driver attempts to select a different Interrogate sub-system control
message 'SPECIAL MODES NOT a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
AVAILABLE' can also in very rare If no sub-system fault is found,
circumstances be generated by a fault investigate JaguarDrive control
in the JaguarDrive control module. module.
FUEL LEVEL LOW Amber warning triangle Fuel level in fuel tank has fallen below Replenish fuel tank.
illuminated LCD. low fuel warning limit.
FUEL PUMP Amber warning triangle Fuel pump or FPDM (fuel pump driver Investigate cause of fault. Interrogate
SYSTEM FAULT illuminated LCD. module) fault has occurred. ECM for faults and diagnose using a
Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
WASHER FLUID Amber warning triangle Fluid level has fallen below low level Replenish reservoir.
LOW illuminated LCD. switch in windshield washer reservoir.
DOOR OPEN Red text is illuminated in Door is open or incorrectly closed. Close open door.
LCD and vehicle view
showing open luggage
compartment lid is
displayed.
BOOT OPEN Red text is illuminated in Luggage compartment lid is open or Close open luggage compartment lid.
LCD and vehicle view incorrectly closed.
showing open door
location is displayed.
BONNET OPEN Red text is illuminated in Hood is open or incorrectly closed. Close open hood.
LCD and vehicle view
www.JagDocs.com
showing open door
location is displayed.
COLUMN ADJUST None. Manual column adjust has been None.
selected on steering column adjustment
switch.
COLUMN ADJUST None. Automatic column adjust has been None.
AUTO selected on steering column adjustment
switch.
MEMORY 1 / 2 / 3 None. Memory button has been pressed to None.
SETTINGS recall memory positions for seat,
RECALLED steering column and mirrors.
MEMORY 1 / 2 / 3 None. Memory has been saved for one of the None.
SETTINGS SAVED memory button positions.
SEAT BELT None. Engine has been started and driver Fasten seat belt(s).
MINDER and/or front passenger seat belt has
not been fastened.
CHECK Red warning triangle A fault has occurred with the pedestrian Investigate cause of fault. Interrogate
PEDESTRIAN illuminated in LCD. protection system or the system has pedestrian protection system control
SYSTEM activated. module for faults and diagnose using
a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
INERTIA SWITCH Amber warning triangle Message appears when the crash status RCM can be rest with an ignition
TRIPPED illuminated LCD. signal from the RCM (restraints control on/off cycle. If fault has occurred,
module) changes to crash detected or a then investigate cause of fault and
fault in the restraints system prevents interrogate the RCM for faults and
the message from being transmitted. diagnose using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic system.
VALET MODE None. Confirmation that valet mode has been None.
entered.
VEHICLE ARMED None. Confirmation that alarm and None.
immobilization has been achieved.
SMART KEY NOT Red warning triangle Smart key has not been detected by Smart key not present in vehicle. May
FOUND PLEASE illuminated in LCD. the passive system inside the vehicle. be caused by a flat smart key battery.
INSERT IN SLOT Replace internal battery in smart key.
May also be due to a communications
problem.
CHECK SMART None. The smart key detected is not the Use the correct smart key coded to
KEY correct smart key for the vehicle. the vehicle.
REMOVE SMART None. Smart key is in the start control module Remove smart key from the start
KEY and has been recognized by the passive control module.
start system.
SMART KEY None. Battery voltage in smart key is Replace smart key internal battery.
BATTERY LOW becoming low, resulting in a decrease
in effective range of the smart key
transmitter.
PRESS BRAKE None. The stop/start button has been pressed To start engine, press brake pedal,
WHEN STARTING without the brake pedal depressed. This then press stop/start button.
will turn on the ignition power mode 6.
GEARBOX NOT IN None. The transmission is not in the 'park' Put transmission in the park position.
PARK position. Engine starting will be
prohibited until 'park' is selected.
STEERING Red warning triangle Fault has occurred preventing the Press the stop/start button to return
COLUMN LOCKED illuminated in LCD. steering column lock from unlocking. to accessory mode 4. If steering
This will also prevent the engine from column is still locked, investigate
starting. cause of fault and interrogate the CJB
(central junction box) for faults and
diagnose using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic system.
IGNITION ON Red warning triangle Stop/start button has been pressed None.
illuminated in LCD. without the brake pedal depressed.
Ignition is now in power mode 6.
ENGINE STOP Red warning triangle Engine stop button has been pressed Do not stop engine when vehicle is
BUTTON illuminated in LCD. when the vehicle is moving. Engine will moving unless necessary.
PRESSED not be switched off until button is
pressed quickly for a second time.
LIGHTS ON Amber warning triangle Side lamps or headlamps are on and Switch off headlamps to avoid
illuminated LCD. the driver's door has been opened. excessive drain on battery.
LIGHTS OFF None. Sunload/Light sensor detects low light Turn exterior lights on.
conditions and exterior lights are not in
AUTO mode.
AUTOLAMP DELAY None. Autolamp delay feature has been None.
OFF deactivated by moving light control
switch from the auto position.
AUTOLAMP DELAY None. Lighting control switch has been moved None.
XX:XX to one of the 4 autolamp delay
positions. Message displays delay timer
period selected.
AUTOLAMP DELAY None. Autolamp delay is selected on the light None. Message will extinguish once
control switch and the driver has the selected delay timer has switched
switched off ignition and opened off the headlamps.
driver's door initiating the autolamp
delay.
TAIL LAMP None. The tail lamp LED (light emitting Correct fault in rear lamp assembly,
FAILURE diode)'s are not functioning correctly. RJB (rear junction box) or wiring.
Location shown on vehicle image.
BRAKE LAMP None. The brake lamp LED's are not Correct fault in rear lamp assembly,
FAILURE functioning correctly. Location shown RJB or wiring.
on displayed vehicle image.
INDICATOR LAMP None. A turn signal indicator bulb has failed. Replace failed turn signal indicator
FAILURE Location is shown on displayed vehicle bulb.
image.
HOOD NOT Red warning triangle Convertible top not latched correctly. Correct fault in switches, wiring or
LATCHED illuminated in LCD. System not seeing correct switch state tonneau latch setting.
for header latch or tonneau latch
switches.
HOOD OUT OF Amber warning triangle Finger removed from switch mid cycle Reset roof, if fault persists identify
POSITION illuminated in LCD. or roof unable to complete cycle due to and resolve.
a switch or wiring fault.
LUGGAGE COVER Amber warning triangle Luggage separator not fixed in luggage Fit luggage separator in fully deployed
OUT OF illuminated in LCD. compartment to allow roof operation. position.
POSITION
FORWARD ALERT Amber warning triangle Forward collision warning radar Remove obstruction or clean radar
SENSOR illuminated in LCD. blocked. sensor.
BLOCKED
FORWARD ALERT Amber warning triangle Forward collision warning system fault. Investigate cause of message.
FAULT illuminated in LCD. Interrogate system control modules
for faults and diagnose using a Jaguar
FORWARD ALERT Amber warning triangle Forward collision warning system fault. Investigate cause of message.
UNAVAILABLE illuminated in LCD. Interrogate system control modules
ADAPTIVE Amber warning triangle Adaptive dynamics system fault. Investigate cause of message.
DYNAMICS FAULT illuminated in LCD. Suspension will default to the hardest Interrogate system control modules
setting. for faults and diagnose using a Jaguar
E_DIFF NOT Amber warning triangle Electronic differential system not Investigate cause of message.
AVAILABLE illuminated in LCD. available. Interrogate system control modules
E_DIFF FAULT Amber warning triangle Electronic differential system fault. Investigate cause of message.
illuminated in LCD. Interrogate system control modules
ENGINE OIL LOW Amber warning triangle Engine oil level low. Top up oil level.
illuminated in LCD.
ENGINE OIL Amber warning triangle Engine oil level too high. Reduce oil to recommended level
HIGH illuminated in LCD. before running engine again.
ENGINE OIL Red warning triangle Engine oil level very low. Top up oil level.
CRITICALLY LOW illuminated in LCD.
ENGINE OIL Amber warning triangle Engine oil level monitoring system Investigate cause of message.
LEVEL MONITOR illuminated in LCD. fault. Interrogate system control modules
SYSTEM FAULT for faults and diagnose using a Jaguar
Odometer Display
The odometer displays the total distance which the vehicle has traveled. This is calculated by the instrument cluster using
wheel speed signals from the ABS module.
The odometer can show six characters and distances up to 999,999 miles or kilometers. The total distance traveled is stored
in a EPROM (erasable programmable read only memory) and the RAM (random access memory). This ensures that the total
distance is not lost if the battery is disconnected.
The odometer value is passed to other vehicle system modules on the medium speed and high speed CAN bus. This is used
to record the total vehicle mileage for diagnostic purposes and when storing DTC (diagnostic trouble code).
Trip Computer Information Display
The instrument cluster contains software which controls the trip computer. The computer allows the driver to access
information for current fuel usage, current journey length, average speed and estimated vehicle range of fuel remaining.
The information is calculated from CAN messages from other vehicle systems, for example wheel speed signals from the ABS
module and fuel injector operating data from the ECM.
A 'Trip' button is located on the end of the LH (left-hand) multifunction switch and allows the driver to access, in sequence,
the available trip information by repeatedly pressing the button. The trip information is displayed in the following order:
 Trip distance - the trip distance since the last reset is displayed.
 Average speed - the average speed since the last reset is displayed.
 Average fuel consumption - the average fuel consumption since the last reset is displayed.
 Range - the range is displayed showing the distance which can be traveled until the fuel gage reads empty. If the
range display shows dashes (-), this indicates a failure with one or both of the fuel level sensors.
 Engine oil level - the oil level icon and the applicable message from the following table are displayed:
Message Meaning Action

LEVEL OK Engine oil level is satisfactory. None.
ADD X.X L/Q Engine oil requires topping up. Add amount of oil described until
level reads OK.
SEE HANDBOOK Engine oil level is outside the limits for safe operation. Add or remove oil as appropriate
until level reads OK.
NOT AVAILABLE  If accompanied by the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL  If there is a system fault,
SEE HANDBOOK MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT in the warning/message display, a repair as required and
fault with the oil level monitoring system is indicated. recheck level.
 If there is no ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT  If the engine oil level is
message, the engine oil level is stabilizing. stabilizing, wait 10 minutes
and then recheck level.
The trip computer has three independent memories; A, B and Auto. Memories A and B can be set independently. The Auto
memory is reset after each ignition cycle and therefore only contains information relating the current journey.
The trip information can also be accessed from the TSD located in the center console. The TSD allows the same information
available with the trip button on the multifunction switch to be displayed on the TSD, with the addition of the option to reset
the values in the A and B memories.
If the battery is disconnected, all trip data in memories A, B and Auto are erased.
Fuel Level Display
The fuel level display is a linear LCD display to show the usable fuel tank contents. The level display is active at all times
when the ignition is on. Low fuel level is displayed as a LOW FUEL LEVEL message and an amber warning triangle in the
message center.
The fuel level is obtained by fuel level sensors in the fuel tank. These are monitored by the auxiliary junction box software
and their output resistance values, corresponding fuel quantity, are transmitted to the instrument cluster on the medium
speed CAN bus. The instrument cluster uses the two level sensor signals to calculate the fuel tank contents. This calculation
takes into account fuel movement in the tank to display a steady fuel quantity in the LCD.
The fuel level information is transmitted on the medium speed and high speed CAN bus for use by other vehicle system
modules.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
The instrument cluster can generate audible warnings to alert the driver to a displayed message and change of vehicle
operating condition. The audible warning is generated by a sounder located within the instrument cluster.
The audible warnings can be generated for the warnings and are listed in order of priority, with the first being the highest
priority.
 Seatbelt reminder
 EPB (electronic parking brake) (high pitch)
 ACC Driver Intervene 1
 Air bag fault
 Key in ignition switch
 ASL overspeed
 ACC Driver Intervene 2
 EPB (low pitch)
 Vehicle armed (entry delay)
 Gear selector not in park
 Valet mode
 Lights on reminder
 Hood operation
 PEPS (passive entry / passive start)
 Memory set
 Turn signal indicators
 Seat belt minder.
The audible warnings can take the form of a single chime, a number of chimes or a continuous chime. The audible warnings
are initiated by a CAN message request from the requesting sub-system control module or by the instrument cluster
software.
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR
If the vehicle is within 3,200 kilometers (1,988 miles) of a service, the message center will display 'SERVICE REQUIRED IN
XXXX km or MILES'. The display reduces the 'service required in' readout by increments every 50 kilometers (30 miles). If
this distance drops below 1 km (0.6 miles), the message center will display 'SERVICE REQUIRED'.
NOTE: The message center will display distance to next service in miles on an instrument cluster fitted with a Miles Per Hour
(MPH) speedometer unless the driver has changed the display units on the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
These messages are displayed every time the vehicle enters power mode 6, for 4 seconds after the instrument cluster bulb
check routine has finished.
Reset Procedure
To re-set the service interval indicator, the following process switch presses must each be carried out within 3 seconds:
 With the vehicle in power mode 0, (ignition off) press and hold the rear fog lamp switch
 Allow the vehicle to enter power mode 6 (Press the start button without a foot on the brake)
 Immediately release the rear fog lamp switch
 Press and hold the trip computer cycle switch
 Press and hold the rear fog lamp switch
 Continue to hold the trip computer and rear fog lamp switches
 If the process has been successful, the message center will display 'RESETTING SERVICE MODE' and then display
'SERVICE MODE RESET' after 10 seconds
 Release both switches and return the vehicle ignition to off, power mode 0.
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center

 Fluid level(s)  Fuse(s)
 Accessory installations  Wiring harness
 Engine compartment components
 Underbody components
 Door switches
 Electronic modules
 Boot/bonnet switch
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Warning Devices - Warning Devices

 Door ajar switch(es)  Fuse(s)
 Safety belt buckle and pretensioner  Wiring harness
 Headlamp switch  Electrical connector(s)
 Fuel gauge  Switch(es)
 Inertia switch  Sensor(s)
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Warning Devices - Low Washer Fluid Warning Indicator Switch
Removal


2. Remove the RH fender splash shield.
3. Drain the washer reservoir fluid.
 Position a container to collect the fluid.
4. Remove the low washer fluid warning indicator switch.

5. Remove and discard the seal.
Installation
1. Install a new seal.
2. Install the low washer fluid warning indicator switch.

4. Refill the washer reservoir.
Parking Aid -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Parking aid module - nut 2 - 18
Parking Aid - Parking Aid
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Control switch
2 - Control module
3 - Rear parking aid sensors (4 off)
4 - Front parking aid sensors (4 off)
INTRODUCTION
The parking aid system provides an audible warning to the driver when any obstacles are in the path of the vehicle during a
forward (if front sensors fitted) or reversing manouevre. The purpose of the system is to assist the driver when parking or
maneuvering in restricted space. It is not designed as a crash avoidance system or a replacement for visual interpretation by
the driver.
Audible warnings to the driver are given by the entertainment system speakers. A visual representation is shown on the TSD
(touch screen display).
The control module controls operation of the speakers via the audio head unit. A gateway module is incorporated into the
system to convert medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus messages from the control module into MOST (media
orientated system transport) messages for use by the audio head unit.
For additional information, refer to: Audio System (415-01A Audio Unit, Description and Operation).
If an obstacle is sensed by the rear parking aid sensors, the rear audio system speakers will sound. If an obstacle is sensed
by the front parking aid sensors, the front audio system speakers will sound.
The PDC audio tone pitch is different between the front and rear, the front tone is a higher pitch than the rear.
The parking aid system operates using ultrasonic signals which are transmitted by the sensors. The reflected echo from this
output is received by the sensors and used by the control module to calculate the distance from an object.
The roof console mounted control switch allows the driver to activate/deactivate the parking aid system if operation is
required or not required.
CONTROL MODULE
The parking aid control module is located in the front passenger footwell, behind a protective panel. The control module uses
a single microprocessor to perform the following tasks:
 Control of the ultrasonic sensors

 Monitoring of the sensors
 Evaluation of received echo signals from the sensors
 Noise and disturbance suppression
 Control of the audio system speakers
 Control and monitoring of the switch status LED (light emitting diode) and associated wiring
 Evaluation and monitoring of the control inputs
 Management of diagnostic and test functions
 Monitoring of power supply
 Communication via diagnostic link.
The control module is connected to the vehicle electrical system by either three (vehicles fitted with front and rear sensors)
or two (vehicles fitted with rear sensors only) multiplug connectors.
Inputs and Outputs
The table below shows control module inputs and outputs
Component Description Input/Output

Transmission Control Module (TCM) Medium speed CAN bus message - reverse gear selected Input
TCM Medium speed CAN bus message - forward gear selected Input
Control switch Status - On/Off Input
Auxiliary junction box Electrical power supply Input
Parking aid sensors Electrical power and ground Output
Parking aid sensors Digital transmit and receive signals Output
Control switch LED illumination Output
PARKING AID SENSORS

1 - De-coupling ring
2 - Front parking aid sensor
3 - De-coupling ring
4 - Rear parking aid sensor
Four sensors are positioned in the rear bumper and four in the front bumper (if fitted). The front sensor housings are glued
into position; the rear sensor housings are welded into position. The sensor bodies are then clipped into the housings from
the rear.
Each sensor has a three pin connector which connects into a common harness linking all four sensors. The three pins of each
connector provide the sensor a negative feed, a positive feed and a signal line. The rear parking aid harness connects to the
main vehicle body harness. The front parking aid harness connects to the LH (left-hand) engine compartment harness.
CONTROL SWITCH

1 - Control switch
The control switch is located in the roof console. The switch is non-latching with an integral status LED. The switch receives a
12 V output from the control module, and is also connected to ground. When the switch is operated, a momentary ground is
completed. This is interpreted by the control module as a signal to enable or disable the parking aid system.
The switch also receives a 12 V output from the control module to drive the status LED when the parking aid system is on.
NOTE: The control switch allows the driver to activate/deactivate the parking aid system if operation is required or not
required.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = MOST bus

Part Number
Item Description
1 - Battery
2 - Megafuse (175A)
3 - AJB
4 - Control module
5 - Right outer front sensor
6 - Right inner front sensor
7 - Left inner front sensor
8 - Left outer front sensor
9 - Right outer rear sensor
10 - Right inner rear sensor
11 - Left inner rear sensor
12 - Left outer rear sensor
13 - Audio head unit
14 - To audio system speakers
15 - Gateway module
16 - Control switch
If reverse (R) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on, both the front (if fitted) and rear parking aid sensors
will become operational. If a forward drive gear is subsequently selected, the front and rear parking aid sensors will remain
operational until vehicle speed increases above 16 km/h (10 mph), park (P) is selected or the PDC control switch is pressed.
If drive (D) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on the parking aid system will have to be activated by
pressing the PDC control switch.
NOTE: The PDC system can not be activated whilst the vehicle is in park (P).
The volume output of the parking aid audible tones can be adjusted by selecting the 'Vehicle Settings' menu and selecting
'Parking' from the menu on the TSD. The volume can be adjusted using the + or - selections on the TSD.
Audible and Visual Warnings
The control module processes the distance readings from the ultrasonic parking aid sensors to determine if there are any
objects within the detection areas. If there are no objects, no audible warning is produced. If an object is detected, repeated
audible warnings are produced via the audio system speakers. The time delay between the audible warnings decreases as the
distance between the detected object and the vehicle decreases, until eventually a continuous tone is emitted from the
speakers.
A visual interpretation of the detection areas is given in the TSD.
The visual interpretation dynamically updates as the sensors detect an objets within the set parameters. This feature can
also be used as a diagnostic aid.
Distance Calculation for Audible Warning and Parking Aid Display
The detection ranges of the sensors are shown in the table below.
Item Number Sensor Location Maximum Detection Range Audio Tone Continuous Audio Tone
1 Rear/Front Outer Approximately 600 mm (24 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
2 Rear Inner Approximately 1800 mm (71 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
3 Front Inner Approximately 800 mm (31 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
After the initial detection of an object, if there is no decrease in the distance between an object and the central sensors, the
time delay between the audible warnings remains constant. If an object is detected by one of the corner sensors only, the
audible warnings stop after approximately 5 seconds if there is no change in the distance between an object and the corner
sensor.
Detection Calculation
When operating in the combined transmitter and receiver mode, the sensor outputs a number of ultrasonic pulses and
receives the reflected echo signal. The control module amplifies the received echo signals and compares them with a
preprogrammed threshold to calculate the distance to the object. This is achieved by determining the elapsed time between
the transmission and reception of the ultrasonic signal.
When operating in receiver mode, the sensor receives echo signals transmitted by an adjacent sensor. This mode is used to
improve the accuracy of the system.
The detection cycle consists of the control module operating one sensor in the combined transmitter and receiver mode and
transmitting a number of pulses. The control module then switches the transmitting sensor and the adjacent sensor(s) to
receiver mode. After a short time delay this sequence is repeated using a different sensor to transmit the ultrasonic signal.
This sequence is completed in 100 ms. The control module uses several measurements of the same sensors to remove errors
from the calculation.
If the detected object is directly behind a sensor, the distance is calculated using the time between the transmission and
reception of the ultrasonic signal. If the object is positioned between two sensors, the control module uses both signals to
determine the correct distance using triangulation.
To perform the triangulation calculation, the control module must know the distance between the individual sensors in the
bumper. This information is stored in the control module memory. From the received distance signal from each sensor and
using the known distance between adjacent sensors, the control module can calculate the minimum distance from the
vehicle to the detected object.
When approaching several objects, the control module recognizes the distance from the vehicle to the nearest object.
The PDC module will prioritise the objects detected, the nearest object detected will take priority and the corresponding
audio outputs will be emitted. For example if 2 objects are detected (one front one rear) the nearest detected object will take
priority and relevant audible tone will be heard.
If two objects are detected at equal distance (one front one rear) the audible tones will alternate between the front and rear
speakers.
Diagnostics
The control module has a diagnostic connection via the medium speed CAN bus to enable faults to be retrieved using the
Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment. Additionally an on-board diagnostic routine within the control module constantly
monitors the system and alerts the driver to a system fault by emitting a 3 second continuous tone through the rear audio
system speakers when the ignition is switched on. The control switch LED will also flash 6 times.
Parking Aid - Parking Aid
For a detailed description of the Park Distance Control (PDC) system, characteristics and limitations refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section in the workshop manual. REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and
Operation).
PDC System On-Board self-test
As part of the strategy of the system if any DTC’s are detected, a long high-pitched tone approx 3 seconds will sound
and the PDC switch (where fitted) indicator LED will flash 5 times at ignition on.
 If a fault is present when the PDC system is activated then the PDC switch (where fitted) status LED will flash 5
times indicating an issue with front or rear PDC sensors, wiring switch, PDC control module or hard wired
sounders.
 The rear PDC sounder/audio system will emit an error tone for approx 3 seconds at ignition on if a fault is
detected with the front or rear sensors, the switch, or if there is a controller area network (CAN) bus error.
 (Only applicable to vehicles fitted with front PDC and a hard wired rear PDC sounder). If there is a fault with the
rear PDC sounder the error tone will come from the front PDC sounder unit (integral with the instrument
cluster).
Audible and Visual Warnings when PDC System is in Error State

Rear PDC
Fitted and No
PDC Switch Front and Rear PDC Fitted with PDC Switch
Fitted Rear PDC Fitted and PDC Switch Fitted Fitted
A long high-  A long high-pitched error tone will sound  A long high-pitched error tone will sound at
pitched error at ignition on for approx 3 seconds and ignition on for approximately 3 seconds and
tone will sound where applicable the PDC switch where applicable the PDC switch indicator LED
at Ignition On indicator LED will flash 5 times at ignition will flash 5 times at ignition on. Every time
for approx 3 on. Every time the PDC system is the PDC system is activated within the same
seconds activated within the same ignition cycle, ignition cycle the PDC switch indicator LED will
PDC switch indicator LED will flash 5 flash 5 times
times
CAUTIONS:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is not acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor
vehicle.
Do not apply any grease based products to any PDC connector or pins.
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the
scan tool to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read
by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
NOTE: If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an
intermittent concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
3. Ensure that the PDC sensor face is clear of contamination that could affect the performance of the sensor.
Visual Inspection
 PDC sensor condition/damaged  Battery
 PDC sensor installation and holder  Fuse(s)
 PDC sensor alignment  Relays
 PDC sensor contamination  Wiring harness
 Bumper cover(s)  Electrical connector(s)
 Vehicle ride height  Front PDC sensor(s)
 Non standard/non manufacturer approved accessories fitted  Rear PDC sensor(s)
 PDC switch and LED
 PDC control module
 PDC sounder
 Audio system
Symptom Chart
CAUTION: Do not apply any grease based products to any PDC connector or pins.
NOTE: Please note if this diagnosis is being carried out on a vehicle without a hard wired parking aid speaker, ensure
the in car infotainment system is fully functional and configured correctly
NOTE: PDC sensors that are painted incorrectly and not to the manufacturer standards, will not be considered in any
warranty claim

NOTE:  Front or rear PDC sensors  Clean front or rear PDC sensors
Permanent/Intermittent fault dirty  Check the front or PDC rear sensor position
 Front or rear PDC sensor  Check the front or rear PDC sensor are
position incorrect correctly installed
PDC system not functioning
 Front or rear PDC sensor  Check front or rear PDC sensor coupling rings
correctly. (No DTC's
incorrectly installed are installed/installed correctly
displayed)
 Front or rear PDC sensor  Ensure all PDC system connectors are
coupling rings not correctly latched
installed/incorrectly  Remove PDC sensor and ensure correctly
installed painted PDC sensor is installed
 PDC control module or PDC  PDC sensors that are painted incorrectly and
sensor connector not fully not to the manufacturer standards, will not be
latched considered in any warranty claim
 PDC sensors painted
without being removed from
the bumper assembly or not
painted to the manufacturer
specification
NOTE:  PDC sensors incorrectly  Ensure the sensors are a tight fit in the holder
Permanent/Intermittent fault mounted and locked. Ensure the sensors are central in
 Incorrect vehicle ride height the holder and bumper and at the correct
 Dirty PDC sensor face. angle
PDC system not functioning
Ice/snow covered sensor.  Ensure vehicle ride height is within the
correctly. (No DTC's
Debris trapped between specified limits. Rectify as required
displayed). System
PDC sensor and PDC sensor  Clean the sensor face as required. Defrost the
characteristics or
body. Heavy rain or water sensor and dry as required. Clear any debris
environmental effects
splash from the ground from the sensor and holder as required.
 Non standard, bumper, Water flowing over the sensor is a system
exhausts/tailpipes, tow bar limitation. (no action required)
or external spare wheel  Check for non standard, bumper,
mounting exhausts/tailpipe, tow bar or external spare
 Area around vehicle is not wheel mounting that may be being detected
clear of obstacles such as by the PDC system. Rectify as required
channels, gutters or other  Ensure the area around the vehicle is clear of
items on the ground any obstacles, move the vehicle to a suitable
 Exhaust gas and warm air area before continuing diagnosis
clouds creating ghost  Ensure no exhaust gas or warm area clouds
echoes are in the area around the PDC sensor
 Vehicle not on level ground detection range
or next to a gradient  Ensure the vehicle is on level ground and
 PDC sensors painted clear of any ramps, potholes or speed bumps,
without being removed from move the vehicle to a suitable area before
the bumper assembly or not continuing diagnosis
painted to the manufacturer  Remove PDC sensor and ensure correctly
specification painted PDC sensor is installed
 PDC sensors that are painted incorrectly and
not to the manufacturer standards, will not be
considered in any warranty claim
PDC sensors are being Possible issue with sensor  When either no/intermittent operation has
returned with no faults found connectors not latched correctly been reported the following action should be
or signs of water taken
ingress/corrosion  Using Datalogger identify the position of the
suspect PDC sensor within the bumper
 1. Visually locate the position of the suspect
PDC sensor. Inspect and provide details in
claim if the sensor has any sign of physical
damage
 2. Remove the bumper. Disconnect the wiring
at the main harness connector. Inspect the
main harness connectors and terminals for
signs of damage, backed out pins, corrosion
and water ingress, or damage to the seals.
Provide details in claim if any of the above
symptom's are present
 3. Attempt to remove the harness connector
from the suspect PDC sensor without using
the connector latch i.e. lightly pull back on
ALL wires together, ensuring the harness is
held close to the back of the connector, not
elsewhere on the wiring harness. DO NOT
apply excessive force. If the connector can be
removed without using the latch, provide
details in claim if connector is loose. If the
connector is fully latched, disconnect it from
the sensor
 4. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
suspect sensor harness connector has any
sign of water ingress/corrosion
 5. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
suspect PDC sensor harness connector shows
any sign that the terminals have backed-out
of the connector or for any damage to the
terminal seals. Replace/repair the harness as
required and proceed
 6. Remove the suspect PDC sensor from the
bumper. Inspect the PDC sensor connector for
signs of water ingress/corrosion. Provide
details in claim if corrosion/water ingress is
present
 7. Exchange the suspect PDC sensor with
another PDC sensor within the bumper that is
performing correctly. Reconnect all sensors
and reconnect the bumper main harness
connector. Repeat step 1. Confirm if the
original fault now appears at the new position
of the suspect PDC sensor, if so, proceed to
step
 8. If not, carry out the appropriate open
circuit and short circuit checks between the
original suspect PDC sensor harness
connector and the PDC control module
 9. Refit the PDC sensors to their original
position in the bumper
 10. Reconnect the PDC sensor to the bumper
harness connector. Reconnect main harness
connector and refit the bumper
 11. Repeat Step 1. If fault is still present,
replace only the faulty sensor
PINPOINT TEST A : PDC SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
A1: PERMANENT FAULT
1 When the PDC system is activated, there is a vibration on the PDC sensor membrane. This can be
verified by touching the PDC sensor face with a hard item such as a pencil, ball-pen, small
screwdriver, or fingernail. Ensure no damage is caused to sensor painted surface.
Are the PDC sensor(s) vibrating?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A5.
A2: SENSORS VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
1 Clean the PDC sensor face.
PDC system functioning correctly?
Yes
No further action required.
No
GO to A3.
1 Check PDC sensors correctly mounted. PDC sensor holder correctly mounted. PDC sensor
decoupler ring fitted or fitted correctly. PDC sensor positioning correct. PDC sensor painted
without being removed from the bumper assembly or not painted to manufacturer specification.
Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to A4.
1 Carry out speaker test. Only applicable to vehicles with rear hard wired PDC speakers. Check the
PDC speaker wiring circuit and connector. Rectify as required. Check and install a new PDC
speaker as required. Vehicles with audio PDC. Confirm audio system is functioning correctly. Refer
to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
PDC system functioning correctly.
Yes
A5: SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
1 Isolate the fault to front or rear PDC sensors
Are all rear PDC sensors vibrating?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
GO to A10.
A6: FRONT SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
1 Check the PDC control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car configuration file
as required.
Yes
No
GO to A7.
1 Check the correct PDC control module is installed to the vehicle.
Yes
No
GO to A8.
1 If all 4 front PDC sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power
supply. Check main PDC harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to A9.
1 Check and install a new PDC control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component.
Yes
A10: REAR SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
1 Check the PDC control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car configuration file
as required.
Yes
No
GO to A11.
1 If all 4 rear PDC sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power
supply. Check main PDC harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to A12.
1 Check and install a new PDC control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
installation of a new module/component.
Yes
PINPOINT TEST B : PDC SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
B1: PDC SYSTEM GIVES WARNING SIGNAL WITHOUT OBSTACLE
1 Clean the PDC sensor face. Check for any damage to the PDC sensor face. Rectify as required.
Snow, water or ice on sensor face. PDC sensor face has been repainted to the incorrect
thickness. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to B2.
1 Ensure the vehicle ride height is within manufacturer specified limits. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to B3.
1 Check for any non standard accessories are not fitted, such as tow bar, bike rack, body kit,
modified exhaust, lighting or licence plate holder.
Yes
No
GO to B4.
1 Limitations or characteristics of the PDC system such as vehicle on a gradient, exhaust gas
vapour, signal reflection.
Yes
No
For a detailed description of the PDC system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation).
DTC Index
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the DMM
leads into account.

B1B36- Front Right Outer  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
01 Sensor - General  Front Right Outer front bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
Electrical Failure Sensor - Component Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
internal failure short circuit to power, open circuit. Repair or
replace any wiring harness as required
 Check the connector for integrity and damage,
then re-connect sensor to confirm connection
 Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
system clear the DTC and run the on demand
self test
 If the problem persists remove the suspect
sensor from the bumper. Inspect the sensor
connector for signs of water ingress/corrosion.
Exchange the suspect sensor with another
sensor within the bumper that is not reporting a
fault. Clear the DTC and run the on demand self
test to confirm if the fault code now appears for
the new position of the suspect sensor. Renew
the faulty sensor
12 Sensor - Circuit short front bumper harness for damage. Check sensor
to battery circuit for short circuit to power. Repair or
self test
96 Sensor - Component  Front Right Outer front bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
internal failure Sensor - Component Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
self test
the faulty sensor
B1B38- Front Right Inner  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
01 Sensor - General  Front Right Inner front bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
Electrical Failure Sensor - Component Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
96 Sensor - Component  Front Right Inner front bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
internal failure Sensor - Component Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
self test
the faulty sensor
B1B40- Front Left Outer  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
01 Sensor - General  Front Left Outer Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
Electrical Failure - Component internal Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
failure short circuit to power, open circuit. Repair or
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
96 Sensor - Component  Front Left Outer Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
internal failure - Component internal Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
self test
the faulty sensor
B1B42- Front Left Inner  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
01 Sensor - General  Front Left Inner Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
96 Sensor - Component  Front Left Inner Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
self test
the faulty sensor
B1B44- Rear Right Outer  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
01 Sensor - General  Rear Right Outer Sensor rear bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
self test
the faulty sensor
12 Sensor - Circuit short rear bumper harness for damage. Check sensor
self test
96 Sensor - Component  Rear Right Outer Sensor rear bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
self test
the faulty sensor
B1B46- Rear Right Inner  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
01 Sensor - General  Rear Right Inner Sensor rear bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
96 Sensor - Component  Rear Right Inner Sensor rear bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
self test
the faulty sensor
B1B48- Rear Left Outer  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
01 Sensor - General  Rear Left Outer Sensor - rear bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
Electrical Failure Component internal Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
96 Sensor - Component  Rear Left Outer Sensor - rear bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
internal failure Component internal Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
self test
the faulty sensor
B1B50- Rear Left Inner  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
01 Sensor - General  Rear Left Inner Sensor - rear bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
Electrical Failure Component internal Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
96 Sensor - Component  Rear Left Inner Sensor - rear bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
internal failure Component internal Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
self test
the faulty sensor
B1B54- Function LED - Park  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
11 Aid - Circuit short to  Switch/LED - parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to
ground Component internal ground. Repair or replace any wiring harness as
failure required
self test. If the problem persists, suspect the
switch/LED
B1B54- Function LED - Park  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
12 Aid - Circuit short to  Switch/LED - parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to power.
battery Component internal Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
failure  Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
 Control Module - system clear the DTC and run the on demand
Component internal self test. If the problem persists, suspect the
failure switch/LED
B1B57- Front Sensors Power  Wiring harness fault  Check front and rear bumper harness for signs
11 Circuit- circuit short  Control Module - of damage and security of connections
to ground Component internal  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
failure parking assist front sensor power circuit and rear
sensor power circuit for short circuit to ground.
Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
control module
 Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up
parking aid system and check corrective action
B1B58- Rear Sensors Power  Wiring harness fault  Check rear and front (if front PDC fitted) bumper
11 Circuit - Circuit short  Control Module - harness for signs of damage and security of
to ground Component internal connections
failure  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
parking assist rear sensor power circuit and front
sensor power circuit (if front PDC fitted) for
short circuit to ground. Repair or replace any
wiring harness as required
control module
 Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up
parking aid system and check corrective action
B1C30- Disable Switch -  Wiring harness fault  Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
73 Actuator stuck closed  Control Switch - parking assist switch and switch circuit. Repair
Component internal or replace any wiring harness as required
failure  Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
control switch
 Check the switch function
U0010- Medium Speed CAN  Medium speed CAN  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 Communication Bus - failure - bus off the Parking aid control module high speed CAN
No sub type bus for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
information power, open circuit, high resistance, or short
circuit between the paired CAN wires
 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, complete a CAN network integrity test
 Cycle the ignition off, then on, and check if the
DTC is still logged
U0073- Control module  Control module  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 communication Bus communication Bus "A" the Parking aid control module high speed CAN
"A" Off - No sub type failure - bus off bus for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
information power, open circuit, high resistance, or short
circuit between the paired CAN wires
 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
DTC is still logged
U0140- Lost Communication  Loss of CAN  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Body Control communication with the power and ground connections to the central
Module - No sub type central junction box junction box. Clear DTC and retest
information  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the CAN network between the central junction
box and the parking aid control module
00 With Body Control communication with the power and ground connections to the
Module "B" - No sub auxiliary junction box auxiliary junction box. Clear DTC and retest
type information  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
00 With Instrument communication with the power and ground connections to the
Panel Cluster (IPC) instrument cluster instrument cluster. Clear DTC and retest
Control Module - No  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sub type information system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
U0300- Internal Control  Car configuration file  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Module Software stored in Parking aid system, check all other control modules, for
Incompatibility - No control module does not related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
sub type information match the master car  Check the components installed on the vehicle
configuration file were installed by the factory or a dealer
 Master car configuration  Install the original component or a new one as
file not being required.
transmitted by master
control module
U0422- Invalid Data Received  Invalid data received  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 From Body Control system, check central junction box, for related
Module - No sub type DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
DTC is still logged
 Clear the DTC and re-test
00 From Instrument system, check instrument cluster, for related
Panel Control Module DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
- No sub type  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system, complete a CAN network integrity test
www.JagDocs.com
DTC is still logged
00 From Body Control system, check auxiliary junction box, for related
Module "B" - No sub DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
type information  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
DTC is still logged
U2100- Initial Configuration  Parking aid control  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Not Complete - No module not configured system check and install latest relevant level of
sub type information software to the parking aid control module
U2101- Control Module  Parking aid control  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
00 Configuration module configuration system check and up-date the car configuration
Incompatible - No sub error file as required. Clear the DTC and re-test
type information
U3000- Control Module -  Parking aid control  Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
49 Internal electronic module internal failure system clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then
failure on, and check if the DTC is still logged
 If the DTC is still logged suspect the parking aid
control module
U3002- Vehicle Identification  VIN Mismatch, stored  Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
81 Number - invalid VIN does not match system clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then
serial data received broadcast VIN on, and check if the DTC is still logged
 If the DTC is still logged replace the parking aid
control module
U3003- Battery voltage  Circuit voltage below  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
16 threshold system, check central junction box, for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
 Check the vehicle charging system performance
to ensure the voltage regulation is correct
 Refer to relevant section of workshop manual
and battery care manual. Check battery state of
charge and starting/charging system
performance
 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
parking aid control module power and ground
circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit
U3003- Battery Voltage  Circuit voltage above  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
17 threshold system, check central junction box, for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
 Check the vehicle charging system performance
to ensure the voltage regulation is correct
performance
U3003- Battery Voltage -  Signal compare failure  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
62 Signal compare failure in battery voltage, of 2 system, check central junction box, for related
volts or more, between DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
parking aid system  Check the vehicle charging system performance
control module and to ensure the voltage regulation is correct
central junction box  Refer to relevant section of workshop manual
performance
Parking Aid - Parking Aid Module
Removal
NOTE: The park control module is situated in the LH footwell and does not change position with the hand of drive.

Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
2. LH side: Remove the cowl side trim panel.
 Remove the hood release lever.
 Release the forward edge of the scuff plate
trim panel.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness and

electrical connectors are not damaged during the
carpet release.
Carefully release the carpet for access.

 Carefully release the forward edge of the
floor console side trim panel.
4. Release the subwoofer cover.

 Position aside.
5. Remove the parking aid module.
 Position the acoustic pad aside.
 Release 2 electrical harness clips from the
body and position aside.
Installation
1. Install the parking aid module.
 Secure the electrical harness.
 Align the acoustic pad.
2. Install the subwoofer cover.

3. CAUTION: Make sure the carpet is correctly installed and

that no foul-condition exists when the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
Install the carpet.

 Install the floor console side panel trim.
4. Install the cowl side trim panel.
 Secure the scuff plate trim panel.

Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
Parking Aid - Rear Parking Aid Sensor
Removal


2. Remove the rear bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19
Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the parking aid sensor.
 Repeat the above for the other 3 sensors.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new sensor is installed, only the front face

must be painted. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the component malfunctioning.
Install the parking aid sensor.

 Repeat the above procedure for the remaining 3 sensors.
2. Install the rear bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19
Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Parking Aid - Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
All vehicles

Vehicles with 4.2L engine

2. Remove the front bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-
19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Vehicles with 5.0L engine

3. Remove the front bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-
19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
All vehicles
Installation


Parking Aid - Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Removal


2. Remove the headlamp assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Assembly (417-
01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
Installation


Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Care
Requirements
1. INTRODUCTION
This document sets out the requirements for care and maintenance of batteries and thereby the standard of battery
care at dealers and retailers for new vehicles
This applies to all types of 12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries used in Jaguar and Land Rover vehicles whether they are
conventional flooded technology or Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM – also known as Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA))
technology and also applies to both Primary and Auxiliary Batteries. AGM batteries offer improved resistance to cycling
as seen in stop start applications.
In order to prevent damage to the battery and ensure a satisfactory service life, all processes detailed within this
document must be rigorously adhered to.
It is equally important therefore to note the following key points:
 All new vehicles leave the factory with either a transit relay installed and/or have a transit mode programmed
into the vehicle control modules. The transit relay must be removed and the transit mode disabled (where
applicable) using an approved diagnostic system, NOT MORE THAN 72 HOURS before the customer takes
delivery.
 The battery can be discharged by the following mechanisms:
 Self Discharge: -A lead acid battery will very slowly discharge itself due to its own internal chemical processes
whether it is connected to a vehicle or not.
 Quiescent Discharge: - The vehicle electrical systems when connected to the battery will draw charge from
the battery.
12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries rely on internal chemical processes to create a voltage and deliver current. These processes
and the internal chemical structure of the battery can be damaged if the battery is allowed to discharge over a number
of weeks / months, or is left in a discharged state for a lengthy time period.
 On vehicles with conventional ignition keys, these must not be left in the ignition lock barrel when the
transit relay has been removed, otherwise quiescent current will increase and the battery will discharge more
rapidly.
 For keyless vehicles, the Smart Key must be stored at least 5m away from the vehicle when the vehicle is
parked or stored.
 AGM Batteries are fully sealed and cannot have the electrolyte level topped up.
NOTE: Dealers and retailers involved in the storage / handling of vehicles and replacement batteries have a
responsibility to ensure that only a fully charged battery may be processed through the distribution selling chain.
2. GENERAL RULES FOR BATTERY CARE
2.1 Dealer Demonstration Vehicles
Vehicles used as dealer demonstrator(s), in a showroom, must be connected to a showroom conditioner capable of
delivering 50 Amps. This will prevent the battery from being damaged.
2.2 Software Reflash, SDD work or Ignition On related workshop activities
Due to the high electrical current demand and high depth of Discharge that can occur during vehicle software re-flash
activities, SDD work or ignition on related work in the workshop, vehicles that are undergoing such activities MUST have
a power supply capable of delivering 50 Amps or more.
2.3 Extended Vehicle Rework
For any extended vehicle rework that results in consuming vehicle power, either the battery should be disconnected or a
suitable power supply connected.
2.4 Jump Starting New vehicles before they have been delivered to the customer
 It is the dealer / retailers responsibility to make sure the battery is not allowed to go flat by following the
instructions and processes defined in this manual.
 However, if circumstances dictate that a new vehicle must be jump started due to a flat battery whilst the
vehicle is in the dealer / retailers care, the battery on this vehicle must be replaced with a new one prior
to delivery to the customer at the dealer / retailers liability.
 The vehicle should also undergo investigation as to why the battery went flat.
 Do not connect the jump starting cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery. Always connect to the
recommended earth point. As defined in the owners handbook or service documentation for that vehicle.
2.5 AGM Batteries
 AGM batteries must not be charged above 14.8 Volts. Doing so will damage them.
 AGM Batteries must be tested with a capable battery tester as detailed in the equipment section (Section
5) of this procedure.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should the battery be disconnected with the engine running because under these
conditions the alternator can give a very high output voltage. This high transient voltage will damage the electronic
components in the vehicle. Loose or incomplete battery connections may also cause high transient voltage.
3. HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS:
BATTERY CELLS CONTAIN SULPHURIC ACID AND EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES OF HYDROGEN AND OXYGEN GASES. IT
IS THEREFORE ESSENTIAL THAT THE FOLLOWING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
Batteries emit highly explosive hydrogen at all times, particularly during charging. To prevent any potential form
of ignition occurring when working in the vicinity of a battery:
 Do not smoke when working near batteries.

 Avoid sparks, short circuits or other sources of ignition in the battery vicinity.
 Switch off current before making or breaking electrical connections.
 Ensure battery charging area is well ventilated.
 Ensure the charger is switched off when: a) connecting to a battery; b) disconnecting from the battery.
 Always disconnect the ground cable from the battery terminal first and reconnect it last.
Batteries contain poisonous and highly corrosive acid. To prevent personal injury, or damage to clothing or the
vehicle, the following working practices should be followed when topping up, checking electrolyte specific gravity,
removal, refitting or carrying batteries:
 Always wear suitable protective clothing (an apron or similar), safety glasses, a face mask and suitable gloves.
 If acid is spilled or splashed onto clothing or the body, it must be neutralized immediately and then rinsed with
clean water. A solution of baking soda or household ammonia and water may be used as a neutralizer.
 In the event of contact with the skin, drench the affected area with water. In the case of contact with the eyes,
bathe the affected area with cool clean water for approximately 15 minutes and seek urgent medical attention.
 If battery acid is spilled or splashed on any surface of a vehicle, it should be neutralized and rinsed with clean
water.
 Heat is generated when acid is mixed with water. If it becomes necessary to prepare electrolyte of a desired
specific gravity, SLOWLY pour the concentrated acid into water (not water into acid), adding small amounts of
acid while stirring. Allow the electrolyte to cool if noticeable heat develops. With the exception of lead or lead-
lined containers, always use non-metallic receptacles or funnels. Do not store acid in excessively warm locations
or in direct sunlight.
Due to their hazardous contents, the disposal of batteries is strictly controlled. When a battery is scrapped, ensure
it is disposed of safely, complying with local environmental regulations. If in doubt, contact your local authority for
advice on disposal facilities.
4. BATTERY CARE REQUIREMENTS
4.1 RECEIPT OF A NEW VEHICLE
Within 24 hours of receipt of a new vehicle, a battery condition check must be carried out in accordance with the
battery test process utilizing an appropriate tester as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this
procedure.
NOTE: The midtronics code must be recorded on the form.
Any actions must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the determining battery condition section
(Section 6) of this procedure. The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the
new vehicle storage document.
For additional information, refer to: New Vehicle Storage Form (100-11, Description and Operation).
4.2 NEW VEHICLE STORAGE
If the vehicle is to be stored the transit relays MUST be refitted and / or the vehicle put into transport mode.
Transit relay removal / vehicle placed in normal mode should only be completed a maximum of 72 hours prior to
handover to customer
For vehicles without either a transit mode or transit relay the battery negative cable must be DISCONNECTED from the
battery.
The battery must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST be re-charged after every 90 day period.
4.3 PDI / DELIVERY TO CUSTOMER
Before the vehicle is handed over to the customer and as part of the PDI, the condition of the battery needs to be
confirmed. The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an appropriate
tester as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
4.4 REPLACEMENT BATTERIES FOR SERVICE
All service replacement batteries must have the battery condition checked within 24 hours of receipt and controlled on a
‘First In First Out’ basis to ensure batteries are not allowed to age unnecessarily.
For batteries in storage and not yet fitted to a vehicle, they must be stored in a dry environment, not in direct sunlight
or under any direct heat source. Any batteries exhibiting any forms of damage or corrosion must not be fitted to any
vehicle. Any batteries which are dropped must be scrapped, this applies even if no external damage is apparent.
The battery condition must be checked every 30 days in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an
appropriate tester as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
(Section 6) of this procedure.The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the
4.5 BATTERY MAINTENANCE
Any battery whether it is in a vehicle or a replacement part must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST
be re-charged after every 90 day period.
4.6 BATTERY TEST PROCESS
It is recommended that this test is conducted at least 24 hours after the vehicle engine has been run or the battery
charged to avoid the need of surface charge removal. If time constraints make this unacceptable then the surface
charge must be removed.
Surface Charge Removal
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its surface
charge removed.
 Turn on the ignition but do not start the vehicle

 Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
 Switch off the headlamps
 Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
Battery Test
The battery may be tested either on a bench or on the vehicle.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an appropriate tester as
outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
CAUTION: DO NOT connect the tester to any other circuit or chassis point other than the battery negative
terminal.
5. EQUIPMENT
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements. Please refer to the approved
equipment document.
In the case of batteries fitted to a new vehicle at the dealership, battery condition should be measured using the
appropriate hand-held Midtronics tester as follows:
Battery
Type Battery Tester Battery Tester
Jaguar Land Rover
Flooded Midtronics MCR 394 & 494 Midtronics EXP1080 & Midtronics MCR 393 & 493 Midtronics EXP1080 &
GR1/GRX GR1/GRX
AGM Midtronics EXP1080, GR1/GRX Midtronics EXP1080, GR1/GRX
The test results must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage document.
NOTE: All equipment must be calibrated
6 DETERMINING BATTERY CONDITION
TESTER RESULTS ACTION

GOOD BATTERY Return to service.
GOOD RE-CHARGE Fully charge battery and return to service.
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Fully charge battery. Remove surface charge. Re-test battery. If same result replace
battery.
REPLACE BATTERY OR BAD Verify surface charge removed. Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test. If result
CELL BATTERY repeats after surface charge removal, replace battery. DO NOT RECHARGE.
UNABLE TO DO TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test.
7 BATTERY CHARGING
It is essential that a suitably ventilated defined area exists in each dealership / retailer for battery charging.
CAUTION: It is very important that when charging batteries using the traction charger or other stand-alone
chargers that the charger is set for the correct type of battery before charging commences. If the wrong switch is
selected the result would be a battery that is not charged fully and / or overheating can occur. Follow the manufacturers
operating instructions.
Batteries MUST BE tested and if necessary charged every 30 days and charged after 90 days irrespective of any test. It
is recommended that dealers / retailers always have fully charged batteries ready for use.
CAUTION: Do not charge AGM batteries with voltages over 14.8 Volts as this will damage the battery.
A designated controlled area must be allocated for scrap batteries and clearly controlled as such.
To bring a discharged but serviceable battery back to a fully charged condition proceed as follows:
 Check and if necessary top-up the battery electrolyte level. (Flooded maintainable batteries only)
 Charge the battery using a charger as detailed in the approved equipment document following the
manufacturers operating instructions.
NOTE: When using the Midtronics Diagnostic Charger, automatic mode must always be used. After charging and
analysis, the charger may display ‘Top-Off Charging’, Hit STOP To End. Do not stop charging until the current falls to 5A
or less, otherwise the battery will not be fully charged.
Following charging a post charge battery condition test must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the
determining battery condition section (Section 6) of this procedure.
8 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
If it is determined that a battery requires replacement, always refer to the appropriate section of the workshop manual
for instructions on removing and installing the battery from the vehicle.
On in service vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the BMS module must be reset following the
installation of a new battery. The BMS module reset procedure must be performed using an approved diagnostic
system.
9 CONFIRMING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
WARNINGS:
BEFORE CHECKING AND TOPPING-UP THE BATTERY ELECTROLYTE, REFER TO THE HEALTH AND SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS SECTION.
AGM TECHNOLOGY BATTERIES ARE FULLY SEALED FOR LIFE AND NO ATTEMPT SHOULD BE MADE TO CHECK OR
TOP UP THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL.
On certain types of battery the electrolyte level may need to be checked.
 Make sure the battery is of a type suitable for topping up. These types of batteries will have cell plugs visible on
the top face of the battery or a removable access panel to allow access to the cells.
 On batteries with a clear or opaque case and level marks, check the electrolyte level by visual inspection of the
maximum level indicator mark on the battery casing indicating adequate level above the battery separators.
 On batteries with black cases, remove the cell plugs or access panel and ensure the electrolyte level is level with
the indicator in the cell hole. A flashlight may be required to see the electrolyte level on this type of battery.
 If the electrolyte level is low, top-up using distilled water.
NOTE: Maintenance free and Valve Regulated (AGM) batteries are sealed and therefore cannot be topped up.
CAUTION: DO NOT overfill.

Battery and Charging System - General Information - Quiescent Drain
VEHICLE QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING
On vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the diagnostic routine for quiescent drain testing in the
approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system should be utilized.
If a customer complains of a vehicle battery that discharges continuously or when left for a prolonged period of time, it
is recommended that a quiescent drain test is performed as described below.
The battery drain should be measured using the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system or a Digital Multi-
Meter (DVOM). A procedure for quiescent drain measurement using the diagnostic system is available in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of the Workshop Manual. The vehicle should be in the locked/armed state (for example vehicle
alarm fully armed), all doors, engine and luggage compartment lids are open and latched (so as to appear closed from
an electrical point of view). The test should take place after the vehicle has entered shutdown mode. The time taken for
this to occur after the ignition is switched off varies according to model (Refer to the Topix On line resource for details).
When the vehicle is armed, the effect of the security system Light Emitting Diode (LED) flashing is to cause a pulsation
in the measured current drain. In this case, either the average current should be taken (using a Digital Multi- Meter
(DVOM) with an averaging system) or the current reading taken, ignoring the brief high current peaks.
EQUIPMENT
Approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system with current probeOR Digital Multi-Meter (DVOM) with current probe.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Using an Approved Jaguar or Land Rover Diagnostic System.
 Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
 Connect the current probe to the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system
 Calibrate the probe
 Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
 Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
Using a digital multimeter
Do not use an in-line DVOM to measure the quiescent drain on vehicles fitted with an electronic throttle (for example XK
2006 onwards). The current exceeds the maximum amount the fuse in the DVOM is capable of handling.
 Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
 Connect the current probe to the digital multmeter
 Calibrate the probe
 Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
 Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING
 Switch ignition to ‘on’ or select ignition mode in keyless vehicles and switch to ‘off’ (do not crank)
 Remove key from ignition switch (if equipped)
 Open and latch all doors, hood and luggage compartment lid
 Lock the vehicle using the remote function on the remote handset. (Single lock only to avoid volumetric alarm
arming)
 Remove any other potential electrical drains such as accessories plugged into accessory sockets
 Record the amperage readings after the shutdown period referenced in the Topix on line resource for details.
Note all cars from 10MY onwards and XK from 07MY and XF from 08MY should be less than 30mA after 30
minutes
 Record the final reading on the battery report form
The preferred method of testing following an excessive current consumption figure is to use a current probe around
individual junction box leads to the various suspected circuits to identify a potential cause. This is in preference to the
old method of removing fuses for the following reasons:
 The drain may be caused by a module remaining active and preventing the quiescent drain from reducing to
normal levels
 The drain may be caused by a relay winding that is activated. Pulling the fuse can allow this to ‘reset’ and the
drain will be lost and go un-diagnosed
QUIESCENT DRAIN - TYPICAL VALUES
NOTE: The quiescent drain after the initial shutdown period should not exceed the value shown in the table.
Jaguar Quiescent Drain Values

MODEL SHUT DOWN PERIOD (minutes) TYPICAL VALUES BATTERY DRAIN (mA)
XJS 3.2 60 <30
Sovereign 3.2 60 <37.3
XJ6 4.0 60 <38.6
XJS 60 <43.9
XJ6 (X300) (1995MY) 60 <43
XJ8 (X300) 60 <30
XK8 (X100) 60 <30
S-Type (X200) 60 <30
X-Type (X400) 30 <30
XJ6 (X350) 40 <30
XJ8 (X350) 40 <30
XK (X150) - From 2006MY <20 (after lock/arm condition) ² <30
33 (unlocked) <30
XF (X250) - From 2008MY <20 (after lock/arm condition) ² <30
33 (unlocked) <30
XF (X250) - From 2013MY <10 (after lock/arm condition) ² <25
XF SportBrake (X250) - From 2013MY <10 (after lock/arm condition) ² <25
<20 (unlocked) <25
XJ (X351) - From 2010MY - 2012MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
30 (unlocked) <20
XJ (X351) - From 2013MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
<20 (unlocked) <20
F - Type (X152) - From 2013MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
<20 (unlocked) <20
NOTE:
1. The total current drain will be higher if certain approved accessories are fitted (for example: tracker, trailer module,
etc.)
2. Applies to vehicles without Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Vehicle shut-down period with TPMS is
approximately 15 minutes.
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Charging System
For a detailed description of the charging system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to:
Battery and Cables (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Description and Operation),
Generator (414-02 Generator and Regulator, Description and Operation).
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition and state of charge before condemning any of the charging system
components. For additional information, refer to the battery care manual.
Visual Inspection
 Generator  Generator
 Drive belt  Battery
 Drive belt tensioner  Fuse 5 Rear Junction Box (RJB)
 Generator pulley  Engine/generator ground connection
 Check the security of the generator fixings  Circuit(s)
4. If the cause is not visually evident verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart. Alternatively, check for
Symptom Chart

Battery Not Charging  Fuse 5 RJB Check Fuse 5 RJB. Check the battery condition and state of
warning displayed on  Front End charge. Refer to the battery care manual. Check the FEAD belt
message center Accessory Drive tension.
(FEAD) belt REFER to: Accessory Drive (303-05 Accessory Drive, Diagnosis
tension and Testing).
 Generator fault Check ECM and instrument cluster for DTCs and refer to relevant
 ECM DTC Index.
 Instrument cluster REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine
fault Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing) /
 Controller Area Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and
Network (CAN) Testing) /
fault Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications
Network, Diagnosis and Testing).
Battery keeps  No ignition power For ignition power circuit tests. GO to Pinpoint Test B. Check the
discharging, no warning from CJB quiescent drain. Check the battery condition and state of charge,
message displayed on  Battery quiescent refer to the battery care manual.
message center drain REFER to: Battery Charging (414-00 Battery and Charging
 Battery fault System - General Information, General Procedures).
 FEAD belt tension Check the FEAD belt tension.
 Generator pulley REFER to: Accessory Drive (303-05 Accessory Drive, Diagnosis
fault and Testing).
 Generator failure Check RJB for DTCs B2A9016, B2A9116, Note: if battery requires
replacing and these DTCs were logged, complete and return the
battery report form listing the DTCs, see battery care manual.
Check ECM for DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine
Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).
Check the generator pulley does not turn independently of the
generator
Generator noisy  FEAD belt tension For noisy generator tests. GO to Pinpoint Test C.
 FEAD belt
 FEAD belt
tensioner
 FEAD belt idler
pulleys
Radio interference  Generator For radio interference tests. GO to Pinpoint Test D.
 Wiring harness
DTC Index

P163200 Generator faults  Charging GO to Pinpoint Test A.
sensor/circuit system fault
B2A9016 Battery low  Circuit voltage Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition (if
below battery requires replacing and this DTC is logged, complete and
threshold return battery report form listing this DTC), refer to the battery
care manual
B2A9116 Battery  Circuit voltage Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition (if
discharged below battery requires replacing and this DTC is logged, complete and
threshold return battery report form listing this DTC), refer to the battery
care manual
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : P163200 CHARGING SYSTEM FAULT

CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING
1 Connect a suitable voltmeter across the battery terminals.
2 Start the engine and allow to idle with no electrical loads applied.
3 Measure the maximum voltage achieved at the battery after start.
Is the voltage greater than 13 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
INSTALL a fully charged battery. GO to A5.
A2: CHECK THE GENERATOR 'S' TERMINAL FOR BATTERY VOLTAGE
2 DISCONNECT generator electrical connector PI048.
3 MEASURE the voltage at generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3.
Yes
GO to A5.
No
GO to A3.
A3: CHECK FUSE 5 IN REAR JUNCTION BOX (RJB)
1 Check fuse 5 in the RJB.
Is the fuse OK?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3 and fuse 5 in the RJB.
CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A4.
A4: CHECK THE GENERATOR 'S' TERMINAL FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1 MEASURE the resistance between generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3 and ground.
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3 and fuse 5 of the RJB.
INSTALL a new fuse, CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new fuse, CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
A5: CHECK FOR BATTERY VOLTAGE AT THE GENERATOR 'L' TERMINAL
2 Disconnect generator electrical connector PI048.
3 Set ignition status to ON.
4 Measure the voltage at generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1.
Yes
INSTALL a new generator.
REFER to: Generator - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (414-02 Generator and Regulator,
No
GO to A6.
A6: CHECK THE GENERATOR 'L' LINE FOR SHORT TO GROUND
2 Disconnect battery.
3 MEASURE the resistance between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and ground.
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and the Engine
Control Module (ECM). CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A7.
A7: CHECK THE GENERATOR 'L' LINE FOR SHORT TO POWER
1 MEASURE the resistance between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and battery
positive.
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and the Engine
Control Module (ECM). CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A8.
A8: CHECK THE GENERATOR 'L' LINE FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1 Disconnect the ECM electrical connector PI300.
2 MEASURE the resistance between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1and ECM
electrical connector PI300 pin 16.
Yes
Install a new generator.
No
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and the ECM electrical
connector PI300 pin 16. CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST B : IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT TESTS

CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR IGNITION POWER AT GENERATOR
4 Measure the voltage at generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2.
Yes
Check for quiescent current fault, check battery condition. Refer to the Battery Care Manual.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK THE IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1 Set the ignition status to OFF.
2 Disconnect the battery.
3 Check the resistance between generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and GROUND.
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and the CJB. CLEAR
the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
1 Check the resistance between generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and battery positive.
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and the CJB. CLEAR
the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B4.
B4: CHECK THE IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1 Disconnect CJB electrical connector FL048.
2 Check the resistance between CJB electrical connector FL048 pin 12 and generator electrical
connector PI048 pin 2.
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between CJB electrical connector FL048 pin 12 and generator electrical
connector PI048 pin 2. CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B5.
B5: CHECK CJB IGNITION POWER OUTPUT DRIVE
1 Connect the battery.
3 Check the voltage at CJB electrical connector FL048, component side, pin 12.
Yes
Check no other modules connected to this circuit are pulling to GROUND. Clear the DTC, test the
No
Install a new generator.
PINPOINT TEST C : GENERATOR NOISY

CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR SECURITY
1 Inspect the generator fixings.
Is the generator secure?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
SECURE the generator. TEST the system for normal operation.
C2: CHECK THE FEAD BELT
1 Remove and inspect the FEAD belt.
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (303-05 Accessory Drive,
Is the FEAD belt in good condition?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
INSTALL a new FEAD belt. TEST the system for normal operation.
C3: CHECK THE FEAD BELT TENSIONER
1Remove and inspect the FEAD belt tensioner.
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (303-05 Accessory
Is the FEAD belt tensioner in good condition?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
INSTALL a new FEAD belt tensioner. TEST the system for normal operation.
C4: CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR MECHANICAL NOISE
1 Rotate the generator pulley by hand.
Does the generator rotor shaft rotate smoothly and quietly?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
C5: CHECK THE FEAD BELT IDLER PULLEYS
1 Rotate the FEAD belt idler pulleys by hand.
Do the FEAD belt idler pulleys rotate smoothly and quietly?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
INSTALL new FEAD belt idler pulleys as necessary.
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (303-05
Accessory Drive, Removal and Installation).
C6: CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR ELECTRICAL NOISE
1 Install the FEAD belt pulleys and belt.
2 Start and run the engine at 1500 rpm. Apply a high electrical load to the battery.
Is the noise only heard with the high electrical load applied?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
CHECK the air conditioning compressor.
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (412-03 Air
Conditioning, Removal and Installation).
CHECK the power steering pump.
REFER to: Power Steering Pump - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (211-02 Power Steering,
C7: ELIMINATE THE GENERATOR AS THE CAUSE OF ELECTRICAL NOISE
2 Start and run the engine at 1500 rpm.
Is the noise still present?
Yes
CHECK the air conditioning compressor.
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (412-03 Air
Conditioning, Removal and Installation).
CHECK the power steering pump.
REFER to: Power Steering Pump - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (211-02 Power Steering,
No
PINPOINT TEST D : RADIO INTERFERENCE

CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK IF THE GENERATOR IS THE CAUSE OF THE RADIO INTERFERENCE
2 Turn the radio to the ON position, and select the affected station.
Is the radio interference present?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK IF THE GENERATOR IS THE CAUSE OF THE RADIO INTERFERENCE WITH A HIGH ELECTRICAL
LOAD APPLIED TO THE BATTERY
2 Apply a high electrical load to the battery.
Yes
GO to D3. GO to D3.
No
DIAGNOSE the entertainment system.
REFER to: Audio System (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information,
D3: ELIMINATE THE GENERATOR AS THE CAUSE OF RADIO INTERFERENCE
Yes
DIAGNOSE the entertainment system.
REFER to: Audio System (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information,
No
CLEAN and tighten all mounting points, positive and negative cable connections (including the
hood, luggage compartment lid and engine GROUND straps). INSTALL fuse 5 to the RJB. TEST the
system for normal operation. If interference is still present, INSTALL a new generator.
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Charging
General Procedures
1. Before charging a discharged battery inspect and repair the

following conditions, if necessary:
 Loose accessory drive belt.
 Pinched or grounded wiring harness to the generator or
voltage regulator.
 Loose wiring harness connections at the generator or
voltage regulator.
 Loose or corroded connections at battery, headlamp
panel junction wire or engine ground.
 Carry out generator charging checks.
 Excessive battery quiescent drain due to:
1. engine compartment, load space, glove
compartment and courtesy lamps remaining on
(switch damaged or out of adjustment, glove
compartment left open).
Battery Charging - Maintenance-Free Batteries

WARNINGS:
KEEP BATTERIES OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. BATTERIES CONTAIN SULPHURIC ACID, AVOID CONTACT WITH
SKIN, EYES OR CLOTHING. SHIELD YOUR EYES WHEN WORKING NEAR THE BATTERY TO PROTECT AGAINST POSSIBLE
SPLASHING OF THE ACID SOLUTION. IN CASE OF ACID CONTACT WITH SKIN OR EYES, FLUSH IMMEDIATELY WITH
WATER FOR A MINIMUM OF 15 MINUTES AND SEEK PROMPT MEDICAL ATTENTION. IF ACID IS SWALLOWED, CALL A
PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
BATTERIES NORMALLY PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES WHICH CAN CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY, THEREFORE DO NOT
ALLOW FLAMES, SPARKS, OR LIGHTED SUBSTANCES TO COME NEAR THE BATTERY. WHEN CHARGING OR WORKING
NEAR A BATTERY ALWAYS SHIELD YOUR FACE AND PROTECT YOUR EYES . ALWAYS PROVIDE ADEQUATE
VENTILATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Cold batteries will not readily accept a charge. Therefore,

batteries should be allowed to warm up approximately to 15
degrees centigrade (59 degrees Fahrenheit) before charging.
This may require 12 hours at room temperature depending on
the initial temperature and battery size.
2. A battery which has been completely discharged may be slow to
accept a charge initially, and in some cases may not accept a
charge at the normal charger setting. When batteries are in this
condition, charging can be started by use of the 'dead battery'
switch which is fitted to certain types of battery chargers. Follow
the manufacturer's instructions when carrying out this
procedure.
3. To determine whether a battery is accepting a charge, follow the
manufacturer's instructions for the charger.
4. After releasing dead battery switch and with the charger still
operating, measure battery voltage. If the voltage is 12 volts or
higher, the battery may be accepting a charge and may be
capable of being recharged. If the temperature of the battery is
below 15 degrees centigrade (59 degrees Fahrenheit) the
battery may require charging for up to two hours before the
charge rate is high enough to show on the charger ammeter. It
has been found that all un-damaged batteries can be charged
by this procedure. If a battery cannot be charged by this
procedure, it should be replaced.
5. A rapid recharge procedure has been developed for recharging
batteries that have passed the 'No-Load Test' and only need a
recharge. This can be due to non start battery failures or battery
discharged in vehicle due to key-off loads.
6. The battery can be rapidly recharged by using either of the
following methods:
1. Perform a two hour charge using a constant current of
20 amps (manual setting on the charger).
2. Perform a two hour charge using a constant voltage
(automatic setting on the charger).
Quiescent Current Measurement

1. NOTE: The following quiescent current measurement does not
apply to vehicles with the Tracker system installed. If the
vehicle is installed with the tracker system the quiescent current
may be up to 14 milliamps higher. If non-jaguar approved
accessories are installed the following measurements may not
apply.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Procedures).
2. Check the vehicle off-load battery voltage. If below 12.5 volts,
install a fully charged slave battery for the tests and recharge
the vehicle battery.
3. Connect a 'shorting' link lead between the negative battery
terminal and the negative battery lead, before connecting a
suitable ammeter to the battery (with the negative test lead clip
to the negative battery terminal, and the positive test lead clip
to the battery negative lead).
4. NOTE: Make sure that all electrical accessories are switched off.
Operate the key fob unlock button to disarm the vehicle security
system.
 Select ignition mode (without starting the engine) for
around 10 seconds.
 Deselect ignition mode, close doors, hood & luggage
compartment lid latch.
 Lock vehicle.
 After 15 minutes on vehicles with TPMS installed or 4
minutes on vehicles without TPMS installed, remove
shorting link & note ammeter reading.
 The quiescent current should be less than 35mA.
 Replace Shorting link.
 Unlock the vehicle.
 Superlock the vehicle.
 After 15 minutes, on vehicles with TPMS installed, or 4
minutes, on vehicles without TPMS installed, remove
shorting link & note ammeter reading.
 The quiescent current should be less than 35mA.
5. NOTE: In the unlocked state, the vehicle will take 30mins to

shut down to its min quiescent current.
If intermittent wake-ups are suspected, monitor battery current

continuously
6. Disconnect the ammeter. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Procedures).
Battery, Mounting and Cables -
Battery Specification
WARNINGS:
Batteries produce explosive gases which may cause personal injury. Do not expose the battery to a naked flame.
When charging or working near a battery wear protective clothing and eye protectors. Always provide adequate
ventilation. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Batteries contain sulphuric acid, avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing. Shield your eyes when working near
the battery to protect against possible contact of the acid solution. In case of contact with the skin or eyes, flush
immediately for a minimum of 15 minutes and seek prompt medical attention. if swallowed call a physician
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Make sure all electrical systems are off before connecting the battery ground cable. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in damage to the electrical system.
Battery
Battery Information
Engine Specification Battery type Specification
All Varta T8 90 Ah
Battery Cold Cranking Specification

Item Specification
90 Ah Battery Cold Cranking 800 Amps
Battery Disconnect/Connect Procedures
WARNING: The backup power supply energy must be depleted before any supplementary restraint system repairs
are carried out. To deplete the backup supply energy, first disconnect the battery ground cable, then disconnect the
battery positive cable and wait ten minutes to avoid accidental deployment and personal injury. Failure to follow this
CAUTION: Disconnecting the battery cables will cause all of the electronic control modules to lose all stored
data/fault codes.
NOTE: Following reconnecting of the battery, the engine should be allowed to idle as the stored idle and drive values
contained within the engine control module (ECM) will have been lost. This may cause driveability concern if the
following procedure is not carried out.
Battery disconnect procedure Battery connect procedure

1. If possible, apply parking brake or alternatively, chock 1. Connect the battery cables and tighten to 5 Nm.
wheels. Ground cable must be connected last
2. If required, record any customer audio and climate 2. Install the battery cover and close the luggage
control settings. This also applies to all electronic control compartment lid.
module stored information.
3. Switch off ignition. 3. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine
reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Open the luggage compartment lid. 4. Switch the engine off.
5. Release the cover and disconnect the battery ground 5. Restart the engine and allow to idle for approximately
cable. two minutes (this will allow the ECM to learn the idle
values).
6. If required, disconnect the battery positive cable. 6. Apply and hold the brake pedal, select drive and allow
the engine to idle for a further two minutes.
7. Drive the vehicle for approximately five miles/eight
kilometers of varied driving to enable the ECM to complete
it's learning strategy.
8. Reset the audio unit and climate control assembly to
original customer settings.
9. Reset the door window motors.
For additional information, refer to: Door Window Motor
Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
Battery positive cable terminal retaining nut 5 4 -
Battery negative cable terminal retaining nut 5 4 -
Battery clamp nuts 9 7 -
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Generator
3 - Battery
4 - Remote jump start terminal
5 - BJB (battery junction box)
6 - Starter motor
INTRODUCTION
Electrical power from the battery and generator is distributed throughout the vehicle through a series of junction boxes.
IGNITION MODES
The vehicle has a possible four ignition modes. The modes and systems that are active in each mode are detailed in the
following table:
Ignition Mode
Off Accessory (Convenience) On Crank
Exterior lamps Memory functions seat, column etc Exterior lamps fog lamps Stability controls
headlamps – Dip only directional Indicators
approach lamps
Interior lighting Manual adjust seat column etc. Convertible hood Heated/Cooled
seat
Preheat - timed in Interior lighting Wash/Wipe Adaptive speed
control
Electric park brake - On Brake lights HVAC Adaptive damping
Instrument cluster - Exterior lighting auto headlamps, reversing EMS TPMS
stand by, clock, lamps, side lamps, tail lamps
odometer
Hazard warning lamps Auto infotainment previous condition (preset Instrument cluster – dials and Pedestrian
volume), radio standby, phone standby, warnings fuel gauge temperature Protection system
steering wheel switches gauge lamp check
Locking and unlocking Instrument cluster –message center, trip Windows Gearshift control
computer and TCM
Security Horn EPB – power to disengage (foot EPB – power to
on break) disengage
- Cigar lighter/power socket Restraints check -
BATTERY
The battery is located behind a cover at the front of the luggage compartment. The cover is held in place by four retainers.
The battery sits in a tray and is secured with a clamp plate and two nuts.
The positive and negative battery cables are fitted with service loops. The service loops add extra length to the cables and
allow the battery to be slid rearward in the luggage compartment without disconnection.
Remote Jump Start Terminal
The positive battery cable is also connected to a remote jump start terminal. The remote jump start terminal is located in the
LH (left-hand) rear corner of the luggage compartment and can be accessed by removing the air vent trim. Although also
fitted to coupe vehicles, the terminal has been specifically designed to allow a convertible vehicle to be jump started if a
drained battery is experienced when the top is in the stowed condition.
The starter motor power lead is also connected to the remote jump start terminal and is insulated from the battery jump
start cable and the vehicle body by a nylon washer.
The negative jump start connection is a stud located in the spare wheel well. For more information on jump start procedure,
refer to the Owner's Handbook.
Transit Relay
The vehicle is also fitted with a transit relay. This is a disposable device and not for use by the customer. This relay is fitted
in series with the battery and ground. It disconnects the battery from the vehicles ground and thus eliminates quiescent
current drain during delivery. The relay must be removed before delivery to the customer. For more information, refer to the
PDI (pre-delivery inspection) manual.
Battery Monitoring System
The battery monitoring system module measures battery current and voltage, which it communicates to the CJB (central
junction box) over a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection. The CJB transmits the battery information to the
instrument cluster over the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The instrument cluster acts as a gateway
between the medium and high speed CAN bus networks, and transmits the battery condition information to the ECM (engine
control module) over the high speed CAN bus. Based on the information received from the battery monitoring system
module, the ECM will control the output from the generator and request the switching off of electrical loads if necessary.
For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02 Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
CAUTION: Due to the self-calibration routine, it is recommended that all power supply diagnostic testing is carried out
using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system rather than a digital multimeter.
The battery monitoring system module is able to generate DTC (diagnostic trouble code)'s to help diagnose battery or
generator power supply issues. These DTC's can be read using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The Jaguar approved
diagnostic system can also be used to implement a battery and generator self test routine.
For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01, Diagnosis and Testing).
If a fault is detected, the ECM will override the battery monitoring system module.
The battery monitoring system module DTC's can be used to help diagnose battery or generator power supply faults. The
DTC's are stored in both the CJB and the ECM. The Jaguar approved diagnostic system has a process for an automated
power supply diagnostic procedure. The procedure provides a menu driven process to locate a fault in a logical sequence.
The procedure uses the capability of the battery monitoring system and generator LIN bus controlled functions to provide
current flow information and will detect if the battery monitoring system or generator are functioning correctly.
www.JagDocs.com
BATTERY JUNCTION BOX
Mounted on the LH side of the battery is the BJB (battery junction box). The BJB contains three megafuses delivering battery
power to: the starter motor (400 A); the AJB (auxiliary junction box) (175 A) and the CJB (175 A). For more information,
refer to the Electrical Guide.
AUXILIARY JUNCTION BOX

The AJB is mounted on the passenger compartment rear bulkhead and secured by two nuts/studs. The junction box can be
accessed by opening the center panel of the rear seat back. The center panel is secured in position by a single stud at the
top, and hinged at the bottom.
The auxiliary junction box receives electrical power from the BJB via a 175 A megafuse. For more information on the circuits
and systems served by the auxiliary junction box, refer to the Electrical Guide.
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX
The CJB is mounted at the base of the LH A pillar and secured by two nuts/studs. Access to the CJB can be gained through a
removable panel located below the LH side of the instrument panel.
The CJB receives electrical power from the BJB via a 175 A megafuse. A second power supply lead 'daisy chains' off the CJB,
providing electrical power to the power distribution box. For more information on the circuits and systems served by the CJB,
refer to the Electrical Guide.
The CJB also controls the functionality of a number of vehicle systems. These include:
 Electric steering column lock.

For additional information, refer to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation).
 Instrument cluster and panel illumination.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination (413-00 Instrument Cluster and Panel
Illumination, Description and Operation).
 Exterior lighting systems.
For additional information, refer to: Exterior Lighting (417-01, Description and Operation).
 Interior lighting systems. For additional information, refer to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Description
and Operation).
 Active anti-theft alarm system.
 Passive anti-theft alarm system.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).
 Electric seats.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
 Electric windows. For additional information, refer to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, Description and Operation).
 Wipers and washers. For additional information, refer to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers,
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOX
The power distribution box is located in the LH rear of the engine compartment, beneath a closing panel. The power
distribution box is supplied electrical power from the BJB, via the CJB. For more information on the circuits and systems
served by the power distribution box, refer to the Electrical Guide.
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery
For a detailed description of the battery system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
of the workshop manual. REFER to: (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables)
Battery and Cables (Description and Operation),
Battery and Cables (Description and Operation),
Battery and Cables (Description and Operation).
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Generator  Generator
 Drive belt  Battery
 Drive belt tensioner  Battery connections
 Generator pulley  Starter motor
 Check the security of the generator fixings  Harnesses and connectors
 Fuses
 Charge warning lamp function
4. If the cause is not visually evident check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Midtronics EXP-1080 User Guide
Carry out the following: -
PINPOINT TEST A : VOLTAGE DROP

A1: GROUND CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
1 Start the engine, turn on the following:
 (1) Air conditioning
 (2) Blower fan on full speed
 (3) Headlights on main beam
 (4) Heated screen - rear
 (5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
 (6) Heated seats (if installed)
2 Connect the multimeter between the battery negative

terminal and the battery clamp as shown in picture
below (do not disconnect the battery at this stage)
3 Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record the
reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return the
vehicle to an ignition off condition. Disconnect the
battery negative clamp, clean clamp and terminal then
reconnect and repeat test GO to A1.
A2: POWER CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
1 Start the engine, turn on the following:
 (1) Air conditioning
 (2) Blower fan on full speed
 (3) Headlights on main beam
 (4) Heated screen - rear
 (5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
 (6) Heated seats (if installed)
2 Connect the multimeter between the battery positive

terminal and the battery clamp as shown in picture
below (do not disconnect the battery at this stage)
3 Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record the
reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
Carry out midtronics battery test procedure
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return the
vehicle to an ignition off condition. Disconnect the
battery power clamp, clean clamp and terminal then
reconnect and repeat test GO to A2.
Reference Description
1 LCD screen with main menu
2 Control panel (key board and power button)
3 Positive and negative fly leads
4 Fly leads connection
5 Temperature sensor
6 Infra-red sensor (data transfer for printer)
7 Amp hour
8 Battery rating (CCA)
9 Rating units
10 Battery type
The following steps must be carried out to ensure correct operation of the EXP-1080 during the battery test procedure
Checks Action
Battery fluid leakage, check for battery fluid leaks or NOTE: If visible damage to the case is evident do not return
damage to the battery casing battery under warranty
Replace the battery if there is any battery fluid leaks

evident
Battery vent pipe routing Check for routing, ensure there are no kinks
EXP-1080 fly lead, condition of clamps Clean or replace as required
EXP-1080 fly lead connection Confirm secure connection
NOTE: The Midtronics EXP-1080 is suitable for testing flooded and absorbed glass mat (AGM) type batteries
Typical Values
Amp Hour CCA (Cold Cranking Amps Rating Units

12 200 EN
70 760 SAE
80 700 SAE
80 800 SAE
90 800 SAE
95 850 SAE
90 950 SAE
105 950 SAE
Midtronics Battery Test Procedure
This midtronics battery test procedure will confirm the serviceability of the battery
 1. Connect the fly-lead to the midtronics EXP-1080

 2. Connect the fly-leads to the battery terminals
 Black lead to negative terminal
 Red lead to positive terminal
 Confirm the connections are secure
 3. The EXP-1080 will power on automatically when connected to a battery, screen below is displayed
NOTE: MAIN MENU SCREEN
 4. Main Menu. Select Battery test and press SELECT
NOTE: BATTERY LOCATION
 5. Battery Location. Select either, Out of vehicle or In Vehicle as appropriate

 Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY RATING
 6. BATTERY RATING. Select the correct battery rating from the pre-installed list, (Goto step 10). Or,
 To manually enter the correct battery type, specification and CCA rate. Scroll using the arrow keys on the
midtronics panel and select Other from the menu
 Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY TYPE
 7. Battery Type. Select the correct battery type (Regular or AGM)

 NOTE: All AGM batteries are marked (Refer to battery label)
 Select Next
NOTE: RATING UNITS
 8. Rating Units. Select the correct rating units. Refer to the battery label for correct specification. Options EN,
DIN, SAE
 Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY RATING
 9. BATTERY RATING. Scroll using the arrow keys on the midtronics panel, select the correct CCA rating (For
CCA refer to battery label)
 Select Next
NOTE: TEMPERATURE
NOTE: Ensure that the temperature sensor does not touch any part of the battery or vehicle, this will cause damage not
be covered under the midtronics warranty and will require the unit to be returned to a service center
 10. Temperature. Aim the temperature sensor towards the battery casing (Maintain distance of 5cm)
 Select Next
NOTE: TESTING
 11. Testing. The screen displays clock hand's rotating, the EXP-1080 will automatically advance when test has
completed
NOTE: SURFACE CHARGE
NOTE: If there is no surface charge this step will not show. Go to next step
 11a. Surface Charge. Ensure the ignition state is on. Switch on the headlights (high beam) until EXP-1080
shows Turn off headlights then return ignition state to off
NOTE: BATTERY CHARGE
NOTE: If the state of charge is sufficient this step will not show. Go to next step
 11b. Battery Charge. Select Before Charging if battery has not been on a recommended mains charger for a
minimum of 6 hours
 Select After Charging if battery has been on a recommended mains charger for a minimum of 6 hours
NOTE: DEEP SCAN TECHNOLOGY
NOTE: This test is automated and will show if required. Go to next step
 12. Testing. The EXP-1080 will carry out the deep scan test, then automatically advance when test has
completed
Number Description
1 Battery test result
2 CCA (Measured capacity rating)
3 Voltage
4 CCA (Manually entered)
5 Temperature
NOTE: RESULTS
Test Result Action

GOOD BATTERY Test complete no action required
GOOD - RE-CHARGE Charge battery using a recommended mains charger (minimum 50 amp) until charging
complete
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Charge battery using a recommended mains charger (minimum 50 amp) until charging
complete. Retest. If the result is the same replace battery
REPLACE BATTERY / BAD Replace battery. Do Not Recharge
CELL BATTERY
UNABLE TO COMPLETE Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test
TEST
NOTE: TEST CODE
NOTE: Battery test code, must be given if a battery, starter motor or generator is exchanged under warranty
NOTE: STATE OF HEALTH
NOTE: General health of the battery and its ability to deliver its specified performance compared with a new battery
NOTE: SOC (State Of Charge)
NOTE: BATTERY STATE OF CHARGE
 Results. From the result display use the arrow keys on the control panel to view the test code
 The test code must be quoted with every battery claim under warranty
Flooded Battery Care Point
If the vehicle is equipped with a flooded battery, ensure the replacement battery is a flooded battery of the same
specification (cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery
Under no circumstances should you fit a flooded battery to a vehicle that originally had an AGM battery, unless formally
instructed by Jaguar/Land Rover
AGM Battery Care Point
If the vehicle is equipped with an absorbed glass mat (AGM) battery, ensure the replacement battery is a AGM battery
of the same specification (cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery, unless
formally instructed by Jaguar/Land Rover
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery Disconnect and Connect
General Procedures
Disconnection
All vehicles
1. Obtain and record the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
Coupe
2.
Convertible
3.
4.
All vehicles
5.
6.
Connect
1. NOTE: Make sure that both the positive and negative battery
terminals are correctly located when installed.
Torque: 6 Nm
2. NOTE: This step is only required when installing a new

component.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, reset the

battery monitoring system (BMS).
3. Door Window Motor Initialization
Refer to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass,

Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
4. Enter the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
5. Reset the clock to the correct time.
6. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine reaches
normal operating temperature.
7. Switch the engine off.
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery
Removal
All vehicles
1. Obtain and record the audio unit preset radio frequencies.

2. NOTE: Where fitted.

3.
4.
All vehicles
5.
6. Torque: 5 Nm

correct.
Torque: 5 Nm
8.
9. Torque: 6 Nm
10. Torque: 6 Nm
11.
Installation

2. NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new
component.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, reset the

battery monitoring system (BMS).
3. Door Window Motor Initialization
4. Enter the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
5. Reset the clock to the correct time.
6. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine reaches
normal operating temperature.
7. Switch the engine off.
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -

Battery positive cable retaining nut 12 9 -
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Generator
COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: Installation on supercharged engine shown, installation on naturally aspirated engine similar.
INTRODUCTION
On 5.0L vehicles (naturally aspirated and supercharged), the electrical charging system consists of a 150 A output generator
with an integral voltage regulator. The output from the generator is set by the voltage regulator under the control of the ECM
(engine control module).
GENERATOR
The generator produces power for the vehicle electrical system and maintains the battery in a charged state.
The generator is located at the front right side of the engine and attached directly to the cylinder block and the sump body.
A terminal post on the generator provides the connection point for the battery positive cable. A single pin electrical connector
on the rear cover provides the interface for a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection with the ECM. A pulley on the
front of the generator is driven at approximately three times engine speed by the accessory drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive (303-05 Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
When the engine is running the generator produces an alternating current, which is converted to a direct current internally.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network); N = Medium speed CAN; O = LIN bus

1 - Battery
2 - Positive remote charge terminal
3 - Starter motor
4 - Generator
7 - Battery monitoring sensor
-
8 CJB (central junction box)
The output voltage required from the generator is calculated by the battery monitoring system. For additional information,
refer to Battery, Mounting and Cables (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Description and Operation).
The battery monitoring system signals the required voltage to the ECM via the CJB (central junction box) and the instrument
cluster. The ECM then transmits the required voltage on the LIN bus connection with the voltage regulator in the generator.
The output from the generator is supplied to the battery through the main battery positive cable.
The ECM will over-ride the voltage value requested by the battery monitoring system if it detects a fault in the generator.
The ECM also signals the instrument cluster to display a warning message if it detects a fault with the generator.
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Generator
Removal


stands.

and Installation).
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
 Torque: 40 Nm
7. Torque: 12 Nm

 Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the accessory drive belt is correctly located

on each pulley.

damage.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
Navigation System Map Updates
Map Update Applicability

Vehicle Pre - 10MY 10 MY 11 MY 12MY 13MY
XK DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD
XF DVD DVD DVD USB USB
XJ - USB USB USB USB
Freelander DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD
Discovery 3 DVD - - - -
Discovery 4 - External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool USB USB
Range Rover Evoque - - - USB USB
Range Rover Sport DVD External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool USB USB
Range Rover (L322) DVD External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool -
Range Rover (L405) - - - - USB
Mapping Regions
Region Mapping Area
1 North America (USA, Canada and Mexico)
2 Western and Eastern Europe
3 Japan
4 Middle East (Bahrain, Jordan, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia and UAE
5 South Africa
6 South America (Brazil and Argentina)
7 Russia
8 Pacific (Australia and New Zealand)
9 South East Asia (Malaysia and Singapore)
DVD Map Updates
Vehicles equipped with the 'remote' navigation module are supplied with a DVD map update which is loaded into and
left in the navigation module. Map data is read directly from the DVD. This update can be carried out by the customer.
External HD Service Tool Map Updates
Discovery 4, Range Rover Sport and Range Rover vehicles, equipped with a HDD (hard disc drive) integrated into the
touch screen, are updated at point of service. Dealers are supplied with a set of master pack map update DVD's which
are loaded onto the dealer Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment. The map data is then loaded from the
diagnostic equipment onto the navigation tool hard drive. The map data is loaded to the touch s screen from the
navigation tool hard drive.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
NOTE: The navigation update tool does not need the map data loading every time. This is only necessary when a new
map update DVD is released.
 Using the approved Jaguar/Land Rover diagnostic equipment select the navigation update tool.
 Select Setup on th navigation update tool.
 Connect the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment using the USB
cable and press Continue proceed.
 The navigation update tool will then check the connection.
 Select your preferred language from the drop down menu then press Save and Continue Setup to proceed.
 When the navigation update tool confirms the initial setup is complete, press Continue to proceed.
 The navigation update tool will the return to the main menu screen, select Load Map Data to proceed.
 Disconnect then reconnect, the USB cable connecting to the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover
approved diagnostic equipment, press Continue proceed.
 The navigation update tool will then check the connection.

 Insert map update disk 1 into the DVD drive of the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment and press
Continue proceed
 The navigation update tool will then read the map data
 Map data will then be copied from disk 1 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
 Insert map update disk 2 into the DVD drive and press Continue proceed
 Map data will then be copied from disk 2 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
 Map data is now ready to be uploaded onto the navigation update tool, press Continue proceed.
 The map data is now being uploaded onto the navigation update tool.
 Map data upload is now complete.
 Disconnect the navigation update tool from Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
 Connect the navigation update tool to the vehicle using the firewire cable.
 Select Navigation using the touch screen display soft key.
 Select Navigation Setup using the touch screen soft key.
 Select Map Change using the touch screen.

 Select map region using the touch screen display and press Map Data Update to continue.
 The current map data version and the proposed update map data versions will now be shown, Select the
relevant region, using the related touch screen key to proceed.
 Select OK to input the licence key using the touch screen.

 Input the licence key using the touch screen display and press OK to continue.
 Select OK using the touch screen.
 The map update will begin.

 When the map update is complete a message will be shown in the touch screen, select OK to continue using the
touch screen display soft key. The navigation system will restart with the new map data.
 Disconnect the navigation update tool from the vehicle.
USB Map Updates
All Gen 2.1 equipped vehicles are supplied with a USB map updates, these updates can be carried out by the customer.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
 Navigate to the touch screen Home Menu screen.

 Insert the USB memory stick containing the map data into the vehicle USB port.
 Press Continue on the touch screen to proceed with the installation of the map update.
 using the touch screen enter the licence code and press OK to proceed.
 NOTE: Selecting 'Cancel' returns to the 'Home Menu' screen, the map update will continue to run in the
background
The map update will begin and a message will be displayed in the touch screen display advising that navigation
is unavailable.
 Map update progress can be viewed as a percentage of the completed download in the Home Menu screen.
 When the update is complete a message is displayed informing the user.

 The navigation will restart upon completion of the map update.
NOTE: Remove USB stick immediately
 Exit, lock the vehicle and leave for at 15 minutes before using the navigation system.
Japanese Navigation
The Japanese satellite navigation system uses a separate navigation computer module.
The HDD in the ACM/IAM is not used for navigation downloads in this market.
Map updates are supplied in DVD format. The DVD is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read directly from
the DVD.
Asia Navigation
The Asia market navigation system is an aftermarket unit.
Map updates are supplied in an SD card format. The SD card is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read
directly from the SD card.
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Audio
System
For a detailed description of the Information and Entertainment System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual. REFER to:
Audio System (415-01A Audio Unit, Description and Operation),
Antenna (415-02 Antenna, Description and Operation),
Speakers (415-03 Speakers, Diagnosis and Testing).
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
 Integrated audio module  Fuses
 Information and entertainment module  Loose or corroded connector(s)
 Audio amplifier  Integrated audio module
 Compact disc player jammed, not loading  Information and entertainment module
 Scratched/dirty compact discs  Audio amplifier
 Speakers  Speakers
Symptom Chart
Symptom Display Possible Causes Action

Steering wheel switches Display normal  Switch circuit fault  GO to Pinpoint Test A.
inoperative (information and
entertainment system)
Poor audio quality (all Display normal  MOST harness  Check MOST harness connectors for
sources) connections loose security
 MOST harness  Check MOST harness connectors for
connections contamination
contaminated  Check the routing of the MOST
 MOST harness harness
misrouted
 Too many bends
 Bend radius
exceeding 25mm
Information and Touch screen  MOST network fault  REFER to: Communications Network
entertainment system blank or (418-00 Module Communications
inoperative displaying a Network, Diagnosis and Testing).
flashing logo
DTC Index
Information and Entertainment Module
into account.

B1A59- Sensor 5volt supply -  Internal electronic failure Suspect Information and Entertainment Control
49 internal electronic Module internal fault, refer to the new module
failure installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
B1D21- Remote Control Switch  Steering Wheel Audio Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
11 - circuit short to ground Switch circuit short to Steering wheel Audio Switch circuit for short to
ground ground. For steering wheel audio control switch
tests. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
B1D21- Remote Control Switch  Steering Wheel Audio Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
15 - circuit short to battery Switch circuit, short to Steering wheel Audio Switch circuit for short to
or open power or high resistance power or high resistance. For steering wheel audio
control switch tests. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
U0010- Medium speed CAN  CAN Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 communication Bus - Can Bus circuit for fault, if circuit is correct suspect
no sub type information faulty module, refer to the new module installation
note at the top of the DTC Index.
U0156- Lost Communication  This is not the factory Refit original Module/Component or configure new
4A With Information installed module the stored module.
Center "A" - incorrect VIN does not match
component installed
U0159- Lost Communication  CAN Bus communication Check Parking Aid Module for stored DTCs. Refer
00 With Parking Assist fault to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can
Control Module "A" - no Bus circuit for fault.
sub type information
U0163- Lost Communication  No communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 With Navigation Control Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Multi
Module - no sub type Media Module for circuit fault.
information
4A With Navigation Control installed module the stored module.
Module - incorrect VIN does not match
component installed
00 With Radio - no sub Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Radio
type information Module for circuit fault.
4A With Radio - incorrect installed module the stored module.
component installed VIN does not match
U0186- Lost communication  No communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 with audio amplifier - Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Power
no sub type information Amplifier for circuit fault.
4A With Audio Amplifier installed module the stored module.
"A" - incorrect VIN does not match
component installed
00 with satellite radio Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to SDARS
tuner - no sub type Receiver for circuit fault.
information
4A With "Digital Audio installed module the stored module.
Control Module A" - VIN does not match
incorrect component
installed
00 with telephone module Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Bluetooth
- no sub type Phone Module for circuit fault.
information
4A With Telephone Control installed module the stored module.
Module - incorrect VIN does not match
component installed
00 With Digital Audio Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Digital
Control Module "C" - no Audio Control Module for circuit fault.
4A With Digital Audio installed module the stored module.
Control Module "C" - VIN does not match
incorrect component
installed
00 With Accessory Protocol Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Portable
Interface Module - no audio interface module for circuit fault.
4A With Accessory Protocol installed module the stored module.
Interface Module - VIN does not match
incorrect component
installed
00 With Front Controls / Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to
Display Interface Infotainment Control Module for circuit fault.
Module - no sub type
information
4A With Front Controls / installed module the stored module.
Display Interface VIN does not match
Module - incorrect
component installed
U0300- Internal control module  Car Configuration data is Update Information and entertainment control
00 software incompatibility not compatible with the module software using the manufacturer approved
- no sub type Information and diagnostic system.
information entertainment control
module software
U0300- Internal control module  System program failure Update Information and entertainment control
51 software incompatibility module software using the manufacturer approved
- not programmed diagnostic system.
U1A15- Incomplete MOST ring  Missing message Clear DTC , Cycle ignition. DTC should not return.
87 reported by
Information and
Entertainment control
module - missing
message
U1A24- MOST Ring Complete.  MOST Ring communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 No Communication - no fault MOST ring for circuit break.
U2101- Control Module  Car-configuration Check and reset car configuration parameters as
00 Configuration parameters incorrect required using the manufacturer approved
Incompatible - no sub diagnostic system.
type information
U3000- Stored vehicle  Car Configuration data is Update Information and entertainment control
55 configuration data does not compatible with the module software using the manufacturer approved
not match - not information and diagnostic system.
configured entertainment control
module software
U3000- Control module -  Missing message Clear DTC, Cycle Ignition. If DTC returns update
87 missing message Information and entertainment control module
software using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Clear DTC, Cycle Ignition, Read
DTCs, If DTC returns suspect Information and
entertainment control module, refer to the new
Index.
U3002- Vehicle Identification  Vehicle/component mis- Install original module, check for DTCs and refer
81 Number (VIN) - invalid match. Corrupt VIN data to relevant DTC Index.
serial data received being transmitted, module
vehicle
U0191- Lost Communication  No communication with TV Check Touch Screen for stored DTCS.
00 With Television - no module
4A With Television - installed module the stored module.
incorrect component VIN does not match
installed
Audio Amplifier (vehicles with premium audio)
into account.

B1A01- Speaker #1 - circuit  Front passenger Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front
13 open speaker circuits - high passenger speaker circuits for high resistance.
resistance
B1A02- Speaker #2 - circuit  Front driver speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front
13 open circuits - high driver speaker circuits for high resistance.
resistance
B1A03- Speaker #3 - circuit  Rear left speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear left
13 open circuit - high speaker circuit for high resistance.
resistance
B1A04- Speaker #4 - circuit  Rear right speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
13 open circuit - high right speaker circuit for high resistance.
resistance
B1A05- Speaker #5 - circuit  Front center speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front
13 open circuit - high center speaker circuit for high resistance.
resistance
B1A06- Speaker #6 - circuit  Sub-woofer speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test sub-
13 open circuit - high woofer speaker circuit for high resistance.
resistance
B1A01- Speaker#1 - general  General electrical Carry out the pinpoint test associated with this DTC
01 electrical failure failure using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
B1A02- Speaker #2 - general  General electrical Carry out the pinpoint test associated with this DTC
B1A09- Short circuit of one or  Short to ground Check for additional front speaker DTCs and refer to
11 both front speaker DTC Index.
output - circuit short to
ground
B1A10- Short circuit of one or  Short to ground Check for additional rear speaker DTCs and refer to DTC
11 both rear speaker Index.
output - circuit short to
ground
B1A11- Speaker#11 - circuit  Short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check all
12 short to battery speaker circuits for short to power.
U2003- Fibre optic  Component or system Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Clear
98 communication Bus - over temperature DTC and re-test/monitor condition.
component or system
over temperature
U3000- Control module -  Software Re-configure the audio amplifier as an existing control
05 system programming incompatibility module, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failures  The version of the system.
Local Configuration file
does not match that
expected
U3000- Control module -  General memory Re-configure the audio amplifier as an existing control
42 general memory failure failure module, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear DTC, cycle ignition and read DTCs. If DTC
returns, suspect audio amplifier module and install a
new module. Refer to the new module installation note
at the top of the DTC Index.
U3000- Control module - data  Data memory failure Re-configure the audio amplifier as an existing control
44 memory failure module, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear DTC, cycle ignition and read DTCs. If DTC
returns, suspect audio amplifier module and install a
new module. Refer to the new module installation note
at the top of the DTC Index.
U3000- Stored vehicle  Incorrect car Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
55 configuration data does configuration data diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC
not match - not received remains suspect the audio amplifier. Refer to the new
configured module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
U3000- Control module -  Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
87 missing message diagnostic system. Check audio amplifier for DTCs and
refer to the DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
U3000- Control module -  Component or system Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Clear
98 component or system over temperature DTC and re-test/monitor condition.
over temperature
U3003- Battery voltage - circuit  Circuit voltage below Carry out the pinpoint test associated with this DTC
16 voltage below threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
threshold
U3003- Battery voltage - circuit  Circuit voltage above Carry out the pinpoint test associated with this DTC
17 voltage above threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
threshold
U3006- Control module - circuit  Short to power Install a new audio amplifier module, refer to the new
12 short to battery module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
U3006- Control module - circuit  Circuit voltage below Install a new audio amplifier module, refer to the new
16 voltage below threshold module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
threshold
Digital Audio Control Module C (DACMC)
into account.
DTC Description Possible causes Action

B1A56- Antenna - general  Antenna general signal failure Renew the diversity antenna amplifier.
02 signal failure
B1A56- Antenna - circuit  Diversity antenna amplifier circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the
11 short to ground short to ground diversity antenna amplifier circuit and the
antenna for short circuit to ground.
B1A56- Antenna - circuit  Diversity antenna amplifier circuit Refer to the electrical guides and check the
12 short to battery short to power diversity antenna amplifier circuit and the
antenna for short circuit to power.
B1A56- Antenna - circuit  Diversity antenna amplifier circuit NOTE: This DTC is always logged in X150 XK
13 open open circuit 2010 model year.
Repair action is not required.

U200D- Control Module  Diversity antenna amplifier power NOTE: This DTC is always logged in X150 XK
14 Output Power A - supply circuit short to ground or open 2010 model year.
circuit short to circuit
ground or open
Repair action is not required.
U3000- Control Module -  Diversity antenna amplifier internal Renew the amplifier module.
04 system internal failure
failures
U3000- Control Module -  Diversity antenna amplifier internal Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
4A incorrect incorrect component installed system select the vehicle configuration main
component  The module has been installed to a menu, select configure existing modules
installed vehicle not configured to accept it menu and program the module.
U3000- Control Module -  Diversity antenna amplifier not Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
55 not configured configured correctly system select the vehicle configuration main
menu, select configure existing modules
menu and program the module.
U3000- Control Module -  Missing message Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
87 missing message system select the vehicle configuration main
menu, select configure existing modules
menu and program the module.
U3000- Control Module -  Diversity antenna amplifier component Consider moving the amplifier mounting
98 component or or system over temperature position to prevent unit overheating. Cool
system over the vehicle interior down by ensuring it is in
temperature the shade and have the A/C on cool. When
cool, clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the amplifier
module.
U3003- Battery Voltage -  Mismatch in battery voltage of 2 volts Refer to the electrical guides and check that
62 signal compare or more for longer than 1 minute, power supply voltage at Digital Audio
failure between the measured battery voltage Control Module C and Rear Junction Box is
at the Digital Audio Control Module C not different by more than 2 volts. Rectify as
and the battery voltage signal sent required.
from the Rear Junction Box.
Integrated Audio Module
into account.
B1B69- 12 Volt supply circuit  Antenna power supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
15 - circuit short to - short to power, high antenna power supply circuit for short to power and
battery or open resistance high resistance.
B1B69- 12 Volt supply circuit  Antenna power supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
11 - circuit short to - short to ground antenna power supply circuit for short to ground.
ground
B1D19- Compact disc unit -  Circuit voltage below Install a new integrated audio module, refer to the
16 circuit voltage below threshold new module installation note at the top of the DTC
threshold Index.
B1D19- Compact disc unit -  Commanded position not Install a new integrated audio module, refer to the
77 commanded position reachable new module installation note at the top of the DTC
not reachable Index.
B1D19- Compact disc unit -  No operation Install a new integrated audio module, refer to the
93 no operation new module installation note at the top of the DTC
Index.
B1A01- Speaker #1 - circuit  Front driver speaker circuits Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 short to ground - short to ground front driver speaker circuits for short to ground.
B1A01- Speaker #1 - circuit  Front driver speaker circuits Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
12 short to battery - short to power front driver speaker circuits for short to power.
B1A01- Speaker #1 - circuit  Front driver speaker circuits Carry out the pinpoint test associated with this DTC
1A resistance below - resistance below threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system.
1B resistance above - resistance above threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system.
1C voltage out of range - voltage out of range using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
B1A02- Speaker #2 - circuit  Front passenger speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 short to ground circuits - short to ground front passenger speaker circuits for short to
ground.
B1A02- Speaker #2 - circuit  Front passenger speaker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
12 short to battery circuits - short to power front passenger speaker circuits for short to power.
B1A02- Speaker #2 - circuit  Front passenger speaker Carry out the pinpoint test associated with this DTC
1A resistance below circuits - resistance below using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold threshold system.
1B resistance above circuits - resistance above using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold threshold system.
1C voltage out of range circuits - voltage out of using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
range system.
B1A03- Speaker #3 - circuit  Rear left speaker circuits - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
11 short to ground short to ground left speaker circuits for short to ground.
B1A03- Speaker #3 - circuit  Rear left speaker circuits - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
12 short to battery short to power left speaker circuits for short to power.
B1A03- Speaker #3 - circuit  Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out the pinpoint test associated with this DTC
1A resistance below resistance below threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system.
1B resistance above resistance above threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system.
1C voltage out of range voltage out of range using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
B1A04- Speaker #4 - circuit  Rear right speaker circuits - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
11 short to ground short to ground right speaker circuits for short to ground.
B1A04- Speaker #4 - circuit  Rear right speaker circuits - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
12 short to battery short to power right speaker circuits for short to power.
B1A04- Speaker #4 - circuit  Rear right speaker circuits - Carry out the pinpoint test associated with this DTC
1A resistance below resistance below threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system.
13 open resistance above threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
1C voltage out of range voltage out of range using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
B1D78- Auxiliary input -  Auxiliary input circuit - short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 circuit short to to ground Auxiliary input circuits for short to ground.
ground
B1D78- Auxiliary input -  Auxiliary input circuit - short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
12 circuit short to to power Auxiliary input circuits for short to power.
battery
B1D78- Auxiliary input -  Auxiliary input circuit - high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
13 circuit open resistance Auxiliary input circuits for high resistance.
B1D79- Microphone input -  Microphone input circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 circuit short to short to ground microphone input circuits for short to ground.
ground
12 circuit short to short to power microphone input circuits for short to power.
battery
13 circuit open high resistance microphone input circuits for high resistance.
B1134- Phone input - circuit  Phone input circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
11 short to ground ground phone input circuits for short to ground.
B1134- Phone input - circuit  Phone input circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
12 short to battery power phone input circuits for short to power.
B1134- Phone input - circuit  Phone input circuit - high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
13 open resistance phone input circuits for high resistance.
U3000- Control module -  Internal electronic failure Suspect the integrated audio module, refer to the
49 internal electronic new module installation note at the top of the DTC
failure Index.
U3000- Stored vehicle  Incorrect car configuration Re-configure the Auxiliary Junction Box using the
55 configuration data data received manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear
does not match - not DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains suspect the
configured integrated audio module, refer to the new module
installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
U3000- Control module -  Missing message Re-configure the Auxiliary Junction Box using the
87 missing message manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
integrated audio module for DTCs and refer to the
DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
U3000- Control module -  Component or system over Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
98 component or system temperature Clear DTC and re-test/monitor condition.
over temperature
U3003- Battery voltage -  Mis-match of battery Carry out the pinpoint test associated with this DTC
62 signal compare voltage, of 2 volts or lower, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure between integrated audio system.
module and Auxiliary
Junction Box
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT TESTS

CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
1 Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2 Wait one minute for the supplemental restraints system back-up power to dissipate.
3 Disconnect the information and entertainment module connector, IP087.
 Information and entertainment module connector, IP087 pin 07, harness side
 GROUND
Is the resistance 5036.71 ohms?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A8.
A2: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL MUTE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1 PRESS and HOLD the MUTE switch
 GROUND

Yes
GO to A3.
No
Install a new steering wheel audio control switch assembly.
REFER to: Steering Wheel Audio Controls (415-01A Audio Unit, Removal and Installation).
A3: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SOURCE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1 PRESS and HOLD the SOURCE switch
 GROUND
Yes
GO to A4.
No
A4: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SEEK DOWN SWITCH CIRCUIT
1 OPERATE and HOLD the SEEK DOWN switch
 GROUND
Yes
GO to A5.
No
A5: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SEEK UP SWITCH CIRCUIT
1 OPERATE and HOLD the SEEK UP switch
 GROUND
Yes
GO to A6.
No
A6: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL VOLUME + SWITCH CIRCUIT
1 OPERATE and HOLD the VOLUME + switch
 GROUND
Yes
GO to A7.
No
A7: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL VOLUME - SWITCH CIRCUIT
1 OPERATE and HOLD the VOLUME - switch
 GROUND
Yes
No fault is indicated with the steering wheel audio control switches or circuit. Check the integrity
of all connections, TEST the system for normal operation.
No
1 Disconnect the clockspring connector IP042.
 Clockspring connector IP042, pin 03, component side
 Clockspring connector IP042, pin 06, component side

Yes
GO to A13.
No
GO to A9.
1 Disconnect the clockspring connector SW001.
 Clockspring connector SW001, pin 04, harness side

Yes
INSTALL a new clockspring.
REFER to: Clockspring (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
No
GO to A10.
1 Disconnect the steering wheel audio control switch connector SW003.
 Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 04, component side
 Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 01, component side

Yes
GO to A11.
No
Install a new steering wheel audio control switch.
 Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 01, harness side

Yes
REPAIR the circuit - audio control switch connector SW003, pin 01 to clockspring connector
normal operation.
No
GO to A12.
 Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 04, harness side

Yes
REPAIR the circuit - audio control switch connector SW003, pin 04 to clockspring connector
normal operation.
No
No fault is indicated with the steering wheel audio control switches or circuit. Check integrity of
all connections and TEST system for normal operation.
 Clockspring connector IP042, pin 03, harness side
 Information and entertainment module connector IP087, pin 07, harness side
Yes
REPAIR the circuit - clockspring connector IP042, pin 03 to information and entertainment
module connector IP087, pin 07. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST
the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A14.
 Clockspring connector IP042, pin 06, harness side
 GROUND point G40AR/1

Yes
REPAIR the circuit - clockspring connector IP042, pin 06 to GROUND point G40AR/1. For
additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
No fault is indicated with the steering wheel audio control switches or circuit. Check integrity of
all connections and TEST system for normal operation.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Cellular
Phone
For a detailed description of the telephone system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Cellular Phone (419-08 Cellular Phone, Description and Operation).
NOTE: Prior to starting any diagnostics, ensure that the customer handset is on the Jaguar Approved Phone List (as
found in the vehicle technology information on the external Jaguar website). If the customer handset is not on the
approved phone list it should NOT be used when carrying out these diagnostics, the technician should test using an
approved handset only.
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the telephone.
Visual Inspection
 Microphone  Electrical connectors
 Bluetooth antenna  Wiring harness for damage or corrosion
 Fuses
System/Carrier Concerns - All Systems
Dropped calls, bad connections, noisy audio and other intermittent symptoms usually indicate a system or cellular
carrier concern, and are not the fault of the phone itself. Such symptoms may occur in situations such as the following:
 In certain geographic areas (for example: areas of excessive foliage or hills) or at the edge of coverage areas
 At the same place each day
 At the same time each day
 Under bridges, tunnels, in lower freeways, or in congested downtown areas
If the customer phone exhibits any of the above symptoms or symptoms occur under the above conditions, the
customer or the dealer should contact customer assistance at their particular cellular provider/carrier.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Action
Unable to pair  GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Not Auto Connecting  GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Poor Quality Audio  GO to Pinpoint Test C.
No Audio to 3rd Party  GO to Pinpoint Test D.
No Audio from 3rd Party  GO to Pinpoint Test E.
No Audio  GO to Pinpoint Test F.
DTC Index

B1A5613 Bluetooth antenna  Open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test blue
tooth antenna circuit for open circuit
B1D7984 Microphone input  Signal amplitude < minimum Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
microphone input circuit for short/open circuit.
Check integrated audio module for DTCs and refer to
DTC Index.
REFER to: Audio System (415-00 Information and
Entertainment System - General Information,
U1A0088 Private Bus circuit  BT chipset communications Install a new telephone module, refer to the new
failure module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U210000 Control module  Initial configuration not Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
complete approved diagnostic system. If DTC remains, carry
out CAN network tests
U210100 Control module  Configuration incompatible Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. If DTC remains,
suspect the telephone module, refer to the new
U300044 Control module  Data memory failure Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC
remains install a new telephone module, refer to the
new module installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
U300045 Control module  Program memory failure Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC
remains install a new telephone module, refer to the
new module installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
U300055 Stored vehicle  Incorrect car configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
configuration data data received approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test.
does not match If the DTC remains suspect the telephone module,
refer to the new module installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
U300087 Control module  Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check telephone
module for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Check
CAN network integrity using the manufacturer
U300098 Control module  Component or system over Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
temperature Clear DTC and re-test/monitor condition for re-
occurrence
U300362 Battery voltage  Mis-match of battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
voltage, of 2 volts or lower, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
between telephone module system
and RJB
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : UNABLE TO PAIR

CONDITIONS
A1: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
NOTE: Prior to continuing with any diagnosis, ensure that the Customer telephone and level of software is included on
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the bluetooth function is
activated and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is shown on vehicle display.
Is 'No Phone Fitted' displayed?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Locate the connected telephone and if not Customer telephone, disconnect from the system.
A2: TELEPHONE BLUETOOTH DEVICE SEARCH
1 Carry out Bluetooth device search using Customer handset.
Is 'Jaguar' identified in Bluetooth device list?
Yes
Select device from list, then continue with diagnosis.GO to A3.
No
Carry out further Bluetooth device search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20
seconds between searches. If 'Jaguar' still not identified in Bluetooth device list, set ignition status
to OFF, wait approximately 30 seconds and set ignition status to ON. Carry out further Bluetooth
device search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20 seconds between searches. If
'Jaguar' still not identified in Bluetooth device list, contact your local in market support for further
assistance.
A3: TELEPHONE HANDSET ERROR
1 Check for any error shown on the telephone handset when 'Jaguar' is selected from the Bluetooth
device list.
Was an error immediately shown on the telephone handset?
Yes
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt selection, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If error still being displayed, contact your local
in market support for assistance.
No
Enter PIN '1313' then continue with diagnosis.GO to A4.
A4: PIN ENTRY STATUS
1 Check for successful PIN entry.
Was PIN entry successful?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt PIN entry, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If PIN entry is still un-successful, contact your
local in market support for assistance.
A5: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is still shown on vehicle display.
Is 'No Phone Fitted' still displayed?
Yes
From the telephone handset, select the connect option for the 'Land Rover' device identified in the
Bluetooth device list. If 'No Phone Fitted' is still displayed, suspect a telephone handset fault.
Carry out Pinpoint test again using known good telephone handset.
No
The telephone is paired and connected to the system. No further action is required for this
symptom.
PINPOINT TEST B : NOT AUTOMATICALLY CONNECTING

CONDITIONS
B1: BLUETOOTH MODULE PAIRED DEVICE LIST
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the bluetooth and auto
connect functions are activated and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is shown in the Bluetooth Module paired
device list.
Is the Customer telephone in the Bluetooth Module paired device list?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test.GO to A.
B2: CUSTOMER HANDSET PAIRED DEVICE LIST
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Bluetooth Module is shown in the Customer telephone paired
device list.
Is the Bluetooth Module in the Customer telephone paired device list?

Yes
GO to B3.
No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test.GO to A.
B3: CUSTOMER TELEPHONE IN POSITION 1
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is in position 1 in the Bluetooth Module
paired device list.
Is the Customer telephone in position 1?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
Advise Customer that auto connection will only be attempted with the device that is shown in
position 1 in Bluetooth Module paired device list.
B4: CHECK FOR DTC B1A56-13
1 Using Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for DTC B1A56-13.
Is DTC B1A56-13 logged?
Yes
Carry out remedial actions as outlined in DTC Index. If symptom remains, contact your local in
market support for assistance.
No
GO to B5.
B5: BLUETOOTH CONNECTION
1 Carry out checks to determine if Bluetooth connection icon is shown on Customer Bluetooth
telephone screen but shows 'No Phone Fitted' on vehicle screen.
Is Bluetooth connection icon shown on the Customer handset but 'No Phone Fitted' displayed on
vehicle screen?
Yes
GO to B9.
No
GO to B6.
B6: 'LAND ROVER' AUTHORISATION
NOTE: Some handsets may require operator intervention to manually authorise connection.
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'Land Rover' is authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone
device list menu.
Is 'Land Rover' authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone device list menu?
Yes
GO to B7.
No
Advise customer that 'Land Rover' needs to be authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone
device list menu, or operator intervention may be required to manually authorise connection.
B7: SEARCH FOR DEVICES SCREEN
1 Select the search for devices button on the vehicle display.
Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle display?
Yes
Contact your local in market support for assistance.
No
GO to B8.
B8: CYCLE IGNITION AND CHECK SEARCH FOR DEVICES SCREEN
1 Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON.
Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle display?
Yes
No further action required for this Symptom. Possible intermitent fault.
No
B9: PAIRED DEVICE
1 Check Customer telephone paired device list to establish which device the Customer telephone is
connected to.
Is the Customer telephone connected to the vehicle?
Yes
Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON. If Not
Automatically Connecting, contact you local in market support for assistance.
No
Using the Customer telephone controls, disconnect from the currently connected device and
delete from paired device list. Lock vehicle (wait for 60s) before unlocking and turning Igition
status to ON. If Not Automatically Connecting, contact your local in market support for
assistance.
PINPOINT TEST C : POOR QUALITY AUDIO

CONDITIONS
C1: MICROPHONE INSTALLATION
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the telephone is placed
within the vehicle cabin area and is connected to the vehicle via bluetooth.
1 Check that the microphone is installed in the correct location/orientation.
Is the microphone installed in the correct location/orientation?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Install microphone to correct location/orientation.
C2: SIGNAL STRENGTH
1 Check the signal strength displayed on the telephone handset.
Are at least two signal strength bars shown on the telephone handset display?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
Suspect GSM Network issue. This can explain intermittent audio and dropped calls, and the
inability to initiate calls.
C3: POOR AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY ONLY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio from the Third Party only.
Is the poor audio from the Third Party only?
Yes
Suspect GSM Network issue. This can explain intermittent audio and dropped calls, and the
inability to initiate calls.
No
GO to C4.
C4: POOR AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY ONLY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio to the Third Party only.
Is the poor audio to the Third Party only?
Yes
Check and install a new microphone as necessary.
No
GO to C5.
C5: POOR AUDIO WITH VEHICLE STATIONARY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio when the vehicle is
stationary only.
Is the poor audio when the vehicle is stationary only?
Yes
Check and install a new microphone as necessary.
No
GO to C6.
C6: THIRD PARTY MOVING VEHICLE
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if the Third Party is in a moving vehicle.
Is the Third Party in a moving vehicle?
Yes
There are limitations to the way the system can improve audio, and in this situation it is not
possible to determine the source of the audio degradation.
No
GO to C7.
C7: CUSTOMER HEARING ECHO
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if the Customer is hearing an echo.
Is the Customer hearing an echo?
Yes
Echo from the Third Party is not vehicle failure, it is the Third Party set-up. No further action
is required for this symptom.
No
PINPOINT TEST D : NO AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY

D1: MICROPHONE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
1 Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for any logged microphone
DTCs in Audio Front Control module.
Is DTC B1D79-01 logged?
Yes
Carry out diagnosis of electrical failure as advised in Action column of DTC Index.
No
PINPOINT TEST E : NO AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY
E1: 'IN CALL' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'In Call' is shown on the vehicle display.
Is vehicle display showing 'In Call'?
Yes
No
Call has ended. No further action is required for this symptom.
PINPOINT TEST F : NO AUDIO

F1: AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the Third Party.
Is there Audio from the Third Party?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio From Third Party' Pinpoint test.GO to E.
F2: AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio to the Third Party.
Is there Audio to the Third Party?
Yes
GO to F3.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio To Third Party' Pinpoint test.GO to D.
F3: CD OR RADIO AUDIO
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the CD or Radio.
Is there Audio from the CD or Radio?
Yes
GO to F4.
No
Suspect MOST ring fault, refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check/rectify MOST ring as
necessary.
F4: TELEPHONE HANDSET AUDIO
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the telephone handset.
Is there Audio from the telephone handset?
Yes
Ensure vehicle is parked. Disconnect and reconnect handset. If issue not resolved, contact
your local in market support for assistance.
No
Contact you local in market support for assistance.
Audio Unit -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Amplifier to bracket - screw 2.5 - 22
Audio/CD module and climate control module assembly to instrument panel - bolt 3 - 27
Audio/CD and climate control modules to assembly bracket - bolt 3 - 27
Audio/CD and climate control modules to assembly bracket - screw 2.5 - 22
Radio frequency interference suppressor to engine cover bracket - bolt 10 7 88
Steering wheel audio controls - bolt 3.5 2.5 31
Audio Unit - Audio System
COMPONENT LOCATION

2 - Touch Screen Display (TSD)
3 - Remote audio switches
4 - Auxiliary Universal Serial Bus (USB) unit (from 2009 Model Year (MY))
5 - Auxiliary input panel (from 2009 MY)
6 - Integrated audio module
7 - Information and entertainment Module
INTRODUCTION
The audio system contains the following functions:

 Six disc CD autochanger.
 AM/FM tuner.
 Interface Protocol Option Devices (iPod) and USB connectivity (from 2009 MY).
The audio system is available in two versions, standard and premium. The standard audio system uses an internal amplifier
to drive the system speakers. The premium system uses an external amplifier and subwoofer assembly to drive the
speakers.
For additional information, refer to: Speakers (415-03 Speakers, Description and Operation).
Control of the audio system is via the integrated control panel and the TSD, located in the center of the instrument panel,
and the remote audio switches on the steering wheel.
Control signals from the integrated control panel are relayed on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus to the
information and entertainment module. The information and entertainment module relays the control signals to the rest of
the audio system on the Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) ring. The information and entertainment module is the
timing master for the MOST ring and also hosts a gateway function between the medium speed CAN bus and the MOST ring.
On premium audio systems the audio signals are sent on the MOST ring from the integrated audio module to the amplifier.
The control signal from the remote audio switches to the information and entertainment module consists of an analogue
voltage from a resistive ladder.
The iPod and USB connectivity allows audio files on portable media players and mass storage devices (i.e. portable audio
devices) to be played through the speakers of the audio system. The audio system supports portable audio devices with a
storage capacity up to 256 GB (approximately 65,000 music tracks).
The iPod and USB connectivity is provided by:
 • An auxiliary input panel, installed in the cubby box of the floor console.
 • An auxiliary USB unit, attached to the RH rear quarter panel, behind the trim of the luggage compartment.
The auxiliary input panel provides the interface between the portable audio device and the vehicle’s audio system. An iPod
port and a USB port are located in the top of the auxiliary input panel, underneath a protective rubber cover. An iPod
connector lead is supplied with the vehicle. Portable audio devices can be connected to both ports at the same time.
The iPod and USB ports both incorporate a charging function. The maximum charging current supplied is 500 ma.
Auxiliary Input Panel

1 - USB port
2 - iPod port
iPod Connector Lead
The auxiliary USB unit translates the electronic signals from the auxiliary input panel into optical signals and transmits them
on the MOST ring.
Operation of the portable audio device is controlled from the TSD via the integrated audio module. For road safety reasons,
the normal control interface of the portable device is disabled when it is plugged into the auxiliary input panel, and it can
only be controlled from the TSD.
Portable Audio Device Selection on TSD
Some MP3 players have a file system that is not supported by the audio system. To use one of these MP3 players with the
audio system, the MP3 player must be set to USB Removable Device mode or Mass Storage Device mode (see the MP3
player manufacturer’s information for further details). Only files that have been added to the MP3 player in these modes can
be played on the audio system.
A number of other vehicle systems are operated from the TSD and the integrated control panel, or have inputs into the audio
system. These include:
 Air conditioning system.

For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (412-03 Air Conditioning, Description and Operation).
 Navigation.
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Description and Operation).
 Parking aid.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation).
 Telephone.
For additional information, refer to: Cellular Phone (419-08 Cellular Phone, Description and Operation).
Software in the information and entertainment module generates the graphics for the TSD.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM (UP TO 2009 MY)
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = MOST ring

1 - Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
2 - TSD
4 - To speakers
5 - Clock spring
8 - Information and entertainment module
CONTROL DIAGRAM - STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM (FROM 2009 MY)

1 - AJB
2 - TSD
3 - Auxiliary USB unit
5 - To speakers
6 - Auxiliary input panel
7 - Clock spring
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM (UP TO 2009 MY)

1 - AJB
2 - TSD
3 - Audio amplifier
4 - To speakers
7 - Clock spring
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM (FROM 2009 MY)

1 - AJB
2 - TSD
3 - To speakers
4 - Audio amplifier
6 - Auxiliary USB unit
7 - Auxiliary input panel
8 - Clock spring
Audio Unit - Audio System
REFER to: Audio System (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Audio Unit - Amplifier
Removal
NOTE: The component is situated in the passenger footwell. LHD is illustrated the procedure to remove the component
on a RHD vehicle is similar.
1. Remove the instrument panel assembly.

2. Remove the heater duct.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness and electrical

connectors are not damaged during the carpet release.

4. Remove the subwoofer cover.
5. CAUTION: Cover fibre optic cable connectors to minimise

dust ingress and avoid bending the cables in a radius of less
than 30 mm.
Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors.

 Carefully disconnect the MOST connector.
6. Remove the amplifier.

Installation
1. Install the amplifier.
2. Connect the electrical connectors.
 Connect the MOST connector.


depressed.
Install the carpet.

5. Install the heater duct.
 Install the lampholder.
6. Install the instrument panel assembly.

Audio Unit - Audio Unit
Removal
NOTE: This component is easily recognised as a CD multichanger, it is however an audio module and links to the MOST.

Specifications).
2. Remove the navigation screen module.
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System Display
Module (419-07 Navigation System, Removal and Installation).
3. Release the audio/CD module and climatic control
assembly.
 Remove the 4 module bracket Torx bolts.
4. CAUTION: Care must be taken to avoid

damage to the mating surfaces.
Separate the climatic control and audio/CD module

from the module bracket.
 Remove 2 Torx screws securing the
navigation screen to the climatic control
assembly.
5. Remove the CD unit.
Installation
1. NOTE: Carefully check the CD access slot in the climatic control
assembly is aligned to the CD unit after tightening the screws.
This is a visual check only, do not attempt to probe the CD unit
with a sharp object or load a CD .
Carefully install the audio/CD module to the climatic control

assembly.
 Tighten the Torx screws.
2. Install the climatic control assembly and audio/CD module to

the module bracket.
 Install and tighten the navigation screen Torx screws.
 Install the CD module bracket Torx bolts and tighten to 6
Nm (4 lb.ft).
 Install the climatic control assembly Torx bolts and
tighten to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
3. Install the navigation screen module.
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System Display
Module (419-07 Navigation System, Removal and Installation).
Specifications).
Audio Unit - Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Removal
NOTE: This procedure is identical to the removal of the steering wheel speed control switch.
1. Remove the steering wheel switch assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Speed Control Switch (310-
03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Installation
For additional information, refer to: Speed Control Switch (310-
03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Audio Unit - Satellite Radio Tuner
Removal
Coupe
1.
Convertible
2.
3.
All vehicles
4.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: If a new component is installed, a link lead

must be installed to the module in the position
shown.

Information and Entertainment System - Audio Input Control Module
This section of the manual concerns diagnostic procedures for the Dension audio input control module. For a detailed
description of the information and entertainment system, refer to the relevant description and operation sections in the
workshop manual
vehicle
Visual Inspection
 Audio input control module  Fuses
 Audio amplifier module  Loose or corroded connector(s)
 Integrated audio module  Audio amplifier module
 Integrated control panel  Integrated audio module
 Touch screen display  Integrated control panel
 Loudspeakers  Touch screen display
 Loudspeakers
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for diagnostic trouble codes and refer to the relevant diagnostic
trouble codes index
Audio Input Control Module Diagnostics
NOTE: If problems are reported with the audio input control module, prior to further diagnostic checks or replacement
of components, first perform a hardware reset by depressing the reset button for a minimum of two seconds. If
problems persist, refer to the symptom charts below
Performing A Hardware Reset
Symptom Chart - Intermittent Fault With iPOD® Playback

Intermittent fault  The connected iPOD® unit has  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
with iPOD® crashed or frozen test A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below
playback GO to Pinpoint Test A.
 The connected iPOD® unit's  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
battery is not holding charge test A2 "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to
and requires replacement Pinpoint Test A.
 The iPOD® dock cable is not  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
securely installed test A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When
 The iPOD® dock cable is faulty Connected To The Audio Input Control Module" below
GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Symptom Chart - Intermittent Fault With Playback From USB Device

Intermittent  The USB memory stick  Check for correct operation by connecting another working
fault with USB is damaged or faulty USB memory stick loaded with a compatible test file (files may
playback  The USB memory stick be downloaded from Dension website). If fault clears, then the
is incompatible with original USB stick should be replaced. If problem persists,
the audio input control suspect a fault with the USB extension cable
module
 The USB extension  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test B3
cable is not securely "Check The USB Extension Cable Is Operational And Securely
installed Installed" below GO to Pinpoint Test B.
 The USB extension
cable is faulty
 The audio input control  Ensure all connectors of the audio input control module power
module power harness harness are correctly secured
is not securely installed  If problem persists, check and install a new audio input control
 The audio input control module power harness
module power harness
is faulty
Not all sound  Sound files may be  Check that affected sound file is encoded in a compatible file
files on the USB saved in an format
are played incompatible file format  Compatible file formats: AAC (up to 320 kbit/s); MP3 (up to
320 kbit/s); MP3 variable bit rate (up to 320 kbit/s); WAV -
uncompressed files; OGG (up to 320 kbit/s); WMA - except
DRM protected files (up to 320 kbit/s)
 Sound files may be  Check integrity of affected files and remove any damaged files
corrupted from the memory stick
Symptom Chart - No Response From CDC Button
No response  USB input or iPOD® input  First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD®
when the CDC faulty operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then follow
button is diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test B GO to
pressed Pinpoint Test B.
 If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates
normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as specified in
pinpoint test A GO to Pinpoint Test A.
 The auxiliary input may be  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A5:
switched to bypass mode "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary Input Unit Is
Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
 The audio input control  Ensure all connectors of the audio input control module
module power harness is power harness are correctly secured
not securely installed  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint tests
 The audio input control C1: "Check The Integrity Of Power Supply From Vehicle"
module power and C2: "Check The Integrity And Operation Of The Audio
supply/harness is faulty Input Control Module Power Harness" below GO to Pinpoint
Test C.
 Optical cables/connectors  Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to avoid
(if fitted) are not securely pinching the cable and with no excessive bends or kinks.
installed Ensure all connectors of the optical cables are correctly
 Optical cables/connectors secured. Replace any damaged or faulty optical cables
(if fitted) are faulty and/or connectors as required
 If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical cables
are configured in a closed loop so that the optical circuit is
intact
Symptom Chart - iPOD® Related Faults

iPOD® inoperative  iPOD® configured or  If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback
connected incorrectly operates normally, then follow diagnostic procedures
as specified in pinpoint test A GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® does not operate  The connected iPOD®  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
and in-car display shows unit has crashed or A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
"99" on the screen frozen Pinpoint Test A.
 The connected iPOD®  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
unit's battery is flat and A2 "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to Pinpoint
requires charging Test A.
 The connected iPOD®
unit's battery is not
holding charge and
requires replacement
 The iPOD® unit is not  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
compatible with the A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The Audio
audio input control Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
module
iPOD® playback drops  USB input or iPOD®  First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD®
out and system reverts input faulty operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then
to radio input follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
 If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback
operates normally, then follow diagnostic procedures
unit has crashed or A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
frozen Pinpoint Test A.
holding charge and
 The auxiliary input unit  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
is faulty A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input Unit"
below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® unit will not  The iPOD® unit is not  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
charge when connected compatible with the A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The Audio
to the audio input control audio input control Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
module module
 The iPOD® dock cable  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
is not securely installed A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected
 The iPOD® dock cable To The Audio Input Control Module" below GO to
is faulty Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® unit keeps cutting  The iPOD® unit is not  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
out and rebooting compatible with the A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The Audio
module
 The iPOD® dock cable  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
is not securely installed A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected
 The iPOD® dock cable To The Audio Input Control Module" below GO to
is faulty Pinpoint Test A.
holding charge and
Unable to select specific  Content/sound files  Check if files/content can be accessed by iPOD®
content on the iPOD® corrupted or when it is disconnected from the audio input control
(ie: an individual artist, incompatible with the module. If fault persists, advise customer to renew or
album or song) iPOD® replace the affected files
iPOD® not recognised  The connected iPOD®  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
when connected unit has crashed or A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
frozen Pinpoint Test A.
 USB input or iPOD®  First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD®
input faulty operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then
follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
 If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback
operates normally, then follow diagnostic procedures
 The auxiliary input may  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
be switched to bypass A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
 The auxiliary input unit  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
is faulty A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input Unit"
www.JagDocs.com
below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
holding charge and
 The iPOD® unit is not  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
compatible with the A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The Audio
module
iPOD® connector pins  The iPOD® dock cable  Replace dock cable as required. To ensure optimum
are misaligned is faulty compatibility, the cable with the white mini-DIN
connector - Part No C2S51762 - should be used
iPOD® not working at  Optical  Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to
all. If reset, the system cables/connectors (if avoid pinching the cable and with no excessive bends
will work for 6 songs fitted) are not securely or kinks. Ensure all connectors of the optical cables
then cuts out again. CDC installed are correctly secured. Replace any damaged or faulty
button inoperative and  Optical optical cables and/or connectors as required
CD sometimes cuts off cables/connectors (if  If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical
for 2-3 seconds fitted) are faulty cables are configured in a closed loop so that the
optical circuit is intact
iPOD® inoperative.  The auxiliary input may  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
Display shows no be switched to bypass A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
magazine mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® inoperative.  Audio input control  Download and install the latest system software.
Display shows menu for module software Software releases are available on the Dension
CD6 and has to load all requires updating website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
the tracks
Symptom Chart - USB Memory Stick/Storage Device Related Faults
No playback from memory  Memory stick/storage  If iPOD® operates normally but USB playback is
stick/storage device device configured or faulty, then follow diagnostic procedures as
connected incorrectly specified in pinpoint test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No playback from memory  Sound files may be saved  Check that sound files are encoded in a
stick/storage device and in an incompatible file compatible file format
in-car display shows "99" format  Compatible file formats: AAC (up to 320 kbit/s);
on the screen MP3 (up to 320 kbit/s); MP3 variable bit rate (up
to 320 kbit/s); WAV - uncompressed files; OGG
(up to 320 kbit/s); WMA - except DRM protected
files (up to 320 kbit/s)
 Sound files may be  Check integrity of sound files and remove any
corrupted damaged files from the memory stick
 The auxiliary input may be  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
switched to bypass mode test B5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The
Auxiliary Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
 The auxiliary input unit is  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
faulty test B6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary
Input Unit" below GO to Pinpoint Test B.
 The storage capacity of  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
the memory stick/storage test B4 "Check The Capacity Of The Memory
device is close to or Stick/Storage Device" below GO to Pinpoint Test
exceeds 8 Gigabytes B.
Connecting a device to the  The storage capacity of  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
USB port is causing in-car the memory stick/storage test B4 "Check The Capacity Of The Memory
display screen to freeze device is close to or Stick/Storage Device" below GO to Pinpoint Test
exceeds 8 Gigabytes B.
Symptom Chart - System Faults
System defaults to Audio/CD  The auxiliary input unit  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
Changer may be switched to test A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The
bypass mode Auxiliary Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
 The auxiliary input unit  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
is faulty test A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary
Input Unit" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
 The memory  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
stick/storage device is test B1 "Check For Correct Formatting" below GO
not correctly formatted to Pinpoint Test B.
 The USB extension  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
cable is not securely test B3 "Check The USB Extension Cable Is
installed Operational And Securely Installed" below GO to
 The USB extension Pinpoint Test B.
cable is faulty
 The USB memory stick  Check for correct operation by connecting another
is damaged or faulty working USB memory stick loaded with a
 The USB memory stick compatible test file (files may be downloaded from
is incompatible with Dension website). If fault clears, then the original
the audio input control USB stick should be replaced. If problem persists,
module suspect a fault with the USB extension cable
 The storage capacity  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
of the memory test B4 "Check The Capacity Of The Memory
stick/storage device is Stick/Storage Device" below GO to Pinpoint Test B.
close to or exceeds 8
Gigabytes
 The connected iPOD®  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
unit's battery is flat test A2 "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to
and requires charging Pinpoint Test A.
holding charge and
 The iPOD® unit is not  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
compatible with the test A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The
audio input control Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
module Test A.
 The connected iPOD®  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
unit has crashed or test A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®"
frozen below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
 No sound from  The audio input control  Ensure all connectors of the audio input control
speakers (either module power harness module power harness are correctly secured
front/rear or is not securely  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
left/right) during installed tests C1: "Check The Integrity Of Power Supply
playback from  The audio input control From Vehicle" and C2: "Check The Integrity And
iPOD®/memory stick module power Operation Of The Audio Input Control Module
 Audio system loses supply/harness is Power Harness" below GO to Pinpoint Test C.
connection to faulty
iPOD®/memory stick  Optical  Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately
during playback cables/connectors (if to avoid pinching the cable and with no excessive
 iPOD® and radio fitted) are not securely bends or kinks. Ensure all connectors of the optical
playback skips after installed cables are correctly secured. Replace any damaged
unit has been  Optical or faulty optical cables and/or connectors as
operating for 4 cables/connectors (if required
minutes fitted) are faulty  If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical
cables are configured in a closed loop so that the
optical circuit is intact
 The iPOD® dock cable  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
is not securely test A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When
installed Connected To The Audio Input Control Module"
 The iPOD® dock cable below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
is faulty
 The USB extension  See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
cable is not securely test B3 "Check The USB Extension Cable Is
installed Operational And Securely Installed" below GO to
 The USB extension Pinpoint Test B.
cable is faulty
Menu operation inoperative.  Audio input control  Download and install the latest system software.
Display shows menu for CD6 module software Software releases are available on the Dension
requires updating website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
Poor sound quality during  Music files encoded at NOTE: The minimum recommended bit rate for high
iPOD® or memory stick too low bit rate quality audio reproduction is 192 kbps
playback
 Check sound quality when files are played direct
from iPOD®. If problem persists, replace content
with higher bit rate files
PINPOINT TEST A : IPOD® INOPERATIVE

CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE IPOD®
1 Check if the iPOD® has crashed or frozen (it is unresponsive to any control commands)
Has the iPOD® crashed or frozen?
Yes
Reset the iPOD® or refer to Apple service procedures
No
GO to A2.
A2: CHECK THE IPOD® BATTERY
1 Check the charge state of the iPOD® battery
Is the iPOD® battery flat?
Yes
Charge the iPOD® battery for at least 10 minutes either by connecting to the charger supplied
with the iPOD® or by connecting to the audio input control module. If iPOD® will not charge when
connected to the audio input control module and with the ignition on thenGO to A3.
No
GO to A3.
A3: CHECK THE IPOD® IS CHARGING WHEN CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE
iPOD® Dock Connector - Pin Configuration
1 Check that the iPOD® is charging when connected to the audio input control module
2 Ignition switch in position II.
3 Ensure the iPOD® dock cable is securely connected
Does the iPOD® charge up while connected to the audio input control module?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
Check the integrity of the iPOD® dock cable and its connections. Disconnect the iPOD® and check
the voltage readings of the iPOD® dock cable using a multimeter (Pin B8: 5 volts/Pin B15: GND).
If a fault is noted, replace dock cable as required. To ensure optimum compatibility, the cable with
the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762 - should be used. If iPOD® will not charge after
replacement, then GO to A4.
A4: CHECK THE IPOD® IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE
NOTE: Some of the earlier (pre-2004) iPOD® models may not be compatible with the audio input control module. In
order to optimise functionality the audio input control module may require a firmware update and/or connection via the
latest iPOD® dock cable with the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762. See the manufacturer website for
further details - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
NOTE: Some of the earlier (pre-2004) iPOD® models may not be compatible with the audio input control module. In
order to optimise functionality the audio input control module may require a firmware update and/or connection via the
latest iPOD® dock cable with the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762. See the manufacturer website for
further details - http://www.dension.com
1 Determine whether the iPOD® model being used is compatible with the audio input control
module installed in the vehicle
2 Ensure the latest firmware updates are installed and an appropriate iPOD® dock cable is securely
connected
3 For advice, check details on the Dension website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
Is the iPOD® compatible with the audio input control module?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Advise customer that an alternative device is required
A5: CHECK IF THE BYPASS SWITCH ON THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT IS ACTIVATED
Auxiliary Input Unit - Bypass Switch
1 Check the status of the bypass switch on the auxiliary input unit
Is the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
Toggle the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position. Turn off the ignition and
wait two minutes until the blue LED on the auxiliary input unit is extinguished. Switch ignition back
on the complete the switching process
A6: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT
1 Check the operation of the auxiliary input unit
2 Disconnect the auxiliary input unit from the audio input control module.
3 Ignition switch in position 0.
4 Wait two minutes
5 Install a new auxiliary input unit
Is the iPOD® now working?
Yes
No
Check the integrity of the iPOD® dock cable and its connectionsGO to A3.
PINPOINT TEST B : USB/STORAGE DEVICE DOES NOT POWER UP WHEN CONNECTED

CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR CORRECT FORMATTING
NOTE: The storage device needs to be configured to FAT16 or FAT32 format
1 Check if the memory stick/storage device is correctly formatted
Is the storage device/memory stick configured to the FAT16 or FAT32 format?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Reformat the storage device as required
B2: CHECK FOR FAULTY OR INCOMPATIBLE MEMORY STICK/STORAGE DEVICE
NOTE: Test files may be downloaded from Dension website
1 Check the operation of the USB port on the auxiliary input unit by connecting another working
USB memory stick/storage device loaded with a compatible test file
Does the system operate normally when another USB memory stick/storage device is connected?
Yes
Replace the original USB memory stick/storage device
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE USB EXTENSION CABLE IS OPERATIONAL AND SECURELY INSTALLED
1 Check the integrity of the USB extension cable and its connections
Is the USB extension cable securely pushed into the USB connection port on the audio input control
module
Yes
Replace the USB extension cable
No
Secure connections and retest
B4: CHECK THE CAPACITY OF THE MEMORY STICK/STORAGE DEVICE
NOTE: The higher the capacity of the memory stick is the longer it takes to register with the audio input control module
and power up. The maximum permitted capacity is 8 Gigabytes
1 Check the storage capacity of the memory stick/storage device does not exceed 8 Gigabytes
Is the storage capacity of the memory stick/storage device 8 Gigabytes or less?
Yes
High capacity devices may require longer to register and should be allowed up to two minutes to
power up following connection to the USB port. If memory stick fails to power up after two
minutes, suspect a faulty memory stick GO to B2. or USB extension cable GO to B3.
No
The memory stick/storage device exceeds the maximum permitted capacity. Replace with a device
with a capacity of 8 Gigabytes or less
B5: CHECK IF THE BYPASS SWITCH ON THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT IS ACTIVATED
Auxiliary Input Unit - Bypass Switch
1 Check the status of the bypass switch on the auxiliary input unit
Is the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position?
Yes
GO to B6.
No
Toggle the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position. Turn off the ignition and
wait two minutes until the blue LED on the auxiliary input unit is extinguished. Switch ignition
back on the complete the switching process
B6: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT
1 Check the operation of the auxiliary input unit
2 Disconnect the auxiliary input unit from the audio input control module.
3 Ignition switch in position 0.
4 Wait two minutes
5 Replace auxiliary input unit
Is the USB memory stick/storage device now powering up?
Yes
No
Check the integrity of the USB extension cable and its connectionsGO to B3.
PINPOINT TEST C : POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/POWER HARNESS CHECKS

CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY
1 Remove the retrofitted audio input control module power harness
2 Reconnect the original power harness
Are the standard infotainment components on the vehicle operating normally?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Check power and ground connections to the affected modules. Check for related power or lost
communications DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index. Check fuses and battery charging
system. Rectify as necessary
C2: CHECK THE INTEGRITY AND OPERATION OF THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE POWER HARNESS
1 SELECT APPROPRIATE HARNESS TYPE BASED ON CONFIGURATION OF MICROFIT CONNECTOR
Audio Input Control Module Power Harness - 2x11 Microfit Connector
2 Reconnect the retrofit audio input control module power harness
3 Check the voltages of the 2x11 audio input control module microfit connector using a multimeter
 Red wire: permanent 12 volts supply
 Black wire: GND
 Blue wire: switched 12 volts

Audio Input Control Module Power Harness - 2x2 Microfit Connector
4 Reconnect the retrofit audio input control module power harness

5 Check the voltages of the 2x2 audio input control module microfit connector using a multimeter
 Red wire: permanent 12 volts supply
 Black wire: GND
 Purple wire: switched 12 volts

Are the voltage readings correct?
Yes
No further action
No
Replace the audio input control module power harness
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to the relevant DTC index
Antenna -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Body earth point - nut 9 7 80
Electric AM/FM antenna 9 7 80
FM ariel splitter module - nut 7 5 62
Antenna - Antenna
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - VICS beacon antenna (Japan only)
2 - Amplitude Modulation (AM)/Frequency Modulation (FM) electric antenna
3 - FM antenna signal splitter
4 - GPS antenna
5 - Bluetooth antenna
INTRODUCTION
The antenna systems on the vehicle cover the following functions:
 AM/FM radio reception

 Bluetooth connection with the Telephone Control Module
 FM reception for the VICS/TMC function of the navigation system
 Global Positioning System (GPS) signals.
GPS ANTENNA
The GPS antenna is located in the rear liftgate spoiler.
BLUETOOTH ANTENNA
The Bluetooth Antenna is located centrally behind the rear seat. The antenna is used to connect the telephone control
module to a Bluetooth compatible phone. The vehicle audio system can then be used for making and recieving telephone
calls hands free.
For additional information, refer to: Cellular Phone (419-08 Cellular Phone, Description and Operation).
ELECTRIC AM/FM ANTENNA
The electric AM/FM antenna is located on the rear RH quarter of the vehicle. The antenna is controlled by the Integrated
Audio Module, which supplies power to the antenna motor. The antenna is extended when the radio is switched on and
retracted when the system is switched off or the ignition is switched off.
AM/FM ANTENNA AND AMPLIFIER - 08 MODEL YEAR ONWARDS

1 - Antenna
2 - FM amplifier
On all vehicles from 08MY, the AM/FM antenna is located in the rear spoiler. The antenna has a hardwire connection to the
amplifier which is mounted on the inner Left-Hand (LH) side of the lift gate, behind the trim panel. The amplifier is held in
place by a steel strap. The amplifier is connected to the integrated audio module, via the FM antenna signal splitter, by a
coaxial cable.
On coupe models, ground for the antenna amplifier is provided by a strap connected to the lift gate hinge. On convertible
models a block connected directly to the amplifier provides the ground through the vehicle body.
FM ANTENNA SIGNAL SPLITTER
The FM antenna signal splitter is located in the luggage compartment just below the RH rear lamp cluster. The splitter
divides the recieved FM signal between the Intergrated Audio Module and the navigation computer. The navigation computer
uses the FM signal for TMC information
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Description and Operation).
.
VICS BEACON ANTENNA (Japan only)
The VICS beacon antenna is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel adjacent to the windshield. The antenna
receives infra red and microwave data transmissions from roadside transmitters.
SDARS ANTENNA
Where fitted the SDARS antenna is located in the center of the liftgate just in front of the spoiler. The antenna recieves
satellite radio transmissions.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Upto 08 Model Year
NOTE: A=Hardwired; P=MOST; T=Coaxial

1 - SDARS Antenna (where fitted)
2 - VICS beacon antenna (Japan)
3 - GPS antenna
5 - AM/FM electric antenna
-
7 Navigation computer
8 - Telephone control module
10 - SDARS module
From 08 Model Year
NOTE: A=Hardwired; P=MOST; T=Coaxial

Part Number
1 - SDARS Antenna (where fitted)
2 - VICS beacon antenna (Japan)
3 - GPS antenna
5 - AM/FM antenna amplifier
7 - Navigation computer
10 - AM/FM antenna
11 - SDARS module
Antenna - Antenna
Antenna - Antenna
Removal
1. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
2. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
3. Release the antenna.

5. Remove the antenna.
 Disconnect the antenna cable.
 Disconnect the antenna earth strap.
Installation
1. Install the antenna.
 Connect the antenna cable.
 Connect the antenna earth strap.
2. Raise the vehicle on the lift.

3. Secure the antenna.

5. Install the RH rear quarter trim panel.
Speakers -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Front door speaker - screw 2 - 18
Subwoofer speaker - screw 5 4 44
Subwoofer speaker cover - bolt 5 4 44
Subwoofer speaker housing - bolt 5 4 44
Subwoofer speaker housing - nut 5 4 44
Subwoofer speaker housing - screw 5 4 44
Quarter panel speaker - screw 2 - 18
Speakers - Speakers
COMPONENT LOCATION-STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM

1 - Front RH high range speaker
2 - Front RH mid/low range speaker
3 - Rear RH mid/low range speaker
4 - Rear LH mid/low range speaker
5 - Front LH mid/low range speaker
6 - Front LH high range speaker
INTRODUCTION
The standard speaker system comprises 6 speakers that are driven by the Integrated Audio Modules internal amplifier.
CONTROL DIAGRAM-STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM
NOTE: A=Hardwired

7 - Integrated Audio Module
COMPONENT LOCATION-PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM

6 - Subwoofer and power amplifier assembly
8 - Center speaker
INTRODUCTION
Premium audio system is a 7 speaker system which is driven by a Dolby Prologic II Audio amplifier. The subwoofer is located
in the passenger footwell behind a false panel inside its own enclosure. The Dolby Prologic II amplifier is attached to the
front of the subwoofer enclosure.
CONTROL DIAGRAM-PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
NOTE: A=Hardwired

2 - Center speaker
6 - Subwoofer
-
7 Rear LH mid/low range speaker
9 - Power amplifier
Speakers - Speakers
Speakers - Front Door Speaker
Removal
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-
2. Remove the front door speaker.
Installation
1. Install the front door speaker.
2. Install the front door trim panel.

Speakers - Front Door Tweeter Speaker
Removal
1. Remove the exterior mirror trim panel.
2. Release the speaker tweeter.

 Release from the clips.
Installation
1. Install the speaker tweeter.
 Release from the clips.
2. Install the exterior mirror trim panel.

 Secure with the clips.
Speakers - Subwoofer Speaker
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel assembly.
2. Remove the heater duct.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness and electrical

connectors are not damaged during the carpet release.


Remove the subwoofer.

6. Remove the amplifier.
7. Release the subwoofer speaker housing

 Remove both speaker housing support
brackets.
8. CAUTION: Cover fibre optic cable connectors to minimise

dust ingress and avoid bending the cables in a radius of less
than 30 mm.
Remove the subwoofer speaker housing.

 Carefully disconnect the MOST connector.
Installation
1. Install the subwoofer speaker housing.
 Install the brackets.
2. Connect the subwoofer speaker housing electrical connectors.
 Connect the MOST connector.
3. Install the amplifier.

4. Install the subwoofer.


depressed.
Install the carpet.

7. Install the heater duct.
 Install the lampholder.
8. Install the instrument panel assembly.

www.JagDocs.com
Speakers - Quarter Panel Speaker 2-Door
Removal
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Trim Panel -
2-Door (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
2. Remove the quarter panel speaker.
Installation
1. Install the quarter panel speaker.
 Install and tighten the Torx screws.
2. Install the rear quarter trim panel.

2-Door (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
Speakers - Quarter Panel Speaker Convertible
Removal
Convertible (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
2. Remove the quarter panel speaker.
Installation
1. Install the quarter panel speaker.

Convertible (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
Exterior Lighting -
Bulbs
Lamp Bulb Type
Number plate lamp W5WL
Reverse lamp LED (non-serviceable)
Side repeater indicator WY5W
Headlamp unit:
Cornering lamp H8
Dip and main beam projector unit D1S35W
Direction indicator PY21W
Side lamp W5W
Side marker WY5W
Rear lamp unit:
Direction indicator PY21W Silver Vision
Side marker W5W
Stop and tail P21/5W
Tail lamp W5W
Fog lamps:
Front fog lamp H11 55W
Rear fog lamp LED (non-serviceable)
Adjustment
Item Adjustment Setting
Headlamp aim (ROW) -1% +/- 0.1%
Headlamp aim (NAS) -0.7%
Fog lamp aim -2% +/- 0.5%
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Headlamp assembly - bolt 6 4 53
Headlamp leveling, front sensor - bolt 20 15 -
Headlamp leveling module - bolt 4 3 35
Headlamp leveling, rear sensor - bolt 20 15 -
High-mounted stop lamp - screw 2 - 18
Rear lamp assembly to gate/lid - nut 2.5 - 22
Rear lamp assembly to fender - nut 2 - 18
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 - Headlamp leveling/AFS control module
2 - Light sensor
3 - Rear height sensor
4 - Turn signal indicator repeater lamp (2 off)
5 - Cornering lamp
6 - Headlamp power washer
7 - Front side lamp
8 - Xenon headlamp module
9 - Front turn signal indicator
10 - Side marker lamp
11 - Auxiliary lighting switch
12 - Front fog lamp switch
13 - Rear fog lamp switch
14 - License plate lamps
15 - Reverse or rear fog lamp
16 - Side lamp
17 - Rear turn signal indicator
18 - Side lamp/Stop lamp
19 - Rear side marker lamp
20 - High mounted stop lamp
21 - Lighting switch
22 - Front height sensor
23 - Front fog lamp (2 off)
INTRODUCTION
The lighting systems are controlled by the Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) and the central junction box (CJB). The two boxes
contain fuses, relays and microprocessors to control the power supply and functionality of the lighting systems.
Driver lighting selections using the left-hand (LH) steering column multifunction switch or the auxiliary lighting switch are
passed to the CJB via the instrument cluster.
The lighting system has an 'auto' lights function which is controlled by the CJB on receipt of signals from the light sensor. The
exterior lights are turned on or off in response to ambient light signals from the light sensor via the instrument cluster.
Two levels of headlamp are available; Bi-xenon or Bi-xenon with Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS). The AFS headlamp
has a swiveling projector module which moves the headlamp beam in the direction of travel. The AFS headlamp also features
a cornering/static bending lamp which illuminates the area at the side of the vehicle when turning into driveways for
example.
The tail lamp is in two parts. The turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps are located in each rear fender. The reverse and
rear fog lamps are located in separate units attached to the liftgate. The locations of the fog and reverse lamps changes
depending if the vehicle is left-hand drive (LHD) or right-hand drive (RHD). The turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps use
conventional glass filament bulbs. The rear fog and reverse lamp use colored light emitting diode (LED).
EXTERIOR BULB TYPE/RATING
The following table shows the bulbs used for the exterior lighting system and their type and specification.
Bulb Type Rating

Xenon Headlamps - Low/High beam Xenon D1S 35W
Front fog lamps - Naturally aspirated Halogen H11 55W
Front fog lamps - Supercharged Halogen H3 55W
Rear fog lamp LED Not applicable
Turn signal indicator lamps - Front - Rest of World (ROW) Bayonet PY21W 21W
Turn signal indicator lamps - Front - North American Specification (NAS) Wedge S8W 3457K 27/7W
Turn signal indicator repeater lamps Capless W5W 5W
Turn signal indicator lamps - Rear Bayonet PY21W 21W
Side lamps - Front Wedge W5W 5W
Stop / Side lamps Bayonet - Twin filament - P21/5 21W/5W
High mounted stop lamp LED Not applicable
Licence plate lamps Capless W5W 5W
Reverse lamp LED Not applicable
Cornering lamp Halogen H8 35W
Side marker lamps (front/rear) Capless W3W 3W
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX AND AUXILIARY JUNCTION BOX
The CJB is an integrated unit located in the passenger compartment LH side on the 'A' pillar.
The Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) is located in a central position, behind the rear seat.
CJB Control
The CJB receives inputs from the following switches via the instrument cluster and the medium speed controller area
network (CAN) bus:
 LH steering column multifunction switch

 Side lamp position
 Headlamp position
 Automatic (AUTO) position
 Timer delay positions
 Turn signal indicators
 Headlamp flash and high beam
 Stop lamp switch
 Hazard flasher switch
 Sunload/Light sensor.
The following lamps are controlled by the CJB:
 Front side lamps

 Front side marker lamps
 Headlamps
 Cornering lamps
 Front fog lamps.
AJB Control
The following lamps are controlled by the AJB:
 Rear fog lamp

 Reverse lamp
 Stop lamps
 High mounted stop lamp
 Rear side lamps
 Rear side marker lamps
 Licence plate lamps
 Front and rear turn signal indicators and side repeaters
The AJB is also connected via a hardwired connection to the hazard flasher switch.
Circuit Protection
The AJB and the CJB provide circuit protection for all exterior lighting circuits. The exterior lighting circuits are protected by
Field Effect Transistors (FETs). Operation of the exterior lighting circuits is protected by the FETs which can detect overloads
and short circuits. The FETs respond to heat generated by increased current flow caused by a short circuit.
On a normal circuit this would cause the fuse to blow. The FETs respond to the heat increase and disconnect the power
supply to the affected circuit. When the fault is rectified or the FET has cooled, the FET will reset and operate the circuit
normally. If the fault persists the FET will cycle, disconnecting and reconnecting the power supply.
The CJB and the AJB store fault codes which can be retrieved using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The fault code will
identify that there is a fault on a particular output which will assist with fault detection.
Alarm Indications
The exterior lighting system is used for alarm arm and disarm requests.
When the driver locks and arms the vehicle, a visual indication of a successful lock and arm request is displayed to the driver
by a single flash of the hazard flashers. If the vehicle is superlocked then the hazard flashers will flash a second time (200ms
off and 200ms on) to confirm the superlock request.
When the driver unlocks the vehicle, a visual indication of a successful lock and disarm request is displayed to the driver by
the hazard flashers operating twice (200ms off and 200ms on).
If the alarm is triggered, the hazard flashers are operated for ten 30 second cycles of 200ms on and 200ms off with a 10
second delay between each cycle.
NOTE: On NAS vehicles the delay between cycle when the alarm is triggered is 60 seconds.
The alarm triggered hazard flasher operation varies depending on market.
Lights on Warning Chime
When the ignition is in the off mode or accessory mode conditions and the lighting switch is in the side lamp or headlamp
position, a warning chime will sound if the driver's door is opened. This indicates to the driver that the exterior lights have
been left switched on.
The chime is generated from the instrument cluster sounder on receipt of a lights on signal, a driver's door open signal and
an ignition off or accessory mode signal via a medium speed CAN bus signal from the CJB.
Crash Signal Activation
When a crash signal is transmitted from the restraints control module, the AJB activates the hazard flashers. The hazard
flashers continue to operate until the ignition is in the off or accessory modes and then returned to the ignition on mode.
Once this condition has occurred, the restraints control module will cease transmission of the crash signal.
Headlamp Timer
The AJB controls a headlamp timer function which allows the headlamps to remain on for a period of time after leaving the
vehicle. This is a driver convenience feature which illuminates the driveway after leaving the vehicle.
To select this feature, the lighting control switch on the steering column multifunction switch must be in one of the three
headlamp timer positions when the ignition mode is changed from ignition on mode to off mode. The timer function will then
be initiated and the low beam headlamps will be illuminated for the selected timer period.
NOTE: If the lighting switch is in the AUTO position, the headlamp timer will not function when the ignition mode is changed
to off.
The timer period can be adjusted using one of the 3 positions on the lighting control switch on the LH steering column
multifunction switch. The 3 switch positions correspond to timer values of 30, 60 and 120 seconds.
LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH

1 - Off position
-
2 Side lamp position
3 - High beam position
4 - right-hand (RH) turn signal indicator position
5 - Headlamp flash/high beam off position
6 - LH turn signal indicator position
7 - Headlamp position
8 - AUTO headlamp position
9 - Headlamp timer 120 second delay position
10 - Headlamp timer 60 second position
11 - Headlamp timer 30 second position
The lighting control switch is located on the LH steering column multifunction switch. The switch is a rotary control with
positions for the following lighting selections:
 Off
 Side lamps
 Headlamps
 AUTO headlamps
 Headlamp timer (3 time period selections).
The steering column multifunction switch also provides for the selection of low and high beam headlamps and also the
headlamp flash function.
The steering column multifunction switch is connected to the instrument cluster by 3 wires. Two wires supply a signal voltage
to the lighting switch and the headlamp timer positions. The third wire is a common ground. Each switch position is
connected to the ground return via resistors which vary the return voltage to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster
senses the voltage returning and determines the switch position selected. The instrument cluster then generates an
applicable message which is sent to the AJB and the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus for activation of the selected exterior
lamps.
The steering column multifunction switch also provides the control for the turn signal indicators. The switch can be pushed
down to select the LH turn signal indicators or pushed up to select the RH turn signal indicators. The switch has 2 positions.
If the switch is pushed up or down gently and held, the turn signal indicators will operate until the switch is released, if the
switch is pushed past a detent, the switch can be released and the selected position will automatically be cancelled when the
manoeuvre is completed. If a turn signal indicator bulb fails, the green turn signal indicator warning indicator in the
instrument cluster will flash at twice the normal rate and the audible ticking will also be at twice the normal rate.
The steering column multifunction switch also has a lane change function. If the switch is gently pushed to either turn signal
indicator direction and then released, the turn signal indicators will flash 3 times and then automatically cancel.
AUXILIARY LIGHTING SWITCH

1 - Front fog lamp switch
2 - Rear fog lamp switch
The auxiliary lighting switch is located in the instrument panel, adjacent to the steering column. The switch has 2 buttons
which select the front and rear fog lamps. The buttons are non-latching momentary switches.
The auxiliary lighting switch is connected to the instrument cluster by 3 wires. Two wires supply a signal voltage to the each
fog lamp switch. The third wire is a common ground. Each switch position is connected to the ground return via a series of
resistors which vary the supply voltage from the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster senses the voltage and
determines the switch position selected. The instrument cluster then generates an applicable message which is sent to the
AJB and the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus for activation of the selected fog lamps.
The front fog lamps can only be activated when the ignition is in the ignition power mode and side lamps or headlamps are
active. The rear fog lamps can only be activated if the low beam headlamps are on or if the sidelamps and front fog lamps
are on. A second press of each fog lamp button will switch of the selected fog lamps. If the lighting control switch or the
ignition is changed to the off mode, then both fog lamps will be switched off and will need to be re-selected if required.
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY
Two types of headlamp are available; Bi-Xenon and Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS). The headlamps are located with a
locating dowel through the upper front bumper bracket and secured with 3 bolts to the front body structure. Bulb
replacement requires the removal of the complete headlamp assembly.
The rear of the headlamp unit has removable access panels which allow access to the bulbs for replacement. A large cover,
which is rotated anti-clockwise to remove allows access to the Xenon D1S bulb. Another removable cover provides access to
the corning lamp bulb and the side lamp bulb, which is retained with a spring clip. A smaller cover can be rotated anti-
clockwise to provide access to the turn signal indicator bulb and the side marker lamp bulb.
The headlamps have two adjustment screws on the rear which allow for the manual setting of the vertical and horizontal
alignment.
On NAS vehicles the headlamp is regarded as 'Visual Optically Left' aiming. The adjustment screws have to turned equal
amounts to maintain the correlation in the vertical axis only. There is no horizontal adjustment. Refer to the Service Repair
Procedures manual for headlamp alignment data and procedures.
Each headlamp has an integral 16 pin connector which provides inputs and outputs for the various functions of the headlamp
assembly.
The low beam headlamps are switched on when the ignition is in the ignition mode and:
 the lighting control switch is in the headlamp position

 the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from a 'lights on'
message generated by the AJB.
The low beam headlamps can also be operated by the headlamp timer function.
The high beam headlamps are switched on when the ignition is in the ignition mode and:
 The low beam headlamps are selected on or activated via the AUTO feature and the LH steering column multifunction
switch is pushed forward, away from the driver
The high beam lamps will be switched off when:
 The LH steering column multifunction switch is moved rearwards, towards the driver.
 The low beam headlamps are switched off
 The ignition mode is changed to accessory or off mode.
1 - Headlamp power washer jet
2 - Side lamp bulb
3 - Cornering lamp (if fitted)
4 - Xenon projector module
5 - Turn signal indicator bulb
6 - Side marker lamp bulb
7 - Cover - Side lamp and cornering lamp
8 - Powerwash hose connection
9 - AFS power module (if fitted)
10 - Xenon control module
11 - Cover - Xenon bulb
13 - Side marker lamp bulb and holder
14 - Turn signal indicator bulb and holder
15 - Igniter electrical connector
16 - Igniter unit and bulb
- Mounting collar
17
WARNING: The Xenon system generates up to 28000 volts and contact with this voltage could lead to fatality.
Make sure that the headlamps are switched off before working on the system.
The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the Xenon headlamp system:
 DO NOT attempt any procedures on the Xenon headlamps when the lights are switched on.
 Handling of the D1S Xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, for example gloves and
goggles. The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.
 Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
 Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
The Xenon headlamp is known as Bi-Xenon because it operates as both a low and high beam unit. The Xenon lamp or High
Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp as they are sometimes called, comprise an ellipsoidal lens with a solenoid controlled shutter
to change the beam output from low to high beam.
NOTE: If the lighting control switch is in the OFF position, the Xenon lamps operate when the high beam 'flash' function is
operated.
The Xenon headlamp system is controlled by the CJB using a control module for each headlamp and an igniter. The control
modules and the igniters provide the regulated power supply required to illuminate the Xenon bulbs through their start-up
phases of operation.
Xenon Headlamp Construction
Xenon Bulb Replacement

A - Locking Ring Removal
B - Locking Ring Replacement
1 - Mounting ring
2 - Xenon bulb
3 - Igniter
The Xenon headlamp is a self contained unit located within the headlamp assembly. The unit comprises a reflector, an
adaptor ring, the lens, a shutter controller and the xenon bulb, which together is an assembly known as the projector
module.
The reflector is curved and provides the mounting for the Xenon bulb. The bulb locates in a keyway to ensure correct
alignment in the reflector and is secured by a plastic mounting ring. The bulb is an integral part of the igniter and is
electrically connected by a connector located in the igniter unit.
The shutter controller is a solenoid which operates the shutter mechanism via a lever. The shutter is used to change the
beam projection from low beam to high beam and visa versa.
The Xenon bulbs illuminate when an arc of electrical current is established between 2 electrodes within the bulb. The Xenon
gas sealed in the bulb reacts to the electrical excitation and the theat generated by the current flow to produce the
characteristic blue/white light.
To operate at full efficiency, the Xenon bulb goes through 3 full stages of operation before full output for continuous
operation is achieved. The 3 phases are; start-up phase, warm-up phase and continuous phase.
In the start-up phase, the bulb requires an initial high voltage starting pulse of up to 30000 volts to establish the arc. This is
produced by the igniter. The warm-up phase begins once the arc is established. The Xenon control module regulates the
supply to the bulb to 2.6A which gives a lamp output of 75W. During this phase, the Xenon gas begins to illuminate brightly
and the environment within the bulb stabilizes, ensuring a continual current flow between the electrodes. When the warm-up
phase is complete, the Xenon control module changes to continuous phase. The supply voltage to the bulb is reduced and
the operating power required for continual operation is reduced to 35W. The process from start-up to continuous phase is
completed in a very short time.
The Xenon control modules (one per headlamp) receive an operating voltage from the CJB when the headlamps are switched
on. The modules regulate the power supply required through the phases of start-up.
The igniters (one per headlamp) generate the initial high voltage required to establish the arc. The igniters have integral
coils which generate high voltage pulses required for start-up. Once the Xenon bulbs are operating, the igniters provide a
closed circuit for the regulated power supply from the control modules.
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp
The turn signal indicator lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly, outboard of the projector
module. The turn signal indicator lamp uses a PY21W bayonet orange colored bulb in Rest Of World (ROW) markets. A S8W
27/7W wedge bulb is used in NAS markets.
The bulb is fitted into a holder which connects with contacts in the headlamp housing. The holder is fitted into an aperture in
the headlamp housing and is rotated to lock in position. Access to the turn signal indicator bulb requires removal of the
headlamp assembly.
The turn signal indicator lamps are operated by the LH steering column multifunction switch or by the hazard flasher switch.
The steering column multifunction switch is only active when the ignition is the ignition mode. The hazard flasher switch is
active at all times. When active, the turn signal indicator lamps flash at a frequency cycle of 400 ms on and 400 ms off.
If a bulb fails, the remaining turn signal indicator lamps continue to flash at the normal speed. The applicable turn signal
indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at double speed to indicate the failure to the driver.
Side Lamp
The side lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly, above the cornering lamp. The side lamp shares
the same housing and reflector as the cornering lamp.
The side lamp uses a W5W wedge fitting, orange colored bulb which is fitted in a holder and connected by wires to the main
headlamp connector. The holder is a push fit into a receptacle in the headlamp housing. The bulb is accessible by removal of
the cover on the side of the headlamp. Access to the bulb and the cover requires removal of the headlamp assembly.
The side lamps are operated by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The side lamps are
operational at all times and are not dependant on the ignition mode. The side lamps will also be illuminated when the
lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from a 'lights on' message
generated by the AJB.
Side Marker Lamp
The side marker lamp is located on the outer part of the headlamp, adjacent to the turn signal indicator bulb. The side
marker lamp uses an orange colored W3W wedge fitting bulb, which is fitted in a holder which connects with contacts in the
headlamp housing. The holder is fitted into an aperture in the headlamp housing and is rotated to lock in position. Access to
the side marker bulb requires removal of the headlamp assembly.
The side marker lamp is active at all times when the side lamps are selected on using the lighting control switch. The side
marker lamps will also be illuminated when the lighting control switch is in the 'AUTO' position and a 'lights on' signal is
received by the CJB from a 'lights on' message generated by the AJB.
Cornering Lamp - Vehicles without AFS
The cornering lamp functionality differs between vehicles with or without the AFS system. The cornering lamps are designed
to illuminate the direction of travel when cornering at low speeds. The design of the lens projects a spread of light from the
vehicle at approximately 45 degrees to the vehicle axis.
The cornering lamp is incorporated into the inner part of the headlamp assembly, below the side lamp. The cornering lamp
uses a 35W Halogen H8 bulb which is permanently fitted in an integral holder which is located in the headlamp housing. The
holder is connected by a removable harness connector and the holder can be removed from the housing by rotating to
unlock. The bulb is accessible by removal of a cover on the side of the headlamp. Access to the bulb anc over requires
removal of the headlamp assembly.
The cornering lamps are controlled by the LH steering column multifunction switch, when the lighting control switch is in the
headlamps position and the ignition is in the ignition on mode. The cornering lamps are controlled by the CJB which uses
turn signal indicator active and vehicle speed to operate the cornering lamps. The cornering lamps are deactivated if the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) with the turn signal indicators selected on or if the headlamp high beam is active.
Only one cornering lamp will illuminate at any one time. If the LH turn signal indicators are active, the LH cornering lamp will
be illuminated and visa versa, providing the vehicle speed and the lighting control switch positions are correct.
Cornering Lamp - Vehicles with AFS
The cornering lamps fitted to vehicles with the AFS system functions differently to those fitted to vehicle with non AFS
headlamps. The construction and light distribution of the cornering lamp with AFS is as described previously for cornering
lamp without AFS.
The cornering lamps operate using high speed CAN signals from the steering angle sensor which are received by the CJB and
the AFS control module. The AFS control module transmits a cornering lamp on request to the CJB which, if all operating
conditions are correct, activates the cornering lamp.
When the operating parameters of the cornering lamp is achieved, the CJB fades the cornering lamp on using a pulse width
modulation (PWM) voltage over a period of approximately 2 seconds. When the lamp is switched off, the CJB fades the bulb
off by decreasing the PWM voltage in a linear manner depending on vehicle speed and steering angle.
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)
The AFS headlamp is similar in its construction to the Xenon, non-AFS headlamp. The projector module is constructed and
functions as described for the Xenon headlamp but with the addition of the AFS system which allows the projector module to
be moved vertically and horizontally. The AFS system is controlled by a AFS control module which is integral with the
headlamp levelling module.
The AFS headlamp assembly contains an additional carrier frame which provides location for the AFS actuators. The
remaining lamps are as described previously. The carrier frame is attached to the AFS vertical actuator. The projector
module has a central pivot point which allows the module to move horizontally in response to operation of the AFS horizontal
actuator.
The AFS actuators are bi-polar (2 phase) dc stepper motors which are driven by a power output from the AFS power module
located on the rear of the headlamp assembly. Each stepper motor receives its position information from the AFS control
module via the applicable AFS power module. When the actuators are powered to their requested positions, a holding current
is applied to maintain the actuator position.
The actuators do not supply a positional feedback signal to the AFS control module. Each stepper motor requires referencing
each time the AFS system becomes active. When the AFS system is active, each vertical actuator is driven to the low beam
position and each horizontal actuator is driven to an inboard position until a mechanical stop in the actuator is reached. Once
the stop is reached a step counter in the AFS control module is set to zero and the actuator is then powered to the operating
position as determined by the AFS control module software.
The AFS control module receives front and rear vehicle height data from the height sensors to provide headlamp levelling
adjustment via the vertical actuator motor. The AFS control module also receives vehicle speed signals from the ABS module
to adjust the projector module vertically to increase the beam range as the vehicle speed increases.
A - Conventional headlamp beam distribution
B - AFS swivel headlamp beam distribution
AFS Control Module
The AFS control module is located on the bulkhead, at the bottom of the RH 'A' pillar. The AFS control module is a dual
functionality unit which also incorporates software to control the headlamp leveling. The AFS control module is connected to
the high speed CAN bus and receives inputs from other vehicle systems on the status of the following parameters:
 Steering angle
 Vehicle speed
 Headlamp status
 Engine running
 Reverse gear selected
 AUTO lights on.
The AFS will only operate when the AFS control module receives an engine running signal on the high speed CAN bus from
the engine control module (ECM). When the engine running signal is received the AFS control module performs its
initialisation routine.
The AFS will also function when the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and the AFS control module receives a
lights on signal from the light sensor and an engine running signal.
The AFS control module then monitors the inputs from the other vehicle systems to control the AFS functionality according to
cornering angles and vehicle speed.
The AFS control module is connected to each AFS power module on a private Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus. The
power modules read operating values supplied from the AFS control module and control the output drivers for the stepper
motor actuators inside the headlamp assembly.
AFS Operation
The AFS controls the swiveling angle of each projector module using speed and steering angle signals. The angles of each
projector module differ to give the correct spread of light, for example, when turning left, the LH projector module will have
a greater swiveling angle than the RH projector module.
Initialisation Procedure
When the AFS control module receives an ignition mode on signal, the control module performs the initialisation procedure
which ensures that the headlamps are correctly aligned on both their vertical and horizontal axes.
The headlamp leveling motors are powered from their current position, which can be either the upper or lower limit or
somewhere in between, to their lower position and then back to the 0 degrees position.
The AFS swivel initialisation starts less than 1 second after the headlamp leveling initialisation is activated to ensure that the
headlamps are at or below the 0 degree position in the vertical axis, thus preventing glare to oncoming vehicles. The AFS
swivel initialisation is completed in less than 2.5 seconds. The LH and RH AFS actuator motors are powered from the 0
degree position to their fully inboard position, then to their fully outboard position and then back to the 0 degree position.
Failure Mode
In the event of a failure of the AFS system, a warning indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated to warn the driver.
The AFS warning indicator illuminates when the ignition is in the ignition on mode and will flash continuously until the fault is
rectified. The AFS warning indicator will also be illuminated if a failure of the steering angle sensor or the vehicle speed
signal is detected.
Illumination of the warning indicator does not necessarily mean that there is a fault with the AFS system. The fault may be
caused by a failure of another system preventing the AFS system from operating correctly.
The AFS control module performs a diagnostic routine every time AFS is requested. If any fault is found, the AFS control
module will suspend the operation of the AFS function.
If the AFS leveling system has failed with the projector module in a position other than the correct straight ahead position,
the AFS control module will attempt to drive the projector module to a position a small amount lower than the standard
position. If the swivel function has failed, the AFS control module will lower the projector module using the leveling actuator
to a position much lower than standard to prevent excess glare to oncoming vehicles.
The AFS control module software can detect an internal failure of the control module control circuits. The control module will
power the projector modules to the zero position and prevent further operation.
Faults can be investigated by interrogating the AFS control module using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system to check for
fault codes.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP OPERATION
The automatic headlamp function is a driver assistance system. The driver can override the system operation by selection of
side lamp or headlamp on if the ambient light conditions require front and rear lighting to be active. The automatic headlamp
system uses a light sensor and the AJB, which is connected to the instrument cluster, via the medium speed CAN bus, to
control 'AUTO' headlamp functionality.
The light sensor is located in the centre of the instrument panel upper surface. The sensor has three functions; houses the
alarm system LED, auto lamp function for AUTO headlamps and sun load sensor for the air conditioning (A/C) system.
The sensor is hardwired to the instrument cluster which supplies a 5V current via a pull-up resistor to 2 photodiode light
sensors within the sensor housing. The ambient light signals are returned to the instrument cluster by the light sensor
varying the current drawn from the 5V output, hence varying the voltage at the 'pull-up' resistor. The instrument cluster
then outputs a message relating to the ambient light level on the medium speed CAN bus. The AJB receives the message
and determines if AUTO lamps are required to be activated.
Operation of the 'AUTO' headlamps requires the ignition to be in the ignition mode and the lighting control switch must be in
the AUTO position. The AJB will only activate the AUTO headlamps on receipt of a valid ambient light signal on the medium
speed CAN bus from the instrument cluster.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Headlamp leveling provides for the automatic adjustment of the vertical aim of the headlamps. The leveling system is
required to minimise glare to other road users when the vehicle attitude changes due to braking or acceleration.
Headlamp leveling is controlled by a headlamp leveling module which is located on the bulkhead, at the bottom of the RH 'A'
pillar.
NOTE: On vehicles with the AFS system, the headlamp leveling software is incorporated into the AFS control module and the
module is known as the AFS control module.
The headlamp leveling system comprises the following components and information from other vehicle systems:
 Front and rear vehicle height sensors

 Two headlamp leveling, vertical adjustment motors
 Headlamp leveling module (or AFS control module if vehicle is fitted with AFS)
 Ignition in on mode
 Vehicle speed information form anti-lock brake system (ABS) module.
When the ignition is in the ignition power mode, power is supplied via the ignition relay in the battery junction box to the
headlamp leveling module (or AFS control module if vehicle is fitted with AFS).
NOTE: When the headlamp leveling module receives a power supply from the ignition relay, the module performs an
initialization procedure to correctly align the vertical aim of the headlamps and to determine if the leveling motors are
functioning correctly.
The headlamp leveling module receives information relating to vehicle attitude from the front and rear height sensors. The
headlamp leveling module processes these signal and provides an output to the headlamp leveling motors to adjust the
headlamp vertical aim according to vehicle speed and attitude.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
Refer to the daytime running lamps (DRL) section for details.

For additional information, refer to: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-04 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), Description and
Operation).
FRONT FOG LAMP

1 - Fog lamp - Naturally aspirated vehicles
2 - Bulb H11
3 - Bulb H3
4 - Fog lamp - Supercharged vehicles
Two front fog lamps are located in apertures in the front bumper. The fog lamps are different in design between the naturally
aspirated and supercharged vehicles.
Front Fog Lamp - Naturally Aspirated Vehicles
The front fog lamp is a conventional design with a clear lens and smooth surface reflector. An H11 55W halogen bulb is
located at the rear of the fog lamp. The bulb has an integral holder and can be removed by rotating counter clockwise to
remove from the lamp housing.
Fog lamp beam adjustment is provided by a rotary adjuster located on the underside of the lamp and is accessible from the
rear of the bumper.
The front fog lamps are controlled by the auxiliary lighting switch and the CJB. Refer to the Auxiliary Lighting Switch section
for switch operation.
Front Fog Lamp - Supercharged Vehicles
The front fog lamp is projector module, similar in design to the projector module used in the Xenon headlamp. A halogen H3
bulb is located in the rear of the lamp and secured with a spring clip. The bulb has a power lead which is secured to the rear
of the lamp connector socket.
Fog lamp beam adjustment is provided by a screw at the top of the lamp. The screw is accessible from the front of the lamp.
Front fog lamp control and operation is as described for 'Front Fog Lamp - Naturally Aspirated Vehicles.
Front Fog Lamp Functionality (NAS and Canadian Markets Only)
The front fog lamps operate as described previously but with the following differences which cover local laws governing lamp
usage.
If the low beam headlamps and the front fog lamps are on at the same time, when the high beam headlamps are switched
on, the front fog lamps will be automatically switched off. When the high beam headlamps are subsequently switched off, the
front fog lamps will be switched on automatically.
NOTE: The front fog lamps will also be switched off if the high beam 'flash' function is operated.
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY
The rear lamp assembly is a 2 piece unit, with one part being located in the rear quarter panel and the second part being
attached to the liftgate. The outer rear lamp assembly is located in a recess in the vehicle body and is secured with 2 nuts
which screw onto studs in the lamp assembly. The inner rear lamp assembly is located in a recess in the liftgate and is
secured with 3 nuts.

1 - Inner rear lamp assembly
2 - Outer rear lamp assembly
3 - Rear fog lamp or reverse lamp LED (market dependant)
4 - Turn signal indicator bulb and holder
5 - Stop lamp and Tail lamp bulb and holder
6 - Side marker bulb and holder
7 - Turn signal indicator
8 - Rear fog lamp or reverse lamp (market dependant)
9 - Stop lamp and tail lamp
10 - Side marker lamp
Rear Stop and Side Lamp
The stop and side lamp are located in the lower section of the outer rear lamp assembly. A combined, twin filament 21W/5W
bayonet fitting bulb is used. The stop lamp uses the 21W bulb filament and the side lamp uses the 5W bulb filament. The
bulb is located in a holder which connects with contacts in the rear lamp housing. The holder can be released by rotating and
pulling from the aperture.
The stop lamps are active when the ignition is in the ignition mode and the stop lamp switch is activated by pressing the
brake pedal. The high mounted stop lamp will also be activated when the brake pedal is pressed. Operation of the stop lamp
switch is sensed by the CJB which sends a message on the high speed CAN bus to the AJB which activates the stop lamps.
The stop lamps can also be activated by the adaptive speed control system. A signal from the adaptive speed control module
is sent via the high speed CAN bus to the AJB which activates the stop lamps until an off message is received.
The side lamps are operated by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The side lamps are
operational at all times and are not dependant on the ignition mode. The side lamps will also be illuminated when the
lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from the light sensor.
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp
The turn signal indicator lamp is located in the upper section of the outer rear lamp assembly and uses a PY21W bayonet
fitting bulb. The bulb is located in a holder which connects with contacts in the rear lamp housing. The holder can be
released by rotating and pulling from the aperture.
The turn signal indicator lamps are operated by the LH steering column multifunction switch or by the hazard flasher switch.
The steering column multifunction switch is only active when the ignition is the ignition mode. The hazard flasher switch is
active at all times. When active, the turn signal indicator lamps flash at a frequency cycle of 400 ms on and 400 ms off.
If a bulb fails, the remaining turn signal indicator lamps continue to flash at the normal speed. The applicable turn signal
indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at double speed to indicate the failure to the driver.
Reversing Lamp
The reversing lamp is located in the inner rear lamp assembly. The reversing lamp uses 3 LED. Only one reversing lamp is
fitted and is located in the LH inner lamp assembly on RHD vehicles and in the RH inner lamp assembly on LHD vehicles.
The reversing lamp is activated on receipt of reverse selected message sent on the medium speed CAN signal from the
transmission control module (TCM) to the AJB.
Rear Fog Lamp
The rear fog lamp is located in the inner rear lamp assembly. The fog lamp uses 3 LED's. Only one fog lamp is fitted and is
located in the RH inner lamp assembly on RHD vehicles and in the LH inner lamp assembly on LHD vehicles.
The rear fog lamp is controlled by the auxiliary lighting switch and the CJB. The rear fog lamp switch receives a power supply
from the instrument cluster. When the rear fog lamp switch is pressed, a ground path is completed through a resistor. The
current flow is monitored by the instrument cluster which determines that the switch has been pressed. The instrument
cluster transmits a rear fog lamp on request message on the medium speed CAN bus to the AJB which activates the power
supplies to the fog lamp provided the lighting switch is in the correct position and the ignition mode is correct.
When the ignition is in ignition on mode and the lighting control switch is in the side lamp or headlamp position and the front
fog lamps are on, pressing the rear fog lamp switch on the auxiliary lighting switch will activate the rear fog lamp. Pressing
the rear fog lamp switch for a second time will switch the rear fog lamp off. The rear fog lamp will also be deactivated if the
lighting control switch is moved to the off position or the ignition mode is changed to off mode.
LICENCE PLATE LAMPS
Two licence plate lamps are located in the underside of the liftgate (hardtop) or luggage compartment lid (convertible)
exterior trim finisher. Each lamp uses a W5W capless bulb which is located in a holder at the rear of the lamp.
The lamp can be removed from the finisher by using a wide flat blade screwdriver or similar tool, inserting it in the slot
between the lamp lens and the finisher and gently levering the lamp from the surround. The bulb is pushed into a holder
which in turn is a press fit in the lamp housing.
The licence plate lamps are illuminated at all times when the side lamps are active.
HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP
The high mounted stop lamp is located in the rear spoiler on the upper edge of the liftgate or luggage compartment lid. The
lamp comprises 24 separate LED's which illuminate through a red colored lens. The high mounted stop lamp functionality is
the same as that described for the stop lamps.
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR REPEATER LAMP
The turn signal indicator repeater lamps are located in each front fender and can be removed by sliding the lamp assembly
rearwards and releasing the front edge from the fender. The lamps use a 5W capless bulb which is located in a holder in the
rear of the lamp housing.
The repeater lamps have the same functionality as described for the turn signal indicators and the hazard flashers.
HAZARD FLASHERS
The hazard flashers are controlled by a non-latching switch located in the centre of the instrument panel. The hazard flashers
operate at all times when selected and are not dependant on an ignition mode to be selected.
When the hazard flashers are selected on by the driver, a ground path is momentarily completed to the AJB which activates
the front and rear and side repeater turn signal indicators. A second press of the switch is again sensed by the AJB and the
hazard flasher will be deactivated. When the hazard flasher are active, they override any request for turn signal indicator
operation.
The hazard flashers can also be activated by a crash signal from the restraints control module (RCM). The signal is received
on the medium speed CAN bus from the instrument cluster by the AJB which activates the hazard flashers. The hazard
flasher can be cancelled by changing the ignition mode to accessory or off mode and then changing it to ignition on mode on
or the crash mode signal is removed by the RCM.
CONTROL DIAGRAM

1 - Battery
2 - Megafuse (175A)
3 - Megafuse (175A)
4 - Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
5 - CJB
6 - High speed CAN bus to other vehicle systems
-
8 - LH steering column multifunction switch
9 - Stop lamp switch
10 - Auxiliary lighting switch
11 - LH headlamp
13 - RH headlamp
14 - Rear height sensor
15 - Front height sensor
16 - Headlamp leveling/AFS control module
17 - LH side repeater
18 - RH side repeater
19 - A/C control module
20 - Hazard warning switch
21 - Light sensor
22 - LH license plate lamp
23 - RH license plate lamp
24 - LH front fog lamp
25 - RH front fog lamp
26 - High mounted stop lamp
27 - RH tail lamp assembly
28 - LH tail lamp assembly
Exterior Lighting - Headlamps
For a detailed description of the exterior lighting system, refer to the Description and Operation section 417-00 -
Exterior Lighting of the workshop manual.
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
The Xenon Headlamp System generates up to 28,000 volts. Make sure that the headlamps are switched off before
working on the system. Failure to follow this instruction may lead to fatality.
The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the Xenon Headlamp System:
 DO NOT attempt any procedures on the Xenon Headlamps or circuits when the system is energized.
 Handling of the Xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, e.g. gloves and goggles.
The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.
 Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
 All safety procedures and precautions must be followed to prevent personal injury.
CAUTION: Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
There are instructions on the correct procedures for Xenon Headlamp System repairs in the manual, refer to section
100-00 - General Information, Standard Workshop Practices of the workshop manual.
vehicle.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
 Headlamp Leveling Module (HLM)
 Bulb(s)
 Photocell(s)
 Ballast
 Wiring harness/electrical connectors
 Fuse(s)
Symptom Chart

Low beam lamp(s)  Bulb failure Check the bulb and fuse condition (see visual inspection). Check the
inoperative  Fuse(s) blown headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch function. Check
 Circuit fault the left-hand steering column multifunction switch operation. Refer
 Lighting control switch to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a headlamp or
High beam lamp(s) fault related circuit fault.
inoperative  Left-hand steering
column multifunction
switch fault
Low beam lamp(s)  Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the tourist lever is set
dim  Tourist lever set in correctly. Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control
the wrong position switch function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction
 Circuit fault switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
 Lighting control switch
High beam lamp(s) fault
dim  Left-hand steering
column multifunction
switch fault
Low beam lamp(s)  Circuit fault Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch
stuck on  Lighting control switch function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch
fault operation. Check the headlamp timer function. Refer to the electrical
 Left-hand steering guides. Check for DTCs indicating a headlamp circuit fault
High beam lamp(s) column multifunction
stuck on switch fault
 Headlamp timer
function fault
Headlamp low/high  Circuit fault Check the headlamp circuits. Check the left-hand steering column
beam switching  Left-hand steering multifunction switch operation. Check the xenon lamp shutter
function inoperative column multifunction mechanism operation. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs
switch fault indicating a headlamp circuit fault
 Xenon lamp shutter
mechanism fault
Warning lamp(s)  Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s) (see visual inspection). Check the lighting control
inoperative  Lighting control switch switch function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction
fault switch function. Check the warning lamp circuits. Refer to the
 Left-hand steering electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating an instrument cluster or
column multifunction CAN system fault.
switch inoperative
 Circuit fault
fault
Headlamp Wet -  Condensation Check for outstanding Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) relating to
Internal  Water Ingress 'Headlamp Internal Condensation'. Carry out the instructions in the
service bulletin to determine if the fault is related to condensation or
water ingress.
DTC Index
NOTE: If the Control Module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to
into account.
NOTE: Prior to installation/replacement of the Headlamp assembly carry out all relevant internal visual and mechanical
checks for correct cable location and termination including: checks for corroded, bent or backed out pins or terminals,
incorrectly inserted connectors and harness damage due to chaffing or incorrect routing.
NOTE: If the control module has been removed and reinstalled, carry out a DTC code clear, cycle the ignition state to
off, then on. This will erase any DTCs that have been logged during the module installation procedure.
Headlamp Leveling Module (HLM)
B1A59- Front or Rear Height  Front or Rear Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Front and
11 Sensors - Circuit Sensors 5 volt supply Rear Height Sensors 5 volt supply circuit for short to
short to ground short to ground ground
B1A59- Front or Rear Height  Front or Rear Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Front and
12 Sensors - Circuit Sensors 5 volt supply Rear Height Sensor 5 volt supply circuit for short to power
short to power short to power
C1A04- Front Right Height  Front Right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Front
11 Sensor - Circuit short Sensor signal circuit Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to ground
to ground short to ground
C1A04- Front Right Height  Front Right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Front
15 Sensor - Circuit short Sensor signal circuit Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to power or
to power or open short to power or open circuit
C1A04- Front Right Height  Sensor (PWM) Signal NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels have
64 Sensor - Signal out of range been raised from the floor
plausibility failure
Check the location, security and mechanical operation of
the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
and check Front Right Height Sensor signal circuit for fault
C1A06- Rear Right Height  Rear right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Rear
11 Sensor - Circuit short Sensor signal circuit Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to ground
to ground short to ground
C1A06- Rear Right Height  Rear right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Rear
15 Sensor - Circuit short Sensor signal circuit Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to power or
to power or open short to power or open circuit
C1A06- Rear Right Height  Sensor (PWM) Signal NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels have
64 Sensor - Signal out of range been raised from the floor
plausibility failure
Check the location, security and mechanical operation of
the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
and check Rear Right Height Sensor signal circuit for fault
B1A57- Left Headlamp  Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state to
01 Leveling Motor - Motor Fault start the engine, look for any errors in the Headlamp Beam
General Electrical  Internal Headlamp movement (compare with other headlamp) and visually
Failure Circuit Fault inspect the lamp for internal damage or dislocation (ball
joints out). If no faults are evident refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check for circuit fault between the
Headlamp Power Module and the swiveling feedback
sensor. If no mechanical or circuit faults are evident,
suspect headlamp internal fault, replace as required. Refer
to the new module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
B1A58- Right Headlamp  Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state to
01 Leveling Motor - Motor Fault start the engine, look for any errors in the Headlamp Beam
General Electrical  Internal Headlamp movement (compare with other headlamp) and visually
Failure Circuit Fault inspect the lamp for internal damage or dislocation (ball
joints out). If no faults are evident refer to the electrical
Headlamp Power Module and the swiveling feedback
sensor. If no mechanical or circuit faults are evident,
suspect headlamp internal fault, replace as required. Refer
to the new module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
U0121- Lost communication  Lost communication Check the Anti-lock Brake System Module for stored DTCs.
00 with Anti-lock Brake with the Anti-lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
System (ABS) Brake System Module complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
Control Module - No  CAN network fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
sub type information between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the Anti-lock
Brake System Module
U0121- Lost communication  Invalid signal from Check the Anti-lock Brake System Module for stored DTCs.
86 with Anti-lock Brake the Anti-lock Brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
System (ABS) System Module complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
Control Module -  CAN network fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
Signal invalid between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the Anti-lock
Brake System Module
U0100- Lost communication  Lost communication Check the Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Using
00 with ECM - No sub with the Engine the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
type information Control Module the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the electrical
 CAN network fault circuit diagrams and check the CAN network between the
Headlamp Leveling Module and the Engine Control Module
U0101- Lost communication  Lost communication Check the Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs.
00 with TCM - No sub with the Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
type information Control Module complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
 CAN network fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the
Transmission Control Module
U0443- Invalid data from  Invalid signal from Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for stored DTCs. Using the
00 Body Control Module the Auxiliary Junction manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete the
B - No sub type Box CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
information  Auxiliary Junction Box diagrams and check the CAN network between the
fault Headlamp Leveling Module and the Auxiliary Junction Box
U0001- High speed CAN  Adaptive Front Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 communication Bus - Lighting System complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
Internal electronic (AFS) Control Module electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network to
failure internal electronic the Headlamp Leveling Module. If no CAN Bus circuit faults
failure are evident suspect Headlamp Leveling Module internal
fault. Refer to the new module/component installation note
U0300- Internal Control  Configuration data Check the correct Headlamp Leveling Module is installed to
62 Module software received over the vehicle specification. Refit original or replace the module as
incompatibility - CAN BUS is different required. Refer to the new module/component installation
Signal Compare from the stored note at the top of the DTC Index
Failure. configuration data
U0001- High Speed CAN  CAN Bus Off Check other modules for stored DTCs. Carry out the CAN
88 Communication Bus  CAN Bus Circuit fault Network Integrity test using the manufacturer approved
- Bus off diagnostic system
U3002- Vehicle Identification  The stored Vehicle Check the correct Headlamp Leveling Module is installed to
81 Number (VIN) - Identification Number vehicle specification. Refit original or replace the module as
Invalid Serial Data is not the same as required. Refer to the new module/component installation
received the Central Broadcast note at the top of the DTC Index
Vehicle Identification
Number
 The Headlamp
Leveling Module has
previously been
installed to another
vehicle
U3000- Control Module -  Height Sensors not NOTE: Sensor calibration routine must be carried out with
54 Missing Calibration calibrated to vehicle the vehicle unladen
Calibrate the Headlamp Leveling sensors using the

manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry the out
routine 'Headlamp and Axle Sensor Calibration' from the
'Module programming and configuration - Setup and
Configuration - Lighting'
U3000- Control Module -  Internal electronic Install a new Headlamp Leveling Module, refer to the new
49 Internal electronic failure module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
failure
U3000- Control Module - Not  Incorrect Car NOTE: The Car Configuration File (CCF) parameters
55 Configured Configuration File required are (Vehicle type)(Headlamp type)(Gearbox type)
(CCF) data received and (Dayrunning light)
Re-configure the Car Configuration File (CCF) File (CCF) as

required using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains suspect
the Headlamp Leveling Module, refer to the new module
U3003- Battery voltage  The power supply to Suspect Charging fault. Check the battery condition and
17 the Module has been state of charge. Check the vehicle charging system. Refer
above 16 Volts for to the relevant workshop manual section
more than 1000
milliseconds
U3003- Battery voltage  The power supply to Suspect Battery or Charging fault. Check the battery
16 the Module has been condition and state of charge. Check the vehicle charging
below 9 Volts for system. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
more than 1000 Clear the DTC, cycle ignition state to off then on, if DTC
milliseconds returns refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
power and ground circuit to the Headlamp Leveling Module
DTC Index
NOTE: If the Control Module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to
into account.
NOTE: Prior to installation/replacement of the Headlamp assembly carry out all relevant internal visual and mechanical
checks for correct cable location and termination including: checks for corroded, bent or backed out pins or terminals,
incorrectly inserted connectors and harness damage due to chaffing or incorrect routing.
NOTE: If the control module has been removed and reinstalled, carry out a DTC code clear, cycle the ignition state to
off, then on. This will erase any DTCs that have been logged during the module installation procedure
NOTE: The Headlamp Power Module is referenced as the AFS ECU + Motors in the circuit diagrams.
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Control Module

B1A59- Front or Rear Height  Front or Rear Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check
11 Sensors - Circuit short to Sensors 5 volt supply Front and Rear Height Sensors 5 volt supply circuit for
ground short to ground short to ground
B1A59- Front or Rear Height  Front or Rear Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check
12 Sensors - Circuit short to Sensors 5 volt supply Front and Rear Height Sensor 5 volt supply circuit for
power short to power short to power
C1A04- Front Right Height Sensor  Front Right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check
11 - Circuit short to ground Sensor signal circuit Front Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to
short to ground ground
C1A04- Front Right Height Sensor  Front Right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check
15 - Circuit short to power or Sensor signal circuit Front Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to
open circuit short to power or power or open circuit
open circuit
C1A04- Front Right Height Sensor  Sensor (PWM) Signal NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels
64 - Signal plausibility failure out of range have been raised from the floor
Check the location, security and mechanical operation

of the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams, and check Front Right Height Sensor signal
circuit for fault
C1A06- Rear Right Height Sensor  Rear Right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Rear
11 - Circuit short to ground Sensor signal circuit Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to ground
short to ground
C1A06- Rear Right Height Sensor  Rear Right Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Rear
15 - Circuit short to power or Sensor signal circuit Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to power or
open circuit short to power or open circuit
open circuit
C1A06- Rear Right Height Sensor  Sensor (PWM) Signal NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels
64 - Signal plausibility failure out of range have been raised from the floor
Check the location, security and mechanical operation

of the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams, and check Rear Right Height Sensor signal
circuit for fault
B1D66- Left Headlamp Power  Headlamp Power NOTE: The power module is a service item
00 Module - No sub type Module internal fault
information  Headlamp Power This DTC is logged if the Headlamp Power Module
Module circuit fault supply voltage is above 16 volts / below 9.5 volts or
the module suffers an internal failure. Record then
clear the stored DTC, cycle the ignition state and
check headlamp operation, if the DTC returns refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power,
ground and signal circuit of the Power Module for
circuit fault. If no circuit faults are evident suspect the
Headlamp Power Module has an internal fault, replace
as required. Refer to the new module/component
B1D67- Right Headlamp Power  Headlamp Power NOTE: The power module is a service item
00 Module - No sub type Module internal fault
information  Headlamp Power
This DTC is logged if the Headlamp Power Module
Module circuit fault
supply voltage is above 16 volts / below 9.5 volts or
the module suffers an internal failure. Record then
clear the stored DTC, cycle the ignition state and
check headlamp operation, if the DTC returns refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power,
ground and signal circuit of the Power Module for
circuit fault. If no circuit faults are evident suspect the
Headlamp Power Module has an internal fault, replace
as required. Refer to the new module/component
B1D66- Left Headlamp Power  The parameter set of NOTE: The power module is a service item
46 Module - the power module
Calibration/parameter does not match the
Clear the DTC. Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the
memory failure Adaptive Front
ignition state to start the engine, check for stored
Lighting System
DTCs, if DTC returns suspect the Headlamp Power
(AFS) Control Module
Module has an internal fault, replace as required. Refer
parameter set
to the new module/component installation note at the
B1D67- Right Headlamp Power  The parameter set of NOTE: The power module is a service item
46 Module - the power module
Calibration/parameter does not match the Clear the DTC. Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the
memory failure Adaptive Front ignition state to start the engine, check for stored
Lighting System DTCs, if DTC returns suspect the Headlamp Power
(AFS) Control Module Module has an internal fault, replace as required. Refer
parameter set to the new module/component installation note at the
B1D68- Left Headlamp Swiveling  Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state
01 Feedback Sensor circuit - Sensor Fault to start the engine, look for any errors in the
General Electrical Failure  Internal Headlamp Headlamp Beam movement (compare with other
Circuit Fault headlamp) and visually inspect the lamp for internal
damage or dislocation (ball joints out). If no faults are
evident refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check for circuit fault between the Headlamp Power
Module and the Headlamp Swiveling Feedback Sensor.
If no mechanical or circuit faults are evident suspect
headlamp internal fault, replace as required. Refer to
the new module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
B1D69- Right Headlamp Swiveling  Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state
01 Feedback Sensor circuit - Sensor Fault to start the engine, look for any errors in the
General Electrical Failure  Internal Headlamp Headlamp Beam movement (compare with other
Module and the Headlamp Swiveling Feedback Sensor.
If no mechanical or circuit faults are evident suspect
of the DTC Index
B1D64- Left Headlamp Swiveling  Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state
01 Motor circuit - General Motor Fault to start the engine, look for any errors in the
Electrical Failure  Internal Headlamp Headlamp Beam movement (compare with other
Module and the Headlamp Swiveling Motor. If no
mechanical or circuit faults are evident suspect
of the DTC Index
B1D65- Right Headlamp Swiveling  Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state
01 Motor circuit - General Motor Fault to start the engine, and check headlamp operation,
Electrical Failure  Internal Headlamp look for any errors in the Headlamp Beam movement
Circuit Fault (compare with other headlamp) and visually inspect
the lamp for internal damage or dislocation (ball joints
out). If no faults are evident refer to the electrical
Headlamp Power Module and the Headlamp Swiveling
Motor. If no mechanical or circuit faults are evident
suspect headlamp internal fault, replace as required.
Refer to the new module/component installation note
B10A3- Left Headlamp Swivel  Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state
71 Actuator - Actuator stuck Actuator Fault to start the engine, look for any errors in the
 Internal Headlamp Headlamp Beam movement (compare with other
Module and the Swiveling Feedback Actuator. If no
of the DTC Index
B10A4- Right Headlamp Swivel  Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state
71 Actuator - Actuator stuck Actuator Fault to start the engine, look for any errors in the
 Internal Headlamp Headlamp Beam movement (compare with other
Module and the Swiveling Feedback Actuator. If no
of the DTC Index
B1A57- Left Headlamp Leveling  Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state
01 motor - General Electrical Motor Fault to start the engine, look for any errors in the
Failure  Internal Headlamp Headlamp Beam movement (compare with other
Module and the Leveling motor. If no mechanical or
circuit faults are evident suspect headlamp internal
fault, replace as required. Refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
B1A58- Right Headlamp Leveling  Internal Headlamp Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state
01 motor - General Electrical Motor Fault to start the engine, look for any errors in the
Failure  Internal Headlamp Headlamp Beam movement (compare with other
Module and the Leveling motor. If no mechanical or
circuit faults are evident suspect headlamp internal
fault, replace as required. Refer to the new
DTC Index
B1C98- Left Corner Lamp circuit  Left Corner Lamp NOTE: On Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
11 defect - Circuit short to circuit short to equipped vehicles the power feed to the Corner Lamp
ground ground is supplied via the Headlamp Power Module
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Left

Corner Lamp circuit for short to ground
B1C98- Left Corner Lamp circuit  Left Corner Lamp NOTE: On Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
13 defect - Circuit open circuit open equipped vehicles the power feed to the Corner Lamp
is supplied via the Headlamp Power Module
www.JagDocs.com
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Left
corner lamp circuit for open circuit
B1C99- Right Corner Lamp circuit  Right Corner Lamp NOTE: On Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
11 defect - Circuit short to circuit short to equipped vehicles the power feed to the Corner Lamp
ground ground is supplied via the Headlamp Power Module
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check

Right corner lamp circuit for short to ground
B1C99- Right Corner Lamp circuit  Right Corner Lamp NOTE: On Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
13 defect - Circuit open circuit open equipped vehicles the power feed to the Corner Lamp
is supplied via the Headlamp Power Module
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check

Right corner lamp circuit for open circuit
U1A39- Lost communication with  Communication NOTE: This circuit uses shielded cable
00 Right Headlamp Power Circuit fault
Module - No sub type  Headlamp Power
NOTE: The power module is a service item
information Module internal fault
 Headlamp Power
Module Power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check the
Ground supply fault power/ground supply and Communication circuit to the
Headlamp Power Module. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear stored DTCs in the
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Control Module.
Cycle the ignition state to off, then return to on and
check for stored DTCs. If DTCs U1A39-00 and U1A38-
00 return suspect Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS) Control Module internal fault, If only DTC
U1A39-00 returns suspect Headlamp Power Module
internal fault. Replace as required. Refer to the new
DTC Index
U1A38- Lost communication with  Communication NOTE: This circuit uses shielded cable
00 Left Headlamp Power Circuit fault
Module - No sub type  Headlamp Power
NOTE: The power module is a service item
information Module internal fault
 Headlamp Power
Module Power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check the
Ground supply fault power/ground supply and Communication circuit to the
Headlamp Power Module. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear stored DTCs in the
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Control Module.
Cycle the ignition state to off, then return to on and
check for stored DTCs. If DTCs U1A39-00 and U1A38-
00 return suspect Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS) Control Module internal fault, If only DTC
U1A38-00 returns suspect Headlamp Power Module
internal fault. Replace as required. Refer to the new
DTC Index
U0126- Lost communication with  Lost communication Check the Steering Angle Sensor Module for stored
00 Steering Angle Sensor with the Steering DTCs. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type Angle Sensor Module system, complete the CAN Network Integrity test.
information  CAN network fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
CAN network between the Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFS) Control Module and the Steering Angle
Sensor Module
U0126- Lost communication with  Invalid signal from Check the Steering Angle Sensor Module for stored
86 Steering Angle Sensor the Steering Angle DTCs. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - Invalid signal Sensor Module system, complete the CAN Network Integrity test.
 CAN network fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
System (AFS) Control Module and the Steering Angle
Sensor Module
U0121- Lost communication with  Lost communication Check the Anti-lock Brake System Module for stored
00 Anti-lock Brake System with the Anti-lock DTCs. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
(ABS) Control Module - Brake System Module system, complete the CAN Network Integrity test.
No sub type information  CAN network fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
System (AFS) Control Module and the Anti-lock Brake
System Module
U0121- Lost communication with  Invalid signal from Check the Anti-lock Brake System Module for stored
86 Anti-lock Brake System the Anti-lock Brake DTCs. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
(ABS) Control Module - System Module system, complete the CAN Network Integrity test.
Signal invalid  CAN network fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
System (AFS) Control Module and the Anti-lock Brake
System Module
U0100- Lost communication with  Lost communication Check the Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
00 ECM - No sub type with the Engine Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
information Control Module complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
 CAN network fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
Control Module and the Engine Control Module
U0101- Lost communication with  Lost communication Check the Transmission Control Module for stored
00 TCM - No sub type with the Transmission DTCs. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information Control Module system, complete the CAN Network Integrity test.
 CAN network fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
System (AFS) Control Module and the Transmission
Control Module
U0443- Invalid data from Body  Invalid signal from Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for stored DTCs.
00 Control Module B - no sub the Auxiliary Junction Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
type information Box complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
 Auxiliary Junction Box electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
fault between the Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
Control Module and the Auxiliary Junction Box
U0001- High speed CAN  CAN network fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
49 communication Bus -  Adaptive Front complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
Internal electronic failure Lighting System electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
(AFS) Control Module to the Headlamp Leveling Module. If no CAN Bus
internal electronic circuit faults are evident suspect Adaptive Front
failure Lighting System (AFS) Control Module internal fault,
replace as required. Refer to the new
DTC Index
U0300- Internal Control Module  Configuration data Check the correct Adaptive Front Lighting System
62 software incompatibility - received over the (AFS) Control Module is installed to vehicle
Signal Compare Failure. CAN BUS is different specification. Refit original or replace the module as
from the stored required. Refer to the new module/component
configuration data installation note at the top of the DTC Index
 The Headlamp
Leveling Module has
previously been
vehicle
U0001- High Speed CAN  CAN Bus Off Carry out the CAN Network Integrity test using the
88 Communication Bus - Bus  CAN Bus Circuit fault manufacturer approved diagnostic system
off
U3002- Vehicle Identification  The stored Vehicle Check the correct Adaptive Front Lighting System
81 Number (VIN) - Invalid Identification Number (AFS) Control Module is installed to vehicle
Serial Data received is not the same as specification. Refit original or replace the module as
the Central Broadcast required. Refer to the new module/component
Vehicle Identification installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Number
 The Adaptive Front
Lighting System
(AFS) Control Module
has previously been
vehicle
U3000- Control Module - Missing  Height sensors not NOTE: Sensor calibration routine must be carried out
54 Calibration calibrated to vehicle with the vehicle unladen
Calibrate the Headlamp Leveling sensors using the

manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry the
out routine 'Headlamp and Axle Sensor Calibration'
from the 'Module programming and configuration -
Setup and Configuration - Lighting'
U3000- Control Module - Internal  Internal electronic Suspect an internal fault, replace the Adaptive Front
49 electronic failure failure Lighting System (AFS) Control Module as required,
refer to the new module installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
U3000- Control Module - Not  Incorrect Car NOTE: The Car Configuration File (CCF) parameters
55 Configured Configuration File required are (Vehicle type)(Headlamp type)(Gearbox
(CCF) data received type) and (Dayrunning light)
Re-configure the Car Configuration File (CCF) as

required using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains
suspect the Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
Control Module, replace as required. Refer to the new
U3003- Battery voltage  The power supply to Suspect Charging fault. Check the battery condition
17 the Module has been and state of charge. Check the vehicle charging
above 16 Volts for system. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
more than 1000 section
milliseconds
U3003- Battery voltage  The power supply to Suspect Battery or Charging fault. Check the battery
16 the Module has been condition and state of charge. Check the vehicle
below 9 Volts for charging system. Refer to the relevant workshop
more than 1000 manual section. Clear the DTC, cycle ignition state to
milliseconds off then on, if DTC returns refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check power and ground circuit to the
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Control Module
Exterior Lighting - Front Fog Lamp Adjustment
General Procedures
1. Align the beam setting equipment to one fog lamp.

2. NOTE: The fog lamp beam should be set at 1.2% below the
horizontal and parallel.
Check the fog lamp beam alignment.

4. NOTE: Wheel shown removed for clarity.
Release the front of the fender splash shield.

5. Adjust the fog lamp using the thumb wheel.

7. To adjust the second fog lamp, repeat the above procedure.

Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Adjustment
General Procedures
1. Align the headlamp beam setting equipment to one headlamp.

2. NOTE: The headlamp setting is 1.2 % below horizontal and
parallel.
Check the headlamp beam alignment.

3. Open the hood.
4. Adjust the headlamps with an Allen Key.
5. To adjust the second headlamp, repeat the above procedure.

Exterior Lighting - Approach Lamp
Removal
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2.
3.
Installation

Exterior Lighting - Front Fog Lamp
Removal

Procedures).


3. Remove the front wheel and tire.
5. Remove the front fog lamp.

Installation
1. Install the front fog lamp.


Procedures).
5. NOTE: The fog lamp beam should be set at 1.2% below the
horizontal and parallel.
Check the fog lamp beam alignment.

Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Assembly
Removal
WARNING: Vehicles fitted with Xenon headlamps, the following precautions must be observed. Failure to comply
may result in exposure to ultra violet rays, severe electric shock, burns or the risk of explosion. Ensure the headlamps
are switched off at all times. Eye and hand protection must be worn. Never switch on the lamps or test the bulbs with
the lamp holder released from the headlamp.

2. Open the hood.
3. CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and glass when

removing exterior components.
Release the headlamp assembly.

 Release the locating pegs.
4. Disconnect the washer jet hose.
5. Remove the LH headlamp assembly.

6. Remove the headlamp bulb.
 Remove the cover.
7. Remove the headlamp inner bulb.

8. Remove the turn signal indicator bulb.
 Release the bulb holder.
9. Remove the side marker bulb.

 Release the bulb holder.
10. Remove the gas discharge modules.
11. Remove the headlamp washer jet.

Installation
1. Install the headlamp washer jet.
2. Install the gas discharge modules.

3. Install the side marker bulb.

 Install the bulb holder.
4. Install the turn signal indicator bulb.

 Install the bulb holder.
5. Install the headlamp inner bulb.

 Install the cover.
6. Install the headlamp bulb.
7. Install the headlamp assembly.

 Position the locating pegs.
8. Connect the washer jet hose.

9. Secure the headlamp assembly.
 Tighten the bolts.
10. Close the hood.

Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Bulb Vehicles With: High Intensity
Discharge Headlamps
Removal
WARNING: Vehicles fitted with Xenon headlamps, the following precautions must be observed. Failure to comply
may result in exposure to ultra violet rays, severe electric shock, burns or the risk of explosion. Ensure the headlamps
are switched off at all times. Eye and hand protection must be worn. Never switch on the lamps or test the bulbs with
the lamp holder released from the headlamp.

2. Remove the headlamp assembly.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb.
4. Remove the headlamp bulb retainer.
Installation
1. Attach the headlamp bulb retainer.
2. Install the headlamp bulb.
 Secure with the clip.
3. Install the headlamp assembly.

Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Module
Removal
2. Remove the blower motor.
For additional information, refer to: Blower Motor (412-02 Heating
and Ventilation, Removal and Installation).
Remove the RH cowl side trim panel.

 Reposition the carpet for access.
5. Remove the headlamp leveling module.

Installation
2. Install the headlamp leveling module.

Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Front Sensor
Removal


3. Remove the headlamp levelling sensor.
 Disconnect the height sensor link.
4. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed

for access only.
Remove the height sensor link.

Remove the bracket.

Installation
Install the bracket.

 Tighten the Allen bolts to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2. Install the height sensor link.

3. Install the headlamp levelling sensor.
 Connect the height sensor link.

Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Rear Sensor
Removal


2. Remove the headlamp levelling sensor.
 Disconnect the height sensor link.
3. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component

is removed for access only.
Remove the bracket.

Installation
Install the bracket.

 Tighten the Allen bolts to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2. Install the headlamp levelling sensor.

 Install the height sensor link.
Exterior Lighting - High Mounted Stoplamp
Removal
1. Remove the liftgate lower trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Lower Trim Panel
(501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
2. Disconnect the high mounted stoplamp electrical
connector.
3. Remove the high mounted stoplamp.

 Carefully release the Torx bolt covers.
Installation
1. Install the high mounted stoplamp.
 Install the Torx bolt covers.
2. Connect the high mounted stoplamp electrical connector.

3. Install the liftgate lower trim panel.
Installation).
Exterior Lighting - Rear Lamp Assembly V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - 2-Door (501-05 Interior Trim
and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).

3. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - Convertible (501-05 Interior
All vehicles
4.
 Torque: 2 Nm
5. CAUTION: Take great care when removing
the rear lamp assembly as the forward point of the
lens can be easily damaged.
Installation

Exterior Lighting - Fog Lamp Bulb
Removal

Procedures).
4. Remove the front fog lamp bulb.

 Release and disconnect the electrical
connector.
Installation
1. Install the fog lamp bulb.


Procedures).
Exterior Lighting - Rear Fog and Reversing Lamp 2-Door
Removal
Installation).
2. Remove the fog and reversing lamp.
 Remove the 3 plastic nuts.
Installation
1. Install the fog and reversing lamp.
 Install the plastic nuts.

Installation).
Exterior Lighting - Rear Fog and Reversing Lamp Convertible
Removal
1. Remove the luggage compartment lid trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid
2. Remove the reverse/fog lamp.
 Remove the 3 plastic nuts.
Installation
1. Install the reverse/fog lamp.
 Install the plastic nuts.
2. Install the luggage compartment lid trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid
Exterior Lighting - Side Turn Signal Lamp
Removal
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2.
3.
Installation

Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting
COMPONENT LOCATION
1 - Left Hand (LH) vanity mirror
-
2 Overhead console (Coupe version shown)
3 - LH map reading lamp switch
4 - Interior lamp switch
5 - Right Hand (RH) map reading lamp switch
6 - Map and interior lamps
7 - RH vanity mirror
8 - LH and RH door puddle lamps
9 - LH and RH footwell lamps
10 - LH and RH luggage compartment lamps
11 - Glovebox lamp
INTRODUCTION
The interior lamps are controlled by the Central Junction Box (CJB) and have two modes of operation: manual and automatic.
In the manual mode the interior lamps can be switched on and off using the momentary switches adjacent to each lamp or
disabled completely using the same switches. In the automatic mode the interior lamp functionality is controlled by the CJB
on receipt of various input signals.
The CJB receives the following inputs which affect the operation of the interior lamps:
 Ignition switch
 Door latch switches
 Liftgate latch switch
 Glovebox lamp switch
 Unlock signal
 Main interior lamp switch
 Map reading lamp switches
 Delayed power off relay
 Vanity mirror lamp switches.
The driver's and passenger door puddle lamps are controlled by the driver's door module and the passenger door module
respectively on receipt of Controller Area Network (CAN) signals from the CJB.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus

1 - Battery
2 - Megafuse (175A)
3 - Megafuse (175A)
4 - CJB
6 - Liftgate latch switch
-
www.JagDocs.com
7 Luggage compartment lamp
8 - Luggage compartment lamp
10 - Passenger door puddle lamp
11 - Driver's door module
12 - Driver's door puddle lamp
13 - Glovebox lamp switch
14 - Glovebox lamp
15 - Driver's vanity mirror
16 - Passenger vanity mirror
17 - Driver's footwell lamp
18 - Passenger footwell lamp
19 - Driver's map reading lamp
20 - Interior lamp
21 - Passenger map reading lamp
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting
For a detailed description of the interior lighting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage and system integrity.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
 Fuse(s)
 Bulb(s)
 Wiring harness
 Loose or corroded connector(s)
 Accessories
 Switch(es)
system.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
INTRODUCTION
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) use the full intensity low beam headlamps which are permanently illuminated when the
vehicle is being driven. DRL are used in a number of markets and there are two systems to cover these markets.
For additional information, refer to: Exterior Lighting (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Description and Operation).
DRL CANADIAN MARKET
DRL for this market use full intensity low beam headlamps. The side marker lamps, tail lamps and license plate lamps
will be on, but instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
 PARK is not selected on automatic transmission selector lever

 Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the auxiliary junction box
 The Central Junction Box (CJB) receives an engine running signal
 The lighting control switch is in the off or side lamps position.
NOTE: If the lighting control switch is moved to the headlamp position, DRL are deactivated and normal side lamp and
headlamp functionality is operational.
NOTE: Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) (where fitted) is non-functional when the DRL are active.
NOTE: When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch will
operate normally.
The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be deactivated. When the
selector lever is in the PARK position on automatic transmission vehicles, DRL are turned off. This is to reduce battery
discharge during long periods of engine idling in cold climate conditions. When the selector lever is moved from the
PARK position, normal DRL functionality is restored.
DRL DENMARK, HOLLAND, NORWAY, SWEDEN, FINLAND AND POLAND
DRL for these markets use full intensity low beam headlamps. Side lamps and license plate lamps will be on, but
instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
 Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the auxiliary junction box

 The CJB receives an engine running signal
 The lighting control switch is in the off position.
NOTE: When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch will
operate normally. The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be
deactivated.
If the lighting control switch is moved to the side lamp or headlamp positions, DRL are deactivated and normal side
lamp and headlamp functionality is operational.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
For a detailed description of the daytime running lamps, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-04 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage and system integrity.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
 Fuse(s)
 Bulb(s)
 Switch(es)
 Wiring Harness
system.
Module Communications Network -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Junction box - nut/screw 4 3 35
Module Communications Network - Communications Network
INTRODUCTION
A number of different types of communication network are incorporated into the vehicle wiring harnesses for the
transmission of commands and information between control modules. The configuration installed on a particular vehicle
depends on the model and equipment level.
The communication networks available on the vehicle are:
 Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus

 High speed CAN bus
 MOST (media orientated system transport) ring
 LIN (local interconnect network) bus
 Private CAN bus
Bus Baud Rate

Medium speed CAN bus 125 kbits/s
High speed CAN bus 500 kbits/s
MOST ring 24 mbits/s
LIN bus 9.6 kbits/s
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK BUS
The CAN bus is a high speed broadcast network where control modules automatically transmit information every few
microseconds. Information is broadcast down a pair of twisted wires, known as 'CAN high' and 'CAN low'. Information is
transmitted on the CAN bus as a voltage difference between the two wires.
Two CAN bus networks are used on the vehicle; medium speed and high speed, with the instrument cluster acting as a
gateway between the two networks. The table below shows the wire colors used on both networks.
Network High Low

Medium Speed White (W) Blue (U)
High Speed Yellow (Y) Green (G)
Private CAN Bus
The private CAN bus networks used on the vehicle can be either medium or high speed depending on which vehicle system
they are being used. All private CAN bus networks are proprietary systems and cannot be interrogated using a Jaguar
Diagnostic Socket
The diagnostic socket allows the transfer of information between the vehicle electronic control modules and a Jaguar
approved diagnostic system. The diagnostic socket is connected directly to both the medium speed CAN bus and the high
speed CAN bus and is located below the driver side of the instrument panel.
MEDIA ORIENTATED SYSTEM TRANSPORT RING
The MOST ring uses a fibre optic cable to transport data and audio around the information and entertainment system. The
fibre optic cable is arranged in a ring, with each unit on the ring having a 'MOST in' and 'MOST out' connection.
MOST is a synchronous network. A timing master supplies the clock and all other components on the ring synchronize their
operation to this clock. The timing master for the MOST ring is the Information and Entertainment control module.
When handling MOST fibre optic cables the following precautions should be observed.
 After disconnection of any cables, carefully install appropriate dust caps to protect the mating faces of the connectors
from damage or contamination.
 Avoid introducing bends of less than 25 mm (0.98 inches) radius or kinks into the fibre optic cable during service or
repair. Tight bends or kinks could impair operation, cause immediate system failure, or future system failure.
 Avoid excessive force, strain or stress on the fibers and connectors, especially permanent stress after reinstallation.
Software Download Socket
CAUTION: The software download socket is used for engineering purposes only and must not be used in service.
The MOST software download socket is located below the driver side of the instrument panel. A service loop is fitted to the
end of the socket to complete the MOST ring. If the service loop is removed the MOST ring will be broken and all
components on the ring will stop operating.
Ring Break Diagnostics
Incorporated into the AJB (auxiliary junction box) is a RBD (ring break diagnostics) link. The RBD link houses a copper link
which when removed initiates the ring break diagnostics mode. The ring break diagnostics mode allows the technician to
locate an optical fiber break in the MOST ring. To initiate the ring break diagnostics mode, carry out the following process:
 Connect the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.

 Ensure the vehicle is in power mode 4 or greater.
 Remove the RBD link for the length of time specified by the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
 Replace the RBD link.
After approximately 30 seconds a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) will be logged in the Information and Entertainment Control
Module, identifying the location of the fault. The DTC can be read and interrogated using a Jaguar approved diagnostic
system.
LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK BUS
The LIN bus is a low speed broadcast network that employs master and slave components. The master component transmits
a message to the slave components identifying which slave is to respond. This message has a header (slave identifier) and
an empty data field. The identified slave component fills the data field with the relevant information and returns the message
to the master component.
Unlike the CAN bus networks, the LIN bus utilizes a single wire network.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MEDIUM SPEED CAN BUS
NOTE: N = Medium speed CAN bus.

1 - Seat climate control module
5 - Parking aid module
6 - Passenger seat module
7 - Keyless vehicle module
8 - TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) module
10 - Convertible top module
13 - Driver seat module
NOTE: Only the buttons of the integrated control panel are connected to the medium speed CAN bus. The TSD (touch screen
display) is connected to the MOST ring.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - HIGH SPEED CAN BUS
NOTE: D = High speed CAN bus.

3 - Adaptive front lighting system control module
6 - Occupancy sensor module
7 - Pedestrian protection module
-
11 RCM (restraints control module)
12 - Parking brake module
14 - Electric steering column lock
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MOST RING
NOTE: P = MOST ring.

1 - Software download socket
3 - Auxiliary USB (universal serial bus) unit
4 - Multi-media module
5 - DAB/SDARS receiver
6 - Cellular phone module
7 - TSD (touch screen display)
- Audio system amplifier
8
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PRIVATE CAN BUS
NOTE: U = Private CAN bus.

1 - ABS module
2 - Yaw rate/acceleration sensor
3 - Adaptive speed control sensor
CONTROL DIAGRAM - LIN BUS
NOTE: O = LIN bus.

1 - CJB
3 - Engine start control module
4 - Steering wheel audio switch module
6 - Driver seat switch pack
8 - Face/Feet distribution stepper motor
9 - LH temperature blend stepper motor
10 - RH temperature blend stepper motor
12 - ATC module
14 - Passenger seat switch pack
16 - Battery backed sounder
- Clockspring
17
Module Communications Network - Communications Network
For a detailed description of the Communications Network, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Description and Operation).
CAUTIONS:
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not guarantee
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage and system integrity
Visual Inspection
Electrical
 Fuses (refer to electrical guide)
 Wiring harness
 Correct engagement of electrical connectors
 Loose or corroded connections
 Routing of fibre optic harnesses
 Correct engagement of optical connectors
 Correct placement of optical connectors (ring order)
 Correct assembly of optical connectors (backout, etc)
 Damage to fibre (chafing, abrasion, kinking, cuts, etc)
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart

MOST network fault - Touch  MOST ring broken after the touch screen display  GO to
screen display displaying flashing  Control module on MOST network power or ground circuit Pinpoint Test
logo open circuit, high resistance B.
 Control module on MOST network internal failure
MOST network fault - Touch  MOST ring broken between the information and  GO to
screen display blank entertainment control module and the touch screen display Pinpoint Test
 Information and entertainment control module or touch G.
screen display power or ground circuit open circuit, high
resistance
 Wake up signal not received by the information and
entertainment control module
 Information and entertainment control module or touch
screen display internal failure
Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST)
NOTE: Items 1, 6, 7, 8 and 9 will always be present. The remaining items are optional and/or market specific.
Item Description
1 Information and entertainment control module
2 Portable audio interface module
3 Navigation control module
4 Telephone module
5 DAB tuner module
6 Touch screen display
7 Power amplifier
8 Integrated audio module
9 MOST diagnostic connector
Overview
The basic guidelines are covered in the description and operation section, such as not attempting to repair fibre optic cables,
but additional precautions include:
 Do not touch the exposed ends of the optical fibres (grease from skin can contaminate the fibre)
 Whenever the fibre optic cable is disconnected, cover the connectors to prevent dust contamination
 Do not expose the fibre optic cable to heat
 Do not bend the fibre optic cable through less than a 25 mm (one inch) radius
 Do not use laser pens to test the fibre optic cable's ability to pass light
MOST Diagnostic Tools
There are two dedicated tools for testing the MOST system:
MOST tester. The MOST tester is connected to the MOST network in place of a control module. It will confirm receipt of any
existing MOST signal and transmit it to the next control module on the network. Perform the following tests to validate the
operation of the MOST tester. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
MOST prism. The MOST prism is connected in the same way as the MOST tester but will simply reflect any existing signal
onward to the next control module. Using the MOST prism before or after a long run of harness may cause a ring break as a
good signal may be too weak after travelling the extended distance. Also, the MOST prism will pass light in either direction
so will not detect reversed MOST terminals elsewhere in the network. For these reasons, the MOST tester is the preferred
tool and should be used unless limited access does not permit it
MOST Ring Break Indication
A ring break in the MOST network is indicated by a blank touch screen display if the break is before the touch screen display
or a flashing logo of the break is after the touch screen display. Possible causes of ring breaks are listed in the symptom
chart
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : MOST TESTER TESTS

CONDITIONS
A1: MOST TESTER BATTERY TEST
1 Set the MOST tester power switch to 'on'
Is the power LED illuminated?

Yes
Test passed. GO to A2.
No
Test failed. Install a new battery into the MOST tester. GO to A1.
A2: 2+0 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTE: '2+0' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 0 electrical terminals.
NOTE: The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does not
indicate a fault.
2 Set the connector selector switch to '2+0'
3 Set the indication switch to 'beep' or 'LED'
4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector and the 2+0 loop harness connector
5 Connect the 2+0 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
6 Operate the test switch and check the MOST tester beep/LED
Did the MOST tester emit a tone or illuminate the LED?
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+0 harness fault
A3: 2+4 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTE: '2+4' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 4 electrical terminals.
indicate a fault.
4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+4 connector and the 2+4 loop harness connector
5 Connect the 2+4 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+4 connector
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+4 harness fault
A4: ADAPTER HARNESS AND PRISM TEST
indicate a fault.
4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector, the prism, and the adapter harness
connectors
5 Connect the adapter harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
6 Connect the prism to the adapter harness
Yes
Test passed
No
Test failed. MOST tester, adapter harness or prism fault
PINPOINT TEST B : MOST NETWORK INITIAL TESTS

CONDITIONS
B1: MOST NETWORK INITIAL TEST 1
NOTE: When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector switch
to match the socket in use
1 Switch on the audio/video system
2 Remove the cover from the MOST diagnostic connector
4 Connect the MOST tester to the MOST diagnostic connector
5 Check the touch screen for indication of a MOST network fault
Has the MOST network been restored?
Yes
The MOST diagnostic connector cover is causing the MOST network fault. GO to B2.
No
The MOST diagnostic connector cover is not causing the MOST network fault. GO to B3.
1 Disconnect the MOST tester
2 Install the cover to the MOST diagnostic connector
Yes
No
Install a new MOST diagnostic connector cover
1 Check the MOST tester beep/LED
Yes
MOST signal received. The MOST network fault is located downstream of the MOST tester. GO to
Pinpoint Test E.
No
MOST signal not received. The MOST network fault is located upstream of the MOST tester.
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester and reconnect it to the control module.
PINPOINT TEST C : MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TESTS

CONDITIONS
C1: MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the preceding control module on the MOST
network
Is this control module the touch screen display?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test F.
No
GO to C2.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the control module
2 Direct the MOST harness connector at a suitable surface and check for the presence of red light
Is red light present?
Yes
The MOST network fault is in the control module or the MOST harness to the succeeding control
module. GO to C3.
No
The MOST network fault is located upstream of the disconnected control module. Reconnect the
MOST harness connector to the control module. GO to C1.
1 Connect the MOST harness connector to the MOST tester
2 Check the touch screen display for indication of a MOST network fault
Yes
The disconnected control module is causing the MOST network fault. GO to Pinpoint Test D.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the succeeding control module.
Install a new MOST harness as necessary
PINPOINT TEST D : CONTROL MODULE TESTS

CONDITIONS
D1: CONTROL MODULE TEST 1
indicate a fault.
1 Connect the MOST tester to the relevant control module using the adapter harness
Yes
MOST signal received. Tests inconclusive. Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the control
module and confirm that the MOST network fault is still present. Repeat the tests from the beginning.
No
GO to D2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the relevant control module power and ground circuits
for open circuit, high resistance
Are the power and ground circuits within specification?

Yes
GO to D3.
No
Repair the power and/or ground circuit
1 Reconnect the MOST harness to the control module
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new control module
PINPOINT TEST E : MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST

CONDITIONS
E1: MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST 1
indicate a fault.
1 Disconnect the MOST tester from the MOST diagnostic connector
2 Install the cover to the MOST diagnostic connector
3 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the information and entertainment control module
Connect the MOST harness connector to the MOST tester
4
Yes
GO to E2.
No
The fault is in the harness between the information and entertainment control module and the
preceeding control module. Install a new MOST harness as necessary
E2: MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST 2
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester
2 Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the information and entertainment control module
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new information and entertainment control module
PINPOINT TEST F : MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TESTS

CONDITIONS
F1: MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TEST 1
indicate a fault.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the touch screen display
2 Connect the MOST tester to the touch screen display using the adapter harness
Yes
The fault is in the MOST harness between the touch screen display and the succeeding control
module. Install a new MOST harness as necessary
No
GO to F2.
F2: MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TEST 2
1 Reconnect the MOST harness to the touch screen display
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new touch screen display
PINPOINT TEST G : BLANK SCREEN TESTS

CONDITIONS
G1: BLANK SCREEN TEST 1
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the touch screen display
1
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test I.
No
GO to G2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the preceding control module on the MOST
network
Is this control module the information and entertainment control module?
Yes
GO to G5.
No
GO to G3.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the control module
Yes
The MOST network fault is in the control module or the MOST harness to the succeeding control
module. GO to G4.
No
The MOST network fault is located upstream of the disconnected control module. Reconnect the
MOST harness connector to the control module. GO to G2.
1 Connect the MOST harness connector to the MOST tester
Yes
The disconnected control module is causing the MOST network fault. GO to Pinpoint Test D.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the succeeding control module.
Install a new MOST harness as necessary
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the information and entertainment control module
2 Direct the information and entertainment control module at a suitable surface and check for the
presence of red light
Yes
Install a new MOST harness between the information and entertainment control module and the
succeeding control module
No
GO to Pinpoint Test H.
PINPOINT TEST H : INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE TESTS

CONDITIONS
H1: INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE TEST 1
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the information and entertainment control
module for related DTCs
Is communication possible between the manufacturer approved diagnostic system and the information and
entertainment control module?
Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC index
No
GO to H2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the information and entertainment control module
power and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to H3.
No
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Is the medium speed CAN bus within specification?
Yes
Install a new information and entertainment control module
No
Repair the medium speed CAN bus circuit
PINPOINT TEST I : TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TESTS

CONDITIONS
I1: TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the touch screen display power and ground circuits
for open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to I2.
No
I2: TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TEST 2
1 Reconnect the MOST harness to the touch screen display
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new touch screen display
DTC Index
CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTE: If the control module is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty Policy
and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module.
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the five digits from the
scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give additional
NOTE: If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be
the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
Rear Junction Box (RJB)

B100A51 Fuel pump  RJB fault Check power and ground supplies to RJB. Check CAN
authorisation target ID  Low speed CAN fault communications between RJB and instrument
not stored  Instrument cluster fault cluster. Check power and ground supplies to
instrument cluster
B100A62 Fuel pump  Low speed CAN fault Check CAN communications between RJB and
authorisation signal  RJB fault instrument cluster. Check power and ground supplies
compare failure  Instrument cluster fault to RJB and instrument cluster. Confirm correct
 Incorrect module installed module installed. Re-synchronise ID by re-
(RJB/Instrument cluster) configuring the RJB as a new module. Check CAN
 Write target SID network for interference/EMC related issues
following re-programming
B100A63 Fuel Pump  RJB fault Check power and ground supplies to RJB and
Authorisation Time Out  Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster. Check CAN communications
 Instrument cluster fault between RJB and instrument cluster. Check battery
 Low battery voltage <9V is in fully charged and serviceable condition, refer to
the battery care manual
B102612 Steering column lock  Steering column lock ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
ground circuit short to circuit - short to power steering column lock ground circuit for short to
power power
B10AF12 Blower fan relay short  Blower fan relay circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
to power short to power blower fan relay circuit for short to power
B10AF14 Blower fan relay open  Blower fan relay circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
load or short to ground short to ground, high using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
resistance
B10DD12 Air bag deployed circuit  Air bag deployed circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test air
short to ground short to ground bag deployed circuit for short to ground
B10DD15 Air bag deployed circuit  Air bag deployed circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
open circuit, short to short to power, high using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
power or no signal resistance
B10DD38 Air bag deployed circuit  Signal frequency incorrect Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test air
signal out of bag deployed circuit between RCM, ECM and RJB for
specification short to power, ground and open circuit
B111211 Parking aid ignition  Parking aid ignition supply Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
supply short to ground circuit - short to ground using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
or over temperature
B111213 Parking aid ignition  Parking aid ignition supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
supply open load circuit - high resistance parking aid ignition supply circuit for high resistance
B111311 Left front comfort  Left front comfort solenoid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
solenoid short to circuit - short to ground using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
ground or over
temperature
B111313 Left front comfort  Left front comfort solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left
solenoid open load circuit - high resistance front comfort solenoid circuit for high resistance
B111411 Right front comfort  Right front comfort solenoid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
solenoid short to circuit - short to ground using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
ground or over
temperature
B111413 Right front comfort  Right front comfort solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
solenoid open load circuit - high resistance front comfort solenoid circuit for high resistance
B111511 High mounted stop  High mounted stop lamp Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
lamp control short to control circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
ground or over ground
temperature
B111513 High mounted stop  High mounted stop lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test high
lamp control open load control circuit - high mounted stop lamp control circuit for high resistance
resistance
B111611 Left rear lamp  Left rear lamp assembly Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
assembly control circuit control circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
short to ground or over ground
temperature
B111613 Left rear lamp  Left rear lamp assembly Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left
assembly control circuit control circuit - high rear lamp assembly control circuit for high resistance
open load resistance
B111711 Right rear lamp  Right rear lamp assembly Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
assembly control circuit control circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
temperature
B111713 Right rear lamp  Right rear lamp assembly Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
assembly control circuit control circuit - high rear lamp assembly control circuit for high resistance
B111811 Left rear side marker  Left rear side marker control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
control circuit short to circuit - short to ground using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
ground or over
temperature
B111813 Left rear side marker  Left rear side marker control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left
control circuit open circuit - high resistance rear side marker control circuit for high resistance
load
B111911 Right rear side marker  Right rear side marker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
control circuit short to control circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
temperature
B111913 Right rear side marker  Right rear side marker Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
control circuit open control circuit - high rear side marker control circuit for high resistance
load resistance
B111A11 License plate lamps  License plate lamps control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
ground or over
temperature
B111A13 License plate lamps  License plate lamps control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
control circuit open circuit - high resistance license plate lamps control circuit for high resistance
load
B111D11 Luggage compartment  Luggage compartment lid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
lid open motor control open motor control circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
circuit short to ground short to ground
or over temperature
B111D13 Luggage compartment  Luggage compartment lid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
lid open motor control open motor control circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
circuit open load high resistance
B111E11 Luggage compartment  Luggage compartment lid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
lid lamps power supply lamps power supply circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
circuit short to ground short to ground
or over temperature
B111E13 Luggage compartment  Luggage compartment lid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
lid lamps power supply lamps power supply circuit - luggage compartment lid lamps power supply circuit
circuit open load high resistance for high resistance
B112311 Restraints ignition relay  Restraints ignition relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
short to ground circuit - short to ground restraints ignition supply relay circuit for short to
ground
B112312 Restraints ignition relay  Restraints ignition relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
short to power circuit - short to power restraints ignition supply relay circuit for short to
power
B113E23 External luggage  Signal stuck low Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
compartment lid using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
release switch stuck
B1A751C Fuel sender No.1 fault  Fuel sender No.1 circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
voltage out of range using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B1A761C Fuel sender No.2 fault  Fuel sender No.2 circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
voltage out of range using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B1A7911 Right fog lamp control  Right fog lamp control circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
circuit short to ground - short to ground using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
or over temperature
B1A7913 Rear fog lamp control  Rear fog lamp control circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
circuit open load - high resistance fog lamp control circuit for high resistance
B1C5512 Horn relay short to  Horn relay circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test horn
power power control relay circuit for short to power
B1C5514 Horn relay open load or  Horn relay circuit - short to Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
short to ground ground, high resistance using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B1C8312 Heated rear window  Heated rear window relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
relay coil short to circuit - short to power heated rear window relay circuit for short to power
power
B1C8314 Heated rear window  Heated rear window relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
relay coil open load or circuit - short to ground, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
short to ground high resistance
B1C9111 Fuel filler door lock  Fuel filler door lock motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
motor control circuit control circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
temperature
B1C9113 Fuel filler door lock  Fuel filler door lock motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
motor control circuit control circuit - high using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B1D0611 Left turn signal lamp  Left turn signal lamp control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
ground or over
temperature
B1D0613 Left turn signal lamp  Left turn signal lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left
control circuit open circuit - high resistance turn signal lamp control circuit for high resistance
load
B1D0711 Right turn signal lamp  Right turn signal lamp Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
control circuit short to control circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
temperature
B1D0713 Right turn signal lamp  Right turn signal lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
control circuit open control circuit - high turn signal lamp control circuit for high resistance
load resistance
B1D3523 Hazard switch stuck  Signal stuck low Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B2A9016 Battery low  Circuit voltage below Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
threshold condition, refer to the battery care manual
B2A9116 Battery discharged  Circuit voltage below Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
threshold condition, refer to the battery care manual
C111A11 Right stoplamp short to  Right stoplamp control circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
ground or over - short to ground using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
temperature
C111A13 Right stoplamp control  Right stoplamp control circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
circuit open load - high resistance stoplamp control circuit for high resistance
C111B11 Left stoplamp control  Left stoplamp control circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
circuit short to ground - short to ground using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
or over temperature
C111B13 Left stoplamp control  Left stoplamp control circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left
circuit open load - high resistance stoplamp control circuit for high resistance
C112011 Reversing lamp control  Reversing lamp control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
circuit short to ground circuit - short to ground using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
or over temperature
C112013 Reversing lamp control  Reversing lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
circuit open load circuit - high resistance reversing lamp control circuit for high resistance
P123011 Fuel pump relay short  Fuel pump relay circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test fuel
to ground short to ground pump relay circuit for short to ground
P123012 Fuel pump relay short  Fuel pump relay circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test fuel
to power short to power pump relay circuit for short to power
U001088 Medium Speed CAN  bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Communication Bus using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U014000 Lost communication  Lost communication CJB Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
CJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U015500 Lost communication  Lost communication with Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
with instrument cluster instrument cluster using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
with climate control climate control module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
module
U0206- Lost communication  Circuit short to ground, short  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 with convertible top to power check the power and ground connections to
module - No sub type  CAN signal fault the convertible top control module
information  Low battery voltage  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
 Convertible top control system, complete a CAN network integrity
module internal fault test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the CAN network between the
auxiliary junction box and convertible top
control module
and battery care manual. Check battery state
of charge and starting/charging system
performance
 Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest.
If the problem persists, renew the convertible
top control module. Refer to the warranty
suspect
with remote keyless remote keyless entry module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
entry module
U030046 Internal control module  Calibration parameter failure Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
software incompatibility approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test,
if DTC remains, suspect the RJB, refer to the new
U1A1449 CAN initialisation failure  Internal electronic failure Install a new RJB, refer to the new module
U300049 Control module  Internal electronic failure Install a new RJB, refer to the new module
U300055 Stored vehicle  Incorrect car configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
configuration data does data received approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test.
not match If the DTC remains suspect the RJB, refer to the new
U300281 Vehicle Identification  Vehicle/component mis- Install original module, check for DTCs and refer to
Number (VIN) match. Corrupt VIN data relevant DTC Index
being transmitted, module
vehicle
Central Junction Box (CJB)

B100951 Ignition  Faulty instrument cluster Check ignition, power and ground supplies to CJB and
authorisation  Target SID re- instrument cluster. Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring the
synchronisation error instrument cluster as a new module. Check CAN
following programming communications between instrument cluster and tester
 CAN fault
B100962 Ignition  Low speed CAN fault Check CAN communications between CJB and instrument
authorisation signal  CJB fault cluster. Check ignition, power and ground supplies to CJB
compare failure  Instrument cluster fault and instrument cluster. Confirm correct module is installed.
 Incorrect module Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the instrument cluster
installed (CJB/Instrument as a new module. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
cluster) related issues
 Target SID
following re-
programming
B100963 Ignition  CJB fault Check Power and Ground supplies to CJB and instrument
authorisation time-  Low speed CAN fault cluster. Check CAN communications between CJB and
out  Instrument cluster fault instrument cluster. Check battery is in fully charged and
 Low battery voltage <9V serviceable condition, refer to the battery care manual
B100964 Ignition  CJB fault Check power and ground supplies to CJB and instrument
authorisation signal  Low speed CAN fault cluster. Check CAN communications between CJB and
plausibility failure  Instrument cluster fault instrument cluster
B102611 Steering column lock  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test steering
power circuit short column lock power circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
B102613 Steering column lock  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test steering
power circuit open column lock power circuit for high resistance
load
B102B67 Passive key  CJB fault Check power and ground supplies to CJB and RKE module.
authorisation signal  Low speed CAN fault Check CAN communications between CJB and RKE module.
incorrect after event  Remote Keyless Entry Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the RKE module as a
(RKE) module fault new module
 Write target SID
following re-
programming
B102B87 Passive key  CJB fault Check power and ground supplies to CJB, RKE module and
authorisation  Low speed CAN fault receiver. Check CAN communications between CJB and
missing message  RKE module fault instrument cluster. Check key fob battery. Confirm vehicle
 Key fob battery surroundings, move vehicle. Check CAN network for
low/battery contact issue interference/EMC related issues. Disconnect battery, then
 Interference from other re-connect - confirm operation by re-programming keys.
RF signal Check serial circuit between receiver and RKE module.
 EMC/noise Confirm spare key works. Refer to the electrical circuit
 Receiver fault diagrams and test circuits to all 3 antennas. Check
 Receiver not whereabouts of key
programmed correctly
 Serial communications
fault (between receiver
and RKE module)
 Key fault
 Passive antenna fault
 Confirm placement of
key within vehicle
B108A23 Start button stuck  Signal stuck low Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B108A29 Start button fault  Signal invalid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B109511 Wiper On Off relay  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test wiper On
control circuit short Off relay control circuit for short to ground
to ground
B109512 Wiper On Off relay  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test wiper On
control circuit short Off relay control circuit for short to power
to power
B109612 Wiper speed relay  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test wiper speed
control circuit short relay control circuit for short to power
to power
B109614 Wiper speed relay  Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test wiper speed
control circuit open open relay control circuit for high resistance or short to ground
load or short to
ground
B109712 Heated front  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test heated front
windshield relay windshield relay control circuit for short to power
control circuit short
to power
B109714 Heated front  Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test heated front
windshield relay open windshield relay control circuit for high resistance or short
control circuit open to ground
load or short to
ground
B109F11 Intrusion sensor  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test intrusion
module power circuit sensor module power circuit for short to ground
short to ground
B10AD11 Rain sensor power  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rain sensor
circuit short to power circuit for short to ground
ground or over
temperature
B10AD13 Rain sensor power  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rain sensor
circuit open load power circuit for high resistance
B10AD49 Rain sensor internal  Internal electronic failure Install a new rain sensor.
fault REFER to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers and Washers,
B10DB23 Front left global  Signal stuck low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Front left
close global close circuit for short to ground
B10DC23 Front right global  Signal stuck low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Front right
close global close circuit for short to ground
B10E511 ECM wake-up signal  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test ECM wake-
short to ground up signal for short to ground
B10F111 Key In switch circuit  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Key In
short to ground switch circuit for short to ground
B10F311 Front left side lamp  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
control circuit short side lamp control circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
B10F313 Front left side lamp  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
control circuit open side lamp control circuit for high resistance
load
B10F411 Front right side lamp  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right
control circuit short side lamp control circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
B10F413 Front right side lamp  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right
control circuit open side lamp control circuit for high resistance
load
B10F812 Cigar lighter relay  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test cigar lighter
to power
B10F814 Cigar lighter relay  Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test cigar lighter
load or short to
ground
B10F912 Accessory socket 'B'  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Accessory
relay short to power socket 'B' relay for short to power
B10F914 Accessory socket 'B'  Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Accessory
relay open load or open socket 'B' relay for high resistance or short to ground
short to ground
B10FA12 Delayed power off  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test delayed
relay power output power off relay power output circuits for short to power
circuits short to
power
B10FA14 Delayed power off  Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test delayed
relay power output open power off relay power output circuits for high resistance or
circuits open load or short to ground
short to ground
B10FF11 Engine Junction Box  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test EJB and
(EJB) and ECM ECM ignition relay control circuits for short to ground
ignition relay control
circuit short to
ground or over
temperature
B10FF13 Engine Junction Box  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test EJB and
(EJB) and ECM ECM ignition relay control circuits for high resistance
ignition relay control
circuit open load
B110011 O2 sensor heater  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test O2 sensor
relay control circuit heater relay control circuit for short to ground
short to ground or
over temperature
B110013 O2 sensor heater  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test O2 sensor
relay control circuit heater relay control circuit for high resistance
open load
B113F12 Intruder detection  Circuit short to power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
arm/disarm control the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
circuit short to
power
B114011 Engine crank  Engine crank Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
authorisation circuit authorisation circuit short the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
short to ground or to ground
over temperature
B114013 Engine crank  Engine crank Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
authorisation circuit authorisation circuit high the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B114211 Ignition supply  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test ignition
status circuits 1 supply status circuits 1 for short to ground
short to ground or
over temperature
B114213 Ignition supply  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test ignition
status circuits 1 supply status circuits 1 for high resistance
open load
B114311 Ignition supply  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test ignition
status circuits 2 supply status circuits 2 for short to ground
short to ground or
over temperature
B114313 Ignition supply  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test ignition
status circuits 2 supply status circuits 2 for high resistance
open load
B114411 Steering wheel  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test steering
heater supply circuit wheel heater supply circuit for short to ground
short to ground or
over temperature
B114413 Steering wheel  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test steering
heater supply circuit wheel heater supply circuit for high resistance
open load
B114611 Passive sounder  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test passive
supply circuit short sounder supply circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
B114613 Passive sounder  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test passive
supply circuit open sounder supply circuit for high resistance
load
B114711 Front left fog lamp  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
control circuit short fog lamp control circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
B114713 Front left fog lamp  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
control circuit open fog lamp control circuit for high resistance
load
B114811 Front right fog lamp  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right
control circuit short fog lamp control circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
B114813 Front right fog lamp  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right
control circuit open fog lamp control circuit for high resistance
load
B115A11 Front passenger seat  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front
heater supply circuit passenger seat heater supply circuit for short to ground
short to ground or
over temperature
B115A13 Front passenger seat  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front
heater supply circuit passenger seat heater supply circuit for high resistance
open load
B115B11 Front driver seat  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front driver
heater supply circuit seat heater supply circuit for short to ground
short to ground or
over temperature
B115B13 Front driver seat  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front driver
heater supply circuit seat heater supply circuit for high resistance
open load
B1A9801 LIN Bus short to  General electrical failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN Bus for
ground or power short to ground or power
B1A9881 LIN Bus header error  Invalid serial data Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN circuit
received to battery backed sounder for short to ground, power, high
resistance
B1A9883 LIN Bus checksum  Value of signal protection Install a new CJB, refer to the new module installation note
error calculation incorrect at the top of the DTC Index
B1B651C Front left seat heater  Circuit voltage out of Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
temperature sensor range seat heater temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
fault power, high resistance
B1B661C Front right seat  Circuit voltage out of Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
heater temperature range seat heater temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
sensor fault power, high resistance
B1C4323 Master light switch  Signal stuck low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test master light
stuck switch circuit for short to ground
B1C4523 Front wiper park  Signal stuck low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test wiper park
position stuck position switch circuit for short to ground
B1C7812 Powerwash relay  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test powerwash
to power
B1C7814 Powerwash relay  Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test powerwash
load or short to
ground
B1C7911 Windshield washer  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test windshield
pump control circuit washer pump control circuit for short to ground
short to ground or
over temperature
B1C7913 Windshield washer  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test windshield
pump control circuit washer pump control circuit for high resistance
open load
B1C9811 Front left cornering  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
lamp control circuit cornering lamp control circuit for short to ground
short to ground or
over temperature
B1C9813 Front left cornering  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
lamp control circuit cornering lamp control circuit for high resistance
open load
B1C9911 Front right cornering  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right
lamp control circuit cornering lamp control circuit for short to ground
short to ground or
over temperature
B1C9913 Front right cornering  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right
lamp control circuit cornering lamp control circuit for high resistance
open load
B1D0011 Front left low beam  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
control circuit short low beam control circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
B1D0013 Front left low beam  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
control circuit open low beam control circuit for high resistance
load
B1D0111 Front right low beam  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right
control circuit short low beam control circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
B1D0113 Front right low beam  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right
control circuit open low beam control circuit for high resistance
load
B1D0211 Front left high beam  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
control circuit short high beam control circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
B1D0213 Front left high beam  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
control circuit open high beam control circuit for high resistance
load
B1D0311 Front right high  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right
beam control circuit high beam control circuit for short to ground
short to ground or
over temperature
B1D0313 Front right high  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right
beam control circuit high beam control circuit for high resistance
open load
B1D1711 Battery backed  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test battery
sounder power backed sounder power circuit for short to ground
circuit short to
ground
B1D1787 Battery backed  Missing message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN Bus for
sounder reply failure short to ground, power or high resistance
B1D2711 Heater coolant pump  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test heater
control circuit short coolant pump control circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
B1D2713 Heater coolant pump  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test heater
control circuit open coolant pump control circuit for high resistance
load
P080111 Reverse inhibit to  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test reverse
rear view mirror inhibit to rear view mirror circuit for short to ground
circuit short to
ground or over
temperature
P080113 Reverse inhibit to  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test reverse
rear view mirror inhibit to rear view mirror circuit for open load
circuit open load
U001088 Medium speed CAN  Bus Off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
communication Bus the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U014200 Lost communication  Lost communication with Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
with RJB RJB the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
with instrument instrument cluster the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
cluster
U015600 Lost communication  Lost Communication with Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
with Information and Information and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Entertainment Entertainment module
module
with climate control climate control module the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
module
with Driver Door DDM the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module (DDM)
with Passenger Door PDM the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module (PDM)
U0206- Lost communication  Circuit short to ground,  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
00 with convertible top short to power the power and ground connections to the
module - No sub  CAN signal fault convertible top control module
type information  Low battery voltage  Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
 Convertible top control system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
module internal fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the CAN network between the auxiliary junction box
and convertible top control module
 Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
and starting/charging system performance
 Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the convertible top control
module. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module is suspect
with remote keyless remote keyless entry the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
entry module module
U030000 Internal control  Invalid configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
module software message is received diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is
incompatibility still logged suspect the CJB module, refer to the new
U030046 Internal control  Calibration parameter Re-calibrate the CJB using the manufacturer approved
module software failure diagnostic system
incompatibility
U1A1449 CAN initialisation  Internal electronic failure Install a new CJB, refer to the new module installation note
failure at the top of the DTC Index
U201011 Switch illumination  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test switch
supply circuit short illumination supply circuit for short to ground
to ground or over
temperature
U201013 Switch illumination  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test switch
supply circuit open illumination supply circuit for high resistance
load
U300049 Control module  Internal electronic failure Install a new CJB, refer to the new module installation note
U300055 Stored vehicle  Incorrect car Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
configuration data configuration data diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC
does not match received remains suspect the CJB, refer to the new module
U300087 Control Module  Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Check CJB for DTCs and refer to the
DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
U300281 Vehicle Identification  Vehicle/component mis- Install original module, check for DTCs and refer to relevant
Number (VIN) match. Corrupt VIN data DTC Index
being transmitted,
module previously
www.JagDocs.com
U300316 Battery voltage  Circuit voltage below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
threshold the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U300317 Battery voltage  Circuit voltage above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
threshold the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module Communications Network - Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
Removal
Specifications).
2. Release the auxiliary junction box access cover.
3. Release the auxiliary junction box.

 Disconnect the battery positive cable.
4. Remove the auxiliary junction box.
Installation
1. Install the auxiliary junction box.
2. Secure the auxiliary junction box.

 Tighten the battery positive lead nut to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

 Secure in the clip.
Specifications).
Module Communications Network - Central Junction Box (CJB)
Removal
Specifications).


3. Remove the cowl side trim panel.

 Remove the hood release lever.
 Release the forward edge of the scuff plate
trim panel.
4. Release the CJB.

 Release the battery positive cables.
5. Remove the CJB.
Installation
1. Install the CJB.
 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2. Secure the CJB.

 Attach the battery positive cables.
3. Install the cowl side trim panel.

 Install the scuff plate trim panel.
 Install the hood release lever and secure with the screw.


Specifications).
6. Using WDS, configure a new CJB.
Module Configuration - Module Configuration
Module Configuration
There are two modes of configuration data. The first type requires configuration information so that the module can
interact with the vehicle correctly. This information will be transferred to the new module using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, so that it will contain the same settings as the old module.
New modules which require configuration after installation are:
 Anti-lock control - stability assist module

 Speed control module
 Climate control module
 Adaptive damping module
 Headlamp levelling module
 Driver door module (DDM)
 Driver seat module (DSM)
 Engine control module (ECM)
 Parking brake module
 Central Junction Box (CJB)
 Navigation system display module
 Integrated audio module (CD player)
 Information and entertainment module
 Integrated control panel
 Audio amplifier
 Remote keyless entry (RKE) module
 Multimedia (navigation) module
 Parking aid module
 Passenger door module (PDM)
 Pedestrian protection system module
 Passenger seat module (PSM)
 Restraints control module (RCM)
 Rear Junction Box (RJB)
 Steering column lock
 Transmission control module (TCM)
 Telephone control module
 Tire pressure monitoring system
Customer Driven Preferences
The second type of configuration data is customer preference driven. These are items that the customer may or may
not want to have enabled. Typically, customer preference items can be toggled on or off by the use of a compatible
scan tool. You may need to ask the customer which preferences they had enabled prior to installation of a new module,
although after installation they will automatically learn the settings by receiving information from existing modules.
To carry out the customer preference configuration process, use the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to
the configuration menu and select 'Vehicle Configuration'. Customer options can be selected or de-selected by
modifying the 'Car Configuration File'.
Wiring Harnesses -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Wiring Harness assembly shield retaining bolts 9 - 80
Engine front cover ground cable retaining bolts 12 9 -
Transmission right-hand heatshield retaining bolts 9 - 80
Engine wiring harness electrical connector bolt 3 - 27
Fuse box retaining bolts 4 - 35
Starter motor battery positive terminal integral connector retaining nut 10 7 -
Heated oxygen sensor(HO2S) bracket retaining bolts 48 35 -
Wiring Harnesses - Wiring Harness
Introduction
CAUTION: Do not use any other heat shrink sleeve other than the approved glue lined heat shrink sleeve mentioned in
the repair procedure.
The purpose of this document is to promote quick and efficient minor repair to harness connectors or cables using approved
methods and the wiring harness repair kit. Repairs may only be made to cables and connectors which have been
mechanically, not electrically damaged. It also applies where the whole extent of the damage can be clearly identified and
rectified.
Care and neatness are essential requirements in making a perfect repair.
Caution:
At the time of this first issue of the Harness Repair Guide, do not approve repairs to any of the following circuits:
 Any media orientated system transport network harnesses.

 Supplement restraint system (SRS) firing circuits (Air bags).
 Link lead assembles, which are unique to safety critical circuits such as anti-lock brake system (ABS) and
thermocouple circuits. An example of this is the ABS wheel speed sensors with moulded connectors.
 4. Screened cables, leads and wiring harness(s).
If any harness(s) with defective electrical connector terminals or wires from the above circuits are a concern,
new components must be installed.
Repair Kit
CAUTION: Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat
shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
The wiring harness repair kit has been produced which comprises:
 Pre-terminated wiring harness(s) of different sizes and types

 Three sizes of butt splice connectors
 A selection of colored cable identification sleeves
 Two sizes of glue lined heat shrink sleeves
 Crimping pliers
 A wire cutter and insulation stripper
 An electrical connector terminal extraction handle and tips
A suitable heat source, for shrinking heat shrink sleeves will be required.
The pre-insulated diamond grip range of electrical connector terminals and in-line, butt splice connectors contained within
the wiring harness repair kit are the only acceptable product for the repairs of wiring harnesses. The butt connectors not
only grip the wire but also the insulation, making a very secure joint.
If an electrical connector terminal is not included in the wiring harness repair kit then approval for the repair is NOT given
and in these circumstances a new wiring harness must be installed.
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) and Butt Splice Connectors
All pre-terminated wiring harness(s) and butt splice connectors in the wiring harness repair kit are contained in bags which
can be resealed after use. Each bag is marked with the part number of the items stored within the bag. Each storage
compartment in the wiring harness repair kit is identified with the corresponding part number. Make sure that pre-
terminated wiring harness(s) and connectors are not mixed up it is advisable to only open one bag at a time and to reseal
the bag securely before opening another bag. Also, replace the bag in its mating part number compartment within the case.
The pre-terminated wiring harness(s) are supplied with the insulation in one of three colors, red, blue or yellow. The colors
do not apply to any particular circuit but to the harness wire size. See the Relationship Table in the Repair Method section.
Butt splice connectors are also supplied with red, blue or yellow coverings, which must be matched to the pre-terminated
wiring harness insulation color.
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s)
The illustration shows:
 The pre-terminated wiring harness(s) which are included in the wiring harness repair kit
 The part number of the pre-terminated wiring harness
 The letter showing the extractor tip which must be used to remove this type of electrical connector terminal
 Those electrical connector terminals which are gold
Some of the pre-terminated wiring harness(s) have seals installed to the insulation for sealed connector applications. It is
essential for prevention of moisture ingress that a sealed pre-terminated wiring harness must be used where a sealed
terminal was removed.
CAUTION: Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat
shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
Two sizes of heat shrink sleeving are supplied in the wiring harness repair kit. Each heat shrink sleeve contains a sealant
glue. These must be used when connecting wiring harness(s) or electrical connector terminal(s) at all times. The smaller
diameter heat shrink sleeve is to be used with the red and blue butt splice connectors and the larger diameter sleeve with
the yellow butt splice connectors.
For ease and speed, some of the pre-terminated wiring harness(s) may already have the insulation partly stripped at the
splice end. If the repair requires insulation to be stripped from the cable, refer to the Relationship Table for the correct
length of insulation to be stripped.
The Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) illustration shows the electrical connector terminal type, the part number of the pre-
terminated wiring harness and the letter of the extractor tip which must be used to extract the electrical connector terminal
from the connector housing. Additionally, those electrical connector terminal(s) which are gold are identified, all others are
therefore, tinned and not gold.
Wiring Harness Cable Identification Sleeves
A selection of colored sleeves are contained in the wiring harness repair kit for maintaining the wiring harness cable
identification on the pre-terminated wiring harness. Place the correct colored sleeve(s) over the pre-terminated wiring
harness insulation as near to the electrical connector as possible with the main wiring harness cable color nearest to the
For example, if the original wiring harness cable color is pink with a black trace put the pink wiring harness cable
identification sleeve on the pre-terminated wiring harness first followed by a black sleeve, and slide both along the wiring
harness cable to the electrical connector terminal.
Extraction Handle and Tips
The extraction handle, in conjunction with the correct tip, is used to remove a terminal from an electrical connector. Each tip
contained in the wiring harness repair kit is marked with an identification letter, A to K inclusive. Each tip has been specially
designed to extract a particular type of electrical connector terminal. The use of any other tool is not recommended and is
liable to cause damage to the electrical connector. The tip is fastened to the handle by a screw which holds the tip firmly yet
allows it to be easily replaced.
Extraction Handle and Tips
Insulation Stripper
The moving jaw has an adjuster wheel which has a series of holes in it. Turning the wheel and placing the cable in the
matching size hole will automatically adjust the jaw to the correct pressure. Note that some wiring harness(s) may have a
harder insulation and slight adjustment of the wheel may be needed to make a clean strip but exercise care not to damage
the wire.
Insulation Stripper
By pressing the outer edges of the wiring harness cable length stop together the adjuster can be slid up or down the jaw.
This decreases or increases the length by which the wiring harness cable insulation will be stripped from the pre-terminated
wiring harness or wiring harness wire. The adjuster has a position indicator to align with a graduated scale and this sets the
correct length in millimetres, of insulation to be stripped. The amount of insulation to be stripped is shown in the
Relationship Table.
The illustration shows the insulation stripper tool and a wiring harness correctly gripped in the jaws. A wire cutter is provided
on the outer side of the fixed jaw.
Cable Correctly Gripped in Stripper Blades

Crimping Pliers
Crimping Pliers
The crimping pliers have a moving jaw and a stationary jaw, with three different sized crimping enclosures. Each of the
enclosures is identified by a red, blue or yellow coloured dot which corresponds to the three colours of the pre-terminated
wiring harness(s) and butt splice connector colors.
List of Parts
Description Part Number Quantity

Wiring Harness Repair Kit 418-S065 1
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) 418-066 to 418-103 10 each
inclusive
Glue Lined Heat Shrink Pack – small diameter 418-104 25 per
pack
Glue Lined Heat Shrink Pack – larger diameter 418-105 10 per
pack
Case Assembly Comprising – carry case, lid, inner lid, base, insert, trays foam 418-106 1
spacers
Butt Splice Connector – Red 418-107 50 per
pack
Butt Splice Connector – Blue 418-108 50 per
pack
Butt Splice Connector – Yellow 418-109 20 per
pack
Extraction Tool Handle 418-110 1
Extraction Tip Pack consists of 2 spare screws plus 418-S111 1
Tip A 418-118 1
Tip B 418-119 1
Tip C 418-120 1
Tip D 418-121 1
Tip E 418-122 1
Tip F 418-123 1
Tip G 418-124 1
Tip H 418-125 1
Tip I 418-126 1
Tip J 418-127 1
Tip K 418-128 1
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Red insulation 418-112 500
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Blue insulation 418-113 500
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Yellow insulation 418-114 500
Instruction Manual JTP 593 1
Crimping Pliers YRW500010 1
Wire Stripping Tool 418-117 1
Items can be ordered from:
SPX United Kingdom Limited
Ironstone Way
Brixworth
Northants
NN6 9UD
United Kingdom
Telephone: +44 (0) 1327 704461
Fax: +44 (0) 1327 706632
Repair Methods
CAUTION: Several different types and sizes of terminal may be found in a single electrical connector
housing.
It is necessary to identify:
 The conductor (wire) size of the affected wiring harness

 The electrical connector range from which the damaged wiring harness is to be removed
 The terminal type
Use of the approved diagnostic tool will greatly assist in the quick identification of electrical connectors and faulty pin
terminal(s).
Reference can also be made to the vehicle Electrical Guides, held by Dealers, to identify wiring harness(s) and electrical
connector(s).
By using the Relationship Table, the wiring harness conductor (wire) size can be related to a suitable pre-terminated wiring
harness by the color of the insulation. Also, the correct length of insulation to be stripped from the wiring harness lead is
identified.
Relationship Table
CABLE RANGE SPLICE STRIP LENGTH

0.35 mm² to 1.50 mm² RED 6.00 to 7.00 mm
1.00 mm² to 2.50 mm² BLUE 6.00 to 7.00 mm
4.00 mm² to 6.00 mm² YELLOW 9.00 to 9.50 mm
Electrical Connector Terminal Extraction
It must be noted that some electrical connector(s) have anti-backout devices which prevent the terminals from being
removed from the electrical connector. Some examples of these are shown in following illustrations. The anti-backout device
must be released before attempting to remove the terminal from the electrical connector. Some anti-backout devices require
a special tip to release the device and these have been included in the kit. Most can be released by carefully using a suitable
small screwdriver.
Various types of electrical connector have seals installed internally or externally to prevent moisture ingress. These normally
do not have to be removed but make sure that they are installed when the electrical connectors are connected.
The illustrations show examples of each tip used on different types of electrical connector(s). There are a large number of
different types of electrical connector used on vehicles therefore only one example using each tip is shown. Technicians
experience and judgement will dictate which type of tip should be used for those electrical connector(s) which are not shown.
Care should be exercised to avoid further damage when removing the terminals from the electrical connector.
NOTE: Examples of the extraction tips and anti-backout tips.
NOTE: The chart shows the electrical connector types, terminal pins/sockets, extractor tip and anti-backout tip.
Electrical connector terminal type Pin or socket Extractor tip Anti-backout tip
Mulitlock 040 series D A
Mulitlock 040 series B A
Mulitlock 070 series B B
Mulitlock 040 series D B
Econoseal III 070 series D B
Econoseal III 070 series B B
Econoseal III 070 series B B
Econoseal III J2 D B
Econoseal III 250 series B F
Micro-timer II 1.5mm D C
Micro-timer II 1.5mm B C
Std power timer 4.8 flat D G
Std power timer 5.8 flat B D
Std power timer 2.8 flat D D
Std power timer 4.8 flat D G
Ford 2.8 flat D E H
Mulitlock 070 series D B
Mulitlock 070 series B B
Junior power timer 2.8 flat D D
Sumitomo TS90 connector B B H
Modu IV gold plated D B
Mulitlock 040 series gold plated D A
Micro qualock D I
EECV D B
EECV D B
Kostal dia 1.50 series D J
AMP 6.3 flat D B
Junior power timer 2.8 flat D D
2.8 series D B I
Sumitomo TS90 connector D B H
Ducon 0.60 gold plated D K
AMP 6.3 flat D D
Repair Procedure
CAUTIONS:
Do not use crimping pliers, insulation strippers, butt splice connectors, heat shrink sleeves or pre-terminated wiring
harness(s) that are not supplied with the Jaguar wiring harness repair kit. Each part has been designed to be used only with
the other parts in this wiring harness repair kit.
Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient heat to the
glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat shrink
sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
It is not correct to make more than five repair joints on the wiring harness to any electrical connector and if more damage is
found at the same electrical connector then a new wiring harness must be installed.
 Remove the faulty terminal from the electrical connector using the extractor tool and correct tip. Make sure that any
anti-backout device is released before trying to remove the terminal.
 CAUTION: : A number of electrical connector terminals are gold plated or gold flashed. When defective, they
must be installed with a gold pre-terminated wiring harness(s) from the wiring harness repair kit. It is not always
easy to identify the female as gold but the male pins are visually easier, therefore always check both male and
female terminals to identify those which are gold. Under no circumstances are gold and tin terminals to be mixed as
this will lead to early failure of the electrical contact.
NOTE: Never use a harness lead with a smaller diameter than the original harness lead.
Select the correct size and type of pre-terminated wiring harness and butt splice connector from the wiring harness
repair kit.
 Using the wire cutter on the stripping tool, cut the pre-terminated wiring harness and the harness cable to the
required length.
 NOTE: See illustration: Stripping Insulation
From the Relationship Table, find the correct length of insulation to be stripped from the pre-terminated wiring
harness and set the adjustable cable length stop to the correct length. Place the pre-terminated wiring harness in the
wire stripper and remove the insulation.
 Put the cable identification sleeve(s) on to the wiring harness with the main cable colour nearest to the terminal.
 During this next step do not over tighten. Place the selected butt splice connector in the crimping tool, matching the
aperture and the butt connector colours. Make sure that the window indentation in the butt connector is resting over
the guide bar on the lower jaw. Partially close the grip until the butt connector is securely held in the aperture. This
will give support to the butt connector while the pre-terminated wiring harness is inserted into it.
 NOTE: See illustration: Splice Correctly Located
Insert the pre-terminated wiring harness into the butt connector and make sure that the wire is against the wire stop.
Close the grip firmly, crimping the lead to the butt connector. When the handles have been completely closed the
butt connector will be freed from the tool as the handles are released. If the handles have not been completely closed
then the jaws will hold the butt connector and it cannot be removed from the tool until the crimp is fully made by
closing the handles completely.
 Make sure that the harness cable has been squarely cut and the correct length of insulation removed. If more than
one splice is needed the butt connectors must be not be crimped to the wiring harness at the same distance from the
connector. The splices must be staggered to prevent a bulk of splices in the same area of the wiring harness.
 It is preferable to cover the butt splice joint with heat shrink sleeve. This is desirable not essential, except where the
electrical connector is a sealed electrical connector. Use the smaller diameter sleeve for red and blue pre-terminated
wiring harness(s) and the large diameter sleeve for the yellow pre-terminated wiring harness(s). It is advisable to
place the heat shrink over the completed joint but in some instances the sleeve will not pass over the terminal.
Check, and if required, place the correct size sleeve onto the harness cable or pre-terminated wiring harness before
crimping the butt splice to the wiring harness.
 Place the harness cable into the butt splice with the splice window over the guide bar. Make sure that the cable
harness wire is against the stop in the butt splice, crimp the butt splice connector to the wiring harness.
 Gently pull the harness cables each side of the butt splice to make sure that a secure joint has been made.
 WARNING: Do not use a naked flame in areas where fuel or oil have been spilt. Clean the area of residual oil
and fuel and wait until the fuel spill has fully evaporated.
CAUTIONS:
When using a heat source make sure that it is localised and causes no damage to surrounding materials.
Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue
lined heat shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
Using a suitable heat source, shrink the sleeve over the butt splice.
 If further pre-terminated wiring harness(s) are to be installed to the same electrical connector, make sure that the
lead is cut at a different length to the previous joint. This makes sure that the splices will, where possible, be
staggered on the wiring harness and prevent a bulk of splices in one area.
 When all of the splices have been made, fit the terminal(s) to the electrical connector, taking care that the terminals
are correctly orientated.
 Install the wiring harness cover and secure with adhesive electrical tape. Do not cover the wiring harness right to the
electrical connector as the terminals must have a little movement and not be firmly bound to the electrical connector
or wiring harness. Make sure that the cable identification sleeve(s) are showing at the wiring harness electrical
connector.
Stripping Insulation
Splice Correctly Located
Wiring Harnesses - Wiring Harness Repair
General Procedures
1. For additional information, refer to: Wiring Harness (418-02

Wiring Harnesses, Description and Operation).
Wiring Harnesses - Fuel Tank Wiring Harness Modification
General Procedures
Repair
NOTE: Some components shown removed for clarity.
1.
 For additional information on correct wiring harness
repair techniques, refer to TOPIx section 418-02.
Installation).
4. NOTE: Cut the wires as close as possible to the
5.
6.
7.
 Install the female terminal to the wire, and
using a suitable tool crimp the first stage.
8.
 Install the wiring harness grommet to the
terminal, and using a suitable tool, crimp
the second stage.
9.
 Repeat steps 5 to 8 for the second wire.
10. CAUTION: It is essential that the wires are

installed in the correct orientation as shown. The
lug must be positioned opposite to the connector
release clip.
11. CAUTION: Make sure that the wires are
installed correctly by pulling the wires gently to
make sure they are engaged.
 Secure the electrical terminals with the

anti-backout.
12.
13. NOTE: Cut the wires as close as possible to the

14.
15.
16.
 Following the procedure above for the
female terminals, install the two male
terminals to the wires.
17. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the wires are installed to align

with the corresponding coloured wire on the
opposite connector.
It is essential that the wires are installed in

the correct orientation as shown.
www.JagDocs.com
18. CAUTION: Make sure that the wires are
installed correctly by pulling the wires gently to
make sure they are engaged.
 Secure the electrical terminals with the

anti-backout.
19.
20. CAUTIONS:
The male connector is to be installed on the sender side.
Make sure that the wires are installed to align with the
corresponding coloured wire on the opposite connector.
It is essential that the wires are installed in the correct

orientation to the connectors.
 Using the procedure outlined above for the passive side

sender, remove the wiring connectors from the active
side sender and replace with the new connectors from
the parts kit.
21.
 Re-route the active side sender wires as
shown.
22.
23.
Installation).
Anti-Theft - Active -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Antenna - bolt 5 - 44
Anti-theft alarm horn - nut 8 - 71
Battery backed sounder to bracket - nut 6 - 53
Battery backed sounder bracket to body - nut 8 - 71
Intrusion sensors - nut/screw 2 - 18
Keyless vehicle module - nut 5 - 44
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active
COMPONENT LOCATION

2 - Left hand and right hand door latch microswitches
3 - Central door locking RF (radio frequency) receiver
4 - Liftgate latch microswitch
5 - Slave intrusion detection module
6 - Intrusion detection module
7 - Hood ajar switch
8 - Passive anti-theft horn (if fitted)
9 - Battery backed sounder (if fitted) or battery backed sounder with tilt sensor (if fitted)
10 - Vehicle horns
INTRODUCTION
The active anti-theft system monitors the hinged panels for unauthorized opening. In some markets the anti-theft system
also incorporates:
 Monitoring of the vehicle interior and vehicle tilt sensing

 Control of the electric steering column lock (where fitted).
The active anti-theft alarm system is controlled by the following body system control modules:
 CJB (central junction box)

 LH (left-hand) door module
 RH (right-hand) door module
 AJB (auxiliary junction box)
 Keyless vehicle module
 Instrument cluster.
The CJB is the main controller in the system. The CJB controls the following security functions, in addition to other vehicle
functions:
 Locking, double locking (where fitted) and unlocking

 Monitoring of hinged panel microswitches and panel ajar states
 Microwave intrusion detection modules (where fitted)
 Passive anti-theft horn or battery backed sounder (market dependant)
 Passive arming and disarming (where enabled)
 Active arming and disarming
 Panic alarm function
 Transceiver coil and transponder reading
 Valet function (via the TSD (touch screen display))
 Interior lighting
 Locking and unlocking of the electric steering column lock (where fitted).
Two alarm modes are available:
 Perimeter mode, which locks and monitors all opening panels

 Volumetric mode, which monitors the vehicle interior for intrusion and incorporates a tilt sensor to monitor if the
vehicle is being raised.
Door Modules
The door modules provide the interface between the door latch motors, the door and latch microswitches and the CJB. The
door modules provide door microswitch switch status information and enable the door motors on request from the CJB or the
keyless vehicle module. Additionally, the door modules also control the exterior mirror functions.
Auxiliary Junction Box and Central Junction Box
The AJB controls, in conjunction with the CJB:
 The horns
 The liftgate latch motors and microswitches (including the liftgate external release switch)
 The liftgate ajar switch
 The turn signal indicators
 The fuel filler flap operation.
The AJB also has a connection to the RCM (restraints control module) for automatic operation of the interior lights and the
turn signal indicators in the event of an accident.
The CJB and AJB are both fitted with an anti-theft sense line. If the AJB is disconnected when the alarm system is active, the
full alarm will be activated by the CJB. If the CJB is disconnected when the alarm system is active, the AJB takes control of
the security system and sounds the full alarm.
NOTE: If the CJB is replaced, the new module will require configuring to the master car configuration using the IDS
(Integrated Diagnostic System).
The CJB automatically arms and disarms the active anti-theft system when the vehicle is locked and unlocked after
successful confirmation that a valid remote handset/smart key has been used.
Keyless Vehicle Module
The keyless vehicle module interfaces with the CLS (central locking system) RF receiver and collects RF signal information
which is transmitted from the smart key. This information is translated into commands which are passed on the medium
speed CAN (controller area network) bus to the CJB, AJB, the door modules and the instrument cluster.
The keyless vehicle module also monitors the liftgate external release switch, the two interior antennae, the luggage
compartment antenna and an additional rear bumper antenna and two door handle antennae if the passive entry system is
fitted.
On vehicles with passive entry, the additional fast latch motors are controlled via the keyless vehicle module and the locking
status is passed to the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus.
Instrument Cluster
The instrument cluster controls the alarm indicator which is incorporated into the sunload/light sensor mounted on the
instrument panel.
The instrument cluster also controls, in conjunction with the ECM (engine control module), the engine immobilization. The
ECM controls the engine crank and fuel functions and the instrument cluster processes the valid transponder information.
Alarm Indicator
The alarm indicator is a LED (light emitting diode) located in the body of the sunload/light sensor. When the ignition is off
the alarm indicator gives a visual indication of the active anti-theft system status, to show if the alarm system is set or not.
When the ignition is on, the indicator provides a visual indication of the status of the passive anti-theft (engine
immobilization) system. If the immobilization system is operating correctly, the LED will be illuminated for 3 seconds at
ignition on and then extinguish.
If a fault exists in the immobilization system, the LED will be either permanently illuminated or flashing for 60 seconds. This
indicates that a fault exists and fault code has been recorded. After the 60 second period the LED will flash at different
frequencies which indicate the nature of the fault.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Diagnosis and Testing).
Operation of the alarm indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster, which varies the flash rate of the LED to indicate the
status of the alarm and the immobilization systems.
Passive Anti-theft Horn (If Fitted)
The passive anti-theft horn is located in the RH rear corner of the engine compartment and attached to the bulkhead. The
passive anti-theft horn is connected directly to the CJB which activates the passive anti-theft horn when the alarm is
triggered.
Battery Backed Sounder (If Fitted)
The battery backed sounder is located in the RH rear corner of the engine compartment and attached to the bulkhead.
On vehicles with a battery backed sounder, a tilt sensor can be incorporated which monitors the vehicle attitude. The CJB
monitors the tilt sensor and can detect if the vehicle is being moved, towed or raised and activate the alarm system. The
type of battery backed sounder can be identified by a suffix change to the part number; sounders without a tilt sensor have
the suffix AA and sounders incorporating a tilt sensor have the suffix BA.
Operation of the sounder is controlled by the CJB on a LIN (local interconnect network) bus. The sounder is also connected
with a permanent battery supply via the CJB. An integral, rechargeable battery powers the sounder if the battery power
supply from the CJB is interrupted.
Intrusion Detection Modules
The intrusion detection modules are an optional fitment in some markets and are not available in other markets. Two
intrusion detection modules are fitted. One module is located on the front of the floor console and monitors the front seat
area, the second module is fitted at the rear of the floor console and monitors the rear seat area. The modules are connected
in parallel, with the forward module being the master module and the rearward module being the slave module.
Each intrusion detection module comprises two microwave sensors which allow the interior of the vehicle to be monitored.
The intrusion detection modules also monitor the vehicle interior on soft top models when the soft top is down.
The intrusion detection modules are activated by the volumetric mode of vehicle locking, which is selected when the vehicle
is double locked. The vehicle can be locked and alarmed without activating the intrusion detection modules, if a pet is to be
left in the vehicle for example, by single locking the active anti-theft system. The intrusion detection modules can also be de-
activated by deselecting the Intrusion/Tilt option in the Vehicle Settings screen on the TSD.
NOTE: The TSD method of de-activation of the intrusion detection modules is only for one arming cycle. They will revert to
active once the vehicle is subsequently unlocked and then locked.
When the volumetric mode is active, if the vehicle battery voltage falls to less than 9 volts, the CJB will ignore any inputs
from the intrusion detection modules to prevent false alarm activation.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN Bus

1 - Battery
2 - Megafuse (175A)
3 - Megafuse (175A)
4 - Electric steering column lock (all except NAS (north American specification))
5 - CJB
-
7 Vehicle horns
8 - Liftgate latch ajar switch
9 - Intrusion detection module
10 - Slave intrusion detection module
12 - Hood ajar switch
13 - CLS RF receiver
15 - Light sensor (security LED)
16 - RH door module
17 - LH door module
18 - LH door latch ajar switch
19 - RH door latch ajar switch
20 - Battery backed sounder (if fitted) or battery backed sounder with tilt sensor (if fitted)
21 - Passive anti-theft alarm horn (if fitted)
22 - AJB
The CJB automatically arms and disarms the active anti-theft system when it operates the CLS. The CJB also locks and
unlocks the electric steering column lock (where fitted) when it operates the CLS.
On vehicles without intrusion detection modules, only the perimeter mode is available to monitor the hinged panels and the
validity of the smart key.
When perimeter mode is active, the CJB monitors panel ajar microswitches located in the latch mechanisms of the driver and
passenger doors and the liftgate. A separate hood ajar microswitch, located in the engine compartment, monitors the hood
status.
When volumetric mode is active, the CJB monitors the interior of the vehicle for movement using the two intrusion detection
modules.
Arming
On vehicles without intrusion detection modules and a tilt sensor, the active anti-theft system is armed in the perimeter
mode when the vehicle is either locked or double locked.
On vehicles fitted with intrusion detection modules, the system has two modes of operation; perimeter mode and volumetric
mode.
Perimeter Mode
Perimeter mode only monitors the hinged panels and validity of the remote handset/smart key in the start control module.
Perimeter mode is activated by a single press of the lock button on either the smart key or the door handle lock button on
vehicles with the passive entry system.
Volumetric Mode
Volumetric mode monitors the vehicle interior for intrusion. If the vehicle is fitted with a battery backed sounder which
incorporates a tilt sensor, the vehicle attitude is also monitored when volumetric mode is active. Volumetric mode is
activated by a second press of the lock button on either the Smart Key or the door handle lock button on vehicles with the
passive entry system. The second press of either lock button must occur within 3 seconds of the first press. The second press
of the lock button also activates the perimeter mode double locking feature.
The CJB arms the active anti-theft system when it locks or double locks the vehicle providing the following conditions are
met:
 All doors, liftgate and hood are closed

 The smart key is not sensed inside the vehicle
 The CJB is not in transit mode.
When the vehicle has successfully completed its locking routine, confirmation will be given by a long single flash of the turn
signal indicators to indicate the locked condition. If double locking is activated then confirmation will be given by a double
flash of the turn signal indicators, one flash for locked and one long flash for double locked. In certain markets an audible
warning is emitted to confirm arming or double locking.
Mislock
If any door, liftgate or hood is open when a lock or double lock request is received, the anti-theft alarm system remains
disarmed and the CJB generates a short mislock sound on the battery backed sounder or passive anti-theft horn and the turn
signal indicators will not flash. Each attempt to lock will be confirmed by two audible chimes being emitted.
When the CJB arms the active anti-theft alarm system, it first enables perimeter mode and monitors the status of the hinged
panels. If the vehicle is double locked and the vehicle is fitted with a battery backed sounder, an arming signal is sent from
the CJB to enable the sounder. If the vehicle is fitted with intrusion detection modules, the CJB then sends an arming signal
to the modules and the tilt sensor when double locked. The CJB ignores the signals from the intrusion detection modules for
the first 30 seconds to allow time for the vehicle interior to settle and prevent false alarm activation.
If the liftgate is opened via the smart key, the intrusion detection modules and the tilt sensor are inhibited until the liftgate is
closed.
Disarming
The CJB will disarm the active anti-theft system when it receives an unlock request from the smart key or, on vehicles with
passive entry, when the smart key is sensed and the driver or passenger door handles are pulled.
The CJB can selectively disarm parts of the active anti-theft system to prevent false alarm activation under certain conditions
as follows:
 When the vehicle active anti-theft alarm system is armed in volumetric mode, if the vehicle battery voltage decreases
to less than 9 V, the CJB will disable the volumetric mode and remain in the perimeter mode only. This prevents false
alarm activation because the intrusion detection modules do not operate below 9 volts.
 On vehicles fitted with a battery backed sounder, if the vehicle battery voltage decreases from 9.5 to 9 V in more
than a 30 minute period, the CJB de-activates the battery backed sounder and if required, will use the vehicle horns
to sound an audible alarm trigger warning. This prevents false alarm activation. At voltages below 9 volts, the CJB
will not generate the 'heartbeat' signal to the battery backed sounder. If the sounder fails to receive the 'heartbeat'
signal, it interprets this as tampering with the CJB and the sounder self activates. If the battery voltage subsequently
rises above 9.5 V, the CJB will re-arm the battery backed sounder.
 If the vehicle is unlocked using the unlock button on the smart key and, within 45 seconds, a hinged panel is not
opened, the CJB automatically re-locks the vehicle and re-arms the active anti-theft system (if the auto re-lock
feature is enabled). This prevents leaving the vehicle unlocked and disarmed by accidental operation of the smart key
unlock button.
Alarm
When the alarm is triggered, the CJB activates audible and visual warnings. The audible warning is produced using the
vehicles horns, the passive anti-theft horn or the battery backed sounder, or a combination of these devices. The visible
indication is produced using the turn signal indicators.
The CJB cycles the warnings on for 30 seconds and off for 5 seconds. At the end of the off period, if the alarm trigger is still
present the CJB repeats the warning cycle. The CJB activates a maximum of 10 warning cycles (3 in some markets) for any
one arming period. The CJB deactivates the alarm if the maximum number of warning cycles have been completed and the
alarm trigger is still present, or if it receives a disarm signal.
NOTE: If the battery backed sounder is triggered due to tamper detection, the visual indication using the turn signal
indicators is not activated.
The alarm can be triggered if any of the hinged panels are opened, an intrusion detection module detects movement inside
the vehicle, the tilt sensor detects vehicle movement, the CJB is disconnected or an ignition tamper is detected (invalid
smart key).
Battery Backed Sounder
When the CJB arms the active anti-theft system, in either the perimeter mode or the volumetric mode, it sends an arming
signal to the battery backed sounder on the LIN bus. When the system is armed in the volumetric mode, the CJB also sends
an arming signal to the tilt sensor (if fitted).
On receipt of the arming signals, the battery backed sounder and the tilt sensor respond with status signals. If the CJB does
not receive the status signals within 12 seconds, it assumes there is a fault and responds with a disarm signal to the battery
backed sounder and/or the tilt sensor and stores a related fault code. If the battery backed sounder is disarmed when the
active anti-theft system is armed and the system is subsequently triggered, the CJB instructs the AJB to energize the horn
relay and use the vehicle horns to sound the audio warning in place of the battery backed sounder.
When the battery backed sounder is armed, the CJB sends a periodic (heartbeat) signal to the battery backed sounder,
which prompts the battery backed sounder to monitor the vehicle battery supply and the LIN bus link with the CJB. The
sounder will operate if:
 It receives an alarm signal from the CJB or the tilt sensor
 The power supply or the LIN bus link from the CJB is disrupted.
The tilt sensor measures the longitudinal and lateral angle of the vehicle over a range of ±16° from the horizontal. When the
active anti-theft system is armed in the volumetric mode, the tilt sensor stores the current vehicle angles in its memory and
monitors the tilt sensor readings. If the vehicle angle changes in either direction by more than the alarm limit, the tilt sensor
activates the battery backed sounder.
If the alarm system is active and the battery or battery backed sounder is disconnected, the battery backed sounder will
operate, but there will be no visual warning.
Customer Programmable Security Features
A number of security features can be programmed to the customers requirements by use of the TSD.
Global Open/Close
The global open/ close feature allows the driver to fully raise/lower the driver and passenger windows with a single press of a
smart key button. The button must be pressed and held for more than 2 seconds. Either or both of the open/close functions
can be disabled from the TSD.
NOTE: Remote global close is not available in all markets.
From the Home screen, select the Vehicle screen and select Veh. Settings. The Security button will be highlighted as the
default selection. Scroll the screen until the Global Open and Global Close selections are displayed. Global open and/or global
close can be switched on or off by touching the applicable button on the TSD.
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows unlocking of the liftgate to be inhibited. When in valet mode, if either the switch pack or exterior luggage
compartment release button is pressed, an audible warning chime is emitted to warn that the liftgate is inhibited.
Enabling Valet Mode
Using the emergency key from the smart key, lock the glovebox. From the Home screen, select the Valet button. The valet
mode screen is displayed and requires a four digit PIN (personal identification number) for access. Enter the PIN using the
digits on the TSD and press OK. When the PIN is accepted the screen displays Valet On. The glovebox and the liftgate are
now locked in valet mode. On leaving the vehicle, only give the attendant the smart key without the emergency key
installed.
Disabling Valet Mode
After entering the vehicle, access the valet mode screen, enter the four digit PIN number and touch the OK button. When the
PIN is accepted, the screen displays Valet Off. Unlock the glovebox using the emergency key and replace the emergency key
in the stowage slot in the smart key.
Single Point Entry
The single point entry feature only unlocks one door, all other panels remain locked.
On vehicles with the remote CLS, a single press of the unlock button on the smart key unlocks only the driver's door. A
second press will unlock the passenger door and the liftgate.
On vehicles with the passive entry system, the first door handle which is pulled will only open that door to gain access to the
vehicle. The remaining door and the liftgate will revert to central locking. The locked door can be unlocked by operating the
interior door release lever and the liftgate can be released using the liftgate release button in the auxiliary lighting switch,
the smart key liftgate release button or the exterior liftgate release button.
From the Home screen, select the Vehicle screen and select Veh. Settings. The Security button is highlighted by default.
Select 2 stage unlock and touch the on or off button to enable or disable the single point entry feature.
Changing from central locking to single point entry and back again can also be carried out by pressing the lock and unlock
buttons on the smart key simultaneously. The turn signal indicators will flash after 4 seconds to confirm that the change has
been performed.
Drive Away Locking
The drive away door locking feature locks the doors and the liftgate if they are unlocked when the transmission selector lever
is not in P and the vehicle speed is more than 7 km/h (5 mph).
From the Home screen, select the Vehicle screen and select Veh. Settings. The Security button is highlighted by default.
Scroll the screen until the Drive away locking section is displayed. Select the drive away locking feature on or off by touching
the applicable button on the TSD.
Smart Key Additional Features
The smart key has convenience buttons in addition to the lock/unlock buttons.
Panic alarm
A panic alarm feature allows the vehicle alarm system to be activated using the smart key. The panic button, identified by a
triangle symbol, can be pressed three times or pressed and held for more than 3 seconds to activate the panic alarm.
To cancel the panic alarm feature, press the panic button three times, press and hold the panic button for three seconds or
press the start/stop button. To prevent accidental cancellation, the panic alarm cannot be cancelled within 5 seconds of
being activated.
Global Open/Close
A global open and close feature can be operated from the smart key. This feature allows the vehicle windows to be
opened/closed by a single press of the lock or unlock button. The button must be pressed and held for more than 2 seconds
to activate the global open/close feature.
NOTE: Remote global close is not available in all markets.
Liftgate Release
A liftgate release button can be pressed to open the liftgate. This will operate with the car locked and alarmed or unlocked. If
the vehicle is locked and alarmed, when the liftgate release button is pressed, the liftgate can be opened without triggering
the alarm system. When the liftgate is subsequently closed, the alarm will be re-activated.
Headlamp Convenience
A headlamp convenience button can be pressed to operate the headlamp to assist departure or approach to the vehicle. A
single press of the button will operate the headlamps for approximately 25 seconds, after which they automatically go off. A
second press of the button will turn off the headlamps if the 25 second period has not been reached. Pressing the Stop/Start
button within the 25 second period will also turn off the headlamp convenience feature.
Convenience Mode
When a door is opened, for a vehicle with either remote RF central locking or passive entry, the vehicle’s electrical system
initiates the convenience mode. The following systems become active:
 Memory - seat and steering column adjustment

 Interior and exterior lighting
 TSD and audio
 Instrument cluster message center
 Horn
 Cigar lighter and power socket.
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active
The complexity of the electronics involved with the anti-theft system, and the multiplexed communication network
which are connected to it, preclude the use of workshop general electrical test equipment. Therefore, reference should
be made to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system for detailed instructions on testing the anti-theft system.
The manufacturer approved diagnostic system systematically tests and analyses all functions and the various systems
affected by it.
Where a fault is indicated, some basic diagnostic methods may be necessary to confirm that connections are good and
that wiring is not damaged before installing a new component.
Anti-Theft - Active - Antenna
Removal
1. Remove the floor console.
For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12
2. Remove the keyless vehicle antenna.
Installation
1. Install the keyless vehicle antenna.
2. Install the floor console.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft Alarm Horn
Removal
1. Make the pedestrian protection system safe.
For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection System
Depowering and Repowering (501-20, General Procedures).
3. Release the pedestrian protection actuator bracket.

4. Remove the pedestrian protection actuator and bracket.

5. Remove the anti-theft alarm horn.

Installation
1. Install the anti-theft alarm horn.
2. Install the pedestrian protection actuator and bracket.

3. Secure the pedestrian protection actuator bracket.

 Attach the wiring harness clips.

 Install the 3 clips.
Anti-Theft - Active - Rear Intrusion Sensor
Removal

2.
3. Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive
COMPONENT LOCATION

2 - Electric steering column lock (all except NAS (north American specification))
3 - RF (radio frequency) receiver
4 - Start control module
6 - LF (low frequency) antennae - passive start system (3 off)
10 - Starter motor and solenoid
INTRODUCTION
The PATS (passive anti-theft system) prevents the vehicle from being driven away by unauthorized persons. This is achieved
by having uniquely coded keys (both passive and transponder) and an encoded data exchange between multiple control
modules. Unauthorized starting is prevented by inhibiting the engine crank, fuel and ignition systems.
The PATS is a function of the passive start system. The system uses the following components:
 Smart key(s)
 Three LF antennae
 A RF receiver
 A keyless vehicle module
 A start control module
 The CJB (central junction box)
 The ECM (engine control module)
 The instrument cluster.
The system is automatic and requires no input from the driver. The engine starting process is initiated when the start/stop
switch and the brake pedal are pressed simultaneously. The engine management system will only allow the engine crank,
fuel and ignition functions when the following conditions are met:
 A hardwired P (park)/N (neutral) signal is received from the TCM (transmission control module)
 A hardwired ignition signal is received from the CJB
 A hardwired crank request signal is received from the CJB
 An encrypted data exchange between the instrument cluster and the ECM is verified.
Before the CJB will send the hardwired ignition signal, it must satisfactorily complete the following:
 Exchange encrypted data with the keyless vehicle module to validate the smart key
 Exchange encrypted data with the instrument cluster to authorize the ignition status.
Additionally, before the CJB will send the hardwired crank request signal it must receive the following signals:
 Brake pressure signal from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module, which must be greater than a pre-determined
threshold
 Hardwired transmission in P signal from the JaguarDrive selector.
START CONTROL MODULE
The start control module is located in the floor console, at the rear of the arm rest. The start control module is used if the
keyless vehicle module is unable to authorize the smart key.
If the keyless vehicle module is unable to identify the smart key for any reason, for example if the smart key battery voltage
is low or there is local RF interference, the transponder within the smart key can be read in the conventional manner. The
driver will be alerted to this by a chime and the message SMART KEY NOT FOUND, PLEASE INSERT IN SLOT in the
instrument cluster message center. The smart key can be inserted into the start control module.
To insert the smart key, lift the arm rest on the floor console and slide back the spring loaded access cover on the start
control module. Insert the smart key, with the key fob loop uppermost, into the slot. The start control module is motorized
and will draw the smart key into the slot once inserted.
The start control module will then read the transponder within the smart key and, if the transponder identification is valid,
pass authorization to the instrument cluster on the LIN (local interconnect network) bus.
NOTE: Inserting the smart key into the start control module will not charge the smart key battery. The battery is non-
chargeable and must be replaced with a new CR2032 battery if defective.
A message REMOVE SMART KEY will be displayed if the smart key is still in the start control module and the driver's door is
opened. The smart key can be removed by pushing downwards on the key fob loop and releasing. The start control unit
motor will then drive the smart key out of the slot.
LF ANTENNA
Three LF antennae for the passive start system are positioned in the following locations:
 Behind the center console, below the heater assembly and audio modules
 In the floor console, between the driver and passenger seats, and below the start control module
 On the battery tray.
NOTE: On vehicles with the passive entry system, three additional antennae are used. One integrated into the rear bumper
and one in each door handle assembly. These are only used by the passive entry system and have no function in the passive
start system.
The keyless vehicle module transmits an LF signal via the antennae which is received by the smart key. The smart key then
responds by transmitting a RF signal, which is received by the RF receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle module for
authorization.
KEYLESS VEHICLE MODULE
The keyless vehicle module is located on the RH (right-hand) A pillar. The module controls signal transmissions to and from
the smart key and provides authorization to allow the vehicle to be entered and started. The module has a medium speed
CAN (controller area network) connection to the CJB for authorizing vehicle unlocking and starting.
RF RECEIVER
The RF receiver is located behind the overhead console. The receiver is available in two variants; 315 Mhz or 433 Mhz
depending on market requirements. Transmissions are received from the smart key for key identification and remote
lock/unlock requests or requests for operation of additional features.
CONTROL DIAGRAM

1 - Battery
2 - BJB (battery junction box) (400 A megafuse, 2 x 175 A megafuses)
5 - Starter motor and solenoid
6 - ECM
7 - Electric steering column lock (all except NAS)
8 - Start/Stop switch
9 - ABS module
11 - RF receiver
14 - Start control module
At the request of the CJB, the keyless vehicle module prompts each of the LF antennae to output a LF signal. When the
Smart Key is within range, it detects the LF signals and responds with an RF identification signal. The RF signal is detected
by the RF receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle module.
NOTE: The LF antenna located in the rear bumper and in each door handle are only fitted if the vehicle has the Passive Entry
option.
The keyless vehicle module authorizes the Smart Key and passes this information to the CJB via the medium speed CAN bus.
Once the CJB receives the authorization and confirms response with internal calculation, it passes the result to the
instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. Once the CJB receives the authorization and confirms the response, it
allows the ignition to be activated when the start/stop switch is pressed.
On receipt of the authorization message from the CJB the instrument cluster sets its internal key status to valid, then passes
a key valid authorization message to the AJB (auxiliary junction box) on the medium speed CAN bus.
Once the AJB receives the authorization and confirms the response with an internal calculation, it enables the FPDM (fuel
pump driver module).
The CJB also controls the engine crank request. If the transmission selector lever is in the park position and the driver
presses the brake pedal and simultaneously presses the start/stop switch, the CJB interprets this as an engine crank request.
Before the engine crank request is allowed, the CJB compares a brake pressure signal received from the ABS module. The
brake pressure signal is compared to an internally stored threshold value within the CJB. If the signal is greater than the
stored threshold value, a crank request signal is sent to the ECM on the high speed CAN bus.
NOTE: If the Smart Key is not in the vehicle and an attempt is made to start the engine by pressing the start/stop switch, a
message 'SMART KEY NOT FOUND, PLEASE INSERT IN SLOT' is displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
If the keyless vehicle module is unable to identify the Smart Key for any reason, the Smart Key can be inserted into the start
control module. The start control unit will then read the transponder within the Smart Key and, if the transponder
identification is valid, pass authorization to the instrument cluster on the LIN bus.
If a replacement Smart Key is required, two procedures with a Jaguar approved diagnostic system are required to
synchronize the passive start/entry and transponder functions of the Smart Key. If any module involved in the Smart Key
authorization process is replaced, a diagnostic procedure is also required to synchronize the replacement module into the
system.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive
For a detailed description of the Anti-Theft - Passive system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in
REFER to: Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).
Anti-theft - Passive
The best method to confirm the correct operation of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) is to check the LED (located
in the center of the instrument panel). The LED should illuminate solid for 3 seconds, when the ignition status is set to
ON, and then extinguish. This validates all PATS functions (i.e. the key transponder matches a stored key code, the
challenge/response sequence between the respective modules was successful resulting in the EMS being enabled).
Ignition fails to operate
Check that the smart key is located within the vehicle interior, and that it is the correct one for the vehicle. Insert the
smart key into the start control unit (located in floor console cubby box), this is an alternative method to allow Ignition
On/Engine Start.
Check that the start button circuit to the CJB is not open circuit or short circuit to power.
Check that the CAN network is not malfunctioning, i.e. open circuit or short circuit. This would mean that the remote
keyless entry module, Central Junction Box (CJB) and instrument cluster would be unable to communicate.
Engine fails to crank
If a PATS fault is detected, the LED will flash for 60 seconds at 4Hz with a 50% duty cycle. At the end of this period, the
LED will flash a 2 digit code; this code is repeated 10 times. The meaning of these fault codes along with the frequency
of flashing is given in the accompanying table. As a general rule a fault code of 16 or less will cause the vehicle not to
crank. Additionally, the manufacturer approved diagnostic system should be used to check the instrument cluster, CJB
& ECM for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
One potential occurrence for failing to crank could be due to the 'Not In Park' switch (input to the CJB) or the P & N
start switch (input to the ECM).
Check the Crank Request output from the CJB to ECM is not short circuit to ground or open circuit.
Check the Starter Relay circuit.
NOTE: Due to Smart Start both sides of Relay Coil are switched directly from ECM (If conditions correct)
Check that the Steering Column Lock correctly operates and the steering wheel can turn freely.
Check that the CAN network is not malfunctioning, i.e. the CAN circuit is open or short circuit. This would mean that the
instrument cluster and ECM would be unable to communicate resulting in no Challenge being performed to enable the
ECM. This would be supported by LED Flash Code 24, see PATS Fault Code Table.
Also check the CAN network between the ABS module and the CJB. The CJB uses the CAN_BrakePressureTMC signal to
determine if the brake pedal has been pressed in order to allow an engine crank. The CJB uses a value of 0x03, if the
CJB sees a value less than this, it will not enable the Crank Request Output.
Engine cranks but will not start
If the Engine is cranking it means that the ECM has passed the authorisation required with the Instrument Cluster. If
this authorisation failed, the ECM would not engage the starter relay. This could be confirmed by verifying the PATS LED
prove out (illuminated solid for 3 seconds) or by reading DTCs from the instrument cluster and ECM.
In this case, the fuel pump circuit should be verified. The Fuel Pump Delivery Module (FPDM), which is supplied via the
RJB (authentication required with the instrument cluster) and controlled by the ECM, supplies the fuel pump.
In all cases of suspected non-start issues, the most logical failure modes should be eliminated first. i.e.
 Check all relevant supplies and grounds to the relevant modules listed herein.
 Note any unusual behaviour from other systems/functionality.
 Note any functions that are not operating as expected.
PATS Fault Codes
For the various PATS modes/faults listed in the table , the instrument cluster will store a DTC and indicate this to the
customer during the detection period defined in the 'when logged' column, by illuminating the indicator as described for
60 seconds and then flashing the LED 10 times as appropriate. The indication will stop immediately the ignition status is
set to OFF any time during the fault indication sequence. Up to 4 DTCs could be stored per key read sequence (1-10
read attempts). No DTCs will be stored until all retry attempts are complete. Only the highest priority fault code will be
flashed.
To determine the fault code from the LED: The LED will flash initially ten times with 1.5 seconds between. The LED will
remain OFF for 2.5 seconds then flash a number of times with 0.5 seconds between (the number of times the LED
flashes represents the first digit of the code), the LED will remain OFF for 1.5 seconds then flash a number of times with
1.5 seconds between (the number of times the LED flashes represents the second digit of the code).
The PATS LED will be commanded on as shown under 'indication'. Normal PATS operations are complete within 400ms
of the ignition switch transition from OFF to ON or START, worst case for ECM communication problems will be less than
2 seconds. If PATS is not complete during the 2 seconds the ECM will terminate PATS and await the next ignition ON or
START event. PATS faults will be indicated via the LED as soon as possible and will terminate the LED prove out. At
ignition OFF all previous flashing will cease and the perimeter anti-theft system will control the LED when the vehicle is
locked and armed.
PATS Fault Code Table

LED
Ignition Fault
Mode of Operation/Fault When Logged Status DTC Code Indication
Prove out N/A Transition N/A N/A 3 Seconds of steady
from OFF to illumination
ON
Perimeter Anti-theft Control N/A OFF - N/A N/A Off or 0.5Hz flashing
Vehicle at 5% duty cycle ±
locked and 20% until Off
armed
Start Control Unit already programmed Key Insert Any B1B0105 N/A No Indication
Start Control Unit status = invalid response Key Insert Any B1B0167 N/A No Indication
Start Control Unit programming error Key Insert Any B1B0151 N/A No Indication
Start Control Unit challenge response error Key Insert OFF B1B0162 N/A No Indication
Key Programming timer expired or Key Auth Key Insert Any B1B0187 N/A No Indication
Timer expired
Transponder challenge response error Key Insert Any B1B0164 N/A No Indication
Transponder keys stored below minimum B&A/Dealer Any B1B0100 N/A No Indication
number required
Transponder not programmed B&A/Dealer Any B1B0155 N/A No Indication
If the instrument cluster sends a 'theft' key EMS CAN OFF to ON B1B3364 16 60 seconds of 4Hz
status to the ECM or the ECM returns a status communication flashing at 50% duty
message containing the data 'Disabled/Theft', cycle followed by
the instrument cluster will set this DTC fault code 16
flashing 10 times
During manufacturing a Target ID is B&A/Dealer OFF to ON B1B3305 22 60 seconds of steady
transferred from the ECM when requested by indication followed
the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster by fault code 22
stores this unique vehicle number in EEPROM. flashing 10 times
If this ID fails to store in EEPROM correctly, the
instrument cluster will set this DTC
If the status message received from the ECM Challenge/Response OFF to ON B1B3362 23 60 seconds of steady
contains the data challenge response error, the indication followed
instrument cluster will set this DTC by fault code 23
flashing 10 times
After the instrument cluster has transmitted its Idle message OFF to ON B1B3387 24 60 seconds of steady
first PATS idle message, it will start a 2 second missing indication followed
timer running. If the PATS sequence does not by fault code 24
complete (Cluster received the Enable msg) flashing 10 times
within this time period the instrument cluster
will set this DTC
system.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft Security Access
General Procedures
1. The complexity of the electronics involved with the passive anti-

theft system of which the security access is a part, and the
multiplexed communication network which are connected to it
preclude the use of workshop general electrical test equipment.
Therefore, reference should be made to the Jaguar approved
diagnostic system for detailed instructions on security access .
The Jaguar approved diagnostic system systematically tests and
analyses all functions and the various systems affected by it.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
General Procedures
1. The complexity of the electronics involved with the anti-theft, of

which the key programming is a part, and the multiplexed
communication network which are connected to it preclude the
use of workshop general electrical test equipment. Therefore,
reference should be made to the Jaguar Approved Diagnostic
System for detailed instructions on key programming . The
Jaguar approved diagnostic system systematically tests and
analyses all functions and the various systems affected by it.
All new keys must be programmed using IDS. When using IDS
to programme new key(s), the lost or obsolete key(s) will cease
to function.
Remote Convenience - Universal Transmitter
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
 Damaged universal transmitter
 Damaged receiver
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the concern and refer to the Symptom Chart. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams for schematic and connector information.
Symptom Chart

The universal transmitter is inoperative  Universal transmitter GO to Pinpoint Test A.
 Receiver unit
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : THE UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER IS INOPERATIVE

CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY OPERATION
1 Check the illumination of the interior lamp.
Does the interior lamp illuminate?
Yes
GO to A2. .
No
Check and rectify fault with interior lamp circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A2: PROGRAM HAND-HELD TRANSMITTER INTO UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER
NOTE: If the garage door is equipped with rolling codes, refer to Training a Garage Door Opener
Equipped With "Rolling Codes."
1 Program the universal transmitter.

REFER to: Universal Transmitter Programming (419-02 Remote Convenience, General
Procedures).
Did the universal transmitter program successfully?
Yes
The universal transmitter is OK. VERIFY receiver operation.
No
REPLACE the roof console assembly. TEST the system for normal operation.
Remote Convenience - Universal Transmitter Programming
General Procedures
WARNING: A garage door opening system that cannot stop or reverse itself after detecting an object in its path
does not meet current federal safety standards. To decrease the risk of serious injury or death, do not use this
HomeLink transmitter with a door opening system that lacks stop and reverse features as required by federal
standards. This includes any garage door opening system manufactured before April 1, 1982. For more information, call
HomeLink customer assistance at 1-800-355-3515.
1. CAUTION: During this procedure, the system that you are

programming will be made to operate. Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door or gate being programmed.
Verify the hand-held transmitter is operative.

2. Prepare for programming the universal transmitter by erasing
all three channels by holding down the two outside buttons
until the red light begins to flash (20-30 seconds). Release
both buttons.
3. Select one of the three universal transmitter channels to be

programmed by pressing the desired button.
4. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter 50-150mm (2-6 in)
from the front surface of the universal transmitter so that the
red light can still be seen.
5. NOTE: During programming, the hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after
two seconds, which may not be long enough to
program the universal transmitter. If programming
this type of hand-held transmitter, continue to hold
the button on the universal transmitter while re-
pressing the hand-held transmitter button every two
seconds (Canada only).
Use both hands to press the hand-held transmitter

button and the desired button on the universal
transmitter. Do not release either button.
6. Hold down both buttons until the red light on the universal
transmitter flashes, first slowly and then rapidly. Release both
buttons when the rapid flashing begins. The universal
transmitter has successfully learned the new frequency signal
and can be used in place of the hand-held transmitter(s).
7. NOTE: If the hand-held transmitter appears to program the
universal transmitter but does not open the garage door, the
garage door opener may have a "code protected" or "rolling
code" feature.
To operate, simply press the appropriate button on the universal

transmitter. The red light is on while the signal is being
transmitted.
Training a Garage Door Opener Equipped With "Rolling Codes"

1. Program the hand-held transmitter to the universal transmitter.
For additional information, refer to Universal Transmitter
Programming in this section.
2. Train the garage door opener receiver to recognize the universal
transmitter.
1. Remove the cover panel from the garage door opener
receiver.
2. Locate the training button on the garage door opener
receiver. Location and color of the button may vary by
garage door opener manufacturer. Refer to the garage
door opener instruction manual or call HomeLink
customer assistance at 1-800-355-3515.
3. Press the training button on the garage door opener
receiver for 1-2 seconds.
4. Press the programmed universal transmitter button for
as long as the universal transmitter red light flashes (1-2
seconds). Release the button and re-press the button to
confirm that the universal transmitter is trained to the
receiver.
5. The garage door opener should recognize the universal
transmitter.
Erasing Channels
1. NOTE: Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be
reprogrammed using the procedures for programming.
For additional information, refer to Universal Transmitter
Programming in this section.
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the two

outside buttons until the red light begins to flash (20-30
seconds). Release both buttons.
Navigation System -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Antenna - bolt 1.5 - 13
Display module to module bracket - bolt 3 - 26
Display module to module bracket - screw 2.5 - 22
Navigation system module to bracket - bolt 2 - 18
Navigation System - Navigation System
COMPONENT LOCATION

2 - Touch Screen Display
3 - Integrated Control Panel
4 - Microphone
6 - AM/FM antenna
8 - GPS antenna
9 - Information and entertainment control module
10 - Audio amplifier
11 - Vehicle Information and Communication Systems (VICS) beacon antenna (Japan only)
INTRODUCTION
The navigation system provides audible and visual route guidance information to enable the driver to reach a desired
destination. The system allows the driver to choose the desired route using minor or major roads or motorways and the
quickest or shortest route. Directions to hospitals, museums, monuments and hotels are also available. The computer uses
map information stored on a DVD-ROM to determine the best route for the journey and provide the driver with details of
directions and approaching junctions.
The navigation system is controlled from the integrated control panel and the Touch Screen Display (TSD). Control signals
from the touch screen display are sent on the MOST ring to the navigation computer. The navigation computer uses a
dedicated GVIF bus to transmit its video signals to the TSD.
Vehicles with navigation systems also incorperate additional traffic information systems. These are market dependant and are
as follows:
 Japan-Voice recognition and VICS

 Europe-TMC
 NAS-No TMC, VICS or voice rrecognition

1 - TSD (rear)
2 - ICP
3 - TSD (front)
4 - IAM
5 - ICM
NAVIGATION COMPUTER
The navigation computer is located in the rear loadspace next to the battery.
The navigation computer incorporates the following:
 GPS receiver
 VICS receiver (Japan only)
 Traffic Message Channel (TMC) receiver
The navigation computer is connected to the MOST bus. The navigation computer generates its own graphics and transmits
them to the TSD on a dedicated GVIF (Gigabyte video Interface) bus.
The navigation computer contains a solid state piezo gyro which measures the motion of the vehicle around its vertical axis.
The gyro operates on the principle known as the Coriolis force. The Coriolis force is the force that appears to accelerate a body
moving away from its rotational axis against the direction of rotation of the axis.
Using inputs from the ABS module, the GPS antenna and the gyro sensor, the computer calculates the vehicle's current
position, direction and speed.
The navigation computer houses the DVD-ROM drive. The drive is used to read map data from region specific DVD's. The
regions are as follows:
 Europe (3 discs)
 NAS (2 discs)
 Japan, Middle east and Australia (1disc)
A button, located adjacent to the DVD slot, is provided to eject the DVD from the unit. Prior to ejecting the disc the slot
protection has to be slid to the side. If the ignition is on, or the Entertainment System is in 1-hour mode, one press of the
button will eject the DVD.
The GPS receiver receives information from between 1 and 8 satellites at any one time. This information is received from the
GPS antenna. The built in GPS receiver is used for calculating the position (i.e. Latitude, longitude and height), direction and
speed.
The navigation computer uses non-volatile memory to store settings and configuration information when it is powered down.
This process takes place just before the computer turns off.
For the Japanese market the navigation computer incorporates a VICS receiver. The VICS receiver, receives information from
the beacon antenna in the center of the instrument panel and the electric FM antenna. The VICS system receiver allows the
vehicle to receive information about traffic conditions from roadside transmitters and adjust the navigation instructions
accordingly.
For ceratin European markets the navigation computer incorporates the Traffic Message Channel (TMC) receiver. The TMC
receiver decodes TMC data. The navigation computer then displays this information on the TSD and also re-routes the
navigation guidance around any traffic hold ups. The TMC data is received via the electric FM (frequency modulation) antenna
via the antenna signal splitter.
TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY (TSD)
The Touch Screen Display (TSD) is located in the center of the instrument panel. TSD is a touch sensitive 7 inch LCD (liquid
crystal display) VGA screen containing 800 x 480 pixels in a 15:9 format. The TSD is connected to the Information and
Entertainment system on the Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST) ring. The MOST ring is a fibre optic communications
data bus that allows high speed transfer of control instructions and audio around the system.
The TSD processes its own video for system operation but receives the navigation graphics from the navigation computer on a
dedicated serial link called GVIF (Gigabit Video Interface).
The TSD is also the control interface for the following vehicle systems:
 Climate control
 Audio system
 Heated seats
 Customer programmable security features
 Cellular phone
 Vehicle settings
The TSD navigation control signals are sent on the MOST ring to the navigation computer,
GPS ANTENNA
The GPS (global positioning system) antenna is located in the rear liftgate spoiler. The GPS antenna is connected to the GPS
computer by a single co-axial cable and passes signals from the GPS satellites to the navigation computers built in receiver for
processing.
It is possible for the GPS antenna to lose the signal from the GPS satellites:
 In hilly or tree lined areas

 Built up areas with tall buildings
 In multi storey car parks
 In garages
 In tunnels
 In bridges
 During heavy rain or thunderstorms.
When the signal is lost the navigation computer will continue to give guidance using memory mapped data from the DVD
(digital versatile disc) map until the signal is restored.
INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE
The Information and Entertainment Control Module (ICM) is located between the TSD and the IAM. The ICM is mounted in the
vehicle using four M6 bolts.
The ICM is the gateway between the vehicle MS CAN bus and the Information and Entertainment system MOST bus.
INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL PANEL
The Information and Entertainment Control Panel is connected to the MS CAN bus. The ICP incorperates switches for audio
system control, climate control hazard warning lamps and the navigation system. The navigation system is operated from the
TSD via signals on the MOST ring. Hard switches on the ICP send CAN signals to the ICM which transfers signals to the
relevant module on the MOST ring.
VICS BEACON ANTENNA (JAPAN ONLY)
VICS Beacon Antenna
The VICS beacon antenna is located on top of the instrument panel. The antenna receives infra red and RF signals from road
side transmitters. The Antenna is connected to the navigation computer which incorperates a VICS reciever.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN; P = MOST ring; Q = GVIF; T = Coaxial

1 - ABS control module
2 - Steering wheel controls
4 - Audio amplifier
5 - Speakers
6 - Microphone
-
8 Navigation computer
9 - Vehicle Information and Communication Systems (VICS) beacon antenna (Japan only)
10 - GPS Antenna
11 - AM/FM antenna splitter
12 - AM/FM antenna
13 - Integrated Control Panel
14 - Information and entertainment control module
15 - Clock spring
The system used to calculate the current position of the vehicle is called the GPS (global positioning system) . The system
utilizes satellites which are owned by the United States Department of Defense (DoD). A total of 24 satellites orbit the earth
every 12 hours at a height of 20,000 km (12500 miles), and between 5 and 11 of these satellites can be seen from a single
point at any given time. The orbits are tilted to the earth's equator by 55 degrees to ensure coverage of polar regions. Each
satellite transmits radio signals to provide information about the satellite position i.e. latitude, longitude, altitude, almanac
data and an accurate time signal generated by an on-board atomic clock. Each satellite contains four atomic clocks.
The vehicle needs to receive data from at least four different satellites to give a three dimensional fix on its current position.
As the vehicle moves, this information is continually being updated. The computer determines which satellites are 'visible' to
the system and their current position and relationship to each other. Using this information the computer can account for
positional deviations of the satellites and compensate to enhance the accuracy of the navigation system.
The GPS (global positioning system) signal is also known as the Precision Positioning Signal (PPS).
PPS predictable accuracy is:
 22 meters horizontal accuracy

 27.7 meters vertical accuracy
 200 nanoseconds time accuracy.
The navigation system provides computer generated audible and visual route guidance information to enable the driver to
reach a desired destination. The system allows the driver to choose the desired route using minor or major roads or highways
and the quickest or shortest route. Directions to hospitals, museums, monuments and hotels are also available. The computer
uses map information stored on a DVD-ROM to determine the best route for the journey and provide the driver with details of
directions and approaching junctions.
The navigation system receives GPS (global positioning system) information via the GPS antenna. The GPS signals are used by
the navigation computer to calculate the vehicles position. Once the driver has input a desired destination the navigation
computer can calculate a route, based on the drivers pre-determined preferences or the default settings in the navigation
computer.
The navigation system is accessed by pressing the navigation soft key on the TSD.
Navigation is initiated by the driver inputting a destination. This can be achieved by:
 Entering in an address using the TSD.

 Entering a post code.
 Choosing a previous destination.
 Choosing a point of interest from the map disc database.
 Chosing the home location
 Chosing a memory stroed location.
The driver is then guided to the destination by a scrolling map display and voice guidance. The display can be varied by scale
and display type.
In addition to the standard navigation system there are two market dependant systems that supply extra information to the
navigation system and the driver. These are:
 Traffic Message Channel (TMC)

 Vehicle Information and Communication System (VICS) (Japan only).
Traffic Message Channel (TMC)
The Traffic Message Channel (TMC) is a function of the FM (frequency modulation) Radio Data System (RDS). The system
broadcasts real-time traffic and weather information. Data messages are received and decoded by the TMC receiver and
passed onto the navigation system, which then delivers them via the navigation system interface. TMC messages can be
filtered by the navigation computer so that only those relevant to the current journey are displayed, allowing the navigation
system to offer dynamic route guidance - alerting the driver of a problem on the planned route and calculating an alternative
route to avoid the incident. All TMC events on the map can be viewed not just the ones on the calculated route.
TMC traffic information systems conform to a global standard that has been adopted by traffic data gatherers, information
service providers, broadcasters and vehicle/receiver manufacturers. TMC information is received via the normal FM (frequency
modulation) radio antenna.
All TMC receivers use the same list of event codes, while the location database (on the map disc) contains both a country-
specific set of location codes for the strategic European road network.
TMC traffic data is currently broadcast in many European countries.
Vehicle Information and Communication System (VICS)
The VICS system supplies the navigation computer with information to enable the navigation computer to re-route the
navigation guidance or to inform the vehicle driver of traffic conditions in the vehicles vicinity. Information is provided to the
system through three routes:
 RF transmission
 Infra-red transmission
 FM (frequency modulation) multiplex transmissions.
The RF transmissions are generally transmitted from road side beacons mainly on expressways. The information transmitted is
as follows:
 Traffic congestion
 Travel time to next intersection
 Traffic conditions in surrounding areas and expressway turn offs
 Traffic accidents
 Speed limits
 Lane regulations
 Tire change
 Parking availability at expressway service areas and parking areas.
The Infra-Red transmissions are received by the beacon antenna mounted on the top of the instrument panel.
Infra-Red transmissions are transmitted from road side beacons on major trunk roads. The information transmitted is:
 Traffic congestion and travel time

 Traffic accidents
 Breakdowns
 Road works restrictions
 Parking availability.
FM (frequency modulation) transmissions are broadcast as part of the normal RDS FM (frequency modulation) transmission.
Information transmitted is:
 Traffic congestion and travel time for wide areas

 Traffic accidents, road works, speed limits and lane restrictions for a wide area
 Parking availability information.
FM transmissions are received via the FM antenna and split from the normal FM transmissions by the FM signal splitter.
Navigation System - Navigation System
For a detailed description of the navigation system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage, water ingress and system integrity.
Visual Inspection
 Navigation system DVD player Mechanism  Navigation system display
 Navigation system module
 GPS antenna
 Wiring harness for damage and corrosion
 ABS Module
 Audio unit
Symptom Chart

Poor satellite reception  Electrical harness open/short GO to Pinpoint Test A.
circuit, dis-connected
 Component failure
 No reception from satellite
Map disc will not  Electrical harness open/short GO to Pinpoint Test B.
insert/eject circuit, dis-connected
 Map disc failure
Black screen (navigation  Electrical harness open/short GO to Pinpoint Test C.
map screen does not circuit, dis-connected
display)  Component failure
 GVIF cable
Navigation map screen  Electrical harness open/short GO to Pinpoint Test D.
color is abnormal circuit, dis-connected
 GVIF cable
Vehicle’s current position  Electrical harness open/short GO to Pinpoint Test E.
mark turns independently circuit, dis-connected
 Vehicle on a turntable in a
parking building
Car current position not  Electrical harness open/short GO to Pinpoint Test F.
stable circuit, dis-connected
Map display is incomplete  Map disc contaminated/damaged GO to Pinpoint Test G.
 Electrical harness open/short
 Incorrect market map disc
No navigation voice  Voice guidance soft key set to GO to Pinpoint Test H.
guidance OFF position
 Volume level set too low
No response to pressing  Interruption during map disc GO to Pinpoint Test I.
navigation menu update
 Electrical harness open/short
 Incorrect Navigation Control
Module (NCM) installed
 Incorrect car configuration data
received
'NO DVD PLEASE INSERT  A disc other than the map disc is Insert the correct map disc
MAP DVD' message is inserted
displayed
'UNABLE TO READ DATA  DVD player abnormality Check and install a new Navigation Control
CONSULT YOUR DEALER' Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new
message is displayed module/component installation note at top of DTC
Index.
'UNABLE TO READ DATA  Operating temperature has been Move the vehicle to a cool location, and turn the
TEMPERATURE IS TOO exceeded engine OFF. Wait for a while, then verify
HIGH' message is displayed  Navigation Control Module (NCM) conditions again. If the temperature around the
internal temperature is high Navigation Control Module (NCM) is high, take
measures to lower temperature
'UNABLE TO READ DVD  Check map disc for Clean the map disc and retest, replace the map
CORRECTLY CHECK IF THE contamination, deformation, disc
DVD IS DAMAGED OR cracks, scratches or non-genuine
DIRTY' message is disc
displayed
'UNABLE TO READ DATA  Incorrect DVD map disc is Insert a map disc with the correct part number
CHECK IF MAP DVD IS inserted
CORRECT' message is
displayed
DTC Index

B1A8911 Satellite antenna  Satellite antenna Check satellite antenna connections. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to circuit diagrams and test satellite antenna circuit for short to
ground ground
B1A8913 Satellite antenna  Satellite antenna Check satellite antenna connections. Refer to the electrical
circuit - open circuit diagrams and test satellite antenna circuit for open
circuit circuit
B1A891B Satellite antenna  Satellite antenna - Install a new navigation system module, refer to the new
circuit resistance module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
above threshold
B1D5514 Antenna #2  TMC/VICS FM Check TMC/VICS FM antenna connections. Refer to the
Circuit antenna circuit - electrical circuit diagrams and test TMC/VICS FM antenna
open circuit for open circuit
B1D5614 Antenna #3  VICS antenna Check VICS antenna connections. Refer to the electrical circuit
Circuit circuit - open diagrams and test VICS antenna circuit for open circuit
U200531 Control Module  Missing vehicle Check ABS module and Instrument Cluster for speed related
speed message DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
REFER to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (206-09 Anti-Lock
Control - Stability Assist, Diagnosis and Testing) /
Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and
Testing).
U300049 Control Module  Internal electronic Install a new navigation system module, refer to the new
failure module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U300055 Stored vehicle  Incorrect car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
configuration data configuration data check/amend the Car Configuration File parameter in block 2,
does not match received byte 127 to match vehicle market/specification. If the DTC
remains check navigation system module part number and
ensure the correct component is installed to vehicle
market/specification
U300087 Control Module  Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Check navigation module for DTCs and refer
to the DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
U300098 Control module  Component or Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Clear DTC
system over and re-test/monitor condition for re-occurrence
temperature
U300362 Battery voltage  Circuit voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
mismatch with manufacturer approved diagnostic system
navigation control
module
U300317 Battery voltage  Circuit voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
above threshold manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Pinpoint Tests
the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval Program is in operation,
NOTE: Navigation Diagnostic Screen Access
 1.With the vehicle at rest, place the ignition switch in either "ACC", "ON", or start the engine.
 2.On the "Menu" screen, press the top center of the screen for more than three seconds.
 3.Enter the PIN code, and then touch "OK". 660: Diagnosis Menu screen 661: System Check screen (DTC code
verification screen) 662: GPS Information screen.
 4.The diagnostics screen will be displayed.
PINPOINT TEST A : POOR SATELLITE RECEPTION

NOTE: Move the vehicle to an open area, radio waves from satellites may not be received inside buildings.
NOTE: Correct the vehicle cursor to the current location.
CONDITIONS
A1: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
1 Check the system for DTCs which may be logged.
Are any system DTCs logged?
Yes
Carry out repair actions to correct the DTCs logged.
Check satellite reception.GO to A3.
No
GO to A2.
A2: RETRO-INSTALL INSTALLATIONS CHECK
1 Check to see if there are any retro-install installations (anti-theft, radar, etc.)
Are there any retro-install installations?
Yes
Aftermarket items may cause either electrical or radio frequency interference that can cause
satellite reception to deteriorate.
Remove the power supply (including backup power supplies) from any aftermarket items
installed. If reception returns to normal after disconnection of aftermarket items, carry out the
following. Alter the installation position of any aftermarket items.Check satellite reception.GO to
A3.
No
GO to A3.
A3: SATELLITE RECEPTION CHECKS
1 Check the 'ST' column of the navigation diagnostics GPS information screen (PIN code 662) after
10 minutes have passed. There must be more than 4 ‘P’s displayed for accurate positioning.
Check the ‘HDOP’ value, this must be less than 5.
Are there more than 4 'P's displayed and is HDOP less than 5?
Yes
Satellite reception is normal.
No
Confirm the GPS antenna is connected to the navigation module.
Refer to the electrical circuit wiring diagrams and check the integrity of the coaxial cable and
connectors from the Navigation Control Module (NCM) to the GPS antenna.
Install a new GPS antenna or coaxial cable as required.
Re-check satellite reception.
PINPOINT TEST B : MAP DISC WILL NOT INSERT/EJECT

NOTE: Ensure the parking brake is applied, and ignition status is set to Auxiliary or ON.
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK NAVIGATION DISC SLOT SHUTTER
1 Check the navigation map disc slot shutter is open.
Is the navigation map disc slot shutter is open?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Open the map disc slot shutter.
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK NAVIGATION MAP DISC WILL INSERT/EJECT
1 Check that it is possible to insert/eject navigation map disc.
Is it possible to insert/eject navigation map disc?
Yes
Operation is normal.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power supply and ground connections to the
Navigation Control Module (NCM). If power supply and ground connections are good, install a new
Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new module/component installation
note at top of DTC Index.
PINPOINT TEST C : BLACK SCREEN (NAVIGATION MAP SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY)
NOTE: Ensure the parking brake is applied, and ignition status is set to Auxiliary or ON.
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK SCREEN SAVER FUNCTION
1 Check the screen saver function operation.
Does the screen saver function operate?
Yes
Press the display panel button.GO to C2.
No
GO to C2.
C2: CHECK DISPLAY BACKLIGHT
1 Check the display backlight operation.
Does the display backlight operate?
Yes
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the GVIF cable between Navigation Control
Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected.
If the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly
connected, check and install a new GVIF cable as required. Refer to the new module/component
installation note at top of DTC Index.
connected and NOT damaged, check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as
required. Refer to the new module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
Re-check the system.
No
Check the HLDF display.
PINPOINT TEST D : NAVIGATION MAP SCREEN COLOUR IS ABNORMAL

CONDITIONS
D1: COLOUR BAR CHECK
1 Carry out the display diagnostics 'colour bar check' (PIN code 660).
Are the results of the display diagnostics 'colour bar check' normal?
Yes
Check the HLDF display.
No
Check the condition of the map disc for dirt or scratches.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the GVIF cable between Navigation Control
Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected.
connected, check and install a new GVIF cable as required. Refer to the new module/component
installation note at top of DTC Index.
connected and NOT damaged, check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as
required. Refer to the new module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
PINPOINT TEST E : VEHICLE’S CURRENT POSITION MARK TURNS INDEPENDENTLY

CONDITIONS
E1: VEHICLES CURRENT POSITION MARK TURNS INDEPENDENTLY
1 Determine if the ignition status was turned to Auxiliary or On, while the vehicle was in motion
with steering turned such as after an engine stall.
Was ignition status set to Auxiliary or On?
Yes
The angular speed of the vehicle at the time of the ignition status change will be logged as the
standard value. To re-set the standard value, turn ignition status to 'OFF' then to 'Auxiliary' or
'On' with the vehicle stationary.
Re-test the vehicle.
No
Check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new
module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
PINPOINT TEST F : CAR CURRENT POSITION NOT STABLE

CONDITIONS
F1: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
Yes
Re-check the system for car current position not stable.
No
GO to F2.
F2: VEHICLE SPEED INPUT CHECK
1 Select Vehicle Sensor from the navigation diagnostic menu screen (PIN code 660), check
Current speed. The current speed must match the speedometer.
From the Vehicle Sensor screen, does the current speed must match the speedometer?
Yes
GO to F3.
No
Carry out MOST ring circuit checks.
Check the Anti-Lock Brake System Module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Carry out network integrity tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits if required. Repair wiring harness as required.
F3: CHECK NUMBER OF SATELLITES
1 From the navigation diagnostic GPS information screen (PIN code 662), check the number of
satellites displayed.
Is the number of satellites displayed on the screen 0?
Yes
Carry out pinpoint test A "Poor Satellite Reception"
No
GO to F4.
F4: CHECK IF SYMPTOMS ARE OCCURRING IN PARTICULAR LOCATIONS
1 Confirm if the 'car current position not stable' symptom is occurring in particular locations.
Is the 'car current position not stable' symptom occurring in particular locations?
Yes
Signal reflections from buildings or a particular location may be responsible.
No
Carry out pinpoint test A "Poor Satellite Reception"
PINPOINT TEST G : MAP DISPLAY IS INCOMPLETE
CONDITIONS
G1: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
Yes
Re-check the system for 'Map display is incomplete'.
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK MAP DISC
1 Check map disc for contamination, deformation, cracks, scratches or non-genuine disc and
correct market.
Has a fault been identified with the map disc?
Yes
Replace the map disc.
Re-check the system for 'Map display is incomplete'.
No
PINPOINT TEST H : NO NAVIGATION VOICE GUIDANCE

CONDITIONS
H1: CHECK ALL AUDIO OUTPUT SYSTEMS
1 Check audio output across all systems.
Is there sound output across all systems?
Yes
GO to H2.
No
GO to H3.
H2: CHECK VOICE GUIDANCE SOFT KEY
1 Check navigation screen menu, voice guidance soft key is not set to OFF position.
Is the voice guidance soft key set to OFF position?
Yes
Set the voice guidance soft key to ON position.
Re-check the system
No
GO to H3.
H3: VOLUME LEVEL CHECK
1 Check the volume level is not set too low.
Is the volume level set too low?
Yes
Increase the volume level and re-test vehicle.
No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of amplifier and speaker system wiring
harness and connectors.
GO to H4.
H4: NAVIGATION VOICE ONLY NOT AUDIBLE
NOTE: Only the navigation voice cannot be heard.
1 Press the 'Navigation voice repeat' soft key.
After the navigation voice repeat soft key is pressed, can voice still not be heard even though it has
become louder?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST I : NO RESPONSE TO PRESSING NAVIGATION MENU

CONDITIONS
I1: NO RESPONSE TO PRESSING NAVIGATION MENU
NOTE: 15 minutes are required for the program to update. If the engine is accidentally turned OFF, start the engine
again, and wait for 15 minutes.
1 Check that the engine was not turned 'OFF' during a navigation software update.
Was the engine turned 'OFF' during a navigation software update?

Yes
Check the correct map disc is inserted into the Navigation Control Module (NCM). Start the engine
and allow to idle for 15 minutesTurn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.Verify that
the navigation screen displays. Navigation was in the program update mode.
No
GO to I3.
1 Check that the engine was not turned 'OFF' after inserting the new map disc.
Was the engine turned 'OFF' after inserting the new map disc?
Yes
and allow to idle for 15 minutesTurn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.
No
GO to I3.
1 Check the "Loading" button on the navigation diagnostics screen (PIN code 660) has been
pressed, and "YES" has been selected.
Has the "Loading" button on the navigation diagnostics screen been pressed, and has "YES" been
selected?
Yes
and allow to idle for 15 minutesTurn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.
No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of navigation system wiring harness and
connectors.
GO to I4.
I4: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
Is DTC U300055 logged?
Yes
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check/amend the Car Configuration File
parameter in block 2, byte 127 to match vehicle market/specification. If the DTC remains check
navigation system module part number and ensure the correct component is installed to vehicle
market/specification.
No
GO to I5.
1 Turn the engine 'OFF', wait for a moment, and then turn the engine 'ON' again.
Does the navigation screen fail to display even if the navigation button is pressed?
Yes
Check the HLDF is installed correctly.
Check the Navigation Control Module (NCM) is installed correctly.
No
Navigation System - Navigation System Antenna
Removal
1. Remove the rear spoiler.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Spoiler (501-08
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the navigation system antenna.

Installation
1. Install the navigation system antenna.
2. Install the rear spoiler.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Spoiler (501-08
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Navigation System - Navigation System Display Module
Removal
Procedures).
2. Remove the instrument panel center reinforcement
trim panel.

Release the navigation system module bracket.

Remove the navigation screen module.

 Remove the trim panel veneer upper
retaining clip.
Installation
1. Install the navigation screen module.
 Install the clip.
2. Install the navigation system module bracket.

3. Install the instrument panel center reinforcement trim panel.


Procedures).
Navigation System - Navigation System Module
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect
(414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
2. Release the navigation system module bracket.
3. Remove the navigation system module.

Installation
1. Install the navigation system module.


For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect
(414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
Cellular Phone -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Cellular (Bluetooth) phone antenna 7 5 62
Transceiver module 6 4 53
www.JagDocs.com
Cellular Phone - Cellular Phone
COMPONENT LOCATION

3 - Microphone
5 - Speakers
10 - Audio amplifier
INTRODUCTION
The cellular phone system is based on using the customers own Bluetooth capable handset with the vehicle Information and
Entertainment system.
NOTE: There is no physical connection (cradle) between the phone handset and the Telephone Control Module.
Communications between the two components are purely Bluetooth. This can limit the available functions dependant on the
handset used.
The cellular phone system comprises the following components:
 Telephone Control Module

 Microphone
 Bluetooth antenna
The system allows the driver to send, receive and end phone calls using the Touch Screen Display (TSD), steering wheel
switches and voice recognition system.
Phone dialing is achieved using one of the following methods:
 Dialing a number using the TSD keypad

 Selecting a number from the handsets phonebook
 Selecting from the handsets call register, typically the last 10 calls made, received and missed.
The Telephone Control Module is connected to the Information and Entertainment system on the MOST ring. This allows
audio and control signals to be routed to and from the Telephone Control Module.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A=Hardwired; N=Medium speed CAN; P=MOST; T=Coaxial

3 - Audio amplifier
4 - Speakers
-
7 Bluetooth antenna
9 - Microphone
10 - Clock spring
Cellular Phone - Cellular Phone Antenna
Removal
1. Remove the rear seat armrest.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat Armrest (501-10
2. Release the auxiliary junction box access cover.
3. Remove the cellular phone antenna.

Installation
1. Install the cellular phone antenna.

 Secure in the clip.
3. Install the rear seat armrest.

Cellular Phone - Transceiver Module
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the transceiver module.
Installation
1. Install the transceiver module.

Specifications).
Multifunction Electronic Modules -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Driver seat module (DSM) retaining bolts 10 7 -
Information and entertainment module retaining bolts 6 - 53
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Module Controlled Functions
COMPONENT LOCATION - MOST BUS

4 - Software download socket
5 - Auxiliary USB (universal serial bus) unit
6 - Cellular phone module
8 - SDARS/DAB (satellite digital audio radio service/digital audio broadcasting) module (where
fitted)
9 - Audio amplifier
COMPONENT LOCATION - LIN AND PRIVATE CAN BUSES

1 - LH (left hand) temperature blend stepper motor
2 - Face/Feet distribution stepper motor
3 - RH (right hand) temperature blend stepper motor
6 - Driver seat switch pack
10 - Passenger seat switch pack
COMPONENT LOCATION - LIN BUS (CONTINUED)

1 - Adaptive speed control sensor
2 - Battery backed sounder
4 - Clockspring
6 - Engine start control module
7 - Steering wheel audio switch module
8 - Yaw rate/acceleration sensor
COMPONENT LOCATION - MEDIUM SPEED CAN BUS

1 - ATC module
5 - Seat climate control module
11 - TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) module
12 - Convertible top control module (convertible vehicle only)
15 - CJB
16 - Parking aid module
COMPONENT LOCATION - HIGH SPEED CAN BUS

2 - Steering column lock
3 - Adaptive front lighting module
7 - RCM (restraints control module)
8 - ADCM (active damping control module)
9 - EPB (electric park brake) module
12 - Occupancy sensor module
14 - ABS module
15 - Pedestrian protection system module
INTRODUCTION
The vehicle electrical system consists of a number of control modules connected via two multiplexed CAN (controller area
network) busses. The Instrument cluster acts as a gateway between the two CAN bus systems.
Lower speed control modules use a LIN (local interconnect network) bus. Control modules on the LIN bus are generally
configured to be master/slave i.e. one module controls other module(s).
The vehicle entertainment system uses a fibre optic bus system, which uses the MOST (media oriented systems transport)
protocol for transmission of data and audio to the relevant components of the audio system.
Module Bus System Function Location

ECM (engine control HS CAN Controls the engine in response to various Front LH (left-hand) side in
module) sensor inputs. engine compartment adjacent to
bulkhead.
ABS (anti-lock brake HS CAN Controls the braking force applied to the road In the engine compartment next
system) module wheels. to the ECM.
Instrument cluster HS CAN, MS Gateway between High speed and Medium On the driver side in the
CAN and LIN speed CAN, gateway between the CAN busses instrument panel.
and the LIN bus.
Parking aid control module MS CAN Control of parking sensors and routing of audio Lower LH A pillar below the CJB
feedback to driver. (central junction box).
Navigation computer MOST, GVIF Route guidance output based on inputs from In the luggage compartment to
GPS (global positioning system) satellites and the right of battery.
driver destination.
RCM (restraints control MS CAN Controls the deployment of supplementary On the transmission tunnel
module) restraint components. between the seats under the
trim.
TPMS (tire pressure MS CAN Monitors the vehicle tires to warn of deflation. Behind the rear seats next to the
monitoring system) AJB (auxiliary junction box).
module
TCM (transmission control MS CAN Electronic control of the automatic gear change. In the sump of the transmission.
module)
Steering column lock MS CAN Inhibits the steering from being turned without On the steering column.
the proper security parameters being met.
Headlamp HS CAN Controls headlamp levels and adaptive front RH (right-hand)foot well
leveling/adaptive front lighting system. mounted against inner bulk
lighting module head.
Adaptive speed control HS CAN Controls vehicle road speed in relation to other At the bottom of the RH A pillar.
module vehicles when in speed control mode.
CJB MS CAN Controls body functions and power distribution. In the passenger compartment
RH side on the A pillar.
AJB MS CAN Controls body functions and power distribution. In the center behind the backrest
of the rear passenger seat.
Seat climate control MS CAN Controls the operation of the climate control In the instrument panel.
module system in the front seats.
ADCM HS CAN Controls the adjustment of the dampers. Behind the backrest of the RH
rear passenger seat.
EPB (electronic parking HS CAN Controls the application and release of the Behind the auxiliary junction
brake) module parking brake. box.
ATC (automatic MS CAN Controls the operation of the climate control/air- Attached to the side of air
temperature control) conditioning system. conditioning unit.
module
Information and MS CAN Gateway between the MOST and CAN systems Behind the TSD and above the
entertainment control for information and control distribution. integrated audio unit.
module
Driver door module MS CAN Memory/adjustment functions for seats, steering In the drivers door behind the
column and mirrors and security functions. trim.
Passenger door module MS CAN Memory/adjustment functions for seats, steering In the passenger door behind the
column and mirrors and security functions. trim.
Integrated control panel MS CAN Contains controls for entertainment system and Center of the instrument panel
air conditioning system. surrounding the TSD.
Driver seat module MS CAN Controls seat positioning and memory seat Under the drivers seat.
functions.
Passenger seat module MS CAN Controls seat positioning and memory seat Under the front passenger seat.
functions.
Keyless vehicle module MS CAN Allows the vehicle to be opened and started Right hand A pillar.
without the use of a key.
JaguarDrive selector MS CAN Electronic control of the selected gear/driving On top of the transmission
module mode. tunnel.
Key start control module LIN Used if the keyless vehicle module is unable to In the center consol.
authorize the smart key.
Pedestrian protection HS CAN Control and monitoring of pedestrian protection On the LH side under the wheel
system module system. arch liner at the top of the wheel
arch.
DLM HS CAN Controls the operation of the motor on the LH side of the luggage
electronic differential. compartment, immediately
forward of the tail lamp.
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Multifunction Electronic Module
For a detailed description of the multifunction electronic control modules, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Module Controlled Functions (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
 Fuse(s)
 Wiring Harness
DTC Index
NOTE: The DTC Index in this section shows information for DTCs that could be logged in the Driver Door Module (DDM)
or Passenger Door Module (PDM). For diagnosis and testing information for: Driver/Passenger Seat module.
REFER to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).
Information and Entertainment module.
Remote Keyless Entry module.
REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - DTC: With (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,

B109C15 Front Courtesy Light  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test front courtesy light circuit for short to
power or open circuit
B109D11 Front Courtesy Light  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test front courtesy light circuit for short
ground
B10EB11 Driver door double  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
locking motor test driver door double locking motor circuit
for short ground
B10EB15 Driver door double  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
locking motor test driver door double locking motor circuit
for short to power or open circuit
B10EC11 Passenger door  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
double locking motor test passenger door double locking motor
circuit for short ground
B10EC15 Passenger door  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
double locking motor test passenger door double locking motor
circuit for short to power or open circuit
B110811 Driver door central  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
locking motor test driver door central locking motor circuit
for short ground
B110815 Driver door central  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
locking motor test driver door central locking motor circuit
for short to power or open circuit
B110911 Passenger door  Short to ground Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
central locking motor this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B110915 Passenger door  Short to power or open circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
central locking motor this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B116311 Left Mirror Heater  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Output short to test left mirror heater output circuit for short
ground to ground
B116315 Left Mirror Heater  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Output short to power test left mirror heater output circuit for short
to power or open circuit
B116411 Right Mirror Heater  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Output short to test right mirror heater output circuit for
ground short to ground
B116415 Right Mirror Heater  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Output short to power test right mirror heater output circuit for
short to power or open circuit
B116511 Left Front Puddle  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Lamp Output short to test left front puddle lamp output circuit for
B116515 Left Front Puddle  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Lamp Output open test left front puddle lamp output circuit for
load or short to power short to power or open circuit
B116611 Right Front Puddle  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Lamp Output short to test right front puddle lamp output circuit for
B116615 Right Front Puddle  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Lamp Output open test right front puddle lamp output circuit for
load or short to short to power or open circuit
battery
B117E72 Front Power Window  Actuator stuck open Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
up module installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
B117E73 Front Power Window  Actuator stuck closed Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
Index
B117F72 Front Power Window  Actuator stuck open Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
down module installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
B117F73 Front Power Window  Actuator stuck closed Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
Index
B118929 Front Window Position  Signal invalid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
Sensor this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B118A29 Rear Window Position  Signal invalid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
Sensor this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B1A9411 Driver Mirror  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test driver mirror fold motor circuit for short
to ground
B1A9415 Driver Mirror  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
B1A9511 Passenger Mirror  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test passenger mirror fold motor circuit for
short to ground
B1A9515 Passenger Mirror  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
B1A9883 LIN Bus Circuit #1  Value of signal protection Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
calculation incorrect test LIN circuit between driver switch pack
and DDM for short/open circuits, clear DTC
and re-test. If DTC remains install a new
switch pack.
REFER to: Window Control Switch (501-11
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
B1A9886 LIN Bus Circuit #1  Signal Invalid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test LIN circuit between driver switch pack
switch pack.
Installation).
B1A9887 LIN Bus Circuit #1  Missing Message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
switch pack.
Installation).
B1C0911 Driver Left/Right  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror Motor Circuit test driver left/right mirror motor circuit for
short to ground
B1C0915 Driver Left/Right  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
B1C1011 Driver Up/Down  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror Motor Circuit test driver up/down mirror motor circuit for
short to ground
B1C1015 Driver Up/Down  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
B1C1111 Passenger Left/Right  Short to ground Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
Mirror Motor Circuit this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B1C1115 Passenger Left/Right  Short to power or open circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
diagnostic system
B1C1211 Passenger Up/Down  Short to ground Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
diagnostic system
B1C1215 Passenger Up/Down  Short to power or open circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
diagnostic system
Mirror Motor Feedback test driver up/down mirror motor feedback
Circuit circuit for short to ground
Mirror Motor Feedback test driver up/down mirror motor feedback
Circuit circuit for short to power or open circuit
Mirror Motor Feedback test driver left/right mirror motor feedback
Circuit circuit for short to ground
Mirror Motor Feedback test driver left/right mirror motor feedback
Circuit circuit for short to power or open circuit
B1C1511 Passenger Up/Down  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror Motor Feedback test passenger up/down mirror motor
Circuit feedback circuit for short to ground
B1C1515 Passenger Up/Down  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror Motor Feedback test passenger up/down mirror motor
Circuit feedback circuit for short to power or open
circuit
B1C1611 Passenger Left/Right  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror Motor Feedback test passenger left/right mirror motor
Circuit feedback circuit for short to ground
B1C1615 Passenger Left/Right  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror Motor Feedback test passenger left/right mirror motor
Circuit feedback circuit for short to power or open
circuit
C1B1411 Sensor Supply #1  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test window sensor supply circuit for short to
ground
C1B1415 Sensor Supply #1  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test window sensor supply circuit for short to
U001000 Medium speed CAN  Medium speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
communication Bus communication Bus this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U014000 Lost communication  Logged when subscribed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
with CJB message missing from CJB this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U020800 Lost communication  Missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
With Driver Seat this DTC using the manufacturer approved
Module (DSM) diagnostic system
the DDM/PDM, refer to the new module
U200224 Switch  Signal stuck high Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, install
a new passenger side window switch
U201011 Switch illumination  Circuit short to ground Carry out CAN network tests using the
U201012 Switch illumination  Circuit short to battery Carry out CAN network tests using the
U201208 Car Configuration  Bus signal/message failures Cycle the ignition status and re-test. If DTC
Parameter(s) remains, re-configure the RJB using the
U201324 Switch Pack  Signal stuck high Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, install
a new driver side window switch pack.
Installation).
U201444 Control module  Data Memory Failure Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
hardware module installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
U210000 Initial configuration  No sub type information Re-configure the DDM/PDM using the
not complete manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U300049 Control module  Internal electronic failure Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
Index
U300255 Vehicle Identification  Not configured Re-configure the relevant module as new
Number (VIN) using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system and re-test. If DTC remains install a
new module, refer to the new module
U300362 Battery voltage  Mis-match of battery voltage, of Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
2 volts or lower, between this DTC using the manufacturer approved
DDM/PDM and RJB diagnostic system
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Door Module (DDM)
Removal

2. Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
3.
Installation

Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Seat Module (DSM)
Removal
1. Remove the front seat.
For additional information, refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating,
2. Remove the front seat control module.
Installation
1. Install the front seat control module.
2. Install the front seat.

Multifunction Electronic Modules - Information and Entertainment
Module
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the instrument panel center reinforcement
trim panel.

Release the navigation system module bracket.

4. Remove the information and entertainment
module.
Installation
1. Install the information and entertainment module.

3. Install the instrument panel center reinforcement trim panel.


Specifications).
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Passenger Door Module (PDM)
Removal

2. Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
3.
Installation

Multifunction Electronic Modules - Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module
Removal
NOTE: This module is installed on the inside of the RH A-pillar above the footwell and does not change with the hand of
drive.

Specifications).

Remove the RH side footwell trim panel.

3. Remove the keyless entry module.

Installation
1. Install the keyless entry module.
2. Install the RH side footwell trim panel.


Specifications).
Front End Body Panels - Air Deflector
Removal

2. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Front End Body Panels - Cowl Vent Screen
Removal
CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.


3. Remove the windshield wiper arms.

For additional information, refer to: Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16 Wipers and
Washers, Removal and Installation).
 Release the retaining clip.
Installation


4. Install the windshield wiper arms.

For additional information, refer to: Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16 Wipers and
Washers, Removal and Installation).
Front End Body Panels - Fender Splash Shield
Removal


4. Remove the fender splash shield, rear section.
 Remove the clip.
5. Remove the fender splash shield, front section.
Installation
1. Install the fender splash shield, front section.
2. Install the fender splash shield, rear section.

 Tighten the nuts.

www.JagDocs.com
Front End Body Panels - Radiator Splash Shield
Removal


2. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the washers.
Remove the radiator splash shield.


for access only.
Remove the 13 clips.

4. Remove the 2 air deflectors.
Installation
1. Install the air deflectors.
2. Install the clips.

3. Install the radiator splash shield.
 Tighten the screws.
Body Closures -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Door check strap to body - bolt 12 9 -
Door check strap to door - nut 12 9 -
Door hinge - pin bolt 25 18 -
Hood to hinge - nut 23 17 -
Hood hinge to body - bolt 23 17 -
Lift-gate to hinge - bolt 23 17 -
Lift-gate hinge to body - nut 23 17 -
Luggage compartment lid to hinge - nut 23 17 -
Luggage compartment lid hinge to body - bolt 23 17 -
Body Closures - Hood Alignment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Actuator Aligners - Pedestrian Protection Hood Stops
501-119
1. With assistance, loosen the 8 nuts securing the hood to the

hinges.
2. Release the hood support struts.
3. Lower the hood and check for alignment.

For additional information, refer to: Body and Frame (501-26
Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance
Checks, Description and Operation).
 Adjust as necessary.
4. Raise the hood.

 Connect the hood support struts.
5. Align the hood to the pedestrian protection

actuators using special tools 501-119.
 Insert special tools 501-119, into the
pedestrian protection actuators.
 Loosen the 8 bolts securing the pedestrian
protection actuator stops to the hood.
 Gently close the hood so that the
pedestrian protection hood stops are
aligned to the actuators.
 Open the hood.
Body Closures - Luggage Compartment Lid Alignment
General Procedures
1. Remove the luggage compartment floor panel.

2. Remove the luggage compartment lid striker
panel.
3. Remove the luggage compartment striker.

4. Remove the luggage compartment aperture seal.

5. Remove the luggage compartment lid struts.
6. Loosen the luggage compartment lid hinge fixings.

7. Make sure the gaps between the luggage

compartment lid are all 3.5 mm.
8. Make sure the luggage compartment lid to rear
bumper gap is 6.8 mm.
9. Tighten the luggage compartment lid hinge nuts to 23 Nm (17

lb.ft).
10. Loosen the luggage compartment lid hinge to body
fixings.
 Loosen the 6 bolts.
11. Make sure the gaps between the luggage compartment lid are
all 3.5 mm.
12. Tighten the luggage compartment lid hinge to body bolts, to 23
Nm (17 lb.ft).
13. Install the luggage compartment lid support struts.
14. With the luggage compartment lid closed, check

the profile of the luggage compartment lid to
convertible top compartment lid, and luggage
compartment lid to rear body side is flush; adjust
as necessary.
15. Install the luggage compartment lid aperture seal.
16. Install the luggage compartment lid striker.
17. Install the luggage compartment lid striker trim panel.
 Install the 4 Torx screws
18. Install the luggage compartment floor panel.

Body Closures - Liftgate Alignment
General Procedures
1. Check the gap and profiles of the liftgate are correct.

For additional information, refer to: Body and Frame (501-26
Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance
Checks, Description and Operation).
2. Remove the loadspace floor panel.
3. Remove the scuff plate trim panel.
4. Remove the liftgate hinge cover.

5. Loosen the liftgate striker.

 Loosen the 2 Torx bolts.
6. Loosen the liftgate to hinge Torx bolts.
7. With the liftgate closed, check the alignment of the

liftgate to the roof panel. Profile of the liftgate to
roof panel should be 2 mm below flush.
8. Tighten the liftgate to hinge Torx bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).

9. Loosen the liftgate hinge to body nuts.
10. With the liftgate closed, check the alignment of the

liftgate to the roof panel and bodyside panel. The
liftgate should be central in its aperture.
11. Tighten the liftgate hinge to body nuts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).

12. Secure the liftgate striker.
13. Install the scuff plate trim panel.

 Install the 4 Torx screws
14. With the liftgate closed, check the profile of the
liftgate to the bodyside panel. Adjust as required.
15. Install the liftgate hinge cover.

16. Install the loadspace floor panel.

Body Closures - Hood
Special Tool(s)
Actuator Aligners - Pedestrian Protection Hood Stops
501-119
Removal
1. With assistance, remove the hood.
 Release the clips and disconnect the struts.

for access only.
Remove the hood seal end caps.

3. Remove the hood seal.
 Release the hood seal.
4. Remove the hood pad.
5. Remove the 2 secondary hood pads.

Installation
1. Install the secondary hood pads.
2. Install the hood pad.

3. Install the hood seal.

 Attach the hood seal.
4. Install the hood seal end caps.
5. With assistance install and align the hood.

 Connect the struts and secure with the clips.
6. Align the hood to the pedestrian protection

actuators using special tools 501-119.
 Insert special tools 501-119 into the
pedestrian protection actuators.
 Loosen the 8 bolts securing the pedestrian
protection actuator stops to the hood.
 Gently close the hood so that the
pedestrian protection hood stops are
aligned to the actuators.
 Open the hood.
Body Closures - Luggage Compartment Lid
Removal
2. Disconnect the 4 luggage compartment lid harness electrical
connectors.
3. Release the wiring harness.
 Remove the electrical harness clip.
4. Release the electrical harness.

 Release the electrical harness clip.
5. Release the clips and disconnect the struts.
6. With assistance, remove the luggage compartment
lid.

Remove the luggage compartment lid latch

operating cable from the lock cylinder.
 Release the cable from the clip.
8. Remove the luggage compartment lid latch

assembly.
9. Remove the bump stops.

10. Remove the luggage compartment lid lock cylinder.

12. Remove the license plate lamp housing.

13. Remove the luggage compartment lid finisher.
 Disconnect the license plate lamp electrical
connector.
 Remove the grommets.
14. Remove both rear lamp assemblies.

15. Remove the luggage compartment lid wiring

harness.
 Release the 8 wiring harness securing clips.
16. Remove the luggage compartment lid decals.

 Wipe the luggage compartment lid to remove all traces
of the adhesive.
 Polish the area to remove any bleaching.
Installation
1. Install the luggage compartment lid decal.
 Remove the backing from the decal.
 Remove the protective cover from the decal.
 Secure the decal to the luggage compartment lid.
 Position and align the decal on the luggage compartment
lid.
2. Install the luggage compartment lid wiring harness.
3. Install both of the rear lamp assemblies.
 Install the nuts.
4. Install the luggage compartment lid finisher.

 Connect the license plate lamp electrical connector.
 Install the 4 bolts.
 Install the grommets.
 Install the license plate lamp housing.
5. Install the wiring harness.

 Install the 2 bolts.
 Secure in the 9 clips.
6. Install the luggage compartment lid lock cylinder.

7. Install the bump stops.

8. Install the luggage compartment lid latch assembly.
 Install the 3 Torx bolts.
9. Connect the luggage compartment lid latch operating cable to

the lock cylinder.
 Install the cable.
10. With assistance, install the luggage compartment lid.

 Install the 4 nuts.
11. Install the luggage compartment lid support struts.

 Secure in the 2 clips.
12. Install the wiring harness.

 Secure the electrical harness with the clip.
13. Connect the 4 electrical connectors.

Body Closures - Door
Removal
Specifications).
3. Remove the window regulator motor.
4. Release the front door inner weathershield.

5. Remove the front door inner weathershield.

 Release the front door interior handle
cable.
6. Release the door check strap from the body.
7. Release the door harness from the door.

 Release from the locating grommet.
8. NOTE: With assistance remove the component.
Remove the door.

 Remove the 2 hinge bolts.
Installation
1. With assistance, install the door assembly.
 Lubricate the hinges and bolts tighten to 25 Nm (18
lb.ft).
2. Install the door wiring harness.
 Secure in the grommets.
3. Install the door check strap.

 Tighten the Torx screws to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
4. Install the front door inner weathershield.

 Attach the front door interior handle cable.
5. Secure the front door inner weathershield.
 Secure the wiring harness clips.
6. Install the window regulator motor.


Specifications).
Body Closures - Door Check Arm
Removal


cable.
5. Remove the door check-strap.
Installation
1. Install the door check strap.




Body Closures - Liftgate
Removal
Installation).
2. Disconnect the rear screen electrical connectors.
3. Release the body harness from the liftgate.
 Release the 2 harness grommets and
withdraw the harness from liftgate.
4. NOTE: Support the lifgate as necessary.
Release the liftgate support struts.

5. With assistance, remove the liftgate.
Installation
1. With assistance, install the liftgate.
2. NOTE: Support the lifgate as necessary.
Attach the liftgate support struts.

3. Attach the body harness to the liftgate.
 Secure the harness grommets into the liftgate.
4. Disconnect the rear screen electrical connectors.

Installation).
6. Check and adjust the liftgate.
For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Alignment (501-03
Body Closures, General Procedures).
Interior Trim and Ornamentation -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
B-pillar trim panel - screw 3 2 26
Door trim panel - screw 3 2 26
Parcel shelf - bolt 6 4 53
Door scuff-plate - screw 6 4 53
Luggage compartment scuff plate - bolt 4 3 35
Rear quarter trim panel - screw 3 2 26
Sun visor - screw 1 - 9
www.JagDocs.com
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - A-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
1. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component
is removed for access only.
Remove the A-pillar trim panel.

2. Remove the cellular phone microphone.

Installation
1. Install the cellular phone microphone.
2. Install the A-pillar trim panel.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - B-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
1. Remove the parcel tray.
For additional information, refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05
2. Remove the sun visor.
For additional information, refer to: Sun Visor (501-05 Interior
3. Remove the roof moulding.
4. Release the B-pillar trim panel.

5. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.

Installation
1. Attach the B-pillar trim panel.
2. Secure the B-pillar trim panel.

3. Install the roof moulding.
4. Install the sun visor.

5. Install the parcel tray.
For additional information, refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Engine Cover V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol
Removal

correct.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Door Trim Panel
Removal
1. Remove the exterior mirror trim panel.
2. Release the front door trim panel.

 Remove the bolt cover.
Remove the front door trim panel.

cable.
4. Remove the front door latch remote control

handle.
5. Remove the grab handle cover.

6. Remove the window control switch.
7. Remove the seat control switch.

Installation
1. Install the seat control switch.
2. Install the window control switch.

3. Install the grab handle cover.

4. Install the front door latch remote control handle.

5. CAUTION: Make sure that the cable remains correctly

installed to the front door trim panel.
Install the front door trim panel.

6. Secure the front door trim panel.

 Tighten the Torx bolts to 10 Nm.
 Install the bolt cover.
7. Install the exterior mirror trim panel.

8. Check the operation of the door latch remote control handle.
 With the door closed, check the latch operation of the
door latch remote control handle.
 With the door closed, check the lock operation of the
door latch remote control handle.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Headliner
Removal
1. Remove the LH A-pillar upper trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05
2. Remove the RH A-pillar upper trim panel.
3. Remove the roof mouldings.

4. Remove the LH B-pillar upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05
5. Release the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.
6. Remove the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

7. Remove the front overhead console.
8. Remove the LH sun visor.

9. Remove the RH sun visor.
10. Remove the sun visor retaining clips.
 Release the screw covers.
 Remove the screws.
11. Remove the headliner.

Installation
1. Install the headliner.
2. Install the sun visor retaining clips.

 Install the screw covers.
3. Install the RH sun visor.

4. Install the LH sun visor.

5. Install the front overhead console.
6. Attach the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

7. Secure the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

8. Install the LH B-pillar upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05
9. Install the roof mouldings.
10. Install the RH A-pillar upper trim panel.

11. Install the LH A-pillar upper trim panel.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Parcel Shelf
Removal
2. Release the parcel tray.
3. Release the rear safety belts.

 Remove and discard the 2 safety belt lower
anchor nuts.
4. Remove the rear safety belt trim panel.
 Release from the safety belts.
5. Remove the parcel tray.

 Release from the safety belts.

Remove the 2 child seat mounting trim panels.

Installation
1. Install the 2 child seat mounting trim panels.
2. Install the parcel tray.

 Position safety belts through apertures.
3. Install the rear safety belt trim panel.

 Attach the safety belts.
4. Secure the rear safety belts.

 Install new nuts and tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
5. Secure the parcel tray.


Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Removal
1. Remove and discard the scuff plate decal.
 Release the adhesive strip.
2. Remove the front scuff plate trim panel.

 Carefully release horizontally.
Installation
1. Install the front scuff plate trim panel.
 Align the component.
2. Install the scuff plate decal.

 Remove backing tape from adhesive strip.
 Clean the adhesive contact area.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Removal
1. Remove the luggage compartment floor panel.
2. Remove the tool kit tray.
3. Remove the spare wheel and tire.

Installation
2. Install the spare wheel and tire.

 Install the bolt.
3. Install the tool kit tray.

4. Install the luggage compartment floor panel.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Sun Visor
Removal
1. Remove the sun visor.
Installation
1. Install the sun visor.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Liftgate Upper Trim Panel
Removal
1. Remove the liftgate upper trim panel.
Installation
1. Install the liftgate upper trim panel.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Liftgate Lower Trim Panel
Removal
1. Remove the liftgate upper trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Upper Trim Panel
Installation).
2. Remove the warning triangle.
3. Remove the warning triangle retaining bracket.

4. Remove the liftgate grab handle.

Installation
2. Install the liftgate grab handle.

3. Install the warning triangle retaining bracket.

4. Install the warning triangle.

5. Install the liftgate upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Upper Trim Panel
Installation).
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Quarter Trim Panel 2-Door
Removal
2. NOTE: Release the forward edge first.
Remove the scuff plate trim panel.

3. Release the rear safety belt lower anchor.

 Remove and discard the Torx bolt.

 Release the safety belt from the trim panel.
Installation
 Position the safety belt through the trim panel.
 Tighten the Torx bolts to 3 Nm (2.2 lb.ft).
2. Secure the rear safety belt lower anchor.

 Tighten the new Torx bolt to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).


Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Quarter Trim Panel Convertible
Removal
2. Remove the rear safety belt stalk trim panel.
3. Remove the rear safety belt stalk.


5. NOTE: Support the convertible top lid.
Open the convertible top to the position shown.

 Depress the switch.
6. Release the convertible top hinge cover tension strap.

 Release from the convertible top mechanism.
7. Carefully remove the outer waist seal.

 Release each end of the seal from the
body.
8. Release the convertible top lid seal.

9. Release the front safety belt lower anchor.

 Remove and discard the Torx bolt.
 Release the safety belt from the trim panel.
Installation
 Position the safety belt through the trim
panel.
 Secure with the clips (1).
 Check the illustrated trim dimension (2),
before tightening the Torx bolt (3) to 3
Nm (2.2 lb.ft).
2. Secure the front safety belt lower anchor.

 Tighten the new Torx bolt to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
3. Attach the convertible top lid seal.

4. Install the outer waist seal.

 Attach the outer waist seal to the body.
5. Attach the convertible top hinge cover tension strap.

 Attach to the convertible top mechanism.
6. Close the convertible top.


8. Install the safety belt stalk.

9. Install the rear safety belt stalk trim panel.


Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Quarter Trim Sliding Panel
Removal
2. Remove the rear safety belt stalk trim panel.
3. Remove the rear safety belt stalk.


5. NOTE: Support the convertible top lid.
Open the convertible top to the position shown.

6. Release the convertible top hinge cover tension strap.

 Release from the convertible top mechanism.

 Release each end of the seal from the
body.
8. Release the convertible top lid seal.

9. Release the rear quarter trim panel.
10. Release the air damper unit from the trim panel.
11. Remove the rear quarter trim sliding panel
complete with both air damper units
 Carefully release the rear quarter trim
sliding panel.
Installation
1. Carefully install the rear quarter trim sliding panel.
 Position the air damper unit between the quarter trim
panel and the support brace.
2. Install the air damper unit to the trim panel.
 Tighten the Torx screws to 1.9 Nm (1.4 lb.ft).

 Check the illustrated trim dimension,
before tightening the Torx bolts to 3 Nm
(2.2 lb.ft).
4. Attach the convertible top lid seal.


 Attach the outer waist seal to the body.
6. Attach the convertible top hinge cover tension strap.

 Attach to the convertible top mechanism.
7. Close the convertible top.

9. Install the safety belt stalk.
10. Install the rear safety belt stalk trim panel.


Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel 2-Door
Removal
1. Remove the battery cover.
 Remove the 4 retainers.
3. Remove the tool kit tray.

4. Remove the spare wheel and tire.

6. Remove the loadspace trim panel.
Installation
1. Install the loadspace trim panel.

3. Install the spare wheel and tire.

 Install the retaining bolt.
4. Install the tool kit tray.

6. Install the battery cover.
 Install the 4 retainers.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel Convertible
Removal
1. Remove the battery cover.
 Remove the 4 retainers.

4. Remove the luggage compartment retractable cover.
5. Remove the luggage compartment retractable
cover track.
 Release the fabric cover.
6. Remove the loadspace trim panel.

Installation
1. Install the loadspace trim panel.
2. Install the luggage compartment retractable cover track.

 Secure the fabric cover.


5. Install the battery cover.
 Install the 4 retainers.
6. Install the luggage compartment retractable cover.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Luggage Compartment Lid Trim
Panel
Removal
1. Remove the warning triangle.
2. Remove the warning triangle retaining bracket.

3. Remove the luggage compartment lid latch handle.

 Remove the locking pin.

Remove the luggage compartment lid grab handle.

Installation
1. Install the luggage compartment lid grab handle.

3. Install the luggage compartment lid latch handle.

 Install the pin.
4. Install the warning triangle retaining bracket.

5. Install the warning triangle.

Exterior Trim and Ornamentation -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
A-post outer finisher (convertible) - screw 2 - 18
Luggage compartment lid finisher - screw 1.5 - 13
Sill applique to body - screw 4 3 35
Spoiler to luggage compartment lid - nut 5 4 44
Spoiler to luggage compartment lid - screw 5 4 44
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Fender Moulding
Removal
1.
2. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding paintwork

to avoid damage.

to avoid damage.
to avoid damage.

avoid damage.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the

Installation

Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Spoiler
Removal
1. Remove the high mounted stoplamp.
For additional information, refer to: High Mounted Stoplamp
(417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
2. Release the rear spoiler.

Installation
1. Install the rear spoiler.
 Fit and tighten the Torx screws.
2. Install the high mounted stoplamp.

For additional information, refer to: High Mounted Stoplamp
(417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Rocker Panel Moulding
Removal


2. Remove the front scuff plate trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Installation).
3. Release the rocker panel moulding lower edge.
4. CAUTIONS:
Always protect paintwork and glass when

removing exterior components.
Removal of the clips is a delicate procedure,

damage will occur if any force is used.
NOTE: When removing the seal, some clips may

remain attached to the component. These clips can
be recovered and returned to their original fitted
positions.
Release the rocker panel door seal lower for

access.
5. CAUTION: Protect the paintwork during this

operation.
NOTE: Apply a sharp horizontal force to release the

clips.
Remove the rocker panel moulding.

 Release the front and rear clips.
Installation
1. Install the rocker panel moulding.
 Align and secure the front and rear rocker panel clips.
2. Install the aperture seal.

3. Secure the rocker panel lower edge.

4. Install the front scuff plate trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Installation).
Rear View Mirrors -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Exterior mirror - bolt 8 6 71
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors
COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) shown, LHD (left-hand drive) mirror image.

1 - Interior mirror
2 - Driver's door mirror
4 - Door mirror switches
6 - Passenger door mirror
INTRODUCTION
Movement of the door mirrors is controlled from a switch pack located on the drivers door. The switch pack contains 2 non-
latching mirror select buttons labelled 'L' and 'R' and a 4-way mirror movement switch. Door mirror movement commands
are transmitted to the driver's door module over the LIN (local interconnect network) bus. The drivers door module transmits
any mirror movement commands to the passenger door module over the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Movement of the door mirrors is carried out by the respective door module. The door modules provide supply and ground
paths to the mirror motors and monitor mirror position via potentiometers located in the mirror housings.
An electrochromic interior mirror is mounted on the windshield and contains a forward and a rearward facing light sensor.
The light sensors control the auto dimming feature of the interior mirror to reduce glare from the headlights of following
vehicles.
When auto-dimming of the interior mirror is required, a supply is provided by the interior mirror to both door mirrors to
initiate the door mirror auto-dimming sequence.
Some vehicles may be fitted with an interior mirror featuring an electronic compass with LED (light emitting diode) display.
The compass is a self contained unit and does not interface with any other vehicle system or electronic control module.
Details of how to set and calibrate the compass can be found in the 'Mirrors' section of the Owner's Handbook.
Up to 2009 Model Year (MY), some vehicles have door mirrors with an electric foldback feature. From 2009 MY, the mirror
foldback feature is a standard fit in all markets. Where fitted, mirror foldback can be operated manually or automatically.
Manual operation of mirror foldback is initiated with the vehicle stationary or moving at 20 km/h (12 mph) or less, by
pressing then releasing the L and R mirror select buttons at the same time. The first press of the mirror select buttons
causes the two door mirrors to turn inwards to the folded position and stop. A further press of the mirror select buttons
causes the door mirrors to turn outwards to the unfolded position and stop. If the mirror select buttons are pressed while the
door mirrors are moving, they stop and reverse direction until they reach their original position. If one of the door mirrors
has been manually folded, the two door mirrors can be re-synchronized by an inward and outward operating cycle.
Automatic mirror foldback is selected and deselected on the vehicle settings menu of the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
Automatic operation is synchronised with the exterior locking and unlocking of the vehicle (it does not work with interior
locking and drive away locking). If automatic operation is selected, the door mirrors fold when the vehicle is locked and
unfold when unlocked. However, the door mirrors will not unfold automatically if they have been folded manually, even
though automatic mode is selected on the TSD.
Automatic Mirror Foldback Selection on TSD
A thermal cut-out feature is incorporated to protect the mirror foldback motors. Thermal cut-out only occurs with the door
mirrors in the unfolded position, and resets after 5 minutes.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus

1 - Battery
2 - Megafuse (175A)
4 - Door mirror switches
6 - Driver's door mirror
-
7 Passenger door mirror
8 - Interior mirror
10 - Mega fuse
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors
For a detailed description of the rear view mirrors, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Rear View Mirrors (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
 Exterior mirror(s)  Fuse(s)
 Relay
 Switch
4. If the cause is not visually evident, Check DDM/PDM for rear view mirror related DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index.
DTC Index

B116311 Left Mirror Heater  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground to ground
B116315 Left Mirror Heater  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
power to power or open circuit
B116411 Right Mirror Heater  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Output short to test right mirror heater output circuit for short
ground to ground
B116415 Right Mirror Heater  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Output short to test right mirror heater output circuit for short
power to power or open circuit
B1A9411 Driver Mirror  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
to ground
B1A9415 Driver Mirror  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
B1A9511 Passenger Mirror  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground
B1A9515 Passenger Mirror  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
B1A9883 LIN Bus Circuit #1  Value of signal protection Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
calculation incorrect test LIN circuit between driver switch pack
switch pack.
Installation).
B1A9886 LIN Bus Circuit #1  Signal Invalid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
switch pack.
Installation).
B1A9887 LIN Bus Circuit #1  Missing Message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
switch pack.
Installation).
short to ground
short to ground
B1C1111 Passenger Left/Right  Short to ground Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
diagnostic system
B1C1115 Passenger Left/Right  Short to power or open circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
diagnostic system
B1C1211 Passenger Up/Down  Short to ground Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
diagnostic system
B1C1215 Passenger Up/Down  Short to power or open circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
diagnostic system
Mirror Motor test driver up/down mirror motor feedback
Feedback Circuit circuit for short to ground
Mirror Motor test driver up/down mirror motor feedback
Feedback Circuit circuit for short to power or open circuit
Mirror Motor test driver left/right mirror motor feedback
Feedback Circuit circuit for short to ground
Mirror Motor test driver left/right mirror motor feedback
Feedback Circuit circuit for short to power or open circuit
B1C1511 Passenger Up/Down  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror Motor test passenger up/down mirror motor
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit for short to ground
B1C1515 Passenger Up/Down  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror Motor test passenger up/down mirror motor
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit for short to power or open
circuit
B1C1611 Passenger Left/Right  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror Motor test passenger left/right mirror motor
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit for short to ground
B1C1615 Passenger Left/Right  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Mirror Motor test passenger left/right mirror motor
Feedback Circuit feedback circuit for short to power or open
circuit
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
With Driver Seat this DTC using the manufacturer approved
Installation).
Index
Index
U300362 Battery voltage  Mis-match of battery voltage, of 2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
volts or lower, between DDM/PDM this DTC using the manufacturer approved
and RJB diagnostic system
Rear View Mirrors - Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror
Removal
1. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the clips.
Protect the surrounding trim to avoid

damage.
2.
3.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is

secured in the retainer.
NOTE: To install the rear view mirror, place in the

4 or 8 o'clock position and rotate to the 6 o'clock
position to lock.
2.
3. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the clips.
Protect the surrounding trim to avoid

damage.
Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror
Removal
2. Remove the exterior mirror.
Installation
1. Install the exterior mirror.
 Secure the wiring harness in the clips.

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Cover
Removal
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Glass
Removal
1.
2.
Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Motor
Removal
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
3.
Installation

Seating -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Front seat track to vehicle floor - bolt* 48 35 -
Rear seat support bracket - nut/screw 9 7 80
NOTE: *New nut/bolt must be installed.
www.JagDocs.com
Seating - Seats
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Rear seat removable center panel
3 - Performance front seat
4 - Sport and luxury front seat
INTRODUCTION
There are three variants of front seat, depending on market and vehicle specification: 10-way sport, 16-way luxury and 16-
way performance. Sport and luxury seats have the same general appearance, but differ in the features they incorporate;
performance seats have a unique appearance. The front seats are equipped with the following:
 Seat control switches (door mounted)

 Cushion front tilt adjustment
 Seat height adjustment
 Backrest adjustment
 Adjustable, active head restraints (sport and luxury variants only)
 Lumbar adjustment
 Fore and aft adjustment
 Extendable cushion (luxury and performance variants only)
 Adjustable side bolsters (luxury and performance variants only)
 Seat heating (sport and performance variants only)
 Seat heating and cooling (luxury variant only)
 Side air bag module
 Seat control module
WARNING: Prior to removal of the front seats, and before disconnecting the front seat wiring harness electrical
connectors (which includes the side air bag module electrical connectors), the battery ground cable must be disconnected
and a period of at least 1 minute allowed to elapse. The same amount of care should be taken when handling and storing the
seats as would be taken when handling and storing air bag modules.
For additional information, refer to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General
The driver and passenger front seats, although almost identical, have some unique components. The front driver seat has a
seat position sensor and the front passenger seat has an occupancy sensing system. In both instances the components form
an integral part of the air bag SRS (supplemental restraint system).
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
The rear seat backrests are conventionally trimmed over a wire frame with a removable center panel allowing access to the
AJB (auxiliary junction box).
FRONT SEAT CONTROL SWITCHES
10-way Adjustment

1 - Backrest adjustment
2 - Stored memory position button 3
5 - Seat position memory store button
6 - Lumbar adjustment, 2-way
7 - Fore and aft adjustment, cushion tilt and seat height adjustment
16-way Adjustment

1 - Backrest adjustment
5 - Seat position memory store button
6 - Seat cushion extension adjustment
7 - Lumbar adjustment, 4-way
8 - Fore and aft adjustment, cushion tilt and seat height adjustment
9 - Bolster adjustment
The front seat control and memory switches are installed in the driver and passenger door casings.
FRONT SEAT CONTROL COMPONENTS
NOTE: Luxury seats shown.

A - Passenger seat
B - Driver seat
1 - Height adjustment motor
2 - Fore and aft adjustment motor
3 - Cushion tilt motor
4 - Seat control module
5 - Cushion extension motor
6 - Bolster solenoids
7 - Lumbar solenoids
8 - Air pump
9 - Backrest adjustment motor
Seat position is monitored by the related seat module using inputs from Hall sensors in the seat adjustment motors. This
prevents the seat from being adjusted to a position that will contact the surrounding interior trim or a rear seat passenger
causing injury (clash avoidance).
Seat memory is standard on both drivers and passenger seats. Each seat memory can be configured for three positions,
which are set using the seat memory switches and stored in the individual seat module.
Selections on the seat adjustment and memory switches are transmitted on a LIN (local interconnect network) bus to the
related seat control module.
NOTE: In the event of a control module failure a fly lead behind the seat valance can be used to connect a power source
directly to the seat slide motor. This enables the seat to be moved to gain access to the front and rear seat fixings. The seat
can then be removed from the vehicle in order to access the control module.

1 - Fly lead
FRONT SEAT HEATING

1 - Seat backrest heater
2 - Seat cushion heater
Seat heating is provided by two heater mats in each seat, one in the seat cushion and one in the seat backrest. Operation of
the heater mats is controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module.
The heater mats in each seat contain three heater elements, two in the cushion heater mat and one in the backrest heater
mat, which are wired in series. The ATC module monitors seat temperature using a temperature sensor in the seat cushion
heater mat.
FRONT SEAT HEATING AND COOLING

1 - Climate seat control module
2 - Air inlet cover for blower of backrest climate module
3 - Backrest climate module
4 - Blower
5 - Duct
6 - Peltier cells
7 - Backrest liner
8 - Cushion liner
9 - Cushion climate module
10 - Blower
11 - Duct
12 - Peltier cells
Seat heating and cooling is provided by climate modules in the cushion and the backrest of the seat. Operation of the climate
modules in both front seats is controlled by a climate seat control module attached to the front of the instrument panel
cross-car beam, on the driver side.
The climate modules contain Peltier cells, which heat up or cool down depending on the voltage provided by the climate seat
control module. Each climate module also contains a blower, controlled by the climate seat control module, which blows air
over the Peltier cell and into a liner in the related cushion or backrest. The heated or cooled air then flows out of holes in the
liner, and through the seat pad and seat cover.
The climate seat control module uses temperature sensors in the backrest and the cushion climate modules to regulate the
seat temperature.
ACTIVE FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS

1 - Head restraint support
2 - Fabric tape
3 - Head restraint movement during rear end collision
4 - Occupant movement during rear end collision
Sport and luxury front seats are fitted with mechanical active head restraints that reduce injuries to the spinal column and
possible whiplash in the event of a rear collision. The 2 supports of the head restraints inside the seat backrest are joined
together with fabric tape. As the seat occupant’s back and body weight presses against the fabric tape the head restraint
moves upwards and forwards mechanically by means of a pivot point. The movement of the headrest cushions the
occupant’s head, altering the posture and reducing the relative motion between the body and the head. The head restraint
then returns to its original position using a spring return mechanism.
FRONT SEAT BACK TILT

A - Sport and luxury seats
B - Performance seats
1 - Safety belt guide
2 - Release lever
3 - Recliner assembly
4 - Release cable
The front seats tilt forward to allow access to the rear seats. To tilt the seat forward, remove the safety belt from the belt
guide. Lift the lever and push the seat back forwards. The seat back will latch when returned to the normal position. Ensure
that the safety belt is returned to the belt guide.
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL CONFIRMATIONS
A single chime audible confirmation is generated by the instrument cluster to provide confirmation to the driver that the
memory store operation has been successfully completed.
In addition to audible confirmation there is also a visual confirmation via the instrument cluster message center.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination (413-00 Instrument Cluster and Panel
Illumination, Description and Operation).
STEERING COLUMN ADJUST

1 - Rotary joystick control switch
The instrument cluster controls the electric adjustable steering column in a rake (up and down) and reach (in and out). The
steering column can be adjusted for rake and reach by operating the rotary joystick control switch on the LH side of the
steering column.
Easy Entry Exit
The 'Easy Entry Exit' mode provides automatic movement of the steering column to allow easier entry to or exit from the
vehicle.
This mode is selected by setting the steering column adjustment switch to the 'AUTO' position.
If the 'Easy Entry Exit' feature fails to function, it can be activated as follows:
 Rotate the steering column adjust switch to the 'AUTO' position

 The instrument cluster will now display 'Column Adjust Auto' in the message center
For more information refer to the owners' handbook.
Steering Column Control
Adjustment of the steering column is achieved by a single Direct Current (DC) motor. Each adjustment movement is
transmitted through a solenoid actuated clutch; 1 clutch for reach movement and 1 for rake movement.
When engaged, a clutch can be released only if the system is unstressed. As the clutches are mounted on the same motor
spindle, the sequence for position adjustment is as follows:
 Engage the selected clutch by powering the appropriate solenoid

 After a time period (approximately 0.1 of a second), the motor is powered in the desired direction. When the motor
reaches the stop position, the solenoid and motor is released/unpowered. The clutch remains engaged under stress
 At the start of the next adjustment the motor is powered in the opposite direction to enable the clutch to disengage
when the stress is released.
Simultaneous rake and reach movements are not possible since the motor must reverse direction as soon as the first axis
has reached its required position.
Steering column rake and reach is controlled via potentiometer feedback.

SEAT CONTROL MODULE
The seat control modules, located under the driver and front passenger seats, rely upon a number of inputs to control
various outputs. As with all electronic control modules, the unit needs information regarding the current operating conditions
of the engine and other related systems before it can make calculations, which determine the appropriate outputs.
CONTROL DIAGRAMS
Adjustment 10-way Seats
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus.

1 - Battery
4 - Recline adjustment motor
5 - Fore/Aft adjustment motor
-
6 Height adjustment motor
7 - Cushion tilt adjustment motor
8 - Air pump
13 - Seat adjustment/memory switchpack
Adjustment 16-way Seats
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus.

1 - Battery
3 - CJB
4 - Recline adjustment motor
-
5 Fore/Aft adjustment motor
6 - Height adjustment motor
7 - Cushion tilt motor
8 - Cushion extension motor
9 - Air pump
12 - Lumbar solenoids
13 - Backrest bolster solenoids
16 - Seat adjustment/memory switchpack
Seat Heating
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = MOST ring.

1 - Battery
3 - CJB
4 - Cushion heater mat
5 - Backrest heater mat
6 - ATC module
Seat Heating and Cooling
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = MOST ring.

1 - Battery
3 - CJB
4 - Cushion Peltier cells
5 - Climate seat control module
6 - Cushion blower
7 - Backrest Peltier cells
8 - Backrest blower
10 - TSD
Drivers Memory Seat
The seat control module can store up to 3 different driver seating, mirror and steering column positions. The numbered
memory and single memory store switches control memory storage and recall operations. Each switch is a momentary action
push switch.
The seat control module broadcasts memory switch selections on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus, for
storage and recall of the door mirror and steering column positions by the door modules and instrument cluster respectively.
Memory Store
Driver's Seat
Once the driver's seat, steering column and exterior mirrors have been adjusted, the vehicle is able to memorize these
settings for future use by using the following procedure:
 Push the memory button M, the red Light Emitting Diode (LED) will illuminate for five seconds
 Whilst the LED is illuminated, press button 1, 2 or 3 to memorize the current settings
The LED will extinguish, and a chime will sound to confirm that the settings have been memorized. If the ignition is ON, the
message center will display a confirmation message.
Passenger Seat
The procedure to memorize a passenger seat position is the same as that for the driver seat with two exceptions. There will
be no chime or message to confirm the settings.
Memory Recall
Memory recall has 3 memory positions stored for the seats, steering column and exterior mirrors. The switches for this
function are located on driver and passenger door side trim panel. Pressing the appropriate numbered memory switch allows
the seat to start moving to the position appropriate to that memory. When the switch is released the system will operate in
manual mode. This means that when the switch is released, the seat will stop moving. In order to reach the intended
memory position, the switch must not be released until all movement has stopped.
When a memory recall is initiated, to limit the overall current consumption, only 2-seat axis will move towards their intended
position at any one time.
Both mirrors move simultaneously about the vertical axis first (left/right), and then, once all vertical axis movements are
complete, about the horizontal axis (up/down). To minimize the number of mirror drives required, a method of sharing is
implemented, which dictates that all movement about 1 axis is complete before movement about the other axis commences.
Immediate Adjustment
Pressing one of the manual adjustment switches will initiate the corresponding motor for that axis until the switch is
released.
Only 2 seat motors can be driven at any one time.
Stall Detection
Seat, steering column and mirror motors are deemed to have stalled if there is no change in the inputs that are received
from the corresponding feedback sensors for 200 ms (seat).
If a stall condition is detected then the drive to that axis is cancelled for the remainder of that memory operation (memory
recall) or until the switch is re-selected (manual movement).
If the motor movement has stopped due to loss of sensor feedback, either stall or sensor failure, then that axis may be
activated again, to move past the stall position, by re-selecting the appropriate switch and pressing for longer than 2
seconds. This allows control of the motor to be maintained if sensor feedback is lost.
Upon re-selection of movement, if sensor pulses are detected then the motor will continue to be driven until the switch is
released or another stall condition is detected. If sensor feedback is not detected then the motor is only driven for 0.5
second and then stops until the switch is released and then pressed again, when a further 0.5 second of activation is
permitted, and so on, this is known as inch mode.
For all seat motor manual movements, whenever a motor is driven and a stall occurs, the seat control module records the
position at which the stall occurred. If movement occurs beyond a stall position, then that position is erased from the control
modules memory. This will always allow movement past a previously recorded stall position once movement has been
registered beyond that position. This is the case for both manual and memory movement.
Initialization
When a replacement seat control module is fitted to a seat it should be calibrated using Jaguar approved diagnostic
equipment so that the control module can learn the seats absolute position.
Battery Monitor
If the battery voltage drops below 10.5 Volts, then the seat control module ignores all requests for a memory recall until the
battery voltage has reached 11.5 Volts. This will conserve as much power in the vehicle battery as possible to enable engine
cranking.
Stand-by Mode
The seat control module supports a stand-by mode to keep power consumption to a minimum.
If the control module is being prevented from entering stand-by mode due to motor movement, memory recall or switch
operation, then it will enter stand-by mode when the current function has terminated.
NOTE: In the case of a memory recall, all memory recall operations should be carried out before entering stand-by mode,
not just the current motor movement.
The control module will exit stand-by mode if there is any CAN bus activity.
The exchange of information between the diagnostic unit and the seat control module is via the medium-speed CAN bus.
There is a non-volatile Electronic Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) for saving detected errors. Its
contents are not lost when the power supply is disconnected. Only Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment can erase the error
memory.
Seat Heating
Seat heating selections on the TSD are transmitted on the MOST (media orientated system transport) ring to the information
and entertainment module, which relays the selections to the ATC module on the medium speed CAN bus. The ATC module
then sends a message, on the medium speed CAN bus, to the CJB (central junction box), which provides a feed to the seat
heater elements.
Seat Heating and Cooling
Seat heating and cooling for the front seats is selected on the climate menu of the TSD. Three levels of heating and three
levels of cooling are available. Heating and cooling can also be selected for either the cushion and the backrest, or just the
backrest.
Heating and cooling selections on the TSD are transmitted on a MOST ring to the information and entertainment module,
which relays the selections to the climate seat control module on the medium speed CAN bus. The climate seat control
module then energizes the Peltier cell and the blower of the climate module(s) in the appropriate seat. If full seat
heating/cooling is selected, both the backrest and the cushion climate modules are activated. If partial seat heating/cooling
is selected, only the backrest climate module is activated.
Seating - Seats
For a detailed description of the seats and seat operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
NOTE: Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, ensure the vehicle battery is in a good serviceable condition, refer to the
battery care manual.
Visual Inspection
 Security, condition and correct installation of seat  Fuses/Relays
components and fixings  Damaged, Loose or Corroded Electrical
Connector(s)
 Damage to Wiring Loom/Incorrect Location,
Stretched or Taught
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the concern and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
Symptom Chart

No seat movement from switch-pack (including no  Seat module has Set ignition ON. Re-check seat
memory recall) gone into sleep mode function from switch-pack. Check
 Seat switch-pack for DTC B1A9887 and refer to DTC
LIN, power or ground Index. Check for DTC B1A9888 and
circuit - open circuit refer to DTC Index
 Seat switch-pack LIN
circuit - short to
power, ground
Seat movement from switch-pack occurs in inch  Motor Hall sensor on Check for DTCs, B1B8731,
mode (after 2 second delay from switch operation) - affected axis is not B1B9131, B1B8931, B1B9331,
When seat axis movement is requested from the seat connected or not B106331 and refer to DTC Index.
switch-pack the requested seat axis moves a short receiving expected Re-calibrate affected seat
distance (after a 2 second delay from switch signals
operation) then stops. This behaviour could occur on
any seat axis (slide, height, squab, tilt or cushion)
Seat movement from switch-pack occurs in inch  MS CAN fault Check Instrument Cluster and
mode - When seat axis movement is requested from DDM/PDM for DTCs, U020800,
the seat switch-pack the requested seat axis moves U012600, U015500, U019900,
a short distance then stops. This behaviour will occur U014200 and refer to relevant DTC
on ALL seat axis (slide, height, squab, tilt and Index. Check CAN network integrity
cushion) using manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Re-calibrate
affected seat
Seat moves forward/rearwards via the slide axis  Seat module is in Re-configure the affected seat
when the seat squab is tipped forwards/rearwards manufacturing mode module as a 'New Module' using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
When seat squab axis is moved to its maximum  Seat is out of Re-calibrate the affected seat.
recline position the squab makes contact with the calibration Check for DTC U300146 and refer
rear quarter casing causing the squab to twist and to DTC Index
bend
Front seat fore/aft movement not functioning  Carry out the GO to Pinpoint Test A.
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat excessive fore/aft free play  Carry out the GO to Pinpoint Test B.
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat fore/aft movement noisy  Carry out the GO to Pinpoint Test C.
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat height, tilt and/or seat extension motor  Carry out the GO to Pinpoint Test D.
movement not functioning pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Front seat height, tilt and/or extension movement  Carry out the GO to Pinpoint Test E.
noisy pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Heating And Cooling - Inoperative  Carry out the GO to Pinpoint Test F.
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Heating And Cooling - Noisy Operation  Carry out the GO to Pinpoint Test G.
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Heating And Cooling - Poor Heat Or Cool Efficiency  Carry out the GO to Pinpoint Test H.
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Heating And Cooling - Heat Or Cool Operation Slow  Carry out the GO to Pinpoint Test I.
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Heating And Cooling - Intermittent Operation  Carry out the GO to Pinpoint Test J.
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
DTC Index
Driver/Passenger Seat Module

B105D- Seat Bolster Inflate  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Output - circuit short to check, Seat Bolster Inflate Output for circuit
B105D- Seat Bolster Inflate  Circuit short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Output - circuit short to circuit check, Seat Bolster Inflate Output for circuit
battery or open short to power or open circuit
B105E- Seat Bolster Deflate  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Output - circuit short to check, Seat Bolster Deflate Output for circuit
B105E- Seat Bolster Deflate  Circuit short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Output - circuit short to circuit check, Seat Bolster Deflate Output circuit for
B105F- Seat Cushion Extension  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Motor Output - circuit check, Seat Cushion Extension Motor Output for
short to ground circuit short to ground
B105F- Seat Cushion Extension  Circuit short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Motor Output - circuit circuit check, Seat Cushion Extension Motor Output for
short to battery or circuit short to power or open circuit
open
B1060- Seat Headrest Motor  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Output - circuit short to check, Seat Headrest Motor Output for circuit
B1060- Seat Headrest Motor  Circuit short to power or open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Output - circuit short to circuit check, Seat Headrest Motor Output for circuit
B1063- Seat Cushion Extension  Seat Cushion Extension Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
31 Motor Sensor - no Position Sensor, faulty or check, Seat Cushion Extension Motor Position
signal circuit open Sensor circuit for open circuit, if circuit is correct
suspect faulty component, refer to the new
of the DTC Index
B1064- Seat Headrest Motor  Seat Recline Motor Speed /  Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
31 Sensor - no signal Position Sensor2, faulty or and check, Seat Recline Motor Position
circuit open Sensor2 circuit for open circuit, if circuit
is correct suspect faulty component,
Index
B1065- Cushion Extend Switch  Cushion Extend Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 - signal stuck high or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Cushion Extend
Switch for fault or circuit short to power
B1066- Cushion Retract Switch  Cushion Retract Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 - signal stuck high or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Cushion Retract
B1067- Lumbar In Switch -  Lumbar In Switch, faulty or Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Lumbar In Switch
for fault or circuit short to power
B1068- Lumbar Out Switch -  Lumbar Out Switch, faulty or Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Lumbar Out Switch
B1069- Lumbar Up Switch -  Lumbar Up Switch, faulty or Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Lumbar Up Switch
B106A- Lumbar Down Switch -  Lumbar Down Switch, faulty or Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Lumbar Down
B106B- Bolster Inflate Switch -  Bolster Inflate Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Bolster Inflate
B106C- Bolster Deflate Switch -  Bolster Deflate Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Bolster Deflate
B106D- Headrest Up Switch -  Headrest Up Switch, faulty or Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Headrest Up Switch
B106E- Headrest Down Switch  Headrest Down Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 - signal stuck high or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Headrest Down
B1136- Lumbar control A -  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 circuit short to ground check, Lumbar control A circuit for circuit short
to ground
B1136- Lumbar control A -  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 circuit short to battery check, Lumbar control A circuit for circuit short
to power
B1136- Lumbar control A -  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
13 circuit open check, Lumbar control A circuit for open circuit
B1137- Lumbar control B -  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 circuit short to ground check, Lumbar control B circuit for circuit short
to ground
B1137- Lumbar control B -  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 circuit short to battery check, Lumbar control B circuit for circuit short
to power
B1137- Lumbar control B -  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
13 circuit open check, Lumbar control B circuit for open circuit
B1138- Lumbar control C -  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 circuit short to ground check, Lumbar control C circuit for circuit short
to ground
B1138- Lumbar control C -  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 circuit short to battery check, Lumbar control C circuit for circuit short
to power
B1138- Lumbar control C -  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
13 circuit open check, Lumbar control C circuit for open circuit
B1139- Lumbar control D -  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 circuit short to ground check, Lumbar control D circuit for circuit short
to ground
B1139- Lumbar control D -  Circuit short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
12 circuit short to battery check, Lumbar control D circuit for circuit short
to power
B1139- Lumbar control D -  Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
13 circuit open check, Lumbar control D circuit for open circuit
B113A- General failure on seat  At least one lumbar failure has If this DTC is logged carry out an on demand
00 lumbar - no sub type been detected during manual self test(ODST). Refer to logged DTC's after an
information operation ODST and check for B1136, B1137, BB138,
B1139 & B113B
B113B- Lumbar Control  Multiple lumbar failures are Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
00 Multiple Failures - no present, the low level details check all Lumbar Control circuit A, B, C & D for
sub type information of the fault condition are fault
unable to be determined
B1A98- LIN Bus Circuit A -  LIN bus checksum error Check LIN network for interference/EMC related
83 value of signal issues
incorrect
B1A98- LIN Bus Circuit A -  LIN bus Bit error / Parity Check LIN network for interference/EMC related
86 signal invalid Error /Sync Error issues
B1A98- LIN Bus Circuit A -  Slave not responding or LIN Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN
87 missing message bus short circuit to ground or Bus between seat switch-pack and control
to battery module for open circuit, short to power or
ground. Check power and ground supplies to
switch-pack
B1B86- Seat Height Motor  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Relay - circuit short to check, Seat Height Motor Relay circuit for short
ground to ground
B1B86- Seat Height Motor  Circuit short to power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Relay - circuit short to circuit open check, Seat Height Motor Relay circuit for power
battery or open or circuit open
B1B87- Seat Height Motor  Seat Height Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
31 Speed/Position Sensor Speed/Position Sensor, faulty check, Seat Height Motor Speed/Position Sensor
- no signal or circuit open circuit for open circuit, if circuit is correct
of the DTC Index
B1B88- Seat Slide Motor Relay  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 - circuit short to check, Seat Slide Motor Relay circuit for short to
ground ground
B1B88- Seat Slide Motor Relay  Circuit short to ground short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 - circuit short to to power or circuit open check, Seat Slide Motor Relay circuit for short to
battery or open power or open circuit
B1B89- Seat Slide Motor  Seat Slide Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
31 Speed/Position Sensor Speed/Position Sensor, faulty check, Seat Slide Motor Speed/Position Sensor
- no signal or circuit open circuit for open circuit, if circuit is correct
of the DTC Index
B1B90- Seat Tilt Motor Relay -  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 circuit short to ground check, Seat Tilt Motor Relay circuit for short to
ground
B1B90- Seat Tilt Motor Relay -  Circuit short to ground short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 circuit short to battery to power or circuit open check, Seat Tilt Motor Relay circuit for short to
or open power or open circuit
B1B91- Seat Tilt Motor  Seat Tilt Motor Speed/Position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
31 Speed/Position Sensor Sensor, faulty or circuit open check, Seat Tilt Motor Speed/Position Sensor
- no signal circuit for open circuit, if circuit is correct
of the DTC Index
B1B92- Seat Recline Motor  Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
11 Relay - circuit short to check, Seat Recline Motor Relay circuit for short
ground to ground
B1B92- Seat Recline Motor  Circuit short to ground short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
15 Relay - circuit short to to power or circuit open check, Seat Recline Motor Relay circuit for short
battery or open to power or open circuit
B1B93- Seat Recline Motor  Seat Recline Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
31 Speed/Position Sensor Speed/Position Sensor, faulty check, Seat Recline Motor Speed/Position
- no signal or circuit open Sensor circuit for open circuit, if circuit is correct
of the DTC Index
B1B94- Seat Height Up Switch  Seat Height Up Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 - signal stuck high or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Height Up
B1B95- Seat Height Down  Seat Height Down Switch, Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 Switch - signal stuck faulty or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Height Down
high Switch for fault or circuit short to power
B1B96- Seat Slide Forward  Seat Slide Forward Switch, Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 Switch - signal stuck faulty or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Slide Forward
B1B97- Seat Slide Backward  Seat Slide Backward Switch, Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 Switch - signal stuck faulty or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Slide Backward
B1B98- Seat Tilt Up Switch -  Seat Tilt Up Switch, faulty or Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Tilt Up Switch
B1B99- Seat Tilt Down Switch -  Seat Tilt Down Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Tilt Down
B1C00- Seat Recline Up Switch  Seat Recline Up Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 - signal stuck high or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Recline Up
B1C01- Seat Recline Down  Seat Recline Down Switch, Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 Switch - signal stuck faulty or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Recline Down
B1C02- Memory Store Switch -  Memory Store Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Memory Store
B1C03- Memory #1 Switch -  Memory #1 Switch, faulty or Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
24 signal stuck high circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Memory #1 Switch
U0010- Medium Speed CAN  CAN Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
88 Communication Bus - check Can Bus circuit for circuit fault, if circuit is
bus off correct suspect faulty module, refer to the new
Index
U0140- Lost Communication  Lost Communication With Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs.
00 With Body Control Central Junction Box (CAN Bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Module - no sub type circuit fault) check Can Bus circuit to Body Control Module
information for circuit fault
U0142- Lost Communication  Lost Communication With Check Auxiliary Junction Box for stored DTCs.
00 With Body Control Auxiliary Junction Box (CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Module "B" - no sub Bus circuit fault) check Can Bus circuit to Body Control Module B
type information for circuit fault
U0155- Lost Communication  Lost Communication With Check Instrument Panel Cluster for stored DTCs.
00 With Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Cluster (IPC) Control Control Module check Can Bus circuit to Instrument Panel
Module - no sub type Cluster for circuit fault
information
U0199- Lost Communication  Lost Communication With Check Door Control Module A for stored DTCs.
00 With "Door Control Door Control Module A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Module A" - no sub check Can Bus circuit to Door Control Module A
type information for circuit fault
U0300- Internal Control Module  CAN master configuration ID Re-configure the Seat Control Module using the
00 Software incorrect manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
Incompatibility - no sub DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged suspect
type information Seat Control Module, refer to new module
installation note at top of DTC Index
U1A14- CAN Initialization  Module internal electronic Suspect Seat Control Module, refer to new
49 Failure - internal failure module installation note at top of DTC Index
electronic failure
U1A4C- Build / End of Line  Manufacturing mode has not Place seat module in to customer mode using
00 mode Active - no sub been removed manufacturer approved diagnostic system
type information
U3000- Control Module -  Module internal electronic Suspect Seat control module, refer to new
49 internal electronic failure module installation note at top of DTC Index
failure
U3001- Control Module  Calibration/parameter memory Check for DTCs that could indicate power failure
46 Improper Shutdown - failure to the module and refer to the DTC Index
calibration / parameter
memory failure
U3002- Vehicle Identification  Vehicle/component mis- Install original module, check for DTCs and refer
81 Number - invalid serial match. Corrupt VIN data being to relevant DTC Index
data received transmitted, module
vehicle
U3003- Battery Voltage - circuit  Circuit voltage below threshold Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
16 voltage below threshold check power and ground circuit for fault
U3003- Battery Voltage - circuit  Circuit voltage above Check Engine control module for stored DTCs.
17 voltage above threshold Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
threshold check power and ground circuit for fault
Climate Controlled Seat Module
B10B913 Blower Control  Left blower control circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
- open circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
 Left blower motor - open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
circuit blower control circuit for open circuit. Check and install
 Climate controlled seat new left blower motor, climate controlled seat module as
module failure required, refer to the new module/component installation
B10B94B Blower Control  Mechanical restriction Check for mechanical restriction within the left blower
within the left blower motor housing. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
motor housing and check left blower control circuit for short to ground.
 Left blower control circuit Check and install new left blower motor, climate
- short to ground controlled seat module as required, refer to the new
 Left blower motor - short module/component installation note at the top of the
to ground DTC Index
 Climate controlled seat
module failure
B115713 Blower Control "B"  Right blower control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
circuit - open circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
 Right blower motor - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
open circuit blower control circuit for open circuit. Check and install
 Climate controlled seat new right blower motor, climate controlled seat module
module failure as required, refer to the new module/component
B11574B Blower Control "B"  Mechanical restriction Check for mechanical restriction within the right blower
within the right blower motor housing. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
motor housing and check right blower control circuit for short to ground.
 Right blower control Check and install new right blower motor, climate
circuit - short to ground controlled seat module as required, refer to the new
 Right blower motor - module/component installation note at the top of the
short to ground DTC Index
module failure
B120E13 Right Thermal  Right seatback/cushion Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Electric Device thermal electric device using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Control control circuits - open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
circuit seatback/cushion thermal electric device control circuits
 Thermal electric device for open circuit. Check and install new thermal electric
failure device/climate controlled seat module as required, refer
 Climate controlled seat to the new module/component installation note at the
module failure top of the DTC Index
B120E19 Right Thermal  Right seatback/cushion Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Control control circuits - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
ground seatback/cushion thermal electric device control circuits
 Thermal electric device for short to ground. Check and install new thermal
failure electric device/climate controlled seat module as
 Climate controlled seat required, refer to the new module/component installation
module failure note at the top of the DTC Index
B120E4B Right Thermal  Right seatback/cushion Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Control control circuits - short to Check for restriction in thermal electric device duct.
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
 Blocked thermal electric seatback/cushion thermal electric device control circuits
device duct (restriction in for short to ground. Check and install new thermal
airflow) electric device/climate controlled seat module as
 Thermal electric device required, refer to the new module/component installation
module failure
B122413 Left Thermal  Left seatback/cushion Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Control control circuits - open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
circuit seatback/cushion thermal electric device control circuits
 Thermal electric device for open circuit. Check and install new thermal electric
failure device/climate controlled seat module as required, refer
B122419 Left Thermal  Left seatback/cushion Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Control control circuits - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
ground seatback/cushion thermal electric device control circuits
 Thermal electric device for short to ground. Check and install new thermal
failure electric device/climate controlled seat module as
 Climate controlled seat required, refer to the new module/component installation
module failure note at the top of the DTC Index
B12244B Left Thermal  Left seatback/cushion Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Control control circuits - short to Check for restriction in thermal electric device duct.
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
 Blocked thermal electric seatback/cushion thermal electric device control circuits
device duct (restriction in for short to ground. Check and install new thermal
airflow) electric device/climate controlled seat module as
 Thermal electric device required, refer to the new module/component installation
module failure
B122A11 Right Seat  Right seat cushion blower Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Cushion Blower speed sensor circuit - seat cushion blower speed sensor circuit for short to
Speed Sensor short to ground ground. Check and install a new motor/module as
 Internal motor failure required, refer to the new module/component installation
 Climate controlled seat note at the top of the DTC Index
module failure
B122A12 Right Seat  Right seat cushion blower Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Cushion Blower speed sensor circuit - seat cushion blower speed sensor circuit for short to
Speed Sensor short to power power. Check and install a new motor/module as
module failure
B122B11 Right Seat Back  Right seatback blower Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Blower Speed speed sensor circuit - seatback blower speed sensor circuit for short to ground.
Sensor short to ground Check and install a new motor/module as required, refer
 Internal motor failure to the new module/component installation note at the
 Climate controlled seat top of the DTC Index
module failure
B122B12 Right Seat Back  Right seatback blower Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Blower Speed speed sensor circuit - seatback blower speed sensor circuit for short to power.
Sensor short to power Check and install a new motor/module as required, refer
module failure
B122C11 Left Seat Cushion  Left seat cushion blower Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Blower Speed speed sensor circuit - seat cushion blower speed sensor circuit for short to
Sensor short to ground ground. Check and install a new motor/module as
module failure
B122C12 Left Seat Cushion  Left seat cushion blower Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Blower Speed speed sensor circuit - seat cushion blower speed sensor circuit for short to
Sensor short to power power. Check and install a new motor/module as
module failure
B122D11 Left Seat Back  Left seatback blower Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Blower Speed speed sensor circuit - seatback blower speed sensor circuit for short to ground.
Sensor short to ground Check and install a new motor/module as required, refer
module failure
B122D12 Left Seat Back  Left seatback blower Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Blower Speed speed sensor circuit - seatback blower speed sensor circuit for short to power.
Sensor short to power Check and install a new motor/module as required, refer
module failure
B122E13 Right Seat  Right seat cushion Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Cushion temperature sensor seat cushion temperature sensor circuit for open circuit.
circuit - open circuit Check and install a new sensor/module as required, refer
 Temperature sensor to the new module/component installation note at the
module failure
B122E98 Right Seat  Blockage in the right seat Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the right
Cushion cushion thermal electric seat cushion thermal electric device fan exhaust vent
device fan exhaust vent
 Right seat cushion
thermal electric device
fan movement restricted
B122F13 Right Seat Back  Right seatback Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
temperature sensor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
 Temperature sensor seatback temperature sensor circuit for open circuit.
failure Check and install a new sensor/module as required, refer
B122F98 Right Seat Back  Blockage in the right Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the right
seatback thermal electric seatback thermal electric device fan exhaust vent
 Right seatback thermal
electric device fan
movement restricted
B120F13 Left Seat Cushion  Left seat cushion Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
temperature sensor seat cushion temperature sensor circuit for open circuit.
circuit - open circuit Check and install a new sensor/module as required, refer
 Temperature sensor to the new module/component installation note at the
module failure
B120F98 Left Seat Cushion  Blockage in the left seat Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the left seat
cushion thermal electric cushion thermal electric device fan exhaust vent
 Left seat cushion thermal
electric device fan
movement restricted
B123013 Left Seat Back  Left seatback Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
temperature sensor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
B123098 Left Seat Back  Blockage in the left Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the left
seatback thermal electric seatback thermal electric device fan exhaust vent
 Left seatback thermal
electric device fan
movement restricted
B12317A Right Seat  Temperature difference Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the right
between seatback and seatback and cushion thermal electric device fan exhaust
cushion vent
B12327A Left Seat  Temperature difference Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the left
between seatback and seatback and cushion thermal electric device fan exhaust
cushion vent
B122313 Right Seat  Right seat cushion Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Cushion temperature sensor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Temperature circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Sensor  Temperature sensor seat cushion temperature sensor circuit for open circuit.
B122513 Right Seat Back  Right seatback Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Temperature temperature sensor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Sensor circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
B122913 Left Seat Back  Left seatback Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Sensor circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
B123513 Left Seat Cushion  Left seat cushion Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Sensor circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
 Temperature sensor seat cushion temperature sensor circuit for open circuit.
U000188 High Speed CAN  Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Communication using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
network to climate controlled seat module for short,
open circuit
U001088 Medium speed Can  Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
communication using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
network to climate controlled seat module for short,
open circuit
U014000 Lost  Lost communication with Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
communication CJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
with CJB
U014200 Lost  Lost communication with Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
communication RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
with RJB
U015500 Lost  Lost communications Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
communications with instrument cluster using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
with instrument Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
cluster network to climate controlled seat module and
instrument cluster for short, open circuit
U015600 Lost  Lost communications Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Communication with information and using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
With Information entertainment control
Centre "A" module
U030000 Internal control  Invalid configuration Re-configure the climate controlled seat module and the
module software message is received RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
incompatibility Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is still logged
suspect the climate controlled seat module, refer to the
new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U040100 Invalid Data  Poor engine speed Check ECM for speed related DTCs and refer to the
Received From quality factor relevant DTC Index. On software levels previous to
ECM/PCM 8X23-14B663-AE clear the DTC and take no further
action if the system is operating correctly
U210100 Control Module  Calibration Re-configure the climate controlled seat module using
Configuration incomplete/corrupt the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Incompatible
U300004 Control Module  Internal electronic failure Check and install a new climate controlled seat module
as required, refer to the new module/component
U300362 Battery Voltage  Mis-match in battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
voltage, of 2 volts or using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
more, between climate
controlled seat module
and RJB
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : FRONT SEAT FORE/AFT MOVEMENT NOT FUNCTIONING

CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR OPERATION
WARNING: Before work is carried out, make the air bag supplemental restraint system safe. For
additional information, refer to Standard Workshop Practices section of workshop manual.
1 Set ignition status to ' ON'.

2From the switch pack, operate the front seat forward-rearward seat motor switch and listen for
evidence of the motor operating.
Does the motor operate?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.
A2: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR DRIVE BAR
1 Check front seat drive bar for correct installation and condition
Is the front seat drive bar correctly installed and in a serviceable condition?
Yes
Re-check for correct front seat forward-rearward movement. Remove seat to allow for further
investigation if required.
No
Correctly install front seat forward-rearward seat motor drive bar, or replace if required.
A3: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR
WARNING: When carrying out the following steps, stand clear of all moving parts and ensure link harness is
routed accordingly.
1 Set ignition status to 'OFF'.
2 Disconnect front seat forward-rearward seat motor connector.
NOTE: It may be that the seat has been driven to the limit of travel along the relevant axis, and when
the link harness is connected, the seat will remain in the same position. If this is the case, a jolt may
be felt from the motor. To confirm the motor operation, swap the link harness to alternate motor pin
connections and the seat should travel in the opposite direction.
3 Using a locally made fused link harness and power supply, connect power and ground to forward-
rearward seat motor.
Battery positive terminal Battery negative terminal
forward-rearward seat motor pin 1 forward-rearward seat motor pin 2
Yes
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for related Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) and carry out the repair operations specified. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check front seat forward-rearward seat motor circuits.
No
Replace front seat forward-rearward seat motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
PINPOINT TEST B : FRONT SEAT EXCESSIVE FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY

CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FRONT SEAT FOR EXCESSIVE FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY
1 Check all accessible front seat frame fixings are installed and to the correct torque.
Are all accessible front seat frame fixings installed and to the correct torque?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Install and tighten all accessible front seat frame fixings to correct torque and re-check for
excessive free play.
B2: COMPARE THE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY AGAINST A SIMILAR SEAT
1 Compare the front seat forward-rearward free play against a similar seat.
Is the front seat forward-rearward free play excessive when compared to a similar seat?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
The front seat frame is operating correctly. Submit Electronic Product Quality Report (EPQR) with
any further query.
B3: CHECK REMAINING FRONT SEAT FRAME FIXINGS
1 Remove front seat and/or any seat covers/trim to allow access to check remaining front seat
frame fixings are all installed and to the correct torque.
Are all remaining front seat frame fixings installed and to the correct torque?
Yes
Replace front seat frame. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
No
Install and tighten all remaining front seat frame fixings to correct torque and re-check for
excessive free play.
PINPOINT TEST C : FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISY

CONDITIONS
C1: COMPARE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISE TO OTHER FRONT SEAT
1 Compare the front seat forward-rearward movement noise to other front seat.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement noise excessive when compared to other front seat?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
GO to C3.
C2: COMPARE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISE TO FRONT SEAT IN OTHER VEHICLE
1 Compare the front seat forward-rearward movement noise to front seat in other vehicle.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement noise excessive when compared to front seat in other
vehicle?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
any further query.
C3: CHECK FOR DEBRIS OBSTRUCTING SEAT MOVEMENT
1 Check for debris obstructing seat movement.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement obstructed by debris?
Yes
Remove obstruction and re-check for noisy forward-rearward seat movement.
No
GO to C4.
C4: RE-ALIGN FRONT SEAT FRAME
1 Loosen front seat frame fixings.
2 Set ignition status to 'ON'.
3 Using the front seat switch pack drive the front seat fully forward then fully rearward.
4 Tighten front seat frame fixings to the correct torque.
5 Re-check for noisy seat movement.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement still noisy?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
The front seat frame is now operating correctly.
C5: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR DRIVE BAR
1 Check front seat drive bar for correct installation and condition.
Is the front seat drive bar correctly installed and in a serviceable condition?
Yes
Replace front seat forward-rearward seat motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
No
Correctly install front seat forward-rearward seat motor drive bar, or replace if required.
PINPOINT TEST D : FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT AND/OR SEAT EXTENSION MOTOR MOVEMENT
NOT FUNCTIONING
CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOTOR
WARNINGS:
Before work is carried out, make the air bag supplemental restraint system safe. For additional information, refer
to Standard Workshop Practices section of workshop manual.
When carrying out the following steps, stand clear of all moving parts and ensure link harness is routed
accordingly.
1 Set ignition status to ' OFF'.
2 Disconnect front seat height, tilt or extension motor connector.
NOTE: It may be that the seat has been driven to the limit of travel along the relevant axis, and when
the link harness is connected, the seat will remain in the same position. If this is the case, a jolt may
be felt from the motor. To confirm the motor operation, swap the link harness to alternate motor pin
connections and the seat should travel in the opposite direction.
3 Using a locally made fused link harness and power supply, connect power and ground to relevant
motor.
Battery positive terminal Battery negative terminal
motor pin 1 motor pin 2
Yes
www.JagDocs.com
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for related Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) and carry out the repair operations specified. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check relevant motor circuits.
No
Replace the relevant motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
PINPOINT TEST E : FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT AND/OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISY
CONDITIONS
E1: COMPARE THE HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISE WITH THE OTHER FRONT SEAT
1 Compare the front seat movement noise to other front seat.

Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise excessive when compared to other front
seat?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
GO to E3.
E2: COMPARE FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISE TO FRONT SEAT IN OTHER
VEHICLE
1 Compare the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise to front seat in other vehicle.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise excessive when compared to front seat in
other vehicle?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
any further query.
E3: CHECK FOR DEBRIS OBSTRUCTING SEAT MOVEMENT
1 Check for debris obstructing seat movement.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement obstructed by debris?
Yes
Remove obstruction and re-check for noisy height, tilt or extension seat movement. If still noisy
GO to E4.
No
GO to E4.
E4: CHECK FOR HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT MECHANISM LUBRICATION
1 Check and apply manufacturer approved lubrication to seat height, tilt or extension movement
mechanism and re-test for noise.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension noise still apparent?
Yes
Replace the relevant motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
No
The front seat height, tilt or extension motor is operating correctly.
PINPOINT TEST F : HEATER AND COOLING - INOPERATIVE

CONDITIONS
F1: CHECK FOR STORED DTC
1 Check the Climate Controlled Seat Module for stored DTC's.
Are there any stored DTC's?
Yes
For information on stored DTC's refer to the information in the Climate Controlled Seat Module
DTC index.
No
GO to F2.
F2: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
WARNING: Before work is carried out, make the air bag supplemental restraint system safe. For additional
information, refer to Standard Workshop Practices section of workshop manual.
NOTE: The Climate Controlled Seat's (heat and cool) function will only operate when the vehicle's engine is running.
NOTE: If a fault is identified and repaired, check for correct operation of the driver and front-passenger climate
controlled seat (heat and cool) functions.
1 Check the heat and cool function of the backrest.
Does the backrest heat and cool function operate correctly?

Yes
GO to F3.
No
GO to F5.
F3: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
1 Check the heat and cool function at the cushion.
Does the cushion heat and cool function operate correctly?
Yes
If there are no faults evident, verify the customer concern.
No
GO to F4.
F4: CUSHION BELLOWS
1 Check the condition of the bellows.
Are the bellows obstructed, have they collapsed?
Yes
Remove the obstruction or replace collapsed bellows.
No
Suspect an internal fault with the Seat Climate Assembly. Replace as required, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2). Prior to installing a new component.
F5: BACKREST BELLOWS DUCT
1 Check the security of the bellows duct.
Is the bellows duct correctly installed?
Yes
GO to F6.
No
Securely reconnect the bellows duct.
F6: BACKREST BELLOWS
1 Check the security of the bellows.
Yes
No
Follow the link below to check operation of the Driver or Front Passenger Seat Cushion Climate
Assembly.GO to F2.
PINPOINT TEST G : HEATING AND COOLING - NOISY OPERATION

CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK FOR STORED DTC
Yes
DTC index.
No
GO to G2.
G2: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - NOISE
1 There is a known issue which effects a limited number of vehicles where under acceleration of the
vehicle the occupant of seat can deform the suspension mat (snake wire) which then presses on
the casing of the seat backrest climate assembly, this causes the casing to distort and the noise
issue to occur. If contact has occurred there will be a witness mark on the casing. Carry out visual
inspection of the seat backrest climate assembly that has been identified as noisy by the
customer.
Is there a witness mark on the casing?
Yes
Contact the local in market support for further information.
No
GO to G3.
G3: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - NOISE 2
1 Operate the heat and cool function of the seat. Listen for a 'WAH WAH' noise (the fan speeds up
and slows down repeatedly).
Does the fan speeds up and slow down repeatedly?
Yes
Confirm the latest Strategy and Calibration software is installed, using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system carry out the new Climate Controlled Seat Module application and update the
Climate Controlled Seat Module software if required.If the noise is still evident after software
update follow link below.GO to G4.
No
GO to G4.
G4: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - NOISE LEVEL COMPARISON
1 Compare the noise level of the suspect climate seat assembly to another climate seat assembly.
Is the noise level equal between the two seats?
Yes
The noise level is standard and comparable to the design intent.
No
PINPOINT TEST H : HEATING AND COOLING - POOR HEAT OR COOL EFFICIENCY

CONDITIONS
H1: CHECK FOR STORED DTC
Yes
DTC index.
No
GO to H2.
H2: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
1 Check the heat and cool function of the backrest.
Yes
GO to H3.
No
GO to H5.
H3: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
Yes
No
GO to H4.
H4: CUSHION BELLOWS
Yes
No
GO to H7.
H5: BACKREST BELLOWS DUCT
Yes
GO to H6.
No
H6: BACKREST BELLOWS

Yes
No
Assembly.GO to H2.
H7: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY -EFFICIENCY COMPARISON
1 Compare the efficiency of the suspect climate seat assembly to another climate seat assembly.
Is the efficiency equal between the two seats?
Yes
The efficiency is standard and comparable to the design intent.
No
PINPOINT TEST I : HEATING AND COOLING - HEAT OR COOL OPERATION SLOW

CONDITIONS
I1: CHECK FOR STORED DTC
Yes
DTC index.
No
GO to I2.
I2: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
1 Check the heat and cool function of the backrest?
Yes
GO to I3.
No
GO to I5.
I3: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
Yes
No
GO to I4.
I4: CUSHION BELLOWS
Yes
No
GO to I7.
I5: BACKREST BELLOWS DUCT
Yes
GO to I6.
No
I6: BACKREST BELLOWS
Yes
No
Assembly.GO to I2.
I7: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - OPERATION COMPARISON
1 Compare the operation of the suspect climate seat assembly to another climate seat assembly.
Is the operation equal between the two seats?
Yes
The operation is standard and comparable to the design intent.
No
PINPOINT TEST J : HEATING AND COOLING - INTERMITTENT OPERATION

CONDITIONS
J1: CHECK FOR STORED DTC
Yes
DTC index.
No
GO to J2.
J2: CABLE CONNECTION CHECK
1 Identify from customer concern or stored DTC's which Seat Climate Assembly is operating
intermittently and confirm the harness connector is fully connected.
Is the harness connector is fully connected?
Yes
No
Disconnect the harness connector, inspect connector and terminals for damage. Repair or
replace if required. Reconnect connector and check operation.
Seating - Heater Mats
Heated seats incorporate heater elements in the cushion and the backrest of the seat. Each cushion heater element has
a thermal sensor, which supplies a feedback temperature signal to the related seat heater module. The backrest heater
elements do not have a thermal sensor, and are regulated at the same temperature as the cushion heater elements.
For a detailed description of the seat heater mat, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (501-10)
Seats (Description and Operation),
Seats (Description and Operation),
Seats (Description and Operation).

Visual inspection
 Seat heater switches condition and installation  Fuses
 Harnesses and connectors
 Seat heater module
 Seat heater switches
 Seat heater mat
NOTE: CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor
kit, part number 3548-1358-00.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to section 100-00.
Seat Heater Mat Application Chart

NOTE: To ensure an accurate resistance reading, calibrated test equipment must be used
Minimum Maximum
Left Hand Drive Right Hand Drive Resistance Resistance
Heater Passenger Passenger
Mat / Side Driver Side Side Driver Side Ohms At Ohms At
Vehicle / Cushion / NTC Connector / Connector / Connector / Connector / 20°C ±10° 20°C ±10°
Year Backrest Resistor Pin Pin Pin Pin C C
XK 2010 Cushion Heater PS002/1 and DS002/1 and PS002/1 and DS002/1 and 1,2 1,6
mat PS002/4 DS002/4 PS002/4 DS002/4
NTC PS002/2 and DS002/2 and PS002/2 and DS002/2 and 4 000 10 000
resistor PS002/3 DS002/3 PS002/3 DS002/3
Backrest Heater PS003/1 and DS003/1 and PS003/1 and DS003/1 and 0,35 0,47
mat PS003/2 DS003/2 PS003/2 DS003/2
XF Cushion Heater C3HS07A/1 C3HS02A/1 C3HS07A/1 C3HS02A/1 1,23 1,64
mat and and and and
C3HS07A/4 C3HS02A/4 C3HS07A/4 C3HS02A/4
NTC C3HS07A/2 C3HS02A/2 C3HS07A/2 C3HS02A/2 4 000 10 000
resistor and and and and
Backrest Heater C3HS06A/1 C3HS01A/1 C3HS06A/1 C3HS01A/1 0,82 1,09
mat and and and and
XJ 2008 Cushion Heater SP14-1 and SD14-1 and SP14-1 and SD14-1 and 1,28 1,71
mat SP14-4 SD14-4 SP14-4 SD14-4
NTC SP14-2 and SD14-2 and SP14-2 and SD14-2 and 4 000 10 000
resistor SP14-3 SD14-3 SP14-3 SD14-3
Backrest Heater SP15-1 and SD15-1 and SP15-1 and SD15-1 and 0,88 1,17
mat SP15-2 SD15-2 SP15-2 SD15-2
XJ 2010 Cushion Heater C3HS07/1 and C3HS02/1 and C3HS07/1 and C3HS02/1 and 0,99 1,32
Front mat C3HS07/4 C3HS02/4 C3HS07/4 C3HS02/4
NTC C3HS07/2 and C3HS02/2 and C3HS07/2 and C3HS02/2 and 4 000 10 000
resistor C3HS07/3 C3HS02/3 C3HS07/3 C3HS02/3
Backrest Heater C3HS06/1 and C3HS01/1 and C3HS06/1 and C3HS01/1 and 0,67 0,90
mat C3HS06/2 C3HS01/2 C3HS06/2 C3HS01/2
XJ 2010 Cushion Heater C3HS78/1 and C3HS76/1 and C3HS76/1 and C3HS78/1 and 0,99 1,32
Rear mat C3HS78/4 C3HS76/4 C3HS76/4 C3HS78/4
NTC C3HS78/2 and C3HS76/2 and C3HS76/2 and C3HS78/2 and 4 000 10 000
resistor C3HS78/3 C3HS76/3 C3HS76/3 C3HS78/3
Backrest Heater C3HS79/1 and C3HS77/1 and C3HS77/1 and C3HS79/1 and 1,0 1,3
mat C3HS79/4 C3HS77/4 C3HS77/4 C3HS79/4
PINPOINT TEST A : SEAT HEATER MAT

CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR DTC'S
1 Where possible use the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to review any logged seat
heater mat DTC's
Were any seat heater mat DTC's logged?
Yes
Carry out the help text action for any logged DTC's. Clear the DTC and retest. If DTC's return
follow the tests listed below GO to A2.
No
GO to A2.
A2: MANUAL CHECK
NOTE: The manual check should be carried out by someone familiar with correct seat heat operation
NOTE: On full power the seat should be hot to touch
1 If required operate the vehicle air conditioning on full for 10 minutes to reduce the in vehicle
ambient temperature
2 Operate the seat heater on full power
Does the seat heater operate correctly?
Yes
Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If seat heater operation is correct no further action required
No
GO to A3.
A3: SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and the seat heater mat application chart (see above) to
identify the connector
2 Disconnect the connector
3 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat heater circuit and the
NTC resistor circuit for short circuit to ground
Are either of the circuits short circuit to ground?
Yes
Repair the circuit or replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
installation of a new module/component. Clear any stored DTC's and retest
No
GO to A4.
A4: CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TEST
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat ( heater circuit ) for circuit
continuity
Does the seat heater mat heater circuit pass the continuity test?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Repair the circuit or replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
installation of a new module/component. Clear any stored DTC's and retest
A5: POWER CONSUMPTION
NOTE: The seat heater power supply cycles on and off dependant on the seat and cabin temperature and may only
switch on for 5 seconds in 30 seconds
1 Reconnect the connector
2 Operate the vehicle air conditioning on full for 10 minutes to reduce the in vehicle ambient
temperature
3 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat ( heater circuit ) using a
current clamp
4 Operate the seat heater on full power
5 Use the chart above to calculate typical value (V/R=I) (Volts divided by Resistance equals
Current in Amps)
6 Examples (12 volts / 0.5 ohms =24 amps) (12 volts / 1 ohms = 12 amps) (12 volts / 2 ohms = 6
amps)
Does the seat heater mat consume the correct level of current?
Yes
Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If operation correct, no further action required
No
GO to A6.
A6: RESISTANCE CHECK
NOTE: Ensure the multimeter used is calibrated and a resistance reading of 0 ohms is shown when the test leads are
connected together, alternately subtract any resistance shown from the result
NOTE: The seat heater mat circuits should be checked at the seat heater module connector
NOTE: Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and to confirm the total resistance of the circuit the cushion and backrest
are connected in series
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and the seat heater mat application chart (see above) to
identify the terminals
2 Disconnect the connector
3 Using a multimeter, carry out a resistance check of the seat heater mat heater circuit and the
NTC resistor circuit. Record the results
4 Compare the results to the chart (see above)
Are the results within specification at the given ambient temperature? (tolerance +/- 0.5 Ohms)
Yes
Reconnect the connector. Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If customer concern or DTC's return
refer to electrical circuit diagrams and investigate the power and ground supply circuits
No
Replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component. Clear any stored DTC's and retest
Seating - Front Seat
Removal
1. Release the front seat.
 Position the front seat fully forwards.
 Remove and discard the 4 rear bolts.
2. Position the front seat fully rearwards.

Procedures).
4. With assistance, remove the front seat.
 Remove and discard the front 2 Torx bolts.
Installation
1. With assistance, install the front seat.
 Install the new bolts and tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).

Procedures).
3. Secure the front seat.
 Position the front seat fully forwards.
 Install the new bolts and tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).
 Install the bolt covers.
Seating - Front Seat Backrest Cover
Removal
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering (501-20, General
Procedures).
3. Remove the front seat head reatraint.
4. Remove the front seat head restraint guide tubes.
 Release from the seat frame.
5. Remove the front seat backrest tilt handle.

6. Remove the front seat backrest tilt handle trim

panel.
7. Release the front seat backrest cover lower tension
straps.
8. Release the 9 front seat backrest cover rear panel

retaining clips.
 Release from the backrest cover.
9. Release the 5 front seat backrest cover lower retaining clips.

10. Release the front seat backrest cover central
tension straps.
11. Remove the side air bag module.

 Release the backrest cover.
12. Release the front seat backrest cover upper

tension straps.
 Withdraw from the backrest pad.
13. Remove the front seat backrest cover.
 Remove the 16 hog rings.
Installation
1. Install the front seat backrest cover.
 Install the 16 hog rings.
2. Secure the front seat backrest cover upper tension straps.

 Pass through the backrest pad.
 Attach to the seat frame.
3. Install the side air bag module.

 Attach the backrest cover.
 Tighten the new nuts to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft).
4. Secure the front seat backrest cover central tension straps.

5. Secure the front seat backrest cover lower retaining clips.

6. Secure the front seat backrest cover rear panel retaining clips.
 Attach to the backrest cover.
7. Secure the front seat backrest cover lower tension straps.

8. Install the front seat backrest tilt handle trim panel.

9. Install the front seat backrest tilt handle.

10. Install the front seat head restraint guide tube.

 Secure in the seat frame.
11. Install the front seat head reatraint.

Seating - Front Seat Backrest Cover
Removal

2. Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
3.
4.
5. Torque: 3 Nm
6. Torque: 5 Nm
7. WARNING: The procedure must be carried

out on both sides of the seat.
8. Torque: 3 Nm
9. Torque: 5 Nm
10.
11. WARNING: The procedure must be carried
out on both sides of the seat.
12.
13.
14. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment

and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any air bag supplementary restraints
system (SRS) components. To deplete the backup
power supply energy, disconnect the battery
ground cable and wait for one minute. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Make sure the front seat air bag

sleeve and front seat backrest cover outer tension
straps, are secure and correctly installed to the
front seat frame to allow the air bag to deploy
correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may
Torque: 9 Nm
15.
16.
17.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Bolster
Removal

2. Refer to: Front Seat Backrest Cover (501-10 Seating, Removal
and Installation).
3.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the clips are

correctly located.
NOTE: The procedure must be carried out on both

sides of the seat.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Bolster Pump
Removal

2. Refer to: Front Seat Backrest Cover (501-10 Seating, Removal
and Installation).
3.
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Control Switch
Removal
2. Remove the front seat control switch.
Installation
1. Install the front seat control switch.
 Fit and tighten the Torx screws.

Seating - Front Seat Cushion Cover
Removal
Procedures).
4. Release the front seat cushion outer trim panel.
5. Remove the front seat cushion outer trim panel.

6. Remove the front seat hinge covers.
 Remove the hinge cover retainers.

straps.
8. Remove the front seat cushion assembly.
 Release and disconnect the 2 electrical
connectors.
 Release the Velcro strap.
9. Remove the front seat cushion cover.

10. Using WDS, calibrate a new front seat cushion cover.
Installation
1. Install the front seat cushion cover.
2. Secure the front seat cushion assembly.
 Secure the Velcro strap.
 Attach the clips.

4. Install the front seat cushion outer trim panel.
5. Secure the front seat cushion outer trim panel.

6. Install the front seat hinge covers.
 Attach the hinge cover retainers.

Seating - Front Seat Lumbar Motor
Removal
Procedures).
straps.
retaining clips.
5. Release the front seat lumbar assembly.

 Release the 3 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the front seat lumbar assembly.
Installation
1. Install the front seat lumbar assembly.
2. Secure the front seat lumbar assembly.
 Secure the electrical connectors.

5. Install the front seat head reatraint.

www.JagDocs.com
Seating - Front Seat Recliner Motor
Removal
Specifications).
Procedures).

5. Remove the front seat hinge cover.
 Remove the hinge cover retainer.
6. Remove the front seat backrest cover.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Backrest Cover
(501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the front seat backrest pad.
8. Release the front seat lumbar assembly.
 Release the 3 electrical connectors.
9. Remove the front seat lumbar assembly.

10. Release the front seat recliner motor.
 Remove the front seat backrest shaft clip.
 Remove the front seat backrest shaft.
11. Remove the front seat recliner motor.

 Drill out the rivet.
Installation
Seating - Rear Seat Armrest
Removal
Installation
Seating - Rear Seat Backrest
Removal
1. Remove the LH rear seat cushion.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat Cushion (501-10
2. Repeat the above procedure for the RH seat cushion.
3. Remove the auxiliary junction box access cover.
 Release from the 2 retainers.
Installation
 Secure in the retainers.
2. Install the auxiliary junction box access cover.

3. Install the LH rear seat cushion.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat Cushion (501-10
4. Install the RH rear seat cushion.

Seating - Rear Seat Cushion
Removal
2. Remove the rear seat cushion.
Installation
1. Install the rear seat cushion.

Seating - Front Seat Backrest Heater Mat
Removal
Specifications).
Procedures).
straps.
retaining clips.
6. Release the 5 front seat backrest cover lower retaining clips.

7. Release the front seat backrest cover central

tension straps.
8. Remove the front seat backrest heater mat.

Installation
1. Install the front seat backrest heater mat.
2. Secure the front seat backrest cover central tension straps.
3. Secure the front seat backrest cover lower retaining clips.



Specifications).
Seating - Front Seat Cushion Heater Mat
Removal
System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General

6. Remove the front seat hinge covers.
 Remove the hinge cover retainers.

straps.
8. Remove the front seat cushion assembly.
 Release and disconnect the 2 electrical
connectors.
 Release the Velcro strap.
9. Remove the front seat cushion cover.

10. Remove the front seat cushion heater mat.

 Carefully release from the seat cushion
pad.
Installation
1. Install the front seat cushion heater mat.
 Secure to the seat cushion pad.
2. Install the front seat cushion cover.

3. Secure the front seat cushion assembly.
 Secure the Velcro strap.
 Attach the clips.

5. Install the front seat cushion outer trim panel.
6. Secure the front seat cushion outer trim panel.
7. Install the front seat hinge covers.

 Attach the hinge cover retainers.

Seating - Seat Base
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the restraints control module backup power supply must be depleted. Wait at
least one minute after disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) before commencing any repair or adjustment to the
supplemental restraint system (SRS), or any component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to follow these
Always wear safety glasses when working on an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling an air bag module.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, do not use radio key code savers when working on the
supplemental restraint system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of injury in the event of premature deployment, always carry a live air bag module with
the bag and trim cover pointed away from the body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, live air bag modules must only be placed on work benches
which have been ground bonded and with the trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Never probe the electrical connectors of air bag modules or any other supplemental restraint system component.
Painting over the driver air bag module trim cover or instrument panel could lead to deterioration of the trim cover
and air bags. Do not for any reason attempt to paint discolored or damaged air bag module trim covers or instrument
panel. Install a new component. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
1. Make the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) safe.
Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General

2. Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
3. Refer to: Front Safety Belt Buckle (501-20A Safety Belt System,
4. Refer to: Front Seat Cushion Cover (501-10 Seating, Removal
and Installation).
5.
6.
7.
installed.
Torque: 35 Nm
Installation

Seating - Front Seat Track Motor
Removal
1. Make the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) safe.
Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00, Description and

Operation).
Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and

Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6.
Installation

2. If a new component has been installed, configure using Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment.
Seating - Rear Seat Backrest Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly
1. Remove the rear outer seat backrest.
For additional information, refer to Rear Outer Seat Backrest - in
this section.
2. Remove the rear seat head restraint.
Detach the rear seat head restraint retaining post.
Remove the rear seat head restraint retaining post.
5. Detach the rear seat outer backrest cover.

6. Detach the rear seat backrest cover and cushion.
7. Remove the rear seat backrest cover and cushion.

 Disconnect the rear seat backrest heater pad
8. Disconnect the rear seat lumbar support electrical

connector.
9. Detach the rear seat lumbar support control valve.

10. Remove the rear seat lumbar support.
11. Disconnect the rear seat head restraint motor

12. Remove the rear seat head restraint motor.
Assembly
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms -
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Door glass into clamp - bolt 8 - 71
Door glass regulator motor to door - screw 4 - 35
Door glass regulator to door - nut/bolt 8 - 71
Door glass regulator to door - screw 4 - 35
Rear quarter glass, seal-carrier (coupe) - screw 4 - 35
Rear quarter glass, regulator motor (convertible) - nut 9 - 80
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
COMPONENT LOCATION - WINDSHIELD AND BACKLIGHT

A - Coupe
B - Convertible
1 - Rain sensor mounting boss and interior mirror mounting button
2 - Coupe backlight
3 - Convertible backlight
4 - Windshield
COMPONENT LOCATION - DOOR GLASS AND REAR QUARTER GLASS MECHANISMS
NOTE: Convertible shown, coupe similar.

2 - Passenger window motor
4 - RH quarter glass assembly (convertible only)
6 - LH quarter glass assembly (convertible only)
7 - Driver window motor
INTRODUCTION
The windshield, which is constructed of 5.5 mm laminated glass with a black obscuration band, is bonded and sealed to the
body aperture using Polyurethane (PU) adhesive. The mounting boss for the rain sensor is also PU bonded to the inner
surface of the screen and is common to the coupe and convertible. The mounting button for the interior mirror is attached to
the windshield using adhesive. A vertical fine-wire multi-strand element, located between the glass laminations, is available
as an option, except for North American Specification (NAS) vehicles, to de-ice and demist the windshield and is controlled
from the Touch Screen Display (TSD). The backlight is 4 mm tempered glass, green tinted and heated and bonded to the
liftgate using PU adhesive. The windshield and backlight, except for the convertible model, are direct glazed to the body.
The door glass on both models is a frameless system with 5 mm green tempered glass. Both the driver and passenger
window glass is operated electrically and raised and lowered by a Bowden cable mechanism.
Each door glass automatically drops when the door is opened or when the convertible top is raised or lowered, and raises
when either the door is shut or the top is fully raised and latched in position (glass drops fully on hood operation). The door
glass can be closed via the Smart Key. Glass operation is internally controlled from switch packs located in the driver and
passenger door arm rests via their respective control modules. The switch packs are illuminated when the sidelights are on.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = CAN bus

1 - Battery
2 - Megafuse (175A)
3 - Megafuse (175A)
6 - Convertible top control module (convertible only)
7 - Passenger door switch
9 - Rear quarter lift motors (convertible only)
10 - Convertible top switch (convertible only)
11 - Passenger window motor
12 - Controller Area Network (CAN) input and output signals to and from various other vehicle
systems
13 - Driver window motor
15 - Controller Area Network (CAN) input and output signals to and from various other vehicle
systems
The windshield and coupe backlight are supplied as assemblies complete with trim, which is directly bonded to the glass.
The convertible backlight is high frequency welded to the canopy and the outer seal is stitched and bonded to the top. On
both models, the heated backlight remains on for 21 minutes after being switched on unless it is manually switched off
before the time delay expires.
Front Door Glass Assembly

1 - Front door glass
2 - 'A' piller guide rail
3 - Window motor
4 - Bowden cables
5 - 'B' piller guide rail
One-touch up operation causes the door glass to fully close unless an object is detected ('Anti-trap') or the glass is within 45
mm of top of travel when the door is opened. If the 'Anti-trap' regulator detects an object, the glass will drop fully open or to
200 mm below the obstruction. All door glass operates with the ignition in either 'Accessory' mode or 'On' mode and after the
ignition enters 'Off' mode, until either door is opened.
The front windows must be programmed for one-touch operation in order for the convertible top to operate correctly. Failure
to program the windows results in a 10 second opening delay once the top is unlatched. The windows can be manually
programmed for one-touch operation using the following procedure:
 Engine running
 Raise window up to the top seal and release switch
 Raise again until window stops moving
 Release switch
 Raise again
 Lower window fully
 Release switch
 Press lower for a further 0.5 seconds until a relay is heard to CLICK
NOTE: Before commencing work within a door interior, all Warnings and Notes within the appropriate Removal and
Installation procedures must be read and fully understood.
To re-learn the glass operating characteristics, the associated door must be closed (door ajar switch inactive). The glass
must then be driven fully down and held stalled at the bottom of its travel for a minimum of 1 second. The glass is finally
driven to the fully up position and held stalled for a minimum of 1 second. The re-learning procedure must also be
accomplished to regain the automatic glass closing sequence.
REAR QUARTER GLASS
The coupe rear quarter glass is a fixed 4 mm, tempered, green-tinted unit fitted by a single bolt fixing on the lower front
corner of the glass assembly, and a pin into the body at the rear.
Convertible Rear Quarter Glass Assembly

1 - Convertible rear quarter glass
2 - Base plate
3 - Window motor
4 - Lift plate
The rear quarter glass of the convertible is 5 mm, tempered, semi-flush and green tinted. A drum and wire system provides
automatic full glass drop when the top is lowered. Rear glass control is incorporated in the convertible top switch, which is
located in the roof console.
When lowering the rear quarters of the convertible at vehicle speeds up to 24 km/h (15 mph), failure to release the switch
on operation of the audible alarm will result in lowering of the top.
Rear quarter glass is automatically powered to the bottom position when the top is lowered and further operation is inhibited
until the top is raised and latched.
The rear quarters are operated automatically, up or down, when raising or lowering the convertible top. If the door glass is
in the raised position when a request to close the top is made, the door glass and the rear quarters will be powered to the
bottom of their travel. When the top is fully raised all glass will be powered up to close, rear quarters first followed by the
door glass, forming a seal with the top.
If the front glass has been either fully or partially lowered manually, the rear quarters only will be powered up. If the power
supply to the driver or passenger door module is disconnected (battery disconnected, module unplugged or fuse removed)
then the glass/system must re-learn the glass operating characteristics. The last known glass position is regarded as top of
travel by one touch operation until re-learning has taken place. One touch down, manual up and down control and the
automatic lowering of the glass for door opening are unaffected.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
For a detailed description of the Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
 Window glass  Fuse(s)
 Window regulator  Window motor
 Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
 Switch
 Circuit(s)
4. If the concern is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index

B117E72 Front Power Window  Actuator stuck open Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
Index
B117E73 Front Power Window  Actuator stuck closed Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
Index
B117F72 Front Power Window  Actuator stuck open Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
Index
B117F73 Front Power Window  Actuator stuck closed Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
www.JagDocs.com
Index
B118929 Front Window  Signal invalid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
Position Sensor this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B118A29 Rear Window  Signal invalid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
Position Sensor this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
B1A9883 LIN Bus Circuit #1  Value of signal protection Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
calculation incorrect LIN circuit between driver switch pack and
DDM for short/open circuits, clear DTC and re-
test. If DTC remains install a new switch pack.

Installation).
B1A9886 LIN Bus Circuit #1  Signal Invalid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
LIN circuit between driver switch pack and

Installation).
B1A9887 LIN Bus Circuit #1  Missing Message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
LIN circuit between driver switch pack and

Installation).
C1B1411 Sensor Supply #1  Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
window sensor supply circuit for short to
ground
C1B1415 Sensor Supply #1  Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
window sensor supply circuit for short to
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
with Driver Seat this DTC using the manufacturer approved
Installation).
Index
Index
U300362 Battery voltage  Mis-match of battery voltage, of 2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
volts or lower, between DDM/PDM this DTC using the manufacturer approved
and RJB diagnostic system
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Fixed Window Glass
For a detailed description of the Glass, Frames and Mechanisms and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual.
NOTE: Refer to Section 100-00 General Information for window glass health and safety precautions.
2. Visually inspect for obvious mechanical faults.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Physical damage to the windshield
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Warranty Repairs
NOTE: The warranty period for the windshield is twelve months with the exception of delamination and electrical faults.
NOTE: Warranty repairs should be completed using genuine parts, in accordance with the Warranty Policy and
Procedures Manual.
1. Draw a line around the windshield damage using a marker pen.
2. Photograph the entire windshield. If the damage extends behind any trim, remove the trim and take further
photographs.
3. Photograph the trademark logo and code to validate the windshield as factory fitment.
Symptom Chart

Scratches  Debris trapped under a wiper blade GO to Pinpoint Test A.
 Foreign object damage
 Fouling by trim
Chips  Foreign object damage GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Cracks  Foreign object damage GO to Pinpoint Test C.
 Impact damage during assembly
Delamination  Manufacturing defect GO to Pinpoint Test D.
PINPOINT TEST A : SCRATCH TEST

A1: IDENTIFY SCRATCH
NOTE: A scratch will usually be regular in shape, following the line of the object that caused it.
1 Probe using the tip of a pencil to identify a groove in the windshield surface.
Is there a groove?
Yes
Windshield scratched. GO to A2.
No
Defect not valid.
A2: CAUSE OF SCRATCH
1 Check for trim, body panels, or foreign objects that may have caused the scratch.
Was the scratch caused by a foreign object?
Yes
The damage is not due to a defect or an assembly error.
No
Rectify as appropriate.
PINPOINT TEST B : CHIP TEST

B1: CHIP TEST
NOTE: Impact damage may cause a crack to form.
1 Assess the damage by probing with the tip of a pencil.
Is the damaged area rough (indicating a breach of the windshield surface)?
Yes
Damage caused by the impact of a foreign object. Not a manufacturing defect.
No
Install a new windshield.
PINPOINT TEST C : CRACK TEST

C1: IDENTIFY CRACK
NOTE: A crack will be detectable as a step in the glass.
1 Confirm the presence of a crack by probing with the tip of a pencil.

Is the windshield cracked?
Yes
Windshield cracked. GO to C2.
No
Windshield not cracked. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
C2: CAUSE OF CRACK
NOTE: Multiple cracks will radiate out from the source.
1 Assess the source of the crack by probing with the tip of a pencil.
Is there evidence of impact damage being the source of the crack?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST D : DELAMINATION TEST

D1: DELAMINATION TEST
1 Visually assess the windshield for delamination.
Have the glass laminates separated?

Yes
No
No further action.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section
100-00.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Door Window Motor Initialization
General Procedures
1. NOTE: After the battery has been disconnected it is necessary to

initialize each door window motor separately to operate the
"one-touch" up function.
Operate the window control switch until the door window glass
is in the fully closed position, continue to operate the window
control switch for a further two seconds.
2. Release the window control switch.
3. Operate the window control switch in the closed position and
continue to operate the window control switch for a further two
seconds.
4. Operate the window control switch until the door window glass
is in the fully open position ("one-touch" down).
5. NOTE: If the door window motor initialization has been
completed correctly, when the window control switch is
operated, the door window glass should move to the fully closed
position ("one-touch" up) automatically.
NOTE: If the door window glass does not fully close

automatically ("one-touch" up), repeat the complete procedure.
Operate the window control switch once to the close position.

6. Repeat the door window motor initialization for each door
window motor.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Door Window Glass Adjustment
General Procedures
CAUTION: Protect the surrounding components.
NOTE: Final door glass alignment or adjustment, can be carried out without the need to remove the interior door trim
panel.
1. Check the alignment of the front door glass.

2. Open the door.
3. Remove the 4 screw covers.
4. NOTE: This step is to align the door window glass

to the nominal position and should be adjusted
from this position to achieve correct seal
engagement.
NOTE: Do not apply excessive torque when the

adjusters are at the end of their travel.
Using a 4mm Allen key, rotate the side adjusters

clockwise until they reach the end of their travel.
 From this position, turn the adjuster screws
counter-clockwise for 5 revolutions.
5. Make sure that the door window glass is aligned
correctly to the seal as illustrated.
 If the alignment is incorrect, repeat Step 4
before carrying on with the procedure.
6. NOTE: The glass must be in the lowered position to

access the adjusters.
NOTE: The glass should have 6mm +/- 2mm

engagement into the upper seal, the glass may not
have equal engagement when the 8mm door to
rear quarter glass is set.
Using a extended 5mm Allen key, rotate the lower

adjusters to adjust the glass height and achieve a
parallel 8mm gap between the rear quarter and
the door.
7. Install the screw covers.

8. Check the alignment of the front door glass.
9. NOTE: For vehicles with convertible top, the door window
function should be checked with the convertible top raised and
lowered, to allow correct operation under all conditions.
When the window glass adjustment is complete the window
motor will need to be calibrated, to do this power the window
fully up and continue to hold the switch for a further 3 seconds.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Glass
Removal
1. Raise the window glass.


cable.
7. Remove the front door window glass.
 Collect the clamp and rubber washer.
Installation
1. Install the front door window glass.
 Attach the clamp and rubber washer.
 Install the Torx bolts, but do not tighten fully at this
stage.
2. NOTE: The window must be fully raised when
carrying out measurements.
Align the front door window glass longitudinally.

 Position the window, forwards or
rearwards, glass edge should be 44mm
from edge of door as shown in dimension
'A'.
3. NOTE: To adjust the window hold the locknut and

turn the centre spindle.
Align the front door window glass horizontally.

 Release the retaining nut.
 Align the glass to door, glass should be
12mm from door as shown in dimension
'B'.
 Tighten the retaining nut to 10 Nm (7
lb.ft).



Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Regulator Motor
Removal
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Regulator
Removal
Specifications).


cable.

 Release each end of the seal from the door frame.
8. Remove the front door window glass.
 Collect the clamp and rubber washer.
9. Remove the window regulator assembly.

 Release the rubber lining from the glass channel.
 Remove the nut.
Installation
1. Install the window regulator assembly.
 Install the rubber lining to the glass channel.
2. Install the front door window glass.

 Attach the clamp and rubber washer.
 Install the Torx bolts, but do not tighten fully at this
stage.
4. NOTE: The window must be fully raised when
carrying out measurements.
Align the front door window glass longitudinally.

 Position the window, forwards or
rearwards, glass edge should be 44mm
from edge of door as shown in dimension
'A'.
5. NOTE: To adjust the window hold the locknut and
turn the centre spindle.
Align the front door window glass horizontally.

 Release the retaining nut.
 Align the glass to door, glass should be
12mm from door as shown in dimension
'B'.
 Tighten the retaining nut to 10 Nm (7
lb.ft).




Specifications).
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Window Control Switch
Removal
1. Remove the grab handle cover.
2. Remove the window control switch.

Installation
1. Install the window control switch.
2. Install the grab handle cover.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Quarter Window
Glass Convertible
Removal
NOTE: The procedure to remove and install the rear quarter window glass is shown in the rear quarter window regulator
motor procedure.
1. Remove the rear quarter window glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Window
Regulator Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
Installation
1. Install the rear quarter window glass.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Window
Regulator Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Windshield Glass
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
Always protect the interior components when removing body glass.
Lay the glass on felt covered supports. Do not stand on edge as this can cause chips which subsequently develop
into cracks.
NOTE: The following equipment is required: l Cutting wire and handles l Kent knife l Glazing knife l Windshield
replacement kit l Sealant applicator gun l Suction cups l A felt covered table or stand to support glass

For additional information, refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02
Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove both A-pillar trim panels.
Disconnect the heated windshield electrical

connectors.
4. Remove the rain sensor.

For additional information, refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers
and Washers, Removal and Installation).
5. WARNING: Eye protection must be worn.
CAUTION: The two shaded areas in the

graphic indicate the position of a body patch, that
covers a body joint. Take care not to trap the
cutting tool in the body joint.
With assistance, remove the windshield glass.

 Carefully cut through the sealant using a
glazing knife or cutting wire.
 Attach the suction cups.
Installation
1. Carefully remove the sealant from the body to leave a smooth
surface.
2. Install the windshield glass.
 Use masking tape to establish reference
marks as an alignment aid.
3. Remove the windshield glass.

4. Apply etch primer to any bare metal.

5. Apply primer over the etc

XKWorkshopManual PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

XKWorkshopManual PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Workshop Manual

5.0L - 5.0L S/C

VIN B32753 to VIN B44939

This manual covers diagnosis and testing and repair procedures.

References to LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)

Vehicle LH and RH definition

Item Part Number Description

Item Part Number Description

How to use Repair Procedures

Important Safety Instructions

Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

Reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets

Types of self-locking nuts and bolts

Item Part Number Description

Special Tools, Equipment, Materials and Torque Figures

Colors used in the graphic are as follows:

 Blue - Component to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled.

One illustration may have multiple steps assigned to it.

How to use Diagnosis and Testing procedures

Inspection and Verification

A representative tester graphic is used for voltmeters and ohmmeters.

Repairs and Replacements

Service Repair Operation Numbering

References to Bank-1 and Bank-2

Disconnecting/Connecting the Battery

 The vehicle to be jacked up

Reconnecting the Battery

Connecting a Slave Battery Using Jump Leads

Always connect the jump leads in the following sequence.

 Slave battery positive first then vehicle battery positive.

Components should be thoroughly cleaned before inspection prior to reassembly.

Calibration of Essential Measuring Equipment

WARNING: Failure to comply may result in personal injury or damage to components.

Use of Control Modules

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)

The diagnosis and testing sections within the manual cover:

Term(s) Acronym/Unit/Abbreviation Definition

Acids and Alkalis

See also Battery Acids.

e.g. caustic soda, sulphuric acid.

Used in batteries and cleaning materials.

Display Eye Hazard sign.

See also Fire, Chemical Materials - General

Highly flammable, explosive – observe No Smoking policy.

Following any direct contact with gas generant.

 Wash affected areas thoroughly with water

Air Bags - Do's

 Do store in an air bag safe when not installed to the vehicle.

Air Bags - Do Nots

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

See also Chlorofluorocarbon, Chemical Materials

Highly flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.

Skin contact may result in frostbite.

Air Conditioning Refrigerant - Do Nots

 Do not expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat

See also Fire, Solvents.

e.g. isopropanol, ethylene glycol, methanol.

Highly flammable, flammable, combustible.

See also Warning Symbols on Vehicles at the end of this subsection.

See also Acids and Alkalis.

Ensure adequate ventilation.

Brake and Clutch Linings and Pads